Digital PDFs

XX-7C4E6-3A

2000

757 pages

Original

595MB

Document:	Digital Systems and Options Catalog 199207
Order Number:	XX-7C4E6-3A
Revision:	0
Pages:	757
Original Filename:

OCR Text

Digital Systems and Options Catalog
July 1992
Highlights of what's new in this catalog ...
Chapter 1

· VAXstation 4000 Model 90 Workstation
·MicroVAX 3100 Model 90 Systems and Servers
·VAX 4000 Models 100, 400, 600 Systems and Servers
· VAX 7000 Systems and Servers
· VAX 10000 Systems and Servers

Chapter 7

· DECarray 400 DSSI Storage Array
· ESE50 Solid-State Disk Storage System
• RF31 T DSSI Integrated Storage Element
• RZ24L SCSI Disk Drive
· RZ26 SCSI Disk Drive
· StorageServer 100 Optical Storage System
· Tx86 Family of Tape Drives
· TLZ06 SCSI DAT Tape Drive
· TKZ09 SCSI Helical Scan Tape Drive

Chapter 8

• LA424 MultiPrinter

See the Table of Contents for new organization.

VMS Renamed to OpenVMS
OpenVMS is now the official name for VMS, reflecting the many
de facto and industry standards that have always been part of VMS,
along with the addition of new open features such as POSIX and
X/Open branding. OpenVMS is the industry leader in the integration
of multivendor computing environments. This edition begins the
transition in terminology.

If you're not retaining this book for reference, please recycle.
This edition was printed on recycled paper.

Digital believes the information in this publication is accurate as of its publication date; such information is subject to change without notice.
Digital is not responsible for any inadvertent errors.
Digital Equipment Corporation makes no representation that the interconnection of its mass-storage products with products of other manufacturers will not infringe on existing or future patent rights. Nor do the descriptions contained herein imply the granting of licenses to make, use, or
sell equipment constructed or configured in accordance herewith.
Digital Storage Architecture (DSA) mass-storage products manufactured by Digital Equipment Corporation are designed to work with host
computers and other DSA mass-storage products designed by Digital Equipment Corporation. Digital Equipment Corporation assumes no
responsibility or liability if the host computers, controllers, mass-storage servers, tape, software, diagnostics, or disk products of another manufacturer are used with DSA products.
The software described in this document is furnished under license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of such license.
The following are trademarks of Digital Equipment Corporation: ACMS, ADVANTAGE-NETWORKS, ALL-IN-1, applicationDEC, BASEstar, CDD,
CDD/Plus, CDD/Administrator, CI, CTS-300, ClusterWide, Companion, DATATRIEVE, DBMS, DDCMP, DEBET, DEC, DEC ACCESSWORKS, DEC
Ada, DEC EtherWORKS, DEC GKS, DEC MAILworks, DEC Network Save and Restore, DEC PHIGS, DEC VTX DEC VUIT, DECalc, DECalc-PLUS
DECconcentrator, DECconnect, DECdesign, DECdirect, DECdx, DECforms , DECgraph , DECimage, DECintact, DEClaser, DEClease, DECmate,
DECmcc, DECmessageQ, DECNA, DECnsr, DECnet, DECnet-MicroRSX, DECnet/E, DEComni, DECpage, DECpresent, DECprint, DECrad, DECSA,
DECscan, DECscheduler, DECserver, DECslide, DECspell, DECstart PLUS, DECstart, DECstation, DECsystem , DECtalk, DECtp, DECtrace, DECUS ,
DECvoice, DECwindows, DECwrite, DELNI, DELUA, DEMCA, DEMPR, DEPCA, DEQNA, DESTA, DHB32, DIBOL-83, DSRVB-AA, DSSI, EDCS, EDT,
Electronic Store, EtherWORKS, eXcursion, HSC, IAS, IVAX 620, IVAX, J-11 , KDA , KLESI, LA, LA50, LA75 Companion, LA324 , LN03 PLUS, LN03 ,
LP27 , LQP02, MAILworks, MASSBUS, MD300, MD400, MD410, MUXserver, Micro/ PDP-11 , Micro/ RSX, MicroVAX II, MicroVAX, MicroVMS, NAS,
OpenVMS, PATHWORKS, PDP, PDP-11 , PowerFrame, PrintServer, Q-bus, Q22-bus, RA, Rdb/VMS, RRD42 , RRD50, RSTS, RSTS/E, RSX, RSX-llM,
RSX-llM-PLUS, RT, RX33 , RX50, Rdb/VMS, ReGIS, Recover-All, SA, SBI, SDI, Scholar, StorageServer, StorageServer 100, TA, TK, TMSCP, TQK50,
TS05 , ThinWire, TURBOchannel, UDA, ULTRIX Disk Shadowing, ULTRIX, UNIBUS, VAX, VAX 6000, VAX 9000, VAX APL, VAX Ada, VAX BASIC,
VAX C, VAX CDD, VAX COBOL GENERATOR, VAX COBOL, VAX DATATRIEVE, VAX DBMS, VAX DIBOL, VAX DOCUMENT, VAX DSM, VAX
ETHERnim, VAX PMS, VAX FORTRAN, VAX GKS, VAX LISP, VAX LMS/SM, VAX MACRO, VAX MAILGATE, VAX Notes, VAX OPS5, VAX Pascal,
VAX RALLY, VAX RMS, VAX Rdb/VMS, VAX SCAN, VAX SPM, VAX Supercomputer, VAX TEAMDATA, VAX VALU, VAX Volume Shadowing,
VAX Xway, VAX, VAX-11 / 750, VAX-111780, VAXBI, VAXELN, VAXcluster, VAXft, VAXlab, VAXmate, VAXserver, VAXset, VAXshare,
VAXsimPLUS, VAXstation, VIDA, VMS, VT, VTlOO, VTlOOO, VT300, VT320, VT330, VTX 2000, WPS, WPS-8, WPS-PLUS, XUI rtVAX, and the
Digital logo.
Adobe and PostScript are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Inc. Apple, LocalTalk, AppleShare, AppleTalk, HyperCard, HyperTalk,
LaserWriter, Mac, Macintosh, MacTerminal, and the Apple Logo are registered trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. AT&T and Touch-Tone are
registered trademarks of American Telephone & Telegraph Company. BASIC is a registered trademark of Trustees of Dartmouth College D.B.A.
Dartmouth College. CalComp is a registered trademark of California Computer Products Corporation. cc:Mail is a registered trademark of
cc:Mail, Inc. Centronics is a registered trademark of Centronics Corporation. CG is a registered trademark of Comp ugraphic Corporation.
COMPAQ and Deskpro are registered trademarks of COMPAQ Computer Corporation. CorrecText and Roget's II: The New Thesaurus are
trademarks of Houghton Mifflin Company. CP/M is a registered trademark of Digital Research , Inc. CRAY, UNICOS and CRAY Y-MP are
trademarks of Cray Research, Inc. D ata Products is a registered trademark of Data Products Corporation. Domain and Apollo are registered
trademarks of Apollo Computer, Inc., a subsidiary of Hewlett-Packard Company. Ethermodem is a trademark of Chipcom Corporation. EUCLID
is a registered trademark of Matra Datavision, Inc. (Matra Group). Excelan is a registered trademark of Excelan, Inc. EtherPort is a trademark of
Shiva Corporation. EXABYTE is a registered trademark of Exabyte Corporation. FastPath is a registered trademark of Kinetics, Inc. Hayes is a
registered trademark of Hayes Microcomputer Products, Inc. Helvetica is a registered trademark of Allied Corporation. Hercules is a registered
trademark of Hercules Computer Technology. Hewlett-Packard, LaserJet, HP, and HP-GL are registered trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Company. IBM , Micro Channel, OS/ 2, PS/ 2, and ProPrinter are registered trademarks and DB2 is a trademark of International Business Machines
Corporation. ITC Avant Garde Gothic, ITC Lubalin Graph, and ITC Souvenir are registered trademarks of International Typeface Corporation.
IDMS/ R is a registered trademark of Cullinet P.C. Software, Inc. Intel and Xpress are trademarks of Intel Corporation. lnterleaf is a registered
trademark of lnterleaf, 1nc. 1-2-3, Lotus, and VisiCalc are registered trademarks of Lotus Development Corporation. MCI and MCI Mail are
registered trademarks of MCI Communications Corporation. MICOM and Micro 800/ X.25 Concentrator Pad are trademarks of MICOM Systems,
Inc. Microcom is a trademark of Microcom, Inc. Microtek is a registered trademark and EyeStar is a trademark of Microtek Labs, Inc. Microsoft,
MS, MS-DOS, MULTIPLAN, and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. MUMPS is a registered trademark of Massachusetts
General Hospital. Mylar is a registered trademark of E. I. Du Pont de Nemours & Company, Inc. NetWare and Novell are registered trademarks
of Novell, Inc. NFS is a trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc. ON-TAP is a trademark of Integrated Software Design, Inc. Olivetti is a registered
trademark of Ing. C. Olivetti. ORACLE is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation. OSF, OSF/1, and OSF/Motif are registered trademarks of
Open Software Foundation, Inc. PageMaker is a registered trademark of Aldus Corporation. PAGER is a trademark of Datalogics, Inc. PICK is a
trademark of Pick Systems, Inc. Plexiglas is a registered trademark of Rohm & Haas Company. Prestoserve is a registered trademark of Legato
Systems, Inc. Protean is a trademark of Protean Associates, Inc. SCO is a trademark of Santa Cruz Operations, Inc. Scribe is a registered
trademark of Scribe Systems, Inc. SIMM is a trademark of Wang Laboratories, Inc. StorageTek is a registered trademark of Storage Technology
Corporation. Sun, SPARC, and NFS are resistered trademarks and SPARCstation is a trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc. SuperCalc is a registered
trademark of Computer Associates International, Inc. Teflon is a trademark of E. I. Du Pont de Nemours & Company. Tek and TEKTRONIX are
registered trademarks of Tektronix, Inc. Trinitron is a registered trademark of Sony Corporation. UNIX is a registered trademark of UNIX System
Laboratories, Inc. Ventura Publisher is a trademark of Ventura Software, Inc. Vitalink and TransLAN are registered trademarks of Vitalink
Communications Corp. WingZ is a registered trademark of lnformix Software, Inc. 3Com and EtherLink are registered trademarks of 3Com
Corporation.
Copyright© 1992, by Digital Equipment Corporation.

Contents
Chapter 1 -

VAX Systems

VAX Systems Comparison Chart ... .. .... ........... .. ..... .. ........ ... .... ....... .. .. ... .. .. .. ... ..

1.2

VAXstation 4000 VLC Systems ..... .. ......... ... ........ ... .... .. ....... ... .............. ..... .. ... ..
VAXstation 4000 VLC System Diagram .... .. .. ... .. .. ..... ........ .... .... .. .... .. ... .. .. .. ... ..
VAXstation 4000 Model 60 ..............................................................................
VAXstation 4000 Model 90 .... ......................................................................... .
VAXstation 4000 Upgrades ............... .. .. ... .. .. .... ..... .... .. .. ... .. .. ......... ....... ....... .. ...
VAXstation 4000 Models 60 and 90 System Diagram ..... ... ... .. .. ...... .............
VAXstation 4000 VLC and Models 60 and 90 Monitor Chart ...... .. .. .. .........

1.4
1.8
1. 9
1.16
1.22
1.23
1.24

MicroVAX 3100 Systems and Servers ... .. .... .. .... ... .. ... .. ... .. .... .... .. .. .... .... .. .. .. .....
MicroVAX 3100 Upgrades and Conversion Kits .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .

1.27
1.3 7

VAX 4000 Systems and Servers .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. ..
VAX 4000 Systems and Servers (Model 100) ................................. .. ..............
VAX 4000 Systems and Servers (Model 200) .................................................
VAX 4000 Systems and Servers (Model 300) .................................................
VAX 4000 Systems and Servers (Models 400, 500, 600) ..............................
R400X and B400X Expansion Pedestals .... .... .. .. .. .. ...... .. .. ... ... .. .. ...... .. .. .. .. .......
Rack-mountable VAX 4000 Systems ....................................... .... ....................
Rack-mountable VAX 4000 System Mounting Diagrams ..............................
VAX 4000 Upgrades and Conversion Kits .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. ... ... .. ....
VAX 4000 Systems and Servers Options .. ... .. .. ... .. .. .. ...... .. ... .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ....... ...

1.3 8
1.41
1.49
1.66
1.72
1.82
1.83
1.86
1.87
1.89

VAX 6000 Systems and Servers .................................... ...................................
1.91
VAX 6000 Systems and Servers Specifications ............................................... 1.108
VAX 6000 Systems Expansion ................................................. .......... ..... ......... 1.109
VAX 6000 CPU Upgrades ...... .......................................... .. ........... ... ................ 1.111
VAX 7000 Systems and Servers ................................... ....................................
VAX 7000 Systems Specifications ...................... ...... ..................... ............... ....
VAX 7000 CPU Upgrades ................... ............... ............................ ... ..... ..........

1.114
1.126
1.127

VAX 10000 Systems and Servers ... .. .. .. ..... ... .. ... .. .... ..... .. .. ... ... ... .. ... .. .. ... ... .... .. ..

1.128

VAXft Systems and Servers ... .. ..... ....... .. ..... ..... .. ... .......... .... ... .. .. ... ....... ... .. .. .. ....
VAXft Storage Expansion Option ............. ...... ........ ... .. .... ..... ...................... ....
VAXft Model 110/410 Rackmount Systems/Servers ........................ .. ... .........
VAXft Model 410 Rackmount Diagram .. .. .. .. .. ..... ... ... .. ... ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... ... .. .. .. .. ..

1.140
1.155
1.156
1.157

ACCESSWORKS Data Integration Servers

1.158

Chapter 2 -

DECsystems

DECstations/ DECsystems Comparison Chart

2.2

Personal DECstation 5000 Models 20, 25, and 33 .............. ..... .....................
DECstation 5000 Models 125 and 133 ...........................................................
DECstation 5000 Model 240 ...... ... ................... ................................................
DECstation 5000 System Diagrams .............................. .................................. .
DECstation 5000 Specifications .......................................................................

2.4
2.14
2.23
2.33
2.34

DECsystem 5000 Systems and Servers ............................................................
DECsystem 5900 Systems .... ...... ....... ..... .. ... ... .... ........................................... ....
DECsystem 5900 Specifications .......................................... ,............................
DECsystem 5900 System Diagrams .............. .. .......... .. ... .... ........ ............ ..........

2.37
2.45
2.50
2.51

iii

Contents
Chapter 3 - Personal Computing
Network Personal Computing ............... ........... ............. ... ...............................
PATHWORKS PC Networks .............................................................................
PATHWORKS Client Software ............. .. ... ................................. ......................
PATHWORKS Server Software ............................................... ................ ... ......
Personal Computer Mail Solutions ....... .. .. ... ....... .......... ..... ....... .... ..... .... .........
LAN-Based Applications ....................... ... .........................................................
PATHWORKS Packaged Servers ............................................. .... ....... ... ...........
PATHWORKS Server 333 .. ........... .... ............. .. ............................................ ... ..
PATHWORKS Server 433 ................... ........ ......................................................
PATHWORKS Server 3100 ........ .............................................. .. ..... .. ................
PC Networking Hardware ............................... .. ................................... ..... .......
DEC pc Personal Computers ..... ... .. ............................................ .. ............ ........
DEC pc Personal Computers Comparison Chart .................... ........................
DEC pc 320P Portable Computers ........................................................... ........
DECpc Desktop Computers ...... ..... ... ............... ............ .... ............ .... ........... ... ..
DECpc 433 Workstation ........ .......... ... ......................................................... ....
DEC pc 400ST Deskside Computers ... ...... ............ .. .. ..... ..... ......... ... .... ... ...... ....
applicationDEC 400xP .. ....... ...... ........... .. ... .. ...... .......... ........ .............. ... ....... .. ...
applicationDEC 433MP System ....... ....................... ......... .................... .............
applicationDEC 433MP System Diagram ........................................................
applicationDEC 433MP System Specifications .......................... .......... ...........

3 .2
3.3
3.5
3.9
3 .11
3.13
3.18
3.19
3.21
3.23
3.25
3 .31
3 .32
3 .34
3.36
3.42
3 .46
3 .50
3.57
3.66
3.67

Chapter 4 - Specialized Systems
CRAY Y-MP EL Systems ........ ... .. ......... .......... ... ............ ... ..... .... .. .. ... .. ... .......... .
CRAY Y-MP EL System Specifications ......... ....... ............................................
CRAY Y-MP EL System Diagrams ................................................................ ...
DECmpp 12000/12000-LC Massively Parallel Processing Systems .............. .
MIRA Application Switch 3400/3800 ............. .. ........ .............. .........................
MIRA AS 3400 Systems .............................. ... ..... ...... ........................................
MIRA AS 3800 Systems ............................................ ......... ...................... .... .....
Multiline DECvoice ...................................................... ......................... .... .... ... .

4 .2
4.11
4.12
4.13
4.19
4.21
4.22
4.23

Chapter 5 - VAXcluster Options/System Expansion
VAXcluster Systems Configuration Details .. .. ... .. .. ..... ..... .... .. .... .. ..... ..... .... .... ..
VAXcluster Multi-Datacenter Facility ............... ............... ...... ................... ......
VAXcluster Console System ...... ..... ..... ... .. .. ... ......... ... ......... ... .. ... ... .... .... ... .. ... ...
VAXcluster Options ....... ...... .. ......... ... ....... ... ................ ............ .. ... ... ...... ....... ....
Memory .................. ... ....... ... ............................... .. .... ...... .... .... ............................
CPU Upgrades ... ...... ... ......................... ... ..................... .. ........ ............................
Environmental Products .... ... ...... ...................... ... ......... ....... ... .. ..... ....... ....... .....
HA4000 3-Phase Uninterruptible Power System ...........................................
Personal Series-PLUS Uninterruptible Power System ....................................
Personal Series-PLUS System Specifications ... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..... .. .. ..... ... ... ....
Personal Series-Uninterruptible Power Systems (UPS) ....................... ........
Receptacle Reference Chart ....... ..... .. ....... ............. ............. ... .... ... .. .. .. ... ... ....... .

5 .2
5.19
5 .23
5 .25
5.28
5.33
5 .44
5.46
5 .53
5 .54
5 .56
5 .60

Chapter 6 - Networks, Communications, and Cables
LAN Communications Controllers ... ..... .... ..... .. .......... .... .... .... .. ... ..... ........ ...... .
VAX/DECsystems LAN Communications Controllers Summary Chart ...
DEC LANcontroller 400 (DEMNA-XMI) ..................................................
DEC LANcontroller 200 (DEBNI-VAXBI) .................... ....... ........ .... .... .....
DESQA Controller (Q-bus) ..... .. ...................................................................
DEC TRNcontroller 100 (DEQRA-Q-bus) ................................................
DEC FDDicontroller 400 Controller (DEMFA-XMI) ...............................
DEC FDDicontroller 700 Controller (DEFZA-TURBOchannel) ..............

6.2
6.2
6.2
6.3
6.3
6.4
6.4
6.5

Contents
Local and Wide Area Communications Servers ................ .... .. ..................... .
802.3/Ethernet Terminal Server Selection Guide ................ ..... ................ .
DECserver 90TL Telnet/LAT Terminal Server ...................... .................. ...
DECserver 90L+ Terminal Server ............. ....... ....... .... ....................... ...... ...
DECserver 700 Ethernet Communications Server ................................... ..
DECserver 250 Communications Server ....................................... ............. .
MUXserver 300/310/380/DECmux 300 Remote Terminal Server
Communications Servers ........ ............................... ..... ...... .. .............. .
DEC Commserver 100/150 Communications Servers ................ ...............
DEC Multiprotocol Router/Bridge Comparison Chart ........................... ..
DECNIS 600 ......... ...... ..... .... .............. .................... ......... ....................... ..... .. .
DECNIS 500 ....... ............................................. ... ....... ........... ... .. .......... ..... ... ..
DEC WAN router 250 Multi protocol Router .............................. ............... .
DEC WANrouter 500 Multiprotocol Router ........................................ ..... .
Proteon 4100+ Multiprotocol 802.5/Token Ring Bridging Router ........ .
Protean CNX 500 Multiprotocol 802.5/Token Ring Bridging Router .. ..
TransPATH 335, 350 Bridge/Routers ................ ..... .... .... ............. .... ........ ...
TransLAN III, 320, 335, 350 Remote Bridges ...... .......... ......... ................. .
DEC ISDNrouter 100 ............................. .. .. ......... .. ......... ........................... ... .
StrataCom IPX Transmission Resource Manager ...... ... ....... .................. ... .
Host-Based Communications Controllers ................................ ..... ...... ........... .
DHB32 Asynchronous Controller (VAXBI) ..... ... ....................................... .
ex Asynchronous Communications Controllers (Q-bus) ..................... .. ..
DEC WAN controller 220 Synchronous Controller (V AXBI) ............... ......
DEC ISDNcontroller 100 Synchronous Controller (Q-bus) ................ ..... .
DSVll Synchronous Controller (Q-bus) ...... .......................... ... ........ ......... .
DEC WAN controller 620 Synchronous Controller (VAXft) .................... ..
DMB32 Multifunction Controller (V AXBI) .......................................... ..... ..
DEC MULTicontroller 542 Multifunction Controller
(DECsystem 5100) ...................... .. ....... ............ .......... ......... ............... .
DEC MULTicontroller 581/582 Multifunction Controller
(MicroVAX 3100) ................................ .............................................. .
DRB32 Parallel Interface (VAXBI) .... .... ................. .. .. ................................ ..
DRQ3B Parallel Interface (Q-bus) ................................ ................... .. ........ ..
DRVlJ Parallel Interface (Q-bus) .......... ... ........ .. ...................................... ...
DRVll and DRVlW Interfaces (Q-bus) ..................................................... .
Network Connectivity Products ........... ............ .................... .......................... .
H4005 Transceiver (Ethernet) ............................... ..................................... .
DELNI (Digital Ethernet Local Network Interconnect) .................. ........ .
DECrepeater 350 (Ethernet) ......................... .... ..................................... ..... .
Twisted-Pair Media Access Unit (Ethernet) ............................................. .
DEMPR Repeater (Ethernet) ....................................... .................... .. .......... .
DESPR Repeater (Ethernet) ... .. ... ....... ..... ........ .. ...... .... ............................ .. .. .
DECrepeater 90C/DECrepeater 90T (Ethernet) ........................................ .
DESTA Station Adapter (Ethernet) ............... ... .. ........ .... ....... ..................... .
DEC bridge 90 (Ethernet) ............................. ............................................... .
DEChub 90 (Ethernet) ................ ................................................................ .
DECbridge 5xx/DECbridge 6xx Series (FDDI) ................. .................. ..... ..
DECconcentrator 500 (FDDI) ...... .............. .................................. ..... ..... .. ... .
DF242 Scholar Plus Modem ....................................................................... .
DECmodem V32 ......................... ..................... ................................ .. .. ....... ..
DECtalk Speech Synthesizers ...... ............................ .. ..... ... ................ ............. ..
Cables ........................................ ......... ................................ ... ............. ...... .........
Cables ................... ......................... ....... ................................. .. ............ ... ...... .
MMJ Accessories
Communications
Video Terminals

6.6
6.6
6.7
6.9
6.10

6.13
6.14
6.16
6.19
6.20
6.23
6.24
6.25

6.27
6.29
6.31
6.32
6.33
6.34
6.37
6.37
6.37
6.38
6.39
6.40
6.41
6.42
6.43
6.43
6.44
6.46
6.47
6.47
6.48
6.48
6.48
6.49
6.49
6.49
6.50
6.50
6.51
6.51
6.52
6.53
6.55
6.57
6.57
6.59
6.61
6.61
6.64
6.65
6.66

Contents
Disks/Controllers ... .. ..... .. ... .. ... ....... .. .......... .. ....... ... ..... .... ... ... .. ..... .. ....... .. ..... .
PC Products .. .. ..... .......... .. ..... .. ..... ..... ....... .. ... .. ..... ........ .... .. ........ ... ... ......... .. ..
Printers/Hardcopy Devices .... .......... .. ... .. .......... .. ... .. .. ..... .. ... ..... .... ... .... ........
Fiber Optics .. .. ..... .. ........ .. ... .. .. ... .. .. .... .... .. ................. ..... .. ..... .. ........ .. ..... .. .. ...
Tapes ............. ... ..................... ........ ...... ........ .................. .. ....... ......... ........... ...

6.67
6.67
6.67
6.68
6.68

Chapter 7 - Storage Devices
Digital Storage Solutions .... .... ........... ...... .. ..... ... .. ..... ..... .. .. .... ..... ... ... ............. ...
Digital Storage Architecture ... .. ....... .... .... .. .. ..... .. .... ......... .. ....... .. ... .. ...... .... ..
Standard Interconnect Series Family (SDI/STI) ................................... ......
Digital Storage System Interconnect (DSSI) Family ...... .................. ...... ....
Small Computer System Interface (SCSI) ...... ............................. .......... ......
Comparison Charts ...... ....... ............ ..................................... ................ ..... ........
SDI/DSSI Disk Drive Comparison Chart .... ... ........ ... ..... .. ... ... .. .. .. .. .... .. .. .. ...
3-High Storage Cabinet Capacity and Performance Comparison Chart
SCSI Disk Drive Comparison Chart ... .. .. .. .. ... .. ... .. ... .. .... .. ... ........ .. .... ... ... ....
Tape Selection Chart ... .. .. ............. ......... .. ...... .. .. .. ........ ....... ......... ....... ... .......
Tape Comparison Chart ..... ... ...... ... .. ... ..... .. .......... ... .... .. ... .. ........... ........ .. ....
Storage Controllers/Adapters ..... .. ... .. ..... ..... .. .. ..... ... ........ .. ....... .. ..... .. ..... .. ... .....
KDM70 XMI Disk/Tape Controller (SDI/STI) .... ............. ..........................
KFMSA XMI Disk/Tape Adapter (DSSI) ... ... .. ... .. ..... .... .. ... .. ... .... ..... ... ... .. .. .
KDB50 VAXBI Disk Controller (SDI) .........................................................
KFQSA Q-bus Storage Adapter (DSSI) ..................................... ..................
KZQSA Q-bus Storage Adapter ...... ... .. ............ ....... .... .... .... .. .. .. ... ..... ..... .. ... .
KDA50 Q-bus Disk Controller ....................................................................
Storage I/O Servers ..... .... .. .. ... .. .... ..... ... ..... .. ...... .. .... ....... ...... .... .. ... .. .... ... ...........
HSC90/HSC60 Intelligent 1/0 Servers .. ..... ... ........... ..... .......... .. ....... ...........
HSS90/HSS60 Cluster Starter Packages ..... ..... .......... ....... ................. ..........
HSC Rack-Mountable Subsystems .................... ........... ................................
Storage Arrays .. .......... ..... ..... ..... ..... ... ........ ........ .. .. ..... ... ... ........ ... ..... .. .. ..... ....... .
DECarray 300 Family (SDI/DSSI) ................................................................
SA900 DECarray (SDI) ... ......... ............ ..... .... .......... ........ .. .. ..... ..... ..... .... .......
SA905 Removable DECarray (SDI) ... .. ...... .. ... .... ... ... .... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. ... ... ... ... .....
SA800 Storage Array (SDI) .. ........ .... .. ....... ... ... .... ... ... .... .. .. ..... ....... ..... ..........
SF400 DECarray (DSSI) ....... .. .......... .... ..... ... ..... .. .. ... .. ..... .. .... ... .. ... .......... ... ...
SF220 DECarray (DSSI) .. ....... ... ... .. .............. .... ... .. ... ...... .. .............................
SF200/SF210 DECarrays (DSSI) .. .............. .. ....... ................. ... ....... ....... .. .... ..
Storage Array Building Blocks ..... .. .... ....... ...... ....... ... .... ..... .................... .. ..... ..
SA71/SA72 Storage Array Building Blocks (SDI) ......................................
SF73/SF72 Storage Array Building Blocks (DSSI) .....................................
SF35 Storage Array Building Block (DSSI) ................................................
Disk Devices .......... ....... ...... ...... ..... .. .... ...... ..... ..... .. .. ... .. ..... .. ..... ............ ...... ..... ..
ESE50 Solid State Disk ................................................................................
RA92 Disk Drive (SDI) ..... .. ........ ....... ...... ... ......... ... ... ........... ... ..... .... ....... .....
RA71/RA72 Disk Drives (SDI) .............................................................. .......
RF-Series Integrated Storage Elements (DSSI) ... ... .. .. ... .. ... .. ... ........ .. .. ... ... ..
RF73 Integrated Storage Element (DSSI) ... .. .. .. .. .... .. .. ... .. ............ ... .. ... .. ... ..
RF72 Integrated Storage Elements (DSSI) .............. ....................................
RF35 Integrated Storage Element (DSSI) ...................................................
RF31T Integrated Storage Element (DSSI) ...... .. ... .. ... .... ... .. .... .. .. ............ ....
RF31 Integrated Storage Element (DSSI) ........... ....................... .................
RF31F Integrated Storage Element (DSSI) ..... .. .. .. .. ... .. .... ..... ......... .. .. .. .... .. .
RF-Series DSSI Storage Expansion Pedestals ............ ............. .. .......... ........
RF-Series DSSI Removable Storage Elements .......... ...................................
RZ-Series Disk Drives (SCSI) .......... .............................................................
RZ-Series Removable Disks (SCSI) ............................... ................. .... ... ... .. ..

7.2
7 .2
7 .2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.5
7.5
7 .6
7 .6
7 .8
7 .10
7.10
7 .11
7.14
7.14
7 .15
7.16
7 .17
7 .17
7 .18
7.19
7 .20
7.20
7 .22
7.25
7 .27
7 .28
7.32
7 .3 5
7.40
7.40
7.42
7.44
7 .46
7.46
7.48
7.49
7.51
7 .51
7 .52
7 .53
7.54
7.55
7.56
7.57
7.58
7.59
7 .62

Contents
RX3 3 Flexible Diskette Drive (SCSI) ................ ................ ... .............. ..... ... .
RX26 Flexible Diskette Drive (SCSI) ......................... ..... ......................... .. .
RX23 Flexible Diskette Drive (SCSI) ......................................................... .
Expansion Boxes (SCSI) ......................................................................... ......... .
SZ03/SZ12/SZ16 Expansion Boxes ........ .. ....... .......................................... ..
Optical Devices .................................. .............................................................. .
RV64 Optical Library Jukebox System ...................................................... .
RV20 Write-Once Optical Drive ..... ....... ......................................... ........... .
Rewritable and WORM Optical Storage Subsystems ............................... ..
RWZO 1 Optical Disk Drive .......... ...... ... ...... ......... ........ ............... ............... .
StorageServer 100 Optical Storage System ......................... ...................... .
\ CD-ROM Devices ............................................................................................. .

·L ~:.~50..~~--~~~~'-~-~t.or..~e..~~~~r~ .. ::::::::::::::::

DECdisc-CD-ROM Solution Package ............................. .................. ........ .
Tape Devices ...................... .. ............................. ............... ... ..................... ..... ... .
Tx800 Family of Cartridge Tape Drives ................................. ................ ...
Tx800 Family of Magazine Tape Subsystems ......... ........ ....................... .. ..
Tx800 Magazine and Cartridge Tape Family Specifications ......... ......... ..
TA91 Cartridge Tape Subsystem .... ... ....... ... .... ........... .......... .. ........... ..... .... .
TU90 Dual-Drive Slave Unit ...................................................................... .
TA90E Tape Subsystem Upgrade Kit ....................................................... ..
VAX to StorageTek 444 ACS Interconnect .............................................. ..
TKZ60 Cartridge Tape Drive .... .................................... .. .... ...................... ..
TK70 Cartridge Tape Drives ...................................................................... .
TK50 Cartridge Tape Drives ..................................................................... ..
TZ30 Cartridge Tape Drive (SCSI) .......................................................... ...
TLZ06 4-mm DAT Tape Drive (SCSI) ....................................... ................ .
TKZ08 Helical Scan Tape Drive (SCSI) ................................................... ..
TKZ09 Helical Scan Tape Drive ............................................................... ..
TLZ08 Helical Scan Tape Drive (SCSI) ..................................................... .
TZKlO Quarter-Inch Cartridge (QIC) Tape Drive (SCSI) .......... .. ............ .
TA79 Magnetic Tape Subsystem .................................................. .............. .
TA81 Magnetic Tape Subsystem .................... ... ................... ...................... .
TU81-Plus Magnetic Tape Subsystem ..... ... .. .. .......................... .................. .
TS05 Family of Magnetic Tape Subsystems ............................. ................. .
TSZ07 Magnetic Tape Drive (SCSI) ........ ...... ....................... .... .... ............. ..

7.63
7.63
7.64
7.65
7.65
7.68
7.68
7.69
7.70
7.71

7.73
7.75
7.75
7.78
7.79
7.80
7.80
7.82
7.86
7.88
7.89
7.90
7.90
7.91
7.92
7.93
7.95
7.95
7.97
7.98
7.98
7.99
7.101
7.102
7.102
7.104
7.106

Chapter 8 - Terminals and Printers
Video Terminals Introduction ... ..... ....... ..... ..... ................. .. ..... .......... ..............
VXT 2000 Windowing Terminals ................................... .............................. ...
Video Terminals Comparison Chart ..... .. ..... ..... ..... .... ....... .................... ..........
VT420 Text Terminal ................................................ ..... ... ................... .. .. ..... .. .
VT420 with PCTerm Text Terminal ....... ........................................................
VT340+ Graphics Terminal .................. ...........................................................
Industrial Terminals ....... ...... ........ ......... ..... ..... ....... ..... ............ ..... .. .......... ....... .
MD30C Color Scanner ................................................................ ..... .................
MD410 Document Image Scanner ......................... ...... .. .................................
MD400 Document Image Scanner .. .. ... ... .. ... ... .. ... .. ... .. .... .. .... .. .. .. .. .. ... ... ... .. .. .. .
2D and 3D Programmable Peripherals for CAD/CAM/CAE ........................
Printers Introduction ...... ...... ........ ..... ..... ......... ..... ... .... ... ....... .. ... .............. ..... ...
Nonimpact Printers Comparison Chart ................. .........................................
Impact Printers Comparison Chart .............................................. .... ...............
PrintServer Family ............... .... .. .. ... .......... .. ..... .... .............. ..... ..........................
PrintServer 40 Plus ...........................................................................................
turbo PrintServer 20 .... ..... .. ... .. ..... .......... .. ..... .. ... .. ....... ..... ...... ....... ........ ..... ... .. .
PrintServer 40 Plus and turbo PrintServer 20 Specifications .................... ...

8.3
8.4
8. 9
8.10
8.15
8.18
8.20
8.22
8.24
8.27
8.28
8.29
8.30
8.32
8.34
8.39
8.41
8.44

vii

Contents
DEClaser Printer Family ...................................................................................
DEClaser Printer Family Ordering Information .............................................
DEClaser Printer Family Specifications .......................................... .. ........... ...
DECjet 1000 and DECjet 2000 Ink-jet Printers .............................................
LJ250/LJ252 Companion Color Printers ... .............. ........ ........... .....................
Colormate PS Printer .................................. .. ............. .......................................
LA424 MultiPrinter .... ..... ..... ....... .. .. ...... .... .. ....... ....... ..... ...... ............... ... ... .. ..... .
LA70 Personal Printer ................... .................................... ..... ..........................
LA75 Plus Companion Printer ..... .......... ....... ............................... ...................
Desktop Printer Cable and Adapter Guide ........... .... .. .. ... ................ ... .. ... .. ...
LP29 Line Printer ............ ... .... ...... ......... .. ..... .. ........ .. .. ..... ..... .. .... ...... .. ... .. ..... ....
LP3 7 Line Printer ............. ... ... .. ....................... .. ..... ... ... ........... ................ ... ..... .
LG06 Shuttle-Matrix Printer ............................................................................
LG31 Dot-Matrix Line Printer ........................................................................
Printer Software ................................................................................................

Chapter 9 -

Software and Services

Network Application Support (NAS) ..............................................................
Operating Environments ........................................................................ ..........
Application Development Tools and Languages ...........................................
Artificial Intelligence ........................................................................................
Communications .... ...... .... .. ... .. ..... .. .......... ....................... ... .......... ................. ....
Data Management and Transaction Processing .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... ... .. ... ... .. .. ..
Device Drivers .............. ........... ............................... ...........................................
Graphics ..... ..... ....... .... ... ............... .. ............ ... ...................................... .. ....... .....
License Control ................................................. .. ..............................................
Office Systems ...................................................................................................
Performance Tools and Diagnostics ...............................................................
System Management ... ...... ....... ............ ... ....... .. ....... ........ ..... .. ......... ............... ...
Software Product Summary .............................................................................
Digital Services .. ........... ...... ....... .. ....... .. ...... .... ........ .. ............... .. .. .. ... .............. ...
Leasing Services ... .... ..... ... .. ............ ............. .... .. ..... ............ .............. ..... ............
Information Services .... ............... .. ..... .. ....... ... .. ...... ............ ............. ..... ..... ........
Digital Reference Service .................................................................................

viii

8.47
8.51
8.53
8.54
8.56
8.58
8.60
8.62
8.65
8.67
8.68
8.70
8.72
8.75
8.77

9.2
9.7
9.9
9.24
9.26
9 .3 7
9.49
9.61
9.68
9.70
9.79
9.85
9.92
9.104
9.108
9.110
9.111

Preface
Digital Equipment Corporation publishes the Digital Systems and Options Catalog
(formerly the VAX Systems and DECsystems Systems and Options Catalog) quarterly as a hardware ordering and configuring guide. It is a comprehensive collection of current descriptive, ordering, and configuring information available on
systems and hardware options. This catalog presents only those products that are
announced, actively marketed, and available for ordering during this quarter.

How To Use This Catalog

This catalog provides ordering and configuring information for new system sales.

If necessary, past editions should be retained for reference. The following
describes how the catalog is organized.
The first four chapters-Chapter 1, VAX Systems; Chapter 2, DECsystems (RISC);
Chapter 3, Personal Computing; and Chapter 4, Specialized Systems-provide systems information, such as product descriptions, illustrations, and menus to assist
in ordering and configuring the various systems.
The remaining chapters provide more detail, such as product descriptions, features, and ordering and configuring information for many of the options
presented or referred to in the system menus. It is not possible, in many
instances, to provide complete ordering information for all of the various options
on each menu; hence, the references to other chapters.
Chapter 5, VAXcluster Options/System Expansion, includes VAXcluster configuration rules, memory, environmental products and additional expansion information. Chapter 6, Networks, Communications, and Cables is organized into five
categories-LAN communications controllers, local and wide area communications controllers, host-based communications controllers, network connectivity
products, and cables. Terminal server and router summary charts are included.
For complete networking and communications information, refer to the Networks
Buyer's Guide. Chapter 7, Storage Devices, provides information on various controllers, disk drives, and tape, optical, and CD-ROM drives. Chapter 8, Terminals
and Printers, contains helpful selection charts in addition to the ordering information. Chapter 9, Software and Services, includes brief descriptions of many
software products developed by Digital as well as information about many of
Digital's service offerings. Other sources of information are the VAX VMS Software Source Book, ULTRIX Software Source Book, and Software Product Descriptions (SPDs), and The U.S. Systems Price List or appropriate country price list.
The following catalogs are also available and may be used for additional
information.

· Networks Buyer's Guide
· VAX VMS Software Source Book
• ULTRIX Software Source Book
• Network Application Support (NAS) Application Catalog
· DECdirect Catalog
· Personal Computing Integration Software and Hardware Catalog
• Digital Systems and Options Catalog for Realtime/ PDP-11 Products
Digital makes every effort to provide this catalog at the beginning of each quarter. However, if major new systems are scheduled to be announced early in a
given quarter, we may alter the schedule to incorporate those products.
We value your comments and suggestions. Please fill out the reply card found at
the back of this catalog.

,Chapter 1

t'1

~.·"''

. . , I'

;vAX System~,

MicroVAX 3100 Systems and Servers

VAX 4000 Systems and Servers

VAX 6000 Systems and Servers

VAX 10000 Systems and Servers

VAXft Systems and Servers

ACCESSWORKS Data Integration Servers

VAX Systems Comparison Chart
VAXstation 4000
VLC, Models 60 and 90

MicroVAX 3100
Models 30, 40, 80, and 90

VAX 4000
Model 100

VAX 4000
Models 400, 500, and 600

Performance

VLC: 6.2 SPECmark
Model 60: 12 SPECmark
Model 90: 32.8 SPECmark

51 TPS

Relative Processor
Performance x
VAX-11/7801

NIA

Models 30 and 40: 22 TPS
Model 80: 28 TPS
Model 90: 34 TPS
Models 30 and 40: 5
Model 80: 10
Model 90: 24

Model 400: 51 TPS
Model 500: 68 TPS
Model 600: 102 TPS
Model 400: 16
Model 500: 24
Model 600: 32

VLC: 25 MHz
Model 60: 55 MHz
Model 90: 72 MHz
VLC: 8 KB on chip;
Models 60 and 90: 2 KB
on chip, 256 KB on board

Models 30 and 40: 25 MHz
Model 80: 50 MHz
Model 90: 72 MHz
Models 3 0 and 40: 6 KB
on chip;
Model 80: 2 KB on chip ,
256 KB on board;
Model 90: lOKB on chip ,
128 KB on board

72 MHz

In-Cabinet CPU
Upgrade

Model 60 upgrades to
Model 90

NIA

Alpha-Ready
System Upgrade

Models 60 and 90: system
up~rade to Alpha desktop
an deskside workstations

Model 40 up1.Jades to
Model 80 or odel 90;
Model 80 upgrades to
Model 90
Models 80 and 90: system
upgrade to Alpha desktop
system

System up~rade to
Alpha des top
system

System u~rade to Alpha
distribute I departmental
system

VLC: 24 MB
Model 60: 104 MB
Model 90: 128 MB
VLC: 8.4 GB
Models 60 and 90: 8.7 GB

Models 30 and 40: 32 MB
Model 80: 72 MB
Model 90: 128 MB
8.7 GB

128 MB

5 12 MB

28 GB

56 GB

Maximum
I/ O Throughput

VLC: 5.0 MB/ s·
Models 60 and 90:
5 MB/ s (SCSI),
50.0 MB/ s (TURBOchannel)

4 MB/ s

8.5 MB/ s

12.5 MB/ s

VO Support

VLC: Synchronous SCSI,
Ethernet; Models 60 and 90:
Synchronous SCSI, Ethernet,
TURBOchannel

1 SCSI, 1 Ethernet

3 DSSI (1 embedded,
2 Q-bus) , 1 Q -bus,
1 S~ SI, 3 Ethernet

4 DSSI (2 embedded, 2
Q-bus), 2 Q -bus, 3 Ethernet

Ethernet

Ethernet, DSSI

Disk shadowing

Disk shadowing,
online hardware/
software service
upgrade

Disk shadowing,
online hardware/ software
service upgrade

VLC and Model 60:
OpenVMS and VAXeln;
Model 90: Open VMS
NAS 250

Open VMS

NAS 200, 300, 400

NAS 400

System

Number of Processors

CPU Clock Speed

Cache Size

t:
ca

c;
c
0

fl.)

li"t:
qw ca

0..

8r.o
E1

~
fl)

~ 1

1/0 Features
Maximum
Memory Capacity
Maximum
Disk Capacity

8 KB on chip,
128 KB on Eoard

Model 400: 63 MHz
Model 500: 72 MHz
Model 600: 83 MHz
Model 400: 8 KB on chip,
Model 500 and 600: 10 KB
on chip;
Models 400 and 500: 128 KB
on board, Model 600: 512 KB
on board
Each VAX 4000 system
upgrades to any nigher VAX
4000 system

High Availability Features
VAXcluster
System Support
High Availability
Features Supported

Software Features
System Software

Network Application
Support Software
I

VAX-11/780 = 1

NIA = not applicable
Performance is highly dependent on configuration, application, and operating environment. Individual workloads should be carefully evaluated before
making performance estimates for specific applications. In this chart no warranty of system performance is expressed or implied.
Details on configurations are found in this catalog.
-

1.2

VAX Systems

VAX Systems Comparison Chart

System
Performance

Relative Processor
Performance x
VAX-11 / 780 1

VAXft Systems
Models 110 through 612
Model 110: 10 TPS
Models 410 and 610: 18 TPS
Model 612: 31 TPS
Model 110: 3.8
Model 410: 6
Model 610: 6
Model 612: 12

VAX 6000
Models 510 and 610
Model 510: 50 TPS
Model 610: 101 TPS
Model 510: 13
Model 610: 32

VAX 7000
Models 610 to 640

VAX 10000
Models 610 to 640

Model 610: 123 TPS
Others: NIA

Model 610: 35
Model 620: up to 65
Model 630: up to 95
Model 640: up to 125
Model 610: 1
Model 620: 2
Model 630: 3
Model 640: 4
91 MHz

Number of Processors

Models 110, 410, 610:
2x2 redundant ~rocessors;
Model 612 equ s two
Model 610s

CPU Clock Speed

Model 110: 16 MHz;
Models 410, 610, and
612: 28 MHz

Model 510: 63 MHz
Model 610: 83 MHz

Cache Size

Model 110: 1 KB on chip,
32 KB on board;
Models 410 and 610: 6 KB
on chip, 128 KB on board;
Model 612: equals two
Model 610s

Model 510: 2 KB on chip,
512 KB on board;
Model 610: 10 KB on chip,
2 MB on board

10 KB on chip/ processor
4 MB on board/ processor

In-Cabinet CPU
Upgrade

NIA

Each VAX 6000 system
upgrades to any nigher
VAX 6000 system

Each VAX 7000 system
upgrades to any nigher
VAX 7000 system

Each VAX 10000 system
upgrades to any higher
VAX 10000 system

Alpha-Ready
System Upgrade

NIA

System upgrade to Alpha
data center system

In-cabinet CPU upgrade
to Alpha data center
system

In-cabinet CPU upgrade to
Alpha mainframe-class
system

Model 110: 96 MB
Models 410 and 610: 256 MB
Model 612: 512 MB
Model 110: 4 GB
Model 410: 24 GB
Model 610 and 612 : 48 GB
Models 110 and 410: 8 MB/ s
Models 610 and 612: 16 MB/ s

Model 510: 512 MB
Model 610: 1 GB2

3.5 GB2

Over 8 TB

Over 10 TB

80 MB/ s

400 MB/ s

Model 110: 2 DSSI,
4 (2 redundant) Ethernet;
Model 410: 2 DSSI,
8 (4 redundant) Ethernet;
Models 610 and 612: 4 DSSI,
8 (4 redundant) Ethernet

1 XMI, 4 CI, 12 DSSI,
2 FDDI, 6 Ethernet,
5 VAXBI, 2 VME

4 XMI, 10 CI, 24 DSSI,
8 FDDI, 16 Ethernet,
1 VAXBI3 , 2 VME

4 XMI, 10 CI, 25 DSSI,
8 FDDI, 16 Ethernet,
1 VAXBI, 2 VME

Ethernet, DSSI, CI, FDDI

Disk shadowing, uninterruptible Disk shadowing, online
power system, battery bacl<up, hardware/ software service
tull hardware redundancy,
upgrade
automatic transparent online
reconfiguration, online
hardware/ software service
upgrade

Disk shadowing, N+ 1
redundant J?,OWer system,
uninterrupuble power
system, battery backup,
online hardware/ software
service upgrade

Disk shadowing, N + 1
redundant J?,Ower system,
uninterrupt1ble power
system, battery backup,
mainframe-class service,
online hardware/ software
service upgrade

System Software

Open VMS

Network Application
Support Sottware

NAS 200, 300, 400

NAS 400

IIO Features
Maximum
Memory Capacity
Maximum
Disk Capacity
Maximum
IIO Throughput

IIO Support

High Availability Features
VAXcluster
System Support
High Availability
Features Supported

Ethernet, DSSI

Software Features

2
3

Model 510: OpenVMS,
ULTRIX
Model 610: OpenVMS
NAS 200, 300, 400

512 MB available now, higher capacities available with upcoming release of OpenVMS and higher density memory modules
Supported by upcoming release of Open VMS

Performance is highly dependent on configuration, application, and operating environment. Individual workloads should be carefully evaluated before
making performance estimates for specific applications. In this chart no warranty of system performance is expressed or implied.
Details on configurations are found in this catalog.

VAX Systems 1.3

VAXstation 4000 VLC Systems

Product Description

Starting at prices on par with PCs, VAXstation 4000 VLC offers an affordable
and attractive graphical user interface with fast native graphics and CPU
performance similar to the fastest VAXstation 3100. The VLC is an alternative to
a text terminal. Terminal users can achieve an immediate increase in their productivity using a low-cost workstation running their current applications under
DECwindows Motif. The 2.5-inch system box supports a maximum of 24 Mbytes
of memory and includes a bracket for an optional RZ23L or RZ24L hard disk
drive. System supports a variety of monitors: 13 -inch, 16-inch, and 19-inch color
and 17 -inch and 19-inch grayscale. Audio input and output capability are
included. VLC systems come equipped with thick wire Ethernet, one DEC-423
serial line, and one EIA-232D serial line with modem control.
Additional storage expansion options are available externally via a synchronous
SCSI controller which increases SCSI throughput by up to a factor of 3 times
that of the asynchronous SCSI controller. Three external expansion boxes can be
connected to the VLC. The following options are supported in SZ03 , SZ12 or
SZ16 expansion boxes: TZ30, TLZ06, and TZKlO tapes; RX26 and RRD42 removable media; and RZ23 , RZ23L, RZ24L, RZ25 , RZ55 , RZ56, RZ57 , RZ58 hard disk
drives.
Software licenses included are: VAX VMS and Network Application SupportNAS 250 for VAXstations: ACA, DECwindows Motif, DECnet-VAX (end-node),
Extensions to DECnet-VAX, VMS/ ULTRIX Connection (TCP/ IP, RPC, NFS,
Telnet), and VAXcluster. Systems ordered with a disk will have the base operating system, VMS, DECwindows Motif, VAXcluster, and DECnet factory
installed.
With the addition of DEC SoftPC, Digital's PC emulator, or with native applications such as Lotus 1-2-3, dBASE IV and WordPerfect, the VAXstation 4000 VLC
becomes a legitimate alternative to PCs in the VAX VMS environment.
Upgrades are available for prior generation of workstations, VAXstation 2000 and
3100 systems. Target applications for VLC are: low-end CASE, desktop publishing, office automation, low-end CAD, medical/hospital, and shop floor control.

1.4

VAX Systems

VAXstation 4000 VLC Systems
Step 1--Systents
• Select system. 120-V systems include a U.S. keyboard and all required power cords. If a 240-V system is selected, the
appropriate country kit or keyboard and power cord are required from Step 2.
• Field-installable options ship separately for installation at customer site. Select factory-installed options for custom systems.
V AXstation 4000 VLC Custom Systems include
• Base module
• Memory-six SIMM connectors
• Thick wire Ethernet controller on base system module
• Synchronous SCSI controller on base system module
• 2D graphics accelerator
· 8-plane color/grayscale graphics board
·Monitor (VRM17, VR319 =monochrome; VRT13, VRT16, VRC16, VRT19 =color)
• U.S. keyboard, 120-V systems only
·Mouse
• One DEC-423 serial line
• One EIA-232D serial line with modem control
• 2.7-meter (9-foot) video cable
• 1.8-meter (6-foot) power cord (wall socket to system box) 120-V systems only
• 0.9-meter (3-foot) convenience power cord (monitor to system box)
·Universal power supply that automatically adjusts to 88-132 Vac or 176-264 Vac
• Software licenses: VMS and Network Application Support (NAS 250) for VAXstations: ACA, DECwindows Motif,
DECnet-VAX (end node), extensions to DECnet-VAX, VMS/ ULTRIX Connection (TCP/IP, RPC, NFS, Telnet), VAXcluster
· English-language user documentation
Order Number
Monitor
120 V/240 V/S.H.
Memory
(C =Color; M =Monochrome)
Hz
Graphics
PV31A-AD/AE/AF
8 MB
17-inch M VRM17 , 1024 x 768
8-plane 2D grayscale
72
PV31A-CAICB/CC
8 MB
19-inch M VR319, 1280 x 1024
8-plane 2D grayscale
72
PV31A-BA/BB
8 MB
13-inch C VRT13 , 1024 x 768
8-plane 2D color
60
PV31A-AAIAB/AC
8 MB
16-inch C VRC16, 1024 x 768
8-plane 2D color
72
PV31A-CD/CE/CF
8 MB
16-inch C VRT16, 1280 x 1024
8-plane 2D color
72
PV31A-CWCJ/CK
8 MB
19-inch C VRT19, 1280 x 1024
8-plane 2D color
72

Step 2--=country Kits, ·Power Cords, Keyboards (Not required for 120-V systents)
Select country kit, or power cord and keyboard for all 240-V systems.
• Country kits include power cord and keyboard.
• Power cords connect system to wall socket.
Country Kit
FCPOl-AG
FCPOl-AB
FCPOl-AD
FCPOl-AF
FCPOl-AP
FCPOl-AG
FCPOl-AH
FCPOl-AT
FCPOl-AI
FCPOl-AN
FCPOl-AV
FCPOl-AS
FCPOl-AM
FCPOl-AK
FCPOl-AL
FCPOl-AE

Power Cord
BN19W-2E
BN19K-2E
BN19K-2E
BN19W-2E
BN19W-2E
BN19W-2E
BN19W-2E
BN18L-2E
BN19Z-2E
BN19W-2E
BN19W-2E
BN19W-2E
BN19W-2E
BN19E-21;:
BN19E-2E
BN19A-2E
BN19H-2E
BN19P-1K
BN19P-1K
BN19S-2E
BN19P-1K

and

Kt:rboard
LK401-AG
LK401-AB
LK401-AD
LK401-AF
LK401-AP
LK401-AG
LK401-AH
LK401-AT
LK401-AI
LK401-AN
LK401-AV
LK401-AS
LK401-AM
LK401-AK
LK401-AL
LK401-AA
LK401-AA
LK401-AA
LK401-AC
LK401-AA
LK401-CA
LK401-AJ
LK402-AA
LK402-AQ
LK402-AS

Country
Austria
Belgium
Denmark
Finland
France
German
Holland
Israel
Italy
Norway
Portugal
Spain
Sweden
Switzerland
Switzerland
U .K./Ireland
Australia/ NZ
U.S./Canada
Canada
India
China
Japan
WPS keyboard
WPS keyboard
WPS ke yboard

Language
German/ Austrian
Flemish
Danish
Suomi
French
German
Dutch
Hebrew
Italian
Norwegian
Portuguese
Spanish
Swedish
French
German
English
English
English
French
English
Chinese
Katakana
English
French
Spanish
VAX Systems 1.5

VAXstation 4000 VLC Systems
Step 3-Storage
Select storage devices if required.

• An RZ2x disk must be ordered as a system disk if the system is not being booted over the network by a server.
• Maximum of seven SCSI storage devices-not to exceed one internal hard drive and three external expansion boxes.
Step 3a-lnternal Storage (Factory/Field Installed)

VLC systems have one internal storage cavity. Factory-installed variant (RZ23L-EJ, RZ24L-EJ) includes Factory-Installed
Software (FIS)"' which includes VMS and DECwindows Motif.

RZ23L-EJ/EH
RZ24L-EJ/EH

121-Mbyte internal disk drive
245-Mbyte internal disk drive

"'FIS is not a substitute for a software load device (media) and documentation ; see Step 13 .
---~~---~--~~~~------~~-...~.~~~ ·~"'.'."""·~--,

Step 3b-Extemal Storage

• Small tabletop expansion boxes (120 V and 240 V) include 18-inch SCSI cable.
· 120-V expansion boxes include a power cord; order country-specific power cord for 240-V variants from Step 2.
Single-Drive Expansion Boxes

120 V/240 V
SZ03A-AA/AB
SZ03B-AA/AB
SZ03B-BC/BD
SZ03B-CA/CB
RRD42-F AIDG
TLZ06-FA

RX26 2.8-Mbyte 3.5-inch diskette drive
RZ23 L 121-Mbyte 3 .5-inch disk drive
RZ24L 245-Mbyte 3.5-inch disk drive
RZ25 426-Mbyte 3.5-inch disk drive
RRD42 600-Mbyte compact disc drive
4.0-Gbyte 4-mm digital audio tape (DAT) drive

Expansion Boxes

For SZ12 and SZ16 expansion box information, see Chapter 7, Storage Devices.
Step Jc-Wall-Mount Bracket

BAlOX-AA

Wall-mount bracket for VLC system box

Step 4-Memory
· System includes 8 Mbytes of memory; additional memory may be added in 8-Mbyte increments.
· Six SIMM memory slots total

MS40-BA

8 Mbytes (2- x 4-Mbyte 80-ns SIMMs), maximum 24 Mbytes

Step 5-Video Cables
Custom systems include a 9-foot video cable; if additional video cable is required, order below.

BC29G-09

Video cable (9-foot) for color/ grayscale monitors

Step 6-Networking Cables
Base system module includes thick wire Ethernet connector. Two adapters are available, ThinWire or lOBaseT (Twisted
Pair).

DESTA-BA
H3350-AA

ThinWire Ethernet Station Adapter
lOBaseT (Twisted Pair) Ethernet Adapter

Select desired length of thick wire to connect ThinWire or lOBaseT adapter to base system. Do not attach adapter directly
to base system module.

BNE4C-xx
BNE3H-xx
BNE3L-xx
BC16M-xx
H8225-00
BN24F-03

Thick wire 802.3/Ethernet cable (xx = 02105 refers to length in meters).
Thick wire transceiver cable with straight connector-PVC (xx = 05/10/20/40 refers to length in
meters).
Thick wi~e transceiver cable with straight connector-Teflon (xx = 05/10/20/40 refers to length in
meters).
ThinWire Ethernet cable (xx = 06/15/30 refers to length in feet).
ThinWire terminator
Twisted Pair cable

See Chapter 6, Networks, Communications, and Cables, for more information and more choices.

1.6

VAX Systems

VAXstation 4000 VLC Systems
Step 7-0ptional Input/Output Devices (Customer Installable)
VSXXX-AB
VSXXX-GA
VSXXX-JA

11-inch x 11-inch tablet
Three-button ergonomic rectangular mouse (included with system)
Audio headset for VAXstation 4000 VLC and Models 60 and 90 workstations

Step 8-Printers
Refer to Chapter 8, Terminals and Printers, for ordering information.

Step 9-Hardware Documentation
VAXstation 4000 VLC information kits are shipped with every system. The information kit includes Internal Options Quick
Card, Peripheral Devices Quick Card, and Internal Replacement Quick Card; the following documents may be ordered, if
required.

EK-VAXVL-OG
EK-SDDBY-OG
EK-INTRE-QC
EK-INTNA-QC
EK-PERDE-QC
EK-VMSFI-RC

VAXstation 4000 VLC Owner's Guide
SZ03 Expansion Box Owner's Guide
Quick connect card
Adding memory quick card
Adding a drive quick card
VAXstation Factory-Installed Software Guide

Step 10-Graphic Option Upgrades (Field Installable)
Custom systems include 8-plane color/grayscale graphics board. Graphics options are listed with compatible monitors.
Options require Digital Services installation.
Order Number

Description

Compatible Monitor

PV31G-AC

8-plane color/grayscale graphics board for use with
monitors operating at:
1280 x 1024 resolution, 72 Hz

16-inch C VRT16-HA/H4
19-inch C VRT19-HA/H4
19-inch C VR320-DAID4
19-inch M VR319-DA/D4

8-plane color graphics board for use with monitors
operating at:
1280 x 1024 resolution, 66 Hz

16-inch C VRT16-DA/D4
19-inch C VRT19-DA/D3/D4
19-inch C VR320-CA/C4
16-inch C VRT16-HAIH4
19-inch C VRT19-HA/H4

PV31G-AD

Hz
66/ 72

66172
72
72
66
66
66
66/72
66/ 72

Step 1!-Software Media and Documentation
VLC requires VMS V5 .5 or higher. A media and documentation kit is recommended for the first system on site. Systems
include the following license PAKs: VMS operating system and NAS 250 for VAXstations (ACA, DECwindows, Motif,
DECnet-VAX (end-node) , extensions to DECnet-VAX, VMS/ ULTRIX Connection, VAXcluster).

QA-09SAA-S5
QA-09SAA-S8
QA-09SAA-SM

VMS and DECwindows media (TK50) and documentation
VMS and DECwindows media (CD-ROM) and documentation
VMS and DECwindows media (magtape) and documentation

QA-XVDAA-H5
QA-XVDAA-HM
QA-XVDAA-H8

NAS 250 for VAXstations media (TK50) and documentation (CD-ROM)
NAS 250 for VAXstations media (magtape) and documentation (CD-ROM)
NAS 250 for VAXstations media and documentation on CD-ROM

DEC SoftPC, an optional layered product, allows a VAXstation 4000 VLC to run MS-DOS programs on the workstation with
no added hardware. Order license, media, and documentation below.

QL-YNWAA-3B
QA-YNWAA-H5
QA-YNWAA-HM
QA-YNWAA-GZ

DEC SoftPC for VMS single-user license
DEC SoftPC for VMS media (TK50)
DEC SoftPC for VMS media (magtape)
DEC SoftPC for VMS documentation

VAX Systems 1. 7

VAXstation 4000 VLC System Diagram

RZ23L/RZ24L Fixed

BU-3274

1.8

VAX Systems

VAXstation 4000 Model 60

Product Description

VAXstation 4000 Model 60 has twice the price/performance of the VAXstation
3100 Model 76 and offers a 60 percent increase in SPECmark performance. The
improved performance is achieved by using the CMOS three-chipset which operates at 18 nanoseconds, providing a system CPU rated at approximately 12.0
SPECmarks.
The Model 60 introduces support for 3D graphics. In addition to the accelerated
2D offered on standard systems, 3D capability is now available in 8-plane or
24-plane configurations. Both options (8-plane SPXg with 16-bit Z-Buffering, and
24-plane SPXgt with 24-bit Z-Buffering) provide support for full double buffering. A choice of 4-plane grayscale or 8-plane color graphics operate on a variety
of monitors: two monochrome: 17 - and 19-inch, for 4-plane grayscale, and three
color: 16-inch and 19-inch Trinitron, and 19-inch conventional, for 8-plane color
systems. Audio input and output capability are included. Dual- and quad-screen
color graphics systems can be ordered as custom systems or as optional
upgrades.
System memory, internal storage, and graphic option upgrades are customer
installable. The system box supports up to 104 Mbytes of memory. Internal
storage permits a maximum of two 3.5-inch hard disks and one removable media
device-diskette, compact disc, or tape drive. Model 60 has a synchronous SCSI
controller on the CPU board which increases SCSI throughput by up to a factor
of 3 times that of the asynchronous SCSI controller used on VAXstation 3100
systems. Three external expansion boxes can be connected to the Model 60. The
following options are supported in SZ03, SZ12 or SZ16 expansion boxes: TZ30,
TLZ06, and TZKlO tapes; RX26 and RRD42 removable media; and RZ23 , RZ23L,
RZ24L, RZ25, RZ55, RZ56, RZ57, RZ58 hard disk drives.
For communication and networking needs, the system is equipped with both
ThinWire and thick wire Ethernet, one DEC-423 serial line and one EIA-232D
serial line with modem control. An additional synchronous communications
option is available to allow DECnet Phase V, OSI, arid TCP/ IP layered products
to use synchronous wide area network communication.

VAX Systems

1.9

VAXstation 4000 Model 60
Product Description (Continued)

VAXstation 4000 Model 60 software licenses include VAX VMS and Network
Application Support-NAS 250 for VAXstations. Systems ordered with a disk will
have the base operating system, VMS and DECwindows Motif Vl.O, factory
installed. These workstations can expand distributed networks, run graphics-based applications, or improve user productivity with the multi-window capability of DECwindows in commercial and technical environments. DEC SoftPC
runs MS-DOS applications in a workstation.
Upgrade kits are available to upgrade VAXstation 3100 Models 30, 38, 40, 48,
and 76 to a VAXstation 4000 Model 60.

1.10

VAX Systems

VAXstation 4000 Model 60
Step r.!-Systems

---

• Select system. 120-V systems include a U.S. keyboard and all required power cords. If a 240-V system is selected, the
appropriate country kit or keyboard and power cord are required from Step 2.
· Field-installable options ship separately for installation at customer site. Select factory-installed options for custom systems.
VAXstation 4000 Model 60 systems include
·Base module with 8-Mbyte embedded memory
• Memory-six SIMM connectors
· Cache memory: 256 Kbytes
· ThinWire/Thick wire Ethernet controller on base system module
· Synchronous SCSI controller on base system module
• 2D or 3 D graphics accelerator
· Monitor
· U.S. keyboard, 120-V only
· Mouse
· One DEC-423 serial line
· One EIA-232D serial line with modem control
· 2.7-meter (9-foot) color/monochrome video cable
· 1.8-meter (6-foot) power cord, 120-V systems only
• 0.9-meter (3-foot) monitor power cord (monitor to system box)
• Universal power supply that automatically adjusts to 88-132 Vac or 17 6-264 Vac
• Software licenses: VMS and Network Applications Support-NAS 250 for VAXstations; ACA, DECwindows Motif,
DECnet-VAX (end-node), extensions to DECnet-VAX, VMS/ULTRIX Connection, VAXcluster
· English-language user documentation.
Note: Systems ordered with a factory-installed RZ2 x disk include factory-installed software (FIS).
Model 60 Systems
Order Number
120 V/240 V/S.H.
PV61A-BE/BF/BH
PV61A-AA/AB/AC
PV61A-AD/AE/AF
PV61A-AX/AY/BA
PV61A-AWAJ/AK
PV61A-AL/AMIAW
PV61A-AP/AR/ASi'
PV61A -AT/AV/Aw~··
1
'

Memory

Monitor
C =Color
M = Monochrome

Graphics

8 MB
8 MB
8 MB
8 MB
8 MB
8 MB
8 MB
8 MB

17-inch M VRMl 7
19-inch M VR319
16-inch C VRT16
19-inch C VR320
19-inch C VRT19
16-inch C VRT16
19-inch C VRT19
19-inch C VRT19

72
72
66
66
66
66
66
66

LCG 4-plane/2D grayscale
LCG 4-plane/2D grayscale
LCG 8-plane/2D color
LCG 8-plane/2D color
LCG 8-plane/2D color
SPXg 8-plane/3 D color
SPXg 8-plane/3 D color
SPXgt 24-plane/3D color

SPXg and SPXgt systems include DEC PHIGS Runtime license and require DECwindows Motif Vl.0 media. Recommended configurations for SPXg and
SPXgt standalone systems are 24-32 Mbytes of memory and two RZ25 internal disks.

Dual- and Quad-Monitor systems
1

PV61A-BB/BC/BD
2
PV61E-AC/AD/AE
3
PV61E-AA/AB

8 MB
8 MB
8 MB

19-inch C VRT19
19-inch C VRT19
No monitor

66
66172

66172

8-plane 2D/ dual-monitor/color
4
8-plane 2D/quad-monitor/color
4
8-plane 2D/quad-monitor/ color

Includes two video cables and one monitor; see Step la.
2
Includes four video cables and one monitor; see Step la.
3
Includes four video cables, no monitor; see Step la.
4
Quad-monitor systems do not support TURBOchannel adapter or synchronous communication options.

Monitors for Dual- and Quad-Monitor Systems
Select additional monitors for dual- and quad-monitor systems; video cables for additional monitors are included with
system; order power cord for each monitor from Step 2.
VRT16-HA/H4
VRT19-HA/H4
VR320-CA/C4
VR320-DA/D4

16-inch color monitor 1280 x 1024, 66/72 Hz
19-inch color monitor 1280 x 1024, 66/72 Hz
19-inch color monitor 1280 x 1024, 66 Hz
19-inch color monitor 1280 x 1024, 72 Hz

VAX Systems

1.11

VAXstation 4000 Model 60
Step 2-Country Kits, Power Cords, Keyboards (Not Required for 120-V Systems)
Country Kit

FCPOl -AG
FCPOl-AB
FCPOl-AD
FCPOl-AF
FCPOl-AP
FCPOl-AG
FCPOl-AH
FCPOl-AT
FCPOl-AI
FCPOl-AN
FCPOl-AV
FCPOl-AS
FCPOl-AM
FCPOl-AK
FCPOl-AL
FCPOl-AE

Power Cord

and

BN19W-2E
BN19W-2E
BN19K-2E
-BN19W-2E
BN19W-2E
BN19W-2E
BN19W-2E
BN18L-2E
BN19Z-2E
BN19W-2E
BN19W-2E
BN19W-2E
BN19W-2E
BN19E-2E
BN19E-2E
BN19A-2E
BN19H-2E
BN19P-1K
BN19P-1K
BN19S-2E
BN19P-1K

Keyboard

LK401-AG
LK401-AB
LK401-AD
LK401-AF
LK401-AP
LK401-AG
LK401-AH
LK401-AT
LK401-AI
LK401-AN
LK401-AV
LK401-AS
LK401-AM
LK401-AK
LK401-AL
LK401-AA
LK401-AA
LK401-AA
LK401-AC
LK401-AA
LK401-CA
LK401-AJ
LK402-AA
LK402-AQ
LK402-AS

Country
Austria
Belgium
Denmark
Finland
France
German
Holland
Israel
Italy
Norway
Portugal
Spain
Sweden
Switzerland
Switzerland
U.K./Ireland
Australia/NZ
U.S./Canada
Canada
India
China
Japan
WPS keyboard
WPS keyboard
WPS keyboard

Step 3-Storage
Select storage devices if required. Factory-installed variants (RZ23L-EM, RZ24L-EM, RZ25-EM) include factory-installed
software (FIS) which includes VMS and DECwindows Motif Vl.O.
Configuration Rules

·An RZ23L, RZ24L , or RZ25 disk must be ordered as a system disk if the system is not being booted over the network by
a server.
· Maximum of seven SCSI devices, not to exceed two internal hard drives, one removable media device, and four external
devices; or up to six external SCSI devices (with only one internal drive).
Note: FIS is not a substitute for a software load device; media and documentation is required for first system on side.
Step 3a-lntemal Drives (Factory/Field Installed)

Systems have three internal storage cavities.
Slot I-Removable media (RX26, RRD42 , TLZ06, TZKlO)
Slot 2-3.5-inch disk RZ23L, RZ24L, or RZ25
Slot 3-3.5-inch disk RZ23L, RZ24L, or RZ25
Select up to one half-height removable media device.

RX26-ES/UL
RRD42-JM/JL
TLZ06-GF/GG
TZKlO-GF/GG

2.8-Mbyte 3.5-inch internal diskette drive
600-Mbyte internal compact disc drive
4.0-Gbyte 4-mm digital audio tape (DAT)
525-Mbyte quarter-inch cartridge (QIC) tape

Select up to two 3.5-inch half-height disk drives. Factory-installed variants (-EM) include Factory-Installed Software (FIS).

RZ23L-EM/EL
RZ24L-EM/EL
RZ25-EM/EL
1.12

VAX Systems

121-Mbyte internal disk drive
245-Mbyte internal disk drive
426-Mbyte internal disk drive

VAXstation 4000 Model 60
Step 3b-Extemal Storage (Expansion Box)
For SZ03, SZ12 and SZ16 expansion box information see Chapter 7, Storage Devices.

Step 3c-Workstands
BA46X-AA
H9855-AA

Vertical floor stand. Holds one VAXstation 4000 system box or one SZ16 expansion box.
Horizontal workstand. Holds one VAXstation 4000 system box and three SZ16 expansion boxes.

Step 4-Memory
Systems include 8-Mbyte memory embedded on base system module. Additional memory may be added in 8-Mbyte or
32-Mbyte increments. Six SIMM memory slots total; 8-Mbyte and 32-Mbyte modules may be combined.

MS44L-BA
MS44-DA

8 Mbytes parity (2 x 4-Mbyte, 100 ns SIMMs)
32 Mbytes parity (2 x 16-Mbyte, 100 ns SIMMs)

Step 5-TURBOchannel Adapter (Customer Installable)
· TURBOchannel adapter provides one single-width bus slot for Digital or third-party options.
·Adapter requires VMS V5.5-2 or higher
·Required for TURBOchannel communication options (Step 5a)

DWCTX-BX

TURBOchannel Adapter Module

Note: Quad-monitor systems do not support TURBOchannel adapter or synchronous communication options.
Step 5a-TURBOchannel Options (Customer Installable)
• Requires a TURBOchannel adapter.
· Each option requires one TURBOchannel slot.
·The following TURBOchannel options have VMS/ driver support.

PMAD-AB
PMAZ-AB
DEFZA-AA

Thick wire Ethernet TURBOchannel option card
Additional SCSI TURBOchannel option card
DEC FDDicontroller 700 (fiber optic)

Step 6-Synchronous Communication Options
Select synchronous communication option if TURBOchannel adapter was not selected from Step 5.

Note: Quad-monitor systems do not support TURBOchannel adapter or synchronous communication options
VAX Wide Area Network (WAN) device driver license is required before adding a synchronous communication controller.
Order license, media (TK50 or magtape), and documentation.

QL-VAWA9-AA
QA-VAWAA-H5
QA-VAWAA-HM
QA-VAWAA-GZ

VAX WAN Vl.2 device driver license
VAX WAN Vl.2 device driver media (TK50) and documentation
VAX WAN Vl.2 device driver media (magtape) and documentation
VAX WAN Vl .2 device driver documentation

Step 6a-Synchronous Communication Controller (Customer Installable)
DSW21 -AA
DSW21-AB
DSW21-AC
DSW21-AD
DSW21-AE
DSW21 -AF

One-line synchronous communication controller and EIA-232 V.24 synchronous modem cable
One-line synchronous communication controller and EIA-423 V.10 synchronous modem cable
One-line synchronous communication controller and EIA-422 V.36 synchronous modem cable
One-line synchronous communication controller and V.35 synchronous modem cable
One-line synchronous communication controller and EIA-530 synchronous modem cable
One-line synchronous communication controller and X.21 synchronous modem cable

Step 7-Video and Keyboard/Mouse Extender Cables
Custom systems include a 9-foot (2.7-meter) color/monochrome video cable; if additional video cable is required,
order below.

BC29G-09
BC13M-10

Video cable (9-foot) for color/monochrome monitors
10-foot keyboard/mouse extender cable and 10-foot 120-V power cord

VAX Systems

1.13

VAXstation 4000 Model 60
Step 8-Networking Cables
BC16M-xx
BNE4C-xx
BNEJL-xx

Thin Wire Ethernet cable (xx = 06/ 15/ 30 feet in length)
Thick wire transceiver cable with straight connector (PVC) (xx = 05/ 10/ 20/ 40 meters in length)
Thick wire transceiver cable with straight connector (Teflon) (xx = 05/ 10/ 20/ 40 meters in length)

Note: Right-angle Ethernet cables are not supported.

Step 9-0ptional Input/Output Devices
The tablet can be used in place of the mouse. The Lighted Programmable Function Keyboard (LPFK) and Programmable
Function Dials (PFD) can be ordered as a pair or separately. The LPFK and PFD packages listed below include a Peripheral
Control Module (PCM) which provides multiplexing of both LPFK and PFD into a single EIA-232 port. In addition, each
package includes a power supply, cables, and user documentation.
VSXXX-AB
VSXXX-GA

11-inch x 11-inch tablet
Three-button ergonomic rectangular mouse (included with system)

VSXlO-AA/A3
VSX20-AA/A3
VSX30-AA/A3

Combination LPFK and PFD package 120 V/ 240 V
LPFK package 120 V/240 V
PFD package 120 V/ 240 V

Audio headset (input/ output capability) for VAXstation 4000 VLC and Models 60 and 90. Uses the MJ audio connector.
VSXXX-JA

Audio headset for VAXstation 4000 workstations

Step 10-Printers
Refer to Chapter 8, Terminals and Printers, for ordering information.
---~--

Step 11-Hardware Documentation
Information kits ship with every system. Information kits include the following documents: VAXstation 4000 Model 60 Quick
Installation Card, Owners and System Installation Guide, and Options Installation Guide. Order additional copies if required.
EK-PMARI-OM
EK-PMARI-IG
EK-VMSFI-RC

Model 60 Owner's and System Installation Guide
Model 60 Options Installation Guide
VAXstation Factory-Installed Software Guide

Step 12-Graphics Option Upgrades
· Graphics options are listed with compatible monitors.
· Upgrades include video cables
· Dual- and quad-monitor options include video cables; require additional monitors and power cords.

Model 60 Graphics

1
2

Order Number

Description

Compatible Monitor

PV21X-GL

8-plane 2D color graphics
1280 x 1024 resolution, 72 Hz

16-inch C VRT16-HA/H4
19-inch C VRT19-HA/H4
19-inch C VR320-DA/D4

66172
66172
72

PV61G-BA 1

8-plane 3D color graphics
SPXg 16-bit Z-Buffer
1280 x 1024 resolution, 66 Hz

PV61G-AA 1

24-plane 3D color graphics
SPXgt 24-bit Z-Buffer
1280 x 1024 resolution, 66 Hz

16-inch C VRT16-DA/D4
19-inch C VRT19-DA/D3/D4
19-inch C VR320-CA/C4
16-inch C VRT16-HA/H4
19-inch C VRT19-HA/H4

66
66
66
66/72
66/72

PV21X-GA

Dual-monitor color graphics
1280 x 1024 resolution, 66 Hz
Two video cables
Supports two color monitors

PV21E-GA

Quad-monitor color graphics board
1280 x 1024 resolution, 60 Hz, 66 Hz, or 72 Hz
Four video cables
Supports four color monitors

Same as above, plus
19-inch C VR320-DA/D4

SPXg and SPXgt systems include DEC PHIGS Runtime license and require DECwindows Motif Vl.O media.
-HA/H4 monitors self-select 66 Hz or 72 Hz depending on setting of graphics card in system box.

1.14

VAX Systems

VAXstation 4000 Model 60
Step 13-Software Media and Documentation
Requires VMS V5 .5 or higher; A media and documentation kit is recommended for the first system on site.
VAXstation 4000 Model 60 includes the following license PAKs: VMS operating system and NAS 250 for VAXstations (ACA,
DECwindows Motif, DECnet-VAX (end-node), extensions to DECnet-VAX, VMS/ULTRIX connection, VAXcluster).

QA-09SAA-S5
QA-09SAA-S8
QA-09SAA-SM

VMS and DECwindows media (TK50) and documentation
VMS and DECwindows media (CD-ROM) and documentation
VMS and DECwindows media (magtape) and documentation

NAS 250 software
QA-XVDAA-H5
QA-XVDAA-HM
QA-VVDAA-H8

NAS 250 for VAXstations media (TK50) and documentation (CD-ROM)
NAS 250 for VAXstations media (magtape) and documentation (CD-ROM)
NAS 250 for VAXstations media and documentation on CD-ROM

DEC PHIGS Runtime license is included with SPXg and SPXgt systems. Order media and documentation separately
QA-VK1AA-H5
QA-VKlAA-HM

DEC PHIGS Runtime for VMS media (TK50) and documentation
DEC PHIGS Runtime for VMS media (magtape) and documentation

DECwindows Motif Vl.O media is included in NAS 250 for VAXstations and on disks with factory-installed software (FIS) .
Order media separately for systems with SPXg and SPXgt graphics options if FIS or NAS 250 media is not ordered.

QA-XA1AA-H5
QA-XAlAA-HM
QA-XAlAA-GZ

DECwindows Motif Vl.O for VMS media (TK50)
DECwindows Motif Vl .0 for VMS media (magtape)
DECwindows Motif Vl.O for VMS documentation

DEC SoftPC, an optional layered product, allows a VAXstation 4000 to run MS -DOS programs with no added hardware.
Order license, media, and documentation.
QL-YNWAA-3B
QA-YNWAA-H5
QA-YNWAA-HM
QA-YNWAA-GZ

DEC SoftPC for VMS single-user license
DEC SoftPC for VMS media (TK5 0)
DEC SoftPC for VMS media (magtape)
DEC SoftPC for VMS documentation

VAX Systems

1.15

VAXstation 4000 Model 90

Product Description

The VAXstation 4000 Model 90 is a high-performance, 32.7-SPECmark,
OpenVMS workstation using the same 14-nanosecond CMOS NVAX chip set as
the VAX 6000 Model 600 datacenter systems. Model 90 offers almost three times
the performance of the next fastest VAXstation, the Model 60.
The Model 90 supports three graphic options: LCSPX (accelerated 2D), SPXg
(8-plane 3D with 16-bit Z-Buffer) and SPXgt (24-plane 3D with 24-bit Z-Buffer).
SPXg graphics provide hardware acceleration for 2D and 3 D vectors and solid
fill, and SPXgt is most useful in accelerating the performance of applications that
make extensive use of smooth-shaded graphics and true-color imaging. All graphics options are supported on 72-Hz monitors.
Main memory can be configured at 16, 32 , 64 , 80 or 128 Mbytes, and system
includes 256 Kbytes of writeback cache. A TURBOchannel adapter option provides direct connectivity to Digital supported TURBOchannel options, including
ThickWire Ethernet, additional SCSI, and FDDI controllers.
The Model 90 system enclosure is the same as the Model 60; memory modules,
internal storage devices, and graphics option upgrades are customer installable.
Internal storage permits a maximum of two 3.5-inch hard disks and one removable media device-diskette, compact disk, or tape drive. External expansion is
supported in SZ03, SZ12 and SZ16 expansion boxes.
VAXstation 4000 Model 90 software licenses include VMS operating system and
Network Application Support-NAS 250 for VAXstations. Systems ordered with
a disk will have the base operating system, VMS V5.5-2 and DECwindows Motif
factory installed.
The VAXstation 4000 Model 90 is ideal for applications such as CAD/ CAM/ CAE,
medical and other forms of imaging, econometrics, process control/CIM, mapping, geophysical analysis, scientific visualization, and is suitable as a trader
workstation. It provides a level of VAXstation performance that enables users to
run the most computationally demanding applications.
To allow VAXstation 4000 Model 60 users to take full advantage of the processing
performance of the new Model 90, system upgrade kits are available. The basic
upgrade kit consists of a new CPU board with eight memory slots. To provide
investment protection, SPXg and SPXgt color graphics cards and monitors can be
transferred from a Model 60 systems to an upgraded Model 90 system.

1.16

VAX Systems

VAXstation 4000 Model 90

Select system. 120-V Packaged and Custom Systems include a U.S. keyboard and all required power cords. If a 240-V
system is selected, the appropriate country kit or keyboard and power cord are required from Step 2.
·Packaged Systems require Step 2 (only if 240-V system is selected). No additions or substitutions can be made to a
P ackaged System. Field-installable options ship separately for installation at customer site.
· Custom Systems require Step 2 (only if 240-V system is selected) and monitor from Step 3. Select factory-installed options
for Custom Systems.
VAXstation 4000 Model 90 systems include
· Base module
• Memory-eight SIMM connectors
· Cache memory: 256 Kbytes
· Thin Wire/Thick wire Ethernet controller on base system module
· Synchronous SCSI controller on base system module
· 2D or 3D graphics accelerator
· Monitor (P ackaged Systems only)
· U.S. keyboard, 120-V only
·Mouse
· One DEC-423 serial line
· One EIA-232D serial line with modem control
· 2.7-meter (9-foo t) color/monochrome video cable
· 1.8-meter (6-foot) power cord, 120-V systems only
• 0.9-meter (3-foot) monitor power cord (monitor to system box)
• Universal power supply that automatically adjusts to 88-132 Vac or 17 6-264 Vac
• Software licenses: VMS and Network Applications Support-NAS 250 for VAXstations; ACA, DECwindows Motif,
DECnet-VAX (end-node), extensions to DECnet-VAX, VMS/ ULTRIX Connection, VAXcluster
• English-language user documentation.
Note: Packaged Systems and Custom Systems ordered with factory-installed RZ24L or RZ25 include Factory-Installed
Software (FIS). Each system also includes VMS software media on TK50 and CD-ROM.
Model 90-Packaged Systems
Order Number
120 V/240 V/S.H.
PV710-AL/AMIAN
PV710-AS/AT/AV
PV710-AP/AQ/AR
PV710-AA/AB/AC
PV710-AD/AE/AF'"
PV710-AWAJ/AK"'
PV720-AA/AB/AC"'
PV720-AD/AE/AF"'

Memory

Monitor
C =Color
M = Monochrome

Graphics

RZ25 = 426 MB

16 MB
16 MB
16 MB
32 MB
32 MB
32 MB
64 MB
64 MB

19-inch M VR319
16-inch C VRT16
19-inch C VRT19
19-inch C VRT19
19-inch C VRT19
19-inch C VRT19
19-inch C VRT19
19-inch C VRT19

72
72
72
72
72
72
72
72

LCSPX 8-plane 2D grayscale
LCSPX 8-plane 2D color
LCSPX 8-plane 2D color
LCSPX 8-plane 2D color
SPXg 8-plane 3D color
SPXgt 24-plane 3D color
SPXg 8-plane 3D color
SPXgt 24-plane 3D color

1 x RZ25
1 x RZ25
1 x RZ25
1 x RZ25
1 x RZ25
1 x RZ25
2 x RZ25
2 x RZ25

c::>

°'

"ii

-0
0

Model 90-Custom Systems (require monitor from Step 3)
PV71A-AA/AB
PV71A-AC/AD
PV71A-AE/AF"'
PV71A-AH/Ar
PV71A-AK/AL"'
PV71A-AM/AW

16 MB
64 MB
32 MB
64 MB
32 MB
64 MB

Requires monitor
Requires monitor
Requires monitor
Requires monitor
Requires monitor
Requires monitor

72
72
72
72
72
72

LCSPX 8-plane 2D grayscale
LCSPX 8-plane 2D grayscale
SPXg 8-plane 3D color
SPXg 8-plane 3D color
SPXgt 24-plane 3D color
SPXgt 24 -plane 3D color

c::>
c::>
c::>

'-.:I"

c:
Q

-~
I ll

:><:

* SPXg and SPXgt systems include DEC PHIGS Runtime license and require DECwindows Motif Vl.1 .

VAX Systems

1.17

VAXstation 4000 Model 90
Step 2- Country Kits, Power Cords, Keyboards (Not Required for 120-V Systems)
Country Kit
FCPOl-AG
FCPOl-AB
FCPOl-AD
FCPOl-AF
FCPOl-AP
FCPOl-AG
FCPOl-AH
FCPOl-AT
FCPOl-AI
FCPOl-AN
FCPOl-AV
FCPOl-AS
FCPOl-AM
FCPOl-AK
FCPOl-AL
FCPOl-AE

Power Cord
BN19W-2E
BN19W-2E
BN19K-2E
BN19W-2E
BN19W-2E
BN19W-2E
BN19W-2E
BN18L-2E
BN19Z-2E
BN19W-2E
BN19W-2E
BN19W-2E
BN19W-2E
BN19E-2E
BN19E-2E
BN19A-2E
BN19H-2E
BN19P-1K
BN19P-1K
BN19S-2E
BN19P-1K

and

Keyboard
LK401-AG
LK401-AB
LK401-AD
LK401-AF
LK401-AP
LK401-AG
LK401-AH
LK401-AT
LK401-AI
LK401-AN
LK401-AV
LK401-AS
LK401-AM
LK401-AK
LK401-AL
LK401-AA
LK401-AA
LK401-AA
LK401-AC
LK401-AA
LK401-CA
LK401-AJ
LK402-AA
LK402-AQ
LK402-AS

Country

Language

Austria
Belgium
Denmark
Finland
France
German
Holland
Israel
Italy
Norway
Portugal
Spain
Sweden
Switzerland
Switzerland
U.K./Ireland
Australia/NZ
U.S./Canada
Canada
India
China
Japan
WPS keyboard
WPS keyboard
WPS keyboard

German/Austrian
Flemish
D anish
Suomi
French
German
Dutch
Hebrew
Italian
Norwegian
Portuguese
Spanish
Swedish
French
German
English
English
English
French
English
Chinese
Katakana
English
French
Spanish

Step 3-Monitor (Required for Model 90 Custom Systems)
Model 90 Packaged and Custom Systems support 72-Hz monitors. Select monitor for LCSPX, SPXg or SPXgt graphics.
Model 90 does not support dual- and quad-monitor configurations at this time.

VRMl 7-HA/H4
VR319-DA/D4
VRT16-HA/H4
VRT19-HA/H4

17-inch monochrome, 1280 x 1024 refresh rate, 72 Hz
19-inch monochrome, 1280 x 1024 refresh rate, 72 Hz
16-inch color, 1280 x 1024 refresh rate, 66/72 Hz
19-inch color, 1280 x 1024 refresh rate, 66/72 Hz

Step 4-Storage
Select storage devices if required. Factory-installed variants (RZ24L-EM, RZ25-EM) include factory-Installed Software (FIS)
which includes VMS V5.5 -2, DECwindows Motif Vl.1 , and DEC PHIGS.

Configuration Rules

· An RZ24L or RZ25 disk must be ordered as a system disk if the system is not being booted over the network by a server.

~
~

· Maximum of seven SCSI devices, not to exceed two internal hard drives, one removable media device, and four external
devices; or up to six external SCSI devices (with only one internal drive).

Note: Model 90 systems ship with VMS V5.5-2 software media on TK50 and CD-ROM.

Step 4a-l ntemal Drives (Factory/Field Installed)

·~
~

Systems have three internal storage cavities.

><
~

Slot I-Removable media (RX26, RRD42, TLZ06, TZKlO)
Slot 2-3.5-inch disk RZ24L or RZ25
Slot 3-3.5-inch disk RZ24L or RZ25

1.18

VAX Systems

VAXstation 4000 Model 90
Step 4a-lntetnal Drives (Factory/Fieid Installed) (Continued)
Select up to one half-height removable media device.

RX26-ES/UL
RRD42-JM/JL
TLZ06-GF/GG
TZKlO-GF/GG

2.8-Mbyte 3.5-inch internal diskette drive
600-Mbyte internal compact disc drive
4.0-Gbyte 4-mm digital audio tape (DAT)
525 -Mbyte quarter-inch cartridge (QIC) tape

Select up to two 3.5-inch half-height disk drives. Factory-installed variants (-EM) include Factory-Installed Software (FIS).

RZ24L-EM/EL
RZ25-EM/EL

245 -Mbyte internal disk drive
426-Mbyte internal disk drive

Step 4b-Extemal Storage (Expansion Box)
For SZ03 , SZ12 and SZ16 expansion box information see Chapter 7, Storage Devices.

BA46X-AA
H9855-AA

Vertical floor stand. Holds one VAXstation 4000 system box or one SZ 16 expansion box.
Horizontal workstand. Holds one VAXstation 4000 system box and three SZ16 expansion boxes.

Systems include 16 Mbytes (4 x 4-Mbyte SIMMs) or 32"' Mbytes (8 x 4-Mbyte SIMMs) or 64 Mbytes
(4 x 16-Mbyte SIMMs). Additional memory may be added in 16- or 64-Mbyte increments if four memory slots are available.
Eight SIMM memory slots total; 16- and 64-Mbyte modules may be combined.

MS44L-BC
MS44-DC
7
'

16 Mbytes (4 x 4-Mbyte, 100 ns SIMMs)
64 Mbytes (4 x 16-Mbyte, 100 ns SIMMs)

Increasing memory in 32-Mbyte systems requires removal of 4 x 4-Mbyte SIMMs; trade-in values for SIMMs are offered through DECdirect catalog.

Step 6-TURBOchannel Adapter (Customer Installable)
• TURBOchannel adapter provides one single-width bus slot for Digital or third-party options.
·Adapter requires VMS V5.5-2 or higher
· Required for TURBOchannel communication options (Step 6a)

DWCTX-BX

TURBOchannel Adapter Module

Step 6a-TURBOchannel Options (Customer Installable)
·Requires a TURBOchannel adapter.
· Each option requires one TURBOchannel slot.
· The following TURBOchannel options have VMS/driver support.

PMAD-AB
PMAZ-AB
DEFZA-AA

Thick wire Ethernet TURBOchannel option card
Additional SCSI TURBOchannel option card
DEC FDDicontroller 700 (fiber optic)

Step 7-Synchronous Communication Options
Select synchronous communication option if TURBOchannel adapter was not selected from Step 6a.
VAX Wide Area Network (WAN) device driver license is required before adding a synchronous communication controller.
Order license, media (TK.50 or magtape) , and documentation.

QL-VAWA9-AA
QA-VAWAA-H5
QA-VAWAA-HM
QA-VAWAA-GZ

VAX WAN Vl.2 device driver license
VAX WAN Vl.2 device driver media (TK.50) and documentation
VAX WAN Vl.2 device driver media (magtape) and documentation
VAX WAN Vl .2 device driver documentation

VAX Systems

1.19

VAXstation 4000 Model 90
Step 7a-Synchronous Communication Controller (Cl!_stomer Installable)
DSW21-AA
DSW21-AB
DSW21-AC
DSW21-AD
DSW21-AE
DSW21-AF

---=-----------------------------------------'"'----

Step 8-Video and Keyboard/Mouse Extender Cables
Custom Systems include a 9-foot (2.7-meter) color/ monochrome video cable; if additional video cable is required,
order below.
.

BC29G-09
BC13M-10

Video cable (9-foot) for color/monochrome monitors
10-foot keyboard/mouse extender cable and 10-foot 120-V power cord

Step 9--N etworking Cables
BC16M-xx
BNE4C-xx
BNE3L-xx

ThinWire Ethernet cable (xx = 06/15/30 feet in length)
Thick wire transceiver cable with straight connector (PVC) (xx = 05/10/20/40 meters in length)
Thick wire transceiver cable with straight connector (Teflon) (xx = 05/10/20/40 meters in length)

Note: Right-angle Ethernet cables are not supported.

Step 10-0ptional Input/Output Devices

-----------------------

The tablet can be used in place of the mouse. The Lighted Programmable Function Keyboard (LPFK) and Programmable
Function Dials (PFD) can be ordered as a pair or separately. The LPFK and PFD packages listed below include a Peripheral
Control Module (PCM) which provides multiplexing of both LPFK and PFD into a single EIA-232 port. In addition, each
package includes a power supply, cables, and user documentation.

VSXXX-AB
VSXXX-GA

11-inch x 11-inch tablet
Three-button ergonomic rectangular mouse (included with system)

VSXlO-AA/A3
VSX20-AA/A3
VSX30-AA/A3

Combination LPFK and PFD package 120 V/240 V
LPFK package 120 V/240 V
PFD package 120 V/240 V

Audio headset (input/ output capability) for VAXstation 4000 VLC and Models 60 and 90. Uses the MJ audio connector.

VSXXX-JA

Audio headset for VAXstation 4000 workstations

Step 11-Printers
Refer to Chapter 8, Terminals and Printers, for ordering information.

Step 12--Hardware Documentation
Information kits ship with every system. Information kits include the following documents: VAXstation 4000 Model 60 or 90
Quick Installation Card, Owners and System Installation Guide, and Options Installation Guide. Order additional copies if
required.

EK-VAXOG-DK
EK-VMSFI-RC

1.20

VAX Systems

Model 90 Owner's and System Installation Guide
VAXstation Factory-Installed Software Guide

VAXstation 4000 Model 90
Step 13-Graphics Option Upgrades
· Graphics options are listed with compatible monitors.
· Upgrades include video cables

Note: Model 90 does not support dual- or quad-monitor configurations at this time.
Model 90 Graphics
Order Number

Description

Compatible Monitor

PV71G-AA

LCSPX 8-plane 2D graphics
1280 x 1024 resolution, 72 Hz

17-inch M VRM17-HA/H4
19-inch M VR319-DA/D4
16-inch C VRT16-HA/H4
19-inch C VRT19-HA/H4

72
72
66/ 72
66/72

PV71G-BA 1

SPXg 8-plane 3D graphics with 16-bit Z-Buffer
1280 x 1024 resolution, 72 Hz

PV71G-CA
1

SPXgt 24-plane 3D graphics with 24-bit Z-Buffer
1280 x 1024 resolution, 72 Hz

SPXg and SPXgt systems include DEC PHIGS Runtime license and require DECwindows Motif Vl.1.
-HA/H4 monitors self-select 66 Hz or 72 Hz depending on setting of graphics card in system box.

Step 14-Software Media and Documentation
Model 90 requires VMS V5.5-2 or higher; VMS software media ships with each system on both TK50 and CD-ROM.
VAXstation 4000 Model 90 includes the following license PAKs: VMS operating system and NAS-250 for VAXstations (ACA,
DECwindows Motif, DECnet-VAX (end-node), extensions to DECnet-VAX, VMS/ULTRIX connection, VAXcluster).

NAS 250 software
QA-XVDAA-H5
QA-XVDAA-HM
QA-VVDAA-H8

NAS 250 for VAXstations media (TK50) and documentation (CD-ROM)
NAS 250 for VAXstations media (magtape) and documentation (CD-ROM)
NAS 250 for VAXstations media and documentation on CD-ROM

DEC SoftPC, an optional layered product, allows a VAXstation 4000 to run MS-DOS programs with no added hardware.
Order license, media, and documentation.
QL-YNWAA-3B
QA-YNWAA-H5
QA-YNWAA-HM
QA-YNWAA-GZ

DEC SoftPC for VMS single-user license
DEC SoftPC for VMS media (TK50)
DEC SoftPC for VMS media (magtape)
DEC SoftPC for VMS documentation

VAX Systems

1.21

VAXstation 4000 Upgrades
VAXstation 4000 System Upgrades
Upgrade kits must be installed by Digital Services.
Notes

From

PV31U-A9

VAXstation 3100 series with VR160, VR150, VR297 ,
VR299, VR262, 60 Hz

VAXstation 4000 VLC
1024 x 864 (60 Hz)

PV31U-D9

VAXstation 3100 series with VRT16, VRT19, VR329,
VR319, 66 Hz

VAXstation 4000 VLC
1280 x 1024 (66 Hz)

PV31U-C9

VAXstation 3100 series with VRM17 , VR319, VRT16,
VR320, VRT19, 72 Hz

VAXstation 4000 VLC
1280 x 1024 (72 Hz)

PV61U-B9

VAXstation 3100 series with VR297, VR299 monitors

VAXstation 4000 Model 60
2D LCG graphics

PV61U-A9

VAXstation 3100 series with VRT16, VRT19,
VR320 monitors

VAXstation 4000 Model 60
2D LCG graphics

PV71U-AF

VAXstation 4000 Model 60 Base board
2D LCG graphics

VAXstation 4000 Model 90
LCSPX 2D graphics

3, 5

PV71U-AH

VAXstation 4000 Model 60 3 D SPXg graphics

VAXstation 4000 Model 90
3D SPXg graphics

4, 5

PV71U-AJ

VAXstation 4000 Model 60 3D SPXgt graphics

VAXstation 4000 Model 90
3D SPXgt graphics

4, 5

2. Upgrade kits include: VAXstation 4000 Model 60 CPU, BA46 system enclosure, power supply, 8 Mbytes of memory, 2D
LCG 8-plane color graphics board, 2.7-meter (9-foot) color/ monochrome video cable, brackets for three internal devices
(one removable media, two fixed disks), ThinWire/ thick wire Ethernet, one DEC-423 serial line, one EIA-232D serial line
with modem control, synchronous SCSI controller, software licenses and English language user documentation. Upgrade
supports VAXstation 3100 options, LK201 keyboard, VSxxx-AA mouse, and three expansion boxes. Upgrades require the
mandatory return of VAXstation 3100 CPU board and system enclosure.
3. Upgrade kits include: VAXstation 4000 Model 90 CPU, 2D LCSPX 8-plane color graphics board, software license, VMS
software kit, user documentation and Model 90 medallion. Upgrades require the mandatory return of Model 60 CPU
board and LCG graphics.

4. Upgrade kits include: VAXstation 4000 Model 90 CPU, software license, VMS software kit, Model 90 user documentation
and medallion. SPXg or SPXgt graphics cards and monitors will be transferred to Model 90 system.
0

a-.

"'O

"'=
"
0

5. Model 90 systems require a minimum of 16 Mbytes of main memory; 8-Mbyte memory embedded on Model 60 system
board cannot be transferred. See Step 4 for Model 90 memory configurations. Trade-in values for memory modules are
offered through DECdirect catalog. 4-Mbyte and 16-Mbyte SIMMs from Model 60 may be transferred to Model 90 in sets
of four only, (e.g. two MS44L-BA = 4 x 4-Mbyte SIMMs). Model 90 memory modules must be installed in sets of four
matching value SIMMs.

".+:l

~
.....
fll

><
<
>

1.22

VAX Systems

VAXstation 4000 Models 60 and 90
System Diagram

TURBOchannel Adapter or
Synchronous Communications
Board

BU-3273

..s
«!

•
Q

...e
QI

I'll

·1':11•.j ,

"'Q

;

'°

I'll

"'Q

::s
8
Q

"""c0
s

·.a
I'll

VAX Systems

1.23

VAXstation 4000 VLC and Models 60 and 90
Specifications
P ower Requirements

SPECmarks
Line voltage
Voltage tolerance- RMS
Frequency/single phase
Frequency tolerance
Maximum running current
Maximum power consumption

VLC

Model 60/ 90

6.2
120 V/240 V
88-132 V/194-264 V
60 Hz/50 Hz
47-63 Hz
1.6 N0.82 A
108 w

12.0/32.7
Same
Same
Same
Same
6.2 N3.1 A
465 w

15°-32°C (59° -90°F)
20 %-80 % noncondensing
2.4 km (8,000 feet)

10°-40°C (50° -104 °F)
20 %-80 % noncondensing
2.4 km (8,000 feet)

6.1 cm (3.6 in.)
39.1 cm (15.4 in.)
36.8 cm (14.5 in.)
3.6 kg (8 lb)

11.3 cm (4.4 in.)
48.2 cm (19.0 in.)
40.0 cm (15.5 in.)
4.5 kg (10 lb)

Operating Environment
Temperature
Relative humidity
Maximum operating altitude
Physical Characteristics
Height
Width
Depth
Weight (diskless)

1.24

VAX Systems

Workstation Color Monitors
Product
Northern Hemisphere
Southern Hemisphere

VRT13
-DA 1' -DY'*

VRC16

CRT
Screen size
Dot pitch
Phosphor
Surface treatment

VRT16
-HA
-H4

-CA

-C4

VRT16
-DA
-D4

13 V/ 14-in. Trinitron
0.26 mm
P22
Silica

16 V/ 17-in. FS
0.26 mm
P22
Silica

16 V/ 17-in. Trinitron
0.26 mm
P22
Silica

1280 x 1024 (66)

640 x 480 (70)
640 x 480 (60)

1280 x 1024 (66)
1024 x 768 (87) 'h°d<
1024 x 768 (72)
1024 x 768 (70)
1024 x 768 (60)
800 x 600 (72)
800 x 600 (56)
640 x 480 (72)
640 x 480 (70)
640 x 480 (60)

Active display
Horizontal (maximum)
Vertical (maximum)

240 mm (9 .4 in.)
180 mm (7.0 in .)

Connectors
Signal
Power

9 pin D-subminiature
IEC receptacle

-C4

VRT19
-DA* -D3 '~ 1'
-D4

VRT19
-HA
-H4

16 V/ 17-in. Trinitron
0.26 mm
P22
Conductive Silica

19 V/ 20-in.
0.31 mm
P22
AR Panel

19 V/20-in.
0.31 mm
P22
AR Panel

19 V/20-in. Trinitron
0.31 mm
P22
Silica

19 V/ 20-in. Trinitron
0.31 mm
P22
Conductive AR

1280 x 1024 (72)
1280 x 1024 (66)

1280 x 1024 (72)

1280 x 1024 (66)

1280 x 1024 (72)
1280 x 1024 (66)

1280 x 1024 (66)

300 mm (11.8 in.)
236 mm ( 9.3 in. )

295 mm (11.6 in.)
236 mm ( 9.3 in. )

295 mm (11.6 in. )
236 mm ( 9.3 in .)

342 mm (13 .5 in. )
273 mm (10.7 in. )

342 mm (13.5 in. )
273 mm (10.7 in.)

343 mm (13.5 in.)
274 mm (10.7 in.)

343 mm (13 .5 in.)
274 mm (10.7 in.)

BNC (5)
IEC receptacle

BNC (3)
IEC receptacle

Included with monitor Included with system
9 to 15-pin
D-subminiature

Included with system

90-264 V/50-60 Hz

90-264 V/50-60 H z

90-264 V/50-60 Hz

Yes
200 W maximum

Yes

90-264 V/50-60 Hz
,., America/"'*Europe
Yes
220 W maximum

90-264 V/50-60 Hz

Auto ranging
Consumption

100-120 V/50-60 Hz* 90-264 V/50-60 Hz
220-240 V/50 Hz 1"°'
Yes
No
110 W maximum
80
maximum

Dimensions
Height
Width
Depth

355 mm (14.0 in. )
348 mm (13.7 in .)
411 mm (16.2 in .)

Resolution/Refresh
Rate (Hz) (All modes
are non-interlaced
except for ***8514/ A
which is interlaced.)

1024 x 768 (87)7dd<

1024 x 768 (60)
-

800 x 600 (56)
-

Signal cable

Power supply
AC

VR320

VR320
-DA
-D4

-CA

432 mm (17.0 in. )
411 mm (16.2 in .)
434 mm (17.1 in.)

.......

409 mm (16.1 in. )
406 mm (16.0 in .)
453 mm (17.8 in .)

409 mm (16.1 in.)
406 mm (16.0 in.)
453 mm (17.8 in.)

457 mm (18.1 in.)
495 mm (19.5 in .)
452 mm (17.8 in. )

Yes
220 W maximum

457 mm (18.1 in. )
495 mm (19.5 in .)
452 mm (17 .8 in.)

474 mm (18.7 in. )
480 mm (18.9 in.)
505 mm (19.9 in.)

474 mm (18 .7 in.)
480 mm (18.9 in.)
505 mm (19.9 in. )

Weight

13 .0 kg (29 lb)

25 kg (55 lb)

25.3 kg (5 6 lb)

25.3 kg (56 lb)

29 kg (64 lb )

25.3 kg (56 lb)

32.5 kg (71.5 lb)

MPRII low-emission
monitor

Yes

FCC/ VDE/VCCI
Class A
Class B

UL/CSA/TUY
DHHS/ HWC/PTB

Cl:J

0 .......
~ .......

ns·
e;=-=
~
f"'t-Q
0
0

<
t'-1

=
=
Q..

0
0....
tr>
~

Cl:J

0--.

Yes
-

Yes

=
=
'\,/;)

r:J:J

~
II>

~<
o>
e. ><

Yes
Yes

Yes

.....

VAXstation 4000 VLC and Models 60 and 90 Monitor Chart

Q..

VAXstation 4000 VLC and Models 60 and 90
Monitor Chart
Workstation Grayscale Monitors
VR319
-CA
-C4

VR319
-DA
-D4

17-in. FS

19-in.

NIA

PC104
Conductive Silica

P192
Mechanical Etch

Product
Northern Hemisphere
Southern Hemisphere

VRM17
-AA
-A4

VRM17
-HA
-H4

CRT
Screen size
Dot pitch
Phosphor
Surface treatment

17-in. FS

NIA
PC104
Silica
1280 x 1024 (72)

1280 x 1024 (72)

1280 x 1024 (66)

1024 x 768 (72)

Active display
Horizontal (maximum)
Vertical (maximum)

295 mm (11.6 in.)
236 mm ( 9.3 in.)

342 mm (13 .5 in.)
273 mm (10.7 in.)

342 mm (13.5 in.)
273 mm (10.7 in.)

Connectors
Signal
Power

BNC(l)
IEC receptacle

BNC (1)
IEC receptacle

Signal cable

Included with system

Power supply
AC
Auto ranging
Consumption

90-264 V150-60 Hz
Yes
75 W maximum

90-264 Vl 50-60 Hz
Yes
75 W maximum

90-264 V150-60 Hz
Yes

Dimensions
Height
Width
Depth

419 mm (16.5 in.)
406 mm (16.0 in .)
375 mm (14.75 in.)

419 mm (16.5 in.)
406 mm (16.0 in.)
375 mm (14.75 in.)

457 mm (18.1 in.)
495 mm (19.5 in.)
401 mm (15.8 in.)

457 mm (18.1 in.)
495 mm (19.5 in .)
401 mm (15.8 in.)

Weight

16.8 kg (37 lb)

21.8 kg (48 lb)

MPRII low-emission monitor

Yes

FCC/VDEIVCCI
Class A
Class B

Yes

UL/CSA/TUV

Yes

DHHSIHWCIPTB

Yes

Resolution/Refresh
Rate (Hz) (All modes
are non-interlaced)

1.26

VAX Systems

MicroVAX 3100 Systems and Servers

Product Description

MicroVAX 3100 systems are designed to complement today's VAX offerings.
With enhanced distributed computing capabilities and flexibility, they support
more than 10,000 commercial and technical applications across local or wide
area networks.
MicroVAX 3100 systems offer communications interfaces to support distributed
applications. Communications options are available as add-ons to provide expansion capabilities. MicroVAX 3100 systems support synchronous options for wide
area communications, and asynchronous options, including modem options for
terminal and printer connections. This large-system networking allows communications in a variety of environments, including DECnet, TCP/IP, OSI, SNA, and
X.25.
With MicroVAX 3100 systems, greater productivity is available for all desktop
systems. PC clients based on MS-DOS, OS/2, and Macintosh can be connected to
the MicroVAX 3100 system, enabling the entire business to share information.
Digital's advanced client/server computing, based on NAS (Network Application
Support), delivers a wide range of solutions to help integrate different desktop
workstations and PCs in an organization.
MicroVAX 3100 systems are designed and engineered to handle demanding computing tasks in the open office environment. Factory-loaded operating system
software and automatic voltage-sensing power capability make them an ideal
choice for any office. Featuring mid-range system performance while retaining
com pact desktop packaging, MicroVAX 3100 systems require no special facility
plans, air conditioning, or power requirements.
MicroVAX 3100 systems support synchronous SCSI transmission in addition to
asynchronous SCSI transmission, providing more balanced and higher
performance systems.

VAX Systems

1.27

MicroVAX 3100 Systems and Servers
Product Description
(Continued)

The MicroVAX 3100 Model 30 is designed to support a broad range of computing needs and a large number of users. Its system performance means quick
access to files and applications and fast wide area networking.
The MicroVAX 3100 Model 40 offers the same fast performance as the Model 30
but in a more expandable desktop system. Additional internal SCSI storage,
asynchronous, synchronous, and modem options can be added to meet current
and future application needs. The Model 40 is also an excellent server for
multi-PC environments, offering a single source of support for the NAS
environment.
The MicroVAX 3100 Model 80 is ideal for organizations that require high
performance, expandability, and storage capacity in a desktop system. It runs
most applications twice as fast as the Model 30 and Model 40. The Model 80
system can be expanded to 72 Mbytes of memory to meet increased application
demands.
The MicroVAX 3100 Model 90 provides the maximum performance for the
desktop. The Model 90 has over twice the CPU and Ethernet performance as the
Model 80. Memory can be expanded to 128 Mbytes for additional user and
application support.
MicroVAX 3100 systems are designed for high availability, sustained reliability,
and ease of serviceability. Their compact size provides mid-range systems
performance at entry-level system prices.

MicroVAX 3100 Comparison Chart
Model 30
5.0

Model 40
5.0

Model 80

Model 90

Performance x VAX 11/780 (VUPS)

10.0

24.0

Enclosures

BA42-A

BA42-B

Memory: Included
Maximum

8 Mbytes
32 Mbytes

8 Mbytes
72 Mbytes

16 or 64 Mbytes
72 or 128 Mbytes

Storage devices (internal maximum)

Storage Devices 1 (Total internal and external)

Storage Capacity2

8.7 Mbytes

1
2

Maximum two SZ12 expansion enclosures can be configured with MicroVAX 3100 system-each SZ12 can be configured with up to two storage devices.
Model 30/ 40/ 80: three RZ26 1.05-Gbyte devices and four RZ58 1.38-Gbyte devices. (RZ57/ RZ58 must be in SZ12 expansion box.)

1.28

VAX Systems

MicroVAX 3100 Systems and Servers
Step 1-Systems
Select system. Note that disk and tape are not included with traditional and base systems and must be ordered separately.
Open VMS user licenses may be ordered as needed.
MicroVAX 3100 Model 30, Model 40, Model 80, and Model 90 systems include
• Small enclosure with CPU/FPU (Model 30) or large enclosure with CPU/FPU (Model 40, Model 80, and Model 90)
• 8 Mbytes of parity memory: Models 30, 40, 8.0; 16 or 64 Mbytes of ECC memory: Model 90 (base memory on Models 30
and 40 on CPU; base memory on Models 80 and 90 in DSIM slots)
t--80-2.3/ Ethernet interface (ThinWire/ thick wire) with terminators
· Ethernet kit; includes Thin Wire T-connector with ENC terminators and 15-pin thick wire terminator
· Synchronous SCSI interface for connecting internal and external SCSI devices; external connection via a 50-pin
external SCSI connector
• Three DEC-423 asynchronous serial lines (MMJ data leads only)
· EIA-232 asynchronous serial line with modem control (25-pin D-subminiature connector)
• H8575-A 25-pin-to-MMJ DEC-423 to EIA-232 adapter
• External SCSI terminator
• 7.6-meter (25-foot) console terminal cable
• 120-V power cord (country-specific power cord required for 240-V use; see Step 8)
·Universal power supply that automatically adjusts to 88-132 Vac or 176-264 Vac
· Hardware documentation (Model 30: QZ-K44AA-GZ; Models 40, 80, and 90: QZ-K44AB-GZ)
· OpenVMS base license (with POSIX) --. Factory-installed software"'
· One full-year product warranty (standard warranty recommended)
"' Delivery of the software on a system disk is not warranted. It is provided as a convenience to the customer. Customers are encouraged to purchase the
necessary media and documentation kits that include complete installation instructions. See Step 7 for details.

ADVANT AGE-SERVER Systems
• NAS 300 package (with DECnet end-node license and Rdb Runtime license)
• RZ26 1.05-Gbyte disk drive
· RRD42 600-Mbyte CD-ROM drive
Order Number

MicroVAX 3100

Memory

DV-31HCB-DA
DV-31PCA-EA

Model 80
Model 90

40 Mbytes
64 Mbytes

MicroVAX 3100

Memory

Open VMS Traditional Systems
• OpenVMS 2-user license
- · Rdb Runtime license
·DECnet end-node license
Order Number
DV-31FTA-B9
- DV-31GTA-B9
DV-31HTA-B9
DV-31PTA-C9
DV-31PTA-E9

Model 30
'- Model 40
Model 80
Model 90
Model 90

8 Mbytes
_./ 8 Mbytes
8 Mbytes
16 Mbytes
64 Mbytes

"'O

;

fl)

j
fl)

OpenVMS Base Servers

rll

Order Number

MicroVAX 3100

Memory

DV-31FAA-B9
DV-31GAA-B9
DV-31HAA-B9
DV-31PAA-C9
DV-31FAA-E9

Model 30
Model 40
Model 80
Model 90
Model 90

8 Mbytes
8 Mbytes
8 Mbytes
16 Mbytes
64 Mbytes

><
~

2
CJ

VAX Systems

1.29

MicroVAX 3100 Systems and Servers
Step 2-Storage
Select storage devices as required. See Chapter 7, Storage Devices, for further details.

Step 2a-Intemal Storage
Configuration Rules
Model 30

Models 40, 80, and 90

· Storage devices are supported in any one of the
following combinations:
- One removable media device and one 3 .5 -inch half-height
- One RX2x 3.5-inch half-height and two RZ2x 3.5-inch
half-height
- Three 3.5-inch half-height devices if TLZ06 is not used
• Maximum two tape devices, one internal and one
external or two external
· Order a load device if necessary-VAXcluster satellite
members or systems being loaded over the network
do not require a load device. (One TK50Z or RRD42
is required as a load device if TZ3 0 storage is not
present.)
· Selection of one factory-installed RZ24L, RZ25, or RZ26
required (for Base Systems) for factory-installed software.

· Maximum five internal devices in any one of the
following combinations:
- Five RZ2x
- Two RRD42, or TLZ06, or TZKlO and three RZ2x
- Two RX26 and three RZ2x
- One TZ30 (must be in right cavity) and three RZ2x
• One factory-installed RZ24L, RZ25, or RZ26 is required
for factory-installed software.
· Order a load device if necessary-VAXcluster satellite
members or systems being loaded over the network
do not require a load device. (One TK50Z or RRD42
is required as a load device if TZ3 0 storage is not
present.)
· Field-installed options require Customer Services
installation.

Note: Internal RRD42 not supported in Model 30 systems.
RZ25-EN/EK
426-Mbyte 3.5-inch half-height embedded SCSI fixed disk drive; factory/ field installed
RZ24L-EJ/EH
245 -Mbyte 3.5-inch half-height embedded SCSI fixed disk drive; factory/field installed
RZ23L-EJ/EH
121-Mbyte 3.5-inch half-height embedded SCSI fixed disk drive; factory/field installed
RZ26-EN/EK - - 1.05-Gbyte 3.5-inch half-height embedded SCSI fixed disk drive; factory/field installed
RX26-EN/EL
2.8-Mbyte diskette drive; factory/field installed
TLZ06-HF/HG
4.0-Gbyte 4mm 3.5-inch DAT drive
TZ30-EK/EL
95-Mbyte streaming tape drive; factory/ field installed
TZKlO-HF/HG
320/525-Mbyte quarter-inch cartridge (QIC) tape drive; factory/field installed
RRD42-EN/EK
600-Mbyte CD-ROM drive for Models 40, 80, and 90 systems; factory/field installed

Configuration Rules

· Maximum two SZ12 dual-drive expansion boxes (a fully populated SZ12 expansion box counts as two devices)
· Maximum seven devices; four can be external
· Maximum SCSI bus length (internal and external) is 6 meters (236 inches)
Use the following table to measure the amount of external SCSI bus length; the total must not exceed 4.6 meters (180.6
inches) for Model 30 and 4.2 meters (163.9 inches) for Models 40, 80, and 90. Note: The following devices include
necessary cables except TZ85; TZ85 requires BC06P cable.
Tabletop Enclosure

Internal Cable Length

External Cable Length

SZ12
RRD42
TK50Z
TLZ04
TLZ06
TZ85

0.78 m (31 inches)
0.35 m (14 inches)
0.45 m (18 inches)
1.01 m (40 inches)
0.32 m (12.6 inches)
0.28 m (11 inches)

0.6 m (24 inches)
0.45 m (18 inches)
0.45 m (18 inches)
0.91 m (36 inches)
0.91 m (36 inches)

SZ12
TK50Z-GAIG3 -::
RRD42-FA/DG":
TLZ06-FA*
TZ85-TA

Refer to page 7 .65 for SZ12 dual-drive expansion box ordering information.
95-Mbyte 5.25-inch tabletop streaming cartridge tape drive; 120 V/ 240 V
600-Mbyte 5.25-inch tabletop CD-ROM drive; 120 V/240 V
4.0-Gbyte 3.5-inch tabletop DAT drive with universal power supply; includes 120-V power cord
2.6-Gbyte 5.25-inch tabletop tape drive; requires BC06P cable

BC06P-2F
BC06P-06
BC06P-09

TZ85 cable, 2.5 ft (0.8 m)
TZ85 cable, 6 ft (1.8 m)
TZ85 cable, 9 ft (2.7 m)

~'Country-specific power cord required for 240-V use, refer to Chapter 7, Storage Devices.

1.30

VAX Systems

MicroVAX 3100 Systems and Servers

Base systems include 8, 16, or 64 Mbytes of memory-base memory on Models 30 and 40 on CPU; base memory on
Models 80 and 90 in first DSIM slot. Model 30 and 40 systems can be expanded to 32 Mbytes of memory, Model 80
syste~s can be expanded to 72 Mbytes of memory, and Model 90 systems can be expanded to 128 Mbytes of memory.
Digital Single In-Line Memory (DSIM)
MS44L-BA
MS44-DA
MS44L-BC
MS44-DC

8 Mbytes of DSIM modules for Model 30, 40, and 80 systems
32 Mbytes of DSIM modules for Model 80 systems
16 Mbytes of DSIM modules for Model 90 systems
64 Mbytes of DSIM modules for Model 90 systems

MicroVAX 3100 Memory Configuration Chart
Model 90
16-Mbyte Base
64-Mbyte Base

Required Memory

Models 30 and 40

Model 80

16 Mbytes

1 x MS44L-BA

24 Mbytes

2 x MS44L-BA

NIA
NIA

32 Mbytes

3 x MS44L-BA

NIA

1 x MS44L-BC

40 Mbytes

NIA
NIA

1 x MS44-DA

NIA
NIA

NIA
NIA
NIA
NIA
NIA

2 x MS44-DA

NIA

80 Mbytes

NIA
NIA

NIA

1 x MS44-DC

1 x MS44L-BC

128 Mbytes

NIA

1 x MS44-DC

48 Mbytes
72 Mbytes

1 x MS44L-BA and
1 x MS44-DA

Step 4-Networks and Communications
Select devices as required. See Chapter 6, Networks, Communications, and Cables, and the Networks Buyer's Guide for more
information.
Host-Based Communications Controllers
Select host-based communications controllers for standalone systems (without LAN connectivity), or for other requirements.
Asynchronous Multiplexer Options
Select one asynchronous multiplexer for communications expansion.
DHW41-BA (Model 30)
Provides four EIA-232 lines for a system total of eight asynchronous lines (three data only and five with modem control).
Includes internal logic module with cable, EIA-232 I/O assembly, and external 50-pin to 4-way 25-pin BC29J-06 1.8-m (6-ft)
cable; factory or field installed.
DHW41-AA (Model 30)-DHW42-AA (Model 40, Model 80, and Model 90)
Provides eight DEC-423 lines for a system total of 12 asynchronous lines (11 data only and one with modem control).
Includes internal logic module with cable, DEC-423 I/O assembly, external 36-pin BC16C-10 3-m (10-ft) cable, and
H3104-00 eight-line distribution harmonica; factory or field installed.
DHW42-CA (Model 40, Model 80, and Model 90)
Provides-eight EIA~232 lines for a system total of 12 asynchronous lines (three data only and nine with modem control).
Includes internal logic module with cable, EIA-232 IIO assembly, and two external 50-pin to 4-way 25-pin BC29J-06 1.8-m
(6-ft) cables; factory or field installed.
DHW42-BA (Model 40, Model 80, and Model 90)
Provides 16 DEC-423 lines for a system total of 20 asynchronous lines (19 data only and one with modem control).
Included internal logic module with cable, DEC-423 I/O assembly, two external 36-pin BC16C-10 3-m (10-ft) cables, and
two H3104-00 eight-line distribution harmonica; factory or field installed.

VAX Systems

1.31

MicroVAX 3100 Systems and Servers
Step 4-Networks and Communications (Continued)
DHW42-UP (Model 40, Model 80, and Model 90)
Upgrades DHW42-AA to DHW42-BA; field installed only.
Note: Addition of DHW4x options increases number of users; a VMS license upgrade may be required.
Synchronous Communications Option
Configuration Rules
• Select ONE synchronous option.
· EIA-232/V.24 cable (BC19D-02) is included-select alternate cables for EIA-423/V.10 and EIA-422/V.11 connection.
~
~~~~~~~~~~~~~-~
DSW41-AA (Model 30)-DSW42-AA (Model 40, Model 80, and Model 90)
EIA-232 synchronous controller (DSW41-AA provides one line; DSW42 -AA provides two lines). Includes synchronous logic
module, I/O assembly, and external EIA-232 0.6-m (2-ft) adapter cable.
BC19B-02
BC19E-02

EIA-422/V.11 0.6-m (2-ft) adapter cable
EIA-423/V.10 0.6-m (2-ft) adapter cable

QL-VAWA9-AA

One- time single-user VAX WAN Device Driver license for use of synchronous port

QA-VAWAA-H5

VAX WAN Device Drivers media (TK50) and documentation

Note: VAX WAN Device Driver included in VMS Consolidated Software Disk CD-ROM media. See Step 7 for details. VAX
WAN Device Driver Vl.2 or higher required.
LAN Communications Controller
802.3/Ethernet Interface (ThinWire/thick wire selectable) included with system. Connection of system to Ethernet requires a
ThinWire BNC connection (e.g., BC16M cable) or a thick wire 15-pin AUI transceiver cable (e.g., BNE3x).
Local and Wide Area Communications Servers
Each communications server requires an 802.3/Ethernet connection. Depending on the server selected, either a Thin Wire
ENC connection (e.g., BC16M cable) or a thick wire 15-pin AUI transceiver cable is required (e.g., BNE3x). Software media
and documentation and cables are also required. See description in Chapter 6, Networks, Communications, and Cables, for
ordering information.
DECserver 90L+, 700, 250, and MUXserver 300, 310, 380 Terminal and P rinter Servers
Select a terminal or printer server to provide users with multiple session access to systems on a LAN, to minimize on a
LAN, to minimize cabling complexity and costs, and to conserve host resources such as backplane slots.
DEC WANrouter 150, 250, 500, and TransPATH 335, 350 Multiprotocol Routers
Select a router to cost-effectively link a LAN to a remote system or another LAN and to offload routing overhead from the
application host system.
Network Connectivity Products
See Chapter 6, Networks, Communications, and Cables, and the Networks Buyer's Guide.

Step 5-Console Terminal
A console device is necessary for a system to function. Console cable included with system. Order video terminals (e.g.,
VT420) for each system unless otherwise available. If logging is required, a combination of video terminal and LA75 is
recommended. See Chapter 8, Terminals and Printers, for ordering information.

Step 6-Terminals and Printers
Select terminals and serial printers as required. Serial printers connect to an asynchronous line. A cable (e.g., BC16E-25)
must be ordered with each unless otherwise provided. See Chapter 8, Terminals and Printers, for ordering information.

1.32

VAX Systems

MicroVAX 3100 Systems and Servers

Licenses required to support additional users beyond those included in base systems.
Software Processor Code
ClusterWide License Rating
Open VMS User Licenses

MicroVAX 3100 = P
MicroVAX 3100 = 20 (C)

QL-XULA9-BB
QL-XULA9-BC
QL-XULA9-BD
QL-XULA9-BE
-.QL-XULA9-BFQL-XULA9-BG
QL-XULA9-BH
QL-XULAA-BR
QL-XULAB-BR

Open VMS/VAX interactive one-user license
Open VMS/VAX interactive two-user license
Open VMS/VAX interactive four-user license
OpenVMS/VAX interactive eight-user license
Open VMS/VAX interactive 16-user license
Open VMS/VAX interactive 32-u; r license
OpenVMS/VAX interactive 64-user license
Open VMS/VAX interactive 128-user license
OpenVMSIVAX interactive 256-user license

QL-VBRAP-AA

VAXcluster license for multiuser systems

Software Media and Documentation
Choose operating system media and documentation. One required for first system on site. System support for Models
30/40/80 requires V5.5 or higher; Model 90 requires V5.5-2.

QA-OOlAA-Hx
QA-09SAA-Hx

Open VMS media with extended documentation.
Open VMS media with base documentation.

Note: x denotes the media type: 5 = TK50, 8 = CD-ROM
Open VMS Consolidated Software Media and Documentation
Choose as an alternative to the above Open VMS kits. Requires RRD42 CD-ROM.

QA-VWJ8A-A8
QA-VYR8A-G8
QA-358AA-Hx
QA-GXXAA-Hx
QA-GXXAB-Hx

OpenVMS and layered product binaries on CD-ROM without hardcopy documentation, not available
for Model 90 systems.
Open VMS extended online documentation and layered product online documentation on CD-ROM;
requires DECwindows Bookreader, not available for Model 90 systems.
Rdb Runtime media and documentation
POSIX media and documentation (with IEEE documentation)
POSIX media and documentation (without IEEE documentation)

Select the appropriate NAS software level. See description of NAS packages on page 9.2. Note: The NAS packaged products
do not include hardcopy documentation for the components (the documentation is CD-ROM only). To order NAS component
hardcopy documentation, see page 9.5 for listing of order numbers.

QL-MClA"'-AA
QA-MClAA-Hx

NAS 200 (Network Application Support 200)
NAS 200 media and documentation kit

QL-MC2A"'-AA
QA-MC2AA-Hx

NAS 300 (Network Application Support 300)
NAS 300 media and documentation kit

Note: x denotes media type: 8 = CD-ROM, 5 = TK50, M = magtape, ·:: = processor code

Step 8-Power Cords
Select for 220/ 240-V systems.

BN19A-2E
BN19C-2E
BN19E-2E
BN19K-2E
BN19M-2E
BN19U-2E
BN19H-2E
BN19S-2E

U.K./Ireland
Austria, Belgium, France, Germany, Finland, Holland, Norway, Sweden, Portugal, and Spain
Switzerland
Denmark
Italy
Israel
Australia, New Zealand
India

VAX Systems

1.33

MicroVAX 3100 Systems and Servers
MicroVAX 3100 Model 30 System Diagram

Optional DSW41 1/0
Module and Logic Board
Optional DHW41 1/0
Module and Logic Board

BU -3248

On/Off Switch

-----------------~

System Ac Power -------------~
Connector
External SCSI Port -----------=--~
Optional DSW41 Port --------~
Optional DHW41 Port - - - -

Asynchronous Modem _ _ _ _ ____,
Control Port
BU-3249

Thick Wire Ethernet Connector _ _ _ _ _ _ __,
ThinWire Ethernet Connector _ _ _ _ _ __ _ ___,

1.34

VAX Systems

MicroVAX 3100 Systems and Servers
MicroVAX 3100 Models 40, 80, and 90 System Diagrams

---~ Optional DHW42 1/0

Module and Logic Board

---- -

On/Off Switch ----------------~

- -------=-

System Ac Power - - - - - - - - - - Connector
--------External SCSI Port

~~~

:::::::: ::::: :::: ____1 _1_1-~
( ~
.•.•...···.·.··.·. --\==r

~-~~I
····.·. ·<

'J ~

b] b] : : :·: :·:·:.: :

Asynchronous Modem _ _ _ _ _ ____,
Control Port

BU-3251

Thick wire Ethernet Connector--------~
ThinWire Ethernet Connector ----------~

VAX Systems

1.35

MicroVAX 3100 Systems and Servers
Specifications
Model 30

Models 40, 80, 90

9.90 cm ( 3.90 in.)
46.38 cm (18.26 in.)
39.42 cm (15.52 in.)
11.40 kg (25.00 lb) 2

14.99 cm ( 5.90 in.)
46.38 cm (18.26 in.)
40.00 cm (15.75 in.)
18.40 kg (40.00 lb) 3

Power Requirements

Model 30

Model 80

Model 90

Nominal voltage
Power source phasing
Nominal frequency
Voltage range

110/240 Vrms
Single
50-60 Hz
88-132 Vrms
17 6-264 Vrms
47-63 Hz
1.0/0.55 A
120/132 VA

110/240 Vrms
Single
50-60 Hz
88-132 Vrms
17 6-264 Vrms
47-63 Hz
1.2/0.65 A
144/156 VA

120/240 Vrms
Single
50-60 Hz
88-132 Vrms
176-264 Vrms
47-63 Hz
1.5/0.75 A
180 VA

Physical Characteristics
Height
Width
Depth
Weight

Line frequency tolerance
Typical running current
Typical power consumption

110/240 Vrms
Single
50-60 Hz
88-132 Vrms
176-264 Vrms
47-63 Hz
1.1/0.6 A
132/144 VA

Standard Communication
Minimum MMJ lines
Modem lines
Ethernet

3 DEC-423
3 DEC-423
3 DEC-423
1 EIA-232
1 EIA-232
1 EIA-232
Thick wire and ThinWire supported on all models

3 DEC-423
1 EIA-232

Communications O ptions

MM] lines
MM] lines
Modem lines
Synchronous lines
Operating Environment

8 DEC-423
4 EIA-232
1 synchronous

8 DEC-423
16 DEC-423
8 EIA-232
2 synchronous

Temperature (sea level) 10°-40°C (50°-90°F)
Relative humidity 10%-90% noncondensing
Maximum operating altitude 2.4 km (8,000 ft)

DEC-423, EIA-232 and synchronous lines can be ordered separately. The DEC-423 and EIA-232 options cannot be configured together in the same
system. An 8-line DEC-423 to 16-line DEC-423 upgrade option is available for the MicroVAX 3100 Model 40 and Model 80 systems.
2
Approximate weight with one disk.
3
Approximate weight with three disks.

1.36 VAX Systems

MicroVAX 3100 Upgrades and Conversion Kits
All software must be upgraded to the latest revision when upgrading from server to timeshare systems. The following
upgrades replace the CPU in the existing system enclosure.

Order
Number

From

VAXserver 3100
Model 10 or 20

VAXserver 3100
Model lOe or 20e

310XR-EA

VMS File and Application Server license and DECnet
end-node license

MicroVAX 3100
Model 10 or 20

MicroVAX 3100
Model 1Oe or 20e

310XR-EB

VMS 1- to 5-user license, and DECnet end-node license.

VAXserver 3100e

MicroVAX 3100e

310XR-AD

VMS 1- to 5-user license, and DECnet end-node license.

Includes:

Note: MicroVAX 3100 Model 90 systems require 16 Mbytes of main memory. 8-Mbyte memory embedded on Model 40
and Model 80 CPU cannot be transferred; 4-Mbyte and 16-Mbyte DSIMs from Model 40 and Model 80 can be transferred
to Model 90 in sets of four ONLY (e.g., two MS44L-BA = 4 x 4-Mbyte SIMMs-Model 90 memory modules must be
installed in sets of four matching DSIM values).
MicroVAX 3100
Model 40

MicroVAX 3100
Model 90

47GEX-C9

16 Mbytes of memory, two OpenVMS user licenses, and
DECnet end-node license.

MicroVAX 3100
Model 40

MicroVAX 3100
Model 90

47GEX-E9

64 Mbytes of memory, two OpenVMS user licenses, and
DECnet end-node license.

MicroVAX 3100
Model 80

MicroVAX 3100
Model 90

47HEX-C9

16 Mbytes of memory, two Open VMS user licenses, and
DECnet end-node license.

MicroVAX 3100
Model 80

MicroVAX 3100
Model 90

47HEX-E9

64 Mbytes of memory, two Open VMS user licenses, and
DECnet end-node license.

MicroVAX 3100
Model 40

MicroVAX 3100
Model 80

47XR-AA

VMS 1- to 2-user license, and DECnet end-node license.

VAX Systems

1.3 7

VAX 4000 Systems and Servers

Product Description

VAX 4000 systems provide unprecedented commercial systems performance, high
availability, and a compact footprint for deployment flexibility. They also support
a wide range of business-enhancing applications and options, including Token
Ring networks and a wide variety of Q-bus peripherals. VAX 4000 systems offer
growth and flexibility, as well as investment protection through board upgrades,
memory and storage expansion, and the ability to create DSSI VAXcluster
systems.
VAX 4000 systems derive their outstanding performance from a powerful CMOSbased CPU, as well as an enhanced cache and memory subsystem. DSSI and
Ethernet adapter chips-each driven by a 10-MIP on-chip RISC processor-are
tightly integrated on the CPU module and have direct access to memory. Digital's
DSSI disk technology offers dedicated cache and an embedded controller on each
disk, enabling linear I/O performance as disks are added to the system. With
balanced I/O, VAX 4000 systems deliver superior application response time.
Because of their balanced and scalable performance, VAX 4000 systems are well
suited for a variety of commercial applications. Typical environments include
banking and finance, insurance, health care, manufacturing, and retail/wholesale
industries. VAX 4000 systems' architecture, combined with the Open VMS operating system and a myriad of application solutions, offers a processing environment flexible enough to embrace client/server and "rightsizing" trends, as well as
the ability to adapt to emerging technologies.
The VAX 4000 Model 100 is offered in a desktop enclosure, and Models 200,
300, 400, 500 and 600 are packaged in a deskside pedestal. All VAX 4000
systems are designed to operate in a office environment and offer superb ease of
use and installation. Since no special room conditioning or power requirements
are necessary, the VAX 4000 can save significant annual facility costs.
VAX 4000 systems are also available in rackmount models. A rackmount solution
is ideal where workspace is at a premium. Rackmount systems offer the opportunity to start with a single system in a rackmount chassis and add systems vertically in a single cabinet to a two- or three-system DSSI VAXcluster configuration.
The power of three VAX 4000 Model 600 systems (96 VUPs) , supported by a
nearly unlimited array of disk and tape configurations can be housed in 4.5
square feet of floor space.

1.38

VAX Systems

VAX 4000 Systems and Servers
Product Description

A DSSI VAXcluster system provides high data and system availability by joining

(Continued)

Q-bus VAX 4000, VAX 6000, and VAX 7000 systems via DSSI. Each system can
access and share all disks attached to the DSSI buses. This provides multiple
paths to the data, increasing data availability. Should one system in a DSSI
VAXcluster configuration fail, data is available to serve systems via the other
paths, and all 1/0 operations can resume immediately. No application rewrite is
required across high-availability options, and systems can be expanded without
disruption to existing operations.
Multi-host DSSI VAXcluster systems are commonly used as boot nodes for local
area VAXcluster systems, or as multiuser systems with terminal servers. Packaged
DSSI VAXcluster systems are available. Refer to system ordering menus for ordering information.

VAX 4000 Comparison Chart
Model 100
(BA42B)

Model 200
(BA215 )

Model 200
(BA430)

Model 300
(BA440)

Model 400
(BA440)

Model 500
(BA440)

Model 600
(BA440)

Minimum supported
version of Open VMS

5.5-2

5.4-2

5.3-2

5.5-2

5.5

Performance
x VAX-11/780 (VUPs)

Maximum memory

128 Mbytes

64 Mbytes

256 Mbytes

512 Mbytes

2.6 Gbytes

2 Gbytes

8 Gbytes

36.0 Gbytes

40 Gbytes

34 Gbytes

48 Gbytes

Maximum storage
(Note 5)
System enclosure
(internal)
Expansion pedestal
(external)

Total

38.6 Gbytes

Maximum disk
I/ O throughput

1200 I/Os per
second

Q-bus slots available

N/A

Maximum possible
11
Q-bus slots
(with B400X expansion
pedestals)
Maximum Tape Configurations:
2 (Note 3)
TF85
2 (Note 8)
TLZ06
1 (Note 3)
TK70
1 (Note 3)
TK50
1 (Note 3)
TU81E
1 (Note 3)
TSV05
1 (Note 3)
TSZ07

42 Gbytes (DSSI) 42 Gbytes (DSSI) 56 G bytes (DSSI) 56 Gbytes (DSSI) 56 Gbytes (DSSI) 56 Gbytes (DSSI)
1180 I/Os per
se9d

1180 I/Os per
second

1980 I/Os per
second

2780 I/Os per
second

2780 I/ Os per
second

6 (Note 4)
4 (Note 2)
2 (Note 1)
2 (Note 1)
2 (Note 3)
1 (Note 3)
2 (Note 6)

8 (Note 4)
4 (Note 2)
2 (Note 1)
2 (Note 1)
2 (Note 3)
1 (Note 3)
2 (Note 6)

)
6 (Notes 4 & 5)
4 (Note 2)
2 (Note 1)
2 (Note 1)
2 (Note 3)
1 (Note 3)
2 (Note 6)

Notes:
1. One TK70/ TK50 in BA4xx (system enclosure) , one in B400X.
2. Supported in tabletop model only.
3. In separate cabinet or enclosure.
4. One per enclosure (BA4xx, B400X, R400X); maximum two per DSSI bus; embedded or tabletop.
5. Not supported in BA215 system enclosure.
6. One per KZQSA adapter.
7. If no internal disk storage is configured, maximum DSSI disk capacity is 42 Gbytes (i.e., three DSSI adapters-embedded and two KFQSAs, 21 RF73
disks, three R400X, and one B400X expansion pedestals).
8. One in BA42B, one in tabletop enclosure.

VAX Systems

VAX 4000 Systems and Servers
Product Description (Continued)
2
1
The following chart lists tape or CD-ROM devices that can be used as boot and load devices:
Device

Model 100
(BA42B)

Model 200
(BA215)

Model 200
(BA430)

Model 300
(BA440)

Model 400
(BA440)

Model 500
(BA440)

Model 600
(BA440)

RRD40
RRD42
TF85
TK50E
TK70E
TU81E
TLZ06
TSV05
TSZ07

Boot/Load
Boot/Load
Boot/Load
Boot/ Load
Boot/Load
3
Boot/Load
Boot
3
Load
3
Load

Boot/Load
Boot/ Load
Boot/ Load
Boot/Load
Boot/Load
3
Boot/Load
Boot
3
Load
3
Load

Boot/ Load
Boot/Load
Boot/Load
Boot/ Load
Boot/ Load
3
Boot/Load
Boot
3
Load
3
Load

Boot/Load
Boot/Load
Boot/Load
Boot/ Load
Boot/Load
3
Boot/Load
Boot
3
Load
3
Load

Boot/Load
Boot/Load
Boot/Load
Boot/ Load
Boot/Load
3
Boot/ Load
Boot
3
Load
3
Load

Boot/Load
Boot/Load
Boot/Load
Boot/Load
Boot/Load
3
Boot/Load
Boot
3
Load
3
Load

Boot/Load
Boot/Load
Boot/ Load
Boot/Load
Boot/ Load
3
Boot/Load
Boot
3
Load
3
Load

Notes:
1. A " boot" device is defined as a device that is supported by both the hardware system 's VMB bootstrap facility (console level " BOOT" command) and
the VMS operating system STABACKIT utility.
2. A "load" device is defined as a device that supports the media on which Digital distributes software.
3. Requires a TK50-compatible tape drive unit in order to support the initial loading of VMS operating system from magtape media. The TK50 media
contains a bootable image to install the magtape contents of the consolidated VMS kit , i.e., QA-OOlAG-HM or QA-09SAG-HM.

1.40

VAX Systems

VAX 4000 Systems and Servers (Model 100)

Select system. Note that disk and tape are not included in base systems and must be ordered separately. Open VMS user
licenses may be ordered as needed.

VAX 4000 Model 100 systems include
• CPU with embedded DSSI, 802.3/Ethernet (Thin Wire/thick wire), and synchronous SCSI adapters
• BA42B tabletop enclosure
- Q -bus adapter for connecting to an external Q-bus enclosure
- Three dedicated slots for RF3x drives
- Two dedicated slots for removable media storage
- Universal power supply that automatically adjusts to 88-132 Vac or 176-264 Vac.
• 16 or 64 Mbytes of ECC memory. 16-Mbyte base systems can be expanded to 80 Mbytes of memory; 64-Mbyte base
systems can be expanded to 128 Mbytes of memory.
• Three DEC-423 asynchronous serial lines (MMJ data leads only)
• H8575-A 25-pin-to-MMJ DEC-423 To EIA-232 adapter
• 7.6-m (25-ft) console terminal cable
• 120-V power cord (country-specific power cord required for 240-V use; see Step 8)
·Universal power supply that automatically adjusts to 88-132 Vac or 176-264 Vac
·Factory-installed software"' (VAX 4000Mode{100 systems include Open VMS V5.5-2 operating system-TK50 and
CD-ROM media-and base documentation)
• Open VMS base license (with POSIX)
· One full-year product warranty (standard warranty recommended)
·Hardware documentation
1
'

Delivery of the software on a systems disk is not warranted. It is provided as a convenience to the customer. Customers are encouraged to purchase the
necessary media and documentation kits that include complete installation instructions. See Step 7 for details.

ADVANT AGE-SERVER Systems
· NAS 300 Package (with DECnet end-node license and Rdb Runtime license)
• RRD42 600-Mbyte CD-ROM drive
DV-41MCA-CA
DV-41MCA-EA

Model 100 with 16 Mbytes of memory and RF31T 381-Mbyte DSSI disk drive
Model 100 with 64 Mbytes of memory and RF35 852-Mbyte DSSI disk drive

ADVANTAGE-SERVER DSSI VAXcluster Systems
• NAS 300 package (with DECnet end-node license and Rdb Runtime license)
• OpenVMS base license per system
• Open VMS licenses for 20 users per system
• VAXcluster software license per system
• DECnet full-function license
· 2.7-meter (9-foot) DSSI bus cable (BC21M-09)
DV-41MBC-C9
DV-41MCB-E9

Model 100 with 16 Mbytes of memory per system
Model 100 with 16 Mbytes of memory per system

Open VMS Traditional Systems
• DECnet end-node license
· Rdb Runtime license
DV-41MT1-C9
DV-41MT1-E9

Model 100 with 16 Mbytes of memory and OpenVMS licenses for 10 users
Model 100 with 64 Mbytes of memory and OpenVMS licenses for 20 users

OpenVMS Base Servers
DV-41MAA-C9
DV-41MAA-E9

Model 100 with 16 Mbytes of memory
Model 100 with 64 Mbytes of memory

VAX Systems

1.,

VAX 4000 Systems and Servers (Model 100)
Step 2-Storage
Select storage devices as required. See Chapter 7, Storage Devices, for further information on devices listed.

Step 2a-lnternal Storage

--------

Configuration Rules
· Selection of one DSSI disk (ISE) is required for factory-installed software.
· Order load device if required-V AXcluster satellite members or systems being loaded over the network do not require a
load device.
·Maximum three 3.5-inch DSSI ISEs (RF31T, RF35) and two half-height 5.25-inch removable media devices (TZ30, TZKlO,
RX26, RRD42) can be housed inside the BA42B system enclosure.
· Single systems support seven ISEs per DSSI adapter; two-system DSSI VAXcluster configurations support six DSSI ISEs and
can be connected between any pair of DSSI adapters (one adapter in each system).
· Field-installed options require Customer Services installation.

Fixed Media Devices
RF31T-EN/EK
RF35-EN/EK

381-Mbyte 3.5-inch full-height embedded DSSI disk drive; factory/field installed
852-Mbyte 3.5-inch full-height embedded DSSI disk drive; factory/field installed

Removable Media Devices
RX26-EN/EL
TZ30-EK/EL
TZKlO-HF/HG
RRD42-EN/EK
TLZ06-HF/HG

2.8-Mbyte diskette drive; factory/field installed
95 -Mbyte streaming tape drive; factory/field installed
320/525-Mbyte quarter-inch cartridge (QIC) tape drive; factory/field installed
600-Mbyte CD-ROM drive; factory/field installed
4.0-Gbyte DAT drive; factory/field installed

Step 2b-External Storage and Q-bus Expansion
Configuration Rules
• Q-bus expansion (B400X)is required to support KFQSA, KDA50, KLESI or KZQSA storage adapters/controllers.
· To achieve maximum storage capacity of 42 Gbytes of DSSI disk storage, two additional KFQSAs and a Q-bus expander
enclosure are required.
·Two Q-bus storage adapters are supported with an external Q-bus enclosure; two KFQSAs, two KDA50s, or one of each;
as well as up to two KZQSAs.
· Two KLESI (TU81E) storage controllers are supported with an external Q-bus enclosure.
· One TKxx tape drive is supported in B400X expansion pedestal.
·Full-height 5.25-inch DSSI ISEs and TF85 DSSI tape drives are supported in R400X or B400X expansion pedestals.
· B400X and R400X expansion pedestals include:
- Q-bus extender modules and two 2.7-meter (9-foot) cables (B400X)
- 2.7-meter (9-foot) DSSI cable (BC21M-09)
- 1.8-meter (6-foot) KZQSA cable (BC06P-06)
- 3.0-meter (10-foot) power control cable (BC09F-10)
- Universal power supply
- 120-V power cord (220/240-V use requires a country specific power cord; see Step 8)
· Maximum four DSSI expansion pedestals or TF85 tabletops in any combination per configuration.

B400X and R400X Expansion Pedestals
Refer to page 1.81 (expansion diagrams) and page 1.82 for more information.

B400X-B9
H4010-AA

Provides ten additional Q-bus slots and space for RF-series disk drives and one TKxx or TF85 tape
drive; factory or field installed
Cable kit required with B400X-B9

R400X-B9
H4010-AA

Provides space for RF-series disk drives and one TF85 tape drive; factory or field installed
Cable kit required with R400X-B9

DSSI Adapter
KFQSA-SE/SG

1.42

VAX Systems

Q-bus-to-DSSI adapter. Uses one Q -bus slot (in B400X expansion pedestal); factory/field installed.

VAX 4000 Systems and Servers (Model 100)
Step 2t;;-Extemal Storage and Q-bus Expansion (Continued)
Integrated Storage Elements (ISEs) for B400X or R400X Pedestals
RF31T-AA/AF
RF312-AA/AF
RF35E-AA/AF
RF352-AA/AF
RF72E-AAIAF
RF73E-AA/AF

381-Mbyte ISE in full-height assembly, expandable to two ISEs; factory/field installed
Two 381-Mbyte ISEs in full-height assembly
852-Mbyte ISE in full-height assembly, expandable to two ISEs; factory/field installed
Two 852-Mbyte ISEs in full-height assembly
1-Gbyte ISE in full-height assembly
2-Gbyte ISE in full-height assembly

Tape Drive for B400X or R400X Pedestals
TF85E-JAIJF

2.6-Gbyte embedded cartridge tape drive; factory/field installed. Also available as a tabletop option.
Refer to Chapter 7, Storage Devices, for ordering information.

TK70E-AA/AF

296-Mbyte embedded cartridge tape drive for B400X (not supported in R400X); requires TQK70-SA
controller; factory/field installed
TK70E controller; factory/field installed

TQK70-SA/SF
TK50E-AA/AF

95-Mbyte embedded cartridge tape drive for B400X (not supported in R400X). Requires TQK50
controller; factory/field installed.
TK50E controller; factory/field installed.

TQK50-SA/SF

RSE Storage Expansion Pedestals
RSE storage expansion pedestals include 2.7-m (9-ft) DSSI cable, documentation, one RSE and space for one additional RSE.
RF72B-KA
RF73B-KA

Same as above except includes RF72 RSE
Same as above except includes RF73 RSE

Note: For 240-V use, a country-specific power cord is required. Refer to Chapter 7 for ordering information.
RSEs for RSE Storage Expansion Pedestals
RF72-RA
RF73-RA

1-Gbyte RSE in individual removable canister
2-Gbyte RSE in individual removable canister; requires VMS V5.5

SDI Disk Controller

~DA50-SEISG

Provides connections for four external RA-disk drives (except RA70/RA71 ); uses three Q -bus slots in
B400X expansion pedestal; factory/field installed. Refer to Chapter 7, Storage Devices, for RA-disk
descriptions and ordering information.

Tabletop Storage Devices
SZ12
TK50Z-GA/G3'"
RRD42-FA/DG*
TLZ06-GA'':
TF85-TA'':
TZ85-TA'':

Refer to Chapter 7, Storage Devices, for ordering information
95-Mbyte 5.25 -inch streaming cartridge tape drive; 120/240 V
600-Mbyte CD-ROM drive; 120/240 V
4.0-Gbyte 5.25-inch DAT drive with universal power supply-includes 120-V power cord
2.6 Gbyte 5.25-inch DSSI tabletop tape drive
2.6 Gbyte 5.25-inch SCSI tabletop tape drive; requires BC06P cable

BC06P-2F
BC06P-06
BC06P-09

TZ85 cable, 2.5 ft (0.8 m)
TZ85 cable, 6 ft (1.8 m)
TZ85 cable, 9 ft (2.7 m)

'~ Coun t ry-specific power cord required for non-120-V use. Refer to Chapter 7, Storage Devices, for ordering information.

Step 'J!.!Memory

------

Base systems include 16 or 64 Mbytes of memory. Select additional memory as required. 16-Mbyte-based systems can be
expanded to 80 Mbytes of memory; 64-Mbyte-based systems can be expanded to 128 Mbytes of memory.
MS44L-BC
MS44-DC

16 Mbytes of memory (4 x 4-Mbyte DSIM modules)
64 Mbytes of memory (4 x 16-Mbyte DSIM modules)

VAX 4000 Model 100 Memory Configuration Chart
.
The memory increments listed in the "Required Memory" column are the only supported memory configurations.
Required Memory

16-Mbyte Based Systems

64-Mbyte Based Systems

32 Mbytes
80 Mbytes
128 Mbytes

1 x MS44L-BC
1 x MS44-DC
NI A

NI A
1 x MS44L-BC
1 x MS44-DC

VAX Systems

1.43

VAX 4000 Systems and Servers (Model 100)
Step 4-Networks and Communications
Select communications options as required. See Chapter 6, Networks, Communications, and f:ables, and the Networks
Buyer's Guide for more information.
Host-Based Communications Controllers
Select host-based communications controllers for standalone systems (without LAN connectivity) , or for other requirements.
Asynchronous Multiplexer Options
Select one asynchronous multiplexer for communications expansion.
DHW42-AA

DHW42-CA

DHW42-BA

DHW42-UP

Provides eight DEC-423 lines for a system total of 12 asynchronous lines (11 data only and one with
modem control). Includes internal logic module with cable, DEC-423 I/O assembly, external 36-pin
3-meter (10-foot) cable (BC16C-10) , and H3104-00 eight-line distribution harmonica; factory or field
installed.
Provides eight EIA-232 lines for a system total of 12 asynchronous lines (three data only and nine
with modem control). Includes internal logic module with cable, EIA-232 I/O assembly, and two
1.8-meter (6-foot) external 50-pin to 4-way 25-pin (BC29J-06) cables; factory or field installed.
Provides 16 DEC-423 lines for a system total of 20 asynchronous lines (19 data only and one with
modem control). Includes internal logic module with cable, DEC-423 I/O assembly, two external
36-pin 3-meter (10-foot) cables (BC16C-10), and two H3104-00 eight-line distribution harmonica;
factory or field installed.
Upgrades DHW42-AA to DHW42-BA; field installed only.

Synchronous Communications Option
Configuration Rules
· Select ONE synchronous option
· EIA-232 synchronous cable (BC19D-02 is included-select alternate cables for EIA-423/V.10 and EIA-422/V.11 connection)
DSW42-AA
BC19B-02
BC19E-02
QL-VAWA9-AA
QA-VAWAA-H5

EIA-232 synchronous controller-provides two lines. Includes synchronous logic module, I/O assembly, and external 0.6-meter (2-foot) EIA-232 adapter cable.
EIA-422/V.11 0.6-meter (2-foot) adapter cable
EIA-423/V.10 0.6-meter (2-foot) adapter cable
One-time single-user VAX WAN Device Driver license for use of synchronous port
VAX WAN Device Driver media (TK50) and documentation

Note: VAX WAN Device Driver included in OpenVMS consolidated software disk CD-ROM media; see Step 7 for details.
VAX WAN Device Driver Vl .2 or higher required.
LAN Communications Controller

802.3/ Ethernet interface (ThinWire/thick wire selectable) included with system. Connection of system to Ethernet requires a
Thin Wire BNC connection (e.g.; BC16M cable) or a thick wire 15-pin AUI transceiver cable (e.g.; BNE3x) .
Local and Wide Area Communications Servers
Each communications server requires an 802.3/ Ethernet connection. Depending on the server selected, either a ThinWire
BNC. connection (e.g., BC16M) or a thick wire 15-pin AUI transceiver cable (e.g., BNE3x) is required. Software media,
documentation, and cables are also required. See descriptions in Chapter 6, Networks, Communications, and Cables, for
ordering information.
DECserver 90L+, 90TL, 700, 250 and MUXserver 300, 310, 320, 380 Terminal and Printer Servers
Select a terminal or printer server to provide users with multiple session access to systems on a LAN, to minimize cabling
complexity and costs, and to conserve host resources.
DEC WANrouter 250, 500; DEC Network Integration Server 500,600; Proteon 4100+, CNX 500; TransPATH 335, 350
Multiprotocol Routers
Select a router to cost-effectively link a LAN to a remote system or another LAN and to offload routing overhead from the
application host system.
Network Connectivity Products
See Chapter 6, Networks, Communications, and Cables, and the Networks Buyer's Guide.

1.44

VAX Systems

VAX 4000 Systems and Servers (Model 100)

A console device is necessary for a system to function. Console cable included with system. Order video terminals (e.g.,
VT420) for each system unless otherwise available. See Chapter 8, Terminals and Printers, for ordering information. Note:
One console terminal required per system. A VT330/VT340/VT420 with split screen capability can be used as a shared
console terminal.

Select terminals and printers as required. Serial printers connect to an asynchronous line. A cable (e.g., BC16E-25) must be
ordered with each unless otherwise provided. Maximum two parallel printers per LPVll controller; maximum two controllers per system :Vhich require one Q -bus slot each. See Chapter 8, Terminals and Printers, for ordering information.

Software Processor Code: VAX 4000 Model 100 = S
Clusterwide License Rating: VAX 4000 Model 100 = 100 (E)
OpenVMS User Licenses
QL-XULA9-BB
QL-XULA9-BC
QL-XULA9-BD
QL-XULA9-BE
QL-XULA9-BF
QL-XULA9-BG
QL-XULA9-BH
QL-XULAA-BR
QL-XULAB-BR
QL-XULAS-6A

Open VMS/VAX interactive one-user license
Open VMS/VAX interactive two-user license
Open VMS/VAX interactive four-user license
OpenVMS/VAX interactive eight-user license
OpenVMS/VAX interactive 16-user license
OpenVMSIVAX interactive 32-user license
OpenVMS/VAX interactive 64-user license
OpenVMSIVAX interactive 128-user license
Open VMS/VAX interactive 25 6-user license
OpenVMS/VAX interactive unlimited-user license

Software Media and Documentation
Choose operating system media and documentation. One required for first system on site. System support requires V5.5-2.

QA-OOlAA-Hx
QA-09SAA-Hx

OpenVMS media with extended documentation
OpenVMS media with base documentation (VAX 4000 Model 100 systems include V5.5-2 mediaTK50 and CD-ROM-and base documentation.)

OpenVMS Consolidated Software Media (CD-ROM) and Documentation
Choose as an alternative to the above Open VMS kits. Requires RRD42 CD-ROM drive.

QA-VWJ8A-A8
QA-VYR8A-G8
QA-358AA-Hx
QA-GXXAA-Hx
QA-GXXAB-Hx

OpenVMS layered product binaries on CD-ROM without hardcopy documentation
Open VMS extended online documentation and layered product online documentation on CD-ROM;
requires DECwindows Bookreader
Rdb Runtime media and documentation
POSIX media with IEEE documentation

POSIX media without IEEE documentation

Note: x denotes media type: 5 = TK50; M = Magtape
Select the appropriate NAS software level. See description of NAS packages on page 9.2. Note: NAS packaged products do
not include hardcopy documentation for the components (the documentation is CD-ROM only). To order NAS component
hardcopy documentation, see page 9 .5 for listing of order numbers.

QL-MClA"'-AA
QA-MClAA-Hx
QL-MC2A"'·AA
QA-MC2AA-Hx

NAS 200 (Network Application Support 200)
NAS 200 media and documentation kit
NAS 300 (Network Application Support 300)
NAS 300 media and documentation kit

Note: x denotes media type: 8 = CD-ROM, 5 = TK50, M = magtape; ,., denotes processor code.

VAX Systems

1.45

VAX 4000 Systems and Servers (Model 100)
Step 8-Power Cords
Select for 220/ 240-V use

Step Sa-Power Cords for VAX 4000 Model 100 System Enclosure

~-~~-- ~~~~·~~~~~·--''"--~~~~d

BN19A-2E
BN19C-2E
BN19E-2E
BN19K-2E
BN19M-2E
BN19U-2E
BN19H-2E
BN19S-2E

U.K. , Ireland
Austria, Belgium, France, Germany, Finland, Holland, Norway, Sweden, Portugal, Spain
Switzerland
Denmark
Italy
Israel
Australia, New Zealand
India

Step Sb-Power Cords for B400X and R400X Expansion Pedestals
BN20B-2E
BN22C-2E
BN22D-2E
BN22E-2E
BN22F-2E
BN22H-2E
BN22J-2E
BN22K-2E
BN22L-2E

1.46

VAX Systems

U.S., Canada, Japan
Australia, New Zealand
Austria, Belgium, France, Germany, Finland, Holland , Norway, Sweden, Portugal, Spain
U.K. , Ireland
Switzerland
Denmark
Italy
India
Israel

VAX 4000 Systems and Servers (Model 100)
VAX 4000 Model 100 System Diagrams

TZK10, RX26,
or RRD42

--'-'----"?

Optional DHW42 1/0
Module and Logic Board

Q-bus Expansion Ports --------------------~
DSSI Port

:::~:~:HW42

--1-1~1 ~~=
.• ..•~:= = =r= = =:= : ;: : : : : : :- - I ~-:::::_

Ports

Optional DSW42 Ports

Asynchronous Modem
Control Port
BU-3297

ThinWire Ethernet Connector
System Ac Power Connector
On/Off Switch ---------------~

VAX Systems

1.4 7

VAX 4000 Systems and Servers (Model 100)
Speci~cations

Physical Characteristics

Height
Width
Depth
Weight

14.99 cm ( 5.90 in.)
46.38 cm (18.26 in.)
40.00 cm (15.75 in.)
18.40 kg (40.00 lb)"'

Power Requirements

Nominal voltage
Power source phasing
Nominal frequency
Voltage range
Line frequency tolerance
Typical running current
Typical power consumption

120/240 Vrms
Single
50-60 Hz
88-132 Vrms
176-264 Vrms
47-63 Hz
2.0/1.0 A
240

Standard Communication

Minimum MMJ lines
Modem lines
Ethernet

Three DEC-423
One EIA-232
Thick wire and Thin Wire supported on
all models

Communications Options
MMJ lines
MMJ lines

Modem lines
Synchronous lines

Eight DEC-423
16 DEC-423
Eight EIA-232
Two synchronous

Operating Environment

Temperature (sea level)
Relative humidity
Maximum operating altitude
1
'

1.48

VAX Systems

Approximate weight with three disks.

10°-40°C (50° -90°F)
10%-90% noncondensing
2.4 km (8,000 ft)

VAX 4000 Systems and Servers (Model 200)
Step 1-VAX 4000 Model 200 (BA21.5) Systems
Select system. Note that disk, tape, and diagnostics are not included with base systems and must be ordered separately.
Note: System model numbers -x2 include a 120-V power cord; -x3 require a 240-V power cord; see Step 9.
VAX/VAXserver 4000 Model 200 (BA215) systems include
· J<A660,lCPU with embedded DSSI adapter and 802.3/Ethernet (Thin Wire/thick wire) controller
• BA215 pedestal enclosure (The BA215 enclosure is +12-V power limited. Verify planned configurations with the configuration template on page 1.76.)
- Two dedicated slots for the CPU and memory modules and four Q-bus slots
· 8-, 16-, or 32-Mbyte ECC memory module
· 7 .6-meter (25-foot) console terminal cable
• Factory-installed software''
· English-language hardware documentation (QZ-K25AB-GZ)
7
'

Delivery of the software on a system disk is not warranted. It is provided as a convenience to the customer. Customers are encouraged to purchase the
necessary media and documentation kits which include complete installation instructions. Refer to Step 8 for ordering information.

Multiuser Systems

Server Systems

· DECnet end-node license (with PATHWORKS for VMS)
• VMS 10-user license (with Rdb/VMS Runtime license)
· Four Q-bus slots

· VMS file and application server license (with
Rdb/VMS Runtime)
·DECnet full-function license (with PATHWORKS
for VMS)
· VAXcluster Software license
·VMS/ULTRIX Connection license (QL-VHRA9-JB)
· Four Q-bus slots

DV-42RT1-A2/AJ
DV-42RT1-B2/B3
DV-42RT1-C2/C3

(8 Mbytes of memory)
(16 Mbytes of memory)
(32 Mbytes of memory)

DV-42RS1 -A2/A3
DV-42RS1-B2/B3

(8 Mbytes of memory)
(16 Mbytes of memory)

Step 2-Storage and Q-bus Expansion
Select storage and Q-bus/storage devices as required. Refer to Chapter 7, Storage Devices, for further details on devices
listed.
Step 2a-Intemal Storage (System Enclosure)
Configuration Rules
• Selection of one DSSI disk (ISE) is required for factory-installed software.
• Order load/backup device if required-V AXcluster satellite members or systems being loaded over the network do not
require a load device.
·Two RF3x ISEs or one RF7x ISE and one TKxx tape drive can be housed in the BA215 system enclosure. Additional ISEs
may be housed in expansion pedestals.
• Single systems support seven ISEs per DSSI adapter; two-system DSSI VAXcluster configurations support six ISEs and can
be connected between any pair of DSSI adapters (one adapter in each system). Three-system DSSI VAXcluster configurations support five ISEs and can be connected between any three DSSI adapters (one adapter in each system).
• Maximum two Q-bus storage adapters are supported; two KFQSAs, two KDA50s, or one of each.
• Maximum two KZQSA storage adapters.
• Maximum two KLESI (TU81E) storage controllers.
DSSI Adapter
KFQSA-SE/SG

Additional Q-bus to DSSI adapter. Uses one Q -bus slot; factory/field installed.

Integrated Storage Elements (ISEs)
RF35E-SA/SF
RF31T-SA/SF
RF72E-SA/SF
RF73E-SA/SF

852-Mbyte (full-height) ISE; factory/field installed.
381-Mbyte (half-height) ISE; factory/field installed.
1-Gbyte (full-height) ISE; factory/field installed.
2-Gbyte (full-height) ISE; factory/field installed. Requires VMS V5.5.

VAX Systems

1.49

VAX 4000 Systems and Servers (Model 200)
Step 2a-Internal Storage (System Enclosure) (Continued)
Tape Drives
TK70E-SA/SF
TQK70-SA/SF

296-Mbyte embedded cartridge tape drive. Requires TQK70 controller; factory/field installed.
TK70E controller; factory/field installed.

TK50E-SA/SF
TQK50-SA/SF

95-Mbyte embedded cartridge tape drive. Requires TQK50 controller; factory/field installed.
TK50E controller; factory/field installed.

SDI Disk Controller
KDA50-SE/SG

Disk controller provides connections for four external RA-disk drives; uses three Q-bus slots; fac- .
tory/field installed. Refer to Chapter 7, Storage Devices, for RA-disk descriptions and ordering
information.

Step 2b-External Storage and Q-bus Expansion
Configuration Rules
· R400X expansion pedestals can be configured with two separate DSSI buses (requires additional BC21M-09 cable).
· TF85 is supported in R400X or B400X expansion pedestals (maximum one per expansion pedestal).
·Two TKxx tape drives are supported; one in system enclosure, one in B400X.
· Four Q -bus storage adapters are supported; two KFQSAs, two KDA50s, or one of each; as well as up to two KZQSAs.
· 21 ISEs are supported with expansion pedestals (in a single system configuration).
• B400X and R400X expansion pedestals include the following:
- Q-bus extender modules and two 2.7-meter (9-foot) cables (B400X)
- 2.7-meter (9-foot) DSSI cable (BC21M-09)
- 1.8-meter (6-foot) KZQSA cable (BC06P-06)
- 3.0-meter (10-foot) power control cable (BC09F-10)
- Universal power supply
- 120-V power cord (220/240-V devices require a country-specific power cord; see Step 9)
· Refer to Chapter 5, VAXcluster Options/Systems Expansion, for DSSI V AXcluster configuration rules.
B400X and R400X Expansion Pedestals
Refer to page 1.81 (expansion diagrams) and 1.82 for more information.
B400X-B9
H4010-AA
R400X-B9
H4010-AA

Provides ten additional Q -bus slots and space for RF-series disk drives and one TKxx or TF85 tape
drive; factory or field installed
Cable kit required with B400X-B9
Provides space for RF-series disk drives and one TF85 tape drive; factory or field installed
Cable kit required with R400X-B9

ISEs for B400X and R400X Expansion Pedestals
RF31T-AA/AF
RF312-AA/AF
RF35E-AA/AF
RF352-AA/AF
RF72E-AA/AF
RF73E-AA/AF

Tape Drives for B400X/R400X Expansion Pedestals
TF85E-JA/JF

2.6-Gbyte embedded cartridge tape drive; factory/field installed. Also available as a tabletop option.
Refer to Chapter 7, Storage Devices, for ordering information.

TK70E-AA/AF

296-Mbyte embedded cartridge tape drive for B400X (not supported in R400X); requires TQK70-SA
controller; factory/field installed
TK70E controller; factory/field installed
95-Mbyte embedded cartridge tape drive. Requires TQK50 controller; factory/field installed.
TK50E controller; factory/field installed.

TQK70-SA/SF
TK50E-AA/AF
TQK50-SA/SF

1.50

VAX Systems

VAX 4000 Systems and Servers (Model 200)
Step ~b-Extemal Storage and Q-bus Expansion (Continued)
ISE Storage Expansion Pedestals
RF72B - DA/DB '~

RF72B-CAJCBi'
RF73B-DA/DBi'
RF73B-CA/CB 1'

Includes one RF72 1-Gbyte ISE and space for two additional, 2.7-meter (9-foot) DSSI cable, and
documentation; factory or field installed; 120/240 V.
Same as above except includes KFQSA adapter
Includes one RF73 2-Gbyte ISE and space for two additional, 2.7-meter (9-foot) DSSI cable, and
documentation; factory or field installed; 120/240 V.
Same as above except includes KFQSA adapter.

'""240-V devices require a country-specific power cord. Refer to Chapter 7, Storage Devices, for ordering information.

ISEs for ISE Storage Expansion Pedestals
RFJ 1T-SA/SF
RF72E-SA/SF
RF73E-SA/SF

381-Mbyte (half-heigh t) ISE; factory/field installed.
1-Gbyte (full-height) ISE; factory/ field installed.
2-Gbyte (full-height) ISE; factory/ field installed. Requires VMS V5.5 .

RSE Storage Expansion Pedestals
RSE Storage Expansion Pedestals include one RSE and space for one additional RSE.

RF72B-KA
RF73B-KA

Includes one RF72 RSE, 2.7-meter (9-foot) DSSI cable and documentation; fac tory/field installed.
Same as above except includes RF73 RSE.

Note: For 240-V use, a country-specific power cord is required. Refer to Chapter 7, Storage Devices, for ordering information.

RSEs for RSE Storage Expansion Pedestals
RF72-RA
RF73-RA

1-Gbyte RSE in individual removable canister.
2-Gbyte RSE in individual removable canister. Requires VMS V5 .5

SDI Disk Controller
KDA50-SE/SG

Provides connections for four external RA-disk drives (except RA70/RA71); uses three Q-bus slots;
factory/field installed. Refer to Chapter 7, Storage Devices, for RA-disk descriptions and ordering
information.

KZQSA Adapter
KZQSA-SA/SF

Required for TSZ07, TLZ06, or RRD42 tabletop devices; provides connections for two storage
devices (total four devices per configuration). Uses one Q -bus slot; factory/ field installed.

Tape/CD-ROM Drives
TLZ06-GA'""
RRD42-FB/Dff'
TU81E-SA/SB "'
TU81E-SF/SG 1'
TSV05-SE 1'

TSZ07

4.0-Gbyte DAT tabletop drive; includes 1.8-meter (6-foot) cable (BC06P-06); requires KZQSA
adapter.
600-Mbyte CD-ROM tabletop drive with 1.8-meter (6-foot) cable (BC06P-06); requires KZQSA
adapter.
40/145-Mbyte (1600/6250 bits/inch) backup tape drive in 1-meter (40-inch) cabinet; two maximum;
includes cable and KLESI controller which uses one Q-bus slot 120/ 240 V; factory installed.
Field installed.
40-Mbyte (1600 bits/inch) data-interchange device in 1-meter (40-inch) cabinet; one maximum;
includes cable and controller which uses one Q-bus slot. Refer to Chapter 7, Storage Devices, for
variants other than 120-V.
1600/6250-bit/inch SCSI 9-track magtape. Refer to Chapter 7, Storage Devices, for ordering information; requires KZQSA adapter.

TF85-TA'~

2.6-Gbyte cartridge tape subsystem in tabletop enclosure. Requires CK-SFlOO-LP cable kit.

SFlOO
SF2x0/300/400

DSSI Storage Array Pedestal. Refer to Chapter 7, Storage Devices, for ordering information.
DSSI DECarray Storage Subsystem. Refer to Chapter 7, Storage Devices, for ordering information.

1
'

120-V power cord included. 220/ 240-V devices require a country-specific power cord. Refer to Chapter 7, Storage Devices.

VAX Systems

VAX 4000 Systems and Servers (Model 200)

System can be expanded to 64 Mbytes of memory. System recognizes up to four memory banks; 8-Mbyte and 16-Mbyte
options require one Q-bus slot and are recognized as one bank each; 32-Mbyte options require one Q-bus slot and are
recognized as two memory banks (e.g., systems configured with one 8-Mbyte, one 16-Mbyte and one 32-Mbyte-56 Mbytes
of memory-require three Q-bus slots and are recognized as four memory banks).
Note: MS650-Ax memory is not supported on VAX 4000 Model 200 systems.
MS650-BB/BH
MS650-BA/BF
MS650-BC/BJ

8 Mbytes of memory; factory/field installed
16 Mbytes of memory; factory/field installed
32 Mbytes of memory; factory/field installed
~~~·~~~~~-~~--!"'~~--~---:~_,...~....,

Step 4-Networks and Communications
Select devices as required. Connection of system to Ethernet requires either a thick wire 15-pin AUI right-angle transceiver
cable (e.g., ENE3K) or ThinWire ENC connection (e.g., EC16M). See Chapter 6, Networks, Communications, and Cables and
the Networks Buyer's Guide for more information.
LAN Communications Controller
DESQA-SA/SF

802.3/Ethernet Controller (ThinWire/thick wire). Maximum two additional per system (one
802.3/Ethernet controller included with base system). Uses one Q-bus slot; factory/field installed.

Local and Wide Area Communications Servers
Each communications server requires an 802.3/Ethernet connection. Depending on the server selected, either a ThinWire
ENC connection (e.g., EC16M) or a thick wire 15-pin AUI transceiver cable (e.g., ENE3x) is required. Software media and
documentation and cables are also required. See descriptions in Chapter 6, Networks, Communications, and Cables, for
ordering information.
DECserver 901+, 90TL, 700, 250; and MUXserver 300, 310, 320, 380 Terminal and Printer Servers
Select a terminal or printer server to provide users with multiple session access to systems on a LAN, to minimize cabling
complexity and costs, and to conserve host resources.
DEC WANrouter 250, 500; DEC Network Integration Server 500, 600, Proteon 4100\ CNX 500; TransPATH 335, 350
Multiprotocol Routers
Select a router to cost effectively link a LAN to a remote system or another LAN and to offload routing overhead from the
application host system.
Network Connectivity Products
See Chapter 6, Networks, Communications, and Cables and the Networks Buyer's Guide.

Step 5-Console Terminal
A console device is necessary for a system to function. Console cable included with system. Order one video terminal (e.g.,
VT420) for each system unless otherwise available. Refer to Chapter 8, Terminals and Printers, for ordering information. A
VT330/VT340/VT420 with split screen capability can be used as a shared console terminal.

Step 6-Terminals and Printers
Select terminals and printers as required. Serial printers connect to an asynchronous line. A cable (e.g., EC16E-25) must be
ordered with each unless otherwise provided. Maximum two parallel printers per LPVl 1 controller; maximum two controllers per system which require one Q-bus slot each. Refer to Chapter 8, Terminals and Printers, for ordering information.

1.52

VAX Systems

VAX 4000 Systems and Servers (Model 200)

Select licenses and media and documentation as required. Note: Upgrade license required to support additional users
beyond those included with base multiuser system-upgrade licenses must be ordered sequentially.

Software
Processor Code
Clusterwide
License Rating

VAX 4000 Model 200 = 200
VAXserver 4000 Model 200 = 10

QL-001AB-B2
QL-001AB-B3
QL-001AB-B4

VMS 11 - to 20-user multiuser upgrade license
VMS 21- to 40-user multiuser upgrade license
VMS 41- ton-user multiuser upgrade license

QA-OOlAA-Hx
QA-09SAA-Hx

VMS media with extended documentation, including VAXcluster and DECnet documentation
VMS media and base documentation

QA-VWJ8A-A8
QA-VYR8A-G8

VMS and layered product binaries (CD-ROM) without hardcopy documentation
VMS extended and layered product online documentation set (CD-ROM); requires DECwindows
Bookreader

QA-A93AA-Hx
QA-358AA-Hx

PATHWORKS for VMS media and documentation
VAX Rdb/VMS Runtime media and documentation

QA-VHRAA-Hx

VMS/ ULTRIX Connection media and documentation. Note: For Server Systems only.

QL-VBRAB-AA

VAXcluster Software license for multiuser member systems only; included with server systems.

QL-AB2AB-AA

VMS Volume Shadowing media is included with VMS. This license is required to authorize
its use.

VAX 4000 Model 200 = B
VAXserver 4000 Model 200 = C

Note: x denotes media type: 8 = CD-ROM, 5 = TK50, M = magtape
Select the appropriate NAS software level. See description of NAS packages on page 9.2. Note: The NAS packaged products
do not provide hardcopy documentation for the components (the documentation is CD-ROM only). To order NAS component
hardcopy documentation, see page 9.5 for listing of order numbers.

QL-MClA"'-AA
QA-MClAA-Hx

NAS 200 (Network Application Support 200)
NAS 200 media and documentation kit

QL-MC2A"'-AA
QA-MC2AA-Hx

NAS 300 (Network Application Support 300)
NAS 300 media and documentation kit

QL-MC5A 1'-AA
QA-MC5AA-Hx

NAS 400 (Network Application Support 400)
NAS 400 media and documentation kit

Note: x denotes media type: 8 = CD-ROM, 5 = TK50, M = magtape

Step 8-Diagnostics and Documentation
Select optional diagnostics and hardware documentation.

Basic Diagnostics
QZ-K14AA-U5
QZ-K32AA-U8

On TK50 media
On CD-ROM media

Extended Diagnostics and Documentation
QX-K19AC-AA
QZ-K19AA-H5
QY-K19AA-AW
QX-K32AA-AA
QZ-K32AA-H8
QY-K32AA-A8
QZ-K19AA-GZ
MD-LEVAX-01

Single-use TK50 license
Media on TK50
Annual updates on TK50
Single-use CD-ROM license
Media on CD-ROM
Annual updates on CD-ROM
Hardcopy extended maintenance documentation
Maintenance documentation and diagnostics listings on microfiche (library and updates)

VAX Systems

1.53

VAX 4000 Systems and Servers (Model 200)

Hardware Documentation
English-language (included with base system)
Multi-lingual (English, French, German)

QZ-K25AB-GZ
QZ-K258B-GZ

~----------~~-----------------.........----------.,,,.._----~---,

Select one for each 220/240-V system.

Select one for each 220/240-V B400X or R400X
expansion enclosure.

BN19B-2E
BN19J-2E
BN19N-2E
BN19Y-2E
BN19T-2E
BN20N-2E
BN19L-2E
BN19F-2E
BN03B-2E

BN20B-2E
BN22C-2E
BN22D-2E

U.K./Ireland
Australia/New Zealand
Italy
Israel
India
Canada/] apan/U .S.
Denmark
Switzerland
Austria, Belgium, France, Germany,
Finland, Holland, Norway, Sweden,
Portugal, Spain

BN22E-2E
BN22F-2E
BN22H-2E
BN22J-2E
BN22K-2E
BN22L-2E

U.S./Canada/Japan
Australia/New Zealand
Austria, Belgium, France, Germany,
Finland, Holland, Norway, Sweden,
Portugal, Spain
U.K./Ireland
Switzerland
Denmark
Italy
India
Israel

Step 10-Environmental Products
Select environmental power products if required. Refer to Chapter 5, VAXcluster Options/Systems Expansion, Digitat s
Environmental Power Products Catalog (EB-M4442-79) and the DECdirect catalog for details.

Step 11-Conflguring Information
Use the template that follows in conjunction with the Q -bus configuring information that follows the Rack-mountable VAX
4000 systems to validate the configuration.

MODULE

SLOT
1

KA660*

2 '"~

MS650-Bx

Current (Amps)
5 Vdc
12Vdc
4.8
..,...........

Power
(Watts)

Bus Loads
ac
de

0.55

30.60

3.5

1.0

0.0

-};..,';;';

0.0

3
4

5
1

'lncludes power requirement for H3602 I/O panel.

Mass-storage
Shelf Device

d'Slot 2 reserved for memory only

** 1' MS650-BA: +5 Vdc = 3.5 Amps; Watts = 17.5
MS650-BB: +5 Vdc = 3.1 Amps; Watts= 15.5
MS650-BC: +5 Vdc = 2.8 Amps; Watts= 14.0

1
2

3
Total these
columns:
Must not
exceed:

33 .0A

7.6A

230W

22.0

20.0
BU-3126

1.54

VAX Systems

VAX 4000 Systems and Servers (Model 200)
VAX/VAXserver 4000 Model 200 (BA215) System Diagrams

RFxx

TKxx

Opt.

Note:
• The second slot can be used only for memory.

4 Q-bus slots
available

::>
CL

6 5 4 3 2

1
BU-3129

VAXlVAXserver 4000 Model 200 (BA215) Base System

RF-Series
Expansion Pedestal
RF xx
Incl.

System

RF xx

RFxx

TKxx

Opt.

1::1
~

Note:
• The second slot can be used only for memory.

4 Q-bus slots
available
DSSI
Cable
(BC21M-09)

RF-Series
Expansion
Pedestal

6 5 4 3 2 1
BU-3128

VAXlVAXserver 4000 Model 200 (BA215) Base System with
RF Series Expansion Pedestal

VAX Systems

1.55

VAX 4000 Systems and Servers (Model 200)
VAX/V AXserver 4000 Model 200 (BA215) Expansion Diagrams
RF-Series
Expansion Pedestal
RF xx
Incl.

RFxx
Opt.

RF xx
Opt.

1::1
~

R400X

System
RFxx
Opt.

TKxx
Opt.

3 Q-bus
slots
available

RF xx
Opt.

RF xx
orTF85
Opt.

RF xx
Opt.

..... >-

~a.

~D
0

§-

C..Cf)

DSSI
Cable
(BC21M-09)

c
0

ooU~

~ ca
ca..

Cf)

RF-Series
Expansion
Pedestal

0
(.)

Ci)

Cf)

u Qic
Q)

o§~

~ ~
DSSI Cable
(BC21M-09)

0
(.)

D
D

BU-3165

Notes:
• RFxxB-DA includes storage expansion pedestal with one RFxx ISE and 9-tt (2.7-m) DSSI cable.
• RFxxB-CA includes RFxxB-DA items plus KFQSA as the second DSSI adapter.
•The second slot can be used only for memory.

VAX/VAXserver 4000 Model 200 (BA215) Base System with
Second KFQSA Adapter and Storage Expansion

System

B400X
DSSI Cable
M-09) _ _ _ _ _ _ _._..._

~---- (BC21

RF xx

Opt.

RF xx ,
TKxx,
orTF85

11 Q-bus slots
available

RF xx

TKxx

Opt.

3 Q-bus
slots
available

J
l
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
BU-3134

Notes:
• B400X expansion pedestal includes the Q-bus extender modules and cables , and DSSI cable (all 9-ft or 2.7-m).
•The second slot can be used only for memory.

VAX/VAXserver 4000 Model 200 (BA215) Base System with
Q-bus/Storage Expansion

1.56

VAX Systems

VAX 4000 Systems and Servers (Model 200)
VAX 4000 Model 200 (BA215) Specifications
Mounting type: Pedestal
Physical Characteristics
Height
Width
Depth
Weight
Clearances
Front
Rear
Sides

Operating

Shipping

69.0 cm (27 .0 in.)
35.0 cm (13.6 in.)
45.0 cm (17.8 in.)
31.8 kg (70 lb)

117 cm (45.6 in.)
78 cm (30.5 in.)
61 cm (23.9 in.)
45.5 kg (100 lb)

Operating

Service

5.1 cm (2.0 in .)
5.1 cm (2.0 in.)
5.1 cm (2 .0 in.)

100.0 cm (39.4 in.)
None
None

Environmental
Temperature
Operating
Nonoperating
Storage (60 days )
Rate of change

10° to 40° C (50° to 104° F)
-40° to 66° C (-40° to 151 ° F)
- 40° to 60° C (-40° to 151° F)
11 ° C per hour (20° F)

Relative Humidity

Operating
Nonoperating
Storage
Storage (60 days)
Rate of change

20 % to 80 % noncondensing
10% to 95 % noncondensing
10% to 95 % noncondensing
10% to 95% noncondensing
25 % per hour

Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature

Operating
Storage

25° C (77° F)
28° C (82° F)

Minimum Dew Point Temperature

Operating

2° C (36° F)

Maximum Heat Dissipation

Operating

1,178 Btu/hr (345 watts)

Air Flow and Quality

Operating
Intake location
Exhaust location
Particle size
Concentration

306 m3/ hr (180 ft 3/ min)
Front top
All sides, bottom

Altitude

Operating
Non operating

2438 meters ( 8,000 feet)
4877 meters (16,000 feet)

Mechanical Shock

Operating
Nonoperating

10 g pk for 10 ±3 MS
40 g pk for 30 ±3 MS

Vibration

Operating

5-22 Hz@ .Ol"da minimum
22-500 Hz@ .25g maximum

Acoustics

Operating
Idle

5.9 bels , 41 dBA
5 .5 bels, 41 dBA

Nominal voltage (Vac)
Voltage ranges (Vrms)
Nominal frequency (Hz)
Frequency range (Hz)
Power source phasing
RMS current (amps)
Circuit breaker (amps)

120
88-132
60
49-61
Single
4.4
7.5

NIA
NIA

Electrical
Power Requirements (ac input)

240
176-264

50
49-61
Single
2.4
7.5

~
""O

Power Cord
Type
Length
U.S. plug

Agency Approvals

UL 114 (office equipment)
UL 478 (EDP units)

CSA C22.2 no.134 (office equipment)
CSA C22.2 no.154 (data processing)

=
fl)

IEC 320 C16
190 cm (75 in.)
NEMA 5-15
Socket IEC 320 Sheet
C-15

e
.....
QI

fl)

£
0
0
0

"It"

VDE 0875 (RFI suppression)
Australian AS C 100
IEC Publication 950
FCC Part 15 Docket 20780

VAX Systems

1.57

VAX 4000 Systems and Servers (Model 200)
Step 1. VAX 4000 Model 200 (BA430) Systems
Select system. Note that disk, tape, and diagnostics are not included with base systems and must be ordered separately.
Note: Systems are shipped with a 120-V power cord. 240-V devices require a country-specific power cord; see Step 9.
VAX/VAXserver 4000 Model 200 (BA430) systems include
• KA660 CPU with embedded DSSI adapter and 802.3/Ethernet (ThinWire/thick wire) controller
• BA430 pedestal enclosure
- Two dedicated slots for the CPU and memory modules, and ten Q-bus slots that support the same Q -bus type options
as VAX 4000 Model 3 00 systems
- Universal power supply that automatically adjusts to 90-128 Vac or 190-256 Vac
• 16- or 32-Mbyte ECC memory module
· 7 .6-meter (25-foot) console terminal cable
· 120-V power cord (220/240-V devices require a country-specific power cord; see Step 9)
• Factory-installed software'"
· One-year product warranty (standard warranty recommended)
· English-language hardware documentation (QZ-K25AA-GZ)
1
'

Delivery of the software on a system disk is not warranted. It is provided as a convenience to the customer. Customers are encouraged to purchase the
necessary media and documentation which include complete installation instructions. Refer to Step 7 for ordering information.

Multiuser System
·VMS 1- to 20-user license (with Rdb/VMS Runtime license)
·DECnet end-node license (with PATHWORKS for VMS)
• Ten Q-bus slots
DV-42HT1-A9
DV-42HT1-B9

(16 Mbytes of memory)
(32 Mbytes of memory)

Two-System DSSI VAXcluster Multiuser System
· Two VMS unlimited-user licenses (with Rdb/VMS Runtime license)
• Two VAXcluster Software licenses
• DECnet full-function license (with PATHWORKS for VMS)
· DECnet end-node license (with PATHWORKS for VMS)
· BC21M-09 DSSI bus cable
· DSSI VAXcluster Installation and Troubleshooting Guide (EK-410AA-MG)
DV-42HT2-A9
Server System
· VMS file and application server license (with Rdb/VMS Runtime)
· VAXcluster Software license
· DECnet full-function license (with PATHWORKS for VMS)
· VMS/ULTRIX Connection license
· Ten Q-bus slots
DV-42HS1-A9
Two-System DSSI VAXcluster Server System
· Two VMS file and application server licenses (with Rdb/VMS Runtime license)
· Two VAXcluster Software licenses
· ·DECnet full-function license (with PATHWORKS for VMS)
· DECnet end-node license (with PATHWORKS for VMS)
· VMS/UL TRIX Connection licenses
· BC21M-09 DSSI bus cable
· DSSI VAXcluster Installation and Troubleshooting Guide (EK-410AA-MG)
DV-42HS2-A9
Note: Options ordered with two-system DSSI VAXcluster systems are configured evenly between the systems unless specified differently on the order.

1.58

VAX Systems

VAX 4000 Systems and Servers (Model 200)
Step 2-Storage and Q-bus Expansion
Select storage and Q-bus/storage devices as required. Refer to Chapter 7, Storage Devices, for further details on devices
listed.

Step 2a-lntemal Storage (System Enclosure)
Configuration Rules

· Selection of one DSSI disk (ISE) is required for factory-installed software.
· Order load device if necessary- VAXcluster satellite members or systems being loaded over the network do not require a
load device.
• System enclosures support storage options in the following configurations:
- Up to four RF7 x IS Es
- Up to three RF7x ISEs and one TKxx or TF85 tape drive
- Up to seven RF312/ RF352 ISEs
- Up to six RF312/ RF352 ISEs and one TKxx or TF85 tape drive
Additional ISEs are housed in expansion pedestals.
· One TF85 per enclosure (BA430, B400X, R400X).
· Two TKxx tape drives are supported: one in the system enclosure and one in a B400X expansion pedestal.
• Maximum two Q-bus storage adapters are supported; two KFQSAs, two KDA50s, or one of each.
· Maximum two KZQSA storage adapters.
·Maximum two KLESI (TU81E) storage controllers.

DSSI Adapter
KFQSA-SE/SG

Additional Q-bus-to-DSSI adapter. Uses one Q -bus slot; factory/field installed.

Integrated Storage Elements (IS Es)

RF31T-AA/AF
RF312-AA/AF
RF35E-AA/AF
RF352-AA/AF
RF72E-AA/AF
RF73E-AA/AF

Tape Drives

TF85E-JAIJF

2.6-Gbyte embedded cartridge tape drive, supported by the embedded DSSI adapter;
factory/ field installed.

TK70E-AA/AF

TQK70-SA/SF

296-Mbyte embedded cartridge tape drive. Requires TQK70 controller; factory/field installed.
TK70E controller; factory/field installed.

TK50E-AA/AF
TQK50-SA/SF

95-Mbyte embedded cartridge tape drive. Requires TQK50 controller; factory/field installed.
TK50E controller; factory/ field installed.

SDI Disk Controller

KDA50-SE/SG

KDA50 disk controller provides connections for four external RA-disk drives; uses three Q-bus slots;
factory/field installed. Refer to Chapter 7, Storage Devices, for RA-disk descriptions and ordering
information.

VAX Systems

1.59

VAX 4000 Systems and Servers (Model 200)
Step 2b-Extemal Storage and Q-bus ·Expansion

--------~--~----~~~--------~----------~----------

Configuration Rules
· 21 ISEs are supported with expansion pedestals (in a single system configuration) .
• R400X expansion pedestals can be configured with two separate DSSI buses (requires additional BC21M-09 cable).
• Single systems support seven ISEs per DSSI adapter; two-system DSSI VAXcluster configurations support six DSSI ISEs and
can be connected between any pair of DSSI adapters (one adapter in each system); three-system DSSI VAXcluster configurations support five ISEs and can be connected between any three DSSI adapters (one adapter in each system).
·Four Q-bus storage adapters are supported; two KFQSAs, two KDA50s, or one of each; as well as up to two KZQSAs.
• B400X and R400X expansion pedestal include the following:
- Q-bus extender modules and two 2.7 -meter (9-foot) cables (B400X)
- 2.7 meter (9-foot) DSSI cable (BC21M-09)
- 1.8-meter (6-foot) KZQSA cable (BC06P-06)
- Universal power supply
- 3.0-meter (10-foot) power control cable (BC09F-10)
- 120-V power cord (220/240-V devices require a country-specific power cord; see Step 9)
· Refer to Chapter 5, VAXcluster Options/Systems Expansion, for DSSI VAXcluster configuration rules.
B400X and R400X Expansion Pedestals
Refer to page 1.81 (expansion diagrams) and 1.82 for more information.
B400X-B9
R400X-B9

Provides ten additional Q -bus slots and space for RF series disk drives and one TK70 or TF85 tape
drive. Factory or field installed.
Provides space for RF series disk drives and one TF85 tape drive. Factory or field installed.

Note: B400X/R400X use the same ISEs, DAT drives, and tape drives as listed in Step 2a with the exception of the TKxx;
TKxx tape drives are not supported in R400X expansion pedestal.
ISE Storage Expansion Pedestals
RF72B-DA/DB 7'
RF72B-CA/CB"'
RF73B-DA/DB'''
RF73B-CA/CB'''

'~240-V devices require a country-specific power cord. Refer to Chapter 7, Storage Devices, for ordering information.

ISEs for ISE Storage Expansion Pedestals
RF31T-SA/SF
RF72E-SA/SF
RF73E-SA/SF

381-Mbyte (half-height) ISE; factory/field installed.
1-Gbyte (full-height) ISE; factory/field installed.
2-Gbyte (full-height) ISE; factory/field installed. Requires VMS V5.5.

RSE Storage Expansion Pedestals
RSE storage expansion pedestals include one RSE and space for one additional RSE.
RF72B-KA
RF73B-KA

Includes one RF72 RSE, 2.7-meter (9-foot) DSSI cable, and documentation; factory/field installed
Same as above except includes RF73 RSE

Note: For 240-V use, a country-specific power cord is required . Refer to Chapter 7, Storage Devices, for ordering information.

RSEs for RSE Storage Expansion Pedestals
RF72-RA
RF73-RA

1-Gbyte RSE in individual removable canister.
2-Gbyte RSE in individual removable canister. Requires VMS V5 .5.

SDI Disk Controller
KDA50-SE/SG

Provides connections for four external RA-disk drives (except RA70/RA71) ; uses three Q-bus slots;
factory/field installed. Refer to Chapter 7, Storage Devices, for RA-disk descriptions and ordering
information.

KZQSA Adapter
KZQSA-SA/SF

1.60

VAX Systems

Required for TSZ07, TLZ06, or RRD42 tabletop devices; provides connections for two storage
devices (total four devices per configuration). Uses one Q-bus slot; factory/field installed.

VAX 4000 Systems and Servers (Model 200)
Step 2b-Extemal Storage and Q-bus Expansion (Continued)
Tape/CD-ROM Drives

TLZ06-GA 1:
RRD42-FB/Dff:
TU81E-SA/SB 1:
TU81E-SF/SG":
TSV05-SE~"

4.0-Gbyte tabletop DAT drive; requires KZQSA adapter. Includes 1.8-meter (6-foot) cable
(BC06P-06); requires KZQSA-SA.
600-Mbyte tabletop CD-ROM drive with 1.8-meter (6-foot) cable (BC06P-06); requires KZQSA
adapter.
.
40/ 145-Mbyte (1600/6250 bits/inch) backup tape drive in 1-meter (40-inch) cabinet; two maximum;
includes cable and KLESI controller which uses one Q -bus slot; factory installed.
Field installed.
40-Mbyte (1600 bits/ inch) data-interchange device in 1-meter (40-inch) cabinet; one maximum;
includes cable and controller which uses one Q-bus, slot. Refer to Chapter 7, Storage Devices, for
variants other than 120-V.

TSZ07

1600/ 6250-bit/ inch 9-track magtape. Refer to Chapter 7 for ordering information.

TF85-TN"

2.6-Gbyte cartridge tape subsystem in tabletop enclosure. Requires CK-SFlOO-LP cable kit.

SFlOO
SF2x0/300/400

DSSI Storage Array Pedestal. Refer to Chapter 7, Storage Devices, for ordering information.
DSSI DECarray Storage Subsystem. Refer to Chapter 7, Storage Devices, for ordering information.

'" 120-V power cord included. 220/240-V devices require a country-specific power cord. Refer to Chapter 7, Storage Devices.

System can be expanded to 64 Mbytes of memory. System recognizes up to four memory banks; 8 Mbyte and 16-Mbyte
options require one Q-bus slot and are recognized as one bank each; 32-Mbyte options require one Q-bus slot and are
recognized as two memory banks (e.g., systems configured with one 8-Mbyte, one 16-Mbyte and one 32-Mbyte-56 Mbytes
of memory- require three Q-bus slots and are recognized as four memory banks).
Note: MS650-Ax memory is not supported on VAX 4000 Model 200 systems.
MS650-BB/BH
MS650-BA/BF
MS650-BC/BJ

8 Mbytes of memory; factory/ field installed
16 Mbytes of memory; factory/field installed
32 Mbytes of memory; factory/ field installed

Step 4-Networks and Communications
Select devices as required. Connection of system to Ethernet requires either a thick wire 15-pin AUI right-angle transceiver
cable (e.g., BNE3K) or ThinWire BNC connection (e.g. , BC16M). See Chapter 6, Networks, Communications, and Cables, and
the Networks Buyer's Guide for more information.
LAN Communications Controller
DESQA-SA/SF

DESQA 802.3 / Ethernet Controller (ThinWire/thick wire). Maximum two additional per system (one
802.3/ Ethernet controller included with base system). Uses one Q-bus slot; factory/field installed.

Local and Wide Area Communications Servers
Each communications server requires an 802.3/ Ethernet connection. Depending on the server selected, either a ThinWire
BNC connection (e.g., BC16M) or a thick wire 15-pin AUI transceiver cable (e.g., BNE3x) is required. Software media and
documentation and cables are also required. See descriptions in Chapter 6, Networks, Communications, and Cables, for
ordering information.

DECserver 90L+, 700, 250, and MUXserver 300, 310, 380 Terminal and Printer Servers
Select a terminal or printer server to provide users with multiple session access to systems on a LAN, to minimize cabling
complexity and costs, and to conserve host resources.
DEC WANrouter 150, 250, 500, and TransPATH 335, 350 Multiprotocol Routers
Select a router to cost-effectively link a LAN to a remote system or another LAN and to offload routing overhead from the
application host system.

E
1
fll

J.
§

Network Connectivity Products
See Chapter 6, Networks, Communications, and Cables, and the Networks Buyer's Guide.

Step 5-Console Terminal
A console device is necessary for a system to function. Console cable included with system. Order video terminals (e.g.,
VT420) for each system unless otherwise available. Refer to Chapter 8, Terminals and Printers, for ordering information. A
VT330/VT340/VT420 with split screen capability can be used as a shared console terminal.

VAX Systems

1.61

VAX 4000 Systems and Servers (Model 200)
Step 6--Terminals and Printers
Select terminals and printers as required. Serial printers connect to an asynchronous line. A cable (e.g., BC16E-25) must be
ordered with each unless otherwise provided. Maximum two parallel printers per LPVl 1 controller; maximum two controllers per system which require one Q-bus slot each. Refer to Chapter 8, Terminals and Printers, for ordering information.

Step 7-Software
Select licenses and media and documentation as required. Note: Upgrade licenses required to support additional users
beyond those included with base multiuser system-upgrade licenses must be order sequentially.

Software
Processor Code
Clusterwide
License Rating

VAX 4000 Model 200 = B
VAXserver 4000 Model 200 = C

QL-001AB-B3
QL-001AB-B4

VMS 21- to 40-user multiuser upgrade license
VMS 41- to n-user multiuser upgrade license

QA-OOlAA-Hx
QA-09SAA-Hx

VMS media with extended documentation kit, including VAX.cluster and DECnet documentation
VMS media and base documentation

QA-VWJ8A-A8
QA-VYR8A-G8

VMS and layered product binaries (CD-ROM) without hardcopy documentation
VMS extended and layered product online documentation set (CD-ROM); requires DECwindows
Bookreader

QA-A93AA-Hx
QA-358AA-Hx

PATHWORKS for VMS media and documentation
VAX Rdb/VMS Runtime media and documentation

QA-VHRAA-Hx

VMS/ULTRIX Connection media and documentation Note: For server systems only.

QL-VBRAB-AA

VAXcluster Software license for multiuser member systems only; included with Server systems.

QL-AB2AB-AA

VMS Volume Shadowing media is included with VMS. This license is required to authorize
its use.

VAX 4000 Model 200 = 200
VAX.server 4000 Model 200 = 10

Note: x denotes media type: 8 = CD-ROM, 5 = TK50, M = magtape; '" denotes porcessor code
Select the appropriate NAS software level. See description of NAS packages on page 9.2. Note: The NAS packaged products
do not provide hardcopy documentation for the components (the documentation is CD-ROM only). To order NAS component
hardcopy documentation, see page 9 .5 for listing of order numbers.
QL-MClA~' -AA

QA-MClAA-Hx

NAS 200 (Network Application Support 200)
NAS 200 media and documentation kit

QL-MC2A *-AA
QA-MC2AA-Hx

NAS 300 (Network Application Support 300)
NAS 300 media and documentation kit

QL-MC5A'"-AA
QA-MC5AA-Hx

NAS 400 (Network Application Support 400)
NAS 400 media and documentation kit

Note: x denotes media type: 8 = CD-ROM, 5 = TK50, M = magtape

Step 8-Diagnostics and Documentation
Select optional diagnostics and hardware documentation.

Basic Diagnostics
QZ-K14AA-U5
QZ-K32AA-U8

On TK50 media
On CD-ROM media

Extended Diagnostics and Documentation
QX-K19AC-AA
QZ-K19AA-H5
QY-Kl9AA-AW

1.62

VAX Systems

Single-use TK50 license
Media on TK50
Annual updates on TK50

VAX 4000 Systems and Servers (Model 200)
Step S-:Diagnostics and Documentation (Continued)
QX-K32AA-AA
QZ-K32AA-H8
QY-K32AA-A8
QZ-K19AA-GZ
MD-LEVAX-01

Single-use CD-ROM license
Media on CD-ROM
Annual updates on CD-ROM
Hardcopy extended maintenance documentation
Maintenance documentation and diagnostics listings on microfiche (library and updates)

Hardware Documentation

QZ-K25AB-GZ
QZ-K258B-GZ

English-language (included with base system)
Multi-lingual (English, French, German)

Step 9-Power Cords
Select one for each 220/240-V system or expansion pedestal.

BN20B-2E
BN22C-2E
BN22D-2E
BN22E-2E
BN22F-2E
BN22H-2E
BN22J-2E
BN22K-2E
BN22L-2E

U.S./Canada/Japan
Australia/ New Zealand
Austria, Belgium, France, Germany, Finland, Holland, Norway, Sweden, Portugal, Spain
U.K./Ireland
Switzerland
Denmark
Italy
India
Israel

Step 10--Environmental Products
Select environmental power products if required. Refer to Chapter 5, VAXcluster Options/Systems Expansion, Digital's
Environmental Power Products Catalog (EB-M4442-79), and the DECdirect catalog for details.

Step 11---Configuring Information
Use the template that follows in conjunction with the configuring information that follows the Rack-mountable VAX 4000
systems to validate the configuration.

SLOT

Current (Amps)
+12 Vdc -12 Vdc

MODULE

+5 Vdc

Power
(Watts)

Bus Loads
ac
de

M9715

0.10

3.0

0.0

12.5

0.0

KA660''

4.8

0.55

0.0

30.60

3.5

1.0

MS650-Bx

~·~ 7:

0.0

~':*

0.0

3
4

5
6

"Includes power requirements
for H3 602 I/O panel

'"'MS650-BA (Included with base system):
+5 Vdc = 3.5; Watts= 17 .5
MS650-BB: +5 Vdc = 3.1; Watts = 15.5
MS650-BC: +5 Vdc + 2.8; Watts = 14.0

10
11

12
Mass-storage
Shelf Device
1
2

3
4
Total these
columns:
Must not
exceed:

60.0

18.0

NIA

584

35.0

20.0
BU-3121

Note: VAX 4000 Model 200 (BA430) specifications follow VAX 4000 Models 400, 500, and 600 ordering menu.

VAX Systems

1.63

VAX 4000 Systems and Servers (Model 200)
VAX/VAXserver 4000 Model 200 (BA430) System Diagrams
RFxx Disks
TLZxx/RRD4x
Connector

Fans

RF xx
Opt.

BU-3122

RF xx ,
TKxx,
orTF85

10 Q-bus slots
available

1211109876543210
BU-3123

VAX 4000 Model 200 (BA430) Base System

1.64

VAX Systems

VAX 4000 Systems and Servers (Model 200)
VAX 4000 Model 200 (BA430) System Expansion Diagrams

B400X

System

RF xx

Opt.

RF xx,
TKxx,
or TF85

RF xx

Opt.

11 Q-bus slots
available

RF xx,
TKxx,
orTF85

..._ >Q) :::: c..

9 Q-bus slots
available

a_(/)

12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2

BU-3125

Notes:
• A power control bus cable connects the VAX 4000 Model 200 (BA430) system to the B400X expander.
This power control bus cable permits the power to be turned on and off for the entire expanded system
with the on/off switch on the VAX 4000 model 200 (BA430) power supply.
• B400X expander includes a 9-foot (2.7-meter) DSSI cable.

R400X

System
RF xx
Opt.

RFxx
Opt.

10 Q-bus slots
available

R400X

RF xx,
TKxx,
orTF85

RFxx
Opt.

RF xx
Opt.

RFxx
Opt.

RF xx
Opt.

RFxx
Opt.

(j)~~

Ci5 tl ~

<t:

au..

:..::

RFxx
Opt.

RF xx
Opt.

RFxx
Opt.

RF xx
Opt.

(/)cal
0 ca..
0

()

(/)~al

DSSI Cable
(BC21M-09)
(Bus 1)
Power Control Cable

(j)~~

(/) c al
O ca..

ca..

0
()

RFxx
orTF85

a..~

0..(/)

(/)

RF xx
orTF85

0
()

(j)~~

(/)cal
0 ca..
0
()

Power Control Cable
BU-3124

Notes:
• Two power control bus cables connect the VAX 4000 Model 200 (BA430) system to the two R400X expanders. These power
control bus cables permit the power to be turned on and off for the entire expanded system with the on/off switch on the
VAX 4000 Model 200 (BA430) power supply.
• R400X expander includes a 9-foot (2.7-meter} DSSI cable.

VAX Systems

1.65

VAX 4000 Systems and Servers (Model 300)
Step 1-VAX 4000 Model 300 Systems
Select system. Note that disk, tape, and diagnostics are not included in base systems and must be ordered separately.
VAX/V AXserver 4000 Model 300 systems include
· CPU with two embedded DSSI adapters, and one 802.3/ Ethernet (ThinWire/ thick wire) controller
· BA440 system pedestal enclosure
- Five dedicated slots for the system and memory modules, and seven available Q-bus slots
- Universal power supply that automatically adjusts to 90-128 Vac or 190-256 Vac
• 7.6-meter (25-foot) console terminal cable
• 120-V power cord (220-V/240-V devices require a country-specific power cord; see Step 9)
· DSSI VAXcluster Installation and Troubleshooting Guide (EK-410AA-MG)
· English-language hardware documentation (QZ-K04AA-GZ)
· Factory-installed software"'
· One full-year product warranty (standard warranty recommended)
'" Delivery of the software on a systems disk is not warrantied. It is provided as a convenience to the customer. Customers are encouraged to buy
the necessary media and documentation, which include complete installation instructions. See Step 7.

Multiuser Systems
· VMS 1- to 20-user license (with Rdb/VMS Runtime license)
· DECnet end-node license (with PATHWORKS for VMS)
DV-43JTB-A9

VAX 4000 Model 300 with 32 Mbytes of memory

· VMS 1- to 40-user license (with Rdb/VMS Runtime license)
· DECnet end-node license (with PATHWORKS for VMS)
DV-43JT1 -A9
DV-43JT1-B9

VAX 4000 Model 300 with 32 Mbytes of memory
VAX 4000 Model 300 with 64 Mbytes of memory

Two-System DSSI VAXcluster Multiuser Systems
• Two VMS unlimited-user licenses (with Rdb/VMS Runtime license)
• Two VAXcluster Software licenses
· DECnet full-function license (with PATHWORKS for VMS)
· DECnet end-node license (with PATHWORKS for VMS)
· Two BC21M-09 DSSI bus cable
DV-43JT2-A9
DV-43JT2-B9

VAX 4000 Model 300 with 32 Mbytes of memory per system
VAX 4000 Model 300 with 64 Mbytes of memory per system

Note: Two-system DSSI VAXcluster systems have a total of 14 available Q-bus slots. Options are configured evenly between

the two systems, unless specified differently on the order.
Three-System DSSI VAXcluster Multiuser Packaged System
· Three VMS unlimited-user licenses (with Rdb/VMS Runtime license)
• Three VAXcluster Software licenses
· Two DECnet end-node licenses (with PATHWORKS for VMS)
• DECnet full-function license (with PATHWORKS for VMS)
· Four BC21M-09 DSSI bus cables
DV-43JT3-B9

VAX 4000 Model 300 with 64 Mbytes of memory per system

Note: Options ordered with two- or three-system DSSI VAXcluster systems are configured evenly among the systems unless
specified differently on the order.
Server Systems
· VMS file and application server license (with Rdb/VMS Runtime license)
· VAXcluster Software license
· DECnet full-function license (with PATHWORKS for VMS)
· VMS/ULTRIX Connection license
DV-43JS1-A9
DV-43JS1-B9

1.66

VAX Systems

VAXserver 4000 Model 300 with 32 Mbytes of memory per system
VAXserver 4000 Model 300 with 64 Mbytes of memory per system

VAX 4000 Systems and Servers (Model 300)
Step 1-Systems (Continued)
Two-System DSSI VAXcluster Server Systems
· Two VMS file and application server licenses (with Rdb/VMS Runtime license)
• Two VAXcluster Software licenses
• DECnet full-function license (with PATHWORKS for VMS)
· DECnet end-node license (with PATHWORKS for VMS)
· Two VMS/ULTRIX Connection licenses
· Two BC21M-09 DSSI bus cables

DV-43JS2-A9
DV-43JS2-B9

VAXserver 4000 Model 300 with 32 Mbytes of memory per system
VAXserver 4000 Model 300 with 64 Mbytes of memory per system

Three-System DSSI VAXcluster Server System
· Three VMS files and application server licenses (with Rdb/VMS Runtime licenses)
· Three VAXcluster Software licenses
· Three VMS/ULTRIX Connection licenses
· Two DECnet end-node licenses (with PATHWORKS for VMS)
• DECnet full-function license (with PATHWORKS for VMS)
· Four BC21M-09 DSSI bus cables

DV-43JS3-A9

VAXserver 4000 Model 300 with 32 Mbytes of memory per system

Note: Options ordered with two- or three-system DSSI VAXcluster systems are configured evenly among the systems unless
specified differently on the order.

Step 2-Storage and Q-bus Expansion
Select storage and Q-bus/storage devices as required. Refer to Chapter 7, Storage Devices, for further details on devices
listed.

Step 2a-lntemal Storage (System Enclosure)
Configuration Rules
• Selection of one DSSI disk (ISE) is required for factory-installed software.
• Order load device if necessary-VAXcluster satellite members or systems being loaded over the network do not require a
load device.
• One TF85 per enclosure (BA440, R400X, B400X; maximum two TF85s per DSSI adapter).
· System enclosures support storage options in the following configurations:
- Up to four RF7x ISEs
- Up to three RF7x ISEs and one TKxx or TF85 tape drive
- Up to seven RF312/RF352 ISEs
- Up to six RF312/RF352 ISEs and one TKxx or TF85 tape drive
Additional ISEs are housed in expansion pedestals.
· Refer to Chapter 5, VAXcluster Options/ System Expansion for DSSI VAXcluster configuration rules.
· Single systems support seven ISEs per DSSI adapter; two-system DSSI VAXcluster configurations support six ISEs and can
be connected between any pair of DSSI adapters (one adapter in each system); three-system DSSI VAXcluster configurations support five ISEs and can be connected between any three DSSI adapters (one adapter in each system).
· Maximum two Q-bus storage adapters are supported; two KFQSAs, two KDA50s, or one of each.
• Maximum two KZQSA storage adapters.
· Maximum two KLESI (TU81E) storage controllers.

DSSI Adapter
KFQSA-SE/SG

Additional Q-bus-to-DSSI adapter. Uses one Q-bus slot; factory/field installed.

VAX Systems

1.6 7

VAX 4000 Systems and Servers (Model 300)
Step 2a-lntemal Storage (Sxstem Enclosure) (Continued)
Integrated Storage Elements (ISEs)
RF31T-AA/AF
RF312-AA/AF
RF35E-AA/AF
RF352-AA/AF
RF72E-AA/AF
RF73E-AA/AF

381-Mbyte (half-height) ISE; factory/field installed
Two 381-Mbyte (762-Mbyte) RSEs; factory/field installed
852-Mbyte (full-height) ISE; factory/field installed
Two 852-Mbyte (1.7-Gbyte) ISEs; factory/field installed
1-Gbyte (full-height) ISE; factory/field installed
2-Gbyte (full-height) ISE; factory/field installed

Tape Drives
TF85E-JA/JF

2.6-Gbyte embedded cartridge tape drive, supported by the embedded DSSI adapter;
factory/field installed.

TK70E-AA/AF

296-Mbyte embedded cartridge tape drive. Requires TQK70-SA/SF controller;
factory/field installed.
TK70E controller; factory/field installed.

TQK70-SA/SF

Step 2b-Extemal S orage and Q-bus Expansion
• R400X expansion pedestals can be configured with two separate DSSI buses (requires additional BC21M-09 cable).
• 28 ISEs are supported with R400X expansion pedestals (in a single system configuration).
· Two TKxx tape drives are supported, one in system enclosure, one in B400X.
·Four Q-bus storage adapters are supported; two KFQSAs, two KDA50s, or one of each; as well as up to two KZQSAs.
· B400X/R400X expansion pedestals include the following:
- Q-bus extender modules and two 2.7 -meter (9-foot) cables (B400X)
- 2.7-meter (9-foot) DSSI cable (BC21M-09)
- 1.8-meter (6-foot) KZQSA cable (BC06P-06)
- 3.0-meter (10-foot) power control cable (BC09F-10)
- Universal power supply
- 120-V power cord; 220/240-V devices require a country-specific power cord; see R400X/B400X descriptions that follow
this ordering menu
• Refer to Chapter 5, VAXcluster Options/Systems Expansion, for DSSI VAXcluster configuration rules.
B400X and R400X Expansion Pedestals
Refer to page 1.81 (expansion diagrams) and 1.82 for more information.
B400X-B9
R400X-B9

Provides ten additional Q-bus slots and space for RF-series disk drives and one TKxx or TF85 tape
drive. Factory or field installed.
Provides space for RF-series disk drives and one TF85 tape drive. Factory or field installed.

Note: B400X/R400X use the same ISEs, DAT drive, and tape drives as listed in Step 2a with the exception of the TK70;
TKxx tape drives are not supported in R400X expansion pedestal.
RSE Storage Expansion Pedestals
RSE storage expansion pedestals include one RSE and space for one additional RSE.
RF72B-KA
RF73B-KA

Includes RF72 RSE, 2.7-meter (9-foot) DSSI cable, and documentation, factory/field installed.
Same as above except includes RF73 RSE.

Note: For 240-V use, a country-specific power cord is required. Refer to Chapter 7, Storage Devices, for ordering information.

RSEs for RSE Storage Expansion Pedestals
RF72-RA
RF73-RA

1-Gbyte RSE in individual removable canister.
2-Gbyte RSE in individual removable canister. Requires VMS V5.5

SDI Disk Controller
KDA50-SE/SG

KZQSA Disk Adapter
KZQSA-SA/SF

1.68

VAX Systems

Required for TSZ07, TLZ06, or RRD42 tabletop devices, provides connections for two storage
devices (total four devices per configuration). Uses one Q-bus slot; factory/field installed.

VAX 4000 Systems and Servers (Model 300)
Step lb--E:xtemal Stor.ige and Q·bu~. Expansion (Continued)
Tape/CD-ROM Drives
TLZ06-GA ,.(
4.0-Gbyte tabletop DAT drive; includes 1.8-meter (6-foot) cable (BC06P-06) . Requires KZQSA-SA
adapter.

RRD42-FB/DH"'

600-Mbyte tabletop CD-ROM drive; includes 1.8-meter (6-foot) cable (BC06P-06). Requires
KZQSA-SA adapter.

TUS lE-SAISB '~

40/ 145-Mbyte (1600/6250 bits/inch) backup tape drive in 1-meter (40-inch) cabinet; two maximum;
includes cable and KLESI controller which uses one Q -bus slot; 120/ 240-V factory installed.

TU81E-SF/SG '~

120/240-V field installed.

TSV05-SE"'

40-Mbyte (1600 bits/ inch) data-interchange device in I-meter (40-inch) cabinet; one maximum;
includes cable and controller which uses one Q-bus slot. Refer to Chapter 7, Storage Devices, for
models other than 120-V.

TSZ07

1600/ 6250-bit/ inch 9-track magtape. Refer to Chapter 7, Storage Devices, for ordering information.

TF85-Tk'

2.6-Gbyte cartridge tape subsystem in tabletop enclosure. Requires CK-SFlOO-LP cable kit.

SFlOO
SF2x0/300/400

DSSI Storage Array Pedestal. Refer to Chapter 7, Storage Devices, for ordering information.
DSSI DECarray Storage Subsystem. Refer to Chapter 7, Storage Devices, for ordering information.

1
'

120-V power cord included. 220/ 240-V devices require a country-specific power cord, refer to Chapter 7, Storage Devices.

Select a maximum of three additional memory modules. VAX 4000 Model 300 systems can be expanded to
256 Mbytes of memory per system.

MS670-BA
MS6 70-CA

32 Mbytes of memory, uses one dedicated memory slot; factory or field installed.
64 Mbytes of memory, uses one dedicated memory slot; factory or field installed.

Step ~Networks.. and Communications
Select devices as required. Connection of system to Ethernet requires either a thick wire 15-pin AUI right-angle transceiver
cable (e.g., BNE3K) or ThinWire BNC connection (e.g. , BC16M). See Chapter 6, Networks, Communications, and Cables, and
the Networks Buyer's Guide for more information.

LAN Communications Controller
DESQA-SA/SF

802.3/ Ethernet Controller (ThinWire/ thick wire). Maximum two additional per system (one
802.3/ Ethernet controller included with base system). Uses one Q-bus slot; factory/field installed.

Local and Wide Area Communications Servers
Each communications server requires an 802.3/Ethernet connection. Depending on the server selected, either a Thin Wire
BNC connection (e.g., BC16M) or a thick wire 15-pin AUI transceiver cable (e.g., BNE3 x) is required. Software media and
documentation and cables are also required. See descriptions in Chapter 6, Networks, Communications, and Cables, for
ordering info rmation.

Network Connectivity Products
See Chapter 6, Networks, Communications~ and Cables, and the Networks Buyer's Guide.

Step 5-Console Terminal
A console device is necessary for a system to function. Console cable included with system. Order video terminals (e.g. , the
VT420) for each system unless otherwise available. See Chapter 8, Terminals and Printers, for ordering information. A
VT33 0/VT340/VT420 with split screen capability can be used as a shared console terminal.

VAX Systems

1.69

VAX 4000 Systems and Servers (Model 300)
Step 6-Terminals and Printers
Select terminals and printers as required. Serial printers connect to an asynchronous line. A cable (e.g., BC16E-25) must be
ordered with each unless otherwise provided. Maximum two parallel printers per LPVl 1 controller; maximum two controllers per system which require one Q-bus slot each. See Chapter 8, Terminals and Printers, for ordering information.

Step 7-Software
Upgrade license required to support additional users beyond those included in base systems.
Software
VAX 4000 Model 300 = 2
Processor Code
VAXserver 4000 Model 300 = C
Clusterwide
License Rating

VAX 4000 Model 300 = 300
VAXserver 4000 Model 300 = 10

QL-001A2-B4

VMS 41- to unlimited-user multiuser upgrade license.

QA-OOlAA-Hx
QA-09SAA-Hx

VMS media and extended documentation, including VAXcluster and DECnet documentation.
VMS media and base documentation.

QA-VWJ8A-A8
QA-VWJ8B-H8
QA-VWJ8A-H8
QA-VYR8A-G8

VMS and layered product binaries (CD-ROM) without hardcopy documentation.
VMS and layered product binaries (CD-ROM) and VMS hardcopy base documentation.
VMS and layered product binaries (CD-ROM) and VMS extended hardcopy documentation.
VMS extended and layered product online documentation (CD-ROM); requires DECwindows
Bookreader.

QA-A93AA-Hx
QA-358AA-Hx

PATHWORKS for VMS media and documentation.
VAX Rdb/VMS Runtime media and documentation.

QA-VHRAA-Hx

VMS/ ULTRIX Connection media and documentation. Note: For server systems only.

QL-VBRAx-AA

VAXcluster Software license for multiuser member systems only; included with server systems.

NAS 200 (Network Application Support 200)
NAS 200 media and documentation kit

QL-MC2N'-AA
QA-MC2AA-Hx

NAS 300 (Network Application Support 300)
NAS 300 media and documentation kit

QL-MC5N'-AA
QA-MC5AA-Hx

NAS 400 (Network Application Support 400)
NAS 400 media and documentation kit
Note: x denotes media type: 8 = CD-ROM, 5 = TK50, M = magtape; -~ denotes processor code

Step 8-Diagnostics and Documentation
Select optional diagnostics and hardware documentation.
Basic Diagnostics
QZ-K14AA-U5
QZ-K32AA-U8

On TK50 media
On CD-ROM media

Extended Diagnostics and Documentation
QX-K19AC-AA
QZ-K19AA-H5
QY-K19AA-AW
QX-K32AA-AA
QZ-K32AA-H8
QY-K32AA-A8
QZ-K19AA-GZ
MD-LEVAX-01

Hardware Documentation
QZ-K25AB-GZ
QZ-K258B-GZ

1. 70

VAX Systems

English-language (included with base system)
Multi-lingual (English, French, German)

VAX 4000 Systems and Servers (Model 300)

Select one for each 220/240-V system or expansion enclosure.

BN20B-2E
BN22C-2E
BN22D-2E
BN22E-2E
BN22F-2E
BN22H-2E
BN22J-2E
BN22K-2E
BN22L-2E

U.S./Canada/J apan
Australia/New Zealand
Austria, Belgium, France, Germany, Finland, Holland, Norway, Sweden, Portugal, Spain
U.K./Ireland
Switzerland
Denmark
Italy
India
Israel

Step 10-Environmental Products
Select environmental power products if required. Refer to Chapter 5, VAXcluster Options/Systems Expansion, Digital's
Environmental Power Products Catalog (EB-M4442-79), and the DECdirect catalog for details.

Step 11-Configuring Information
Use the templates that follow in conjunction with the configuring information that follows Rack-mountable VAX 4000
systems to validate the configuration.
VAX/V AXserver 4000 Model 300 System Template
Current (Amps)
+12 Vdc -12 Vdc

Power
(Watts)

Bus Loads
ac
de

MODULE

+5 Vdc

2~'

MS670

;'.;';

0.0

....

0.0

KA670

7.4

0.35

0.04

42.6

3.5

1.0

60.0

18.0

3.0

584

35 .0

20.0

SLOT

y
Y'

lt
2t
3t
4t
5t
6t
7t
Mass-storage
Shelf Device
1
2
3
4
Total these
columns:
Must not
exceed:

BU-3246

*Reserved for memory only.
H MS670-BA: +5Vdc = 3.25 Amps; Watts = 16.25
MS670-CA: +5Vdc = 4.75 Amps; Watts = 23 .75
tO- bus slots

VAX Systems

1. 71

VAX 4000 Systems and Servers
(Models 400, 500, 600)
Stq1l-VAX 4000 Model 409,
Select system. Note that disk, tape, and diagnostics are not included in base systems and must be ordered separately.
Open VMS user licenses may be ordered as needed.

VAx.JV AXserver 4000 Model 400, 500, and 600 systems include
• CPU with two embedded DSSI adapters, and one 802.3/Ethernet (ThinWire/thick wire) controller
• BA440 system pedestal enclosure
- Five dedicated slots for the system and memory modules, and seven available Q-bus slots
• 7.6-meter (25-foot) console terminal cable
·Universal power supply that automatically adjusts to 90-128 Vac or 190-256 Vac
· 120-V power cord (220-V/240-V devices require a country-specific power cord; see Step 9)
• DSSI VAXcluster Installation and Troubleshooting Guide (EK-410AA-MG)
·English-language hardware documentation (QZ-K04AA-GZ)
·Factory-installed software'°' (VAX 4000 Model 400 systems include OpenVMS V5.5-2-TK50 and CD-ROM media-and
base documentation)
• OpenVMS base license (with POSIX)
• One full-year product warranty (standard warranty recommended)

* Delivery of the software on a systems disk is not warrantied. It is provided as a convenience to the customer. Customers are encouraged to buy
the necessary media and documentation , which include complete installation instructions. See Step 7.

ADVANTAGE-SERVER Systems
· NAS 300 package (with DECnet end-node license and Rdb Runtime licenses)
• Two 852-Mbyte ISEs in full-height assembly
• RRD42 600-Mbyte tabletop CD-ROM drive, includes cable and KZQSA-SA adapter

DV-44JCA-EA
DV-45JCA-FA
DV-46JCA-FA

Model 400 with 64 Mbytes of memory
Model 500 with 128 Mbytes of memory
Model 600 with 128 Mbytes of memory

OpenVMS Traditional Systems
• OpenVMS licenses for 40 users
• DECnet end-node license
• Rdb Runtime license

DV-44JT1-D9
DV-44JT1-E9
DV-45JT1-E9
DV-45JT1-F9
DV-46JT1-E9
DV-46JT1-F9

Model 400 with 32 Mbytes of memory
Model 400 with 64 Mbytes of memory
Model 500 with 64 Mbytes of memory
Model 500 with 128 Mbytes of memory
Model 600 with 64 Mbytes of memory
Model 600 with 128 Mbytes of memory

Open VMS Base Servers
DV-44JAA-D9
DV-44JAA-E9
DV-45JAA-E9
DV-45JAA-F9
DV-46JAA-E9
DV-46JAA-F9

1. 72

VAX Systems

VAX 4000 Systems and Servers
(Models 400, 500, 600)
Step 1-VAX 4000 Model 400, .500, and 600 Systems (Contihuef!)
~~~--~~~~-----~--..~-----------------

Two -System DSSI VAXcluster Multiuser Systems
• Open VMS base license per system
• Open VMS unlimited-use license per system
• VAXcluster Software licenses per system
• Rdb Runtime license per system
· DECnet full-function license
• DECnet end-node license
·Two BC21M-09 DSSI bus cables
DV-44JT2-E9
DV-45JT2-F9
DV-46JT2-F9

Model 400 with 64 Mbytes of memory per system
Model 500 with 128 Mbytes of memory per system
Model 600 with 128 Mbytes of memory per system

Step 2-Storage and Q..bus Expansion

-------~~~~~~--~~---~~~~__...

Select storage and Q-bus/storage devices as required. Refer to Chapter 7, Storage Devices, for further details on devices
listed.

Step 2a-Intemal Storage (System Enclosure)
Configuration Rules
• Selection of one DSSI disk (ISE) is required for factory-installed software.
• Order load device if necessary-VAXcluster satellite members or systems being loaded over the network do not require a
load device.
• One TF85 per enclosure (BA440, R400X, B400X; maximum two TF85s per DSSI adapter).
• System enclosures support storage options in the following configurations:
- Up to four RF7 x IS Es
- Up to three RF7 x ISEs and one TKxx or TF85 tape drive
- Up to three RF312/RF352 ISEs and one TKxx or TF85 tape drive
Additional ISEs are housed in expansion pedestals.
· Refer to Chapter 5, VAXcluster Options/System Expansion for DSSI VAXcluster configuration rules.
• Single systems support seven ISEs per DSSI adapter; two-system DSSI VAXcluster configurations support six ISEs and can
be connected between any pair of DSSI adapters (one adapter in each system); three-system DSSI VAXcluster configurations support five ISEs and can be connected between any three DSSI adapters (one adapter in each system).
·Maximum two Q-bus storage adapters are supported; two KFQSAs, two KDA50s, or one of each.
• Maximum two KZQSA storage adapters.
·Maximum two KLESI (TU81E) storage controllers.
DSSI Adapter
KFQSA-SE/SG

Additional Q-bus-to-DSSI adapter. Uses one Q-bus slot; factory/field installed.

Integrated Storage Elements (ISEs)
RF31T-AA/AF
RF312-AAIAF
RF35E-AA/AF
RF352-AAIAF
RF72E-AA/AF
RF73E-AA/AF

Tape Drives
TF85E-JA/JF

2.6-Gbyte embedded cartridge tape drive, supported by the embedded DSSI adapter;
factory/field installed.

TK70E-AA/AF

296-Mbyte embedded cartridge tape drive. Requires TQK70-SA/SF controller;
factory/field installed.
TK70E controller; factory/field installed.

TQK70-SAISF

VAX Systems

1.73

VAX 4000 Systems and Servers
(Models 400, 500, 600)
Step 21>-:-Extemal Storage and Q-bus Expansion
• R400X expansion pedestals can be configured with two separate DSSI buses (requires additional BC21M-09 cable).
· 28 ISEs are supported with R400X expansion pedestals (in a single system configuration).
• Two TKxx tape drives are supported; one in system enclosure, one in B400X.
· Four Q -bus storage adapters are supported; two KFQSAs, two KDA50s, or one of each; as well as up to two KZQSAs.
· B400X/R400X expansion pedestals include the following:
- Q -bus extender modules and two 2.7-meter (9-foot) cables (B400X)
- 2.7-meter (9-foot) DSSI cable (BC21M-09)
- 1.8-meter (6-foot) KZQSA cable (BC06P-06)
- 3.0-meter (10-foot) power control cable (BC09F-10)
- Universal power supply
- 120-V power cord; 220/240-V devices require a country-specific power cord; see R400X/B400X descriptions that follow
this ordering menu
· Refer to Chapter 5, VAXcluster Options/Systems Expansion, for DSSI VAXcluster configuration rules.
B400X and R400X Expansion Pedestals
Refer to page 1.81 (expansion diagrams) and 1.82 for more information.
B400X-B9
R400X-B9

Includes RF72 RSE, 2.7-meter (9-foot) DSSI cable, and documentation, factory/field installed.
Same as above except includes RF73 RSE.

Note: For 240-V use, a country-specific power cord is required. Refor to Chapter 7, Storage Devices, for ordering information.

RSEs for RSE Storage Expansion Pedestals
RF72-RA
RF73-RA

1-Gbyte RSE in individual removable canister.
2-Gbyte RSE in individual removable canister. Requires VMS V5.5

SDI Disk Controller
KDA50-SE/SG

Provides connections for four external RA-disk drives (except RA70/RA71); uses three Q-bus slots;
factory/ field installed. Refer to Chapter 7, Storage Devices, for RA-disk descriptions and ordering
information.

KZQSA Adapter
KZQSA-SA/SF

Required for TSZ07, TLZ06, or RRD42 tabletop devices, provides connections for two storage
devices (total four devices per configuration). Uses one Q-bus slot; factory/ field installed.

Tape/CD-ROM Drives
TLZ06-GA-:'

4.0-Gbyte tabletop DAT drive; includes 1.8-meter (6-foot) cable (BC06P-06) . Requires KZQSA-SA
adapter.

RRD42-FB/Dff''

600-Mbyte tabletop CD-ROM drive; includes 1.8-meter (6-foot) cable (BC06P-06). Requires
KZQSA-SA adapter.

TU81E-SA/SB-:'

40/145-Mbyte (1600/6250 bits/ inch) backup tape drive in 1-meter (40-inch) cabinet; two maximum;
includes cable and KLESI controller which uses one Q-bus slot; 120/240-V factory installed.

TU81E-SF/SG-:'

120/240-V field installed.

1.74

VAX Systems

VAX 4000 Systems and Servers
(Models 400, 500, 600)
Step 2b-ExtemafStorage and Q-bus Expansion (Continued)
TSV05 -SE~':

40-Mbyte (1600 bits/inch) data-interchange device in 1-meter (40-inch) cabinet; one maximum;
includes cable and controller which uses one Q-bus slot. Refer to Chapter 7, Storage Devices, for
models other than 120-V.

TSZ07

1600/ 6250-bit/inch 9-track magtape. Refer to Chapter 7, Storage Devices, for ordering information.

TF85-TN':

2.6-Gbyte cartridge tape subsystem in tabletop enclosure. Requires CK-SFlOO-LP cable kit.

SFlOO
SF2x0/300/400

DSSI Storage Array Pedestal. Refer to Chapter 7, Storage Devices, for ordering information.
DSSI DECarray Storage Subsystem. Refer to Chapter 7, Storage Devices, for ordering information.

"' 120-V power cord included. 220/ 240-V devices require a country-specific power cord, refer to Chapter 7, Storage Devices.

Step 3-Memory
Select a maximum of three additional memory modules. Systems can be expanded to 512 Mbytes of memory per system.
MS690-BA
MS690-CA
MS690-DA

32 Mbytes of memory, uses one dedicated memory slot; factory or field installed.
64 Mbytes of memory, uses one dedicated memory slot; factory or field installed.
128 Mbytes of memory, uses one dedicated memory slot; factory or field installed.

Step 4- Networks and Communications
Select devices as required. Connection of system to Ethernet requires either a thick wire 15-pin AUi right-angle transceiver
cable (e.g., ENE3K) or ThinWire ENC connection (e.g. , EC16M) . See Chapter 6, Networks, Communications, and Cables, and
the Networks Buyer's Guide for more information.
LAN Communications Controller
DESQA-SA/SF

802.3/Ethernet Controller (ThinWire/ thick wire) . Maximum two additional per system (one
802.3/Ethernet controller included with base system). Uses one Q-bus slot; factory/ field installed.

DEC WANrouter 150, 250, 500, and T ransPATH 335, 350 Multiprotocol Routers
Select a router to cost-effectively link a LAN to a remote system or another LAN and to offload routing overhead from the
application host system.
Network Connectivity Products
See Chapter 6, Networks, Communications, and Cables, and the Networks Buyer's Guide.

Step 5-Console Terminal
A console device is necessary for a system to function. Console cable included with system. Order video terminals (e.g. , the
VT420) for each system unless otherwise available. See Chapter 8, Terminals and Printers, for ordering information. A
VT330/VT340/VT420 with split screen capability can be used as a shared console terminal.

Step 6-Terminals and Printers
Select terminals and printers as required. Serial printers connect to an asynchronous line. A cable (e.g., EC16E-25) must be
ordered with each unless otherwise provided. Maximum two parallel printers per LPVl 1 controller; maximum two controllers per system which require one Q-bus slot each. See Chapter 8, Terminals and Printers, for ordering information.

VAX Systems

1.75

VAX 4000 Systems and Servers
(Models 400, 500, 600)
Step 7~ofhvare
Licenses required to support additional users beyond those included in base systems.
Software
Processor Code

VAX 4000 Model 400 = 2
VAX 4000 Model 500 and 600 = 4

Clusterwide
License Rating

VAX 4000 Model 400 = 300
VAX 4000 Model 500 and 600 = 900

OpenVMS User Licenses
QL-XULA9-BB
QL-XULA9-BC
QL-XULA9-BD
QL-XULA9-BE
QL-XULA9-BF
QL-XULA9-BG
QL-XULA9-BH
QL-XULAA-BR
QL-XULAA-BR

OpenVMS/VAX interactive one-user license
OpenVMS/VAX interactive two-user license
OpenVMS/VAX interactive four-user license
OpenVMS/VAX interactive eight-user license
OpenVMS/VAX interactive 16-user license
Open VMS/VAX interactive 32-user license
OpenVMS/VAX interactive 64-user license
OpenVMS/VAX interactive 128-user license
Open VMS/VAX interactive 256-user license

QL-XULA2-6Y
QL-XULA4-64
QL-XULA4-65

Model 400 Open VMS/VAX interactive unlimited-use license
Model 500 Open VMS/VAX interactive unlimited-use license
Model 600 OpenVMS/VAX interactive unlimited-use license

QA-OOlAA-Hx
QA-09SAA-Hx

OpenVMS media and extended documentation, including VAXcluster and DECnet documentation.
OpenVMS media and base documentation. (Model 400 systems include OpenVMS V5 .2-2-TK50
and CD-ROM media and base documentation)

QA-VWJ8A-A8
QA-VWJ8B-H8
QA-VWJ8A-H8
QA-VYR8A-G8

Open VMS and layered product binaries (CD-ROM) without hardcopy documentation.
OpenVMS and layered product binaries (CD-ROM) and VMS hardcopy base documentation.
OpenVMS and layered product binaries (CD-ROM) and VMS extended hardcopy documentation.
OpenVMS extended and layered product online documentation (CD-ROM); requires DECwindows
Bookreader.

QA-A93AA-Hx
QA-358AA-Hx
QA-GXXAA-Hx
QA-GXXAB-Hx

PATHWORKS for VMS media and documentation.
Rdb Runtime media and documentation.
POSIX media and documentation with IEEE documentation
POSIX media and documentation without IEEE documentation

NAS 200 (Network Application Support 200)
NAS 200 media and documentation kit

QL-MC2A"'-AA
QA-MC2AA-Hx

NAS 300 (Network Application Support 300)
NAS 300 media and documentation kit

QL-MC5A -;'-AA
QA-MC5AA-Hx

NAS 400 (Network Application Support 400)
NAS 400 media and documentation kit

Note: x denotes media type: 8 = CD-ROM, 5 = TK50, M = magtape; * denotes processor code

1.76

VAX Systems

VAX 4000 Systems and Servers
(Models 400, 500, 600)
Step 8-Diagnostics and Documentation
Select optional diagnostics and hardware documentation.

Basic Diagnostics
QZ-K14AA-U5
QZ-K32AA-U8

On TK50 media
On CD-ROM media

Extended Diagnostics and Documentation
QX-Kl9AC-AA
QZ-K19AA-H5
QY-K19AA-AW
QX-K32AA-AA
QZ-K32AA-H8
QY-K32AA-A8
QZ-K19AA-GZ
MD-LEVAX-01

Hardware Documentation
QZ-K25AB-GZ
QZ-K258B-GZ
EK-KA680-TM

English-language (included with base system)
Multi-lingual (English, French, German)
VAX 4000 Model 400, 500, and 600 CPU Technical Manual

Step 9-Power Cords
Select one for each 220/240-V system or expansion enclosure.

BN20B-2E
BN22C-2E
BN22D-2E
BN22E-2E
BN22F-2E
BN22H-2E
BN22J-2E
BN22K-2E
BN22L-2E

U.S ./Canada/Japan
Australia/ New Zealand
Austria, Belgium, France, Germany, Finland, Holland, Norway, Sweden, Portugal, Spain
U.K./Ireland
Switzerland
Denmark
Italy
India
Israel

Step 16-Environmental Products
Select environmental power products if required. Refer to Chapter 5, VAXcluster Options/Systems Expansion, Digital's
Environmental Power Products Catalog (EB-M4442-79), and the DECdirect catalog for details.

J
1

VAX Systems

1. 77

VAX 4000 Systems and Servers
(Models 400, 500, 600)
Ste~Q 11-Conftguring Information
Use the templates that follow in conjunction with the configuring information that follows Rack-mountable VAX 4000
systems to validate the configuration.
VAX/VAXserver 4000 Model 400, 500, and 600 System Template

MODULE

SLOT
5*

Current (Amps)
+5 Vdc +12 Vdc -12 Vdc

Power
(Watts)

Bus Loads
ac
de

4*
3*
2''
1

MS690

·k;';

0.0

CPU

•'>-1:*

;': ;': '!:

0.0

60.0

18.0

3.0

0.0

;': ;';

0.0

35.0

20.0

.............

lt
2t
3t
4t
5t
6t
7t
Mass-storage
Shelf Device
1
2
3
4
Total these
columns:
Must not
exceed:

584

BU-3075

'''Reserved for memory only
'"''MS690-BA: +5 Vdc = 5.3 Amps; Watts = 26.5
MS690-CA: +5 Vdc = 4.2 Amps; Watts = 21.0
MS690-DA: +5 Vdc = 6.4 Amps; Watts = 32 .0
'""''KA675 (Model 400) : +5 Vdc = 3.6; +12 Vdc = 1.6; Watts= 46.0;
ac Bus Loads= 4; de Bus Loads= 1.
KA680 (Model 500): +5 Vdc = 4.8; + 12 Vdc = 1.6; Watts= 53.8;
ac Bus Loads = 4; de Bus Loads = 1.
KA690 (Model 600): +5 Vdc = 5.8; +12 Vdc = 1.6; Watts = 59.8;
ac Bus Loads = 4; de Bus Loads = 1.
tQ-bus slots

1. 78

VAX Systems

VAX 4000 Systems and Servers
(Models 400, 500, 600)
VAX 4000 Model 400, 500, and 600 Specifications
Mounting type: Pedestal
Physical Characteristics

Operating

Shipping

Height
Width
Depth
Weight

69.0 cm (27.0 in.)
53.0 cm (21.0 in.)
45.0 cm (17.8 in.)
66 kg (145 lb)

117 cm (45.6 in.)
78 cm (30.5 in.)
61 cm (23.9 in.)
84.1 kg (185 lb)

Operating

Service

Front
Rear
Sides

5.1 cm (2.0 in.)
5.1 cm (2.0 in.)
5.1 cm (2.0 in.)

100.0 cm (39.4 in.)
None
None

Clearances

Environmental
Temperature

Operating
Nonoperating
Storage (60 days )
Rate of change

10° to 40° C (50° to 104° F)
-40° to 66° C (-40° to 151 ° F)
-40° to 60° C (-40° to 151 ° F)
11 ° C per hour (20° F)

Relative Humidity

Operating
Nonoperating
Storage
Storage (60 days)
Rate of change

20% to 80% noncondensing
10% to 95% noncondensing
10% to 95 % noncondensing
10% to 95 % noncondensing
25% per hour

Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature

Operating
Storage

25°
(77° F)
28° C (82° F)

Minimum Dew Point Temperature

Operating

2° C (36° F)

Maximum Heat Dissipation

Operating

2,903 Btu/ hr

Air Flow and Quality

Operating
Intake location
Exhaust location
Particle size
Concentration

306 m3/ hr (180 ft 3/ min)
Front top
All sides, bottom

Altitude

Operating
Nonoperating

2438 meters ( 8,000 feet)
4877 meters (16,000 feet)

Mechanical Shock

Operating
Nonoperating

10 g pk for 10 ±3 m/ s
40 g pk for 30 ±3 m/ s

Vibration

Operating

5-22 Hz @ .01 "da minimum
~2:.._500 Hz @ .25g maximum

Acoustics

Operating
Idle

5.5 bels, 40 dBA (typical)

NIA
NIA

5.2 bels, 37 dBA (typical)
Nominal AC Voltage

Electrical

101

120

220

240

Voltage range (Vac)
Power source phase
Nominal frequency (Hz)
Frequency range (Hz)
RMS current (steady state)
at nominal valtage (amps)
Startup current-30 s (amps)
Maximum inrush current (amps)
Maximum power consumption (Watts)

90-110
Single
50-60
47-63
11.9

104-128
Single
50-60
47-63
11.2

176-242
Single
50-60
47-63
6.1

186-264
Single
50- 60
47-63
5.8

12 .6
100
850

10.6
100
850

6.2
83
850

5.8
83
850

Power Cord

Type
Length
U.S. plug

IEC 320 C16
190 cm (75 in.)
NEMA 5-15, Socket IEC 320 Sheet, C- 15

j
1

;, Built-in universal power supply automatically selects the correct voltage range for either 120-V or 240-V operation .

Agency Approvals

ut 114 (office equipment)
UL 478 (EDP units)

CSA C22.2 no.134 (office equipment)
CSA C22.2 no.154 (data processing)

VDE 0875 (RFI suppression)
Australian AS C 100
IEC Publication 950
FCC Part 15 Docket 20780

VAX Systems

1. 79

VAX 4000 Systems and Servers
(Models 400, 500, 600)
VAX 4000 Model 400, 500, and 600 System Diagrams

RFxx Disks
TLZxx/RRD4x
Connector

DSSI Bus
Connector

BU-3091

Fans

RF xx
Opt.

7 0-bus slots
available

RFxx
Opt.

RF xx,
TKxx,
orTF.85

CPU plus
4 Dedicated
Memory
Slots

,._ >-

~ 8:
:::J

Cl...(/)

D
D
D

iJj

1
fl)

~ ~

fl)

7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1 2 3 4 5
BU-3110

1.80

VAX Systems

VAX 4000 Systems and Servers
(Models 400, 500, 600)
VAX 4000 Model 300, 400, 500, and 600 Expansion Diagrams

System
RFxx
Opt.

RFxx
Opt.

7 Q-bus slots

R400X

RFxx
Opt.

CPU plus
1-4 Memory
Slots

R400X

RFxx,
TKxx,
orTF85

RF xx
Opt.

RFxx
Opt.

RF xx
Opt.

RFxx
Opt.

RF xx
Opt.

RFxx
orTF85
Opt.

RF xx
Opt.

RFxx
Opt.

~ 8:
::J

~D
0

a.~

a. Cf)

iii-~~

c !ti
0 ca.

Cf)

0
()

iii~~
c !ti

Cf)

~ ~

r~
a.

Cf)

iii t5 ~

Cf)~ !ti
0 ca.

ca.

()

RF xx
or TF85
Opt.

en -~~

c !ti
0 ca.

Cf)

()

~ ~

Power Control Cable _ _ _ _ __...,.

0
()

.....__ _ _ _ Power Control Cable----~

BU-3108

Notes:
• Two power control cables connect the system to the two R400X expanders. These power control cables permit the power
to be turned on and off for the entire expanded system with the on/off switch on the system power supply.
•The R400X expander includes a 9-foot (2.7-meter) DSSI cable and one power control cable.

8400X
RF xx
Opt.

RF xx
Opt.

System
RF xx
Opt.

11 Q-bus slots
available

RF xx,
TKxx,
orTF85
Opt.

RFxx
Opt.

RF xx
Opt.

6 Q-bus slots
available

RFxx
Opt.

RFxx,
TKxx,
orTF85
Opt.

CPU plus
1-4 Memory
Slots

432112345

12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2

"'111111-----

Power Control Cable _ _ __,
BU-3109

Notes:
• A power control cable connects the system to the B400X expander. This power control cable
permits the power to be turned on and off for the entire expanded system with the on/off switch on the
system power supply.
• B400X expander includes a 9-foot (2 .7-meter) DSSI cable and one power control cable and Q-bus
extender modules with cables.

VAX Systems

1.81

R400X and B400X Expansion Pedestals
Storage
Expansion Pedestal

R400X-B9
Storage expansion pedestal; provides seven storage cavities;
each storage cavity houses one 5.25-inch RF-disk or one 3.5 -inch RF3x disk or
one dual RF3x disk assembly (RF3x2). The top right cavity can house one
5.25-inch tape (TF85E-Jx). The R400X can be configured with one or two DSSI
buses (split bus). In single-bus mode, R400X supports seven DSSI devices-in
split bus mode, the top tier (four storage cavities) is dedicated to one bus, and
the lower tier (three storage cavities) is dedicated to the other bus. TKxx devices
are not supported in R400X enclosure. Included with the enclosure are one
9-foot (2.7-m) DSSI cable (BC21M-09), one 3.0-meter (0.9-foot) power control
cable (BC09F-10), and one 6-foot (1.8-m) KZQSA cable (BC06P-06), universal
power supply, and 120-V power cord (for non-120-V use, a country-specific
power cord is required). Note: Additional BC21M-09 cables may be required for
split bus or DSSI VAXcluster configurations. Refer to Chapter 5 , VAXcluster
Options/Systems Expansion, for DSSI VAXcluster configuration rules.

Specifications

Height
Width
Depth
Weight

Q-bus and Storage
Expansion Pedestal

B400X-B9
Q-bus and storage expansion pedestal; provides four storage
cavities and 10 additional Q-bus slots. B400X has 12 slots, one slot in the system
and one slot in B400X are used to make the connection between the enclosures-modules and cables required for the connection are included. Each storage cavity can house one 5.25-inch RF-disk or 3.5-inch RF3x disk or one dual
RF3x disk assembly (RF3x2). The right cavity can house one 5.25-inch tape
(TF85E-Jx/TKxx). Included with the enclosure are Q-bus extender modules,
9-foot (2.7-m) Q-bus cables, one 9-foot (2.7-m) DSSI cable (BC21M-09), one
3.0-meter (0.9-foot) power control cable (BC09F-10), and one 6-foot (1.8-m)
KZQSA cable (BC06P-06), universal power supply, and 120-V power cord (for
non-120-V, a country-specific power cord is required). Note: See VAX 4000
Expansion Diagrams for supported storage configurations in R400X and B400X
pedestals.

Specifications

Height
Width
Depth
Weight'"

Power Cords

Select one for each 220/ 240-V expansion pedestal; 120-V power cord is
included.
BN20B-2E
BN22C-2E
BN22D-2E
BN22E-2E
BN22F-2E
BN22H-2E
BN22J-2E
BN22K-2E
BN22L-2E

1.82

VAX Systems

69 cm (27 .0 in.)
53 cm (21.0 in.)
45 cm (17 .8 in.)
68 kg (150 lb), fully configured

U.S./Canada/J apan
Australia/ New Zealand
Austria, Belgium, France, Germany, Finland,
Netherlands, Portugal, Spain, Sweden
United Kingdom/ Ireland
Switzerland
Denmark
Italy
India
Israel

Rack-mountable VAX 4000 Systems

Product Description

Rack-mountable VAX 4000 systems are mechanically reconfigured VAX 4000
pedestal systems capable of being mounted into a 19-inch-wide ANSI/EIA (formerly RETMA) and MIL-STD-compatible cabinet.
Rack-mountable VAX 4000 systems are ideal for two- or three-system DSSI
VAXcluster configurations. The rack-mountable systems can be configured in
cabinets with other peripherals to save floorspace, and can be configured to
customer requirements in the factory or on-site.
Rack-mountable VAX 4000 Models 400, 500, and 600 are offered in a BA441
chassis. They are identical to VAX 4000 Model 400, Model 500, and Model 600
pedestal systems' functionality and configuration requirements.
Rack-mountable VAX 4000 systems feature front-to-back airflow. This allows systems to be stacked, efficiently utilizing vertical rack or cabinet space. They can
also be installed in environmental cabinets for use in harsh environments.
Rack-mountable VAX 4000 systems chassis are slide equipped for easy maintenance and configuring. Slides and cable management brackets are included with
all VAX 4000 rack-mountable systems.
Items to consider when selecting a 19-inch rack, cabinet, or enclosure:
·Each BA431 or BA441 requires 35.5 cm (14 inches) of vertical rack space.
· Power controller as well as voltage and total current requirements
· Face or filler panel requirements
· Front door must be louvered in the area of the BA4 31/BA441 chassis to accom3
modate 180 ft / min of cooling air
· Rear door must be louvered in the area of the BA4 3 l/BA441 chassis to accom3
modate 180 ft / min of cooling air
· Front stabilizer leg or bar must be provided to compensate for systems being
pulled out for servicing or cabinets must be secured to the floor or to another
cabinet in order to prevent overturning

VAX Systems

1.83

Rack-mountable VAX 4000 Systems
Ordering Information
Traditional Systems

OpenVMS Base Systems

Two-System DSSI VAXcluster
Multiuser Systems

Note: With the exception of the BA441 rackmount enclosure, systems include
the same items as the VAX 4000 pedestal systems listed on page 1.72.

DV-44LT1-D9
DV-44LT1-E9
DV-45LT1-E9
DV-45LT1-F9
DV-46LT1-E9
DV-46LT1-F9

Model 400 (32 Mbytes of memory)
Model 400 (64 Mbytes of memory)
Model 500 (64 Mbytes of memory)
Model 500 (128 Mbytes of memory)
Model 600 (64 Mbytes of memory)
Model 600 (128 Mbytes of memory)

DV-44LAA-D9
DV-44LAA-E9
DV-45LAA-E9
DV-45LAA-F9
DV-46LAA-E9
DV-46LAA-F9

Model 400 (32 Mbytes of memory)
Model 400 (64 Mbytes of memory)
Model 500 (64 Mbytes of memory)
Model 500 (128 Mbytes of memory)
Model 600 (64 Mbytes of memory)
Model 600 (128 Mbytes of memory)

DV-44LT2-E9
DV-44LT2-E2/EA
DV-45LT2-F9
DV-45LT2-F2/FA

DV-46LT2-F9
DV-46LT2-F2/FA

Configuring Information

Model 400 two-system DSSI VAXcluster (with 64 Mbytes
of memory in each system)
Model 400 two-system DSSI VAXcluster (with 64 Mbytes
of memory in each system) in H9602 cabinet; 120/240 V
Model 500 two-system DSSI VAXcluster (with
128 Mbytes of memory in each system)
Model 500 two-system DSSI VAXcluster (with
128 Mbytes of memory in each system) in H9602 cabinet; 120/240 V
Model 600 two-system DSSI VAXcluster (with
128 Mbytes of memory in each system)
Model 600 two-system DSSI VAXc~uster (with
128 Mbytes of memory in each system) in H9602 cabinet; 120/240 V

Refer to appropriate VAX 4000 Model 400, 500 , 600 configuration rules.
Note: On the previous page, the left photo shows a three-system DSSI
VAXcluster custom configured in an H9702 cabinet. The right photo shows a
single VAX 4000 mounted in an H9602 cabinet. Contact the EiC Sales Support
Center at 800-832-6277 or 603-884-8990 for information about these systems or
custom configurations.

1.84

VAX Systems

Rack-mountable VAX 4000 Systems
Specifications/Site Preparation
Physical Characteristics
Height
Width
Depth
Weight+
Mounting Requirements

35.5 cm (14 in.)
48.2 cm (19 in.)
74.73 cm (29.42 in.)
System weight (approximately) 58 kg (128 lb)
Shipping weight (approximately) 64 kg (141 lb)

Conforms to ANSI/EIA ES-310-C-77 and MIL-STD 189 standards for a 19-inch panel
width and 30-inch minimum depth enclosure.

Clearances
Front
Rear
Sides

Operating

Service

20.3 cm (8 in.)
20.3 cm (8 in.)
None

76.0 cm (30 in.)
9.0 cm (36 in.)
None

Environmental
Temperature

Operating
Nonoperating

10° to 40° C (50° to 104° F)
-40° to 66° C (-40° to 151° F)

Relative Humidity

Operating
Nonoperating

20% to 80% noncondensing
10% to 90% noncondensing

Cooling Air Required

306 m3/ hr (180 ft3 /min. )

Altitude

Operating
Non operating

2438 meters ( 8,000 feet)
4877 meters (16,000 feet)

Mechanical Shock

Operating
Nonoperating

10 g pk for 10 ±3 mis, 112 sine wave all 3 axes
Incline impact to 1.75 mis (5.75 ft/ s) all sides;
Tilt drop to 20.3 cm (8 inches)

Acoustics

Operating
Idle

5 .5 bels, 40 dBA
5 .2 bels, 37 dBA

Electrical

101

120

220

240

Voltage range (Vac)
Power source phase
Nominal frequency (Hz)
Frequency range (Hz)
RMS current (steady state)
at nominal voltage (amps)
Startup current-30 s (amps)
Maximum inrush current (amps)
Maximum power consumption (Watts)
Heat dissipation (Btu/hr)
Circuit breaker rating (amps)
Power supply power connector
U.S. power cord plugt

90-110
Single
50-60
47-63
11.9

104-128
Single
50-60
47-63
11.2

176-242
Single
50-60
47-63
6.1

186-264
Single
50-60
47-63
5.8

12.6
100
850
2978
14
IEC 320 C16
NEMA 5-15P

10.6
100
850
2978
14
IEC 320 C16
NEMA 5-15P

6.2
83
850
2978
14
IEC 320 C16
NEMA 5-16P

5.8
83
850
2978
14
IEC 320 C16
NEMA 5-16P

Nominal AC Voltage

1
'

Built-in universal power supply automatically selects the correct voltage range for either 120-V or 240-V operation.
tStandard U.S. 15A 3-pin 120-Vac plug. Power cords for other countries are available.
:j: Weight given is for typical enclosure fully loaded with module options, power supply, maximum number of Integrated Storage Elements, and one tape
drive.

VAX Systems

1.85

Rack-mountable VAX 4000 System
Mounting Diagrams

On/Off
Switch

- - - - - 1 8 . 3 1 - - - -1
(46.51)

-1

1.48
(3.76)

DD
13.97
(35.48)

RFxx,
TKxx,

RFxx

RF xx

D T~~5

L........______

9.88
(25.08)

_j
-t
0.50
(1.27)

0.25
0.62
(0.64) (1 .57)

Note:
• Dimensions in inches (cm)

BU -311 5

Front View
· - - - - 29.42 - - - - -(74.73)

-·--1-

--------1

Overall

1.75(4.44)

27.67 - - - - 1
(70.28)

Inside Cabinet

r;:i

25.00
(63.5)

ble Mgmt
Bracket

r;-;i

1
- -

1.67
(4.24)

Ic:::=:>c:::=:>c:::=:>JD

- -- ---------1

Rai 1-to-Rai I

· - - - - - - - -- - 26.00
(66.04)
Slide Length

(24.00 (60.96) Slide Travel)
Note:
• Dimensions in inches (cm}

BU-311 6

Side View

1.86

VAX Systems

VAX 4000 Upgrades and Conversion Kits
Note: VAX 4000 Models 400, 500, and 600 require MS690 memory.
MS690-UC
MS690-UD

64 Mbytes of memory (MS690). Requires return of 32 Mbytes of memory (MS670-BA).
128 Mbytes of memory (MS690). Requires return of 64 Mbytes of memory (one MS670-CA or
two MS670-BA).

Note: The following upgrade kits are for VAX/VAXserver 4000 Model 300 systems with serial numbers WFOOOOOOOO
through WF04899999 and AYOOOOOOOO through AY04700100.

Order
Number

Includes:

From

VAX 4000
Model 300 Multiuser

VAX 4000
Model 400

675XR-EE

Upgrade licenses for Open VMS Base, Rdb runtime,
40-user, DECnet end-node; new backplane.

VAX 4000
Model 300 Server

VAX 4000
Model 400

675XR-EF

Upgrade licenses for OpenVMS Base, Rdb runtime,
VAXcluster, DECnet full-function; new backplane.

VAX 4000
Model 300 Multiuser

VAX 4000
Model 500

680XR-EE

Upgrade licenses for OpenVMS Base, Rdb runtime,
40-user, DECnet end-node; new backplane. Requires
MS690 memory.

VAX 4000
Model 300 Server

VAX 4000
Model 500

680XR-EF

Upgrade licenses for Open VMS Base, Rdb runtime,
VAXcluster, DECnet full -function; new backplane.
Replaces 680XR-AF.

VAX 4000
Model 300 Multiuser

VAX 4000
Model 600

690XR-EE

Upgrade licenses for OpenVMS Base, Rdb runtime,
40-user, DECnet end-node; new backplane. Replaces
690XR-AE.

VAX 4000
Model 300 Server

VAX 4000
Model 600

690XR-EF

Upgrade licenses for OpenVMS Base, Rdb runtime,
VAXcluster, DECnet full-function; new backplane.
Replaces 690XR-AF.

Note: The following upgrade kits are for VAX/VAXserver 4000 Model 300 systems with serial numbers WF04900000 and
higher, AY04700101 and higher, and serial numbers that begin KA or NI.

""O
OS

Order
Number

From

VAX 4000
Model 300 Multiuser

VAX 4000
Model 400

675XR-FE

Upgrade licenses for Open VMS Base, Rdb runtime,
40-user, DECnet end-node.

VAX 4000
Model 3 00 Server

VAX 4000
Model 400

675XR-FF

Upgrade licenses for Open VMS Base, Rdb runtime,
VAXcluster, DECnet full-function.

VAX 4000
Model 300 Multiuser

VAX 4000
Model 500

680XR-FE

Upgrade licenses for OpenVMS Base, Rdb runtime,
40-user, DECnet end-node. Replaces 680XR-BE.

VAX 4000
Model 300 Server

VAX 4000
Model 500

680XR-FF

Upgrade licenses for Open VMS Base, Rdb runtime,
VAXcluster, DECnet full-function. Replaces 680XR-BF.

VAX 4000
Model 300 Multiuser

VAX 4000
Model 600

690XR-FE

Upgrade licenses for Open VMS Base, Rdb runtime,
40-user, DECnet end-node. Replaces 690XR-BE.

VAX 4000
Model 3 00 Server

VAX 4000
Model 600

690XR-FF

Upgrade licenses for Open VMS Base, Rdb runtime,
VAXcluster, DECnet full-function . Replaces 690XR-BF.

::J

§
~

1.88

VAX Systems

Includes:

VAX 4000 Upgrades and Conversion Kits
All software must be upgraded to the proper rating when upgrading from server to timeshare systems. The following
upgrades replace the CPU in the existing system enclosure.

Order
Number

From

VAXserver 4000
Model 300

VAX 4000
Model 300

670XR-AA

VMS 1- to 40-user license, VAXcluster license, and
DECnet end-node license.

MicroVAX
3500/3600
3800/3900

VAX 4000
Model 200

660XR-AC

H3602 1/ 0 panel, VMS unlimited-user license, and
DECnet end-node license. Requires MS650-Bx memory.

MicroVAX
3300/3400

VAX 4000
Model 200

660

VMS unlimited-user license, and DECnet end-node
license. Requires MS650-Bx memory.

MicroVAX
3500/3600,
3800/3900

VAX 4000
Model 200

660XR-AA

H3602 1/ 0 panel, VMS 1- to 40-user license, and
DECnet end-node license. Requires MS650-Bx memory.

VAXserver
3500/3600,
3800/3900

VAXserver 4000
Model 200

660XR-BA

H3602 1/ 0 panel, VMS File and Application Server
license, DECnet full-function license, VAXcluster license,
and VMS/ULTRIX Connection license. Requires
MS650-Bx memory.

MicroVAX
3300/3400

VAX 4000
Model 200

660XR! CA

VMS 1- to 20-user license, and DECnet end-node
license. Requires MS650-Bx memory.

VAXserver
3300/3400

VAXserver 4000
Model 200

660XR-DA

VMS File and Application Server license, DECnet
full-function license, VAXclus'ter license, and
VMS/ULTRIX Connection license. Requires MS650-Bx
memory.

VAXserver 4000
Model 200

VAX 4000
Model 200

660XR-EA

VMS 1- to 20-user license, DECnet end-node license,
and VAXcluster Software license.

VAXserver 3100
Model 10 or 20

VAXserver 3100
Model 1Oe or 20e

310XR-EA

VMS File and Application Server license, and DECnet
end-node license.

VAX 4000
Model 400

VAX 4000
Model 500

680XR-HJ

Upgrade license for OpenVMS Base.

VAX 4000
Model 400

VAX 4000
Model 600

690XR-HJ

Upgrade license for OpenVMS Base.

VAX 4000
Model 500
Multiuser

VAX 4000
Model 600

690XR-JE

Upgrade licenses for Open VMS Base, Rdb runtime,
40-user, DECnet end-node. Replaces 690XR-DE.

VAX 4000
Model 500
Server

VAX 4000
Model 600

690XR-JF

Upgrade licenses for OpenVMS Base, Rdb runtime,
VAXcluster, DECnet full-function. Replaces 690XR-DF.

VAX 4000
Model 500
Open VMS Base

VAX 4000
Model 600

690XR-JJ

Upgrade license for OpenVMS Base.

Includes new CPU and

VAX Systems

1.87

·V AX 4000 Systems and Servers Options
This hardware support table specifies options supported on VAX 4000 systems and should be used as a guideline only.
Maximum options supported are dependent on bus loads device drivers, and applications.
Option

Description

Maximum
Supported

Q-bus
Slots

Current (Amps)
(Max)

Power
(Max)

Bus Loads

Watts

10.50

2.5

0.5

12 v

2-channel DIA with 12-bit resolution; drivers available 2
with DEC RT Integrator software

2.10

0.00

ADQ32-SAISF

12-bit, 200 kHz AID; 32 single-endedl16 different
channels; drivers available with DEC RT Integrator
software

4.45

0.00

22.25

2.5

0.5

ADVl 1-SA/SF

12-bit, 50 kHz AID, 16 single-endedl8 different
channels; drivers available with DEC RT Integrator
software

2.00

0.00

10.00

2.3

0.5

AXVll-SA/SF

16 single-ended, 8 differential channels, 25 kHz AID
and two-channel DIA; drivers available with DEC RT
Integrator software

2.00

0.00

10.00

1.2

0.3

CXA16-AAIAF

16 asynchronous serial lines, EIA-423A, no modem
control (not supported by DECnet-VAX)

Note 5

1.60

0.20

10.40

3.0

0.5

CXB16-AA/AF

16 asynchronous serial lines, EIA-422, no modem
control (not supported by DECnet-VAX)

Note 5

2.00

0.00

10.00

3.0

0.5

CXY08-AAIAF

8 asynchronous serial lines, EIA-232C, modem control Note 5

1.64

0.40

12.94

3.0

0.5

DEQRA-CA

Token Ring Q-bus adapter. Uses same configuration
2
guidelines as DESQA Ethernet interface for backplane
placement. Requires VMS V5.5 and MDM V136 for
full DEQRA support.

5.0

0.1

26.2

5.0

4.27

DESQA-SA/SF

Second 802.31Ethernet interface (ThinWire or thick
wire)

2.40

0.22

14.64

3.3

0.5

DFAOl-AAIAF

Dual 2400-baud modem with interface

1.90

0.04

10.30

3.0

1.0

DJ-DFAOl-xx

Dual 2400-baud modem with interface and VAX
Public Access Communications software.
Note: For VMS multiuser systems only.

1.90

0.04

10.30

3.0

1.0

DIV32-SA/SF

Q-bus ISDN rate access communication interface (not
supported by DECnet-VAX)

5.50

0.00

27.50

3.5

1.0

DPVll-SA/SF

Single-line EIA-2321EIA-4221EIA-423 synchronous
serial line interface

1.20

0.30

9.60

1.0

1.01

DRQ3B-SA/SF

Double buffered DMA parallel interface; 1.3 MHz;
drivers available with DEC RT Integrator software

1 (Note 1)

4.50

0.00

22.50

2.0

0.5

1.80

0.00

9.00

2.0

1.0

AAVll-SA/SF

DRVlJ-SAISF

64 -line digital IIO interface (drivers available in DEC

---

RT Integrator software)

DRVlW-SA/SF

16-bit parallel interface (drivers available in DEC RT
Integrator software)

1.80

0.00

9.00

2.0

1.0

DSVll-SAISF

Synchronous serial-line interface providing two
high-speed connections to SNA, X.25, and DECnet
networks; VAX 4000 Model 300 requires VAX Wide
Area Network Device Drivers Vl.lA Note: Order one
per system-order DSVl 1-SBISG for additional
DSVlls (not supported by DECnet-VAX).

5.43

0.69

35.43

3.9

1.0

{I)

.§

~
0
0
0

"'1"

'""t

Q,1 1

DSVl 1-SB/SG

Additional synchronous serial-line interface option.
Note: Total of five DSVlls per system

5.43

0.69

35.43

3.9

1.0

DTC05-SA

Voice processing module (Note 4)

Note 4

4.0

0.0

15.8

3.6

0.75

~·

DTCN5-UG

Tl telephony upgrade kit (Note 4)

Note 4

7.17

0.0

35.8

7.0

1.5

<
·>

IBQOl-SA/SF

BITBUS-to-Q-bus interface

Note 5

5.00

0.30

28.60

4.6

1.0

{I) '

VAX Systems

1.89

VAX 4000 Systems and Servers Options

Description

Option

Maximum
Supported

Q-bus
Slots

Current (Amps)
(Max)

Power
(Max)

Bus Loads

12 v

Watts

3.50

0.00

17.50

2.0

1.0

13.50

0.03

67 .86

3.0

0.5

IEQll-SA/SF

IEEE-488 Q-bus interface providing two IEEE buses,
each with DMA capability; drivers available with
VAXlab software

KDA50-SE/SG

SDI disk controller

KFQSA-SE/SG

DSSI storage adapter

5.50

0.00

27.50

4.4

0.5

KLESI-SA/SF

Controller for (and included with) TU81E and RSV20

4.00

0.00

20.00

0.5

1.0

KWVl 1-SA/SF

Programmable realtime clock; drivers available with
DEC RT Integrator software

2.20

o.oi

11.16

1.0

0.3

KXJll-SF

Realtime or I/O processor; supported by VAX
Coprocessor/ RSX software; field installed only

1 (Notes 2,3)

5.10

0.70

33.90

2.0

1.0

KZQSA-SA/SF

TLZxx/ RRD4 x/TSZxx adapter

5.40

0.0

27 .00

4.4

0.5

LPVll-SA

Controller for (and included with) parallel printers

2.80

0.00

14.00

1.8

0.5

3.0

0.5

MRVll-D

ROM option; field installed only

1.60

0.00

8.00

MS650-BA/BF

16-Mbyte memory option for Model 200

4 (Notes 2,3)

3.50

0.00

17.50

0.0

MS650-BB/BH

8-Mbyte memory option for Model 200

4 (Notes 2,3)

3.10

0.00

15.50

0.0

MS650-BC/BJ

32-Mbyte memory option for Model 200

2 (Notes 2,3)

2.80

0.0

-14.0

0.0

MS670-BA

32-Mbyte memory option for Model 300

4 (Notes 1,3)

3.25

0.0

16.25

0.0

MS670-CA

64-Mbyte memory option for Model 300

4 (Notes 1,3)

4.75

0.0

23.75

0.0

MS690-BA

32-Mbyte memory option for Model 500

4 (Notes 1,2)

8.2

0.00

41.0

0.0

MS690-CA

64-Mbyte memory option for Model 500

4 (Notes 1,2)

6.1

0.00

30.5

0.0

MS690-DA

128-Mbyte memory option for Model 500

4 (Notes 1,2)

8.2

0.00

41.0

0.0

M7530-PA

Con troller for (and included with) TSV05

Note 5

2.50

0.00

12.50

3.0

1.0

RF31T-xx

381-Mbyte 3.5-inch full-height DSSI ISE

Note 6

NIA

1.71

0.85

13.7

0.0

RF312

Two 381-Mbyte 3.5-inch ISEs

Note 7

NIA

3.42

1.70

27.4

0.0

RF35

852-Mbyte 3.5-inch full-height ISE

Note 6

NIA

0.75

0.95

15.15

0.0

RF352

Two 852-Mbyte 3.5-inch full-height ISEs

Note 6

NIA

1.50

1.90

30.30

0.0

RF72E-xx

1-Gbyte 5.25-inch full-height ISE

Note 6

NIA

1.20

1.75

27.00

0.0

RF73E-xx

2-Gbyte 5.25-inch full-height ISE

Note 6

NIA

1.20

1.75

27.00

0.0

TF85-TA

2.6-Gbyte cartridge tape subsystem in tabletop
enclosure

Note 7

NIA

TF85E-JA/JF

2.6-Gbyte embedded cartridge tape subsystem

Note 7

NIA

1.5

36.30

0.0

NIA

TK50E-xx

95-Mbyte embedded tape drive (one per controller)

TQK50-xx

Controller for TK50 (second device is mounted in
expansion enclosure)

TK70E-xx

295-Mbyte embedded tape drive (one per controller)

TQK70-xx

Controller for (second device is mounted in
expansion enclosure)

VS30U-xx

8-plane color graphics controller (QDSS)

1 •

NIA

1.35

2.40

35.55

0.0

2.90

0.00

14.50

2.8

0.5

1.50

2.40

36.30

0.0

3.50

0.00

17.50

4.3

0.5

12 .60

0.75

72.00

3.5

1.0

Not supported on Model 200.
2
Not supported on Model 300.
3
Not supported on Models 5001600.
4
Refer to Multiline DECvoice in Chapter 4, Specialized Systems.
5
Number of modules limited only by Q-bus slot/ power availability.
6
Number of drives limited by number of DSSI controllers (KFQSA and embedded adapter) supported by the system as well as power availability.
7
Maximum two per DSSI bus.

1.90

VAX Systems

VAX 6000 Systems and Servers

111111111111111111111111111111111111
111111111111111111111111111111111111
111111111111111111111111111111111111
111111111111111111111111111111111111
111111111111111111111111111111111111

111111111111111111111111111111111111
111111111111111111111111111111111111
111111111111111111111111111111111111
111111111111111111111111111111111111

Product Description

The VAX 6000 system is ideal for the rigorous demands of the datacenter. Its
CPU power balances well with large memory and storage capacity, fast 1/ 0 , and
vector processing options to provide a high-performance system that's up to the
challenge of the most demanding datacenter applications. Its modular platform
allows users to constantly improve performance while building upon the value of
their initial investment.
A broad range of system performance-from 7 to as much as 150 times the
processor performance of the VAX-111780 (depending on the VAX 6000 model
chosen)-is made possible by a unique modular platform strategy featuring symmetric multiprocessing (SMP)-key to VAX 6000 systems growth. This platform
strategy designs out obsolescence by allowing the expansion of performance up
to 50 times in the same cabinet in minutes simply by adding or changing modules. Memory and 1/0 also expand easily, and placing the VAX 6000 system in a
VAXcluster allows a further increase in availability and storage capacity.
The VAX 6000 system allows the addition of up to 512 Mbytes of memory in
32-, 64-, and 128-Mbyte increments, and increased 1/ 0 speed to keep pace with
the expanded capabilities of the CPU-as easily as additional processors are
added.
The VAX 6000 system's 1/0 design begins with the 100-Mbyte-per-second, XMI
high-speed system bus. This bus features a streamlined bus structure, plus 14
slots to provide for growth. XMI 1/0 controllers include: a CI VAXcluster controller, DSSI storage controllers, and Ethernet and FDDI controllers. Each controller has its own high-speed processor, to increase the 1/0 speed. Additionally,
up to five VAXBI buses can be added. Two VME bus adapters that connect to
over 4,000 industry-standard VME options can also be added.
Vector processing offers yet another option for VAX 6000 system growth. An
integrated VAX vector processor can offer 3 to 20 times faster execution time
over a scalar processor for compute-intensive FORTRAN or APL applications.
And VAX vector processing is fully supported by a wide range of applications
and development tools. VAX 6000 systems with vector processing offer
supercomputing performance at economical prices.

VAX Systems

1.91

VAX 6000 Systems and Servers
Product Description (Continued)

VAX 6000 system bandwidth-up to 100 Mbytes per second-comes from a
balanced approach that encompasses the entire system, from the CPU, to buses
and storage controllers, to disks and software tools. This approach means that
critical data moves through the system fast and keeps the datacenter operating at
peak performance.
VAX 6000 systems are powerful enough to function as servers connecting hundreds of PCs, as high-speed database engines, and as transaction processing systems for a widely distributed user base. Enhanced multivendor networking capabilities plus a commitment to applications portability support users goals for an
open computing environment.
Best of all, the VAX 6000 is a member of the compatible VAX family of computers. It offers a choice of the robust and open VMS operating system or
ULTRIX, Digital's implementation of the UNIX operating system. Digital's
approach to open systems computing ensures application portability, as well as
the exceptional dependability, data integrity, system management, and security
expected from VAX systems.
The high availability built into the VAX 6000 system through the VMS operating
system offers maximum uptime and protection of data. And when even higher
availability is required, it's made possible in the following ways.
• An entry-level VAX 6000 Digital Storage Systems Interconnect (DSSI) VAXcluster
system offers ihcreased system uptime and availability, because if one system goes
down, the others can continue processing critical data.
·When more systems and storage are needed, a CI-based VAXcluster system offers
even greater flexibility and superior system, application, and data availability.
· A fault-tolerant VAXft system used as a front end to a VAX 6000 system offers
the highest level of system availability in a single location.
· The high-speed FDDI network lets users connect two VAXcluster systems in
separate geographic locations up to 40 km apart.
The VMS file journaling feature protects data on a VAX 6000 system even in the
event of a power failure. It records all transactions in a temporary file that allows
recovery of every keystroke or file operation.
VAX 6000 systems provide complete data and transaction integrity for both distributed and centralized production environments through the transaction
monitors, database management systems, and interconnect products supported by
the VMS operating system.

Digital is committed to open computing. In addition to Network Application
Support (NAS), which ties together applications running across a wide range of
desktops and operating systems, open interfaces to the VMS operating system
allow users to easily move UNIX or ULTRIX application to VMS, and to automatically benefit from the robust VMS environment.

l
'cl)
~

u
t;
u

"i::>

=
....ii

There is a full range of upgrades available for the VAX 6000 chosen. Additional
processors can be added, or faster processors can be added as they become
available .

ell

flJ

'°><
<
>

' 1.92

VAX Systems

VAX 6000 Systems and Servers
Step 1-Systems
Select system. Unless included with preconfigured system, the following items are required.
• InfoServer 150, TF85 , TF857, or TK70 for software distribution
• KDM70 (SDI/STI) disk/tape controller, KFMSA (DSSI) disk/tape adapter, or CIXCD (CI) controller
· System disk device
· Console terminal
• VAXcluster Software license for each system when multiple systems are used in a VAXcluster environment
Additional items may be added as required. For optimum backup performance a high-capacity tape drive is recommended.
ADVANTAGE-SERVER Systems include
· 14-slot XMI system bus
• 64 or 128 Mbytes of memory
·DEC LANcontroller 400 (DEMNA) 802.3/ Ethernet
controller
• KFMSA disk/tape controller
• TF85 2.6-Gbyte cartridge tape drive
· Two RF73 2.0-Gbyte disks and cables
· VT420 console terminal

· LA75 Plus console printer
· VT420/LA75 table
• Console cable
· OpenVMS base license (with POSIX)
· NAS 300 package (with DECnet end-node license
and Rdb Runtime license)
· One full-year product warranty (standard warranty
recommended)

VAX 6000

Order Number
AE = 60 Hz, 208 V
AF = 50 Hz, 380/416 V

Memory

Model 510
Model 510
Model 610
Model 610

SV-6E04A-AE/AF
SV-6E04C-AE/AF
SV-6F04B-AE/AF
SV-6F04E-AE/AF

64 Mbytes
128 Mbytes
64 Mbytes
128 Mbytes

Preconfigured DSSI VAXcluster Systems include
· VAX 6000 systems with 14-slot XMI system bus
· 128 Mbytes of memory per system
· DEC LANcontroller 400 (DEMNA) 802.3/Ethernet
controller per system
• KFMSA disk/tape controller per system
• SF210 storage array with four RF73 disks and TF857
tape drive for Model 610; SF200 storage array with
eight RF72 disks and TF857 tape drive for Model 510
• VT420 console terminal per system
· LA75 Plus console printer per system
· VT420/ LA75 table per system
• Console cable per system

XMI Slots Available
Total Slots
VO Capable
10
10
10
10

8
8
8
8

• Network kit for InfoServer (DESTA and BC16M)
per system
· Battery Backup Unit (BEU) per system
·VMS unlimited-user license (with Rdb/VMS
Runtime) per system
· VAXcluster Software license per system
· DECnet full-function licenses (with PATHWORKS
for VMS) per system
· PATHWORKS for VMS media and documentation
· One full-year product warranty (standard warranty
recommended)

VAX 6000

Order Number
AK = 60 Hz, 208 V
AN = 50 Hz, 380/416 V

Configuration

Model 510
Model 610
Model 610

DV-6E03A-AK/AN
DV-6F04D-AK/AN
DV-6F04B-AK/AN

Two VAX 6000-510 systems
Two VAX 6000-610 systems
Three VAX 6000-610 systems

XMI Slots Available
Total Slots
VO Capable
10
10
10

8
8
8

VAX Systems

1.93

VAX 6000 Systems and Servers
Step 1-Systems (Continued)
Traditional Systems include
· 14-slot XMI system bus
· 64 or 128 Mbytes of memory
·DEC LANcontroller 400 (DEMNA) 802.3/Ethernet
controller
• Console cable
· VMS unlimited-user license (with Rdb/VMS Runtime)

· DECnet full-function license (with PATHWORKS
for VMS) unless noted differently
· PATHWORKS for VMS media and documentation
· One full-year product warranty (standard warranty
recommended)

Order Number

VAX 6000

AE = 60 Hz, 208 V
AJ = 50 Hz, 380/416 V

Model 510

65AMD-AE/AJ
65A~E-AE-AJ

Model 610

66AMC-AE/AJ
66AMA-AE/AJ

XMI Slots Available
Total Slots
I/0 Capable

Memory

11
11
11
11

64 Mbytes
128 Mbytes
64 Mbytes
128 Mbytes

Base Servers include
· 14-slot XMI system bus
· 64 or 128 Mbytes of memory
·DEC LANcontroller 400 (DEMNA) 802.3/Ethernet
controller

9
9

· Console cable
• OpenVMS base license (with POSIX)
· One full-year product warranty (standard warranty
recommended)

Order Number

VAX 6000
Model 510
Model 610

AA =60 Hz, 208 V
AB =50 Hz, 380/416 V

Memory

65AMD-AA/AB
65AME-AA/AB
66AMA-AA/AB
66AMC-AA/AB

64 Mbytes
128 Mbytes
64 Mbytes
128 Mbytes

XMI Slots Available
Total Slots

I/O Capable

11
11
11
11

9
9
9
9

Step 2-Memory/CPU Options
Select additional memory if required. All models can be expanded to a maximum of 512 Mbytes. Refer to the following
table for recommended minimum memory configurations.

VAX 6000

Vectors

Model 510/ 610
Model 510

One

Recommended
Minimum lnterleave 1'

Recommended
Minimum Memory

1
1

64 Mbytes
64 Mbytes

'"See VAX 6000 Memory in Chapter 5 , VAXcluster Options/Systems Expansion, for interleave description.

MS65A-BA
DL-MS65A-CA
MS65A-CA
DL-MS65A-DA
MS65A-DA
H7236-A
FV64A-AA

1.94

VAX Systems

32 Mbytes of memory; requires one XMI slot, factory or field installed
64 Mbytes of memory, requires one XMI slot, factory installed only
64 Mbytes of memory; requires one XMI slot, factory or field installed
128 Mbytes of memory, requires one XMI slot, factory installed only
128 Mbytes of memory; requires one XMI slot, factory or field installed
Memory battery backup, maximum one per system
Vector processor, maximum one per Model 510. Requires one XMI slot. Note: Not supported on
Model 600 systems.

VAX 6000 Systems and Servers
Step 5b-External Storage (Continued)
Tape and Optical Drives
TF85-TA

2.6-Gbyte tabletop cartridge tape subsystem.

TF857-AA/AB

18.2-Gbyte cartridge tape drive. Maximum two per SF200/SF210 storage array, one per SFl 00
storage pedestal. See TF857 description in Chapter 7. Note: See Tx800 family in Chapter 7 for
more information.

TA91/TA79/TA81

TA91 tape drive. Maximum two masters per HSC5X-DA; two masters per KDM70. Each master
supports three additional slave units; cables included.
TA79/TA81 tape drives. Maximum four per HSC5X-DA, two per KDM70; cables included. Supports
up to three TU79 add-on units. See descriptions in Chapter 7.

TU81E-BA/BB

TU81 tape drive. Maximum four TU81-Plus tapes/RBV20/RBV60 masters per VAXBI channel; four
TU81-Plus tapes per system (cables included). Requires DWMBB-xx VAXBI expansion option and
one VAXBI slot. See TU81-Plus description in Chapter 7.

RV20/RV64 Optical
Drives

Maximum four RBV60/RBV20 masters/TU81-Plus tape drives per VAXBI channel. Maximum three
RV60 slaves per master. Requires DWMBB-xx VAXBI expansion option and one VAXBI slot. See
RV20/RV64 'description in Chapter 7.

Step 6-CI VAXcluster Options
For CI VAXcluster configurations, select appropriate VAXcluster options. CI controller, BNCIA cables, and VAXcluster
Software license required.
HSS90-GA/GB
HSS60-GA/GB

HSC90/HSC60 VAXcluster starter package. Includes HSC90-AA/AB or HSC60-AA/AB, one BNCIA-20
cable set, one HSC5X-DA disk/tape data channel, one HSC9X-FA eight-port data channel, and one
SC008-AC Star Coupler.

HSC90-BA

HSC90 storage controller. Supports four HSC5X-DA and four HSC9X-FA data channel cards for a
total of 48 ports; BNCIA-xx cable set required.

HSC60-BA

HSC60 storage controller. Supports one HSC5X-DA and two HSC9X-FA data channel cards for a
total of 20 ports; BNCIA-xx cable set required.

BNCIA-xx

Computer interconnect cable sets. Choose required length 10, 20 or 45 meters
(10 m = 32.8 ft, 20 m = 65.6 ft, 45 m = 147.6 ft).

HSC5X-DA

Disk/tape channel. Supports four DSA disk drives or tape drives. (Disks and tapes cannot be
combined on the same HSC5X-DA.)

HSC9X-FA
SC008-AC

Disk data channel. Supports up to eight DSA disk drives.
8-Port Star Coupler. Maximum four Star Couplers per system.

SC008-AD

Star Coupler. Upgrades SC008-AC to 16 ports; maximum one per SC008-AC.

CISCE-AA

Star Coupler expander. Upgrade to either 24 or 32 ports. Requires two SC008-ACs and two
SC008-ADs for 32 ports; requires two SC008-ACs and one SC008-AD for 24 ports. Maximum 32
ports per Star Coupler.

VAXcluster
Console System

The VCS connects to the console ports of each VAXcluster node to provide a single, central point of
control for all clusterwide console functions. Refer to Chapter 5, VAXcluster Options/Systems Expansion, for details.

VAX Systems

1.97

VAX 6000 Systems and Servers
Step 7-Networks and Communications
DEMNA 802.3/Ethernet controller included with each system. Select additional devices if required. Note: Connection of
system to Ethernet requires an Ethernet transceiver cable, which can be connected to a DESTA, H4005, or port on a
DELNI. See Chapter 6, Networks) Communications) and Cables, and the Networks Buyer)s Guide for details.
LAN Communications Controllers
DEMNA-M
CK-DEMNA-KD
DEBNI-M

CK-DEBNA-LD
CK-DEBNA-LJ

802.3/Ethernet controller; one included; maximum six Ethernet controllers per system (see further
limitations in chart below). Requires one I/O capable XMI slot.
DEMNA cabinet kit, required with DEMNA-M.
802.3/Ethernet controller; maximum six Ethernet controllers per system; four per VAXBI channel
(see further limitations in chart below). Requires DWMBB-xx VAXBI expansion option and one
VAXBI slot.
DEBNI cabinet kit, required with DEBNI-M if placed on internal VAXBI channel.
DEBNI cabinet kit, required with DEBNI-M if placed on external VAXBI channel.

Ethernet Configuration Limitations
Note: The VAX 6000 supports a maximum of six Ethernet controllers (any combination of XMI and VAXBI controllers).
The number of direct connections to ThinWire (DESTA) or standard (H4005) transceivers is limited to the number of
internally supported transceiver power connections-presently three or less depending on the configuration (see table
below) . If required, additional ThinWire or standard connections can be provided via the DELNI Ethernet concentrator.
H4005/DESTA Limitations
VAX 6000 Systems

Cabinet

Model 500/600
Model 300/400
Model 200/300/400

H9657 -Cx cabinet
H9657 -Cx cabinet
Original cabinet

Number of Connections per System
XMI Only
XMI and VAXBI

2
1
NIA

3
2
3

DEC FDDicontroller 400
DEMFA-AA

DEC FDDicontroller 400, XMI-to-FDDI adapter; requires one XMI slot. Maximum two per system.

Local and Wide Area Communications Servers
Each communications server requires an 802.3/Ethernet connection. Depending on the server selected, either a Thin Wire
BNC-type connection, e.g., BC16M cable or thick wire 15-pin AUI transceiver cable, e.g., BNE3x is required. Additional
items are also required-see descriptions in Chapter 6, Networks) Communications, and Cables, for ordering information.
DECserver 90L+, 90TL, 700, 250, and MUXserver 300, 310, 320, 380 Terminal and Printer Servers
Select a terminal or printer server to provide users with multiple session access to systems on a LAN, to minimize cabling
complexity and costs, and to conserve host resources such as backplane slots.
DEC WANrouter 250, 500; DECNIS 500, 600; Proteon 4100+; CNX500 and TransPATH 335, 350 Multiprotocol Routers
Select a router to cost-effectively link a LAN to a remote system or another LAN and to offload routing overhead from the
application host system.
Host-Based Communications Controllers
Select host-based communications controllers for standalone systems (without LAN connectivity), or for special requirements. Typically, Local and Wide Area Communications Servers are preferred.
DMB32/DHB32 Controllers
Total of two DMB32s/DHB32s per CPU cabinet; maximum four per external VAXBI channel. Total of eight DMB32s/
DHB32s per system; requires DWMBB-xx VAXBI expansion option. DMB32 requires one VAXBI slot; DHB32 requires one
VAXBI slot. See Chapter 6, Networks, Communications) and Cables, for details. Additional items may be required.

1.98

VAX Systems

VAX 6000 Systems and Servers

DMB32-M
CK-DMB32-LJ

Eight-line multifunction communications/ printer controller.
DMB32 cabinet kit, required with DMB32-M.

DHB32-M
CK-DHB32-AJ
CK-DHB32-LJ

16-line asynchronous communications controller.
DHB32 cabinet kit, required with DHB32-M for EIA-232 connection.
DHB32 cabinet kit, required with DHB32-M for DEC-423 connection.

DSB32 (WANcontroller 220)
Total of four per CPU cabinet; maximum four per external VAXBI channel; eight per system. Requires DWMBB-xx VAXBI
expansion option and one VAXBI slot. See Chapter 6, Networks, Communications, and Cables, for details.

DSB32-M
CK-DSB32-UJ
CK-DSB32-UM

Two-line synchronous controller.
DSB32 cabinet kits , required with DSB32-M if placed on internal VAXBI channels.
DSB32 cabinet kits , required with DSB32-M if placed on external VAXBI channels.

Network Connectivity Products
1

See Chapter 6, Networks, Communications, and Cables, and the Networks Buyer s Guide for details .

.~tep ,&-!Cons e Tetitiin~
A console terminal/printer is required unless otherwise available. VT420-SA/SE, LA75S-AAIAE, and LAXXS-AD included
with preconfigured systems. See Chapter 8, Terminals and Printers, for ordering information.

DL-VT420-xx
LA75S-xx
LAXXS-AD

VT420 terminal. See VT420 description for ordering details.
LA75 Plus printer. See LA75 description for ordering details.
VT420/LA75 table for both VT420 and LA75.

Select system printers as required. Line printers must connect to an asynchronous line, DMB32 printer port or DECserver
250 printer server. Printer servers must connect directly to the Ethernet. See Chapter 8, Terminals and Printers, for ordering
information.

Select terminals as required. See Chapter 8, Terminals and Printers, for ordering information.

The 14-slot XMI included with all models. Space for one 11 -slot VAXBI channel available in CPU cabinet. Maximum five
VAXBI channels (one internal and four external) for all models. See Step 14 and XMI and VAXBI configuring information
on page 1.102.

DWMBB-DA

Internal 11-slot VAXBI channel, maximum one per system. Requires one I/ O capable XMI slot.

DWMBB-BA/BB

Adds first external VAXBI channel; maximum one per system. Includes H9657 -EC/ED VAXBI
expansion cabinet which provides five VAXBI slots and 52 panel units and space for additional
channels/slots. Requires one I/ O capable XMI slot. Battery backup support is not available.

DWMBB-CA

Adds additional VAXBI channels; maximum three per system. Includes H9657-EU VAXBI expansion
kit. Provides five VAXBI slots. Requires DWMBB-BA/BB first external VAXBI channel. Requires one
I/O capable XMI slot.

DWMVA

VME adapter; see description in VAX 6000 Expansion in this chapter.

VAX Systems

1.99

VAX 6000 Systems and Servers

Model
VAX 6000
VAX 6000

Model 510
Model 610

ClusterWide
License Ratings

Software
Processor Code

900
1200

4
D

OpenVMS User Licenses

QL-XULA9-BB
QL-XULA9-BC
QL-XULA9-BD
QL-XULA9-BE
QL-XULA9-BF
QL-XULA9-BG
QL-XULA9-BH
QL-XULAA-BR
QL-XULAA-BR

OpenVMS/VAX interactive one-user license
OpenVMS/VAX interactive two-user license
OpenVMS/VAX interactive four-user license
OpenVMS/VAX interactive eight-user license
OpenVMS/VAX interactive 16-user license
OpenVMS/VAX interactive 32-user license
OpenVMS/VAX interactive 64-user license
Open VMS/VAX interactive 128-user license
OpenVMS/VAX interactive 256-user license

QL-XULA4-6A
QL-XULAD-6B

Model 510 OpenVMS/VAX interactive unlimited-use license
Model 610 OpenVMS/VAX interactive unlimited-use license

QA-OOlAA-Hx
QA-09SAA-Hx

OpenVMS media and extended documentation, including VAXcluster and DECnet documentation
OpenVMS media and base documentation

QL-VBRN''-AA

VAXcluster Software license; "' = processor code

QA-358AA-Hx

Rdb Runtime media and documentation

QA-GXXAA-Hx
QA-GXXAB-Hx

VMS POSIX media and documentation (with IEEE documentation) TK50, magtape
VMS POSIX media and documentation (without IEEE documentation) TK50, magtape
Note: x denotes media type: 5 = TK50; 8 = CD-ROM

Select the appropriate NAS software level. See description of NAS packages on page 9.2. Note: The NAS packaged products
do not include hardcopy documentation for the components (the documentation is CD-ROM only). To order NAS component hardcopy documentation, see page 9 .5 for listing of order numbers.

QL-MClA'"-AA
QA-MClAA-Hx

NAS 200 (Network Application Support 200)
NAS 200 media and documentation kit

QL-MC2A'"-AA
QA-MC2AA-Hx

NAS 300 (Network Application Support 300)
NAS 300 media and documentation kit

QL-MC5A'"-AA
QA-MC5AA-Hx

NAS 400 (Network Application Support 400)
NAS 400 media and documentation kit
Note: x denotes media type: 8 =CD-ROM, 5 = TK50, M = magtape
": denotes processor code.

Select environmental power products if required. Refer to Chapter 5, VAXcluster Options/Systems Expansion, and DigitaF s
Environmental Power Products Catalog (EB-M4442-79).

Before adding XMI and VAXBI options to the system, determine the available mounting space; see XMI and VAXBI
Options-Configuring Information on page 1.102.

1.100

VAX Systems

VAX 6000 Systems and Servers
VAX 6000 OpenVMS System Diagrams

Space for
TF85fTK70
Tape Drive

Power Supply

1/0
Panel
Unit

Storage
Controllers

1/0 Capable slots

Console
Ethernet

Cooling Assembly

AC Power
Input
Space for SF35(s), SF73(s),
SF72(s), RA92(s) , and
Battery Backup

BU-3103

• Not 1/0 capable for VAX 6000 Model 310 and 410

VAX 6000 System (Front)

VAX 6000 System (Back)

""O

;

VAX Systems

1.101

VAX 6000 Systems and Servers
XMI Configilring Information
Note: Power values need not be a consideration.

XMI Slots

I/O Panel
Units

General Configuring Rules

CPU processor

1 XMI slot

Maximum six per system

Memory

1 XMI slot

Maximum 512 Mbytes per system

Vector processor

1 XMI slot

Maximum one per Model 410/ 510; two per Model 420/ 520; three per Model
530; four per Model 540

Option
CPU modules

I/O modules (require 1/0 capable slots)
CIXCD

1 XMI slot

Maximum four per system; CIXCDs and CIBCAs cannot be configured in the
same system

DEMFA

1 XMI slot

Maximum two per system

DEMNA'"

1 XMI slot

KDM70

2 XMI slots

Maximum three per system

KFMSA

1 XMI slot

Maximum six per system

DWMBB

1 XMI slot

Maximum five per system

DWMVA

1 XMI slot

Maximum six Ethernet controllers per system

Maximum two per system

"'See Ethernet Configuration Limitations in Step 7.

Note: The total number of XMI modules cannot exceed 14. See menus for more specific rules.

VAXBI Configuring Information
Mounting
Requirements

Option

1/0
Panel
Units

de Amps Drawn @
5v

12 v

- 12 v

-5.2 v

-2 v

CIBCA

2 VAXBI slots

9.00

0.00

2.00

1.00

DEBNr''

1 VAXBI slot

6.72

0.00

DHB32 (EIA-232)

1 VAXBI slot

5.56

0.42

0.00

DHB32 (DEC-423)

1 VAXBI slot

5.56

0.42

0.00

DMB32

0.42

0.00

General Configuring Rules

Maximum four per system; CIXCDs and CIBCAs
cannot be configured in the same system .
Maximum four per VAXBI channel; six Ethernet
controllers per system.
Maximum two per CPU cabinet; four per external
VAXBI channel. Total of eight per system.

1 VAXBI slot

6.75

0.29

DRB32-M

1 VAXBI slot

8.00

0.00

DRB32-E

2 VAXBI slots

9.80

0.00

"'O

DRB32-W

2 VAXBI slots

11.80

0.00

DSB32

1 VAXBI slot

4.50

0.08

0.00

Maximum four per CPU cabinet; four per external
VAXBI channel. Total of eight per system.

KDB50

2 VAXBI slots

11.94

0.03

0.00

3.76

0.14

Maximum four per VAXBI channel; 12 per system.

TU81-Plus
RBV20/ 60 (KLESI)

1 VAXBI slot

7.00

0.00

Maximum fo ur per VAXBI channel-total of four
tapes per system.

TBK70-CA

1 VAXBI slot

5.50

0.00

Maximum one per system .

!'I.I

J!
c~

!'I.I

Maximum two per VAXBI channel; eight per system.
See DRB32 description in Chapter 7.

!'I.I

rE
0
8

"°><
<
>

"'See Ethernet Configuration Limitations in Step 7.

Note: See ordering menus for more specific rules.

1.102

VAX Systems

VAX 6000 Systems and Servers
Step 1-Systems
Select system. The following items are required for base systems/servers-memory, KDM70 or CIXCD, system disk device,
console terminal; a TK70 load device is included. For optimum backup performance, a high-capacity tape drive is
recommended.
VAX 6000 ULTRIX Base Systems include

VAXserver 6000 ULTRIX Base Systems include

· 14-slot XMI system bus
· 11-slot VAXBI channel
• DEMNA 802.3/Ethernet communications interface
· TK70 tape drive and interface
· Console cable
• ULTRIX 2-user base license
· 64-user license
· DECnet-ULTRIX license
· One full-year product warranty
(standard warranty recommended)

· 14-slot XMI system bus
• 11-slot VAXBI channel
• DEMNA 802.3/ Ethernet communications interface
• TK70 tape drive and interface
· Console cable
· ULTRIX 2-user base license
· ULTRIX Server license
·DECnet-ULTRIX license
· One full-year product warranty
(standard warranty recommended)

Note: BE = 60 Hz, 208 V
BJ = 50 Hz, 380/416 V

Note: B~ = 60 Hz, 208 V
BJ = 50 Hz, 380/ 416 V

65AMB-BE/BJ

65APB-BE/BJ

Model 510

Step 2-Memory
Base systems require memory selection. All models can be expanded to a maximum of 512 Mbytes. Refer to the following
table for recommended minimum memory configurations.

VAX 6000 System

Vectors

Model 510
Model 510

One

Recommended
Minimum Interleave'"

Recommended
Minimum Memory .
64 Mbytes
64 Mbytes

'" See VAX 6000 Memory in Chapter 5, VAXcluster Options/Systems Expansion, for interleave description .

MS65A-BA
MS65A-CA
MS65A-DA

32 Mbytes of memory, requires one XMI slot
64 Mbytes of memory, requires one XMI slot
128 Mbytes of memory, requires one XMI slot

FV64A-AA

Vector processor; maximum one per Model 510, two per Model 520

Step 3-Storage Controller/CI Controller
Base systems require the selection of a storage controller or CI controller.
KDM70-AA
CK-KDMOO-LF

XMI Disk/tape controller. Maximum one per system; requires two 1/0 capable XMI slots. Provides
eight ports for DSA devices-any two available for tapes.
0.9-m (3-ft) KDM70 cabinet kit; required with each KDM70-AA

KDB50-C

VAXBI disk controller. Maximum two per VAXBI channel, 12 per system; maximum four disk
drives per KDB50. Requires two VAXBI slots.

CIXCD-AB

CIXCD controller (for expanded disk capability). Maximum one CIXCD controller per Model
310/410 system-two per Model 5xx systems; requires one 1/0 capable XMI slot. Requires one
BNCIA cable set to connect system to Star Coupler.

BNCIA-xx

Computer interconnect cable sets. Choose required length 10, 20 or 45 meters (10 m = 32.8 ft, 20
m = 65.6 ft, 45 m = 147.6 ft).

Step 4-Storage
Select additional storage devices as required. A system device is required for a fully supported system. See Chapter 7,
Storage Devices, for complete ordering information.

VAX Systems 1.103

VAX 6000 Systems and Servers
Step 4a-Intemal Storage

-----·---

The CPU cabinet provides space for two SA70 building blocks (8 RA70s), two RA92 disk drives, or one of each. CI
connection kit required only if connecting internal storage options to an HSC40 or HSC70. Note: One BC26V-xx cable
required per disk drive for CI connection.
SA70-MK
62X34-SA
62X34-SB
RA92-PA
62X34-RA
62X34-RB

1.1-Gbyte storage array. Maximum two SA70-MKs, two RA92-PAs, or one of each per CPU cabinet;
includes BA27 box, four RA70 disks, and cable.
Connection kit, required for connection of first SA70 internal storage option to external HSC.
Connection kit, required for connection of second SA70 internal storage option to
external HSC.
1.5-Gbyte disk drive. Maximum two RA92-PAs, two SA70-MKs, or one of each per CPU cabinet;
includes cable.
Connection kit, required for connection of first RA92 internal storage option to external HSC.
Connection kit, required for connection of second RA92 internal storage option to
external HSC.

Step 4h-Extemal Storage
RA Disks/ESE50/
Storage Arrays

See RA series disks, storage arrays, and ESE50 descriptions in Chapter 7 for ordering information.
Maximum four disk drives per KDB50.

Expanded Disk
Capability

For expanded disk capability, select the HSC70 or HSC40 Starter Package. CI connection kit
required if connecting internal storage options to an HSC40 or HSC70. Note: One BC26V-xx cable
required per disk drive for CI connection.

HSS90-GA/GB
HSS60-GA/GB

HSC90/HSC60 VAXcluster starter package, includes HSC90 or HSC60 storage controller, SC008 Star
Coupler, one HSC5x-DA disk/tape channel, one HSC9x-FA data channel, and one set of BNCIA-20
cables.

HSC5X-DA

HSC5X disk/tape interface, supports up to four disk drives/tape drives; disks and tapes cannot be
combined on the same HSC5X-DA.

Tape/Optical Drives
TA79-BF/BJ

TA79 tape drive; maximum four tape units per HSC5X-DA; cables included. Supports three TU79
add-on units.

TA81-AA/AB

TA81 tape drive; maximum four tape units per HSC5X-DA; cables included.

TU81E-BAIBB

TU81-Plus tape drive; maximum two TU81-Plus tapes/ RBV20 masters per VAXBI channel; maximum
four TU81-Plus tapes per system (cables included) .

RV20 Optical Disk

Maximum two RBV20 masters/ TU81 -Plus tapes per VAXBI channel. Maximum three RV20 slaves per
RBV20 master. See RV20 description in Chapter 7.

Step 5-Networks and Communications
DEMNA 802.3/ Ethernet controller included with each system. Select additional devices if required. Note: Connection of
system to Ethernet requires an Ethernet transceiver cable which can be connected to a DESTA, H4005 , or port on a DELNI.
See Chapter 6, Networks, Communications, and Cables, and the Networks Buyer's Guide for complete ordering information.
LAN Communications Controllers
DEMNA-M
CK-DEMNA-KD
DEBNI-M
CK-DEBNA-LD
CK-DEBNA-LJ

1.104

VAX Systems

802.3/Ethernet controller; one included; maximum four Ethernet Controllers per system (see further
limitations in chart on following page). Requires one I/ O capable XMI slot.
DEMNA cabinet kit, required with DEMNA-M.
802.3/Ethernet controller; maximum two per VAXBI channel (see further limitations in chart on
following page). Requires DWMBB-xx VAXBI expansion option and one VAXBI slot.
DEBNI cabinet kit, required with DEBNI-M if placed on internal VAXBI channel.
DEBNI cabinet kit, required with DEBNI-M if placed on external VAXBI channels.

VAX 6000 Systems and Servers

Ethernet Configuration Limitations
Note: The VAX 6000 supports a maximum of six Ethernet controllers (any combination of XMI and VAXBI controllers).
The number of direct connections to ThinWire (DESTA) or standard (H4005) transceivers is limited to the number of
internally supported transceiver power connections-presently three or less depending on the configuration (see table
below). If required, additional ThinWire or standard connections can be provided via the DELNI Ethernet concentrator.
H4005/DESTA Limitations
VAX 6000 Systems

Cabinet

Model 500
Model 3 00/ 400
Model 200/ 300/ 400/500

H9657 -Cx cabinet
H9657 -Cx cabinet
Original cabinet

Number of Connections per System
XMI Only
XMI and VAXBI
2
1

3
2

NIA

Local and Wide Area Communications Servers
Each communications server requires an 802.3/Ethernet connection. Depending on the server selected, either a ThinWire
BNC-type connection, e.g. , BC16M cable or thick wire 15-pin AUI transceiver cable, e.g. , BNE3x is required. Additional
items are also required-see descriptions in Chapter 6, Networks, Communications, and Cables for ordering information.
DECserver 90L+, 90TL, 700, 250, and MUXserver 300, 310, 320, 380 Terminal and Printer Servers
Select a terminal or printer server to provide users with multiple session access to systems on a LAN, to minimize cabling
complexity and costs, and to conserve host resources such as backplane slots.
DEC WANrouter 250, 500; DECNIS 500, 600; Proteon 4100+; CNX500 and TransPATH 335, 350 Multiprotocol Routers
Select a router to cost-effectively link a LAN to a remote system or another LAN and to offload routing overhead from the
application host system.
Host-Based Communications Controllers
Select host-based communications controllers for standalone systems (without LAN connectivity) , or for special requirements. Typically, Local and Wide Area Communications Servers are preferred.
DMB32/DHB32 Controllers
Total of two DMB32/DHB32 controllers per CPU cabinet; maximum four per external VAXBI channel. Total of eight
DMB32/ DHB32 controllers per system. See Chapter 6, N etworks, Communications, and Cables for details. Additional items
may be required.
DMB32-M
CK-DMB32-LJ

8-line multifunction communications/ printer controller.
DMB32 cabinet kit, required with DMB32-M.

DHB32-M
CK-DHB32-AJ
CK-DHB32-LJ

16-line asynchronous communications controller.
DHB32 cabinet kit, required with DHB32-M for EiA-232 connection.
DHB32 cabinet kit, required with DHB32-M for DEC-423 connection.

Network Connectivity Products
See Chapter 6, N etworks, Communications, and Cables, and the Networks Buyer's Guide for details

A console terminal/printer is required unless otherwise available. See Chapter 8, Terminals and Printers , for complete
ordering information.
DL-VT420-xx
LA75-xx
LAXXS-AD

VT420 terminal. See VT420 description for ordering details.
LA75 printer. See LA75 description for ordering details.
VT420/LA75 stand for both VT420 and LA75.

VAX Systems

1.105

VAX 6000 Systems and Servers

Select system printers as required. Line printers must connect to an asynchronous line, DMB32 printer port, or DECserver
250 Printer Server. Print servers must connect directly to the Ethernet. See Chapter 8, Terminals and Printers, for details.
See ULTRIX Software Product Description.

Select terminals and printers as required. See Chapter 8, Terminals and Printers, for ordering information.

One 14-slot XMI and one 11-slot VAXBI channel included with all models. Maximum five VAXBI channels-one internal,
four external. See XMI and VAXBI Configuring Information on following page.

DWMBB-BAIBB

External first VAXBI channel, adds second VAXBI channel; maximum one per system. Includes
H9657 -EC/ ED VAXBI expansion cabinet and H9657 -EU VAXBI expansion kit. Provides five VAXBI
slots and 52 panel units and space for additional channels/slots. Requires one XMI slot.

DWMBB-CA

Adds additional VAXBI channels; maximum three per system. Includes H9657 -EU VAXBI expansion
kit. Provides five VAXBI slots. Requires DWMBA-BA/BB third VAXBI channel. Requires one XMI
slot.

Step · to-Software
Select media and documentation.
Software
Processor Code

VAXserver Model 510 = G

QL-VEYAx-B9

ULTRIX 65- to unlimited-user upgrade license.

QA-VEYAB-H5
QA-716AA-H5

ULTRIX media (TK50) and documentation. Recommended for first VAX system of each CPU type.
DECnet-ULTRIX media (TK50) and documentation.

Select environmental power products if required. Refer to Chapter 5, VAXcluster Options/Systems Expansion, and Digital's

Environmental Power Products Catalog (EB-M4442-79).

Before adding VAXBI and XMI options to the system, refer to the following tables; see VAXBI Options-Configuring
Information on following page.

1.106

VAX Systems

VAX 6000 Systems and Servers
VAX 6000 ULTRIX System Diagram

.......

~--~.......,....__;'--~~""---'--~

.......

---~~--"'

~~------~-"-~~~~~~--

TK70
Tape

Drive

Power Supply

ffijj rn

+- 1-v

1/0 Capable slots

v
~ !---

Cooling Assembly

1/0
Panel
Unit

Storage
Controllers

Console
Ethernet

':>IC~
-=..J

AC Power
Input

Space for SA70(s)
and RA92(s)

•

• Not 1/0 capable for VAX 6000 Model 310 and 410

VAX 6000 System (Front)

VAX 6000 System (Back)

VAXBI Configuring Information
Option

I/O Panel

Mounting
Requirements

de Amps Drawn @
5V

12 v

-12 v

- 5.2 v

Units
-2 v

CIBCA CI Port

2 VAXBI slots

9.00

0.00

2.00

1.00

DEBNAIDEBNI"'
Ethernet Port

1 VAXBI slot

6.72

0.00

DHB32 (EIA-232)

1 VAXBI slot

5.56 0.42

0.42

0.00

DHB32 (DEC-423)

1 VAXBI slot

5.56 0.42

0.42

0.00

DMB32

1 VAXBI slot

6.75

0.29

0.42

0.00

KDB50

2 VAXBI slots

11.94

0.03

0.00

3.76

0.14

TU81-Plus, RBV20/60 1 VAXBI slot

7.00

0.00

TBK70-CA

5.50

0.00

1 VAXBI slot

"' See Ethernet Configuration Limitations in Step 5.

Q,I

XMI Configuring Inform~tion

j
Note: Power values need not be a consideration.

""O

XMI slots

I/O P anel Units

i
e

CPU processor

1 XMI slot

Memory

1 XMI slot

Vector processor

1 XMI slot

§
'°~

1 XMI slot

Option

(/.I

£fl.I

CPU modules

1/0 modules (requires I/O capable slots)
CIXCD
DEMNA

1 XMI slot

KDM70

2 XMI slots

XMI-to-VAXBI interface

1 XMI slot

VAX Systems

1.107

VAX 6000 Systems and Servers Specifications
Note: Contact local Customer Services for detailed site preparation data.
Physical Characteristics
Height
Width
Depth
Weight'"

Operating

Shipping

154 cm (60.5 in.)
78 cm (30.5 in.)
90 cm (36.0 in.)
318 kg (700 lb)

180 cm (71.0 in.)
94 cm (37.0 in.)
105 cm (41.5 in.)
391 kg (860 lb)

"' Does not include in-cabinet storage or optional BBU.

Environmental

Clearances

Operating

Service

Front
Rear
Sides

1 m (39 in.)
1 m (39 in.)
None

Same
Same
None

Temperature
Operating

VAX 6000-200/300/400/500:
15° to 32° C (59° to 90° F) with TK70/TF85
10° to 40° C (50° to 104° F)
VAX 6000-600:
15° to 32° C (59° to 90° Fl

Nonoperating

-40° to 66° C (-40° to 151° F)

Humidity
20% to 80% noncondensing with TK70/ TF85
10% to 90% noncondensing
10% to 95 % noncondensing

Operating
Nonoperating
Altitude

2438 meters (8000 feet)
Nonoperating: 9100 meters (30,000 feet)

Operating
Vibration

2-22 Hz @ 0.01 "da minimum
22-500 Hz@ 0.25g maximum

Operating

Note: Maximum Heat Dissipation (subject to configuration)
5440 Btu/ hr (1600 watts)
1365 Btu/hr (400 watts)

Fully configured system
Systems without VAXBI

Electrical

Power Requirements

Nominal voltage
Nominal frequency
Frequency range
Power phasing
RMS current (maximum
per phase)
Surge current

208
60 Hz
47-63 Hz
Three
8 amps

380/ 416
50 Hz
47-63 Hz
Three
4.3/ 4.0 amps

60 amps

4.57 m (15 ft)
208 V 3-Phase Y
HUBBELL #2511
NEMA #L2 l-20P
DEC #12-11209-00

4.57 m (15 ft)
380/ 416 V 3-Phase Y
HUBBELL #16P6W
DEC #12-14379-04
516R6W

Power Cord
Length
Plug

Expansion
Cabinets

Voltage
Nominal

Freq
Nominal
Hz

Number
of
Phases

Current
ac Amps

Thermal Dissipation
Watts

H9652-EC

120

50-60

Note

H9652-ED

120

50-60

Note

208

380/416

H9657-Ec3
H9657-ED
1

2
3

VAX Systems

Note

PCS/PDS
Cable
Type

Physical Size
Height
in. [cm]

Btu/h
[kJ/h]

Width Depth Weight
in. [cm] in. [cm] lb [kg]
2

Note

L5-30R

BC24S

60.3

26.3

31.5

X+350.0

Note

6-15R

BN29K

[153.0]

[66.7]

[80.0]

[X+158.9 ]

Note

11.97

3,001

10,242

L21-20R

BC24V

60.0

30.0

540.0

5.26

2,955

10,085

516R6W

BN29X

[152.0]

[76.2]

[308.4]

Requirements (cooling, power) of options.
X =Requirements (cooling, power, weight) of options.
All data is for fully configured cabinet.

1.108

Receptacle
Type

VAX 6000 Systems Expansion
VAXBI Expansion Options
DWMBB-DA

Provides internal 11-slot VAXBI channel; maximum one
per system. Requires one I/O capable XMI slot.

DWMBB-BA/BB
Provides first external VAXBI channel. Includes one
H9657 -EC/ED VAXBI expansion cabinet, which provides 5 VAXBI slots and 52
panel units and space for additional VAXBI channels. Maximum one per system.
Requires one I/O capable slot. Battery backup not supported on systems including DWMBB-BA/BB.
DWMBB-CA
Provides additional external VAXBI channels. Includes
one H9657-EU VAXBI expansion kit. Provides five VAXBI slots. Requires a
DWMBB-BA/BB. Maximum three per system.
Cooling Assembly

Cooling Assembly

Power Supply

VAXBI

Power Supply

•

110 Connection

Panel

Space for Addil1onal

Backplane#1

VAXBI backplanes

(H9657-EU)

(H9657- EU)

t----,

""
~e

o. E

() 0
<(()

AC Power
Supply

om
om om
om om
om om
DJ
DJ
DJ
DJ

ffiE rn DI~

BU·3056a

Front

BU-3056b

Back

DWMBB VAXBI Expansion O ptions

iii

x<( x<( x<( x<( x<(
> > > > >

~
E
Q)

Ci)
>.

(/)

iii

x<(
>

BU-3057

42 amps@ 5 V
2 amps@ 12 V
2 amps@ -12 V
15 amps@ -5.2 V
10 amps@ -2 V

H9657-EU Expansion Slots

VAX 6000 Systems Battery Backup
H7236-A
Memory battery backup for VAX 6000 Model 500/600
and all VAX 6000 Models 300/400 identified by model number H9657-CA/CB on
the CPU cabinet serial tag. Powers main memory for approximately 10 minutes.
Provides one second ac power ride-through.

H7231-N
Memory battery backup for VAX 6000 Model
200/300/400 systems identified by model number 62AMB-YE/YJ, 62AMA-YE/YJ,
63AMB-YE/YJ, and 64AMA-YE/YJ on the CPU cabinet serial tag. Powers main
memory for approximately 10 minutes.

VAX 6000 Model 200 Systems TK.50-to-TK70 Upgrade
TBK70-UA
Upgrades a TK50 console load device to a TK70 console
load device for VAX 6000 Model 200 systems.

VAX 6000 Vector Processor
FV64A-AA
CMOS implementation 1-Mbyte onboard cache, general-purpose arithmetic unit with four pipes. Peak performance 45 Mflops
double precision, 90 Mflops single precision. Maximum one per VAX 6000
Model 410/510 systems; two per Model 420/520 systems; three per Model 530
system; and four per Model 540 system. Requires one XMI slot.

VAX Systems

1.109

VAX 6000 Systems Expansion
VME :Adapter Option
---------~--

Interface between the VAX 6000 XMI system bus and the VMEbus; two VME
buses are supported. It is compliant with IEEE/ ANSI 1014-1987, utilizes arbitration modes (PRIORITY, ROUND-ROBIN, SINGLE LEVEL) , bus release modes
(FAIR, ROR, RWD) , data modes (D8, D16, D32 bits), and address modes (A16,
A24 , A32 bits). The option is available as a module set for customer defined
power and packaging or in the optional BA62 VME bus enclosure. The BA62 is a
pedestal enclosure that contains six 6U slots and three 9U slots. Slot 1 of the 6U
slots must contain the Digital VME interface module. The BA62 contains a power
supply that delivers standard VME voltages and has a 470-watt capacity. (Contact
EIS sales representative for detailed configuration information.)

Prerequisite Software

DWMVA-AA

VAX 6000 VME adapter option, includes one XMI module and one 6U VME module and a shielded cable assembly (3 meters).

BA62-BA/BB

VME pedestal enclosure.

DWMVA-BAIBB

Includes DWMVA-AA and BA62-BA/BB.

VMS V5 .5 for VAX 6000 Model 600 systems and VMS V5 .4 .3 for VAX 6000
Model 200/ 300/ 400/500 systems.

Specifications

Environmental
(BA62-BAIBB)

Electrical Requirements
(BA62-BA IBB)

1.110

VAX Systems

Operating Range

10°-40° C (50°-104° F)

Humidity

10%-90 % with maximum wet bulb temperature 28° C (82°
F) and minimum dew point 2° C (39° F) noncondensing

Altitude

Up to 8000 feet

110-120 Vac/ 220-240 Vac, single-phase, 3-wire
Input line frequency: 50, 60 Hz
Input power: 700 W maximum
Plug type: 120 V 60 Hz, 240 V 50 Hz (standard wall outlet)

VAX 6000 CPU Upgrades
To upgrade to VAX 6000 Model 500/600 systems, follow the steps listed below. For all other upgrades, select the
appropriate upgrade based on the steps that follow.

Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 3a
Step 3b Step Jc Step 4 -

Select CPU upgrade.
Unless included with upgrade package, replace any MS62A-AB memory with MS65A-xx memory.
If model number of CPU cabinet serial tag is H9657-Cx, Steps 3a and 3b are not required.
If the following items-battery backup, more than 12 XMI slots, or more than four CPUs-are required, order
number H9657 -CU (power conversion kit).
If the H9657-CU is required and if more than two VAXBI channels are in the system, order one DWMBB-AB
for each VAXEi in excess of two.
If battery backup is required, order H7236-A. Replace H7231-N with H7236-A.
If a CIBCA-AA is present, replace with CIXCD-AB or CIBCA-BA.

The following upgrade packages include CPU processor(s) , VMS or ULTRIX licenses, and one full-year product warranty;
DECnet full function license included unless noted differently with VMS upgrades-DECnet-ULTRIX license included with
ULTRIX upgrades.
Model 300

Model 200
From-To

VMS

Model 210-610
Model 220-610
Model 220-620
Model 230-630
Model 240-640

66AUA-AA
66AVA-AA
66BUA-AA
66CUA-AA
66DUA-AA

Model 210-610
Model 220-610
Model 230-610
Model 240-610

66AUE-AA"'
66AUF-AA"'
66AUH-AA"'
66AUJ-AA"'

Model 210-510
Model 220-520
Model 230-530
Model 240-540

65AUA-AA
65BUA-AA
65CUA-AA
65DUA-AA

Model 210-510
Model 220-510
Model 230-510
Model 240-510

65AUE-AA"'
65AUH-AA"'
65AUJ-AA"'
65AUK-AA"'

Model 210-410
Model 220-420
Model 230-430
Model 240-440

64AUA-AA
64BUA-AA
64CUA-AA
64DUA-AA

ULTRIX

65AUA-BA
65BUA-BA
65CUA-BA
65DUA-BA

64AUA-BA
64BUA-BA
64CUA-BA
64DUA-BA

From-To

VMS

Model 310-610
Model 320-610
Model 320-620
Model 330-63 0
Model 340-640
Model 350-650
Model 360-660

66AUA-AC
66AVA-AC
66BUA-AC
66CUA-AC
66DUA-AC
66EUA-AC
66FUA-AC

Model 310-610
Model 320-610
Model 330-610
Model 340-610
Model 350-610
Model 360-610

66AUE-AC"'
66AUF-AC'"
66AUH-AC"'
66AUJ-AC"'
66AUK-AC'"
66AUL-AC"

Model 310-510
Model 320-520
Model 330-530
Model 340-540
Model 350-550
Model 360-560

65AUA-AC
65BUA-AC
65CUA-AC
65DUA-AC
65EUA-AC
65FUA-AC

Model 310-510
Model 320-510

65AUE-AC"'
65AUH-AC'"

Model 310-410
Model 320-420
Model 330-430
Model 340-440
Model 350-450
Model 360-460

64AUA-AC
64BUA-AC
64CUA-AC
64DUA-AC
64EUA~AC

64FUA-AC

ULTRIX

65AUA-BC
65BUA-BC
65CUA-BC
65DUA-BC
65EUA-BC
65FUA-BC

64AUA-BC
64BUA-BC
64CUA-BC
64DUA-BC
64EUA-BC
64FUA-BC

"' Includes 128 Mbytes (MS65A-DA) of memory.

VAX Systems

1.111

VAX 6000 CPU Upgrades
Model ;oo

Model 400 ·
From-To

VMS

Model 410-610
Model 420-610
Model 420-620
Model 430-630
Model 440- 640
Model 450-650
Model 460-660

66AUA-AF
66AVA-AF
66BUA-AF
66CUA-AF
66DUA-AF
66EUA-AF
66FUA-AF

Model 410-610
Model 420-610
Model 430-610
Model 440-620
Model 450-620
Model 460-620
Model 410-510
Model 410-510
Model 420-520
Model 430-530
Model 440- 540
Model 450-550
Model 460-560
Model 410-420
Model 420-430
Model 430-440
Model 440-450
Model 450-460

66AUE-AFi'
66AUF-AFi'
66AUH-AFi'
66BUJ-AFi'
66BUK-AFi'
66BUL-AFi'
66AUE-AFi'
65AUA-AF
65BUA-AF
65CUA-AF
65DUA-AF
65EUA-AF
65FUA-AF
64BUA-AF
64CUA-AF
64DUA-AF
64EUA-AF
64FUA-AF

ULTRIX

65AUA-BF
65BUA-BF
65CUA-BF
65DUA-BF
65EUA-BF
65FUA-BF
64BUA-BF
64CUA-BF
64DUA-BF
64EUA-BF
64FUA-BF

VAXserver 6000 Upgrades

rJ'J

""";
s

fl) '

From-To

VMS

Model 310- 610
Model 320- 620
Model 310- 510
Model 320- 520
Model 310-410
Model 320-420

66KUA-HD
66LUA-HD
65KUA-HD
65LUA-HD
64KUA-HD
64LUA-HD
66KUA-HH
66LUA-HH
65KUA-HH
65LUA-HH
64LUA-HH

Model 410-610
Model 420- 620
Model 410-510
Model 420-520
Model 410-420

><
<

Model 510-610
Model 520-620
Model 510- 520
Model 610-620
Model 620- 630
Model 63 0-640

66KUA-HL
66LUA-HL
65LUA-HL
66LUA-HN
66MUA-HN
66NUA-HN

ULTRIX

65KUA-JD
65LUA-JD
64KUA-BD
64LUA-BD

65KUA-JH
65LUA-JH
64LUA-BD

65LUA-JL

'~ Includes 128 Mbytes (MS65A-DA) of memory.

t Includes Open VMS Base license (DECnet not included)

1.112 VAX Systems

VMS

ULTRIX

Model 510-610
Model 520-620
Model 530-630
Model 540-640
Model 550-650
Model 560-660

66AUA-AK
66BUA-AK
66CUA-AK
66DUA-AK
66EUA-AK
66FUA-AK

Model 510-610
Model 520-620
Model 530-630
Model 540-640
Model 550-650
Model 560-660

66AUD-AKt
66BUD-AKt
66CUD-AKt
66DUD-AKt
66EUD-AKt
66FUD-AKt

Model 510-520
Model 520-530
Model 530-540
Model 540-550
Model 550-560
Model 510-520
Model 520-530
Model 530-540
Model 540-550
Model 550-560

65BUA-AK
65CUA-AK
65DUA-AK
65EUA-AK
65FUA-AK
65BUD-AKt
65CUD-AKt
65DUD-AKt
65EUD-AKt
65FUD-AKt

65BUA-BK
65CUA-BK
65DUA-BK
65EUA-BK
65FUA-BK

From-To

VMS

ULTRIX

Model 610-620
Model 620-630
Model 630-640
Model 640-650
Model 650-660

66BUA-AM
66CUA-AM
66DUA-AM
66EUA-AM
66FUA-AM

Model 610-620
Model 620-630
Model 630- 640
Model 640-650
Model 650-660

66BUD-AMt
66CUD-AMt
66DUD-AMt
66EUD-AMt
66FUD-AMt

Model 600

VAXserver 6000 to VAX 6000 Conversion Kits

fl)

:>-.

rJ'J
0

From-To

VMS

ULTRIX

Model 410-410
Model 420-420

64AUA-AH
64BUA-AH

64AUA-BH
64BUA-BH

Model 510-510
Model 520-520

65AUA-AL
65BUA-AL
66AUA-AN
66BUA-AN
66CUA-AN

65AUA-BL
65BUA-BL

Model 610-610
Model 620-620
Model 63 0-63 0

VAX 6000 Series Rack-mountable Systems
Product Description

VAX 6000 series systems are available in custom-quoted rack-mountable configurations that provide all the functionality of the standard 76.2-cm-wide
(30-in.-wide) system in a 48.2-cm-wide (19-in.-wide), EIA standard rackmountable format. These systems require 40 cm (15.75 in.) of vertical mounting
space, making them ideal for applications where severe footprint or environmental constraints exist. Since they can be installed in air-conditioned, NEMA enclosures, the VAX 6000 series rack-mount systems can be placed in areas where
excessive heat, non-corrosive liquids, dirt, dust, and other contaminants might
cause standard systems to fail .
Rack-mountable VAX 6000 series base systems consist of a single 14-slot XMI
chassis that requires a software load device and any other options required for
standard configurations. They support the same models and allow the same
expansion capabilities. A 12-slot VAXBI chassis is optional and can include a
TK70 tape drive within the chassis. Each chassis has an integral power supply
and two fans that provide front-to-back forced air cooling.
The rack-mountable VAX 6000 series systems use a modular power supply that
requires an ac input power cord. This power supply does not support the Battery Backup option for VAX 6000 series products. In applications requiring battery backup, an HA32A Uninterruptible Power System is recommended. To
ensure FCC compliance, the rack-mountable VAX 6000 series chassis must be
mounted in a standard EMI shielded cabinet.

Specifications

Power Requirements
Input voltage
Frequency tolerance
Phases
Surge current
Maximum ac power

220-240 Vrms (50/60 Hz)
47-63 Hz
1
61 A
1.6 kW consumption/system

Physical Characteristics Per Chassis
Height
Width
Depth
Weight

40.0 cm (15 .75 in.); includes cable management
48.3 cm (19. in.); typical cabinet width is 21.5 inches
71.1 cm (28. in.) ; recommended cabinet depth is 36 inches
59.1 kg (130 lb)

Note: For a custom quotation and more information contact the EiC Sales Support Center at 800-832-6277 or 603-884-8990.

VAX Systems

1.113

VAX 7000 Systems and Servers

Product Description

VAX 7000 systems are the latest in a family of Open VMS-based systems designed
for the rigorous demands of data center computing. The VAX 7000 system's
modular platform enables users to improve performance in a number of different
dimensions-symmetric multiprocessing, larger memory, more I/O bandwidth,
greater disk capacity, and VAX.cluster systems-all the while building upon current investments.
VAX 7000 systems support thousands of applications for a wide range of industries. Travel reservation, telephone switching, information-rich imaging, highvalue funds transfer, and compute-intensive financial or pharmaceutical modeling
applications are only a few examples of the kinds of mission-critical applications
that the VAX 7000 runs exceedingly well. The system supports massive
databases, multiple CPUs acting in concert, and high-volume I/O.

In addition, VAX 7000 servers support hundreds of PCs or workstations running
a wide range of applications. Because Digital's client/server computing is built on
standards-based Network Application Support (NAS) software, VAX 7000 servers
support OpenVMS, ULTRIX, UNIX, MS-DOS, OS/2, and Macintosh clients, and
both windowing and ASCII terminals.
With as many as four CPUs in a symmetric multiprocessing (SMP) configuration
and up to 400 Mbytes/second of I/O, a single VAX 7000 system offers the
powerful features needed in data center systems. And multiple systems provide
even more: VAX 7000 systems in VAX.cluster configurations provide support for
as much as 10 terabytes of data.
To balance the performance of the four processors, the VAX 7000 has been
designed to support very high-volume I/O. A high-speed system interconnect
links memory and processors, allowing a transfer rate of 640 Mbytes/second. For
peripheral devices, the VAX 7000 system supports as many as four 100-Mbyte/
second XMI buses, for an aggregate bandwidth of 400 Mbytes/second. And since
many of Digital's XMI-based VO controllers are powered by RISC chips, high
system throughput is bolstered at every point.

1.114

VAX Systems

VAX 7000 Systems and Servers
Product Description (Continued)

The CPU technology is based upon Digital's proven high reliability CMOS technology. Full error protection is provided on the system bus, on all memory
modules, and on the write-back cache. The power system provides power conditioning to protect against high-voltage transients.
VAX 7000 systems get their fast processing power from a design that takes VAX
instructions, translates them into RISC operations, and then executes them in a
very high-performance, four-stage RISC pipeline. The powerful CPU runs at 91
MHz. The ability to configure a symmetric multiprocessing VAX 7000 with as
many as four CPUs offers yet another dimension of performance.

An optional N+ 1 redundant power system allows for higher system availability in
the event of a power regulator failure. Systems can be configured with up to
three power regulators, assuring that even the most heavily configured systems
have sufficient redundant power to keep operating in the event of a single power
regulator failure . Optional system-level UPS (Uninterruptible Power System)
capability is available to support all elements within the CPU and I/O expansion
cabinets. This means that CPU, memory, I/O channels and devices, and
in-cabinet disk storage can continue operating in the event of a power loss.
The VAX 7000 systems provide both balanced performance and outstanding
configuration flexibility. Up to seven memory arrays, and up to four XMI I/O
channels allow users to configure large systems to suit a wide variety of needs.
The CPU, memory, and I/O can all be upgraded over time with future generations of components, providing excellent investment protection.
VAX 7000 systems support up to 512 Mbytes of memory today, with planned
support for up to 3 .5 Gbytes of memory at the next major release of the
OpenVMS operating system. VAX 7000 systems can support more than 10 terabytes of disk storage in a VAXcluster configuration-easily enough capacity for
the largest datacenter applications.
The balanced I/O subsystem on the new VAX 7000 provides substantial I/O
capacity initially (one 12-slot XMI I/O channel is standard) and the ability to add
up to three more 12-slot XMI I/O channels. These XMI IIO channels offer a
bandwidth of 100 Mbytes/second each, making this system capable of providing
very high I/O bandwidth performance-up to 400 Mbytes/second.
XMI devices supported include adapters for Ethernet, CI, FDDI, SDI/STI, and
DSSI interconnects. Support for up to 16 Ethernet adapters, 10 CI adapters, 12
DSSI adapters (24 ports), 24 SDI/STI adapters (24 ports) , and eight FDDI adapters demonstrates the large expansion potential of the new VAX 7000 systems.
Adding a VAX 7000 system to a VAXcluster configuration enables efficient, economical resource sharing, plus still higher availability and storage capacities.

An entry-level Digital Storage Systems Interconnect (DSSI) VAXcluster system
offers increased system uptime and availability-if one system goes down, as
many as three other systems can continue processing critical data.
When more systems and storage are needed, a CI-based VAXcluster system offers
even greater flexibility and superior system, application, and data availability.
There's no disruption to users when the cluster grows-new systems, or disk and
tape subsystems can be added without taking the cluster offline.
The high-speed FDDI network allows connection of VAXcluster systems in separate
geographic locations many kilometers apart. If disaster tolerance is a requirement, a
VAXcluster can be duplicated at another site. Then, if one site goes down due to a
fire, flood, or power outage, the other site can continue operations. OpenVMS
Volume Shadowing ensures full availability of critical data at the other site.

VAX Systems

1.115

VAX 7000 Systems and Servers
Product Description (Continued)

Up to 24 Gbytes of storage and 2.6 Gbytes of tape capacity can be configured
in the VAX 7000 system cabinet to form a complete, compact system where
space requirements are critical. Outside the cabinet, industry-leading DSSI storage arrays such as the DECarray 400 offer economical, high-capacity storage
solutions.
A variety of tape drives can meet all needs, from backup and data interchange to
high-capacity, high-performance storage. For example, VAX 7000 systems support
Digital's TA867 /TF867 tape drives, each drive providing unattended backup
capacity of up to 42 Gbytes.
Digital' s Open VMS operating system is based on standards-standards for software development, networking and communications, system management, data
management, and user interaction. With standards, Open VMS brings superior
functionality to an open system. Openness gives users options, makes it easier to
move between platforms, and lets users of other vendors' systems take advantage
of the special features of the OpenVMS operating system. OpenVMS standards
include IEEE POSIX, X/Open Base Branding (XPG3) and Motif, and Digital is
committed to supporting the Open Software Foundation's (OSF) Distributed
Computing Environment (DCE).
Digital's commitment to Network Application Support (NAS) and standards-based open computing means that users can integrate and share applications over a network and across a broad range of industry-standard, heterogeneous systems. VAX 7000 systems offer a complete range of datacenter solutions
built upon NAS software to provide the exact level of functionality needed.
A variety of configurations are available. VAX 7000 ADVANTAGE-SERVER systems offer package-priced, balanced configurations-complete with memory, I/O
controllers, disks, and tape-with the flexibility to add components, such as user
licensing, as needed. Single-node ADVANTAGE-SERVER systems include
OpenVMS and the NAS 300 software package, providing complete support for
client/server computing. VAXcluster AD VANT AGE-SERVER systems include NAS
400 software, which provides high-performance and high-availability datacenter
features.
Traditional VAX 7000 systems are designed to be integrated into existing
VAXcluster configurations. They include unlimited OpenVMS user license,
DECnet full-function license, and an Rdb/OpenVMS runtime license.
Base servers are the VAX 7 000 configurations of choice when configuration flexibility is the primary consideration. VAX 7000 base servers allow users to add
user licenses, memory, I/O controllers, storage, database software, and networking support as the data center requires. VAX 7000 base servers include the
OpenVMS operating system. NAS software, DECnet or TCP/IP, PATHWORKS,
and Rdb/Open VMS are key options.

1.116

VAX Systems

VAX 7000 Systems and Servers

Unless included with preconfigured system, the following items are required. Open VMS user licenses may be ordered as
needed.
· InfoServer 100/150 for initial booting of system console
• CIXCD (CI) controller, KFMSA (DSSI) disk/tape adapter, KDM70 (SDI/STI) disk/tape controller
· System disk device
· Console terminal
· VAXcluster Software license for each system when multiple systems are used in a VAXcluster environment
Additional items may be added as required.

ADVANTAGE-SERVER Systems include
• CPU(s) , high-speed system interconnect bus, 12-slot XMI I/ O channel
· 64 , 128 or 256 Mbytes of memory
·DEC LANcontroller 400 (DEMNA) 802.3/ Ethernet controller
· KFMSA disk/tape adapter
• RF73 2.0-Gbyte disk drives with cables and disk plug-in unit
· TF85 2.6-Gbyte cartridge tape drive
· VT420 console terminal and cable>''
· LA75 Plus console printer and cable
· VT420/LA75 table
· 48-volt power regulator
· Open VMS base license (with POSIX)
· NAS 300 package (with DECnet end-node license and Rdb Runtime license)
·One full-year product warranty (standard warranty recommended)
* Not included with Japan order numbers

Order Number
xK = 60 Hz, 208 V
xL = 50 Hz, 380/416 V
xM = 50/60 Hz, Japan

Model

Memory

RF73 (2.0 Gbytes)

SV-7F1DA-AK/AL/AM
SV-7F2DA-AK/ALIAM
SV-7F2DA-BK/BL/BM
SV-7F3 DA-CK/CL/CM
SV-7F3 DA-DK/DL/DM

Model 610
Model 610
Model 620
Model 630
Model 640

64 Mbytes
128 Mbytes
128 Mbytes
256 Mbytes
256 Mbytes

2 x RF73
2 x RF73
2 x RF73
4 x RF73
4 x RF73

ADVANTAGE-SERVER DSSI VAXcluster Systems include
· VAX 7000 systems with CPU(s), high-speed system interconnect bus and 12-slot XMI I/O channel
• 128 Mbytes of memory per system
·DEC LANcontroller 400 (DEMNA) 802.3/ Ethernet controller per system
· KFMSA disk/tape adapter per system
• DECarray SF400 (four RF73 2.0-Gbyte disk drives and TF857 18.2-Gbyte cartridge tape subsystem)
· VT420 console terminal and cable per system.,.'
· LA75 Plus console printer and cable per system
• VT420/ LA75 table per system
• 48-volt power regulator per system
· Open VMS base license (with POSIX) per system
· NAS 400 package per system (with DECnet full-function license, VAXcluster license, and Rdb Runtime license)
· One full-year product warranty (standard warranty recommended)
"' Not included with J apan order numbers

Order Number

xK = 60 Hz, 208 V
xL = 50 Hz, 380/416 V
xM = 50/60 Hz, Japan

Configuration

RF73 (2.0 Gbytes)

DV-7F2DA-EK/EL/EM
DV-7F2DA-KKIKL/KM

2 x VAX 7000-610
3 x VAX 7000-610

4 x RF73
6 x RF73

VAX Systems

1.117

VAX 7000 Systems and Servers
Step 1-Systems (Continued)
OpenVMS Traditional Systems include
· CPU(s), high-speed system interconnect bus and 12-slot XMI I/O channel
• 128, 256, or 512 Mbytes of memory
·DEC LANcontroller 400 (DEMNA) 802.3/ Ethernet controller
• 48-volt power regulator
· Console cable
• OpenVMS Unlimited-Use license (with POSIX)
• DECnet Full-Function license
• Rdb Runtime license
• One full-year product warranty (standard warranty recommended)
Order Number
xA = 60 Hz, 208 V
xB = 50 Hz, 380/416 V
xC = 50160 Hz, Japan

Model

Memory

7FAMC-AAIAB/AC
7FAMD-AA/AB/AC
7FAME-AAIAB/AC

Model 610
Model 610
Model 610

128 Mbytes
256 Mbytes
512 Mbytes

7FBMC-AAIAB/AC

7FBMD-AA/AB/AC
7FBME-AA/AB/AC

Model 620
Model 620
Model 620

128 Mbytes
256 Mbytes
512 Mbytes

7FCMD-AAIAB/AC
7FCME-AA/AB/AC

Model 630
Model 630

256 Mbytes
512 Mbytes

7FDMD-AAIAB/AC
7FDME-AA/AB/AC

Model 640
Model 640

256 Mbytes
512 Mbytes

Open VMS Base Servers include
• CPU(s), system interconnect bus and 12-slot XMI I/ O channel
· 64, 128 or 256 Mbytes of memory
·DEC LANcontroller 400 (DEMNA) 802.3/Ethernet controller
· 48-volt power regulator
• Console cable
· OpenVMS base license (with POSIX)
· One full-year product warranty (standard warranty recommended)
Order Number
xA = 60 Hz, 208 V
xB = 50 Hz, 380/416 V
xC = 50160 Hz, Japan

Model

Memory

7FAMB-BA/BB/BC
7FAMC-BA/BB/BC
7FAMD-BA/BB/BC

Model 610
Model 610
Model 610

64 Mbytes
128 Mbytes
256 Mbytes

7FBMC-BA/BB/BC
7FBMD-BA/BB/BC

Model 620
Model 620

128 Mbytes
256 Mbytes

7FCMC-BA/BB/BC
7FCMD-BA/BB/BC

Model 630
Model 630

128 Mbytes
256 Mbytes

7FDMC-BA/BB/BC
7FDMD-BA/BB/BC

Model 640
Model 640

128 Mbytes
256 Mbytes

fQI

tQI
Vl
"'O

a
fl.I

~
fl.I
:>..

.......

1.118

VAX Systems

VAX 7000 Systems and Servers
Step 2-Memory
Select additional memory if required. All models can currently be expanded to a maximum of 512 Mbytes. There are no
memory restrictions on Model 610 systems. On Model 620/630/640 systems, 64-Mbyte memory modules must be configured in pairs. There are no restrictions on the other memory modules as they all have on-board interleaving.
MS7 AA-AA
DL-MS7 AA-BA
MS7 AA-BA
DL-MS7 AA-CA
MS7 AA-CA

64 Mbytes of memory, factory or field installed
128 Mbytes of memory, factory installed only
128 Mbytes of memory, factory or field installed
256 Mbytes of memory, factory installed only
256 Mbytes of memory, factory or field installed

Step 3-Gonsole Load Device
Order an InfoServer for initial booting of console system unless one is already available on-site on the local area network.
SEACD-AA/A9

InfoServer 150 Ethernet load device. Includes internal RRD42 CD-ROM drive and RZ23L disk drive.
Additional items are also included; see description in Chapter 7.
Same as above except includes additional external RRD42 CD-ROM drive.
Note: -AA includes 120-V power cord.
-A9 requires country-specific power cord-see InfoServer 150 in Chapter 7 for listing.

SEACE-AA/A9

Step 4-Storage Controller(s)/CI Controller
-----~~--~~~~--~~~·-~

Base systems require selection of storage controller or CI controller (KFMSA included with preconfigured systems).
KFMSA-BA

CK-KFMSA-LN
KDM70-AA

XMI disk/tape controller. Total six per XMI; maximum 24 per system. Requires two XMI slots.
Provides eight ports for DSA devices-any two available for tapes.
0.9-m (3-ft) cabinet kit. Required with each KDM70-AA.

CK-KDMOO-LF
CIXCD-AC

XMI CI controller. Total six per XMI; maximum 10 per system. Requires one XMI slot. Each
CIXCD requires one BNCIA cable set to connect system to Star Coupler. VAXcluster Software
license (QL-VBRAx-AA) required for each system when multiple systems are used in a VAXcluster
environment.

BNCIA-xx

Computer interconnect cable sets. Choose required length 10, 20 or 45 m (10 m = 32.8 ft,
20 m = 65.6 ft, 45 m = 147.6 ft).

QL-VBRAx-AA

VAXcluster license. Required with each system that will connect to a VAXcluster (including DSSI
VAXcluster system)-included with DSSI preconfigured systems; x = processor code.

Step .5-Storage
----~-

Select storage devices as required. See Chapter 7, Storage Devices, for complete ordering information.

Step 5a-lntemal Storage (System Cabinet)
The system cabinet provides space for two disk plug-in units-each holds a maximum of three SF73 storage array building
blocks. Space for one TF85 tape drive is provided.
BA654-AA
SF73-LA
TF85D-AA
TFM85-DA

Disk plug-in unit-required for first and fourth SF73 added to system cabinet. Supports up to three
SF73-LAs.
4.0-Gbyte storage array building block with two RF73 disk drives. Requires BA654 disk plug-in unit,
KFMSA, and CK-KFMSA cabinet kit.
TF85 2.6-Gbyte embedded cartridge tape subsystem.
TF85 starter kit-includes TF85, KFMSA, and CK-KFMSA cabinet kit.

Step 5b-Extemal Storage (I/O Expansion Cabinet)
~~~~~~--~----

In addition to options described in Step 10, the I/O expansion cabinet provides space for six disk plug-in units; each holds
a maximum of three SF73 storage array building blocks. See Step 5a for ordering information.

VAX Systems

1.119

VAX 7000 Systems and Servers

The following list describes available storage devices, capacities, and components included with initial offerings; supported
options can be added as required. See Chapter 7, Storage Devices, for ordering information.
Storage Arrays

Capacity

Storage Array Components

SF400
SF220

SA900
SA905
SA800
SA300

4.0-64.0 Gbytes
5.1-61.3 Gbytes
18.2 Gbytes
4.0-48.0 Gbytes
18.2 Gbytes
2.0-24.0 Gbytes
18.2 Gbytes
1.5-40.0 Gbytes
1.4-2.0 Gbytes
6.0-24.0 Gbytes
4.0-12 .0 Gbytes

RF3 5 DSSI disk drives
RF3 5 DSSI disk drives
TF857 DSSI tape drive
RF73 DSSI disk drives
TF857 DSSI tape drive
RF72 DSSI disk drives
TF857 DSSI tape drive
RA71, RA72, RA92 SDI disk drives
RA71, RA72 SDI removable disk drives
RA92 SDI disk drives
RA71/RA72 SDI disk drives

Storage Array
Building Blocks

Capacity

Storage Array Building
Block Components

SF73
SA71
SA72

1.7-10.2 Gbytes
2.0-4.0 Gbytes
4.0-8.0 Gbytes
700 Mbytes-2.8 Gbytes
1.0-4.0 Gbytes

RF3 5 DSSI disk drives
RF72 DSSI disk drives
RF73 DSSI disk drives
RA71 SDI disk drives
RA72 SDI disk drives

Disk Drives

Capacity

RF35 DSSI
RF72 DSSI
RF73 DSSI
RA71 SDI
RA72 SDI
RA92 SDI
ESE50 solid-state

853 Mbytes
1.0 Gbyte
2.0 Gbytes
700 Mbytes
1.0 Gbyte
1.5 Gbytes
120-600 Mbytes

SF210
SF200

SF35
SF72

Tape Drives
TF85/TF857 recommended for backup and data interchange. The system cabinet provides space for one TF85 tape drive.
Note: For additional Tx800 information see Tx800 Family of Tapes in Chapter 7, Storage Devices.

TF85-TA
TF86-TA
TF857-AA/AB
TF86 7-AA/AB
TA857-AA/AB
TA867-AA/AB
TA91/TA79/TA81

1.120

VAX Systems

TF85 2.6-Gbyte DSSI tabletop cartridge tape subsystem.
TF86 6.0-Gbyte DSSI tabletop cartridge tape subsystem.
18.2-Gbyte DSSI cartridge tape subsystem for SF storage arrays and pedestals, 120 V/240 V.
42.0-Gbyte DSSI cartridge tape subsystem for SF storage arrays and pedestals, 120 V/240 V.
18.2-Gbyte CI cartridge tape subsystem for SA300/SA900 storage arrays, 120 V/240 V.
42.0-Gbyte Cl cartridge tape subsystem for SA300/SA900 storage arrays, 120 V/240 V.
TA91 tape drive-maximum two masters per HSC5X-DA; two masters per KDM70. Each master
supports three additional slave units.
TA79/ TA81 tape drives-maximum four per HSC5X-DA, two per KDM70; cables included. See
descriptions in Chapter 7.

VAX 7000 Systems and Servers
Step 6-CI VAXcluster l:>ptions
For CI VAXcluster configurations, select appropriate VAXcluster options. CI controller, BNCIA cables, and VAXcluster
Software license required.
HSS90-GA/GB
HSS60-GA/GB

HSC90/60 VAXcluster starter package. Includes HSC90-AA/ AB or HSC60-AA/ AB, one BNCIA-20
cable set, one HSC5X-DA disk/tape data channel, one HSC9X-FA eight-port data channel, and one
SC008-AC Star Coupler.

HSC90-BA

HSC90 storage controller. Supports four HSC5X-DA and four HSC9X-FA data channel cards for a
total of 48 ports; BNCIA-xx cable set required.
HSC60 storage controller. Supports one HSC5X-DA and two HSC9X-FA data channel cards for a
total of 20 ports; BNCIA-xx cable set required.

HSC60-BA
BNCIA-xx

Computer interconnect cable sets. Choose required length of 10, 20 or 45 m (10 m = 32.8 ft, 20 m
= 65.6 ft, 45 m = 147.6 ft).

HSC5X-DA

Disk/tape channel. Supports four DSA disk drives or tape drives. (Disks and tapes cannot be
combined on the same HSC5X-DA.)
Disk data channel. Supports up to eight DSA disk drives.

HSC9X-FA

SC008-AC
SC008-AD
CISCE-AA

8-port Star Coupler. Maximum five Star Couplers per system.
Star Coupler. Upgrades SC008-AC to 16 ports; maximum one per SC008-AC.
Star Coupler expander. Upgrade to either 24 or 32 ports. Requires two SC008-ACs and two
SC008-ADs for 32 ports; requires two SC008-ACs and one SC008-AD for 24 ports. Maximum
32 ports per Star Coupler.

VAXcluster
VCS provides a single, central point of control for all clusterwide console functions. Refer to
Console System (VCS) Chapter 5, VAXcluster Options/Systems Expansion, for details.

Step 7-Networks and cOmmunications
DEMNA 802.3/Ethernet controller included with each system. Select additional devices if required. Note: Connection of
system to Ethernet requires an Ethernet transceiver cable, which can be connected to a DESTA, H4005, or port on a DELNI.
See Chapter 6, Networks, Communications, and Cables, and the Networks Buyer's Guide for details.
LAN Communications Controllers
DEMNA-M
CK-DEMNA-KN
DEMFA-AA

802.3/Ethernet controller; one included; total four per XMI; maximum 16 per system. Requires one
XMI slot.
DEMNA cabinet kit, required with DEMNA-M.
DEC FDDicontroller 400, XMI-to-FDDI adapter; requires one XMI slot. Total four per XMI; maximum eight per system. Includes cabinet kit.

Local and Wide Area Communications Servers
Each communications server requires an 802.3/Ethernet connection. Depending on the server selected, either a ThinWire
ENC-type connection, e.g. , BC16M cable or thick wire 15-pin AUI transceiver cable, e.g., BNE3x is required. Additional
items are also required-see descriptions in Chapter 6, Networks, Communications, and Cables, for ordering information.
DECserver 90L+, 90TL, 700, 250, and MUXserver 300, 310, 320, 380 Terminal and Printer Servers
Select a terminal or printer server to provide users with multiple session access to systems on a LAN, to minimize cabling
complexity and costs, and to conserve host resources such as backplane slots.
DEC WANrouter 250, 500; DECNIS 500, 600; Proteon 4100+; CNX500 and TransPATH 335, 350 Multiprotocol Routers
Select a router to cost-effectively link a LAN to a remote system or another LAN and to offload routing overhead from the
application host system.
Network Connectivity Products
See Chapter 6, Networks, Communications, and Cables, and the Networks Buyer's Guide for details.

VAX Systems

1.121

VAX 7000 Systems and Servers
Step 8-Console Terminal
A console terminal with EIA-232 25-pin D-subminiature connector and printer required unless otherwise available.
VT420-SA/SE, LA75S-AA/AE, and LAXXS-AD included with preconfigured systems. See Chapter 8, Terminals and Printers,
for ordering information.

DL-VT420-xx
LA75S-xx
LAXXS-AD

VT420 terminal, 17-01364-02 console cable and H8595-A MMJ adapter required. See VT420
description for ordering details.
LA75 Plus printer. See LA75 description for ordering details.
VT420/LA75 table for both VT420 and LA75.

Select terminals as required. See Chapter 8, Terminals and Printers, for ordering information.

Step 10-Expansion (System Cabinet and 1/0 Expansion Cabinet)

----

The system cabinet includes one 12-slot XMl-plug-in-unit and one power regulator and provides space for one TF85 tape
drive, two additional power regulators, and two lower expansion bays for plug-in units. The lower bays accommodate
plug-in units as follows.

System Cabinet
Expansion Bay
Location

Plug-in Unit

Quantity

Expansion Bays
Occupied

Lower
Lower
Lower

Disk plug-in unit
XMI Plug-in unit
Battery plug-in unit

2 maximum
2 maximum (included)
1 maximum

1 each
2 each
2

The 1/0 expansion cabinet includes one power regulator and provides space for one TF85 tape drive, two additional power
regulators and six expansion bays-two upper and four lower-for plug-in units. The two upper bays accommodate a
maximum of two disk plug-in units. The four lower bays accommodate plug-in units as follows.

1/0 Expansion Cabinet

Expansion Bay
Location

Plug-in Unit

Quantity

Expansion Bays
Occupied

Upper
Lower
Lower
Lower

Disk plug-in unit
Disk plug-in unit
XMI Plug-in unit
Battery plug-in unit

2 maximum
4 maximum
2 maximum
1 maximum

1 each
1 each
2 each
2

H9FOO-BA/BB/BC

1/0 expansion cabinet, maximum two per system.

Note: Maximum four XMI plug-in units per system; total two per cabinet (one included in system cabinet. )
~

tcu

DWLMA-AA
DWLMA-BB

XMI plug-in unit with 12-slot XMI 1/0 channel for system cabinet.
XMI plug-in unit with 12-slot XMI 1/0 channel for 1/0 expansion cabinet; maximum three per
system.

H7237-AA

Battery plug-in unit with batteries for battery backup/UPS capability-maximum one per cabinet.
Includes four batteries to support one 48-volt power regulator and cabling for second and third
H7238-AA battery option.
4-pack battery option; one required per optional 48-volt power regulator to support battery
backup/UPS capability.

~
~

~
Q
Q
Q

H7238-AA

......
l;I<

<
>

H7263-AA/AB

1.122

VAX Systems

48-volt power regulator, 60 Hz/50 Hz; maximum three per cabinet (one included). A second
regulator may be required to supply adequate power depending on configuration. See power configuration table that follows. A third regulator assures redundancy and higher availability in the event
of a power regulator failure. Note: The power configuration table provides a manual method of
determining the need for a second power regulator. Equivalent power unit (EPU) is an equivalent
value of power used at 48 V de by each option.

VAX 7000 Systems and Servers
Power Configuration Table
EPU Values for Options in System Cabinet

EPUs

Base System includes: one power regulator, one I/O port module, one CPU
module, one memory module, one XMI I/O channel, one DEMNA

Additional CPU modules

MS7 AA-AA 64 Mbytes of memory

MS7AA-BA 128 Mbytes of memory

MS7AA-CA 256 Mbytes of memory

DWLMA-AA XMI plug-in unit

DEMNA-M Ethernet XMI controller

DEMFA-AA FDDI XMI adapter

CJXCD-AC CI XMI controller

KDM70-AA disk/tape XMI adapter

KFMSA-BA DSSI XMI adapter

SF73-LA storage array building block

Quantity

Total EPU
(Qty times EPU)

Total the last column

If EPU is greater then 85 , order second power regulator (H7263-AA/ AB); EPU must not exceed 185.

EPU Values for Options in I/O Expansion Cabinet

EPUs

Expansion cabinet (H9FOO-BA/BB/BC) includes; one power regulator

DWLMA-BB XMI plug-in unit

DEMNA-M Ethernet XMI controller

DEMFA-AA FDDI XMI adapter

CIXCD-AC CI XMI controller

KDM70-AA disk/ tape XMI adapter

KFMSA-BA DSSI XMI adapter

SF73-LA storage array building block

Quantity

Total EPU
(Qty times EPU)

Total the last column

If EPU is greater then 85, order second power regulator (H7263-AA/AB); EPU must not exceed 185.
Note: Depending on the configuration, the system offers integral UPS capability that supports all in-cabinet components for up to 11 minutes. If UPS
support is required for external devices, e.g., console terminals, terminal servers, printers, modems, etc., a universal UPS can be ordered separately. See
"Environmental Products" section in Chapter 5 and Th e Environmental Products Catalog.

Step 11-Software
Model

VAX 7000
VAX 7000
VAX 7000

ClusterWide
License Ratings

Software
Processor Code

1200
1800
2400

Model 610
Model 620
Model 630/640

u
v

Open VMS User Licenses

QL-XULA9-BB
QL-XULA9-BC
QL-XULA9-BD
QL-XULA9-BE
QL-XULA9-BF
QL-XULA9-BG
QL-XULA9-BH
QL-XULAA-BR
QL-XULAB-BR

Open VMS/VAX interactive one-user license
Open VMS/VAX interactive two-user license
Open VMS/VAX interactive four-user license
Open VMS/VAX interactive eight-user license
Open VMS/VAX interactive 16-user license
OpenVMS/VAX interactive 32-user license
OpenVMS/VAX interactive 64-user license
Open VMS/VAX interactive 128-user license
Open VMS/VAX interactive 256-user license

VAX Systems

1.123

VAX 7000 Systems and Servers
Step 11-Software (Continued)
QL-XULAD-6D
QL-XULAU-6C
QL-XULAV-6H
QL-XULAV-6J

Model 610 OpenVMS/VAX interactive unlimited-use license
Model 620 OpenVMS/VAX interactive unlimited-use license
Model 630 OpenVMS/VAX interactive unlimited-use license
Model 640 OpenVMS/VAX interactive unlimited-use license

QL-VBRA"'-AA

VAXcluster Software license-Note: ·>< denotes processor code

QA-OOlAA-Hx
QA-09SAA-Hx

Open VMS media and extended documentation, including VAXcluster and DECnet documentation
Open VMS media and base documentation

QA-358AA-Hx
QA-GXXAA-Hx
QA-GXXAB-Hx

Rdb Runtime media and documentation
POSIX media and documentation (with IEEE documentation)
POSIX media and documentation (without IEEE documentation)

Note: x denotes media type: 5 = TK50; 8 =CD-ROM
Select the appropriate NAS software level. See description of NAS packages on page 9.2. Note: The NAS packaged products
do not include hardcopy documentation for the components (the documentation is CD-ROM only). To order NAS component hardcopy documentation, see page 9 5 for listing of order numbers.
QL-MClA"'-AA
QA-MClAA-Hx

NAS 200 (Network Application Support 200)
NAS 200 media and documentation kit

QL-MC2A"'-AA
QA-MC2AA-Hx

NAS 300 (Network Application Support 300)
NAS 300 media and documentation kit

QL-MC5A"'-AA
QA-MC5AA-Hx

NAS 400 (Network Application Support 400)
NAS 400 media and documentation kit

Note: x denotes media type: 8 = CD-ROM, 5 = TK50, M = magtape
1
' denotes processor code.

Step 12-Environmental Power Products
Select environmental power products if required. Refer to Chapter 5, VAXcluster Options/Systems Expansion, and Digital' s

Environmental Power Products Catalog.

1.124

VAX Systems

VAX 7000 Systems and Servers

High-speed
System
Interconnect
Bus
•1-4CPUs
•Memory
• 1/0 Port

Space for
TF85
Tape Drive

Operator
Control
Panel

Space
for
Disk Drives

48-Volt
Power
Regulator

Space for
Additional
Power
Regulators

Cooling Assembly

12-slot Standard
XMI 1/0 Channel
Plug-in Unit

I
48-Volt
Power
Regulator

Expansion Bay for:
• XMI 1/0 Channel
• Disk Drives
• Batteries for UPS

BU-3299

System Cabinet

1/0 Expansion Cabinet

VAX 7000 System Diagram

/
/
/
/

c:::Jc::::J

/
/

___ _ _
...,..._

__._

/
/

-~,--.?L--~,
__._..,__...__....
/

--,71
/
/

/
~--.---r---r'"----.-...,....--f

I
I

I
I
I
I

I
I

- - - --r-1

I
I

XMI Plug-in Unit
... . . . . . . ..-.-..,
(occupies two bays)

Battery Plug-in Unit
(occupies two bays)
BU-3300

VO Expansion Cabinet Sample Configuration
Note: The upper expansion bays are unavailable for disk plug-in units in the system cabinet.

VAX Systems

1.125

VAX 7000 Systems Specifications
Physical Characteristics
Height
Width
Depth
Weight, full configuration
Without batteries
With batteries

Operating
170.0 cm (67.0 in.)
80.0 cm (31.5 in.)
86.5 cm (34.1 in.)

Shipping
195.0 cm (76.7 in.)
106.0 cm (41.7 in.)
119.0 cm (46.8 in.)

408 kg (900 lb)
545 kg (1,200 lb)

448 kg (1000 lb)
585 kg (1,300 lb)

Clearances
Front
Rear
Sides

Operating
1.0 m
1.0 m
0

Service
1.5 m
1.0 m
0

Operating
15° to 28° C (59° to 82° F)
10% to 90 %
0-2.4 km (0-8000 ft)
2-22 Hz@ O.Ol"da minimum

N onoperating
-40° to 66° C (-40° to 151 ° F)
10% to 95 %
9,100 m (30,000 ft)
22-500 Hz @ 0.25g maximum

Fully configured system
(system cabinet)
14,000 Btu/ hr, 4120 W
Minimally configured system
(system cabinet)
4,000 Btu/hr, 1200 W

Fully configured system
(system cabinet with two
1/0 expansion cabinets)
37,500 Btu/hr 11,020 W

Environmental
Temperature
Humidity
Altitude
Vibration
H eat Dissipation

Power Requirements

Nominal voltage
Frequency range
Phases

U.S./Canada
120/ 208 v
50-60 Hz
3-phase star
4-wire N-GND

Europe/GIA
380--415 y
50-60 Hz
3-phase star
4-wire N-GND

Maximum input current/ phase
Surge current
Rating
Power cap (system)
Receptacle (site)
Receptacle
PCS/ PDS/ PDU/UPS cable

24 Arms
50 A peak
30 A
DEC 12-12314-00
DEC 12-12315-01
NEMA L21-30R
BC24W

12.8 Arms
50 A peak
16 A
DEC 12-30333-02
Note 2
IEC309
BN29L

1
Power cord is required for system cabinet and each I/ O expansion cabinet.
2

Receptacle type is Hubbell 516R6 or equivalent.

1.126

VAX Systems

Japan
202 v
50-60 Hz
3-phase delta
4-wire mid-GND or
3-wire junction-GND
24 Arms
50 A peak
30 A
DEC 12-12314-00
DEC 12-12315-01
NEMA L21 -30R
BC24W

VAX 7000 CPU Upgrades
Base upgrade packages include CPU processor(s), OpenVMS base license, and
one full-year product warranty. Traditional upgrade packages include Open VMS
unlimited-use license, DECnet full-function license, and one full year product
warranty.

From-To

Traditional

Base

Model 610-620
Model 620-630
Model 63 0-640

7FBTA-BA
7FCTA-BA
7FDTA-BA

7FBTA-AA
7FCTA-AA
7FDTA-AA

VAX Systems

1.127

VAX 10000 Systems and Servers

Product Description

Digital's VAX 10000 systems offer world class mainframe solutions for business-critical needs. These systems have been configured to deliver the best value
in mainframe-class computing. They incorporate Digital's most powerful CPU
technology, enhanced with additional reliability features and an extensive range
of software and services. This comprehensive, integrated, packaged solution
approach offers a substantial computing resource, capable of handling the
high-volume online and batch production jobs that are the backbone of corporate information processing.
Every VAX 10000 model offers the reliability and high work throughput of a
traditional mainframe combined with the convenience and flexibility of a personal workstation. Being Alpha-ready, VAX 10000 systems also provide an easy
upgrade path to substantially greater performance in the future.
VAX 10000 systems deliver distributed computing as a core element of the mainframe strategy. Their power can be effectively switched between distributed,
interactive, online transaction processing tasks and dedicated, time-critical single-stream batch jobs.

The VAX 10000 series incorporates substantial software functionality and
Digital's most comprehensive service and support offerings. Together with
sophisticated system management capabilities, these ensure that production system operations can be maintained with trouble-free consistency and
dependability.
The VAX 10000 series is optimally suited for all commercial applications and all
major industries. It is the most powerful VAX system available for finance, payroll, human resource and administrative applications. It offers superior
price/performance benefits to organizations that are:
• Processing high-volume transactions or large-scale commercial batch jobs
· Exploring rightsizing and other ways to reduce mainframe costs
· Considering migrating to Alpha technology in the future

· In need of network support for distributed operations.

1.128

VAX Systems

VAX 10000 Systems and Servers
Product Description (Continued)

The VAX 10000 series has recorded highly successful benchmarks running popular financial and manufacturing third-party solutions. For example, a VAX 10000
system can complete a Fortune 10-size general ledger quarterly close in less than
a single shift. Third-party applications can benefit from VAX 10000 performance.
The VAX 10000 series has been optimized to deliver the maximum throughput
for mission-critical applications. It may be configured with up to four CPUs (six
available in the future), each based on the newest NV AX CMOS technology. Four
XMI VO channels are available, providing throughput of up to 400
Mbytes/second to meet business needs. Memory capacity can be extended to 3.5
Gbytes-with a future release of Open VMS, with over 10 Terabytes of disk
storage available on-line.
High availability for the VAX 10000 means the ability to continue functioning in
the event of power failure, not just to maintain memory contents. Ongoing
operation is ensured by incorporating high reliability features into the basic
design and by the provision of an N+ 1 redundant power system and Uninterruptible Power System (UPS) capability. The UPS sustains full processing for up
to one hour in every twenty-hour period.
Large memories, local storage and optional solid state disks are all available to
contribute to optimum performance. For the highest levels of capacity, all the
necessary adapters are included to easily integrate the VAX 10000 series into a
new or existing VAXcluster environment.
The VAX 10000 standard service and support solution is one of the most comprehensive in the industry. The highlights are:
· Formal needs assessment and operations review, which forms the basis of planning and documenting the other services via the System Implementation Plan
(SIP)
· Customer Configuration Design (CCD) service, which designs and documents the
optimal VAX 10000 configuration to meet application needs
• Full hardware and software installation, including environment/ logistics assessment and pre-installation planning
• Consulting and training plan, which assesses startup, migration and training
needs and delivers the appropriate consulting and training services
· Digital's premier hardware and software remedial support including the dedicated customer support embodied in the Mission-Critical Support Service

In addition to these services, the VAX 10000 is supplied with VAX Performance
Capacity Services and Performance Management Services, and with DEC System
Support (24 x 7).
The details of the support component of the VAX 10000 series may differ
outside the U.S. Specific information can be obtained from a Digital
representative.
The VAX 10000 is a complete mainframe-class solution. It therefore incorporates
a wide range of software to facilitate rapid introduction into a customers environment and enhance their enterprise computing capability. This software
includes:
• Open VMS for unlimited use and DECnet full function .
· NAS 400, which is Digital's premier Network Application Support (NAS) offering. It includes all the functionality of NAS 200 and NAS 300. NAS 400 offers
one of the most highly acclaimed transaction processing capabilities in the industry, an enhanced mission-critical environment, application and desktop integration, and access to functions such as disk shadowing, journaling and transaction
processing.

VAX Systems

1.129

VAX 10000 Systems and Servers
Product Description (Continued)

Production system environments need to be able to maximize performance and
concentrate on servicing end users. The VAX 10000 series supports this approach
by providing the tools that optimize performance while reducing system management overhead to the minimum.
A system management workstation is included to run the VAX.cluster Console
System (VCS) and the DECperformance Solution (DECps) products that make up
part of the VAX 10000 solution. These make major contributions to management
ease, capacity planning, and tuning for high performance.

1.130

VAX Systems

VAX 10000 Systems and Servers
Step 1--Systerns
The following items are required for traditional systems only. Appropriate functionality is provided with all other systems.
· InfoServer 100/150 for initial booting of system console
· CIXCD (CI) controller, KFMSA (DSSI) disk/tape adapter, KDM70 (SDI/STI) disk/tape controller
· System disk device
· Console terminal
· VAXcluster Software license for each system when multiple systems are used in a VAXcluster environment
Additional items may be added as required.
VAX 10000 Model 610/620/630/640 Three-Cabinet Systems include
· Three-cabinet system (1-4 CPU(s) for CI Version/ 1-2 CPU(s) for DSSI Version) high-speed system interconnect bus, two
12-slot XMI I/ O channels
· 512 Mbytes of memory (256 Mbytes for DSSI version)
·DEC LANcontroller 400 (DEMNA) 802.3/ Ethernet controller
· Two KFMSA DSSI disk/tape adapters
· CIXCD CI VAXcluster adapter (for CI version) and BNCIA-20 cable set
· DEMFA FDDI adapter
· Two Dual RF73 2.0-Gbyte disk drives with cables and disk plug-in unit
· InfoServer 150 and cable
• TF85 tape drive
· VT420 console terminal and cable'"
· VT420 table
· N+ 1 (redundant) 48-volt power system
· Batteries to support 60 minutes of system-wide uninterruptible power capability
· Open VMS base license (with POSIX) and unlimited-use license
• NAS 400 package (with DECnet full-function license, VAXcluster license, and Rdb Runtime license)
• DECram, Disk Striping, DEC File Optimizer licenses
· VAXstation 4000 Model 60 System Management Workstation with network connections
· VAXcluster Console System (VCS), DECps Performance Advisor license and DECps Capacity Planner license
· Network kit for InfoServer
·DECsystem support
· System Implementation Plan (SIP)
· Customer Configuration Design (CCD)
• Mission-Critical Support Service
· Hardware and software installation
· One full-year product warranty
Order Number
xK = 60 Hi, 208 V
xL = 50 Hz, 380/416 V
xl\1 =50160 Hz, Japan

Model

Memory

RF73 (2.0 Gbytes)

~
a>

SV-9F4BA-AK/AL/Al\1 (CI)
SV-9F4BA-BK/BL/Bl\1 (CI)
SV-9F4BA-CK/CL/Cl\1 (CI)
SV-9F4BA-DK/DL/DM (CI)
SV-9F3BB-AK/ALIAM (DSSI)
SV -9F3 BB-BK/BL/BM (DSSI)

Model 610
Model 620
Model 630
Model 640
Model 610
Model 620

512 Mbytes
512 Mbytes
512 Mbytes
512 Mbytes
256 Mbytes
256 Mbytes

4 x RF73
4 x RF73
4 x RF73
4 x RF73
4 x RF73
4 x RF73

.,,c

¥::

r:J)

=
(/)

ea>

.....
I'll

r:J)

0
0
0
0

* Not included with Japan order numbers

:><

VAX Systems

1.131

VAX 10000 Systems and Servers
Step 1-Systems (Continued)

........~--........--..

~~----~~----~~~~----~~~~--~~-'-~~~--~

VAX 10000 Model 630/640 Five-Cabinet Systems include
· Five-cabinet system, 3-4 CPU(s), high-speed system interconnect bus, four 12-slot XMI I/O channels
• 512 Mbytes of memory
• Two DEC LANcontroller 400 (DEMNA) 802.3/Ethernet controller
·Two KFMSA DSSI disk/tape adapters
• Two CIXCD VAXcluster CI adapters and two BNCIA-20 cable sets
• DEMFA FDDI adapter
· Two dual RF73 2.0-Gbyte disk drives with cables and disk plug-in unit
· TF85 tape drive
· InfoServer 150 and cable
• VT420 console terminal, and cable'"
· VT420 table
• N+ 1 (redundant) 48-volt power system
• Batteries to support 60 minutes of system-wide uninterruptible power (UPS) capability
• Open VMS base license (with POSIX) and unlimited-use license
· NAS 400 package (with DECnet full-function license, VAXcluster license, and Rdb Runtime license)
· DECram, Disk Striping, DEC File Optimizer licenses
• VAXstation 4000 Model 60 System Management Workstation with network connections
· VAXcluster Console System (VCS), DECps Performance Advisor license and DECps Capacity Planner license
· Network kit for Infoserver
· DECsystem support
• System Implementation Plan (SIP)
• Customer Configuration Design (CCD)
• Mission-Critical Support Service
• Hardware and software installation
• One full-year product warranty
Order Number
xK = 60 Hz, 208 V
xL = 50 Hz, 380/416 V
xM = 50/60 Hz, Japan

Model

Memory

RF73 (2.0 Gbytes)

SV -9F4CA-CK/CL/CM
SV-9F4CA-DK/DL/DM

Model 630
Model 640

512 Mbytes
512 Mbytes

4 x RF73
4 x RF73

"' Not included with Japan order numbers

VAX 10000 Traditional Systems include
• Three-cabinet system, 1-4 CPU(s), high-speed system interconnect bus, two 12-slot XMI I/O channels
• 256 Mbytes of memory
· DEC LANcontroller 400 (DEMNA) 802.3/Ethernet controller
• N+ 1 (redundant) 48-volt power system
• Batteries to support 60 minutes of system-wide uninterruptible power (UPS) capability
· OpenVMS base license (with POSIX) and unlimited-use license
· DECnet full-function license
· Rdb runtime license
·DECsystem support
· System Implementation Plan (SIP)
· Customer Configuration Design (CCD)
· Mission-Critical Support Service
· Hardware and software installation
• One full-year product warranty
Order Number
xK = 60 Hz, 208 V
xL = 50 Hz, 380/416 V
xM = 50/60 Hz, Japan

Model

Memory

9FAJD-AAIAB/AC
9FBJD-AA/AB/AC
9FCJD-AAIAB/AC
9FDJD-AAIAB/AC

Model 610
Model 620
Model 630
Model 640

256 Mbytes
256 Mbytes
256 Mbytes
256 Mbytes

1.132

VAX Systems

VAX 10000 Systems and Servers

Select additional memory if required. All models currently support a maximum of 512 Mbytes. There are no memory
restrictions as they all have on-board interleaving.
MS7 AA-AA
DL-MS7 AA-BA
MS7 AA-BA
DL-MS7AA-CA
MS7 AA-CA

~...;...,--~..;._~~~~~--~----~~....---~~--..--~~~-~~~~~

Step 3-Console Load Device
InfoServer required for initial booting of system console unless one is already included with system or available on-site on
the Local Area Network.
SEA CD-AA/A9
SEACE-AA/A9

InfoServer 150 Ethernet Load Device. Includes internal RRD42 CD-ROM drive and RZ23L disk
drive. Additional items are also included; see description in Chapter 7, Storage Devices.
Same as above except includes additional external RRD42 CD-ROM drive.

Note: -AA includes 120-V power cord.
-A9 requires country-specific power cord-see InfoServer 150 in Chapter 7, Storage Devices, for listing.

Step 4-Storage Controller( s )/CI Conttoller't
Traditional systems require selection of storage controller or CI controller.
KFMSA-BA

CK-KFMSA-LN
KDM70-AA
CK-KDMOO-LF
CIXCD-AC

BNCIA-xx
QL-VBRAx-AA

DSSI disk/tape adapter. Total six per XMI; up to a maximum of 12 per system. Maximum number
of KFMSAs is derived as follows: (25 minus the number of CIXCDs) divided by two. Requires one
XMI slot; supports 14 DSSI devices. VAXcluster Software license (QL-VBRA*-AA) required for all
VMS systems that will connect to a DSSI-based VAXcluster. Note: One CK-KFMSA-xx required with
each KFMSA-BA. KFMSA and TF85 are available with a single order number-see Step 5a.
Two pairs of 1.2-m (4-ft) cables in cabinet kit. Allows mixed hosting of systems and warm-swap.
XMI disk/tape controller. Total six per XMI; maximum 24 per system. Requires two XMI slots.
Provides eight ports for DSA devices-any two available for tapes.
0.9-m (3-ft) cabinet kit. Required with each KDM70-AA.
XMI CI controller. Total six per XMI; maximum 10 per system. Requires one XMI slot. Each
CIXCD requires one BNCIA cable set to connect system to Star Coupler. VAXcluster Software
license (QL-VBRAx-AA) required for each system when multiple systems are used in a VAXcluster
environment.
Computer interconnect cable sets. Choose required length 10, 20 or 45 meters (10 m = 32.8 ft,
20 m = 65.6 ft, 45 m = 147.6 ft).
VAXcluster Software license. Required with each system that will connect to a VAXcluster (including DSSI VAXcluster system)-included with NAS 400; x = processor code.

Select storage devices as required. See Chapter 7, Storage Devices, for complete ordering information.

Step ;a-Intemal Storage (I/ff Expansion Cabinet)
The I/ O Expansion Cabinet provides space for two disk plug-in units-each holds a maximum of three SF73 storage array
building blocks. Space for one TF85 tape drive is also provided in both the I/O Expansion Cabinet and System Cabinet. A
disk plug-in-unit and two 4-Gbyte storage array building blocks included except with traditional systems.
BA654-AA
SF73-LA
TF85D-AA
TFM85-DA

VAX Systems

1.133

VAX 10000 Systems and Servers

The following list describes available storage devices, capacities, and components included with initial offerings. See Chapter
7, Storage Devices, for ordering information.
Storage Arrays

Capacity

Storage Array Components

SF400
SF220

SA900
SA905
SA800
SA300

4.0-64 .0 Gbytes
5.1-61.3 Gbytes
18.2 Gbytes
4.0~8 Gbytes
18.2 Gbytes
2.0-24 Gbytes
18.2 Gbytes
1.5~0.0 Gbytes
1.4-2.0 Gbytes
6.0-24 Gbytes
4.0-12 .0 Gbytes

RF3 5 DSSI disk drives
RF3 5 DSSI disk drives
TF857 DSSI tape drive
RF73 DSSI disk drives
TF857 DSSI tape drive
RF72 DSSI disk drives
TF857 DSSI tape drive
RA71, RA72, RA92 SDI disk drives
RA71 , RA72 SDI removable disk drives
RA92 SDI disk drives
RA71 , RA72 SDI disk drives

Storage Array
Building Blocks

Capacity

Storage Array Building
Block Components

SF210
SF200

SF35
SF72
SF73
SA71
SA72

1.7-10.2 Gbytes
2.0~.0 Gbytes

4.0-8.0 Gbytes
700 Mbytes-2.8 Gbytes
1.0~.0 Gbytes

Disk Drives

Capacity

RF35 DSSI
RF72 DSSI
RF73 DSSI
RA71 SDI
RA72 SDI
RA92 SDI
ESE50 solid-state

853 Mbytes
1.0 Gbyte
2.0 Gbytes
700 Mbytes
1.0 Gbyte
1.5 Gbytes
120-600 Mbytes

RF3 5 DSSI disk drives
RF72 DSSI disk drives
RF73 DSSI disk drives
RA 71 SDI disk drives
RA72 SDI disk drives

Tape Drives
TF85/TF857 recommended for backup and data interchange. See TA800 family of tape drives for numerous tape combinations available.
TF85-TA
TF86-TA
TF857 -AA/AB
TF86 7-AA/AB
TA857-AA/AB
TA867-AAIAB
TA91/TA79/TA81

1.134 VAX Systems

TF85 2.6-Gbyte tabletop cartridge tape subsystem.
TF86 6-Gbyte tabletop cartridge tape subsystem
18.2-Gbyte DSSI cartridge tape subsystem for SF storage arrays and pedestals, 120 V/ 240 V.
42.0-Gbyte DSSI cartridge tape subsystem for SF storage arrays and pedestals, 120 V/ 240 V.
18.2-Gbyte CI cartridge tape subsystem for SA300/SA900 storage arrays, 120 V/240 V.
42 .0-Gbyte CI cartridge tape subsystem for SA300/SA900 storage arrays, 120 V/240 V.
TA91 tape drive-maximum two masters per HSC5X-DA; two masters per KDM70. Each master
supports three additional slave units. TA79/TA81 tape drives-maximum four per HSC5X-DA, two
per KDM70; cables included. See descriptions in Chapter 7, Storage Devices.

VAX 10000 Systems and Servers
Step 6--CI VAXcluster Options
For CI VAXcluster configurations, select appropriate VAXcluster options. CI controller, BNCIA cables, and VAXcluster
Software license required.
HSS90-GA/GB
HSC90/HSC60 VAXcluster starter package. Includes HSC90-AA/AB or HSC60-AA/AB, one BNCIA-20
HSS60-GA/GB
cable set, one HSC5X-DA disk/tape data channel, one HSC9X-FA eight-port data channel, and one
SC008-AC Star Coupler.
HSC90-BA
HSC60-BA

BNCIA-xx

Computer interconnect cable sets. Choose required length of 10, 20 or 45 meters (lOm = 32.8 ft,
20m = 65.6 ft, 45m = 147.6 ft).

HSC5X-DA

Disk/tape channel. Supports four DSA disk drives or tape drives. (Disks and tapes cannot be
combined on the same HSC5X-DA.)
Disk data channel. Supports up to eight DSA disk drives.

HSC9X-FA
SC008-AC
SC008-AD
CISCE-AA

8-Port Star Coupler. Maximum five Star Couplers per system. Star Coupler. Upgrades SC008-AC to
16 ports; maximum one per SC008-AC.
Star Coupler expander. Upgrade to either 24 or 32 ports. Requires two SC008-ACs and two
SC008-ADs for 32 ports; requires two SC008-ACs and one SC008-AD for 24 ports. Maximum 32
ports per Star Coupler.

VAXcluster Console
System (VCS)

VCS connects provides a single, central point of control for all clusterwide console functions. Refer
to Chapter 5, VAXcluster Options/Systems Expansion, for details. Included with three-cabinet and
five-cabinet systems; not included with traditional systems.

Step 7-Networks and Communications
DEMNA 802.3/Ethernet controller included with each system. Select additional devices if required. Note: Connection of
system to Ethernet requires an Ethernet transceiver cable, which can be connected to a DESTA, H4005, or port on a DELNI.
See Chapter 6, Networks, Communications, and Cables, and the Networks Buyer's Guide for details.
LAN Communications Controllers
DEMNA-M
CK-DEMNA-KN
DEMFA-AA

Local and Wide Area Communications Servers
Each communications server requires an 802.3/Ethernet connection. Depending on the server selected, either a ThinWire
ENC-type connection, e.g., BC16M cable or thick wire 15-pin AUI transceiver cable, e.g., BNE3 x is required. Additional
items are also required-see descriptions in Chapter 6, Networks, Communications, and Cables, for ordering information.
DECserver 90L+/90TL/700/250 and MUXserver 300/310/320/380 Terminal and Printer Servers
Select a terminal or printer server to provide users with multiple session access to systems on a LAN, to minimize cabling
complexity and costs, and to conserve host resources such as backplane slots.
DEC WANrouter 250/500; DECNIS 500/600; Proteon 4100+/CNX 500; TransPATH 335/350 Multiprotocol Routers
Select a router to cost-effectively link a LAN to a remote system or another LAN and to offload routing overhead from the
application host system.
Network Connectivity Products
See Chapter 6, Networks, Communications, and Cables, and the Networks Buyer's Guide for details.

VAX Systems

1.135

VAX 10000 Systems and Servers

A console terminal with EIA-232 25-pin D-subminiature connector and printer is required on traditional system unless
otherwise available. VT420-SAISE and LAXXS-AD stand along with a system management workstation are included with
preconfigured systems. Printer not required for configurations that include system management workstation. See Chapter 8,
Terminals and Printers, for ordering information.
DL-VT420-xx
LA75S-xx
LAXXS-AD

VT420 terminal. See VT420 description for ordering details.
LA75 Plus printer. See LA75 description for ordering details.
VT420/ LA75 table for both VT420 and LA75.

Step 9-Expansion
~------------------~---------------------------------------------------------------------~~---

9FATA-XW/XY/ XZ

VAX 10000 1/0 expansion option, 60 Hz, 50 Hz, 50/60 Hz Japan- upgrades a three-cabinet system
to a five-cabinet system (XMI channels not included). Provides an 1/ 0 expansion cabinet with six
expansion bays, two upper and four lower, N + 1 redundant power system, and space for TF85 tape
drive. Battery cabinet provides uninterruptible power capability. Maximum one per three-cabinet
system.

Expansion Bay
Location

Plug-in Unit

Quantity

Expansion Bays Occupied

Upper
Lower
Lower

Disk plug-in unit
Disk plug-in unit
XMI plug-in unit

Two maximum
Four maximum
Two maximum

One each
One each
Two each

Step 10-Software
Model

ClusterWide
License Ratings

Software
Processor Code

1200
1800
2400

VAX 10000
VAX 10000
VAX 10000

Model 610
Model 620
Model 630/640

QL-VBRA '"-AA

VAXcluster Software license. Note: * denotes processor code

QA-OOlAA-H x
QA-09SAA-H x
QA-358AA-Hx
QA-GXXAA-Hx

OpenVMS media and extended documentation, including VAXcluster and DECnet documentation
Open VMS media and base documentation
Rdb Runtime media and documentation
POSIX media and documentation (with IEEE documentation)
POSIX media and documentation (w/ o IEEE documentation)

QA-GXXAB~Hx

Note: x denotes media type: 5 = TK50; 8 = CD-ROM. IA= interactive

Step 11- Environmental Power Products
Select environmental power products if required. Refer to Chapter 5, VAXcluster Options/Systems Expansion, and Digital's

Environmental Power Products Catalog.

><
<
>

1.136

VAX Systems

VAX 10000 Systems and Servers
Operator
Control Panel
_l

TF85
Tape
Drive
Space
for
Disk Drives
Integrated
UPS/PCS
for 1/0
Expansion
Cabinet

48-Volt
Power
Regulators

l l
Cooling Assembly

12-slot
XMll/O
Channel
Plug-in Unit

Battery Cabinet

T T

12-slot
XMll/O
Channel
Plug-in .Unit

1/0 Expansion Cabinet

High-speed
System
Interconnect
Bus
• 1-4 CPUs
•Memory
• 110 Port

Space for
TF85
Tape
Drive

48-Volt
Power
Regulators

Space
for
Disk Drives

1 l

Cooling Assembly

I
Integrated UPS/PCS
for CPU Cabinet

System Cabinet

Space for
TF85
Tape
Drive

48-Volt
Power
Regulators

l l
Cooling Assembly

12-slot
XMll/O
Channel
Plug-in Unit

Integrated
UPS/PCS
forl/0
Expansion
Cabinet

12-slot
XMI 1/0
Channel
Plug-in Unit

110 Expansion Cabinet

Battery Cabinet

3-Cabinet System
5-Cabinet System

BU-3301

VAX 10000 System Diagram

VAX Systems

1.137

VAX 10000 Systems and Servers
VAX 10000 Specifications
Physical Characteristics

Three-Cabinet System

Five-Cabinet System

Height
Width
Depth
Weight

170 cm (67 in.)
220 cm '(86.7 in.)
86.5 cm (34.1 in.)
1,640 kg (3,600 lb)

170 cm (67 in.)
360 cm (141.8 in.)
86.5 cm (34.1 in.)
2,600 kg (5,700 lb)

Environmental

Operating Environment

Non Operating Environment

Temperature
Humidity
Altitude
Vibration

15° to 28° C (59° to 82° F)
10% to 90%
0-2.4 km (0-8,000 ft)
2-22 Hz @ 0.01" da minimum

-40° to 66° C (-40° to 151 ° F)
10% to 95 %
9100 m (30,000 ft)
22-500 Hz @ 0.25 g maximum

Three-Cabinet System

Five-Cabinet System

Maximum ac power
Maximum heat dissipation

6,600 Watts
22,500 Btu/hour

Power Requirments

U .S./Canada

Europe/GIA

10,900 Watts
37 ,200 Btu/hour

Nominal voltage
Frequency range
Phases

120/208 Y
50-60 Hz
3 -phase star
4-wire N-GND

380-415 Y
50-60 Hz
3-phase star
4-wire N-GND

Maximum input current/phase
Surge current
Rating
Power cap (system)
Receptacle (site)
Receptacle
PCS/ PDS/ PDU/UPS cable

24 Arms
50 A peak
30 A
DEC 12-12314-00
DEC 12-12315-01
NEMA L21-30R
BC24W

12.8 Arms
50 A peak
16 A
DEC 12-30333-02
Note 4
IEC309
BN29L

Notes:

1. These values are per line cord.
2. The three-cabinet system has two cabinets with line cords.
3. The five-cabinet system has three cabinets with line cords.
4. Receptacle type is Hubbell 516R6 or equivalent.

j
l

j
-~

1.138 VAX Systems

Japan
1

202 Delta
50-60 Hz
3-phase delta
4-wire mid-GND or
3-wire junction-GND
24 Arms
50 A peak
30 A
DEC 12-12314-00
DEC 12-12315-01
NEMA L21-30R
BC24W

VAX 10000 Systems and Servers

Traditional upgrade packages include a CPU module plus license upgrades for OpenVMS base license and OpenVMS
unlimited-use license, DECnet full-function license and Rdb Runtime license. One full-year product warranty included .
Upgrades packages for NAS 400 based systems, which include DECnet full-function license, include a CPU module plus
license upgrades for Open VMS base and OpenVMS unlimited-use licenses. NAS 400 and layered products must be upgraded
separately.

From-To
Model 610-620
Model 620-630
Model 630-640

Traditional Upgrades for
Base Systems

NAS 400 Upgrades for
Fully Configured
3- and 5-Cabinet Systems

9FBTA-BB
9FCTA-BB
9FDTA-BB

9FBTA-IB
9FCTA-IB
9FDTA-IB

VAX Systems

1.139

V AXft Systems and Servers

Product Description

The VAXft series is a family of fault-tolerant computer systems that meets the
performance, capacity, and availability demands of a wide range of applications
running under the VMS operating system. The VAXft series is fully compatible
with all other VAX and VAXcluster systems. Fault-tolerant capabilities can be
introduced to enterprise-wide computer systems, without rewriting existing
applications.
VAXft series systems are full implementations of a hardware-intensive faulttolerant architecture. They provide continuous processing with the highest levels
of data and computational integrity. The VAXft series consists of 11 fault-tolerant
configurations that offer three levels of performance: 3 .8 VUPs, 6.0 VUPs, and
12.0 VUPs.
The VAXft Model 110 is the lowest-cost fault-tolerant system. It offers performance of 3 .8 VUPs and can support up to 96 Mbytes of internal memory and up
to 4 Gbytes of disk storage. It is available in pedestal or rackmount
configurations.
The VAXft Model 410 offers 6 VUPs of performance, up to 256 Mbytes of
memory, 12 Gbytes of disk storage, and are offered in dual pedestal cabinets
suitable for office installation or in rackmount versions.
The VAXft Model 610 and Model 612 are offered in 1.5-meter (60-inch) cabinets
for computer room installation. The Model 610 delivers 6.0 VUPs; the Model
612 incorporates two Model 610 units into a Digital Storage Systems Interconnect (DSSI) VAXcluster system. This increases performance to 12 VUPs and provides storage and load sharing.
Each model in the VAXft series implements a hardware-intensive fault-tolerant
architecture. Each VAXft system consists of two fully duplicated sets of components, called zones. Two zones ensure that there is no single point of hardware
failure-a single hardware error or fault in one zone cannot disable the system.
The two zones are linked by high-speed cables that provide parallel data paths.
Each zone contains its own backplane to link its CPU, system I/O, and memory
modules. This redundancy ensures that even the backplane is not a single point
of failure.

1.140

VAX Systems

VAXft Systems and Servers
Product Description (Continued)

The two CPU/memory subsystems run synchronously, executing the same instruction at the same time. As a result, the systems may be viewed as uniprocessors
running one copy of the VMS operating system and other applications. The
redundant cross-link pathways that interconnect the CPU modules in each zone
carry the signals necessary to maintain processor synchronization. If a failure
occurs in one zone, the system continues processing on the duplicate component
in the other zone, without loss of data and with no performance degradation.
The VAXft series is designed to provide fault-tolerant I/O capabilities. Each system I/O module contains an Ethernet port and a DSSI port. The system I/O
module design provides sufficient bandwidth and control to allow peripheral
devices to work together simultaneously.
VAXft systems fit easily into existing networks and distributed systems. Ethernet
and synchronous communications capabilities are built into the VAXft series for
local area networks, wide area networks, and distributed systems.
For redundant Ethernet support, a single port in each of the two zones is
connected to a single Ethernet rail. If one zone is down, the other zone can
continue to service the network application without interruption. Multiple-rail
Ethernet is supported on all VAXft systems.
Expanded synchronous communications are supported via Ethernet-based communications line servers and gateways. Asynchronous communications are also
supported via Ethernet, using terminal servers. Both thick wire and ThinWire
Ethernet connections are supported. Q-bus devices may be connected through
DEC Commserver products.
Fault-tolerant storage is achieved by using a combination of VAX Volume
Shadowing, redundant ports, redundant DSSI buses, and the data integrity features of the DSSI.
VAX Volume Shadowing software duplicates all data written to disks onto two
separate volumes. This duplication ensures continuous access to data in the event
of a failure on a disk or a DSSI port. Volume shadowing is totally transparent to
the application.
With uninteruptible power supply (UPS) capability, which is available as an
option with the Model 110, enough power is provided for the entire in-cabinet
system to tolerate power fluctuations, brownouts (a series of brief outages), and
full outages of up to 30 minutes per 24-hour period. It supports full application
processing without any loss of work in progress.
VAXft Models 410, 610, and 612 incorporate an integral UPS. Each cabinet,
including storage expansion cabinets, contains its own redundant internal UPS.

In addition to protection from power problems, each zone includes an internal
environmental logic module that monitors the environmental condition of the
system. This module issues warnings if acceptable thresholds are exceeded and,
when possible, corrects the erroneous condition. Such correction includes
improving cooling by automatically increasing fan speed or evoking the UPS.
Modules have magnetic indicators for easy identification of the failing FRU.
These indicators can only be factory reset, preventing the inadvertent reinsertion
of a faulty component. Replaceable DSSI disks and tapes can be removed safely
without shutting down a zone of the system.

VAX Systems

1.141

VAXft Systems and Servers
Product Description (Continued)

All VAXft models are designed to be repairable without interruption of applications running on the system. Each system is physically organized into two separate zones; the zone with the fault is taken completely offline to repair, even
when both zones are contained within the same cabinet.
All VMS-based software products run on the VAXft series of systems. The VMS
operating system and other software run on a fault-tolerant platform, taking
advantage of the hardware-intensive fault-tolerant capabilities.

612

110

410

610

3.8

6.0

12.0

256

512

Maximum DSSI buses per system
Storage port bandwith
(Mbyte/ second peak)
Maximum storage capacity
(Gbytes)

Maximum Ethernet Rails
(redundant connection assumed)

Model Number:
Performance
Relative Performance (VUPs)
(TPS)
Memory

ECC memory in 32-Mbyte segments
Maximum supported (Mbytes)

1/0

1.142

VAX Systems

VAXft Systems and Servers
Step 1-Systems
The following items are required:
· Two system disks (Model 110 systems are preconfigured with two disks)
· Two console terminals
VAXft systems include
· Two system zones, each include:
- 7-slot backplane (Models 410, 610), 5-slot back-plane (Model 110)
- CPU with integral floating-point processor
- 32 or 64 Mbytes of ECC memory (1-Mbit DRAMs)
- KFE52 with onboard DSSI port and Ethernet port
- Two console ports (one local and one remote)
- ThinWire T-connector and terminators for ThinWire, thick wire, and DSSI bus
- Battery backup for memory, CPU, I/ O, communications options, disks, and tapes
- Cross-link cables
· One-year warranty
· Factory installed software'"
,., Delivery of software on a system disk is not warranted; it is provided as a convenience. Purchase of meclia and documentation is encouraged; see Step 7.

Note: VAXft systems include OpenVMS Volume Shadowing license and VAXft System Services license (support for VAXft
System Services is included in Open VMS operating system software).
VAXft Model 110 Systems
ADV ANT AGE-SERVER System
· Open VMS base license (with POSIX)
• NAS 300 package
DV-51AAA-BE/BJ

VAXft Model 110, includes two RF31disks;120/240 Vac

Traditional Systems
• Pedestal enclosure
· VMS 1- to 5-user license (with Rdb Runtime)
·DECnet end-node license
SV-51AAA-AE/AJ
SV-51ABA-AE/AJ

VAXft Model 110, includes two RF31 disks; 120/240 Vac
VAXft Model 110, includes two RF72 disks; 120/240 Vac

Open VMS Base Servers
· Open VMS base license (with PO SIX)
SV-51ABA-BE/BJ

VAXft Model 110, includes two RF72 disks; 120/240 Vac

VAXft Model 410 Systems
Traditional Systems
• Pedestal enclosure
• VMS unlimited-user license (with Rdb Runtime)
· DECnet end-node license
· Universal (120/240-Vac) power supply
55AAA-AA
55AAB-AA

Model 410 with 32 Mbytes of memory
Model 410 with 64 Mbytes of memory

Open VMS Base Servers
• OpenVMS base license (with POSIX)
55AAA-BA
55AAB-BA

Model 410 with 32 Mbytes of memory
Model 410 with 64 Mbytes of memory

Server Systems
· VMS File and Application Server license (with Rdb Runtime)
· DECnet full-function license
· VAXcluster license
55AAA-KA
55AAB-KA

Model 410 with 32 Mbytes of memory; 120 or 240 Vac
Model 410 with 64 Mbytes of memory; 120 or 240 Vac

VAX Systems

1.143

VAXft Systems and Servers
Step 1-Systems (Continued)
================~=======::::==::::::::====~~:;:;;::~=====::::;::=======:::;:;:=;
VAXft Model 610 Systems

ADVANTAGE-SERVER Systems
• OpenVMS base license (with POSIX)
• NAS 400 package (with DECnet full-function license, VAXcluster license, and Rdb Runtime license)
· Two RF73 disk drives
• TF85 tape drive

DV-55CAB-BE/BJ

Model 610 with 64 Mbytes of memory; 120/240 Vac

Traditional Systems
· 1.5-meter (60-inch) cabinet enclosure
• VMS unlimited-user license (with Rdb Runtime)
• DECnet end-node license

55CAA-AE/AJ
55CAB-AE/AJ

Model 610 with 32 Mbytes of memory; 120/240 Vac
Model 610 with 64 Mbytes of memory; 120/240 Vac

OpenVMS Base Server
· Open VMS base license (with POSIX)

55CAA-BE/BJ

Model 610 with 32 Mbytes of memory

Server Systems
• 1.5-meter (60-inch) cabinet enclosure
• VMS File and Application server license (with Rdb Runtime)
• DECnet full-function license
• VAXcluster license

55CAA-KE/KJ
55CAB-KE/KJ

Model 610 with 32 Mbytes of memory; 120/240 Vac
Model 610 with 64 Mbytes of memory; 120/240 Vac

VAXft Model 612 Systems
VAXft Model 612 systems consist of two VAXft Model 610 systems and a storage expansion enclosure. They include two
each of the items included with VAXft Model 610 systems in addition to the following:
• 1.5-meter (60-inch) enclosure
· BA22E-AA 1.5-meter (60-inch) storage expansion enclosure includes:
- DSSI cables
- UPS for disks
• VAXcluster software license
• Factory-installed software"'
· One year warranty (standard warranty recommended)
Traditional Systems
• VMS unlimited-user license (with Rdb Runtime)
·DECnet end-node license

55CDA-AE/AJ
55CDB-AE/AJ

Model 612 with 32 Mbytes of memory per system; 120/240 Vac
Model 612 with 64 Mbytes of memory per system; 120/240 Vac

Open VMS Base Server
• OpenVMS base license (with POSIX)

55CDA-BE/BJ
55CDB-BE/BJ

Model 612 with 32 Mbytes of memory per system; 120/240 Vac
Model 612 with 64 Mbytes of memory per system; 120/240 Vac

Server Systems
· VMS File and Application server license (with Rdb Runtime)
· DECnet full-function license

55CDA-KE/KJ
55CDB-KE/KJ
1.144 VAX Systems

Model 612 with 32 Mbytes of memory; 120/240 Vac
Model 612 with 64 Mbytes of memory; 120/240 Vac

VAXft Systems and Servers

Select storage devices as required. Minimum of two system disk storage options are required. Shadow pairs must be of
equal capacity. Order load device if necessary; VAXft systems running VMS Version 5 .5 or higher support the InfoServer
100/150 as a software load device.
Configuration Rules
VAXft Model 110
· Maximum six RF31 or four RF72 disks (pedestal or rackmount); they cannot be mixed. TF70 tape drive can be substituted
for one RF31 or RF72.
· BA22 expansion not supported on Model 110 systems
· One DSSI adapter per zone
· Maximum one TFxx per DSSI adapter
VAXft Model 410
Base System:
·Maximum four DSSI devices per system in one of the following combinations: four RFxx-JA, or three RFxx-JA and one
TF70C-JA, or two RFxx-JA and two TF70C-JA
· One DSSI adapter per zone; two DSSI buses per system
· Maximum one TF70 per DSSI adapter
· One BA22D-AA expansion option supported on Model 410 systems
Base System with one BA22D-AA storage expansion option:
· Two DSSI adapters per zone; two DSSI buses per system
· Maximum 12 DSSI RFxx devices
· Maximum two TF70 devices
VAXft Model 610
Base System:
·Maximum six DSSI storage devices: four RFxx-JA disks and two TFxx tapes or TF857 loaders
· Maximum one DSSI adapter per zone; two DSSI buses per system
·Maximum one TFxx per DSSI adapter
· Maximum two BA22E-AA storage expansion enclosures
Base System with one BA22E-AA storage expansion option:
· Maximum two DSSI adapters per zone; two DSSI buses per system.
• BA22E-AA storage expansion enclosure supports a maximum of 12 DSSI storage devices
Base System with two BA22E-AA storage expansion options:
• Maximum four DSSI adapters per zone; four DSSI buses per system
• BA22E-AA storage expansion enclosures support a maximum of 12 DSSI storage devices each
VAXft Model 612
VAXft Model 612 systems consist of two Model 610 systems and include one BA22E-AA. All DSSI buses and DSSI storage
devices (disks and tapes) are accessed by both systems. Disks are housed in the BA22E, tapes are housed in the system
enclosures.
Base system:
• One DSSI adapter per zone; two shared DSSI buses
· Maximum 12 DSSI devices
·Maximum one additional BA22E-AA storage expansion option
·Maximum one TFxx per DSSI adapter (two per system)
Base system with one additional BA22E-AA storage expansion option:
• Two DSSI adapters per zone; four shared DSSI buses
• Maximum 24 DSSI devices
VAX Systems

1.145

VAXft Systems and Servers
Step 2-Storage (Continued)
Storage Expansion Enclosures
Note: When adding BA22x-AA expansion enclosures to existing VAXft systems, system downtime must be considered.
BA22D-AA
For Model 410-requires KFE52-AA; factory or field installed.
BA22E-AA
For Models 610 and 612-requires KFE52-AA; factory or field installed.
KFE52 DSSI/Ethernet Adapter-required for addition of BA22x-AA storage expansion enclosure.

RF31-HA
RF31-JA
RF31-KA

Model 410: Order two (one per zone) if adding BA22D-AA storage expansion.
Model 610: Order two (one per zone) if adding one BA22E-AA; order six (three per zone) if adding
two BA22E-AAs.
Model 612: Order four (one per zone) if adding a second BA22E-AA storage expansion enclosure.
381-Mbyte ISE for Model 110
381-Mbyte RSE for Models 410/610/612 and BA22x expansion enclosures
381-Mbyte ISE for BA22x expansion enclosures

RF72-HA
RF72-JA
RF72-KA

1-Gbyte ISE for Model 110
1-Gbyte RSE for Models 410/610/612 and BA22x expansion enclosures
1-Gbyte ISE for BA22x expansion enclosures

RF73-JA
RF73-KA

2-Gbyte RSE for Models 410/610/612 and BA22x expansion enclosures
2-Gbyte ISE for BA22x expansion enclosures

TF70C-RA
TF70C-JA
TF70C-AA

DSSI tape drive for Model 110
DSSI tape drive for Models 410
DSSI tape drive for Models 610/612

TF857-CA/CB
TF85C-AA

Tape loader for Model 610/612; 120/240 V
2.6-Gbyte tape drive for Models 610/612

KFE52-AA

Step 3-Memory
Select additional memory as required. Memory must be identical in each system. Two 32-Mbyte memory modules, one per
zone, are included. Model 110 systems can be expanded to 96 Mbytes of mirrored memory; Models 410, 610 can be
expanded to 256 Mbytes of mirrored m:emory. Three memory modules can be added to each system.
MS520-BB
MS520-CB

32-Mbyte ECC mirrored memory option; consists of two 32-Mbyte modules, one for each zone.
64-Mbyte ECC mirrored memory option; consists of two 64-Mbyte modules, one for each zone. Not
supported on Model 110 systems.

Step 4-Networks and Communications
LAN Communications Controller
Two 802.3/ Ethernet ports (on board the KFE52 modules) and two ThinWire T-connectors are included, one per zone,
providing dual connection to a single Ethernet. Both ThinWire and thick wire Ethernet connections are provided. If
redundant connections-up to four-to multiple Ethernets are required, select two additional Ethernet ports, one per zone
per Ethernet. DECnet-VAX end-node license is provided with the base system. DECnet-VAX end-node to full-function
upgrade license is required for dual Ethernet support. Refer to DECnet-VAX SPD number 25.03 for details. All asynchronous communications for the VAXft system are provided via the Ethernet. Connection of the system to the Ethernet
requires Ethernet transceiver cables. Each Ethernet port can be connected to an H4005 or to ports on a DELNI. See the
Networks Buyer's Guide for complete networking details.
KFE52-AA

1.146

VAX Systems

802.3/ Ethernet/DSSI port. Two included with base system, one per zone, for redundant connection
to a single Ethernet. Order two additional KFE52-AA, one per zone, for redundant connection to
dual Ethernets.

VAXft Systems and Servers
Step 4-Networks and Communications (Continued)
Local and Wide Area Communications Servers

Each communications server requires an 802.3/Ethernet connection. Depending on the server selected, either a ThinWire
BNC connection (e.g., BC16M) or a thick wire 15-pin AUI transceiver cable (e.g., BNE3x) is required. Software media and
documentation and cables are also required. See descriptions in Chapter 6, Networks, Communications, and Cables, for
ordering information.
DECserver 90L+, 700, 250, and MUXserver 300, 310, 380 Terminal and Printer Servers

Select a terminal or printer server to provide users with multiple session access to systems on a LAN, to minimize cabling
complexity and costs, and to conserve host resources.
DEC WANrouter 150, 250, 500, and TransPATH 335, 350 Multiprotocol Routers

Select a router to cost-effectively link a LAN to a remote system or another LAN and to offload routing overhead from the
application host system.
DEC Commserver 100/150

The DEC Commserver 100/150 allows Q-bus Simpact Associates, Inc. communications modules to be placed on an
Ethernet-up to 80 serial lines can be connected. Lines can be configured with asynchronous or synchronous protocols at
speeds up to 64 Kbytes/second. The 14 industry protocols supported on these lines have different performance specifications and the actual number of lines is a function of the type of protocol and the line speed. The DEC Commserver for
VMS software provides a transparent connection between the DEC Commserver hardware and the VAX VMS host. For more
information, contact the EIC Sales Support hotline at 800-832-6277 or 603-884-8990.
DSPAA-AA
DSPAB-BA
DSPAB-BB

DEC Commserver 100; 4- to 16-line Q-bus Simpact Associates, Inc. communications server (tabletop
system chassis only)
DEC Commserver 150; 4- to 80-line Q-bus Simpact Associates, Inc. communications server
(rackmount system chassis only)
DEC Commserver 150; 4- to 80-line Q-bus Simpact Associates, Inc. communications server (pedestal
system chassis only)

Host-Based Synchronous Communication Controller

The DEC Wide Area Network Controller 620 is a two-line synchronous communication controller option specific to VAX.ft
systems. This option can be configured to provide highly available synchronous communication. Adapters and extension
cables must be ordered separately based on the interface standard requirements. For more information on the DEC
WANcontroller 620, refer to Chapter 6, Networks, Communications, and Cables, and the Networks Buyer's Guide.
DEC WAN controller 620

For redundant communications: For each two lines needed (maximum of four DSF32-AA/ AB pairs per system for a total of
eight fault-tolerant synchronous lines per system), order:
DSF32-AA
DSF32-AB

DEC WANcontroller 620, Y-Box, 100-pin cable and terminator-one required.
DEC WANcontroller 620, 100-pin cable, 20-pin module interconnect cable-one required.

Prerequisite software: WAN device driver kit Vl.lB for VMS V5.4 or higher, plus layered communication product if needed.
For non-redundant communications: For each two lines needed (maximum eight controllers, four per zone, for a total of 16
synchronous non-redundant lines per system), order:
DSF32-AA

DEC WANcontroller 620, Y-Box, 100-pin cable and terminator-one required.

Prerequisite software: WAN device driver kit Vl.lB for VMS V5 .4 or higher, plus layered communication product if needed.
Network Connectivity Products

See Chapter 6, Networks, Communications, and Cables, and the Networks Buyer's Guide.

Step .5-Console Terminal
Four console ports, two per system cabinet (one local and one remote) are included.
Step 5a-Local Console

Two console terminals required, one per zone, for fault-tolerant console access. Console port supports DEC-423 cable
connection except for Model 610/612, which supports EIA-232 communications. Console cable included with base system.
Order two video terminals (e.g., VT420) unless otherwise available. A combination of video terminal and LA75 is recommended. For Model 610/612, order the U.S. international VT420 video terminal. See Chapter 8, Terminals and Printers, for
ordering information.

VAX Systems

1.147

VAXft Systems and Servers

----

Step 5b-Remote Console

Two remote console ports provided, o~e per zone. Remote console ports are used for automatic notification, upon failure,
by system to notify remote customer or Digital site. These ports can also be used for dial-in from a remote site for system
diagnosis. Remote console ports can be connected via modems to a remote location or to a Digital Services site. Refer to
Chapter 6, Networks, Communications, and Cables, for modem ordering information.
...........

~~~~~--~~~--

...,.,__,.........,~~~---.....

Step 6-Terminals and Printers
Select terminals and printers as required. All asynchronous communications for the VAXft system are provided via the
Ethernet. Terminals and printers are connected over the Ethernet to a DECserver communications server. Refer to Chapter
8, Terminals and Printers, and Chapter 6, Networks, Communications, and Cables, for ordering information.

Step 7-Software
Select operating system media and documentation for first system on site.
VAXft Model 110
Software Processor Code = S
ClusterWide License Rating = 100
VAXft Models 410/610/612
Software Processor Code
ClusterWide License Rating

Traditional and OpenVMS Base Servers = 2
Traditional and OpenVMS Base Servers = 300

Server= C
Server= 10

Open VMS User Licenses
QL-YULA9-BB
QL-YULA9-BC
QL-YULA9-BD
QL-YULA9-BE
QL-YULA9-BF
QL-YULA9-BG
QL-YULA9-BH
QL-YULAA-BR
QL-YULAB-BR

OpenVMS/VAX interactive one-user license
OpenVMS/VAX interactive two-user license
OpenVMS/VAX interactive four-user license
OpenVMS/VAX interacti~e eight-user license
OpenVMS/VAX interactive 16-user license
OpenVMS/VAX interactive 32-user license
OpenVMS/VAX interactive 64-user license
Open VMS/VAX interactive 128-user license
OpenVMS/VAX interactive 256-user license

VAXft Model 110 Traditional System License Upgrades
QL-OOlAS-BW
QL-001AS-B2
QL-OOlAS-BX
QL-OOlAS-BY

6- to 10-user license upgrade
11- to 20-user license upgrade
21- to 30-user license upgrade
31- to unlimited-user license upgrade

QA-001AA-H5

OpenVMS media (TK50) and extended documentation, including VAXcluster and DECnet
documentation

QA-YEAAA-H5
QA-358AA-H5

VAXft system services media (TK50) and documentation-required
Rdb Runtime media (TK50) and documentation-optional

QA-GXXAA-Hx
QA-GXXAB-Hx

POSIX media and documentation (with IEEE documentation)
POSIX media and documentation (without IEEE documentation)

QA-AB2AA-GZ
QT-YEAAA-E5

Volume Shadowing documentation-optional
VAXft system services MDDS (TK50)

Select the appropriate NAS software level. See description of NAS packages on page 9.2. Note: The NAS packaged products
do not include hardcopy documentation for the components (the documentation is CD-ROM only). To order NAS component hardcopy documentation, see page 9.5 for listing of order numbers.
QL-MClA *-AA
QA-MClAA-Hx

NAS 200 (Network Application Support 200)
NAS 200 media and documentation kit

QL-MC2A"'-AA
QA-MC2AA-Hx

NAS 300 (Network Application Support 200)
NAS 300 media and documentation kit

QL-MC5A'"-AA
QA-MC5AA-Hx

NAS 400 (Network Application Support 200)
NAS 400 media and documentation kit

Note: x denotes media type: 8 =CD-ROM, 5 = TK50, M = magtape; '" denotes processor code

1.148 VAX Systems

VAXft Systems and Servers
Step 7~oftWare (Continued)
VAXft Model 612
VAXft Model 612 systems are preconfigured cluster configurations consisting of two VAXft Model 610 systems. Follow
guidelines for cluster installations when ordering software licenses for the VAXft Model 612.

Step 8-Environmental Power Products
VAXft Model 410/610 systems include an integral UPS that supports all in-cabinet components. This includes the CPU,
memory, I/O controllers, communications controllers, disks, and tapes (tape devices are not supported on Model 610) for
up to 30 minutes of battery backup per 24-hour period. If UPS support is required for external devices, such as the console
terminals, terminal servers, printers and modems connected to the system, a universal UPS can be ordered separately. Select
environmental power products if required. Refer to Chapter 5, VAXcluster Options/System Expansion, and Digital's Environmental Power Products Catalog, (EB-M4442-79) for details.

Uninterruptible Power System
See Chapter 5, VAXcluster Options/System Expansion, and Digital's Environmental Power Products Catalog (EB-M4442-79)
for ordering information.

Step 9-Power Cords and Cables
Two power cords are required per system; 120-V power cords are included with 120-V systems. All power cords are 2.5 m
(6.6 ft) long. For 240-V systems, select power cords from the following list:

VAXft Model 110
BN20A-2E
BN19D-2E
BN19L-2E
BN19Y-2E
BN19N-2E
BN19F-2E
BN19B-2E

United States
Austria, Belgium, France, Germany, Finland, Netherlands, Portugal, Spain, and Sweden
Denmark
Israel
Italy
Switzerland
United Kingdom

VAXft Models 310/410
BN12A-2E
BN19C-2E
BN19E-2E
BN19H-2E
BN19K-2E
BN19M-2E
BN19S-2E
BN19U-2E
BN18J-1K

United Kingdom
Austria, Belgium, France, West Germany, Finland, Netherlands, Portugal, Spain, and Sweden
Switzerland
Australia and New Zealand
Denmark
Italy
India
Israel
Japan and U.S.

VAXft Models 610/612 Receptacles
Power cords are included with all VAXft Model 610/ 612 systems. These systems use a three-phase power supply. The wall
receptacles are as follows: Hubbell Twist-Lock #2810A (30 A, 3-phase, 120/240 Vac, 60 Hz) and Hubbell Twist-Lock
#532R6W (30 A, 3-phase, 220/380 Vac, 50 Hz).

VAXft CPU Upgrade
55UPG-XX

Upgrades VAXft Model 310 to VAXft Model 410; includes two VAXft Model 410 CPUs and documentation. No software license upgrade required.

VAX Systems

1.149

VAXft Systems and Servers
VAXft Model 110 System Diagrams

.......

~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~-'-~~~----~~

§ El

§§
c

~ 0 E li li

0 0

$:
0
a_

c..
c..

2:- .-- C\J

:::J
Cf)

c
0

:::J

c c
a_ E 0 0
0 Q) "E_ li
~ 0 0

Cf)

::::> 0

::::>

Fan

C\J
2:- .-c c

Fan

]-'-

J-'- l

Line7
Cord

CPU Enclosure

r-"1

RFxx-JA
Removable

RFxx-JA
Removable
or
TF70C-JA
Opt.

r@I
:::)

:::)
~--~co

1234567

.--------. co

DC
Power
Supply

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

DC
Power
Supply
c
0

L-...J

C\J
l{)

0
:::) C\J

c c c
0

@~ u :?UJ aaa
000
a_

l{)

'
AC
Power
Supply CD

AC
Power
Supply CD

~
D

BU-3 168

<X-Link> - - - - - " " '

G) AC power supply not used for -48/60 Vdc versions.

® Line cord required for each enclosure.
@ BBU not included with -48/60 Vdc versions .

VAXft Model 410 Base System

1.150

VAX Systems

0
~ 0a_ E "05_ li
Q)

0 0

Fan
~

Line /t~
Cord
BU-3255

VAXft Model 410 System Diagrams

co
co

C\J
2:- .-c c

'----------'

BU-3254

RFxx-JA
Removable
or
TF70C-JA
Opt.

$:
0
a_

::::>

Fan

Line /t~
Cord

Line /
Cord

0 0

'-------'

J-'- l

:::J

Cf)

$:
0
a_

'----

c..
c..

0 0
~ 0a_ E "E_
"E_

...___

c..
c..

2:- .-- C\J
:J 0
a_

2 3 4 5 6

:::J
Cf)

...-------,

2 3 4 5 6

c..
c..
Q;

Disk

...-------,

2 3 4 5 6

$:
0
a_

§ §§

,------,

,...-----

§
§§

VAXft Systems and Servers

Expansion Enclosure

CPU Enclosure

RFxx
Removable
or
TF70
Opt.

RFxx
Fixed
Opt.

,..,

Unavailable

~
al
al

Power
Supply

RF xx
Fixed
Opt.

RFxx
Fixed
Opt.

al
al

1234567

RFxx
Fixed
Opt.

1234567

Power
Supply

RFxx
Fixed
Opt.

AC
Power
SupptyCD

RFxx
Fixed
Req .

RFxx
Fixed
Opt.

cc c

~ ~ :JN
0
a_Oil

Oil :JN

cc c

'"' !;!;:w a..'"'
li Ci. 0..
~
(.) ~

000

RFxx
Fixed
Req .

RFxx
Removable
or
TF70
Opt.

Power
Supply

li li 'E
~~ ocn
:::;;

AC
Power
Supply (})

Expansion Enclosure

CPU Enclosure

AC
Power
SupplyCD

.Q .Q .Q

000

AC
Power
Suppty CD

@
CJ

<~~>

<DSSI> -

....

<DSSI>
BU-3169

<X-Link>

CD AC power supply not used for -48/60 Vdc versions.

® Line cord req uired for each enclosure.
@ BBU not included with -48/60 Vdc versions.
@ Connections for local (DEC423) and remote console.

VAXft Model 410 Base System with BA22D Storage Expansion Cabinet

VAXft Model 610 System/Server Diagrams

Zone A
Summary
Panel

RFxx-JA
Opt.

RFxx-JA
Required

.-----

gJ J. ...z_i.A._5_6_

Power
0

5~ :::>
·z wa.. m-.g_
8-~
:::;;o

Supply

()

TF70C-AA
or
TF857-Cx
Opt.

...__

Power
Supply

I c (J) c I

'------

Zone
A
AC Box

..._ < D~> -

Zone B

.---- ,.,

Summary
Panel

RFxx-JA
Opt.

RFxx-JA
Requ ired

~ J. .2.....a..A....5....§.
DC
Power
Supply

"'"' ~1! g~I
1! !;2U
WQ.

TF70C-AA
or
TF857-Cx
Opt.

Q Q

AC
Power
Supply

,-----

...__
Zone

I c (J)c I

B
AC Box

())Connections for local (DEC423) and remote console.

VAXft Model 610 Base System

VAX Systems

1.151

VAXft Systems and Servers

Zone A
r-

RFxx
Fixed
Opt.

RF xx
Fixed
Opt.

Unavailable

:::>
CD
CD

DC
Power
Supply

Unavailable

RF xx
Fixed
Opt.

DC
Power
Supply

AC
Power
Supply

RFxx
Fixed
Opt.

,.....

<DSSI> -

Unavailable

CD
CD

RFxx
Fixed
Opt.

RF xx
Fixed
Req .

DC
Power
Supply

RFxx
Fixed
Opt.

RF xx
Fixed
Opt.

Summary
Panel

RF xx
Removable
Opt.

fX:>
~
Wa_

.......

NN
1()1()

:.'.:.'.

RFxx
Fixed
Opt.

DC
Power
Supply

RF xx
F.ixed
Opt.

RF xx
Fixed
Opt.

AC
Power
Supply

RF xx
Fixed
Req.

RF xx
Fixed
Opt.

ll
I

~ 1:::iii"

l"--l

lei-+-

Zone
B
AC Box

~ <DSSI>

<DSSI> -

I]
I

_!
:

<DSSI>

<DSSI> -

VAXft Model 610 Base System with Two BA22E Storage Expansion Cabinets

Zone A

Unavailable

.----

NN
0
LOl.O:> N
WWQ.1.0

\::\::U~

AC
Power
Supply

RFxx
Removable
Opt.

RF xx
Fixed
Opt.

RFxx
Fixed
Opt.

DC
Power
Supply

RF xx
Fixed
Opt.

RFxx
Fixed
Opt.

AC
Power
Supply

RFxx
Fixed
Req.

RFxx
Fixed
Opt.

:::>

TF70C-AA,
TF857-Cx,
or
TF85C-AA
Opt.

~ _t I"T """45""6
DC
Power
Supply

.--

Summary
Panel

CD
CD

~ . . . . ~(j)

J--1
J
I
I
I

I .,®., I

Zone
A

AC Box

I
I

---r

<DSSI>

<DSSl> iiiiiiiiiioiiii

Zone B

Unavailable

~l
~

.----

~ _t ::23::-A :rli
DC
Power
Suppl y

LOLO:>N

WWQ.. lO

AC
Power
Supply

....
B

RF xx
Removable
Opt.

RFxx
Fixed
Opt.

DC
Power
Supply

RFxx
Fixed
Opt.

RF xx
Fixed
Opt.

AC
Power
Supply

RF xx
Fixed
Req .

RFxx
Fixed
Opt.

CD
CD

r=-~]
~ l
I

:::>

TF70C-AA,
TF857-Cx,
or
TFBSC-AA
Opt.

\::\::t>~

Summary
Panel

AC Box_!

__:_

_:_

·'= <DSSI>
<DSSI>

-- :f
-y

BU 3171

CD DSSI connectors when tape devices are installed.
® Connections for local (DEC423) and remote console .

VAXft Model 610 Base System with One BA22E Storage Expansion Cabinet

1.152

VAX Systems

.....
~

BU 3172

CD DSSI connectors when tape devices are installed.
® Connections for local (DEC423) and remote console.

TF70C-AA,
TF857-Cx,
or
TFBSC-AA
Opt.

.Ji.

~ \::U ll'~>

AC
Power
Supply

RF xx
Fixed
Req .

:::>

gJ-1. ....L..a....i.

' - :.'.

AC
Power
Supply

Unavai !>le

:::>
<DSSI>

RF xx
Fixed
Opt.

<DSSI>

r---

:::>

RF xx
Fixed
Opt.

[

<X-Link>

RFxx
Fixed
Opt.

RF xx
Fixed
Opt.

ACBox

......

Zone B
RFxx
Fixed
Opt.

DC
Power
Supply

CD
CD

r--=--:]
J
l
I

RF xx
Removable
Opt.

RF xx
Fixed
Opt.

... . . . . ;.CD

:.'.:.'.

...___'.

:::ii

RF xx
Fixed
Opt.

1()1()

\:'. \::U ~

AC
Power
Supply

.--

RF xx
Removable
Opt.

TF70C-AA,
TF857-Cx,
or
TF85C-AA
Opt.

"'
ll'>:::> 0N

Wa. ll'>

RF xx
Fixed
Req.

.----

2...a..J.....5._§.

CD
CD

RF xx
Fixed
Opt.

.-Summary
Panel

:::>

DC
Power
Supply

RF xx
Removable
Opt.

VAXft Systems and Servers
VAXft Model 612 System/Server Diagrams
Zone A

,.,
Unavailable

Unavailable

Zone A

Summary
Panel

RFxx
Removable
Opt.

.-----

,.,
RF xx
Fixed
Opt.

RF xx
Fixed
Opt.

Unavailable

DC
Power
Supply

~~~

UJUJQ.

!;Z!;ZU

ro
ro

TF70C-AA,
TFB57-Cx,
or
TFB5C-AA
Opt.

35 ...1. ...2.__;l__i___o.__§_
c cc

~1!18-181
00

DC
Power
Supply

r--

<DSSI>

AC
Power
Supply

--"'--"'-

Zone
A
AC Box
<DSSI >

Zone B

Unavailable

~[
>s

Unavailable

::J

ro _j_:::Z:-:J:
ro

DC
Power
Supply

:JN 0

AC
Power
Supply

RFxx
Removable
Opt.

,----------,

DC
Power
Supply

l c®c

Zone
B
AC Box

~m~

Oc cc

8"!:2 u ~I~ 8"p

RF xx
Fixed
Req.

RF xx
Fixed
Opt.

=-=

RF xx
Fixed
Opt.

RFxx
Fixed
Opt.

Unavailable

RFxx
Fixed
Opt.

RF xx
Fixed
Opt.

DC
Power
Supply

AC
Power
Supply

Zone
A
AC Box

I c@c I

<DSSI> _ _ . . . .
Zone B

,.,
Unavailable

AC
Power
Supply

<DSSI>_

ffi ...i :::Z::::J::::I JLJL
Oc c c

., UJo._
"'<n::J 2 ~
'-' 8" !;ZU ~I~ 8"p
0

RF xx
Fixed
Req.

RF xx
Fixed
Opt.

AC
Power
Supply

=-=

<DSS I> _ _ . . . .

Summary
Panel

::J

<DSSI>

[

DC
Power
Supply

ro
ro

TF70C-AA,
TFB57-Cx,
or
TFB5C-AA
Opt.

::;; 1;318-18-

35 ...i ...2....a.....i.__o.__§_
RF xx
Fixed
Opt.

Summary
Panel

::S::JL

0 cc c
"'"'
o._<n
"'"'
~~ ucn
~~

::J

RF xx
Fixed
Opt.

::J
::J

Summary
Panel

"'0

I c®c I [

Zone
B
AC Box

BU-3173

CD DSSI connectors when tape devices are installed.
® Connections for local (DEC423) and remote console.

VAXft Model 612 Two-Node DSSI VAXcluster Base System

Zone A

Unavailable

Summary
Panel

TF70C-AA,
TFB57·Cx,

DC
Power
Supply

TFB5C-AA
Opt.

~ ~ => ~ § § §

::===!'-'I~~ ~~~~

,, . .

1. 111* -l+++-!'l!

AC
Power
Supply

Zone
A

l
I
I

~ AC Box I

l~====~~~~~~~lt;~

Zone B
r

,--------,
Unavailable

Panel

r1
@

I
:

Unavailable

RFxx
Fixed
Opt.

DC
Power
Supply

RFxx
Fixed
Opt.

DC
Power
Supply

AC
Power
Supply

RFxx
Fixed
Req.

RFxx
Fixed
Opt.

AC
Power
Supply

RFxx
Fixed
Req .

RFxx
Fixed
Opt.

AC
Power
Supply

,________,

...

<DSSI > -

Z
ACone
BBox

RFxx
Removable
Opt.

RFxx
Fixed
Opt.

DC
Power
Supply

RFxx
Removable
Opt.

RFxx
Fixed
Opt.

DC
Power
Supply

::J
Cil

RFxx
Fixed
Opt.

DC
Power
Supply

RFxx
Fixed

AC
Power

RFxx RFxx
Fixed Fixed

AC
Power

Supply

Req.

Opt.

Supply

--- ---

Supply

Req.

Opt.

fX fX :J ~ § o o

'===='~~1~ ~ ~ ~~~

AC
Power

--- ---

Unavailable

1:===:::::!1ffi
RFxx
Fixed
Opt.

Summary
Panel

Zone B

RFxx
Fixed
Opt.

lffi

1:===~1ffi

TF70C-AA,
TFB57-Cx,
or
TFBSC-AA
Opt.

~====='--'I~~~ ~~~ I,. ......
let-+-+-+- l '---------...J ....1I
AC
Power
Supply

Unavailable

~..L~~~~~~~~:jt~;;~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~==~~

>(~--~

~ l fn :J ~ § § §

RFxx
Fixed
Opt.

<DSSI> ~

v ,---

DC
Power
Supply

RFxx
Fixed
Opt.

DC
Power
Supply

c6 Summary J

:J
Unavailable

RFxx
Fixed
Opt.

'---------...J

RFxx
Fixed
Opt.

RFxx
Removable
Opt.

1:===:::::::1ffi

::J

'===ffi 1~7

Zone A
RF xx
Removable
Opt.

1-H++-

Summary
Panel

n I j
Zone

AC BBox

L:::::::::t~~~~~;; <DSSl>~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~5<DSSI> :::::::::::::::::;...,..f----....I...-----'
'--------'

.____

BU-3174

CD DSSI connectors when tape devices are installed.
® Connections for local (DEC423) and remote console .

VAXft Model 612 Two-Node DSSI VAXcluster Base System with BA22E Storage Expansion

VAX Systems 1.153

· VAXft Systems and Servers
Specifications
Physical Characteristics

Model

110

410

610

612

Base System

Height

69.0 cm
(27.0 in.)
53.0 cm
(21.0 in.)
45.7 cm
(18.0 in.)
68.0 kg
(151 lb)

67.3 cm
(26.5 in.)
109.2 cm
(43 .0 in.)
45 .7 cm
(18.0 in.)
218.2 kg
(480 lb)

1.5 m
(60.0 in.)
91.4 cm
(36.0 in.)
76.2 cm
(30.0 in.)
390 kg
(858 lb)

1.5 m
(60.0 in.)
2.4 m
(96.0 in.)
76.2 cm
(30.0 in.)
1107 kg
(2436 lb)

Width
Depth
Weight

Storage Expansion
(Not supported on
Model 110 systems)

Height
Width
Depth
Weight

Power

Model

BA22D
(for Model 410)

BA22E
(for Models 610/612)

67.3 cm (26.5 in.)
109.2 cm (43 .0 in.)
45 .7 cm (18.0 in.)
218.2 kg (480 lb)

1.5 m (60.0 in.)
60.9 cm (24.0 in.)
76.2 cm (30.0 in.)
327.3 kg (720 lb)

110

410

610

612

120
240

Base power consumption (Watts)
Base System
Storage expansion

650

1400

NIA

lOOOi'

2000
1000

5400
1000

Thermal dissipation (Btu's)
Base system
Storage expansion

2219

4778
3413

6826
3413

17065
3413

Input voltage support (Vac)

Operating temperature
Relative humidity

NIA
10° to 40° C with storage
10% to 90%

* Total power consumption for two storage expansion enclosures.

J
1

1.154 VAX Systems

VAXft Storage Expansion Option
BA22D Storage Expansion
Option for VAXft
Model 310/410

Total of one BA22D Storage Expansion option may be added to the base system.
Adding this option is a major upgrade. System downtime must be considered.
This option consists of two storage expansion enclosures (rackmount or pedestal)
with integral UPS . Each enclosure can house up to six DSSI devices. Total Four
KFE52-AA are required to connect the BA22D. With the addition of this option,
storage devices already installed in the base system enclosures must be removed
and may be used in the storage expansion enclosures. Maximum of two removable storage devices (tape or disk) can be re-used and installed (one within each
of the BA22D two storage expansion cabinets).

BA22D-AA
BA22D-BA

BA22E Storage Expansion
Option VAXft
Model 610/612

120/240 Vac, pedestal enclosure
120/240 Vac, rackmount enclosure

Total of two BA22E Storage Expansion options may be installed for the VAXft
Models 610 and 612. Adding this option is a major upgrade. System downtime
must be considered.
This option consists of two storage cages housed in a single 1.5-'meter (60-inch)
cabinet. Each cage has it own power and UPS system and can house up to six
DSSI disk storage options for a total of 12 disk devices in a single 1.5-meter
(60-inch) cabinet using two DSSI buses. Total of four KFE52-AA are required to
connect each BA22E storage option. With the addition of the BA22E, storage
devices already installed in the base system enclosures excluding tape devices
must be removed and may be used in the BA22E storage expansion. Maximum
of two removable storage devices (disk only) can be re-used and installed.

Storage Devices for
Expansion Cabinets

BA22E-AA

120/240 Vac 1.5-meter (60-inch) enclosure

RF31-JA

Maximum four in base system enclosure; maximum two per
BA22D/BA22E enclosure
Maximum 12 per BA22D/BA22E-AA enclosure
Maximum six per VAXft Model 110

RF31-KA
RF31-HA
RF72-JA
RF72-KA
RF72-HA

Maximum four in base system enclosure; maximum two per
BA22D/BA22E enclosure
Maximum 12 per BA22D/BA22E-AA enclosure
Maximum four per VAXft Model 110

RF73-KA

Maximum four in base system enclosure; maximum two per
BA22D/ BA22E enclosure
Maximum 12 per BA22D/BA22E-AA enclosure

TF70C-JA
TF70C-AA
TF70C-RA

Maximum two tape drives per VAXft Model 410 system.
Maximum two tape drives per VAXft Model 610/612 system.
VAXft Model 110

TF857-CA/CB

Maximum two tape loaders per VAXft Model 610/612 system,
120/240 Vac.

TF85C-AA

2.6-Gbyte cartridge tape drive. Maximum two tape drives per
VAXft Model 610/612 system.

KFE52-AA

KFE52 DSSI/Ethernet adapter. Total four KFE52 are required
per system to connect each BA22E/BA22D storage expansion
option. Two KFE52 are included with the base system.

RF73-JA

VAX Systems

1.155

VAXft Model 110/410 Rackmount
Systems/Servers
Product Description

VAXft Models 110 and 410 are offered as 48.3 -cm (19-inch) wide, RETMA,
rack.mountable systems (cabinet not included). These systems mount in a standard 48.3 cm (19-inch) cabinet with a vertical mounting space of
66 cm (26 inches) (including rack.mount base) .
Rack.mount VAXft systems offer the same functionality as the standard VAXft
systems and support the same I/O options and hardware. With rack.mount systems the office base with casters is replaced with a rack.mount base. The
rack.mount base ensures support for the transformer and allows spacing for
proper airflow.
To ensure FCC compliance, the rack.mountable VAXft systems must be mounted
in a standard EMI shielded cabinet (not provided by Digital). OEMs who have
special packaging needs can mount the chassis in their own enclosures and are
responsible for FCC compliance through self-certification.
BA22 enclosures can weigh up to 109 kg (240 pounds) for the processor enclosure and up to 122.7 kg (270 pounds) for the storage expansion enclosure. The
cabinet's 19-inch RETMA rail system must be designed to handle a hang weight
of 245 kg (540 pounds)-one BA22 processor and one BA22 expansion enclosure
mounted on a one rail system. Another consideration is power distributionwhen adding power control to a rack.mount cabinet, a single point of failure
should be avoided when using a single power controller for multiple BA22 CPU
cabinets.

Ordering Information

Traditional Systems-Model 110 Rack.mount Traditional Systems include VMS
1- to 5-user license (with Rdb Runtime) and DECnet end-node license.

SV-51BAA-AE/AJ
SV-51BBA-AE/AJ

Includes two RF31 disks; 120/ 240 Vac
Includes two RF72 disks; 120/ 240 Vac

OpenVMS Base Servers include Open VMS base license

SV-51BAA-BE/BJ
SV-51BBA-BE/BJ

Includes two RF31 disks; 120/240 Vac
Includes two RF72 disks; 120/ 240 Vac

Traditional Systems-Model 410 Rack.mount Traditional Systems include VMS
unlimited-user license (with Rdb Runtime), and DECnet end-node license.

55BAA-AA
55BAB-AA

Model 410 with 32 Mbytes of memory; 120 or 240 Vac
(universal power supply)
Model 410 with 64 Mbytes of memory; 120 or 240 Vac
(universal power supply)

OpenVMS Base Servers include Open VMS base license

55BAA-BA
55BAB-BA

Model 410 with 32 Mbytes of memory, 120/240 Vac
Model 410 with 64 Mbytes of memory, 120/240 Vac

Server Systems
Model 410 Rack.mount Server systems include VMS File and Application Server
license, VAXcluster license, and DECnet full-function license:

55BAA-KA
55BAB-KA

Model 410 with 32 Mbytes of memory; 120 or 240 Vac
(universal power supply)
Model 410 with 64 Mbytes of memory; 120 or 240 Vac
(universal power supply)

With the exception of the system information listed above, Rack.mount VAXft
configuring information is identical to the configuring information in the VAXft
systems' menu. Refer to the VAXft ordering menus for complete ordering
information.

1.156

VAX Systems

VAXft Model 410 Rackmount Diagram
46.51 cm
- - - - - - - - (18.31 in) - - - - - - . - EIA Mounting Holes Ctr. to Ctr.

J[]
a

Front View

60.96 cm
(24 in)

J ••

J J
I

JJ J
I

44.55 cm
(17.54 in)

0000000
0000000

•

t
29 .89 cm

Cable Routing Area __/

(11 .77 in)

_ _ _ _J
~ 46.78cm_J

46.51 cm
(18.31 in) - - - - - - ·
Standard 19.00 in. Rack Mounting

- - • - - - - -

(18.42 in)

Top View

0
0

D
D

[-.:J

8::1 •
e

[-.:J

Mounting
Flange

llB •

c)
c
D

Front View

66.14 cm
(26.04 in)

J
1

Rack Mount

_ _ _ _ _ _ 44.55 cm _ _ _ __
(17.54 in)
BU-3077

VAX Systems

1.157

ACCESSWORKS Data Integration Servers
Product Overview

Desktop computing has delivered vast power and flexibility to the user. Providing these users with manageable actess to enterprise data is the challenge faced
by MIS organizations today.
ACCESSWORKS provides everything necessary to access database information as
it consolidates, distributes, and manages data securely and automatically.
ACCESSWORKS provides an alternative to expensive mainframe upgrades.
Datacenter capacity can be extended by offloading database query activities.
ACCESSWORKS systems provide the strategic direction sought by corporate data
management organizations. ACCESSWORKS is the solution to their data distribution and desktop data access needs.
ACCESSWORKS framework consists of three components: desktop PCs, the
ACCESSWORKS server, and one or more data repositories.

DB2
Macintosh
Rdb
MS-DOS
ORACLE
UNIX

VAX
RMS

OS/2
IMS
VMS
VSAM
BU-3277

Features

ACCESSWORKS provides:

· A strategic, flexible solution providing simplified data management compared
with point-to-point solutions
· Database access that does not require specialized interconnect design

• A single vendor for support of hardware, software, and corporate data management strategy
• The unloading and freeing of the database mainframe with its associated
performance extension

• A family of client/server integrated solutions that are preconfigured, tested, and
characterized for optimal performance
Desktop Environment

ACCESSWORKS utilizes NAS tools, including the SQL application programming
interface, and PATHWORKS, to integrate the desktop computing environment.
ACCESSWORKS supports DOS, Microsoft Windows, OS/2, Macintosh, VAX,
ULTRIX, and UNIX System V clients.

1.158 VAX Systems

ACCESSWORKS Data Integration Servers
Features (Continued)

Target Databases

ACCESSWORKS provides read access to a variety of corporate databases, including IBM DB2, VSAM, and VAX Oracle, as well as read/write access to Rdb and

RMS.
IBM databases are accessed via high-performance DECnet/SNA-ST and -CT
Gateways or through cost-effective DECnet/SNA software.
Data Storage and Ad-hoc Query Capability

ACCESSWORKS can act as a decentralized data storage point, or can be the
platform for interactive "ad-hoc" queries.
ACCESSWORKS uses VAX Data Distributor, VAX Common Data Dictionary,
and Digital's interoperability products (VIDA and RdbAccess) so data can be
extracted or rolled up from a number of sources, relational and non-relational,
into a single relational database.
ACCESSWORKS provides seamless routing and translation of interactive queries.
The desktop user can issue ad-hoc queries to remote databases. Data is returned
quiclqy and easily for local analysis and presentation.
Interactive query and data storage can be used in conjunction to provide the
fullest flexibility of data access.
Platforms

ACCESSWORKS is a scalable solution based on specific VAX platforms.

VAX Systems

1.159

ACCESSWORKS Data Integration Servers
Step 1-System
Select the ACCESSWORKS base system.
ACCESSWORKS base systems include
• VAXstation, MicroVAX, or VAX server system
• OpenVMS
• NAS 200, NAS 250, NAS 300, or NAS 400 (high availability)
• DECnet/OSI end-node license (with PATHWORKS for VMS)
• System disk and memory
• VAX Rdb/VMS
• Compact disc load device (except ACCESSWORKS 6610 and 7610; see note 2 below)
• ACCESSWORKS media/ documentation-includes NAS and layered product images for ACCESSWORKS base systems and all
ACCESSWORKS options.
• Layered software licenses:
- VAX Common Data Dictionary
- DEC RdbAccess for VAX RMS
Order Number

System

NAS

Memory

Disk

ACCESSWORKS-OpenVMS User-Based Licenses
DJ-DB2AA-AB
DJ-DB2AA-AC

ACCESSWORKS 4000-VLC, 50 Hz
ACCESSWORKS 4000-VLC, 60 Hz

250
250

8 MB
8 MB

426 MB
426 MB

DJ-DB3EA-AA
DJ-DBJDA-AA

ACCESSWORKS 3130
ACCESSWORKS 3180

200
200

16 MB
16 MB

426 MB
426MB

DJ-DB4DA-AA
DJ-DB4EA-AA
DJ-DB4FA-AA

ACCESSWORKS 4100
ACCESSWORKS 4500
ACCESSWORKS 4600

300
300
300

32 MB
64 MB
64 MB

852 MB
852 MB
852 MB

DJ-DB6CA-AB
DJ-DB6CA-AC

ACCESSWORKS 6610, 50 Hz
ACCESSWORKS 6610, 60 Hz

300
300

64 MB
64 MB

2 GB
2 GB

DJ-DB7 AA-AB
DJ-DB7 AA-AC

ACCESSWORKS 7610, 50 Hz
ACCESSWORKS 7610, 60 Hz

300
300

64 MB
64 MB

2 GB
2 GB

ACCESSWORKS-File and Application Server License
DJ-DB3CA-AA
DJ-DBJBA-AA

ACCESSWORKS 3130
ACCESSWORKS 3180

200
200

16 MB
16 MB

426 MB
426 MB

DJ-DB4AA-AA
DJ-DB4BA-AA
DJ-DB4CA-AA

ACCESSWORKS 4300
ACCESSWORKS 4500
ACCESSWORKS 4500

300
300
400

16 MB
64 MB
64 MB

426 MB
852 MB
852 MB

DJ-DB6AA-AB
DJ-DB6AA-AC
DJ-DB6BA-AB
DJ-DB6BA-AC

ACCESSWORKS 6610, 50 Hz
ACCESSWORKS 6610, 60 Hz
ACCESSWORKS 6610, 50 Hz
ACCESSWORKS 6610, 60 Hz

300
300
400
400

64 MB
64 MB
64 MB
64 MB

2 GB
2 GB
2 GB
2 GB

Notes:
1. Each system requires the addition of a console. This can be a country-specific VT100/VT200-compatible terminal.
2. ACCESSWORKS 6610 and 7610 require the addition of an InfoServer 150 and associated country kit (order numbers
SEACD-AA and SEAKC-xx) as load device unless one is already resident on the local network.
3. Distribution media for ACCESSWORKS software and VMS is CD-ROM.

1.160

VAX Systems

ACCESSWORKS Data Integration Servers

Select additional memory depending on number of clients. Refer to the following table for recommended memory
configurations.
.
ACCESSWORKS System

Number of Clients

ACCESSWORKS 4000-VLC
ACCESSWORKS 3130
ACCESSWORKS 3180
ACCESSWORKS 4100
ACCESSWORKS 4300
ACCESSWORKS 4500
ACCESSWORKS 4600
ACCESSWORKS 6610
ACCESSWORKS 7610

25
70
120
170
100
175
250
256
300

Total Memory Required
8 MB

32 MB
64 MB
128 MB
256 MB
128 MB
256 MB

Step 3-IBM Connectivity
Select from one of three SNA connectivity options: ACCESSWORKS/SNA, ACCESSWORKS/SNA-ST, and ACCESSWORKS/
SNA-CT. Target IBM databases include DB2, VSAM, IMS.
ACCESSWORKS/SNA includes
· VMS/SNA software
• VIDA client software license
• LU 6.2 software license
• VAX DTF server software license
• Wide are device driver software
· DF296 9600-b/s modem
• Serial line controller
QP-LBXAA-01
DJ-DB3CB-AA
DJ-DB3BB-AA
DJ-DB4DB-AA
DJ-DB4AB-AA
DJ-DB4BB-AA
DJ-DB6AB-AA
DJ-DB7 AB-AA

ACCESSWORKS/SNA for ACCESSWORKS 4000-VLC
ACCESSWORKS/SNA for ACCESSWORKS 3130
ACCESSWORKS/SNA for ACCESSWORKS 3180
ACCESSWORKS/SNA for ACCESSWORKS 4100
ACCESSWORKS/SNA for ACCESSWORKS 4300
ACCESSWORKS/SNA for ACCESSWORKS 4500/ACCESSWORKS 4600
ACCESSWORKS/SNA for ACCESSWORKS 6610
ACCESSWORKS/SNA for ACCESSWORKS 7610

ACCESSWORKS/SNA-ST includes
· DECnet/SNA Gateway-ST
• VIDA client software license
• LU 6.2 software license
· VAX DTF server software license
DJ-DB2AC-AA
DJ-DB3CC-AA
DJ-DB4DC-AA
DJ-DB4AC-AA
DJ-DB4BC-AA
DJ-DB6AC-AA
DJ-DB7 AC-AA

ACCESSWORKS/SNA-ST for ACCESSWORKS 4000-VLC
ACCESSWORKS/SNA-ST for ACCESSWORKS 3130/80
ACCESSWORKS/SNA-ST for ACCESSWORKS 4100
ACCESSWORKS/SNA-ST for ACCESSWORKS 4300
ACCESSWORKS/SNA-ST for ACCESSWORKS 4500/4600
ACCESSWORKS/SNA-ST for ACCESSWORKS 6610
ACCESSWORKS/SNA-ST for ACCESSWORKS 7610

VAX Systems

1.161

ACCESSWORKS Data Integration Servers

ACCESSWORKS/SNA-CT includes
• DECnet/SNA Gateway-CT
• VIDA client software license
· LU 6.2 software license
• VAX DTP server software license
DJ-DB2AD-AA
DJ-DB3CD-AA
DJ-DB4DD-AA
DJ-DB4AD-AA
DJ-DB4BD-AA
DJ-DB6AD-AA
DJ-DB7 AD-AA

ACCESSWORKS/SNA-CT for ACCESSWORKS 4000-VLC
ACCESSWORKS/SNA-CT for ACCESSWORKS 3130/80
ACCESSWORKS/ SNA-CT for ACCESSWORKS 4100
ACCESSWORKS/SNA-CT for ACCESSWORKS 4300
ACCESSWORKS/SNA-CT for ACCESSWORKS 4500/ 4600
ACCESSWORKS/SNA-CT for ACCESSWORKS 6610
ACCESSWORKS/SNA-CT for ACCESSWORKS 7610

Notes:
1. Access to IBM databases by the ACCESSWORKS/SNA option requires the addition of an internal VAXBI (order number

DWMBB-DA) to ACCESSWORKS 6610 systems.
2. Access to IBM DB2 databases requires VIDA server software on the IBM host. This software (QL-VTXAX-xx and
QA-VTXAA-xx) needs to be ordered unless already resident on the IBM host.
3. Access to IBM DB2 databases requires DTP software on the IBM host unless already resident.
DTF for MVS
QL-1GQA9-AA
QA-lGQAA-xx
QA-lGQAA-GZ
QA-lGQN'-xx
DTF for VM
QL-GUYA9-AA
QA-GUYAA-xx
QA-GUYAA-GZ
QA-GUYA'~ -xx

Software license
Software media
Software documentation
Software product services
Software license
Software media
Software documentation
Software product services

4. Batch access to IBM IMS databases requires Data Extract, an IBM product, to be resident on the IBM host. The order
number is 5668-788, Data Extract, Version 2, Release 4 for MVS and VM. This software needs to be ordered unless
already resident on the IBM host.
* Denotes processor code, xx denotes media type. For additional information on available licenses, services, and media, refer to the appropriate price book.

ACCESSWORKS/SNA-BASIC allows the utilization of existing -ST or -CT gateways in connecting to IBM systems. It provides
provides SNA connectivity for incremental ACCESSWORKS base systems.
ACCESSWORKS/SNA-BASIC includes
• VIDA client software license
• LU 6.2 software license
• VAX DTP server software license
QP-LBYAA-05
QP-LBYAA-01
QP-LBYAA-06
QP-LBYAA-02
QP-LBYAA-03
QP-LBYAA-04

1.162

VAX Systems

ACCESSWORKS/SNA-BASIC for ACCESSWORKS 4000-VLC
ACCESSWORKS/SNA-BASIC for ACCESSWORKS 3130/80
ACCESSWORKS/SNA-BASIC for ACCESSWORKS 4100
ACCESSWORKS/SNA-BASIC for ACCESSWORKS 4300
ACCESSWORKS/SNA-BASIC for ACCESSWORKS 4500/ 4600
ACCESSWORKS/SNA-BASIC for ACCESSWORKS 6610/7610

ACCESSWORKS Data Integration Servers

Access to Oracle Databases is provided through RdbAccess for Oracle software.
QL-YQVA9-JC
QL-YQVA9-JB
QL-YQVA9-JE
QL-YQVA9-JK
QL-YQVA9-JL

RdbAccess for Oracle for ACCESSWORKS 3130, 3180
RdbAccess for Oracle for ACCESSWORKS 4000-VLC, 4300
RdbAccess for Oracle for ACCESSWORKS 4100
RdbAccess for Oracle for ACCESSWORKS 4500, 4600
RdbAccess for Oracle for ACCESSWORKS 6610, 7610

Note: Access to remote. Oracle databases requires an Oracle SQU'Net license be installed on the ACCESSWORKS server.

Step ~ACCESSWORKS/DNfA·STORE
ACCESSWORKS/DATA-STORE provides the ability to store and manage data at the ACCESSWORKS server.
ACCESSWORKS/DATA-STORE includes

· RDB interactive license
· VAX data distributor license
QP-LBZAA-05
QP-LBZAA-01
QP-LBZAA-06
QP-LBZAA-02
QP-LBZAA-03
QP-LBZAA-04

ACCESSWORKS/DATA-STORE for ACCESSWORKS 4000-VLC
ACCESSWORKS/DATA-STORE for ACCESSWORKS 3130/80
ACCESSWORKS/DATA-STORE for ACCESSWORKS 4100
ACCESSWORKS/DATA-STORE for ACCESSWORKS 4300
ACCESSWORKS/DATA-STORE for ACCESSWORKS 4500/4600
ACCESSWORKS/DATA-STORE for ACCESSWORKS 6610/7610

Note: ACCESSWORKS DATA-STORE requires additional disks sized to customer needs for data storage. See Chapter 7,
Storage Devices, for disk selection.

VAX Systems

1.163

DECstations/DECsystems Comparison Chart

System
1

Personal DECstation 5000
Models 20/25

DECstation 5000
Models 125/133

DECstation 5000
Model 240

DECsystem 5000
Model 25

R3000l}JR3010

R3000A/R3010A

R3400B

R3000A/R3010

SPECmark

16.3/19.l

19.3125.5

32.4

19.1

MIPS

21.6/ 26.7

26.8/34.4

42.9

26.7

Clock Speed

20 MHz/25 MHz

25 MHz/ 3 3 MHz

40 MHz

25 MHz

Cache Size

64 KB (instructions)
64 KB (data)

Model 125:
64 KB (instructions)
64 KB (data)
Model 133:
64 KB (instructions)
128 KB (data)

64 KB (instructions)
64 KB (data)

·5

Memory Capacity
(type)

8 MMO MB
(parity)

8 MB-128 MB
(parity)

16 MM80 MB
(ECC)

8 MMO MB
. (parity)

Enclosure

Desktop

~
rn

Storage Capacity
Internal
Total

Up to 426 MB
Up to 25.3 GB

Up to 852 MB
Up to 33.5 GB

None
Up to 33.1 GB

Up to 426 MB
Up to 25.3 GB

~·

1/0 Bus Type

i
·:

TURBOchannel4
VME (optional)

Peripheral Support

SCSI
VME

Network Support

TCP/IP (standard)
NFS (standard)
DECnet-ULTRIX
(optional)
FDDI (optional)

TCP/ IP (standard)
NFS (standard)
DECnet-ULTRIX
(optional)
FDDI (optional)

CPU / FPU
2

~~
rn

1. From MIPS Computer Systems, Inc.
2. SPECmark is the geometric mean of ten compute-intensive, public-domain benchmarks compared to performance on a VAX-111780.
3. Million instructions per second based on the Dhrystone benchmarks.
4. Digital and third-party TURBOchannel options are available. Contact a sales representative or Digital reseller for third-party options available through
the TRI/ ADD program.

2.2

DECsystems

DECstations/DECsystems Comparison Chart

System
1

CPU /FPU
SPECmark

DECsystem 5000
Model 133

DECsystem 5000
Model 240

DECsystem 5900

R3000A/R3010A

R3400B

R3000AIR3010A

25.5

32.4

32.8

MIPS3

34.4

42.9

Clock Speed

33 MHz

40 MHz

Cache Size

64 KB (instructions)
128 KB (dat~)

64 KB (instructions)
64 KB (data)

Memory Capacity
(type)

8 MB-128 MB
(parity)

16 MB-480 MB
(ECC)

64 MB-448 MB
(ECC)

Enclosure

Desktop

Cabinet

Storage .Capacity
Internal
Total

Up to 852 MB
Up to 33.5 GB

None
Up to 33.1 GB

Up to 37.2 GB
Up to 37.2 GB

I/O Bus Type

TURBOchannel
VME (optional)

Peripheral Support

SCSI
VME

SCSI
VME
CI

Network Support

TCP/IP (standard)
NFS (standard)
DECnet-ULTRIX
(optional)
FDDI (optional)

DECsystems

2.3

Personal DECstation 5000 Models 20, 25, and 33

Product Description

The Personal DECstation 5000 Series is Digital's first RISC personal workstation,
combining the power of a workstation with the productivity of a PC. This
entry-level workstation offers CPU performance of up to 25.3 SPECmarks. The
Personal DECstation combines excellent price/performance with a growth path
for future higher-performance ACE-compliant CPUs.
The Personal DECstation 5000 Series consists of three products: the Personal
DECstation 5000 Model 20, 25, and 33 (20 MHz, 25 MHz, and 33 MHz respectively). All share the same modular design for investment protection. These
workstations are UNIX-based RISC systems featuring the MIPS R3000A CPU and
R3010 FPU chipset. The design of the Personal DECstation places the CPU/FPU
chipset on a 3- x 5-inch (7.6- x 12.7-cm) removable daughter card which permits easy, economical performance upgrades. The R4000 CPU daughter card will
be available at a later date.
The Personal DECstation has built-in 8-plane frame buffer graphics, built-in
audio, audio clips, and the ability to develop and run multimedia applications.
Two TURBOchannel expansion slots allow use of 3D graphics, true-color graphics, high-resolution graphics, live video, specialized networking options (including
FDDI networks), serial line expansion, and numerous I/O options.
The system has 8 Mbytes of built-in memory and offers four memory expansion
slots. Memory modules are available in 4- and 16-Mbyte packages for system
totals of 16 and 40 Mbytes respectively. Internal storage for Models 20 and 25 is
provided by two storage cavities. One slot is reserved for a SCSI hard drive; the
other slot supports an FDI diskette drive.
The Personal DECstation family is based on industry standards and provides
built-in industry-leading openness: open TURBOchannel bus for expansion; X.25
for synchronous communications; EIA-232; SCSI storage; VME expansion; and
Floppy Device Interface (FDI).

2.4

DECsystems

Personal DECstation 5000 Models 20, 25, and 33
Product Description
(Continued)

The Personal DECstation's built-in audio, in conjunction with XMedia Tools and
the DECvideo/PIP TURBOchannel option, offers customers the flexibility of configuring the system as a low-cost multimedia player system or as a fully functional multimedia developer's ~system. Digital-designed client/server multimedia
software allows developers to implement audio and video applications in a distributed environment. No other vendor offers fully distributed multimedia
capability.
Over 2800 RISC ULTRIX applications are available, including an extensive number of personal productivity applications, vertical, 2D and 3D applications with a
clear growth path to OSF/1 and ACE-compliance. Of particular interest to customers wanting to break away from the limits of their PC are: Lotus 1-2-3,
Wingz, WordPerfect, Island Write, Island Draw, Coral Draw, Adobe Illustrator,
Framemaker II, Interleaf TPS, AUTOcad, Applix Asterix, and BBN Slate. For
those applications that are not ported, we offer DEC SoftPC V3.0 for ULTRIX
that allows a user to run MS-DOS applications in emulation mode on the
workstation.
The Personal DECstation offers a wide range of solutions including: demanding
business applications, financial trading, technical publishing, electronic computer-aided design (ECAD), multimedia station, low-cost software development
platform (CASE), and 3D graphics (MCAD).

DECsystems

2.5

Personal DECstation 5000 Models 20, 25, and 33
Step 1-Systems
Select system. 120-V Packaged and Custom Systems include power cord and U.S. keyboard. 240-V Packaged and Custom
Systems require country-specific power cord and keyboard. Custom systems require a monitor for use with built-in 8-plane
frame buffer graphics or a TURBOchannel graphics option. Order software from Step 13, if necessary.
No additions or substitutions can be made to a Packaged system. Field-installable options ship separately for installation at
customer site. Select factory-installed options for Custom Systems.
Personal DECstation 5000 systems include
• Base module with 20-MHz, 25-MHz, or 33-MHz CPU daughter card
• TURBOchannel I/O interconnect bus-two slots total
• Baseboard frame-buffer graphics 1024 x 768, 72 Hz, 8-plane
· Built-in audio hardware and speaker. Requires Xmedia Runtime License and software to operate audio. Some systems
include license, see below.
· Memory (8 or 24 Mbytes)
· Thick wire Ethernet controller on base system module
• Synchronous SCSI controller on base system module
· U.S. keyboard, 120-V systems
·Three-button mouse
· One EIA-232 serial line with full modem control
• 0.9-meter (3-foot) video cable (Packaged systems only)
· 1.8-meter (6-foot) power cord (wall socket to system box, 120-V systems only)
• 0.9-meter (3-foot) convenience power cord (monitor to system box)
• Universal power supply that automatically adjusts to 88-132 Vac or 17 6-264 Vac
• ULTRIX Workstation Software 2-user base license
• User documentation (120 V includes English, 240 V includes international)
Note: Packaged Systems with RZ25 disk and Custom Systems ordered with factory-installed RZ25 variant (-FM) include
ULTRIX Factory-Installed Software (FIS).
Packaged Systems

Memory

Monitor
M =Mono
C = Color

20/20 MHz
20/20 MHz

8 MB
8 MB
8 MB

17" M VRM17
16" C VRC16
19" C VRT19

PM300-AA/AB/ AC
PM300-AG/AHiAJ 1
PM300-EA/EB/EC2
PM300-EG/EH/EJ2
PM302-EK/EL/EM2
PM305-DG/DHIDJ2
PM307-LG/LH/LJ2

25125 MHz
25125 MHz
25125 MHz
25125 MHz
25125 MHz
25125 MHz
25125 MHz

8 MB
8 MB
8 MB
8 MB
8 MB
24 MB
24 MB

17" M VRM17
16" C VRC16
17" M VRM17
16" C VRC16
19" C VRT19
16" C VRT16
16" C VRT16

PM300-FA/FB/FC 1
PM300-FG/FH/FJ 1
PM302-GK/GL/GM2
PM305-HG/HH/Hf

33/ 33 MHz
33/ 33 MHz
33/33 MHz
33/33 MHz

8 MB
8 MB
8 MB
24 MB

17" M VRM17
16" C VRC16
19" C VRT19
16" C VRT16

Order Number
120 V/240 V/S.H.

Model/CPU

PM300-SA/SB/SC1
PM300-SG/SH/SJ 1
PM302-TK/TL/TM2
1

20120 MHz

Graphics

Available
TURBOChannel
Slots

RZ25 = 426 MB
RX26 = 2.88 MB
RRD42 = 600 MB

8-plane
8-plane
HX 8-plane

2
2
1

RZ25, RX26

8-plane
8-plane
8-plane
8-plane
HX 8-plane
PXG+ 8-plane
TX 24-plane
DECvideo/PIP
8-plane
8-plane
HX 8-plane
PXG+ 8-plane

2
2
2
2
1
0
1

8-plane
8-plane
8-plane

2
2
2

2
2
1
0

RZ25, RX26
RZ25, RX26
RZ25, RX26
RZ25, RRD42 3

RZ25, RX26

Custom Systems (Require monitor and video cable from Step 3)
PM310-SX4
PM310-AX4
PM310-FX4

20/20 MHz
25125 MHz
33/33 MHz

8 MB
8 MB
8 MB

Required
Required
Required

Notes:
1. Requires SCSI cable (BC09D-xx, system box to expansion box) for external storage.
2. Includes Xmedia Runtime License.
3. RRD42 in external expansion box
4. Custom System (PM310-SX,AX,FX) includes 120-V power cord and U.S. keyboard. Systems ordered with country-specific power cord and
keyboard ship with international kit.

2.6 DECsystems

Personal DECstation 5000 Models 20, 25, and 33
Step 2-Power Cords and KeybOards (not required for 120-V systems)
Select a power cord and keyboard for all 240-V systems. Power cords connect system to wall socket.

Power Cord
Included
BN19W-2E
BN19K-2E
BN19K-2E
BN19W-2E
BN19W-2E
BN19W-2E
BN19W-2E
BN19U-2E
BN19Z-2E
BN19W-2E
BN19W-2E
BN19W-2E
BN19W-2E
BN19E-2E
BN19E-2E
BN19A-2E
BN19H-2E
BN19P-1K
BN19P-1K

and

Keyboard

Country

Language

Included
LK501-AG
LK501-AB
LK501-AD
LK501-AF
LK501-AP
LK501-AG
LK501-AH
LK501-AT
LK501-AI
LK501-AN
LK501-AV
LK501-AS
LK501-AM
LK501-AK
LK501-AL
LK501-AA
LK501-AA
LK501-AQ
LK501-AC
LK501-AJ
LK501-BH
LK501-BU
LK501-BW

U.S.
Austria
Belgium
Denmark
Finland
France
Germany
Holland
Israel
Italy
Norway
Portugal
Spain
Sweden
Switzerland
Switzerland
U.K./Ireland
Australia/NZ
U.S./Canada
Canada
Japan
Greece
Turkey
Turkey

English
German/Austrian
Flemish
Danish
Suomi
French
German/Austrian
Dutch
Hebrew
Italian
Norwegian
Portuguese
Spanish
Swedish
French
German
English
English
· English
French
Japanese
Greek
Turkish Q layout
Turkish F layout

ff\ .
ff\

-0

i
~
~

Step 3-Monitor and Video Cable (required for Custom Systems)
Select monitor and video cable for use with Personal DECstation base graphics. Monitors require a video cable; select 3-foot
or 10-foot cable.

VRM17-AA/A4
VRC16-CA/C4

Monitor

Resolution/Refresh Rate

17-inch Monochrome
16-inch Color

1024 x 768 72 Hz
1024 x 768 72 Hz

Video Cable
10-foot
17 -02878-01
BC27M-03
BC29G-09
BC29H-2E

3-foot

Step 3a-TURBOchannel Graphics Options (Factory/Field lnstalle<I)
To configure a high-resolution graphics system, select a TURBOchannel graphics option. Graphics options are listed with
compatible monitors.
· Factory-installed PXG, PXG+ or PXGTurbo+ graphics options order with Custom Systems include DEC PHIGS Runtime
license and The Personal Visualizer (TPV) license. A Z-Buffer is recommended for all systems running TPV.
· Field-installable PXG, PXG+ and PXGTurbo+ graphics options do not include DEC PHIGS Runtime License and The
Personal Visualizer (TPV) license; they must be ordered separately.
· The Personal DECstation only supports the PXGTurbo+ graphics option in the TURBOchannel Extender (TcE) box; see
DECstation 5000 Model 240 options.
• Graphics options include 10-foot (3-meter) video cable. The HX option includes a color cable. To run HX grayscale
graphics on a monochrome monitor, order 10-foot grayscale monitor cable (17-02878-01).
· TX frame buffer supports an optional DECvideo/Picture-in-Picture (PIP) option card; see TURBOchannel Multimedia
options.

DECsystems

2.7

Personal DECstation 5000 Models 20, 25, and 33
Step 3a-TURBOchannel Graphics Options (Factory/Field Installed) (umtinued)
Order Number
Factory/Field Installed

Compatible
Monitors

TURBOchannel
Slots Required

Graphics Options

17" M VRM17 -ANA4
19" M VR319-DA/D4

72
72

8-plane color/ grayscale 2D Smart Frame
1280 x 1024, 72 Hz
1280 x 1024, 66 Hz

17" M
19" M
16" c
19" c
19 " c
16" c

VRM17 -ANA4
VR319-DA/D4
VRT16-HA/H4
VRT19-HA/ H4
VR320-DA/D4
VRTl 6-DA/D4

72
72
72
72
72
66

8-plane color/grayscale 2D Smart Frame
1280 x 1024, 72 Hz
1024 x 768, 72 Hz

17" M VRM17 -ANA4
16" c VRC16-CA/C4

72
72

PMAGB-JA/JB

24-plane true color
frame buffer non-accelerated
1280 x 1024, 72 Hz

16" c
19" c
19" c

VRT16-HA/H4
VRT19-HA/H4
VR320-DA/D4

72
72
72

PMAGB-DA/DB

PXG+

8-plane 3D, low- to mid-range
1280 x 1024, 72 Hz

·:::

=
u

PMAGB-EA/EB

PXG+

24-plane 3D, Z-Buffer, mid-range
1280 x 1024, 72 Hz

i;.:i

PMAGB•FA/FB

PXG
Turbo+

96-plane 3D, high performance
1280 x 1024 , 72 Hz

PMAG-JAIJB

24-plane true color
frame buffer non-accelerated
1280 x 1024, 66 Hz

16" c
19 " c
19" c

VRT16-DA/D4
VRTl 9-DA/D3 / D4
VR320-CA/C4

66
66
66

PMAG-DA/DB

PXG

8-plane 3D, entry level
1280 x 1024, 66 Hz

PMAGB-DC/DD

PXG+

8-plane 3D, low- to mid-range
1280 x 1024, 66 Hz

PMAGB-EC/ED

PXG+

24-plane 3D, mid-range
1280 x 1024 , 66 Hz

PMAG-GB

8- to 24-plane upgrade
Requires Digital Services installation

PMAG-HA

24-bit Z-Buffer option
for PXG, PXG+ and PXGTurbo+ systems

PMAG-AA/AB

1-plane monochrome
1280 x 1024, 72 Hz

PMAGB-BA/BB

PMAGB-BE/BF

l'r\
l'r\

""O

=
""0

""
fll

~
""O
0

::e

8
II'\

c
0

.....
VJ

"';

s
e
~

Monitor key:

xNx4: xA = 120-V/240-V Northern H emisphere, x4 = 240-V Southern Hemisphere.
xN x3/x4: xA = 120-V Northern Hemisphere, x3 = 240-V N orthern Hemisphere,
x4 = 240-V Southern Hemisphere

Step 4-Storage (Factory/Field Installed)
·A single RZ23L or RZ24L disk drive is recommended as data/swap device only.
·One RZ25 disk (426 Mbytes) is recommended for a standalone system.
·Maximum of seven SCSI devices are supported on the b ase SCSI controller. Select SCSI TURBOchannel option (PMAZ-AA)
if more are required.
• Model 25 supports one internal SCSI device with three external expansion b oxes.

Step 4a-Intemal Drives (Factory/Field Installed)
M o d els 20 and 25 have two internal storage cavities.

Slot 1-3.5-inch FDI diskette drive RX26
Slot 2-3.5-inch SCSI hard disk, RZ23L, RZ24L; or RZ25
Select maximum of one removable media device

RX26-FP/FN

2.8

DECsystems

....

-............_.~.._._~--~~----~~~--~~-------'

2.88-Mbyte 3.5-inch internal diskette drive

~~m----

Personal DECstation 5000 Models 20, 25, and 33
Step 4a-Interual Drives (Factory/Field Installed) (<3ontin11,id)
Select maximum of one 3.5-inch half-height disk drive. Factory-installed variants (RZ25-FM) include Factory-Installed
Software (FIS).

RZ23L-FM/FN
RZ24L-FM/FN
RZ25-FM/FN

121 -Mbyte internal disk drive
245-Mbyte internal disk drive
426-Mbyte internal disk drive

To embed a DECstation 2100 or 3100 3.5-inch SCSI disk drive, order hard drive mounting bracket kit.

RZ2X-FN

RZ2X mounting drive bracket kit and documentation

Step 4b-Extemal Drives
Note: Order SCSI cable (BC09D-xx, small connector to large connector) if external storage is to be added to the following
systems: PM300-SA/SB/ SC, -SG/ SH/ SJ, -AA!AB/AC, -AG! AHiAJ, -FAIFBIFC , -FGIFHIFJ. All other systems include SCSI
cable.
Each SZ12, TLZ06, TKZ08, and RRD42 expansion device includes a SCSI cable. Note: External expansion boxes for 240-V
systems require a country-specific power cord.

SCSI TURBOchannel Option Card
Base SCSI controller supports seven SCSI devices; maximum of three expansion boxes with one internal device. SCSI
TURBOchannel option card supports six additional external SCSI devices in three dual-drive expansion boxes.

PMAZ-AA/AB

SCSI TURBOchannel option card

Single-Drive Expansion Boxes
TLZ06-FA
TKZ08-AA
RRD42-FA

4.0-Gbyte 4-mm digital audio tape (DAT)
2.2-Gbyte 8-mm tape
600-Mbyte compact disc drive

Expansion Boxes (SZ03, SZ12 and SZ16)
For expansion box information see Chapter 7, Storage Devices.

TURBOchannel Extender (TcE) Expansion Box
See DECstation 5000 Model 240 Step 4a.

Step 4c-Workstand
H9855-AA

Horizontal workstand. Holds one Personal DECstation system box with three SZ12 expansion boxes.
Four mounting wheels included.

Step 5-Memory
System includes 8 Mbytes of memory embedded on system board. Additional memory may be added in 4-Mbyte or
16-Mbyte memory modules. Four memory slots total.

MSOl-AA
MSOl-CA

4-Mbyte parity (2 x 2-Mbyte 1-Mbit DRAM), maximum 16 Mbytes
16-Mbyte parity (2 x 8-Mbyte 4-Mbit DRAM), maximum 40 Mbytes

Note: MSOl -AA modules cannot be mixed with MSOl-CA modules. To upgrade from 12 or 16 Mbytes to 24 or 40 Mbytes
of memory, MSOl -AA SIMMs must be removed and replaced with MSOl-CA SIMMs. Digital's DECdirect accepts the return
of MSO 1-AA SIMMs for credit toward MSO 1-CA SIMMs.

DECsystems

2.9

Personal DECstation 5000 Models 20, 25 , and 33
Step 6-Multi-screen TURBOchannel Graphics Options (Factory/Field Installed)
To build a multi-screen system, add appropriate TURBOchannel graphics card and select compatible monitors. Each
additional monitor requires a country-specific power cord from Step 2. Although the Personal DECstation 5000 offers two
TURBOchannel slots, users can operate three monitors per system by using base graphics with PMAGB-BAIBB or
PMAGB-BE/BF HX option only.
.
• Add a graphics card for each additional monitor. Two or three monitors are supported per system, provided there are free
TURBOchannel slots. Supported multi-screen configurations are:
- Personal DECstation base graphics with one or two HX option cards, (PMAGB-BA/BB or PMAGB-BE/BF) with two or
three monitors
- Two MX option cards with two monitors
- Two TX option cards with two monitors
· Multi-screen systems expand monitor area. They are single-user systems, with one keyboard and one mouse.
• Monitor cables are included with each graphics option. The HX option includes a color cable. To run HX grayscale
graphics on a monochrome monitor, order 10-foot grayscale monitor cable (17-02878-01) for each monitor.
Order Number
Factory/Field Installed

Graphics Options

TURBOchannel
Slots Required

Compatible
Monitors

PMAG-AA/AB

1-plane monochrome
1280 x 1024, 72 Hz

17" M VRM17-AAIA4
19" M VR319-DA/D4

PMAGB-BA/BB

8-plane color/grayscale 2D Smart Frame
1280 x 1024, 72 Hz
1280 x 1024, 66 Hz

17" M
19" M
16" c
19" c
19" c
16" c

VRM17-AAIA4
VR319-DAID4
VRT16-HA/H4
VRT19-HA/H4
VR320-DA/D4
VRT16-DA/D4

72
72
72
72

72
72
72
66

PMAGB-BE/BF

8-plane color/ grayscale 2D Smart Frame
1280 x 1024, 72 Hz
1024 x 768, 72 Hz

17" M VRM17-AAIA4
16" c VRC16-CA/C4

72
72

PMAGB-JA/JB

24-plane true color
frame buffer non-accelerated
1280 x 1024, 72 Hz

16" c
19" c
19" c

VRT16-HAIH4
VRT19-HA/H4
VR320-DA/D4

72
72
72

PMAG-JA/JB

24-plane true color
frame buffer non-accelerated
1280' x 1024, 66 Hz

16" c
19 " c
19" c

VRT16-DA/D4
VRT19-DA/D3/D4
VR320-CA/C4

66
66
66

Step 7-TURBOchannel Multimedia Options (Factory/Field Installed)
DECvideo/PIP (Picture-in-Picture)-Does not require TURBOchannel slot
Option card for TX 24-plane color frame buffer, attaches to TX TURBOchannel graphic card
· Provides live NTSC, PAL or SECAM full-motion "video in a window"
· · Includes XMedia Tools Runtime Kit License

AVlOU-AA/DA

DECvideo/Picture-in-Picture option card for TX graphic option

Step 8-TURBOchannel Communications Options (Factory/Field Installed)
-·---'
'
Each option requires one· TURBOchannel slot

PMAD-AA/AB
DEFZA-AA
DEFZA-CA

2.10

DECsystems

Thick wire Ethernet TURBOchannel option card
DEC FDDicontroller 700 (fib er optic)
DEC FDDicontroller 700C (copper)

Personal DECstation 5000 Models 20, 25, and 33
Step 9- Networking Adapters and Miscellaneous Cables
Base system module includes a thick wire Ethernet connector. Two adapters are available: ThinWire or lOBaseT (Twisted
Pair).

H3350-AA
DESTA-BA

lOBaseT (Twisted Pair) Ethernet adapter
Thin Wire Ethernet station adapter

Select desired length of thick wire to connect ThinWire or lObaseT adapter to base system. Do not attach adapter directly
to base system module.
Thick wire 802.3/Ethernet cable (xx = 02/ 05 refers to length in meters)
Thick wire transceiver cable with straight connector-PVC (xx = 05/10/20/40 refers to length in
meters)
Thick wire transceiver cable with straight connector-Teflon (xx = 05/ 10/20/ 40 refers to length in
meters)

BNE4C-xx
BNE3H-xx
BNEJL-xx

Right-angle Ethernet cables are not supported.
ThinWire Ethernet cable (xx = 06/ 15/ 30 refers to length in feet)

BC16M-xx

See Chapter 6, Networks, Communications, and Cables, for more information.

BC19J-1E

18-inch (45.7-cm) SCSI cable, large connector to large connector
(included with each expansion device)
3-foot (0.9-m) SCSI cable, large connector to large connector
6-foot (1.8-m) SCSI cable, large connector to large connector
3-foot (0.9-m) SCSI cable, small connector to large connector (system box to expansion box)
6-foot (1.8-m) SCSI cable, small connector to large connector; required for Packaged Systems
PM300-SA/SB/SC, -SG/SH/SJ, -AA!AB!AC, -AG/AH/AJ, -FAIFBIFC, -FGIFHIFJ; all other systems
include a BC09D-06 SCSI cable.

BC19J-03
BC19J-06
BC09D-03
BC09D-06

Step 10-Qptiorial Input Devices
Lighted Programmable Function Keyboard (LPFK) and Programmable Function Dials (PFD) can be ordered as a pair or
separately. LPFK and PFD packages listed below include a Peripheral Control Module (PCM) which provides multiplexing
of both LPFK and PFD into a single EIA-232 port. Each package includes a power supply, cables, and user documentation.

VSXlO-AA/A3
VSX20-AA/A3
VSX30-AA/A3

Combination LPFK and PFD package, 120 V/240 V
LPFK package, 120 V/240 V
PFD package, 120 V/240 V

Models 20, 25, and 33 do not support the tablet at this time.

Step 11. Printers
Refer to Chapter 8, Terminals and Printers, for ordering information.

Step 12« 'CPU Daughter 'Card Upgrade

Upgrade includes the required upgrade license (QL-VV lAB-TA)

KN02-CC
KN02-DC

25-MHz CPU Upgrade for Personal DECstation 5000 Model 20
33-MHz CPU Upgrade for Personal DECstation 5000 Models 20 and 25

Step 13· Software
ULTRIX V4.2a is required. An ULTRIX media and documentation kit is recommended for the first system on site. ULTRIX
kits i~1clude documentation, ULTRIX single-user kit, DECwindows, and OSF/Motif software on tape or compact disc.

QA-VV1AA-H5
QA-VV1AA-H8

ULTRIX workstation media (TK50) and documentation kit
ULTRIX workstation media (CD-ROM) and documentation kit

DECsystems

2.11

Personal DECstation 5000 Models 20, 25, and 33

DEC C license is included with ULTRIX V4.2a; order media and documentation separately.

QA-YSJAA-H5
QA-YSJAA-GZ

DEC C for RISC ULTRIX media (TK50)
DEC C for RISC ULTRIX documentation

DEC PHIGS Runtime license is included with Custom Systems ordered with factory-installed PXG, PXG+ and PXGTurbo+
graphics options. Field-installable PXG, PXG+ and PXGTurbo+ graphics options do not include DEC PHIGS Runtime
license; order it separately. Order media and documentation kit separately.

QL-VW7AA-AA
QL-VW6AA-AA

DEC PHIGS Runtime license
DEC PHIGS Development license

QA-VW7 AA-H5
QA-VW6AA-H5

DEC PHIGS Runtime media (TK50) and documentation kit
DEC PHIGS Development media (TK50) and documentation kit

The Personal Visualizer (TPV) license is included with Custom Systems ordered with factory-installed PXG, .PXG+ and
PXGTurbo+ graphics options. Field-installable PXG, PXG+ and PXGTurbo+ graphics options do not include The Personal
Visualizer (TPV) license; order it separately. A Z-Buffer is recommended for all systems running TPV. Order media and
documentation kit separately.

QL-GXZA8-AA
QA-GXZAA-H5
QA-GXZAA-GZ

The Personal Visualizer (TPV) license
TPV media (TK50) and documentation kit
TPV documentation only

The Xmedia Runtime License is included with the Personal DECstation 5000 Model 25 standalone systems; see notes for
Packaged Systems. Order media and documentation separately. All other systems require the Xmedia Runtime License and
software to operate audio applications .. A multimedia developds kit is also available.

QP-LBDAA-01
QB-MB5AA-AA
QA-MB4AA-H5
QB-XUVAA-AA
QB-XUWAA-AA

Xmedia Tools Runtime License (audio/video)
Xmedia Tools Runtime License (audio/video) and software on TK50
Xmedia tools for RISC ULTRIX on TK50
Xmedia tools full developds kit on CD-ROM
Xmedia tools full developer's kit (TK50 and CD-ROM)

The following server kit is required if serving VAX systems.

QA-YL5AA-H5
QA-YL5AA-H8
QA-YL5AA-HM

ULTRIX workstation server media (TK50) and documentation kit
ULTRIX workstation server media (CD-ROM) and documentation kit
ULTRIX workstation server media (magtape) and documentation kit

DECnet ULTRIX license must be purchased separately. DECnet media included in ULTRIX V4.2a CD-ROM media kit, but
must be ordered separately if ULTRIX V4.2a TK50 media kit is ordered.
QL-YT9AA-AA
QA-YT9AA-H5
QA-YT9AA-GZ

DECnet-ULTRIX/RISC license
DECnet-ULTRIX/RISC media (TK50)
DECnet-ULTRIX/RISC documentation

FORTRAN
QL-VV6AA-AA
QL-VV7 AA-AA

FORTRAN for RISC ULTRIX license
FORTRAN for RISC ULTRIX educational license

QA-VV6AA-H5
QA-VV6AA-H8

FORTRAN for RISC ULTRIX media (TK50)
FORTRAN for RISC ULTRIX media (CD-ROM)

Encryption
QL-VV3A8-BA
QA-VV3AA-H5
QA-VV3AA-H8

2.12

DECsystems

RISC ULTRIX encryption license
ULTRIX encryption media (TK50) and documentation
ULTRIX encryption media (CD-ROM) and documentation

Personal DECstation 5000 Models 20, 25, an~ 33
Step 13-SoftWare (Continued)
DEC So&PC allows RISC ULTRIX systems to run MS-DOS programs with no added hardware. DEC SoftPC runs on both
workstations and timesharing systems under ULTRIX.
Customers may test run SoftPC on the Personal DECstation. Order DEC SoftPC loaner kit (QL-YP7A9-xx); loaner kits are
available for up to one year.

QL-YP7AC-3B
QA-YP7AA-H5
QA-YP7AA-HM
QA-YP7AA-GZ

DEC SoftPC for RISC ULTRIX single-user license
DEC SoftPC for RISC ULTRIX media (TK50)
DEC SoftPC for RISC ULTRIX media (magtape)
DEC SoftPC for RISC UL TRIX documentation

A 2-user license (QL-VVlAA-BC) is included with all systems. This only needs to be purchased in special circumstances.
To increase the maximum number of users, select the appropriate license upgrades below.

QL-VV1A8-B5
QL-VV1A8-B6
QL-VV1A8-BS
QL-VV1A8-BT
QL-VV1A8-B9

3- to 8-user upgrade license
9- to 16-user upgrade license
17- to 32-user upgrade license
33- to 64-user upgrade license
65- to unlimited-user upgrade license

See DECstation 5000 specifications on page 2.34 for power requirements, operating environment and physical characteristics
information.

DECsystems

2.13

DECstation 5000 Models 125 and 133

Product Description

The DECstation 5000/100 Series of workstations are UNIX-based RISC systems
featuring the MIPS R3000A CPU and R3010 FPU chipset. These systems place the
CPU/FPU chipset on a 3- x 5-inch (7.6- x 12.7-cm) removable daughter card
that permits upgrading the processing power easily. The R4000 CPU daughter
card will be available at a later date. Models 125 and 133 offer advanced processing power, graphics power, and expandability in a mid-range workstation.
More than 2800 ULTRIX applications are available for the DECstation family.
The DECstation 5000/100 Series offers two systems: Model 125 running at 25
MHz (19.7 SPECmarks) and Model 133 running at 33 MHz (25.3 SPECmarks).
Memory modules are available in 4 and 16 Mbytes for system totals of 32 and
128 Mbytes respectively.
Internal storage is provided by three storage cavities. Slot 1 is reserved for one
removable media device, and slots 2 and 3 support hard disk drives. The
600-Mbyte compact disc reader enables access to online ULTRIX documentation,
CD-based binary distribution, and applications from CD-ROM.
Six graphics subsystems are supported via the TURBOchannel I/O bus, providing
a range of solutions from simple 2D to complex 3D graphics, and 24-plane true
color. Non-accelerated options and multi-screen displays offer increased end-user
productivity by providing two or three simultaneous displays for either color or
high-resolution monochrome.

2.14

DECsystems

DECstation 5000 Models 125 and 133
Product Description (Continued)

Two TURBOchannel multimedia options are available: DECvideo/PIP (Picture-inPicture) video, an option card to the TX 24-plane color frame buffer, provides
live NTSC, PAL or SECAM full-motion "video in a window. " Video windows can
be scaled from full size to icon size, and allow individual frames to be grabbed
for use in documents or presentations. DECaudio provides telephone-grade audio
in and out capabilities. The hardware is ready to support telephony in the U.S.
and Canada, CD-quality audio and ISDN at V2 of the Xmedia tools software.
DECaudio consists of a TURBOchannel board which has the telephone line and
set interface, and an external distribution box with: speaker, amplification, stereo
volume/balance control, microphone, headphone and handset jacks; microphone
pre-amplification, telephone-grade (8-bit, 8-kHz sampling) line in and out,
CD-quality (stereo 16-bit, 44.1 -kHz sampling) audio out, ISDN S interface (certification country-specific) .
The DECstation 5000/ 100 Series supports applications ranging from financial
trading, and technical publishing to computer-aided software engineering (CASE),
mechanical computer-aided design (CAD), electrical computer-aided design
(ECAD), scientific modeling, mechanical modeling, scientific visualization, and
graphics art design.

DECsystems

2.15

DECstation 5000 Models 125 and 133

Select system. 120-V Packaged Systems include power cord and U.S. keyboard; 120-V Custom Systems include power cord ;
U.S. keyboard must be ordered separately. 240-V Packaged and Custom Systems require country-specific power cord and
keyb oard. Order software from Step 13, if necessary.
No additions or substitutions can be made to a Packaged System. Field-installable options ship separately for installation at
customer site. Select factory-installed options for Custom Systems.
DECstation 5000 Models 125 and 133 systems include
• Base module with 25-MHz or 33-MHz CPU daughter card
· TURBOchannel I/O interconnect-three slots total
· Memory (8 with 1-Mbit DRAM or 16 Mbytes with 4-Mbit DRAM)
• Thick wire Ethernet controller on base system module
· Synchronous SCSI controller on base system module
• Three-button mouse
· Two EIA-232 serial communication (synchronous/asynchronous) ports
• 3-meter (10-foot) video cable
• 3-meter (10-foot) keyboard/mouse cable
• 1.8-meter (6-foot) SCSI cable (50-pin small connector to 50-pin large connector)
· 0.6-meter (2-foot) SCSI cable (50-pin small connector to 50-pin small connector)
· 1.8-meter (6-foot) power cord (wall socket to system box, 120-V systems only)
• 0.9-meter (3-foot) convenience power cord (monitor to system box)
·Universal power supply that automatically adjusts to 88-132 Vac or 176-264 Vac
· ULTRIX Workstation Software, 2-user base license, DEC C and OSF/Motif
• English-language user documentation
Note: Packaged Systems with RZ25 disk and Custom Systems ordered with factory-installed RZ25 variant (-FM) include
ULTRIX Factory-Installed Software (FIS).
Packaged Systems

Order Number
120 V/240 V/S.H.
PM326-HG/HWHJ
PM326-RG/RWRJ 1
PM327 -SG/SWSJ 2
PM327-TG/TWTJ 2
PM327-SD/SE/SF 2
PM327-TD/TE/ TF 2
PM327-SN/SP/SR 2
PM327-TN/TP/TR 2
PM323-SD/SE/SF 2

Model/CPU

Memory

Monitor
M =Mono
C =Color

125/25 MHz
133/33 MHz
133/33 MHz
133/33 MHz
133/33 MHz
133/33 MHz
133/33 MHz
133/33 MHz
133/ 33 MHz

8 MB
8 MB
16 MB
16 MB
16 MB
16 MB
16 MB
16 MB
16 MB

19" M VR319
19 " M VR319
19" M VR319
19" M VR319
16" C VRT16
16" C VRT16
19" C VRT19
19" C VRT19
16" C VRT16

Graphics

MX 1-plane

Available
TURBOChannel
Slots

MX 1-plane
HX 8-plane
HX 8-plane
HX 8-plane
HX 8-plane
HX 8-plane
HX 8-plane
PXG 3 8-plane/3D

Two
Two
Two
Two
Two
Two
Two
Two
One

Required
Required
Required
Required

Three
Three
Three
Three

RZ25 = 426 MB

426 MB
426 MB
426 MB

Custom Systems (Requires graphic option and monitor from Step 3)
PM339-HY/HZ 1
PM339-RY/RZ 1
PM339-JY/JZ 2
PM339-SY/SZ 2

125/ 25 MHz
133/ 33 MHz
125/ 25 MHz
133/33 MHz

8 MB
8 MB
16 MB
16 MB

Required
Required
Required
Required

Notes:
1. 1-Mbit DRAM memory. Memory may be added in 4-MB increments (MSOl-AA) only
2. 4-Mbit DRAM memory. Memory may be added in 16-MB increments (MSOl-CA) only
3. System includes DEC PHIGS Runtime license and The Personal Visualizer (TPV) license. AZ-Buffer is recommended for all systems
running TPV.

2.16

DECsystems

DECstation 5000 Models 125 and 133
Step 2-Power Cords and Keyboards
120-V Packaged Systems include power cord and U.S. keyboard.
Select U.S. keyboard for 120-V Custom Systems. Select power cord and keyboard for all 240-V systems. Power cords
connect system to wall socket.
Note: U.S. Keyboard is required for 120-V Custom Systems.
Power Cord

Keyboard

Country

Language

Included
BN19W-2E
BN19K-2E
BN19K-2E
BN19W-2E
BN19W-2E
BN19W-2E
BN19W-2E
BN19U-2E

and

LK401-AA
LK401-AG
LK401-AB
LK401 -AD
LK401-AF
LK401-AP
LK401-AG
LK401-AH
LK401-AT

BN19Z-2E

LK401-AI

BN19W-2E
BN19W-2E
BN19W-2E
BN19W-2E
BN19E-2E
BN19E-2E
BN19A-2E
BN19H-2E
BN19P-1K
BN19P-1K

LK401-AN
LK401-AV
LK401-AS
LK401-AM
LK401-AK
LK401-AL
LK401 -AA
LK401-AA
LK401 -AA
LK401-AC

U.S.
Austria
Belgium
Denmark
Finland
France
German
Holland
Israel
Italy
Norway
Portugal
Spain
Sweden
Switzerland
Switzerland
U.K./Ireland
Australia/New Zealand
U.S./Canada
Canada

English
German/Austrian
Flemish
Danish
Suomi
French
German
Dutch
Hebrew
Italian
Norwegian
Portuguese
Spanish
Swedish
French
German
English
English
English
French

-1""""
""~
fl.I

"'il

· "g

::a

§
II'\

"i....
(I.)

u~
Q

Step 3-TURBOchannel Graphics Options (Factory/Field Installed)
Custom Systems require 'graphics option and monitor; select factory-installed variant.
·Factory-installed PXG, PXG+ or PXGTurbo+ graphics options ordered with Custom Systems include DEC PHIGS Runtime
license and The Personal Visualizer (TPV) license. A Z-Buffer is recommended for all systems running TPV.
·Field-installable PXG, PXG+ or PXGTurbo+ graphics options do not include DEC PHIGS Runtime license and The
Personal Visualizer (TPV) license. They must be ordered separately.
• Graphics options include 10-foot (3-meter) video cable. The HX option includes a color cable. To run HX grayscale
graphics on a monochrome monitor, order 10-foot grayscale monitor cable (17-02878-01)
• TX frame buffer supports an optional DECvideo/Picture-in-Picture (PIP) option card; see TURBOchannel Multimedia
options.
Order Number
Factory/Field Installed
PMAG-AA/AB
MX

Graphics Options
1-plane monochrome
1280 x 1024, 72 Hz

Compatible
Monitors

TURBOchannel
Slots Required

19" M VR319-DAID4

PMAGB-BA/BB

8-plane color/grayscale 2D Smart Frame
1280 x 1024, 72 Hz

19" M VR319-DA/D4
16" c VRT16-HA/H4
19" c VRT19-HA/H4

72
72
72

PMAGB-JA/JB

24-plane true color
frame buffer non-accelerated
1280 x 1024, 72 Hz

16" c
19" c
19" c

72
72
72

PMAGB-DA/DB

PXG+

8-plane 3D, low- to mid-range
1280 x 1024, 72 Hz

PMAGB-EA/EB

PXG+

24 -plane 3D, Z-Buffer, mid-range
1280 x 1024, 72 Hz

PMAGB-FA/FB

PXG
Turbo+

96-plane 3D, high performance
1280 x 1024, 72 Hz

VRT16-HA/H4
VRT19-HA/H4
VR320-DA/D4

DECsystems 2.17

DECstation 5000 Models 125 and 133
Step 3-TURBOchannel Graphics Options (Factory/Field Installed) . (Continued)
Order Number
Factory/Field Installed
PMAG-JA/JB

24-plane true color
frame buffer non-accelerated
1280 x 1024, 66 Hz

PMAG-DA/DB

PXG

8-plane 3D, entry level
1280 x 1024, 66 Hz

PMAGB-DC/DD

PXG+

8-plane 3D, low- to mid-range
1280 x 1024, 66 Hz

PMAGB-EC/ED

PXG+

24-plane 3D, mid-range
1280 x 1024, 66 Hz

PMAGB-BC/BD

8-plane color/ grayscale 2D Smart Frame
1280 x 1024, 72 Hz
1024 x 864, 60 Hz

PMAG-GB

8- to 24-plane upgrade
Requires Digital Services installation

PMAG-HA

24-bit Z-Buffer option
for PXG+ and PXGTurbo+ systems

Monitor key:

Compatible
Monitors

VRT16-DAID4
VRT19-DA/D3/ D4
VR320-CA/C4

66
66
66

19" M VR262-AA/ A3/A4
16" c VR297-DAID3/D4
19" c VR299-DA/D3/ D4

60
60
60

TURBOchannel
Slots Required

Graphics Options

16" c
19" c
19" c

xA/x4: xA = 120-V/240-V Northern Hemisphere, x4 = 240-V Southern Hemisphere.
xA/x3/x4: xA = 120-V Northern Hemisphere, x3 = 240-V Northern Hemisphere,
x4 = 240-V Southern Hemisphere

·A single RZ23L or RZ24L, disk drive is recommended as data/swap device only.
·Recommended configurations for standalone systems are: One RZ25, or two RZ24Ls or one RZ23L and one RZ24L.
·Maximum seven SCSI devices are supported on the base SCSI controller. Select SCSI TURBOchannel option (PMAZ-AA) if
more are required.

Step 4a-lnternal Drives (Factory/Field Installed)
---------------~-·-~~..__.----~---~------------~-----~--"

Models 125 and 133 systems have three internal storage cavities.
Slot I-Removable media, RX23 or RRD42 or TZKlO or TLZ06
Slot 2-3.5-inch disk, RZ23L, RZ24L or RZ25
Slot 3-3.5-inch disk, RZ23L, RZ24L or RZ25
Select maximum of one removable media device.
RX23-FM/FL
RRD42-FM/FL
TLZ06-FM/FL
TZKlO-FM/FL

1.4-Mbyte 3.5-inch internal diskette drive
600-Mbyte 5.25-inch compact disc drive
4.0-Gbyte digital audio tape (DAT)
525-Mbyte 5.25-inch internal quarter inch cartridge (QIC) tape drive

Select maximum of two 3.5-inch half-height disk drives. Factory-installed variants (RZ25-FM) include Factory-Installed
Software (FIS).
RZ23L-FM/FL
RZ24L-FM/FL
RZ25-FM/FL

121-Mbyte 3.5-inch internal disk drive
245-Mbyte 3.5-inch internal disk drive
426-Mbyte 3.5-inch internal disk drive

Step 4b-External Driva
Each SZ12, TLZ06, TKZ08, and RRD42 expansion device includes a SCSI cable. Note: External expansion boxes for 240-V
systems require a country-specific power cord.
SCSI TURBOchannel Option Card
Base SCSI controller supports seven SCSI devices; maximum of three expansion boxes with one internal device. SCSI
TURBOchannel option card supports six additional external SCSI devices in three dual-drive expansion boxes.
PMAZ-AAIAB

2.18

DECsystems

SCSI TURBOchannel option card

DECstation 5000 Models 125 and 133

Single-Drive Expansion Boxes

TLZ06-FA
TKZ08-AA
RRD42-FA

4.0-Gbyte 4-mm digital audio tape (DAT)
2.2-Gbyte 8-mm tape
600-Mbyte compact disc drive

Expansion Boxes (SZOJ, SZ12 and SZ16)

For expansion box information see Chapter 7, Storage Devices.
TURBOchannel Extender (TcE) Expansion Box

See DECstation 5000 Model 240 Step 4a.
--~~~~~----~~---~~~~~~~~~~~~~~--~~~~

Step 4c-Workstand
H9855-AA

Horizontal workstand. Holds one DECstation 5000 system box and three SZ12 expansion boxes.
Four mounting wheels included.

Additional memory may be added in 4-Mbyte or 16-Mbyte memory modules. Eight memory slots total.

MSOl-AA
MSOl-CA

4-Mbyte parity (2 x 2-Mbyte 1-Mbit DRAM), maximum 32 Mbytes
16-Mbyte parity (2 x 8-Mbyte 4-Mbit DRAM), maximum 128 Mbytes

Note: MSOl-AA modules cannot be mixed with MSOl-CA modules.

~tep 6-::-Multi-Scres,p 11JRBOcliannel Grapfalcs Options (Fact~lY/Fielc! Installed)
_......____
To build a multi-screen system, add appropriate TURBOchannel graphics cards and select compatible monitors. Each
additional monitor requires a country-specific power cord from Step 2.
• Add a graphics card for each additional monitor. Two or three monitors are supported per system, provided there are free
TURBOchannel slots. Supported multi-screen configurations are:
- Maximum three MX option cards with three monitors
- Maximum three HX option cards with three monitors
- Maximum three TX option cards with three monitors
· Multi-screen systems expand monitor area. They are single-user systems, with one keyboard and one mouse.
• Monitor cable included with each graphics option. The HX option includes a color cable. To run HX grayscale graphics
on a monochrome monitor, order 10-foot grayscale monitor cable (17-02878-01) for each monitor.

Order Number
Factory/Field Installed
PMAG-AA/AB
MX
PMAGB-BA/BB

PMAGB-JA/JB

PMAG-JA/JB

PMAGB-BC/BD

Graphics Options
1-plane monochrome
1280 x 1024 72 Hz
8-plane color/grayscale
2D Smart Frame
1280 x 1024, 72 Hz

TURBO channel
Slots Required
1

Monitor key:

19" M
16"
19"
19"
16"
16"
19"
19"
16"
19"
19"
19" M
16"
19"

VR319-DA/D4

c VRT16-HA/H4
c VRT19-HA/H4
c VR320-DAID4
c VRT16-DA/D4
c VRT16-HA/H4
c VRT19-HA/H4
c VR320-DA/D4
c VRT16-DAID4
c VRTl 9-DAID3/D4
c VR320-CA/C4

1280 x 1024, 66 Hz
24-plane true color
frame buffer non-accelerated
1280 x 1024, 72 Hz
24-plane true color
frame buffer non-accelerated
1280 x 1024, 66 Hz
8-plane color/grayscale
2D Smart Frame
1280 x 1024, 72 Hz
1024 x 864, 60 Hz

Compatible
Monitors
19" M VR.319-DAID4

VR262-AAI A3/ A4

c VR297-DA/D3/D4
c VR299-DA/D3/D4

Hz
72
72
72
72
72
66
72
72
72
66
66
66
60
60
60

xNx4: xA = 120 V/240 V Northern Hemisphere, x4 = 240 V Southern Hemisphere.
xNx3/x4: xA = 120 V Northern Hemisphere, x3 = 240 V Northern Hemisphere,
x4 = 240 V Southern Hemisphere

DECsystems 2.19

DECstation 5000 Models 125 and 133

DECvideo/PIP (Picture-in-Picture)-Does not require TURBOchannel slot.
·Option card for TX 24-plane color frame buffer attaches to TX TURBOchannel graphic card.
· .Provides live NTSC, PAL or SECAM full-motion "video in a window"
• Includes Xmedia Tools Runtime Kit license
AVlOU-AA/DA

DECvideo/Picture-in-Picture option card for TX graphic option

DECaudio-Requires one TURBOchannel slot
·Audio/signal processing TURBOchannel card
• Provides telephone-grade audio in and out capabilities; hardware ready to support telephony in U.S. and Canada,
CD-quality audio and ISDN at V2 of the Xmedia tools software.
·Includes Xmedia Tools Runtime Kit license
AVOlB-AA/DA

DECaudio TURBOchannel card and distribution box

Each option requires one TURBOchannel slot
PMAD-AA/AB
DEFZA·AA
DEFZA-CA

Thick wire Ethernet TURBOchannel option card
DEC FDDkontroller 700 (fiber optic)
DEC FDDkontroller 700C (copper)

Base system module includes thick wire Ethernet connector. Two adapters are available, ThinWire or lOBaseT (Twisted

Pair):
H3350-AA
DESTA-BA

lOBaseT (Twisted Pair) Ethernet adapter
ThinWire Ethernet station adapter

Select desired length of thick wire to connect ThinWire or lOBaseT adapter to base system. Do not attach adapter directly
to base system module.
BNE4C-xx
BNE3H-xx
BNE3L·xx

Thick wire 802.3/Ethernet cable (xx = 02105 refers to length in meters)
Thick wire transceiver cable with straight connector-PVC (xx = 05/10/20/40 refers to length in
meters)
Thick wire transceiver cable with straight connector-Teflon (xx = 05/10/20/40 refers to length in
meters)

Right-angle Ethernet cables are not supported.
BC16M·xx

ThinWire Ethernet cable (xx = 06/15/30 refers to length in feet)

See Chapter 6, Networks, Communications, and Cables, for more information.
BC19J-1E
BC19J-03
BC19J-06
BC09D-03
BC09D-06

Step 1O-Optional Input Devices
Tablet can be used in place of the mouse. Lighted Programmable Function Keyboard (LPFK) and Programmable Function
Dials (PFD) can be ordered as a pair or separately. LPFK and PFD packages listed below include a Peripheral Control
Module (PCM) which provides multiplexing of both LPFK and PFD into a single EIA-232 port. Each package includes a
power supply, cables, and user documentation.
VSXXX-AB
VSXlO-AA/A3
VSX20-AA/AJ
VSX30-AA/A3

2.20

DECsystems

11- x 11-inch (28- x 28-cm) tablet with a 2-button stylus and a 4-button puck
Combination LPFK and PFD package, 120 V/240 V
LPFK package, 120 V/240V
PFD package, 120 V/240V

DECstation 5000 Models 125 and 133
Step 11-Printers
Refer to Chapter 8, Terminals and Printers, for ordering information.

........

~~~......--~~~.....,...~~

,,,_--~~~-----.....,,..---,

Step fa-CPU Daughter Card Upgrade .
CPU daughter card upgrades include required upgrade licenses (QL-VVlAB-TA--ULTRIX Workstation Software and
QL-YT9AB-GA--DECnet-ULTRIX license)

KN02-CC
KN02-DC

25-MHz CPU Upgrade for DECstation 5000 Model 120
33-MHz CPU Upgraq~ for DECstation 5000 Model 120 and 125

ULTRIX V4.2a is required. An ULTRIX media and documentation kit is recommended for the first system on site. ULTRIX
kits include documentation, ULTRIX single-user kit, DECwindows, and OSF/ Motif software on tape or compact disc.
QA-VV1AA-H5
QA-VV1AA-H8

ULTRIX workstation media (TK50) and documentation kit
ULTRIX workstation media (CD-ROM) and documentation kit

DEC C license is included with ULTRIX V4.2a; order media and documentation separately.
QA-YSJAA-H5
QA-YSJAA-GZ

DEC C for RISC ULTRIX media (TK50)
DEC C for RISC ULTRIX documentation

DEC PHIGS Runtime license is included with PXG Packaged System and Custom Systems ordered with factory-installed
PXG, PXG+ and PXGTurbo+ graphics options. Field installable PXG, PXG+ and PXGTurbo+ graphics options do not
include DEC PHIGS Runtime license, order separately. Order media and documentation separately.
QL-VW7AA-AA
QL-VW6AA-AA

DEC PHIGS Runtime license
DEC PHIGS Development license

QA-VW7AA-H5
QA-VW6AA-H5

DEC PHIGS Runtime media (TK50) and documentation kit
DEC PHIGS Development media (TK50) and documentation kit

The Personal Visualizer (TPV) license is included with a PXG Packaged System and Custom Systems ordered with factoryinstalled PXG, PXG+ AND PXGTurbo+ graphics options. Field-in'stallable PXG, PXG+ and PXGTurbo+ graphics options do
not include The Personal Visualizer (TPV) license; order it separately. A Z-Buffer is recommended for all systems running
TPV. Order media and documentation separately.
QL-GXZA8-AA
QA-GXZAA-H5
QA-GXZAA-GZ

The Personal Visualizer (TPV) license
TPV media (TK50) and documentation kit
TPV documentation only

Xmedia Runtime (Multimedia Software)
Xmedia Runtime license included with DECvideo/ PIP and DECaudio options. Media and documentation must be ordered
separately.
QP-LBDAA-01
QB-MB5AA-AA
QA-MB4AA-H5
QB-XUVAA-AA
QB-XUWAA-AA

Xmedia Tools Runtime license (audio/video)
Xmedia Tools Runtime license (audio/video) and software on TK50
Xmedia tools for RISC ULTRIX on (TK50)
Xmedia tools full developer's kit on CD-ROM
Xmedia tools full developer's kit (TK50 and CD-ROM)

The following server kit is required only if serving VAX systems.
QA-YL5AA-H5
QA-YL5AA-H8
QA-YL5AA-HM

ULTRIX workstation server media (TK50) and documentation kit
ULTRIX workstation server media (CD-ROM) and documentation kit
ULTRIX workstation server media (magtape) and documentation kit

DECsystems

2.21

DECstation 5000 Models 125 and 133

DECnet-ULTRIX/RISC license
DECnet-ULTRIX/RISC media (TK50)
DECnet-ULTRIX/RISC documentation

FORTRAN
QL-VV6AA-AA
QL-VV7 AA-AA
QA-VV6AA-H5
QA-VV6AA-H8

FORTRAN for RISC ULTRIX license
FORTRAN for RISC ULTRIX educational license
FORTRAN for RISC ULTRIX media (TK50)
FORTRAN for RISC ULTRIX media (CD-ROM)

Encryption
QL-VV3A8-BA
QA-VV3AA-H5
QA-VV3AA-H8

ULTRIX (RISC) encryption license
ULTRIX encryption media (TK50) and documentation
ULTRIX encryption media (CD-ROM) and documentation

DEC SoftPC allows RISC ULTRIX systems to run MS-DOS programs with no added hardware. DEC SoftPC runs on both
workstations and timesharing systems under ULTRIX.
QL-YP7 AC-3B
QA-YP7AA-H5
QA-YP7AA-HM
QA-YP7AA-GZ

DEC SoftPC for RISC ULTRIX single-user license
DEC SoftPC for RISC ULTRIX media (TK50)
DEC SoftPC for RISC ULTRIX media (magtape)
DEC SoftPC for RISC ULTRIX documentation

Multiuser Upgralle Licenses
A 2-user license is included with all systems. To increase the maximum number of users, select the appropriate license
upgrades below.
QL-VV1A8-B5
QL-VV1A8-B6
QL-VV1A8-BS
QL-VV1A8-BT
QL-VV1A8-B9

3- to 8-user upgrade license
9- to 16-user upgrade license
17- to 32-user upgrade license
33- to 64-user upgrade license
65- to unlimited-user upgrade license

See DECstation 5000 specifications on page 2.34 for power requirements, operating environment and physical characteristics
information.

2.22

DECsystems

DECstation 5000 Model 240

Product Description

The DECstation 5000/240 is a high-performance RISC/UNIX workstation,
designed to extend the performance envelope of the DECstation family. It provides superb across-the-spectrum performance in all areas of workstation computation (graphics, I/O, integer and floating point, and network throughput) in a
compact, low-cost desktop package. It maintains full and complete binary compatibility with all other Digital RISC systems.
The innovative design of the DECstation 5000 Model 240 extends the performance of the DECstation family to 32.4 SPECmarks. The Model 240 incorporates
a CPU daughter card design similar to the DECstation 5000 Model 100 series,
which provides significant long-term investment protection. The R4000 CPU
daughter card will be available at a later date. NFS performance is increased by
up to 300 percent with the addition of a Prestoserve option, and new DMA I/O
controllers substantially improve on-board SCSI and Ethernet performance.
Four new graphics options are available: HX, TX, PXG+ and PXGTurbo+.
• The HX (Smart Frame Buffer) is a single-width 2D graphics option delivering up
to four times the performance of the 200CX systems, This option is the best
choice for color graphics that do not require extensive 3D object manipulation,
and is suitable for all 2D (ECAD, GIS, 2D Mechanical Design and Drafting) and
many simpler 3D applications, such as AutoCAD.
• TX True Color Frame Buffer provides affordable 24-plane color with an optional
"video-in-a-window" option card. It is targeted at applications such as desktop
publishing or imaging, which require true color but no graphic acceleration.
• PXG+ is an 8- or 24-plane 3D graphics option with an 8- or 24-plane double
buffer offering a 33 percent performance improvement over PXG graphics.
PXG+ supports applications doing simpler 3D design, modeling, and rendering
using wireframes and simple 3D solids cost effectively. A Z-Buffer is now standard on the 24-plane version.
• PXG Turbo+ is a 96-plane, 3D graphics subsystem designed for customers who
need both maximum performance and functionality for applications in advanced
3D solids, animation and rendering.

DECsystems 2.23

DECstation 5000 Model 240
Product Description
I

(Continued)

All new graphics options are supported on 16-inch or 19-inch Sony monitors
with 1280 x 1024 resolution, operating at 72 Hz.
The TURBOchannel Extender (TcE) enclosure, a peripheral box designed to
contain a TURBOchannel Extender as well as up to two half-height internal
drives (RZ25) and one half-height removable device (CD-ROM). The TcE is supported on. all TURBOchannel-based systems. The TURBOchannel Extender allows
the use of a dual- or triple-width TURBOchannel card such as a PXG+ or
PXGTurbo+ graphics card without restricting the use of the two remaining
TURBOchannel slots.
As part of the DECstation family, the Model 240 is able to take advantage of the
more than 2,800 existing RISC ULTRIX applications and large third-party
TURBOchannel device portfolio (IPI disks controllers, large frame buffers, array
processors, etc.).

2.24

DECsystems

DECstation 5000 Model 240

Select system. 120-V Packaged and Custom Systems include power cord and U.S. keyboard. 240-V P ackaged and Custom
Systems require country-specific power cord and keyboard. Order software from Step 12, if necessary.
No additions or substitutions can be made to a Packaged System. Field-installable options ship separately for installation at
customer site. Select factory-installed options for Custom Systems.
DECstation 5000 Model 240 systems include
· Base module with 40-MHz CPU daughter card
• TURBOchannel I/O interconnect- three slots total
·Memory (16 or 24 Mbytes using 1-Mbit DRAM, or 32 Mbytes using 4-Mbit DRAM)
• Thick wire Ethernet controller on Base System module
• Synchronous SCSI controller on Base System module
• U.S. keyboard, 120-V systems
• Three-b utton mouse
·Two EIA-232 serial communication (synchronous/ asynchronous) ports
• 3-meter (10-foot) video cable
• 3-meter (IO-foot) keyboard/mouse cable
• 1.8-meter (6-foot) SCSI cable (50-pin small connector to 50-pin large connector)
• 0.6-meter (2 -foot) SCSI cable (50-pin small connector to 50-pin small connector)
• 1.8-meter (6-foot) power cord (wall socket to system box, 120-V systems only)
• 0.9-meter (3-foot) convenience power cord (monitor to system box)
· Universal Power Supply that automatically adjusts to 88-132 Vac or 176- 264 Vac
· ULTRIX W orkstation Software 2-user base license, DEC C and OSF/Motif
• English-language user documentation
Packaged Systems

Order Number
120 V/240 V/S.H.

Monitor
M =Mono
C = Color

Graphics
HX 8-plane
HX 8-plane
HX 8-plane

Model/CPU

Memory

PM380-AD/AE/AF
PM381-AD/AE/AF
PM381-AG/AWAJ
PM381-AKIAL/ AM

240/40 MHz
240/40 MHz
240/40 MHz
240/40 MHz

16 MB
16 MB 1
16 MB 1
16 MB 1

19" M VR319
19" G VR319
16" C VRT16
19" C VRT19

PM382-AK/AL/AM
PM383-BG/BWBJ 3
PM383-BK/BL/BM 3
PM384-BK/BL/BM 3

240/40 MHz
240/40 MHz
240/40 MHz
240/40 MHz

16 MB 1
24 MB 1
24 MB 1
24 MB 1

19" C VRT19
16" C VRT16
19" C VRT19
19" C VRT19

PM384-TK/TL/ TM 3

240/40 MHz

24 MB 1

19" C VRT19

PM385-BK/BL/BM 3

240/40 MHz

24 MB 1

19" C VRT19

PM385-TK/TL/TM 3

240/40 MHz

24 MB 1

19" C VRT19

MX 1-plane

Available
TURBOChannel
Slots

TcE Box with
RZ25 = 426 MB
CD-ROM = 600 MB

Two
Two
Two
Two
Two
One
One
One

TX 24-plane/2D
PXG+ 8-plane/3D
PXG+ 8-plane/3D
PXG+ 24-plane/3D
Z-Buffer
PXG+ 24-plane/3D
Z-Buffer
PXG 96-plane/3D
Turbo+
PXG 96-plane/3D
Turbo+

Two

Required
Required

Three
Three

2 x 426 MB
1 x 600 MB

Zero
Two

2 x 426 MB
1 x 600 MB

Custom Systems (Require graphics option and monitor)
PM390-AYI AZ
PM390-CY/CZ

240/40 MHz
240/40 MHz

16 MB 1
32 MB 2

Required
Required

Notes:
1. 1-Mbit DRAM memory. Memory may be added in 8-MB increments (MS02-AA) only.
2. 4-Mbit DRAM memory. Memory may be added in 32-MB increments (MS02-CA) only.
3. Systems include DEC PHIGS Runtime license and The Personal Visualizer (TPV) license. A Z-Buffer is recommended for all systems running TPV.

DECsystems 2.25

DECstation 5000 Model 240
Step 2-Power Cords and Keyboards (not required for 120-V systems)
Select power cord and keyboard for all 240-V systems. Power cords connect system to wall socket.
Power Cord

~
'13

"'O
Q

8
=
.""g
~

and

Included
BN19W-2E
BN19K-2E
BN19K-2E
BN19W-2E
BN19W-2E
BN19W-2E
BN19W-2E
BN19U-2E
BN19Z-2E
BN19W-2E
BN19W-2E
BN19W-2E
BN19W-2E
BN19E-2E
BN19E-2E
BN19A-2E
BN19H-2E
BN19P-1K
BN19P-1K

Keyboard

Country

Language

Included
LK401-AG
LK401-AB
LK401-AD
LK401-AF
LK401-AP
LK401-AG
LK401-AH
LK401-AT
LK401-AI
LK401-AN
LK401-AV
LK401-AS
LK401-AM
LK401-AK
LK401-AL
LK401-AA
LK401-AA
LK401-AA
LK401-AC

U.S.
Austria
Belgium
Denmark
Finland
France
German
Holland
Israel
Italy
Norway
Portugal
Spain
Sweden
Switzerland
Switzerland
U.K./Ireland
Australia/NZ
U.S./Canada
Canada

English
German/ Austrian
Flemish
Danish
Suomi
French
German
Dutch
Hebrew
Italian
Norwegian
Portuguese
Spanish
Swedish
French
German
English
English
English
French

Step 3-TURBOch

.its

OptiOlll (f*'1'Ylfield Installed)

Custom Systems require graphics option and monitor; select factory-installed variant.
· Factory-installed PXG+ or PXGTurbo+ graphics options ordered with Custom Systems include DEC PHIGS Runtime
license and The Personal Visualizer (TPV) license. A Z-Buffer is recommended for all systems running TPV.
• Field-installable PXG+ or PXGTurbo+ graphics options do not include DEC PHIGS Runtime license and The Personal
Visualizer (TPV) license; they must be ordered separately.
• Graphics options include 10-foot (3-meter) video cable. The HX option includes a color cable. To run HX grayscale
graphics on a monochrome monitor, order 10-foot grayscale monitor cable (17-02878-01).
• TX frame buffer supports an optional DECvideo/Picture-in-Picture (PIP) option card; see TURBOchannel Multimedia
options.
Order Number
Factory/Field Installed

Graphics Options

TURBOchannel
Slots Required

Compatible
Monitors

PMAG-AAIAB

1-plane monochrome
1280 x 1024, 72 Hz

19" M

VR319-DA/D4

PMAGB-BA/BB

8-plane color/grayscale 2D Smart Frame
1280 x 1024, 72 Hz

19" M
16" c
19" c

VR319-DA/D4
VRT16-HA/H4
VRT19-HA/H4

72
72
72

PMAGB-JA/JB

24-plane true color
frame buffer non-accelerated
1280 x 1024, 72 Hz

16" c
19" c

VRT16-HA/H4
VRT19-HA/H4

72
72

PMAGB-DA/DB

PXG+

8-plane 3D, low- to mid-range
1280 x 1024, 72 Hz

PMAGB-EAIEB

PXG+

24-plane 3D, Z-Buffer, mid-range
1280 x 1024, 72 Hz

PMAGB-FA:'/FB

PXG
Turbo+

96-plane 3D, high performance
1280 x 1024, 72 Hz

2.26 DECsystems

DECstation 5000 Model 240
Step 3-TURBOchannel Graphics Options (Factory/Field Installed) (Continued~
Compatible
TURBOchannel
Hz
Monitors
Graphics Options
Slots Required
16" c VRT16-DA/D4
66
24-plane true color
1
19" c VRT19-DAID3/D4
66
frame buffer non-accelerated
66
19" c VR320-CAIC4
1280 x 1024, 66 Hz
PMAGB-DC/DD
PXG+
8-plane 3D, low- to mid-range
2
1280 x 1024, 66 Hz
PMAGB-EC/ED
PXG+
24-plane 3D, mid-range
2
1280 x 1024, 66 Hz
60
PMAGB-BC/BD
19" M VR262-AA/ A3/ A4
HX
8-plane color/ grayscale 2D Smart Frame
1
60
1280 x 1024, 72 Hz;
16" c VR297-DAID3/D4
60
1024 x 864, 60 Hz
19" c VR299-DAID3/D4
PMAG-GB
8- to 24-plane upgrade
0
Requires Digital Services installation
PMAG-HA
24-bit Z-Buffer option
0
for PXG+ and PXGTurbo+ systems
Monitor key: xNx4: xA = 120-V/240-V Northern Hemisphere, x4 = 240-V Southern Hemisphere. xNx3/x4: xA = 120-V
Northern Hemisphere, x3 = 240-V Northern Hemisphere, x4 = 240-V Southern Hemisphere
Order Number
Factory/Field Installed
TX
PMAG-JA/JB

~~~~~~~~~---.

Step 4-Storage
Internal storage is not supported in the DECstation 5000 Model 240.
Maximum of six external SCSI devices supported on base SCSI controller, resulting in maximum of three SZ12 expansion
boxes. Select SCSI TURBOchannel option (PMAZ-AA) if more are required. Each SZ12, TLZ06, TKZ08, and RRD42 expansion device includes a SCSI cable. Note: External expansion boxes for 240-V systems require a country specific power cord.
SCSI TURBOchannel Option Card
SCSI TURBOchannel option card supports six additional external SCSI devices in three dual-drive expansion boxes.
PMAZ-AA/AB

SCSI TURBOchannel option card

Single-Drive Expansion Boxes
TLZ06-FA
TKZ08-AA
RRD42-FA
TSZ07-CA
RW lOO-AA
RWlOO-BA
RWlOO-CA

4.0-Gbyte 4-mm digital audio tape (DAT)
2.2-Gbyte 8-mm tape
600-Mbyte compact disc drive
40-Mbyte/140-Mbyte SCSI 9-track tape at 1600/6250 bits/inch. Must order U.S./Canada country kit
(TSZK7 -AA) .
19-Gbyte StorageServer 100 deskside base option, TK50 media
19-Gbyte StorageServer 100 deskside base option, CD-ROM media
19-Gbyte StorageServer 100 deskside base option

Expansion Boxes (SZOJ, SZ12 and SZ16)
For expansion box information see Chapter 7, Storage Devices.

Step 4a--TcE Expansion Bo~
~~-..-------~--'---

Note: Model 25 requires 61-cm (2-foot) SCSI cable (small connector to small connector, 17-TCESC-Ol ) to connect TcE to
system box. Cable is not required if TcE is daisychained to another expansion box. DECstation 5000 Models 13 3 and 240
include 61-cm (2-foot) SCSI cable.
TURBOchannel Extender (TcE) box supports TURBOchannel extender and three half-height devices: one half-height removable
device and two half-height hard drives. TcE includes base connector card and cable, SCSI cable, and 120-V power cord.
· Select TcE expansion box when dual- or triple-width TURBOchannel cards are required.
• System supports maximum of three TcE boxes, one per TURBOchannel slot.
• TcE can be daisychained with other external storage devices but must be last device in chain.
• 240-V devices require a country-specific power cord.
PMTCE-AA
PMTCE-DA
PMTCE-EA
PMTCE-FA
PMTCE-LA
PMTCE-MA

T cE, no options, no disks
TcE, PXG+ 8 planes, no disks
T cE, PXG+ 24 planes, no disks
TcE, PXGTurbo+, no disks
TcE, PXG+ Two RZ25s (852-Mbyte), one CD-ROM
TcE, PXGTurbo+ Two RZ25s (852-Mbyte), one CD-ROM

DECsystems

2.27

DECstation 5000 Model 240
Step 4a-TcE Expansion Box (Continued)

---------

Additional SCSI devices may be purchased separately and are customer installable. The following SCSI devices are supported
in T cE expansion box.
RZ23L-FL
RZ24L-FL
RZ25-FL
TZKlO-FL
RX23-FL
RRD42-FL

121-Mbyte internal disk drive
245-Mbyte internal disk drive
426-Mbyte internal disk drive
525-Mbyte internal quarter inch cartridge (QIC) tape drive
1.4-Mbyte internal diskette drive
CD-ROM internal compact disc drive

Note: TcE allows for full use of all three TURBOchannel slots while incorporating dual- or triple-width cards. It does not
permit the connection of more than three TURBOchannel option cards.

Step 4b-Workstand
H9855-AA

Horizontal workstand. Holds one DECstation 5000 system box and three SZ12 expansion boxes.
Four mounting wheels included.

Step 5- Memory

--------

Additional memory may be added in 8-Mbyte or 32-Mbyte memory modules. Fifteen memory slots total.
MS02-AA
MS02-CA

8-Mbyte ECC memory (1-Mbit DRAM) , maximum 120 Mbytes
32-Mbyte ECC memory (4-Mbit DRAM), maximum 480 Mbytes

Prestoserve Option-must be placed in 15th memory slot (slot number 14) . Prestoserve reduces maximum memory to 112
Mbytes using 1-Mbit DRAMs and 448 Mbytes using 4-Mbit DRAMs.
DJ-523PS-AA

Includes 1-MByte cache RAM module and software license

Note: MS02-AA modules cannot be mixed with MS02-CA modules.

Step 6-Multi-Screen TURBOchannel Graphics Options (Factory/Field Installed)
To build a multi-screen system, add appropriate TURBOchannel graphics cards and select compatible monitors. Each
additional monitor requires a country-specific power cord from Step 2.
• Add graphics card for each additional monitor. Two or three monitors are supported per system, provided there are free
TURBOchannel slots. Supported multi-screen configurations are:
- Maximum three MX option cards with three monitors
- Maximum three HX option cards with three monitors
- Maximum three TX option cards with three monitors
• Multi-screen systems expand monitor area. They are single-user systems, with one keyboard and one mouse.
• Monitor cables included with each graphics option. The HX option includes a color cable. To run HX grayscale graphics
on a monochrome monitor, order 10-foot (3-meter) grayscale monitor cable (17-02878-01) for each monitor.
Order Number
Factory/Field Installed
PMAG-AAIAB
MX

Graphics Options
1-plane monochrome
1280 x 1024, 72 Hz

TURBOchannel
Slots Required
1

19" M

PMAGB-BAIBB

1280 x 1024, 72 Hz

19" M
16" c
19" c

PMAGB-JAIJB

24-plane true color frame buffer
non-accelerated
1280 x 1024, 72 Hz

PMAG-JAIJB

PMAGB-BC/BD

Monitor key:

2.28

DECsystems

Compatible
Monitors
VR319-DAID4

Hz
72

16" c
19" c
19" c

VR319-DA/D4
VRT16-HA/H4
VRT19-HAIH4
VRT16-HA/H4
VRT19-HA/H4
VR320-DAID4

72
72
72

24-plane true color frame buffer
non-accelerated
1280 x 1024, 66 Hz

16" c
19" c
19" c

VRT16-DA/D4
VRT19-DA/D3/D4
VR320-CA/C4

66
66
66

8-plane color/grayscale 2D Smart Frame
1280 x 1024, 72 Hz
1024 x 864, 60 Hz

19" M
16" c
19" c

VR262-AAIA3/ A4
VR297-DA/D3/D4
VR299-DA/D3/D4

60
60
60

8-plane color/grayscale 2D Smart Frame

xA/x4: xA = 120 V/240-V Northern Hemisphere, x4 = 240-V Southern Hemisphere.
xA/x3/x4: xA = 120-V Northern Hemisphere, x3 = 240-V Northern Hemisphere,
x4 = 240-V Southern Hemisphere

72
72
72

DECstation 5000 Model 240
Step 7-TURBOchannel Multimedia Qptions (Factory/E'ield lnstalledf
DECvideo/PIP (Picture-in-Picture)-Does not require TURBOchannel slot
·Option card for TX 24-plane color frame buffer, attaches to TX TURBOchannel graphic card.
·Provides live NTSC, PAL or SECAM full-motion "video in a window"
· Includes Xmedia Tools Runtime Kit license

AVlOU-AA/DA

DECvideo/Picture-in-Picture option card for TX graphic option

DECaudio-Requires one TURBOchannel slot
· Audio/ signal processing TURBOchannel card
• Provides telephone-grade audio in and out capabilities; hardware ready to support telephony in U.S. and Canada,
CD-quality audio and ISDN at V2 of the Xmedia tools software.
· Includes Xmedia Tools Runtime Kit license

AVOlB-AA/DA

DECaudio TURBOchannel card and distribution box

Step 8-TURBOchannel Communications Options (Factory/Field Installed)
Each option requires one TURBOchannel slot.

PMAD-AA/AB
DEFZA-AA
DEFZA-CA

Thick wire Ethernet TURBOchannel option card
DEC FDDicontroller 700 (fiber optic)
DEC FDDicontroller 700C (copper)

Step 9-Networking Adapters and Miscellaneous cables (Field Installable)
Base system module includes thick wire Ethernet connector. Two adapters are available, ThinWire or lOBaseT (Twisted
Pair).

H3350-AA
DESTA-BA

lOBaseT (Twisted Pair) Ethernet adapter
ThinWire Ethernet station adapter

Select desired length of thick wire to connect ThinWire or lOBaseT adapter to base system. Do not attach adapter directly
to base system module.

BNE4C-xx
BNEJH-xx
BNEJL-xx

Right-angle Ethernet cables are not supported.

BC16M-xx

ThinWire Ethernet cable (xx = 06/15/30 refers to length in feet)

See Chapter 6, Networks, Communications, and Cables, for more information.

BC19J-1E
BC1 9J-03
BC19J-06
BC09D-03
BC09D-06

18-inch (45.7-cm) SCSI cable, large connector to large connector
(included with each expansion device)
3-foot (0.9-meter) SCSI cable, large connector to large connector
6-foot (1.8-meter) SCSI cable, large connector to large connector
3-foot (0.9-m) SCSI cable, small connector to large connector (system box to expansion box)
6-foot (1.8-meter) SCSI cable, small connector to large connector (included with each system)

Step 10-0ptional Input Devices
~~~~--~~~-~~~-----~

Tablet can be used in place of the mouse. Lighted Programmable Function Keyboard (LPFK) and Programmable Function
Dials (PFD) can be ordered as a pair or separately. LPFK and PFD packages listed below include a Peripheral Control
Module (PCM) which provides multiplexing of both LPFK and PFD into a single EIA-232 port. Each package includes a
power supply, cables, and user documentation.

VSXXX-AB
VSXlO-AA/AJ
VSX20-AA/A3
VSX30-AA/A3

Step 11-Printers

28- x 28-cm (11- x 11-inch) tablet with a 2-button stylus and a 4-button puck
Combination LPFK and PFD package, 120 V/240 V
LPFK package, 120 V/240 V
PFD package, 120 V/ 240 V

.......------~~--~..---------~--.

--...-------~--~~~--

Refer to Chapter 8, Terminals and Printers, for ordering information.
DECsystems

2.29

DECstation 5000 Model 240
Step 12-Softwate.
ULTRIX V4 .2a is required. An ULTRIX media and documentation kit is recommended for first system on site. ULTRIX kits
include documentation, ULTRIX single-user kit, DECwindows, and OSF/Motif software on tape or compact disc.

QA-VV1AA-H5
QA-VV1AA-H8

ULTRIX workstation media (TK50) and documentation kit
ULTRIX workstation media (CD-ROM) and documentation kit

DEC C license is included with ULTRIX V4.2a, order media and documentation separately.

QA-YSJAA-H5
QA-YSJAA-GZ

DEC C for RISC ULTRIX (TK50)
DEC C for RISC ULTRIX documentation

DEC PHIGS Runtime license is included with PXG+ and PXGTurbo+ Packaged Systems and Custom Systems ordered with
factory-installed PXG+ and PXGTurbo+ graphics options. Field-installable PXG+ and PXGTurbo+ graphics options do not
include DEC PHIGS Runtime license; order it separately. Order media and documentation separately.

QL-VW7AC-AA
QL-VW6AC-AA

DEC PHIGS Runtime license
DEC PHIGS Development license

QA-VW7AA-H5
QA-VW6AA-H5

DEC PHIGS Runtime media (TK50) and documentation kit
DEC PHIGS Development media (TK50) and documentation kit

The Personal Visualizer (TPV) license is included with PXG+ and PXGTurbo+ Packaged Systems and Custom Systems
ordered with factory-installed PXG+ and PXGTurbo+ graphics options. Field-installable PXG+ and PXGTurbo+ graphics
options do not include The Personal Visualizer (TPV) license; order it separately. A Z-Buffer is recommended for all
systems running TPV. Order media and documentation separately.

QL-GXZA8-AA
QA-GXZAA-H5
QA-GXZAA-GZ

The Personal Visualizer (TPV) license
TPV media (TK50) and documentation kit
TPV documentation only

Xmedia Runtime (multimedia software)

Xmedia Runtime license included with DECvideo/PIP and DECaudio options. Order media and documentation separately.

QP-LBDAA-01
QB-MB5AA-AA
QA-MB4AA-H5
QB-XUVAA-AA
QB-XUWAA-AA

Xmedia Tools Runtime license (audio/video)
Xmedia Tools Runtime license (audio/video) and software on TK50
Xmedia tools for RISC ULTRIX on TK50
Xmedia tools full developer's kit on CD-ROM
Xmedia tools full developer's kit (TK50 and CD-ROM)

The following server kit is required only if serving VAX systems.

QA-YL5AA-H5
QA-YL5AA-H8
QA-YL5AA-HM

ULTRIX workstation server media (TK50) and documentation kit
ULTRIX workstation server media (CD-ROM) and documentation kit
ULTRIX workstation server media (magtape) and documentation kit

DECnet ULTRIX license must be purchased separately. DECnet media included in ULTRIX V4.2a CD-ROM media kit, but
must be ordered separately if ULTRIX V4.2a TK50 media kit is ordered.

QL-YT9AC-AA
QA-YT9AA-H5
QA-YT9AA-GZ

DECnet-ULTRIX/RISC license
DECnet-ULTRIX/RISC media (TK50)
DECnet-ULTRIX/RISC documentation

FORTRAN
QL-VV6AC-AA
QL-VV7AA-AA

FORTRAN for RISC ULTRIX license
FORTRAN for RISC ULTRIX educational license

QA-VV6AA-H5
QA-VV6AA-H8

FORTRAN for RISC ULTRIX media (TK50)
FORTRAN for RISC ULTRIX media (CD-ROM)

Encryption

QL-VV3A8-BA

ULTRIX (RISC) encryption license

QA-VV3AA-H5
QA-VV3AA-H8

ULTRIX encryption media (TK50) and documentation
ULTRIX encryption media (CD-ROM) and documentation

2.30

DECsystems

DECstation 5000 Model 240

DEC SoftPC allows RISC ULTRIX systems to run MS-DOS programs with no added hardware. DEC SoftPC V2.2 runs on
both workstations and timesharing systems under ULTRIX.
QL-YP7AC-JB
QA-YP7AA-H5
QA-YP7AA-HM
QA-YP7AA-GZ

DEC SoftPC for RISC ULTRIX single-user license
DEC SoftPC for RISC ULTRIX media (TK50)
DEC SoftPC for RISC ULTRIX media (magtape)
DEC SoftPC for RISC ULTRIX documentation

Multiuser Upgrade Licenses
A 2-user license included with all systems. To increase the maximum number of users, select the appropriate licenses
upgrades below.

QL-VV1A8-B5
QL-VV1A8-B6
QL-VV1A8-BS
QL-VV1A8-BT
QL-VV1A8-B9

3- to 8-user upgrade license
9- to 16-user upgrade license
17- to 32-user upgrade license
33- to 64-user upgrade license
65- to unlimited-user upgrade license

DECsystems

2.31

DECstation 5000 Model 240
DECstation 5000 Series Upgrades
~~~~--~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~----~--~~~~--....~~----

Upgrade kits are installed by Digital Services.

From

Note

PM321-DY/DZ
PM321-LY/LZ
PM327 -YYIYZ

DECstation 2100
DECstation 2100
DECstation 2100

DECstation 5000 Model 120
DECstation 5000 Model 125
DECstation 5000 Model 133

1
1
1

PM321-MY/MZ
PM327-ZY/ZZ

DECstation 3100
DECstation 3100

DECstation 5000 Model 125
DECstation 5000 Model 133

PM38U-AY

DECstation 5000 Model 200

DECstation 5000 Model 240

DECstation 5000 Models 20/120
with R3000 20-MHz daughter card
DECstation 5000 Models 25/125
with R3000 25-MHz daughter card

DECstation 5000 Models 25/125
with R3000 25-MHz daughter card
DECstation 5000 Models 33/133
with R3000 33-MHz daughter card

R3000 CPU Upgrades
KN02-CC
KN02-DC

Notes
l. Upgrade kits include: DECstation 5000 Model 100 series enclosure, power supply, base system module, 20-MHz, 25-MHz, or 33 MHz CPU daughter
card, HX graphics, keyboard/mouse cable, color and grayscale monitor cables, brackets for two RZ2x disk drives and one RX23 diskette drive, Thick
wire-to-ThinWire Ethernet adapter DESTA-BA with thick wire cable for attaching DESTA to base system, and required upgrade licenses (ULTRIX
Workstation Software license and DECnet-ULTRIX license).
2. Upgrade kits include: DECstation 5000 Model 240 enclosure, base system module, 40-MHz CPU daughter card, and required upgrade license. Requires
mandatory return of Model 200 parts.
3. CPU daughter card upgrades include required upgrade licenses (ULTRIX Workstation Software license). Requires mandatory return of CPU daughter
card.

2.32

DECsystems

DECstation 5000 System Diagrams
TURBOchannel option modules

Personal DECstation 5000
Models 20, 25, 33

CPU module
Power supply

Power supply

System module

WSMXS003

DECstation 5000 Models 120/125

Drive Opening
BU-WS330008

DECstation 5000 Model 240

TURBOchannel option
modules (optional)
Power supply

Memory
module

CPU module
Base system module
(with memory boards)
WS3P0012

DECsystems 2.33

DECstation 5000 Specifications
Model 240

Power requirements

Model 25

Line voltage

120/240
88-132 V/194-264 V

50/60 Hz

50160 Hz

50/60 Hz

47-63 Hz

Voltage tolerance-RMS
Frequency-single phase

Frequency variations

47-63 Hz

Maximum running current

5.1 A/2.6 A

Maximum power consumption

343

Model 133

9.5 A/5.3 A
302

359

Operating environment

a
·:z

Temperature

10°-40° c
(50°-104° F)

10°-40° c
(50° -104 ° F)

10°-40° c
(50°-104° F)

Humidity

20%-80%
non condensing

10%-90%
non condensing

Maximum operating altitude

2.44 km (8,000 ft)

9.1 cm (3.6 in.)
40.6 cm (16 in.)
43.2 cm (17 in.)

10.2 cm (4.0 in.)
51.0 cm (20.1 in.)
43.5 cm (17 .1 in.)
12.7 kg (28.0 lb)

9.2 cm (3.6 in.)
51.0 cm (20.1 in.)
43 .5 cm (17 .1 in.)
12.7 kg (28.0 lb)

flJ

g
II"\

·:z

Physical characteristics
Height
Width
Depth
Weight

2.34

DECsystems

5.8 kg (15.0 lb)

Workstation Color Monitors
Product
Northern Hemisphere
Southern Hemisphere
CRT
Screen size
Dot pitch
Phosphor
Surface treatment

VRT13
-DA* -D3 **

VRC16
-CA
-C4

13 V/ 14-in. Trinitron
0.26 mm
P22
Silica

VR320
-CA
-C4

VR320
-DA

VRT19
-DA* -DJ**

-D4

VRT16
-HA
-H4

-D4

VRT19
-HA
-H4

16 V/ 17-in. FS
0.26 mm
P22
Silica

16 V/ 17-in. Trinitron
0.26 mm
P22
Silica

16 V/ 17-in. Trinitron
0.26 mm
P22
Conductive Silica

19 V/20-in.
0.31 mm
P22
AR Panel

19 V/ 20-in.
0.31 mm
P22
AR Panel

19 V/ 20-in. Trinitron
0.31 mm
P22
Silica

19 V/ 20-in. Trinitron
0.31 mm
P22
Conductive AR

1280 x 1024 (72)

1280 x 1024 (66)
-

1280 x 1024 (66)

1280 x 1024 (72 )
1280 x 1024 (66)

640 x 480 (70)
640 x 480 (60)

1280 x 1024 (66)
1024 x 768 (87)***
1024 x 768 (72)
1024 x 768 (70)
1024 x 768 (60)
800 x 600 (72)
800 x 600 (56)
640 x 480 (72 )
640 x 480 (70)
640 x 480 (60)

1280 x 1024 (72)
1280 x 1024 (66)

Active display
Horizontal (maximum )
Vertical (maximum)

240 mm (9.4 in.)
180 mm (7.0 in.)

300 mm (11.8 in.)
236 mm ( 9.3 in.)

295 mm (11.6 in.)
236 mm ( 9.3 in.)

295 mm (11.6 in.)
236 mm ( 9.3 in. )

342 mm (13 .5 in.)
273 mm (10.7 in.)

342 mm (13.5 in.)
273 mm (10.7 in.)

343 mm (13.5 in .)
274 mm (10.7 in. )

343 mm (13.5 in. )
274 mm (10.7 in. )

Connectors
Signal
Power

9 pin D-subminiature
IEC receptacle

BNC (5)
IEC receptacle

BNC (3)
IEC receptacle

BNC (3 )
IEC receptacle

Included with monitor Included with system
9 to 15-pin
D-subminiature

Included with system

90-264 V/50-60 Hz

Yes
200 W maximum

Yes

90-264 V/50-60 Hz
*America/''*Europe
Yes
220 W maximum

90-264 V/50-60 H z

Auto ranging
Consumption

100-120 V/50-60 Hz* 90-264 V/50-60 Hz
220-240 V/ 50 Hz*1'
No
Yes
80 W maximum
110 W maximum

Dimensions
Height
Width
Depth

355 mm (14.0 in.)
348 mm (13.7 in.)
411 mm (16.2 in. )

432 mm (17.0 in.)
411 mm (16.2 in. )
434 mm (17 .1 in. )

409 mm (16.1 in.)
406 mm (16.0 in .)
453 mm (17 .8 in .)

409 mm (16.1 in.)
406 mm (16.0 in.)
453 mm (17.8 in .)

457 mm (18. 1 in.)
495 mm (1 9.5 in .)
452 mm (17 .8 in.)

457 mm (18.1 in.)
495 mm (19.5 in.)
452 mm (17.8 in.)

474 mm (18.7 in.)
480 mm (18.9 in.)
505 mm (19.9 in .)

474 mm (18.7 in.)
480 mm (18.9 in.)
505 mm (19.9 in.)

Weight

13 .0 kg (29 lb)

25 kg (55 lb)

25 .3 kg (56 lb)

29 kg (64 lb)

25.3 kg (56 lb)

32.5 kg (7 1.5 lb)

32 .5 kg (71.5 lb )

MPRII low-emission
monitor

Yes

Resolution/Refresh
Rate (Hz) (All modes
are non-interlaced
except for 1'*''8514/ A
which is interlaced.)

1024 x 768 (87 )***

1024 x 768 (60)
-

800 x 600 (56)
-

Signal cable

Power supply
AC
-

t:::i

tTl

VRT16
-DA

tr1

~
rlJ
......
......

=
-·
0

\JI
0
0
0

:::
Yes
220 W maximum

Yes

UL/CSAITUV

Yes

DHHS/ HWC/PTB

Yes

i..i

""'

DECstation 5000 Monitor Charts

-·=

......
0

1-t

=
......
1-t

rlJ

FCC/ VDE/VCCI
Class A
Class B

DECstation 5000 Monitor Charts
Workstation Grayscale Monitors
Product
Northern Hemisphere
Southern Hemisphere

VRM 17
-AA

VRM17

VR319

-HA

-A4

-H4

-CA
-C4

VR319
-DA
-D4

CRT
Screen size
Dot pitch
Phosphor
Surface treatment

17-in. FS

19-in.

NIA

PC104
Silica

PC104
Conductive Silica

P192
Mechanical Etch

Resolution/Refresh
Rate (Hz) (All modes
are non-interlaced)

1280 x 1024 (72)

1280 x 1024 (66)

1024 x 768 (72)

Active display
Horizontal (maximum)
Vertical (maximum)

295 mm (11.6 in.)
236 mm ( 9.3 in.)

342 mm (13 .5 in.)
273 mm (10.7 in.)

Connectors
Signal
Power

BNC (1)
IEC receptacle

Signal cable

Included with system

Power supply
AC
Auto ranging
Consumption

90-264 V150-60 Hz
Yes
75 W maximum

90-264 V150-60 Hz
Yes

Dimensions
Height
Width
Depth

419 mm (16.5 in.)
406 mm (16.0 in.)
375 mm (14.75 in.)

457 mm (1 8.l in.)

495 mm (19.5 in.)
401 mm (15.8 in.)

457 mm (18.1 in.)
495 mm (19.5 in.)
401 mm (15 .8 in.)

Weight

16.8 kg (37 lb)

21.8 kg (48 lb)

MPRII low-emission monitor

Yes

FCC/VDE/VCCI
Class A
Class B

Yes

UL/CSA/TUV

Yes

DHHSI HWCIPTB

Yes

2.36

DECsystems

DECsystem 5000 Systems and Servers

Product Description

DECsystem 5000 Series (Multiuser/Server)

The DECsystem 5000 Series is Digital's RISC family of servers featuring the MIPS
R3000-based chip set. These systems place the CPU on a removable daughter
card that permits upgrading the processing power easily. This modular design
offers long-term investment protection and an upgrade path to R4000-based CPU
card at a future date. Systems include built-in thick wire Ethernet, and a synchronous SCSI controller on base system module. Over 2800 ULTRIX RISC applications are available now.
DECsystem 5000 Model 25 Entry-Level Server

The DECsystem 5000 Model 25 offers RISC performance in a low-cost server
system. This entry-level server combines the power of a RISC system (19.2
SPECmarks) with the producitivity of a PC file server. System has one synchronous/asynchronous serial line with speeds up to 19.2 Kbits/second, and two
TURBOchannel slots to allow use of specialized networking options.
The system has 8 Mbytes of memory embedded on system board and four
memory expansion slots. Memory modules are available in 4- and 16-Mbyte
packages for a system total of 16 and 40 Mbytes respectively. System cache is
128 Kbytes (64-Kbyte instruction, 64-Kbyte data). Internal storage is provided by
two storage cavities; one slot is reserved for a SCSI hard drive and a second slot
for an FDI diskette drive.
Model 25 is well suited as an entry level server for: PC server applications,
database services, distributed retail outlets, small UNIX-based workgroups, and is
an ideal application client for DECsystem 5900 dataserver.

DECsystems 2.37

DECsystem 5000 Systems and Servers
Product Description (Continued)

DECsystem 5000 Model 133 Mid-Range Server

The Model 133 runs at 33 MHz (25.3 SPECmarks) and offers the expandable
features frequently demanded in the today's markets. Memory can be expanded
to 128 Mbytes and internal storage is provided by three storage cavities. Slot 1 is
reserved for a removable media device, and slots 2 and 3 support hard disk
drives. The 600-Mbyte compact disc reader enables access to online ULTRIX
documentation, CD-based binary distribution, and applications from CD-ROM.
Two EIA-232 serial ports provide a direct connection to the CPU enclosure for
asynchronous devices. Synchronous connections can be made through the
EIA-232 ports with the addition of the DEC WAN driver for ULTRIX and the
DEC X.25 native mode for ULTRIX software.
DECsystem 500 Model 133 servers are ACE compatible; applications developed
today will run on ARC-compliant machines in the future.
DECsystem 5000 Model 240 High-Performance Server

The DECsystem 5000 Model 240 is a high-performance (32.4 SPECmark), multiuser RISC server designed to extend the performance envelope of the DECsystem
family. It provides superb across-the-spectrum performance in all areas of workstation computation (I/O, integer and floating point, and network throughput) in
a compact, low-cost desktop package. It maintains full and complete binary
compatibility with all other Digital RISC systems.
NFS performance is increased by up to 300 percent with the addition of a
Prestoserve option, and DMA I/O controllers substantially improve on-board
SCSI and Ethernet performance. As part of the DECsystem family, the Model 240
is able to take advantage of third-party TURBOchannel device portfolio IPI disk
controllers, large frame buffers and array processors.

2.38

DECsystems

DECsystem 5000 Systems and Servers

Select system. 120-V systems include required power cord. Select the appropriate power cord for all 240-V systems from
Step 2.
Any field-installable option ordered with a system ships separately for customer installation.

DECsystem 5000 Servers include
• Base module with CPU daughter card
• TURBOchannel I/O interconnect: Model 25 two slots; Models 133/240 three slots
·Memory
• Thick wire Ethernet controller on base system module
• Synchronous SCSI controller on base system module
• EIA-232 serial communication (synchronous/asynchronous) ports-Model 25 one line; Models 133/240 two lines
• 1.8-meter (6-foot) SCSI cable (50-pin small connector to 50-pin large connector)
• 0.6-meter (2-foot) SCSI cable (50-pin small connector to 50-pin small connector)-Models 133/240 only
• 1.8-meter (6-foot) power cord (wall socket to system box, 120-V systems only)
• ULTRIX base license
·ULTRIX 4-user license
· ULTRIX server license
• English-language user documentation

Order Number
120 V/240 v

CPU

Memory

TURBOChannel

EIA-232

Internal Storage
Bays/Disks

25 MHz
25 MHz

8 MB (1-Mbit DRAM) parity
24 MB (4-Mbit DRAM) parity

2 slots
2 slots

One
One

Two
Two RZ25=426 MBt

33 MHz
33 MHz
33 MHz

8 MB (1-Mbit DRAM) parity
16 MB (4-Mbit DRAM) parity
16 MB (4-Mbit DRAM) parity

3 slots
3 slots
3 slots

Two
Two
Two

Three
Three
Three RZ25=426 MBt

40 MHz
40 MHz

16 MB (1-Mbit DRAM) ECC
32 MB (4-Mbit DRAM) ECC

3 slots
3 slots

Two
Two

None
None

Model 25
PM319-MX*
PM319-RX*
Model 133
PM338-2Y/2Z
PM338-3Y/3Z
PM338-4Y/4Z
Model 240
PM399-AY/AZ
PM399-CY/CZ

* PM3 l 9-MX/RX include 120-V power cord. International kits ship with 240-V systems.
t RZ25 disk includes ULTRIX factory-installed software.

DECsystems

2.39

DECsystem 5000 Systems and Servers

Select power cord for all 240-V systems. Power cords connect system to wall socket.

j
l

Power Cord

Country

Included
BN19W-2E
BN19K-2E
BN19K-2E
BN19W-2E
BN19W-2E
BN19W-2E
BN19W-2E
BN19U-2E
BN19Z-2E
BN19W-2E
BN19W-2E
BN19W-2E
BN19W-2E
BN19E-2E
BN19A-2E
BN19H-2E
BN19P-1K

U.S.
Austria
Belgium
Denmark
Finland
France ·
German
Holland
Israel
Italy
Norway
Portugal
Spain
Sweden
Switzerland
U.K./Ireland
Australia/New Zealand
U.S./Canada

Model 25: Includes 8 Mbyes on system board. Four memory slots total.

MSOl-AA
MSOl-CA

4-Mbyte parity (2 x 2-Mbyte 1-Mbit DRAM), maximum 16 Mbytes
16-Mbyte parity (2 x 8-Mbyte 4-Mbit DRAM), maximum 40 Mbytes

Model 133: Eight memory slots total

MSOl-AA
MSOl-CA

4-Mbyte parity (2 x 2-Mbyte 1-Mbit DRAM), maximum 32 Mbytes
16-Mbyte parity (2 x 8-Mbyte 4-Mbit DRAM), maximum 128 Mbytes

Model 240: Fifteen memory slots total (14 if Prestoserve is installed)

MS02-AA
MS02-CA

8-Mbyte ECC (1 x 8-Mbyte 1-Mbit DRAM), maximum 120
32-Mbyte ECC (1 x 32-Mbyte 4-Mbit DRAM), maximum 480

Note: -AA modules cannot be mixed with -CA modules.
Prestoserve Option: Must be placed in 15th memory slot (slot number 14); available for Model 240 servers only
Installation of Prestoserve reduces maximum memory to 112 Mbytes using 1-Mbit DRAMs and 448 Mbytes using 4-Mbit
DRAMS.

DJ-523PS-AA

2.40

DECsystems

Includes 1-Mbyte cache RAM module and software license.

DECsystem 5000 Systems and Servers
Step ~torage
Select storage devices if required.

Model 25: Supports one 3.5-inch diskette drive and one 3.5-inch fixed disk drive in system enclosure.
Model 133: Supports one removable media device (RX23 , RRD42 , TLZ06, TZKlO) and two fixed disk drives in system
enclosure.

Model 240: Does not support internal storage.

·A single RZ24L or RZ23L disk drive is recommended as data/swap device only.
• Recommended configurations for standalone systems are:
Model 25: one RZ25 ; Model 133: one RZ25, or two RZ24Ls or one RZ24L and one RZ23L
·Maximum seven SCSI devices are supported on the base SCSI controller Select SCSI TURBOchannel option (PMAZ-AA) if
more are required.

Step 4a--lnternal Drives
Model 25: Select maximum of one internal diskette and one hard disk drive. Factory-installed RZ25 -FM disk includes
Factory-Installed Software (FIS).

RX26-FP/FN
RZ23L-FM/FN
RZ24L-FM/FN
RZ25-FM/FN

2.88-Mbyte 3.5-inch internal diskette drive
121-Mbyte 3.5-inch internal disk drive
245-Mbyte 3.5-inch internal disk drive
426-Mbyte 3.5-inch internal disk drive

To embed a DECsystem 2100 or 3100 3 .5-inch SCSI disk drive in a Model 25, order hard drive mounting bracket.

RZ2X-FN

Hardware mounting drive bracket and documentation for Model 25

Model 133: Select maximum of one removable media device and two hard disk drives. Factory-installed RZ25 -FM disk
includes Factory-Installed Software.
RX23-FM/FL
RRD42-FM/FL
TLZ06-FM/FL
TZKlO-FM/FL

1.4-Mbyte 3.5-inch internal diskette drive
600-Mbyte 3.5-inch internal compact disc drive
4.0-Gbyte 3.5-inch internal 4-mm digital audio tape (DAT)
525-Mbyte 3.5-inch internal QIC tape drive

RZ23L-FM/FL
RZ24L-FM/FL
RZ25-FM/FL

121-Mbyte 3.5-inch internal disk drive
245-Mbyte 3.5-inch internal disk drive
426-Mbyte 3.5-inch internal disk drive

Step ,4~Extemal Drives
Each SZ12 , TLZ06, TKZ08, and RRD42 expansion device includes a SCSI cable (BC19J-IE) . External expansion boxes for
240-V systems require a country-specific power cord.
Base SCSI controller supports seven SCSI devices; maximum of three expansion boxes with one internal device. Select SCSI
TURBOchannel option if more are required.

PMAZ-AA/AB

SCSI TURBOchannel option card

Single Drive Expansion Boxes
TLZ06-FA
TKZ08-AA
RRD42-FA
TSZ07-CA *
i'

4.0-Gbyte 4-mm digital audio tape (DAT)
2.2-Gbyte 8-mm tape
600-Mbyte compact disc drive
40-Mbyte/140-Mbyte SCSI 9-track tape at 1600/6250 bits/inch. Must order U.S./Canada
country kit (TSZK7 -AA).

TSZ07 is supported on Model 240 only

Expansion Boxes (SZ03, SZ12, and SZ16)
For SZ03, SZ12 , and SZ16 expansion box information, see Chapter 7, Storage Devices.

DECsystems

2.41

DECsystem 5000 Systems and Servers
Step 4c-TcE Expansion Box
~~~--'""-~~~~~-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~

Note: Model 25 requires 61-cm (2-foot) SCSI cable (small connector to small connector, 17-TCESC-Ol ) to connect TcE to

system box. Cable is not required if TcE is daisychained to another expansion box. Models 133 and 240 include 61-cm
(2-foot) SCSI cable.
TURBOchannel Extender (TcE) box supports TURBOchannel extender and three half-height devices: one half-height removable device and two half-height hard drives. TcE includes base connector card and cable, SCSI cable, and 120-V power
cord.
· Select TcE expansion box when dual- or triple-width TURBOchannel cards are required.
• System supports maximum of three TcE boxes, one per TURBOchannel slot.
• TcE can be daisychained with other external storage devices but must be last device in chain.
• 240-V devices require a country-specific power cord.

PMTCE-AA
PMTCE-DA
PMTCE-EA
PMTCE-FA
PMTCE-LA
PMTCE-MA

TcE, no options, no disks
TcE, PXG+ 8 planes, no disks
TcE, PXG+ 24 planes, no disks
TcE, PXGTurbo+, no disks
TcE, PXG+ Two RZ25s (852-Mbyte), one CD-ROM
TcE, PXGTurbo+ Two RZ25s (852-Mbyte), one CD-ROM

Additional SCSI devices may be purchased separately and are customer installable. The following SCSI devices are supported
in T cE expansion box.

RZ23L-FL
RZ24L-FL
RZ25-FL
TZKlO-FL
RX23-FL
RRD42-FL

Note: TcE allows for full use of all three TURBOchannel slots while incorporating dual- or triple-width cards. It does not
permit the connection of more than three TURBOchannel option cards.
..........

~~·---~~~~~~~~~~~------~~

Step 4(1-Workstand
H9855-AA

Horizontal workstand. Holds one DECsystem 5000 system box and three SZ12 expansion boxes.
Four mounting wheels included.

Step 5-Networking Adapters and Miscellaneous Cables
Base system module includes thick wire Ethernet connector. Two adapters are available, ThinWire or lOBaseT (Twisted
Pair):

H3350-AA
DESTA-BA

lOBaseT (Twisted Pair) Ethernet adapter
ThinWire Ethernet station adapter

Select desired length of thick wire to connect ThinWire or lOBaseT adapter to base system. Do not attach adapter directly
to base system module.

BNE4C-xx
BNE3H-xx
BNE3L-xx

Thick wire 802.3/Ethernet cable (-xx = -02/-05 refers to length in meters)
Thick wire transceiver cable with straight connector-PVC
(-xx = -05/-10/-20/-40 refers to length in meters)
Thick wire transceiver cable with straight connector-Teflon
(-xx = -05/-10/-20/-40 refers to length in meters)

Right-angle Ethernet cables are not supported.

BC16M-xx

ThinWire Ethernet cable (-xx = -06/-15/-30 refers to length in feet)

See Chapter 6, Networks, Communications, and Cables, for more information.

BC19J-1E
BC19J-03
BC19J-06
BC09D-03
BC09D-06
2.42

DECsystems

18-inch (45.7 -cm) SCSI cable, large connector to large connector,
(included with each expansion device)
3-foot (0.9-m) SCSI cable, large connector to large connector
6-foot (1.8-m) SCSI cable, large connector to large connector
3-foot (0.9-m) SCSI cable, small connector to large connector (system box to expansion box)
6-foot (1.8-m) SCSI cable, small connector to large connector (included with each system)

DECsystem 5000 Systems and Servers
Step 6-TURBOchannel Communications Options (Factory/Field Installed)
Each option requires one TURBOchannel slot

PMAD-AA/AB
DEFZA-AA
DEFZA-CA

Thick wire Ethernet TURBOchannel option card
DEC FDDicontroller 700 (fiber optic)
DEC FDDicontroller 700C (copper)

Step 7-Console Termin81
A console device is necessary for a system to function; select video terminal (e.g. , VT420) unless otherwise available. Note:
Models 25 and 133 include a console cable. Model 240 does NOT; order console cable separately.

Step 8-Printers

--------

Select serial printers as required. Serial printers can be connected to an asynchronous line. A cable (e.g. BC16E-xx) must be
ordered unless otherwise available. See Chapter 8, Terminals and Printers.

DECsystem 5000 Multiuser/Servers require ULTRIX V4.2a or higher.
Software
Processor Code

Model 25 = N
Model 133 = N
Model 240 = S

An ULTRIX media and documentation kit is recommended for the first system on site. ULTRIX kits include documentation,
and DECwindows software on tape or compact disc.

QA-VYVAA-H5
QA-VYVAA-HS

ULTRIX media (TK50) and documentation kit
ULTRIX media (CD-ROM) and documentation kit

DEC C license is included with ULTRIX V4.2a or higher; order media and documentation separately.

QA-YSJAA-H5
QA-YSJAA-GZ

DEC C for RISC ULTRIX media (TK50)
DEC C RISC ULTRIX documentation

DECnet ULTRIX license must be purchased separately. DECnet media included in ULTRIX V4.2a or higher CD-ROM media
kit, but must be ordered separately if ULTRIX V4.2a or higher TK50 media kit is ordered.

QL-YT9A"'-AA
QA-YT9AA-H5
QA-YT9AA-GZ

DECnet-ULTRIX/RISC license
DECnet-ULTRIX/RISC media (TK50)
DECnet-ULTRIX/RISC documentation

FORTRAN
QL-VV6A *-AA
QL-VV7AA-AA
QA-VV6AA-H5
QA-VV6AA-H8

FORTRAN for RISC ULTRIX license
FORTRAN for RISC ULTRIX educational license
FORTRAN for RISC ULTRIX media (TK50)
FORTRAN for RISC ULTRIX media (CD-ROM)

Encryption

QL-VV3A8-BA
QA-VV3AA-H5
QA-VV3AA-H8

RISC UL TRIX encryption license
ULTRIX encryption media (TK50) and documentation
ULTRIX encryption media (CD-ROM) and documentation

DEC SoftPC allows RISC ULTRIX systems to run MS-DOS programs with no added hardware. DEC SoftPC runs on both
workstations and timesharing systems under ULTRIX.

QL-YP7AC-3B
QA-YP7AA-H5
QA-YP7AA-HM
QA-YP7AA-GZ

DEC SoftPC for RISC ULTRIX single-user license
DEC SoftPC for RISC ULTRIX media (TK50)
DEC SoftPC for RISC ULTRIX media (magtape)
DEC SoftPC for RISC ULTRIX documentation

DECsystems 2.43

DECsystem 5000 Systems and Servers
Step 9-Software (Continued)
--~~~~~~---~~~-----~~...-..~~~~~--~-----........_

________________

Multiuser Upgrade Licenses

A 4-user license is included with all systems.
To increase the maximum number of users, select the appropriate license upgrades below.
QL-VYVAS-BS
QL-VYVAS-B6
QL-VYVAS-BS
QL-VYVAS-BT
QL-VYVAS-B9

5- to 8-user upgrade license
9- to 16-user upgrade license
17- to 32-user upgrade license
33- to 64-user upgrade license
65- to unlimited-user upgrade license

DECsystem 5000 Series Upgrades
Upgrade kits must be installed by Digital Services.

PM38U-BY

From

Notes

DECsystem 5000 Model 200

DECsystem 5000 Model 240

Note
1. Upgrade kits include: DECsystem 5000 Model 240 enclosure, base system module, 40-MHz CPU daughter card, and
required upgrade license. Requires mandatory return of DECsystem 5000 Model 200 parts.

See DECstation 5000 specifications on page 2.34 for power requirements, operating environment and physical characteristics
information.

2.44 DECsystems

DECsystem 5900 Systems

Product Description

The DECsystem 5900 system is a server system that provides high-end
functionality in the RISC product set. The DECsystem 5900 incorporates the CPU
(R3000A) and storage in a 67-inch cabinet using a standard 19-inch drawer
packaging scheme. The R3000A runs at 40 MHz, producing more than 32
SPECmarks; the system has a maximum memory capacity of 448 Mbytes.
The CPU drawer includes the 40-MHz R3000A-based CPU, Prestoserve, and the
TURBOchannel extender. Prestoserve is a high-performance file system accelerator from Legato Systems, Inc. It significantly improves NFS (Network File System) performance. The TURBOchannel Extender is a board extension to the
TURBOchannel bus which allows double- or triple-width cards to be used without precluding the use of all three TURBOchannel slots.
Each storage drawer incorporates up to seven 5.25-inch SCSI peripheral devices.
Four peripheral drawers are supported in the DECsystem 5900 for a total of up
to 28 devices, all in a relatively small footprint. The storage drawers support two
SCSI buses each. The large modular drawers allow significant internal expansion
capability and include internal TURBOchannel option slots.
The DECsystem 5900 is a non-desktop ULTRIX-based server that incorporates
the TURBOchannel I/O interconnect. With TURBOchannel, unique Digital and
third-party options can be integrated easily. TURBOchannel allows configuration
expansion of up to four SCSI controllers. Third-party TURBOchannel options
such as IPI storage controllers and Token Ring adapters allow the DECsystem
5900 to meet a variety of needs. Two TURBOchannel FDDI adapters are available
from Digital to meet the demand of high-performance networking requirements.
Standard with the DECsystem 5900 is an integral Ethernet adapter that provides
a peak throughput of 1.2 Mbytes/second. This adapter supports thick wire connections. For additional Ethernet throughput, an Ethernet adapter can be added
via the TURBOchannel. The system includes TCP/IP software and NFSTM support (DECnet-ULTRIX license is optional) .

DECsystems

2.45

DECsystem 5900 Systems
Product Description
(Continued)

Two Digital FDDI controllers can be added via the TURBOchannel, providing
access to a 100-Mbit/second FDDI network. The first option is a true fiber-optic
controller (DEFZA-AA) which supports a maximum distance up to 1000 meters
(3280 feet). The second option (DEFZA-CA) utilizes standard ThinWire co-axial
cable with the full FDDI performance and a maximum distance of up to 100
meters (328 feet).
Dual DECsystem 5900 systems offer the same features as a single DECsystem
5900 system but with two systems sharing the same cabinet. Each system incorporates a CPU (R3000A) and storage in a 67-inch-high cabinet using a standard
19-inch drawer packaging scheme. Each system includes internal TURBOchannel
option slots and the ability to configure up to 13 internal 5.25-inch full-height
devices (a CD-ROM is included with each system), all in a relatively small footprint. In the storage drawer, devices can be divided evenly (14 devices per
system) or unevenly (up to 26 devices on one system and two on the other).
Operating system support begins with ULTRIX V4.2a. All configurations are
packaged with an ULTRIX 4-user license. Also included with each system is an
ULTRIX Workstation Software Server license, which allows the DECsystem 5900
system to act as an application server in an X-Windows environment and as a
boot server for ULTRIX-based workstations.
The DECsystem 5800 to DECsystem 5900 upgrade provides performance
improvement to the DECsystem 5900 from the DECsystem 5800 (up to 300
percent increase based on SPECmarks). Application performance improvements
can be increased with the addition of Prestoserve. The upgrade consists of a
single order number which requires the mandatory return of the DECsystem
5800 kernel. Other components may also be returned for credit.

2.46

DECsystems

DECsystem 5900 Systems

Select system.

DECsystem 5900 Systems include

Dual DECsystem 5900 Systems include

• 67 -inch cabinet with 19-inch rack mountable drawers
• TURBOchannel extender
• Three TURBOchannel slots
• 64 Mbytes of memory expandable to 448 Mbytes
• CPU-I/O module set with embedded 802.3/Ethernet
(thick wire) controller and SCSI adapter
• RZ58 1.38-Gbyte SCSI drive
· RRD42 600-Mbyte CD-ROM drive
• 120-V power cord
• ULTRIX 2-user base license
• ULTRIX 2- to 4-user upgrade license
• ULTRIX/RISC Workstation Server license
• Prestoserve license (QL-YV5AS-AA) and functionality
•English-language hardware documentation
• One full-year product warranty

• 67-inch cabinet with 19-inch rack-mountable drawers
• Two CPU drawers, each includes:
- Embedded 802.3/Ethernet (thick wire)
- Embedded SCSI adapter
- 64 Mbytes of memory
- Three TURBOchannel slots plus TURBOchannel
extender
• Two storage drawers, each includes:
- RZ58 1.38-Gbyte SCSI drive
- RRD42 600-Mbyte CD-ROM drive
• 120-V power cord
• Two Prestoserve licenses (QL-YV5AS-AA) and functionality
• Two ULTRIX 2-user base licenses
·Two ULTRIX 2- to 4-user upgrade licenses
·Two ULTRIX/RISC Workstation Server licenses
• English-language documentation
• One full-year product warranty

DU-59BT1-AA/A3

DECsystem 5900
120 V/240 V

DU-59BT2-AA/A3

Dual DECsystem 5900
120 V/240 V

Step 2--Storage Expansion
Select additional storage drawers and storage devices as required. Refer to Chapter 7, Storage Devices, for further details on
devices listed.

Step 2a-lntemal,Storage
Configuration Rules
·Maximum four storage drawers per system
· Each storage drawer accommodates up to seven devices in one of the following combinations:
- Two full-height removable devices and five full-height disks (RX5x) or
- One full-height and two half-height removable devices and four full height disks or
- Seven full height disks.
·Each additional storage drawer requires a TURBOchannel-SCSI adapter (PMAZ-Bx-one SCSI adapter
embedded on CPU)
• Up to six StorageServer lOOs are supported; one in system enclosure and up to five standalones. Each StorageServer 100
requires three SCSI bus connections.

SZ29X-XA/XB
PMAZ-BA/BB
RZ58-LF/LG
TLZ06-LF/LG
TZ30-EM/EN
TZKlO-LF/LG
TZK09-AF
RX26-LF/LG
RRD42-EG/EH
RWlOO-DA/DB

Storage drawer, requires PMAZ-BA adapter; factory/ field installed
TURBOchannel-SCSI adapter; factory/field installed
1.38-Gbyte, full-height SCSI disk; factory/field installed
4.0-Gbyte, full-height DAT drive; factory/field installed
95-Mbyte, half-height tape drive; factory/field installed
QIC, half-height tape drive factory/field installed
8-mm tape drive; field installed only
2.8-Mbyte, 3.5-inch, half-height floppy drive; factory/field installed
600-Mbyte, half-height CD-ROM drive; factory/ field installed
StorageServer 100 19.0-Gbyte optical library, internal to sy~tem enclosure; factory/field installed.

Step 2b-Extemal Storage

-~~~--"--~---"--~~-----------~~----~..._~~--------w--~~--------~--'

Configuration Rules
• Each external SCSI device requires a dedicated TURBOchannel-SCSI adapter (PMAZ-BA) and an external SCSI cable
(BC09D-12), i.e. , two external SCSI devices require two PMAZ-BA adapters and two BC09D-12 cables
• Maximum one external enclosure per SCSI adapter

DECsystems

2.47

DECsystem 5900 Systems
Step 2b-Extemal Stofllge (Continued)
-~----------------

BC09D-12
TSZ07
TZ85-TA
RWlOO-CA

12-foot (3.6-meter) external SCSI cable; small connector to large connector.
140-Mbyte 9-track tabletop tape drive. Refer to Chapter 7, Storage Devices, for ordering information.
2.6-Gbyte cartridge tape subsystem in tabletop enclosure.
StorageServer 100 19 .0-Gbyte optical library in standalone cabinet. Refer to Chapter 7, Storage
Devices, for more information and configuration requirements.
------------------~---~~~~_,....---..

Step 3-Memory
Select a maximum of 12 additional memory options. System can be expanded to 448 Mbytes.
MS02-CA

32 Mbytes ECC memory; factory or field installed.

Step 4-Networks and Communications
~~~~--~--~~~~~~...-,--~--~

Select devices as required. See Chapter 6, Networks, Communications) and Cables, and the Networks Buyer's Guide for more
information. Note: Ethernet transceiver cables with right angle connectors are not supported on DECsystem 5900 systems.
Local and Wide Area Communication Servers
Each communications server requires an 802.3/Ethernet connection. Depending on the server selected, either a Thin Wire
BNC connection (e.g. , BC16M cable) or a thick wire 15-pin AUI transceiver cable (e.g., BNE3x) is required. Software media
and documentation and cables are also required. See descriptions in Chapter 6, Networks, Communications, and Cables, for
ordering information.
DECserver 90L+, 90TL, 700, 250, and MUXserver 300, 310, 320, 380 Terminal and Printer Servers
Select a terminal or printer server to provide users with multiple session access to systems on a LAN, to minimize cabling
complexity and costs, and to conserve host resources such as backplane slots.
DEC WANrouter 250, 500; DEC Network Integration Server 500, 600; Proteon 4100\ CNX 500, TransPATH 335, 350
Multiprotocol Routers
Select a router to cost -effectively link a LAN to a remote system or another LAN and to offload routing overhead from the
application host system.
Host-Based Communications Controllers
Select host-based communications controllers for standalone systems (without LAN connectivity), or for other special
requirements. Typically, local and wide area communications servers are preferred. Refer to Chapter 6, Networks, Communications, and Cables, and the Networks Buyer's Guide for more information.
Network Connectivity Products
See Chapter 6, Networks) Communications, and Cables, and the Networks Buyer's Guide.
LAN Communications Controllers
DEFZA-AA

DEC FDDicontroller 700: fiber optic interface; factory installed/field installed.

DEFZA-CA

DEC FDDicontroller 700: Thin Wire interface; factory installed/field installed.

Step 5-Console·. Terminal
A console terminal is necessary for a system to function. Order a video terminal (e.g., VT420) unless otherwise available.
See Chapter 8, Terminals and Printers, for ordering information.

Step 6--,-Terminals and Printers

----~~---~----~~~~~....,.....----~--~--~-------

Select terminals and printers as required. See Chapter 8, Terminals and Printers, for ordering information.

. --_,,

w--~,-

Step 7-TURBOchannel Options
Each option requires one TURBOchannel slot.
Note: Field-installed options require Digital Customer Services installation.
PMAD-AA/AB

Thick wire Ethernet TURBOchannel option, factory installed/field installed.

PMAZ-BA/BB

Additional SCSI TURBOchannel option, supports up to seven internal devices or one external SCSI
device; factory installed/field installed.

CITCA-AA

TURBOchannel to CI adapter-triple wide, mounts in TURBOchannel extender.

DSYTI-AB

DEC WANcontroller 720: synchronous communications interface. Refer to Chapter 6, Networks,
Communications, and Cables, for more information.

2.48

DECsystems

DECsystem 5900 Systems

Upgrade license required to support additional users beyond those included in base systems. System support begins with
ULTRIX V4.2a.
Processor Code
DECsystem 5900 = S
Select the appropriate NAS for ULTRIX software level. See description of NAS packages on page 9.2. Note: The NAS
packaged products do not include hardcopy documentation for the components (the documentation is CD-ROM only). To
order NAS component hardcopy documentation, see page 9.5 for listing of order numbers.

QL-XVCAS-AA
QA-XVCAA-Hx

NAS 200 (Network Application Support 200) for ULTRIX
NAS 200 for ULTRIX media and documentation kit

QL-XVAAS-AA
QA-XVAAA-Hx

NAS 300 (Network Application Support 300) for ULTRIX
NAS 300 for ULTRIX Media and Documentation Kit
Note: x denotes media type: 8 =CD-ROM, 5 = TK50, M = magtape

Multiuser License Upgrades
QL-VYVA8-B8
QL-VYVA8-B6
QL-VYVAS-BS
QL-VYVAS-BT
QL-VYVA8-B9

ULTRIX 5- to 8-user upgrade license
ULTRIX 9- to 16-user upgrade license
ULTRIX 17- to 32-user upgrade license
ULTRIX 33- to 64-user upgrade license
ULTRIX 65- to unlimited-user upgrade license

DECnet-ULTRIX
QL-YT9AS-AA

DECnet-ULTRIX software license

RISC FORTRAN
QL-VV6AS-AA

RISC FORTRAN software license

Media and Documentation
QA-VYVAA-Hx
QA-YT9AA-H5
QA-VV6AA-Hx
QA-YL5AA-Hx

ULTRIX media and documentation
Note: CD-ROM media kit includes DECnet-ULTRIX media and documentation
DECnet-ULTRIX media and documentation
Note: Available on TK50 media only
ULTRIX FORTRAN-77 media and documentation
ULTRIX Workstation server media and documentation
Note: Only required if serving VAX/ULTRIX systems
x denotes media type: 5 = TK50; 8 = CD-ROM

Ste 9-Power,. Cords
BN18P-4E
BN18C-4E
BN18D-4E
BN18E-4E
BN18F-4E
BN18H-4E
BN18R-4E

Denmark, United Kingdom, Ireland, Switzerland
Austria, Belgium, Finland, France, Germany, Holland, Norway, Portugal, Spain, Sweden
Australia
Italy'
Israel
India
U.S., Canada, Japan

Step l~Environmental Products
Select environmental power products if required. See Chapter 5, VAX.cluster Options/System Expansion, Digital' s Environmen-

tal Power Products Catalog, and DECdirect catalog for details.

DEGsystem ,800 .to DECsystem .S.900 Uggrade
DU-59BU1-AA/A3

Upgrades a DECsystem 5800 to a DECsystem 5900. Includes 64 Mbytes of memory, RZ58 1.3-Mbyte
SCSI drive, RRD42 600-Mbyte CD-ROM, Prestoserve license, TURBOchannel extender, storage
drawer, documentation, and 120-V power cord. Requires mandatory return of DECsystem 5800
kernel.

DECsystems

2.49

DECsystem 5900 Specifications

Power Requirements
Nominal voltage
Nominal frequency
Power consumption

120/230 v
50-60 Hz
1560 w

Physical Characteristics
Height
Width
Depth
Weight
Shipping Weight

170 cm (66.9 in.)
61 cm (24 in.)
86.4 cm (34 in.)
440 kg (970 lbs)
485 kg (1070 lbs)

Operating Environment
Temperature
Relative humidity
Maximum operating altitude

2.50

DECsystems

0° to 32°C (32° to 90°F)
20% to 80%
3000 meters (10,000 feet)

DECsystem 5900 System Diagrams
Optional Full-height
Removable Media
(TLZxx shown) ~

Optional Half-height
Removable Media
(TZ30 shown)

~-LJ

00000000000000000 o 000
ODO D~ ~~
000
000
°
0

000

Vent for
Inflow of Air

~ 000 D 'i' 'i'

Power Switch-Green LED
Illuminates to Indicate "On"

Storage Drawer
Front View

Drawer Power
Supply
Full-height Non-removable
Storage Option

Note:
• Dual DECsystem 5900 systems' second CPU drawer is
installed directly under first CPU drawer.

DECsystem .5900
Front View
Full-height
Removable Storage Options
(If one full-height option is installed,
an additional R258 is supported.)

Placement of
Storage Devices in
Storage Drawer

DECsystems

2.51

DECsystem 5900 System Diagrams
TU RBOcha'nnel
Extender Slots

TU RBOchannel
Extender

· .J~~~]l

TURBOchannel
e-=i
o~o
]11
Extender ~~lrnll]lllllll]llmil]llll]ll~
Optional TURBOchannel
~
~~
Slots

I~
~o!~ . H
~ lmiil

System

z:-:-;

SCSI Port

Ethernet
Port

1330

lol:~ll~ll

~ ~1:.-i

1--~ommunications

Console
Port

Port

Note:
•One TURBOchannel Extender option per CPU is supported and is
mounted in one of the TURBOchannel Extender slots.

CPU Drawer
Back View

DECsystem 5900
Back View

2.52

DECsystems

C~aute~; 3

Personal ~0811>.utihg

Network Personal Computing---PATHWORKS

P ATHWORKS Packaged Servers

PC Networking Hardware

DECpc Personal Computers

applicationDEC 400xP System

applicationDEC 400MP System

Network Personal Computing
Overview

Personal computers are a major part of most organizations' information systems
strategies. Yet personal computers, even those on PC LANs, frequently remain
isolated from mainstream operations. Clearly, the challenge is to link personal
computers completely and cost-effectively into the organization's computing
environment.
Digital goes beyond simply connecting PCs to offering true networking of PCs
into the enterprise-wide information system. Digital's comprehensive approach to
network personal computing is based on an organization-wide architecture and
illustrates Digital's ability to provide integration and information-management
solutions at every level of computing.
Digital's network personal computing products include the PATHWORKS PC
networking products and client/server applications, the DECpc series of 80386and 80486-based personal computers and networking hardware, and a variety of
server systems. These solutions allow users to gain the benefits of network personal computing within a powerful and flexible enterprise-wide environment.
They enable PC users to share applications, information, and large system
resources such as printers, disks, and CD readers. These solutions even allow
PATHWORKS users to share data over local- and wide-area networks with any
other user on the network.
Digital's PC networking is highly flexible, accommodating small and large user
groups that can grow incrementally without disrupting present users. Digital's
PATHWORKS network personal computing products allow users to network any
number of DOS, Microsoft Windows, OS/2, or Macintosh PCs, and connect them
to multiple servers simultaneously.
The following pages describe the PATHWORKS products and network interface
. cards that link desktop DOS, Windows, OS/ 2, and Macintosh systems into productive workgroups and to the enterprise. Also described are LAN-based applications and information about Digital's comprehensive family of industry-standard
DECpc personal computers.

3.2

Personal Computing

PATHWORKS PC Networks
Overview
Today personal computers need to be networked to realize their
fullest potential. Sharing files, data, and applications makes PCs
more efficient. Without sacrificing their own computing power,
networked PCs become smarter and let users make better use of
their existing resources.
The PATHWORKS family of network personal computing products creates an environment where multivendor PCs, diverse communications protocols and networks, and diverse applications can
work together smoothly and efficiently. The family includes
networking software products and packaged server products.
These products incorporate all the applications and systems-integration expertise users have come to associate with
Digital. They let users access the basic network utilities that best
meet their organization's business needs. And they let users take
advantage of advanced applications support, management, and
integration capabilities that add substantial value to those basic
utilities.
PATIIWORKS products offer much more than the average PC
LAN. They give users choices and provide the best integration of
these choices. They provide:

• A choice of client. Digital integrates the industry-standard PC
environment-Windows, DOS, OS/2, and Macintosh-with
different servers through its family of PATHWORKS PC
networking software.
Because PATHWORKS uses industry-standard interfaces such
as NETBIOS, PC applications work in the PATHWORKS
environment. Users can work in the PC environment of their
choice using the applications they want.

• A choice of server. Digital offers a full range of scalable
servers based on INTEL, RISC, and VAX. architectures and
running the OS/2, UNIX, and VMS operating systems.
Users can receive file, print, and applications services from a
wide range of scalable servers that provide LAN and WAN
functionality, as well as the functionality users need for
production-mode applications.
PC users can connect to any and multiple servers at the
same time, if needed, giving them the functionality they
need for the appropriate server platform.

·A choice of network. PATHWORKS supports a broad range
of networking technologies and network transports.
For local area communications, PATHWORKS supports the
IPX, AppleTalk, and NetBEUI protocols. For local- and
wide-area communications, PATHWORKS supports the
DECnet and TCP/IP protocols. PATHWORKS users also gain
wide-area access through X.25 and SNA gateways.
PATHWORKS provides users flexibility through a choice of
network wiring-Thin Wire, thick wire, and Unshielded
Twisted Pair Ethernet, 802.5/ Token Ring and LocalTalk,
and FDDI as backbone LAN technology.

·A choice of network operating system (NOS) . PATHWORKS
supports LAN Manager and AppleShare for basic network
operating system utilities, such as file and print services.
Digital is continuing to add support for industry-standard
network operating systems, such as NetWare file and print
services.

• Easier data access and exchange. Personal computer files
stored on server systems anywhere on the network are
directly accessible from any PC or terminal on the network.
DOS, OS/2, and Macintosh clients can also share files on a
peer-to-peer basis.
• Efficient distribution of programs, data, and services. PC
applications and data can be stored on large systems and
shared by many personal computer users. PATHWORKS
products also provide communications services, electronic
mail, text editors (for OS/2 and DOS systems) , and terminal
emulation.
• Better use of resources. Networked PCs allow users to share
storage, printers, plotters, gateways, and other devices with
other users on the network. Yet most processing occurs on
the desktop, not on the host system. This means better
service at a lower cost per user.

• Simplified, central management of personal computing.
Resources can be allocated on a group rather than an
individual basis. The system administrator can control access
to the network, data, applications, and resources. Using
management facilities for DECnet and TCP/IP, system
administrators can also manage local and remote LANs.
Administrators can also perform remote software
installations and updates and centralized file backups.

• Smoother, Jaster data flow . High-speed connections and
distributed applications improve personal and departmental
effectiveness.
· A clear, consistent growth path. Digital's networked PC
products can solve users' computing needs of today and
tomorrow. There's virtually no limit on expansion. Users can
add clients, servers, and resources as needed-without
disrupting users.
PATHWORKS adds value to the choice of basic PC network utilities through:
• Its support for business-critical-or production-modeapplications. PATHWORKS is designed to be the ideal
platform for database access, distributed transaction
processing, and other production-mode, client/ server
applications.
Client/server applications allow users to optimize their
resource utilization. Users can take advantage of the
interface and power of their PCs as well as the compute
power of the back-end server machines.
• Its multivendor, enterprise-wide integration capabilities for
applications, networks, electronic mail, and services. This
enables customers to focus on future growth requirements
as well as addressing current needs.
• Its peer-to-peer networking capabilities. Users can access
both local and remote resources-such as multiple servers,
printers, gateways and corporate data-directly. The
technologies used are transparent to the end user. And, the
network is robust, providing up-time reliability for local and
wide area access.
• Its multivendor management via system management, remote
software installations and updates, and centralized file
backups. In addition, PATHWORKS can take advantage of
Digital's rich network management capabilities.

• Resource Sharing with other types of desktop users, such as
terminal users and UNIX (NFS) and VMS workstation users,
or PC users on other third-party LANs.

Personal Computing

3.3

PATHWORKS PC Networks
APPLICATION AND
WINOOWING SERVICES

A PATHWORKS client receives system software, PC applications,
storage, and printer resources from PATHWORKS servers located
anywhere on the network. Once the network link is established,
the PC system software and applications run on the PC while
accessing applications and files from virtual disks located on the
server system. As far as the PC user is concerned, it's as simple
as changing drives for DOS, Windows, and OS/2 users or switching volumes for Macintosh users. It doesn't matter where the
server is located or what type of operating system it runs. The
networking is totally transparent.

MAIL
SERVICES

r-::=01

L:::__J
\
\
\

The following table shows the PATHWORKS servers and the clients each supports. These products are discussed in the following
pages.
Server

Transport

File Protocol

Client

PATHWORKS for
VMS

DECnet
TCP/IP

LAN Manager

PATHWORKS for
DOS, Windows
PATHWORKS for
OS/2

PATHWORKS for
VMS (Macintosh)'"

DECnet
AppleTalk

APP

PATHWORKS for
Macintosh -1,

PATHWORKS for
OS/2

DECnet
TCP/IP
NetBEUI

LAN Manager

PATHWORKS for
DOS, Windows
PATHWORKS for
OS/2

PATHWORKS for
ULTRIX

DECnet
TCP/ IP

LAN Manager

PATHWORKS for
DOS, Windows
PATHWORKS for
OS/2

Pacer for ULTRIX

AppleTalk

APP

PATHWORKS for
Macintosh

"' This software supports DECnet and AppleTalk communications
and supports TCP/IP with MacX. The file and print services
run over AppleTalk.

Note: Third-party products available for Macintosh systems support ULTRIX servers.

J.4

Personal Computing

MACINTOSH CLIENT

BU-3 191

PATHWORKS Client Software
Overview
PATHWORKS client software allows personal. computers to participate in the enterprise network. A user's favorite desktop computer can use file, print, and mail services provided by
PATHWORKS server software running on OS/2, ULTRIX, or VMS
platforms. And users don't have to learn anything new. The network services provided by PATHWORKS software are simply an
extension of their familiar PC environment.
Each client PC must be licensed to access any PATHWORKS
server anywhere on the network.

With PATHWORKS for DOS client software, PC users can continue to use Microsoft Windows (V3.0 and V3.1) and the DOS
command line when they connect into an organization's network.
This client software gives a broad choice of networks: it supports
LAN Manager V2.0 for access to file and print services and the
APis; DECnet and TCP/IP transports over Ethernet and
802.5/Token Ring networks; NETBIOS, both on the PC and on
VMS servers, for task-to-task and multitask communications; and
Network Device Interface Specification (NDIS) support for network interface cards.
PATHWORKS for DOS users can run Network Application Support (NAS) client-server applications such as the DECquery database query application that uses SQL/Services, PATHWORKS
Conferencing software for many-to-many communications, and
DECtp Desktop for ACMS software for distributed transaction
processing.
PATHWORK~ for DOS provides:

DOS (NetWare Coexistence) products. (The DEC MAILworks for
DOS client media and documentation kit must be purchased separately; see page 3 .12 for details. A separate DEC MAIL works
server license and media and documentation kit are required to
use the server-based mail software.)
For a DOS client to use TCP/IP networking, users must also
purchase PATHWORKS for DOS (TCP/IP) client add-on license
software, described below.
For Microsoft Windows users, the PATHWORKS for Windows
combination license contains both the PATHWORKS for DOS client license and the DEC MAILworks for Windows (X.400 mail)
license. (The DEC MAILworks for Windows client and server
media and documentation kit must be purchased separately; see
page 3 .11 for details.)
Client License
QL-OTLA9-AA
PATHWORKS for DOS client license
QP-LBJAA-01
PATHWORKS for Windows client license
package: contains PATHWORKS for DOS license and DEC
MAILworks for Windows license.
Media and Documentation for Network Use
QA-OTLAA-H5/HM
PATHWORKS for DOS and PATHWORKS
for Windows media and documentation for VMS server
(TK50/magtape)
QA-OTLAE-H5/HM
PATHWORKS for DOS and PATHWORKS
for Windows media and documentation for ULTRIX server
(TK50/magtape)
Media and Documentation for Local Hard Disk Use
Order one of these kits to use the PATHWORKS for DOS product with an OS/2 server, or to load client software onto a hard
disk.

• LAN Manager Redirector for access to file and print services
on OS/2, ULTRIX, and VMS servers over local- and widearea networks

QA-OTLAA-H7/HB

• A license for DEC MAILworks for DOS, on X.400 mail
clients

Additional Documentation

• A Mail client, (MAIL-11 front end to VMS mail) including
binary file attachments and realtime mail notification

The media and documentation kits listed above contain a complete documentation set. Order the following documentation kits
only if an extra set of documentation is required.

• PC DECwindows Motif, an X Window System server
• VT320 terminal emulation (character cell and windowed
versions) that allows multiple sessions
• NETBIOS programming interface support for task-to-task
and multitask communication
• DOS utilities (backup and restore, loadable text and
graphics fonts, and print screen capabilities)
• A remote boot facility for use with VMS servers
• Support for Expanded Memory Specification Version 4.0
• Access to InfoServer 100 and 150 CD-ROM drives.
Licensing
Each PATHWORKS client must have a PATHWORKS for DOS
client license or a PATHWORKS for Windows client license.
The PATHWORKS for DOS license includes the right to use
PATHWORKS for DOS client software on a single DOS personal
computer and to use the PATHWORKS for VMS and
PATHWORKS for ULTRIX server software on one or more server
systems. This license also grants the right to use the DEC
MAILworks for DOS (X.400 mail client) and PATHWORKS for

PATHWORKS for DOS media and
documentation (RX33/RX24)

QA-OTLAB-GZ
PATHWORKS for DOS complete
documentation (for VMS server)
QA-OTLAE-GZ
PATHWORKS for DOS complete
documentation (for ULTRIX server)
QA-OTLAC-GZ
PATHWORKS for DOS complete
documentation (for OS/ 2 server)
QA-OTLAA-GZ
PATHWORKS for DOS user documentation: User's Handbook, MAIL User's Reference, SEDT User's Reference, Client Command Reference, PC DECwindows Motif
Guide, Microsoft Windows Support Guide, SETHOST Terminal
Emulation Guide, Microsoft LAN Manager's User's Guide for
MS-DOS.
QA-OTLAD-GZ
PATHWORKS for DOS DECnet-DOS documentation: SETHOST Terminal Emulation Guide, DECnet User's
Guide, DECnet Network Management Guide.
AA-PAF7C-TK
PATHWORKS for DOS User's Handbook
Programmer's Guide
AA-PAFJC-TK

DECnet Programmer's Guide

Personal Computing

3.5

bll

.5
...
::s

c..

E
0
u

PATHWORKS Client Software
PATHWORKS for DOS (TCP/IP)

The PATHWORKS for DOS (NetWare Coexistence) client kit
includes:

PATHWORKS for DOS (TCP/ IP) networking software option
enables PATHWORKS for DOS clients to participate in a TCP/IP
network environment. Featuring an industry-standard RFC
1001/ 1002 NETBIOS implementation, PATHWORKS for DOS
(TCP/IP) lets users use industry-standard applications.

• NetWare driver components that can be used to generate an
IPX driver that uses the NDIS interface
• An installation procedure that, together with the
documentation, guides a system manager through the entire
installation and configuration process.
• Documentation describing how to install, configure, and use
the PATHWORKS for DOS facilities while retaining access to
NetWare capabilities

With this network transport option, PC users in TCP/ IP networks
can access the file and print services offered by PATHWORKS for
VMS, UL TRIX, and OS/ 2 servers and use the mail services of
PATHWORKS for ULTRIX.
This networking software also provides
• Telnet protocol for the PATHWORKS terminal emulators
• File Transfer Protocol (FTP) and Trivial File Transfer
Protocol (TFfP) to perform network file operations
· Various TCP/ IP network management tools such as PING,
ARP, and NETSTAT
• A Berkeley Software Distribution (BSD) V4.3 compatible
socket library, allowing developers to create or port PC
applications that use UNIX socket library calls
• The Domain Name Resolver, which allows applications to
use domain names rather than Internet addresses
• Memory-saving techniques
• A Windows socket library
Licensing

Client License

PATHWORKS for DOS (TCP/IP) client
license

Media and Documentation

QA-YV9AA-HW
PATHWORKS for DOS (TCP/IP) media
and documentation. (The PATHWORKS for DOS client media and
documentation kit is a prerequisite for this product.)
QA-YV9AA-GZ
PATHWORKS for DOS (TCP/ IP) User's
Reference (included in media and documentation kit)
AA-PESZB-TK
PATHWORKS for DOS (TCP/ IP) Programmer's Reference Guide

PATHWORKS for DOS JNetWare Coexistence)
PATHWORKS for DOS (NetWare Coexistence) lets PATHWORKS
for DOS operate concurrently with Novell's NetWare client software (shell) on PCs running the DOS operating system and using
a single Ethernet or Token Ring network interface card. To use
this product, a PC client platform must:
• Meet the hardware, software, and network topology
requirements of PATHWORKS for DOS client
• Satisfy the network topology requirements of a NetWare
DOS client platform for Advanced NetWare V2.15, NetWare
V2.2, NetWare 386 V3.1, NetWare V3.11 , or NetWare for
VMS V2.1
• Have an Ethernet or Token Ring card for which an
NDIS-compliant driver is available. All of Digital's
EtherWORKS cards meet this requirement.

3.6

Personal Computing

For clients in a Token Ring LAN, PATHWORKS for DOS V4.1 is
a prerequisite. For clients in Ethernet networks, PATHWORKS
for DOS V4.0 or V4.1 is required.
License

The license for this product is included with the license for
PATHWORKS for DOS V4.0 or later.
Media and Documentation

QA-GLVAA-HW
PATHWORKS for DOS (NetWare Coexistence) media and documentation (RX31 and RX24)
Documentation

QA-GLVAA-GZ
PATHWORKS for DOS (NetWare
Coexistence) documentation only (included in media and documentation kit)

PATHWORKS Access Solution for TCP/IP

Each DOS client must be licensed to use the PATHWORKS for
DOS (TCP/ IP) product. The PATHWORKS for DOS (TCP/IP)
license grants the right to use the TCP/IP network transport on a
single DOS personal computer. The PATHWORKS for DOS client
license is a prerequisite for the TCP/IP add-on license.

QL-YV9AW-AA

Prerequisites

PATHWORKS Access Solution (PAS) is a family of products that
allow non-Digital TCP/ IP for VMS software to be used with
PATHWORKS for VMS server software. These products also allow
non-Digital TCP/ IP client software to use PATHWORKS servers.
Developed by· InterConnections, Inc. in cooperation with Digital,
PAS provides compatibility between the PATHWORKS for VMS
server and non-Digital TCP/ IP software.
PAS for TCP/ IP supports the following transport software and
TCP/ IP clients:

VMS TCP/IP Transport

PC TCP/IP Client

PATHWORKS for DOS (TCP/IP)
TGV MultiNet
Wollongong WIN
3COM PC TCP/ IP
Network Research Fusion
U ngermann-Bass PC TCP / IP
DEC TCP/ IP Services for VMS
PAS supports any combination of the above client and server
software and does not affect PATHWORKS DECnet support. To
the PATHWORKS server, all the clients look the same. This
means PATHWORKS for DOS, PATHWORKS for DOS (TCP/ IP),
3Com, and Ungermann-Bass clients can all use the same server at
the same time.
PAS requires VMS V5 .3 or higher and PATHWORKS for VMS
V4 .0 or higher installed and operational on the VMS server. In
addition, users will need either Digital's DEC TCP/ IP Services for
VMS as the TCP/ IP software for the VMS server or Network
Research Fusion V3.4 or higher, Wollongong WIN/VMS V5.1 or
higher, TGV MultiNet V2.2 or higher, or Digital's DEC TCP/ IP
Services for VMS for use with 3Com or Ungermann-Bass clients.
They will also need PATHWORKS for DOS and the PATHWORKS
for DOS (TCP/IP) add-on.
On a client system, users need either PATHWORKS for DOS and
PATHWORKS for DOS (TCP/ IP) add-on, 3Com TCP/ IP client, or
Ungermann-Bass TCP/ IP client. There is no version dependency
for the PC TCP/IP client.
(Continued)

PATHWORKS Client Software
PATHWORKS Access Solution for TCP/IP (Continued)

Licenses

Licensing

QL-YFWAW-AA
PATHWORKS for OS/ 2 client license: gives
users the right to use PATHWORKS for OS/ 2 client software on a
single PC as well as PATHWORKS for VMS and UL TRIX server
software.
QL-YLXAW-AA
PATHWORKS for OS/ 2 server license:
offers DOS and OS/ 2 clients access to the licensed server's local
storage or print devices. Each client must also be licensed.

Each VMS server and PC client using PAS must be licensed.
Media and Server License
QB-XYlAV-WA
PAS for Fusion (TK50): allows Network
Research Fusion to be used as the VMS TCP/ IP software with a
PATHWORKS for VMS server.
QB-XY2AV-WA
PAS for MultiNet (TK50): allows TGV
MultiNet to be used as the VMS TCP/IP software with a
PATHWORKS for VMS server.
QB-XY3AV-WA
PAS for WIN/VMS (TK50): allows Wollongong WIN/VMS to be used as the VMS TCP/ IP software with
a PA THWORKS for VMS server.
QB-XY4AV-WA
PAS for UCX, 3Com and UngermannBass (TK50): allows a VMS server using DEC TCP/ IP Services for
VMS as its TCP/ IP software to work with 3Com and
U ngermann-Bass clients.
Client License
Q6VXX-CZ

PAS TCP/ IP client license (five PC license
pack)

PATHWORKS for OS/2
PATHWORKS for OS/ 2 software lets an OS/ 2 system be a client
to an OS/ 2, ULTRIX, or VMS system running PATHWORKS server
software. OS/2 clients can then use selected resources and services of those systems and access information and services from
other PATHWORKS servers on the enterprise network.
PATHWORKS for OS/ 2 supports multiple concurrent transports:
NetBEUI, DECnet, and TCP/IP, in Ethernet and 802.5/ Token
Ring networks, and supports source routing bridges between
Token Rings. It also supports the NETBIOS interface (on the PC
and on VMS servers) for task-to-task and multitask communication; and the Network Device Interface Specification (NDIS) for
network interface cards.
PATHWORKS for OS/ 2 provides the following client capabilities
to OS/ 2 users:
• Full LAN Manager, including LAN Manager Redirector for
access to file and print services on OS/2, ULTRIX, and VMS
servers, over local and wide area networks
• Mail utility, including binary file attachments and realtime
mail notification
• VT320 terminal emulation that allows multiple sessions to
VMS and ULTRIX hosts
Users of OS/ 2 Standard Edition Vl.1 , Vl.21, and Vl.3 are supported as clients. OS/2 Extended Edition Vl.3 users can connect
to all PATHWORKS servers via DECnet over Ethernet by using
the LAN Requester; to PA THWORKS for OS/ 2 servers via
NetBEUI over Token Ring; and to services of IBM hosts via the
IBM Communications Manager as well.
Note: PATHWORKS for OS/2 software also provides server capabilities, which are described in the PATHWORKS Server section.
Configuration Requirements
PATHWORKS for OS/ 2 requires an 80286, 80386, or 80486
processor with 4 Mbytes of system memory for client configurations and 6 Mbytes of system memory for server or peer services
configurations. A hard disk with 8 Mbytes of available space and
an Ethernet or Token Ring adapter card are also required.
Licensing
One media and documentation kit provides both OS/ 2 client and
OS/ 2 server capabilities. However, there are two separate licenses.
Each OS/ 2 client requires a client license (QL-YFWAW-AA). Each
OS/2 server requires a server license (QL-YLXAW-AA). An OS/ 2
client or server running TCP/ IP requires a PATHWORKS for OS/ 2
(TCP/IP) license (QL-XV7AW-AA).

Media and Documentation
Note: These kits contain the media and documentation for both
the server and client products.
QA-YFWAA-HC/H7
PATHWORKS for OS/2 client and server
media and documentation (RX23/RX33)
Additional Documentation
QA-YFWAA-GZ
PATHWORKS for OS/2 user doc1mentation: Installation and Configuration Guide, User's Guide, Utilities
Guide, LAN Manager User's Guide, LAN Manager's Administrator's Guide, LAN Manager's Administrator's Reference, Mail
User's Guide, SEDT User's Guide, SETHOST Terminal Emulation
Guide, Network Management Guide, Network Troubleshooting
Guide, and DECnet for OS/ 2 Network Management Guide.
Note: The media and documentation kits listed above contain
these documents.
Programmer Documentation
QA-YFWAB-GZ
PATHWORKS for OS/2 programmer documentation: DECnet for OS/2 Programmer Reference Manual and
LAN Manager Programmer Reference Manual.

PATHWORKS for OS/2 (TCP/IP)
PATHWORKS for OS/2 (TCP/ IP) networking software option
enables PATHWORKS for OS/2 clients to participate in a TCP/ IP
networked environment. Featuring an industry-standard RFC
100111002 NETBIOS implementation, PATHWORKS for OS/ 2
(TCP/ IP) lets users use industry-standard applications.
With this network transport option, PC users in TCP/IP networks
can access the file and print services offered by PATHWORKS for
VMS, UL TRIX, and OS/2 servers; use the mail services of
PATHWORKS for ULTRIX and OS/ 2 servers.
This networking software also provides:
• Telnet protocol for the PATHWORKS terminal emulators
• File Transfer Protocol (FTP) to perform network file
operations
· Various TCP/IP network management tools such as PING,
ARP, and NETSTAT
Licensing
In addition to being licensed to use the PATHWORKS for OS/ 2
product as either a client or server, each OS/ 2 system must also
be licensed to use the PATHWORKS for OS/2 (TCP/ IP) product.
License
QL-XV7AW-AA
PATHWORKS for OS/ 2 (TCP/ IP) license:
gives users the right to use the TCP/IP network transport on a
single OS/2 system.
Media and Documentation
QA-XV7AA-HW
PATHWORKS for OS/ 2 media and documentation (5.25- and 3.5-inch disks); includes the TCP/ IP network stack and various network management facilities. The
PATHWORKS for OS/2 media and documentation kit is a prerequisite for the PATHWORKS for OS/2 (TCP/IP) product.

Personal Computing 3.7

PATHWORKS Client Software
PATHWORKS for Macintosh

Configuration Requirements

Developed jointly by Digital Equipment Corporation and Apple
Computer, Inc., PATHWORKS for Macintosh gives users the best
of both worlds: easy access to Digital's enterprise-wide capabilities while using their familiar Macintosh interface.

Ethernet connections can be handled by either Ethernet cards or
a LocalTalk-to-Ethernet router. PATHWORKS for Macintosh supports AppleTalk Phase 2-compliant Ethernet cards, including the
new Apple Ethernet card. LocalTalk-to-Ethernet routers include
the FastPath 4 and 5, Cayman GatorBox CS, Webster Multigate,
and Apple's Internet Router.

With PATHWORKS software, Macintosh users can access remote
resources-file and print services, databases, electronic mail, and
network services-on a local- or wide-area network.
The PATHWORKS software lets Macintosh users communicate
with all other users connected to MAILbus. Through terminal
emulation and an X Window System server, PATHWORKS provides access to production applications on the network.
PATHWORKS for Macintosh includes the following:

Hardware Requirements
Macintosh clients can be Macintosh Plus; Macintosh SE and
SE/30; Macintosh II, Ilx, Hex, Ilci, IIfx, and Hsi; Classic and LC
models; Powerbook 100, 140, and 170; Quadra 700 and 900; and
the Portable. Digital recommends a Macintosh with 2 Mbytes or
more of RAM. For a complete list, see SPD 31.53, PATHWORKS
for Macintosh.

• Macintosh client application software

Software Requirements

- Electronic mail: Mail for Macintosh, a VMS Mail client,
and a license for DEC MAILworks for Macintosh, an X.400
mail client
-MacX (l.1.7), an X Window System server for access to
DECwindows Motif applications and other X Windows
applications.
-MacTerminal (V3.0) terminal emulator
- Data Access Language client software
-AppleTalk-to-LAT transport gateway
- PATHWORKS Listener
• Connectivity software components
-DECnet for Macintosh: Network Control Program (NCP),
File Access Listener (PAL)
- Macintosh Communications Toolbox with ADSP tool for
AppleTalk connection; transport gateway access tool for
AppleTalk to DECnet gateway; DECnet tool; CTERM tool
for LocalTalk and wide area terminal emulation; LAT tool
for high-speed, local-area terminal emulation; MacTCP tool
for TCP/IP connection with MacX; direct serial connection
tool; modem tool; text transfer tool; and Xmodem file
transfer tool, AppleTalk-to-LAT tool for the ATK-LAT
gateway.
• Developer tools
-Application Programming Interface (API) for AppleTalk
for VMS V3 .0
- API for AppleTalk-to-DECnet transport gateway

The Macintosh client must be running Macintosh operating system V6.0.5, 6.07 , 7.0 or 7.1. DEC MAILworks for Macintosh
requires DEC MAILworks Server for VMS.

Licensing
Each Macintosh client system requires a PATHWORKS for Macintosh client license, which conveys the right to use the client software and PATHWORKS for VMS (Macintosh) and Pacer for
ULTRIX server software.

License

QL-YPH9W-AA

Media and Documentation
PATHWORKS for Macintosh media and documentation are available in VMS and ULTRIX formats . Order the kit appropriate to
the server (VMS or RISC ULTRIX) used .

QA-YPHAA-H5/HM
PATHWORKS for Macintosh client media
and documentation kit (VMS format) (TK50/magtape)
QA-YPHAB-H5/HM
PATHWORKS for Macintosh client media
and documentation kit (ULTRIX format) (TK50/magtape)
Additional Documentation

QA-YPHAA-GZ
QA-YPHAB-GZ
QA-YPHAC-GZ
QA-YPCAC-GZ

3.8

Per~onal Computing

PATHWORKS for Macintosh client license

PATHWORKS for Macintosh
documentation
PATHWORKS for Macintosh
documentation (ULTRIX format)
PATHWORKS for Macintosh user
documentation
PATHWORKS for Macintosh programmer's
documentation

PATHWORKS Server Software
Overview

PATHWORKS for •VMS (Macintosh)

The PATHWORKS family of servers provide network operating
system services (file and print), information access, network management, and flexibility to client PC users. A single PC client can
concurrently access any combination of OS/2, ULTRIX, and VMS
server systems. And as users' needs grow, they can add new PCs
or new server systems anytime, anywhere, without disrupting
their network, buying new software, or changing the way they
work.

Developed jointly by Digital Equipment Corporation and Apple
Computer, Inc., PATHWORKS for VMS (Macintosh) server software allows VAX systems to provide local- and wide-area network
services to Macintosh clients. VAX computers become servers for
file and printer sharing, database access, electronic mail, and network services to large groups of Macintosh clients.

Some PATHWORKS features are common to all servers. Others
are unique to individual operating systems. Common
PATHWORKS server features are
• File and print services
• Local-area and wide-area network capabilities over DECnet
and TCP/IP
• Electronic mail that lets users communicate with all other
users on the network
• Easy PC LAN administration through menus
• Security for PC files stored on the server
• Broadcast utility, allowing a system administrator to send
messages to PC users connected to the local area network.
• Date and time services

PATHwORKS for VMS
PATHWORKS for VMS server software enables VAX systems to
provide local- and wide-area network services to Windows, DOS,
and OS/2 clients. It delivers common PATHWORKS server features while providing broad system management capabilities, support for rich client/server applications, and a choice of networks.
PATHWORKS for VMS enables unattended backup of PC data
stored on the file server and remote boot for DOS PCs configured with DECnet-based PATHWORKS and Ethernet network
interface cards.

PATHWORKS for VMS (Macintosh) provides file services (which
are as familiar as AppleShare services to Macintosh users) that
offer the benefits of large disks, regular operator backups, and
data security. Additionally, PATHWORKS software lets Macintosh
users communicate with all other users connected to MAILbus.
PATHWORKS software gives Macintosh users the best of both
worlds: easy access to remote resources on a local- or widearea network without leaving their familiar desktop environment.
Macintosh users can select and use Digital and LaserWriter printers in the same way they select LaserWriter printers connected to
an AppleTalk network.
PATHWORKS for VMS (Macintosh) includes the following:

• VMS server software
- VAXshare file services, based on Apple Filing Protocol
(AFP)
-VAXshare print services for Apple LaserWriter,
LaserWriter-PLUS,
LaserWriter-II/NT, and LaserWriter-II/NTX; Digital's
LN03R ScriptPrinter; PrintServer 20 and 40; and DEClaser
1150, 2150, and 3250 printers
-Network-based file and print server management
- Data Access Language server software for VMS systems
and adapter for Rdb/VMS relational database
-PATHWORKS mail server
-AppleTalk for VMS V3.0.1, an AppleTalk Phase 2
implementation
-AppleTalk-to-DECnet transport gateway

PATHWORKS for VMS software also enables remote management
of multiple PC LANs from a single point. In addition, it enables
remote system management and supports VMS Access Control
Lists so system managers can specify privileges to assigned users.

• Developer tools

Users have access to a rich set of distributed applications such as
ALL-IN-1 MAIL, the DECquery applications for SQL database
access, and DECtp DESKTOP for ACMS transaction processing.

-Application Programming Interface (API) for AppleTalk
for VMS V3.0
-API for AppleTalk-to-DECnet transport gateway

PATHWORKS for VMS supports TCP/IP software. DEC TCP/IP
Services for VMS is supported out of the box. Or PATHWORKS
Access Solution (see page 3.6) product can be used-Wollongong
Win, TGV MultiNet, or Network Research Fusion TCP/IP software. Also, the software supports both Token Ring and Ethernet
environments. The server software also provides direct access to
the DECnet/SNA Gateway in organizations using the gateway.
Licensing

Each client requires a client license. The Client license conveys
the right to use both client and server software.
Media and Documentation

QA-A93AA-H5/HM
PATHWORKS for VMS media and
documentation (TK50/magtape)

Software Requirements

VMS V5.3, 5.4, or 5.5.
Licensing

Each Macintosh client requires a client license. The client license
gives the Macintosh user the right to use the client and the
PATHWORKS for VMS (Macintosh) and Pacer for ULTRIX server
software.
Media and Documentation

QA-YPCAA-H5/HM
PATHWORKS for VMS (Macintosh) media
and documentation (TK50/magtape)
Additional Documentation

Additional Documentation

QA-YPCAA-GZ

QA-A93AA-GZ
PATHWORKS for VMS documentation:
Installation Guide, Server Administration with Commands,
Network Troubleshooting Guide, Server Administration with the
Menu, Release Notes.

QA-YPCAC-GZ

PATHWORKS for VMS (Macintosh)
documentation
PATHWORKS for Macintosh programmer's
documentation

Note: Media and documentation kits contain these documents.

Personal Computing

3.9

PATHWORKS Server Software
PATHWORKS for ULTRIX

PAJHWOKKS for OS/2

PATHWORKS for ULTRIX server software allows RISC and VAX
systems to provide local- and wide-area server features to Windows, DOS, and OS/2 clients. In addition to delivering the common PATHWORKS server features, PATHWORKS for ULTRIX
integrates PCs into the UNIX environment by providing
SENDMAIL mail addressing and supporting UNIX utilities such as
YP (Yellow Pages) and BIND/ Hesiod (Berkley Internet Name
Domain) for naming.

PATHWORKS for OS/2 server software provides full Microsoft
LAN Manager capabilities for Windows, DOS, and OS/ 2 clients in
Token Ring and Ethernet networks. That means OS/ 2 systems
can function as servers and/or clients. PATHWORKS for OS/2
server software includes the common PATHWORKS server features while supporting LAN Manager's Application Programming
Interfaces (APis), such as Named Pipes, for developing and distributing applications between DOS and OS/2 systems and takes
advantage of LAN Manager Peer services. The software also supports multiple concurrent transports, including DECnet, TCP/IP,
and NetBEUI.

PATHWORKS for ULTRIX server software also provides shared
update of files among PC and UNIX applications by supporting
native ULTRIX byte-range locking. This server also delivers
UL TRIX enhanced security and allows unattended backup and
provides audit log files.
Licensing

Each client accessing a PATHWORKS server requires a client
license. The client license conveys the right to use both client
and server software.
Media and Documentation

QA-YNGAA-H5/HM PATHWORKS for ULTRIX VAX media and
documentation (TK50/ magtape)
QA-YNGAB-H5/HM PATHWORKS for ULTRIX RISC media and
documentation (TK50/magtape)
Additional Documentation

QA-YNGAA-GZ
PATHWORKS for ULTRIX documentation:
Server Installation Guide, Server Administrator's Guide, and Network Troubleshooting Guide
Note: Media and documentation kits contain these documents.

Pacer for ULTRIX

PacerShare, a network-based file server for MaCintosh users, uses
AppleTalk Filing Protocol services with the ULTRIX operating
system running on RISC systems. For example, with PacerShare a
DECstation 3100 can become a fast AppleShare-compatible file
server. Macintosh users can connect to the file server through
direct Ethernet connections or through a LocalTalk-to-Ethernet
router. PacerShare file service supports standard UL TRIX access
control and lets the system manager determine on a per-user
basis who has access to a file or directory and the type of access
that user receives.
PacerPrint is a standard ULTRIX spooling daemon, providing an
interface to the print job queue, status reports, and error handling provided by the UL TRIX system. PacerPrint services allow
Macintosh and ULTRIX RISC users to share LaserWriter, LN03R,
LPS40, LPS20, and other Digital printers.
Prerequisites

Pacer for ULTRIX requires any RISC processor with a standard
Ethernet controller and ULTRIX V4.2 operating system. Pacer for
ULTRIX is compatible with PATHWORKS for Macintosh Vl.1.
Licensing

Each Macintosh system accessing Pacer for UL TRIX must be
properly licensed. The PATHWORKS for Macintosh client license
grants the right to use Pacer for ULTRIX and to access multiple
PATHWORKS and Pacer servers simultaneously.
Media and Documentation

3.10

PATHWORKS for OS/2 supports OS/2 Standard Edition Vl.21
and Vl.3, including the High Performance File System (HPFS),
on servers.
PATHWORKS for OS/2 requires an 80286, 80386, or 80486
processor with 6 Mbytes of system memory for server or peer
services configurations. A hard disk with 8 Mbytes of available
space is also required. In addition, the server software requires a
network interface card-an Ethernet card, such as Digital's
EtherWORKS family of cards, or a Token Ring card, also available from Digital. PATHWORKS for OS/ 2 runs on any industry-standard PC such as DECpc, IBM AT and PS/2, COMPAQ,
Olivetti, Toshiba, and Zenith Data Systems models.
While there is one media and documentation kit for the server
and client, there are two separate licenses.
License

Pacer for ULTRIX is a combination of Macintosh-to-ULTRIX connectivity products-PacerShare, PacerPrint and AppleTalk for
ULTRIX-developed by Pacer Software and available from
Digital.

QA-ME9AA-H5/HM

This software supports TCP/IP through the PATHWORKS for
OS/2 (TCP/IP) add-on option. The software also contains DECnet
for OS/2 networking software for task-to-task communications,
NETBIOS interface support, and network management and diagnostic tools.

Pacer for ULTRIX media and documentation (TK50/magtape)

Personal Computing

QL-YLXAW-AA
PATHWORKS for OS/ 2 server license
QL-YFWAW-AA
PATHWORKS for OS/ 2 client License:
gives users the right to use PATHWORKS for OS/ 2 client software
on a single PC as well as PATHWORKS for VMS and ULTRIX
server software.
A client license (QL-YFWAW-AA) is required for each OS/ 2 client
system. A server license (QL-YLXAW-AA) is required for each
OS/2 server system. A client or server running the PATHWORKS
for OS/2 (TCP/IP) option requires a TCP/ IP license in addition to
the base client or server license.
Media and Documentation

QA-YFWAA-HC/H7
PATHWORKS for OS/2 client and server
media and documentation (RX23/RX33)
Additional Documentation

QA-YFWAA-GZ
PATHWORKS for OS/2 user documentation: Installation and Configuration Guide, User's Guide, LAN
Manager User's Guide, LAN Manager's Administrator's Guide,
LAN Manager's Administrator's Reference, Mail User's Guide,
SEDT User's Guide, SETHOST Terminal Emulation Guide, Network Management Guide, Network Troubleshooting Guide, and
DECnet for OS/2 Network Management Guide. Note: The media
and documentation kits listed above contain all these documents.
QA-YFWAB-GZ
PATHWORKS for OS/ 2 programmer documentation: DECnet for OS/2 Programmer Reference Manual and
LAN Manager Programmer Reference Manual.

Personal Computer Mail Solutions
Overview
Most enterprises today recognize that electronic communicationacross computer systems, departments, enterprises, and countries-is vital to competitive health. Yet such organizations also
need to ensure that their workers have access to computers and
software that support their work styles, personal preferences,
job-specific needs, and ranges of technical literacy.
Extending an electronic mail system across such diverse platforms
and technologies is the challenge Digital addresses and meets
with its DEC MAILworks products for Microsoft Windows, Macintosh, and DOS users and with its Mobilizer for ALL-IN-1 product for portable PCs.

DEC MAILworks for PCs
Taking advantage of Digital's PATHWORKS products for connecting systems, the DEC MAILworks family makes possible a worldwide mail system that supports both X.400-based and proprietary
systems. The products implement the CCITT X.400 standards for
public and private electronic mail systems.
DEC MAILworks products deliver the following capabilities:
• Full-featured DEC MAILworks capabilities for Microsoft
Windows, Macintosh, and DOS systems
·Adherence to CCITT X.400 Pl and P2 User Agent
recommendations for multinational, multivendor mail
interconnection
• Click-to-Launch feature for starting other applications from
within mail on Windows, and Macintosh clients
• Full integration with multivendor mail systems through
Digital' s MAILbus
• Personal Address Book for easy maintenance of mail
addresses and nicknames; easily integrated with the
MAILbus Distributed Directory Service for directory support
throughout a multivendor network
• Support for any number or type of message attachments
• Sophisticated filing functions for storing messages locally or
remotely
Additional features include handling various file formats, configuring messages for maximum readability; online notification of
message delivery; priority-based message delivery; message
retrieval based on header fields and filing structures; and message
redirection to a secondary address.

DEC MAILworks Server
The DEC MAILworks VMS server requires VMS operating system
V5.3 or higher, DECnet-VAX V5.3 or higher, PATHWORKS for
VMS V4.0, and DEC MAILworks Server for VMS. Optional software includes VAX Message Router, VAX Message Router
VMSmail Gateway, or other Message Router gateways. For Macintosh service, PATHWORKS for Macintosh Vl.0 (VMS resident
component) is required.

QB-YFTA9-AA

QL-YFUA9-JC
QA-YFUAA-H5/HM

DEC MAILworks Server for VMS
(single-node server); license, media
(TK50) , and documentation
DEC MAILworks WAN Server license
DEC MAIL works WAN Server media
and documentation (TK50/ magtape)

DEC MAILworks for Windows is a fully functional, graphicsoriented Microsoft Windows application. It features icons,
pull-down menus, color, windows, and on-line help. This product
allows MAIL to be called from other Windows applications, enabling users to send mail without exiting from the original application. Sample Macros for Word for Windows and Microsoft
Excel are included.
The Microsoft Windows client connects to the server over local
area networks connected by DECnet.
Prerequisites

PATHWORKS for DOS V4.0 and 4.1 and Microsoft Windows
V3.0 or 3.1 configuration that has a minimum of 4 Mbytes of
system memory and a hard disk with a minimum of 3 .5 Mbytes
of free storage in addition to PATHWORKS for DOS requirements; DOS operating system V3.3, 4.0, 4.1 or 5.0; Microsoft
Windows V3.0 or 3.1; PATHWORKS for DOS V4.0 or higher;
PATHWORKS for Windows includes license.
License

QL-XZJAG-2B

DEC MAILworks for Windows personal use
license

Media and Documentation

QB-XZJAA-AA
QA-XZJAA-HB

DEC MAILworks for Windows personal use
license, media, and documentation
DEC MAILworks for Windows media
(RX24) and documentation

Additional Documentation

QA-XZJAA-GZ

DEC MAILworks for Windows
documentation

The DEC MAILworks for Macintosh product is a fully functional
Macintosh application for use on any Macintosh system supported by PATHWORKS for Macintosh. Like other Macintosh
applications, DEC MAILworks for Macintosh is graphics oriented,
using icons, pull-down menus, windows, and on-line help .
The Macintosh client connects to the server through the DECnet
network, through the PATHWORKS AppleTalk/DECnet
gateway, or remote locations through asynchronous DECnet connections. Mail attachments can include MacBinary files (data fork
and resource fork or data fork only), allowing the highest level of
interoperability in today's heterogeneous computing environment.
Prerequisite

PATHWORKS for Macintosh (contains the license for DEC
MAILworks for Macintosh Vl.O or 1.1)
Media and Documentation

QA-YXlAA-HB

DEC MAILworks for Macintosh media
(RX24) and documentation

Additional Documentation

QA-YXlAA-GZ

DEC MAILworks for Macintosh
documentation (10 sets)

Personal Computing

3.11

Personal Computer Mail Solutions
DEC MAILworks for DOS

This DEC MAILworks product is a DOS character-cell implementation of the DEC MAILworks client software. It can be used on
any industry-standard DOS system supported by PATHWORKS
for DOS. The license for this client is packaged with
PATHWORKS for DOS.
DEC MAILworks for DOS users can connect to the server over
local area networks by way of the DECnet network, by dialing in
from remote locations through asynchronous DECnet connections,
or through asynchronous connections through LAT, X.25 PAD, or
dial-up without benefit of DECnet.
Prerequisites

Any valid PATHWORKS for DOS configuration with a minimum
of 640 Kbytes of memory (420 Kbytes of free memory is required
after loading PATHWORKS for DOS); support for 8-bit characters
is provided only on EGA and VGA machines; DOS operating system V3.3 or higher; PATHWORKS for DOS V4.0 or higher (contains the license for DEC MAILworks for DOS)
Media and Documentation

QA-VZ8AA-H7
QA-VZ8AA-HB

DEC MAILworks for DOS media (RX33)
and documentation
DEC MAILworks for DOS media (RX24)
and documentation

Using the ALL-IN-1 IOS as its server, MOBILIZER for ALL-IN-1
simulates an ALL-IN-1 electronic messaging session with a subset
of the ALL-IN-1 IOS Electronic Mail, Folder, Nickname, and Distribution List commands.
Software Requirements

Configuration requirements are a VMS account with full DCL
access on a VAX server running VMS V5 .1 or higher (including
VMS Required Saveset and VMS Utilities Saveset) and ALL-IN-1
V2.3 or higher.
Hardware Requirements

The PC requires 1-Mbyte RAM, 512-Kbytes storage (in addition
to space for MS-KERMIT) and MS-DOS V3.3 or higher. The right
to use the server is included in the client license.
Server Media and Documentation

QA-XWWAA-H5/HM MOBILIZER for ALL-IN-1 VAX VMS
Server media and documentation
(TK50/magtape)
Client License

QL-XWXAW-AA

Client Media and Documentation

QA-XWXAA-HB

Additional Documentation

QA-VZ8AA-GZ

DEC MAILworks for DOS documentation
(one set)

MOBILIZER for ALL-IN-1 DOS PC client
license

MOBILIZER for ALL-IN-1 DOS client
media (RX24) and documentation

POQET Software License

QL-XWXAX-AA

MOBILIZER for ALL-IN-1

MOBILIZER for ALL-IN- 1 DOS POQET
client license

POQET Media and Documentation
MOBILIZER for ALL-IN-1 allows business travelers to stay in
touch with their electronic mail, even when they are out of the
office. MOBILIZER for ALL-IN-1 users communicate through the
familiar ALL-IN-1 interface, even using distribution lists from
their office-based ALL-IN-1 account.
By bringing remote DEC MAILworks capabilities to portable systems, Digital allows the business traveler to stay in touch with
the office without suffering through interminable low-speed
connections.
MOBILIZER provides basic terminal emulation and bidirectional
asynchronous message transfer capabilities between DOS
notebook, laptop , and palmtop computers and the ALL-IN-1
Integrated Office System's Mail and File Cabinet V2.3 or V2.4.

3.12

Personal Computing

QA-XWXAA-HS

MOBILIZER for ALL-IN-1 DOS POQET
media (RX24) and documentation

Additional Documentation

QA-XWWAA-GZ
QA-XWXAA-GZ
QA-XWXAB-GZ

MOBILIZER for ALL-IN-1 server
documentation
MOBILIZER for ALL-IN-1 DOS
documentation
MOBILIZER for ALL-IN-1 DOS POQET
documentation

LAN-Based Applications
PATHWORKS Links for Windows
PATHWORKS Links for Windows is a set of Microsoft Windows
applications that run on PATHWORKS for DOS or PATHWORKS
for Windows. PATHWORKS Links includes two components:
PATHWORKS Conferencing for Windows and Browser for Windows. PATHWORKS links with MAIL includes three components:
PATHWORKS Conferencing for Windows, PATHWORKS Browser
for Windows and DEC MAILworks for Windows.
When these components are integrated into a PATHWORKS LAN,
users receive benefits that surpass the sum of the parts.
PATHWORKS Links for Windows enables users to improve personal productivity and improve their ability to navigate the network and work as a team with other users on the network.
Conferencing for Windows, also available separately (see page
3.14), is a client to the VAX Notes services available on the
PATHWORKS server. This product enables groups to set up electronic conferences for sharing information regardless of time,
location, or type of desktop.
Browser for Windows, also available separately (see page 3.13 ),
allows a user easy access to DOS files anywhere on the wide-area
network, regardless of the application used to produce the information. This product provides users with a global view of their
files across multiple disks and directories. PATHWORKS Browser
provides simple information-retrieval capabilities as well as more
sophisticated browsing based on content.

Browser includes viewing and conversion services for the PC
environment. It can handle all the intricacies determining how
and when conversions take place. For a complete list of supported viewers and converters refer to the PATHWORKS Browser
SPD 37.42.
PATHWORKS Links for Windows with MAIL options provides
X.400 mail capabilities to Microsoft Windows users. This component enables Microsoft Windows users to exchange electronic
mail with PC, Macintosh, workstation, and video terminal users.
In addition, users can exchange mail with users of the ALL-IN-1
Integrated Office System, UL TRIX, VMSmail, PROFS, SNADS,
DISOSS , and other mail systems that support the X.400 standard
or Digital's MAILbus. See page 3.11 for more information about
DEC MAILworks for Windows.
Software Requirements

PATHWORKS Links for Windows requires PATHWORKS for DOS
client software, Microsoft Windows V3 .x, PATHWORKS for VMS
server software, and the VMS Notes Server. Additionally, if you
have PATHWORKS Links with MAIL for Windows, the DEC
MAILworks Server and VAX Message Router are required.
License

QL-MEBAG-2B
PATHWORKS Links for Windows
(includes PATHWORKS Browser and PATHWORKS Conferencing)
personal use license
QL-MCUAG-2B
PATHWORKS Links for Windows with
MAIL (includes PATHWORKS Browser, PATHWORKS Conferencing, and DEC MAILworks for Windows) personal use license
Media and Documentation

QB-MEBAA-SA
PATHWORKS Links (includes
PATHWORKS Browser and PATHWORKS Conferencing) media,
documentation, and license
QA-MEBAA-HB
PATHWORKS Links (includes
PATHWORKS Browser and PATHWORKS Conferencing) media
and documentation
QB-MCUAA-SA
PATHWORKS Links (includes
PATHWORKS Browser, PATHWORKS Conferencing, and DEC
MAILworks for Windows) media, documentation, and license

QA-MCUAA-HB
PATHWORKS Links (includes
PATHWORKS Browser, PATHWORKS Conferencing, and DEC
MAILworks for Windows) media (RX24) and documentation
Additional Documentation

QA-MEBAA-GZ
PATHWORKS Links (includes
PATHWORKS Browser and PATHWORKS Conferencing) documentation
QA-MCUAA-GZ
PATHWORKS Links (includes
PATHWORKS Browser, PATHWORKS Conferencing, and DEC
MAILworks for Windows) documentation

BfO\hel' for \'Vindowt
Browser for Windows extends the file management capabilities
for navigating PC and/ or network drives. The Browser lets users
access, view, convert, and locate information anywhere on their
systems.
Users can access files on the local PC as well as disks anywhere
in a LAN-based network, thus offering true distributed processing
capabilities (a PC LAN connection is required for this support).
The Browser viewing and conversion services can be integrated
with some leading conversion programs. A common user interface is presented which "front-ends" the appropriate viewing and
conversion service for that format. For a complete list of viewers
and converters, see SPD 37.42.
Browser provides many ways to locate information. Filters mask
(block out) unwanted information and allow users to obtain
detailed information quickly. For example, filtering is used in a
large directory containing many file types when users want to see
only specific file types.
Other features include:
·Easy-to-Use Menus and Online Help
Browser is layered on Microsoft Windows. All functions can
be accessed by easy-to-use pull-down menus or pushbuttons.
Dialog boxes are used to input information.
Context-sensitive Help allows users to use the mouse to
point and click a pull-down menu item to get help. This
feature is an extension of extensive online Help
documentation.
• Mail Integration
Browser supports DEC MAILworks for Windows or
PATHWORKS MAIL to enable users to send electronic mail
or messages to other users on the network using cc:Mail for
Windows and Microsoft MAIL.
• Use in a Network or on a Standalone PC
Browser is an application that is layered on Microsoft
Windows. Optionally, Browser software is also designed for
use in any PC LAN such as NetWare, LAN Manager, Vines,
or PATHWORKS.
• Accelerator Buttons
Accelerator buttons give users quick access to frequently
used menu options.
• Ability to Customize the Environment
Users can customize Browser to fit their needs and
computing styles.

(Continued)

Personal Computing

3.13

LAN-Based Applications
I

Browser for Windows (Continued)
• Flexible File Filtering and Searching
The Browser search capability facilitates locating information
within files located on multiple directories, including
network drives. Users can search for:
- Partial file names (starts/ends with, contains)
- File content (contains/equals) •.
- Creation dates (on, before, or after a specified time)
-File size (equal, greater than, smaller than)

The PATHWORKS Conferencing software is designed or use in a
client/server environment. The following server products are
required:
•VAX Notes
•PATHWORKS for VMS
A DECnet connection to a VAX Notes server is required.
PATHWORKS for DOS communication software is required.
License

QL-MCWAG-2B

License

QL-MCVAG-2B

Browser for Windows personal use license

Media and Documentation

QB-MCVAA-AA
QA-MCVAA-HB

Browser for Windows personal use license,
media, and documentation
Browser for Windows media (RX24) and
documentation

PATHWORKS Conferencing for Windows
personal use license

Media and Documentation

QB-MCWAA-SA

QA-MCWAA-HB

PATHWORKS Conferencing for Windows
personal use license, media, and
documentation
PATHWORKS Conferencing for Windows
media (RX24) and documentation

Additional Documentation

PATHWORKS Desktop Backup

QA-MCVAA-GZ

Digital's PATHWORKS Desktop Backup product is a highperformance, low-cost, easy-to-use network backup solution providing backup and restore services to network-attached personal
computers.

PATHWORKS Links for Windows
documentation

PATHWORKS Conferencing for Windows enables Microsoft Windows users to set up an electronic conference for sharing information regardless of time or location. Computer conferencing is a
proven, computer supported, electronic messaging technology.
Conferencing can be used for a variety of applications such as an
electronic bulletin board, collaborative document authoring and
review, and internal classes or seminars.
Features

• Distributed Access
PATHWORKS Conferencing clients can access VAX Notes
conferences on any VAX Notes server node in a DECnet
network, therefore offering true distributed processing
capability.
·Easy to Use
PATHWORKS Conferencing is layered on Microsoft
Windows. All functions can be accessed by easy-to-use
pull-down menus or pushbuttons. Dialog boxes are used to
input information.
PATHWORKS Conferencing is designed for inexperienced
users. On-line Help and tutorial documentation assists in
familiarizing new users with PATHWORKS Conferencing
quickly and easily.
• Built-in Editor
The PATHWORKS Conferencing client has a built-in editor,
so users can create their own topics and replies without
leaving the application.
• Imported Text
PATHWORKS Conferencing allows topics and replies to be
created outside of the PATHWORKS Conferencing
application (using any editor that can produce ASCII output
files) and then later imported into the conference.
• Mail Integration
PATHWORKS Conferencing supports the DEC MAILworks
for Windows or PATHWORKS MAIL to allow users to send
notes to other users from within VAX Notes.
PATHWORKS Conferencing, one of the components of
PATHWORKS Links for Windows is also available
separately.

3.14

Personal Computing

PATHWORKS Desktop Backup uses a client/server layered software approach to provide unattended backup of multiple PCs to
one or more servers. Typical clients are IBM or IBM-compatible
PCs that have local disks with backup requirements. For Vl.O,
clients must use MS-DOS as an operating system and may optionally use Windows 3 .0. A typical server is VAX VMS platform with
any supported tape drive; multiple clients on the network can be
backed up by a single Desktop Backup Server system. The server
writes VMS backup-compatible savesets.
It supports VAX VMS servers, PATHWORKS for DOS clients, and
PATHWORKS for DOS with Microsoft Windows 3.0 clients.
Features

• Easy-to-use graphical user interface
• Supports both unattended or attended backup
• Allows for grouping several client backups into a single
backup job
• Flexible scheduling of backups with automatic rescheduling
• Backup history database for lookup of previously saved files
• For each client, files can be specified to be backed up or
restored or can be specifically excluded from the backup
process.
• Backup administrator can access system logs of events, such
as when backups have occurred.
• System security features to maintain confidentiality of data.
Benefits

• Protects valuable organizational data, which is increasingly
resident on personal computers
• Increases user productivity by:
- Eliminating the need for users to backup their own
client software or data.
- Allowing file restorations on demand at any time
(Continued)

LAN-Based Applications
PATHWORKS Desktop Backup (Continued)

• Increases backup administrator flexibility-PCs on a
network can now be scheduled and backed up similarly to a
large computer system. Unattended backups can be
scheduled at times when applications are not running.
• Maintains system security-Backup administrators maintain
a high level of system security through passwords and
system registration.
• VMS backup saveset format facilitates emergency file
restoration on any VAX VMS system, ensuring higher data
availability.
Hardware Prerequisites

Any VAX VMS servers
IBM or IBM-compatible PCs
Software Prerequisites

PATHWORKS for DOS Clients, Version 4.0 or higher
PATHWORKS for DOS with Microsoft Windows Clients
(optional)
Resources

Features

• Separate application windows for each X application
displayed by the X server
• eXcursion Setup Utility for installing eXcursion under
Microsoft Windows
• Option to add X application icons to a Microsoft Windows
· Program Manager group
• eXcursion Control Panel for easy access to X application
and customization features
• Extensive online help including answers to questions about
setting up or using eXcursion
· Cut and paste text or graphics between X applications and
Microsoft Windows applications
• Support for VGA and higher resolution monitors
• Display up to 256 colors with the appropriate graphics
controller
• Complete library of fonts to use with X applications (both
75 and 100 dots per inch)

SPD 41.52, SPD 41.55

• Compile new fonts from source files, if needed for a
particular application

Ordering Information

• Redefine the use of one or more keys on the keyboard

QL-MR1A9-A9
QL-MR2AW-2B
QA-MR1AA-H5.1.0
QA-MRlAA-HM.1.0
QA-MR2AA-H7.1.0
QA-MR2AA-HB.1.0

Software license for server, any VAX
Software license for PC, client
PATHWORKS desktop backup for VMS
server (TK50)
PATHWORKS desktop backup for VMS
server (magtape)
PATHWORKS desktop backup for DOS
(5.25-inch diskettes)
PATHWORKS desktop backup for DOS
(3 .25-in ch diskettes)

Additional Documentation

QA-MCWAA-GZ

PATHWORKS Links for Windows
documentation

eXcursion for Windows

• Specify a personal password for access to eXcursion
• Microsoft Windows manages the X window applications
• Three-button mouse emulation
eXcursion for Windows application software is layered on
Microsoft Windows, creating a unified operating environment
where PC users can take advantage of X applications without
learning a new interface.
eXcursion for Windows allows a personal computer running the
DOS operating system and Microsoft Windows to use
X client applications available from a remote system, using
DECnet or TCP/ IP protocols. eXcursion for Windows supports
PATHWORKS for DOS (TCP/IP), 3Com TCP with Demand Protocol Architecture or FTP PC/TCP TCP/IP stacks. eXcursion for
Windows supports PATHWORKS for DOS using the DECnet
protocol.
Software Requirements

eXcursion for Windows is a layered application on Microsoft
Windows; it requires Microsoft Windows V3.0 or V3.1.

eXcursion for Windows enables a Microsoft Windows user to
display and control X Window applications on a PC within the
Microsoft Windows environment. This product is a full implementation of the MIT X Windows Version 11 Release 4 server
and provides local Microsoft Windows window management and
control for applications based on DECwindows Motif, Open
Look, or other X-11 toolkit implementations.

The eXcursion for Windows software supports DECnet and
TCP/IP communication environments. One of the following communications software packages is required:

Components

• TCP/IP using PATHWORKS for DOS (TCP/IP) (Vl.0 or
higher)

• eXcursion for Windows server software
• Installation utility
• Program start utility for DECnet
• Dynamic Link Libraries (DLL) for network communications

• DECnet using PATHWORKS for DOS (V4.0 or higher)

·.:::s

Q..

·TCP/IP using 3Com TCP with Demand Protocol
Architecture (Vl.2 or higher)

• eXcursion for Windows User Guide, Quick Start Card plus

Media and Documentation

extensive online help.

QA-MG7 AA-AB
QA-MG7 AA-AA

• DECwindows Motif, MIT, Open Look fonts , and OSF/Motif

·TCP/IP using PC/TCP from FTP Software, Inc. (V2.05 or
higher)

eXcursion for Windows, (RX33) media
eXcursion for Windows, (RX24) media

• Keyboard mapping files
• Template initialization file

Personal Computing

3.15

LAN-Based Applications
Vivace for Windows Version
Vivace for Windows is an object-oriented, customizable desktop
manager that helps Microsoft Windows users work more easily
with multiple applications, network services, and large numbers
of documents. Vivace runs on standalone personal computers and
on any PC LAN.
~ '
Vivace creates a customized representation of the user's personal
work environment. Vivace uses icons to depict file cabinets, documents, applications, network services, printers, FAX machines,
CD-ROM drives, and other peripherals.
The desktop manager enables users to search for documents in
archives stored on PCs or PC LANs, basing their search on document content, name, description, creation date, or locationregardless of what application produced the documents.
Vivace currently is available in eight languages: Dutch, English
(U.K. ), English (U.S.), French, German, Italian, Spanish, and
Swedish.
Features

• Document Handling-Users can create, open, delete, move,
copy, rename, and print documents, and retrieve them from
the wastebasket via icons. Users can display information
about each document, such as the creation date, date last
modified, owner, and the full DOS pathname.
• Powerful Search Facility-Users can search for documents
and compartments by specifying content, name, description,
owner, or creation date. The user can search any or all filing
levels within Vivace. All items found in a search are
immediately available for editing. Users can conduct
searches in several steps, narrowing the results at each step.
A long search can be interrupted to inspect the result (to
the point of interruption) ; the user then can continue the
search or start editing the document.
· Naming Convention-Users can assign meaningful names
(up to 24 characters) to documents, filing compartments,
and services. Documents and filing compartments can have
an additional 60-character description for further
identification.
• Document Filing-Vivace stores all documents in archives.
The system automatically sets up one archive for each user;
however, each user can choose to maintain up to 30
archives. Users also can set up the number of storage levels
they want to use, up to a maximum of six.
Users can file documents at any level in an archive. A user
can retrieve a filed document, read or edit it on the
desktop, and then ask the system to file it automatically in
its original location. Related documents can be filed
together, regardless of the types of applications used to
create them.
Most of the document-handling, functions are available in
the archives; the user does not have to put the document on
the desktop first.
Users can create, open, copy, rename, and delete filing
compartments such as drawers and folders , just as for
documents. When the user moves, copies, or deletes a filing
compartment, or retrieves it from the wastebasket, all of the
compartment's contents move with it.

• Customizable Document Backup-Whenever the user deletes
a document, Vivace places a copy in the wastebasket. The
user can predetermine the number of calendar days items
are to be kept in the wastebasket. When this holding period
has expired, the user can choose whether the item should
be deleted or retained as backup.
• Import of Existing DOS Files-DOS files not filed under
Vivace are displayed as DOS files on the Vivace desktop and
in the archives. The user can convert these files into Vivace
documents by importing them. Importing a document
involves associating it with one of the editors set up in
Vivace, choosing an icon for it, and giving it a Vivace name
and description.
·Sharing Resources in a Network-Vivace users whose PCs
are connected to a LAN can share the use of resources and
networked applications, and can access shared archives. All
access rights set up for the network remain in force.
• Context-Sensitive Help-At any time, the user can display
"help" information about the current situation or action.
Furthermore, the help facility tracks the user's actions: As
the user opens windows and menus , or selects items or
menu entries, the help information changes accordingly.
Users can open, close, move, or size the help window just
like any other window.
• Open and Extendable Environment-Users can specify
third-party applications to be used as document editors, as
services on the desktop, or as entries in the tools menu. For
example, the user simply browses for the command (.exe,
.bat, etc.) that starts the application. Users can represent
services with icons, from a set of 32 icons.
• Simple Integration of Applications-Vivace handles
documents created by many types of Windows and
non-Windows applications. Out of the box, Vivace
recognizes and automatically integrates 40 popular PC
applications. Additional applications can be integrated
through a simple scripting capability. By means of default
document icons, start-up commands, and templates, Vivace
provides for automatic integration with those applications
present on the system. This integration works with the
following popular applications:
Corel DRAW
cc:Mail for Windows
DaVinci for Windows
DisplayWrite
DrawPerfect
Framework III
DECwrite for Windows
Friendly FAX
Harvard Project Manager
Harvard Graphics
Hollywood
Legacy for Windows
Lotus 1-2-3
Lotus Ami Pro
Lotus Freelance Graphics
Lotus Symphony
Microsoft Cardfile
Microsoft Excel
Microsoft Mail for Windows Microsoft Multiplan
Microsoft Notepad
Microsoft Paintbrush
Microsoft PowerPoint
Microsoft Word
Microsoft Word for Windows Microsoft Write
PageMaker Table Editor
PageMaker
Persuasion
PlanPerfect
Project Manager Workbench Quattro Pro
RapidFile
Signature
Storyboard
SuperBase4
Upword
SuperCalc5
WingZ
Ventura Publisher
WordStar
WordPerfect

(Continued)
3.16

Personal Computing

LAN-Based Applications
Vivace for Windows Version (Continued)
• Easy Installation and Maintenance-Vivace offers one
easy-to-use interface for daily work and for activities such as
installation and integration of document editors, services,
and tools.
Hardware Requirements:

Vivace will run on any Intel 80286-, 80386-, or 80486-based personal computer that includes 1 Mbyte of extended memory (2
Mbytes recommended), a 40-Mbyte hard disk or network disk
with 1.5-Mbyte of free space, a 720-Kbyte diskette drive, and a
mouse or other Windows pointing device. In a PC LAN, at least
one base system must have a 720-Kbyte diskette drive; in an
asynchronous network environment, every base system must have
one 720-Kbyte diskette drive and 1.5-Mbyte of free hard-disk
space.
Software Requirements:

Vivace requires MS-DOS Version 3.3, 4.0, 4.1, or 5.0; and
Microsoft Windows Version 3 .0 or 3 .1.
Vivace works with Novell NetWare, Microsoft LAN Manager,
Banyan VINES , and Digital PATHWORKS.
Media and Documentation

QB-MQGAA-SA

Vivace for Windows (shrink wrapped kit)
includes media and documentation

Personal Computing

3.17

PATHWORKS Packaged Servers
PATHWORKS Packaged Servers Comparison Chart
Now users can easily combine the power of their standalone PCs with the resources, security, and manageability of a local
server system. Digital offers three PATHWORKS server packages to help create a client/server network to fit any group.
These packages have everything needed, including software, hardware, and documentation..

PATHWORKS
Server 333

PATHWORKS
Server 433

PATHWORKS
Server 3100

CPU

Intel 80386

Intel 80486

VAX (CMOS)

Clock speed/performance

33 MHz

Models 30 and 40: 25 MHz
Model 80: 50 MHz
Model 90: 72 MHz

Standard memory

8 Mbytes

12 Mbytes

8 Mbytes

Maximum memory

16 Mbytes

64 Mbytes

Models 30 and 40: 32 MB
Model 80: 72 MB
Model 90: 128 MB

Storage interface

SCSI, IDE

SCSI, EISA

SCSI

Standard hard disk storage

170 Mbytes

640 Mbytes

209 Mbytes

Maximum hard disk storage

340 Mbytes

4.4 Gbytes

8.7 Gbytes

Diskette storage

1.44 Mbytes optional

1.44 Mbytes standard

1.44 Mbytes optional

150 Mbytes

95 Mbytes

600 Mbytes

600 Mbytes
(Not on Model 30)

Tape support

150 Mbytes

CD-ROM support
Console included

Color VGA graphics

Monochrome character cell

PC Client operating systems

DOS, OS/2

DOS, OS/2 3
Macintosh 3

Network connectors

BNC standard
AUI optional

BNC standard
AUI standard

Software and documentation
included

PATHWORKS for OS/2 Server
software and server license;
PATHWORKS for OS/2 Client
software;4 OS/2 SE Vl .21
operating system

PATHWORKS for OS/2 Server
software and server license;
PATHWORKS for OS/2 Client
software;4 OS/ 2 SE Vl.21
operating system

PATHWORKS for VMS;
PATHWORKS for DOS;
VMS V5.5

Menu interface

Yes

Client licenses included

User installable

Yes

Yes5

Yes

Dedicated or non-dedicated
server

Dedicated or non-dedicated
server; 70+ simultaneous
client PCs6; local- or wide-area
networking

Wide area network package
available

Yes

Recommended use

Dedicated or non-dedicated
server; low-cost Intel server;
small- to medium-sized office

VAX Unit of Performance

The PATHWORKS Server 333 offers the option of adding a second 150-Mbyte streaming tape, available separately.
With the addition of optional software loaded on the server.
4
Client license(s) must be ordered separately.
5
When used in conjunction with a VMS or ULTRIX server.
6
Actual number is application dependent.
3

3.18

Personal Computing

PATHWORKS Server 333
The PATHWORKS Server 333 is recommended for small work groups of PC users needing to share file, print, and resource
services. This low-priced, Intel-based solution is ideal when local area networking is the primary application. Providing
PATHWORKS services and full support for LAN Manager V2.0 networking systems, this solution is particularly appealing for
entry-level PC LANs.

A DECstation 333c system, this 33 -MHz 80386-based server supports the High-Performance File System (HPFS) and is fully
compatible with Digital networks and PATHWORKS installations.
-~~----~~~----..~~--~----"""""""'--~-~,~~---·~-r~·~,

·Packaged PATHWORKS Server 333 is a complete 120-V_system and includes U.S. keyboard and all required power cords.
To order a non-U.S. system, see DECstation 333c order menu.
· Options ordered from this menu will be shipped separately for customer installation.
• Packaged system includes a server license. If server is to function as both a server and a client, order client license.
· A client license must be purchased for each additional client PC.

PATHWORKS Server 333 includes
· PATHWORKS for OS/2 server license, software media and documentation
· OS/2 Standard Edition Vl .21 operating system
· 8 Mbytes of memory, expandable to 16 Mbytes
• 32-Kbyte cache memory
· 101-key industry-standard keyboard
· Two-button serial mouse
· 14-inch VGA color monitor
• SCSI/ IDE controllers
• 170-Mbyte SCSI hard disk
· DEC EtherWORKS Ethernet network interface card

Order Number

Memory

Monitor

Internal Storage

DJ-PC4S3-AB

8 Mbytes

14-inch color

1 x 17 0-Mbyte SCSI disk

Step i4t:i>i@ge:
Select additional storage if required.
• System supports a maximum of three internal drives (one removable device; diskette or tape) and two SCSI or IDE hard
drives or two removable devices and one hard drive.
· System includes SCSI and IDE controllers.

Select a removable media device if required. 60-Mbyte tape drive uses diskette drive interface.

PC4XR-GA
PC4XR-EA
PC4XR-FA
PC4XT-CA
PC4XT-DA

360-Kbyte 5.25-inch diskette drive
1.2-Mbyte 5 .25-inch diskette drive
1.44-Mbyte 3.50-inch diskette drive
60-Mbyte tape drive
60-Mbyte tape cartridge for (PC4XT-CA)

System includes one 170-Mbyte SCSI hard disk drive.

IDE Drives:
PC4XR-BD
PC4XR-EB
PC4XR-DB

52-Mbyte 3.5-inch hard disk drive
105-Mbyte 3 .5-inch hard disk drive
120-Mbyte 3.5-inch hard disk drive

Personal Computing 3.19

PATHWORKS Server 333
Step 2a-.lntemal Storage (Continued)

.........~~~--'

~~----~----~~~~--~~~~~----~~---

SCSI Drives:

PC4XR-CA
PCXAR-AA
PC4XR-HA
PCXAR-AB
PC4XT-AA
PC4XT-BA

80-Mbyte 3.5-inch hard disk drive
209-Mbyte 3.5-inch hard disk drive
320-Mbyte 5.25-inch hard disk drive
426-Mbyte 3.5-inch hard disk drive
150-Mbyte SCSI tape drive for DOS
150-Mbyte tape cartridge for (PC4XT-AA)

Step 3-Memory
• System includes 8 Mbytes of memory.
· System supports a maximum of 16 Mbytes of memory.
· Memory expansion adapter is required when expanding to greater than 10 Mbytes.

PC46M-AA

Memory expansion adapter

For a total memory of:

Order this quantity:

of this Order Number:

1 Mbyte

PC4XM-CA

4 Mbytes
8 Mbytes
12 Mbytes
16 M bytes

2
4
6

PC4XM-CB

Step 4· Client Licenses
Client license
· Required if server is to function as both server and client
• Required for each additional client PC

QL-YFWAW-AA
QL-OTLA9-AA

PATHWORKS for OS/ 2 client license
PATHWORKS for DOS client license

Step 5.. Math Coprocessor
PCXAP-CD

Intel 80387 math coprocessor

Step 6-Documentation
PC46Y-CC
PC46Y-DD

3.20

Personal Computing

User documentation set (multilingual versions)
Technical reference manual (English language only)

PATHWORKS Server 433
The PATHWORKS Server 433 is based on a DECpc 433T system, an Intel 8Q486-based 33-MHz microprocessor using EISA
bus architecture. This server is recommended for workgroups of PC users needing to share file, print, and resource services.
The PATHWORKS Server 433 provides PATHWORKS services and full support for the LAN Manager V2.0 network
operating system and is particularly appealing for workgroup PC LANs.
This server supports the High-Performance File System (HPFS) of ·OS/2 Vl.21 and is fully compatible with Digital networks
and PATHWORKS installations.

Step 1-Packaged System
·Packaged PATHWORKS Server 433 is a complete 120-V system and includes a U.S. keyboard and all required power
cords. To order a non-U.S. system, see order menu for DECpc 433T.
· Options ordered from this menu will be shipped separately for customer installation.
· Packaged system includes a server license. If server is to function as both a server and a client, order client license.
· A client license must be purchased for each client PC.
PATHWORKS Server 433 includes

· PATHWORKS for OS/2 server license, software media, and documentation
• OS/2 Standard Edition Vl.21 operating system
· 12 Mbytes of memory, expandable to 64 Mbytes
• 128 Kbytes cache memory, expandable to 256 Kbytes
· 101-key industry-standard keyboard
·Two-button serial mouse
• Video controller
· 14-inch monochrome monitor
• EISA/SCSI controller
• One 3.5-inch 1.44 diskette drive
· Two 320-Mbyte SCSI disk drives
· DEC EtherWORKS network interface

Order Number

Memory

Monitor

Internal Storage

DJ-PCTSl-AA

12 Mbytes

14-inch monochrome

2 x 320 Mbytes SCSI disks
1 x 1.44 Mbytes diskette

Step 2--Storage
• System supports a maximum of ten drives (two diskettes and eight half-height drives) or (two diskettes and four
full-height drives) .
· System includes one 1.44-Mbyte diskette drive.
· Select one additional removable media device if required.
PC4XR-EA

1.2-Mbyte 5.25-inch diskette drive

· System includes two 320-Mbyte SCSI hard disk drives.
• Select additional devices if required:
PCXAR-AA
PCXAR-AB
PCXAT-AC
PCXBR-AA
PCXBR-AB

200-Mbyte half-height hard disk drive
426-Mbyte half-height hard disk drive
525-Mbyte half-height Quarter Inch Cartridge (QIC) for OS/2
650-Mbyte 5.25-inch full-height hard disk drive
1.0-Gbyte 5.25-inch full-height hard disk drive

Personal Computing 3.21

PATHWORKS Server 433
Step 3-Memory
--~--

• System includes 12 Mbytes of memory (maximum 64 Mbytes).
• Select memory in quantities listed below.

For a total memory of:

of this Order Number:

Order this quantity:

4 Mbytes

Included

8 Mbytes
12 Mbytes
16 Mbytes

2
4
6

PCXAM-DB

20 Mbytes

PCXAM-DC

24 Mbytes

2
2

PCXAM-DB
PCXAM-DC

28 Mbytes

4
2

PCXAM-DB
PCXAM-DC

36 Mbytes

PCXAM-DC

40 Mbytes

2
4

PCXAM-DB
PCXAM-DC

52 Mbytes

PCXAM-DC

64 Mbytes

PCXAM-DC

PCXAM-DB
PCXAM-DC

2-Mbyte (2 x 1-Mbyte SIMMs)
8-Mbyte (2 x 4-Mbyte SIMMs)

Note: To achieve 64 Mbytes, 4 Mbytes (PCXAM-DB) included in packaged system, must be removed.

Step 4-Cache Memory

;.._~

__ __________
_.;:..

-~~-··-~----

~----~-~~~~~~~~~~--~

· System includes 128-Kbyte cache.
• Select an additional cache memory upgrade, if required.
PCTlM-AA

__ ____

128-Kbyte cache expansion upgrade
_.:....;;_.,

Step 5-Client Licenses

~~~-----~~~~~---~~--~--.

~~~~~~~~--~~~~~-----------~~~~~~--~~---~~~----

Client license
· Required if server is to function as both server and client
· Required for each additional client PC
QL-YFWAW-AA
QL-OTLA9-AA

PATHWORKS for OS/2 client license
PATHWORKS for DOS client license

Step 6-Math Coprocessor
PCXAP-DB

Math coprocessor (Weitek 4167, 33 MHz)

Step 7- Ethernet Controller

---

. System includes DEC EtherWORKS network interface.
· Select Ethernet controller cards, if required.
• Cables are not included; order BNC, twisted pair, and AUi cables separately.
DElOO-AA
DE101-AA
DE200-AC
DE201-AC

EtherWORKS LC Ethernet adapter
EtherWORKS LC/TP Ethernet adapter
EtherWORKS Turbo Ethernet adapter (included in packaged server)
EtherWORKS Turbo/IP Ethernet adapter

Step 8-Documentation
PCTlY-AA

3.22

Personal Computing

Technical reference manual (English language only)

PATHWORKS Server 3100
The MicroVAX 3100 PATHWORKS systems provide the means to get greater productivity from desktop systems by connecting PC clients based on MS-DOS, OS/2, UNIX, and Macintosh. Digital's advanced client/server computing, based on NAS
(Network Application Support) delivers a wide range of solutions to help integrate all the different desktop workstations
and PCs within an organization. Digital's preconfigured MicroVAX 3100 PATHWORKS systems provide the first, simple step
to an integrated enterprise by providing MS-DOS and VAX connectivity packages.

Step 1-Packaged Systems
--~~~~~~~~---~-~~-~------~~~~~~-~~__.

PATHWORKS packages include
· Small enclosure with CPU/FPU (Model 30) or large enclosure with CPU/FPU (Models 40, 80 and 90)
·Memory-parity (Models 30 40 and 80), ECC (Model 90)
· 802.3/Ethernet interface (ThinWire/thick wire) with terminators
· Ethernet kit; includes ThinWire T-connector with ENC terminators and 15-pin thick wire terminator
· Synchronous SCSI interface for connecting internal and external SCSI devices; external connection via a 50-pin external
SCSI connector
· Three DEC-423 asynchronous serial lines (MMJ data leads only)
• EIA-232 asynchronous serial line with modem control (25-pin D-subminiature connector)
• H8575-a 25-pin-to-MMJ DEC-423 to EIA-232 adapter
• External SCSI terminator
· 7.6-meter (25-foot) console terminal cable
· 120-V power cord (country-specific power cord required for 240-V systems)
·Universal power supply that automatically adjusts to 88-132 Vac or 176-264 Vac
·Hardware documentation: Model 30 QZ-K44AA-GZ; Models 40, 80, 90 QZ-K44AB-GZ
· Software licenses: OpenVMS 2-user license (with Rdb/VMS runtime license) and DECnet end-node license with
PATHWORKS for VMS
·Media: PATHWORKS for MS-DOS media on TK50 (QA-OTLAA-H5) and PATHWORKS for VMS on TK50 (QA-A93AA-H5)

Order Number

PATHWORKS Server

Memory

Internal Storage
RZ25 = 426 MB;
RZ26 = 1.0 GB;
TZJO = 95 MB

DJ-31FP1-A9
DJ-31GP1-A9
DJ-31HP1-A9
DJ-31PP1-C9
DJ-31PP1-E9

MicroVAX 3100 Model 30
MicroVAX 3100 Model 40
MicroVAX 3100 Model 80
MicroVAX 3100 Model 90
MicroVAX 3100 Model 90

16 MB
16 MB
16 MB
16 MB
64 MB

RZ25 + TZ30
RZ25 + TZ30
RZ25 + TZ30
RZ26 + TZ30
RZ26 + TZ30

Step 2-Storage

..........~~--__....~~~---~----~~-~~~~~~~-------'-----'

~~--~~------

Configuration Rules

Model 30 supports:
· Maximum three half-height internal devices: one 5.25-inch removable media (diskette or tape) and two RZxx hard
disk drives
• Maximum two fully populated SZ12 dual-drive expansion boxes (four devices)
• Maximum two tape devices, one internal plus one external, or two external
Models 40, 80, 90 support:
· Maximum five half-height internal devices: two removable media (two TZKlO QIC tapes, two RX26 diskette, or one RRD42
compact disc (left cavity only) plus one TZ30 tape (right cavity only) and three RZxx hard disk drives.
Note: Internal RRD42 compact disc drive not supported in Model 30 systems

Personal Computing 3.23

PATHWORKS Server 3100
Step !-Storage (ContimltJ)
Field-installed options require Customer Service~ !nstallation.
Factory/Field Installed

RZ23L-EJ/EH
RZ24L-EJ/EH
RZ25-EN/EK
RZ26-EN/EK
RX26-EN/EL
TLZ06-HF/HG
TZ30-EK/EL
TZKlO-HF/HG
RRD42-EN/EK

121-Mbyte 3.5-inch half-height embedded SCSI fixed disk drive
245-Mbyte 3.5-inch half-height embedded SCSI fixed disk drive
426-Mbyte 3.5-inch half-height embedded SCSI fixed disk drive
1.0-Gbyte 3 .5-inch half-height embedded ·SCSI fixed disk drive
2.8-Mbyte 3.5-inch diskette drive
4.0-Gbyte 4-mm 3.5-inch half-height embedded SCSI digital audio tape (DAT) drive
95-Mbyte 3.5-inch steaming tape drive
320/525-Mbyte quarter-inch cartridge (QIC) tape drive
600-Mbyte compact disc drive (Models 4, 80, 90 only)
~------~~------~~---~~~~----------------~~---~-.

Step 3-Memory
Configuration Rules
Models 30 and 40:
Model 80:
Model 90:

Include 8 Mbytes of memory embedded on CPU, additional 8 Mbytes of parity memory in two
memory slots; six slots total. Maximum memory 32 Mbytes.
Includes 16 Mbytes of parity memory in four memory slots; six slots total. Maximum memory
72 Mbytes
Includes 16 or 64 Mbytes of ECC memory in four memory slots, eight slots total. Maximum
memory 128 Mbytes

Digital Single In-Line Memory (DSIM)

MS44L-BA
MS44-DA
MS44L-BC
MS44-DC

8-Mbyte parity (2 x 4-Mbyte 100-ns DSIM) , Model 30, 40, 80 systems
32-Mbyte parity (2 x 16-Mbyte 100-ns DSIM), Model 80
16-Mbyte ECC (4 x 4-Mbyte 100-ns DSIM), Model 90
64-Mbyte ECC (4 x 16-Mbyte 100-ns DSIM), Model 90

Note: ECC memory for Model 90 must be installed in sets of four
For more information on options available for MicroVAX 3100 Systems and Servers, see Chapter 1, VAX Systems, page 1.27.

3.24

Personal Computing

PC Networking Hardware
Note: Digital offers both Ethernet and Token Ring network interface cards.

EtherWORKS Net\tork Interface Cards
The EtherWORKS family of network interface cards gives personal computers
access to Ethernet networks and enables PCs to access the file , disk, application,
print, and ne~ork services of the PATHWORKS network personal computing
products.
.
Software drivers included with all EtherWORKS products have been certified by
Novell and Microsoft Corporation for compatibility with NetWare V2.15 DOS
Client and NDIS Vl.O.
Features

• Offers complete line of 8- , 16-, and 32-bit network interface cards for ThinWire,
thick wire, and unshielded twisted pair (lOBaseT) Ethernet
· Supports multivendor PC LAN software
·Supports PATHWORKS PC networks
· Provides high performance and increased productivity for networked PCs
• Connects PCs using Ethernet V2.0, 802.3/ Ethernet, and lOBaseT standards
• Requires only one PC slot
• Supports remote boot capability for PATHWORKS and NetWare
• Provides compatibility through built-in configurators
• Allows flexible network topologies for a wide range of networking options
• Provides multiple transmit and receive buffers and multicase address filtering to
ensure performance during heavy network traffic times
The seven members of the EtherWORKS family are:
• EtherWORKS LC (DElOO)
• EtherWORKS LC/ TP (DElOl )
· EtherWORKS Turbo (DE200)
• EtherWORKS Turbo/ TP (DE201)
• EtherWORKS Turbo TP/ BNC (DE202)
· EtherWORKS MicroChannel (DE210)
· EtherWORKS MicroChannel/ TP (DE212)
· EtherWORKS EISA TP/ BNC (DE422)

Personal Computing

3.25

PC Networking Hardware
EtherWORKS Comparison Chart
PC BUS
(See PC manual for bus type)
Wiring Media
Twisted Pair (RJ45 )
Unshielded or Shielded

ISA/EIS A
(for PC, PC/ XT, and PC/AT)

MicroChannel
(for PS/2)

EISA

EtherWORKS MC/ TP
• High performance
• 16-bit
• Also ThinWire
• Order DE212

EtherWORKS EISA TP/ BNC
· High performance
• 32-bit
• Also ThinWire
• Order DE422

EtherWORKS LC
· Low cost
• 8-bit
• Also thick wire
• Order DEIOO

EtherWORKS MC
• High performance
• 16-bit
• Also thick wire
• Order DE210

EtherWORKS EISA TP/ BNC
• High performance
• 32-bit
• Also twisted pair
· Order DE422

EtherWORKS Turbo
• High performance
• 16-bit
• Also thick wire
• Order DE200

EtherWORKS MC/ TP
• High performance
• 16-bit
• Also twisted pair
• Order DE212

EtherWORKS LC/ TP
•Low cost
• 8-bit
• Also thick wire
• Order DE101
EtherWORKS Turbo/ TP
· High performance
• 16-bit
• Also thick wire
· Order DE201
EtherWORKS Turbo TC/ BNC
• High performance
• 16-bit
• Also ThinWire
• Order DE202

Thin Wire (BNC)

EtherWORKS Turbo TP/ BNC
• High performance
• 16-bit
• Also twisted pair
• Order DE202
Thick Wire (AUI)

EtherWORKS LC
· Low cost
• 8-bit
• Also Thin Wire
• Order DEIOO
EtherWORKS LC/TP
·Low cost
• 8-bit
• Also twisted pair
• Order DE101
EtherWORKS Turbo
• High performance
• 16-bit
• Also ThinWire
• Order DE200
EtherWORKS Turbo TP
• High performance
• 16-bit
• Also twisted pair
· Order DE201

3.26

Personal Computing

EtherWORKS MC
· High performance
• 16-bit
• Also Thin Wire
• Order DE210

PC Networking Hardware
DEC EtherWORKS NIC Family Overview
LC

LC/TP

Turbo

Turbo/TP

Turbo
TP/BNC

MC/TP

EISA
TP/BNC

Bus
Architecture

XT, AT,
EISA

AT, EISA

MCA

EISA

Standard
Ethernet
Connection

BNC &
AUI

RJ45
UTP/STP
&AUI

BNC &
AUI

RJ45
UTP/STP
&AUI

RJ45
UTP/STP
&BNC

BNC &
AUI

RJ45
UTP/STP
&BNC

Order No.

DElOO

DE101

DE200

DE201

DE202

DE210

DE212

DE422

Data Path

8-bit

16-bit

32-bit

Slot Size

Half

Full

LSI Controller
Technology

Yes

Ethernet V2.0
Support

Yes

IEEE 802.3

Yes

NDIS

Yes, V2.0

NetWare, ODI

Yes, V3.ll
server and
client

Yes, V3 .ll
server and
client

Yes, V3.11
server and
client

Yes, V3 .11
server and
client

Yes, V3.11
server and
client

NetWare, IPX

Yes, V2.2
server and
client

Yes, V2 .2
server and
client

Yes, V2.2
server and
client

SCO UNIX
System V/386

Yes,
Release 3.2

Buffer Memory
(RAM)

64 KB

PC System
Memory

2, 32, or
64 KB

32 or
64 KB

16, 32, or
64 KB

16, 32 , or
64 KB

16, 32, or
64 KB

Firmware
(ROM)

16 KB

Remote Boot
Capability

Yes

PATHWORKS,
NetWare,
Others

Included
Optional

FCC Certified

Class B

VDE Certified

Class B

User Manual

Yes

Warranty

One Year

User Installable

Yes

Support

128 KB

Personal Computing 3.27

PC Networking Hardware
DEC EtherWORKS LC

DElOO-AA"'

Low-cost Ethernet card with terminator and T-connector

DEC EtherWORKS LC/TP

DE101-AA"'

Unshielded twisted-pair Ethernet card

DEC EtherWORKS Turbo

DE200-AC*

High-performance Ethernet card with terminator and
T-connector

DEC EtherWORKS Turbo/TP

DE201-AC*

~~shielded twisted-pair Ethernet card

DEC EtherWORKS Turbo TP/BNC

DE202-AA*

High-performance twisted-pair (RJ45) or Thin Wire (BNC)
Ethernet card

DEC EtherWORKS MC

DE210-AA"'

MicroChannel Ethernet card with terminator and T-connector

DEC EtherWORKS MC/TP

DE212-AA"'

High-performance MicroChannel Ethernet card with BNC terminator and T-connector

"'Notes:
1. Cables are not included. Order BNC, twisted pair, and AUI cables separately.

2. PATHWORKS software for DOS and for OS/2 must be ordered as separate line items.
3. EtherWORKS Ethernet network interface cards do not offer support for the Digital
mouse. In the PATHWORKS environment, EtherWORKS should be used only with 100

percent Microsoft-compatible mice.
Optional Hardware

DESPR-EE

ThinWire Ethernet single-port repeater; connects one ThinWire
segment with up to 29 daisychained PCs to an Ethernet
backbone.

DEMPR-AA

ThinWire Ethernet multiport repeater; provides ports to connect eight ThinWire segments and a port for connecting to
standard baseline cable.

Token Ring Cards
~~~~~~~~~~~~

ProNet Family

The ProNET 4/16 family of high-performance Token Ring network interface
cards provides a physical connection between a PC and the network.

Features

·Connects PCs using IEEE 802.5/Token Ring standards for 4/ 16 Mb/s Token
Ring networking applications
• Supports Extended Industry Standard Architecture (EISA), MicroChannel, and
IBM PC/AT bus architecture
• Supported by PATHWORKS for DOS, PATHWORKS for OS/2, and PATHWORKS
for DOS (NetWare Coexistence) software as well as many
other network operating systems
• Offers media flexibility with onboard support for shielded twisted-pair (STP),
unshielded twisted-pair (UTP), and fiber optic cabling media

Ordering Information

3.28

Personal Computing

DWllO-AA

ProNET-4/16 AT network interface card provides an interface
between a 4-Mbit/s or 16-Mbit/s 802.5/Token Ring network on
IBM PCs, PC/ATs, and ISA compatibles.

DW210-AA

ProNET-4/16 MicroChannel interface card provides an interface between a 4-Mbit/s or 16-Mbit/s 802.5/Token Ring network, IBM PS/2, and MicroChannel-compatible PCs.

DWJOO-AA -

ProNET-4/16 EISA network interface card provides an interface
between the 4-Mbit/s or 16-Mbit/s 802.5/ Token Ring network
and the EISA network compatible PCs.

PC Networking Hardware
ProNet Family (Continued)

H7014-AA

ProNET-4/16 Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) Media Filter
enables connectivity between a 100-ohm Unshielded Twisted
Pair and older versions of IBM's 16/4 Adapter (ISA) and 16/4
Adapter/A (MCA) on the ProNET-4/16 (MCA) 150-ohm network interface cards.

H7015-AA

ProNET-4/16 Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) Media Filter
. enables connectivity between a 100-ohm Unshielded Twisted
Pair cable and IBM's new versions of the 16/4 adapter (ISA)
and the 16/4M Adapter/A (MCA) 150-ohm network interface
cards.

DEC TRNcontroller 100

The DEC TRNcontroller 100 and the Digital Token Ring Network Device Driver
are a Q -bus controller and a software driver that enable Micro VAX/VAXserver
3xxx (except the 3100) and VAX/VAXserver 4000 systems to connect to a
4-Mbit/s or 16-Mbit/s 802.5/Token Ring network.

Features

·Digital Token Ring Network Device Driver (TRDRV VIV Vl.1 for VMS
• Supports DECnet VAX
• Includes self-test diagnostics and VMS installation verification procedure kit
• Serial console port can support a console device for debugging purposes
(BC29E-15)
• Supports STP connections only
• Microcode-based device
·Supported in BA200 and BA400 series enclosures (MicroVAX VAXserver 3xxx
[except 3100], VAX 4000 systems)
· Includes hardware and software documentation
· Source routing as a DECnet datalink service
· Arbitrary Macintosh layer addressing

Hardware Requirements

VAX configuration

Software Requirements

VMS V5 .5 operating system

Optional Networking Software

· DECnet VAX IV
• PATHWORKS for VMS 4.1-1

DEQRA-CA

DEC TRNcontroller 100

EtherWORKS Router/DECnet
The EtherWORKS Router/DECnet Vl.O addresses the DECnet connectivity needs
of small PC local area networks (LANs) in remote branch office locations usually
found in retail, banking, service, and insurance businesses.
EtherWORKS Router/DECnet connects PC LANs to a DECnet wide-area network.
Users can communicate with other users on DECnet nodes over asynchronous or
synchronous connections that support the Digital Data Communications Message
Protocol (DDCMP). The DDCMP ensures integrity and correct sequencing of
messages between adjacent nodes.
The result is full access to a robust, wide-area network for file and print services
and for client/server applications such as mail, conferencing, and browsing. In
addition, file and print services will work transparently over the WAN on other
servers.
The user can downline load the router software from any PC system running
DOS and PATHWORKS for DOS software on the same Ethernet segment with
the EtherWORKS Router. This includes the same PC system housing the
EtherWORKS Router card as long as that PC has an additional Ethernet interface
card.
Personal Computing

3.29

PC Networking Hardware
EtherWORKS Router/DECnet (Continued)
Features

• Provides cost-effective routing for branch offices within a DECnet area as well as
between DECnet areas
• Combines PC-card hardware and routing software to run on personal computers
with no performance imp_act
• Offers expandable memory (from 0.5 to 3 .5 Mbytes) to protect investments
through future sofrware ~pgrades
• Uses asynchronous and synchronous connections, allowing users to choose
low-cost services
• Selects the least-cost path and reroutes traffic if there is a line failure in the
DECnet network
· Supports up to 2 x 64 Kbits/s, providing full backup-line and growth capabilities plus the opportunity to move from low- to high-speed connections
· Features easy-to-use DOS-based installation and single-box packaging

Hardware Requirements

Note: The hardware and software can be configured on the same system if there
is a separate connection to Ethernet in addition to the EtherWORKS Router
connection.

· Any PC/ AT-compatible personal computer to run the router software and
hardware

·A minimum of one drive (3.5-inch 720-Kbyte or 5.25-inch 360-Kbyte) for software installation
· Optional adapter cables for high-speed ports
Software Requirements

Valid configuration of the DOS operating system and PATHWORKS for DOS
networking software

Disk Space Requirements

For local host PC:
· 1250 blocks (640 Kbytes) for installation
· 530 permanent blocks (270 Kbytes) per router for use

Optional Hardware

Modem (Digital's DF03, DF112, or DF224; Hayes SmartModem 2400, Codex
2233/2260)

A separate license is required for each EtherWORKS Router/DECnet hardware
unit on which the EtherWORKS Router/DECnet software product will be used.
DE206-AA

3.30

Personal Computing

EtherWORKS Router/DECnet includes the hardware module,
software media, documentation, software license and associated
cables.

DECpc Personal Computers
Overview

Wherever users are and whatever their applications, Digital has a pers~mal computer to meet their needs. Digital's DECpc family of personal computers is perfect for network personal computing or for standalone operation. The family
includes four types of personal computers, one to fit every need.
·High-performance networked graphics PCs
• On-the-go portables

·Highly expandable deskside PCs, ideal as PATHWORKS or NetWare PC LAN
servers
• General-purpose d~sktop personal computers based on Intel 80386 and 80486
microprocessors
Based on popular Intel 80386, 80386sx, 80486, and 80486sx microprocessors,
DECpc computers are industry-standard personal computers. Whichever DECpc
system users select, they can choose the operating system that's right for themDOS with its rich set of proven applications or OS/2 with its flexibility to meet
the increasing performance needs of the future . SCO UNIX is also available for
high-end PCs and multiprocessor systems.
The DECpc family participates fully in leading network environments. With these
PCs, users can use all of their favorite applications and still have access to group,
departmental, and corporate resources through local area network software such
as the PATHWORKS products from Digital.
Users can order their DECpc personal computers as packaged systems or

A-La-Carte systems, allowing them to create a customized system to meet their
specific needs.
The following chart helps determine which DECpc personal computer is right for
the user. Each offers the superior quality users expect from Digital and the
dedicated customer support that makes it easy to get-and stay-up and running. The following pages describe each member of the family in greater detail.

Personal Computing 3.31

DECpc Personal Computers Comparison Chart
Mid-Range Desktops

Portable Systems

Entry-Level Desktops

Features

DECpc 320P
Notebook

DECpc 316sx

DECstation
320sx

DECpc 420sx

DECstation 325c

DECstation 333c

DECstation 425c

Industry standard

PCIXT , PC/ AT

PCIXT, PC/ AT

PC/ XT, PC/ AT

PC/XT, PC/ AT

PC/ XT, PC/ AT

PCIXT , PC/AT

PC/ XT, PC/ AT

Processor (Intel)

80386sx

80486sx

80386

80486

Clock Speed

20 MHz

16 MHz

20 MHz

25 MHz

33 MHz

25 MHz

System Box Dimensions

10" x 12.2" w
x 1.7" D

4.25" x 15.5" w
x 15" D

6.25" x 17" w
x 16" D

6.25" x 17 " w
x 16" D

6.25" x 17" w
x 16" D

3.5-in/1.44-MB Diskette Drive

Included

Memory
Minimum

2 Mbytes

1 Mbyte

4 Mbytes

1 Mbyte

Maximum

8 Mbytes

13 Mbytes 4

32 Mbytes

16 Mbytes

Option

Included

8 KB

32 KB

8 KB

200 Watts

Memory Expansion Adaptor
Cache Memory

Power Supply

3-hour battery;
AC adapter

Options Slots

100 Watts

3 PC/ AT

32-bit Proprietary Memory Slots

6 PC/ AT

Option

Video Controller

Included

Math Coprocessor

Option

IDE Adapter

Included

IDE Drive Support

2.5" 40-MB or
80-MB drive

Option:
3.5" : 52 , 105,
120, 240 MB
drive

Option:
3.5": 52 , 105,
120, 240 MB 'drive

Option:
3.5": 52, 105,
120, 240 MB drive

Option:
3.5" : 52 , 105,
120, 240 MB
drive

Option:
3.5" : 52 , 105 ,
120, 240 MB
drive

Option

SCSI Adapter

Included

SCSI Drive Support

Option:

3.5 -inch hard disk

245 & 426 MB

5.25 -inch hard disk

320 MB

150, 525 MB

5.25 -inch tape drive
CD-ROM
Ports

Parallel, serial,
VGA, keyboard

Parallel, serial,
mouse, VGA,
keyboard

Parallel, serial,
mouse, keyboard

One 3.5";
one 5.25"

One 3.5" ;
one 5.25"

One 3.5" ;
two 5.25 "

One 3.5" ;
two 5.25"

Option

SCO UNIX

Option

Open Desktop

Option

Storage Bays 1

Keyboard
101-key PC-style

Option

Gold-key style
PS/2 style

84-key included

Mouse
Communications Devices
Ethernet card
Token Ring card
2400 baud internal modem

Included 2

9600 baud fax/ data modem

Included 2

Parallel/serial port adapter
Operating System
MS-DOS
OS/ 2

Included)

1. Available storage bays.
2. Choice of 2400-baud internal modem or 9600-baud fax-data modem must be included in fully-configured system.
3. Includes MS-DOS V5.0 and Microsoft Windows V3.l
4. 5 MB maximum on the motherboard; PC/ AT bus-based memory option.

3.32
_J

Personal Computing

DECpc Personal Computers Comparison Chart
PC Workstation
Features:

DECpc 433
Workstation

Industry standard

PCIXT, PC/AT

Deskside Systems
DECpc 425ST

DECpc 433ST

DECpc 450ST

EISA,
PC/XT, PC/ AT

EISA,
PC/ XT, PC/ AT

Processor (Intel)

80486

Clock Speed

33 MHz

25 MHz

33 MHz

50 MHz

System Box Dimensions

2.75" x 14.5" w x
16.5" D

18.5" x 7" w x
18.3" D

3.5-in/1.44-MB Diskette Drive

Option

Included

Memory
Minim um

8 Mbytes

4 Mbytes

Maximum

48 Mbytes

192 Mbytes

Memory Expansion Adaptor

Included

Cache Memory

64 KB and
128 KB option

8 KB expandable
to 64 or 128 KB

8 KB internal:
256 KB external

Power Supply

105 Watts

254 Watts

6 EISA

Option

Options Slots
32-bit Proprietary Memory Slots
Video Controller

Included

Math Coprocessor
IDE Adapter

Included

IDE Drive Support

Option:
3.5": 52-MB and 105-MB
drive;
2.5" : 40-MB and 80-MB drive

Option:
3.5'' : 52-MB, 105-MB,
120-MB, 240-MB drive

Option:
3.5" : 52-MB, 105-MB,
120-MB, 240-MB drive

SCSI Adapter

Included

Option

SCSI Drive Support

Option:

3.5-inch hard disk

245, 426, 852 MB

245 , 426, 852 MB

5.25-inch hard disk

170 and 320 MB

650 MB, 1 GB

5.25-inch tape drive

525 MB

CD-ROM

600 MB

Ports

Parallel, serial, video,
mouse, keyboard

Parallel, two serial,
keyboard, mouse

Parallel, two serial,
keyboard , mouse

Storage Bays 1

Up to 8; two in base (3.5"
and 2.5"); three per expansion
box (max . 2 exp.), three 3.5''
or one 3.5'' and two 5 .25"

Four available; three 5.25" front-panel accessible, half-height; one 3.25" hidden full-height

Keyboard
101-key PC-style

Included

Gold- key style

Option

PS/ 2 style

84-key included

Mouse

Included

Incl uded

Included

Ethernet card

Included

Option

Token Ring card

Included
Option

Option

Communications Devices

2400 baud internal modem
9600 baud fax/data modem
Parallel/serial port adapter
Operating System
MS-DOS

Option

OS/ 2

Option

SCO UNIX
Open Desktop

Option

Personal Computing 3.33

DECpc 320P Portable Computers
The newest addition to Digital's line of portable computers, the DECpc 320P, is a 6.4-pound 80386sx-based portable, for
users whose jobs frequently take them away from their offices. Running at 20 MHz, this slim, entry-level machine offers 2
Mbytes of standard memory, expandable to 8 Mbytes, and a battery life of three hours.
With the DECpc 320P computer, users can stay in touch with their offices via modem or Ethernet connections. The
portable computer features a 40- or 80-Mbyte internal hard disk drive, 3.5-inch 1.44-Mbyte internal diskette drive, backlit
LCD VGA display, 84-key keyboard, and MS-DOS V5.0 operating system with Microsoft Windows V3.l.
The base system includes a modem; VGA, external serial/parallel ports; carrying case; and battery pack with an ac adapter.
System does not support external expansion boxes. Fax/modem option must be selected at initial order; it may not be
added later as an option. It also includes utilities and user documentation.

Step 1-Base System
Select system.

DECpc 320P Entry-Level Notebook includes:
• 2 Mbytes of memory expandable to 8 Mbytes
• 1.44-Mbyte 3.5-inch diskette drive
• 40-Mbyte or 80-Mbyte 2.5-inch hard drive
• 84-key keyboard
·LCD VGA display (640 x 480)
· Battery pack (3 hour)
·AC adapter

PCPll-AA

PCPll-CA
PCPll-FA

PCPll-FZ
PCPll-IA

• 2400-baud data modem (see below)
• Serial/parallel ports: video and keyboard
• Serial mouse port
• Dedicated modem/fax option slot
• 120-V U.S. power cord
• Carrying case

Base system, 20-MHz, 40-Mbyte internal hard disk drive, 2400-baud data modem, carrying case,
Logitech track ball, battery pack, ac adapter, 120-V power cord, QA Plus, MS-DOS V5 .0 operating
system with Microsoft Windows V3 .1 installed. Add general-purpose options to meet user's needs.
Same as above with no modem, software, or power cord
Base system, 20-MHz, 80-Mbyte internal hard disk drive, 2400-baud data modem, carrying case,
Logitech track ball, battery pack, ac adapter, 120-V power cord, QA Plus, MS-DOS V5.0 operating
system with Microsoft Windows V3.1 installed. Add general-purpose options to meet user's needs.
Same as above with no modem, software, or power cord
Base system, 20-MHz, 80-Mbyte internal hard disk drive, 9600-baud send/receive fax/2400-baud
data modem, carrying case, Logitech track ball, battery pack, ac adapter, 120-V power cord, QA
Plus, MS-DOS V5.0 operating system with Microsoft Windows V3.1 installed. Add general-purpose
options to meet user's needs.

Select operating system if required.

QB-MESAA-SA
QB-MESPA-SA
QB-MESSA-SA
PCPXQ-BA
QB-MRSAA-SA
PCPXQ-CA

MS-DOS V5.0 and Microsoft Windows V3.1, English
Same as above in French
Same as above in Spanish
MS-DOS V4.0, Microsoft Windows V3.0, and QEMM V5.1
OS/2 operating system Vl.3, Presentation Manager, and system supplemental kit. Minimum requirements are 4 Mbytes of memory, a diskette drive, and a 40-Mbyte hard disk.
MS OS/2 Vl.21 with Presentation Manager

Step 3-Power Cord (Not required for 120-V systems)
BN24R-2E
BN19W-2E
BN19K-2E
BN22Z-2E
BN22P-2E
BN19Z-2E
BN24T-2E
BN26B-2E
BNE4J-2E
3.34

Personal Computing

______

________________

.;;......_....__

Australia, New Zealand
Austria, Belgium, France, Germany, Holland, Spain, Sweden, Portugal
Denmark
India
Israel
Italy
Switzerland
U .K./lreland, Hong Kong, Singapore
Japan (240 V)

~------------'

DECpc J20P Portable Computers
Step 4-Memory

•

System includes 2 Mbytes of memory; maximum is 8 Mbytes. Memory ordered with base unit ships with the base unit and
with instructions for easy installation. Select maximum of one additional memory card:
PCPlM-BA
PCPlM-BB
PCPlM-BC

2-Mbyte DECpc 320P memory card; system maximum 4 Mbytes
4-Mbyte DECpc 320P memory card; system maximum 6 Mbytes
6-Mbyte DECpc 320P memory card; system maximum 8 Mbytes

Step ;-Math Coprocessor
Math coprocessor ordered with base unit ships with the base unit and with instructions for easy installation.
PCXAP-BB

DECpc 320P 20-MHz math coprocessor

Step 6-Ethernet Contro*ller Carel
Q6VU5-CZ

Pocket Ethernet adapter

Step 7-Video Monitor (optional)
Monitors include country-specific power cord, 120-V/240-V Northern Hemisphere/240-V Southern Hemisphere.
PC4XV-B2/B6/B7
PC4XC-BB

14-inch multisynchronous color monitor; supports VGA (640 x 480), SVGA (800 x 600), SVGA Plus
(1024 x 768) , and 8514/A (1024 x 768). Requires cable PC4XC-BB.
Monitor-to-PC cable, required when using full-sized monitor with DECpc 320P.

Step 8-Fuil-Size Keybolrd (Optional)
PCXAL-AA

101-key PC-style keyboard

Step 9-Additional Optional Devices
PCPlH-BB
PCPlH-EA
PCPlC-XA

Extra battery pack
Extra ac adapter
Leather carrying case

Personal Computing 3.35

DECpc Desktop Computers
The deskt_.op members of the DECpc family share a number of common features.
• Industry-standard IBM PC/XT and PC/AT compatibility

·A choice of MS-DOS (V4.01 or V5.0 with Microsoft Windows) or OS/2 Vl.3 Standard Edition operating system with
Presentation Manager

• A choice of 101-key industry-standard keyboard or Digital's Gold-key style keyboard with keycaps available in five
languages
• Support for Digital's wide range of serial and parallel desktop printers
· Capabilities for sharing resources on the network through products of the PATHWORKS family
· Support for PC DECwindows Display Facility software, allowing users to display and manipulate VMS and ULTRIX
DECwindows applications running on VAX and RISC systems on the network
• Worldwide service and support through the Digital Services organization

Step l--Syste111s
Packaged Systems
Packaged systems are complete systems. They include memory, storage, software, and frequently requested options, all
packaged under a single order number for easy ordering. No additional components should be added to a packaged system.
If a different configuration is required, select an a-la-carte system and add the necessary components.
For current packages and pricing in this rapidly changing market, call Desktop Direct. (In the U.S., 800-PC-BY-DEC. In
other countries, contact your local sales office.)
A-La-Carte Systems
For an A-La-Carte system, complete Steps 1 through 5; add general purpose options as required. 120-V systems include
power cord. For non-U.S. systems order power cord.
Note: Specify ASSEMBLY REQUIRED and NO PARTIALS on order form if system is to be delivered already assembled.

120 V/240 V
PC444-AAIA3

DECpc 316sx, 16 MHz, 80386sx, 1 Mbyte of memory, 1.44-Mbyte 3.5-inch diskette drive, SVGA
Plus, IDE controller, mouse/keyboard ports, serial/parallel ports.

PC443-AAIA3

DECstation 320sx, 20 MHz, 80386sx, 1 Mbyte of memory, 1.44-Mbyte 3.5-inch diskette drive,
SVGA+, IDE controller, mouse/keyboard ports, serial/parallel ports.

PC44 5-AAIA2/A3

DECpc 420sx, 20 MHz, 80486 with 4-Mbyte memory, 1.44-Mbyte 3.5-inch diskette drive, SVGA,
IDE controller, mouse/keyboard ports, serial/parallel ports.

PC462-AA/A3

DECstation 325c, 25 MHz, 80386 with 32-Kbyte cache, 1.44-Mbyte 3.5-inch diskette drive, IDE
controller, mouse/keyboard ports, serial/parallel ports.

PC463-AA/A3

DECstation 333c, 33 MHz, 80386 with 32-Kbyte cache, 1.44-Mbyte 3.5-inch diskette drive, IDE
controller, mouse/keyboard ports, serial/parallel ports.

PC465-AA/A3

DECstation 425c, 25 MHz, 80486 with 8-Kbyte cache, 1.44-Mbyte 3.5-inch diskette drive, IDE controller, mouse/keyboard ports, serial/parallel ports.

3.36

Personal Computing

DECpc Desktop Computers
Step .~-Keyboard and Power Cord
----~~------~----~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~----'

Keyboard

Power Cord

PCXAL-AA
PCXAL-AB
PCXAL-AD
PCXAL-AP
PCXAL-AG
PCXAL-AA
PCXAL-AI
PCXAL-AN
PCXAL-AR
PCXAL-AS
PCXAL-AA
PCXAL-AT
PCXAL-AV
PCXAL-CA
PCXAL-CH
PCXAL-AE

BN26J-1K
BN19W-2E
BN19K-2E
BN19W-2E
BN19W-2E
BN22Z-2E
BN19Z-2E
BN19W-2E
BN19W-2E
BN19W-2E
BN24R-2E
BN22P-2E
BN19W-2E
BN19W-2E
BN24T-2E
BN26B-2E
BNE4J-1K

LK450-AA
LK450-AS
LK450-AC
LK450-AQ

U.S./Canada/Japan (included in 120-V base system)
Belgium
Denmark
France
Germany
India
Italy
Norway
Spain (international)
Spain
New Zealand/Australia
Israel
Portugal
Sweden/Finland
Switzerland 102-key
U.K./Ireland 102-key
Japan (240 V)
Digital G9ld-key keyboard (U.S./U.K.)
Digital Gold-key keyboard (Spanish)
Digital Gold-key keyboard (Canadian/French)
Digital Gold-key keyboard (Canadian/English)

Step J-Operating System
Select an operating system.

QB-MESAA-SA
QB-MESPA-SA
QB-MESSA-SA
QB-MSVAA-SA
QB-MSVPA-SA
QB-MSVSA-SA
QB-MSUAA-SA
QB-MSUPA-SA
QB-MSUSA-SA
PC4XQ-BA
QB-MRSAA-SA
PC4XQ-CA
QB-YN2AW-VA
QB-YN2AW-VB
QB-GFlAW-VA
QB-YN2AW-VD
QB-YN2AW-VE
QB-YNSAW-VB
QB-GF4AW-VA
QB-GF5AW-VB

MS-DOS V5.0 operating system with Microsoft Windows V3.1 (English)
Same as above in French
Same as above in Spanish
Microsoft Windows V3 .1 upgrade kit, English
Same as above in French
Same as above in Spanish
MS-DOS operating system V5.0, English
Same as above in French
Same as above in Spanish
MS-DOS V4.01 operating system, and QEMM V5.1 (English)
OS/2 operating system Vl.3 with Presentation Manager and system supplemental kit. Minimum
requirements are 4 Mbytes of memory, a diskette drive, and a 40-Mbyte hard disk
OS/2 Vl.21 operating system with Presentation Manager (English)
SCO UNIX V3.2.2 operating system, two-user, 3.5-inch high-density diskette
(for DECstation 325c, 333c, and 425c)
SCO UNIX V3.2.2 operating system, multiuser, 3.5-inch high-density diskette
(for DECstation 325c, 333c, and 425c)
SCO UNIX V3.2.2 operating system development system, 3.5-inch high-density diskette
(for DECstation 325c, 333c, and 425c)
SCO UNIX V3.2.2 operating system, two-user, QIC tape (for DECstation 325c, 333c, and 425c)
SCO UNIX V3.2.2 operating system, multiuser, QIC tape (for DECstation 325c, 333c, and 425c)
Open Desktop Vl.1.1 operating system, QIC tape (for DECstation 325c, 333c, and 425c)
Open Desktop Vl.1.0 server upgrade, 3.5-inch high-density diskette (for DECstation 325c, 333c, and
425c)
Open Desktop Vl.1 development system, QIC tape (for DECstation 325c, 333c, and 425c)

Personal Computing 3.37

0..

DECpc Desktop Computers
Step 4-Memory
Select system memory. Requirements for system memory are operating system and application dependent. Check guidelines
provided in operating system and application literature. Digital recommends a minimum of 4 Mbytes on systems using DOS
and Microsoft Windows together and a minimum of 8 Mbytes on systems using OS/2 or SCO UNIX operating systems.
Note: All DECpcs must contain a minimum of 1-Mbyte memory; Digital will not ship systems without memory installed.
DECpc 316sx and DECstation 320sx
PC44M memory expansion adapter allows expansion to 13 Mbytes. Select memory in quantities listed below:
For a total memory of:

Order this quantity:

of this Order Number:

1 Mbyte

Included

2 Mbytes

PC4XM-CA

3 Mbytes

PC4XM-CB

5 Mbytes

PC4XM-CB

6 Mbytes

2
2
1

PC4XM-CA
PC4XM-CB
PC44M-AA

2
1

PC4XM-CA
PC4XM-CB
PC44M-AA

6
1

PC4XM-CB
PC44M-AA

8 Mbytes

3
13 Mbytes

DECpc 420sx
Select memory in quantities listed below:
For a total memory of:

Order this quantity:

0
2
2
2
2
4

4 Mbytes

5 Mbytes
8 Mbytes
16 Mbytes ,·~
20 Mbytes
32 Mbytes'·~

of this Order Number:
(Included)
PC4XM-CA
PC4XM-CB
PC4XM-DC
PCXAM-DC
PCXAM-DC

;~ Requires removal of factory-installed 4 Mbytes

DECstation 325c, 333c, and 425c
PC46M-AA memory expansion adapter allows expansion to 16 Mbytes. Select memory in quantities listed below:
For a total memory of:
1 Mbyte

PC4XM-CA

2 Mbytes

PC4XM-CA

4 Mbytes

PC4XM-CB

8 Mbytes

PC4XM-CB

10 Mb ytes

4
4
1

PC4XM-CB
PC4XM-CA
PC46M-AA

16 Mbytes

8
1

PC4XM-CB
PC46M-AA

·::c s

0..

"";

0
~

of this Order Number:

Ct)

Order this quantity:

PC4XM-CA
PC4XM-CB
PC46M-AA
PC44M-AA

PCXAM-DC
3.38

Personal Computing

512-Kbyte memory kit (DECstation and DECpc 316sx PCs only)
2-Mbyte memory kit (DECstation and DECpc 316sx PCs only)
Zero K memory expansion adapter for DECstation 325c, 333c, and 425c. Required when expanding
memory to 10 Mbytes and higher.
Zero K memory expansion adapter for DECpc 316sx and DECstation 320sx. Required when
expanding memory to 6 Mbytes or higher. Recommended limit of one. For configurations greater
than 12 Mbytes, call Technical Pre-Purchase Assistance (800-343-4040).
8-Mbyte 70-ns memory kit (DECpc 420sx) using two 4-Mbyte SIMMs.

DECpc Desktop Computers
Step 5-Monitor and Video Adapter
----·~~~----------~~------------~~------~-----~~~-

. Select a monitor and video adapter
· Monitors include video cable and country-specific power cord ·
-xA, x2 = 120 V Northern Hemisphere
-x3 = 240 V Northern Hemisphere
-x4 = 240 V Southern Hemisphere
1

PCXAV-AAIA3/A4
PC4XV-A2
PC7XV-KB
PC7XV-KD
PCXAV-BA/B3/B4

19-inch monochrome monitor 72 Hz (VR319)
14-inch VGA monochrome monitor, 64 shades of gra/
2
Same as above, 240 V Northern Hemisphere
2
Same as above, 240 V Southern Hemisphere
19-inch color monitor 72 Hz (VR320) 1

PCXAV-DA/D3/D4
PCXAV-CA/C3/C4
PC4XV -B2/B6
PC7XV-CC

19-inch Trinitron color monitor 66 Hz (VRT19)
1
16-inch Trinitron color monitor 66 Hz (VRT16)
14-inch VGA multisynchronous color monitor supports VGA (640 x 480), SVGA (800 x 600) , SVGA
2
Plus (1024 x 768), and 8514/A (1024 x 768).
2
Same as above, Southern Hemisphere

PCXCV -B2/B3/B4

14-inch VGA single synchronous color monitor, 640 x 480

Note 1: Requires PCXAG-AD graphics adapter.
Note 2: Requires PC4XG-AC graphics adapter.

Step >.--Video Adapter

------------------------------~-------

DECpc 420sx:

PC4GM-AA

512-Kbyte video RAM upgrade kit to support 1024 x 768 x 256 color video

The DECstation 325c, 333c, and 425c offer the user a range of graphic options. The following adapters will support these
systems and the monitors listed above.

PCXAG-AC

Super VGA Plus 1024 x 768 high-resolution graphics adapter (standard on DECpc 420sx); also
supports Super VGA and VGA modes. Includes 512-Kbyte video RAM. Used with DECpc VGA
monitor (PCXCV-Bx), VGA monochrome monitor (PC4XV-Ax), and VGA multisynchronous color
monitor (PC4XV-Bx).

PC4XG-BA

8514/A 1024 x 768 high-resolution graphics adapter provides 1024 x 768 interlaced and
non-interlaced modes. Provides 256 colors and 1-Mbyte video RAM. Requires PCXAG-AC video
adapter.

PCXAG-AD

1280 x 1024 high-resolution graphics adapter, includes VGA daughter board. Used with PCXAV-Bx,
PCXAV-Cx, and PCXAV-Dx monitors above.

Step 6-Storage Devices
------------~~~--~-"-----~~~~~~~--~-----------'---~~--~-------

• Select optional storage devices.
• Devices selected are in addition to 3 .5-inch diskette drive included in all systems.
• SCSI drives require a SCSI adapter (PC4XR-CC) .
• 3.5-inch SCSI drive must be mounted in 5.25-inch storage bay.

DECpc 316sx, DECstation 320sx, and DECpc 420sx
Maximum of two drives
• No more than one additional diskette or 3.5-inch 60-Mbyte tape backup drive and
· No more than one SCSI or 5.25-inch device

DECstation 325c, 333c, and 425c
Maximum of three drives
· No more than one additional diskette or 3.5-inch 60-Mbyte tape backup drive and
· No more than two SCSI devices or
Two 5.25-inch half-height devices or
Two IDE drives

Personal Computing 3.39

DECpc Desktop Computers
Step 6-Storage Devices (Continued)
Diskette or tape drive
A 3 .5-inch tape drive uses the diskette drive interface standard on the DEC pc 316sx and 420sx and all DECstation personal
computers.
PC4XT-CA
PC4XT-DA

60-Mbyte 3.5-inch tape drive
60-Mbyte tape cartridge for above tape drive (PC4XT-CA)

PC4XR-FA
PC4XR-GA
PC4XR-EA

1.44-Mbyte 3.5-inch diskette drive
360-Kbyte 5.25-inch diskette drive
1.2-Mbyte 5.25-inch diskette drive

.........

~--~~~~----~~~~~~~.....,.....------......

-~.._.~~~~

Step 6a-IDE Hard Disk Drives
Integrated Digital Electronics (IDE) disks provide midrange performance for DECpc 316sx and all DECstation personal
computers.
PC4XR-BD
PC4XR-EB
PCXAR-CA
PCXAR-CB

52-Mbyte 3.5-inch hard disk drive
105-Mbyte 3.5-inch hard disk drive
120-Mbyte 3.5-inch hard disk drive
240-Mbyte 3.5-inch hard disk drive

Step 6b-SCSI Adapter (Required for SCSI Devices)
Small Computer Storage Interface (SCSI) disks and tapes provides high-performance throughput required by servers and
database management or graphics-intensive applications for DECstation and DECpc 316sx personal computers.
PC4XR-CC

SCSI adapter board with external connector ports.

Step 6c-SCSI Devices
PCXAR-AG
PCXAR-AB
PC4XR-HA

245-Mbyte 3.5-inch hard disk drive; must be mounted in 5.25-inch storage bay
426-Mbyte 3.5-inch hard disk drive; must be mounted in 5.25-inch storage bay
320-Mbyte 5.25-inch hard disk drive

PC4XT-AA
PC4XT-BA

150-Mbyte 5.25-inch SCSI tape drive (DECstation 325c, 333c, and 425c)
150-Mbyte tape cartridge for above tape drive (PC4XT-AA)

DECstation 325c, 333c, and 425c only
PCXAT-AA
SCSI 525-Mbyte 5.25-inch quarter-inch cartridge (QIC) for SCO
PCXAT-AB
SCSI 525-Mbyte 5.25-inch quarter-inch cartridge (QIC) for DOS
PCXAT-AC
SCSI 525-Mbyte 5.25 -inch quarter-inch cartridge (QIC) for OS/2; requires SCSI adapter (PC4XR-CC)
when using OS/2 Vl.21

Step ·7-Math Coprocessor (Optional)
~~~~----------------------~~~~~~~--~-~--

Select optional math coprocessor.
PCXAP-BA
PCXAP-BB
PCXAP-CC
PCXAP-CD
PCXAP-DA

3.40

Personal Computing

DECpc 316sx 16-MHz Intel 80387sx math coprocessor
DECstation 320sx 20-MHz Intel 80387sx math coprocessor
DECstation 325c 25-MHz Intel 80387 math coprocessor
DECstation 333c 33-MHz Intel 80387 math coprocessor
DECstation 425c 25-MHz Weitek 4167 math coprocessor

DECpc Desktop Computers
Step ~unieations Option•
Select communications options-maximum of two. If more than two adapters are required, consult a technical support
specialist. Special configuration rules apply.

PC4XD-AA
PC4XD-AB
DElOO-AA
PC4XD-CA

One serial and one parallel port adapter.
Two-port serial adapter
EtherWORKS LC Ethernet adapter
2400 bit/s modem adapter.

,Step 9-Accessories
PCXAS-AA

PS/2 and Microsoft-compatible three-button mouse.

DECpc 316sx
PC44Y-CE
PC44Y-DD

User documentation set (multilingual versions)
Technical reference manual (English language only)

DECstation 320sx
PC44Y-CC
PC44Y-CD

User documentation set (multilingual versions)
Technical reference manual (English language only)

DECpc 420sx
PC44Y-CF
PC44Y-EE

User documentation set (multilingual versions)
Technical reference manual (English language only)

DECstation 325c
PC46Y-CB
PC46Y-DD

User documentation set (multilingual versions)
Technical reference manual (English language only)

DECstation 333c
PC46Y-CC
PC46Y-DD

User documentation set (multilingual versions)
Technical reference manual (English language only)

DECstation 425c
PC46Y-CE
PC46Y-BA

User documentation set (multilingual versions)
Technical reference manual (English language only)

Personal Computing 3.41

DECpc 433 Workstation
The DECpc 433 workstation is a powerful, industry-standard personal computer for networked or standalone computing.
It's ideal for windows and graphics-intensive applications in business and commercial environments. Based on the Intel
80486 microprocessor, the system incorporates a high-resolution color video controller that, in a standard configuration,
provides unparalleled graphics performance of up to 1280 x 1024 pixels and 256 colors.
This 33 -MHz system includes a built-in Ethernet or Token Ring adapter, 8-Mbyte RAM, a SCSI interface and adapter, IDE
hard drive interface and diskette controller, and two serial/parallel ports. It supports DOS, OS/2 , and SCO Open Desktop
operating systems. It also supports Microsoft Windows, OS/2 Presentation Manager, SCO Open Desktop X Windows, GEM,
PC DECwindows Motif, IBM 8514/A, and TIGA-34020 graphical interfaces.

Step 1-Base S11tems
Select a base system. 120-V systems include a U.S. keyboard, mouse and power cord. If a non-U.S. system is selected, the
appropriate keyboard, mouse, and power cord are required.

DECpc 433 Workstation Base System includes
· 8 Mbytes of memory, expandable to 48 Mbytes
· 101 -key industry-standard keyboard (120 V)
• Power cord (120 V)
· Three-button serial mouse (120 V)
• Math coprocessor embedded on chip
• High-resolution color video controller
• SCSI interface and adapter
• IDE hard drive interface and diskette controller
· DEC EtherWORKS network interface

PCWlO-AA

8-Mbyte RAM, Ethernet card, and bay interfaces for an optional 3.5-inch diskette or IDE hard disk
drive; includes keyboard, mouse, and power cord (120 V).

PCWll-AA

DECpc 433 Workstation base system for Token Ring environments; same as above but with Token
Ring card instead of Ethernet card.

PCW10-A2

8-Mbyte RAM, Ethernet card, and bay interfaces for an optional 3.5-inch diskette or IDE hard disk
drive. Requires keyboard, mouse, and power cord.

PCW11-A2

DECpc 433 Workstation base system for Token Ring environments; same as above but with Token
Ring card instead of Ethernet card.

Note: A 2.5 -inch IDE hard disk drive can also be added along with the 3.5-inch diskette. Add memory, monitor, disks,
operating system, and general-purpose options to meet user's needs.

Step 2-0pei:ating Systen;i
Select an operating system.

!:IQ

·g

"';

QB-MESAA-SA

MS-DOS operating system V5.0 with Microsoft Windows V3.1. English version.

QB-MESPA-SA

Same as above in French

QB-MESSA-SA

Same as above in Spanish

QB-MSVAA-SA

Microsoft Windows V3 .1 upgrade kit, English

QB-MSVPA-SA

Same as above in French

QB-MSVSA-SA

Same as above in Spanish

QB-MSUAA-SA

MS-DOS operating system V5.0, English

QB-MSUPA-SA

Same as above in French

QB-MSUSA-SA

Same as above in Spanish

QB-XNTAD-WA

MS-DOS V5.0 upgrade kit (3.5-inch diskette)

3.42

Personal Computing

DECpc 433 Workstation
Step 2-0perating System (Continued)
~---~~-----~~~~--~~~--~~~

PCWXQ·BA
QB-MRSAA-SA
PCWXQ-CA
QB-MH3AW-VA

MS-DOS operating system V4.01, Microsoft Windows V3.0, and QEMM V5.12. English version.
OS/2 operating system Vl.3 with Presentation Manager and system supplemental kit. Minimum
requirements are 4 Mbytes of memory, a diskette drive, and a 40-Mbyte hard disk.
OS/2 operating system Vl.21: Presentation Manager, and system supplemental kit
SCO Open Desktop Vl.1 for DECpc 433 Workstation (U.S. and Canada). This software is not
customer installable. See Open Desktop Field Installation below for expert installation services. (To
operate with SCO, the DECpc 433W requires 12 Mbytes of system memory, a diskette drive, and the
expansion box with both a 525-Mbyte QIC tape drive and a 200-Mbyte hard disk.)

QB-MH3AW-VB

SCO Open Desktop Vl.1 for DECpc 433 Workstation (International). This software is not customer
installable. See Open Desktop Field Installation below for expert installation services. (To operate
with SCO, the DECpc 433W requires 12 Mbytes of system memory, a diskette drive, and the
expansion box with both a 525-Mbyte QIC tape drive and a 200-Mbyte hard disk.)

QT-YNSAW-19

Open Desktop field installation for SCO Open Desktop operating system.

Step 3-Power Cord, Keyboard and Mouse (Not required for 120..V systems)
Select power cord, keyboard, and mouse for all non-U.S. systems.

Power Cord
BN26J-1K
BN19W-2E
BN19K-2E
BN19W-2E
BN19W-2E
BN22Z-2E
BN19Z-2E
BN19W-2E
BN19W-2E
BN19W-2E
BN24R-2E
BN22P-2E
BN19W-2E
BN19W-2E
BN24T-2E
BN26B-2E
BNE4J-2E

Mouse

Keyboard
PCXAL-AA
PCXAL-AB
PCXAL-AD
PCXAL-AP
PCXAL-AG
PCXAL-AA
PCXAL-AI
PCXAL-AN
PCXAL-AR
PCXAL-AS
PCXAL-AA
PCXAL-AT
PCXAL-AV
PCXAL-CA
PCXAL-CH
PCXAL-AE

LK450-AA
LK450-AC
LK450-AQ
LK450-AS
PCXAS-AA

U.S./Canada/Japan (120 V)
Belgium
Denmark
France
Germany
India
Italy
Norway
Spanish (international)
Spain
New Zealand/Australia
Israel
Portugal
Sweden/Finland
Switzerland 102-key
U.K./Ireland 102-key
Japan (240 V)
Digital Gold-key style (U.S./.U.K. )
Same as above, French Canadian
Same as above, French Canadian/English
Same as above, Spanish
Three-button mouse

Step 4-Video Monitor
• Select a video monitor.
· Monitors include video cable and country-specific power cord.
· Monitors operate at 1280 x 1024 resolution.
-xA = 120 V Northern Hemisphere
-x3 = 240 V Northern Hemisphere
-x4 = 240 V Southern Hemisphere

PCXAV-AA/A3/A4
PCXAV-BA/B3/B4
PCXAV-CA/C3/C4
PCXAV-DA/D3/D4

19-inch monochrome monitor 72 Hz (VR319)
19-inch color monitor 72 Hz (VR320)
16-inch Trinitron color monitor 66 Hz (VRT16)
19-inch Trinitron color monitor 66 Hz (VRT19)

Personal Computing 3.43

DECpc 433 Workstation
Step 5-Storage
· System is configured as a diskless network client and does not have a storage device unless one or more are ordered from
the list below.
· System supports two external SCSI expansion boxes.
~~~~~~~~~----~~~~~~~~~~~~--:-~~

Step 5a-lntemal Storage
Internal storage options are:
· One 3.5-inch hard disk drive, or
· One 3.5-inch diskette drive, or
· One 2.5-inch 40-Mbyte or 80-Mbyte IDE plus one 3.5-inch diskette drive
PCWXR-AA
PCWXR-CA
PCXAR-BA
PCWXR-BA
PCWXR-BB

1.44-Mbyte 3.5-inch internal diskette drive
40-Mbyte 2.5-inch internal IDE hard disk drive
80-Mbyte 2.5-inch internal IDE hard disk drive
52-Mbyte 3.5-inch IDE hard disk drive
105-Mbyte 3.5-inch IDE hard disk drive

Step 5b-External Storage
Select maximum of two SCSI expansion boxes. Expansion box has three half-height storage bays: two front accessible
3.5-inch/5.25-inch bays and one internal 3.5-inch bay.
PCWXE-AA
PCWXE-AB

Expansion box for SCSI devices (U.S.)
Expansion box for SCSI devices (international)

Select SCSI storage devices for expansion box(es).
· Maximum of two 5.25-inch half-height devices
· Maximum of two tape drives
·Maximum of three 3.5-inch half-height devices
PC4XR-DA
PC4XR-HA
PCXAR-AG
PCXAR-AB
PCXAR-AC
PCXCR-BC

170-Mbyte 5.25-inch SCSI hard disk drive
320-Mbyte 5.25-inch SCSI hard disk drive
245-Mbyte 3.50-inch SCSI hard disk drive
426-Mbyte 3.50-inch SCSI hard disk drive
852-Mbyte 3.50-inch SCSI hard disk drive
600-Mbyte CD-ROM kit (DOS) for DECpc 433W

PCXAT-AB
PCXAT-AA

525-Mbyte half-height Quarter Inch Cartridge (QIC) tape for DOS
525-Mbyte half-height Quarter Inch Cartridge (QIC) tape for SCO

Step 6-Memory
System includes 8 Mbytes of memory (maximum 48 Mbytes). Select memory in quantities listed below:

For a total memory of:

Order this quantity:

of this Order Number:

8 Mbytes

Included

12 Mbytes

PCXAM-DB

24 Mbytes
36 Mbytes
48 Mbytes

PCXAM-DC

PCXAM-DB
PCXAM-DC

3.44

Personal Computing

4
6
2-Mbyte (2 x 1-Mbyte SIMM) upgrade
8-Mbyte (2 x 4-Mbyte SIMM) upgrade

DECpc 433 Workstation

Select cache memory, if required (maximum of one upgrade).

PCWXM-AA
PCWXM-AB

64-Kbyte cache expansion upgrade
128-Kbyte cache expansion upgrade

Select memory in quantities listed below:

For a total memory of:

Order this quantity:

of this Order Number:

4 Mbytes

PCXAM-DB

16 Mbytes

PCXAM-DC

PCXAM-DB
PCXAM-DC

2-Mbyte (2 x 1-Mbyte SIMM) upgrade
8-Mbyte (2 x 4-Mbyte SIMM) upgrade

Step 7-Math ~essor
Note: Math coprocessor is included in the 486 33-MHz DX chip.

Step 8-Video Coprocessor
PCXAP-EA

Video coprocessor

ER-PCWlA-TR

DECpc 433 Workstation Series Technical Reference Manual (Ethernet and Token Ring)

Personal Computing 3.45

DECpc 400ST Deskside Computers
The DECpc 400ST Series is designed to meet users' computing needs as they grow, using Intel's Xpress technology for easy
upgrades and expandability. The 400ST Series has a scalable design that goes beyond modularity. This scalability makes the
entire DECpc 400ST Series of computers ready to run Intel's P5 next generation of processors as soon as they are available,
providing computing power for today and P5 investment protection for tomorrow.
The DECpc 400ST series is a family of industry-standard, 80486-based personal computers that are compliant with the
Extended Industry Standard Architecture (EISA). Each DECpc 400ST system offers six internal 32-bit expansion slots and
five half-height storage bays for hard disk, diskette, or tape drives and carries a 254-Watt autosensing power supply.
The DECpc 400ST family is built on a modular design that allows each member of the family to start with the same chassis,
power supply, and motherboard. All speed-graded parts are on a plug-in processor card that is user-interchangeable and
upgradable. The design also supports increases in chip speeds. Initial variations are the Intel 80486sx at 25 MHz, the 80486
at 33 MHz, and the 80486 at 50 MHz.
Suited to the desktop or deskside environment, the DECpc 400ST family offers increased storage in a small-tower design
that can be used either vertically or horizontally, depending on user preference and need.

Step 1--Systems
• Select Base System with CPU kit and all hardware options factory installed and tested. 120-V systems include power cord
and U.S. keyboard. 240-V systems require country-specific power cord and keyboard.
· Select a-la-carte system with CPU kit and all hardware options as line items for field/customer installation only.
A-la-carte systems require country-specific power cord and keyboard.
· Software options ship at same time, but are not factory installed.
DECpc 400ST systems include:
• Intel 80486 processors with choice of 25-MHz, 33-MHz or 50-MHz CPU module
• 4-Mbyte memory, expandable to 192 Mbytes
• 25-MHz and 33-MHz systems support an external cache upgrade (64 or 128 Kbytes)
• 50 MHz system includes 256-Kbyte external cache
• 1.44-Mbyte 3.5-inch diskette drive
• Four additional storage bays (one 3.5-inch, three 5.25-inch)
· Diskette and IDE controllers
· Six EISA expansion slots
• Two serial, one parallel, mouse and keyboard ports
·U.S. keyboard and power cord (120-V Base Systems)
·User documentation
· User diagnostics
· 254-W autosensing power supply
Order Number
120 V/240 v

Model

CPU

Memory

Cache

Base Systems
PCT15-AA/A2
PCT20-AA/A2
PCT25-AA/A2

DECpc 425ST
DECpc 433ST
DECpc 450ST

25 MHz
33 MHz
50 MHz

4-Mbyte
4-Mbyte
4-Mbyte

8-Kbyte 1 internal
8-Kbyte 1 internal
8-Kbyte internal,
256-Kbyte external

A-la-carte System (Options Field/Customer Installable ONLY)
BA55-A93
DECpc 400ST
Option

4-Mbyte

Option2

Systems support an external cache upgrade (64 or 128 Kbytes)
Systems ordered with 50-MHz CPU include 256-Kbyte external cache
3
Does not include keyboard or power cord; order these items as separate line items in Step 3.
2

Step la~U Kit (Field/Custpmet JnstaDable)
PCT16-A2
PCT21-A2
PCT26-A2
J.46

Personal Computing

25-MHz CPU upgrade kit with user-installable 486sx processor card, installation guide, and snap-in
DECpc logo
33-MHz CPU upgrade kit with user-installable 486DX processor card, installation guide, and snap-in
DECpc logo
50-MHz CPU upgrade kit with user-installable 486DX processor card, 256-Kbyte external cache,
installation guide, and snap-in DECpc logo

DECpc 400ST Deskside Computers
Step 2-0perating System (Required for all systems)
QB-MESAA-SA
QB-MESPA-SA
QB-MESSA-SA
QB-MSVAA-SA
QB-MSVPA-SA
QB-MSVSA-SA
QB-MSUAA-SA
QB-MSUPA-SA
QB-MS USA-SA
QB-MRSAA-SA

MS-DOS V5.0 operating system with Microsoft Windows V3.1; English
Same as above in French
Same as above in Spanish
Microsoft Windows V3 .1 upgrade kit, English
Same as above in French
Same as above in Spanish
MS-DOS operating system V5 .0, English
Same as above in French
Same as above in Spanish
OS/2 Vl.3 operating system

U .S./Canada:

QB-MN8AW-VA
QB-MN8AW-VB
QB-MN8AW-VC
QB-MN8AW-VD

SCO UNIX V3.2.4 operating system, two-user, 3.5-inch diskette
SCO UNIX V3.2.4 operating system, multiuser, 3.5-inch diskette
SCO UNIX V3.2.4 operating system, two-user, QIC tape
SCO UNIX V3.2.4 operating system, multiuser, QIC tape

International:

QB-MN8AW-VE
QB-MN8AW-VF
QB-MN8AW-VG
QB-MN8AW-VH

SCO UNIX V3.2.4 operating system, two-user, 3.5-inch diskette
SCO UNIX V3.2.4 operating system, multiuser, 3.5 -inch diskette
SCO UNIX V3 .2.4 operating system, two-user, QIC tape
SCO UNIX V3 .2.4 operating system, multiuser, QIC tape

Step 3-Power Cords and Keyboards
Select country-specific power cord and keyboard for a-la-carte and 240-V systems.

Power Cord
BNE4H-2E~:

BN19W-2E
BN19K-23
BN19W-2E
BN19W-2E
BN19W-2E
BN19W-2E
BN19W-2E
BN19W-2E
BN19W-2E
BN24R-2E
BN19A-2E
BN24T-2E
BN22P-2E
BN19Z-2E
BN19S-2E
BNE4J-2E
1
'

and

Keyboard

Country

Language

PCXAL-AA ,•:
PCXAL-AB
PCXAL-AD
PCXAL-AP
PCXAL-AG
PCXAL-AN
PCXAL-AV
PCXAL-AR
PCXAL-AS
PCXAL-CA
PCXAL-AA
PCXAL-AE
PCXAL-CH
PCXAL-AT
PCXAL-AI
PCXAL-AA

U.S./Canada/Japan
Belgium
Denmark
France
Germany
Norway
Portugal
Spanish
Spain
Sweden
Australia/ N.Z.
U.K./lreland
Switzerland
Israel
Italy
India
J apan (240 V)

English
Belgian
Danish
French
Austrian/ German
Norwegian
Portuguese
Spanish (international)
Spanish
Swedish/ Finnish
English
English/ U.K.
Swiss
Hebrew
Italian
English

ell

c
::s
Q.,

·;::

Included in 120-V Base Systems

"";

c
0

;...
QJ

Personal Computing

3.47

DECpc 400ST Deskside Computers
Step 4-Memory
Systems includes 4 Mbytes of memory. Main logic board accommodates two memory banks, two slots per bank. Optional
memory expansion card accommodates four banks, two slots per bank for a system total of 12 memory slots. SIMMs must
be installed in pairs of matching size and speed.
Some memory configurations require removal of two 2-Mbytes SIMMs standard in all systems.
Digital recommends a minimum of 4 Mbytes of memory on systems using MS-DOS and Microsoft Windows together and
minimum of 8 Mbytes of memory on systems using the SCO UNIX operating system.
System memory board

} Bank 1

(PCTAM-CC standard in all systems)

} Bank 0

Optional memory expansion card (PCTXM-AA)

Bank 1
Bank2
Bank3
Bank4
PCTAM-CC
PCTAM-CD
PCTAM-CE
PCTAM-DF

4 Mbytes (2 x 2-Mbytes, 80 ns, 36-bit SIMMs)
8 Mbytes (2 x 4-Mbytes, 80 ns, 36-bit SIMMs)
16 Mbytes (2 x 8-Mbytes, 80 ns, 36-bit SIMMs)
32 Mbytes (2 x 16-Mbytes, 70 ns, 36-bit SIMMs)

PCTXM-AA

Memory expansion card; four banks, two SIMM slots per bank; maximum of one expansion card
per system

Note: If factory installation is selected, two additional SIMM kits ordered without memory expansion card require removal
of standard 4-Mbyte (2 x 2 Mbytes) SIMMs. These SIMMs will be shipped to customer for future upgrades.

Step ;-Cache ~ory Qpgrade (
External cache upgrades supported on 25-MHz and 33-MHz systems only. Maximum of one upgrade kit per system.
PCWXM-AA
PCWXM-AB

64-Kbyte external cache upgrade kit
128-Kbyte external cache upgrade kit

Step 6-Video Monitors
Select video monitor and video adapter. Monitors include video cable and country-specific power cord.
120 VI 240 V/S.H.
PCXAV-BA/B3/B4
PCXAV-DA/D3/D4
PCXAV-EA
PCXA V-CA/C3/C4
PC4XV-B2
PCXCV-B2
PCXAV-AA/A3/A4
PC4XV-A2

19-inch color monitor, 1280 x 1024, 72 Hz (VR320); requires PCXAG-AD adapter
19-inch color monitor, 1280 x 1024, 66 Hz, (VRT19) Trinitron; requires PCXAG-AD adapter
16-inch SVGA Plus multisynchronous, non-interlaced color monitor; requires either PCXAG-AC or
PCXAG-AD video adapter
16-inch color monitor, 1280 x 1024, 66 Hz, (VRT16) Trinitron; requires PCXAG-AD adapter
14-inch VGA multisynchronous color monitor; supports VGA (640 x 480), SVGA (800 x 600),
SVGA Plus (1024 x 768) , and 8514/A (1024 x 768) , 120 V; requires PCXAG-AC adapter
14-inch VGA color monitor, supports 640 x 480; requires PCXAG-AC adapter
19-inch monochrome monitor, 1280 x 1024, 72 Hz (VR319); requires PCXAG-AD adapter
14-inch VGA monochrome monitor, 64 shades of gray, 120 V; requires PCXAG-AC adapter

Step 6a-Video Adapter
PCXAG-AD
PCXAG-AC
PC4GM-AA

3.48

Personal Computing

1280 x 1024 high-resolution graphics adapter used with PCXAV-Ax, PCXAV-Bx, PCXAV-Cx, and
PCXAV-Dx monitors above.
SVGA+ graphics adapter for non-interlaced monitors up to 1024 x 768.
VRAM upgrade kit, 512 Kbytes

DECpc 400ST Deskside Computers
Step 7-Storage
Systems include one 1.44-Mbyte 3.5-inch diskette drive; four additional storage bays are available (one 3.5-inch, three
5.25-inch). SCSI devices require a controller; see Step 7 a. Select additional devices if required.
· Maximum of two IDE devices
·Maximum of four 42-mm-high devices
· Maximum of three 5.25-inch, half-height devices
· Maximum of one 5.25-inch, full-height device (uses two half-height bays)
• Maximum of one additional diskette drive
Select maximum of one additional diskette drive:

PCXDR-AA
PC4XR-EA

1.44-Mbyte 3.5-inch, 42-mm half-height diskette drive
1.2-Mbyte 5.25-inch, half-height diskette drive

One 5.25 -inch bay
One bay

Select maximum of two IDE disks:

PC4XR-BD
PC4XR-EB
PCXAR-CA
PCXAR-CB

52-Mbyte 3.5-inch, 25-mm half-height IDE disk
105-Mbyte 3.5-inch, 25-mm half-height IDE disk
120-Mbyte, 3.5-inch, 25-mm half-height IDE disk
240-Mbyte, 3.5-inch, 25-mm half-height IDE disk

One bay
One bay
One bay
One bay

SCSI devices ~equire SCSI controller from Step 7 a.

PCXAR-AG
PCXAR-AB
PCXAR-AC
PCXBR-AB
PCXCR-BA
PCXCR-BC
PCXAT-AA
PCXAT-AB

245 -Mbyte 3.5-inch, 42-mm full-height SCSI hard drive
426-Mbyte 3.5-inch, 42-mm full-height SCSI hard drive
852-Mbyte 3.5-inch, 42-mm full-height SCSI hard drive
1-Gbyte 5.25-inch, full-height SCSI disk drive
600-Mbyte CD-ROM kit (DOS) for DECpc 400ST (152x
support)
600-Mbyte CD-ROM kit (DOS) for DECpc 400ST (154x
and 174x support)
525-Mbyte 5.25-inch, half-height QIC tape drive for SCO
525-Mbyte 5.25-inch, half-height QIC tape drive for DOS

One bay
One bay
One bay
Two bays

One bay
One bay

Step 7a-~I Controller (Required if ~I devices ue selected)

~-----~~~~~~~_...~~~~~---------'""---~-

PCTAZ-AB
PCTAZ-AA

32-bit high-performance EISA SCSI controller
16-bit low-cost SCSI controller

Step &-Ethern~t Controller Cards
DElOO-AA
DEtol-AA
DE200-AC
DE201-AC

---

EtherWORKS LC Ethernet adapter
EtherWORKS LC/ TP Ethernet adapter
EtherWORKS Turbo Ethernet adapter
EtherWORKS Turbo/TP Ethernet adapter

Step 9-Accessories (Optional)
LK450-AA
LK450-AC
LK450-AQ
LK450-AS
PC4XD-AA
PC4XD-AB
PC4XD-CA
PCXAS-AA
PCT15-UD
PCT15-TR

Digital Gold-key keyboard, English
Digital Gold-key keyboard, Canadian French
Digital Gold-key keyboard, French Canadian/English
Digital Gold-key keyboard, Spanish
One serial and one parallel port adapter
Two-port serial adapter
2400-baud modem
Extra 3-button mouse (included with system)
Multilingual documentation set for DECpc 425ST, 433ST, and 450ST
Technical reference manual for DECpc 425ST, 433ST, and 450ST

Personal Computing 3.49

applicationDEC 400xP

Product Description

The applicationDEC 400xP is a floor-mounted uniprocessor tower based on the
Intel-based i486 technology. Base design allows for plug-in processor choice of
three processor speeds: 25SX, 33DX, or 50DX. Flexibility designed into the
enclosure and logic design allows for processor speeds upgrade path, expansion
of memory, and internal and external storage devices. The applicationDEC 400xP
functions well in all application environments: multi-user timeshare, server, or
single-user workstation. Operating systems supported include SCO UNIX,
MS-DOS and Windows, OS/2, as well as certification for Novell NetWare and
Banyan Vines.

Configuration Examples:
Multi-User Timeshare
486150
256 KB standard
36 MB: 2 x 2 MB standard +
memory expansion card with
two 2 x 8 MB add-on
1024 x 768
16 color standard

Server
486/33
64 KB add-on
20 MB: 2 x 2 MB standard +
2 x 8 MB add-on

1.44-MB 3.5-inch floppy
standard + 1.2-MB
5.25-inch floppy

1.44-MB 3.5-inch floppy
standard + 3201525 MB
QIC tape

Fixed Disk

105-MB IDE

852-MB SCSI

490-MB SCSI (2 x 245 MB)

Disk Controller

·ac.:=

IDE (std) + internal IDE cable

AHA 1540B

AHA 1740A

Console

16-inch color VGA,
keyboard, mouse

14-inch monochrome VGA,
keyboard, mouse

14-inch monochrome VGA,
keyboard

Multiplexer Options

None

e.g., 48 users: 2 MUX +
4 additional terminal
concentrators

None

Base CPU
Cache
Memory

VGA

Single-User Workstation
486/25
0 KB
8 MB: 2 x 2 MB standard +
2 x 2 MB add-on
1024 x 768

256 color 512 KB standard +

1024 x 768
16 color standard

512 KB VRAM add-on
Accessible Storage

'"ii
c:
Q

Ethernet

None

Operating System

MS-DOS 5.0 with Microsoft
Windows 3.0

SCO UNIX 3.2.4

Novell Net Ware

Accessory

2400-baud internal modem

None

3.50

Personal Computing

applicationDEC 400xP
Step 1--Systetns
applicationDEC 400xP hardware is customer installable. There are three methods of ordering/ configuring these systems:
1. Select Base System with CPU kit and all hardware options factory installed and tested.
2. Select Base System with CPU kit factory installed only and all hardware options as line items for field/ customer
installation only.
3. Select a-la-carte system with CPU kit and all hardware options as line items for field/ customer installation only.

Note: · 120-V systems include power cord, 240-V systems require country-specific power cord from Step 2.
• Software options arrive at the same time, but are not factory installed.

applicationDEC 400xP systems include:
· Intel 80486 processors with choice of 25-MHz, 33-MHz or 50-MHz CPU module
• 4-Mbyte memory, expandable to 192 Mbytes
· 25-MHz and 33-MHz systems support one external cache upgrade, 64 or 128 Kbytes
• 50-MHz systems include 256-Kbyte external cache
· 1.44-Mbyte 3 .5-inch diskette drive
• Seven additional half-height storage bays, three accessible, four hidden
• Standard on-board controllers: IDE, diskette, 1024 x 768 VGA (512-Kbyte video RAM standard, with expansion
to 1 Mbyte)
· I/O expansion: eight 32-bit EISA slots (six master, two slave)
· Ports: two serial, one parallel, mouse, keyboard,
· Auxiliary IEC 320 monitor outlet
• Installation guide
• User diagnostics
· 350-W autosensing line voltage

Order Number
120 V/240 V
Model
Base Systems-Options Factory Installed and Tested
PS201-AA/A3
applicationDEC 400xP
PS202-AA/A3
applicationDEC 400xP
PS203-AAIA3
applicationDEC 400xP

CPU

Memory

Cache2

25 MHz

4-Mbyte
4-Mbyte
4-Mbyte

O-Kbyte
1
O-Kbyte
256-Kbyte

33 MHz

50 MHz

Base Systems-Options Field/Customer Installable Only
PS201-BAIB3
applicationDEC 400xP 25 MHz
4-Mbyte
PS202-BA/B3
applicationDEC 400xP 33 MHz
4-Mbyte
PS203-BAIB3
applicationDEC 400xP 50 MHz
4-Mbyte
A-la-Carte Systems (Select CPU and Options, Field/Customer Installable Only)
PS200-AA/A3
applicationDEC 400xP Option
4-Mbyte
1

O-Kbyte
1
O-Kbyte
256-Kbyte

. 2
0 ptlon

Systems support one external cache upgrade (64 or 128 Kbyte)
Systems ordered with 50-MHz CPU include 256-Kbyte external cache.

Step la-CPU Kit (Required for A-la-Carte systems)

PS2XK-AA
PS2XK-BA
PS2XK-CA
1

25-MHz CPU card for applicationDEC 400xP, 0-Kbyte cache
1
33-MHz CPU card for applicationDEC 400xP, 0-Kbyte cache
50-MHz CPU card for applicationDEC 400xP, 256-Kbyte external cache

Systems support one external cache upgrade (64 or 128 Kbyte)

Step 2-Power cords (Not required for 120-V systetns)
BN26J-1K
BN24R-2E
BN19W-2E
BN26B-2E
BN24T-2E
BN19K-2E
BN22P-2E
BN19Z-2E
BN22Z-2E

U.S./Canada/Japan, 120 V (included with 120-V systems)
Australia/New Zealand
Austria, Belgium, France, Holland, Norway, Sweden, Portugal, Spain
U.K./Ireland
Switzerland
Denmark
Israel
Italy
India

Personal Computing

3.51

applicationDEC 400xP

Kits include software licenses, distribution media, and documentation. If mixing multiple operating systems, refer to
operating system support hot line(s). No restriction mixing MS-DOS V5.0 and SCO UNIX V3.2.4.

QB-MESAA-SA
PC4XQ-BA
PC4XQ-AA

MS-DOS V5.0 operating system with Microsoft Windows V3.1, English
MS-DOS V4.01 operating system, English
MS-DOS V3 .3 operating system, English

PCWXQ-CA

OS/2 Vl.21 English

U.S./Canada
QB-YN2AW-VA
QB-YN2AW-VB
QB-YN2AW-VD
QB-YN2AW-VE

SCO UNIX V3.2.4 operating system, two-user, 3.5-inch diskette
SCO UNIX V3.2.4 operating system, multi-user, 3.5-inch diskette
SCO UNIX V3.2.4 operating system, two-user, QIC tape
SCO UNIX V3.2.4 operating system, multiuser, QIC tape

International
QB-YN2AW-VG
QB-YN2AW-VH
QB-YN2AW-VK
QB-YN2AW-VL

SCO UNIX V3 .2.4 operating system, two-user, 3 .5-inch diskette
SCO UNIX V3.2.4 operating system, multiuser, 3.5-inch diskette
SCO UNIX V3.2.4 operating system, two-user, QIC tape.
SCO UNIX V3.2.4 operating system, multiuser, QIC tape.

Note: SCO UNIX variants listed are for use on applicationDEC 400xP and DECpc 400ST series platforms only.

Step 4-Memory
Systems include 4 Mbytes of memory with maximum expansion to 192 Mbytes. Main logic board accommodates two
memory banks, two slots per bank. Optional memory expansion card accommodates four banks, two slots per bank for a
system total of 12 memory slots. SIMMs MUST be installed in pairs of matching size and speed.
Some memory configurations require removal of two 2-Mbytes SIMMs standard in all systems.
Digital recommends a minimum of 4 Mbytes of memory on systems using MS-DOS and Microsoft Windows, 4 Mbytes for
OS/2 operating systems, and 8 Mbytes for SCO UNIX operating systems. An additional 0.5 Mbyte is recommended on SCO
UNIX systems for each concurrent user, or each additional graphical application.

System memory board

;===========:: } Bank 1

(PS2XM-AA standard in all systems)

~======~ } Bank 0
Optional memory expansion card (PCTXM-AA)
Bank 1
Bank2
Bank3
Bank4

PS2XM-AA
PS2XM-AB
PS2XM-AC
PS2XM-AD

4 Mbytes (2 x 2-Mbytes, 80 ns, 36-bit SIMM kit)
8 Mbytes (2 x 4-Mbytes, 80 ns, 36-bit SIMM kit)
16 Mbytes (2 x 8-Mbytes, 80 ns, 36-bit SIMM kit)
32 Mbytes (2 x 16-Mbytes, 70 ns, 36-bit SIMM kit)

PS2XM-AE

Memory expansion card; maximum of one expansion card per system

3.52

Personal Computing

applicationDEC 400xP
Step 5-Extemal Cache Upgrade (Optional)
External cache upgrades are supported on 25-MHz and 33-MHz systems only. Maximum of one upgrade kit per system.
PSWXM-AA
PSWXM-AB

64-Kbyte external cache upgrade kit
128-Kbyte external cache upgrade kit
---~~~~~~~~~~~~--~~~~~------...-.

System includes one 1.44-Mbyte 3.5-inch diskette drive. Seven additional half-height storage bays or three full-height and
one half-height are available (three accessible, four hidden). SCSI devices require a controller; see Step 6a. Select additional
devices if required.
Minimum fixed disk storage recommended for operating systems:
MS-DOS
OS/2
SCO UNIX

40 Mbytes
40 Mbytes
80 Mbytes + 5 Mbytes per user (typical for office environment)

Select maximum of one additional 1.2-Mbyte 5.25-inch diskette drive, internal cabling included with base system.
PS20R-FA

1.2-Mbyte 5.25 -inch half-height diskette drive

One bay

Select maximum of two IDE fixed disks, IDE controller standard on base system. Requires selection of internal IDE cable;
cable harness assembly supports two drives. IDE drives not recommended for use with SCO UNIX.
PCWXR-BB
PSWXR-AA

105-Mbyte 3.5-inch 25-mm half-height IDE disk drive
Internal IDE cable for applicationDEC 400xP

One bay

SCSI devices require SCSI controller from Step 6a.
PS20R-AA
PS20R-BA
PS20R-CA
PCXAR-AC
PS20R-DA
PS20R-HA
PS20R-EA
TLZ06-BA

245-Mbyte 3.5-inch 42-mm half-height SCSI hard drive
426-Mbyte 3.5-inch 42-mm half-height SCSI hard drive
665-Mbyte 5.25-inch full-height SCSI disk drive
852-Mbyte 3.5-inch half-height SCSI hard drive
1-Gbyte 5.25-inch full-height SCSI disk drive
1.3-Gbyte 5.25-inch full-height SCSI disk drive
320/525-Mbyte 5.25-inch half-height QIC tape
4.0-Gbyte 3.5-inch half-height digital audio tape (DAT)

One bay
One bay
Two bays
One bay
Two bays
Two bays
One bay
One bay

Step 6a-SCSI AHA Controllers
One controller per seven SCSI devices under SCO UNIX 3.2.4. SCSI devices are not recommended for OS/2 Vl.21 systems.
Controllers include internal SCSI cable and terminations.
PSXAZ-AA
PSXAZ-CA
PSXAZ-BA

AHA 1520 SCSI controller (8-bit)
AHA 1540B SCSI controller (16-bit)
AHA 1740A SCSI controller (32-bit bus master); requires external SCSI cable (BC09D-03 )

Step 6b-.-Extemal Storage
Systems support two SCSI controllers. Maximum of two tower storage expanders per system. Maximum of two expansion
boxes per SCSI controller, four expansion boxes with two SCSI controllers. External SCSI cable must not exceed 6 meters
(19.7 feet).
Note: xA variants include 120-V power cord; x3 require country-specific power cord.

Personal Computing 3.53

applicationDEC 400xP
Step 6b-External Stof8F (Contia"'1J
Tower Storage Expansion
Select maximum of two tower storage cabinets. Select SCSI devices for tower from Step 6.
· 14 half-height bays (four front accessible bays)
• Half-height bays convertible to full-height
• Internal cabling for two SCSI bus and two external SCSI cables
·Maximum of seven SCSI devices per bus under SCO UNIX 3.2.4.
• Each bus requires one SCSI controller in host system
• 350-W autosensing power supply
• AHA 17 40A SCSI controller (PSXAZ-BA)
• External SCSI cable BC09D-03
Tower Expansion
SCSI devices ordered with PS2XR-AA/A3 are factory installed.

PS2XR-AA/A3
PS2XR-BA/B3

14-bay tower storage expander, SCSI options factory installed
14-bay tower storage expander, SCSI options field installable

Base system has eight 32-bit EISA slots: six bus master, two slave.
• No configuration restriction on filling backplane (with exception of 32-bit bus master card in slots 3-8 only)
• Select maximum of eight total 1/0 cards
• Select maximum of six 32-bit EISA bus-master cards
Option card types accepted per slot type:

Slave
(Slots 1 and 2)

Master
(Slots 3-8)

AT (8-bit)
ISA (16-bit)
ISA master (16-bit)
EISA slave (32-bit)
EISA (32-bit) bus master

Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No

Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Only

Step 7a-Terminal Multiplexer Options
Multiplexer card:
• Each multiplexer board supports one to four terminal concentrators.
· Based on memory configuration, system will support the following number of multiplexer cards under
SCO UNIX 3 .2 .4:
Less than 16 Mbytes:
Maximum of 1 MUX (limit 32 users)
16 Mbytes or greater:
Maximum of 4 MUX (limit 128 users)
Terminal concentrators:
• Each terminal concentrator supports one to eight asynchronous devices such as terminals and printers.
· Supports full modem control.
· Supports serial printers which require hardware handshakes.
· Maximum of three additional terminal concentrators per MUX kit (PC4XD-DA).
Extension kit:

• An extension kit is available if terminal concentrator is to be placed more than 3 meters (10 feet) from system box.
· Allows terminal concentrator to be placed up to 305 meters (1,000 feet) away from system.
· Includes wall-mounted power supply. Note: Cable is not available from Digital; customers need to purchase a level 3 or 4
unshielded twisted-pair cable at the desired length.
· Requires SCO UNIX 3 .2 .4.

PC4XD-DA
PC4XD-DB
PC4XD-DC
3.54

Personal Computing

Terminal multiplexer (16-bit card) with one 8-port terminal concentrator
8-port terminal concentrator
Terminal concentrator extension

applicationDEC 400xP
Step 7b-Ethernet Cards

3C503
WD8013

3Com-reference sell only
Western Digital-reference sell only
----~~~--~~~~~~~........,.--.....-.~--~~~~~~.....,

Step 7c-Intemal Modem Card

PC4XD-CA

2400-baud internal modem (16-bit)

Step 8-Console Monitors

-----

Note: The EISA System Configuration Utility requires VGA (standard with system), VGA monitor, and a PC keyboard. A
serial I/ O terminal cannot be used as a console device to configure the system. 120-V monitors include power cord; select
country-specific power cords for 240-V variants from Step 2.
VRT13-CA
VRT13-DA

13-inch VGA, color, 120-V power cord included
13-inch VGA, color, 240 V, requires country-specific power cord

PC4XV-A2
PC4XV-A3
PC4XV-A4

14-inch VGA, monochrome, 120-V power cord included
14-inch VGA monochrome, 240-V Northern Hemisphere, requires country power cord
14-inch VGA monochrome, 240-V Southern Hemisphere, requires country power cord

VRC16-DA
VRC16-D3
VRC16-D4

16-inch multisynchronous, color, 120-V power cord included
16-inch multisynchronous, color, 240-V Northern Hemisphere, requires country power cord
16-inch multisynchronous, color, 240-V Southern Hemisphere, requires country power cord

Step 9-Keyb'?ard
PCXAL-AA
PCXAL-AB
PCXAL-AD
PCXAL-AE
PCXAL-AG
PCXAL-AI
PCXAL-AN
PCXAL-AP
PCXAL-AR
PCXAL-AS
PCXAL-AT
PCXAL-AV
PCXAL-CA
PCXAL-CH

U.S. keycaps-101 keys
Belgian keycaps-102 keys
Danish keycaps-102 keys
U.K. keycaps-102 keys
c;.erman keycaps-102 keys
Italian keycaps-102 keys
Norwegian keycaps-102 keys
French keycaps-102 keys
Spanish (international) keycaps-102 keys
Spanish keycaps-102 keys
Hebrew keycaps-102 keys
Portuguese keycaps-102 keys
Swedish/ Finnish keycaps-102 keys
Swiss keycaps-102 keys

Step to-Accessories
Hardware-specific accessories for applicatiohDEC 400xP
PSWXM-BA
PCXAS-AA
PSWXR-BA
PSXAZ-DA
BC09D-03

512-Kbyte video RAM upgrade to 1 Mbytes, 256 color, for applicationDEC 400xP
3-button Logitec mouse
Internal IDE cable for two IDE fixed disks
Internal SCSI cable, 7-connector, for use with third-party SCSI controllers; not required if DEC SCSI
controllers selected
External SCSI cable for 1740A SCSI controller (PSXAZ-BA)

Supported Terminals and Printers
· VT420, VT330, VT340 and industry-standard terminals are supported for connection to the multiplexer, not as a system
monitor
· LA70 dot matrix impact personal printer
• LA324 dot matrix impact, wide-carriage printer
· LN05 /LN06 DEClaser printers
• Serial and parallel variants
• Industry-standard printers

Personal Computing

3.55

applicationDEC 400xP
Specifications
Power Requirements

Maximum power consumption

110 V-120 V/220 V-240 V autosense
88 V-132 V/176 V-264 V
50160 Hz
47 Hz - 63 Hz
12 A @ 100 Vac (with auxiliary output)
9 A @ 100 Vac (without auxiliary output)
830 w

Operating Environment

Temperature
Relative humidity
Maximum operating altitude

10° C - 40° C (50° F - 104° F)
20-80 % operating
10,000 ft.

Physical Characteristics

Height
Width
Depth
Weight

Regulatory

FCC A
VDE B

Line voltage
Voltage tolerance-RMS
Frequency/single phase
Frequency tolerance
Maximum running current

63.5 cm (25.0 in.)
22.9 cm (9.0 in.)
61.0 cm (22.0 in.)
26.6 kg (59 lbs) without options

PTT
UL/CSA

TUV/GS
CISPR A

System Diagram
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N

BU -32 69

3.56

Personal Computing

SCSI bus cable

Power cables
Front drive bays
SCSI terminator
Rear drive bays
Diskette drive cable
System board
CPU model
On-board memory SIMMS
Memory expansion module
Power supply
1/0 connectors
SCSI host adapter
EISA option module slots (8)

applicationDEC 433MP System

Product Description

The applicationDEC 433MP system is based on industry-standard technology:
SCO UNIX System V with Intel 486 33-MHz processors, EISA bus, and SCSI
devices. It features a dual-bus architecture: a high-performance system bus
(9 slots) for CPU and memory, and an industry-standard EISA bus (7 slots) for
popular PC option boards. The system software is based on SCO UNIX System V
with SCO MPX multiprocessor extensions, providing immediate access to over
4,000 small-to-medium business applications.
The applicationDEC 433MP can be configured to support a variety of compute
environments, e.g., multiuser timesharing system, applications fileserver, or database
server. It will support one to four Intel 486 33-MHz CPU boards. Optional CPU
boards also include either serial I/O or high-performance SCSI functionality. With
these expansion options, terminals and storage can directly access the system bus
for performance-sensitive situations.
Memory is expandable from 8 to 64 Mbytes in 4-Mbyte increments. Internal
storage can grow to 5.1 Gbytes with six 852-Mbyte RZ35 disks, while external
storage can grow to 14 Gbytes with 14 RZ57 disks. Storage options also include
an internal 320/525-Mbyte TZKlO QICtape drive.

Configurations

The following are typical models that can be configured to meet the appropriate
application environment.

Multiuser Timesharing (32-user)

·Base System (8 Mbytes, 245 -Mbyte disk, VGA, 3.5-inch diskette)
· Monitor and PC keyboard
• One additional 245-Mbyte disk drive
• One terminal multiplexer kit
• One 320/525-Mbyte QICtape drive
·Additional 12-Mbyte memory (20 Mbytes total)
• SCO UNIX System V/ 386
• Three additional terminal concentrators

File Server

·Base System (8 Mbytes, 245-Mbyte disk, VGA, 3.5-inch diskette)
• Monitor and PC keyboard
• Two additional 245-Mbyte disk drives
·One 33-MHz 486 SCSI CPU module
• One 320/525-Mbyte QICtape drive
• One 3Com or Western Digital Ethernet module
·Additional 8-Mbyte memory (16 Mbytes total)
• Open Desktop (includes SCO TCP/IP and SCO NFS)
· Open Desktop Server Upgrade
Personal Computing 3.57

applicationDEC 433MP System
Multiuser Timesharing Environment Examples
Number of Users

8-User

32-User

64-User

128-User

Number of processors:
Base CPU (included)
Serial I/0 CPU
High-performance SCSI CPU

1
1

2-1~

NIA
NIA

NIA
1

4t
1
2
1

Minimum total memory

245 MB

490 MB

986 MB

2 GB

Multiplexer board with
terminal concentrator

Additional terminal
concentrators

NIA

SCO UNIX System V O/S
(multiuser)

SCO MPX software kit

NIA

Disk storage

* Second processor in 64-user system is a high-performance SCSI CPU.
t Third and fourth processors in 128-user system are serial 1/0 CPUs.

File Server and Multiuser Workstation Environments
Memory Guidelines

Disk Storage Guidelines

SCO UNIX operating system or Open Desktop

8.0 Mbytes

For each concurrent user, or each additional
graphical application

0.5 Mbyte

For each concurrent user in a software development
environment

0.75 Mbyte

For each user running SCO UNIX VP/ix for MS-DOS
under UNIX

1.0 Mbyte

For each copy of SCO MPX

4.0 Mbytes

Disk storage requirements are heavily dependent upon the type of
applications being run and on the number of users.
Non-Cumulative:

el.)

SCO UNIX operating system

80 Mbytes

For each user in an office environment

5 Mbytes

For Open Desktop (total)

100 Mbytes

For Open Desktop Server Upgrade (total)

180 Mbytes

For SCO UNIX development system (total)

140 Mbytes

For SCO MPX

&
e0
u

Cumulative:

·~

3.58

Personal Computing

5 Mbytes

Page/ swap space

Total memory +
2 Mbytes

For each software developer

Size of source and
ob ject modules

applicationDEC 433MP System
applicationDEC 433MP hardware is customer installable. There are two methods of ordering/configuring these
systems.
1. Order packaged system and options as line items-customer installs the options.
2. Order base system and options, with hardware options factory-installed and tested (hardware options ordered in
Steps 1 through 10 will be factory-installed). Software options arrive at the same time, but are not pre-installed.

Step 1-Systems

------

Select from Steps 1 through 12, using the configuration rules noted within the Steps. Only Steps 1 through 5 are required
for a fully functional system-the other steps are optional.

PS11A-AA/A3
Packaged system includes:
• Intel 486 33-MHz base/bridge CPU (2-board set)
• 8 Mbytes of ECC memory
• RZ24L 245-Mbyte internal SCSI disk drive
• RX23 1.44-Mbyte SCSI diskette drive
• Tower box with EISA backplane
• 550-watt autosensing power supply
• Nine system bus slots for CPU and memory modules (six available for expansion)
• Seven EISA slots for popular PC option boards (four for expansion)
· Adaptec SCSI controller
• 16-bit VGA plus adapter (1024 x 768), with 3-button bus mouse
• Serial/parallel board with one serial port and one parallel port
• English-language user documentation

-----

Step th-Custom System and Options, wi~ H.....,e Options F~t.IW
Custom systems include:
• Intel 486 33-MHz base/bridge CPU (2-board set)
·A choice of 8, 12, or 16 Mbytes of ECC memory
• RZ24L 245-Mbyte internal disk drive
· RX23 1.44-Mbyte diskette drive
• Tower box with EISA backplane
• 550-watt autosensing power supply
• Nine system bus slots for CPU and memory modules (six available for expansion)
• Seven EISA slots for popular PC option boards (four for expansion)
• Adaptec SCSI controller
· 16-bit VGA plus adapter (1024 x 768), with 3-button bus mouse
• Serial/parallel board with one serial port and one parallel port
• English-language user documentation

System

Number
of CPUs

Memory

Disk
Storage

Diskette
Drive

Tape
Drive

PS110-AA/A3
PS110-BA/B3
PS110-DA/D3

1
1
1

8 MB
8 MB
16 MB

245 MB
245 MB
245 MB

1.4 MB
1.4 MB
1.4 MB

NIA
320/525 MB
320/525 MB

.f
!.

e
8

Persona] Computing 3.59

applicationDEC 433MP System
Step 2-Power Cord (System to wall socket-not requited for, 120-V systems)
If a 240-V system is required, appropriate power cords must be ordered.
BN26J-1K
BN24R-2E
BN19W-2E
BN26B-2E
BN24T-2E
BN19K-2E
BN22P-2E
BN19Z-2E
BN22Z-2E

United States/Canada/Japan, 120 V (included in base -AA system)
Australia/New Zealand
Austria, Belgium, France, Holland, Norway, Sweden, Portugal, Spain
U.K./Ireland
Switzerland
Denmark
Israel
Italy
India

"Step 3-0perating System Software
Software order numbers include license, media, and documentation.
Note: SCO UNIX, SCO MPX, and Open Desktop, as sold by Digital Equipment Corporation, include SCO patches and
enhancements to improve data reliability and performance. To ensure reliable operation, customers should only use SCO
UNIX, SCO MPX, and Open Desktop available from Digital on the application DEC family of systems. (Digital Equipment
Corporation only supports SCO UNIX System V, SCO MPX, and Open Desktop kits that have been provided by Digital
Equipment Corporation.)

In U.S. and Canada:
QB-YN2AW-VA
QB-YN2AW-VD
QB-YN2AW-VB
QB-YN2AW-VE
QB-GFlAW-VA
QB-YN8AW-VB
QB-GF4AW-V A
QB-GF5AW-VB
QB-YNBAW-VC

SCO UNIX two-user, 3.5-inch diskette media
SCO UNIX two-user, QICtape media
SCO UNIX multiuser, 3.5-inch diskette media
SCO UNIX multiuser, QICtape media
SCO UNIX Developers' System, 3.5-inch diskette media-requires two-user or multiuser media
Open Desktop operating system, QICtape drive media
Open Desktop Server Upgrade, 3.5-inch diskette media-requires Open Desktop O/S
Open Desktop Development System, QICtape media-requires Open Desktop O/S
DEC Enhanced SCO MPX Vl.2 3.5-inch diskette media

In GIA:
QB-YN2AW-VG
QB-YN2AW-VH
QB-GFlAW-VJ
QB-YN2AW-VK
QB-YN2AW-VL
QB-YN8AW-VK
QB-GF4AW-VH
QB-GF5AW-VM
QB-YNBAW-VD

SCO UNIX two-user 3 .5-inch diskette media
SCO UNIX multiuser 3 .5-inch diskette media
SCO UNIX Developers' System, 3.5-inch diskette media-requires two-user or multiuser media
SCO UNIX two-user QICtape media
SCO UNIX multiuser QICtape media
Open Desktop operating system QICtape media
Open Desktop Server Upgrade, 3.5-inch diskette media-requires Open Desktop O/S
Open Desktop Development System, QICtape media-requires Open Desktop O/S
DEC Enhanced SCO MPX Vl.2 3.5-inch diskette media

Notes: • SCO MPX is required for a 2-CPU system, and for each additional processor added.
• Refer to SPDs for more information.
·Open Desktop operating system is a prerequisite for Open Desktop Server Upgrade and/or Open Desktop
Development System.

3.60

Personal Computing

applicationDEC 433MP System

Select a video display monitor.
Note: The EISA configuration utility, a software utility for configuring EISA systems, requires a VGA (standard in base
system), a monitor, and a PC keyboard-a serial I/O terminal cannot be used as a console device to configure the
system. Multiple VGE boards in a system are not supported.

VRC16-DA
VRC16-D3
VRC16-D4
VRT13-CA
VRT13-DA
PC4XV-A2
PC4XV-A3
PC4XV-A4

16-inch color multisync video display, 120 V (includes power cord)
16-inch color multisync video display, 240 V (order country cord from Step 2)
16-inch color multisync video display, 240 V, S. Hemisphere (order country cord from Step 2)
14-inch color video display, 120 V (includes power cord)
14-inch color video display, 240 V (order country cord from Step 2)
14-inch monochrome video display, 120 V (includes power cord)
14-inch monochrome video display, 240 V (order country-specific power cord)
14-inch monochrome video display, 240 V, S. Hemisphere (order country-specific power cord)

PCXAL·AA
PCXAL-AB
PCXAL-AD
PCXAL-AE
PCXAL-AG
PCXAL-AI
PCXAL-AN
PCXAL-AP
PCXAL-AR
PCXAL-AS
PCXAL-AT
PCXAL-AV
PCXAL-CA
PCXAL-CH
PCXAL-CT

U.S. keycaps (101 keys)
Belgian keycaps (102 keys)
Danish keycaps (102 keys)
U.K. keycaps (102 keys)
German keycaps (102 keys)
Italian keycaps (102 keys)
Norwegian keycaps (102 keys)
French keycaps (102 keys)
Spanish (international) keycaps (102 keys)
Spanish keycaps (102 keys)
Hebrew keycaps (102 keys)
Portuguese keycaps (102 keys)
Swedish/Finnish keycaps (102 keys)
Swiss keycaps (102 keys)
German-ampersand keycaps (102 keys)

Order additional processors and memory as required for the application environment.
The nine system bus slots are allocated as follows:
• One for base 486 CPU board
• One for bridge CPU board (bridge EISA bus to system bus)
• One for memory board
• Six available for additional CPU or memory boards

One to three incremental 486/serial I/O CPUs can be added to a base system. The 33-MHz 486/SIO processor board
includes a built-in serial 1/0 multiplexer which supports one to four terminal concentrators.

PSlOK-AA

33-MHz i486 SIO CPU module

Note: SCO MPX is required for a 2-CPU system, and for each additional processor added.

To optimize disk I/O performance, the 486 SCSI CPU should be the first optional CPU added to the base system. A
maximum of two 486/high-performance SCSI controllers are supported on the system bus. The first 486 SCSI CPU supports
a combination of internal and external devices. The second 486 SCSI CPU supports external devices. Each 486 SCSI CPU
supports up to seven disk drives.

PSlOK-BA

33-MHz i486 SCSI CPU module

Note: SCO MPX is required for a 2-CPU system, and for each additional processor added.

Personal Computing 3.61

applicationDEC 433MP System
Step 6b-Memory Options
One to three incremental system bus memory boards can be added to a base system for a maximum total of four memory
boards. The base system memory board includes 8 Mbytes of memory-additional memory SIMMs can
be added in 4-Mbyte increments up to a total of 16 Mbytes. Each additional memory board can accommodate
16 Mbytes. The maximum total memory is 64 Mbytes on four memory boards.
PSlXM-BA
PSlXM-AA
PSlXM-BB

4-Mbyte SIMM package, ECC, 100 ns
Add on ECC memory card (no SIMMs)
100-Mbyte memory pack (25 x 4-Mbyte SIMM packages)

Note: The bulk-ordering PSlXM-BB is offered as an ease-of-ordering/pricing feature when ordering multiple systems-the
64 Mbytes total per system applies.

Step 7-lnternal Storage Options
--------~~~~~--~------~----~~~--~~--.--......;;........-.-.-i@l1---.I

Select additional storage devices if required.
System supports one to six RZ24L or RZ25 SCSI disks. If an RX33 5.25-inch diskette drive is installed, a total of five

RZ24LIRZ25 disks can be installed.
Note: When ordering base system and options with hardware options pre-installed, select factory-installed options.
System supports the following SCSI controllers:
· Adaptec (ISA bus) PSlXR-AA-for external and internal devices
· A second (ISA bus) PSlXR-AA-for tape drive only
· 486 SCSI (system bus) PSlOK-BA-for internal and external devices
· A second 486 SCSI (system bus) PSlOK-BA-for external devices
Note: The first PSlXR-AA (included in Base System ) supports up to four disk drives. Each 486 SCSI CPU supports up to
seven disk drives.
RX33-AS
RZ24L-SJ
RZ24L-SJ

1.2-Mbyte 5.25-inch diskette disk drive
245-Mbyte disk drive (factory installed)
245-Mbyte disk drive (field installable)

RZ25-SJ
RZ25-SH

426-Mbyte disk drive (factory installed)
426-Mbyte disk drive (field installable)

PCXAR-AC

852-Mbyte disk drive (factory/field installed)

TZKlO-EF
TZKlO-EG

320/525-Mbyte QICtape drive (factory installed)
320/525-Mbyte QICtape drive (field installable)

TLZ06-EF
TLZ06-EG

4.0-Gbyte 4-mm digital audio tape (DAT) drive (factory installed)
4.0-Gbyte 4-mm digital audio tape (DAT) drive (field installable)

Step 8-Multiuser Options
Select multiplexer kits and terminal concentrators to accommodate the number of users.
System supports up to three EISA-bus terminal multiplexer boards. Each mux board supports one to four terminal
concentrators. Each terminal concentrator supports one to eight asynchronous devices such as terminals and printers. Also
supports up to three system bus serial 1/0 CPU modules.

...

.5
:s
c..

A terminal concentrator plugs into either an EISA-bus mux board or a 486 SIO CPU board. The terminal concentrator
supports full modem control. It also supports serial printers which require hardware handshakes. An extension kit is
available if a terminal concentrator is to be placed more than 3 meters (10 feet) from the applicationDEC system box. The
extension kit allows the terminal concentrator to be placed up to 305 meters (1000 feet) away from the system. The
extension kit includes a wall-mounted power supply. Cable is not available from Digital; customers need to purchase a level
3 or 4 unshielded twisted-pair cable at the desired length.
PC4XD-DA
PC4XD-DB
PC4XD-DC

3.62

Personal Computing

Terminal multiplexer kit (includes PCAXD-DB, cables and adapters; accepts three additional
PC4XD-DB terminal concentrators)
Terminal concentrator, with full modem control
Terminal concentrator extension kit (120 V)

applicationDEC 433MP System

Select SCO UNIX application software. Software order numbers include a license, media, and user documentation.
In U.S. and Canada:

QB-YN7AW-VA
QB-GF2AW-VA
QB-GFJAW-VA
QB-GF6AW-VA
QB-GF7 AW-VA
QB-YNAAW-VA

SCO TCP/ IP Runtime System, 3.5-inch diskette media
SCO TCP/ IP Developer's System, 3.5-inch diskette media (requires SCO TCP/IP runtime media)
SCO NFS, 3.5-inch diskette media
SCO Portfolio, 3.5-inch diskette media
SCO Lyrix, 3.5-inch diskette media
XENIX Tutor (DOS) Vl.O

In GIA:
QB-YN7AW-VD
QB-GF2AW-VE
QB-GFJAW-VF

SCO TCP/ IP Runtime System, 3.5-inch diskette media
SCO TCP/ IP Developer's System, 3.5-inch diskette media (requires SCO TCP/IP runtime media)
SCO NFS, 3.5-inch diskette media

Step 10-External Storage Expansion
Select a maximum of two SCSI PS2XR Expander(s).

PS2XR Expander Rules
· PS2XR Expander has seven full-height or 14 half-height storage bays; two full-height or four half-height front accessible
bays support removable media; tape or SCSI diskette drives.
• Each PS2XR expander includes 18-inch SCSI cable.
• PS2XR Expanders include 120-V power cord. rs2XR Expanders for 240-V systems require country-specific power cord,
see Step 2.
· PS2XR Expander ships without drives.

PS2XR-AA
PS2XR-BA
PS2XR-A3
PS2XR-B3

SCSI Storage Expander without drives 120 V (factory installed)
SCSI Storage Expander without drives 120 V (field installable)
SCSI Storage Expander without drives 240 V (factory installed)
SCSI Storage Expander without drives 240 V (field installable)

...........

.......... ~--~~·~~~

~~~~~~

Step lOa-Storage Devices
Devices for PS2XR Expander are customer installable, or may be installed by Digital Services.
· Hard drive variants listed here are configured to spin on power-up to meet the applicationDEC 433MP SCO UNIX drive
configuration requirements.

RZ24L-SJ
RZ24L-SJ

245-Mbyte half-height disk drive (factory installed)
245-Mbyte half-height disk drive (field installable)

RZ25-SJ
RZ25-SH

426-Mbyte half-height disk drive (factory installed)
426-Mbyte half-height disk drive (field installable)

PCXAR-AC

852-Mbyte half-height disk drive (factory/ field installable)

PSlXR-DA
PSlXR-GA

665-Mbyte full-height (RZ56) disk drive (field installable)
1.0-Gbyte full-height (RZ57) disk drive (field installable)

TZKlO-EF
TZKlO-EG

525-Mbyte half-height QIC tape (factory installed)
525-Mbyte half-height QIC tape (field installable)

TLZ06-EF
TLZ06-EG

4.0-Gbyte 4-mm digital audio tape (DAT) drive (factory installed)
4.0-Gbyte 4-mm digital audio tape (DAT) drive (field installable)

Personal Computing

3.63

applicationDEC 433MP System
Step 11-SCO UNIX Networking Options
For networking with other UNIX systems, select the following products to interconnect applicationDEC systems to other
UNIX systems supporting TCP/IP networking protocol.

QB-YN7 AW-VA
QB-GF2AW-VA
QB-GFJAW-VA

SCO TPC/IP Runtime System, 3.5-inch diskette media
SCO TPC/IP Development System, 3.5-inch diskette media (requires SCO TCP/IP runtime O/S)
SCO NFS, 3.5-inch diskette media

Note: The above options require a supported Ethernet card (Western Digital WD8003E or 3COM 3C503) or asynchronous
serial line.

For DECnet-based systems (VAX VMS, ULTRIX, MS-DOS, Macintosh, OS/2) , DECnet for SCO UNIX is currently shipping
for applicationDEC systems. DECnet for SCO UNIX is a DECnet Phase IV end-node implementation. DECnet will allow the
concurrent use of DECnet and TCP/IP on the same machine using a single supported Ethernet card.

QL-GJ7 AW-AA
QA-GJ7 AA-HC
QA-GJ7 AA-H7
QA-GJ7 AB-HC
QA-GJ7 AB-H7
DE200-AC

DECnet for SCO UNIX license
DECnet for SCO UNIX media (3.5-inch diskette) and documentation
DECnet for SCO UNIX media (5 .25-inch diskette) and documentation
DECnet for SCO UNIX Programmers Library (3.5 -inch diskette)
DECnet for SCO UNIX Programmers Library (5 .25 -inch diskette)
DEC EtherWORKS TURBO Ethernet board (when running DECnet for SCO UNIX)

Note: The following third-party Ethernet boards are supported: Western Digital WD8003E or 3Com 3C503.

An alternative method of networking VAX VMS to applicationDEC systems is to include the Digital software product VMS
ULTRIX Connection or Fusion TCP/IP which provide TCP/IP support under VMS. Both products are available from Digital.
The above mentioned SCO TCP!IP product is required on the applicationDEC system.
LAT support on applicationDEC systems is available from third -party vendors. Announce-One for SCO from phase2 networks corporation provides LAT capabilities on SCO UNIX.
With IBM systems, many third-party products exist to integrate applicationDEC systems into an IBM environment. Refer to
the SCO System V Directory for more information.
As PC LAN Server, PC-Interface from Locus Computing Corporation converts an applicationDEC system into a PC LAN
server, providing extensive network services for MS-DOS personal computers.

Step 12-Accessories
Uninterruptible Power System (UPS)

Uninterruptible power systems are especially important for applications requiring continuous uptime. Digital strongly recommends the use of UPS to protect valuable data from inconsistencies caused by blackouts, brownouts, power sags, or
electrical impulses.

4N-AEAAF-AF

1500 VA online backup power system. Constant line monitoring capability with surge and transient
protection and battery backup.

Supported Terminals and Printers

• VT420, VT330, VT340, and industry-standard terminals are supported for connection to the multiplexer or I/ O CPU, not
as a system monitor.
• LA70 dot-matrix impact personal printer
• LA324 dot-matrix impact, wide-carriage printer
· LN05 / LN06 DEClaser printers
• Serial and parallel variants
• Industry-standard printers

3.64

Personal Computing

applicationDEC 433MP System
Step 12-Accessories (Continued)
Documentation
EK-PSllO-RC
EK-PSllO-OV
EK-PSllO-CG
EK-PSllO-SV

Using the 433MP System (included with Base System)
System Overview (included with Base System)
Technical Configuration and Installation Guide (included with Base System)
Service Guide

SCO Documentation Sets

QA-YN2AB-GZ
QA-GFlAA-GZ

SCO UNIX V/386 O/S documentation set
SCO UNIX V/386 O/S developers' system documentation set

Mouse
PSlXS-AA

3-button bus mouse (included in PSlXG-AA VGA adapter and in base system)

VRC16 Video Cable

BC13L-10

10-foot (3-meter) video cable for VRC16 monitor (included in VRC16-xx monitor)

Grommet/Screw Fastener
12-31734-01

Fastens third-party internal hard disks to applicationDEC 433MP chassis brackets
(orderable through the DECdirect catalog)

Step 13-Upgrade Kit
To upgrade an ISA-bus applicationDEC 433MP to an EISA-bus applicationDEC 433MP, order the following upgrade kit. The
upgrade kit is customer installable.

PSllK-DA

Upgrade kit includes:
- 33-MHz i486 EISA CPU module
- EISA bridge module
- 16-bit VGA-plus adapter
- EISA configuration utility diskette
- System Exerciser diagnostic diskette
- User documentation

Personal Computing 3.65

applicationDEC 433MP System Diagram

245-MB
Hard Disk
(5 shown)

3.5-inch 1.44-MB
Diskette Drive
(RX23)

CD-ROM Drive

5.25-inch 1.2-MB
Diskette Drive
(RX33)

Power
Supply

Power Switch
Card Cage with - - - 9 System-bus and
7 ISA/EISA Slots

Pull Out
Brake

BU-3157

Slot
Number

Memo_!Y_

2
3
4
5
6

_iO~ional Memo_!Y)_

7
8

9
10
11
12

Cl)

·::=
::s

_iO~ional Memo_!Y)_
J_OQtional CPUl
J_O_gtional CPUl
_iO_gtional CPUl
EISA ~ System Bridge
Base 486 CPU

System bus
System bus
System bus
System bus
System bus
System bus
System bus
System bus
System bus

ADAPTEC SCSI Controller
Serial/Parallel Board

EISA bus
EISA bus

VGA Module

EISA bus

_iO~ional Memo_!Y)_

13
14

(Optional EISA/ISA Board)

EISA bus

(Optional EISA/ISA Board)

EISA bus

15
16

(Optional EISA/ISA Board)

EISA bus

(Optional EISA/ISA Board)

EISA bus

c..

BU-3156

Note:
• Base system configuration-additional modules can be added to
tailor system to specific applications.

3.66

Personal Computing

applicationDEC 433MP System Specifications
Central Processing Unit

• Intel 80486, 33 MHz uPC
·Four CPU maximum expansion
· 486 CPU with embedded SCSI
· 486 CPU with embedded SIO
• 256-Kbyte write-back cache per CPU
• 64-Mbyte system bus

Memory

• 8-Mbyte shared global memory standard
· 64-Mbyte maximum, 4-Mbyte increments
• 1-Mbyte SIMMs, 8-bit, 100-ns fast paged, ECC
· Four memory array cards maximum

Operating System and Diagnostics

• SCO UNIX System V
• DEC Enhanced SCO MPX
• Open Desktop
· DECnet for SCO UNIX
· Industry-standard ROM BIOS
· Integrated ROM-resident and standalone diagnostics

1/0 Subsystem

• EISA bus, full PC/AT compatibility
• Seven EISA slots
· Two serial, one parallel ports embedded
• ISA SCSI adapter (synchronous/asynchronous)
• 16-bit VGA plus adapter, with 3-button bus mouse
• ISA expansion memory support
• Optional ISA 32-port multiplexer board
· Optional ISA Ethernet adapter
· Optional 8-port terminal concentrators

Power, Packaging, Environment

• 110/120 Vac or 220/240 Vac auto-sensing (base unit) 50-60 Hz
• 700-watt maximum power dissipation
· 12-amp line input
• Optional uninterrupted power supply
• Base system physical data
Width: 289 mm x Depth: 559 mm x Height: 635 mm
(Width: 11.4 in. x Depth: 22.0 in. x Height: 25.0 in.)
Weight range: Minimum 41 kg (90.5 lb); Maximum 47 kg (104 lb)
· Integral anti-roll brake system

Agency Approvals

Safety:

Quality:

Ergonomics:

·UL

· VDE 0871-A
• FCC Class A

·TUV/GS

• CSA

• IEC

·PTT ,

Personal Computing 3.67

MIRA Application Switch 3400/3800

CRAY Y-MP EL Systems

Product Description

The Cray Research/Digital agreement significantly expands the ongoing strategic
business and technology relationship between the two leaders in the highperformance technical computing market. Customers now have access to the
leading supercomputer technology of Cray Research, Inc. coupled with Digital's
proven strength in open distributed computing. Together they offer the broadest
range of performance and functionality with the greatest value and openness in
the industry today, from desktop PCs to datacenter supercomputers. Also, over
600 optimized vector applications are available on the CRAY Y-MP EL running
under UNICOS, a UNIX-based operating system. UNICOS is the most powerful
and feature-rich UNIX operating system available for technical computing.
This worldwide marketing agreement reinforces all three levels of Digital's Open
Advantage strategy: integrates new technology into the open Digital environment,
satisfies customer needs through open business practices, and assures system
reliability through Digital's open services and support programs. Cray Research
products embrace the same open system standards as Digital such as
X-Windows, POSIX, OSI, TCP/IP, FDDI, HIPPI and Ethernet.

4.2 Specialized Systems

CRAY Y-MP EL Systems
Product Description (Continued)

The CRAY Y-MP EL system combines a proven architecture with innovations
that provide the highest level of sustained performance in its price range. Using
the integrated vector CRAY Y-MP architecture, each CPU provides balanced
scalar, vector, memory, and I/O performance. To enhance performance while
preserving binary compatibility, the CRAY Y-MP EL includes an innovative multifunctional unit extension to this architecture that provides up to four results
per clock period (instead of two). To enhance performance even further, the
CRAY Y-MP EL CPU is designed to maximize the overlapping of vector, scalar,
memory, and I/O operations.
With up to four CPUs working in parallel and up to 1024 Mbytes of central
memory, the CRAY Y-MP EL provides the highest possible performance on a
wide variety of applications. Leading-edge applications are available for industries
such as aerospace, automotive, chemistry, energy, petroleum, and defense. Cray
Research also offers software packages to couple the power of visualization with
its supercomputers.
The CRAY Y-MP EL supercomputer can be used in the following ways:
· As a departmental supercomputer-the CRAY Y-MP EL supercomputer features
a powerful, balanced architecture that provides the highest possible performance
in its class on scientific and engineering applications.
· As a complementary system for larger Cray Research systems-ideal for UNICOS
application development. Because binaries from the CRAY Y-MP EL will run on
other CRAY Y-MP systems, work is easily scaled to larger Cray Research systems.
• As a secure system-it is physically compact and offers removable storage media,
and is ideal for secure processing environments. UNICOS also provides multilevel
security.
·As a high-performance file server-combined with the powerful data management features of the UNICOS operating system, the CRAY Y-MP EL system is an
excellent server platform. With support for standalone STK autoloading tape
cartridge systems, the CRAY Y-MP EL file server can satisfy requests from multiple supercomputers over gigabit/second networks while providing service to
smaller systems, workstations, and personal computers.

Specialized Systems

4.3

CRAY Y-MP EL Systems

Select system. The following items may be required and must be purchased separately.
• Minimum configuration of disk drives
• Tape drives and other storage devices
• Network communication devices
• Additional I/O cabinets
• Processor and memory upgrades
• Layered software

Base Cray Y-MP EL system includes
• Mainframe cabinet
· One to four processors
· Four memory boards containing memory selected
· 20-slot VME I/O card cage
· I/O subsystem with 6-slot backplane
· 1.35-Gbyte QIC cartridge tape drive (for operating system backup)
· 200-Mbyte Winchester disk drive (for error logging)
· Set of user, operator, and system administrator manuals
· Operator's console
• Maintenance workstation
• Operating system software and license

Digital Order Number

Cray Order Number

Number of CPUs

System Memory

MC121-AA
MC131-AA
MC141 -AA

Y-MP EL/1-256
Y-MP EL/1-512
Y-MP EL/1-1024

1
1
1

256 Mbytes
512 Mbytes
1024 Mbytes

MC122-AA
MC132-AA
MC142-AA

Y-MP EL/2-256
Y-MP EL/2-512
Y-MP EL/2-1024

2
2
2

256 Mbytes
512 Mbytes
1024 Mbytes

MC123-AA
MC133-AA
MC143-AA

Y-MP EL/3-256
Y-MP EL/3 -512
Y-MP EL/3-1024

3
3
3

256 Mbytes
512 Mbytes
1024 Mbytes

MC124-AA
MC134-AA
MC144-AA

Y-MP EL/4-256
Y-MP EL/4-512
Y-MP EL/4-1024

4
4
4

256 Mbytes
512 Mbytes
1024 Mbytes

Step 2. Additional CPUs
System accommodates four CPUs; all CPU boards reside in the mainframe cabinet. If additional CPUs are required, order
the following.

MClOC-AA

CRAY Y-MP EL CPU Upgrade

The CRAY Y-MP EL is a real memory, timesharing machine rather than a virtual memory machine. Selection of proper
memory size is most important. Without sufficient memory, excessive process swapping may occur.
It is very important to understand the number of interactive users connected to the system, their interface environments,
and the type of work being performed. X-window users may have two to three windows open at one time performing
various tasks from each window. Each window is an individual process that requires system memory. In addition to interactive users, large batch jobs must be sized and taken into consideration. UNICOS itself requires 8.8 Mbytes of memory.

4.4

Specialized Systems

CRAY Y-MP EL Systems
Step 3-Memory (Continued)
As an example, consider ten interactive X-terminal users who are using the system for code development. Each user is
assumed to have two sessions, one for editing and one for compiling and testing. Assuming average program sizes, these 20
processes will need approximately 160 Mbytes of system memory. If the size and complexity of the programs increases,
even more memory will be needed.

If additional system memory is needed, order the following options:
MClOM-AA
MClOM-AB

Cray 256- to 512-Mbyte memory upgrade
Cray 512- to 1024-Mbyte memory upgrade

Step 4-1/0 Subsystems
The CRAY Y-MP EL uses a VME I/O subsystem that conforms to the IEEE-1014 industry interface standard. The standard
offering is the 6U card cage which accepts VME boards that are 15.2 x 4.4 cm (6 x 1.75 inches) or 26.7 cm (10.5 inches)
high. A 9U card cage that accommodates custom-built VME boards is available on special order.
The mainframe cabinet and each of the three expansion cabinets have a VME cage with 20 slots for VME boards. Into these
slots go I/O systems (IOSs) which consist of an I/O processor board (IOP), an I/O buffer board (IOBB), a Y-lC channel
cable that connects the VME to the I/O port of the CPU, and user VME boards. When configuring an IOS, two slots are
taken for the IOP and the IOBB.
There are three types of IOSs available: the 10-, 6-, and 4-slot systems which result in 8-, 4-, and 2-user slots respectively.
The VME card cage may be set up at the factory in a 6-4-6-4 (up to four I/O channels) , 10-6-4 (up to three I/O channels),
or 10-10 (up to two I/O channels) slot IOS configuration (see system diagrams). Unless otherwise specified on the order, the
factory will build the 6-4-6-4 configuration and will make the one IOS included with the base system a 6-slot.
Each VME I/O system (IOS) is connected to the I/O port of a CPU via the Y-lC channel which has a sustainable data
transfer rate of over 20 Mbytes/second. When configuring the VME I/O system, devices should be placed on I/O channels
so that the sum of the data transfer rates in actual practice for the devices during peak periods of I/O do not exceed the
sustained rate for the IOS channel.

If additional I/O systems are required, order the following .
MClOX-HG
MClOX-HH
MClOX-HJ

Cray additional IOS with eight slots
Cray additional IOS with four slots
Cray additional IOS with two slots

Step ;.- Disk Configurations
The following is the minimum disk storage capacity required according to the amount of system memory purchased. These
minimum requirements are only capable of providing adequate space to permit bringing up the operating system. They do
not include customer static storage requirements or disk space for a backup root file system.
System Memory
256 Mbytes
512 Mbytes
1024 Mbytes

Minimum Disk Capacity (Bytes)
1,849,780,000
2,655 ,080,000
4,265 ,480,000

The following Cray Research disk subsystems have been selected primarily for performance and reliability with optimized
device drivers, diagnostics, and error logging features.

MClOS-EA

Cray 1.3-Gbyte (formatted) 5.25-inch Winchester ESDI Disk Drive-operates at a peak data transfer rate of approximately 2 Mbytes/second; ESDI controller required.

MClOS-RA

Cray 1.3-Gbyte Removable Disk Subsystem-frame containing two ESDI drives in removable canisters used for secure operations where media must be removed between runs. ESDI controller
supports two removable disk subsystems.

MClOS-RB

Cray Spare Removable Canister-ESDI drive in removable canister that fits the removable disk
subsystem.

Specialized Systems

4.5

CRAY Y-MP EL Systems
Step 5-Disk Configurations (Continued)
MClOS-RC

Cray Maintenance Disk Drive-frame containing one ESDI disk drive in removable canister.
Replaces IOS maintenance/startup console drive and allows system to be configured entirely with
removable media.

MClOS-RD

Cray Spare Maintenance Canister-spare ESDI drive in removable canister for maintenance disk
drive.

MClOS-EB

Cray ESDI Controller-intelligent controller that supports fo ur ESDI disk drives. Intelligent disk
management techniques include overlapping seeks on multiple drives connected to the disk controller. Operates at peak data transfer rate of 2 Mbytes/second. Requires tray and one VME slot.

MClOX-HA

Cray ESDI Peripheral Expansion Tray-specially designed tray that holds eight ESDI disk drives
and contains power supplies for the drives. Trays are required for all ESDI drives with the exception of removable and maintenance drives which include their own trays. Due to power supply
incompatibilities, different drive types cannot be mixed in this tray.

MClOS-IA

Cray 2.7-Gbyte (formatted) two-headed parallel IPI-2 Disk Drive-operates at a peak formatted
transfer rate of 7.5 Mbytes/second and sustained transfer rates of approximately 6 to
7 Mbytes/second.

MClOS-IB

Cray IPI-2 Drive Controller-intelligent controller that can transfer data from two drives simultaneously; supports four IPI-2 drives. Operates at peak data transfer rate of 15 Mbytes/ second. Requires
tray and one VME slot.

MClOX-HB

Cray IPI Peripheral Expansion Tray-holds two IPI-2 drives and contains all necessary power
supplies for the drives. All IPI-2 drives require trays. Due to power supply incompatibilities, different drive types cannot be mixed in this tray.

MClOS-DA

Cray Disk Array Storage System (DAS) -specialized storage subsystem that transfers large blocks
of sequential data rapidly. Consists of an intelligent disk array controller supporting four banks (one
included) of eight ESDI drives for data storage, plus one drive for parity and error recovery and one
spare drive to serve as a hot standby. Provides a sustained data transfer rate in excess of 15
Mbytes/second on block sizes of 64K and larger. For smaller block transfers, the rate drops to 0.01
Mbyte/second. As an alternative to the DAS, consider striping two 2.7-Gbyte IPI-2 disk drives to
obtain close to the 15 Mbytes/second of the DAS over all block sizes. Requires one VME slot.

MClOS-DB

Cray DAS Expansion Bank-extra banks of ten 1.3-Gbyte drives for the DAS array.

MClOS-DC

Cray DAS Multiplexer-allows disk array storage system to expand beyond one bank of drives.

Step 6-Network Communications
A number of network options including Ethernet, FDDI, HYPERchannel, and HIPPI are supported. All except HIPPI are
supported off the VME I/O system. Each of the following interface cards fits into one slot of the VME IOS. They all use
TCP/IP protocol and support FTS (file transfer) , Telnet (interactive access), NFS (network file system), and X-Windows.

MClON-FA
MClON-GA
MClON-RA

Cray FDDI interface card (requires one VME slot)
Cray HYPERchannel interface card (requires one VME slot)
Cray Ethernet interface card (requires one VME slot) Note: UNICOS does not support directly
connected terminals. An Ethernet terminal server must be purchased to supply this functionality.

HIPPI is an actual high-performance channel directly into the CPU that requires a chip change on the CPU board. HIPPI
channels do not use VME slots. Once HIPPI is configured, the CPU supporting HIPPI can only support up to two IOS
channels for a maximum of ten VME slots. Cray HIPPI uses TCP/IP protocol and supports FTS (file transfer) and NFS
(network file server). ULTRAnet support is under investigation.

MClON-HA
MClON-HB
MClON-HC

4.6

Specialized Systems

Cray HIPPI input and output channels
Cray HIPPI input channel
Cray HIPPI output channel

CRAY Y-MP EL Systems
"Step 7-Tape Configurations

---

All tapes, including Exabyte units, are designed to fit inside the cabinets.

MClOS-TA

Cray 125 JPS 9-Track Pertee Tape Drive-high-performance, digital vacuum-buffered drive for
0.5-inch open-reel tape. Read/write tape speed is 125 inches per second for 800-, 1600-, or
6250-bit/inch tape densities. Requires connection to a Pertee tape control unit.

MClOS-TD

Cray Pertee Tape Control Unit-supports one internal or eight external 9-track tape drives. Unit is
capable of reading and writing records of any length, and reading records of unknown length.
Requires one VME slot.

MClOS-TB

Cray 3480-Compatible Cartridge Tape Drive-provides high-speed access to 3480-compatible cartridges. Data transfer rate is 3 Mbytes/ second. Each drive includes its own tray, but requires Cray
SCSI-1 interface card.

MClOS-TC

Cray SCSI-1 Interface Card-has a transfer rate of 5 Mbytes/second; Provides connectivity to STK
(or compatible) SCSI tape units such as the STK4781 which provides connectivity to the STK 4400
silo. Requires one VME slot. Also supports the 3480-compatible cartridge drives and Exabyte drives.

MClOS-TE

Cray Exabyte 8-mm Helical Scan Cartridge Tape Drive-consists of drive and controller integrated
into a 5.5-inch form factor. Provides 5-Gbyte capacity per 8-mm cartridge and is intended primarily
as a user file backup device. Transfer rate is 500 Kbytes/second. Additional units can be placed in
the main I/O cabinet using the Exabyte peripheral expansion tray and SCSI-1 interface card.

MClOX-HC

Cray Exabyte Peripheral Expansion Tray-allows two Exabyte units to be placed in main I/O
cabinet space and be connected to the VME I/O system.
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~-

S~p 8-Expansion Cahinets
Select additional expansion cabinets if required.
Diagram on page 4.12 shows a front view of a typical cabinet with its right and left chimneys or vertical shafts into which
storage devices and trays are installed. Each chimney has its own cooling system where air is blown from the bottom and
exhausted through the top of the cabinet. Vertical space is designated in "U" units where one U equals 4.45 cm (1.75
inches).

In the mainframe cabinet, the right chimney is filled with the CPUs and memory modules, and is not available for any
peripheral devices or trays. In the expansion cabinets, both chimneys may be populated with devices and trays, but
restrictions apply as to what is permitted in each chimney.
Permitted in Left Chimneys

Permitted in Right Chimneys

· 1.3-Gbyte ESDI disk drives and trays
• 2.7-Gbyte IPI-2 disk drives and trays
· Exabyte drives and trays
• Pertee 9-track tape drives
· 3480-compatible cartridge tape drives
• 2.6-Gbyte removable disk drive systems
·Disk Array Storage (DAS) subsystems
·Disk Array Storage (DAS) banks

· 1.3-Gbyte ESDI disk drives and trays
• 2 .7 -Gbyte IPI-2 disk drives and trays
· Exabyte drives and trays

Use the following list to determine the vertical space required for each of the currently-offered peripheral devices and
peripheral expansion trays.
Order Number

Description

MClOX-HA
MClOX-HB
MClOX-HC
MClOS-RA
MClOS-DA

ESDI peripheral expansion tray
IPI-2 peripheral expansion tray
Exabyte peripheral expansion tray
2.6-Gbyte removable ESDI drive system
10.4-Gbyte disk array storage subsystem
- DAS bank
- DAS controller
10.4-Gbyte disk array storage bank
125 IPS 9-track Pertee tape drive
3480-compatible cartridge tape drive

MClOS-DB
MClOS-TA
MClOS-TB

Space
(U = 4.4 cm; 1.75 in.)
5U
5U
2U
3U
5U
8U
5U
5U
4U

Specialized Systems

4. 7

CRAY Y-MP EL Systems
Step 8-Expansion Cabinets (Continued)
Additional Configuration Rules
1. All processor and memory boards are configured in the mainframe cabinets. Additional cabinets are strictly for 1/0 and
storage devices.

2. Maximum of two 3480-compatible cartridge tape drives, or one 9-track tape drive and one 3480-compatible drive, or
one 9-track tape drive plus disks can be supported in the left chimney. Only one 9-track tape drive is supported in the
left chimney due to cooling requirements for tape devices.
3. Because power and monitoring system extends from the mainframe cabinet to each of the expansion cabinets, the
cabinets must be physically connected together.
4. If an expansion cabinet is added, there must be at least one IOS in that cabinet.

5. DAS controller may only be installed in the uppermost slot in the left chimney. Only one DAS controller supported in a
mainframe cabinet or an expansion cabinet due to cooling requirements.
6. With a DAS controller in the left chimney, no removable ESDI drive system, 9-track tape drives, or 3480-compatible
cartridge tape drives are allowed in that chimney due to cooling reasons.
7. One Exabyte tape drive can be installed at the top of the mainframe cabinet next to the system disk and the QIC tape.
This unit is then connected to the master IOP. Two Exabytes can be placed in expansion cabinets.
8. The removable maintenance disk drive, if ordered, is placed in the upper position of the mainframe cabinet in place of
the system disk.

If additional expansion cabinets with 20-slot VME card cages are required, order the following. Expansion cabinets include
their own power systems and power cord.

MClOX-HD
MClOX-HE
MClOX-HF

Cray 1st expansion cabinet with VME cage
Cray 2nd expansion cabinet with VME cage
Cray 3rd expansion cabinet with VME cage

The following describes the type of connection and the physical plate space requirements for connecting devices external to
the cabinets:
External Connections

The diagram on page 4.12 illustrates the number of access plates available for the various external interface bulkhead
connectors. There are seven dedicated plates and 16 openings for external user interfaces.
The following describes the dedicated plate layout and the requirements for the 16 user-defined access plates:
Slot 1:
Slot 2:
Slot 3:
Slot 4:
Slot 5:
Slot 6:
Slot 7:

Operator's console
Maintenance workstation
Ethernet connection
Remote alarm 1
Remote alarm 2
Remote control panel status
Centronics printer parallel connector

Ethernet
FDDI
HYPERchannel pair
HIPPI channel
(input or output)
HIPPI channel
(input and output)
SCSI
Pertee

One connector per plate
One connector per plate
Two plates
One plate

4.8

Specialized Systems

Two plates
One connector per plate
One connector per plate

(EIA-232)
(9-pin DSUB)
(DR-15)
(9-pin DSUB)
(9-pin DSUB)
(15-pin DSUB)

CRAY Y-MP EL Systems
Step 9--So~are
The following Cray Research binary system software and features are included with the CRAY Y-MP EL system. Customers
are required to purchase a USL System V, Version 4 license prior to taking delivery of the system.
· USL UNIX System V with Berkeley 4.3 extensions
• Multiprocessing
• Parallel processing
· Enhanced performance file systems
• Enhanced tape support
• Production batch capabilities
·Cray CF77 FORTRAN compiling system
· Cray Standard C compiler
· Cray Pascal compiler (not included but available at no charge)
· Full C and FORTRAN compiler optimization enabled as default
· Binary compatibility with all Cray Y-MP series systems
· Cray assembly language (CAL)
· Utilities
· Cray Research libraries
· Advanced accounting and resource control
· Multilevel security
• Data migration facility
· Advanced system administration
· Standards-based implementation

'·

Cray Software
The following describes briefly the software packages and licenses that are available for the CRAY Y-MP EL system. Note
that this is Cray Research software and not Digital software. It is designed for Cray Research platforms such as the CRAY
Y-MP EL only. Since the software is licensed by Cray Research directly to the end user, customers must sign Cray Terms
and Conditions prior to ordering and receiving software.
· CRAY UNICOS Environment-License, software, media and documentation kit included with the system.
• CRAY USL System V.4 license-must be purchased for each system.
· CRAY TCP/IP-software based on the Fourth Berkeley Distribution implementation of TCP/IP and is appropriate for
CRAY Y-MP EL systems connected to other computer systems that are running an implementation of the DoD standard
TCP/ IP specifications.
· CRAY Mainframe RQS/VMS-software used for remote job submission and control to Cray systems running UNI COS from
a VMS-based system. RQS/VMS will support all VAX systems except for VAX.station 3100. Supports a maximum of 32
simultaneous connections.
· CRAY RQSIVMS 1.0 for WSS-software used for remote job submission and control to Cray systems running UNI COS
from a VMS-based system. RQS/VMS will support the VAX.station 3100. Supports a maximum of 32 simultaneous
connections.
· CRAY RQS/VM LO-software used for remote job submission and control to Cray systems running UNICOS from a
VM-based system. RQS/VM will support the following IBM mainframes: IBM 370, IBM 390, IBM 9370.
·CRAY Mainframe RQS/UNIX 2.1-software used for remote job submission and control to Cray systems running UNICOS
from a UNIX-based mainframe. RQS/UNIX supports IBM 3090 systems running AIX/370.
·CRAY RQS/UNIX 2.1 for WSS-software used for remote job submission and control to Cray systems running UNICOS
from a UNIX-based system. RQS/UNIX supports the following UNIX-based systems: SUN-4 systems (SunOS 4.0.3 ), Sun
SPARCstation (SunOS 4.0.3 and 4.1) , IBM RISC System/6000 (AIX Version 3, Release 1.0 and 2.0), DECstation 3100
(ULTRIX 4.2), DECstation 5100 (ULTRIX 4.2), Silicon Graphics 4D (IRIX 3.3 and 4.0), HP 9000/400 and /700 (HP-UX 7.0
and 8.0 respectively), CDC 4000 (EP!IX 3.1)

Specialized Systems

4.9

CRAY Y-MP EL Systems
Step 9....;.Software (Continued)

-----

.CRAY ADA 2.0 for 1-4 CPUs-software required for Ada compilation on the CRAY Y-MP EL system. Requires
8 MW (64 Mbytes), but performance is improved with 16 MW (128 Mbytes). Licensed only in binary form.
·CRAY CVT LO-software is a collection of tools which allow users to create visual interfaces from Cray-based applications. Most of the tools are the result of porting other vendor products to the Cray platform. Licensed only in binary
form.
• CRAY MPGS 4.0-multipurpose graphics system visualization tool for understanding the results of engineering analysis
software running on the CRAY Y-MP EL system. Available in binary code only and resides on an IBM RS/6000 3xx, 5xx
or 7xx, or SGI IRIS-4D worksta.tion attached to the EL.
· CRAY EXPLORER 1.0-very high level object oriented programming system with visual interfaces at almost every level;
used in the building of applications programs. New functional modules may be added to the system using existing code or
by writing new code. Visually based tools for the integration into the system and similar tools for integration of new data
types and formats are provided. Available in binary code only.
• CRAY UniChem I-applications software environment for computational chemistry. Consists of two major components:
"UniChem User Interface," the interactive graphics (workstation-based) modeling system; and "ChemSuite" a third-party
and Cray-developed computational chemistry codes (MND090, CADPAC, DGAUSS) integrated through the UniChem User
Interface. Available in binary code only and requires a Silicon Graphics IRIS workstation.
· CRAY CVT 1.0 (University )-lower-cost license for university use
· CRAY MPGS 4.0 (University)-lower-cost license for university use
• CRAY UniChem 1 (University )-lower-cost license for university use

Step 10-lnstallation
The CRAY Y-MP EL has minimal installation and operational requirements and may be installed in most office environments or computer rooms.

4.10

Specialized Systems

CRAY Y-MP EL System Specifications
Physical Characteristics
Mainframe Cabinet

Expansion Cabinets

Height
Width
Depth
Weight

144 cm (56.75 in.)
127 cm (50.00 in.)
83 cm (32.75 in.)
635 kg (1400 lb) maximum
411 kg (906 lb) minimum

144 cm (56.75 in.)
127 cm (50.00 in.)
57 cm (22.56 in.)
635 kg (1400 lb) maximum
411 kg (906 lb) minimum

Access
requirements

30 cm (12 in.)-rear
76 cm (30 in.)-each side
91 cm (36 in.)-fronf''

'" "'-rear
76 cm (30 in.)-each side
91 cm (36 in.)-front"'

When expansion cabinets are installed, the front panel of the mainframe cabinet is removed and
the expansion cabinets are attached to the front of the mainframe cabinet. Then the radiused
front panel is installed on the front of the expansion cabinet. With expansion cabinets, the front
clearance requirement for the mainframe cabinet is no longer valid.
As described above, the backs of the expansion cabinets are connected to the front of the
mainframe cabinet or the front of the previous expansion cabinets which eliminate the rear
clearance requirement for the expansion cabinets.

Environmental
Operating temperature

10° to 35° C (50° to 95° F)

Non-operating temperature

-10° to 50° C (14° to 122° F)

Relative humidity

20 % to 80% noncondensing

Operating altitude

0 to 3000 m (0 to 10,000 feet)

Nonoperating altitude """'°'

0 to 4500 m (O to 15,000 feet)

Cooling

Fully configured system requires less than 2 tons of
cooling per cabinet. A flow rate of not less than
1274 lpm (45 cfm) must be maintained through the
area.

The system must be shipped in a pressurized cargo bay for altitudes greater than 4500 m
(15,000 feet).

Specialized Systems

4.11

CRAY Y-MP EL System Diagrams
CPU

CPU

Y11 Channel

0
p

B
B

u u u
s s s

B
B

Six-slot IOS

B
B

Four-slot IOS

M
1

0
p

Six-slot IOS

Q
B
B

Four-slot IOS

CPU

Y11 Channel

0
B

E
R

B
B

Y11 Channel

Y11 Channel
u

0
p

B
B

Six-slot IOS

CPU

Ten-slot IOS

Four-slot IOS

0
p

B
B

Ten-slot IOS

Ten-slot IOS
BU-3261

Three VME Card-cage Configurations

1 or 2 EX-2 Units
VME Card Cage
Wiring Channel

23U

15U*

.____.._________.J
Left Chimney

Blank
Plates

Power
Distribution

Right Chimney
BU-3262

Dedicated
Plates

*Filled with CPUs·and memory in the
mainframe cabinet

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
BU-3263

Cabinet Configuration

4.12

Specialized Systems

External Connections

DECmpp 12000/12000-LC Massively Parallel
Processing Systems

Product Description

DECmpp 12000 and 12000-LC system series introduces a family of computers
based on massively parallel processing (MPP) , a high-performance technology
targeted to meet the needs of scientific and commercial users. DECmpp 12000
and 12000-LC differ only in cabinet size, capacity, and choice of console. The
low-end 12000-LC series starts at lK and expands to 4K processor elements,
delivering a maximum of 6,400 MIPS (150 Mflops) of processing power. The
high-end DECmpp 12000 series starts at lK and expands to 16K processor
elements and delivers a maximum of 26,000 MIPS (773 Mflops) of processing
power. Both series may be upgraded simply by adding PE boards.
Massively parallel processing is an outgrowth of the quest to speed computer
processing. The faster CPU requires more memory and larger input/ output
bandwidth to maintain balanced, high-speed operations. Multiple-processor
implementations, with four , six, or even a hundred or more processors can bring
significant increases in speed, coordinated by additional logic to maintain synchronization. Operating in a Single Instruction Multiple Data (SIMD) fashion,
thousands of processor elements can work on a single problem simultaneously.
DECmpp's integrated software provides access to hundred of utilities. The
DECmpp Parallel Programming Environment (symbolic debugger, machine animator, data visualizer, etc.) , DECmpp system software, and DECmpp FORTRAN
compiler work identically on high- and low-end offerings. Parallel disk arrays
provide 5 .8 to 23 Gbytes of magnetic storage for all configurations, and are fully
supported by DECmpp parallel disk systems that can store up to 23 Gbytes of
data.
The DECmpp 12000 systems are available with either a DECsystem 5900 server
or a DECstation 5000 Model 240 workstation. The DECsystem 5900 is configured
with 32 Mbytes of memory, a VME adapter, one 1.3 Gbyte RZ58 hard drive, one
RRD42 CD-ROM drive, and an ULTRIX 4-user server license. The DECstation
5000 Model 240 is configured with 32 Mbytes of memory, a VME adapter, an
SZ12 expansion box with one 1.3 Gbyte RZ58 hard drive, and one RRD42
CD-ROM drive, and an ULTRIX 2-user workstation license. The DECstation or

Specialized Systems

4.13

DECmpp 12000/12000-LC Massively Parallel
Processing Systems
Product Description (Continued)

DECsystem functions as a general-purpose console to control and execute
sequential code, and to provide an interface for system administration and diagnostics. VAX 9000 users can access the data parallel unit through the
DECstation/DECsystem console.
The DECmpp 12000 series systems consist of massively parallel processing systems and parallel disk array systems.
Although the DECmpp 12000 series uses many interconnected processing elements to achieve high performance, it features a single, integrated software environment based on the ULTRIX operating system, for developing complex scientific and commercial applications. The user interface to the software environment
is based on the DECwindows system and supports access from DECwindow
terminals and DECstation workstations.
DECmpp 12000 and 12000-LC System Software:
· DECmpp System Software includes a C-like, high-level language compiler as the
primary programming language for the DECmpp system's data parallel unit.
• DECmpp Parallel Programming Environment consists of a comprehensive set of
development tools for data parallel programming. Features include an easy-to-use
interactive Motif-like point-and-select interface for users to visualize and analyze
the behavior of DECmpp processor elements, algorithms, and data. The DECmpp
tool set includes a symbolic debugger, a machine animator, and data visualizer.
• DECmpp Image Processing Library is a highly optimized set of image processing
routines supporting the development of high-performance image processing solutions in a fully programmable platform. Library routines are callable from standard languages such as C, FORTRAN, and DECmpp programming language. The
library includes routines for image arithmetic, low-level image processing operations, and image analysis, as well as utilities for image display, I/O, test image
generation, and format conversion.
· DECmpp FORTRAN: DECmpp FORTRAN, a FORTRAN 77 based compiler with
FORTRAN 90 features , greatly simplifies the process of porting and adapting
existing FORTRAN programs for execution on DECmpp 12000 systems. Modifications to the code and new data structures can be developed quickly. Scalar
sections of most FORTRAN 77 programs need no change.
DECmpp FORTRAN makes DECmpp 12000 systems truly transparent to the
application developer. The optimizing compiler automatically separates scalar and
parallel code, distributes data across the processing elements, accesses different
functional units as needed, and integrates all communications and VO Programming Environment for application development and debugging.
DECmpp FORTRAN also allows users to develop parallel code without a DPU.
Using the -scalar option, code is generated for execution on the workstation
using runnodpu included in the package. Here, all constructs are linearized, and
intrinsic calls for parallel execution are converted to sequential in-line algorithms.
Source code can be re-compiled without modification at any time for parallel
execution with the DPU. Programs compiled in scalar mode are fully debuggable
under the DECmpp Programming Environment.
The disk array provides systems with up to 23 Gbytes of formatted capacity and
can be upgraded from four disks operating at 3 Mbytes/second to 24 disks
operating at 9 Mbytes/ second sustained disk I/O. Digital's TKZ08 tape drive may
be used to back up the parallel disk array.

4.14

Specialized Systems

DECmpp 12000/12000-LC Massively Parallel
Processing Systems
Product Description (Continued)

Markets for DECmpp systems include industries such as oil/gas, chemical, pharmaceutical, automotive/ aerospace, financial, education, Government, and defense.
Typical applications include geophysical data processing, ocean and atmospheric
modeling, seismic processing and reservoir analysis, structural dynamics and
acoustics, computational chemistry and physics, simulation of neural nets, molecular modeling, image processing and recognition, computational fluid dynamics,
signal processing (lD, 2D, 3D), and database and text retrieval.
· DECmpp Math Library: The DECmpp Math Library ("DPML") is a set of mathematical routines optimized for DECmpp 12000 systems. The library supports the
three primary groups of routines, which may be called from either DPL or
FORTRAN: linear algebra solvers, linear algebra building blocks, Fourier transforms for one- and two-dimensional data.
Like the Image Processing Library, DPML uses an internal virtualization strategy
for optimal performance across all configurations of DECmpp. Similarly, all routines operate on the DECmpp 12000 massively parallel unit, not on its
DECstation front end.
· DECmpp VAST-2: DECmpp VAST-2-a new development tool-translates FORTRAN 77 source code to DECmpp's FORTRAN. It's primary use is to translate
FORTRAN 77 DO loops to FORTRAN 90 array syntax for efficient execution on
DECmpp systems. VAST-2 also supports a scalarization option, which enables the
translation of FORTRAN 90 array syntax back to FORTRAN 77. VAST-2 has:
-Sophisticated data dependency analysis to ensure safe translation of loops
- User directives and switches to control all aspects of the translation process
- Reordering of array references to avoid dependencies
-In-line expansion of subroutines and functions
DECmpp VAST-2 optimizes programs by exposing implicit parallelism.
Performance of VAST-generated code is highly dependent on the nature of the
algorithm, structure of the data, and programming style. Best results are almost
always obtained for programs that have been restructured to take advantage of
VAST's abilities and for code that has been mapped to DECmpp's architecture
efficiently.

Specialized Systems

4.15

DECmpp 12000/12000-LC Massively Parallel
Processing Systems

Select system. 120-V systems include a U.S. keyboard an all required power cords. For 240-V systems select country-specific
power cord and keyboard from Step 2. Order DECmpp system license and software media and documentation from Step 10.
DECmpp systems with DECstation 5000 Model 240 include:
• Base module with 40-MHz CPU daughter card
· TURBOchannel I/O interconnect-three slots total
·Memory, 32 Mbytes
• Thick wire Ethernet controller on base system module
· Synchronous SCSI controller on base system module
• SZ12 expansion box with 1.3-Gbyte (RZ58) disk and 600-Mbyte (RRD42) compact disk drive
· 8-plane HX graphics board
• Monitor, 19-inch color (VR299)
· U.S. keyboard, 120 V
· Three-button mouse
· Two EIA-232 serial communication (synchronous/asynchronous) ports
· 3-meter (IO-foot) video cable
• 3-meter (10-foot) keyboard/mouse cable
· 1.8-meter (6-foot) SCSI cable (50-pin small connector to 50-pin large connector)
· 1.8-meter (6-foot) power cord, 120-V systems only
· 0.9-meter 3-foot convenience power cord (monitor to system box)
· Universal power supply that automatically adjusts to 88-132 Vac or 176-264 Vac
·ULTRIX workstation two-user base license, DEC C and OSF/Motif
• English-language user documentation
DECmpp systems with DECsystem 5900 include:
·Base module with 40-MHz CPU
· TURBOchannel I/O interconnect-three slots total
· TURBOchannel extender
· Memory, 32 Mbytes
• Embedded Thick wire 802.3/Ethernet controller
• Synchronous SCSI controller on base system module
• 67-inch cabinet with 19-inch rack-mountable drawers
· RZ58 1.38-Gbyte SCSI drive
• RRD42 600-Mbyte CD-ROM drive
· VME adapter
• VT420 terminal
· U.S. keyboard
• 120-V power cord
• Prestoserve license (QL-YV5AS-AA) and functionality
• ULTRIX base license
· ULTRIX four-user server license
Model Number

120 V/240 V/ S.H. ~,

Model

Console

Processor Elements

MPOOl-BAIBB/BC
MP002-BA/BB/BC
MP101-BA/BB/BC
MP102-BAIBB/BC
MP101-CAICB/CC
MP102-CA/CB/CC
MP103-CA/CB/CC
MP104-CA/CB/CC
MP105-CA/CB/CC
MP106-CA/CB/CC
MP107 -CA/CB/CC
MP108-CAICB/CC

DECmpp 12000-LC
DECmpp 12000-LC

DECstation 5000/240
DECstation 5000/240

lK
lK

16-Mbyte RAM
64-Mbyte RAM

DECmpp 12000
DECmpp 12000

DECstation 5000/240
DECstation 5000/240

lK
lK

16-Mbyte RAM
64-Mbyte RAM

DECmpp 12000
DECmpp 12000
DECmpp 12000
DECmpp 12000
DECmpp 12000
DECmpp 12000
DECmpp 12000
DECmpp 12000

DECsystem 5900
DECsystem 5900
DECsystem 5900
DECsystem 5900
DECsystem 5900
DECsystem 5900
DECsystem 5900
DECsystem 5900

lK
lK
4K
4K
8K
8K
16K
16K

16-Mbyte RAM
64-Mbyte RAM
16-Mbyte RAM
64 -Mbyte RAM
16-Mbyte RAM
64-Mbyte RAM
16-Mbyte RAM
64-Mbyte RAM

'" 120V/240V/ S.H indicates voltage of workstation and monitors only, e.g., -AC includes monitor for operation in Southern Hemisphere.

Note: Data parallel unit in all models requires a power source of 240 V, 50/60 Hz.

4.16 Specialized Systems

DECmpp 12000/12000-LC Massively Parallel
Processing Systems

Power Cord

and

BN19W-2E
BN19K-2E
BN19K-2E
BN19W-2E
BN19W-2E
BN19W-2E
BN19W-2E
BN19U-2E
BN19Z-2E
BN19W-2E
BN19W-2E
BN19W-2E
BN19W-2E
BN19E-2E
BN19E-2E
BN19A-2E
BN19H-2E
BN19P-1K
BN19P-1K

Keyboard

Country

Language

LK401-AG
LK401-AB
LK401-AD
LK401-AF
LK401-AP
LK401-AG
LK401-AH
LK401-AT
LK401-AI
LK401-AN
LK401-AV
LK401-AS
LK401-AM
LK401-AK
LK401-AL
LK401-AA
LK401-AA
LK401-AA
LK401-AC

Austria
Belgium
Denmark
Finland
France
German
Holland
Israel
Italy
Norway
Portugal
Spain
Sweden
Switzerland
Switzerland
U.K./Ireland
Australia/N .Z.
Canada
Canada

German/Austrian
Flemish
Danish
Suomi
French
German
Dutch
Hebrew
Italian
Norwegian
Portuguese
Spanish
Swedish
French
German
English
English
English
French

Step 3-Processor Element Array Options
· DECmpp 12000 systems support a maximum of 16 processor element (PE) boards.
· DECmpp 12000-LC systems support a maximum of four processor element (PE) boards.
·PE boards must be same type; -AA boards cannot be mixed with AB boards.

KPlOO-AA
KPlOO-AB
KPlOO-AC

lK PE board with 16 Mbytes of RAM
lK PE board with 64 Mbytes of RAM
lK PE board upgrade from 16 Mbytes to 64 Mbytes of RAM

Step 4-MemofY
· Systems with DECsystem 5900 include 32 Mbytes and are expandable to 448 Mbytes
· Systems with DECstation 5000 Model 240 include 32 Mbytes are exp~ndable to 120 Mbytes

MS02-CA
MS02-AA

32-Mbyte ECC memory for DECsystem 5900
8-Mbyte ECC memory for DECstation 5000

Note: MS02-AA memory modules cannot be mixed with MS02-CA modules.

Step 5-Parallel Disk Arrays
• Parallel disk arrays and upgrades require an I/ O controller.

· I/O controller supports 16 data disks.
KFlOO-AA
DECmpp I/ O controller with 8 Mbytes
• Select parallel disk array.
·
• System supports a maximum of 16 data disks.
SMPll-AA
SMPll-AB
SMPll-AC

Parallel disk array system, four data disks, 5.8 Gbytes
Parallel disk array system, eight data disks, 11 .5 Gbytes
Parallel disk array system, 16 data disks, 23 Gbytes

Step 5a-Parallel Disk Array Upgr~qes
· Select additional disk array upgrades; system maximum is 16 disks.
SMP12-AA
Upgrades SMPOl-AA to SMPOl-AB (four additional disks)
SMP12-AB
Upgrades SMPOl-AA to SMPOl-AC (12 additional disks)
SMP12-AD
Upgrades SMPOl-AB to SMPOl-AC (eight additional disks)

Step 5b-Hard Disk
RMPll-AA

1.5-Gbyte hard disk and controller for use as a hot standby disk for critical applications

Specialized Systems

4.17

DECmpp 12000/12000-LC Massively Parallel
Processing Systems
Step 6-TURBOchannel Options
PMAZ-AA

SCSI TURBOchannel option card, supports an additional six external devices

Step 7-N etworking Cables
BC16M-xx
BNE3H-xx
BNE3L-xx

Thin Wire Ethernet cable (xx = 06/ 15/ 30; refers to length in feet)
Thick wire transceiver cable with straight connector (PVC)
(xx = 05110120140, refers to length in meters)
Thick wire transceiver cable with straight connector (Teflon )
(xx = 05110120140, refers to length in meters)

Step 8-Software
• Systems with DECstation 5000 Model 240 include: ULTRIX Workstation two-user base license, DEC C and OSF/Motif
· Systems with DECsystem 5900 include: ULTRIX four-user server license
Part Numbers for DECmpp Software Version 1.1

An ULTRIX media and documentation kit is recommended for the first system on site.
QA-VV1AA-H8
QA-VYVAA-H8

ULTRIX workstation media (CD-ROM) and documentation kit (include DECnet-ULTRIX media)
ULTRIX server media (CD-ROM) and documentation kit

DECmpp System Executibles
QA-XT4AA-H8

ULTRIX/RISC executibles (CD-ROM);"

DECmpp System Software
QL-XT4A8-AA .
QA-XT4AA-WZ
QA-XT4AB-GZ

DECmpp system-wide license
Update from Vl.O
Documentation

DECmpp Fortran
QL-XT6A8-AA
QL-XT6A8-3B
QA-XT6AA-WZ
QA-XT6AB-GZ

System-wide license
Concurrent-use license
Update from Vl.O
Fortran documentation

DECmpp Programming Environment
QL-XT7 AS-AA
QL-XT7A8-3B
QA-XT7 AA-WZ
QA-XT7 AB-GZ

System-wide license
Concurrent-use license
Update from Vl.O
Documentation

DECmpp Image Processing Library
QL-XT5A8-AA
QA-XT5AA-WZ
QA-XT5AB-GZ

System-wide license
Update from Vl.O
Documentation

DECmpp Math Library
QL-MTCA8-AA
QA-MTCAA-GZ

System-wide license
Documentation

DECmpp VAST-2
QL-MTBA8-AA
QL-MTBA8-3B
QA-MTBAA-GZ

System-wide license
Concurrent-use license
Documentation

~.All DECmpp software products are distributed together on the same media.

4.18

Specialized Systems

MIRA Application Switch 3400/3800

Product Description

The MIRA Application Switch (MIRA AS) 3400/3800 is the second generation in
Digital's family of MIRA high-availability systems. A MIRA AS configuration is a
fully redundant master standby system based on dual MicroVAX 3400 or 3800
configurations. The applications for MIRA AS are similar to MIRA 3200 systems
except that auto failover of Q-bus options is not supported.
Each MicroVAX is housed in a BA2xx-style cabinet and includes a hardware
watchdog (KWV32) linked via a dedicated interprocessor communications cable.
The dedicated link and its synchronous protocol guarantee a deterministic
failover time of less than one second.
In addition, MIRA Disk Shadowing is available as an option on MIRA AS systems. This product provides an automatic backup of data, and is fully transparent to the user applications.
The type of disk used for data storage determines the degree of availability
achievable with MIRA AS systems. A 400-Mbyte RF71 ISE is used for the system
disk on all MIRA AS systems. A DSR70 dual-ported storage system is recommended for additional data storage due to its redundant architecture and maximum storage capability.
MIRA AS extends the range of detected errors to the device level. In this manner, faulty devices are functionally isolated, while the processor itself continues to
operate (as long as the device fault does not impact the Q-bus) .
MIRA AS performs the same type of total failover as MIRA 3200. However, with
its enhanced error detection, MIRA AS provides automatic failover at the applications level. The selectivity afforded by MIRA AS allows a single application to
failover to the standby processor without affecting the status of the other critical
applications.

Specialized Systems

4.19

MIRA Application Switch 3400/3800
Product Description

Digital has developed High Availability Management Software (MIRA HAMS) for
use on a MIRA AS system. This software provides the functionality that allows
user applications to initiate a recovery procedure as fast as one second. Up to 16
applications can use the MIRA HAMS failure management environment. Each
application will failover selectively, based on individually defined "action tables. "
These action tables are filled in by the user at the time of system configuration,
and allow the user to completely define and control error recovery strategy on a
application-by-application basis.

(Continued)

A standard VMS application must be adapted to a MIRA AS environment in
order to take advantage of MIRA HAMS. Applications already running on a
MIRA 3200 system can be migrated to MIRA AS by relinking with the MIRA
HAMS library.
To maximize the integrity of a user database, MIRA Disk Shadowing software is
an option that provides an automatic backup of valuable data, and is fully
transparent to user applications. The shadowing software writes data on two or
more virtual disks configured in a shadow set. Shadowed disks are contiguous
RMS files, declared as virtual disks. Disks of mixed types and sizes can coexist in
the same shadow set. There is no limit imposed on the maximum number of
virtual disks in a shadow set.
When a virtual disk is added to a shadow set, the MIRA Disk Shadowing software starts an automatic catch-up procedure to update its contents. During the
catch-up procedure, the shadow set continues to be available for the user. This
catch-up feature allows routine backup of virtual disks-with no interruption of
normal operations. MIRA AS system can also run VMS/Host Volume Shadowing.

The MIRA Application Switch 3400/3800 rules of configuration are exactly the
same as those used for dual-host systems, without any exception. Each processor
of the MIRA AS system requires its own operator console (recommended are one
VT420 terminal plus one LA75 printer on each). Options are factory integrated
into the MIRA AS systems prior to customer shipment.
Each processor in a MIRA AS system has its own RF71 system disk and a TK70
tape system integrated within a BA2xx processor enclosure. Data disks are
ordered separately.

MIRA AS Model Matrix
The following table presents the system models offered in MIRA AS configurations. Each system contains two computers;
and the table indicates the features offered with each computer.

System Models

DV-34MS3-B2/B3
DV-34MT3-B2/B3
DV-38MS3-A2/ A3
DV-38MT3-A2/A3

MicroVAX
CPU

Mbytes of
Memory

Disk

Tape

Ethernet

W atchdog

VMS
Licenses

3400
3400
3800
3800

4
12
16
16

RF71
RF71
RF71
RF71

TK70
TK70
TK70
TK70

Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

Yes
3
Yes
1
Yes
3
Yes

DECnet
Licenses
2

Yes
2
Yes
2
Yes
2
Yes

MIRA HAMS
License

Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

Note: A2 and B2=120 V; A3 and B3=240 V. 120-V systems include U.S. power cords.
1

VMS file and application server license. VMS VAXcluster Software license.
DECnet full-function and end-node licenses (one each).
3
VMS 1- to 10-user license (with Rdb/VMS Runtime).
4
MIRA AS system packages utilizing VAX 4000 or VAX 6000 CPUs are available on a custom quotation basis. Contact the EIC Sales Support Center at
800-632-6277 or 603-884-8990 for more information.
2

4.20

Specialized Systems

MIRA AS 3400 Systems
MIRA AS 3400 VMS Server Dual-Host System
DV-34MS3-B2
Each half of the system includes:
• KA640 CPU board with embedded 802.3/Ethernet (ThinWire/thick wire) controller, DSSI adapter, and 4-Mbyte ECC
memory
• BC16E-10 console terminal cable
· RF71 400-Mbyte ISE disk
· BA213 system enclosure
• TK70 296-Mbyte cartridge tape drive and controller
• KWV32 watchdog module, adapters, 7.6-meter (25-foot) cable, and loopback connectors
· BC21M-09 DSSI cable (quantity one only)
• VMS File Application Server license
• DECnet full-function and end-node licenses (one each)
· VMS VAXcluster Software license
· MIRA HAMS license
• Power cord, documentation, and diagnostic kit
· One full- year product warranty

MIRA AS 3400 VMS Multiuser Dual-Host System
DV-34MT3-B2
Each half of the system includes:
• KA620 CPU board with embedded 802.3/Ethernet (Thin Wire/thick wire) controller, DSSI adapter, and 4-Mbyte ECC
memory
• BC16E-10 console terminal cable
• MS650-AA 8-Mbyte memory (system total 12 Mbytes)
• RF71 400-Mbyte ISE disk
• BA213 system enclosure
· TK70 296-Mbyte cartridge tape drive and controller
• KWV32 watchdog module, adapters, 7 .6-meter (25-foot) cable, and loopback connectors
• BC21M-09 DSSI cable (quantity one only)
·VMS 1- to 10-user license (with Rdb/VMS Runtime)
· DECnet full-function and end-node licenses (one each)
• VMS VAXcluster Software license
· MIRA HAMS license
• Power cord, documentation, and diagnostic kit
• One full- year product warranty
Note: For configuration assistance, contact the EIC Sales Support Center at 800-832-6277 or 603-884-8990.

Specialized Systems 4.21

MIRA AS 3800 Systems
MIRA AS 3800 VMS Server Dual-Host System
DV-38MS3-A2
Each half of the system includes:
· KA655 CPU board (note Multiuser systems use -AA variant and Server systems use -BA variant)
· BC16E-10 console terminal cable
• MS650-BA 16-Mbyte memory (system total 16 Mbytes)
· RF71 400-Mbyte ISE disk
• BA213 system enclosure
• TK70 296-Mbyte cartridge tape drive and controller
· KWV32 watchdog module, adapters, 7 .6-meter (25-foot) cable, and loop back connectors
· KFQSA DSSI adapter
· DESQA 802.3/Ethernet interface (ThinWire/thick wire)
· BC21M-09 DSSI cable (quantity one only)
· VMS File and Application Server license
· DECnet full-function and end-node licenses (one each)
• VMS VAXcluster Software license
• MIRA HAMS license
• Power cord, documentation, and diagnostic kit
• One full-year product warranty

MIRA AS 3800 VMS Multiuser Dual-Host System
DV-38MT3-A2
Each half of the system includes:
· KA655 CPU board (note Multiuser systems use -AA variant and Server systems use -BA variant)
· BC16E-10 console terminal cable
· MS650-BA 16-Mbyte memory (system total 16 Mbytes)
• RF71 400-Mbyte ISE disk
• BA213 system enclosure
· TK70 296-Mbyte cartridge tape drive and controller
• KWV32 watchdog module, adapters, 7.6-meter (25-foot) cable, and loopback connectors
· KFQSA DSSI adapter
• DESQA 802.3/Ethernet interface (Thin Wire/thick wire)
· BC21M-09 DSSI cable (quantity one only)
·VMS 1- to 10-user license (with Rdb/VMS Runtime)
• DECnet full-function and end-node licenses (one each)
· VMS VAXcluster Software license
• MIRA HAMS license
• Power cord, documentation, and diagnostic kit
· One full-year product warranty
Note: For configuration assistance, contact the EIC Sales Support Center at 800-832-6277 or 603-884-8990.

4.22

Specialized Systems

Multiline DECvoice

Product Description

Multiline DECvoice, Digital's voice-processing platform for VOICEmail, provides
flexible configurations for three voice technologies all optimized for use over a
standard telephone-digitized (stored) voice, speech synthesis, and voice recognition-all on one platform. The product is software configurable and operates in
both multiline (8-line) and full-function (single-line) modes.
Multiline DECvoice is a VAX 4000-based voice-processing platform that supports
one to 72 simultaneous telephone calls via the Tl telephony interface. The basic
product is a Q-bus peripheral available for installation in the S-box series of
MicroVAX 3300/3400/3500/3600/3800/3900 systems or VAX 4000 Model
200/300/500/600 systems. Packaged systems are based on the VAX 4000 Model
200/300/500/600 platforms and provide server, timeshare, and, for missioncritical applications, dual-host system variants.
Multiline DECvoice consists of a voice-processing option, a Tl telephony option,
cables, and DECvoice software integrated into a VAX 4000 system. The systems
are configurable from one to 72 channels of voice (phone lines). Three Tl spans
can be connected directly to the system via the Tl telephony module. Analog
phone lines can be connected via channel banks into the Tl module. Multiline
DECvoice can be configured with multiple combinations of digitized, synthesized,
and voice recognition support depending on the requirements of the application.
Based on the VAX VMS architecture, Multiline DECvoice VAX 4000 packaged
systems are compatible with the entire line of VAX systems. Packaged systems
are available in 8, 16, 24, 48, and 72 ports (phone lines). Hardware component
options are available in 8-line increments (one module) up to a maximum of 72
lines depending on processor type.
Multiline DECvoice includes the following telephony and voice technologies:

· Digitized Voice-Multiline DECvoice can digitally record speech that can later
be retrieved and played back over the telephone, using the same principles as a
high-quality compact disc recording. Multiline DECvoice also supports the conversion of certain ASCII strings into concatenated digitized voice output.

Specialized Systems

4.23

Multiline DECvoice
Product Description (Continued)

• Speech Synthesis-Multiline DECvoice contains an improved version of the
DECtalk speech synthesizer. Both Multiline DECvoice and DECtalk can convert
ordinary ASCII text into high-quality, human-sounding speech. Special name pronunciation software is provided to allow speech synthesis of foreign surnames
and geographical names; the resulting output can be used by both Multiline
DECvoice and DECtalk synthesizers.
· Voice Recognition-Multiline DECvoice has the ability to recognize and respond
to human speech. Two voice recognizers are supported by Multiline DECvoice:
an isolated word recognizer and a separately licensed continuous word recognizer. Both provide the capability to recognize the words ((yes," ((no," "oh" (for
zero), and (( zero" through "nine."
· Touch-Tone-Multiline DECvoice can accept, generate, and detect the full set of
DTMF (Touch-Tone) frequencies, including the military extensions. Touch-Tones
can be used to interrupt voice operations, which can later be resumed under
user program control.
Multiline DECvoice requires a Tl telephone interface, PBX integration, and may
require a Channel Bank (analog-to-digital converter) and a Software Integration
Device (SID) for PBX protocol handling if Voicemail applications are used.
The Tl telephony module is used to connect the DECvoice system to a maximum of three digital DSl telephone circuits (72 lines). The option consists of a
quad-width Q-bus module and a bulkhead adapter assembly used for telephone
network connection and a voice interconnect bus connection. Each DSl circuit
can be up to 200 meters (655 feet) in length. Note: Many PBXs have distance
limitations of approximately 30.5 meters (100 feet.) Signal framing can be either
D3 / D4 or ESF compliant selectable under software control.
A variety of signaling techniques are available on a per-channel basis under
software control including E&M, FXO/ FXS, and DPO/DPT. Flash-hook signaling
can be detected and generated. DTMF or pulse dialing can be selected on a
per-channel basis for outdialing applications.
The DTC05 option is a quad-width Q-bus module that provides voice generation
and recognition capability. DECvoice software allows the DTC05 option to operate in either multiline mode (8 lines) to support digitized speech OR in the fullfunction mode (single line) to support digitized speech and enhanced functionality such as recognition and synthesis. The modules can be configured under
software control to provide a combination of "standard" mode digitized voice, or
enhanced functionality within the system. Recognition and synthesis are not currently supported in the multiline mode.
Refer to the Multiline DECvoice Software Product Description (SPD 29. 97 .xx)
and Software Support Addendum (SPD/SSA 29.97 .xx-x) and the current VMS
Software Product Description and Software Support Addendum for the most
complete list of supported systems and hardware configurations.
Multiline DECvoice provides users with the tools necessary to customize the
isolated word recognition capabilities for application specific vocabularies.
To hear a demonstration of DECvoice and the Continuous Word Recognizer,
call 508-493 -1923.

4.24

Specialized Systems

Multiline DECvoice
Features

Multiline DECvoice hardware and software have been designed to allow access to
the North American telephone network by voice applications on a VAX platform.
Multiline DECvoice software supports the following functionality:
· Answers telephone calls.
· Originates telephone calls.
· Generates hook-flash signaling that can be used to control certain PBX features
such as call-transfer capability.
· Detects and generates DTMF tones (Touch-Tone).
· Records and plays digitized messages in a variety of standardized formats.
· Synthesizes messages from ASCII text (single-line-mode).
· Call progress analysis (multi-line-mode).
· Automatic volume leveling of messages.
· Performs speaker-independent voice recognition of a predefined vocabulary
(single-line mode).
· Performs speaker-dependent voice recognition of a user-defined vocabulary
(single-line mode).
• Integrates advanced voice technologies into the VAX platform.
· Supports up to 72 lines (telephone calls) on a single system.
• High-level application programming interface and tools based on a VMS V5 .3/5 .4
Runtime library.
• Recording of voice prompts is performed with an ordinary telephone.
• User-selectable recording formats, including 64-Kbps uLAW, 64-Kbps ALAW, 24and 32-Kbps ADPCM, and 16-Kbps Subband.
· The isolated and continuous word recognizers support a speaker-independent
13-word vocabulary: the digits zero through nine, "yes," "no," and (often used
as substitute for zero) "oh."
· The isolated word recognizer can be user-trained for a speaker-dependent,
application-specific, vocabulary.
· The softload design of the DECvoice hardware means that updating to new
microcode releases is easily accomplished.
• Can be switched between multiline (8-line digitized voice only mode) and
enhanced (1-line digitized voice, synthesis, and recognition mode) under software
control.
Multiline DECvoice is available in packaged system configurations of 8-, 16-, 24-,
48-, and 72-line server, timeshare, and dual-hosted variants, or as an option module
set for field upgrades of the MicroVAX 3300/3400/3500/3600/3800/3900 systems
and any pre-installed VAX 4000 Model 200/300/500/600 systems.
Note: Multiline DECvoice is available in the U.S. and Canada only. For ordering,
configuration support, and information on the continuous word recognition
license, call the EiC Sales Support Center at 800-832-6277 or 603-884-8990.

Specialized Systems

4.25

Multiline DECvoice
Step 1-Multiline DECvoice Systems
Multiline DECvoice systems are available as prepackaged voice solutions and include software, user licenses, media, and
documentation. Additional voice modules may be purchased (in 8-line increments) to support specific configurations or
enhanced functionality not listed below. Systems available include servers, timeshare, and dual-hosted variants. Load devices
and console terminals/monitors are NOT included and must be ordered separately.
DECvoice Packaged VAX 4000 Model 200 Systems

CL-42RS1 ·VA
CL-42RT1-VA

8-line VAXserver system, VMS 1- to 2-user license
8-line VAX timeshare system, VMS 1- to 10-user license

• Multiline DEC voice VAX 4000 Model 200
• BA215 pedestal enclosure
· 120-V 60-Hz power supply
• 8-Mbyte memory module (MS650-BB)
• DSSI adapter and Ethernet adapter on CPU
· DTCN5 -UG Tl upgrade kit
· RF31F 200-Mbyte disk drive
· DECvoice on TK50 media
·DECnet-VAX end-node license
• DECvoice software license
· Hardware and software documentation

CL-42HS1-VA
CL-42HT1 ·VA

16-line VAXserver system, VMS 1- to 2-user license
16-line VAX timeshare system, VMS 1- to 10-user license

· Multiline DECvoice VAX 4000 Model 200
• BA430 pedestal enclosure
• Universal power supply
· 16-Mbyte memory module (MS650-BA)
· DSSI adapter and Ethernet adapter on CPU
• DTCN5-UG Tl upgrade kit
• DTC05-SA voice processing module
· RF31F 200-Mbyte disk drive
• DECvoice on TK50 media
• DECnet VAX end-node license
· DECvoice software license
· Hardware and software documentation
DECvoice Packaged VAX 4000 Model 300 Systems

CL-43JS1-CA
CL-43JTl -CA

24-line VAXserver system, VMS 1- to 2-user license
24-line VAX timesharing system, VMS 1- to 40-user license

· Multiline DECvoice VAX 4000 Model 300
• BA440 pedestal enclosure
· Universal power supply
· 32-Mbyte memory module (MS670-BA)
· Two DSSI adapters and one Ethernet adapter on CPU
·Two DTC05 -SA voice processing modules
· DTCN5 -UG Tl upgrade kit
· RF31E-AF 381-Mbyte disk drive
· DECvoice on TK50 media
·DECnet-VAX end-node license
• VAXcluster software license
· DECvoice software license
· Hardware and software documentation

4.26

Specialized Systems

Multiline DECvoice
DECvoice Packaged VAX 4000 Model 300 Systems (Continued)
CL-43JS2-AA
CL-43JT2-AA

48-line dual-host VAXserver system, VMS 1- to 2-user license
48-line dual-host timesharing system, VMS 1- to 40-user license

· Multiline DECvoice VAX 4000 Model 300 dual-host system
· Two BA440 pedestal enclosures
· Universal power supply
· 32-Mbyte memory module (MS670-BA) per system
·Two DSSI adapters and one Ethernet adapter on each CPU
· Two DTC05-SA voice processing modules
· DTCN5-UG Tl upgrade kit per CPU
· Two RF31E-AF 381-Mbyte disk drives
· DECvoice TK50 media
·DECnet-VAX end-node license
· VAXcluster software license
• DECvoice software license
· Hardware and software documentation

CL-43JS1-DA

72-line VAXserver system, VMS 1- to 2-user license

• Multiline DECvoice VAX 4000 Model 300
· BA440 pedestal enclosure
· Universal power supply
· Two 32-Mbyte memory modules (MS670-BA)
· Two DSSI adapters and one Ethernet adapter on CPU
· Eight DTC05-SA voice processing modules
• DTCN5-UG Tl upgrade kit
· RF31E-AF 381-Mbyte disk drive
· B400X-B9 expansion enclosure
· TDM expansion cable/bulkhead
· DECvoice TK50 media
• VAXcluster software license
·DECnet-VAX end-node license
· DECvoice software license
• Hardware and software documentation

DECvoice Packaged VAX 400~ Model 500 Systems
CL-45JS1-VA
CL-45JT1-VA

8-line VAXserver system, VMS file and application license
8-line VAX timeshare system, VMS 1- to 10-user license

· Multiline DECvoice VAX 4000 Model 500
· BA440 pedestal enclosure
· Universal power supply
• 64 Mbytes of memory (MS690-CA)
· Two DSSI adapters and one Ethernet adapter on CPU
· RF35E-AA 852-Mbyte disk drive
· DTCN5-UG Tl upgrade kit
• DECnet end-node license
· DECvoice software license and TK50 media
· Hardware and software documentation

Specialized Systems

4.27

Multiline DECvoice
DECvoiee Packaged VAX 4000 Model 500 Systems (Continued)
---------~-------~----~~~~....._.~...-..~~~------~-------

CL-45JS l -VB
CL-45JT1-VB

24-line VAXserver system, VMS file and application license
24-line VAX timeshare system, VMS 1- to 10-user license

• Multiline DEC voice VAX 4000 Model 500
· BA440 pedestal enclosure
· Universal power supply
• 64 Mbytes of memory (MS690-CA)
·Two DSSI adapters and one Ethernet adapter on CPU
· RF35E-AA 852-Mbyte disk drive
• DTCN5-UG Tl upgrade kit
·Two DTC05 -SA voice processing modules
· DECnet end-node license
· DECvoice software license and TK50 media
• Hardware and software documentation

CL-45JS1-VC
CL-45JT1-VC

48-line VAXserver system, VMS file and application license
48-line VAX timeshare system, VMS 1- to 10-user license

· Multiline DEC voice VAX 4000 Model 500
· BA440 pedestal enclosure
• Universal power supply
• 64-Mbytes of memory (MS690-CA)
• Two DSSI adapters and one Ethernet adapter on CPU
• RF35E-AA 852-Mbyte disk drive
• DTCN5-UG Tl upgrade Kit
·Five DTC05 -SA voice processing modules
·DECnet end-node license
• DECvoice software license and TK50 media
• Hardware and software documentation

CL-45JS1-VD
CL-45JT1-VD

72-line VAXserver system, VMS file and application license
72-line VAX timeshare system, VMS 1- to 10-user license

• Multiline DECvoice VAX 4000 Model 500
• BA440 pedestal enclosure
· B400X-B9 expansion pedestal enclosure
• Universal power supply
• 96-Mbytes of memory (MS690-CA, MS690-BA)
·Two DSSI adapters and one Ethernet adapter on CPU
• RF35E-AA 852-Mbyte disk drive
• DTCN5-UG Tl upgrade kit
·Eight DTC05-SA voice processing modules
· DECnet end-node license
• DECvoice software license and TK50 media
• Hardware and software documentation

.....

~.....--~--------~--

DECvoice Packaged VAX 4000 Model 600 Systems
CL-46JS1-VA
CL-46JT1-VA

8-line VAXserver system, VMS file and application license
8-line VAX timeshare system, VMS 1- to 10-user license

· Multiline DECvoice VAX 4000 Model 600
· BA440 pedestal enclosure
• Universal power supply
· 64-Mbytes of memory (MS690-CA)
·Two DSSI adapters and one Ethernet adapter on CPU
• RF35E-AA 852-Mbyte disk drive
• DTCN5-UG Tl upgrade kit
• DECnet end-node license
• DECvoice software license and TK50 media
• Hardware and software documentation

4.28

Specialized Systems

-----------~~....-m-------------~~~~""r"~---,

Multiline DECvoice
DECvoice Packaged VAX 4000 ModeJ 600 Systems (Continued)
CL-46JS1 ·VB
CL-46JT1 ·VB

24-line VAXserver system, VMS file and application license
24-line VAX timeshare system, VMS 1- to 10-user license

• Multiline DECvoice VAX 4000 Model 600
• BA440 pedestal enclosure
• Universal power supply
· 64-Mbytes of memory (MS690-CA)
·Two DSSI adapters and one Ethernet adapter on CPU
· RF35E-AA 852-Mbyte disk drive
• DTCN5-UG Tl upgrade kit
·Two DTC05-SA voice processing modules
·DECnet end-node license
· DECvoice software license and TK50 media
• Hardware and software documentation

CL-46JS1-VC
CL-46JT1-VC

48-line VAXserver system, VMS file and application license
48-line VAX timeshare system, VMS 1- to 10-user license

• Multiline DEC voice VAX 4000 Model 600
· BA440 pedestal enclosure
·Universal power supply
· 64-Mbytes of memory (MS690-CA)
·Two DSSI adapters and one Ethernet adapter on CPU
· RF35E-AA 852-Mbyte disk drive
• DTCN5-UG Tl upgrade kit
• Five DTC05-SA voice processing modules
• DECnet end-node license
• DECvoice software license and TK50 media
• Hardware and software documentation

CL-46JS1-VD
CL-46JT1 ·VD

72 -line VAXserver system, VMS file and application license
72-line VAX timeshare system, VMS 1- to 10-user license

· Multiline DECvoice VAX 4000 Model 600
• BA440 pedestal enclosure
• B400X-B9 expansion pedestal enclosure
• Universal power supply
· 96-Mbytes of memory (MS690-CA, MS690-BA)
·Two DSSI adapters and one Ethernet adapter on CPU
• RF35E-AA 852-Mbyte disk drive
· DTCN5-UG Tl upgrade kit
·Eight DTC05-SA voice processing modules
• DECnet end-node license
· DECvoice software license and TK50 media
· Hardware and software documentation

Step 2-Storage
A minimum of 300 Mbytes of local disk storage is recommended for the VAX 4000 Model 300; one RF31E-AF 381 -Mbyte
disk drive is included with each system. A minimum of 200 Mbytes of storage is recommended for the VAX 4000 Model
200; one RF31F 200-Mbyte disk drive is included with each system. A minimum of 700 Mbytes of disk storage is
recommended for the VAX 4000 Model 500/600 systems; one RF35E-AA 852-Mbyte disk drive is included with each system.
If additional disk storage is required, refer to Chapter 7, Storage Devices, for ordering information.
A load device is required to load the Multiline DECvoice software and must be ordered separately (NOT included with the
packaged system). The recommended load device is a TK70E-AF tape drive and is supported by the TQK70-SF tape
controller which must also be ordered separately. For additional information, refer to Chapter 7, Storage Devices.

Specialized Systems

4.29

Multiline DECvoice
Step 3- Memory
A minimum of 1 Mbyte of memory per voice line is recommended. Each VAX 4000 Model 300 system includes a minimum
of 32 Mbytes of memory (MS670-BA). The system can be expanded from 32 Mbytes to 224 Mbytes of memory using three
64-Mbyte modules (MS670-CA) and one 32-Mbyte module (MS670-BA). The VAX 4000 Model 200 system is shipped with a
minimum of 8 Mbytes of memory (MS5650-BB) and can be expanded from 8 Mbytes to 64 Mbytes of memory using four
16-Mbyte modules (MS650-BF). VAX 4000 Model 5001600 systems require 64 Mbytes of memory (MS690-CA). To support
72-line configurations, an additional 32 Mbytes of memory (MS690-BA) is provided.

Step 4- Console Terminal/Monitor
A console device is necessary for the system to function. No monitor, terminal, printer, or cables are provided with the
system; they must be ordered separately. Refer to Chapter 8, Terminals and Printers, for ordering information.

Step 5-Documentation
Documentation is included with each packaged system but must be ordered separately for the Field Upgrade options.

EK-DVMLS-IN
AA-LE86C-TE
AA-PB3HA-TE
QA-VFUAA-GZ

Multiline DECvoice Hardware Installation Manual
DECvoice Software Reference Manual
DECvoice Software Installation Manual
DECvoice Software Documentation

Step 6-Software
Software media is on TK50; a load device must be ordered separately.

QA-VFUAA-H5
QL-VFUA9-Jx
QT-VFUA9-Lx

Multiline DECvoice software media and documentation
Multiline DECvoice software license
Multiline DECvoice Software Product Services

Step 7- Continuous Word Recognition and Optional License
The DECvoice Continuous Word Recognizer is a separa~ely licensed product that supplements the isolated word recognition
capabilities of the base :DECvoice software. The Continuous Word Recognizer documentation, binaries, and support are
integrated into the base Multiline DECvoice distribution kit (QA-VFUAA-Hx).

QL-YFCAA-3B
QT-YFCAx-xx

Continuous Word Recognizer License. Activity license; contact the EiC Sales Support Center,
800-832-6277 or 603-884-8990.
Continuous Word Recognizer Services

Step 8-Expansion Information
The VAX 4000 Model 300/500/600 (BA440) pedestal cabinet provides seven available Q-bus slots. This configuration can
support a maximum of one Tl module (DTCN5-AA) and six DECvoice modules (DTC05-SA) providing there are NO other
Q-bus options installed. This configuration supports 48 lines. Adding additional voice processing modules or other Q-bus
devices such as TQK70 (tape drive controller) require B400X-B9 expansion enclosure and CK-DTC05-AA expansion kit.
The VAX 4000 Model 200 (BA215) pedestal cabinet has four Q-bus slots available. This configuration can support a
maximum of one Tl module (DTCN5-AA) and two DECvoice modules (DTC05-SA) plus a load device such as TK70 tape
drive and TQK70 controller. This configuration supports 16 lines. No expansion cabinet is supported for Multiline
DECvoice on this pedestal.
The VAX 4000 Model 200 (BA430) pedestal enclosure has ten Q-bus slots available. This configuration can support one Tl
module (DTCN5-AA) and six DECvoice modules (DTC05-SA) for a maximum of 48 telephone lines in multiline mode. One
additional DTC05-SA DECvoice module for single-line full-function mode (enhanced functionality) OR one load device such
as a TK70 tape drive and TQK70 controller may also be installed. A 48-line configuration requires a total of 48 Mbytes of
memory; an additional 32 Mbytes of memory or two Q-bus memory modules (MS650-BF) must be added. The maximum
number of telephone lines supported in the BA430 pedestal is 48. Adding additional voice processing modules will exceed
the VAX 4000 Model 200 Q-bus ac load limit and is not supported by DEC voice. No expansion cabinet is supported for
Multiline DECvoice on this pedestal.

4.30

Specialized Systems

Multiline DECvoice
Step 9-Configuration Information
Requirements for adding Multiline DECvoice components (field upgrades) to a Q -bus MicroVAX 3000 series or VAX 4000
Model 300/500/600 system:
1. One Mbyte of memory per voice channel required:
(e.g., one DTC05 module (eight channels) = 8 Mbytes of memory required.)
2. Maximum number of DECvoice modules (DTC05s) and telephone lines supported:
VAX 4000 Model
300/500/600

11 DTC05s (nine modules support 72 telephone lines in multiline mode, and two
modules support single-line full-function mode for enhanced functionality).

VAX 4000 Model 200
(BA430)

Six DTC05s (six modules support 48 telephone lines in multiline mode or six
telephone lines in the single-line full-function mode for enhanced functionality).

VAX 4000 Model 200
(BA215 )

Two DTC05s (two modules support 16 telephone lines in multiline mode or two
telephone lines in the single-line full-function mode for enhanced functionality) .

MicroVAX 3800/3900

Nine DTC05s (six modules support 48 telephone lines in multiline mode, and three
modules support single-line full-function mode for enhanced functionality).

MicroVAX 3500/3600
MicroVAX 3300/3400

Six DTC05s (three modules support 24 telephone lines in multiline mode, and three
modules support single-line full-function mode for enhanced functionality).
Note: Each DECvoice module requires one Q-bus slot.

3. Each system requires one Tl telephony module which requires one Q-bus slot.
4. Each system requires a storage device for recorded voice files.
5. Each system requires a load device for the DECvoice software.
Prerequisites:
• Tl telephone line (installed by local telephone company)
· VMS V5.3 or higher (V5.4-2 for VAX 4000-200)- VMS V5.5 for VAX 4000 Model 500/ 600
• DECvoice software license
• DECvoice media and documentation kit
· Monitor/terminal required (order separately)
· Load device required (order separately)
· System integration may be required:
- Telephone system (e.g., PBX integration)
- Channel bank
• 64 Kbytes of Q-bus I/ O space is required for each Tl module and DTC05 module installed in the system.
· Power and bus loading constraints may reduce the maximum DTC05 configuration.
• The DTC05/ DTCN5 modules are not distributed, nor shareable across nodes in the VAXcluster. The module must reside
locally on the processor that performs the calls to the DECvoice libraries.
· The performance of the realtime portions of the system is sensitive to processor, VAXcluster, and device-interrupt latency.
Degradations will be noticed if the DTC05/ DTCN5 interrupts are blocked by any other software and/or hardware in the
system. A dedicated VAX system is recommended for optimal DEC voice performance.
• The following DECvoice implementation services are available:
- PBX integration
- Technical consulting
- Configuration support
- Training
For services information, call the EIC Sales Support Center at 800-832-6277 or 603-884-8990.
Multiline DECvoice Configuring Information

DTC05-SA
DTCN5-UG

Q-bus
Slots

de
Load

ac
Load

+5 v

+12

.75
1.5

3.6
7.0

4.0

7.17

0.0
0.0

W atts
15 .8
35.8

Specialized Systems

4.31

Chapter 5
VAXcluster Options/Systems Expansion

VAXcluster Systems Configuration Details

VAXcluster Multi-Datacenter Facility

VAXcluster Console System

VAXcluster Options

Memory

Easy System Upgrades

CPU Upgrades

Environmental Products

VAXciuster Systems Configuration Details
Overview

A VAXcluster system is one of Digital's most highly developed architectures to
support the widest variety of corporate computing demands. A VAXcluster system is a loosely coupled configuration of computer elements or units and storage
subsystems. A VAXcluster system appears as a single system to the user, whether
the VAXcluster system is local or distributed among several sites. Multiple VAX
systems can be linked together, regardless of their size and capacity. Peripherals,
such as storage devices and printers, are shared. Site redundancy or site consolidation can be achieved using the VAXcluster Multi-Datacenter Facility. These
various capabilities can be combined to install the level of computing power,
availability, and datacenter consolidation required across the enterprise.
A VAXcluster system offers a stable and predictable computing environment.
VAXcluster system design provides high performance, high data integrity, and
high availability. The technology substantially reduces downtime and dramatically
decreases-or even eliminates-the impact of the failure of an individual computing unit or subsystem component. A VAXcluster can be configured with
increasing levels of availability, all the way to disaster tolerance.
VAXcluster systems provide the ability to add or vary computer performance and
storage capacity by flexible increments. They support scalability, or increasing
proportions, across several dimensions: range of availability, size of host processor, number of host processors, number of user stations, storage capacity,
VAXcluster interconnect bandwidth, distance, and with the newest VAXcluster
product-VAXcluster Multi-Datacenter Facility-geographically separated sites. A
VAXcluster across multiple sites can offer disaster-tolerant platforms and/or consolidation of multiple datacenters.
A VAXcluster system maximizes an investment in computing resources, extends
the life of existing systems, and can meet future growth needs. VAXcluster technology offers an economical means of expanding compute power and shared
resources in gradual steps, where and when needed, by simply adding new VAX
systems, VAXstations, and peripheral devices to the cluster as requirements grow.
The most recent ability to link multiple sites in a single VAXcluster configuration
extends VAXcluster functionality in a new dimension. In addition, a VAXcluster
system allows simplification of system management through the ability to manage
the VAXcluster system-host processors, user stations, shared resources, and
multiple sites-as a single system.
VAXcluster systems represent a unique way to use many of Digital's architectures
in combinations that meet customer needs for system and data availability. The
commitment to VAXcluster technology means that a current VAXcluster configuration can incorporate future technological innovations.

VAXcluster Benefits
VAXcluster technology offers many benefits through a variety of configurations.
These benefits include:
· Resource sharing of data, computes, printers, applications, backup capabilities
· Availability spectrum based upon the use of element redundancy to satisfy application requirements, for timesharing and client/server environments, or both
· Single system management domain including multiple computing units within a
single locale or across multiple geographically dispersed sites
· Expandability of bandwidth, number of systems in the VAXcluster, storage
devices, distance between systems or sites with no application rewrites
• Investment protection for growth and extension of CPUs, storage, and knowledge
of MIS personnel and end users
· Disaster tolerance for predictable, reliable, short, and verifiable recovery from the
loss of a computer facility (datacenter)

5.2

VAXcluster Options/ System Expansion

V AXcluster Systems Configuration Details
Configuring VAXcluster Systems
VAXcluster systems are configured with the following groups of components:
· CPUs-VAX and MicroVAX processors, from desktop systems to the
VAX 10000 mainframe systems, can be computing units or members of a
VAXcluster system.
· Interconnects-There are four types of interconnects that are currently used in
VAXcluster configurations: CI, DSSI, Ethernet, FDDI.
• Storage Subsystems-There is a wide range of storage devices and technologies
to meet the data storage needs of any size VAXcluster system.
The following table provides a simple positioning based on the four VAXcluster
interconnects. These interconnects may be used in any combination.
V AXcluster Configurations
DSSI
VAX

10000/
7000

VAX

6000

CPUs supported per bus

90
16

4000
20

Service CPU online
Service storage online

Yes
Yes

Yes
Yes 2

NIA

Reconfigure cluster
while online5

Yes

Maximum and direct
shareable storage

7 TB

288 GB

144 GB

48 GB

NIA

Bandwidth (aggregate
Mbitsls per bus)

140

32 3

100

Maximum distance (meters)

4
5

Ethernet

FDDI

2K4

40K
16

Yes 1

Yes

VAX 4000-300 an d higher systems
Service storage in supported warm-swap enclosures only, i.e., can "warm-swap" RF disks in
SF35/72/73 storage building blocks, TF857 tape cartridge system, and all RF/ TF ISEs in
Model 400 series enclos ures (BA44x, BA43x, R400X, B400X) .
VAX 10000 and VAX 7000 systems support up to 24 DSSI buses for total bus bandwidth of 96
Mbytes/ secoJJd . VAX 6000 systems support up to 12 DSSI buses for total bus bandwidth of 48
Mbytes/ second . VAX 4000-300 and higher systems support up to four DSSI buses for total bus
bandwidth of 16 Mbytes/second.
Total maximum distance (up to four segments at 500 meters each)
Systems and storage devices may be added/ removed from a CI VAXcluster while the VAX cluster
continues. To add/ remove systems in a DSSI VAXcluster requ ires shutting down the VAXcluster.

The next sections focus on the rules and configuration guidelines for each
VAXcluster interconnect: CI, Ethernet, DSSI, and FDDI. The rules and guidelines
included here are to assist in planning purchases. For configuration details, see
VAXcluster Systems: Guidelin es for VAXcluster System Configurations, and VMS
Version 5.4-3 Release Notes.
All configuration rules conform to the VAXcluster Software Version 5 .5 SPD. If a
configuration is based on a different version of VMS, refer to the SPD for that
version.

General V AXcluster Configuration Rules
The following rules apply for all VAXcluster configurations:
· Maximum number of CPUs supported in a VAXcluster system is 96.
· CPUs not supported in any VAXcluster configuration include VAXstation I,
MicroVAX I, VAX-11/725, VAX-11/730, and VAX-11/782 .
· CPU or storage controller may not participate in more than one VAXcluster
system at a time.
• "Rule of Total Connectivity" must be met. This states that in a VAXcluster
system, every CPU must be able to communicate directly with every other CPU.
VAXcluster software does not perform routing for VAXcluster functionality.

VAXcluster Options/System Expansion

5.3

VAXcluster Systems Configuration Details
General V AXcluster
Configuration Rules

· DECnet-VAX communication path must exist between all nodes in a VAXcluster
system.
• Single time zone setting must be used by all CPUs in a VAXcluster system.
• Multiple VAXcluster systems can be configured on a single Local Area Network
(LAN).

(Continued)

• VAXcluster systems support four LAN adapters per CPU for VAXcluster communications. LAN segments can be bridged to form an extended LAN. The number
of LAN adapters supported by each CPU is CPU dependent.

If possible, any LAN-based VAXcluster configuration that includes Ethernet or
FDDI should include multiple MOP and disk servers to enhance availability.
When a server fails in configurations that include multiple servers, satellite access
to disks fails over to another server. Disk servers should be the most powerful
CPUs in the VAXcluster and should use the highest bandwidth LAN adapters
available.
The following table shows the VAXcluster interconnects supported for VAX systems.
VAX Systems

Ethernet

DSSI

FDDI

VAX 10000
VAX 9000
VAX 8xxx
VAX 7000
VAX 6000
VAX 4000
MicroVAX 3000 Q-bus
MicroVAX 3100

x
x
x
x
x

x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x

x
x

x
x
x
x

x
x

VAX-11/7xx, VAX 6000, VAX 8xxx, and VAX 9000 series CPUs require a system
disk that is accessed via a local controller or through a local CI or DSSI connection. VAXcluster satellite booting is not supported for these systems.

.............~~~~~~

~--~~~~~--~~--

Configuration Rules for CI VAXcluster Systems
Single CI Connections

·Maximum number of nodes that can be connected to a CI is 32. Maximum of
16 may be VMS systems; the other 16 may be HSCs.
• Dual porting of devices between an HSC and a local controller is not supported.
· TA-series tape drives may be dual ported between pairs of HSC subsystems with
HSC Microcode Version 3.9 or higher.

Multiple CI Connections

If a VAX CPU can support more than one CI adapter, it can communicate
through more than one Star Coupler. The following rules apply to multiple Cis
and multiple Star Couplers. In addition to these rules, the general rules for
VAXcluster systems and the rules for CI VAXcluster systems must be followed.
• Some CPUs can have multiple CI adapters.
· Different types of CI adapters cannot be mixed in the same CPU.
• Up to five Star Couplers can be used in a VAXcluster system.
• There is no requirement for a single Star Coupler through which all systems
attached to the CI communicate, as long as total connectivity is maintained.
· Two VAXcluster configurations may not intersect. That is:
- A CPU cannot be attached to two Star Couplers that are not in the same
VAXcluster system.
- A Star Coupler cannot be attached to two CPUs that are in different
VAXcluster systems.
• Each CI adapter connected to the same Star Coupler must have a unique node
number relative to that Star Coupler.
· Adapters in the same CPU may have the same node number only if they are
connected to different Star Couplers.
· Storage devices cannot be dual ported between HSCs that are located on different Star Couplers or in different VAXduster configurations.

(ti

a
!
(ti

,};

~>
~

--'

5.4

VAXcluster Options/System Expansion

V AXcluster Systems Configuration Details
With Multiple CI Connections
(Continued)

The following table shows the numbers of CI adapters allowed in specific types
of VAXcluster nodes. A single node cannot have different types of CI adapters.
Maximum CI Adapters per VAXcluster CPU

CPU

Cl750

VAX-11/750
VAX-11/780
VAX-11/785
VAX 6000-XXX
VAX 7000
VAX 82XX,83XX
VAX 85XX, 87XX, 88XX
VAX 86XX
VAX 9000-110/ 210/310/ 320 1'
VAX 9000-330/ 340/ 410/ 420 1'
VAX 9000-430/ 440*
VAX 10000

CI780

CIBCI

CIBCA-A

CIBCA-B

CIXCD

1
2

2
4
8
10
10

'" A maximum of four CIXCDs per XMI bus is supported. However, a maximum of ten CIXCDs is the
system limit on a VAX 9000.

The following diagram shows a multiple CI configuration. VAX A, VAX B, and
VAX C have connections to Star Coupler 2. VAX A and VAX B also have
connections to Star Coupler 1. VAX A or VAX B can MSCP serve data on
storage devices that are connected by Star Coupler 1 to VAX C.

r-----8

lr-8
Star
Coupler
1

Cl Adapter
VAXA
Cl Adapter
Storage

Cl Adapter
VAXB

Star
Coupler

2
Cl Adapter

Storage
VAXC
Cl Adapter
BU-3271

VAXcluster Options/System Expansion

5.5

VAXcluster Systems Configuration Details
Configuration Guidelines for
CI VAXcluster Systems

The following configuration guidelines are suggested for improved operation of a
VAXcluster system:
· DECnet communications are required among all VMS systems in a VAXcluster
operation (DECnet works on CI except through CIXCD).
· Two CI adapters (see table) may be configured, either for redundancy or for
throughput. Throughput increase with a second CI adapter to the same Star
Coupler is likely to be minimal. Increased throughput can be achieved by connecting the second CI adapter to a separate Star Coupler. The primary reason
for having two CI adapters to the same Star Coupler is redundant access by the
system.
The Star Coupler is a passive device and is extremely reliable. It is not internally
a single point of failure. Additional CI adapters and Star Couplers may be
installed to improve system bandwidth, total computing power, total storage
capacity, and higher availability.

Configuratign Rules for DSSI VAXdusier ~ystems
Universal DSSI VAXcluster
Configuration Rules

The following configuration rules apply to all DSSI VAXcluster configurations:
1.1 There must be at least two Q-bus MicroVAX/VAX systems or two VAX
6000, VAX 7000, VAX 10000 series systems in the VAXcluster configuration
with each system having at least one DSSI adapter, whether embedded on
the system module, connected via the Q-bus (KFQSA adapter), or connected
via the XMI-bus (KFMSA adapter). See the DSSI Adapters per System table,
for the type of adapter each system uses.
1.2 A maximum of three systems can be configured:
·Any combination of three Q-bus systems, as long as at least one is a VAX
4000 Model 300 or higher system
· Any combination of up to four VAX 6000, VAX 7000, VAX 10000 series
systems
· Any combination to a maximum of three VAX 4000 and VAX 6000
systems
• With a minimum of one DSSI bus shared among all three systems
1.3 All systems connected to the same DSSI bus must be members of the same
VAXcluster, each configured with a VMS license (VMS V5.4-3 or higher is
required for three-system configurations), a VAXcluster software license, and
a DECnet license (full-function DECnet is required on the first system). DSSI
VAXcluster systems must also be connected by an Ethernet interconnect for
DECnet communications. (DECnet communications are required for
VAXcluster operation but are not supported over the DSSI bus.)
1.4 All systems connected to the same DSSI bus must have a common power/
ground.
1.5 Each DSSI bus supports up to eight nodes. Each of the following counts as
one DSSI node: a DSSI adapter; an RF-disk controller interface; & TF-tape
controller interface. For a two-system DSSI VAXcluster system, for instance,
a maximum of six RF-disks can be configured per DSSI bus: two system
adapters + six disks = eight nodes.
1.6 Multiple DSSI adapters for each system are allowed, per the configuration
restrictions as indicated in the DSSI Adapters per System table; each DSSI
adapter in a single system must be connected to a different DSSI bus.
1.7 Each DSSI bus must be terminated at each end at all times; breaking the
bus while a system is operational may lead to data corruption.

5.6

VAXcluster Options/System Expansion

V AXcluster Systems Configuration Details
Configuration Rules for DSSI
VAXcluster Systems (Continued)

1.8 The maximum DSSI bus length supported, i.e., the total distance between
end-node terminators on the DSSI bus, is 25 m (82 ft) in a computer room
environment, 20 m (65.6 ft) in an office environment.
These lengths are based on grounding conditions typically found in
computer room and office environments. Improper grounding can result in
voltage potentials, called ground offset voltages, between the enclosures in
the configuration. If these voltages exceed certain limits, data transmission
across the DSSI bus can be disrupted and the configuration can experience
performance degradation or data corruption.
For these reasons, a common ground must be maintained between all
systems/enclosures in a DSSI VAXcluster at all times. It is, therefore,
necessary that all systems receive their power from a common power feed,
i.e., it is not advisable to power systems/enclosures from different circuit
breaker panels.
To verify site conditions, the following is strongly recommended:
1. Have a qualified electrician ensure that site power distribution meets all
local electrical codes.
2. Also, have electrician inspect entire site power distribution system to
ensure it does not have any of the following faults.
• Outlets do not have power ground connections.
• Grounding prong missing from computer equipment power cables.
• Power outlet neutral connections are actual ground connections.
· Grounds for the power outlets are not connected to the same power
distribution panel.
• Devices that are not UL or IEC approved are connected to the same
circuit breaker as the computer equipment.

If these conditions have been met, ground offset voltages should be within
acceptable limits.
The ground offset voltage limits are:
Allowable Ground Offset Voltage
DC
AC (rms)

Total DSSI Bus Length

Up to 20 m (65 ft)
20-25 m (65-82 ft)

200 mV
40 mV
30 mV

27 m (89 ft) for four system VAX 6000,
VAX 7000, VAX 10000 only

70 mV
14 mV
10.5 mV

Ground offset voltages between enclosures can be measured after system
installation to verify they fall within acceptable limits.
DSSI Adapters per System
KFQSA
KFMSA 1
Embedded
VAX System
1
2
MicroVAX 3300/3400
(embedded EDA640)
MicroVAX II and MicroVAX
3500/3600/3800/3 900
VAX 4000 Model 110
(embedded SHAC 2)
VAX 4000 Model 200
(embedded SHAC2)
VAX 4000 Model 300 and higher
(embedded SHAC2 )
VAX 6000 Series
VAX 7000
VAX 10000

Buses

3
rr.i

stU

...>.
fl.>

6
12

12
24

Each KFMSA (XMI-to-DSSI) adapter contains two DSSI VAX system ports.
Single Host Adapter Chip (SHAC)
3
Requires a Q-bus expansion enclosure
2

VAXcluster Options/System Expansion 5. 7

...'"'
tU

rr.i

:s
CJ

<
>

VAXcluster Systems Configuration Details
MicroVAX and VAX 4000-Based DSSI
VAXcluster Configurations

The following simplified rule may be used when configuring Q-bus DSSI
VAXcluster systems:
2.1 "The Q-bus 5-Enclosure Rule": For Q-bus VAXcluster configurations, a
maximum of five enclosures, excluding SF200/210/220s, can be configured
on a single DSSi bus. That is, two systems and up to three expansion
enclosures, or three systems and up to two expansion enclosures can' be
configured.;~

See the Q-bus Enclosure Characteristics table for a summary of the storage
capabilities provided by each enclo ure-type and the cable connector-types
which are associated with each enclosure.
Note that if other configurations are to be deployed (e.g., one with an
SF200/210/220), then ((Universal Length Rule 1.8" must be rigorously observed (to ensure signal integrity). For details on the use of ((Universal
Length Rule 1.8," see examples and the tables provided at the end of the
DSSI V AXcluster Configurations Guidelines section.
'" Note that only one SFlOO is allowed on any DSSI bus in this set of DSSI VAXcluster
configuration rules . (The TF857 and the SF7x used in a SFlOO each count as one expansion
enclosure.) The "Q -bus 5-Enclosure Rule" can only be applied with the use of the following
cables: BC21M-09 and BC22Q-09 (both of which are 9-foot DSSI cables) and the BC21Q-3F, a
40-inch internal cable that is used to connect the TF857 to the SF7x inside the SFlOO.

Q-bus Enclosure Characteristics

~,
1

5.8

VAXcluster Options/System Expansion

Enclosure

Number of Disks

Cable Connector-Type

BA440/441'"
VAX 4000-300 1
with RF35s

/PS
Pedestal-style

BA430/431'"
VAX 4000-200
with RF35s

/PS

R400X*
with RF35s

7
13

/PS

BA42B
VAX 4000-100
with RF35s

/PS

B400X*
with RF35s

4
13

/PS

SF100-SF72/73
with RF72/73s

2 or 4

/ MR
Midrange-style

SF100-TF857

1 (tape-only)

/MR

Tabletop
TF85

1 (tape-only)

/ MR

B213/213F

/PS

BA215

/PS

R215F

/PS

R23F

/PS

A tape ISE can be substituted for one disk.
VAX 4000 Model 300 and higher systems
EiC removable disk packs-only

VAXcluster Systems Configuration Details
MicroVAX and VAX 4000-Based DSSI
VAXcluster Configurations

Three-System VAX 4000 Model 300 or Higher DSSI VAXcluster Configuration

(Continued)

Ethernet

VAX 4000-300

DSSI Bus A

VAX 4000-300

Storage
Expansion

' - - - - - - - - - - - - - + - - ' - - DSSI Bus B

Storage
Expansion

DSSI Bus C _ _ _ _ ____._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___,
BU-3267

VAX 4000-300
or Higher

KFQSA

R400X Expansion
Enclosure

SF100 Storage
Array

ML0-008627

Useful information on Q-bus DSSI VAXclusters
· The simplest two-system DSSI VAXcluster configuration has DSSI disks embedded in the system enclosures.
• Expanding from a single system to a two-system DSSI VAXcluster increases compute capacity, adds I/O capacity, and increases system availability.
• A minimum Q-bus DSSI VAXcluster configuration with any combination of
MicroVAX 3300, 3400, 3800, or VAX 4000 series systems, all of which can
accommodate internal DSSI storage, can be created.'"
·The MicroVAX 3300 and 3400, as well as the VAX 4000 Model 200, each have
one embedded DSSI adapter; the VAX 4000 Model 300 and higher systems have
two embedded adapters.
1
'

Some MicroVAX 3500 systems have embedded storage also.

VAXcluster Options/System Expansion

5.9

V AXcluster Systems Configuration Details
MicroVAX and VAX 4000-Based DSSI
VAXcluster Configurations
(Continued)

· Q-bus systems that do not support internal DSSI disk storage, e.g., MicroVAX II,
can be integrated into a Q-bus DSSI VAXcluster configuration with the addition
of a KFQSA storage adapter; RF-disks associated with that system are placed in
the expansion enclosure for shared access.
• Any two MicroVAX or VAX 4000 systems can share an expansion enclosure.
· When sharing an R400X expansion enclosure between two systems in a DSSI
VAXcluster configuration on a single DSSI bus, only six of the seven storage bays
can be used (see Rule 1.5).
• The maximum configuration is determined by the number of DSSI adapters that
can be configured on each system. The VAX 4000 Model 300 and higher systems
have two embedded DSSI adapters. When two additional KFQSAs are added to
the configuration, the maximum configuration becomes four shared DSSI buses.
Note that the VAX 4000 Model 100/ 200 has one embedded adapter and supports a maximum of two additional KFQSAs; thus the VAX 4000 Model 100/ 200
supports a maximum of three shared DSSI buses. VAX 4000 Model 100 requires
additional Q-bus expansion enclosure to house KFQSA adapter.
· A three-system Q-bus DSSI VAXcluster configuration can be created with any
combination of Q-bus MicroVAX/VAX systems, as long as the "middle" node is
a VAX 4000 Model 300 or higher system.

VAX 6000/7000/10000-Based DSSI
V AXcluster Configurations

The following simple rule set may be used for VAX 6000 DSSI VAXcluster
configurations:
3.1 "The VAX 6000 Cabinet Rule": For DSSI VAXclusters with any combination of two or three VAX 6000, VAX 7000, VAX 10000 systems it is recommended that the RF and/or TF storage ISEs residing on any single DSSI bus
be housed in a single cabinet.
Note that if other configurations are to be deployed, then Universal Length
Rule 1.8 must be rigorously observed (to ensure signal integrity). For details
on the use of Universal Length Rule 1.8, see examples and the table provided at the end of the "DSSI VAXcluster Configurations Guidelines" section.
3.2 Up to two SF35, SF72, or SF73 storage array building blocks can be embedded inside the VAX 6000 system cabinet; each of the DSSI system ports on
the KFMSA adapter can be connected to either an embedded SF35/SF72/
SF73 or to an external SF200/SF210/SF220/SF300/SF400 storage cabinet.
Note that embedded disks are shareable in a DSSI VAXcluster configuration.
3 .3 VMS Version 5 .4-2 or higher is required for the KFMSA adapter and VAX
6000 series DSSI VAXcluster configurations. VMS Version 5 .4-3 or higher is
required for booting VAX 6000 systems from the TF857 and TF85. VMS
V5.5 is required to support VAX 6000 Model 600 systems; VMS V5.5-2 is
required to support VAX 7000 and VAX 10000 systems.

SF72/SF73 Storage Arrays and
SF100/SF200/SF210/SF220
Storage Cabinets

The following rules apply to SF72/SF73 storage arrays and SF100/SF200/
SF210 storage cabinet configurations:
4.1

Each SF200/ 210 storage cabinet can include up to six SF72/SF73 storage
arrays, each consisting of two or four RF72/RF73 disks; and up to two
TF8xx magazine tape subsystems.
Each SF220 storage cabinet can include up to six SF35 storage arrays, each
consisting of up to 12 RF35 disks and up to two TF8xx magazine tape
subsystems.

4.3

Each SF72/SF73 storage array has two external DSSI interfaces and can
include either two or four RF72/RF73 disks; these RF-disk pairs can be
connected to either one or two separate DSSI buses.

Note: The new SF400 cabinet is recommended for use with the VAX 7000 and
VAX 10000 systems. The SF400 storage cabinet is the same height as the new
platforms and can hold 65 percent more RF disk capacity than the SF220.

5.10

VAXcluster Options/System Expansion

VAXcluster Systems Configuration Details
SF72/SF73 Storage Arrays and
SF100/SF200/SF210/SF220
Storage Cabinets (Continued)

Three-System VAX 6000 DSSI VAXcluster Configuration
Ethernet

VAX 6000
System

SF200/SF210/220

DSSI
Buses

Storage
Expansion

Ill

l±

BU-3266

Useful information on VAX 6000 DSSI VAXclusters
· Create a minimum, two-bus VAX 6000 DSSI VAXcluster system with any combination of VAX 6000 series systems, each configured with at least one KFMSA
adapter, which supports two DSSI buses.
• The simplest two-system DSSI VAXcluster configuration has DSSI disks embedded in the system cabinet; each VAX 6000 system cabinet can accommodate up
to eight RF72/73 disk drives and one TF85 tape drive, which are directly shareable between both systems.
· In a two-system VAX 6000 DSSI VAXcluster system, up to six RF72/73 disk
drives (or four RF72/73 disk drives and one IF-tape drive) can be supported on
each DSSI bus.
Mixed System DSSI VAXcluster
Configurations

The following rules apply to mixed-system DSSI VAXcluster configurations:

5.1 VAX 6000 and VAX 4000 families can be connected to the SFlOO,
SF200/210/220 storage cabinet or to the R400X and other selected
expansion enclosures.
Note that, since the combination and permutation of mixed systems and
DSSI storage expansion options is virtually unlimited, the " Q-bus
five-Enclosure Rule" and "VAX 6000 Cabinet Rule" are not applicable;
"Universal Length Rule 1.8" must be rigorously observed (to ensure signal
integrity). For details on the use of "Universal Length Rule 1.8," see
examples and the tables provided at the end of the DSSI VAX.cluster
configurations guidelines section.
Mixed System DSSI VAXcluster Configuration
Ethernet

Cl
-

VAX 6000
System

_g__
_g__

VAX 6000
System

SF200/SF210/220
Storage
Expansion

III
ll

VAX 4000
System

111

DSSI
Buses

BU-3268

VAXcluster Options/System Expansion

5.11

VAXcluster Systems Configuration Details
Mixed System DSSI VAXcluster
Configurations (Continued)

Useful information on Mixed System DSSI VAXclusters

• A mixed system DSSI VAXcluster configuration can be created with any combination of up to three VAX 4000 and VAX 6000 Series systems.

• A VAX 6000 series system can be added to an existing VAX 4000 family DSSI
VAXcluster configuration and also be configured as a member of a CI
VAXcluster; the VAX 6000 system then provides a "gateway" service, providing
high-performance access to the CI VAXcluster datacenter-wide databases for the
VAX 4000 systems.
• The VAX 6000 series system may be added to an existing two-system VAX 4000
family VAXcluster for applications that require vector processing, where the disk
requirements exceed the configurability of the Q -bus VAXcluster, or where more
than three CPUs in the cluster are required to meet future business growth
needs-all without losing the investment in the existing Q-bus DSSI VAXcluster.
Configuration Guidelines for DSSI
V AXcluster Systems

The following are recommended guidelines and considerations, when configuring
a DSSI VAXcluster:
• Similar VAX systems should be connected on the same DSSI bus, whenever
possible, to optimize performance.
• Different adapter types are allowed in the same system; similar adapters should
be connected on the same DSSI bus whenever possible to maximize performance.
(See the DSSI Adapter Performance Characterization table.) In conjunction with
this configuration guideline, it is recommended that KFQSA-based Q -bus systems
be upgraded to VAX 4000 Model 200 systems when included in VAX 4000 DSSI
VAXcluster configurations.
• VAX 6000 series systems configured with KFMSA adapters may also be configured with CI adapters, simultaneously accessing data and resources in this
mixed interconnect VAXcluster.
· VMS Volume Shadowing Phase II software can be added for increased data
availability and redundancy.

• An optional Uninterrupted Power Supply (UPS) , can be added to the VAXcluster
configuration to increase the level of availability.
DSSI Adapter Performance Characterization
DSSI Adapter-type

KFQSA

VAXcluster Options/System Expansion

190

Embedded EDA640 (MicroVAX 3300/3400 systems)

360

Embedded SHAC (VAX 4000 systems)

1200 '~

KFMSA

1600

1
'

5.12

Sustained I/O Rate
(I/Os per second)

For VAX 4000 Model 200 and VAX 4000 Model 300 systems SHACs, can only be driven to 800
!Os/ second.

V AXcluster Systems Configuration Details
Configuration Guidelines for DSSI
VAXcluster Systems (Continued)

Electrical Lengths of DSSI Bus Components*
Order
Number

Description/ Connector Types

Length

3.5-foot intracabinet shielded cable used in SF200,
SF210, SF220 and SFlOO cabinets to connect between
the drive enclosures SF72 and TF857 / 83 7 (MR/MR
connectors)

BC21Q-3F

42 inches
(3 .5 ft, 1.06 m)

6-foot intracabinet shielded cable used in SF200/
210/220 cabinets between drive enclosures and
SF200/SF210/220 bulkhead (MR/MR-BH connectors)

BC21R-5L

70 inches
(5.8 ft, 1.78 m)

9-foot external shielded cable (MR/MR connectors)

BC21Q-09

108 inches
(9 ft , 2.74 m)

9-foot external shielded cable (MR/PS connectors)

BC22Q-09

108 inches
(9 ft , 2.74 m)

9-foot external shielded cable (PS/PS connectors)

BC21M-09

108 inches
(9 ft , 2.74 m)

16-foot external shielded cable (PS/PS connectors)

BC21Q-16

192 inches
(16 ft, 4.8 m)

16-foot external shielded cable

BC22Q-09

192 inches
(16 ft, 4.8 m)

25-foot external shielded cable (MR/MR connectors)

BC21Q-25

300 inches
(25 ft, 7 .62 m)

25-foot external shielded cable (MR/MR connectors)

BC22Q-25

300 inches
(25 ft, 7 .62 m)

·1<

Electrical length may be different from apparent physical length by wide margins; for example: in a
"Y" cable bundle the apparent physical length of the cable bundle is "a" feet but the electrical
length is actually 2a between external connectors

Notes:
• MR is a micro-ribbon style external shielded connector; mates with MR-BH only.
•PS is a pin-and-socket-style external shielded connector; mates with PS-BH only.
• MR-BH is a micro-ribbon style shielded connector used for bulkhead mounting; mates with MR only.
• PS-BH is a pin-and-socket-style shielded connector used for bulkhead mounting; mates with PS only

Embedded DSSI Bus in VAX 6000 Enclosures
Order
Number

Description

Length

4-foot intracabinet shielded cable used from XMI
backplane with KFMSA to cabinet bulkhead in VAX
6000 (XMI-BP/ MR-BH connectors)

BC07T-04

48 inches
(4 ft, 1.22 m)

9-foot intracabinet shielded cable used from XMI
backplane with KFMSA to cabinet bulkhead in
special rackmount VAX 6000 (XMI-BP/MR-BH
connectors)

BC07T-09

108 inches
(9 ft, 2.74 m)

8-foot intracabinet "Y" shielded cables used from
cabinet bulkhead to XMI backplane with KFMSA to
cabinet bulkhead in VAX 6000 (MR-BH/XMI-BP/
MR-BH connectors)

BC07W-08

96 inches
(8 ft, 2.43 m)

10-foot intracabinet shielded cable used from XMI
backplane with KFMSA to internal TF interface
board to cabinet bulkhead in VAX 6000
(XMI-BP/TFI/MR-BH connectors)

BC07U-10

124 inches
(10.3 ft, 3.15 m)

Note: XMI-BP is a backpanel connector for the XMI backpanel.

VAXcluster Options/ System Expansion

5.13

V AXcluster Systems Configuration Details
Configuration Guidelines for DSSI
VAXcluster Systems (Continued)

Electrical Lengths of Embedded DSSI Bus in Enclosures
Enclosure

5.14

VAXcluster Options/System Expansion

Internal DSSI
Bus Length

R400x through bus mode
• No internal terminator
· Up to seven drives both upper and lower rows
·Two external PS-BH connectors
R400x split bus mode 1
• No internal terminator
•Up to four drives on same bus-upper row only
• Two external PS-BH connectors
R400x split bus mode 2
• No internal terminator
•Up to three drives on same bus-lower row only
·Two external PS-BH connectors
BA42B embedded storage
• Has internal terminator
·VAX 4000 Model 100
• One external PS-BH connector
BA440 embedded storage (Bus 0)
• Has internal terminator
• VAX 4000 Model 300 and higher
• One external PS-BH connector
BA440 in/out port (Bus 1)
• No internal terminator
• VAX 4000 Model 300 and higher
· Two external PS-BH connectors
BA430 embedded storage
• Has internal terminator
• VAX 4000 Model 200
• One external PS-BH connector
BA213
• Has internal terminator
• One external PS-BH connector
B213F
• Has internal terminator
• One external PS-BH connector
BA215
·Has internal terminator)
· One external PS-BH connector)
R215F
• No internal terminator
• Two external PS-BH connectors
R23F
• No internal terminator
• Two external PS-BH connectors
KFQSA adapter with one external PS-BH connector
directly attached to KFQSA (e.g., BA440)

94.5 inches
(7 .875 ft, 2.40 m)

KFQSA adapter with two external PS-BH connectors
directly attached to KFQSA (e.g., BA440)

12 inches
(1.0 ft, .33 m)

SF72 or SF73 enclosure in through .bus mode
• 1-4 drives on same DSSI bus no internal terminator
·Two external MR-BH connectors

168 inches

SF72 or SF73 enclosure in split bus mode
• 1 or 2 drives using internal SF72 terminator
· One external MR-BH connector

83.5 inches
(6.96 ft, 2.12 m)

66 inches
(5 .5 ft, 1.68 m)

40 inches
(3.33 ft, 1.02 m)

26 inches
(2.2 ft, .72 m)

52 inches approximately
(4.3 ft, 1.32 m)

20 inches
(1.6 ft , 0.51 m)

54 inches
(4.5 ft, 1.37 m)

45 inches
(3.7 ft, 1.14 m)
20 inches
(1.6 ft, 0.51 m)
30 inches
(2.5 ft, 0.76 m)
60 inches
(5 ft, 1.52 m)
39 inches approximately
(3 .3 ft, 1.0 m)
12 inches
(1.0 ft , .33 m)

(14 ft, 4.27 m)

V AXcluster Systems Configuration Details
Configuration Guidelines for
DSSI VAXcluster Systems (Continued)

Electrical Lengths of Embedded DSSI Bus in Enclosures (Continued)
Internal DSSI
Bus Length

Enclosure
Half-rack SF35 enclosure in through bus mode
· 1-6 drives on same DSSI bus no internal terminator
• Two external MR-BH connectors

84 inches
(7 ft, 2.13 m)

Half-rack SF35 enclosure in split bus mode
• 1-3 drives using internal SF35 terminator
· One external MR-BH connector

42 inches
(3 .5 ft, 1.07 m)

TF857 or TF83 7
• No internal terminator
· Two external MR-BH connectors

10 inches
(0.83 ft, 0.25 m)

SF200/SF210/SF220/ 100: Cable lengths internal to the SF200/SF210/SF220/
SFlOO must be obtained by adding the intracabinet cable length to the lengths in
the enclosures used (SF72 or TF857/837). Usually the SFlOO has only a 3.5-foot
intracabinet cable between the enclosures and the SF200/SF210/SF220 will have
one or two 70-inch cables and possibly a 3.5-foot intracabinet cable; consider the
specific implementation.
For example: an SF200 with the bulkhead connected to a through bus
SF72 connected to a TF857 connected back to the bulkhead would have
70 + 167 + 42 + 10 + 70 = 359 inches (29.9 feet) internal to the SF200 cabinet.
Enclosures with no internal terminators may be used anywhere on the bus (end
or middle). (If used on the bus end, an external terminator must be used on the
enclosure.)
Enclosures with internal terminators must occupy bus end positions.
There are essentially three DSSI cable types used to connect various enclosures
together in a DSSI cluster. The difference between these cables is essentially the
style of connector used on each end. The Q-bus pedestal systems use one style
of connector (PIS for pedestal style/pin socket) and the VAX 6000 systems use
the MIR (mid-range/micro ribbon) style of connector. These two connector styles
are not compatible with each other, thus three cable types are necessary.

BC21M-09
BC21Q-xx
BC22Q-xx

Pedestal-to-pedestal style cable
Mid-range-to-mid-range style cable
Pedestal-to-mid-range style cable

Today only the BC21M-09 and the BC21Q-3F are orderable via the cable number. The BC21M-09 is the pedestal-to-pedestal style DSSI cable used to connect
Q-bus systems (e.g., VAX 4000 to VAX 4000) as well as pedestal DSSI expansion
(R400X).
Order this cable by its cable number. The BC21Q-3F is the 40-inch cable used
to interconnect SFxx and TF857 storage building blocks within SF2x0 and SFlOO
DECarrays.
Cable variants of BC21Q-xx and BC22Q-xx (where xx is the length in feet) must
be ordered via cabinet kits.
For connecting between a VAX 6000 system and an SF2xx DECarray:
Cable Required

Cabinet Kit to Order

BC21Q-09
BC21Q-16
BC21Q-25
BC21Q-50

CK-SF200-LM
CK-SF200-L5
CK-SF200-L3
CK-SF200-L 7

VAXcluster Options/System Expansion

5.15

V AXcluster Systems Configuration Details
Configuration Guidelines for
DSSI VAXcluster Systems (Continued)

For connecting between a VAX 4000 system and an SF2xx DECarray:
Cable Required

Cabinet Kit to Order

BC22Q-09
BC22Q-16
BC22Q-25
BC22Q-50

CK-SF200-LP
CK-SF200-L6
CK-SF200-IA
CK-SF200-L8

For connecting between a VAX 6000 and another VAX 6000, SFlOO DECarray or
tabletop TF85:
Cable Required

Cabinet Kit to Order

BC21Q-09
BC21Q-16
BC21Q-25

CK-SFlOO-LM
CK-SF100-L5
CK-SF100-L3

For connecting between a VAX 4000 and VAX 6000 system, SFlOO DECarray or
tabletop TF85:
Cable Required

Cabinet Kit to Order

BC22Q-09
BC22Q-16
BC22Q-25

CK-SFlOO-LP
CK-SF100-L6
CK-SFlOO-IA

Configuration Rules for LAN-Based VAXcluster Systems
Just as there are general rules for VAXcluster configurations, there are rules that
apply to both Ethernet and Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) VAXcluster
configurations. Ethernet and FDDI are industry-standard general-purpose communications interconnects that can be used to implement a Local Area Network
(LAN). Rules specific to Ethernet or FDDI are in the separate sections. For
network configuration details, see the N etworks Buyer's Guide.
• A single extended LAN must link all CPUs.
• All LAN bridges must provide a low-latency data path, with approximately 10
Mbits per second throughput for Ethernet and 100 Mbits per second throughput
for FDDI. Translating bridges must be used when connecting VAXcluster nodes
on an Ethernet to those on an FDDI.

• An extended local area network (LAN) must be configured according to the
guidelines in the Networks Buyer's Guide.
Configuring LAN-based VAXcluster
Systems with Multiple LAN Adapters

·All VAXcluster nodes should run VMS V5.4-3 or later.
·VMS V5.4-3 and higher support up to four Local Area Network (LAN) adapters
on each local area VAXcluster system. Adapters can be either Ethernet or FDDI.
LAN segments can be bridged to form an extended LAN. The LAN segments can
be either Ethernet segments or FDDI rings.
· The boot server and the system disk server for a given satellite must be connected to the same LAN segment.
· All nodes must have a direct path to all other nodes. A direct path can be a
bridged or unbridged LAN segment.
· Connect each LAN adapter to a separate LAN segment. A LAN segment can be
bridged or unbridged. This can help provide higher performance and availability
in the cluster.
· Distribute satellites equally among the LAN segments. This can help to distribute
the cluster load more equally across all of the LAN segments.

5.16

VAXcluster Options/System Expansion

V AXcluster Systems Configuration Details
Configuration Rules for Ethernet V AXcluster Systems
The following general rules apply for all Ethernet VAXcluster systems:
· CPUs that use the Ethernet for VAXcluster communications can use it concurrently for other network protocols that conform to the applicable Ethernet standards, such as Ethernet Version 2.0, IEEE 802.2, and
IEEE 802.3.
The following diagram shows an Ethernet VAXcluster configuration with two
VAX systems sharing disks across the DSSI. Both boot servers boot from locally
connected system disks, and the disk containing satellite system roots is dual
accessed (DSSI disks can not be dual ported) between the servers. Thus, if one
boot server fails, satellites can access their system disk through the other server.

Local
System
Disk

VAX Disk
Server

MicroVAX

VAXstation

Ethernet

Local
System
Disk

VAX Boot
Server

Satellite
System
Disk

VAX Boot
Server

Local
System
Disk
BU-3272

Configuration Rules for CPUs with
Multiple Ethernet Adapters

When a LAN-based VAXcluster system is configured with high performance
nodes, multiple LAN adapters and interconnects can be used to increase total
communication bandwidth. When a VAXcluster system is configured with multiple Ethernet adapters, follow these rules:
· First determine the maximum number of Ethernet adapters supported by the
CPU. A maximum of four LAN adapters per CPU is supported for VAXcluster
communication.
· Each Ethernet adapter can be connected to a separate Ethernet LAN segment.
This can help provide higher performance and availability in the VAXcluster
system.
· Each Ethernet adapter can be connected to the same Ethernet LAN segment.
This does not provide additional performance, but does provide higher
availability.

Configuration Guidelines for Ethernet
V AXcluster Systems

The following guidelines can help in configuring Ethernet VAXcluster systems.
· Ethernet bridges can be used to localize VAXcluster system traffic if overall
network traffic is a concern.
• When choosing a CPU as a server, a general rule is to use the most powerful
CPU with the highest bandwidth adapter.
For VAXcluster configurations that require even higher availability, use the following guidelines when you configure the VAXcluster system.
Ethernet LAN segments:
·Bridge Ethernet LAN segments together to form a single extended LAN.
· Provide redundant Ethernet LAN segment bridges for failover support.
· Configure LAN bridges to pass VAXcluster system and maintenance operation
protocol (MOP) multicast messages.
• Use multiple boot or disk servers.

VAXcluster Options/System Expansion

5.17

VAXcluster Systems Configuration Details
Configuration Rules for FDDI VA.Xcluster Systems
The Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) conforms to ANSI FDDI and IEEE
LLC standards, and is an open protocol-independent interconnect. It can be used
as a network interconnect, a VAXcluster interconnect, or as a common interconnect for both.
· CPUs that use an FDDI for VAXcluster communications can concurrently use it
for other network protocols that conform to the applicable FDDI standards, such
as ANSI X3.139-1987 , ANSI X3.148-1988, and ANSI X3.166-1990.
· VMS V5.4-3 and higher support up to four Local Area Network (LAN) FDDI
adapters (DEMFA) on each CPU within the VAXcluster system.
· The maximum number of VAXcluster members that can be directly connected to
the FDDI, via the DEC FDDicontroller 400 (DEMFA), is 16.

Configuration Rules for Mixed lntercQnnect VAXcluster Systems
The rules for mixed interconnect configurations are consistent with the rules for
each individual interconnect.
For applications that require continuous processing with no loss of work in
progress, a VAXft can be added to the environment with no application rewrite.
VAXft fault tolerant systems may be used as standalone systems, as clustered
fault-tolerant systems, or as a fault-tolerant front-end processor to a VAXcluster.
For businesses that require site independence, lights-out operation, or disaster
recovery in seconds or minutes, see the following section, "VAXcluster MultiDatacenter Facility."

5.18

VAXcluster Options/System Expansion

VAXcluster Multi-Datacenter Facility
Overview

The VAXcluster Multi-datacenter Facility (MDF) is a software and consultancy
package that provides the platform for disaster-tolerant computing. With MDF,
system elements (CPUs, storage, etc.) located in two or more physically separated
datacenters can be combined into a single, manageable VAXcluster system that
has no single site dependency to be operational. Two system variations are currently supported:
· Two datacenters with a Quorum VAX at a third site provide resumption of
system service within seconds after the loss of either datacenter without operator
action.
· Two datacenters without a Quorum VAX provide resumption of service within
minutes after the operator invokes the automated recovery procedures.
Both variations employ FDDI as the inter-datacenter communications media, providing site separation of up to 24.8 miles (40 km) and redundant (two) operations management stations (OMS) to provide site-independent system
management.
The VAXcluster Multi-Datacenter Facility can also be used to consolidate
datacenters and for lights-out operation allowing remote management of sites.
For disaster tolerance, the recovery period/ disaster-tolerant requirement is
derived from the business or operational need being met.
· Critical computing functions such as those associated with health care or utility
delivery (power, telephone, etc.) require virtually continuous system operation
and cannot be dependent upon a single datacenter.
• The period of system outage directly correlates to a negative impact upon the
bottom line for any business dependent upon computing functions and data
access.
• Auditor and regulatory pressure to have a ((fail safe" and verifiable disaster
recovery plan is becoming the rule rather than the exception.
· Credible recovery plans may be required to obtain financing when the product or
service delivered by the enterprise is dependent upon the computing system.
· Assured system availability can be used as a competitive advantage when marketing computing services.
Traditional disaster recovery techniques rely on manual procedures. Techniques
such as offsite storage and standby systems are high risk, difficult, expensive to
verify, and often go untested. The recovery period is typically specified in hours
or days. Alternatively, applications can be written using remote journaling or
other techniques. This disaster recovery technique is application dependent and
is expensive to implement and maintain. The disaster-tolerant VAXcluster system
is not application dependent and by making the recovery process intrinsic to the
system's implementation, the ((disaster recovery plan" is in continuous operation
and, therefore, highly reliable, predictable, and easy to verify and costs less to
implement and maintain than current disaster techniques.
In designing a disaster-tolerant VAXcluster system, the first decision to be made
is whether recovery time must be in seconds (requires Quorum VAX and does
not require operator action) or minutes (requires operator action and does not
require Quorum VAX). The VAXcluster Multi-Datacenter Facility supports FDDI
as the interconnect between sites. At least one XMI-based VAX (VAX 6000, VAX
7000, VAX 9000, or VAX 10000) equipped with a DEC FDDI Controller 400
connected to the FDDI ring must be located at each datacenter. The optional
Quorum VAX can be any VAX (with system disk) connected to the FDDI ring
via an FDDI/Ethernet bridge at a third location.

VAXcluster Options/System Expansion

5.19

VAXcluster Multi-Datacenter Facility
Overview (Continued)

In order to achieve a predictable, and short recovery period, physical datacenter
independence must be assured. The MDF package provides the only way to do
this reliably. Through the combination of software and service, datacenter independence is addressed in four dimensions: system management, system function,
data correctness, and fault isolation/correction. Site-independent system management is provided by the deployment of two operations management stations
(OMS) ,- each to serve as backup to the other. The software that executes on the
OMS VAXstation platforms is a combination of prerequisite system management
products (see Step 3 of the following ordering menu) and additional utilities,
code to integrate the various system management functions, code to effect OMS
failover, customized command procedures, and event-monitor database provided
with the MDF package.

Features

Operations Management Station (OMS) Software

• Location-independent, integrated system management functions
- Management station security management
- Configuration display monitor-current and expected views of V AXcluster
system

- OMS installation and customization tools
- OMS platform failover
- Integrated system management menus
• Customized command files for location-independent system operation
- System startup
- Restart after site failure
- Re-combine VAXcluster after site repair
- Shared resource redeployment
· Customized command files for location-independent storage management
- Shadow set mount
- Mark invalid shadow members for shadow copy only use
- Shadow set reconstruction
· Site-independent failure isolation procedures
- Event-monitor database (applied to VCS and DCM)
- 24 ((indications" mapped to isolation/correction procedures
Service and Documentation

• System availability analysis/ configuration verification

• MDF implementation plan
· Command procedure customization

· OMS software customization
·Training on use of OMS
· Disaster-readiness checklists
• System test-recovery verification

5.20

VAXcluster Options/System Expansion

VAXcluster Multi-Datacenter Facility
Warranty
• VAXcluster MDF provides disaster-tolerant system availability and is a
Digital-supported system solution-from design to online.
A VAXcluster Multi-Datacenter system may include up to:
• Two datacenters with or without a Quorum VAX at a third location (a future
release will support three datacenters)
·A maximum of 16 VAX CPUs (VAX 6000, VAX 7000, VAX 9000, or VAX 10000)
directly attached to an FDDI ring through a DECconcentrator and a DEC FDDI
Controller 400 (XMI-FDDI interface) in the entire MDF VAXcluster system.
• One or two FDDI rings between location with load balancing and failover
between rings.
• VAX systems with multiple FDDI interfaces per VAX CPU (up to four FDDI
interfaces per VAX 9000-4xx; up to two per VAX 6000 and VAX 9000-200 and
up to eight per VAX 7000 and VAX 10000).
· 96 nodes in the total VAXcluster system (including workstation and Hierarchical
Storage Controllers).
• 75 two- or three-member shadow sets.
Additional configuration information is contained in VAXcluster Multi-Datacenter
Facility Configuration Guidelines (order number AA-PKR9A-TE).
Disaster-Tolerant System

DECserver

Optional
Quorum
VAX

OMS
VAXstation

HSC

OMS

DECserver

VAXstation

HSC

I
I
I

I
I

~ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - _I
Datacenter A

Datacenter B

BU-3276

VAXcluster Options/System Expansion

5.21

VAXcluster Multi-Datacenter Facility
Step 1- VAXcluster Multi-Datacenter Facility

--~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~----

0 rd er VAXcluster Multi-Datacenter Facility package.
QB-MC8AA-BA
QA-MC7AA-HW

VAXcluster Multi-Datacenter Package (one per datacenter included in multi-datacenter system)
Media and documentation kit (one per multi-datacenter system)

Step 2-VAXcluster Multi-Datacenter Facility Hardware/Software Platform
Order appropriate VAX 6000/VAX 7000/VAX 10000 system, including DEC FDDI Controller 400 controller (DEMFA) option.
Ensure that the prerequisite software is on the VAXcluster system:

QL-OOlxx-xx
QL-VBRAx-xx
QL-AB2Ax-AA
QL-D05xx-xx
Q2-GABAx-AA

VMS V5.4-3 or V5.5 for all nodes in the VAXcluster system
VAXcluster Software V5.4-3 for all nodes in the VAXcluster system
VAX Volume Shadowing V5 .4-3 for all nodes in the VAXcluster system
Full-function DECnet (on at least one node/site)
Datacenter Monitor Watchdog R3 .0 for each VAX system

Both multi-mode and single-mode FDDI fiber between datacenters are supported. Note that there must be a "reliable link"
between the datacenters; e.g., there should be more than one physical path between the datacenters. This may be accomplished in several ways: diverse path routing with a dual ring, diverse path routing with two single rings, diverse path
routing with two dual rings, and single path with a three-site (or two datacenter, plus Quorum VAX) configuration.
See the Network Buyer)s Guide for details on configuring an FDDI network.

Step 3-0MS Hardware/Software Platform
Two Operation Management Station (OMS) systems are required in a VAXcluster Multi-Datacenter system: an OMS should
be installed at each of the datacenters in the VAXcluster Multi-Datacenter system. The recommended OMS platform is a
VAXstation 4000 VLC, VAXstation 4000 Model 60, or VAXstation 3100 Model 48. Each OMS requires a minimum of 16
Mbytes of memory and 300 Mbytes of disk storage. The display must have 8-plane color graphics, 1024 x 864 video
resolution, a pointing device, and support DECnet.
Order the prerequisite software for each Operations Management Station:

QL-OOlxx-xx
QL-YFPxx-xx
QL-VDHA9-AA
Q2-GAAAx-AA
QL-VOlAA-JB

VMS V5.4-3 or V5.5 (multi-user license)
DECelms Vl.1
Terminal Server Manager (TSM) Vl.5
Datacenter Monitor Kernel R3 .0
VAXcluster Console System Vl.3 for each VAX system, HSC, and OMS station

Step 4-0MS Console Interfaces
Select appropriate terminal servers and choose appropriate adapters to connect VAX systems and HSCs to the OMS console.

H8575-A
No adapter required
'" MMJ connection

DECserver 200/MC (DRSVB-AA, AB) with modem control
DECserver 200/DL (data leads, DSRVB-AA/ AB)
DECserver 300' (DSRVF-BA, BB), DECserver 90V°', DECserver 90TL"'
0
'

Step 5- 0MS Console Cables
Choose appropriate cable length or customize cable length required to connect each VAX system and HSC to the OMS
console.

BC16E-25
BC16E-50
BC16E-AO
H8240
H8220
H8241

25-ft (7.6-m) DECconnect cable
50-ft (15.2-m) DECconnect cable
100-ft (30.5-m) DECconnect cable
1000-ft (300.5-m) unterminated roll of DECconnect cable
Package of 50 MMP connectors
Crimping tool

Step 6-0MS Console Cable Adapters
H8575-A (25-pin)
H8575-B (9-pin)
No adapter required
0
'

'MMJ connection

5.22

VAX 9000, VAX 6000-2xx/3xx/4xx series, VAX 8xxx, VAX-11/750/780/785, HSC40/50/60/70/90
MicroVAX II, VAXstation II
MicroVAX 3xxx'" series, VAXstation 3xxx''' (except VAXstation 3200), VAX 4000 series'°', VAXstation
4000 series'°', VAXserver 3xxx'°', VAXserver 4000 series 1'

VAXcluster Options/System Expansion

V AXcluster Console System
Overview

The VAXcluster Console System (VCS) is a system management tool that centralizes the console management of dispersed nodes. VCS is a VMS V5 .4
DECwindows layered product, and utilizes various MicroVAX and VAXstation
systems as hardware platforms.
The VAXcluster Console System Software components include I/O data logger,
data scanner, event logger, central control coordinator interface, monitor interface, connect interface, record interface, review interface, access interface, configuration editor, configuration file, and log files.
From VCS, a system manager can perform all console functions for all serviced
nodes including:
· Shutting down or rebooting the serviced nodes.
· Running standalone diagnostics.
· Performing standalone backup operations.
· Installing layered products.
· Viewing console output.
· Reviewing historical console data.
• Retrieving historical console data for analysis or printing.
· Searching for console data.
· Logging all data and activities between VCS and the serviced nodes.
· Scanning incoming messages from the serviced nodes for specific text strings that
may contain status or error information.
· Assembling icons into graphic displays on a VAXstation screen representing the
aerial view of the datacenter and the logical grouping of VAXcluster
configurations.
· Providing an optional security facility to control access to the serviced nodes.

Software Features

· AJl data received from connected devices are logged by VCS and identified by
sok_ce node name and the time received by VCS.
• A security facility allows the system manager to restrict access to VCS-controlled
devices.
· VCS detects console events by scanning console text messages and comparing
them with predefined text strings contained in scan files.
• With VAXstation host systems, VCS can build an icon-based view of all the
devices connected to it. This graphic layout uses color to indicate the severity of
an event and allows the user to access a device's console by clicking with a
mouse to activate a VCS interface.
· Users are alerted of critical system messages by changing icon colors, via a
DEC talk device, VAXmail, terminal broadcast, notification window on
VAXstations and DECwindows terminals, or user-defined.

IIardware Features

· Support of up to 32 devices: VAXcluster system nodes, standalone VAX systems,
or any device that sends ASCII data over an RS-232 line, has an EIA console
port, and supports XON/XOFF and I/O buffering. The maximum supported
console terminal speed is 9600 baud.
· Operators can connect to the console port of any node serviced by VCS from
any terminal connected to the VCS host.
• VCS can control remote devices via reverse LAT connections over the Ethernet
using DECserver 200/ 300 terminal servers.
• Operators can remotely access the VCS host system via DECnet, LAT, or dial-up
ports to perform VCS functions.
· Managed devices can connect to DECconnect via a terminal server or at the VCS
host hardware platform.

VAXcluster Options/System Expansion

5.23

VAXcluster Console System
Step 1-VAXcluster Console Software
Order VAXcluster Console System software.

QL-V01AA-3B
QA-V01AA-H5
QA-VOlAA-HM

1-node license; order as many as needed. A maximum of 32 nodes can be connected.
TK50 media and documentation
Magtape media and documentation

Step 2-Hardware Platform
The following hardware platforms are supported. Refer to the appropriate chapter in this catalog for ordering new systems.

A minimum of 6 Mbytes memory and 71 Mbytes of disk storage is required. If utilizing DECwindows, a minimum of 8
Mbytes of memory and 159 Mbytes of disk storage is recommended.
No. Nodes
Connected

Host Hardware Platform

Connection Method

1-8

MicroVAX 2000
VAXstation 2000

Host-initiated connection

1-16

MicroVAX II
VAXstation II/GPX
VAX 4000

Direct connect or host -initiated
connection

1-32

VAX 4000
MicroVAX 3300, 3400, 3500, 3600, 3800, 3900
VAXstation 3200, 3500
VAXstation 3100, MicroVAX 3100

Direct connect or host -initiated
connection
Host-initiated connection only

~~~~~~~~~~~~

Step 2a-Direct Connection Method
For managed devices that are directly connected to the VCS host hardware platform, order the appropriate adapters.

H8575-A

MicroVAX II (DHVll, DHQll interface)
MicroVAX 3300, 3400, 3500, 3600, 3800, 3900 (CXY08 interface)
VAXstation 3500 (CXY08 interface)

No adapter required

MicroVAX 3300, 3400, 3800, 3900 (CXA16 interface)'"
VAXstation 3200, 3500 (CXA16 interface)'"

"' MMJ connection

Step 2b-Host-initiated Connection
For managing devices that are elsewhere on the network, use terminal servers and choose appropriate adapters.

H8575-A

DECserver 200/MC (DSRVB-AA, AB) with modem control

No adapter required

DECserver 300"' (DSRVF-BA, BB)
DECserver 200/DL (data leads, DSRVB-AA/AB)

,; MMJ connection

Step 3-Cables
Choose appropriate cable length or customize cable length required.

BC16E-25
BC16E-50
BC16E-AO
H8240
H8220
H8241

25-ft (7 .6-m) DECconnect cable
50-ft (15.2-m) DECconnect cable
100-ft (30.5-m) DECconnect cable
1000-ft (300.5-m) unterminated roll of DECconnect cable
Package of 50 MMP connectors
Crimping tool

Step 4-Adapters
Order the appropriate adapter for each of the following managed devices.

H8575-A (25-pin)

VAX 9000, VAX 6000-2xx/3xx/4xx Series, VAX 8xxx, VAX-11/750/780/785, HSC40/50/70

H8575-B (9-pin)

MicroVAX II, VAXstation II

No adapter required

MicroVAX 3xxx'" Series, VAXstation 3xxx"' (except VAXstation 3200), VAXserver 3xxx''

"' MM} connection

5.24

VAXcluster Options/System Expansion

VAXcluster Options
V AXcluster Options

VAXcluster systems based on the Computer Interconnect (CI) offer high availability and performance through the Cl's dual-path design, with 140-Mbit/second
speed on both CI paths. These VAXcluster systems use VAXcluster Software on
VMS systems with CI hardware:
• CI VAXcluster hubs-Star Coupler and CI Star Coupler Expander (CISCE)
·CI interfaces-CIXCD-AA, CIXCD-AB, CIXCD-AC, and CIBCA-BA
·CI cables
VAXcluster configurations have been expanded with support for:
• Multiple Star Couplers and/or CI Star Coupler Expanders in a single VAXcluster
system
· Multiple CI interfaces on most VAX processors in a VAXcluster system
Configuration guidelines are found in Guidelines for VAXcluster Systems

Confi'gurations (EK-VAXCS-CG).

Star Coupler

SC008-AC The SC008-AC is a passive hub device providing dual CI path and
electrical isolation between CPU nodes and HSCxx storage controller nodes in a
CI VAXcluster system. Supports up to eight CI ports; includes cabinet.

SC008-AC
8 Ports

Dimensions: Width: 54 cm (21.25 in.)
Height: 106 cm (41.75 in.)
Depth: 76 cm (30.00 in.)

SC008-AD
8 Ports

SC008-AD Upgrades the SC008-AC from support of 8 to 16 ports and is
installed inside the SC008-AC cabinet.
BU-3053

Star Coupler Expander

CISCE-AA The CISCE Star Coupler Expander permits up to 32 ports to be
connected to the Computer Interconnect, providing room to grow from the
previous 16-port limit to 32 for larger installed CI-VAXcluster systems. It is used
in combination with two SC008-ACs and two SC008-ADs for 32 CI interfaces, or
two SC008-ACs and one SC008-AD for 24 CI interfaces. Each of the two amplifier assemblies that comprise the CISCE-AA has the following dimensions:

CISCE
SCOOS-AC

SCOOS-AC

8 Ports

SCOOS-AD
8 Ports

BU -3054

CI Interfaces

Dimensions: Width: 43.1 cm (17.0 in.)
Height: 8.73 cm (3.44 in.)
Depth: 29.7 cm (11.7 in.)
Voltage: 120/240 ac
Power: 6 W (continuous)
CI interfaces are intelligent controllers that connect nodes to the CL Each interface attaches to the CI Bus, the bus consisting of two transmit and two receive
cables (which provides hardware redundancy and fail-over). In the past, traffic
on the CI Bus was restricted to transmissions on one available path at a time. With the introduction of the CIXCD, greater utilization of
the CI Bus occurs with the controller taking advantage of both paths of the CI
Bus for communications. Transmission can now be made across either available
path simultaneously. The CI Bus retains its high availability since, if one path
becomes unavailable, all traffic will use the surviving path. The VMS operating
system tests a failed path periodically. As soon as the path becomes available it is
automatically used again for normal traffic.

VAXcluster Options/System Expansion

5.25

VAXcluster Options
CIXCD

CIBCA

CI Cables

High-performance, intelligent I/O interface that connects VAX 6000, VAX 7000,
VAX 9000, and VAX 10000 series processors to the Computer Interconnect (CI)
VAXcluster systems. It uses a method of CI communications that allows the
CIXCD to communicate over two CI paths at the same time in any order. It is
compatible with existing VAXcluster systems port interfaces and can be used to
enhance existing VAXcluster systems I/O performance. It is supported by VMS
V5.4. Combining CIXCDs and CIBCAs on the same system is not supported.
CIXCD-AA

CIXCD with cabinet kit for use on VAX 9000 system.

CIXCD-AB

CIXCD with cabinet kit for use on VAX 6000 system.

CIXCD-AC

CIXCD with cabinet kit for use on VAX 7000 and VAX 10000
system.

Option

Mounting
Requirements

1/0 Panel Units

CIXCD-AA/AB

1 XMI slot

CIBCA-BA Optional CI VAXcluster interface for VAXBI systems. VMS V5.4 supports the use of multiple CIBCA-BA interfaces on VAXBI-based systems, providing the interfaces are of the same type. VMS restricts the use of mixed CI port
interface variations, e.g., the CIBCA-BA and the CIBCA-AA cannot be mixed
within the same system.

Option

Mounting
Requirements

CIBCA-BA

2 VAXBI slots

12 v -12 v

-5.2 v

-2 v

9.00

0.00

2.00

1.00

0.00

A VAXcluster software license is required for each CPU in a VAXcluster system.

CI interfaces/ Star Coupler
CI-based VAX CPUs/VAXcluster System
Total VAX CPUs/Mixed Interconnect
2
VAXcluster System

Supported
with VMS V5.2

Supported
with VMS V5.4

24 (with CISCE)

32 (with CISCE)

96
51

Star Couplers/VAXcluster System

VAXcluster Options/ System Expansion

CI cable set-10 meters (32 feet)
CI cable set-20 meters (65 feet)
CI cable set-45 meters (146 feet)

Configuration
Support Table

5.26

1/0 Panel
Units

CI cables are required for each CI interface ordered.
BNCIA-10
BNCIA-20
BNCIA-45

V AXcluster System License

VAXBI
Nodes

de Amps Drawn @

CIXCD/VAX 9000-110, 210, 310, 320
System3

CIXCD/VAX 9000-330, 340, 410, 420
System3

CIXCD/VAX 9000-430, 440 System 3

101

VAXcluster Options
Number of CI Interfaces
Supported by CPU

CI750

CI780

CIBCI

CIBCA-A CIBCA-B CIXCD

VAX-11/750
VAX-11/780, 785
VAX 82xx, 83xx
VAX 85xx, 8700, 88xx

VAX 86xx

VAX 6000 systems
VAX 7000 systems

VAX 9000-110, 210, 310, 320

VAX 9000-330, 340, 410, 420

VAX 9000-430, 440
10

VAX 10000 systems
Notes:
1

Architectural limit is 16; initial limits to be increased as testing and qualification proceed.
CPUs may be single- or multiprocessor and may be connected by Computer Interconnect (CI),
Ethernet, and/or DSSI. As of V5.4, CPUs are classified as workstations or other VAX types. During
V5.2, CPUs were then classified as CI-based or non-CI based CPUs.
3
All CI interfaces on a particular CPU must be of the same type.
See the Guidelines for VAXclusters System Configurations, EK-VAXCS-CG-004 , for further
information.
4
CIBCA-A not supported on Model 500 and Model 600 systems.
5
CIBCA-B not supported on Model 600 systems.
2

VAXcluster Revision Matrix to
Support CIXCD

Note: The following matrix indicates the minimum revision levels required to
support the CIXCD in a CI VAXcluster environment (current at the time of
publication of this catalog). Consult Digital Services for the latest revision levels.
All CI adapters in the cluster must be set to 10 tick mode when CIXCD is
installed on any system in the cluster.
All VAXcluster CI Nodes
Element

Numbered 0 - 15

All VAXcluster CI Nodes
Numbered 0 - 31

VMS

V5.4

CIXCD
T2080
CIXCD.BIN

Rev E02 or above
V2.03

LOlOO Rev E
L0118 Rev B

L0118 Rev B

V4.1
V6.0

HSCxO
Link Module
HSC s/w'°' for

HSC50
HSC40/70
CI7 xO, CIBCI
Link Module
CI780.BIN
and L0101
CIBCA-A
Link Module
Port Module
CIBCA.BIN
CIBCA-B
Link Module
Port Module
CIBCB.BIN

LOlOO Rev E
L0118 Rev B

L0118 Rev B

Rev 8.7 and LOlO l Rev K or
Rev 20.20 and L0101-YA

Rev 20.20 and LOlOl -YA
fl.)

·:::=
0

No Restriction

Rev 7.5

0
...
!
:s
y
:><
fl.)

No Restriction

Rev 5.2

''<Later versions of operating systems and affiliated devices such as HSCs may require higher versions
than those stated above. Refer to applicable release notes.

VAXcluster Options/System Expansion 5.27

Memory
VAX 7000 and VAX 10000
Memory

VAX 9000 Series Memory

Recommended Memory Configuration

MS7AA-AA

64 Mbytes of memory; memory does not support intra-board
interleaving.

MS7AA-BA

128 Mbytes of memory; memory supports two-way, intra-board
interleaving.

MS7AA-CA

256 Mbytes of memory; memory supports two-way, intra-board
interleaving.

MS900-BA

256-Mbyte ECC MOS memory using 1-Mbit DRAMs; mounts in
memory backplane in SCU cabinet. System memory capacity is
512 Mbytes.

MS900-UA

128-Mbyte to 256-Mbyte memory upgrade for VAX 9000 Models 110 and 310 only.

The VAX 9000 system requires sufficient memory capacity and bandwidth to
match its processing capabilities and application demands. Insufficient memory
can result in excessive paging and swapping and long memory I/O command
queues. Memory is especially important for vector processors because they typically generate a high level of memory activity. The following chart shows the
recommended memory configurations for VAX 9000 processors.
Model

Non-Vector
Amount
Interleaving

Amount

Interleaving

210/410

256 MB

2-way

256 MB/512 MB

2-way or 4-way

420

512 MB

4-way

512 MB

4-way

430

512 MB

4-way

512 MB

4-way

Vector

Note: Systems configured with 256 Mbytes of memory are capable of 2-way
interleaving while systems configured with the MS900-BA (512 Mbytes total
memory) can perform 4-way interleaving.
These are guidelines only. Application demands are important in determining the
optimum amount of physical memory for a VAX 9000 system. A general VMS
guideline states that additional memory is required when a system incurs ten or
more page faults per second. It is desirable, in many cases, to configure sufficient
physical memory to operate at a level significantly below ten page faults per
second. Vector processor performance is especially sensitive to excessive paging.

VAX 6000 Series Memory

MS65A-BA

32 Mbytes, ECC, 1-Mbit DRAM memory; requires VMS V5.4.

MS65A-CA

64 Mbytes, ECC, 4-Mbit DRAM memory; requires VMS V5.4.

MS65A-DA

128 Mbytes, ECC, 4-Mbit DRAM memory; requires VMS V5.4.

MS62A-AB

32 Mbytes, ECC, 1-Mbit DRAM memory.

Note: MS62A-AB memory is not supported in VAX 6000 Model 500/600 systems.
Recommended for VAX 6000 systems running VMS versions prior to VMS V5.4.

5.28

VAXcluster Options/System Expansion

Memory

Model 200

Recommended
Minimum Interleave
Model 300
Model 400

Model 500/600~'

One
One
One
Two
Two
Two

One
One
Two
Two
Four
Four

One
One
One
Two
Two
Two

Two
Two
Four
Four
Four

One
Two
Two
Two
Two

Memory Interleaving
Number of
Processors

One
Two
Three
Four
Five
Six
One with one vector
Two with one vector
Two with two vectors
Three with one vector
Four with one vector

*The interleave requirements for the VAX 6000 Model 5001600 are less than specified for the VAX
6000 Model 400. This is a result of the the improved efficiencies of write-back cache implemented
in the VAX 6000 Model 500/ 600.

Interleaving is used to increase the performance of the memory subsystem by
distributing the memory traffic across multiple memory modules. Higher
performance systems require larger minimum interleaving to maintain acceptable
system performance.
• One memory module provides a one-way interleave.
·Two memory modules of like size provide a two-way interleave.
• Three memory modules of like size provide a one-way interleave.
• Four memory modules of like size provide a four-way interleave.
• Five memory modules of like size provide a one-way interleave.
• Six memory modules of like size provide a two-way interleave.
· Seven memory modules of like size provide a one-way interleave.
• Eight memory modules of like size provide a eight-way interleave.
The system will automatically configure the optimum memory interleave for a
given memory configuration. For example, if seven 64-Mbyte memory modules
are configured, the system will use the first four 64-Mbyte modules to establish a
four-way interleave set, the next two 64-Mbyte memory modules to establish a
two-way interleave set, and the last 64-Mbyte memory module to establish a
one-way interleave set. Under certain applications, traffic may all be directed to
the one-way interleave set; therefore, the seven module memory system is effectively a one-way interleave set.
Systems with memories of different sizes will automatically configure the optimum memory interleave by grouping smaller sized memories and then interleaving these groups with the remaining larger memories. For example, if two
32-Mbyte memories and one 64-Mbyte memory are present, the system will
group the two 32-Mbyte memories and establish a two-way interleave set with
the 64-Mbyte memory module. Thus, a two-way interleave is established. Other
common examples of mixed memory configurations are shown below.
Starting
Memory Modules

Added
Memory Modules

New Memory
Capacity

Minimum
Interleave

One 32-Mbyte
One 32-Mbyte

One 64-Mbyte
One 128-Mbyte

96 Mbytes
160 Mbytes

One
One

Two 32-Mbyte
Two 32-Mbyte

One 64-Mbyte
One 128-Mbyte

128 Mbytes
192 Mbytes

Two
One

Three 32-Mbyte
Three 32-Mbyte

One 64-Mbyte
One 128-Mbyte

160 Mbytes
224 Mbytes

One
One

Four 32-Mbyte
Four 32-Mbyte

One 64-Mbyte
One 128-Mbyte

192 Mbytes
256 Mbytes

Two
Two

VAXcluster Options/System Expansion

~
0

e
QJ

5.29

Memory
CPU ROM Kits

VAX 4000 Models 400, 500,
and 600 Memory
Configuring Information

VAX 4000 Model 300 Memory
Configuring Information

VAX 4000 Model 200

Memory

• Customers purchasing MS65A memory for VAX 6000 Models 200, 300 or 400
systems that have only MS62A-AB memory installed (no MS65A memory currently
installed) must order CPU ROM kits according to the table below. Additional
CPU ROM kits are NOT required with subsequent memory purchases for the
same system.
• Systems that are shipped to customers with MS65A memory included DO NOT
require CPU ROM kits.
• The CPU ROM kit includes two ROMs for installation on each CPU module. The
CPU ROM purchase requirements follow.

System

ROM Kit

System

ROM Kit

VAX 6000-210
VAX 6000-220
VAX 6000-230
VAX 6000-240

62XOO-AA
62XOO-AB
62XOO-AC
62XOO-AD

VAX 6000-310
VAX 6000-320
VAX 6000-330
VAX 6000-340
VAX 6000-350
VAX 6000-360

63XOO-AA
63XOO-AB
63XOO-AC
63XOO-AD
63XOO-AE
63XOO-AF

VAX 6000-410
VAX 6000-420
VAX 6000-430
VAX 6000-440
VAX 6000-450
VAX 6000-460

64XOO-AA
64XOO-AB
64XOO-AC
64XOO-AD
64XOO-AE
64XOO-AF

MS690-BA
MS690-CA
MS690-DA

Current
5V

MS690-BA
MS690-CA
MS690-DA

5.3
4.2
6.4

0.0
0.0
0.0

MS670-BA
MS670-CA

ecu

Configuring Information

5.30

VAXcluster Options/System Expansion

63XOO-BA
63XOO-BB

VAX 6000-410
VAX 6000-420

64XOO-BA
64XOO-BB

32-Mbyte ECC memory module
64-Mbyte ECC memory module
128-Mbyte ECC memory module

Option

Power
(Watts)

ae
Loads

de
Loads

26.5
21.0
32.0

0.0
0.0
0.0

32-Mbyte ECC (1-Mbit chip) memory module.
64-Mbyte ECC (4-Mbit chip) memory module.

Current
Option

MS670-BA
MS670-CA

3.25
4.75

0.0
0.0

Power
(Watts)

ae
Loads

de
Loads

16.25
23.75

0.0
0.0

Systems can be expanded to 64 Mbytes of memory. System recognizes up to four
memory banks; 8-Mbyte and 16-Mbyte options require one Q-bus slot and are
recognized as one bank each; 32-Mbyte options require one Q-bus slot and are
recognized as two memory banks (e.g., systems configured with one 8-Mbyte,
one 16-Mbyte, and one 32-Mbyte-56 Mbytes of memory-require three Q-bus
slots and are recognized as four memory banks.)

MS650-BB/BH
MS650-BA/BF
MS650-BC/BJ
~
0

Servers
VAX 6000-310
VAX 6000-320

8-Mbyte ECC memory, factory/field installed.
16-Mbyte ECC memory, factory/field installed.
32 Mbytes of memory, factory/field installed.

Option

Current

12 v

Power
(Watts)

ae
Loads

de
Loads

MS650-BB/BH
MS650-BA/BF
MS650-BC/BJ

3.10
3.50
2.80

0.0
0.0
0.0

15.50
17.50
14.0

0.0
0.0
0.0

Memory
MicroVAX 3100 Model lOe
VAXstation 3100
Models 30, 38, 40, and 48
Memory

MS42-AB

4-Mbyte parity (1-Mbit chip) memory module. Factory or field
installed. Not configurable with MS42-BA or MS42-AB.

MS42-BA

12-Mbyte parity (1-Mbit chip) memory module. Factory or
field installed. Not configurable with MS42-AB or MS42-BA.

MS42-CA

16-Mbyte parity (1-Mbit chip) memory module. Module has
two connectors to enable either the MS42-AB or MS42-BA to
be used together to increase memory. Provides system
expandability to architectural limit of 32 Mbytes (including 4
Mbytes on CPU module). Not configurable with MS42-KA or
MS42-CA. Factory or field installed.

MS42-KA

8-Mbyte parity (1-Mbit chip) memory module. Module has two
connectors to enable either the MS42-AB or MS42-BA to be
used together to increase memory. Provides system
expandability up to 24 Mbytes (including 4 Mbytes on CPU
module). Not configurable with MS42-CA or MS42-KA. Factory
or field installed.
Power
(Watts)

ac
Loads

de
Loads

I/O
Inserts

12.4

13 .8

14.5

Module

Current
5V

MS42-AB

2.5

MS42-BA

2.8

MS42-CA

2.9

MS42-KA

2.6

13.0

Configuring Information

VAXstation 3100 Model 76
Memory

MS44-AA

4-Mbyte parity (1-Mbit DRAM) memory module.

VAXft Memory

MS520-BB

Mirrored memory option, two 32-Mbyte modules using
1-Mbit DRAM, one for each zone; factory or field installed.

MS520-CB

Mirrored memory option of two 64-Mbyte modules using
1-Mbit DRAM, one for each zone. Not supported on Models
110 and 310. Factory or field installed.

MicroVAX 3100 Models
30/40/80 Memory

MS44L-BA

8-Mbyte parity (1-Mbit DRAM) memory option consists of two
4-Mbyte modules; factory or field installed.

DECsystem 5100/
VAXstation 4000 Model 60/
MicroVAX 3100 Model 80
Memory

MS44L-BA

8-Mbyte parity {1-Mbit DRAM) memory option consists of two
4-Mbyte modules; factory or field installed.

MS44-DA

32-Mbyte parity (4-Mbit DRAM) memory option consists of
two 16-Mbyte modules; factory or field installed.

MicroVAX 3100 Model 90/
VAX 4000 Model 100 Memory

MS44L-BC

16 Mbytes of memory, 4x4-Mbyte DSIM modules

MS44-DC

64 Mbytes of memory, 4x16-Mbyte DSIM modules

VAXstation 4000 VLC Memory

MS40-BA

8-Mbyte parity (1-Mbit DRAM memory option consists of two
4-Mbyte modules; factory or field installed.

VAXcluster Options/System Expansion

5.31

Memory
DECsystem 5500 Memory'

MS220-AA/AF
MS220-BA/BF

Module

12 v

Power
(Watts)

MS220-AA/AF

6.98

0.0

34.9

0.0

MS220-BAIBF

4.16

0.0

20.8

0.0

Current

Configuring Information

DECstation 5000
Model 200/240
DECsystem 5000
Model 200/240 Memory

32-Mbyte ECC (1-Mbit DRAM) memory; factory or field
installed.
64-Mbyte ECC (4-Mbit DRAM) memory; factory or field
installed.

de Loads

MS02-AA

8-Mbyte ECC memory (1-Mbit DRAM) ; 15 slots allow for
120 Mbytes; not compatible with MS02-CA.

MS02-CA

32-Mbyte ECC memory (4-Mbit DRAM); 15 slots allow for
480 Mbytes; not compatible with MS02-AA.

DECsystem 5900 Memory

MS02-CA

32-Mbyte ECC memory (4-Mbit DRAM) ; 15 slots allow for
480 Mbytes; not compatible with MS02-AA.

DECstation 2100/3100 and
DECsystem 3100 Memory

MSOl-AA

4-Mbyte parity (1-Mbit DRAM) memory option consisting of
two 2-Mbyte single in-line memory modules (SIMMs). System
memory capacity is 24 Mbytes.

DECstation 5000
Model 120/125
DECstation 5000
Model 20/25
DECsystem 5000 Model 25
Memory

MSOl-AA

4-Mbyte parity (1 -Mbit DRAM) memory consisting of two
2-Mbyte single in-line memory modules (SIMMs). Not compatible with MSOl-CA.

MSOl-CA

16-Mbyte parity (1-Mbit DRAM) memory consisting of two
8-Mbyte single in-line memory modules (SIMMs) using 8-Mbit
DRAM. Not compatible with MSOl-AA.

5.32

VAXcluster Options/System Expansion

CPU Upgrades

Upgrade kits must be installed by Digital Services.

From

Order Number

VAXstation 3100 series with VR160, VR150, VR297,
VR299, VR262, 60 Hz

VAXstation 4000 VLC
1024 x 864 (60 Hz)

PV31U-A9

VAXstation 3100 series with VRT16, VRT19, VR329,
VR319, 66 Hz

VAXstation 4000 VLC
1280 x 1024 (66 Hz)

PV31U-D9

VAXstation 3100 series with VRM17, VR319, VRT16,
VR320, VRT19, 72 Hz

VAXstation 4000 VLC
1280 x 1024 (72 Hz)

PV31U-C9

VAXstation 3100 series with VR297, VR299 monitors

VAXstation 4000 Model 60
2D LCG graphics

PV61U-B9

VAXstation 3100 series with VRT16, VRT19,
VR320 monitors

VAXstation 4000 Model 60
2D LCG graphics

PV61U-A9

VAXstation 4000 Model 60 Base board
2D LCG graphics

VAXstation 4000 Model 90
LCSPX 2D graphics

PV71U-AF

3, 4

VAXstation 4000 Model 60 3D SPXg graphics

VAXstation 4000 Model 90
3D SPXg graphics

PV71U-AH

3, 4

VAXstation 4000 Model 60 3D SPXgt graphics

' VAXstation 4000 Model 90
3D SPXgt graphics

PV71U-AJ

3, 4

Notes

Notes
1. Upgrade kits include: VAXstation 4000 VLC enclosure and power supply, 8 Mbytes of memory, 8-plane color/grayscale
graphics board, 2D graphics accelerator, 2.7-meter (9-foot) color/monochrome video cable, bracket for one internal
RZ23L or RZ24L disk, thick wire Ethernet, one DEC-423 serial line, one EIA-232D serial line with modem control,
synchronous SCSI controller, software licenses and English language user documentation. Upgrade supports VAXstation
3100 options, LK201 keyboard, mouse, and three expansion boxes.
2. Upgrade kits include: VAXstation 4000 Model 60 CPU, BA46 system enclosure, power supply, 8 Mbytes of memory, 2D
LCG 8-plane color graphics board, 2.7-meter (9-foot) color/monochrome video cable, brackets for three internal devices
(one removable media, two fixed disks), ThinWire/thick wire Ethernet, one DEC-423 serial line, one EIA-232D serial line
with modem control, synchronous SCSI controller, software licenses and English language user documentation. Upgrade
supports VAXstation 3100 options, LK201 keyboard, VSxxx-AA mouse, and three expansion boxes. Upgrades require the
mandatory return of VAXstation 3100 CPU board and system enclosure.
2. Upgrade kits include: VAXstation 4000 Model 90 CPU, 2D LCSPX 8-plane color graphics board, software license, VMS
5.5-2 software kit, user documentation and Model 90 medallion. Upgrades require the mandatory return of Model 60
CPU board. Trade-in values for 2D graphics card are offered through DECdirect catalog.
3. Upgrade kits include: VAXstation 4000 Model 90 CPU, software license, VMS 5.5-2 software kit, Model 90 user documentation and medallion. SPXg or SPXgt graphics card will be installed in Model 90 system box.
4. Model 90 systems require a minimum of 16 Mbytes of main memory; 8-Mbyte memory embedded on Model 60 system
board cannot be transferred. See Step 4 for Model 90 memory configurations. Trade-in values for memory modules are
offered through DECdirect catalog. 4-Mbyte and 16-Mbyte SIMMs from Model 60 may be transferred to Model 90 in sets
of four only, (e.g. two MS44L-BA = 4 x 4-Mbyte SIMMs). Model 90 memory modules must be installed in sets of four
matching value SIMMs.

VAXcluster Options/System Expansion

5.33

CPU Upgrades
MicroVAX 3100 Upgrades and Conversion Kits
--------~~~~--~~

All software must be upgraded to the latest revision when upgrading from server to timeshare systems. The following
upgrades replace the CPU in the existing system enclosure.

Order
Number

From

VAXserver 3100
Model 10 or 20

VAXserver 3100
Model lOe or 20e

310XR-EA

VMS File and Application Server license, and DECnet
end-node license.

MicroVAX 3100
Model 10 or 20

MicroVAX 3100
Model 1Oe or 20e

310XR-EB

VMS 1- to 5-user license, and DECnet end-node license.

VAXserver 31 OOe

MicroVAX 31 OOe

310XR-AD

VMS 1- to 5-user license, and DECnet end-node license.

Includes new CPU and:

Note: MicroVAX 3100 Model 90 systems require 16 Mbytes of main memory. 8-Mbyte memory embedded on Model 40
and Model 80 CPU cannot be transferred; 4-Mbyte and 16-Mbyte DSIMs from Model 40 and Model 80 can be
transferred to Model 90 in sets of four ONLY (e.g., two MS44L-BA = 4 x 4-Mbyte DSIMs-Model 90 memory
modules must be installed in sets of four matching DSIM values).
MicroVAX 3100
Model 40

MicroVAX 3100
Model 90

47GEX-C9

16 Mbytes of memory, two OpenVMS user licenses, and
DECnet end-node license.

MicroVAX 3100
Model 40

MicroVAX 3100
Model 90

47GEX-E9

64 Mbytes of memory, two Open VMS user licenses, and
DECnet end-node license.

MicroVAX 3100
Model 80

MicroVAX 3100
Model 90

47HEX-C9

16 Mbytes of memory, two Open VMS user licenses, and
DECnet end-node license.

MicroVAX 3100
Model 80

MicroVAX 3100
Model 90

47HEX-E9

64 Mbytes of memory, two OpenVMS user licenses, and
DECnet end-node license.

MicroVAX 3100
Model 40

MicroVAX 3100
Model 80

47XR-AA

VMS 1- to 2-user license, and DECnet end-node license.

<IJ

""O

Q.,

Order
Number

From

VAXserver 4000
Model 300

VAX 4000
Model 300

670XR-AA

VMS 1- to 40-user license, VAXcluster license, and
DECnet end-node license.

MicroVAX
3500/3600
3800/3900

VAX 4000
Model 200

660XR-AC

H3602 I/O panel, VMS unlimited-user license, and
DECnet end-node license. Requires MS650-Bx memory.

MicroVAX
3300/3400

VAX 4000
Model 200

660XR-CC

VMS unlimited-user license, and DECnet end-node
license. Requires MS650-Bx memory.

MicroVAX
3500/3600,
3800/3900

VAX 4000
Model 200

660XR-AA

H3602 I/O panel, VMS 1- to 40-user license, and
DECnet end-node license. Requires MS650-Bx memory.

VAXserver
3500/3600,
3800/3900

VAXserver 4000
Model 200

660XR-BA

H3602 I/O panel, VMS File and Application Server
license, DECnet full-function license, VAXcluster license,
and VMS/ULTRIX Connection license. Requires
MS650-Bx memory.

5.34

VAXcluster Options/System Expansion

Includes new CPU and:

CPU Upgrades
Order
Number

From

MicroVAX
3300/3400

VAX 4000
Model 200

660XR-CA

VMS 1- to 20-user license, and DECnet end-node
license. Requires MS650-Bx memory.

VAXserver
3300/3400

VAXserver 4000
Model 200

660XR-DA

VMS File and Application Server license, DECnet
full-function license, VAx.cluster license, and
VMS/ULTRIX Connection license. Requires MS650-Bx
memory.

VAx.server 4000
Model 200

VAX 4000
Model 200

660XR-EA

VMS 1- to 20-user license, DECnet end-node license,
and VAx.cluster Software license.

VAX 4000
Model 400

VAX 4000
Model 500

680XR-HJ

Upgrade license for OpenVMS Base.

VAX 4000
Model 400

VAX 4000
Model 600

690XR-HJ

Upgrade license for OpenVMS Base.

VAX 4000
Model 500
Multiuser

VAX 4000
Model 600

690XR-JE

Upgrade licenses for OpenVMS Base, Rdb runtime,
40-user, DECnet end-node. Replaces 690XR-DE.

VAX 4000
Model 500
Server

VAX 4000
Model 600

690XR-JF

Upgrade licenses for Open VMS Base, Rdb runtime,
VAXcluster, DECnet full-function. Replaces 690XR-DF.

VAX 4000
Model 500
Open VMS Base

VAX 4000
Model 600

690XR-JJ

Upgrade license for OpenVMS Base.

Includes new CPU and:

N ote: VAX 4000 Models 400, 500, and 600 require MS690 memory.

MS690-UC
MS690-UD

64 Mbytes of memory (MS690). Requires return of 32 Mbytes of memory (MS670-BA) .
128 Mbytes of memory (MS690). Requires return of 64 Mbytes of memory (one MS670-CA or
two MS670-BA).

Note: The following upgrade kits are for VAX/VAXserver 4000 Model 300 systems with serial numbers WFOOOOOOOO
through WF04899999 and AYOOOOOOOO through AY04700100.
Order
Number

Includes new CPU and:

From

VAX 4000
Model 300 Multiuser

VAX 4000
Model 400

675XR-EE

Upgrade licenses for Open VMS Base, Rdb runtime,
40-user, DECnet end-node; new backplane.

VAX 4000
Model 300 Server

VAX 4000
Model 400

675XR-EF

Upgrade licenses for Open VMS Base, Rdb runtime,
VAXcluster, DECnet full-function; new backplane.

VAX 4000
Model 300 Multiuser

VAX 4000
Model 500

680XR-EE

Upgrade licenses for OpenVMS Base, Rdb runtime,
40-user, DECnet end-node; new backplane. Requires
MS690 memory.

VAX 4000
Model 300 Server

VAX 4000
Model 500

680XR-EF

Upgrade licenses for Open VMS Base, Rdb runtime,
VAXcluster, DECnet full-function; new backplane.
Replaces 680XR-AF.

VAX 4000
Model 300 Multiuser

VAX 4000
Model 600

690XR-EE

Upgrade licenses for OpenVMS Base, Rdb runtime,
40-user, DECnet end-node; new backplane. Replaces
690XR-AE.

VAX 4000
Model 3 00 Server

VAX 4000
Model 600

690XR-EF

Upgrade licenses for OpenVMS Base, Rdb runtime,
VAXcluster, DECnet full-function; new backplane.
Replaces 690XR-AF.

VAXcluster Options/System Expansion

5.35

CPU Upgrades
Note: The following upgrade kits are for VAX/VAXserver 4000 Model 300 systems with serial numbers WF04900000 and
higher, AY04700101 and higher, and serial numbers that begin KA or NI.
Order
Number

From

VAX 4000
Model 300 Multiuser

VAX 4000
Model 400

675 XR-FE

Upgrade licenses for OpenVMS Base, Rdb runtime,
40-user, DECnet end-node.

VAX 4000
Model 300 Server

VAX 4000
Model 400

675XR-FF

Upgrade licenses for OpenVMS Base, Rdb runtime,
VAXcluster, DECnet full-function.

VAX 4000
Model 300 Multiuser

VAX 4000
Model 500

680XR-FE

Upgrade licenses for OpenVMS Base, Rdb runtime,
40-user, DECnet end-node. Replaces 680XR-BE.

VAX 4000
Model 300 Server

VAX 4000
Model 500

680XR-FF

Upgrade licenses for OpenVMS Base, Rdb runtime,
VAXcluster, DECnet full-function. Replaces 680XR-BF.

VAX 4000
Model 300 Multiuser

VAX 4000
Model 600

690XR-FE

Upgrade licenses for OpenVMS Base, Rdb runtime,
40-user, DECnet end-node. Replaces 690XR-BE.

VAX 4000
Model 300 Server

VAX 4000
Model 600

690XR-FF

Upgrade licenses for OpenVMS Base, Rdb runtime,
VAXcluster, DECnet full-function. Replaces 690XR-BF.

Includes new CPU and:

VAX 4000 Upgrades and Conversion Kits
N ote: The following upgrade kits are for VAX/VAXserver 4000 Model 300 systems with serial numbers WFOOOOOOOO
through WF04899999 and AYOOOOOOOO through AY04700100.

(/J

Q.I

""O

VAX 4000
Model 300

VAX 4000
Model 400

675XR-EE

Upgrade licenses for OpenVMS Base, Rdb runtime,
40-user, DECnet end-node; new backplane. Requires
MS690 memory.

VAX 4000
Model 300

VAX 4000
Model 400

675X R-EF

Upgrade licenses for OpenVMS Base, Rdb runtime,
VAXcluster, DECnet full-function; new backplane.
Requires MS690 memory.

VAX 4000
Model 300

VAX 4000
Model 500

680X R-EE

Upgrade licenses for OpenVMS Base, Rdb runtime,
40-user, DECnet end-node; new backplane. Requires
MS690 memory. Replaces 680XR-AE.

VAX 4000
Model 300

VAX 4000
Model 500

680X R-EF

Upgrade licenses for OpenVMS Base, Rdb runtime,
VAXcluster, DECnet full-function; new backplane.
Requires MS690 memory. Replaces 680XR-AF.

VAX 4000
Model 300

VAX 4000
Model 600

690XR-EE

Upgrade licenses for Open VMS Base, Rdb runtime,
40-user, DECnet end-node; new backplane. Requires
MS690 memory. Replaces 690XR-AE.

VAX 4000
Model 300

VAX 4000
Model 600

690XR-EF

Upgrade licenses for OpenVMS Base, Rdb runtime,
VAXcluster, DECnet full-function; new backplane.
Requires MS690 memory. Replaces 690XR-AF.

VAX 4000
Model 300

VAX 4000
Model 500

680X R-AE

Upgrade licenses for VMS 1- to 40-user and DECnet
end-node; new backplane. Requires MS690 memory.

VAXserver 4000
Model 300

VAXserver
4000
Model 500

680X R-AF

Upgrade licenses for VMS file/application server,
DECnet full-function, and VAXcluster; new backplane.
Requires MS690 memory.

;J
~

5.36

VAXcluster Options/System Expansion

CPU Upgrades
Note: The following upgrade kits are for VAX/VAXserver 4000 Model 300 systems with serial nu~bers WF04900000 and
higher, AY04700101 and higher, and serial numbers that begin KA or NL

Order
Number

From

VAX 4000
Model 300

VAX 4000
Model 400

675XR-FE

Upgrade licenses for OpenVMS Base, Rdb runtime,
40-user, DECnet end-node. Requires MS690 memory.

VAX 4000
Model 300

VAX 4000
Model 400

675XR-FF

Upgrade licenses for OpenVMS Base, Rdb runtime,
VAXcluster, DECnet full-function. Requires MS690
memory.

VAX 4000
Model 300

VAX 4000
Model 500

6SOXR-FE

Upgrade licenses for OpenVMS Base, Rdb runtime,
40-user, DECnet end-node. Requires MS690 memory.
Replaces 680XR-BE.

VAX 4000
Model 300

VAX 4000
Model 500

680XR-FF

Upgrade licenses for OpenVMS Base, Rdb runtime,
VAXcluster, DECnet full-function. Requires MS690
memory. Replaces 680XR-BF.

VAX 4000
Model 300

VAX 4000
Model 600

690XR-FE

Upgrade licenses for OpenVMS Base, Rdb runtime,
40-user, DECnet end-node. Requires MS690 memory.
Replaces 690XR-BE.

VAX 4000
Model 300

VAX 4000
Model 600

690XR-FF

Upgrade licenses for Open VMS Base, Rdb runtime,
VAXcluster, DECnet full-function. Requires MS690
memory. Replaces 690XR-BF.

Includes new CPU and:

VAXcluster Options/System Expansion

5.3 7

CPU Upgrades

To upgrade to VAX 6000 Model 500/600 systems, follow the steps listed below. For all other upgrades, select the
appropriate upgrade based on the steps that follow.
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 3a
Step 3b Step Jc Step 4 -

Select CPU upgrade.
Unless included with upgrade package, replace any MS62A-AB memory with MS65A-xx memory.
If model number of CPU cabinet serial tag is H9657 -Cx, Steps 3 a and 3b are not required.
If the following items-battery backup, more than 12 XMI slots, or more than four CPUs-are required, order
number H9657 -CU (power conversion kit).
If the H9657-CU is required and if more than two VAXBI channels are in the system, order one DWMBB-AB
for each VAXBI in excess of two.
If battery backup is required, order H7236-A. Replace H7231-N with H7236-A.
If a CIBCA-AA is present, replace with CIXCD-AB or CIBCA-BA.

The following upgrade packages include CPU processor(s), VMS or ULTRIX licenses, and one full-year product warranty;
DECnet full function license included unless noted differently with VMS upgrades-DECnet-ULTRIX license included with
ULTRIX upgrades.

From-To

VMS

Model 210-610
Model 220-610
Model 220-620
Model 230-630
Model 240-640
Model 210-610
Model 220-610
Model 230-610
Model 240-610

66AUA-AA
66AVA-AA
66BUA-AA
66CUA-AA
66DUA-AA

Model 210-510
Model 220-520
Model 230-530
Model 240-540

65AUA-AA
65BUA-AA
65CUA-AA
65DUA-AA

Model 210-510
Model 220-510
Model 230-510
Model 240-510

65AUE-AA 1'
65AUH-AA*
65AUJ-AA*
65AUK-AA*

Model 210-410
Model 220-420
Model 230-430
Model 240-440

64AUA-AA
64BUA-AA
64CUA-AA
64DUA-AA

66AUE-AA*
66AUF-AA*
66AUH-AA'"
66AUJ-AA'"

'' Includes 128 Mbytes (MS65A-DA) of memory.

5.38

ULTRIX

VAXcluster Options/System Expansion

65AUA-BA
65BUA-BA
65CUA-BA
65DUA-BA

64AUA-BA
64BUA-BA
64CUA-BA
64DUA-BA

From-To

VMS

Model 310-610
Model 320-610
Model 320-620
Model 330-630
Model 340-640
Model 350-650
Model 360-660

66AUA-AC
66AVA-AC
66BUA-AC
66CUA-AC
66DUA-AC
66EUA-AC
66FUA-AC

Model 310-610
Model 320-610
Model 330-610
Model 340-610
Model 350-610
Model 360-610

66AUE-AC*
66AUF-AC*
66AUH-AC"'
66AUJ-AC'"
66AUK-AC"'
66AUL-AC*

Model 310-510
Model 320-520
Model 330-530
Model 340-540
Model 350-550
Model 360-560

65AUA-AC
65BUA-AC
65CUA-AC
65DUA-AC
65EUA-AC
65FUA-AC

Model 310-510
Model 320-510
Model 310-410
Model 320-420
Model 330-430
Model 340-440
Model 350-450
Model 360-460

65AUE-AC"'
65AUH-AC*
64AUA-AC
64BUA-AC
64CUA-AC
64DUA-AC
64EUA-AC
64FUA-AC

ULTRIX

65AUA-BC
65BUA-BC
65CUA-BC
65DUA-BC
65EUA-BC
65FUA-BC

64AUA-BC
64BUA-BC
64CUA-BC
64DUA-BC
64EUA-BC
64FUA-BC

CPU Upgrades
Model 400

Model 500

From-To

VMS

Model 410-610
Model 420-610
Model 420-620
Model 430-630
Model 440-640
Model 450-650
Model 460-660

66AUA-AF
66AVA-AF
66BUA-AF
66CUA-AF
66DUA-AF
66EUA-AF
66FUA-AF

Model 410-610
Model 420-610
Model 430-610
Model 440-620
Model 450-620
Model 460-620
Model 410-510
Model 410-510
Model 420-520
Model 4.30-530
Model 440-540
Model 450-550
Model 460-560
Model 410-420
Model 420-430
Model 430-440
Model 440-450
Model 450-460

66AUE-AF*
66AUF-AF"'
66AUH-AF'"
66BUJ-AF"'
66BUK-AF"'
66BUL-AF"'
66AUE-AF*
65AUA-AF
65BUA-AF
65CUA-AF
65DUA-AF
65EUA-AF
65FUA-AF
64BUA-AF
64CUA-AF
64DUA-AF
64EUA-AF
64FUA-AF

ULTRIX

From-To

VMS

Model 510-610
Model 520-620
Model 530-630
Model 540-640
Model 550-650
Model 560-660
Model 510-610
Model 520-620
Model 530-630
Model 540-640
Model 550-650
Model 560-660
Model 510-520
Model 520-530
Model 530-540
Model 540-550
Model 550-560
Model 510-520
Model 520-530
Model 530-540
Model 540-550
Model 550-560

66AUA-AK
66BUA-AK
66CUA-AK
66DUA-AK
66EUA-AK
66FUA-AK

ULTRIX

66AUD-AKt
66BUD-AKt
66CUD-AKt
66DUD-AKt
66EUD-AKt
66FUD-AKt
65BUA-AK
65CUA-AK
65DUA-AK
65EUA-AK
65FUA-AK
65BUD-AKt
65CUD-AKt
65DUD-AKt
65EUD-AKt
65FUD-AKt

65BUA-BK
65CUA-BK
65DUA-BK
65EUA-BK
65FUA-BK

From-To

VMS

ULTRIX

Model 610-620
Model 620-630
Model 630-640
Model 640-650
Model 650-660
Model 610-620
Model 620-630
Model 63 0-640
Model 640-650
Model 650-660

66BUA-AM
66CUA-AM
66DUA-AM
66EUA-AM
66FUA-AM
66BUD-AMt
66CUD-AMt
66DUD-AMt
66EUD-AMt
66FUD-AMt

ULTRIX

From-To

VMS

ULTRIX

Model 410-410
Model 420-420
Model 510-510
Model 520-520
Model 610-610
Model 620-620
Model 630-630

64AUA-AH
64BUA-AH

64AUA-BH
64BUA-BH

65AUA-AL
65BUA-AL

65AUA-BL
65BUA-BL

65AUA-BF
65BUA-BF
65CUA-BF
65DUA-BF
65EUA-BF
65FUA-BF
64BUA-BF
64CUA-BF
64DUA-BF
64EUA-BF
64FUA-BF

Model 600

VAXserver 6000 Upgrades

From-To

VMS

Model 310-610
Model 320-620
Model 310-510
Model 320-520
Model 310-410
Model 320-420
Model 410-610
Model 420-620
Model 410-510
Model 420-520
Model 410-420
Model 510-610
Model 520-620
Model 510-520
Model 610-620
Model 620-630
Model 630-640

66KUA-HD
66LUA-HD
65KUA-HD
65LUA-HD
64KUA-HD
64LUA-HD

65KUA-JD
65LUA-JD
64KUA-BD
64LUA-BD

66KUA-HH
66LUA-HH
65KUA-HH
65LUA-HH
64LUA-HH

65KUA-JH
65LUA-JH
64LUA-BD

66KUA-HL
66LUA-HL
65LUA-HL

66AUA-AN
66BUA-AN
66CUA-AN

(/J

-g
""'ell

:§"

65LUA-JL

66LUA-HN
66MUA-HN
66NUA-HN

::;J
~

,., Includes 128 Mbytes (MS65A-DA) of memory.
t Includes Open VMS Base license (DECnet not included)

VAXcluster Options/System Expansion

5.39

CPU Upgrades
VAX 7000 CPU Upgrades
Base upgrade packages include CPU processor(s), OpenVMS base license license, and one full-year product warranty.
Traditional upgrade packages include OpenVMS unlimited-use license, DECnet full-function license, and one full year
product warranty.

From-To

Traditional

Base

Model 610-620
Model 620-630
Model 630-640

7FBTA-BA
7FCTA-BA
7FDTA-BA

7FBTA-AA
7FCTA-AA
7FDTA-AA

VAX 10000 Upgrades
Traditional upgrade packages include a CPU module plus license upgrades for OpenVMS base license and OpenVMS
unlimited-use license, DECnet full-function license and Rdb Runtime license. One full-year product warranty included.
Upgrades packages for NAS 400 based systems, which include DECnet full-function license, include a CPU module plus
license upgrades for Open VMS base and Open VMS unlimited-use licenses. NAS 400 and layered products must be upgraded
separately.

From-To

Traditional Upgrades for
Base Systems

NAS 400 Upgrades for
Fully Configured
3- and 5-Cabinet Systems

Model 610-620
Model 620-630
Model 63 0-640

9FBTA-BB
9FCTA-BB
9FDTA-BB

9FBTA-IB
9FCTA-IB
9FDTA-IB

VAXft Upgrade
Upgrade package includes two VAXft Model 410 CPUs and documentation; no software license upgrade required.

From-To
Model 310-410

5.40

VAXcluster Options/System Expansion

55UPG-XX

CPU Upgrades

Upgrade kits are installed by Digital Services.
From

DECstation 2100
DECstation 2100
DECstation 2100

DECstation 5000 Model 120
DECstation 5000 Model 125
DECstation 5000 Model 133

PM321-DY/DZ
PM321-LY/LZ
PM327-YY/YZ

1
1
1

DECstation 3100
DECstation 3100

DECstation 5000 Model 125
DECstation 5000 Model 133

PM321-MY/MZ
PM327-ZY/ZZ

1
1

DECstation 5000 Model 200

DECstation 5000 Model 240

PM38U-AY

DECstation 5000 Models 20/120
with R3000 20-MHz daughter card

DECstation 5000 Models 25/125
with R3000 25-MHz daughter card

KN02-CC

DECstation 5000 Models 25/125
with R3000 25-MHz daughter card

DECstation 5000 Models 33/133
with R3000 33-MHz daughter card

KN02-DC

Note

Notes
1. Upgrade kits include: DECstation 5000 Model 100 series enclosure, power supply, base system module, 20-MHz, 25-MHz,
or 33 MHz CPU daughter card, HX graphics, keyboard/mouse cable, color and grayscale monitor cables, brackets for
two RZ2x disk drives and one RX23 diskette drive, Thick wire-to-ThinWire Ethernet adapter DESTA-BA with thick wire
cable for attaching DESTA to base system, and required upgrade licenses (ULTRIX Workstation Software license and
DECnet-ULTRIX license).
2. Upgrade kits include: DECstation 5000 Model 240 enclosure, base system module, 40-MHz CPU daughter card, and
required upgrade license. Requires mandatory return of Model 200 parts.
3. CPU daughter card upgrades include required upgrade licenses (ULTRIX Workstation Software license). Requires
mandatory return of CPU daughter card.

Upgrade kits must be installed by Digital Services.
From

Order Number

DECsystem 5000 Model 200

DECsystem 5000 Model 240

PM38U-BY

Notes

VAXcluster Options/System Expansion

5.41

Easy System Upgrades
Overview

Digital's "Easy System Upgrades" take the complexity out of cabinet upgrades
by offering one order number and one price to upgrade existing VAX and
MicroVAX systems to the more powerful and efficient VAX 9000, VAX 6000,
VAX 4000 and MicroVAX 3100 systems. An "Easy System Upgrade" (ESU) package provides hardware, software licenses, plus one year of servi~es, for one low
price. Each "Easy System Upgrade" order number delivers the following
components:
· Built-in value for existing system
· System upgrade-see "System Delivered" in following chart:
- VAX 9000 VMS System (with memory and CIXCD Cluster Adapter)
- VAX 6000 VMS System (with memory)
- VAX 4000 VMS System (with memory and DSSI controllers)
- MicroVAX 3100 Preconfigured System (with disk and tape)
• VMS and DECnet paid-up licenses
• Software license upgrades for all Digital VMS layered products (except ALL-IN-1)
• One year of standard hardware warranty
·One year of Software Product Services (except ALL-IN-1)
• Installation of new hardware, deinstallation of existing hardware, reconnection of
existing CPU options-where applicable
• Up to 12 months to return existing hardware
"Easy System Upgrades" provide cabinet upgrades for customers with MicroVAX
2000/11, MicroVAX 3xxx, VAX-11/7xx, and VAX 8xxx systems.

5.42

VAXcluster Options/System Expansion

Easy System Upgrades

Current System (From)

Upgraded System (To)

OpenVMS Licensed
Memory
Users

Order Number

MicroVAX 2000/3100/31 OOe

MicroVAX 3100 Model 40
MicroVAX 3100 Model 80
MicroVAX 3100 Model 90

Two
Two
Two

8 Mbytes
8 Mbytes
64 Mbytes

DV-31GU1-A9
DV-31HU1-A9
DV-31PU1 -E9

MicroVAX II

VAX 4000 Model 200
VAX 4000 Model 200
VAX 4000 Model 200
VAX 4000 Model 400
VAX 4000 Model 500

10
20
Unlimited
40
40

8 Mbytes
16 Mbytes
16 Mbytes
32 Mbytes
64 Mbytes

DV-42RU1-A2
DV-42HU1-A9
DV-42HU1-B9
DV-44JU1-A9
DV-45JU2-A9

MicroVAX 3300/3500

VAX 4000 Model 400

32 Mbytes

DV-44JU1-M9

MicroVAX 3500/3600/3800/3900

VAX 4000 Model 400
VAX 4000 Model 500

Unlimited
Unlimited

32 Mbytes
64 Mbytes

DV-44JU1-E9
DV-45JU2-B9

VAX 4000 Model 200

VAX 4000 Model 400
VAX 4000 Model 400

20
40

32 Mbytes
32 Mbytes

DV-44JU1-K9
DV-44JU1-L9

VAX 11/7xx

VAX 4000 Model 200
VAX 4000 Model 400
VAX 4000 Model 500
VAX 6000 Model 510
VAX 6000 Model 610
VAX 7000 Model 610

Unlimited
Unlimited
Unlimited
Unlimited
Unlimited
Unlimited

16 Mbytes
32 Mbytes
64 Mbytes
128 Mbytes
128 Mbytes
128 Mbytes

DV-42HU1-C9
DV-44JU1-C9
DV-45JU2-D9
65XMH-AE
66XMB-AE
7FAXA-BA

VAX 82xx

VAX 4000 Model 400
VAX 4000 Model 500
VAX 6000 Model 510
VAX 6000 Model 610
VAX 7000 Model 610

Unlimited
Unlimited
Unlimited
Unlimited
Unlimited

64 Mbytes
64 Mbytes
128 Mbytes
128 Mbytes
128 Mbytes

DV-44JU1-H9
DV-45JU2-E9
65XMI-AE
66XMC-AE
7FAXB-BA

VAX 83xx

VAX 4000 Model 400
VAX 4000 Model 500
VAX 6000 Model 510
VAX 6000 Model 610
VAX 7000 Model 610

Unlimited
Unlimited
Unlimited
Unlimited
Unlimited

64 Mbytes
64 Mbytes
128 Mbytes
128 Mbytes
128 Mbytes

DV-44JU1-J9
DV-45JU2-F9
65XMJ-AE
66XMD-AE
7FAXN-BA

VAX 8530

VAX 6000 Model 510
VAX 6000 Model 610

Unlimited
Unlimited

128 Mbytes
128 Mbytes

65XMK-AE
66XME-AE

VAX 8530/86xx

VAX 4000 Model 600
VAX 7000 Model 610

Unlimited
Unlimited

128 Mbytes
128 Mbytes

DV-46JU1 -A9
7FAXC-BA

VAX 8550

VAX 6000 Model 510
VAX 6000 Model 610
VAX 7000 Model 610
VAX 4000 Model 600

Unlimited
Unlimited
Unlimited
Unlimited

128 Mbytes
128 Mbytes
128 Mbytes
128 Mbytes

65XML-AE
66XMF-AE
7FAXD-BA
DV-46JU1-B9

VAX 8600

VAX 6000 Model 510
VAX 6000 Model 610

Unlimited
Unlimited

128 Mbytes
128 Mbytes

65XMM-AE
66XMH-AE

VAX 8650

VAX 6000 Model 510
VAX 6000 Model 610

Unlimited
Unlimited

128 Mbytes
128 Mbytes

65XMN-AE
66XMJ-AE

"'t:I

VAX 6000 Model 610
VAX 7000 Model 610

Unlimited
Unlimited

128 Mbytes
128 Mbytes

66XMK-AE
7FAXE-BA

::J

VAX 6000 Model 610
VAX 7000 Model 610

Unlimited
Unlimited

128 Mbytes
128 Mbytes

66XML-AE
7FAXF-BA

!!
C'll

VAX 8700/8810
VAX 8800/8820

C'll
~

fb!)

0..

;;....
C'll

(IS

VAXcluster Options/ System Expansion

5.43

Environmental Products
Introduction

Digital's environmental power products solve power-related problems in two
ways: They protect individual circuits and they control the power flowing into
the system. Power-related solutions control the quality of electrical power flowing
into a computer. Digital's environmental power products simplify system installations and ensure efficient, reliable system operation. For product details, configuration, and ordering information, refer to Digitafs Environmental Power Products Catalog (EB-M4442-79) or call 800-DIGITAL.

Environmental Products Summary Chart
UPS
HA4000
Personal
Series PLUS1

Personal
Series
UPS

PCS+2

High energy transients,
impulses and spikes

High/low voltage,
sags, surges

Phase rotation
Improper/inadequate
wiring or grounding
Electrical noise
Power outage

cvc4

TVSS5

x
x

x
NIA

Environmental
monitoring

PDS+3

Software link with
REMS/EMS

System type

All Digital
systems
single-phase
3-phase

Single-phase
small to
mid-range
systems

3-phase
mid- range to
large systems

Small to
mid-range
systems

All Digital
systems

REMS/EMS6

All Digital
VAX VMS
systems

UPS protects against blackouts, conditions, distributes
PCS+, conditions, distributes, monitors
PDS+ distributes, monitors
4
eve conditions, distributes
5
TVSS suppresses
6
REMS/ EMS environmental monitoring and software
2

Power Conditioning System
Plus/Power Distribution
System Plus

Offering comprehensive protection for large systems is the Power Conditioning
System Plus (PCS+). A PCS+ to accompany a VAX system provides a dependable
solution to every power-related problem except a power outage; it corrects electrical variations including sags, surges, low and high voltage fluctuations, brownouts, spikes, and impulses while eliminating power distribution problems. It also
provides comprehensive environmental monitoring capability. For owners of
medium-to-large computer systems that do not need power conditioning or
built-in surge suppression, five sizes of Power Distribution Systems (PD S+) are
offered. The PDS+, like the PCS+, replaces conventional wiring and monitors
electrical power.

PCS+/PDS+ Options

The Building Interface Alarm option (H7317-KB) enables interconnection
with building systems such as smoke and water detectors, halon and airconditioning systems, and security setups. Environmental Monitor/Repo stations
(H7317 -JA/JB/JC) are now offered for the Power Distribution and Power Conditioning Systems. They feature quick-read LCD temperature and humidity monitoring options, with an audible alarm silence and reset button, and automatic
power off for high ambient temperature conditions.

5.44

VAXcluster Options/ System Expansion

Environmental Products
Constant Voltage Conditioners

The H7225 Constant Voltage Conditioner (CVC) products are self-contained,
integrated power-conditioning systems designed specificially for use with
single-phase-powered Digital products. The eve products were developed to
correct input voltage fluctuations, as well as low-voltage brownout conditions
often encountered during peak power usage, and to provide input power factor
correction. Attenuation of the effects of electrical noise, impulses, and spikes is
also provided by the CVC products. The H7225 series is available in sizes from
0.5 kVA to 3.0 kVA, single phase.

Transient Voltage
Surge Suppressors

The 4N-GAXXX-xx family of Transient Voltage Surge Suppressor (TVSS) products are specifically designed to prevent high-energy impulses that can damage a
computer system. These energy transients can enter the system through the ac
power lines or through the data communications lines. The line of data and
power TVSS products is now offered in over 150 models, and includes
power/data combinations and rackmount models.

Remote Environmental
Monitoring Software (REMS)
Environmental
Monitoring System (EMS)

The Environmental Monitoring System (EMS) is an advanced, microprocessorbased monitoring system built to handle the total electronic environmental surveillance of any computer site and its supporting equipment by providing timely
warnings against environmental threats such as fire, water, extreme
temperatures, and humidity. It monitors from one to 112 external sensors/
probes, connected to the remote sensing unit, to provide realtime sampling of
physical environmental changes up to 1524 meters (5000 feet) away, and compares these changes to user-established thresholds. As a standalone unit, EMS
responds immediately with both a visual display and an audio announcement on
its connecting VTlOO-compatible terminal.
The EMS can also be daisychained with up to seven additional EMS units, or
H7317 Power Distribution Systems Plus (PDS+), or H7318 Power Conditioning
Systems Plus (PCS+) to form a monitoring network. When alarms occur in a
configuration of more than one unit, the alarm is displayed simultaneously on the unit detecting the alarm condition as well as on the master unit.
An optional layered VMS software package, VAX Remote Environmental Monitoring Software (REMS), features centralized monitoring from a designated terminal. This software allows the system to send mail messages and build historical
environmental data files that can reveal environmental patterns leading to equipment failures. REMS requires VAX PMS software.

VAXcluster Options/System Expansion 5.45

HA4000 3-Phase Uninterruptible Power System
Product Description

The HA4000 3-Phase Uninterruptible Power System (UPS), provides reliable protection against a power blackout. In the event of an outage, the HA4000 system
provides the computer system battery backup power ranging from 5 to 30 minutes on the battery option selected. This allows time to ride through the outage,
power down in an orderly fashion, or switch to an alternative power source
automatically without any interruption to computer operations.
The HA4000 also protects the computer system and valuable data against everyday power aberrations-voltage surges, voltage spikes, high energy transients,
electrical noise, and low voltage conditions. With REMS software, the HA4000
notifies the VAX systems of a power/environmental problem or occurrence and
may trigger an automatic, controlled shutdown.
This system is designed and tested specifically to support nonlinear power loads
with no derating. The static bypass feature automatically transfers the load to
utility during a UPS system fault or overload condition. The latest microprocessor-controlled operations and diagnostics are featured to maximize system
uptime. The HA4000 provides state-of-the-art Pulse Width Modulation (PWM)
inverter technology for optimum system performance.
It has a small footprint and quiet operation for an easy fit into the computer
room environment.
The HA4000 features high efficiency ratings at both full- and halfload. Easy,
menu-driven operating instructions and monitoring procedures display messages
in five languages. A maintenance bypass feature allows full computer system
operation during routine UPS maintenance. The HA4000 offers user-friendly
online diagnostics and a modular design for easy and efficient maintenance and
service.
Seven different sizes are available for 11-kVA, 20-kVA, 40-kVA, 60-kVA,
80-kVA, 100-kVA, and 125-kVA power requirements. The HA4000 features a
self-contained battery cabinet with sealed, maintenance-free batteries.
The HA4000 11-kVA unit houses the UPS and the batteries in a single cabinet.
The standard configuration of the 20-80-kVA models consists of a main UPS
cabinet and a matching battery cabinet. For 100- and 125-kVA models, the
standard configuration comprises a main UPS cabinet, an auxiliary cabinet which
contains the maintenance bypass and an input THD filter, and a matching battery cabinet.
Since the 100-kVA and 125-kVA cabinets are designed for 480-Vac input and
output, an additional cabinet may be necessary to step up or step down the
voltage for other voltage requirements. The 11-, 100-, and 125-kVA UPS cabinets
and the Power Distribution Unit are mounted on permanent casters. The 2080-kVA systems are shipped with removable casters.
The HA4000 is manufactured by EPE Technologies, Inc.

5.46

VAXcluster Options/System Expansion

HA4000 3-Phase Uninterruptible Power System
Product Description
(Continued)

· Auxiliary Cabinet
For 20-80-kVA systems: The auxiliary cabinet houses one or both of the following two options:
- Input Isolation Transformer
- Input Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) Reduction Filter

For 100- and 125-k VA systems: The auxiliary cabinet houses the maintenance
bypass and the input THD reduction filter; 480/208 applications are available
only with distribution for 480/208-V applications. The bypass, filter, transformer,
and distribution panel board are housed in the distribution cabinet. For
208/208-Vac applications, a second auxiliary cabinet with an additional transformer would be required to step down the input voltage.
· Distribution Cabinet
For 20-80-kVA systems: The distribution cabinet provides an efficient method of
power distribution throughout the computer room. This cabinet is bolted to the
UPS system and offers isolation and an optional output transformer. The output
transformer provides another layer of isolation while in bypass mode and is
required for distribution cabinets attached to 480/480-Vac UPS systems.
For 100- and 125-kVA systems: The auxiliary cabinet houses the maintenance
bypass and the input THD reduction filter and, in some cases, an autotransformer. For 208/208-Vac applications, two auxiliary cabinets (each containing an
autotransformer) are required; 480/208-V applications require the distribution
cabinet (which contains an isolation transformer).
·Power Distribution Unit (PDU)
The power distribution unit has the same capabilities as the distribution cabinet
described above. However, it is intended for remote placement and is not bolted
to the HA4000 system. The PDU may be utilized as a standalone distribution
option with or without a UPS system.

VAXcluster Options/System Expansion

5.47

HA4000 3-Phase Uninterruptible Power System
HA4000 System Specifications
System Input Characteristics
Input Voltage~'

3 phase Delta 208 V or 480 V (+10%1-15%)

Input Frequency

60 Hz± 5%

Input Current THD

Less than 10% (with optional input THD reduction filter) 20-125 kVA

~, In Canada, CSA cabinets are required in addition to standard system configuration for 20-80 kVA units only. CSA cabinets are available with 600/208 V

input/ output transformer or with CSA option only. Call 800-DIGITAL or 603-884-6660 and ask to speak with an Environmental Products Support
Specialist.

Battery Characteristics

D.C. Voltage Bus

11 kVA: 232-V float, 163-V cutoff
20-80 kVA: 436-V float, 325-V cutoff
100 and 125 kVA: 540-V float, 390-V cutoff

Battery Time

Nominal 5-30 minutes at full load (see chart)
HA4000 Battery Times (in minutes) at Full Load*
kV A

Minimum

Standard

Extended

Extra Extended

NIA

NIA
NIA
NIA
NIA
NIA

100

125

Battery type: sealed lead acid maintenance free.
~, All battery times are approximate and based on 0.8 power factor (pf) . Battery times may vary
depending on age, temperature, load, and use.

System Output Characteristics
Output Power Ratings

11, 20, 40, 60, 80, 100, and 125 kVA

Output Voltage

2081120 or 4801277 3-phase, 4-wire Y, plus ground~'
(adjustable ±5 % via software)

Output Frequency

60 Hz ± 0.25, 0.5, 0.75, 1 (software selectable)
60 Hz ± 1% free running

Output Voltage THD

Less than 4 % , 100 % nonlinear or linear load with
current crest factor up to 3 .0

Output Power Factor Capability

0.65 lagging (nonlinear) to 0.8 leading (linear)

Output Voltage Deviation (maximum)

± 3% for 50% load step, ± 5% for 100% load step

Output Overload Capability
150% of rated load for 1 minute, 125 % of rated load for 10 minutes
* 11 kVA available with 208-V input/ output only, 4-wire Y plus ground.
Environmental Specifications
Overall Efficiency

Up to 91 %; 85% at half load (11-80 kVA)
93 % full load at 0.8 power factor (pf);
92.5% at half load (100 and 125 kVA)

Ambient Temperature

0°-40° C (32°-104° F)

Operating Humidity

0%-95 % noncondensing

Operating Altitude

2438 m (8000 ft)

Acoustic Noise

less than 60 dB

5.48

VAXcluster Options/System Expansion

HA4000 3-Phase Uninterruptible Power System
HA4000
Order Number Selection

To establish kVA and cable requirements, develop a worksheet with the following column titles: (1) Equipment, (2) kVA, (3) Poles, (4) Receptacles, and (5)
Cable Order Number.

In column 1 list the computer equipment and peripherals.
In column 2 list the kVA rating for each item. kVA = (Volts x Amps) divided by
1000, or kVA approximately equals KW x 1.25. Contact Service Delivery
Environmentalist for further assistance.
In column 3 list the number of poles for each listed item. Note whether the
circuit is one pole, two pole, or three pole.
In column 4 list the NEMA receptacle number for each listed item.
In column 5 list cable order numbers. For specific cable information and cable
order numbers, refer to the Cable section of Digital's Environmental Power Products Catalog (EB-M4442-79).

Now add up column 2 to obtain the total kVA and add up column 3 to obtain
total poles.
To determine the HA4000 system order numbers, list the available input voltage
for the UPS system. The building electrician can provide this information.

Configuration Guidelines for
11-80 kV A HA4000 Systems

Determine the desired output voltage of the UPS system.
From the HA4000 order number chart, select the HA4000 UPS cabinet model
number by using the total kVA requirement and the available input voltage along
with the desired output voltage.

Note: Although the HA4000 unit can be run at 100 percent of its rated capacity,
75 percent loading is recommended, to allow for future growth.
Select the battery cabinet, auxiliary cabinet, and distribution cabinet by reading
across from the UPS cabinet model number.
Refer to the Cable Assemblies Reference Guide or see site preparation for each
product in this catalog for information.

11-80 kVA HA4000 Order Number Chart
Base System

Options

UPS

kVA
11

Voltage
(60 Hz)
2081208
2081208

UPS

Battery
Cabinet

Auxiliary Cabinet
w/F&T 1
w/T

w/F

Distribution Cabinet
w/T
w/oT

NIA
NIA

2081208
4801208
4801480
2081208
4801208
4801480

HA42A-AH
HA42A-BH
HA42A-CH

HA42B-CH
HA42B-CH
HA42B-CH

HA42C-AH
HA42C-BH
HA42C-CH

HA42D-AH
HA42D-BH
HA42D-CH

HA42E-PH
HA42E-PH
HA42E-PH

HA42A-AK
HA42A-BK
HA42A-CK

HA42B-CK
HA42B-CK
HA42B-CK

HA42C-AK
HA42C-BK
HA42C-CK

HA42D-AK
HA42D-BK
HA42D-CK

HA42E-PK
HA42E-PK
HA42E-PK

HA42A-AM
HA42A-BM
HA42A-CM
HA42A-AN
HA42A-BN
HA42A-CN

HA44B-CM
HA42B-CM
HA42B-CM

HA42C-AM
HA42C-BM
HA42C-CM
HA42C-AN
HA42C-BN
HA42C-CN

HA42D-AM
HA42D-BM
HA42D-CM

HA42E-PM
HA42E-PM
HA42E-PM

42 Pole
--HA42J-AH
HA42J-AT
HA42J-AH
HA42J-AT
NIA
HA42J-BH
HA42J-AK
HA42J-AT
HA42J-AK
HA42J-AT
HA42J-BK
NIA
84 Pole
--HA42K-AM HA42K-AT
HA42K-AM HA42K-AT
HA42K-BM NIA

2081208
4801208
4801480
2081208
4801208
4801480

HA42D-AN
HA42D-BN
HA42D-CN

HA42E-PN
HA42E-PN
HA42E-PN

HA42K-AN
HA42K-AN
HA42K-BN

Cabinet
HA42A-AA 2
HA432-AB3

HA44B-CN4
HA42B-CN 4
HA42B-CN4

NIA
NIA

HA42K-AT
HA42K-AT

NIA

F = Filter; T = Transformer
With 10-minute battery included
With 10-minute battery, EIA-232 communications port, 30 pole
4
For site planning purposes, plan for two cabinet footprint.

VAXcluster Options/System Expansion

5.49

HA4000 3-Phase Uninterruptible Power System
Configuration Guidelines
for 100 and 125 kV A
HA4000 Systems

Base level configuration consists of three cabinets: UPS, battery, and auxiliary (or
distribution depending on the voltage application). Begin by selecting the UPS
and battery cabinet.
kVA

UPS

Battery*

100

HA44A-CP

HA44B-CT
HA44B-AT
HA44B-ET
HA44B-FT

(standard duration)
(short duration)
(extended duration)
(extra extended duration)

125

HA44A-CR

HA44B-CT
HA44B-AT
HA44B-ET
HA44B-FT

(standard duration)
(short duration)
(extended duration )
(extra extended duration)

-1,

See battery chart for exact battery times at rated kVA.

Next, select the appropriate input/output voltage application to determine the
correct auxiliary and/or distribution cabinet. Offere<J as an option, 84-pole distribution is available in either bolt-on or free-standing (PDU) cabinets. The
free-standing PDU can also function as a standalone distribution cabinet. All
distribution cabinets contain 480/208 input/ output voltage transformers. Only
the UPS cabinet and PDU are voltage-dependent; the battery, auxiliary, and
bolt-on distribution cabinets are the same for both the 100 and 125 kVA units.
Distribution (84 Poles)
Application
Input/Output
Voltage

Auxiliary
Cabinet

Bolt-on or

PDU

480/480

HA44L-PR

NIA

480/208 with
distribution

NIA

HA44M-BR or

4N-CMCCB-BE'" (100 kVA)
4N-CMCCB-BF" (125 kVA)

208/208 with
distribution

HA44L-GR

HA44M-BR or

4N-CMCCB-BE'"t (100 kVA)
4N-CMCCB-BF"t (125 kVA)

2081208

HA44L-GR and
HA44L-NR

NIA

* Requires HA44L-PR auxiliary cabinet.

t Requires HA44L-NR auxiliary cabinet in place of HA44L-GR.
For applications requiring 600-V input, add an HA44L-HR auxiliary cabinet (contains a 600-VI 480-V transformer) to the above configurations.

Options For All HA4000
Systems

HA420-A3
HA420-AA
HA420-AB

Remote alarm panel (11-125 kVA)
Remote status panel with 15 0-foot cable ( 11-125 kV A)
Remote status panel with 300-foot cable (11-125 kVA)

QL-VI5A9-AA
QA-VI5AA-Hx
QT-Vl5A9-*'"

Remote Environmental Monitoring Software (REMS)
right-to-use license and warranty
REMS media and documentation kit
REMS support services

HA420-Bl
HA420-C2

Smoke detection system (11- 125 kV A)
Ground fault detection system (20-125 kVA only)

x Denotes media type: 5 = TK50, M = magtape

5.50

VAXcluster Options/System Expansion

HA4000 3-Phase Uninterruptible Power System
HA4000 Cabinets Weight Chart (all weights in pounds)
Cabinet

Models
11 kVA"'

20 kVA

40 kVA

60 kV/\

80 kVA

100 kVA*

125 kVA*

1100 (B)

1075 (B)

1385 (B)

1725 (A)

2250 (A)

NIA

1169 (B)

1820 (A)

3100 (D)

UPS Cabinet
Base System
Battery Cabinets
Short duration
Standard duration

NIA

1820 (B)

1995 (A)

2@ 1820 (A)

3300 (D)

Extended duration

NIA

1820 (A)

2@ 1820 (A)

2@ 1995 (A)

2@ 3100 (D)

2@ 3300 (D)

Extra extended duration

NIA

2@ 3300 (D)

Auxiliary Cabinets for 20-80 kVA Systems
With filter and transformer
(480/ 208)

NIA

591 (C)

724 (C)

993 (C)

1225 (C)

NIA

With transformer only
(480/ 208)

NIA

450 (C)

550 (C)

720 (C)

850 (C)

NIA

With filter only

NIA

341 (C)

374 (C)

473 (C)

573 (C)

NIA

Auxiliary Cabinets for 100 and 125 kVA Systems
With filter and maintenance
bypass (480/ 208)

NIA

400 (C)

With transformer only
(480/ 208)

NIA

700 (C)

With filter , transformer, and
maintenance bypass (480/ 208)

NIA

1100 (C)

With transformer only
(600/ 480)

NIA

700 (C)

NIA

775 (B)

885 (B)
(84 pole)

1015 (B)
(84 pole)

1135 (B)
(84 pole)

NIA

(42 pole)

Distribution Cabinets
With transformer (480/ 208)
Without transformer

NIA

495 (B)

525 (B)

NIA

With transformer (480/ 208) ,
maintenance bypass, and filter

NIA

1300 (B)

NIA

745 (B)
(42 pole)

885 (B)
(84 pole)

1015 (B)
(84 pole)

1205 (B)
(84 pole)

1375 (B)
(84 pole)

1535 (B)
(84 pole)

495 (B)

525 (B)

NIA

Power Distribution Unit Cabinets
With transformer (480/ 208)
Without transformer

NIA

Note: Remote alarm panel, de ground fault detector, and smoke detection unit add no more than 10 pounds to system
weights.

HA4000 Cabinets Dimension Chart (all dimensions in inches)
H eight*

Depth

Width

Cabinet Size A
(shipping dimensions)

55.25

32.25

45 .00

66.50

34.50

47.00

Cabinet Size B
(shipping dimensions)

55.25
66.50

32.25

31.50
33.50

Cabinet Size C
(shipping dimensions )

55.25
66.50

Cabinet Size D
(shipping dimensions )
-1,

34.50

32.25
34.50

18.75
21.00

55.25

32.25

52 .00

66.50

34.50

Add 2 inches for the permanent casters which come with the 11 kVA, 100 kVA, 125 kVA UPS units, and PDU cabinets.

VAXcluster Options/System Expansion 5.51

HA4000 3-Phase Uninterruptible Power System
Standard HA42A UPS Models
Model Number

Output Rating
kVA!kW

Btu/Hour

Nominal Input
Voltage (Volts)

Output
Voltage (Vohs)

Input CB
Rating (Amps)

HA42A-AA

11/8.8

3,715

208

208Y/120

HA42A-AB

1118.8

3,715

208

208Y/120

HA42A-AH

20/16

8,189

208

208Y/120

HA42A-BH

20/16

8,189

480

208Y/120

HA42A-CH

20/16

8,189

480

480Y/277

HA42A-AK

40/32

15,013

208

208Y/120

175

HA42A-BK

40/32

15,013

480

208Y/120

HA42A-CK

40/32

480

480Y/277

HA42A-AM

60/48

20,130

208

208Y/120

250

HA42A-BM

60/48

20,130

480

208Y/120

100

HA42A-CM

60/48

20,130

480

480Y/277

100

HA42A-AN

80/64

26,594

208

208Y/120

350

HA42A-BN

80/64

26,594

480

208Y/120

150

HA42A-CN

80/64

26,594

480

480Y/277

150

HA44A-CP

100/80

26,800

480

480Yl277

250

HA44A-CR

125/96

34,000

500

480Y/277

250

HA4000 Weight and Dimension Charts (dimension is indicated by small letter)
Base System

Options

kVA

UPS
Cabinet

Battery
Cabinet

w/F&T 1

llOO(b)

NIA

Auxiliary Cabinet
w/T
w/F

NIA

Empty

Distribution Cabinet
w/T
w/oT

NIA

NIA
42 Pole

1075(b)

1820(b)

591(c)

450(c)

341(c)

200(c)

775(b)

495(b)

1385(b)

1995(a)

724(c)

550(c)

374(c)

200(c)

885(b)

495(b)

1725(a)

1995(a)

993(c)

720(c)

473(c)

200(c)

1015(b)

525 (b)

2250(a)

2 x 1820(a)

1225(c)

850(c)

573(c)

200(c)

1135(b)

525(b)

84 Pole

i
~

1e
~
·>
~

F = Filter; T = Transformer

Actual Dimensions

Shipping Dimensions

Height

Depth

Width

Height

Depth

Width

size (a)

55.25

32.25

45.00

66.50

34.50

47.00

size (b)

55.25

32.25

31.50

66.50

34.50

33.50

size (c)

55.25

32.25

18.75

66.50

34.50

21.00

Note: Weight of remote status panel does not exceed 4.5 kg (10 lb) .

5.52

VAXcluster Options/System Expansion

Personal Series-PLUS Uninterruptible
Power System
Product Description

The Personal Series-PLUS Single-Phase UPS, which replaces the HAlOOO, is available in two kVA ratings to accommodate the demands of small to mid-range
Digital computers. The Personal Series-PLUS provides reliable blackout protection, plus power conditioning and power distribution for critical system applications. Its compact design, quiet operation, and portability make it equally suitable for use in a computer room or for supporting several small computer systems
in an office environment.
In the event of a complete power blackout, the Personal Series-PLUS automatically obtains power from its storage battery and relays it to the computer system
for six to ten minutes, without any interruption of the power supply to critical
load. This allows time to ride out the outage, switch to an auxiliary power
source, or perform a controlled shutdown of the system without any danger to
valuable data.
In addition to battery backup protection, the Personal Series-PLUS also ensures
that the ac power that reaches the computer system is clean, conditioned power.
Its solid state inverter/ charger filters and regulates the power from the commer-

cial power source, protecting the system and its data from everyday power aberrations. A wide range of receptacles are also available to meet the power distribution needs, and are distributed by the PDM (power distribution module).
The Personal Series-PLUS offers microprocessor-controlled logic. This eliminates
the need for manual adjustments to compensate for component tolerances, and
facilitates maintenance and troubleshooting procedures. A 100 percent nonlinear
(computer) load is supported without derating. An optional maintenance bypass
switch is internal to UPS cabinet and allows uninterrupted transfer to utility
power even while performing maintenance. The Personal Series-PLUS offers convenient plug-in connection to the critical load with receptacles on the power
distribution module (PDM) on the back of the UPS unit; it may also be
hardwired if desired.
The Personal Series-PLUS UPS is highly reliable. It operates as an online, fully
automatic system in the following modes:

Normal Mode-In normal mode, the critical load is continuously controlled by
the Personal Series-PLUS system's inverter/charger. The inverter/charger derives
power as needed from the commercial power source, and supplies filtered , regulated ac power to the critical load. Simultaneous float-charging of the battery
backup occurs during normal mode operation, as well.

Emergency-If the commercial ac power source fails, the inverter continues to
supply the critical load with power from the Personal Series-PLUS storage battery
without interruption.
Recharge-When the commercial ac power source is restored, the inverter/
charger automatically recharges the storage battery with no interruption to the
critical load.

Bypass-Bypass mode automatically transfers the critical load to the commercial
ac power source when the Personal Series-PLUS is taken out of service for repair
or maintenance. Transfer to bypass mode can also be initiated manually through
the On/Off switch on the control panel.
Systems are truly worldwide with 176-276 V input at 50 or 60 Hz, three-phase
or single-phase.
In case of emergency, an Emergency Power Off (EPO) switch located on the
Personal Series-PLUS unit disconnects the critical load from both the UPS and
the bypass. A Remote Power Off switch is also available as an option.
The full-featured front panel offers a communications interface which allows
alarm conditions to be transmitted via an EIA-232C port to system status and a
terminal, thus permitting monitoring of the system from a remote location.

VAXcluster Options/System Expansion

5.53

Personal Series-PLUS System Specifications

10.0 kVA

6.0 kVA

3.6 kVA

12.0 kVA

Input Characteristics

Input voltage range

176-276

Frequency range

45-65 Hz

Power factor (with full load)

0.95

Surge protection

Meets IEEE 587;
ANSI 62.41;
Class A, B

Meets IEEE 587;
ANSI 62.41 ;
Class A, B

Meets IEEE 587;
ANSI 62.41;
Class A, B

Battery voltage

25.5

Battery time @
half load, full load

9.5

Recharge time with
standard battery

2 hours to 80%

2 hours to 80 %

Recharge time with ext. battery 1

4 hours to 80 %

4 hours to 80%

Recharge time with ext. battery 2

6.5 hours to 80%

6.5 hours to 80 %

Life expectancy

5 years

Output kVA!kW

3.6/2.4

6/4

10/7

12/8

Output voltage regulation

±2%

±2 %

±2%

Battery Characteristics

Output Characteristics

Output voltage THD

< 3 % for 100% linear loads
< 5% for 100% nonlinear loads with current crest factor = 3.1

Overload capability

105 % continuous
125 % 10 minutes
150% 30 seconds

105% continuous
125% 10 minutes
150% 30 seconds

Power factor

67 lagging,
9 leading

Command mode noise

-120 dB

Transverse mode noise

-60 dB

Transient response

< 5% for 100% load step within 1 ms, full recovery within 1 cycle

Frequency (free run)

±0.1 Hz

±0.l Hz

±0.1 Hz

±0.l Hz

Frequency (sync range)

±1.0 Hz

Frequency (slew rate)

1 Hz/second

10° - 40° c
-20° - 60° c

Operating humidity,
non condensing

0% - 95%

Acoustic noise (on any surface at
1 meter and full load)

50 dB

(3.6-6.0 kVA)
55 dB
(8-12 kVA)

(3 .6-6.0 kVA)
55 dB
(8-12 kVA)

(3.6-6.0 kVA)
55 dB
(8-12 kVA)

55 dB

1500 m (5000 ft)

Environmental Specifications
Ambient temperature
Operating
Storage

Operating altitude

(3.6-6.0 kVA)
(8-12 kVA)

(Continued)

5.54

VAXcluster Options/ System Expansion

Personal Series-PLUS System Specifications
(Continued)
3.6 kVA

l 6.0 kVA

10.0 kVA

j 12.0 kVA

Weight

123 kg (270 lb)

1123 kg (270 lb)

216 kg (475 lb)

I 216 kg (475 lb)

Dimensions (W x D x H)

8.5 x 24.6 x 28.1 in.
216 x 625 x 714 mm

Agency approvals

UL 1778 listed
Canadian Standards Association (CSA)
FCC Class A, Subpart J of Part 15 (Certified compliance)
IEEE 587-1980 ANSI C62.41-1900 Standards for surge withstandability
MTBF = 50K hours
w/ BP = 250K hours

Physical Specifications

17 x 24.6 x 28.1 in.
432 x 625 x 714 mm

I
l

Options
4N-AEAAH-BB
4N-AEAAH-BD

3.6 kVA Basic with EPO/bypass
3.6 kVA Basic/FFP/EPO/bypass

4N-AEAAJ-BB
4N-AEAAJ-BD

6 kV A Basic with EPO/bypass
6 kV A Basic/FFP/EPO/bypass

4N-AEACH-BC
4N-AEACH-BD
4N-AEACH-BE
4N-AEACH-BF
4N-AEACH-BG
4N-AEACH-BH
4N-AEACH-BJ
4N-AEACH-BK
4N-AEACH-BL
4N-AEACH-BM
4N-AEACH-BN

AST 6-foot input line cord 2-phase
AST 6-foot input line cord 3-phase
PDM 4 each 5-15R duplex outlets
PDM 1 each L5-30R 3 each 5-15R
PDM 2 each L5-30R 2 each 5-15R
PDM 3 each L5- 30R 1 each 5-15R
PDM 2 each L5-30R 2 each 5-15R
PDM 4 each 5-20R
PDM 2 each L6-30R
PDM 4 each 6-15R
PDM 1 each L6-15R 3 each 5-15R

Note: PDM = Output distribution model
EPO = Emergency power off
FFP = Fully featured front panel with LCD display and EIA-232
Basic = Basic panel without LCD display

4N-AEAAL-BA
4N-AEAAM-BA
4N-AEACH-BA
4N-AEACH-BB
4N-AEACK-BA
4N-AEACK-BB
4N-AEACK-BC
4N-AEACK-BD
4N-AEACK-BE
4N-AEACK-BF

10 kVA UPS with LCD display panel with 4N-AEACH-BB b attery cabinet
12 kVA UPS with LCD display panel with 4N-AEACH-BB battery cabinet
Extended battery cabinet/1 ECBl
Extended battery cabinet/2 EBC2
PDM for 4N-AEAAL/M-xx UPS units with 8 each 5-15R duplex outlets
PDM for 4N-AEAAL/M-xx UPS units with 2 each L5- 30R, 4 each 5-15R, 2 each L5-15R
PDM for 4N-AEAAL/M-xx UPS units with 6 each L5-30R, 2 each 5- 15R
PDM for 4N-AEAAL/M-xx UPS units with 4 each 5-15R, 4 each L5-15R
PDM for 4N-AEAAL/M-xx UPS units with 4 each L6-15R, 4 each 5-15R
PDM for 4N-AEAAL/M-xx UPS units with 4 each 5- 20R, 4 each 5-15R

The battery cabinet 1 is used only on the 3 .6 and 6 kVA units as extended battery cabinets. The battery cabinet 2 will be
shipped standard with the 8, 10, and 12 kVA versions. It can also serve as an extended battery cabinet on 3 .6 through 12
kVA.

VAXcluster Options/System Expansion 5.55

Personal Series-Uninterruptible Power
Systems (UPS)
Product Description

Uninterruptible Power Systems (UPS) provides both power line conditioning and
power outage protection of 5 to 15 minutes of emergency power backup at full
load. The UPS continuously controls the flow of power to the computer in order
to provide reliable, dependable operation.
Specially designed by Exide Electronics for small application environments, the
new "true online" UPS is a compact, microprocessor-based system that brings
the latest sine wave output technology to offices and small labs. Because of its
"true online" configuration, the UPS provides not only continuous uptime during
power outages, but also line conditioning for protection against surges, spikes,
and other power irregularities that occur during a normal business day. The
microprocessor-based electronics in the UPS ensure the high reliability of the
system.
UPS provides protection for the following applications:
·Telecommunications/PBX

· Personal computers

• Graphics workstations

• Research/medical equipment

• Computer terminals

·Point-of-sale devices

• Local area networks (LANs)
Each UPS system comes with a three-year, return-to-factory warranty (which
includes batteries). With Digital's "Hot Swap," a replacement unit can be
received within 24 to 48 hours.
The Personal Series UPS is lightweight, portable, compact, quiet, and easy to use
in either a vertical or horizontal position. They resemble a briefcase in size and
can be easily installed by customers. They are ideal for LAN and rackmount
installation with easy-to-install rackmount kits.
With the EIA-232 serial interface or LAN options (two dry contacts) , system
status and parameters are made available. The optional software kits enable
communications with major operating systems. The software kits include OnliNet
software, which will interface with SCO XENIX or SCO UNIX. With the software
interface kit, automatic shutdowns can be initiated even in unattended settings.
On models 800 VA and above, systems are available with extended battery times
of up to 28 minutes at half load or 15 minutes at full load.
Static Bypass allows the system to provide power to an application even during
overload or failure of UPS.

5.56

VAXcluster Options/System Expansion

Personal Series-Uninterruptible Power
Systems (UPS)
Specifications
Models

350 VA

500 VA

800 VA

1000 VA

1500 VA

2000 VA

System Input Characteristics

Volts
Amps

120 Vac + 10% to -20%

120 Vac + 10% to -18%

4.5

5.6

8.4

10.3

50 Hz or 60 Hz + 5% (Note 1)

Frequency
Cord

1.8-m (6-ft) cord with standard plug (5-15 P)

1.8-m (6 ft) (5-20 P)

117 Vac +3% to -4 %

120 Vac ± 3%

System Output Characteristics

Volts
Voltampere/Watts

350/200

500/325

8001525

1000/650

1500/1100

2000/ 1300

Amps/Continued

3.0

4.3

6.8

8.5

Amps/Peaks

50 Hz or 60 Hz (Note 1) + 5% (Note 2) + 0.1 % (Note 3)

Frequency
Receptacles

3 Receptacles (5-15 R)

4 Receptacles (5-15 R)

6 Receptacles (5-15 R)

Environmental Specifications

Temperature

0° C (32° F) to 40° C (104° F)

Humidity

0% to 95 % noncondensing

Altitude

Maximum 2134 m (7000 ft)

Projection

Surge-Joules

200

Surge-Amps

6500

Fusing-In

15 A

Fusing-Out

12 A

Elec. Noise at 100 kHz
Normal Mode
Common Mode

80 dB
40 dB

Weight and Dimensions

Weight
Dimensions (W x D x H)
With Extended
Battery Time

6.4 kg (14 lb)

17.2 kg (38 lb)

29.2 kg (65 lb)

102 x 345 x 216 mm
4.0 x 13.6 x 8.5 inches

343 x 133 x 314 mm
13.5 x 5.25 x 12.4 inches

343 x 133 x 527 mm
13.5 x 5.25 x 22 inches

Not Available

Extended battery time
add 28 lb/ 12.7 kg
343 x 133 x 314 mm
13.5 x 2.6 x 12.4 inches

Extended Battery Time
add 52 lb/23 .5 kg
343 x 133 x 314 mm
13.5 x 5.2 x 12.4 inches

N otes:
1

Input frequency automatically sensed. Output frequency same as input.
Normal operation; output synchronized to input.
3
Input frequency out of acceptable limits or input not present.
2

VAXcluster O ptions/ System Expansion

5.57

Personal Series-Uninterruptible Power
Systems (UPS)
Personal Series UPS Ordering Information
Personal UPS with Standard Battery
Basic System

UPS with LAN

UPS with EIA-232

Rackmount Kitt

350

4N-AEAAA-AA

4N-AEAAA-AK

4N-AEAAA-AF

4N-AEAEO-AF

500

4N-AEAAB-AA

4N-AEAAB-AK

4N-AEAAB-AF

4N-AEAEO-AF

800

4N-AEAAD-AB

4N-AEAAD-AK

4N-AEAAD-AF

4N-AEAEO-AG

1000

4N-AEAAE-AB

4N-AEAAE-AK

4N-AEAAE-AF

4N-AEAEO-AG

1500

4N-AEAAF-AC

-/:

4N-AEAAF-AF

4N-AEAEO-AG

2000

4N-AEAAG-AC

4N-AEAAG-AF

4N-AEAEO-AG

Personal UPS with Extended Battery*

800

4N-AEAAD-AG

4N-AEAAD-AJ

4N-AEAAD-AH

4N-AEAEO-AH

1000

4N-AEAAE-AG

4N-AEAAE-AJ

AN-AEAAE-AH

4N-AEAEO-AH

1500

4N-AEAAF-AG

;I:

4N-AEAAF-AH

4N-AEAEO-AH

2000

4N-AEAAG-AG

-/:

4N-AEAAG-AH

4N-AEAEO-AH

1
'

All 1500 and 2000 units have LAN as standard feature (i.e., not able to order LAN separately).

t Rackmount kits consist of standard 19-inch racks , hardware and instructions.
+Extended battery model is not available in 350, 500.

Note: The following software kits are available for all systems.

- SCO XENIX software kit, 4N-AEAEO-AA
- SCO UNIX software kit, 4N-AEAEO-AB
- REMS software license, QL-VI5A9-AA
- REMS media (TK50) and documentation kit, QA-VI5AA-H5
- REMS media (magtape) and documentation kit, QA-VI5AA-HM
EIA-232 communications port provides communications with SCO UNIX and SCO XENIX software as well as VMS with
REMS.

5.58

V AXcluster Options/System Expansion

Personal Series-Uninterruptible Power
Systems (UPS)
Selecting the Right Personal Series UPS
Digital System

UPS Size

Order Number

VAX/VAXserver 4000 Model 300

2000 VA

4N-AEAAG-AC/XXX

MicroVAX/VAXserver 3400, 3800

2000 VA

4N-AEAAG-AC/XXX

MicroVAX/VAXserver 3 3 00

1000 VA

4N-AEAAE-AB/XXX

MicroVAX/VAXserver 3100 Model 1Oe

500 VA

4N-AEAAB-AA/XXX

Micro VAX/VAXserver 3100 Model 20e

800 VA

4N-AEAAD-AB/XXX

VAXft Systems

Call for information

DECsystem 5800 Series Systems

Call for information

DECsystem 5500 Systems

2000 VA

4N-AEAAG-AC/XXX

DECsystem 5400 Pedestal Systems

2000 VA

4N-AEAAG-AC/XXX

DECsystem 5400 Cabinet Systems

Call for information

DECsystem 5100 Systems

500 VA

4N-AEAAB-AA/XXX

DECsystem 5000 Multiuser/ Server

1500 VA

4N -AEAAF-AC/XXX

DECsystem 3100 Multiuser/Server

500 VA

4N-AEAAB-AA/XXX

VAXstation 3100 Model 30/38/76

800 VA

4N-AEAAD-AB/XXX

VAXstation 3100 Model 40/ 48

1000 VA

4N-AEAAE-AB/XXX

VAXstation 3520 and 3540

1500 VA

4N-AEAAF-AC/XXX

DECstation 5000

1500 VA

4N-AEAAF-AC/XXX

DECstation 3100

1000 VA

4N-AEAAE-AB/XXX

DECstation 2100

1000 VA

4N-AEAAE-AB/XXX

DEC PATHWORKS Server 3100

800 VA

4N-AEAAD-AB/XXX

DECstation PC Model 200, 300, 400

500 VA

4N-AEAAB-AA/XXX

DECserver 2000-6 Units

350 VA

4N-AEAAA-AA/XXX

DECserver 2000-10 Units

500 VA

4N-AEAAB-AA/XXX

DECserver 3000--4 Units

500 VA

4N-AEAAB-AA/XXX

DECserver 3000-7 Units

800 VA

4N-AEAAD-AB/XXX

DECserver 500 and 550

1000 VA

4N-AEAAE-AB/XXX

VT1300

500 VA

4N-AEAAB-AA/XXX

VT1200

350 VA

4N-AEAAA-AA/XXX

Note: Additional drives or equipment may change your power capacity requirements. Contact a Customer Services engineer
for configuration assistance.

VAXcluster Options/System Expansion

5.59

Receptacle Reference Chart

RECEPTACLE TYPE

PART NO.

NEMA No. 5-15R

BC24J-xx

NEMA No. 5-15R(2)

BC24K-xx

GJ) GJ)
GJ) GJ)

NEMA No. 5-15R(4)

BC24L-xx

NEMA No. 5-2oR ®

BC24M-xx

]@@]

NEMA No. 5-20R(2)®

BC24N-xx

@]
I

GJ) GJ) I

~
~
[lli
[QJ
@]

RE CE PTACLE TYPE

CD
PART NO.

NEMA No. L21-30R

BC24W-xx

ZPLT-6C24-49PR

BC24X-xx

RUSSELL STOLL 7428

BC26D-xx

NEMA No. L6-30R

BC26E-xx

NEMA No. L5-15R

BC26F-xx

@@ NEMA No. 5-20R(4) ® BC24P-xx I ~ I NEMA No. L14-30R
@@
®
No. 5-20R Dual
@@ 1711 @@ NEMA
Duplex 10 ft. (3 m) aRart,
BC24R-xx
@@
10
@@
NEMA No. 5-20R(8) ®
o
m)
o
o
3

BC28Z-xx

(

[QJ
[QJ
~
~

NEMA No. L5-30R

BC24S-xx

NEMA No. L6-20R

BC24T-xx

NEMA No. L 14-20R

BC24U-xx

NEMA No. L21-20R

BC24V-xx

[@]
[2J

RUSSELL STOLL DF6516FP

BC29A-xx

HUBBELL No. 5609CW

BC29B-xx

NEMA No. 6-15R

BC29C-xx

I @ I HUBBELL No. 51009CW

BC29D-xx

BU-3162

CD Refer to U.S. price list for cable lengths. xx denotes cable length, where:
-10 = 10 ft (3 m)
-20 =20 ft (6 m)
-30 = 30 ft (9.1 m)
-40 = 40 ft {12.2 m)
-50 = 50 ft (15.2 m)

-60 = 60 ft (18.3 m)
-70 =70 ft (21.3 m)
-80 = 80 ft (24.4 m)
-90 = 90 ft (27.4 m)
-AO = 100 ft (30.5 m)

® U.S. only. For Canada, order BC28D for BC24M; BC28E for BC24N; BC28F for BC24P; BC28G for BC24R.

5.60

VAXcluster Options/System Expansion

Chapter 6
Networks, Commvnications, and Cables
t

LAN Communications Controllers

Local and Wide Area Communications Servers

Host-Based Communications Controllers

Network Connectivity Products

DECtalk Speech Synthesizers

LAN Communications Controllers

rlJ

Number of
Lines

Operating
System
Support

Maximum
Speed

LAN Connection

Protocol Support

10 Mb/s

Standard AUi

DECnet-VAX,
DECnet-ULTRIX

VMS, ULTRIX

LAN Type

Bus

Controller

802.3/
Ethernet

XMI

DEMNA

802.3 /
Ethernet

VAXBI

DEBNI

10 Mb/s

Standard AUi

DECnet-VAX,
DECnet-ULTRIX

VMS, ULTRIX

802.3/
Ethernet

Q-bus systems
in BA2xx-series
enclosures

DESQA

10 Mb/s

Standard AUi
or ThinWire
BNC

DECnet-VAX,
DECnet-ULTRIX

VMS, ULTRIX

802.5
Token Ring

Q-bus

DEQRA

4/16 Mb/s

DB9

DECnet

VMS

FDDI

XMI

DEMFA

100 Mb/ s

SAS, Fiber
MIC

DECnet

VMS

FDDI

TURBOchannel

DEFZA

100 Mb/ s

Fiber: SAS,
Fiber MIC
Copper:
ThinWire
or STP

DECnet, OSI,
TCP/IP

ULTRIX

·.;:
as
CJ

"§

E
0

-0

a
<ll

~ ·

·1<

Additional controllers available; see the Networks Buyer's Guide for information. For PC LAN controller information, see Chapter 3 .

DEC LANcontroller 41l0 (DEMNA-XMI)
The DEC LANcontroller 400 (DEMNA) is a high-performance XMI-to-Ethernet
controller. The DEMNA is a single board option. The module uses an onboard
CVAX processor to control data flow and 512 Kbytes of memory for packet
buffering and processing.
The DEC LANcontroller 400 enables a VAX 10000/9000/7000/6000 system to
operate as a boot member of a Local Area VAX.cluster. Additional controllers
can be installed in these systems to establish communications with multiple independent Ethernet segments.

Prerequisites

Hardware: DEMNA connects to the network via an Ethernet transceiver and
transceiver cable. The cabinet kit, transceiver cable, and transceiver are ordered
separately.

Software: The DEC LANcontroller 400 is supported under DECnet Phase IV and
IEEE 802.3 software. Refer to the VMS , ULTRIX, LAT, DECnet, and Local Area
VAXcluster Software Product Descriptions.

Ordering Information

The DEC LANcontroller 400 is supported on VAX 10000/9000/7000/ 6000 systems. When purchased as an add-on, a cabinet kit must also be ordered. This
option requires Digital Services installation.

DEMNA-M
CK-DEMNA-KD
CK-DEMNA-KE
CK-DEMNA-KN
CK-DEMNA-AM
Option

Mounting
Requirements

DEMNA-M

1 XMI slot

Configuring Information

6.2

Networks, Communications, and Cables

VAX XMI Ethernet adapter without cables
VAX 6000 cabinet kit, 3-ft (0.91-m) cable
VAX 9000 cabinet kit, 3-ft (0.91 -m) cable
VAX 10000/VAX 7000 cabinet kit
VAX 6000/VAX 9000 local console cabinet kit
de Amps Drawn @
5V

12 v

-12 v

-5.2 v

-2 v

7.75

0.60

0.10

0.0

LAN Communications Controllers
DEC LANcontroller 200 (DEBNI-VAXBI)
The DEC LANcontroller 200 (DEENI) 802.3/Ethernet-to-VAXBI communications
controller connects VAXEi systems to 802.3/Ethernet local area networks. An
enhanced version of the DEENA, it offers two to three times more throughput
for small Ethernet packets and has ROM-based console functionality to monitor
DEEN! and Ethernet use.
The DEC LANcontroller 200, available as a module or as a ROM upgrade kit for
the DEENA, supports one Ethernet port. It sends and receives signals at 10 Mbits
per second. Actual device throughput depends on the system configuration, packet
sizes, and application in use.

Prerequisites

Hardware: The DEC LANcontroller 200 connects to the Ethernet via an Ethernet
transceiver and transceiver cable. The cabinet kit, transceiver cable, and transceiver are ordered separately.
Software: Refer to the VMS, LAT, DECnet, Local Area VAXcluster, VAXELN,
and ULTRIX Software Product Descriptions.

Ordering Information

DEBNI-M

Includes base module only. For system installation, order
CK-cabinet kits.

DEBNI-UA

4-ROM upgrade to the DEENA-M, no cabinet kit required.

CK-DEBNA-LD

For use with VAX 6000 series internal VAXEi channels.

CK-DEBNA-LJ
For use with VAX 6000 series external VAXEi channels.
Note: Internal channels are built into the CPU cabinet, and external channels are
located within the expansion cabinet. Cabinet kit consists of internal cable, 1/0
connector panel, and console-enable jumper for Ethernet.

Configuring Information
Option

Mounting
Requirements

Cable
Length

de Amps Drawn@

5 V 12 V -12 V -5.2 V -2 V
DEBNI-M
1 VAXBI slot 6.72 0.00 0.00
0.00
CK-DEBNA-LD none
0.00 0.00 0.00
0.00
CK-DEBNA-LJ none
0.00 0.00 0.00
0.00
"I, Panel contains Ethernet transceiver power LED and fuse.

VAXBI 1/0 Panel
Nodes Units

m [ft]
none

0.00
0.00

[3]

0.00

1.5

[5]

DESQA Controller (Q-bus)
The DESQA is an Ethernet-to-Q-bus communications controller that connects VAX,
Q-bus, MicroVAX, DECsystems, and MicroPDP-11 systems that use the EA4xx or
EA2xx series enclosures to an Ethernet V2.0 or IEEE 802.3 local area network. The
DESQA can be connected to standard Ethernet coaxial cable or to ThinWire
Ethernet. The DESQA is a combination of DELQA and DESTA on one quad-height
EA2xx series form-factor module. DESQA does not require a cabinet kit.

Prerequisites

Hardware: One Thin Wire ENC T-connector and two 50-ohm terminators are
supplied with the DESQA. The DESQA physically and electrically connects to the
IEEE 802.3/Ethernet via transceiver cable-ENE3K or ENE3M series (thick wire)
or the EC16M-x series (Thin Wire). In the case of ThinWire connections, the
DESQA must be connected via a DEMPR or a DESPR. For thick wire baseband
connections, DESQA can be connected to an H4005 or DELNI. For broadband
connections DESQA can be connected to a DECOM. The H4005, DECOM,
DELNI, DEMPR, DESPR, and cable must all be ordered separately.

Software: DESQA is compatible with all DELQA software drivers.
Ordering Information

DESQA-SA/SF

Ethernet-to-Q-bus communications controller for VAX 4000,
Q-bus MicroVAX 3000 series, and Q-bus DECsystems. Factory/
field installed.

EK-DESQA-TM

DESQA Technical Manual.

Configuring Information
Option
DESQA-Sx

Q-bus Slots

de Amps Drawn @

5V
2.4

12 v
0.22

Watts
Drawn

Bus Loads
Drawn
ae

14.64

3.3

0.5

Networks, Communications, and Cables

6.3

LAN Communications Controllers
DEC TRNcontroller 100 (DEQl.A-Q-bus)
The DEC TRNcontroller 100 is a Q-bus adapter that enables MicroVAX 3xxx
and VAX 4000 systems to connect to a 4- or 16- Mb/s 802.5/Token Ring network. The DEQRA, in combination with the DEC Token Ring Network Device
Driver for VMS Vl.O (TRDRV VIV) , enables these systems to act as DECnet
Phase N full-function nodes and interoperate with other DECnet Phase IV systems on either 802.5/Token Ring or Ethernet LANs. When configured with
PATHWORKS for VMS V4 .1, these systems can act as PC LAN servers for
PATHWORKS clients on either 802.5/Token Ring or Ethernet LANs. The TRDRV
VIV driver kit includes online diagnostics, installation verification procedures,
and the DEQRA-CA host-loadable microcode. The DEQRA supports shielded
twisted-pair connection only, and provides an EIA-232 console port for debugging purposes.
Prerequisites

Software: VMS V5.4-3 and associated DECnet-VAX
Hardware: The DEQRA physically and electrically connects to the 802.5/ Token
Ring shielded-twisted pair cable. These connection components are not included
with the DEQRA-CA and must be ordered separately.

Ordering Information

Order the DEQRA-CA as a field-installable controller. This controller is not currently available as a factory-installed option.

DEQRA-CA
BC29E-15
QA-GVJAA-GZ

Field-installed DEQRA (includes VMS device driver license)
Debugging console cable
TRDRV VIV documentation

Option

Mounting
Requirements

DEQRA

1 quad slot

Configuring Information

de Amps Drawn @

Bus Loads
Drawn

5 Vdc

12 Vdc

4.0A

O.lA

DEC FDDicontroller 400 Gbntroller .(DEMFA-:»MI)
The DEC FDDicontroller 400 enables VAX 10000/9000/7000/6000 systems and
servers to operate as native FDDI SAS devices, via an FDDI concentrator, in a
high-speed FDDI ring. The DEC FDDicontroller 400 consists of three
components:

· A single XMI module, with the system interface and FDDI logic
• An active I/O bulkhead assembly that houses the fiber optic transceiver and
electrical interface
· A woven cable to interconnect the XMI module and bulkhead assembly
The DEC FDDicontroller 400 uses an ANSI-standard MIC (Media Interface Connector) to provide optical interconnection to a fiber cable attached to any ANSIcompliant FDDI concentrator, such as the DECconcentrator 500.
The DECconcentrator 500 connects Digital's FDDI devices, as well as
ANSI-compliant devices from other vendors, in an FDDI physical star or logical
ring topology.
Features
• Full-performance FDDI interface-provides necessary speed for support of network-intensive applications
·VMS load balancing/auto-failover to second FDDI adapter or Ethernet-assures
network availability to systems and servers using adapter

6.4

Networks, Communications, and Cables

LAN Communications Controllers
DEC FDDicontroller 400
(Continued)

· Firmware downline loadable (retained in non-volatile RAM)-supports currency
with FDDI standards and easy upgrades for new features and capabilities

Prerequisites

Hardware
• The DEC FDDicontroller 400 adapter for VAX 10000/9000/7000/6000 platforms
provides a Single Attachment Station (SAS) connection. It requires a concentrator
for connectivity to the FDDI LAN.
• The DEC FDDicontroller 400 must have a corresponding concentrator port card
providing the same media interface for 62.5-micron multimode fiber.
Software: VMS Version 5.4-3 provides DECnet Phase IV and LAT support for the
DEC FDDicontroller 400. Included in VMS V5.4-3 is the ability to diagnose
network problems and manage the adapter via the Network Control Program
(NCP) and System Dump Analyzer (SDA).

Ordering Information

DEMFA-AA
DEMFA-AB
1
'

Configuring Information

XMI-to-FDDI SAS adapter for use on VAX 6000/VAX 7000/
VAX 10000 systems'~
XMI-to-FDDI SAS adapter for use on VAX 9000 systems"'

Includes single-use license for DEC FDDicontroller 400 software microcode.

Requires one XMI slot; one I/O panel unit required for VAX 9000 systems, two
I/O panel units for VAX 6000/VAX 7000/VAX 10000 systems. Maximum three
per VAX 9000 system, two per VAX 6000/VAX 7000/VAX 10000 system.

--DEC FDDicontroller 700 Controller (DEFZA-TURBpchannel)

--~-

The DEC FDDicontroller 700 enables the direct connection of Digital workstations (presently supported on the DECstation/DECsystem 5000 and VAXstation
4000 60/90 with TURBOchannel adapter) to Fiber Distributed Data Interface
(FDDI) networks. FDDI is a dual-ring, timed token-passing network technology
with a 100-Mbit data rate, ten times the rate of current IEEE 802.3/Ethernet
offerings. It consists of two piggy-backed cards (11.7 by 14.4 cm [4.600 by 5.675
inches]) that plug directly into one slot of the CPU's TURBOchannel bus
interface.
The DEC FDDicontroller 700 attaches directly to the FDDI ring through the
DECconcentrator 500 as a Single Attachment Station (SAS). SAS workstation
connection provides the end user with added protection from network disruption
and allows network configurations that are more flexible and manageable.
The DEC FDDicontroller 700-C supports 100 Mbit/second FDDI signaling over
ThinWire and Shielded Twisted Pair (SIP) at distances up to 100 meters. This
optional use of copper wiring for FDDI provides lower-cost FDDI connectivity
for TURBOchannel-based workstations and servers. The DEC FDDicontroller
700-C for TURBOchannel-based products has connections for either 150-ohm
Type 1, 2, and 6 SIP, or 50-ohm ThinWire coaxial cable, and is switchselectable between the two.
Prerequisite Hardware

O rdering Info rmation

The FDDicontroller 700-C adapter for the DECstation 5000/DECsystem 5000 and
VAXstation 4000 60/90 systems is a SAS connection. As such, it requires a
concentrator. In supporting copper, either Thin Wire or SIP, the controller and
concentrator device must be matched to provide the same interface as the
selected physical media. DECconcentrator (DEFCN-Ax or DEFCN-Bx) requires
firmware revision 3 .0 or higher to support copper options. Units shipped before
June 1991 require a firmware upgrade kit. Refer to the Networks Buyer's Guide
for details.

DEFZA-AA
DEFZA-CA

DEC FDDicontroller 700 fiber optic version
DEC FDDicontroller 700-C copper version

Networks, Communications, and Cables

6.5

Local and Wide Area Communications Servers
802.3/Ethernet Terminal Server Selection Guide

Applications
Local Connectivity
·PC (terminal emulation )
· PC (file transfer)
·Terminal (asynchronous)
• Serial printers
· X Window terminal
(E-net interface)
· X Window terminal
(asynchronous interface)
Remote Connectivity

DECserver
901+
(DSRVG)

DECserver
90TL
(DSRVE)

DECserver
700
(DSRVW)

MUXserver
320/380
(DSRZE/DSRZD)

y
y
y

y
y
y
y

(individuals)

(individuals/ groups)

fl)

.sa.....
~

·a
s=
e0

Number of ports
(asynchronous)

8/16

32/128

Network protocol support

LAT

LAT
Telnet
SLIP

LAT
Telnet

Modem control

NIA

Limited

Full (8 line)
Limited (16 line)

Full with DB25

IIO connectors

MMJ

RJ45/MJ8

DB25 (8 line)
RJ45/MJ8 (16 line)

DB25/MMJ

Maximum line
speed/ throughput

38.4 Kb/s
35 Kb/s

57.6 Kb/s
30 Kb/s

115.2 Kb/s
215 Kb/s

19.2 Kb/s
19.2 Kb/s

Ethernet interface

ThinWire
DEChub 90

Standard E-net (AUi)
Unshielded Twisted
Pair (UTP)

Standard E-net (AUi)
ThinWire

Load host support

NIA

VMS
VAX/ULTRIX
RISC/ULTRIX
MS-DOS
UNIX

VMS
ULTRIX

-0

c:
~

fl)

~
Jo<

y
y

(ROM based)

Management

SNMP (via agent)
TSM
Remote console

SNMP
TSM
Remote console

TSM

Password protected

Multiple LAT
sessions/port

VT420/VT330/VT340
dual sessions

Dedicated/prefered
service

Group codes

Mounting options

Tabletop
DEChub 90

Tabletop
Rack

6.6

Networks, Communications, and Cables

Local and Wide Area Communications Servers
DEC~ener 901i 'Ieloet/LAT ,Terminal Server
-~---

Designed for high-speed asynchronous connections to UNIX, ULTRIX, VMS,
DOS, and multivendor network services, the DECserver 90TL delivers the
performance of a mid-range terminal server in a compact, low-cost module. This
eight-port Telnet/LAT terminal server offers industry-standard connections at
speeds of up to 57.6 Kb/s. It supports TCP/IP, Telnet, LAT, and SLIP protocols
and several remote management systems. Like other members of the WorkGroup
Family of Networking Products, it can be used interchangeably as a standalone
unit and in the DEChub 90.
The server's support for TCP/IP-Telnet and Domain Name Service (DNS) protocols provides for multivendor connectivity and wide area terminal service. LAT
protocol, a highly efficient local area terminal service, accommodates a variety of
host systems from Digital and other vendors.
With TCP/IP-SUP, the DECserver 90TL becomes a static IP end-node router for
PCs connected to the serial ports. The server provides TCP/IP communications
to connect these PCs to each other and to any service on the network. These
low-cost connections, via a telephone line and modem, are excellent for connecting branch and other remote operations.
The DECserver 90TL can be managed in a variety of network environments using
SNMP or MOP, which are integral to the server. Terminal Server Manager (TSM)
Vl .5, Telnet Remote Console, and MOP Remote Console are useful for checking
status or reconfiguring the server remotely.
Several productivity-enhancing features are included. With one server, users can
simultaneously access 64 different sessions operating under a mix of protocols.
This minimizes the need to log in and out of sessions. The server supports
Terminal Device/Session Management Protocol (TD/SMP). Its preferred service
feature expedites connections to specific services. On-demand font loading, especially useful for Asian terminals that require dynamic font capabilities, is also
included.
Industry-standard MJ8 (RJ45-style) connectors provide data, DSR, and DTR signals to most modems and printers. As an added security feature, system managers can dedicate a port to just one service, or assign group codes to restrict
access to network services.
New DECserver software, also used with the DECserver 700 series, can be downline-loaded from ULTRIX, UNIX, VMS, or MS-DOS (via PATHWORKS for DOS)
operating systems using BOOTP/TFTP or MOP. The server software license is
included with the DECserver 90TL.
Features

· Multiprotocol capabilities-Supports Telnet, LAT, TCP/IP and SLIP protocols
• Configuration flexibility-Operates standalone or in the DEChub 90
· Investment protection-Features upgradeable software and memory
·Network management-Manageable remotely using SNMP, Terminal Server Manager (TSM) Vl.5, MOP Remote Console, and Telnet Remote Console
• High speed-Supports high bandwidth asynchronous devices at speeds of up to
57.6 Kb/s
·Modem/printer/device control-Uses industry-standard MJ8 (RJ45-style) connections that provide data, DSR, and DTR signal capabilities
• Ease of use-Features front panel LEDs to provide port, module, and network
status and activity at a glance

Networks, Communications, and Cables

6.7

Local and Wide Area Communications Servers
DECserver 90TL Telnet/LAT
(Continued)

DECserver 90TL for standalone use; includes power supply.
Note: Server software license. included with purchase.

Ordering Information

DSRVE-AA
DSRVE-AD
DSRVE-AE
DSRVE-AI
DSRVE-AK
DSRVE-AT
DSRVE-AX
DSRVE-AZ
DSRVE-BJ
DSRVE-MA
H7082-AA
H7082-AB
H0342-AA

U.S., Canada, Japan
Denmark
U.K.
Italy
Switzerland
Israel
Austria, Belgium, France, Germany, Finland, Holland, Norway,
Sweden, Portugal, Spain
Australia
India
DECserver 90TL for use with DEChub 90 (power supply not
included)
120-V power supply with internal power connection
240-'V power supply with IEC connection
Snap-on cover for hub-based model of the DECserver 90TL

Note: Prefix the DECserver 90TL order code with DL- to order 24 units.
QA-MJPAA-Hx
QA-MJPAB-Hx
QA-MJPAC-HB
QA-MUPAC-HB
QA-MUPAD-HC
QA-MUPAD-HP

DECserver media and documentation kit (VMS)
DECserver media and documentation kit (ULTRIX)
DECserver media and documentation kit (DOS-RX24)
DECserver 90TL media and documentation kit
(DOS-RX24)
DECserver 90TL media and documentation kit
(UNIX-RX23)
DECserver 90TL media and documentation kit
(UNIX-QIC)

Note: x = media; 5 = TK50; M = 1600-bit/in. magtape
Configuring Information

The DECserver 90TL features eight MJ8 (RJ45-style) connectors that support
asynchronous device connections. It has an integral BNC for connection to
ThinWire Ethernet, a connector for insertion into the DEChub 90, and a connector for the standalone power supply. Eight DECserver 90TL modules in the hub
provide 64 connections; two interconnected DEChub 90 units can support 128
connections. The DECserver 90TL can also be combined with WorkGroup Family repeaters, bridges, and LAT-only terminal servers in the DEChub 90.

Specifications

Dimensions:
Weight (without
power supply):
Connectors:

Software:
Load hosts:
Protocols:

Port speeds:
Characters:
Parity:
Flow control:
Maximum throughput:
Operating temperature:

6.8

Networks, Communications, and Cables

3.2 x 27.9 x 14.0 cm (1.25 x 11 x 5.5 in.)

0.77 kg (1.7 lb)
• Thin Wire BNC for Ethernet
· 8 MJ8 connectors (RJ45-style) for
asynchronous lines
· standalone power supply
DECserver downline-loadable software
ULTRIX/RISC, ULTRIX/VMS, UNIX, VMS, and
PATHWORKS for DOS
Telnet, TCP, UDP, IP, ARP, SLIP, LAT,
BOOTP/TFTP, SNMP, DNS, TD/SMP
(initial software release)
Autobaud or user selectable from 75 bis to
57.6 Kb/s
7 or 8 bit · characters, 1 or 2 stop bits
None, even, odd, space, mark
XON-XOFF or DSR/DTR (2-wire)
30K cps
5°-50°C (41°-l22°F); convection cooled

Local and Wide Area Communications Servers
DECserver 90L+ Terminal Server
The DECserver 90L+ is a feature-enhanced LAT terminal server for 802.3/
Ethernet local area networks. Like other modules in Digital's WorkGroup Family, it can be used interchangeably in standalone and hub-based configurations to
accommodate both small workgroups and large departments.
This terminal server replaces the DECserver 90L. It adds many software enhancements. Its high throughput delivers optimal line speed capabilities, up to 38.4
Kb/s, for eight interactive terminals, serial printers, and PCs (in terminal emulation mode).
The DECserver 90L+ can connect to up to four different services per port. It
provides both dedicated and preferred services. The dedicated service feature
allows a port to be connected to only that service name specified by the system
manager. The preferred service feature allows a user to predefine a frequently
used service and, thereafter, to connect to that service without specifying its
name.
The DECserver 90L+ also offers basic session management and security features.
For example, if a terminal is powered off while sessions are still active, the
terminal server will disconnect the session on the host, preventing other users
from accessing another individual's session. If a printer is powered off, the
DECserver 90L+ can notify and stop the print queue on the host system,
preventing print jobs from being lost. Also included are diagnostic and management features, including the ability to examine and modify the server and port
parameters.
Features

• Multi-session support-Each port can initiate up to four sessions
· Provides dedicated and preferred services
• Features command line recall and edit
• Network management-Supports Terminal Server Manager (TSM) Vl.6 for configuring, monitoring and management
• Allows user to initiate connection to any device supporting MOP console carrier
• Easy to use-Features simple commands, preset parameters, and menu-driven
setups
• Plug-and-play-Supports autobaud; factory configured for immediate use
· Built-in ROM-based software eliminates the need to downline load server software from a host system
• Ease of management-Front panel LEDs indicate status of power, self-test, network connection, and data flow
• Supports LAT protocol-Performs in widely supported Ethernet environments to
provide efficient connections to network services
· Printer support-Supports XON and XOFF, and distributed LAT queuing
• Port customization-Users can set port name, speed, flow control, device type,
and action on break; port characters can be set remotely

Networks, Communications, and Cables

6.9

Local and Wide Area Communications Servers
DECserver 90L+ (Continued)
Ordering Information

DECserver 90L+ for standalone use; includes power supply.

DSRVG-AA
DSRVG-AD
DSRVG-AE
DSRVG-AI
DSRVG-AK
DSRVG-AT
DSRVG-AX
DSRVG-AZ
DSRVG-BJ
DSRVG-MA
H7082-AA
H7082-AB
H0342-AA

U.S., Canada, Japan
Denmark
U.K.

Italy
Switzerland
Israel
Austria, Belgium, France, Germany, Finland, Holland, Norway,
Sweden, Portugal, Spain
Australia
India
DECserver 90L+ for use with DEChub 90 (power supply not
included)
120-V power supply with internal power connection
240-V power supply with IEC connection
Snap-on cover for hub-based model of the DECserver 90L+

Note: Prefix the DECserver 90L+ order code with DL- to order 24 units.
Configuring Information

The DECserver 90L+ has an integral BNC for connection to Thin Wire Ethernet
and a connector for insertion into the DEChub 90.
Users can easily connect up to eight asynchronous devices to the MMJ jacks and
immediately have communications in operation, without complicated configuration setups or software expertise. Up to eight DECserver 90L+ modules can be
snapped into the DEChub 90 backplane to provide 64 connections for terminals
and printers, and PCs in terminal emulation mode.

Specifications

Dimensions:
Weight:
Input connectors:
Resident firmware:
Baud rates:
Parity:
Protocol:
Current:
Environmental class:

3.2 x 27.9 x 14.0 cm (1.25 x 11 x 5.5 in.)
0.77 kg (1.7 lb)
ThinWire Ethernet and 8 MM] jacks
LAT
User selectable from 1.2 Kb/s to 38.4 Kb/s
8-bit characters; 1 stop bit; no parity
XON-XOFF
+5 Vde from ac line transformer

DECserver 700 Ethernet Communications Server
DECserver 700 Ethernet Communications Servers offer superior price/
performance over their predecessors. They provide the flexibility to adapt new
network applications via software enhancements and customer~installable hardware upgrades. The DECserver 700 implementation of TCP/IP protocols (including Telnet, Serial Line Internet Protocol-SLIP, and Simple Network Management Protocol-SNMP) and LAT demonstrates Digital's commitment to "open"
network protocols and to the delivery of information system solutions across any
vendor's platforms.
DECserver 700 replaces both the DECserver 200 and 300 models and due to its
superior performance, implementation of TCP/IP and expandability, multiple
DECserver 700s are the preferred solution to the DECserver 550.
The DECserver 700 is less than half the size of its predecessors, the DECservers
200 and 300, at 4.4 x 44.2 x 28.2 cm (1.75 x 17.4 x 11.1 in.), 3.2 kg (7 lb.).
The DECserver 700 comes in two versions: a 16-port limited modem control
version and an 8-port full modem control version. The 16-port version uses
RJ45/MJ8 connectors and supports most Hayes-compatible modems and Digital's
DECmodem V.32 and Scholar Plus modems. Transmit (±) and Receive (±) signaling options are provided, as are the following control signals for low- to
medium-speed (<9600-bit/s) asynchronous modems: Data Carrier Detect (DCD),

6. 10

Networks, Communications, and Cables

Local and Wide Area Communications Servers
DECserver 700 (Continued)

Data Set Rate Selector (DSRS), Data Terminal Ready (DTR), and Ring Indicator
(RI). Additionally, for medium- to high-speed (>9600-bit/s) asynchronous
modems, the following control signals are supported: Clear-To-Send (CTS), Data
Set Ready (DSR) , Data Terminal Ready (DTR), and Request-To-Send (RTS).
The DECserver 700 8-port version uses EIA-232/DB25 connectors and provides
full modem control for modems that meet Bell 103 , 212, and CCITT V.21, V.22,
and V.32 specifications. This model is recommended for network connection of
devices that require full EIA-232 signaling, such as industrial instrumentation.
Both DECserver 700 versions deliver line speed and character throughput of
115 .2 Kbits per second per line and 215K characters per second total aggregate
throughput. They directly support thick wire Attachment Unit Interface (AUI)
and lOBaseT Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) 802.3/Ethernet connections. For
ThinWire Ethernet connections, an AUI-to-ThinWire MAU (Media Access Unit)
is required (DW29-AA).
DECserver 700 supports 1 to 8 Mbytes of user-installable memory to assure
investment protection and to take advantage of future communications protocols
and applications. The DECserver 700 is easily managed by the DECmcc management platforms and SNMP.
The DECserver 700 SLIP implementation combined with the hardware platform's
superior throughput and line speed makes the DECserver 700 an ideal, low-cost
solution for local and remotely connected PCs. A single Ethernet address can
support all 16 ports as IP addresses, eliminating the need for costly PC LAN
implementations. PCs can access network resources and perform efficient file
transfer and virtual terminal operations.
DECserver 700 software is available on 5.25-inch diskette, "TK" tape cassettes,
CD-ROM, etc., for VMS, ULTRIX/UNIX, DOS, and SCO/ Unix hosts. The " Open
Advantage" characteristics of this platform are evidenced by its ease of use in
non-DEC environments.
Features
· Designed for rack, tabletop, or wall-mounting
• Superior performance ---7 115.2 Kbits per second per port speeds, 250K characters per second aggregate throughput
· Complete TCP/IP support ---7 Telnet, Serial Line Internet Protocol (SLIP), manageable via SNMP
· Platform is expandable ---7 to 8 Mbytes of memory for future applications
·Replaces the DECserver 200 and 300 models

Ordering Information

DSRVW-A*

DECserver 700, eight EIA-232 ports with DB25 connectors for
full modem control, 1-Mbyte memory, accessory kit, software
license, manual, U.S. power cord.

DSRVW-B'"

DECserver 700, eight EIA-232 ports with DB25 connectors for
full modem control, 1-Mbyte memory, accessory kit, software
license. Manual and power cord not included.

DSRVW-C''

DECserver 700, 16 EIA-232 ports with MJ8/ RJ-45 connectors
(eight wires), 1-Mbyte memory, accessory kit, software license,
manual, U.S. power cord.

DSRVW-Di'

DECserver 700, 16 EIA-232 ports with MJ8/ RJ-45 connectors
(eight wires), 1-Mbyte memory, accessory kit, software license.
Documentation and power cord not included.

,., DECserver 700s are offered in single units or in kits of ten units at a discounted price. Replace the
'~ with A for single unit order or M for a multipack of 10.

Networks, Communications, and Cables

6.11

Local and Wide Area Communications Servers
Ordering Information (Continued)

DSRVW-xx

DECserver 700 country kit with power cord and manual

(xx= KD for Denmark, KE for U.K./lreland, KG for Germany/ Austria, KI for Italy, KJ for
Japan, KT for Israel, KZ for Australia/ New Zealand, LJ for India, MA for Belgium/
Finland/France/Holland/ Norway/ Spain/ Sweden, MB for Switzerland.

QL-XA5A *-xx
-1,

= A for VMS, B for ULTRIX, C for MS-DOS

QA-XA5A'"-xx
-1,

DECserver 700 software license

DECserver 700 media and documentation

= A for VMS, B for ULTRIX, C for MS-DOS;
xx denotes media type: H5 = TK50, HM = magtape, HB = RX24

DW29-AA

AUi-to-Thin Wire Media Access Unit (MAU)

For new or rewired installations, use the following adapters and cables with the
DECserver 700.
To DECserver 700
(16-port)

T o DECserver 700
(8-port)

Terminal/printer with
MMJ port

BN24H-xx cable

H8575-A adapter and
BC16E-xx cable

Terminal/printer with
DB25 male port

H8575-A adapter and
BN24H-xx cable

BCl 7D-xx (10 wire) cable or
BC22D-xx (6-wire) cable

Terminal/printer with
DB9 male port

H8575-B adapter and
BN24H-xx cable

H8575 -A and H85 71 -J

PC communication
interface with DB9 male
port

H8585-AA adapter and
BN25G-xx cable

H8575-A and H8571-J

Modem (<9600 bi s) with
DB25 female port

H8585-AB adapter and
BN25G-xx cable

BC22E-xx (10-wire) cable or
BC22F-xx (25-wire) cable

Modem (=>9600bls) with
DB25 female port

H8585-AC adapter and
BN25G-xx cable

BC22E-xx (10-wire) cable or
BC22F-xx (25-wire) cable

Non-Digital systems with
DB25 male ports
(reverse-LAT configuration)

NIA

BC22R-xx cable

To Connect

adapters and BC16E-xx cable
adapters and BC16E-xx cable

For upgrades where existing cabling will be maintained, use the following adapters with the DECserver 700.
To Upgrade From

Use

DECserver 300 with
ThinWire Ethernet
connection

DECserver 700 (16-port)

H8584-AA adapters
(one per port) and
DW29-AA AUI-to-ThinWire
adapter)

DECserver 300 with
standard Ethernet
connection (15-pin)

DECserver 700 (16-port)

H8584-AA adapters (one per
port)

DECserver 200IDL

DECserver 700 (16-port)

H8584-AA adapters (one per
port)

DECserver 200IMC (and
DECserver 700 (8-port)
other terminal servers with
DB25 ports)

6.12

Networks, Communications, and Cables

No additional adapters
required

Local and Wide Area Communications Servers

The DECserver 250 network server is dedicated to providing Ethernet
connection for both parallel and serial printers. It is a high-performance, fullfunction, Ethernet-based server for printers that provides the interface between
two parallel interfaces (compatible with Data products parallel interface standard); four asynchronous EIA-232 serial data communication channels; and a
single 802.3/Ethernet Local Area Network (LAN) .
One serial port is available with the full functionality associated with the existing
DECserver 200/MC product for EIA-232 communication, including modem control. All ports offer dedicated 512K character buffer.
The two parallel ports can support line printers operating at speeds up to 2,000
lines/min and are compatible with Digital standard cabling for parallel line printers, such as the BC27 A.
The serial ports operate at their full rated speeds of up to 19.2K baud on two
ports and up to 9 .6K baud on the remaining two ports. Both parallel and serial
ports can be accessed at their rated speeds; however, the DECserver 250 overall
performance is a factor of CPU and network utilization.
Features

• Host independent; eliminates dedicated CPU/printer connection and provides
greater sharing of printers
• Two parallel ports support up to 2,000 lines per minute
·Four serial ports-two at 19.2K baud and two at 9.6K baud
• Simple Ethernet connection
• Customer installable
• Supports LLFOl-Long-Line Fiber Optic Interface
Prerequisite Hardware

The DECserver 250 hardware requires both a transceiver drop cable and H4005 ,
DELNI, or DESTA (for ThinWire connection) to connect to the Ethernet physical
channel. Additionally, a VAX load host CPU on the same Ethernet as the
DECserver 250 is required to enable the downline loading of the software.

Software Support

The DECserver 250 software license is included with the hardware. The software
is downline-loaded over the Ethernet LAN from either a DECnet Phase IV, or
ULTRIX DECnet load host processor. One active host processor on the same
Ethernet as the DECserver 250 is a minimum requirement. Once the DECserver
250 software is loaded, it will communicate with any host processor running the
LAT driver. The DECserver 250 software Version 2.0 supports all ports running
at their rated speeds:
• Two parallel ports with printers operating at 2,000 lines/min; and
• Three serial ports with printers and one port with a printer or terminal-operating at speeds up to 19.2K baud on two ports and 9.6K baud on two ports.

Prerequisite Software

• VAX VMS operating system, V4. 7 or later
·DECnet-VAX, V4 .7 or later
·ULTRIX V3.0-V4.0
• DECserver 250, VMS or ULTRIX, V2.0 (license included with the hardware).
Media and documentation must be ordered separately.

Networks, Communications, and Cables

6.13

Local and Wide Area Communications Servers
DECserver 250 (Continued)
Optional Software

Terminal Server Manager, a component of the DECmcc Site and Enterprise
Management stations, is a software tool that allows a VAX host to remotely
observe and control Digital terminals anywhere in an extended local area net work. (Refer to SPDs 31.87 and 31.88.)

Ordering Information

DSRVP-AA/AB

Country Kits

Country kit must be ordered with 240-V models; no charge for these kits.

Media and Documentation
(Required)

DECserver 250, with license, 120 V/240 V

DSRVP-KB
DSRVP-KD
DSRVP-KE
DSRVP-KG
DSRVP-KI
DSRVP-KJ
DSRVP-KT
DSRVP-KZ
DSRVP-LA

Switzerland (French and German)
Denmark
United Kingdom
Germany/Austria
Italy
Japan
Israel
Australia/New Zealand
Belgium, Finland, Holland, Norway, Sweden, France, Spain

QA-VTMAA-HM
QA-VTMAA-H5
QA-VTNAA-HM

DECserver 250 VMS (magtape) and documentation kit
DECserver 250 VMS (TK50) and documentation kit
DECserver 250 ULTRIX media (magtape) and documentation kit
DECserver 250 ULTRIX media (TK50) and documentation

QA-VTNAA-H5

kit
Note: For more information, contact the EiC Sales Support Center at
800-832-6277 or 603-884-8990.

80lDECmux JOO R~mote T el'Qlinal Server (:ommunications servers
MUXserver 320/380 and DECmux 300 Remote Terminal Servers connect remote
asynchronous terminals, serial printers, modems, and non-LAT hosts to an
802.3/Ethernet local area network. Phone costs are minimized by concentrating
data from multiple users at one site over a pair of modems and one leased
phone line.
The MUXserver 320/380 connects to the LAN and functions as a terminal server
for remote devices. The DECmux 300 connects devices at the remote site and
functions with the MUXserver as a statistical multiplexer. Users can access both
LAT services and Telnet services (e.g., UNIX hosts) that are available on the
Ethernet LAN.
The MUXserver 320 connects up to 32 remote users from up to two remote
sites. One phone link runs at a maximum speed of 64 Kb/s and the other phone
link runs at a maximum speed of 19.2 Kb/s, although the total aggregate
bandwidth cannot exceed 64 Kb/s.
The MUXserver 380 connects up to 128 remote users from up to eight remote
sites. Two phone links run at a maximum speed of 64 Kb/s and six phone links
run at a maximum speed of 19.2 Kb/s, although the total aggregate bandwidth
cannot exceed 128 Kb/s.
Both the MUXserver 320 and 380 can communicate to any DECmux 300 model.
Up to three DECmux 300s can be daisychained from any MUXserver link, with a
maximum of six DECmux 300s through the MUXserver 320 and 16 DECmux
300s through the MUXserver 380.
DECmux 300s with EIA-232-D user ports have full modem control to support
dialup modems as well as asynchronous connections to non-LAT hosts. Models
with EIA-423-A user ports provide open DECconnect wiring for terminals and
printers.

6.14

Networks, Communications, and Cables

Local and Wide Area Communications Servers
MUXserver 300/310/380/
DECmux 300 (Continued)
Prerequisite Hardware

• One MUXserver with the appropriate number of DECmux 300s plus user port
cables.
· One 3 002 or equivalent leased phone line and one pair of external modems and
cables, where needed.
• All 802.3/Ethernet physical channel hardware.

· An 802.3/Ethernet transceiver, DESTA, or DELNI and transceiver drop cable.
Prerequisite Software

MUXserver software must be downline-loaded to a MUXserver or unit from
either a VMS or ULTRIX host. The MUXserver is supported by Terminal Server
Manager (TSM) software.
The MUXserver 320 and 380 are shipped with a software license. 120-V devices
include a country kit (U.S. power cord). Each 240-V MUXserver or DECmux
requires a country kit from the list below.

O rdering Information

DSRZE-AAIAB

MUXserver 320, 120 V/ 240 V

DSRZD-AAIAB

MUXserver 380, 120 V/ 240 V

DM308-AA/AB

DECmux 300, 8-channel EIA-232-D, 120 V/ 240 V

DM316-AA/AB

DECmux 300, 16-channel EIA-232-D, 120 V/ 240 V

DM316-BA/BB

DECmux 300, 16-channel EIA-423-A, 120 V/ 240 V; requires
two H3104-B kits

DM332-BA/BB

DECmux 300, 32-channel EIA-423-A, 120 V/ 240 V; requires
four H3104-B kits

H3104-B

Cable kit; two required for DM316-Bx, four required for
DM332 -Bx

CK-DM308-A7

8-channel EIA-232-D upgrade kit for DM308-Ax
and DM316-Bx

CK-DM316-W7

16-channel EIA-423-A upgrade kit for DM308-Ax and
DM316-Bx; order two H3104-B kits separately

QA-VT7AA-Hx
QA-VZHAA-Hx

MUXserver 320/380 media and documentation for VMS
MUXserver 320/380 media and documentation for ULTRIX

x denotes media type: 5 = TK50, M = magtape

Country Kits

DM300-KZ
DM300-MA
DM300-KD
DM300-KG
DM300-LJ
DM300-KT
DM300-KI
DM300-KJ
DM300-MB
DM300-KE

Australia, New Zealand
Belgium, Finland, France, Holland, Norway, Spain, Sweden
Denmark
Germany
India
Israel
Italy
Japan
Switzerland
United Kingdom
1

Note: Refer to the Networks Buyer s Guide for additional information. For more
information, call the EiC Sales Support Center at 800-832-6277 or 603 -884-8990.

Networks, Communications, and Cables

6.15

Local and Wide Area Communications Servers
DEC Commserver 100/1'0 Co....unieadoiwServers
The DEC Commserver 100/150 family of Ethernet servers enables VAX VMS
computers to communicate with a wide variety of industry-specific synchronous
serial line protocols. With a capacity of 40 serial lines at 9.6K baud in the DEC
Commserver 150 (up to 80 lines at lower speeds), these servers can also allow a
computer to handle a larger number of serial lines than computer backplane
options will support.
Using the widely accepted line cards and protocols mode by Simpact Associates,
the DEC Commserver provides the ability for Digital VAX VMS systems to connect to market data feeds such as Telerate International Quotations (TIQ) , Standard and Poor's Ticker's III and IV, and Reuter's Integrated Data Network
(IDN) as well as Financial Systems such as S.W.I.F.T. and CHIPS and market
broadcasts from SIAC, NYSE, NASD. Military and government agencies can connect to AUTODIN, ADCCP NRM and ADCCP ABM. Those with special protocol
requirements can create point-to-point links to other systems using HDLC, X.25 ,
DDCMP, 3270, and 2780/3780 protocols.

Features
· Single host handles larger number of lines than its backplane can accommodate
• Serial lines accessible to any other VAX VMS system in the network, either as
backup or for alternate tasks
• Provides universal interface to serial lines, regardless of internal bus structure of
the host VAX
· Physical location of the facility's serial lines are independent of the client computer's location
• CPU performance is increased by off-loading line handling from the host
• Existing host-resident Q-Bus Simpact cards can be moved to a DEC Commserver
with no application software changes

fl.)

1
z

Prerequisite Hardware

Prerequisite Software

DEC Commserver requires a transceiver drop cable and H4005 , DELNI, or
DESTA (for ThinWire) for connection to the Ethernet physical channel-VAX
load host with DECnet on the same Ethernet as the DEC Commserver is
required to downline load the software.
• VMS operating system , V5 .4 or later
·DECnet on the load host (not on the DEC Commserver's client node or nodes, if
different)

6.16

Networks, Communications, and Cables

Local and Wide Area Communications Servers
Step 1-Line Cards
Select line cards. Separate lines by protocol (one protocol per line card), use the following table to select quantity and types
of modules for each protocol. Note: DSPAX-AA, contains the protocol processor and four serial ports (order DSPAX-BA for
European PTT certification). For line speeds below 19.2K baud, DSPAX-CA expander module is used (for EIA-232/V.28
only) to add two to 12 additional lines to the 4-line module. Throughput limits of the protocol processor determine how
many lines on a 4-line card or 4-line/12-line pair can be used at a given speed. One protocol per DSPAX-AA or DSPAX-AA,
DSPAX-CA pair.

DEC Commserver Line Cards Required for Line and Speed
Note: The number refers to quantity required, A refers to DSPAX-AA, C refers to DSPAX-CA.
Line Speed
Protocols

2.4 Kb/s

4.8 Kb/s

All

AUTO DIN All Others

1
2
3
4

lA
lA
lA
lA
lA, lC
lA, lC
lA, lC
lA, lC
lA, lC
lA, lC
lA, lC
lA, lC
2A, lC
2A, lC
2A, 2C
2A, 2C
2A, 2C
2A, 2C
2A, 2C
2A, 2C
JA, 2C
JA, 2C
3A, JC
3A, JC
4A, JC
4A, 4C
4A, 4C
5A, 4C

5
6
7
8
9-10
11-12
13-14
15-16
17-18
19-20
21-22
23-24
25-26
27-28
29-JO
31-32
JJ-J4
J5-36
J7-40
41-48
49-52
5J-60
61-64
65-68
69-80

lA
lA
lA
lA
2A
2A
2A
2A
3A
3A
4A
4A

5A
5A
6A
6A
7A
7A
8A
8A

lA
lA
lA
lA
lA, lC
lA, lC
lA, lC
lA, lC
lA, lC
lA, lC
2A, lC
2A, lC
2A, 2C
2A, 2C
2A, 2C
2A, 2C
JA, 2C
JA, 2C
JA, JC
3A, JC
JA, 3C
JA, JC
4A, JC
4A, 4C
5A, 4C

ADCCP
lA
lA
lA
lA
lA, lC
lA, lC
2A
2A
2A, lC
3A
3A, lC
4A
4A, lC

5A
5A, lC
6A
6A, lC
7A
7A, lC
8A
8A, lC
8A, 2C

56/64 Kb/s
19.2 Kb/s
9.6 Kb/s
Note 2
TELEKURS 3 All Others TELEKURS 4 All Others Note 1
lA
lA
lA
lA
lA
lA
lA
lA
2A
2A
2A
lA
2A
lA
3A
3A
lA
3A
2A
lA
4A
4A
4A
lA
3A
2A
lA, lC
5A
5A
5A
3A
2A
6A
lA, lC
6A
6A
2A
7A 4A
7A
lA, lC
7A
4A
2A
8A
lA, lC
8A
8A
5A
3A
2A, lC
6A
3A
2A, lC
7A
2A, 2C
4A
8A
4A
2A, 2C
3A, 2C
5A
3A, 2C
5A
(Note 2)
(Note 1)
6A
3A, 3C
X.25
6A
BSC
3A, 3C
HDLC
7A
FMP
4A, JC
REUTERS ADCCP
7A
4A, JC
ABM
8A
4A, 4C
DDCMP
4A, 4C
8A
DDN
5A, 4C
SWIFT&
5A, 4C
CHIPS
5A, 5C

5A, 5C

Note 1: BSC, FMP, REUTERS (Including Backup)
Note 2: X.25 , HDLC, ADCCP ABM, DDN, SWIFT & CHIPS

DSPAX-AA
DSPAX-BA
DSPAX-CA

4-line processor module (use for EIA-232, EIA-449, and V.35)
4-line processor module (use for EIA-232/V.28)
12-line expansion module (EIA-232/V.28 only)

Step 2-1/0 Panel Kits
1/0 panel kits include universal cables that plug into the line cards and 1/0 panels that convert the universal cables to the
appropriate electrical standard's connectors.
CK-DSPAX-AA
CK-DSPAX-AB
CK-DSPAX-AC
CK-DSPAX-BA
CK-DSPAX-CA

4-line EIA-232 1/0 panel kit for DSPAX-AA
2-line EIA-449 (422, 433) 1/0 panel kit for DSPAX-AA
2-line V.35 1/0 panel kit for DSPAX-AA
4-line EIA-232/V.28 1/0 panel kit for DSPAX-BA
4-line EIA-232/V.28 1/0 panel kit for DSPAX-CA
----........--~---~--~------~~~~~~~~~~

Step 3-Rackmount Brackets
Each rackmount bracket kit accommodates four 1/0 panel kits
H3132-AA

5.25-inch rackmount/tabletop bracket

Networks, Communications, and Cables

6.17

Local and Wide Area Communications Servers
Step 4;--Chassis (System Enclosure)
Based on the number of cards selected from Step 1, order DEC Commserver 100 (two available user slots) or DEC
Commserver 150 (eight available user slots). Rack.mount models include mounting hardware.

DSPAA-AA
DSPAB-BA/BB
DSPAB-CA/CB

Tabletop DEC Commserver 100, 120 or 240 V
Rack.mount DEC Commserver 150, 120 V/240 V
Pedestal DEC Commserver 150, 120 V/240 V

Step 5-DEC Commserver License/Media and Documentation
Each client in the network must be licensed to use the DEC Commserver software. A license for the first host is included
with the hardware. Order one license for each additional VAX VMS system that will use the DEC Commserver (not required
with clusterwide licensing except for alternate load hosts).

QL-GCQA9-AA
QA-GCQAA-Hx

DEC Commserver license
DEC Commserver media and documentation (one required)

Note: x denotes media type, 5 = TIGO; M = Magtape

Select license(s) for the protocol(s) that will be used in each DEC Commserver. Each protocol license allows that protocol
to run on one DEC Commserver. A DEC Commserver may run multiple protocols-only one protocol can run on a 4-line
card or 4-line/ 12-line combination at the same time. Protocol media included with DEC Commserver media.
Protocol

License

Documentation

X.25
HDLC LAPB
ADCCP NRM
ADCCP ABM
BSC 2780/3 780
BSC 3270
FMP
AUTODIN
IDN
TIC 4
TIQ
SWIFT & CHIPS
DDCMP

QL-GCSAL-2B
QL-GCTAL-2B
QL-GCUAL-2B
QL-GCVAL-2B
QL-GCXAL-2B
QL-GCYAL-2B
QL-GCZAL-2B
QL-GD1AL-2B
QL-GD2AL-2B
QL-GD3AL-2B
QL-GD4AL-2B
QL-GD5AL-2B
QL-GD6AL-2B

AA-PE93A-TE
AA-PE94A-TE
AA-PE95A-TE
AA-PE96A-TE
AA-PE98A-TE
AA-PE99A-TE
AA-PE9AA-TE
AA-PE9BA-TE
AA-PE9CA-TE
AA-PE9DA-TE
AA-PE9EA-TE
AA-PE9FA-TE
AA-PE9GA-TE

Note: For more information contact the EIC Sales Support Center, 800-832-6277 or 603-884-8990.

6.18

Networks, Communications, and Cables

Local and Wide Area Communications Servers
DEC Multiprotocol Router/Bridge Comparison Chart
Product

Hardware
Type

Line
Interfaces

Data
Links

Routing
Support

Bridging
Support

DECNIS 600 series

9-slot modular

1 x 802.3
8 x 64K
2 x Tl/El

HDLC
X.25

DECnet
TCP/IP
OSI

IEEE 802 .ID/
Spanning tree"'

Proteon CNX5 00

3-slot modular

1 x 802.5
1/2 x 802.3
1 x FDDI
1 x Tl/El

PPP
HDLC
X.25
FR
SDLC

DECnet
TCP/IP
IPX
XNS
Domain
OSF

Spanning tree
Source routing
SDLC tunneling

DECNIS 500 series

4-slot modular

1 x 802.3
2 x Tl/El
8 x 64K

HDLC
X.25

DECnet
TCP/IP
OSI

IEEE 802 .ID/
Spanning tree>"

1 x 802.3
1 x 802.5
1 x Tl/El

PPP
HDLC
X.25
FR
SDLC

DECnet
TCP/IP
IPX
XNS
Domain
OSF

IEEE 802 .ID/
Source routing
SDLC tunneling

Proteon p4100+

DEC WANrouter 500

DEC WANrouter 250

4-slot modular

Bounded

fl.)

c0
·:::
OS
u

·g
sa

l
fl.)

1 x 802.3
4 x 64K OR
3 x 256K

DDCMP
HDLC
X.25
FR

DECnet
TCP/IP
OSI

NIA

1 x 802.3
8 x 19.2K OR
2 x 64K

DDCMP
HDLC
X.25 ;',

DECnet
TCP/IP
OSI

NIA

....

Note: features marked ;, will be available in a subsequent release.
Requirement

Solution

- Token Ring access for PCs

- Proteon p4100+ or CNX500

- High-speed backbone routing

- DECNIS 500 or 600

- Token Ring to FDDI

- Proteon CNX500

- Low speed access routing over 64 Kbits/s synchronous connections

- DEC WAN router 250 or 500

- Expansion capability

- DECNIS 600

- "Future-safe" for higher speed .services

- DECNIS 600

Networks, Communications, and Cables

6.19

Local and Wide Area Communications Servers
DECNIS 600
The DEC Network Integration Server 600 (DECNIS 600) integrates local and
wide area networks. It acts as a high-speed multiprotocol router, remote and
local bridge, and X.25 gateway server that fans in traffic from remote sites to
high-bandwidth backbone networks.
Its modular design allows the customer to mix and match network interfaces. Up
to seven module slots are available for multiple LAN and WAN network interface
cards. As new network technologies are required, new network interface cards
can be purchased.
The DECNIS 600 is expandable, allowing new network interface cards to be
added as required. Live insertion allows these interfaces to be added without
powering down the unit, ensuring no disruption of service to network users.
The server's hardware design is based on a distributed processing architecture,
with packet forwarding performed on the network interface modules. This means
that the overall packet throughput increases as network interfaces are added.
Features

· DECNIS Routing Services-The DECNIS 600 provides a network routing service
for:
- ADVANTAGE-NETWORKS nodes
- DECnet Phase IV nodes
- TCP/IP hosts
- OSI-compatible end systems
• DECNIS Bridging Services-The DECNIS 600 provides a bridging service for:
- Any LAN traffic that cannot be routed, such as LAT or other protocols
- Nodes attached to IEEE 802.3/Ethernet LANs connected to different DEC
LANcontroller 601 interfaces on the DECNIS 600
- Nodes accessible through any IEEE 802.ID-compliant bridge connected on the
same LAN as the DECNIS 600 and participating in the same spanning tree
topology (for example the LANbridge 150 or LANbridge 200).
- Nodes locally accessible to another DECNIS 600 unit which is connected
remotely to the DECNIS 600 using the DEC WANcontroller 622 network interface card.
When providing a remote bridging service, the following restrictions apply:
- Remote bridging is not supported at speeds less than 56 Kb/s
- Remote bridging is not supported on the DEC WANcontroller 618 network
interface card
- It is not recommended that multiple remote bridging hops be configured
between DECNIS 600 units. (The remote bridging path should not pass
through more than one consecutive synchronous link.)
• DECNIS X.25 Services-The DECNIS 600 provides X.25 Gateway services that
relay X.25 Level 3 packets to and from:
- Digital and multivendor systems on the LAN
- X.25 Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) connected over an X.25 Packet
Switched Data Network (PSDN)
- X.25 Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) connected directly to the unit
- Any of the above connected to another Digital X.25 Gateway service accessible
over a routing network
These end systems can be collocated on the same LAN as the router or connected to the synchronous ports of the router. Connections to other routers or
end systems can be made
- Locally over the LAN using IEEE 802.3/Ethernet
- Remotely using modem connections over leased lines using the HDLC data link
protocol
- Remotely across a PSDN using X.25 protocols

6.20

Networks, Communications, and Cables

Local and Wide Area Communications Servers
DECNIS 600 Preconfigured Systems

Preconfigured systems include management processor and memory cards, and
two network interface cards. Additional network interface cards may be ordered
separately.
• DECNIS 600-EP-This is the standard base package for high-speed routing and
bridging. The DECNIS 600-EP preconfigured system includes a DEC
LANcontroller 601, a DEC WANcontroller 622, and routing and bridging software licenses.
· DECNIS 600-RP-This is the standard base package for low-speed routing. The
DECNIS 600-RP preconfigured system includes a DEC LANcontroller 601, a DEC
WANcontroller 618, and a routing software license.

DECNIS Network Interface Cards

• DEC WANcontroller 618-Supports eight synchronous lines for routing at speeds
from 1.2 Kb/s up to 64 Kb/s. EIA-232, V.35, and EIA-422/V.11 models are
available. Remote bridging is not supported on this card.
• DEC WAN controller 622-Supports two synchronous lines for remote bridging
and routing at speeds from 56/64 Kb/s up to 2.048 Mb/s. Models that support
V.35, EIA-422/V.11, and X.21 Leased Line/BT Kilostream are available.
·DEC LANcontroller 601-A single-port IEEE 802.3/Ethernet interface card with
a standard Ethernet 15-pin AUi interface supporting routing and local bridging.

Prerequisites

Hardware: VAX, MicroVAX, VAX.station, VAX.server, DECstation or DECsystem
computer for software installation and load host.
Software

· VMS load host
- VMS operating system V5 .4
- DECnet VAX V5 .4 including extensions kit
· ULTRIX load host
- VAX ULTRIX or RISC ULTRIX operating system V4 .2
- DECnet OSI for ULTRIX V5.0
Note: DECNIS software is downline-loadable from the VMS for VAX, VAX
ULTRIX, or RISC ULTRIX host systems over IEEE 802.3/Ethernet and synchronous links.
Ordering Information

DECNIS 600 Preconfigured Systems
The DECNIS 600-EP includes a nine-slot DECNIS enclosure (120-V/240-V),
19-inch rackmount kit, management processor and pool memory, DEC
LANcontroller 601, DEC WANcontroller 622, and routing and bridging software
licenses. Three interface options are available:
DNSEA-BC/Bn~·: DECNIS 600-EP preconfigured system with X.21 LL interface
DNSEB-BC/Bff: DECNIS 600-EP preconfigured system with V.35 interface
DNSEC-BC/BD": DECNIS 600-EP preconfigured system with EIA-422 interface

The DECNIS 600-RP includes a nine-slot DECNIS enclosure (120-V/240-V),
19-inch rackmount kit, management processor and pool memory, DEC
LANcontroller 601, DEC WANcontroller 618, and a routing software licenses.
Three interface options are available:

DNSED-BC/BD* DECNIS 600-RP preconfigured system with V.35 interface
DNSEE-BC/BD 1: DECNIS 600-RP preconfigured system with EIA-422 interface
DNSEF-BC/BD 1: DECNIS 600-RP preconfigured system with EIA-232 interface

* BD version includes U.S. power cord; BC version requires appropriate
country kit.

Networks, Communications, and Cables

6.21

Local and Wide Area Communications Servers
Country Kits

DNSXC-A*

DECNIS country kit

Note: Replace the * with one of the following codes: A (United States and Canada), D (Denmark), E
(United Kingdom and Ireland) , I (Italy), K (Switzerland), T (Israel), X (Central Europe), Z (Australia, New Zealand).

Network Interface Cards

Software Licenses and Media

DNSAE-AA
DNSCA-AB
DNSCA-AC
DNSCA-AD
DNSCB-AA
DNSCB-AB
DNSCB-AC

DEC LANcontroller 601 1 port IEEE 802.3
DEC WANcontroller 618 V.35 package
DEC WANcontroller 618 422/V.11 package
DEC WANcontroller 618 EIA-232 package
DEC WANcontroller 622 X.21LL/KS package
DEC WANcontroller 622 V.35 package
DEC WANcontroller 622 422/V.11 package

QL-GX7 A9-AA
QL-GZNA9-AA
QA-GX7AA-H*
QA-GX7 AB-H"'

DECNIS Router license
DECNIS Bridge license
DECNIS software media and documentation (VMS load host)
DECNIS software media and documentation (VAX ULTRIX
load host)
DECNIS software media and documentation (RISC ULTRIX
load host)

QA-GX7AC-W

'"H = TK50, M = 9MT16 magtape
Refer to Software Product Description 36.05 .00 and System Support Addendum
36.05.00-A for further information.

DECNIS 600 Specifications

Physical Characteristics
Height:
Width:
Depth:
Weight:

55.4 cm (21.82 in.)
48.2 cm (19 in.)
47.2 cm (18.61 in. )
Base unit>": 33 kg (72 lb)
Network interface cards: 1 kg (2.2 lb)
Fully loaded unit: 40 kg (88 lb) maximum
·k Base unit includes: enclosure, power supply, fan tray, processor, and
memory modules

Power Requirements
Nominal:
Range:
Consumption:

6.22

Networks, Communications, and Cables

100 Vrms to 120 Vrms (120 V)
200 Vrms to 240 Vrms (240 V)
50 Hz to 60 Hz
600 W (maximum)

Local and Wide Area Communications Servers
DECNIS 500
The DEC Network Integration Server 500 (DECNIS 500) is a smaller version of
the DECNIS 600. It acts as a high-speed multiprotocol router and bridge that
provides high-bandwidth connections into backbone networks for remote sites.
The DECNIS 500 uses the same modular design and architecture as the larger
DECNIS 600, and provides two module slots for LAN and/or WAN network
interface cards. These cards are identical to and interchangeable with the
DECNIS 600. The DECNIS 500 is packaged as a fully-populated preconfigured
system (i.e., no expansion slots available).
DECNIS 500 Preconfigured Systems

• DECNIS 500-EP-This is the entry level package for high-speed routing and
bridging. The DECNIS 500-EP preconfigured system includes a DEC
LANcontroller 601, a DEC WANcontroller 622, and routing and bridging software licenses.
• DECNIS 500-R-This is the entry level package for low-speed routing services.
The DECNIS 500-RP preconfigured system includes a DEC LANcontroller 601, a
DEC WANcontroller 618, and a routing software license.
Features
The DECNIS 500 operates the same software and supports the same network
interface cards as the DECNIS 600 product. Refer to the DECNIS 600 entry in
this section for supported features, functions and installation prerequisites.

Ordering Information

DECNIS 500 Preconfigured Systems
The DECNIS 500-EP includes a four-slot DECNIS enclosure (120 V/240 V),
19-inch rackmount kit, management processor and pool memory, DEC
LANcontroller 601, DEC WANcontroller 622, and routing and bridging software
licenses. Three interface options are available:
DNSDA-BC/BD-:' DECNIS 500-EP preconfigured system with X.21 LL interface
DNSDB-BC/BD* DECNIS 500-EP preconfigured system with V.35 interface
DNSDC-BC/BD-:' DECNIS 500-EP preconfigured system with EIA-422 interface
The DECNIS 500-RP includes a four-slot DECNIS enclosure (120 V/240 V),
19-inch rackmount kit, management processor and pool memory, DEC
LANcontroller 601, DEC WANcontroller 618, and a routing software license.
Three interface options are available:
DNSDG-BC/BD'" DECNIS 500-RP preconfigured system with V.35 interface
DNSDH-BC/BD* DECNIS 500-RP preconfigured system with EIA-422 interface
DNSDI-BC/BD* DECNIS 500-RP preconfigured system with EIA-232 interface
-:. BD version includes U.S. power cord; BC version requires appropriate country
kit.

Country Kits

DNSXD-A'"

DECNIS 500 country kit

Note: '"Replace the with one of the following c~des: A (United States and Canada), D (Denmark) ,
E (United Kingdom and Ireland), I (Italy), K (Switzerland) , T (Israel), X (Central Europe), Z
(Australia, New Zealand) .
1
'

Networks, Communications, and Cables

6.23

Local and Wide Area Communications Servers
Software Licenses and Media

QL-GX7 A9-AA
QL-GZNA9-AA
QA-GX7AA-W
QA-GX7AB-H*
QA-GX7 AC-H*

'H = TK50, M = 9MT16 magtape Refer to Software Product Description
36.05.00 and System Support Addendum 36.05 .00-A for further information.
'

Specifications

Physical Characteristics
Height:
Width:
Depth:
Weight:

20.7 cm (8.15 in.)
48.2 cm (19 in.)
35.5 cm (13.97 in.)
16 kg (35.2 lb)

Power Requirements
Nominal:
Range:
Consumption:

100 Vrms to 120 Vrms (120 V)
200 Vrms to 240 Vrms (240 V)
50 Hz to 60 Hz
287 W (maximum)

f DEC WANrouter 250 Multiprotocol Rout_er___
The DEC WANrouter 250 provides a network routing service for:

· ADVANTAGE-NETWORKS nodes
· DECnet Phase IV nodes
• TCP/IP hosts
· OSI compatible end systems
These nodes can be co-located on the same LAN as the router or connected to
the asynchronous/synchronous ports of the router. Connections to other routers
or end systems can be made:
• Locally over the LAN using IEEE 802 .3 /Ethernet.
• Remotely using modem connections over leased and telephone lines using either
DDCMP or HDLC data link protocols.

Features
The DEC WANrouter 250 is a fully compatible member of an international standards-based multiprotocol router family.
· Accepts downline loadable DEC WAN router 150/250 software from VAX VMS,
VAX ULTRIX, and RISC ULTRIX host systems over IEEE 802.3/Ethernet, or
remotely over a synchronous line from host systems or via a DECNIS 500/600.
· Uses local dedicated wiring or remote leased lines using DDCMP and HDLC.
· Supports both synchronous and asynchronous ports.
• Switch selectable ThinWire or thick wire IEEE 802.3/ Ethernet connection.
The DEC WANrouter 250 software fully implements Integrated IS-IS to provide:
• OSI routing
• Internet routing
·DECnet routing

6.24

Networks, Communications, and Cables

Local and Wide Area Communications Servers
Prerequisites

Hardware
• VAX, MicroVAX, DECstation or VAx.station configured as specified in the System
Software Addendum 32.97.00-A
·DEC X25gateway 100 (DEMSB-H) as specified in the System Software Addendum
32.97.00-A
Software: Either VMS operating system V5.4 software with DECnet-VAX extensions V5.4 software, or ULTRIX operating system V4.2 running DECnet/ OSI for
ULTRIX V5 .0 software.

Ordering Information

DSRVR-Wx

DECrouter 250 basic hardware, DEC WANrouter 150/250 software license, rack mounting kit, (2 ) EIA-232 -C/ D adapter cable,
power cable, and hardware documentation. Order media kits
separately.

Note: Replace the x with one of the following codes:
A (United States, Canada, Japan, Mexico) , T (Israel) , Z (Australia, New Zealand),
D (Denmark) , E (United Kingdom , Ireland), I (Italy), K (Switzerland) X (Austria, Belgium,
Finland, France, Germany, Netherlands, Portugal, Sweden), Z (Australia, New Zealand)

QA-GZZAA-Hx
QA-GZZAB-Hx
QA-GZZAC-Hx
QL-GZ9A9-AA

VMS software media and documentation
VAX ULTRIX software media and documentation
RISC ULTRIX software media and documentation
Migration License for DECrouter 250

Note: x denotes media type: 5 = TK50, M = Magtape
Refer to Software Product Description 36.24 and System Support Addendum
36.24 for further information.

DEC WANroub!r SOO Mqltiprotocol Router
The DEC WANrouter 500 provides a network routing service for:
·ADVANTAGE-NETWORKS nodes
• DECnet Phase IV nodes
• TCP/IP hosts
• OSI compatible end systems
These systems can be colocated on the same LAN as the router or connected to
the synchronous ports of the router. Connections to other routers or end systems
can be made:
• Locally over the LAN using IEEE 802.3/Ethernet.
·Remotely using modem connections over leased lines using either DDCMP or
HDLC data link protocols.
• Remotely across a frame relay network.
· Remotely across a PSDN using X.25 protocols.
Features
The DEC WAN router 500 is a fully compatible member of an international
standards-based multiprotocol router family.
·Accepts downline-loadable DEC WANrouter 100/500 software from the VMS for
VAX, VAX, ULTRIX, and RISC/ULTRIX host systems over IEEE 802.3/ Ethernet.
· Uses local dedicated wiring or remote leased lines using DDCMP and HDLC,
X.25 PSDNs or Frame Relay networks.
• X.25 support is DLM/DA or data link mapping/ dynamic assignment. This permits
OSI, TCP/IP, or DECnet routing over X.25 networks.
The DEC WANrouter 100/500 software fully implements the following routing
standards:
· OSI routing
• Internet routing
• DECnet routing
• X.25 routing circuits
• Frame relay networks

Networks, Communications, and Cables

6.25

Local and Wide Area Communications Servers
Prerequisites

Hardware
· VAX, MicroVAX, DECstation, DECserver or DECstation as specified in SSA
32-98-00-A.

Software
• Either VMS operating system software with DECnet-VAX network software or the
ULTRIX operating system running DECnet/OSI for ULTRIX networking software.
· The DEC WANrouter 100/500 software is provided for installation on any VMS,
VAX ULTRIX, or RISC/ULTRIX system with the appropriate version of the operating system and DECnet software. Separate kits must be ordered and installed
for use with frame relay networks.

Ordering Information
DEC WANrouter 500 Hardware

DEMSA-Wx

DEC MicroServer with DEC WANrouter 100/ 500 software
includes basic hardware ( 120/ 240 V) , ThinWire Ethernet
adapter, 2-m (7-ft) standard Ethernet cable, rack mounting kit,
two EIA-232-C/D and two V.35 adapter cables, software
license, and hardware documentation

Order number for Germany includes two X.21 adapter cables and two
EIA-232-C/D adapter cables.
Note: Replace x with one of the following codes: A (United States, Mexico, Canada, J apan), D
(Denmark), E (United Kingdom, Ireland) , G (Germany), I (Italy), K (Switzerland), T (Israel),
X (Austria, Belgium, Finland, France, Netherlands, Norway, Sweden, Portugal, Spain) ,
Z (Australia, New Zealand).

DEC WANrouter 100/500 Software

Software Media Kits for Leased Line and X.25 Data Links

QA-YT7AA-Hx
QA-YT7AB-Hx
QA-YT7AC-Hx

VMS software
VAX ULTRIX software
RISC/ULTRIX software

Software Media Kits for Frame Relay Data Links

QA-YT7AD-Hx
QA-YT7AE-Hx
QA-YT7 AF-Hx

VMS software
VAX ULTRIX software
RISC/ ULTRIX software

Note: x denotes media type: 5 = TK50, M = magtape

QL-GZ9A9-AA

Migration License for DECrouter 2000

Note: Separate media kits are required for VMS, ULTRIX, and RISC/ULTRIX
load hosts. A separate set of media kits is required for the software to operate
over frame relay data links.
Refer to the following SPDs for further information on supported processors
and services: Software Product Description 32.98.00 and Software Support
Addendum 32.98.00-A.

6.26

Networks, Communications, and Cables

Local and Wide Area Communications Servers

The Proteon 4100+ Bridging Router systems support 4-Mb/s or 16-Mb/ s Token
Ring and multiprotocol routing and bridging between local and remote networks.
These bridging router systems are designed to provide an effective method for
integrating 802.5/Token Ring and other LAN technologies in a mixed environment and for supporting the industry protocols listed in the table below.
Features
• 4-Mb/s or 16-Mb/s Token Ring backbone connectivity (UTP and Fiber)
• SNMP network management (manageable via DECmcc SNMP AM Vl.l)
·WAN connectivity: 64 Kb/s, Tl (2.048 Mb/s), PDN X.25, DDN X.25 (not PTT
approved in Europe)
• 20-MHz 386 CPU, 2-Mbyte RAM, Watchdog timer
• Event logging system and customized event/ error reporting
• Wide selection of packaged bridging routers available
4100+ Bridging Router Systems Supported Protocols:
LAN/Backbone

WAN '

Network O/S

Bridging

802.3/ Ethernet

Tl/El

NetWare IPX

Source Routing
Bridging (SRB)

802.5 4 Mb/s
or 16 Mb/s
Token Ring

64 Kb/ s

TCP/IP

X.25

OSI (ES-IS)

Spanning Tree
Bridging (ST)

Apollo
Token Ring

Frame Relay

DECnet Phase IV

SDLC

XNS (3Com,
Xerox, UB)

Network
Management
SNMP MIB II

AppleTalk Apollo
Domain

Ordering Information

The 4100+ base systems include TCP/IP and source routing and spanning tree
bridging as part of the systems software. The 4100+ X.25 base systems add X.25
hardware and software.
The preconfigured 4100+ packaged systems include the base system hardware
and software plus DECnet, IPX, and an optional protocol forwarder (XNS, SDLC,
Frame Relay, AppleTalk, Apollo Domain, or ES-IS). Optional protocols are
included at no extra cost. Preconfigured 4100+ X.25 packaged systems add X.25
software and the X.25 interface hardware (DETAB-AH). Serial line cables must
be ordered separately.
The network interface options-Ethernet, Token Ring, Tl or serial lines-are
not bundled into the systems and must be ordered separately (with the exception
of the 4100+ X.25 systems which include X.25 hardware and software).
4100+ preconfigured packaged systems with SDLC require the Tl serial interface
(DETAB-AD) and a serial line cable. These must be ordered separately.

Networks, Communications, and Cables

6.27

Local and Wide Area Communications Servers

Ordering Information (Continued)

4100+ Systems
DETAC-Ax

4100+ base system hardware with system software TCP/IP,
source routing and spanning tree bridging

Preconfigured 4100+ packaged systems with base system hardware/ software
(DETAC-A*) plus additional protocol forwarders:
DETAC-Cx
DETAC-Dx
DETAC-Ex
DETAC-Fx
DETAC-Gx
DETAC-Hx
DETAC-Jx
DETAC-Kx

4100+ packaged system with DECnet IV, IPX, XNS
4100+ packaged system with DECnet IV, IPX, frame relay
4100+ packaged system with DECnet IV, IPX, SDLC
4100+ packaged system with DECnet IV, IPX, OSI (ES-IS)
4100+ packaged system with DECnet IV, IPX, AppleTalk
4100+ packaged system with DECnet IV, IPX, Apollo Domain
4100+ packaged system with DECnet IV and IPX only
4100+ packaged system with DECnet IV only

4100+ X.25 Systems
DETAD-Ax

4100+ base system hardware with system software, X.25,
TCP/IP, source routing and spanning tree bridging

Preconfigured 4100+ X.25 packaged systems with base system hardware/
software (DETAD-Ax) plus additional protocol forwarders:
DETAD-Cx
DETAD-Dx
DETAD-Ex
DETAD-Fx
DETAD-Gx
DETAD-Hx
DETAD-Jx

4100+ X.25 packaged system with DECnet IV, IPX, XNS
4100+ X.25 packaged system with DECnet IV, IPX,
frame relay
4100+ X.25 packaged system with DECnet IV, IPX, SDLC
4100+ X.25 packaged system with DECnet IV, IPX,
OSI (ES-IS)
4100+ X.25 packaged system with DECnet IV, IPX, AppleTalk
4100+ X.25 packaged system with DECnet IV, IPX,
Apollo Domain
4100+ X.25 packaged system with DECnet IV and IPX Only

Replace x with one of the following codes:
A = United States, B = International

4100+ Optional Interface Line Cards and Cables
DETAB-AA
DETAB-AB
DETAB-AC
DETAB-AD
DETAB-AH
DETAB-AE

BC07V-1F
BC07V-1J
DETAB-AF

BC07Y-1F
BC07Y-1J
DETAB-AG

BC07Z-1F
BC07Z-1J
DETAB-AI

6.28

Networks, Communications, and Cables

Protean Apollo Token Ring interface
Protean Ethernet interface
Protean Token Ring adapter
Protean Tl serial interface
Protean X.25 interface
Protean EIA-232 interface and cable
HD-26 to EIA-232 interface cable, 45.7 cm (18 in.)
HD-26 to EIA-232 interface cable
Protean EIA-449 interface and cable
HD-26 to EIA-449 interface cable, 45.7 cm (18 in.)
HD-26 to EIA-449 interface cable
Protean V.35 Interface and cable
HD-26 to V.35 Interface cable, 45.7 cm (18 in.)
HD-26 to V.35 Interface cable-spare, 50.8 cm (20 in.)
Protean p4100 and rackmount kit

Local and Wide Area Communications Servers
Specifications

Physical Characteristics
Height
Width
Depth
Weight

17.7 cm (7.0 in.)
41.3 cm (16.25 in.)
43 .8 cm (17.25 in.)
21.3 kg (47 lb)

Power Requirements
Input voltage
Input frequency
Power consumption

90 Vac to 260 Vac
50 Hz to 60 Hz
27 Watts

Operating Environment
Operating temperature
Operating humidity
Connectors
Power cord

0° to 50°C (32° to 122° F)
10% to 95 % noncondensing
One EIA-232, DB 25 for local console and IEC-320
line cord connector
U.S. line cord/Universal Adapter

Proteon CNX .SOO Multiprotocol·802.;/Token Ring Bri.dging :Q.outtr
The Proteon CNX 500 bridging router is a high-performance, RISC-based bridging router that supports 4-Mb/s or 16-Mb/s Token Ring and FDDI backbone
connectivity. The CNX 500 increases network efficiency, manages the overall
network performance, and provides network integration for mixed LAN/WAN
environments.
Features
• Supports distributed routing over 4-Mb/s, 16-Mb/s or FDDI backbones
• Supports industry-leading protocols
• SNMP network management (manageable via DECmcc SNMP AM Vl.1)
• Full range of LAN/WAN support for enterprise-wide connectivity (not PTT
approved in Europe)
• Watchdog timer increases network availability
• Event logging system customized event/error reporting
CNX 500 Bridging Router Supported Protocols
LAN/Backbone

WAN

Network O/S

Bridging

802.3/Ethernet

Tl/El

NetWare IPX

Source Routing
Bridging (SRB)

802.5 4 Mb/s
or 16 Mb/s
Token Ring

64 Kb/s

TCP/IP

Frame Relay

OSI (ES-IS)

Spanning Tree
Bridging (ST)

FDDI

SDLC

Network
Management

SNMP MIB II

DECnet Phase IV
XNS (3Com,
Xerox, UB)
AppleTalk
Apollo Domain

Networks, Communications, and Cables

6.29

Local and Wide Area Communications Servers
Ordering Information

The CNX 500 base systems include TCP/IP and source routing and spanning tree
bridging as part of the systems software. CNX 500 X.25 base systems add X.25
software; hardware interface and level converter must be ordered separately.
Preconfigured CNX 500 packaged systems include the base system hardware and
software plus DECnet, IPX, and an optional Protocol Forwarder (XNS, SDLC,
frame relay, AppleTalk, Apollo Domain, or ES-IS). Optional protocols are
included at no extra cost. Preconfigured CNX 500 X.25 packaged systems add
X.25 software; hardware interface and level converter must be ordered separately.
The Network Interface options-Ethernet, Token Ring, Tl/El or serial linesare not bundled into the systems and must be ordered separately.
CNX 500 systems with SDLC require require the Tl/El high-speed interface
(DETCB-AC) and a choice of level converter.
CNX 500 Systems
DETCE-AA

DETCE-CA
DETCE-DA
DETCE-EA
DETCE-FA
DETCE-GA
DETCE-HA
DETCE-JA
DETCE-KA

CNX 500 base system hardware with system software, TCP/IP,
source routing and spanning tree bridging.
Preconfigured CNX 500 packaged systems with base system
hardware/software (DEICE-AA) plus additional protocol
forwarders:
CNX 500 packaged system with DECnet IV, IPX, XNS
CNX 500 packaged system with DECnet IV, IPX, frame relay
CNX 500 packaged system with DECnet IV, IPX, SDLC
CNX 500 packaged system with DECnet IV, IPX, OSI (ES-IS)
CNX 500 packaged system with DECnet IV, IPX, AppleTalk
CNX 500 packaged system with DECnet IV, IPX, Apollo Domain
CNX 500 packaged system with DECnet IV and IPX only
CNX 500 packaged system with DECnet IV only

CNX 500 X.25 Systems
DETCF-AA

DETCF-CA
DETCF-DA
DETCF-EA
DETCF-FA
DETCF-GA
DETCF-HA
DETCF-JA

CNX 500 X.25 base system hardware with system software,
X.25 , TCP/IP, source routing and spanning tree bridging.
Preconfigured CNX 500 X.25 packaged systems with base system hardware/software (DETCF-AA) plus additional protocol
forwarders:
CNX 500 X.25 packaged system with DECnet IV, IPX, XNS
CNX 500 X.25 packaged system with DECnet IV, IPX,
frame relay
CNX 500 X.25 packaged system with DECnet IV, IPX, SDLC
CNX 500 X.25 packaged system with DECnet IV, IPX,
OSI (ES-IS)
CNX 500 X.25 packaged system with DECnet IV, IPX,
AppleTalk
CNX 500 X.25 packaged system with DECnet IV, IPX,
Apollo Domain
CNX 500 X.25 packaged system with DECnet IV and
IPX only

Note: All CNX 500 systems require TCP/ IP TFTP (Trivial File Transfer Protocol)
software on a host for downline loading. CNX 500 systems are universal, no
country kits or specific geography codes required.

6.30

Networks, Communications, and Cables

Local and Wide Area Communications Servers
Proteon CNX 500 (Continued)

CNX 500 Optional Interface Line Cards and Level Converters

DETCB-AA
DETCB-AB
DETCB-AC
DETCB-AE
DETCB-AF
DETCB-AG
DETCB-AH
DETCB-AL
DETCB-AJ
DETCB-AD
Specifications

CNX 500 Ethernet interface
CNX 500 Token Ring adapter
CNX 500 dual-port serial Tl/El interface
EIA-232-C level converter
EIA-449 level converter
V.35 level converter
X.21 level converter
Dual Ethernet interface
FDDI interface 50 micron
FDDI interface 62.5 micron

Physical Characteristics

Height
Width
Depth
Weight

16.5 cm (6.5 in.)
41.9 cm (16.5 in.)
41.4 cm (16.3 in.)
18.1 kg (40 lb)

(jl)

a
·::
•v

·s:s

Power Requirements

Input voltage
Input frequency
Power consumption

~
l

85 Vac to 270 Vac
50 Hz to 60 Hz
240 Watts maximum

fl)

Operating Environment

""0

15° to 40° C (59° to 104° F)
5 % to 95 % noncondensing
Universal Adapter

Operating temperature
Operating humidity
Power cord

TransPATH 335, 350 Bridge/Routers
The TransPATH Bridge/Router combines a TCPIIP router with a high-speed,
protocol-independent bridge in one integrated product. Based on the TransLAN
335 or 350, TransPATH provides all the benefits of a TransLAN bridge while
simultaneously routing the TCP/IP protocol. TransPATH keeps TCP/IP broadcasts off the network, saving bandwidth for true user data. This sophisticated
hybrid product communicates with existing TransLAN bridges, ensuring true
best-path routing in a complex network.
The TransLAN 335 and 350 bridges can be upgraded to routing with the addition of new software. This would minimize the expense to add routing capability
when the network grows in complexity. Other routing protocols, such as
DECnet, IPX, and XNS can be added in future software releases. The TransLAN
bridges can also be managed from DECmcc utilizing the Vitalink Bridge access
module.
Features

· Supports the Telnet protocol for managing the network from a UNIX host.
·Implements the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) Management
Information Base (MIB) as alternative to Vitalink Management Program.
• Allows traffic filter changes without network downtime.

,:-,,

Networks, Communications, and Cables

6.31

Local and Wide Area Communications Servers
Ordering Information

DETLB-GA
DETLB-TT
DETLB-TW
DETLB-TX
DETLX-CA
DETLX-JA
DETLX-JC

TransPATH 335, 2 lines, 2.048 Mbits/second each, V.35
TransPATH 350, 4 lines, 2 at Tl or multiple lines total 4.096
Mbits/second, UIC
TransPATH 350, 4 lines, 2 at Tl or multiple lines total 4.096
Mbits/second, V.35
TransPATH 350, 8 lines, 2 at Tl or multiple lines total 4.096
Mbits/second, V.35
V.35 modem cable, .7.5 m (25 ft)
UIC modem cable, V.35, DTE, 7.5 m (25 ft)
UIC modem cable, V.36, EIA-449/422, DTE 3 m (10 ft)

Note: All units are configurable for either 120-V or 240-V operation. One order
number includes hardware, software, license, media, and documentation. Cables,
DSU/CSU and/or rack.mount kit must be ordered separately. Refer to the Networks Buyer's Guide for additional information. For more information, call the
EiC Sales Support Center at 800-832-6277 or 603-884-8990.

TransLAN m, 320, 3j,, l.SO !emote ~·
The Vitalink TransLAN bridges offer Digital-supported solutions for longdistance communication needs by allowing users to access services remotely on
their 802.3/Ethernet Local Area Networks. TransLAN bridges use high-speed
synchronous lines up to 2.048 Mbits/second to connect multiple, geographically
dispersed LANs. All traffic from any station on a connected LAN appears as
local, including both host-to-host and terminal traffic. The user has simple, direct
access to any compatible resource in the extended network. Several bridges can
interoperate to combine multivendor 802.3/Ethernet LANs into one integrated,
multiprotocol extended LAN.
The T ransLAN bridge automatically learns the addresses of network stations,
allowing easy installation and automatic reconfiguration when devices are moved
or added. It filters locally addressed data frames and forwards only remote
traffic. With programmable filter combinations, the T ransLAN bridge can provide sophisticated traffic control over the network. The TransLAN bridge can
handle a filtering rate up to 14,880 packets/second and a forwarding rate up to
6,800 packets/second (depending on the model).
The TransLAN bridge includes Vitalink Management Program for network planning and diagnostics. This service can be centralized at one site or distributed
throughout the network. Capabilities include comprehensive bridge, link and
network statistics. The TransLAN bridges can also be managed from DECmcc
utilizing the Vitalink Bridge Access Module.
• Provides automatic activation of backup links if the primary link fails.
• Provides enhanced performance support for Digital's terminal servers.
• Supports switched dial-up 56-Kbit/second services for added bandwidth at peak
traffic periods, for emergency backup, or for occasional user access. Auto-dial,
manual, and time-of-day setup are available.
• Provides for grouping of parallel links for added bandwidth between two sites.
• Provides a consistently high network service level through distributed load sharing, which allows the use of backup paths during operation.

6.32

Networks, Communications, and Cables

Local and Wide Area Communications Servers
Ordering Information

DETLB-RA
DETLB-FA
DETLB-NW
DETLB-PT
DETLB-PW
DETLB-PX
DETLX-CA
DETLX-JA
DETLX-JC

TransLAN 320, 2 lines, 64 Kbits/second each, UIC
TransLAN 335, 2 lines, 2.048 Mbits/second each, V.35
TransLAN III, 4 lines, 1 @ Tl or multiple lines total
1.024 Mbits/second, V.35
TransLAN 350, 4 lines, 3 @ Tl or multiple lines total
4.096 Mbits/second, UIC
TransLAN 350, 4 lines, 3 @ Tl or multiple lines total
4.096 Mbits/second, V.35
TransLAN 350, 8 lines, 3 @ Tl or multiple lines total
4.096 Mbits/second, V.35
V.35 modem cable, 7.5 m (25 ft)
UIC modem cable, V.35 , DTE, 7.5 m (25 ft)
UIC modem cable, V.36, RS449/422, DTE 3 m (10 ft)

Note: All units are configurable for either 120-V or 240-V operation. One order
number includes hardware, software, license, media and documentation. Cables,
DSU/CSU and/or rackmount kit have to be ordered separately. Refer to Networks
Buyer's Guide for additional information. For more information, call the EiC
Sales Support Center at 800-832-6277 or 603-884-8990.

The DEC ISDNrouter 100 provides DECnet routing via ISDN Basic Rate Access
circuit switching. It supports up to six 64-Kbit-per-second B-channel circuitswitched connections to remote DECnet nodes over ISDN. The product is a
dedicated routing system that supports both intra-area (Level 1) and inter-area
(Level 2) routing for Phase IV nodes on the LAN, or remote nodes connected
through any of the six ISDN B-channels. The ISDNrouter also supports DDCMP
point-to-point links and "path splitting."
The DEC ISDNrouter 100 is a packaged ISDN Basic Rate Access router system
with hardware and software components. The package includes a software
license for VMS, DECnet, and VAX ISDN software. The hardware base for the
package consists of a MicroVAX/VAXserver 3300 system (without tape), a VT320
terminal, and a maximum of three DEC ISDNcontroller 100 modules (DIV32).
Features

• Allows DECnet routing on ISDN Basic Rate Access circuits.
• Operates at speeds of 64 Kbits per second for up to six ISDN B-channel
connections.
· Single-vendor integrated solution for the new telephony infrastructure (ISDN).
Prerequisites

Any DEC ISDNrouter 100 package specified in the ordering information below
and a subscription to an ISDN service requires:
·A VAX system running VMS V5.2-1 or later connected to the same Ethernet LAN
as the DEC ISDNrouter 100.
• An appropriate load device available over the network to read the software
during installation.

Ordering Information

The entry level DEC ISDNrouter 100 bundled system includes:
• Tapeless VAXserver 3300 (bundled with VMS and DECnet full-function licenses)
• One DEC ISDNcontroller 100
• Loopback connectors
·VAX ISDN software license
• DIV32 installation guide
• DEC ISDNrouter 100 installation guide
·One VT320 and keyboard

Networks, Communications, and Cables

6.33

Local and Wide Area Communications Servers
DEC ISDNrouter 100 (Continued)

See ordering information below for order numbers specifying the number of
DEC ISDNcontroller 100 (DIV32) cards desired with the DEC ISDNrouter 100
bundled system.

Note: Order separately at least one copy of the media and documentation kit
(QA-VZ9AA-H5 = media and documentation kit, QA-VZ9AA-GZ = documentation
only), the ISDN communication cable (BC23T for U.S. and France and BC23U
for Germany) and an appropriate power cord (see list included with MicroVAX
3300 menu in Chapter 1, VAX Systems).

DISDN-A2/A3
DISDN-B2/B3
DISDN-C2/C3

Basic Rate Access router with one DIV32 card
Basic Rate Access router with two DIV32 cards
Basic Rate Access router with three DIV32 cards

Note: For more information, contact the EiC Sales Support Center at
800-832-6277 or 603-884-8990.

StrataCom IPX Transmission Resource Manager
The StrataCom IPX product is a high-performance transmission resource management system that supports the private network environment. It may also be
referred to as a Tl multiplexer or nodal processor.
The StrataCom IPX (Integrated Packet Exchange) is an integral component of
Digital's wide area and backbone network strategy. With the IPX products providing access to high-speed Tl or El communications lines, Digital can design
and supply wide area networks capable of integrating voice, data image, and
video applications for a variety of industries. The IPX also provides a complementary capability to the DECrouter product family.
The StrataCom IPX employs a leading-edge switching technology called
''FastPacket.'' FastPacket switching instantaneously allocates bandwidth on
demand. Information is transmitted in a uniform packet format over a single,
high-speed digital trunk line. This enables the IPX to provide reliable, costeffective and high-performance WAN connectivity for computers, PBXs, and
other communications equipment in a corporate backbone network environment.
It also implements a complementary technology to FastPacket called "Frame
Relay." Frame Relay is an emerging packet-mode service that increases the efficiency of LAN-to-LAN communication via a WAN. It is ideal for " bursty" applications requiring variable amounts of bandwidth.

Features
· FastPacket switching provides adaptive bandwidth allocation at speeds up to
1.544 Mbits/second (U.S. Tl) or 2.048 Mbits/second (European El).
• Reduces Tl/El nework cost with voice compression at a 4:1 ratio and data
compression up to 5: 1.
· Integrates voice, data, image, fax, and video; protocol independent.
· Provides 99.99 % network uptime with a highly fault-tolerant architecture-no
single point of failure.
• Supports a maximum of 960 voice connections, 1200 data connections, and 96
Tl / El trunk lines.
· Frame relay capabilities for improved performance, low error rates , and minimal
network delay.
• Fully supports OSI network management standards.

6.34

Networks, Communications, and Cables

Local and Wide Area Communications Servers
Ordering Information

A base IPX system unit consists of a cabinet, power supply, and processor card.
Additional modules are added, depending on customer-specified functionality
and performance requirements, as well as requirements for increased availability
from redundant modules.
IPX 12~'

22 .5 x 17.3 x 19 in. (57.2 x 44 x 48.26 cm) . Single-shelf
system; tabletop or rackmount. Twelve-card slots, available for
trunks and/or voice/data/frame relay ports, two power supply
slots (ac), one or two Tl/El trunks.

IPX 16

60 x 22 x 27 in. (152.4 x 55.8 x 68.6 cm). Single-shelf system;
floor-standing cabinet. Sixteen-card slots, fourteen available for
trunks and/or voice/data/frame relay ports. Four power supply
slots (ac or de), up to four Tl/El trunks.

IPX 32

60 x 22 x 27 in. (152.4 x 55.8 x 68.6 cm). Double-shelf
system; floor standing cabinet. Thirty-two card slots, thirty
available for trunks and/or voice/data/frame relay ports.

IPX HUB

Comprises up to six IPX 16 or 32s, up to 96 Tl trunks. A
maximum of 960 voice connections, 1200 data connections.

*Not available in Europe.

System Units

DIXSA-AD
DIXSA-BE
DIXSA-BD
DIXSA-BC
DIXSA-CE
DIXSA-CD
DIXSA-CC

IPX 12 DTI-6 PSM, 120 V
IPX 16, 208 V
IPX 16, CEPT, 240 V
IPX 16, 48 Vdc
IPX 32, 208 V
IPX 32, CEPT, 240 V
IPX 32, 48 Vde

DIXSA-XA
DIXSA-XB
DIXSA-XC
DIXSA-XD

IPX installation kit type II
IPX 12 rackmount kit 19 in.
IPX rackmount kit 23 in.
IPX OEM equipment cabinet

IPX System Software

All IPX 12, 16, and 32 system units include a system software license

IPX Application Software

QL-GKUAX-AA
QL-GKWAX-AA
QL-GKVAX-AA
QL-GKXAX-AA

Network Management Software

QB-GKZAA-TW IPX StrataVIEW DOS license, media and documentation
QB-XK9AA-T5
IPX StrataVIEW PLUS ULTRIX license, media and
documentation

Power Supplies

DIXPA-AA
DIXPA-BE
DIXPA-BC

IPX 12 600W PIS 120 V
IPX 16/32 600W PIS 208 V
IPX 16/32 600W PIS 48 Vdc

IPX Processor Group Module

DIXCA-CA

IPX PCC/E card flash EPROM

Digital Trunk Interface Modules

DIXTA-AC
DIXTA-BA
DIXTA-BB
DIXTA-BC
DIXTA-CA
DIXTA-DA
DIXTA-XA
DIXTA-XB

IPX NTC/C card
IPX El back card
IPX Tl back card
Subrate back card
IPX TXR/D card
IPX PIC card
IPX DT15 utility bus
IPX DTl 7 utility bus

IPX 12 DFM license
IPX 12 FR license
IPX 16/32 DFM license
IPX 16/32 FR license

Networks, Communications, and Cables

6.35

Local and Wide Area Communications Servers
FastPacket Voice PAD Modules

DIXVA-BA
DIXVA-CA
DIXVA-DA
DIXVA-DB
DIXVA-EB

IPX VCD card
IPX VDP utility bus
IPX VDP/ A card
IPX VDP/u card
IPX CIP/B card

FastPacket Data PAD Modules

DIXDA-AA
DIXDA-AB
DIXDA-AC
DIXDA-AD
DIXDA-AE
DIXDA-BD
DIXDA-BB
DIXDA-BE
DIXDA-BC
DIXDA-CA

IPX SDP card
IPX SDI-EIA-232C back card
IPX SDI-EIA-232D back card
IPX SDI-V .3 5 back card
IPX SDI-EIA-44 9 back card
IPX LDB
IPX LDI4-EIA-232C back card
IPX LDI4 DDS back card
IPX LDI8-EIA-232C back card
IPX SDP utility bus

Frame Relay PAD Modules

DIXFA-AA
DIXFA-BA

IPX FRP card
IPX V .3 5 FRP back card

Local Bus

DIXMA-AA

IPX local bus, 1 slot

Blank Face Plates

DIXMA-BA
IPX front face plate
DIXMA-CA
IPX back plate, 1 slot
DIX MA-CE
IPX 16/32 p.s. blanking plate
Ancillary equipment such as channel banks, echo cancellers, and CSUs are
required to complete a Tl network configuration. Consult your Network Site
Services representative for third-party recommendations for channel banks and
echo cancellers. The Digital DFD03 DSU/CSU should be used to establish the Tl
connection.

Ancillary Equipment

Note: For more information, contact the EIC Sales Support Hotline at
800-832-6277 or 603 -884-8990.
Specifications

Environmental
Temperature: 0°-50° C (32°-92° F)
Relativity humidity: 0% to 95 % noncondensing

Electrical (Power Supplies)

A maximum of four power supplies per system
100-130 Vac/50-60 Hz/600 W or
200-250 Vac/50-60 Hz/600 W or,
48 Vdc/600 W

Processors
One or two processor cards
Two EIA-232 network management ports

Voice Ports
Up to 960 voice connections
Integral voice activity detection
Optional ADPCM compression

Data Ports
EIA-232C/D, V.35 and EIA-422/499 interfaces
Up to 1200 data connections
Synchronous data up to 1.334 Mbits/second
Isochronous clocking up to 128 Kbits/second
Optional Data Frame Multiplexing (DFM) up to 64 Kbits/second

Digital Trunk Interfaces
Up to 96 Tl/El superframe interfaces
Internal or external clock sources at 1.544 MHz or 2.048 MHz ± 10 ppm

6.36

Networks, Communications, and Cables

Host-Based Communications Controllers
DHB32 Asynclupnous Controller (VAXBI)
The DHB32 is an asynchronous communications controller for VAXBI systems.
The DHB32 enables up to 16 terminals, modems, and serial printers to communicate directly with a VAXBI processor. Supported by both VMS and ULTRIX
operating systems, the DHB32 emulates the asynchronous portion of Digital's
DMB32 communications controller. Unlike the DMB32, the DHB32 provides no
synchronous or parallel printer channel support.
The DHB32 supports aggregate throughput of 16,000 characters per second. Two
cabinet kits are available, one providing 16 EIA-232 (modem control) connections and one providing 16 EIA-423 connections with ports 14 and 15 switchselectable between EIA-423 and EIA-232. This allows for modem connections on
these lines. Use of the EIA-423 cabinet kit requires H3 104-B cable concentrator,
one for each eight lines-two total.
Ordering Information

DHB32-M

DHB32 module only

CK-DHB32-AJ

EIA-232 cabinet kit, for use with VAX 6000 series internal and
external VAXBI channels, and VAX 9000 VAXBI expansion

CK-DHB32-LJ

DEC-423 cabinet kit, same as above; uses DECconnect MMJ
connectors

Configuring Information
Option

Mounting
Requirements

Power
Requirements

VAXBI

Nodes

1/0 Panel
Units

v -12 v -5.2 v - 2 v

1 VAXBI slot

5.56

0.42

0.00

DH B32 (DEC-423) 1 VAXBI slot

5.56

0.42 0.42

0.00

DH B32 (EIA-232 )

The ex communications controllers provide asynchronous communications for
Q-bus systems in BA4xx or BA2xx (VAX 4000, Q-bus MicroVAX 3xxx and
Q-bus DECsystems) series system enclosures. The controllers operate at speeds to
38.4 Kbits per second per line, and transmit data using either Direct Memory
Access (DMA) or programmed output.
The CXY08 provides eight EIA-232-D communications lines to terminals,
modems, or serial printers. All lines support full modem control, which permits
point-to-point dial-up or leased-time operation. The CXA16 provides 16 EIA-423
(Digital implementation) lines for data-only connections (no modem control)
using the DECconnect modular plug connectors. The CXB16 provides 16
EIA-422 communications lines for data-only connections (no modem control).
O rdering Information

CXY08-AA/AF

8-line EIA-232-D asynchronous controller with modem
control; factory/field installed

CXA16-AAIAF

16-line EIA-423 (Digital implementation) asynchronous controller (data only) ; factory/field installed

CXB16-AAIAF

16-line EIA-422 asynchronous controller (data only);
factory/field installed

Networks, Communications, and Cables

6.37

Host-Based Communications Controllers
ex Communications Controllers
(Continued)

Option

Q-bus Slots

de Amps Drawn @

Watts
Drawn

Bus Loads
Drawn

12 v

CXY08-Ax

1.64

.40

12.94

3.0

0.5

CXA16-Ax

1.60

.20

10.40

3.0

0.5

CXB16-Ax

2.00

0.0

10.00

3.0

0.5

Configuring Information

Note: For information regarding modules used in systems not listed, contact the
EIC Sales Support Center at 800-832-6277 or 603-884-8990.
~~~~~~--~~~~~~~-

DEC WAN controller 220 Synchronous Controller (VAXBI)
The DEC Wide Area Network Controller 220 (DEC WANcontroller 220) is a
two-line synchronous communication controller designed specifically for VAXBI
systems. It provides host-based connectivity in VAXBI environments for establishing communication with X.25, DECnet, and IBM networks. This is accomplished
with Digital's standard layered network software.
The DEC WANcontroller 220 supports DDCMP, HDLC, and SDLC protocols at
speeds up to 64 Kbits per second per line for two-line operation, and 192 Kbits
per second for one-line operations running HDLC and SDCL protocols. (Actual
throughput is application-dependent.)
The two lines of the DEC WANcontroller 220 are independently managed and
operated. This permits concurrent communication using Digital's layered
network software products (DECnet-VAX, VAX P.S.I., VMS/SNA, DECnetULTRIX, and X.25 native mode). Any combination of these software products
can share the DEC WANcontroller 220. (VMS/SNA does not support two DSB32
lines.)
Ordering Information

External Cables

DSB32-M

DEC WAN controller 220 module only. Prerequisite software:
WAN device driver kit Vl .1 for VMS V5 .0 or higher. For VMS
systems: VAX Wide Area Network Drivers (SPD 29.64). For
ULTRIX systems: DEC Wide Area Network Device Drivers
(SPD 32.33 ).

CK-DSB32-UJ

Cabinet kit for VAX 6000 and VAX 9000 VAXBI expansion for
use with shielded cabinets. Includes four 1.5-meter (5-foot)
ribbon cables.

CK-DSB32-UN

Cabinet kit for VAX 6000 cabinet expansion for use with
shielded cabinets. Includes four 4.6-meter (15-foot) ribbon
cables.

Adapter and extension cables must be ordered separately based on interface
standard requirements.
BC19B-02
BS19D-02
BC19E-02
BC19F-02
BC55D
BC22F
BC19L

Configuring Information
Option

DSB32-M

6.38

Networks, Communications, and Cables

EIA-422-A adapter cable
EIA-232-D adapter cable
EIA-423-A adapter cable
V.35 adapter cable
Extension cable for BCl 9B/BC19E
Extension cable for BS 19D
Extension cable for BC19F
Mounting
Requirements

1 VAXBI slot

VAXBI IIO Panel
Nodes Units

Power
Requirements
5V

12 v -12 v -5.2 v -2 v

4.5

0.08

0.00

Host-Based Communications Controllers
DEC

Ncontroller 100 SJnchronous Controller (Q-bus)
DEC ISDNcontroller 100 (DIV32), a single-board, synchronous communication
controller, provides Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) connectivity for
VAX 4000 and Q-bus MicroVAX 3000 series systems. It plugs directly into the
MicroVAX BA23, BA123, H9642 , and BA2xx/BA4xx series enclosures. The device
provides ISDN Basic Rate Access (2B + D) connections to AT&T #5ESS or
Northern Telecom DMS-100 central office switches in the U.S. In Europe the
product is supported by the French and German public ISDN networks. The
DEC ISDNcontroller 100 allows the user to take advantage of many 64 Kbits per
second circuits or packet-switching services offered by ISDN.
Each module supports one ISDN Basic Rate Access (BRA) line. A single BRA line
consists of two high-performance 64-Kbit-per-second bearer channels or
B-channels, and one 16-Kbit-per-second signaling channel or D-channel. The two
ISDN B-channels are independently managed and operated to permit different
protocols to run concurrently to two separate destinations. The product has 128
Kbytes of onboard memory to downline load level one software, and uses an
onboard 68000 microprocessor to control communication functions.
The DEC ISDNcontroller 100 is driven by two ISDN software packages, VAX
ISDN and VAX ISDN Access. The VAX ISDN software is loaded onto the
MicroVAX host containing the DEC ISDNcontroller 100, which controls the ISDN
connection. It allows support for DECnet-VAX and VAX P.S.I layered network
software under VMS as well as customer-developed protocols (HDLC, SDLC,
DDCMP oriented) .
VAX ISDN Access software can be used by any (Q-bus or other) VMS DECnet
node, on an Ethernet, for remote access to an ISDN environment.

Features

• Provides high-performance, 64-Kbit-per-second, circuit-switched access to ISDN
services via Q-bus VAX systems.
· Allows two protocols to be run simultaneously, one on each channel, to one or
two different destinations.
• Reduces communication line cost with traffic-sensitive time-cutting mode.
·Supported on BA2xx/ BA4xx, BA23/123 and H9642 MicroVAX enclosures.
• VAX ISDN software manages ISDN call control and customer-application development on host.
· VAX ISDN Access software allows any VMS-based Ethernet node to manage the
ISDN connection.

Prerequisite Software

The DEC ISDNcontroller 100 driver software is incorporated into VAX ISDN
software version 1.0 for VMS V5 .2-1 or higher. Refer to Software Product
Descriptions 31.23 and 31.24 for VAX ISDN and VAX ISDN Access software
requirements. Order the VAX ISDN Access software only if ISDN communication
for Ethernet node is required.

Ordering Information

One DEC ISDNcontroller 100 module must be ordered along with the appropriate cabinet kit. Note: DIV32-SA/SF variants do not require cabinet kits.

DIV32-SA/SF

For VAX 4000 and Q -bus MicroVAX 3xxx series
systems; factory/field installed

DIV32-M

Q-bus ISDN BRA interface for BA123/BA23/ H9642
cabinets

CK-DIV32-MA
CK-DIV32-MB
CK-DIV32-MF

Cabinet kit for BA123 enclosure
Cabinet kit for BA23 enclosure
Cabinet kit for H9642 enclosure

Networks, Communications, and Cables

6.39

Host-Based Communications Controllers
DEC ISDNcontroller 100 (Continued)

Cables

Cables must be ordered separately. They provide connectivity between the DIV32
1/0 plug and the ISDN wall socket.
BC23T-10
BC23T-25

Configuring Information

Option

10-foot (3-meter) ISDN BRA cable; ISO 8877
25-foot (7 .6-meter) ISDN BRA cable; ISO 8877
Q-bus Slots

DIV32

Watts
Drawn

de Amps Drawn @

One

12 v

5.5

0.00

27.50

Bus Loads
Drawn
ac

3.5

1.0

Note: For more information, contact the EiC Sales Support Center at
800-832-6277 or 603-884-8990.

DSVll Synchronous Controller (Q-bus)
The DSVll is a two-line synchronous interface that provides up to 256-Kbit-persecond wide area network capability for standalone VAX Q-bus systems. The
module supports the DDCMP, HDLC, and SDLC protocols at speeds up to 256
Kbits per second for one-line-only operation, and speeds up to 64 Kbits per
second per line for two-line operation. The bisync protocol is also supported at
speeds up to 9.6 Kbits per second per line, regardless of whether one or two
lines are operating.
For VMS systems, DECnet-VAX, VAX P.S.I., VMS/SNA, VAX 2780/3780 P.E. and
VAX 3271 P.E. software products support the DSVll module. (Refer to the
Networks Buyer)s Guide for more information about these products.) Several
combinations of these software products can share the DSVll, with one product
controlling both lines, or one product controlling one line while another product
controls the second line.
The following table lists the software combinations that can control the DSVl 1
and the maximum line speeds they support.
Communications
Application
(speed/line)

Communications application running on the second line
(speed/line)
DECnet
64 Kb/s 1

VMS/SNA VAX P.S.I. VAX 2780/3780 P.E VAX 3271 P.E
64 Kb/s 64 Kb/s
9.6 Kb/s
9.6 Kb/s2

DECnet-VAX
64 Kb/s

Yes

VMS/SN A
64 Kb/ s

Yes

NIS3

Yes

VAX P.S.I.
64 Kb/s

Yes

VAX 2780/3780 P.E. Yes
9.6 Kb/s

Yes

VAX 3271 P.E.

Yes

NIA

Yes

NIA

9.6 Kb/s

DECnet-ULTRIX
64 Kb/s

X.25 Native Mode
64 Kb/ s
N otes:

Supports 1-line operation at 256 Kb/s if the second line is unused.
19.2 Kb/sis supported for some configurations. Refer to VAX 3271
P.E. Software Product Description, 25.21.
3
VMS/SNA does not support two DSVl 1 lines.
2

For ULTRIX systems, DECnet-ULTRIX and X.25 native mode support the DSVll
module through the WAN device drivers for ULTRIX.

6.40

Networks, Communications, and Cables

Host-Based Communications Controllers
DSVl l Synchronous Controller
(Continued)
Ordering Information

DSVl 1-SA/SF

Controller for VAX 4000, Q-bus MicroVAX 3xxx and
DECsystem 5500 systems. Includes VMS V5.0 driver software
kit with TK50 media, software license, one EIA-232 and one
V.35 adapter cable, and documentation. Cabinet kit not
required. Factory/field installed.

DSVll-SB/SG

Adapter cable option only. No software or documentation.
Cabinet kit not required. Factory/field installed.

Note: For multiple DSVl ls on one system, order one DSVl 1-SA/SF for the first
DSVl 1. Order DSVll-SB/SG for additional DSVlls (maximum five DSVlls per
system).
Configuring Information
Option

DSVll-Sx

Q-bus Slots

1 quad slot

de Amps Drawn @
5V

12 v

5.43

0.69

Watts
Drawn

35.43

Bus Loads
Drawn
ac

3.9

1.0

The DEC Wide Area Network Controller 620 (DEC WANcontroller 620) is a
two-line synchronous communication controller designed specifically for VAXft
systems. It provides connections for communicating over X.25, DECnet, and IBM
networks by using Digital' s standard layered network software.
The DEC WANcontroller 620 supports DDCMP, HDLC, SDLC, and BISYNC protocols. Line speeds of up to 64 Kbits/second per line are supported on two
lines. Actual line speed is dependent on the application/layered communication
product throughput. See SPD of layered product for details.
The two lines of the DEC WANcontroller 620 are independently managed and
operated, allowing different protocols to run simultaneously. The controller supports Digital standard layered communication software for DECnet, VAX P.S.I.,
VMS/SN A, and VAX 2780/3 780. Any combination of these software products can
share the DEC WANcontroller 620. (VMS/SNA support is limited to one line
regardless of hardware interface used.)
Ordering Information
Hardware

For redundantly configured communications-for every two synchronous lines
needed, order the following two items:
DSF32-AA
DSF32-AB

DEC WANcontroller 620, Y-Box, 100-pin cable and terminator
(order one).
DEC WANcontroller 620, 100-pin cable, 20-pin module interconnect cable (order one).

For non-redundantly configured communications-for every two synchronous
lines needed, order the following item. Note: This configuration does not provide any fail-over for the communications lines.
DSF32-AA
Software (Required)

DEC WANcontroller 620, Y-Box, 100-pin cable and terminator
(order one).

Note: The following software is required. Refer to SPD 29 .64 for more
information.
QL-VAWA9-AA VAX WAN device driver kit Vl.lB for VMS V5.4-1A or higher.
QA-VAWAA-H5 Software media (TK50) and documentation kit.
QA-VAWAA-HM Software media (magtape) and documentation kit.

Networks, Communications, and Cables

6.41

Host-Based Communications Controllers
DEC WANcontroller 620 (Continued)
External Cables (Required)

Required adapters and extension cables must be ordered separately based on
local interface standard requirements.
BC19B-02
BC19D-02
BC19E-02
BC19F-02
BC55D-xx
BC22F-xx
BC19L-xx

EIA-422-A/V.11 adapter cable (0.6 m/2 ft)
EIA-232-D/V.24 adapter cable (0.6 m/2 ft)
EIA-423-A/V.10 adapter cable (0.6 m/2 ft)
V.35 adapter cable (0.6 m/2 ft)
Extension cable for BC19B/ BC19E
Extension cable for BC19D;'
Extension cable for BC19F

xx = Cable length (feet); 10, 25, 35, etc.
* Maximum supported length is 10.7 m (35 ft) due to EIA-232 standard.

Note: For European installations, maximum length must not exceed 7 .6 meters
(25 feet) per PTT requirements.

Option

Mounting
Requirements

DSF32-AA/AB

1 VAXft Slot

Configuring Information

Power Requirements
5v

12 v

-10 v

7.7 A

0.21 A

0.46 A

-0

DMB32 Multifunction Controller (VAXBI)
The DMB32 is a host-based 8-line multifunction intelligent communications controller that enables a combination of modems and terminals to communicate with
Digital's VAXBI processors. The DMB32 operates at speeds up to 38.4 Kbits per
second per asynchronous line (under specified conditions) with full modem control. One synchronous line supports message framing, CRC generation, and
checking with full modem control of the following protocols: HDLC, SDLC, IBM
BISYNC, DDCMP, and GEN BYTE. Parallel printer line supports a wide range of
Digital parallel printers. An optional adapter cable is required if the synchronous
driver is ordered for use on the DMB32 50-pin D-subminiature connector.
Prerequisite Hardware

Any valid VAXBI system configuration.

Ordering Information

DMB32-M

Includes base module only.

CK-DMB32-LJ

For use with VAX 6000 series internal and external VAXBI
channels, and VAX 9000 VAXBI expansion.

Software

For systems running VMS V5.0, the VAX Wide Area Network Device Drivers are
required to use the DMB32 synchronous port. For ULTRIX systems, the ULTRIX
WAN device drivers are required. License options for system device drivers are
as follows. A license is required for each CPU.
QL-VAWA9-AA VAX WAN Device Driver software license (VMS)
QL-YMKA9-AA ULTRIX WAN Device Driver software license (ULTRIX)
QA-VAWAA-H5 Media (TK50) and documentation kit (VMS)
QA-YMKAA-H5 Media (TK50) and documentation kit (ULTRIX)
QA-VAWAA-HM Media (magtape) and documentation kit (VMS)
QA-YMKAA-HM Media (magtape) and documentation kit (ULTRIX)

Configuring Information
Option

Mounting
Requirements

VAXBI

de Amps Drawn @

6.75

0.29

5
DMB32

6.42

Networks, Communications, and Cables

1 VAXBI slot

Nodes

110 Panel
Units

v -12 v -5.2 v -2 v
0.42

0.0

Host-Based Communications Controllers
DEC MUCTlcontrollet >42 Multifunction Controller (DECsystem 5100)
The DEC MULTicontroller 542 (DSH80) is a two-line synchronous/four-line asynchronous module internal to the system enclosure. It allows for two synchronous
connections and four DEC-423 serial data-only lines to enhance communication
needs. There is no modem support on the asynchronous lines. The synchronous
lines support connections to DECnet/OSI and X.25 networks by using Digital's
standard layered network software, and SNA networks by using software developed by Systems Strategies, Inc. The synchronous connections support HDLC
and SDLC protocols at speeds up to 64 Kbits/second per line. The asynchronous
connections support speeds up to 19.2 Kbits/second. The synchronous operations of the module are supported by the ULTRIX Wide Area Network (WAN)
device driver. The DSH80 consists of one controller module, and can be ordered
as a factory-installed or field-installed option.

Ordering Information

DSH80-AA/AF

Two-line synchronous/four-line asynchronous connector and
four DEC-423 MMJ connectors; second module with one 50-pin
D-Sub connector. 100-way internal cable, 50-way internal cable.
Factory/field installed.

ULTRIX WAN Device Driver

QL-YMJAS-AA
QA-YMJAA-H5

One-time single-user license for use of synchronous ports.
Media (TK50) and documentation

Software

Order additional software to support X.25 or DECnet/ OSI V5 .0 connections.
SNA software is available from third party.

QL-YSYAN-AA
QA-YSYAA-H5
QL-YT9AN-AA
QA-YT9AA-H5

External Cables

X.25 native mode license for DECsystem 5100
X.25 native mode media (TK50) and documentation
DECnet/OSI ULTRIX V5.0 license (DECsystem 5100)
DECnet/OSI ULTRIX media (TK50) and documentation

The following external cables are required for connection to modems.

BC19B-02
BC19D-02
BC19E-02
BC19F-02
BC55D-xx
BC22F-xx
BC19L-xx

EIA-422-A/V.11
EIA-232-E/V.24
EIA-423-A/V.10
V.35
Extension cable for BC19B/19E
Extension cable for BC19D; supported length up to 10.7 m
(35 ft)
Extension cable for BC 19F

xx = Cable length (feet); 10, 25, 35, etc.

DEC

~ Multifunction Controller (MicroVAX 3100)
The DSH32 (DEC MULTicontroller 581/582) is a dual-function communications
controller. It is supported by the VMS and ULTRIX operating systems,
DECnet-VAX networking software, VAX P .S.I. communications software,
VMS/SN A communications software, and 2780/3 780 Protocol Emulator. ULTRIX
supports only the eight asynchronous lines.
The synchronous interfaces allow operation at software-set speeds up to 19,200
bits per second when one line is being used (including DDCMP) in non-DMA
mode, with full modem control and support for bit- and byte-oriented protocols.
The synchronous lines are compatible with Digital's family of modems, Bell
200-series modems, and their equivalents.

Networks, Communications, and Cables

6.43

Host-Based Communications Controllers
DEC MULTlcontroller 581/582

Each variant includes an eight-line standard DEC-423 asynchronous multiplexer
which can be set for speeds up to 38,400 bits per second with an operating
software limitation of 19,200 bits per second. These lines will support connection
of any EIA-423-supported device, but they do not have modem control.
2780/3780 Protocol Emulator is supported on one line only. The DSH32 consists
of one controller module, and can be ordered as a factory-installed or
field-installed option.

(Continued)

Ordering Information

DSH32-BA

DEC MULTicontroller 581 for EIA-232/V.24 communications
(with BC19V-02 cable and EIA-232 adapter) . One synchronous
line.

DSH32-BB

Same as above, for EIA-423/V.10 (with BC19W-02 cable).

DSH32-BC

Same as DSH32-BA, for EIA-422/V.36 (with BC19U-02 cable).

DSH32-EA

DEC MULTicontroller 582 for EIA-232/V.24 communications.
For MicroVAX 3100 Model 20e only. Two synchronous lines.

DSH32-EB

Same as above, for EIA-423/V.10 communications.

DSH32-EC

Same as DSH32-EA, for EIA-422/V.36 communications.

DSH32-YA

DEC MULTicontroller 581 to 582 upgrade; upgrades DSH32-BA
to DSH3 2-EA.

DSH32-YB

Same as above, upgrades DSH32-BB to DSH32-EB.

DSH32-YC

Same as DSH32-YA, upgrades DSH32-BC to DSH32-EC.

The DSH32 's synchronous driver software will be shipped as part of the VAX or
ULTRIX WAN device drivers. Asynchronous driver software is inherent in VMS
and ULTRIX operating systems.
VAX WAN Device Drivers

QL-VAWA9-AA One-time single-user license, CPU-independent
QA-VAWAA-H5 Media (TK50) and documentation kit
QA-VAWAA-HM Media magtape and documentation kit

ULTRIX WAN Device Drivers

QL-YMKA9-AA Software license
QA-YMKAA-H5 Media (TK50) and documentation kit
QA-YMKAA-HM Media (magtape) and documentation kit

Cables

The following external cables are required for connection to modems.
BC22F-xx

For connecting DSH32-BA/EA to EIA-232-compatible modems.

BC55D-xx

For connecting DSH32 -BB/BC/EB/EC to EIA-422/V.36 or
EIA-423/V.10-compatible modems.

xx = cable length (feet); refer to Cables, at the end of this chapter.
Configuring Information
Option

Q-bus Slots

de Amps Drawn @

0.5

0.3

DSH32-xx

Watts
Drawn

Bus Loads
Drawn
ae

2.9

0.5

DRB32 Parallel Interface (VAXBI)
The DRB32 is a high-speed (up to 6.7 -Mbyte-per-second) asynchronous DMA
parallel interface to the VAXBI. The DRB32 uses a 32-bit half-duplex bidirectional I/O path to transfer data to and from the user device and two 8-bit
unidirectional paths for control data. A dual register set permits "limitless" data
transfers. One version is "subset" compatible with the DRll-W providing a
UNIBUS migration path to the VAXBI. Supplied software is generic and may be
modified for user applications.

6.44

Networks, Communications, and Cables

Host-Based Communications Controllers
DRB32 Parallel Interface (Continued)
Ordering Information

Hardware

DRB32-M

VAXBI parallel interface; connects to user device within the
same cabinet system as the VAXBI system.

DRB32-W

Module with subset of DRll-W functionality plus DRB32-M;
connects to user device within the same cabinet system as the
VAXBI system.

DRB32-E

Longline module plus DRB32-M; connects to user device or
another DRB32-E up to 12 meters (40 feet) outside the system
cabinet; a BSl 7Y external cable must be ordered separately.

DRB32s include base option module(s) only and require following cabinet kit.

CK-DRB32-LJ

Software

Cabinet kit with 5-foot (1.5-meter) cables for VAX 6000 series
system cabinets, VAX 9000 VAXBI expansion cabinets, and for
H9657 VAXBI expansion cabinets.

DRB32 VMS software is included in one package. Customers need to purchase
the package only once in order to modify the code to support their unique
devices. No other software or licenses are required.

QB-VF5A9-Yx

VMS V5.0 drivers and sources for DRB32-M/-E and DRB32-W
and AA-HX25C-TE manual (CPU cross product).

x denotes media type: 5 = TK50; M = magtape

Documentation

The VAXELN V3.1 (or later) toolkit includes DRB32-M/E and DRB32-W drivers.
The DRB32 is also supported by VAX Realtime Accelerator (VAX RTA) products.

EK-DRB32-0V
EK-DRB32-TM

Introductio_n to the DRB32 Adapter; ordered separately. Provides
enough information for a make/buy decision.
DRB32 Technical Manual; ordered separately. Hardware
specifications.

EK-DRB32-IN

DRB32 Installation Guide; ordered separately.

AA-HZ25C-TE

DRB32 Programmer's Reference Manual; ships with VMS drivers,
ordered separately. Software specifications.

Configuring Information

VAXBI I/O Panel
Nodes Units

Option

Mounting
Requirements
5V

DRB32-M

1 VAXBI slot

8.0

0.0

NIA

DRB32-E

2 VAXBI slots

9.8

0.0

DRB32-W

2 VAXBI slots

11.8

0.0

NIA

de Amps Drawn @

v -12 v -5.2 v -2 v

Note: The DRB32-M and DRB32-W must be installed with the user's device in
the same Digital-approved cabinet system. The DRB32-E is used to drive signals
external from the cabinet. Total cable length must be less than 50 feet (15
meters).
The number of DRB32s that can be put into a system depends on the system
configuration and the planned application. For VAX 6000 series systems and
VAX 9000 VAXBI expansion, two DRB32s are supported on each VAXBI; up to
eight DRB32-Ms, DRB32-Es, or DRB32-Ws can be configured.
Many customers need to design interfaces that adapt their unique devices to the
DRB32. If these interfaces plug into the VAXBI backplane next to the DRB32 ,
the customer should obtain a VAXBI license and the VAXBI technology tools that
will ensure a design with mechanical and electrical integrity.

Networks, Communications, and Cables

6.45

Host-Based Communications Controllers
DRB32 Parallel Interface (Continued)
BS17Y Cable

The BS 17Y is a set of three fully shielded cables designed for use with the
DRB32-E. Each cable in the set has 25 controlled impedance twisted pairs.

Specifications

· Conductors: 50 (25 twisted-pair) 50-position, molded, D-subminiature male connector on each end
• Gauge-conductors: 28-AWG-stranded
· Shield: Foil with braid
• Wiring: Point-to-point

Ordering Information

BS17Y-20
BS17Y-40

External cable for DRB32-E-20 feet (6 meters)
External cable for DRB32-E-40 feet (12 meters)

The DRQ3B is a high-performance Q-bus parallel I/O interface designed for
realtime data collection or for high-speed interprocessor communications
between Q-bus systems. With its two independent 16-bit parallel channels, the
DRQ3B can receive or send data or do both concurrently at up to 1.2
Megawords per second total throughput (2.4 Mbytes per second) in extended
block mode. Its double buffering capability allows the DRQ3B to transfer data
continuously up to this maximum rate. To enhance its realtime performance, the
DRQ3B provides a 512-word FIFO buffer on each channel. The DRQ3B supports
program-controlled transfers and single-cycle, burst-mode, and block-mode DMA
(direct memory access) transfers. These features make the DRQ3B perfect for
demanding I/O applications such as data telemetry, simulation, structural and
performance testing, seismic data collection, and high-speed graphics display and
imaging.

Ordering Information
Hardware

DRQ3B-SA/SF

High-speed 16-bit parallel DMA interface with documentation.
Factory installed in VAX 4000 Model 300 and Q-bus
MicroVAX 3000 series systems. Processing constraints may preclude option usage on workstations except when workstations
are lightly loaded. Cabinet kit not required. Software driver
must be ordered separately. Factory/field installed.

Cables

BC19T-xx

Cable for connecting the DRQ3B to a user device or to another
DRQ3B. Two BC19T cables must be ordered for each DRQ3B
module. Both 25- and 50-foot lengths available (equivalent to
7 .6 m and 15 m).

Software

QA-OAPAA-H5
QA-OAPAA-GZ
QL-OAPAx-AA

MicroVAX/DRQ3 B device driver binaries and documentation
on TK50 media (license must be ordered separately).
MicroVAX/DRQ3 B device driver documentation.
MicroVAX/DRQ3B single-use binaries, paid-up license without
warranty.
x = processor code

Option

Q-bus Slots

Configuring Information

DRQ3B-Sx

1 quad slot

de Amps Drawn @
5V

12 v

4.5

0.0

Watts
Drawn
22.5

Bus Loads
Drawn
ac

2.0

0.5

Note: For more information contact the EIC Sales Support Center at
800-832-6277 or 603-884-8990.

6.46

Networks, Communications, and Cables

Host-Based Communications Controllers

The DRVlJ is a parallel line interface with four programmable ports, each containing 16 1/0 lines. It will also accept up to 16 external interrupt requests, a
capability that makes it useful for realtime response in sensor 1/ 0 applications.
Features

O rdering Information

Configuring Information

· Four 3-state, 16-bit parallel 1/0 ports.
· User-assigned device addresses.
· Accepts up to 16 external interrupt requests.
· Programmable interrupt vector addresses.
• Program-controlled input/output operations.
• Programmable operating modes:
- interrupt controller mode: interrupt-driven.
- priority modes: fixed or rotating.
- vector address selection: individual or common vector.
• Can drive up to 25 feet (7 .6 meters) of shielded cable and 6 feet (1.8 meters) of
unshielded flat or round cable.
DRVlJ-SA/SF

64-line parallel interface for VAX 4000 and Q-bus MicroVAX
3000 series systems. Support available in Realtime Test Integrator (RTI). Factory/field installed.

BS04M-12

Cable connecting user devices to the DRVlJ-SA/ SF.

Option

Q-bus Slots

DRVlJ-Sx

de Amps Drawn @
5V

12 v

1.80

0.00

Watts
Drawn

Bus Loads
Drawn
ae

9.0

2.0

1.0

Note: For information regarding modules used in systems not listed, contact the
EiC Sales Support Center at 800-832-6277 or 603 -884-8990.

----

The DRVll-WA and DRVlW-SA/SF are general-purpose 16-bit parallel direct
memory access (DMA) interface modules for Q-bus systems. Each offers 22-bit
addressing capability and permits data transfers at rates up to 250K words per
second in single cycle mode and up to 400K words in burst mode. Useful for
connecting to high-speed user devices or an interprocessor communications link
between Q-bus VAX or PDP-11 systems. A device driver is included in VMS V4.4
and later. An ULTRIX driver is also available; see SPD 32.91.
Ordering Information

Configuring Information

DRVlW-SA/SF

General-purpose 16-bit parallel DMA Q-22 interface module.
Installed in BA4xx or BA2xx series enclosures. Cabinet kit not
required. Requires two BC06M-20 or BS06M-21 cables;
factory/field installed.

DRVll-WA

General-purpose 16-bit parallel DMA Q-22 interface module
for the BA23 or BA123 enclosures. Requires two BC08R (or
equivalent) cables to connect to user device. Includes base
option module only. Requires one of the following cabinet kits.

CK-DRVlW-KA

Cabinet kit for use with BA23 enclosure; 38-cm (15-inch) cable.

CK-DRVlW-KF

Cabinet kit for use with BA123 enclosure and H9642 cabinet;
91.4-cm (36-inch) cable.

Option

Mounting
Requirements

de Amps
Drawn@

Watts
Drawn

Bus Loads
Drawn

12 v

CK-DRVl W-Kx

NIA

DRVlW-Sx

1 quad slot

DRVll-WA

1 dual slot

1.8

0.0

9.0

2.0

1.0

NIA

1.8

0.0

9.0

2.0

1.0

1/0 Panel
Insert Size

Networks, Communications, and Cables

6.47

Network Connectivity Products

The H4005 is a nonintrusive tapping transceiver that provides a physical and
electrical connection to a 10-Mbit-per-second IEEE 803 .2 "thick" local area network coaxial cable. The H4005 connects to the standard Ethernet coaxial cable
via a removable tap assembly. This is the same tap assembly used on the older
H4000. This product complies with the IEEE 802.3 specification and can interface to both 802.3 and Ethernet station controllers. The H4005 is a less costly,
smaller replacement for the H4000 model. It contains the necessary electronics to
send and receive signals at 10 Mbits per second, detect the occurrence of collisions and provide electrical isolation between the coaxial cable and the station.
The H4005 is compatible with all products except the DEREP, which requires
the H4000.
Ordering Information

H4005-00

IEEE 802.3/Ethernet transceiver.

Customer-installation of H4005 transceiver requires the Ethernet Transceiver
Installation Tool Kit (12-24664-02). The kit includes all the components necessary to install the H4005.

The DELNI (Digital Ethernet Local Network Interconnect) is a complete

Ethernet implementation in a single desktop-sized device. The DELNI can take
the place of Ethernet coaxial cable and eight separate Ethernet transceivers. It
can be used by itself, or as an economical addition to an existing network. It is
customer installable. Systems, communications servers, and bridges-up to eight
Ethernet devices-can be connected to the coaxial cable through a single
Ethernet transceiver. If there are more than eight systems, connect the first
DELNI to eight additional DELNI devices and link 64 Ethernet stations in a
single data center. If used in this configuration, the DELNis cannot be connected
to an Ethernet backbone cable.
Ordering Information

Country Kits

6.48

Networks, Communications, and Cables

The U.S. version of the DELNI does not require a country kit. Each non-U.S.
version of the DELNI requires one country kit which contains installation instructions and a power cord. If the country in which the DELNI is to be used is not
listed, select a country kit that uses the same plug configuration. Each node
connected to a DELNI requires an 802.3/Ethernet communications controller and
transceiver cable. (For DELNI-connected configurations, an H4005 transceiver and
transceiver cable are needed.)

DELNI-BA
DELNI-BB

DELNI U .S./Canada
DELNI Non-U.S.

DELNK-AZ
DELNK-AB
DELNK-AQ
DELNK-AC
DELNK-AD
DELNK-AF
DELNK-AP
DELNK-AH
DELNK-AI
DELNK-AN
DELNK-AS
DELNK-AM
DELNK-AL
DELNK-AK
DELNK-AE
DELNK-AG

Australia
Belgium
Canada (English)
Canada (French)
Denmark
Finland
France
Holland
Italy
Norway
Spain
Sweden
Switzerland (German)
Switzerland (French)
United Kingdom
Germany

Network Connectivity Products

The DECrepeater 350 (DEPTR) is a low-cost multiport repeater that connects one
backbone Ethernet to eight unshielded twisted-pair distribution ports. It is
designed for small configurations where network management is minimal. Its
eight ports connect PCs, workstations or other intelligent devices (via standard
8-pin RJ45 jacks) to 802.3/Ethernet lOBaseT unshielded twisted-pair cabling. It
also includes a single AUI port for connecting to standard baseband or transceiver cable. Like the DEMPR, it retimes, amplifies, and repeats signals. It must
be counted as a repeater for various network configurations. Connectivity to a
lOBaseT hub requires home runs to a lOBaseT controller card (DE201) or to a
media access device (H3350).

Ordering Information

Power Cords and Documentation

DETPR-AA/AB

8-port unshielded twisted-pair to Ethernet nonmanageable repeater, U.S., 120 V/240 V.

DETPR-BA/BB

8-port unshielded twisted-pair to Ethernet nonmanageable repeater (plastic case not included) ,
U.S., 120 V/240 V.

DL-DETPR-AA/AB

Package of 10, 8-port unshielded twisted-pair to Ethernet
non-manageable repeaters, U.S., 120 V/240 V.

DETPR-DC
DETPR-DD
DETPR-DE
DETPR-DG
DETPR-DI
DETPR-DJ
DETPR-DK
DETPR-DP
DETPR-DT
DETPR-DX
DETPR-DZ
DETPR-EE

Canada
Denmark
United Kingdom
Germany
Italy
Japan
Switzerland
France
Israel
Austria, Belgium, France, Germany, Finland, Holland, Norway,
Sweden, Portugal, Spain
Australia
Ireland

Note: Refer to the Networks Buyer's Guide for additional information.

The twisted-pair Media Access Unit (H3350) provides lOBaseT connectivity for
devices other than PCs. Any device that is equipped with a standard 802.3/
Ethernet card can use an H3350 to connect it to a lOBaseT hub, repeater, or
network. It functions as a transceiver and complies with the lOBaseT specification. It has an 8-pin RJ45 interface on the lOBaseT side, and an AUI 15-pin
connector on the system side. The H3350 has LED indicators for link integrity.

Ordering Information

H3350-AA

Unshielded twisted-pair Media Access Unit-allows for the
connection of standard 802.3/Ethernet products to unshielded
twisted-pair.

The ThinWire Ethernet Multiport Repeater (DEMPR) provides eight ports for
connection of eight ThinWire Ethernet segments and one port for a connection
to an H4005 transceiver. As a repeater, it extends the length, topology, or interconnection of the physical network medium beyond the limits imposed by a
single segment. Each segment can have 29 stations for a total of up to 232
stations.

Networks, Communications, and Cables

6.49

Network Connectivity Products
Ordering Information

DEMPR-AA

120-V ThinWire Ethernet Multiport Repeater.
Power cord included.

DEMPR-AB

240-V ThinWire Ethernet Multiport Repeater.
Does not include power cord.

Note: Refer to the Networks Buyer's Guide for power cord order codes.

The ThinWire Ethernet Single-Port Repeater (DESPR) connects a single
ThinWire segment to a standard Ethernet network. The ThinWire segment can
be up to 185 meters (600 feet ) long, and can accommodate up to 29 stations.
The DESPR connects to standard Ethernet using an H4005 transceiver, or via a
DELNI. When the DESPR/DELNI combination is used, the DELNI must be connected to the standard Ethernet using an H4005 transceiver. The DESPR must be
counted as a repeater when configuring a standard Ethernet network.
Ordering Information

DESPR-EE

120-V ThinWire Ethernet Single-Port Repeater.
Power cord included.

DESPR-EF

240-V ThinWire Ethernet Single-Port Repeater.
Does not include power cord.

Note: Refer to the N etworks Buyer's Guide fo r power cord order codes.

The DECrepeater 90C (coaxial) and DECrepeater 90T (unshielded twisted-pair)
repeaters provide modular and cost-effective Ethernet connections. The
DECrepeater 90T offers lOBaseT networking. The DECrepeater 90C complies
with the IEEE 802.3 standard for 10Base2 networks and supports up to 185
meters of ThinWire cabling. Both products are part of Digital's WorkGroup
Family of Networking Products.
As standalone units, these repeaters provide a new level of Ethernet connectivity.
As part of the DEChub 90 Ethernet backplane) they can be integrated with
WorkGroup Family server, bridge, and management modules to increase
networking capabilities in seconds. When installed in the DEChub 90, the repeaters can be remotely managed using the DECbridge 90. The DECrepeater 90T and
DECrepeater 90C feature:
• Full repeater per port-no retiming module needed in the DEChub 90 backplane
• Automatically identifies and isolates faulty ports.
·High-speed communications-full 10-Mb/ s Ethernet throughput.
Ordering Information

6.50

Networks, Communications, and Cables

DECrepeater 90C country kits contain the DECrepeater 90C Multiport Ethernet
Repeater, which is 10Base2 ThinWire compliant. DECrepeater 90T country kits
contain the DECrepeater 90T Multiport Ethernet Repeater, which is lOBaseT
twisted-pair compliant. The DECrepeater 90C has six BNC ports; the
DECrepeater 90T has eight UTP ports.

Network Connectivity Products
Ordering Information (Continued)

DECrepater 90C/90T for standalone use; includes power supply.

DECrepeater 90C

DECrepeater 90T

Country

DECMR-AA
DECMR-AD
DECMR-AE
DECMR-AI
DECMR-AK
DECMR-AT
DECMR-AX

DETMR-AA
DETMR-AD
DETMR-AE
DETMR-AI
DETMR-AK
DETMR-AT
DETMR-AX

DECMR-AZ
DECMR-BJ
DECMR-MA

DETMR-AZ
DETMR-BJ
DETMR-MA

U.S., Canada, Japan
Denmark
U.K.
Italy
Switzerland
Israel
Austria, Belgium, France, Germany,
Finland, Holland, Norway, Sweden,
Portugal, Spain
Australia
India
DECrepeater 90C/90T for use with
DEChub 90 (power supply not
included)

Note: Multipack country kits (12) are preceded by DL- in the order number.

H7082-AA
H7082-AB
H0342-AA
Configuring Information

120-V power supply with integral power connector
240-V power supply with IEC connector
Snap-on cover for hub-based model of the DECrepeater
90T/90C

Both the DECrepeater 90T and DECrepeater 90C can be configured as
standalone units or as part of the DEChub 90. When the DECrepeater 90T/90C
is used as a standalone unit, it uses an external power supply. When installed in
the DEChub 90 backplane, power is provided by the backplane power supply.

DESTA Station Adapter (Ethemet)
The ThinWire Ethernet Station Adapter (DESTA) connects a standard 15-pin
AUL station to ThinWire cabling. The DESTA can be attached to standard-cable
Ethernet controllers allowing UNIBUS, Q-bus, and VAXBI devices to connect to
ThinWire Ethernet. It also allows Digital' s Ethernet Communications and Terminal Servers to connect to ThinWire Ethernet.
Ordering Information
Thin Wire 802.3/Ethernet

DESTA-BA

ThinWire Ethernet Station Adapter

BC16M-06
BC16M-15
BC16M-30
H8243-A
H8244-A
H8222
H8223
H8224
H8225
H8242

6-foot (1.8-meter) PVC cable with BNC connectors and boots
15-foot (4.5-meter) PVC cable with BNC connectors and boots
30-foot (9-meter) PVC cable with BNC connectors and boots
1,000-foot (305-meter) ThinWire Ethernet PVC cable
1,000-foot (305-meter) ThinWire Ethernet Plenum (Teflon) cable
Male coaxial connectors and boots
T-connectors and boots
Barrel connectors and boots
Terminators and boots
Installation kit

DECbridge 90 (Ethernet)
The DECbridge 90 is a high-performance bridge that connects a departmental
workgroup to the larger LAN backbone. It keeps local traffic within the workgroup LAN as it forwards traffic that has a destination elsewhere on the backbone. It prevents workgroup traffic from deteriorating overall network performance. As a member of the award-winning WorkGroup Family of Networking
Products, the DECbridge 90 can be used in standalone configurations or snapped
into the DEChub 90 backplane. It features a Thin Wire and AUI connection to
the backbone, and a Thin Wire-only connection to the workgroup. It simplifies
setup and configuration tasks and manages all LAN traffic for up to 200 node
addresses.

Networks, Communications, and Cables

6.51

Network Connectivity Products
DECbridge 90 (Ethernet) Continued)

• Fully autoconfiguring-automatically configures itself for operation with other
LAN Bridge products or any other IEEE 802.1 compliant bridge.
· High-speed communications-filters 29,694 packets/second and forwards 14,847
packets/second, giving workgroups full Ethernet bandwidth.
· Protocol filtering-filters up to 16 protocols in one or in both directions.
• Flexibility-can be used as a standalone bridge or quickly snapped into Digital's
DEChub 90 backplane.
• Indicators-power, use, and status LEDs give a continuous display of all key
functions.

Ordering Information

DECbridge 90 for standalone use; includes power supply.
DEWGB-AA
DEWGB-AD
DEWGB-AE
DEWGB-AI
DEWGB-AK
DEWGB-AT
DEWGB-AX

fl.)

c
0

·::i
0$
u

·~

DEWGB-AZ
DEWGB-BJ

DEWGB-MA

""Q

U.S., Canada, Japan
Denmark
U.K.
Italy
Switzerland
Israel
Austria, Belgium, France, Germany, Finland, Holland, Norway,
Sweden, Portugal, Spain
Australia/New Zealand
India
DECbridge 90 for use with DEChub 90 (power supply not
included)

Note: Multipack country kits (12) are preceded by DL- in the order number.
H7827-AA
H0342-AA

Configuring Information

120/240-V power supply
Snap-on cover for the hub-based model of the
DECbridge 90

The DECbridge 90 has a ThinWire and AUI conection to the backbone and a
ThinWire-only connection to the workgroup. It can be configured as a standalone unit or as part of the DEChub 90 Ethernet backplane. When used as a
standalone unit, this product uses an external power supply. When integrated
with the DEChub 90 backplane, the DECbridge 90 uses the backplane power
supply.

DEChul> 90 (Ethern1!)
The DEChub 90 provides ThinWire Ethernet connections, power, and mounting
for eight plug-compatible WorkGroup Family modules. The hub's revolutionary
design promote easy analysis of the hardware status, hot swap module replacement, and flexible network configurations. Its compact size is ideal for office
environments. The DEChub 90 can be used to create and manage an Ethernet
LAN from one easy-to-manage unit.
When combined with the optional DEHUX enclosure, the DEChub 90 backplane
becomes a mini equipment closet. The DEHUX provides mounting for the backplane and patch panels, and provides a cover that limits access to the equipment
for added security.
Features
• Provides workgroup communication center in a multifunction hub
• Integrates active components and passive wiring-acts as a hub for active
networking components, and a wiring closet for passive wiring.
· Compact-mounts on a wall or in a rack
·Features hot swap module replacement
·Accommodates dense configurations-two DEChub 90 units can be interconnected and managed as a single unit

6.52

Networks, Communications, and Cables

Network Connectivity Products
DEChuh 90 (Continued)
Ordering Information

DEHUB-BA

DEChub 90, 120 V, rack.mount brackets, documentation

Note: The following order numbers include DEChub 90, country-specific power
cord, rack.mount brackets, and documentation:

DEHUB-BD
DEHUB-BE
DEHUB-BI
DEHUB-BK
DEHUB-BT
DEHUB-BZ
DEHUB-CB

Configuring Information

DEHUB-CJ

Denmark
United Kingdom
Italy
Switzerland
Israel
Australia
Austria, Belgium, France, Germany, Finland, Holland, Norway,
Sweden, Portugal, Spain
India

DEHUX-AA

Cover assembly, wall-mount brackets, patch panel brackets

The DEChub 90 backplane accommodates up to eight modules and has an integral power supply. The modules designed for this backplane include the
DECserver 90L, DECserver 90L+, and DECserver 90TL terminal servers,
DECrepeater 90T and DECrepeater 90C Ethernet repeaters, and the DECbridge
90 network bridge. The DEChub 90 backplane supports up to eight modules and
takes up less than one cubic foot of space. Two DEChub 90 units can be
interconnected and managed by one DECbridge 90.

DECbridge Sxx/DECbridge 6xx Series (FDDI)
The DECbridge 5xx and 6xx series are standards-compliant LAN interconnect
devices that join 10-Mbit/second 802.3/Ethernet LANs to 100-Mbit/second FDDI
LANs. Communication between 802.3/Ethernet and FDDI LAN technologies is
accomplished through a standards-based translation capability that also accommodates specialized translation for the AppleTalk protocol and Kinetics devices.
DECbridge 5xx and 6xx series products support Simple Network Management
Protocol (SNMP) , enabling a network manager to monitor, configure, and control
DECbridge 5xx/6xx series such as protocol-filtering, address learning, settable
address filtering, and satistical counters from either Digital or third-party SNMP
network management systems. Additionally, DECmcc Extended LAN Manager
software provides complete VMS-based network management for these products
using Digital's REMS protocol. The DECbridge 5xx and 6xx series support IP
(Internet Protocol) fragmentation. This functionality supports applications that
deal with large IP packets, such as imaging.
Compared to the DECbridge 500, the following new functionality is provided in
the DECbridge 5xx and 6xx series:
• Dual attachment station (DAS) options, providing direct attachment of
DECbridge 52x and 62x products to the FDDI LAN without requiring a
concentrator
• Dual homing support, providing fault tolerance in treed topologies (DAS
versions)
• External optical bypass device support, allowing network bypass of failed device
(DAS multimode versions)
• Single-mode optical fiber FDDI options, allowing up to 40 km between FDDI
stations
Features
• DAS or SAS (single attachment station) connection to FDDI-provides configuration flexibility
• SNMP agent-enables management of DECbridge devices in a multivendor
network

Networks, Communications, and Cables

6.53

Network Connectivity Products
Comparison Chart-DECbridge 500/600 Series
DECbridge 5xx Family
DECbridge 51xl52x

DECbridge 6xx Family
DECbridge 600
DECbridge 61x/62x

Number of LAN connections
802.3/Ethernet
FDDI connection

NIA*

SAS/DAS

Settable filtering
Learning addresses

FDDI

SAS/DAS

Destination/source address, protocol type
14,000

14 ,000

14,000

BNCt and AUI:j:
Multimode/ singlemode fiber optics

AUI

NIA

AUI
Multimode/ singlemode fiber optics

Distances between FDDI stations
Multimode fiber
Single-mode fiber

Up to 2 km
Up to 40 km

NIA
NIA

Up to 2 km
Up to 40 km

SMT version

V6.2

NIA

V6.2

Network management protocol

SNMP/RBMS

Network management

DECmcc Extended LAN Manager for VMS, DECmcc Management Station for ULTRIX Vl.1 , or any
SNMP-based network management system

LAN interface
802 .3 /Ethernet
FDDI

* Not applicable
t ThinWire connection
t Transceiver cable connection to thick wire coaxial cable

Prerequisite Hardware

The SAS-based DECbridge 51x/61x products require the DECconcentrator 500,
or an equivalent concentrator from another vendor, for connection to the FDDI
network. The DAS-based DECbridge 52x/62x products connect either directly to
the dual ring or to a concentrator.

Optional Software

Although no software products are required to operate the DECbridge
51 x/52x/600 series, either DECmcc Extended LAN Manager or DECmcc Management Station for ULTRIX or a third-party SNMP network management system
may be used to manage, monitor, troubleshoot, and fully utilize the settable
characteristics of the devices.

Ordering Information

DECbridge 5xx Series

One FDDI LAN to one 802.3/Ethernet LAN
Note: Order numbers are listed as U.S./non-U.S.

DEFEB-AC/AD
DEFEB-AS/AT
DEFEB-DAIDB
DEFEB-DM/DN
DEFEB-DP/DQ
DEFEB-DS/DT

6.54

Networks, Communications, and Cables

DECbridge 510, SAS, multimode FDDI optics
DECbridge 518, SAS, single-mode FDDI optics
DECbridge 520, DAS, multimode FDDI optics
DECbridge 524, DAS, single-mode FDDI optics Port A,
multimode FDDI optics Port B
DECbridge 526, DAS, multimode FDDI optics Port A,
single-mode FDDI optics Port B
DECbridge 528, DAS, single-mode FDDI optics Ports A and B

Network Connectivity Products
DECbridge 6xx series

One FDDI LAN to three 802.3/Ethernet LANs
Note: Order numbers are listed as U.S./non-U.S.

DEFEB-NC/ND
DEFEB-TA/TB
DEFEB-TS/TT
DEFEB-LA/LB
DEFEB-LM/LN
DEFEB-LP/LQ
DEFEB-LS/LT

DECbridge 600, 3-port 802.3/Ethernet LAN bridge
DECbridge 610, SAS, multimode FDDI optics
DECbridge 618, SAS, single-mode FDDI optics
DECbridge 620, DAS, multimode FDDI optics
DECbridge 624, DAS, single-mode FDDI optics Port A,
multimode FDDI optics Port B
DECbridge 626, DAS, multimode FDDI optics Port A,
single-mode FDDI optics Port B
DECbridge 628, DAS, single-mode FDDI optics Ports A
and B

U.S. versions include a power cord (BN20A-2E); non-U.S. versions require a
power cord.
Notes: The DECbridge 600 is a multiport 802.3/ Ethernet bridge; it does not
include an FDDI interface, but may be easily upgraded when the need for FDDI
arises. All other DECbridge 6xx series products include an FDDI interface.
Refer to the Networks Buyer's Guide for further information.

As a backbone interconnect, the DECconcentrator 500 FDDI concentrator, offers
two ports to connect to the primary and secondary FDDI rings, and one or two
port modules of up to six ports each for connection of devices to the FDDI
LAN. As a standalone device, it can be used to create small, dedicated, highperformance FDDI LANs for specialized communities of users. Used in this way,
the DECconcentrator 500 can accommodate from one- to three-port modules
connecting as may as 18 devices.
Support for "industry-standard" SNMP sets-and-traps allows a network manager
to configure, control, and change device parameters in a multivendor environment from any Digital or non-Digital SNMP management station. The
DECconcentrator 500 also offers Out-of-Band Management (OBM) through the
use of an optional ASCII terminal connected directly to the DECconcentrator
500, providing an alternative path for management access to the device if inband
management is blocked or a lower-cost concentrator management solution for
small, single concentrator FDDI workgroup configurations. Additionally, Optical
Bypass Relay Support is provided, allowing the concentrator to control an external Optical Bypass Relay (OBR). By allowing the datastream to bypass an off-line
DECconcentrator, this feature maintains dual ring integrity during local power
failures or if a fault condition occurs in the concentrator.
The dual-attachment DECconcentrator 500 provides considerable flexibility for
configuring a network in a "dual ring of trees," the predominant FDDI LAN
topology. Users can construct hierarchical topologies by attaching one
DECconcentrator 500 to another, cascading devices several levels deep.
The DECconcentrator 500 supports both multimode fiber (MMF) and singlemode fiber (SMF), ThinWire and Shielded Twisted Pair (STP), providing costeffective and flexible connections. Using laser technology, single-mode fiber
options support station-to-station FDDI connections of up to 40 kilometers (24.8
miles).

Networks, Communications, and Cables

6.55

Network Connectivity Products
DECconcentrator 5000 (FDDI)

Comparison of DECconcentrator 500 Media Support

(Continued)
Media
Distance supported
Maximum number user ports:
Attached to FDDI dual ring
Standalone configuration

ANSI Optics
(DEFCN-N)
2 km

Low-Power
Optics
(DEFCN-L)
1 km

8
12

ThinWire
or STP
(DEFCN-S/T)
100 m

8
12

12
18

Regardless of the system type, the DECconcentrator 500 provides ANSI
Station Management (SMT) facilities. SMT is the data link level capability for
station and link configuration and management. It features the following
capabilities:
• Ensures interoperability within multivendor networks using standards-compliant
FDDI technology
• Permits attachment of FDDI single and dual attachment stations (bridges, systems, workstations, and other concentrators) to the FDDI LAN
• Optimizes topological flexibility by reducing complicated configuration rules and
limitations characteristic of a DAS-only FDDI ring
• Modular design provides low-cost entry to the FDDI network
• Provides device insertion and removal through SAS ports, minimizing network
disruption and inadvertent ring segmentation
Prerequisites

Hardware: In supporting copper, either ThinWire or STP, the controller and
concentrator device must be matched to provide the same interface as the
selected physical media. The DECconcentrator (DEFCN-Ax or DEFCN-Bx)
requires firmware revision 3 .0 or higher to support the 6-port copper option
modules. Devices shipped after June 28, 1991, will meet this requirement. For
earlier units, a firmware upgrade (QB) kit must be ordered. Refer to the Networks Buyer's Guide for further details.
Software: Although no software products are required to manage the
DECconcentrator 500, DECmcc management products are recommended to monitor and control capabilities of the DECconcentrator 500. For further information, refer to the Networks Buyer's Guide.

Ordering Information

All models include installation instructions. The DECconcentrator 500 is ordered
on a component basis. Either box (rack or tabletop) accepts up to three cards,
one of which can be a Network Management Card.
DEFCN-AC

FDDI DECconcentrator box with OBM, U.S. power cord,
rackmount

DEFCN-BC

FDDI DECconcentrator box with OBM, U.S. power cord,
tabletop

Note: Specify "A" for factory installation or "F" for field installation. Field
installation requires an additional service charge. Stringent application guidelines
apply for the use of single-mode fiber.
Management Modules for FDDI DECconcentrator 500
DEFCN-C
DEFCN-D
DEFCN-E
DEFCN-MB/MH

Two ports with A = single-mode and B = multimode
Two ports with A = multimode and B = single mode
Two ports each with single-mode fiber
Two ports, multimode, with OBR control; factory/field installed

Port Modules for FDDI DECconcentrator 500
DEFCN-F
DEFCN-L
DEFCN-N
DEFCN-S
DEFCN-T

Four ports with two multimode and two single mode
Four ports with low power optics
Four ports each with multimode fiber
Six ports Shielded Twisted Pair (STP) copper
Six ports ThinWire copper

Note: Additional configurations are available for these products. Refer to the

Networks Buyer's Guide for details.
6.56

Networks, Communications, and Cables

Network Connectivity Products

The DF242-CA Scholar Plus Modem combines high performance with a unique
modem access security system. Valuable data is protected by a sophisticated
scheme of callback security with password verification. It is a full-duplex modem
that communicates asynchronously at speeds of 2400, 1200, and 300 bits/s or
2400 and 1200 bits/s synchronously over dial-up lines. It provides savings in
telephone line costs and features speed buffering and the support of two
error-correction protocols.

Ordering Information

Specifications

DF242-CA

2400/1200/300 bits/s FDX Scholar Plus Modem

Compatible with

2400 bits/s, CCITT V.22 bis
1200 bits/s, CCITT V.22 Bell 212A
300 bits/s, Bell 103}

Interface compatibility

EIA-23 2-D, EIA-4 23

Front panel
control switches

Data/Talk (DT), Test Loop (TL),
and Power On/Off

Power

Wall-mounted power supply, 120 V, 60 Hz

Size

3 cm high x 15 .2 cm wide x 21.8 cm deep
(1.19 in. high x 6 in. wide x 8.62 in. deep)

Weight

4.4 kg (2 lb), with power supply

Auto-dialer features

Stores up to 30 telephone numbers (36 characters
long) and/or labels in non-volatile memory; phone
number linking capabilities (DMCL only) ; Call
Progress Monitoring

Error correction

Microcom Networking Protocol (MNP) Class 2
and 3, or X.PC (TYMNET implementation)

Answer mode security

Access security via password (DMCL only)

Speed buffering

Asynchronous speed buffering from 1200 to 9600
bit/s with optional XON/XOFF or RTS/CTS flow
control

Note: For more information, contact the EiC Sales Support Center at
800-832-6277 or 603 -884-8990.

The DECmodem V32 offers both desktop and rackmount options with asynchronous and synchronous modes of operation at speeds of 9600, 4800, 2400, or
1200 bits/s over dial-up or leased lines. A complete security system, greater
adaptable speed capabilities and enhanced error correction make the DECmodem
perfect for high-performance communications needs. In addition to the Digital
Modem Command Language (DMCL), it supports the Hayes AT command set
for more experienced users.
HELP screen displays make operating the DECmodem a simple procedure. By
selecting a command, the following features may be activated:
• Modem setup parameters can be uniquely defined and stored.
· Remote access option enables Digital Services personnel to examine or change
the modem's setup parameters, dial memory, and/or callback memory without an
on-site visit.

Networks, Communications, and Cables

6.57

Network Connectivity Products
DECmodem V32 (Continued)

· Access security allows only authorized personnel to access the modem parameters
list, dial memory and callback memory locations.
· Callback security screens all incoming calls, whether manual or auto-answered
before allowing access to the host system.
· Enhanced auto-dialing enables storage of up to 99 telephone numbers, including
credit card numbers.
• Self-test diagnostics allow the modem to check its own internal logic when the
power is turned on. It is also equipped with remote diagnostic capability.
The rackmount version of the DECmodem V32 is functionally identical to the
desktop version yet provides additional benefits. When switching from dial-up
connections to leased lines, simply change the front panel of the DECmodem
V32 from PSTN (Public Switched Telephone Network) to PLTN (Private Leased
Telephone Network) and attach the private line wiring.
It provides dial backup capability which allows the DECmodem V32 rackmount to
automatically detect a failure in the leased line connection, switch into dial-up
mode, and dial a prestored number on a dial-up line. The rackmount version can
be configured to use the dial backup facility through the Digital Modem Command
Language (DMCL) and requires no operator intervention.

Ordering Information

Specifications

DF296-DA
DF196-DM

DECmodem V32 Desktop
DECmodem V32 Rackmount Module

Compatible with

9600 and 4800 bits/s, CCITT V32
2400 bits/s, CCITT V.22 bis
1200 bits/s, CCITT V.22 and Bell 212A

Interface compatibility

EIA-232-D

Front panel indicators

Carrier Detect, Send Data, Off Hook, Receive Data,
Test Mode (desktop only), Data Terminal Ready,
Modem Ready (DF196)

Power

120 V, 60 Hz

Size

7 .6 cm high x 15 .2 cm wide x 25 .4 cm long
(3 in. high x 6 in. wide x 10 in. long)

Auto-dialer features

Stores up to 99 numbers (50 characters long) and/
or labels in non-volatile memory; phone number
linkage (DMCL only); call progress monitoring

Error correction

MNP Class 4 (asynchronous mode only)

Access mode security

Via Passthru

Speed buffering

Asynchronous speed buffering from 1200 to 19 ,200
bits/s with optional XON/XOFF or RTS/CTS flow
control

Note: For more information, contact the EIC Sales Support Center at
800-832-6277 or 603-884-8990.

6.58

Networks, Communications, and Cables

DECtalk Speech Synthesizers
DEGtalk Speech Syntbesizecs (Voice)

-'filim-----------------------.............

....-illiiiiiillo......._ ._ _ _ _......,......,......_.~--~-----...

Digital's family of DECtalk speech synthesizers can convert ordinary ASCII text
into spoken output, can control a telephone line, and can translate and transmit
user DTMF input to the host.
Any ASCII computer can communicate with the DECtalk speech synthesizer
using ordinary ANSI escape sequences. VMS-based applications can take advantage of the VMS-provided DECtalk programming interface, and the optional
DECvoice Software name pronunciation support.
The DECtalk family includes two complementary products that cover many application and system requirements:
· The DECtalk-I DTCOl is a small, self-contained, single telephone line voice synthesizer intended for desktop use. DECtalk-I is ideal for small business applications that require system annunciators, and for interactive terminals and workstations. DECtalk-I includes a local speaker.
· The DECtalk-III DTC03 is a rackmount system that supports from two to eight
telephone lines. DECtalk-III is the system of choice for environments that require
dial-out audio call-progress detection capabilities, for computer room environments, and for applications that require a large number or a high density of
telephone lines.
Call 508-493-0645 for a demonstration of the DECtalk synthesizer.

Features
·With any Touch-Tone telephone, DECtalk and the telephone keypad function as
a terminal keyboard to control a host computer and access information.
• Connects to the computer through a standard EIA-232-C serial line.
• Ten voices and unlimited vocabulary.
• User-defined dictionary with acronyms and industry-specific terms.
• Self-contained, onboard diagnostics.
• Sophisticated telephone-handling features .
· Compatible with the DECvoice software name pronunciation support.
·Dial-out audio call progress detection is standard on the DECtalk-111. DECtalk-1
supports "blind dialing. "

Ordering Information

DTCOl-AA

Single-line DECtalk-I text-to-speech unit. One 10-foot
(3-meter) BC22D-10 cable is included.

DTCOJ-AA

Multiple-line DECtalk-III, 8-channel text-to-speech unit. Eight
serial cables required.

DTCOJ-SC

Two-line DECtalk-III, 2-channel text-to-speech unit. Two serial
cables required.

DTCOJ-AM

DECtalk-III board, single-channel DECtalk module. No power
supply, enclosure or cabling. Can be an add-on for the
DTC03-SC DECtalk-III rack; can also be integrated into custom
customer platforms. System designers should also order the
documentation kit FB-DTC03.
DECconnect serial cable.

H8575-A

One MMJ adapter is required for each DECtalk-I used in a
DECconnect wiring system.

H8571-D

One adapter is required for each DTC03-AM module in a
DECtalk-III rack (DTC03-SC or DTC03-AA) when used in a
DECconnect wiring system.

* Refer to Cables, at the end of this chapter for available lengths.

Networks, Communications, and Cables

6.59

DECtalk Speech Synthesizers
Ordering Information (Continued)

BC22D-xx*

Null modem cable, used for DECtalk-I applications.

BC22E-xx*

Modem cable, one required for each DTC03-AM module
installed in a DECtalk-III rack (DTC03-SC or DTC03-AA).

QL-VFUA9-Jx

DECvoice software license for VMS (optional). Supplements the
general DECtalk pronunciation rules with support
tailored specifically to surname pronunciation. See the
DECvoice description in Chapter 4 of this catalog. Requires
QA-VFUA9-Hx binaries.

QA-VFUA9-Hx

DECvoice software binaries for VMS. Optional. Requires
QL-VFUA9-Jx license .

.,, Refer to Cables, at the end of this chapter for available lengths.

Note: For ordering assistance contact the EIC Sales Support Center at
800-832-6277 or 603-884-8990.
Configuring Information

Connect DECtalk to a Digital or other computer with a standard EIA-232 compatible line running from the host computer to DECtalk's communication portDECconnect cabling system recommended. The host system must support fullduplex connections, standard XON/XOFF flow control, and be able to pass the
full ASCII character set.
To connect DECtalk to the telephone system, order standard telephone service.
For DECtalk-III installations, request RJ21X service (CA21A in Canada).
DECtalk-I installations should request RJllX service (or CAllA in Canada). If
RJ21X/CA21A service is unavailable, for information regarding an RJ21X to RJl l
adapter, contact the EIC Sales Support Center at 800-832-6277 or 603-884-8990.
All DECtalk synthesizers are approved for connection to the Public Switched
Telephone Network (PSTN) in the United States and in Canada.

6.60

Networks, Communications, and Cables

Cables
Note: For additional cabling information, refer to the Networks Buyer)s Guide) the DECdirect catalog, and the OPEN
DECconnect Building Wiring Components and Applications catalog.

Order Number

Length

Description

BCC14-10

10 ft (3 .05 m)

16-position EIA-232 peripheral cable

BC06M-20

20 ft (6.1 m)

37-position D -subminiature to 37-position
D -subminiature cable

Connects DRVlW-Sx to Q-bus VAX
or PDP-11 systems

BC06P-06
BC06P-09
BC06P-2F

6 ft (1.8 m)
9 ft (2.7 m)
2.5 ft (0.8 m)

SCSI cable

VAX 4000, DECsystem 5500,
R400X, B400X

BC16D-50
BC16D-AO

50 ft (15.24 m)
100 ft (30.5 m)

36-position, right-angle, male-to-male, shielded, 18
twisted-pair extension cable

DECconnect, EIA-423-A Q-bus
products

BC16E-02
BC16E-10
BC16E-25
BC16E-50
BC16E-AO

2 ft (0.6 m)
10 ft (3.1 m)
25 ft (7 .6 m)
50 ft (15.2 m)
100 ft (30.5 m)

Six-conductor cable for terminal connection MMP
to MMP with crossover pinning

DECconnect standard terminal
connection cable

BC16K-02
BC16K-10

2 ft (0.6 m)
10 ft (3.05 m)

ThinWire patch cord

Patches ThinWire patch panel to
DEMPR

BC16M-06
BC16M-15
BC16M-30

6 ft (1.8 m)
15 ft (4.6 m)
30 ft (9.2 m)

ThinWire 802.3/Ethernet PVC cable with BNC
connectors and boots

ThinWire 802.3/Ethernet products

BC16U-10

10 ft (3.1 m)

Cross-connect for 8-pin MP DETPR lOBaseT
repeater to existing DECconnect wiring.

BC17C-10
BC17C-25

10 ft (3 .1 m)
25 ft (7.6 m)

Full EIA-232C/CCITT V.28 modem cable, round,
17-wire, fully shielded, male-to-female molded
connectors

802.3/Ethernet Communications
Servers (DCSAX-LA line cards)

BC17D-10
BC17D-25
BC17D-50
BC17D-AO

10 ft (3.1 m)
25 ft (7 .6 m)
50 ft (15.2 m)
100 ft (30.5 m)

EIA-232C/CCITT V.28, fully shielded, null modem,
10-wire, female-to-female molded connectors

802.3/Ethernet Communications
Servers (DCSAX-LB line cards)

BC17E-25

25 ft (7.6 m)

CCITT V.35, fully shielded, modem cable (Note:
This cable has an EIA-449 connector on the CPU
end, and a V.35 connector on the modem end.)

802.3/Ethernet Communications
Servers (DCSAX-LB line cards),
DMR

BC17N-24

24 ft (7.3 m)

Connectors: One female and one male 50-position
D-subminiature

Connects TU80/TU81 tape with
CPU

BC19M-10

10 ft (3.1 m)

Parallel printer cable

Connects parallel printers to PCs

BC22D-10
BC22D-25
BC22D-50
BC22D-AO
BC22D-BO
BC22D-B5

10 ft (3.1 m)
25 ft (7 .6 m)
50 ft (15.2 m)
100 ft (30.5 m)

Null modem cable, round, 6-wire, fully shielded,
EIA-232C/CCITT V.28, female-to-female molded
connectors

Local connection of asynchronous
terminals

200 ft (61.0 m)
250 ft (7 6.2 m)

BC22E-02
BC22E-10
BC22E-25
BC22E-50
BC22E-AO
BC22E-BO
BC22E-B5

2 ft (0.6 m)
10 ft (3.1 m)
25 ft (7.6 m)
50 ft (15.2 m)
100 ft (30.5 m)
200 ft (61.0 m)
250 ft (7 6.2 m)

Modem cable, round, 16-wire, fully shielded,
EIA-232C/CCITT V.28, male-to-female molded
connectors

Connection of asynchronous
modems

10 ft (3.1 m)

Full, EIA-232C/CCITT V.28 modem cable, round,
25-wire, fully shielded, male-to-female molded
connectors

Connections of synchronous
modems

BC22F-10
BC22F-25
BC22F-50
BC22F-AO
BC22F-BO

25 ft (7.6 m)
50 ft (15.2 m)

Where Used

100 ft (30.5 m)
200 ft (61.0 m)

Networks, Communications, and Cables

6.61

Cables
Order Number

fll
QI

=iu

Length

Description

Where Used

BC22H-02

2 ft (0.6 m)

Female-to-male converter

BC22J-02

2 ft (0.6 m)

Male-to-female converter

BC22U-10
BC22U-25
BC22U-50

10 ft (3.1 m)

25 ft (7 .6 m)
50 ft (15.2 m)

Full, EIA-232C/CCITT V.28 modem cable,
D -subminiature connector, fully shielded,
male-to-female molded connectors

KMVlA configuration in BA2xx
enclosure

BC22W-25
BC22W-50

25 ft (7 .6 m)
50 ft (15.2 m)

EIA-422/423 communications cable, 37-conductor,
D -subminiature connector, fully shielded, molded
connectors

KMVlA configuration in BA2xx
enclosure

BC23T-10
BC23T-25

10 ft (3.1 m)

ISDN communications cable

DIV32 ISDN interface

25 ft (7.6 m)

BC26V-6D
BC26V-12
BC26V-25
BC26V-50
BC26V-80

6 ft (1.85 m)
12 ft (3.7 m)
25 ft (7.6 m)
50 ft (15.2 m)
80 ft (24.4 m)

Connectors: Two 8-position, 2 by 4 (four signal, four

Interfaces between controllers and
storage interconnect (SI) type
storage devices

BC27A-30
BC27A-50

30 ft (9.3 m)
50 ft (15.2 m)

37 -position female D -connector to 50-position male
D -connector shielded cable

Parallel printer cable

BC55D-50

50 ft (15.2 m)

EIA-423-AIEIA-449 interface connectors

Connection of DMR, DMP, DMV
options

BC55T-25
BC55T-50
BC55T-AO
BC55T-B5

25 ft (7.6 m)
50 ft (15 .2 m)
100 ft (30.5 m)

Integral modem, twinaxial cable with BNC
connectors

Connects fully shielded DMR, DMP,
DMV options

Connectors: One 9-position female D-subminiature

Fully shielded printer cable

ground)

250 ft (76.2 m)
10 ft (3.0 m)
25 ft (7.6 m)
50 ft (15.2 m)

BCC05-10
BCC05-25
BCC05-50
BCC05-AO

100 ft (30.5 m)

BN24A-2E
BN24A-3E

8.2 ft (2.5 m)
11.8 ft (3.6 m)

Daisychain office cable

Daisychain faceplate connector is
required

BN24B-01
BN24B-03
BN24B-4E
BN24B-10
BN24B-20
BN24B-30

3.2 ft (1 m)
9.8 ft (3 m)
14.8 ft (4.5 m)
32.8 ft (10 m)
65.6 ft (20 m)
98.4 ft (30 m)

FDDI x FDDI cable assembly with crossover

Connects FDDI-compatible devices
where a transmit/receive crossover
is required

BN24D-01
BN24D-03
BN24D-4E
BN24D-10
BN24D-20
BN24D-30

3.2 ft (1 m)
9.8 ft (3 m)
14.8 ft (4.5 m)
32.8 ft (10 m)
65 .6 ft (20 m)
98.4 ft (30 m)

FDDI x 2.5-mm bayonet connection cable assembly

BN24E-01
BN24E-03
BN24E-4E
BN24E-10
BN24E-20
BN24E-30

3.2 ft (1 m)
9.8 ft (3 m)
14.8 ft (4.5 m)
32.8 ft (10 m)
65 .6 ft (20 m)
98.4 ft (30 m)

Dual 2.5-mm bayonet connection cable assembly

BN24F-03
BN24F-04

9.8 ft (3 m)
13.1 ft (4 m)

Two twisted-pair cable configured with 8-pin
modular plugs and crossover pinning

6.62

Networks, Communications, and Cables

and one 25-position female D-subminiature

Connects lOBaseT workstation to
8-pin faceplate connector; used in
conjunction with DE1PR or other
repeaters that do not implement an
internal crossover

Cables
Order Number

Length

Description

Where Used

BN24G-Ol
BN24G-03
BN24G-04
BN24G-07

3.3 ft (1 m)
9.8 ft (3 m)
13.1 ft (4 m)
23 .0 ft (7 m)

Four twisted-pair cable configured with 8-pin
modular plugs and wired pin to pin

Used as OPEN DECconnect patch
cord to connect I-13107-L/M/N
patch panel inserts; also used as an
office cable for ISDN or as an office
cable for lOBaseT workstations
where the crossover is internal to
the repeater

BN24H-03
BN24H-04

9.8 ft (3 m)
13.1 ft (4 m)

Three twisted-pair cable configured with one 6-pin
modified modular plug, one standard 8-pin modular
plug, and crossover pinning

Connects the 6-pin MMJ port of a
terminal or printer to the 8-pin MJ
faceplate outlet jack

BN24J-Ol
BN24J-03
BN24J-07

3.2 ft (1 m)
9.8 ft (3 m)
22.9 ft (7 m)

Three twisted-pair cable configured with one 6-pin
modified modular plug and one standard 8-pin
modular plug (pin-to-pin wiring)

Connects the 6-pin MMJ port of
EIA-423 server to the 8-pin MMJ
patch panel insert jack

BN24K-03

9.8 ft (3 m)

Shielded 18 twisted-pair cable configured with one
male 36-position right angle connector and one male
50-position straight connector

Connects the 36-position port of a
DECserver 200/DL or CXA16
terminal server to the 50-position
port of the H3107-M patch panel
insert

BN24L-03

9.8 ft (3 m)

Octopus cable configured with eight 6-pin modified
modular plugs and one male 50-position straight
connector

Connects the 6-pin MMJ port of an
EIA-423 server to the 50-position
port of the I-13107-M patch panel
insert

BN24M-03

9.8 ft (3 m)

Octopus cable configured with eight-position
standard modular plugs and one male 50-position
straight connector

Connects the 8-pin MMJ ports of a
lOBaseT server to the 50-position
port of the I-13107-M patch panel
insert

BN24N-03

9.8 ft (3 m)

Octopus cable configured with eight-position
standard modular plugs and one male 36-position
right-angle connector

Connects the 36-position port of
DECserver 200/DL or CXA16
terminal server to the 8-pin MMJ
ports of the H3107-N patch panel
insert

BN25G-OE
BN25G-01
BN25G-03
BN25G-04
BN25G-07

1.6 ft (0.5 m)
3.3 ft (1.0 m)
9.8 ft (3 .0 m)
13.1 ft (4.0 m)
22.3 ft (7 .0 m)

8-MP to 8-MP high performance grade 4-pair cable.
This cable is wired pin to pin.

DECconnect patch cord or lOBaseT
or Token Ring office cable

BN25J-10
BN25J-20
BN25J-50
BN25J-AO
BN25J-B5
BN25J-EO

32 .8 ft (10 m)
65 .6 ft (20 m)
164.1 ft (50 m)
328.2 ft (100 m)
820.0 ft (250 m)
1640.0 ft (500 m)

VCS FOSHA-AC/AD fiber optic cable

Connects DHFl 1 remote terminal
concentrator to DHFll controller,
and parallel printers to LPll,
DMB32, LPVll, LPVll-SA,
DSRVP-AA via LLFOl-A

BN26K-OE
BN26K-03
BN26K-04
BN26K-07

1.6 ft (0.5 m)
9.8 ft (3 .0 m)
13 .1 ft (4 .0 m)
22.3 ft (7 .0 m)

8-MP to 8-MP 2-pair office cable for lOBaseT wired
pin to pin

lOBaseT repeaters that use an
internal crossover (DETMR)

BN26L-03
BN26L-04
BN26L-07

9.8 ft (3 .0 m)
13.1 ft (4.0 m)
22.3 ft (7 .0 m)

8-MP to 8-MP shielded high-performance grade
2-pair cable wired pin to pin

lOBaseT repeaters that use an
internal crossover (DETMR)

BN26M-OE
BN26M-01
BN26M-03
BN26M-04
BN26M-07

1.6 ft (0.5 m)
3.3 ft (1.0 m)
9.8 ft (3.0 m)
13.1 ft (4.0 m)
22.3 ft (7.0 m)

8-MP to 8-MP shielded high-performance grade
4-pair cable wired pin to pin

Shielded open DECconnect patch
cord or lOBaseT or Token Ring
office cable

BN26N-03
BN26N-04
BN26N-07

9.8 ft (3 .0 m)
13.1 ft (4.0 m)
22.3 ft (7 .0 m)

8-MP to 8-MP shielded high-performance grade
2-pair cable wired with crossover

lOBaseT repeaters that do not
implement an internal crossover
(DETPR)

BNCIA-10
BNCIA-20
BNCIA-45

32.8 ft (10 m)
65 .6 ft (20 m)
147.6 ft (45 m)

Connectors: BNC-type connectors

Cable set that connects CPU/storage
controllers to the Star Coupler

Networks, Communications, and Cables 6.63

..Cl

Cables

:aI
~

Order Number

Length

Description

Where Used

BNE2A-MA
BNE2A-MB
BNE2A-MC
BNE2A-ME

76.8 ft (23 .4 m)
230.3 ft (70.2 m)
383 .9 ft (117 m)
1640.4 ft (500 m)

Plenum-rated coaxial cable

Standard 802.3/ Ethernet cable
(backbone)

BNE2B-MA
BNE2B-MB
BNE2B-MC
BNE2B-ME

76.8 ft (23 .4 m)
230.3 ft (70.2 m)
383.9 ft (117 m)
1640.4 ft (500 m)

PVC-insulated coaxial cable

Ethernet

BNE3B-05
BNE3H-10
BNE3H-20
BNE3H-40

16.4 ft (5 m)
32.8 ft (10 m)
65.6 ft (20 m)
131.2 ft (40 m)

PVC-insulated transceiver cable with straight
connector

IEEE 802.3

BNE3K-05
BNE3K-10
BNE3K-20
BNE3K-40

16.4 ft (5 m)
32.8 ft (10 m)
65 .6 ft (20 m)
131.2 ft (40 m)

PVC-insulated transceiver cable with right-angle
connector

IEEE 802.3

BNE3L-05
BNE3L-10
BNE3L-20
BNE3L-40

16.4 ft (5 m)
32.8 ft (10 m)
65 .6 ft (20 m)
131.2 ft (40 m)

Plenum-rated transceiver cable with straight
connector

IEEE 802.3

BNE3M-05
BNE3M-10
BNE3M-20
BNE3M-40

16.4 ft (5 m)
32.8 ft (10 m)
65 .6 ft (20 m)
131.2 ft (40 m)

Plenum-rated transceiver cable with right-angle
connector

IEEE 802.3

BNE4C-02
BNE4C-05

6.6 ft (2 m)
16.4 ft (5 m)

Office transceiver cable with PVC insulation, straight
connector

IEEE 802.3

BNE4D-02
BNE4D-05

6.6 ft (2 m)
16.4 ft (5 m)

Office transceiver cable with PVC insulation,
right-angle connector

IEEE 802.3

BS06M-21

21.0 ft (6.4 m)

37-position to 40-position (via adapter) cable

Connects DRVlW-Sx to Q -bus VAX
or PDP-11 systems

H4010-AA

BA2xx to BA4xx
connection kit

For connections between BA2xx series enclosures
and BA4xx series enclosures.

H8243-A

1000.0-ft (300 m)

PVC-insulated ThinWire cable spool

ThinWire 802.3/Ethernet products

H8244-A

1000.0-ft (300 m)

Plenum-rated ThinWire cable spool

ThinWire 802.3/Ethernet products

H8245-A
H8246-A

1000.0-ft reel PVC
1000.0 ft reel Plenum
rated

DECconnect Terminal Interconnect.

Connects faceplate or wallplate to

SER

MMJ Accessories
Order Number

Description

BC16E-02
BC16E-10
BC16E-25
BC16E-50
BC16E-AO

EIA-423 office cable

H0401-A

Crossover switch (four EIA-423 connectors)

H8571-C

25-pin male EIA-423 DECconnect to EIA adapter (with 5 male pins) with mating hex nuts

H8571-D

Full 25 -pin male EIA-423 DECconnect to EIA filtered adapter with jack screws

H8571-E

EIA-423 DECconnect 25-pin adapter with jack screws

H8571-J

9-pin MMJ adapter

H8572-00

MMJ cable extender

H8575-A

Female 25-pin EIA-423 DECconnect MMJ to EIA general-purpose adapter with jack screws

H8575-B

Female 9-pin EIA-423 DECconnect to printer adapter with jack screws

H8672-A

PC to printer interconnect kit

6.64

Networks, Communications, and Cables

Cables
N ote: The associated connections in the following charts are not a statement of software/firmware device support, only of
physical connectivity.

CoJl!1Ilunications
Device from

Device to

Cable used, adapter needed

DECSA

LA210/ LA120/LA100/LA50/LG31/LN03
LQP02/VT100/VT200/VT300 1/VT420 1

BC22D

CXY082
DSRVA
DSRVB-AA

LA70 /LA324 1/ DEClaser 2000 series 1/LA75 1/LJ250 1/VT300 1/VT420 1

H8575-A + BC16E

DFl00/200 asynchronous modems

BC22E or BCC14

DFl00/200 series synchronous modems (2400 baud or less)

BC22F

DFlOO series synchronous modems (over 2400 baud)

BC17C

DECSA, host CPU

BC17D

Local synchronous connection

BC17D

V.35 modems

BC17E

DECmate/ PR0-300/Rainbow/VAXmate
DHQ11/DHU11/DMB32/ DZ11
LA210/ LA120/ LA100/LA50/ LG31/LN03
LQP20/VT100/VT200/VT300 1/VT420 1

BC22D

DSRVP-AA
2

CXY08
DSRVB-AA

LA70 / LA324 / DEClaser 2000 series 1/LA75 1/LJ250 1/VT300 1/VT420 1

H8575-A + BC16E

LG01/LG02/LP27 / LP37 / LP29 parallel printers

BC27A

DFl00/200 asynchronous modems operating at 2400 baud or slower

BC22E or BCC14

DFlOO synchronous modems operating at 4800 baud or faster

BC22F

EIA-423 Open DECconnect Version Communications Interfaces
Device from

Device to

Cable used, adapter needed

CXA163
DHB32 3
DHQ11 3
DHT11 3
DHV11 3
DSRVB-B3

LA21O/LA120/LA100/LA50/LG31/LN03
LQP02/DECmate/PR0-300/Rainbow
VAXmate/ DHQ11/DHU1 llDMB32/DZ11
VT100/VT200

H8575-A + BC16E

CXA164
DSRVB-B3

LA75 /LJ250 1/VT300 1/VT420 1/LA70 1
DEClaser 2000 1/ LA324 1

BC16E

DSRZC

DM3XX EIA-422 Local Connect

BC19Y

DFMZA

LA210/LA120/LA100/LA50/LG31/LN03
LQP02/VT100/VT200/VT300 1/VT420 1

BC22D

LA70 1/ LA324 1/DEClaser 2000 series 1/ LA75 1/ LJ250 1/VT300 1/VT420 1

H8575-A + BC16E

DFlOO synchronous modems

BC22F

DECmate/ PR0-300/Rainbow/VAXmate

BC22D

DFMZA (EIA-423)

BC17D

DELNI
DESTA
H4000
H4005

DEBET/ DEBNAIDECSAIDELQA/ DELUA
DEMPR/DEMSA/DEQNAIDESNA
DESNC/ DESQAIDESVA-B/ DSRVA
DSRVB/ DSRVC/DSRVS/DSRZA

BNE3x

DELNI
DESTA
H4000

DECNA

BCC06 + BNE3 x

H4000

DEREP

BNE3x

Networks, Communications, and Cables 6.65

Cables
EIA-423 DECconnect Version Communications Interfaces (Continued)
Device from

Device to

Cable used, adapter needed
5

DEMPR
DES PR

DEPCA/DEST AIDESVA/VAXmate

BC16M

DMRll
DMPll
DMVll

EIA-422/423 modems

BC55D

DMRl l/DMPl l/DMVl 1 (integral point)

BC55S or BC55T

DFlOO synchronous modems operating faster than 2400 baud

BC17C

V.35 modems

BC17E

DFl00/200 modems operating at
2400 baud or slower

BC22F

DECmate/ PR0-3 00/ RainbowIVAXmate
LA210/ LA120/ LA1 OO/ LA50/ LG31/ LN03
LQP02/VT100/VT200/VT300 1/VT420 1

BC22D

LA70 1/ LA324 1/ DEClaser 2000 series 1/
LA75 1/ LJ250 1/VT300 1/VT420 1

H8575-A + BC16E
BC22E or BCC14

DF03/ DF112/ DF124/ DF126/ DF224/ DF242

BC22F

CXY086
DHQ11 6
DHU11 6
DHV11 6
DMB32 6
DMF32 6
DMZ32 6
DZ11 6
DZ32 6
DZQ11 6
DZV11 6
DMB32 6
DMF32 6

DF126/ DF127/ DF129

DF112/ DF124/ DF126/ DF224/ DF242 (asynchronous only)

BC22E or BCC14

DF126 (synchronous only) 2400 baud and slower

BC22F

DF127 / DF129 (synchronous only) faster than 2400 baud

BC17C

DMF32/DMB32 (synchronous integral modem)

BC17D

LA210/ LA120/ LA100/ LA50/ LG31/LN03
LQP02/VT100/VT200/VT300 1/VT420 1

BC22D

LG01/ LG02/ LP25/ LP26/ LP27 / LP29

BC27A

LP04/ LP14

BC27B

DF03
DF112
DF124
DF126
DF224
DF242
DFM04-16

CXY08/DH11/DHB32/DHQ11 / DHV1 l
DHT11/ DHU11/DMB32/DMF32/DMZ32
DV11/DZ11/DZQ11/DZV11/LA210/ LA120
LA 100/ LN03 /VTl 00/VT200/VT3 00 1/VT420 1 DECmate/ PR0-3 00/ RainbowIV AXmate

BC22E or BC22F
BCC14

DF126
DF127
DF129

DMB32/ DMC 11/DMF32/DMP11/DMR11/
DMVl 1/DPVl 1

BC17C

DFM04-16

VT 100/VT200/VT3 00 1/VT420 1 DECmate/PRO-300/RainbowIV AXmate

BCC14

LA2 10/ LA120/ LA100/ LA50/ LG31/LN03
LQP02/ DHB32/ DHU11/DMB32/ DMF32
DHQll/ DHVl 1/DZQll

BC22E or BC22F

DFM04-16 (concentrated link port only)

BC22L

DFl00/200 modems on channel ports only

BC22M

Video f erminals
Device from

Device to

Cable used, adapter needed

VTl00-180

LA70/ LA324 DEClaser 2000 series/ LA75/ LJ250
LA701/ LA324 1/ DEClaser 2000 series 1/ LA75 1/LJ250 1

BC16E
H8575-A

LA50/ LA100/ LA210/ LG31 / LN03 / LQP02/ LQP03

BC22D

VT200 Series

LA70 / LA324 / DEClaser 2000 series / LA75 / LJ250
LA50/ LA100/LA2 10/LN03/ LQP02/LQP03

6.66

Networks, Communications, and Cables

H8575-B
BCC05

Cables
Video Terminals (Continued)
Device from

Device to

VT300 Series
VT420

LA70 /LA324 / DEClaser 2000 series 1/ LA75 1/LJ250 1

BC16E7

LA50/LA100/LA210/LN03/LQP02/LQP03

H8575-A + BC16E

LQP45

H8575-A+
BC 16E or BC22D

CXY08/DECSA/DLVJ1/DHB32/ DHF11
DHQ11/DHT11/ DHU11/ DHV11/DMB32
DMF32/ DMZ32/DSRVA-AA/ DSRVB-AA
DSRZA

BC22D

DFl00-200 series asynchronous modems

BCC14
BC22E or BC22F

DFlOO series synchronous modems

BC22F or BCC04

VT100-VT180
VT200
VT300 1
VT420

Cable used, adapter needed
1

Device from

Device to

Cable used, adapter needed

RA60
RA70
RA80/ RA81 IRA82
RA90/RA92
SA482
SA550
SA600/SA650
SA800/SA850

HSC5X-BA/HSC5X-DAIKDA50/ KDB50/RB86/ UDA50

BC26V

Device from

Device to

Cable used, adapter needed

Any SCSI device

VAX 4000, DECsystem 5500, R400X, B400X

BC06P

Device from

Device to

Cable used, adapter needed

SC008

CI750/CI780/CIBCA/CIXCD
HSC50/ HSC70/ HSC40

BNCIA

Device from

Device to

Cable used, adapter needed

DECstation/ DECpc
Parallel Port

LA70/LA324/DEClaser 2000 series/LA75P 11/LJ25i 1
LA2 l0

BC19M
LAlOX-EP + BC19M8

DECstation/ DECpc

LA70/ LA324/ DEClaser 2000 series/LA75P /LJ25i

Serial Port

LN03 9/ LN03S 9/LN03R/LA210

DECstation/ DECpc

Thin Wire Ethernet

H8575-J

H8672-A
DEPCA-CA

inters/Hardc;:opy D
Device from

Device to

Cable used, adapter needed

LA50
LAlOO
LA210
LCGOl
LCPOl
LGOl (serial)
LG02 (serial)
LG31
LN03
LQP02
LQP45
LN03R

CXY08/DECSA/DLVJ1/DHB32/DHF11
DHQ11/DHU11/DHV11/DMB32/ DMF32
DMZ32/ DSRVA-AA/ DSRVB-AAIVT100
series (EIA-232 devices)

BC22D

DFl00-200 series asynchronous modems

BC22E

DFlOO series synchronous modems

BC22F

PClOO (Rainbow)

BCC14

PC278/PR0-300/VT200 series

BCC05

VAXmate/VT300 1 series/VT420 1

H8575-A + BC16E

Networks, Communications, and Cables

6.67

Notes: 1. LA70/ LA324/ DEClaser 2000 series/ LA75/ LJ250/VT300 series/VT420 use EIA-423 DECconnect cabling. LA70/LA324/DEClaser 2000
series/ LA75 / LJ250 require H8571/H8575 adapters when attaching to EIA-232, 25-pin, D-type, subminiature, asynchronous connections.
VT330+, VT340+ , and the VT320 international model use EIA-423 DECconnect and EIA-232 communication ports. The VT320 North
American model uses EIA-423 and ships with an H8571-F adapter for EIA-232 connections.
2. CXY08 is an 8-line EIA-232 option module for the DECserver 500 and BA213/BA214-based MicroPDP and MicroVAXIVAXstation
systems.
3. EIA-423 DECconnect communication is standard.
4. CXA16 is a 16-line option module that implements the EIA-423 6-pin MMPIMMJ DECconnect architecture for the DECserver 500 and
BA213 / BA214-based MicroPDP and Micro VAXIVAXstation systems.
5. T-connector is required.
6. EIA-232 communication is standard.
7. LA70, LA324, DEClaser 2000 series, LA75, LJ250, VT300, and VT420 ship with a BC16E DECconnect cable. No other cable is required
to establish communication with the associated devices in the chart.
8. The LAlOX-LE is the external parallel interface. It does not provide the customer with IBM character set (LAlOX-LE) . The LAlOX-H
provides both the LAlOX-EP and LAlOX-LE and is less expensive than purchasing each part separately.
9. The H8672-A is not required if you purchase PC-compatible options on the LN03 or LN03S printers.
10. For use only with LLFOl-A Long-line Fiber Optic Interface connector modules.
11. The LJ252 and LA75P include the BC19M-10 parallel cable.

6.68

Networks, Communications, and Cables

Chapter 7
Storl!ge Devices
'km

Digital Storage Solutions

Comparison Charts

Storage Controllers/Adapters

Storage I/O Servers

Storage Array Building Blocks

Disk Devices

Expansion Boxes (SCSI)

Digital Storage Solutions
Overview
Digital offers a broad and flexible range of storage solutions, suitable for application environments spanning the desktop, office, and data center. Depending
upon performance and capacity requirements, users can choose Digital tape and
optical products, large and small disks, and solid state disks. Most of these
devices, along with storage arrays, controllers, and I/O servers, are based on a
carefully planned framework of standardized interfaces called Digital Storage
Architecture (DSA). DSA governs the interactions of all Digital host systems and
storage subsystems. Two interfaces, Standard Interconnect (SI) and Digital Storage System Interconnect (DSSI), implement DSA.
Mindful of the growing need for more "open" technology, Digital also offers
Small Computer System Interface (SCSI) storage products, Digital's implementation of the ANSI SCSI standard for drives, aimed at Digital's VAX- and RISCbased workstations, RISC servers, and multi-user PCs and PC LAN servers.
Digital continues its commitment to systems integration and investment protection by offering a range of connectivity options that permit the use of SCSI
storage devices throughout a VAX environment. These include VAXBI and
Hierarchical Storage Controller (HSC) cluster versions of SCSI peripherals.
Digital provides expertise in solving storage problems, with standard products or
special offerings for unique customer requirements. Digital offers cost-effective
solutions by focusing on solving customers' business problems.

Digital Storage Architecture
Today, virtually all of Digital's storage subsystems are based on DSA, thus protecting a customer's investment in Digital subsystems. With DSA, new storage
products incorporating new technologies do not require additional software
drivers or applications software modification.
With DSA storage solutions having subsystem-based intelligence, DSA can offload
host-associated functions , thus providing more usable CPU power. Software compatibility and software migration are easily achieved with no loss in performance.
Storage devices for the SI interface support Digital's mid-range and high-end
systems, while DSSI devices support DSSI VAX.cluster systems and primary local
storage.
The low-end family includes RX-series flexible disk drives and an extension of
DSA-the RF-series Integrated Storage Element. It is complemented by the
TK-series cartridge tape drives, which have their own controllers. This edition
features a new generation of tape products, the Tx86 family. The Tx86 family
increases capacity while maintaining the high performance, high capacity, and
unsurpassed data integrity in unattended backup of the Tx85 tape products.

Standard Interconnect Series Family (SDI/STI)
The SI family of Standard Disk Interconnect (SDI) devices and Standard Tape
Interconnect (STI) devices provide high-capacity, high-performance, and highreliability storage for Digital's mid-range and high-end systems. The SI family
includes RA-series disk drives, storage arrays, TA-series tape drives, HSC90,
HSC70, HSC60, and HSC50 I/O servers, KDM70, KDB50, KDA50, and UDA50
board controllers.
SDI drives are available in storage arrays, including the new DECarray 300
family which also takes DSSI, SA900 and SA800 storage arrays, and the SA905
computer-room removable storage array.
SDI drives are also sold in 1-meter (40-inch) cabinets with single-phase power,
embedded in VAX 6000 system cabinets, and as single spindles for upgrading
existing configurations.

7.2

Storage Devices

Digital Storage Solutions
Standard Interconnect Series
Family (SDI/STI) (Continued)

Features

· High data availability through VAX VMS Shadowing
• High performance through VAX Disk Striping and ESE50 solid-state disks
· Seek ordering-reorders I/O requests to improve I/O access time
• Overlapped seeks-transfers data from one disk while simultaneously seeking on
other disks with outstanding I/O requests
· Rotational optimization-selects the disk nearest the beginning sector when more
than one dis~ is positioned on cylinder
• Express queue-provides immediate servicing of I/O requests if required
· Speed matching buffers-use high-speed RAM to smooth the disk data burst
rates to host CPU I/O bus
· Redundant header addresses-records disk block header information four times
for more reliable sector location
• Automatic sector relocation-the automatic revectors process removes defective
blocks from service and replaces them with others without causing shrinkage in
disk capacity
• Error detection code-checks controller memory and data-path errors as well as
ECC hardware operation
· Error reporting-reports all significant errors to the host system, enabling detection and preventive action, where needed, before subsystem failure or data loss

The DSSI storage subsystem family is a building block set of storage products
that offers highly competitive storage solutions. DSSI is ideal as primary local
storage or as part of a DSSI VAXcluster system. With the addition of the magazine tape subsystem and storage cabinet, DSSI now offers solutions that meet
storage and backup requirements from the office to the datacenter.
The DSSI family includes RF series disk-integrated storage elements, storage pedestals, storage array cabinets, TF series tape drives and magazine tape subsystems,
KFQSA and KFMSA board adapters and embedded adapters. The new RF3 l T is
Digital's fastest DSSI disk drive. The new DECarray 400 provides high-capacity
storage using a variety of products. For unique versatility, DECarray 300 holds
both DSSI and SI, both tape and disk devices. The SF220 performance DECarray
is configured to hold SF35s, the half-rack building block that can house 12
3.25-inch RF35 disk drives.
Host computer interfaces for DSSI offer high availability and excellent
performance to a broad range of VAX systems and servers.
Features

• Multiple DSSI buses supported on each host
• Up to seven ISEs supported per DSSI bus in a single-host configuration
· Integrated disk storage and tape backup in a single cabinet for VAX 10000,
VAX 7000, and VAX 6000 systems
· Full DSA compliance and VAXsimPLUS support offer superior serviceability
• DSSI VAXcluster support and host-based volume shadowing provide high
availability
• ISEs may be grouped into stripe sets and into shadow sets for higher
performance
• Customer-selectable HISPEED mode allows flexible mixed-array
high-performance configurations

Storage Devices

7.3

Digital Storage Solutions

As part of Digital's commitment to open systems, Digital provides an extensive
offering of SCSI disk, tape, and CD-ROM storage devices. These devices conform
to Digital's implementation of the ANSI SCSI standard for disk drives. The
advantages to using an industry-standard SCSI bus include low cost, configuration flexibility, and investment protection. Digital SCSI products feature a family
of disk drives that vary in form factor, capacity, and performance to match
application requirements. The RZ26 SCSI disk drive has 1.05-Gbyte capacity,
Digital's highest performing 3.5-inch SCSI disk. The TLZ06 tape drive supports
multiple interfaces including SCSI, in a 4-mm DAT drive. A variety of third-party
SCSI devices are also available for SCSI-based Digital systems.

7.4

Storage Devices

Comparison Charts
SDI/DSSI Disk Drive Comparison Chart
RA92

RA72

RA71

RF73

RF72

RF35

RF31

RF31T

RF31F

Capacity
Formatted:
Unformatted:'"

1.5.GB
2.0 GB

1.0 GB
1.3 GB

280 MB
350 MB

2.0 GB
2.6 GB

1.0 GB
1.4 GB

1.1 GB
852 MB

381 MB
499 MB

381 MB

200 MB
250 MB

Interface

SDI

DSSI

Controller/ adapter

HSCs, KDA50, KDB50, KDM70,
UDA50

KFMSAI
KFQSA

KFQSA

KFQSA/
KFMSA

KFQSA

Form factor (inches)

5.25

3.5

5.25

3.5

5.25

45
53

50
58

48
56

34
44
50

60
73
77

29
41
46

71
8.4
-

36
47
51

6.9

12.2

Performancet
maximum request/s
@50 ms
@100 ms
@150 ms

37
47
50

Average seek
time (ms)

16.0

12.5

12.9

13.4

9.5

15.3

Average rotational
latency (ms)

8.81

8.3

5.6

8.3

5.6

8.3

Peak transfer rate
(Mbytes/s)

2.8

2.0

2.7

2.0

3.3

2.0

3.3

2.0

Track cache
(read-ahead)

Yes
(512 Kb)

Yes

Yes
(5 12 Kb)

Yes

Yes
(512 Kb)

Yes

;, Unformatted capacity provided for comparison purposes; only formatted capacity is user-accessible in any disk drive.
t All performance reflects raw drive hardware capability and may not include improvements due to controller optimizations.

Note: Previous measurements for I/O per second do not reflect the performance benefits of cache in the integrated controllers
of the RF drives, nor do they reflect the performance benefits of HSC controller cache as an option. For these reasons,
we have developed a new figure of merit, applicable across all disk drives, which represents a more typical workload of
requests seen by a disk. The higher throughput reflects the performance benefit of controller cache. See following table.
Requests per Second

RA92

RA72

RA71

RF73

RF72

RF35

RF31T

@ 50 ms

104

113

100

112

@100 ms

113

121

109

120

3-High Storage Cabinet 'Capacity and Performance Comparison Chart
Array

SFlOO

SF2x0

SA900

Sx400

Sx300

RA92

Max. disk capacity, GB

10.2

61.3

102.2

61.3

Min. disk capacity, GB

0.7

1.5

Max. tape capacity, GB

18.2

36.4

72.8

109.2

SF73

SF72

SA71

Disk/tape supported

SA72

RA92

SA70

2 (Migration
only)

RA90

6 (Migration
only)

TF857

(TA857 only)

SF35

Interface

DSSI

SDI

DSSI

SDI/DSSI

SDI

Note: Transfer rate, seek time, and access time depend upon component devices used. See above chart.

Storage Devices

7.5

Comparison Charts
SCSI Disk Drive Compari$on Chart
Specifications
Capacity
Formatted
Unformatted
Buffer size

RZ23L

RZ24L

RZ25

RZ26

RZ56

RZ57

RZ58

121.65 MB

245 MB

1.05 GB

256

426 MB
493 MB
60

512

665.17 MB
760 MB
64

1000 MB
1200 MB
256

1380 MB
1600 MB
256

1.5 MB/ s
3.0 MB/ s
4.0 MB/ s
1.13 MB/ s

3.75 MB/ s
4.0 MB/ s
5.0 MB/ s
2.8 MB/ s

3.2 MB/ s
3.0 MB/s
4.0 MB/ s
2.8 MB/ s

3.3 MB/ s
5
10
2.1

1.875 MB/ s
1.6 MB/ s
4.0 MB/ s
1.66 MB/ s

2.2 MB/ s
1.6 MB/ s
4.0 MB/ s
2.19 MB/ s

3.8 to 5.0 MB/ s
1.6 MB/ s
5.0 MB/ s
3 .36-4.38 MB/ s

10°-55° c
(50°-13l°F)
8%-80%
25 .6°( (78.1°F)

10°-55 ° c
(50°-131°F)
8%-80%
25.6°( (78.1°F)

10°-55° c
(50°-131°F)
8%-80%
25.6°C (78.l °F)

10°-50° c
(52°-l22°F)
10%-90%
28°( (82°F)

10°-55° c
(50°-131°F)
8%-80%
26.5°C (79.7°F)

10°-55 ° c
(50°-131 °F)
8%-80%
26.5°C (79.7°F)

10°-55° c
(50°-131 °F)
8%-80%
25.6°C (78.1 °F)

-304.8 to
4572 m
-1000 to
15,000 ft
3.6
11°C/hr
(20°F/hr)

-304.8 to
4572 m
-1000 to
15,000 ft
4.9
11°C/ hr
(20°F/hr)

-304.8 to
3048 m
-1000 to
10,000 ft
10
11°C/hr
(20°F/ hr)

2500 m
8000 ft

-304 .8 to
4572 m
-1000 to
15,000 ft
28
11°C/ hr
(20°F/ hr)

-304.8 to
4572 m
- 1000 to
15,000 ft
28
11°C/hr
(20°F/hr)

-304.8 to
4572 m
-1000 to
15,000 ft
26
11°C/hr
(20°F/ hr)

Transfer Rate

To/from media
Bus/ async
Bus/sync
Spiral transfer rate
Operating Environment

Ambient temperature
Relative humidity
Maximum wet bulb,
non condensing
Altitude

Heat dissipation (typical)
Temperature gradient
Shock and Vibration

Shock
Vibration

10 Gpk, 10±3 ms, 5 to 22 Hz, 0.01 in. DA, 22 to 500 Hz, 0.25 Gpk

Acoustic Noise

Idle (bel)
Seeking (bel)
::I
/

4.3
5.0

4.3
4.8

5.0

4.4
5.0

4.6
5.7

5.0
5.7

8 ms
19 ms
26.8 ms
8.8 ms

5 ms
16 ms
22 .9 ms
6.9 ms

2.5 ms
14 ms
20.8 ms
6.8 ms

0.1 ms
9.5 ms
15.1 ms
5.6 ms

<4 ms
<16 ms
24.3 ms
8.3 ms

<4 ms
<14.5 ms
22.8 ms
8.3 ms

<3 ms
<12.5 ms
18.1 ms
5.6 ms

3409±0.5 %

4306±0.5 %

4412±0.5 %

5400±0.5 %

3600±0.5 %

5400±0.5 %

36,250 b/ in.
1850
67.06
4
5.4-1

38,600 b/in.
1930
4
5.4-3

38,843 b/in.
1760
68.28
9
5.4-1

56,000 b/in.
2756
153
14
5 .5 (generic
device)
5.5-2 (full
support)

31,846 b/ in.
1440
45 .86
15
5.2-1

42,441 b/in.
1670
70.88
15
5.3

42 ,130 b/ in.
1854
78.1
15
5.5

4.3

4.1

2.2D

4.2A

3.8 w
14.5 w

5.7 w
12.3 w

14 w
34.5 w

16-49 w

32 w
60.7 w

32 w
68.2 w

33 w
48 w

Embedded
2

Optical
2

Dedicated
5

Embedded
7

Dedicated
8

4.6

Latencies

Track-to-track seek
Average seek
Average access
Average rotational
latency
Rotational speed
(rev/ min)
Recording density
Track density (tracks/ in. )
2
Areal density (MB/ in. )
Read/ write heads (data)
Software support VMS
(version)

Software support ULTRIX 4.1
(version)
Power

Maximum seeking
Maximum startup
Functional

.tu
Q

Servo
Disks
Physical

Height
Width
Depth
Weight

7 .6

Storage Devices

2.5 cm (1.0 in.) 2.5 cm (1.0 in.) 4.1 cm (1.63 in.) 4.14 cm (1.63 in.) 8.3 cm (3.25 in.) 8.3 cm (3.25 in.) 8.3 cm (3.25 in.)
10.2 cm (4 .0 in. ) 10.2 cm (4 .0 in.) 10.2 cm (4.0 in.) 10.1 cm (4.0 in.) 14.6 cm (5.75 in.) 14.6 cm (5 .75 in.) 14.6 cm (5.75 in.)
14.6 cm (5.75 in.) 14.6 cm (5.75 in.) 14.6 cm (5.75 in.) 14.6 cm (5.75 in. ) 20.8 cm (8.2 in.) 20.8 cm (8.2 in.) 20.8 cm (8.2 in.)
3.8 kg (8.4 lb)
3.8 kg (8.4 lb)
0.5 kg (1.2 lb)
0.4 kg (1.05 lb) 0.8 kg (1.8 lb)
0.8 kg (1.8 lb )
3.8 kg (8.4 lb)

Comparison Charts
Tape Selection Chart
The chart below is a simplified guide to choosing a tape subsystem to meet most customer needs. To use the chart:
1. Determine whether system will be clustered or standalone (column 1).
2. If the system is standalone, determine which CPU(s) will be used (column 1).
3. Determine the amount of disk storage required, allowing for growth (column 2) .
4. Use column 3 to determine the most appropriate tape unit for the applications listed. 3

For atypical needs, such as a requirement for a specific media format, refer to the supplementary information on the
following page.

Product Recommendations
Column 1

Column 2

Column 3
Disk Backup,
Data Collection,
Archiving,
2
SW Distribution

Highest
Speed Backup,
Data Collection

System

Number of
Gbytes of Disk 1
on System

VAXclusters
DSSI

Any number
Any number

SAlOO, SA106
TF85/TF857
TF86/TF867

TA91s + TU91s
TF85/TF857
TF86/TF867

VAX 9000 Systems

Any number

One or more TF857 /TF867

TA91

VAX 6000/7000/10000 Systems

1-6
>6

TF85/TF86
One or more TF857 /TF867

TA91

VAX 8xxx Systems

1-4
>4

TLZ06''d'
SZ106/ SZ100''"'

TZ85 /TZ86 ,-,.;,
SZ106/SZ100""'

VAX 4000 Systems

1-4
1-6
>6

TLZ06*
TF85/TF86
TF857 /TF86 7

TF85/TF86
TF857 /TF867

MicroVAX Systems

1-4
>4

TLZ06
TZ85/ SZ100
TZ86/ SZ106

TZ85/TZ86
TZ85/ SZ100
TZ86/ SZ106

DECsystems

Any number

TLZ06

TZ85/TZ86

applicationDEC Systems

Any number

TZK10/TLZ06

TLZ06

VAXstations/DECstations

0-4
0-1
>4

TLZ06
TZKlO
TZ86/ SZ106

TLZ06
TZ86/SZ106

0-4
>4

TLZ06
TZ85/ SZ100
TZ86/ SZ106

TZ85/TZ86
TZ85/SZ100
TZ86/SZ106

Standalone4

Network Backup

InfoServer 150

Notes:
1

1 Gbyte = an 85% full RA90, two 85% full RA82s, one 85% full RF72 or RZ57, etc.
Any of these media are suitable for customers to distribute software to other users. For receiving Digital's software distribution , the primary supported
media are CD-ROM optical disks, TK cartridges, 9-track magtape. Note that Tx86 drives cannot read TK50 format media.
3
Recommendations for additional applications:
Data Interchange: The TLZ06, TZKlO, and TA90E all use industry-standard cartridge media and are suitable for many data interchange applications. The
9-track tape is the most universally used interchange medium. Customers may want to purchase or retain a 9-track drive for interchange purposes. TA79,
TA81, TU81-Plus, TSZ07 and TS05 tape products provide a standard 9-track drive for many of our systems.
Transaction Journaling and Batch Processing: These applications are best served by systems with fast start/ stop capability. TA91, TA90, and TA79
provide this function for VAX 6000 and VAX 9000 VAX.cluster systems.
4
ULTRIX currently does not support loaders; TA91 , SZ100/SZ106 and Tx8x7 subsystems will require manual intervention if used on ULTRIX-based
systems.
2

* With KZQSA adapter
"d' With KZBSA adapter

Storage Devices

7. 7

"t
Q

Comparison Charts

Tape
Drives

Densities (bits/in.)

Operating
Mode

Interface

System Support

Typical Time to
Back Up 1-Gbyte
Disk (minutes)

No. of Reels or
Cartridges to Back
Up 1-Gbyte Disk

Cartridge

r:u

"t
Q
:.,

TA90/TA91

38,000,
18 tracks

Streaming

HSC/
KDM70

VAXcluster
VAX 9000
VAX 6000

16 (with
one drive)

6
1-3 (TA91)

SAlOO

42,500,
48 tracks

Streaming

HSC

VAXcluster

0.4

SA106

42 ,500,
112 tracks

Streaming

HSC

VAXcluster

0.17

TF857/TF85

42 ,500,
48 tracks

Streaming

DSSI

VAX 9000
(TF857 only)
VAX 6000
VAX 4000
MicroVAX 3 xxx
MicroVAX II

0.4

TF867/TF86

42 ,500,
112 tracks

Streaming

DSSI

Same as TF857
above

0.17

TZ85/SZ100

42 ,500,
48 tracks

Streaming

SCSI-2
VAXBP"''

InfoServer 150
MicroVAX 3100
VAXstations
DECstations
VAX 8xxx

Depends on
network or
system
performance

0.4

TZ86/ SZ106

42 ,500,
112 tracks

Streaming

SCSI-2

Same as TZ85
above

0.17

TK70

10,000,
48 tracks

Streaming

Q-bus

MicroVAX
VAX 4000

185

TK50/TZ30

6666,
22 tracks

Streaming

UNIBUS
Q-bus
SCSI

VAX
MicroVAX
Workstations

370

TKZ08

43 ,200

Streaming

SCSI

RISC
ULTRIX
DECstations

0.5

TLZ08

NIA

Streaming

scsI
Q-bus
VAXBI

Workstations
MicroVAX
VAX 4000
VAX 6000

0.5

TLZ06

DDS and DDS-C
Standard format

Streaming

SCSI 1
Q -bus
2
VAXBI

SCSI workstations
MicroVAX 3100
VAX 4000
DECsystem 5xxx
applicationDEC
VAX 6000
VAX 8xxx

0.25

TZKlO
PCXAT

QIC-320
QIC-525
Standard formats

Streaming

SCSI

SCSI workstations
DECsystem 5xxx
applicationDEC
PCs

2-3

TKZ60

38,000

Streaming

SCSI
1
Q-bus
2
VAXBI

Workstations
MicroVAX
VAX 6000

~
1
2

With KZQSA adapter.
With KZBSA adapter.

7.8

Storage Devices

VAXBr"'~

Comparison Charts
Tape Comparison Chart (Continued)
Tape
Drives

Densities (bits/in. )

Operating
Mode

TA79

1600/6250

TA81

Typical Time to
Back Up 1-Gbyte
Disk (minutes)

No. of Reels or
Cartridges to Back
Up 1-Gbyte Disk

Interface

System Support

Start/stop

HSC/
KDM70

VAXcluster
VAX 9000
VAX 6000

1600/6250

Same as
TU81-Plus

HSC/
KDM70

VAXcluster
VAX 9000
VAX 6000

110

TU81-Plus

1600/6250

High-speed
streaming
Slow start/stop

VAXBI
UNIBUS
Q-bus

VAX
MicroVAX
DECsystems

114 (on UNIBUS)
95 (on VAXBI)

TSZ07

1600/6250

Streaming

SCSI
Q-bus1
VAXBI2

SCSI workstations
MicroVAX
VAX 4000
VAX 6000
VAX 8xxx

TSZ05/
TSV05/
TSU05

1600

Streaming

SCSI
Q-bus
UNIBUS

Workstations
MicroVAX
VAX

480

1
2

With KZQSA adapter.
With KZBSA adapter.

Storage Devices

7.9

Storage Controllers/Adapters
KDM70 XMI Disk/faee Controller (SDI/STI)
The KDM70 single-host disk and tape controller is an XMI-based eight-port
controller that offers full support for SDI-STI devices. The KDM70 supports up
to eight RA-series disk drives, up to two TA-series tape formatters, including the
high-performance SA-series storage arrays, the IBM-compatible TA90 tape drive,
and up to two ESE20 solid-state disks.
The KDM70 provides high-performance 110 throughput by using a CVAX microprocessor to offload the host system. This is the first DSA controller that features
Dynamic Ch:;mnel Allocation (DCA) with the two data channels dynamically allocated among eight ports to achieve optimal performance.
Features

· Data buffering-provides buffering of up to 180 Kbytes of data
· Direct controller-to-host memory transfers
• Self-contained diagnostics-host-independent diagnostic capability
· Fully overlapped seeks, seek reordering, request fragmentation
· Self-contained diagnostics-provides host-independent diagnostics
• High availability-disk drives can be statically dual-ported to two separate
KDM70s
·Data rate: 3.4 Mbytes/second sustained
· Request rate: 1200 1/0 requests/second
· VAXsimPLUS support

Ordering Information

KDM70-AA

KDM70 controller with KDM70 software; comprises two
XMI modules which occupy adjacent XMI backplane
slots.

CK-KDMOO-LF

Cabinet kit, 0.9-m {3 -ft) internal SDI/STI controller-tobulkhead cables and I/O distribution panels for use with
VAX 10000/7000/6000 systems

CK-KDMOO-LG

Same as above except for VAX 9000 systems

QA-YG5AA-H5/HM

KDM70 software H -kits (TK50/magtape); should only be
ordered for self-maintenance customers requiring KDM70
software update; all other customers receive the kit via
automatic di~tribution.

Configuring Information

7.10

Storage Devices

Option

Mounting
Requirements

KDM70-AA

2 XMI slots

I/O Panel
Units

de Amps Drawn @

12 v

-12 v

-5.2 v

-2 v

17.40

0.00

Storage Controllers/Adapters
KFMSA XMI Diskffape Adapter (DSSI)
The KFMSA disk and tape Integrated Storage Element (ISE) adapter is an XMlbased adapter that offers full compliance with the Digital Storage Architecture
(DSA) . It is available on the VAX 10000/9000/7000/6000 systems. The KFMSA
adapter can support up to 14 RF72, RF73, or RF31/3 l-F* disk storage elements
or combination of RF disk drives and TF8x/TF8xx series magazine tape subsystems. The KFMSA supports up to four TF ISEs (two per DSSI bus) .
The KFMSA incorporates two 7-MIP 1/ 0 processors and a 45,000-gate array to
create a very powerful storage adapter. It provides two 4-Mbyte packet multiplexing paths to storage elements with full error detection and retry. The KFMSA
adapter's bandwidth and extremely low latency permit unconstrained
performance of all attached storage elements.
1
'

RF31/3 1-F drives require microcode release 256 or later to be supported.

Features

· Two DSSI buses supported
· Supports up to 14 DSSI Integrated Storage Elements (ISEs)
· Latency less than 1.5 ms on each DSSI bus
·Data rate: 8.0 Mbytes/ second peak, 5.5 Mbytes/ second sustained
·Request rate: capable of over 1,600-1,800 1/ 0 requests/ second
· Built-in automatic self-diagnosis
• VAXsimPLUS support

Ordering Information

KFMSA-BA

XMl-to-DSSI adapter for VAX 10000/9000/7000/6000 DSSI
VAXcluster and storage-sharing applications. Required for
VAX 6000 systems in DSSI VAXcluster configurations. Includes
installation and user documentation. Requires one XMI slot.

Note: The KFMSA and CIBCA-A are not supported on the same system. The
CIBCA-AA must be upgraded to the CIBCA-BA or CIXCD.

CK-KFMSA·LJ

Cable kit, two 1.2-meter (4-foot) internal cabinet DSSI cables.
Connects XMI backplane (adapter) to VAX 6000 host computer
1/0 bulkhead. Also includes 1/0 bulkhead adapter plate (occupies two 1/0 panel units) and two DSSI bus terminators. Does
not support KFMSA warm-swap and, within a DSSI VAXcluster
configuration, can only be used on end-node VAX 6000s.

CK-KFMSA-LN

Cable/bulkhead kit includes two 2.4-meter (8-foot) internal
cabinet DSSI cables. Connects host system 1/0 bulkhead to
XMI backplane (adapter) and then connects the XMI backplane
back to the 1/0 bulkhead. Required for KFMSA-BA warm-swap
and KFMSA-BAs in the middle-node position of a DSSI
VAXcluster configuration. Also includes 1/0 bulkhead adapter
plate (occupies two 1/0 panel units) and two DSSI bus
terminators.

CK-KFMSA-LK

Cable kit, two 1.2-meter (4-foot) internal cabinet DSSI cables.
Connects XMI backplane (adapter) to VAX 9000 host computer
1/ 0 bulkhead. Also includes 1/0 bulkhead adapter plate (occupies two 1/0 panel units) and two DSSI bus terminators. For
use with external DSSI ISEs.

Storage Devices

7.11

Storage Controllers/Adapters
Configuring Information

KFMSA-BA options required for SF200/SF210/SF400 configurations.
Number of RF72/73 Disk Drives
Single- and
Two-System
Host

Three- and
Four-System
Host

2-6
13-18
19-24
25-30
31-36
37-42
43-48
49-54

2-4
9-12
13-16
17-20
21-24
25-28
29-32
33-36
37-40
41-44
45-48
49-52
53-56
57-60
61-64
65-68
69-72
73-76
77-80
81-84
85-88
89-92
93-96

55-60
61-66
67-72
73-78
79-84
85-90
91-96
97-102
103-108
109-114
115-120
121-126
127-132
133-138
139-144

Options Required

KFMSA-BA

CK-KFMSA-LN

1
2
2
3
3
4
4

5
5

6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12

Cabinet-to-Cabinet
Interconnect
1
3
4

5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Notes
1. Use CK-SF200-xx for KFMSA-BA to SF2xx cabinet-to-cabinet interconnect.
2. Use BC21Q-xx for KFMSA-BA to SF400 cabinet-to-cabinet interconnect for
VAX 6000/7000/ 9000/ 10000 systems.
3. Use BC22Q-xx for KFMSA-BA to SF400 cabinet-to-cabinet interconnect for VAX 4000
and Q-bus MicroVAX systems.
4. Use CK-SFlOO-xx for KFMSA-BA to KFMSA-BA cabinet-to-cabinet interconnect.

5. VAX 6000 supports up to 72 RF72/73s in SF series cabinet.
6. VAX 7000/10000 supports up to 144 RF72/73s.
7. To calculate maximum supported RF72/ 73s if TF8xs or TF8xxs are required in a
two-system DSSI VAXcluster configuration, subtract two RF72/73s for every one TF8x
or TF8xx required; for all other configurations, subtract one RF72/RF73 for every TF8x
or TF8xx required .
8. All option requirements increase by 50 percent in two-system DSSI VAXcluster
configurations when both systems are end nodes.

7.12

Storage Devices

Storage Controllers/Adapters
Configuring Information

KFMSA-BA Options Required for SF220/SF35 Configurations.

(Continued)

Number of RF35 Disk Drives

Options Requirecl

SingleSystem

TwoSystem

ThreeSystem

FourSystem KFMSA-BA

1-7
8-14
15-21
22-28
29-35
36-42
43-49

1-6
7-12
13-18
19-24
25-30
31-36
37-42
43-48
49-54

1-5
6-10
11-15
16-20
21-25
26-30
31-35
36-40
41-45
46-50
51-55
56-60
61-65
66-70
71-75
76-80
81-85
86-90
91-95
96-100
101-105
106-110
111-115
116-120

1-4
5-8
9-12
13-16
17-20
21-24
25-28
29-32
33-36
37-40
41-44
45-48
49-52
53-56
57-60
61-64
65-68
69-72
73-76
77-80
81-84
85-88
89-92
93-96

50-56
57-63
64-70
71-77
78-84
85-91
92-98
99-105
106-112
113-119
120-126
127-133
134-140
141-147
148-154
155-161
162-168

55-60
61-66
67-72
73-78
79-84
85-90
91-96
97-102
103-108
109-114
115-120
121-126
127-132
133-138
139-144

CK-KFMSA-LN

1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4

5
5

1
2
3
4

5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12

6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12

Cabinet-toCabinet
Interconnect

Notes
1. Use CK-SF200-LM for KFMSA-BA to SF2xx cabinet-to-cabinet interconnect.
2. Use BC21Q-xx for KFMSA-BA to SF400 cabinet-to-cabinet interconnect for
VAX 6000/7000/9000/10000 systems.
3. Use BC22Q-xx for KFMSA-BA to SF400 cabinet-to-cabinet interconnect for VAX 4000
and Q-bus MicroVAX systems.
4. Use CK-SFlOO-LM for KFMSA-BA to KFMSA-BA cabinet-to-cabinet interconnect.
5. Use CK-SFlOO-LP for KFMSA-BA to VAX4000 cabinet-to-cabinet interconnect.
6. VAX 6000 supports up to 84 RF35s.
7. VAX 7000/10000 supports up to 168 RF35s.
8. To calculate maximum supported RF35s if TF8xs or TF8xxs are required, subtract one
RF35 for every TF8x or TF8xx that is required.

Option

KFMSA

I!O Panel

Mounting
Requirements

1 XMI slot

de Amps Drawn @

Units

12 v

-12 v

-5.2 v

-2 v

6.0

0.00

Storage Devices

7.13

Storage Controllers/Adapters
KDB50 VAXBI Disk Controller (SDI)
The KDB50 is an intelligent controller that allows Standard Disk Interconnect
(SDI) disk drives (including the ESE20 Electronic Storage Element) to be used
with a variety of VAXBI system configurations. The KDB50 contains two highspeed microprocessors for disk-host communications and data routing through
the KDB50's onboard memory buffer. The KDB50 can handle data bursts up to
3 Mbytes/ second with a sustained throughput of 1.2 Mbytes/second. The controller consists of two VAXBI modules that can be mounted in adjacent VAXBI
backplane slots, two intermodule cables, one internal SI (Storage Interconnect)
cable to bulkhead, and one bulkhead connector assembly. Each controller can
attach up to four radially connected RA series SDI disk drives, up to four ESE20
Electronic Storage Elements, or any four RA component drives in a storage array.
Features

· Stores up to 20 host I/O requests for disk optimization
· Request rate: up to 700 I/O requests/second
· Buffers up to 41 disk sectors to smooth the data rates between the disks and the
host Q-bus port
• Direct controller-host memory transfers
• Indicates fault conditions on LED (light emitting diode) displays and in a hardware register that is readable by the host
· Supports VAXsimPLUS

Ordering Information

KDB50-C

Configuring Information
Option

KDB50-C

KDB50 controller with 0.9-m (3-ft) controller-to-bulkhead
cable. For use with VAX 6000 series internal and external
VAXBI channels.
Mounting
Requirements

2 VAXBI slots

de Amps Drawn @

12 v -12 v

-5.2 v

-2 v

11.94

0.03

3.76

0.14

0.00

VAXBI

J/O Panel

Nodes

Units

KFQSA Q-bus Storage Adapter ·(DSSI)
The KFQSA storage adapter is a single, quad-height module that provides a
space-saving, low-power link between the Q-bus and DSSI. It is capable of supporting up to seven nodes, including any combination of DSSI-based storage
devices or connection to another CPU. The KFQSA transfers commands and data
between the host and ISEs using direct memory access (DMA) hardware, maximizing the number of CPU cycles available for additional applications development. The sustained data transfer rate is 1.5 Mbytes per second with a
throughput limit of 190 I/Os per second.
The KFQSA uses the same Storage System Port (SSP) used by the RQDX3 and
KDA50 controllers, and is supported by existing device drivers across all 32-bit
operating systems. To ensure high data integrity, the adapter runs power-up,
self-test diagnostics, provides online and offline diagnostics, and provides fault
detection and isolation. Byte parity and packet error detecting code (EDC), combined with automatic retry, serve to ensure the highest level of data integrity.
Features

· Occupies a single slot in the Q-bus backplane and requires low power
• Links Q-bus VAX, MicroVAX, and DECsystem computer systems to DSSI for
expanded system performance and high storage capacity
· Offers support for high-availability, dual-host configurations with VMS V5 .l-1
and higher
· Makes more CPU cycles available for application use with Direct Memory Access
(DMA) hardware moving data between adapter and main memory
· 190 I/Os per second throughput
• 1.5 Mbytes per second sustained data rate

7.14

Storage Devices

Storage Controllers/Adapters
Ordering Information

KFQSA-AA

Q-bus-to-DSSI adapter, field installed into BA23 or H9642
system enclosure.

KFQSA-BA

Q-bus-to-DSSI adapter, field installed into BA123 system
enclosure.

KFQSA-SA

Q-bus-to-DSSI adapter, factory installed for BA213 system
enclosure and rtVAX 3800 system only.

KFQSA-SE/SG

Additional DSSI adapter. For DECsystem 5400 and DECsystem
5500 systems, BA4xx, BA2xx, and H9644 enclosures; factory/
field installed.

Note: Requires BC21M-09 cable; order separately.

Configuring Information
Option

Q-bus Slots

KFQSA

de Amps Drawn @

12 v

5.5

0.00

Watts
Drawn

27.50

Bus Loads
Drawn
ac

4.4

0.5

The KZQSA adapter provides the capability to connect TLZ06, RRD42, and
TSZ07 devices to Q-bus MicroVAX and VAX 4000 systems (only one TSZ07 per
KZQSA is supported). DECsystem 5500 systems can use the KZQSA to connect
the above devices as well as RZ25, RX23, RX33, RZ56, RZ57, TZ30, and TZKlO.
(KZQSA cannot be used to connect TKZ08 to DECsystem 5500.)
The KZQSA is a quad-height module with an integral handle that has two standard connectors. There is no termination on the module.

Ordering Information

Configuring Information

KZQSA-AA

For use with MicroVAX II system in BA23 enclosure; field
installed.

KZQSA-BA

Same as above except for BA123 enclosure

KZQSA-SA/SF

For use with BA2xx, BA4xx, and B400X enclosures; factory/
field installed.

KZQSA-CA

For use with DECsystem 5500; factory or field installed.

· Q-bus MicroVAX and VAX 4000 systems support two KZQSA adapters per system; each KZQSA supports two devices. Each adapter requires one Q-bus slot.
· DECsystem 5500 systems support two KZQSA adapters per configuration; each
KZQSA supports up to seven devices. Each adapter requires one Q-bus slot.
Devices connected to DECsystem 5500 systems by KZQSA cannot be used as
boot devices.
Option

KZQSA

Q-bus Slots

de Amps Drawn @

12 v

5.4

0.0

Watts
Drawn

27.0

Bus Loads
Drawn
ac

4.4

0.5

Storage Devices

7.15

Storage Controllers/Adapters
KDA.50 Q-bus Disk Controller
The KDA50 implements the Digital Storage Architecture (DSA) and allows Standard Disk Interconnect (SDI) disk drives (including the ESE20 Electronic Storage
Element) to be used with a variety of Q-bus system configurations. The KDA50 is
an intelligent board controller containing two high-speed microprocessors for
disk-host communications and data routing through the KDA50's onboard memory
buffer. The KDA50 is capable of handling data bursts up to 3 Mbytes/second with
a sustained throughput of 1.15 Mbytes/second. The controller consists of two
quad-height modules that can be mounted in adjacent Q-bus backplane slots, two
intermodule cables, one internal SI (Storage Interconnect) cable to bulkhead, and
a bulkhead specifically tailored for an application. Each controller can attach up
to four radially connected RA series SDI disk drives or ESE20 Electronic Storage
Elements in any combination.
Features

• Sustained throughput of 1.15 Mbytes/ second
• Maximum 1/0 requests/ second of 208 (208 QIOs)
• Stores up to 20 host 1/0 requests for disk optimization
• Provides buffering of up to 41 disk sectors in order to smooth the data rates
between the high-speed disks and the host Q-bus port
· Direct controller-host memory transfers
• Indicates fault conditions on LED (light-emitting diode) displays and in a hardware register that is readable by the host
• Supports VAXsimPLUS

Ordering Information

Configuring Information

KDA50-QA

Q-bus controller for MicroVAX II and Q-bus PDP systems

KDA50-SB/SC

Q-bus controller for H9644 cabinet or BE213 expansion pedestal; uses two Q-bus slots; factory/field installed

KDA50-SE/SG

Q-bus controller for B400X-, BA4xx-, and BA2xx-series enclosures; uses three Q-bus slots; factory/field installed

Option

Q-bus
Slots

de Amps@

7.16

Storage Devices

Watts
Drawn

12 v

Bus Loads
Drawn
ac

I/O Panel
Insert Size

KDA50-QA

13 .5

0.03

67.86

3.0

0.5

(2)B

KDA50-SB/SC

13.5

0.03

67 .86

3.0

0.5

NIA

KDA50-SE/SG

13.5

0.03

67.86

3.0

0.5

NIA

Storage If() Servers
HSC90/HSC60 Intelligent 1/0 Servers
HSC90 and HSC60 intelligent I/O servers are CI-based disk and tape controllers
that offer full architectural support for SDI disk drives from the SA, RA families,
or a combination of SDI disk drives and TA series tape drives.
The HSC90 supports 48 SCI disk drives; HSC60 supports 20 disk drives or 12
tape ports. The use of the optional 32-Mbyte disk cache greatly enhances disk
performance. This single module plugs into the HSC backplane and is shared by
all selected disk drives connected to the HSC90/HSC60 controllers.

lllllllllllllllllllllllUHlllllllHllHllHIUHIUIHUllU
HllUlllllllllUIWlllllllMIHUIHUllllllllll

.........
. .111. . . . . . .,

lllllRlllHllllllllHUllllllllll

The HSC90 provides very high-performance I/ O throughput using a new higher
speed PDP-11-based microprocessor in conjunction with multiple high-speed
bit-slice microprocessors. The HSC I/O server offloads all disk-management functions from the host systems and provides host-independent sharing of common
data among medium- to large-sized CI VAXcluster systems. The HSC60 is the
entry-level CI-based intelligent disk and tape controller that provides hostindependent sharing of common data among small- to medium-sized CI
V AXcluster systems.
The HSC controllers can serve several CI-bus interconnected host processors.
Housed in standalone cabinets, they are independently powered and electrically
isolated from the CPUs and storage devices they serve.

A video terminal and hardcopy printer are supplied with each HSC90 for utility
operation and diagnostic purposes. Note: A cache needs analysis tool is available
that provides valuable information in assessing the configuration load.
Features

· CI interface for higher CI throughput and loadable microcode
• Handles up to 1300 I/ O requests per second
• Self-contained diagnostics-provides host-independent diagnostic
• Offline utilities-happening in parallel and providing volume backup and restore
as well as disk formatting and format verification
· High availability-disk drives can be static dual ported to multiple HSCs of any
variety
· Failover-re-establishes data path to disks after controller or data path failure
· CI bus bandwidth: 70 Mbits/ second per data path; internal data bus:
13 .3 Mbytes/ second total
· Single-phase power requirements simplify site preparation.
· Disk data-channel bandwidth: 3.125 Mbytes/second maximum each
· Supports VAXsimPLUS
Additional HSC90 Features

· Stores up to 900 host command queues
· Provides data buffering for 512 Kbytes of data (512 disk sectors to insulate the
CI bus from real time dependency)
• Multiple processors may read and write shared files .
• HSC40, HSC60, and HSC70 controllers can be field upgraded to the HSC90.

Ordering Information

Note: Purchase of an HSC controller includes the H-kit for the HSC software.
Customers must sign a no-charge license agreement and register it with Software
Product Services. Scheduled software updates are automatic with the one-year
warranty. Following the warranty period, an HSC hardware Digital Services contract includes a basic software contract that includes scheduled HSC software
updates.

Storage Devices

7.17

Sto~age I/() Servers
HSC90/HSC60 lntelligen~ 1/0 Servers
(Continued)

HSC90-BA/BB
HSC60-BA/BB
HSC5X-DA
HSC9X-FA
HSC6X-AA
HSC9:X-CA/CB
HSC9X-AA
HSC9X-BA
HSC6X-BA/BB
QL926-H7

Specifications

HSC90 with 48-port capability, 120 V/240 V
HSC60 with 20-port capability, 120 V/ 240 V
4-port disk/tape channel card
8-port disk data channel (not supported on HSC40/50/70)
HSC40 to HSC60 upgrade
HSC60 to HSC90 upgrade, 120 V/240 V
HSC70 to HSC90 upgrade
HSC90 cache option
HSC60 cache option, auxiliary power supply, 120 V/240 V
Cache needs analysis tool; requires HSC V3 .7 or higher; can be
used with HSC40/60/70/90.

Physical Characteristics
105.9 cm (41.7 in.)
54.0 qµ (21.3 in.)
91.4 cm (35 .0 in.)
240 kg (450 lb)

Height
Width
Depth
Weight

Note: Weight represents maximum configuration.
Power Requirements
NEMA receptacle type
IEC receptacle type
PCS+/PDS+ cable type
Number of phases
Voltage
Nominal
Model

L5-30R

(See note)
BC24S

1
Frequency
Nominal

Current in Amps
Steady State

Hz
L1

Thermal Dissipation
Watts

Btulk]lh

HSC90160-BA

120

12.3

NIA NIA 12.3

785

3480 Btu/h

HSC90160-BB

240

7.0

NIA NIA 7.0

785

3670 kJlh

Note: HSC90/60-BB incorporates removable line cord (17-00199-10). Power consumption and heat dissipation specs for these items do not include a channel
(HSC5X-BAIDA, HSC9X-FA) device.

HSS90/HSS60 Cluster Starter Packages
HSS Cluster Starter Packages lower the entry cost of clustering. The easy-toorder packages contain the HSC I/O server, 4- and 8-port data channel cards,
cables, and Star Coupler. V AXBI CI adapter included with HA/HB variants.

Ordering Information

7.18

Storage Devices

HSS90-GA/GB

HSC90-BAIBB I/O server, HSC5X-DA disk/tape data channel,
HSC9X-FA 8-port data channel, SC008-AC Star Coupler, and
BNCIA-20 cable set, 120 V/240 V

HSS90-HA/HB

HSC90-BA/BB I/O server, HSC5X-DA disk/tape data channel,
HSC9X-FA disk data channel, SC008-AC Star Coupler, two
BNCIA-20 cable sets, and CIBCA-BA CI adapter, 120 V/240 V

HSS60-GA/GB

HSC60-BA/BB I/O server, HSC5X-DA disk/tape data channel,
HSC9X-FA 8-port data channel, SC008-AC Star Coupler, and
BNCIA-20 cable set, 120 V/240 V

HSS60-HA/HB

HSC60-BAIBB I/O server, HSC5X-DA disk/tape data channel,
HSC9X-FA disk data channel, SC008-AC Star Coupler, two
BNCIA-20 cable sets, and CIBCA-BA adapter, 120 V/240 V

Storage 1/0 Servers
HSC Rack-Mountable Subsystems
HSC rack-mountable subsystems are Hierarchical Storage Controller subsystems
in a 48.3-cm (19-inch) wide, rack-mountable chassis. They provide the same
functionality and technology as standard HSC subsystems, but mount in any
EIA-standard 48.3-cm (19-inch) wide rack or enclosure, utilizing 62.2 cm (24.5
inches) of vertical rack space.
Based on the standard, cabinet version HSCs, rack-mountable HSCs use the same
multiple high-speed microprocessors to locate, organize, and access data. They
support the same combinations of SA or RA Standard Disk Interfaces (SDI) and
TA series Standard Tape Interfaces (STI) and provide the same superior I/O
throughput to optimize physical disk and tape operations.
The rack-mountable HSC chassis extends the capabilities of the HSC to applications where severe footprint or environmental constraints prohibit use of the
standard subsystems. It can be mounted with other equipment in one cabinet,
mounted in air-conditioned enclosures for use in non-conditioned, non-computer
room environments, or mounted in contaminant-protected (NEMA) cabinets for
use in dusty, dirty areas such as warehouses or manufacturing facilities. Rackmountable HSCs are configured according to application needs or can be
ordered as chassis alone for mounting by the user.
The rack-mountable HSC is available in a number of models that support a wide
range of SDI disk drives, or a combination of SDI disk drives and TA tape drives.

Ordering Information

All rack-mountable HSC subsystem configurations require a custom quotation
which can be obtained through a EIC Sales Support Specialist. For more information, call the EIC Sales Support Center at 800-832-6277 or 603-884-8990.

Storage Devices

7.19

Storage Arrays
DECarray 300 Family (SDI/DSSI)
The DECarray 300 storage subsystem supports multiple bus configurations in one
1.1-meter (42-inch) high, single-phase cabinet. This space and power-efficient
package is the first DECarray to combine SDI and DSSI disks as well as backup
tape drives, making a wide variety of initial storage configurations available for
high-end, mid-range, and low-end systems.
Investment is protected because SA71 , SA72 , RA92'", SF72, SF7Y', TF857 and
older SA70"', RA90 7' devices can be added to these initial configurations at any
time. The DECarray 300 family offers the flexibility needed to meet the variety of
storage demands generated by new applications, additional users, and network
expansion. The SA70 can migrate a maximum of two boxes into the DECarray
300 cabinet.
The DECarray 300 is an excellent choice for mixed bus configurations and for
mixed environments with constrained floor space. DECarray 300 family is compatible with any VAX or VAX.cluster system as well as the full line of Digital's
CI servers (HSC family), SDI controllers, and DSSI Integrated Storage Elements
(ISEs) which have their own integrated controller and embedded MSCP server.
* Field-installed only.

Features
2

• Occupies only 5.5 ft (0.5 m) of floorspace
· Variable drive capacity-systems can be configured for maximum capacity or
maximum I/O throughput
· Accepts installation of up to six separately powered and cooled Storage Array
Building Blocks (SABBs) or RA90/ 92 disk drives and up to six TF857 tape
subsystems
· Each SABB can be either SDI or DSSI
-. Each SDI SABB can hold up to four RA71 700-Mbyte (formatted) or four RA72
1.0-Gbyte (formatted) dual portable disk drives
• DSSI SABBs can hold up to four 1.0-Gbyte (formatted) RF72 ISEs, or up to four
2.0-Gbyte (formatted) RF73 ISEs
• Maximum disk storage capacity is 24 Gbytes (formatted) (24 RA72 drives) or
48 Gbytes (formatted) (24 RF73 ISEs)
· Maximum unattended tape storage backup capacity is 109.2 Gbytes (six TF857
tape drives). The TF857 tape subsystem consists of a DSSI-based streaming tape
device and an automatic cartridge loader

Ordering Information

Note: DECarray storage enclosures are 1.1-meter (42-inch) cabinets. GBf refers to
Gbytes formatted . Custom configurations are available from the factory with SDI
SABBs.

SF300 DECarrays are configured for single systems, and require appropriate
CK-SF200-Lx cable kits listed below:

SF300-CA/CD
SF300-HA/HD
SF300-TE/TD

7.20

Storage Devices

DECarray with one SF72 SABB (4 GB0 , 60/50 Hz
DECarray with three SF72 SABBs (12 GB0 , 60/50 Hz
DECarray with one TF857 tape drive, 60/50 Hz

Storage Arrays
DECarray 300 Family (SDI/DSSI)
(Continued)

To upgrade SF300 DECarrays to multi-host systems, order one of the following.
CK-SF200-LM
CK-SF200-LP
CK-SF200-L3
CK -SF200-L7
CK-SF200-L8

2.7-m (9-ft) DSSI cable kit for VAX 6000/7000/9000/10000
2.7-m (9-ft) DSSI cable kit for VAX 4000 and MicroVAX
7.6-m (25-ft) version of -LM
15.2-m (50-ft) version for VAX 6000/7000/9000/10000
15.2-m (50-ft) version for VAX 4000 and MicroVAX systems

The following DECarrays require external BC26V-12/25/50/80 cables-one per
drive; duplicate set required for dual porting.
SA300-CA/CD
SA300-HA/HD
SA301-CA/CD
SA301-HA/HD
SAJOO-XA/XD

DECarray with one SA72 SABB (4 GBf), 60/50 Hz
DECarray with three SA72 SABBs (12 GBf), 60/50 Hz
DECarray with one SA71 SABB (2.8 GBf), 60/50 Hz
DECarray three SA71 SABBs (8.4 GBf), 60/50 Hz
Empty DECarray cabinet, 60/50 Hz

Note: For SDI RA disk drives, order external BC26V-12/25/50/80 cables separately. One per box unless dual porting, then two per box.
The following cables are required when adding SA/SF arrays and RA disks into
the DECarray 3xx cabinet .
........_ CK-SA300-Ll
CK-SA300-L2
SA71-AK
SA71-BK
_§_A72-AK
SA72-BK- -

Specifications

Mounting kit for 3HI of SA7X disk
Mounting kit for 3HI of RA9X SABB
700-Mbyte RA71 for SA300, factory installed
2.8-Gbyte version (four RA7ls)
1-Gbyte SABB, factory installed in DECarray 300 (one RA72)
.4-Gb_y~ . SABB, factory installed in DECarray 300 (fovr RA72s)

Physical Characteristics
Height
Width
Depth
Weight
Empty cabinet
RA9x
Sx7X
TF857

106.9 cm (42 in.)
54.7 cm (21.5 in.)
91.5 cm (36 in.)
148 kg (327 lb)
34 kg (74 lb)
40 kg (89 lb)
25 kg (56 lb)

Note: Calculate weight of the DECarray 300 family by adding weight of empty
cabinet to weight of installed components. Sx7X with two drives is 34 kg
(75 lb).

240

Power Requirements

120

Number of phases
AC-plug type
Rated current
RA9x
Sx7x
Tx857

Single
NEMA L5-30P
24 amps
3.6
2.22
1.73

Operating Environment

Class A Operating Environment

Agency compliance
Maximum altitude
Relative humidity
Temperature

FCC, UL, IEC, CSA, TUEV, and FTZ
2438 m (8000 ft)
40% to 60% noncondensing
18° to 24° C (64.4° to 75.2° F)

Single

PIN 12-14379-03
12 amps
1.8
1.5
0.9

Disks Supported
RA70, RA71, RA72, RA90, RA92, RF72, RF73
Note: See SDI/DSSI Comparison Chart for performance specifications.
Tapes Supported

TF857, TF86 7

Storage Devices

7.21

Storage Arrays
SA900 DECarray (SDI) ........,__,........,.._
The SA900 DECarray packs 40 Gbytes of Standard Interconnect series storage
into 7 .0 square feet. This 170-cm (67-inch) high cabinet offers the flexibility of
configuring a variety of up to ten highly competitive half-rack SA7x storage array
building blocks (SABBs), RA92 disk drives, ESE50 solid state devices, and TA857
tape subsystems. Less than fully populated SA900 DECarrays are also available.
SABBs are preconfigured for upgrading to higher-capacity storage arrays in the
field. Storage arrays offer unparalleled data integrity and data availability features
that are key in commercial, financial, and realtime data acquisition applications.
Features
· Optimal floor utilization with 40 Gbytes of capacity in a single cabinet
· Flexibility-houses a mix of devices
• Starter configurations allow storage capacity to expand as storage needs grow
• Investment protection-starter entry-level configurations offer flexibility to consolidate existing SA70 SABBs and RA92 and RA90 disk drives into a powerful
footprint
· 2000 maximum requests/second (@ 50 ms) , fully configured with SA72 SABBs
• 2320 maximum requests/ second (@ 100 ms), fully configured with SA72 SABBs
• VAX Volume Shadowing and VAX Disk s.~riping
· VAXsimPLUS support
· Three-phase power
· One drive per port on any SDI controller or SDI server
· Maximum of 54.6 Gbytes of tape unattended backup within one footprint

Ordering Information

Note: The following table lists the SA900 SDI DECarrays, including their Gbyte
capacity and prerequisites. For dual porting: a duplicate set of open ports on an
additional SDI controller or I/O server and a duplicate set of BC26V-xx external
SDI cables are required.
Prerequisites

Order Number

Gbyte
Capacity

SA900-AA/AD
SA900-BA/BD
SA900-CA/CD
SA900-JA/JD
SA900-KA/KD
SA900-RA/RD
SA900-SA/SD
SA900-TE/TF
SA900-TG/TH
SA900-TJ/TK
SA900-XAIXD
SA900-BA/BB

4.0
2.8
1.5
11.2
16
15
40
8.2
36.4
54.6
0
0

Number of
Components

1 x SA72-HK
1 x SA7 1-HK
1 x RA92-KA
4 x SA71-HK
4 x SA72-HKS
_ 10 x RA92~
10 x SA72
1 x TA857
2 x TA857
3 x TA857
-

Space Available
for Mix of SA 7x/
RA92/ESE/T ape

Number
Open
Ports

BC26V

VMS

HSCxx

Cables

Version

Software 1 Software

9
9
9
6
6

4
4
1
16
16

NIA
NIA

8
6
4

40
1
2
3

10
10

NIA
NIA

5.4-2
6.0
5.4-2
6.0
5.3-1
Note 2
5.4-2
6.0
5.4-2
6.0
5.3-1
Note 3
10
5.4-2
6.0
40
5.4-2
1
6.0
2
5.4-2
6.0
5.4-2
6.0
3
(For migration program)
(Empty cabinet)

HSC50
4.1
4.1
3.9A
4.1
4.1
4.1
4.1
4.1
4.1
4.1

HSC40/60/70/90 software version
HSC40/50/60 software version
3
HSC40/60 software version
2

Cable

Length

Where Used

BC26V-12
BC26V-25
BC26V-50
BC26V-80

12 ft (3.7 m)
25 ft (7.6 m)
50 ft (15.2 m)
80 ft (24.4 m)

One cable connects one RA7x or one RA9x to
an existing SDI IIO server or controller.

Note: In the SA900, BC26V-12 (12 ft/3.7 m) cables are suitable for drives located
in the bottom rack only. It is recommended that 25-ft (7 .6-m) cables or longer
be used in all slots of the SA900 storage array.

7.22

Storage Devices

Storage Arrays
Configuration Notes

Ordering an SA900 DECarray is similar to ordering multiple CPUs. Order each
SA900 as a separate line item. Include the components for that cabinet directly
under the SA900 order number.
Note: If SA900 is not ordered separately as described above, Digital will follow
the default configuration rule: drives for multiple cabinets will be distributed
evenly among the cabinets.

For example, if two 120-V, 60-Hz SA900 storage arrays are required-the first
with five SA72-HK and two RA92-KA in a single-ported configuration and the
second with three SA72-HK and two RA92-KA in a single-ported configurationthe order should specify:
1. (1) SA900-AA (SA900 with one SA72-HK)
2. (4) SA72-HK (SA72 installed in SA900-AA)
3. (2) RA92-KA (RA92 installed in SA900-AA)
4. (22) BC26V-xx (external SDI cables)
5. (1) SA900-AA (SA900 with one SA72-HK)
6. (2) SA72-HK (SA72 installed in SA900-AA)
7. (2) RA92 -KA (RA92 installed in SA900-AA)
8. (14) BC26V-xx (external SDI cables
It would be configured as follows.

SA72
SA72

SA72

RA92

RA92
BU-3194

If a 120-V, 60-Hz SA900 storage array with five SA72-HK and two RA92-KA in a
SA900 storage array is required, the order should specify:
1. (1) SA900-AA (SA900 with one SA72 -HK)
2. (4) SA72-HK (4-Gbyte SABB)
3. (2) RA92-KA (1.5-Gbyte disk drive)
4. (22) BC26V-xx (external SDI cables)
It would be configured as follows.

SA72
SA72

SA72

RA92

RA92
BU-3193

If less than fully configured, but greater than starter options are desired, SA71,
SA72, and RA92 options can be added to the SA900 in the factory and in the
field.

Storage Devices

7.23

Storage Arrays
The following table offers examples of order numbers required for more storage capacity, e.g., to obtain 6 Gbytes of
storage, include one SA900-AA (4 Gbytes), one SA72-GK (1 Gbyte), and one RA72-AF (1 Gbyte). Note that not all possible
capacities are listed.
Target Formatted Capacity in Gbytes
Order Number/Capacity (Gbytes)

1.5

2.8

SA900-AA (4-Gbyte RA72)
SA900-BA (2.8-Gbyte RA71)
SA900-CA (1.5-Gbyte RA92)

1
1

SA900-JA (11.2-Gbyte RA71)

SA900-KA (16-Gbyte RA72)

SA900-RA (15-Gbyte RA92)

SA900-SA (40-Gbyte RA72)

SA71-HK (2.8-Gbyte RA71)

SA72-GK (1-Gbyte RA72)

SA72-HK (4-Gbyte RA72)

1
2

RA71-AF (700-Mbyte)
RA72-AF (1-Gbyte)

RA92-KA (1.5-Gbyte)

Performance
Option

Components

Capacity

1/0 requests/
second @ 50 ms

SA900-CA/CD
(3) RA92-KA

(4) RA92

6.0 Gbytes

176

Seismic, imaging, engineering

SA900-BA/BD
(4) RA92-KA

(1) SA71
(4) RA92

8.8 Gbytes

372

General computing, small office
administration timesharing, MIS interactive

- ~A900-RA/RD

(10) RA92

15.0 Gbytes

440

Image processing, seismic, engineering

SIA900-AA/AD
(3) SA72-HK

(4) SA72

16.0 Gbytes

800

OLTP realtime, database

SA900-SA/SD

(10) SA72

40.0 Gbytes

2000

Very large database, imaging, seismic,
financial

Application

Note: As with all Digital storage subsystems, the SA900 capacity, performance, and data availability can be balanced to
meet specific requirements. Digital offers a variety of hardware and software products and capacity planning tools to help
configure a subsystem to meet users' needs.

7.24

Storage Devices

Storage Arrays
Specifications

P hysical Characteristics
170.0 cm (66.94 in. )
61.0 cm (24.0 in.)
108.0 cm (42.5 in.)
532.0 kg (1172.0 lb)

Height
Width
Depth
Weight

Note: Weight represents maximum configuration.
Power Requirements
NEMA receptacle type
IEC receptacle type
Number of phases
Voltage
Nominal
Model

L21-30R
309
3
Frequency
Nominal
Hz

Current in Amps
Steady State
Start

SA900-AA
SA900-AD
SA900-SA
SA900-SD

120/ 208
240/ 416
120/ 208
240/ 208

50/ 60
50/ 60

50160
50160

6.8
3.9
27.5
15.9

Thermal Dissipation
N

Watts Btu/ kJ/ h

0.5 0.0 3 .4 3 .4 291
0.3 0.0 1.5 1.5
291
14.0 10.1 10.1 18.0 2460
6.3 4.5 4.5 9.0 2460

993 Btu/h
1048 kJ/ h
8396 Btu/ h
8856 kJ/ h

Notes:
1. Currents are for nominal voltages of 120 Vac phase-to-neutral corresponding to 208
Vac phase-to-phase or for 240 Vac phase-to-neutral corresponding to 416 Vac
phase-to-phase.
- 101 and 220 nominal voltages will have proportionately higher phase currents by the
ratio of 120/ 101 or 240/ 220 to the currents specified in this table.

2. Startup currents are calculated for the worst case power phase.
3. Line and neutral currents are broken down by number, i.e. , Ll, L2 , L3 , N. Neutral
currents in these products are typically higher than phase currents. It is recommended
that neutral site wiring be oversized by 1.7 times that of any one phase.

4. Weight data for all units is approximate and has been rounded up to the nearest
5 pounds.

5. Due to the large variable number of SDI cables the SA900 cabinet can accommodate,
the maximum cabinet depth can be 42.50 inches (108 cm), and the minimum cabinet
depth can be 34.25 inches (87 cm).
- This data is typical and calculated for the product at the time of release. It is
subject to change without notice.

SA905 Removable DECarray (SDI)
The SA905 (67-inch cabinet) Removable DECarray can house up to 20 full-height
5.25-inch removable RA71-RK, and RA72 -RK disk drives. For European markets,
there is a 12-drive limit.
Each drive is configured in a canister providing shock and vibration protection,
and carrying capabilities. The drives have full DSA/SDI functionality, including
dual porting and VAXsimPLUS.
Power and cooling for RA72/RA71-RK 5.25-inch drives are provided by the
SA7XR-AK enclosure. The RA72-RK, RA71 -RK, and the SA7XR-AK can be factory
or field installed in the SA905 DECarray. The SA905 provides capacity for up to
20 RA72 and/or RA71 drives and five SA7XR-AK enclosures. SA905 connects to
any of the SDI controllers: HSC90, HSC60, HSC70, HSC50, HSC40, KDM70,
KDB50, KDA50, and UDA50.

Storage Devices

7.25

Storage Arrays
SA905 Removable DECarray (SDI)
(Continued)

Ordering Information

Features
• Removable-easy storage fdr sensitive data; key locks front door
· Flexibility-two-capacity disk drives (700 Mbytes or 1 Gbyte)
· Static dual porting-increased data availability, no single point of failure
· VAXsimPLUS-preventive maintenance for higher data availability
· RA71/RA72 seek time: 12.5 ms
• Capacity with RA72s (formatted): 20 Gbytes
• Capacity with RA71s (formatted): 14 Gbytes
Note: SA905 enclosure is a 170-cm (67-inch) DECarray storage cabinet. External
BC26V-xx cables must be ordered separately for all drives in a DECarray.
SA905-BA/BD

Prerequisite:

Specifications

1.4-Gbyte removable storage starter configuration with two
removable RA71-RK drives and one SA7XR-AK full-rack removable enclosure. Space for four additional SA7XR enclosures,
(maximum four drives per enclosure) and a maximum of 18
additional RA71-RK and/or RA72-RK removable drives, 120 V,
60 Hz/240 V, 50 Hz. BC26V-xx cables must be ordered
separately.
Any SDI controller or I/O server.

SA905-AA/AD

Same as above except 2-Gbyte removable storage starter configuration with RA72-RK drives.

SA7XR-AK

Removable full-rack enclosure provides power and cooling for
5.25-inch SDI RA71 and RA72 drives. Maximum of four drives
per enclosure. These are to be housed in an SA905. For Q-bus,
VAXBI, CI XMI, and UNIBUS systems; 120-240 V, 50-60 Hz.

RA71-RK

)00-Mbyte removable 5.25-inch SDI drive enclosed in a canister for installation into an SA7XR-AK removable full-rack enclosure (maximum four drives per enclosure) for power and cooling. These are to be housed in an SA905. For Q-bus, VAXBI,
CI XMI, and UNIBUS systems; 120-240 V, 50-60 Hz.

RA72-RK

Same as above except 1-Gbyte removable 5.25-inch SDI drive
enclosed in a canister for installation into an SA7XR-AK removable full-rack enclosure.

Cable

'Length

Where Used

BC26V-25
BC26V-50
BC26V-80

25 ft (3 .7 m)
50 ft (7.6 m)
80 ft (24.4 m)

One cable connects one RA71, or RA72 to
an existing SDI I/O server or controller.

Physical Characteristics
Height
Width
Depth
Weight

170.0 cm (66.9 in.)
61.0 cm (24.0 in.)
108.0 cm (42.5 in.)
203.0 kg (447 lb)

Note: Weight data is approximate and has been rounded up to the nearest

5 pounds.
Power Requirements
NEMA receptacle type
IEC receptacle type
Number of phases

7.26

Storage Devices

L21-30P
309
3

Storage Arrays
SA905 Removable DECarray (SDI)
(Continued)

Voltage
Nominal

Model

SA905-AA/BA
SA905-AD/BD

120
240

Frequency
Nominal
Hz

Thermal
Dissipation

Current in Amps
Steady State

50/60
50/60

Start

Watts

Btu/kJ/h

6.8
3.9

0.5

3.4
1.5

0.0
0.0

3.4
1.5

291
291

993 Btu/h
1048 kJ/h

0.3

Notes:
Only minimum and maximum values are presented in above table. This data is typical and calculated
for the product at the time of release; it is subject to change without notice.
• Currents are for nominal voltages of 120 Vac phase to neutral corresponding to 208 Vac phase to
phase or for 240 Vac phase to neutral corresponding to 416 Vac phase to phase; 101 and 220
nominal voltages will have proportionately higher phase currents by the ratio of 120/101 or 2401220
to the currents specified in this table.
• Startup currents are calculated for the worst case power phase.
• Line and neutral currents are broken down by number, i.e., Ll, L2, L3, and N. Neutral currents in
these products are typically higher than phase currents. It is recommended that neutral site wiring be
oversized by 1.7 times that of any one phase.
• Weight data for all units is approximate and has been rounded up to the nearest 5 pounds.

SASOO Storage Array (SDI)
The SA800 storage array provides between one and eight RA92 disk component
drives available in a 1.5-meter (60-inclr) cabinet. SA800 storage arrays offer
unparalleled data integrity and data availability-features that are key in commercial, financial, and realtime data acquisition applications.
Features
· Capacity (formatted): 12 Gbytes
· Capacity (unformatted 1'): 15.9 Gbytes
· Maximum requests/s (@ 50 ms): 342
• Maximum requests/s (@ 100 ms): 402t
• Dual access: standard
· VAX VMS Volume Shadowing
· VAXsimPLUS support
* Unf~rmatted capacity provided for comparison purposes; only formatted capacity is user-accessible
in any disk drive.

t For symmetrical load balancing. It is recommended that storage arrays be loaded at more conservative levels.

Ordering Information

Note: Open ports on SDI controllers or I/O servers and BC26V external SDI
cables are required. For dual porting: One open port on additional SDI controller or I/O server and one additional external BC26V-xx cable required for each
RA92 component drive. SA800 enclosure is a 1.5-meter (60-inch) H9646-SA/SB
cabinet.
Prerequisites
Order Number
SA800-CA/CD
SA800-FA/FD
SA800-HA/HD
..--- SA800-GA/GD
SA800-JA/JD
SA800-LA/LD~'

Gbyte
Capacity

RA92

Drives

Number of
Ports

BC26 V Cables

1.5

1
2
4
6
8
1

1
2
4
6
8
16

3.0
6.0
9.0
12.0
24.0

Number of

"' Two 1.5-meter (60-inch) H9646-SAISB cabinets provided.

Storage Devices

7.27

Storage Arrays
SA800 Storage Array (SDI)

(Continued)

Specifications

Cable

Length

Where Used

BC26V-12
BC26V-25
BC26V-50
BC26V-80

12 ft (3.7 m)
25 ft (7.6 m)
50 ft (15.2 m)
80 ft (24.4 m)

One cable connects one RA92 or one RA70
component drive to an existing SDI I/O server
or controller.

Physical Characteristics
Height
Width
Depth
Weight

156.2 cm (60.5 in. )
55.9 cm (21.3 in.)
91.4 cm (36.0 in.)
470.0 kg (925.0 lb)

Note: Weight represents maximum configuration.
Power Requirements
NEMA receptacle type
IEC receptacle type
PCS+/PDS+ cable type
Number of phases

Model

SA800-CA
SA800-CD

L21 -30R
309
BC24W (120/208)
3

Voltage
Nominal

Frequency
Nominal

120/208
240/4 16

60
50

Current in Amps
Steady State

Thermal Dissipation

Start

Watts Btu/k.J/h

6.0
3.6

3.6
2.2

0.0
0.0

3.6
2.2

332
333

1133 Btu/h
1199 kJ/h

Notes:
Only minimum and maximum values are presented in above table. This data is typical and calculated
for the product at the time of release; it is subject to change without notice.
• Currents are for nominal voltages of 120 Vac phase-to-neutral corresponding to 208 Vac
phase-to-phase, or for 240 Vac phase-to-neutral corresponding to 416 Vac phase-to-phase.
• Startup currents are calculated for worst-case power phase.
• Line and neutral currents are broken down by number, i.e., Ll, L2 , L3 , and N. Neutral currents in
these products are typically higher than phase currents. It is recommended that neutral site wiring be
oversized by 1.7 times that of any one phase.

The SF400 DECarray is Digital's highest capacity DSSI storage array. It supports
almost any combination of DSSI storage array building blocks, including the
SF72, SF73, and the TF857 tape subsystem within 10 half-rack slots.~" For maximum flexibility, these storage products can be installed into any location in the
DECarray 400 cabinet.
The DECarray 400's dual power distribution option greatly reduces the possibility of the storage subsystem becoming a single point of failure and allows for
greatly enhanced shadow set availability when the individual members of shadow
sets are also configured on separate DSSI buses and adapters.
The size of the DECarray 400 cabinet matches the dimensions and physical
appearance of the new VAX 7000/10000 platform. This newest member of the
Storage Array families provides a variety of packaging options for DSSI storage
products. In addition, the DECarray 400 has been designed to the mounting
specifications defined for Digital' s future storage products.
,; Within Ql the SF35 and TF867 will be installable options for the SF400.

7.28

Storage Devices

Storage Arrays
SF400 DECarray (DSSI) (Continued)

The following table compares the SF400 DECarray to other DEC storage subsystem products.
SFlOO

SF200

SF300

SF400

Maximum
disk capacity

10.2 Gbytes

61.3 Gbytes

102.2 Gbytes

TF857 capacity

18.2 Gbytes

36.4 Gbytes

109.2 Gbytes

72.8 Gbytes

TF867 capacity

42 Gbytes

84 Gbytes

252 Gbytes

126 Gbytes

Maximum
SF35s/spindles

1/ 12

6/72

10/ 120

Maximum
SF7 xi spindles

1/4

6/ 24

10/ 40

Maximum
TF8x7 tapes

Features
• Over 100 Gbytes of disk capacity, 65 percent more disk capacity than the SF2xx
series cabinets.
· Dual power distribution option allows isolated shadow sets in one cabinet
· Up to four TF857 tape subsystems installable in any position within a single
cabinet (or four TF867 tape subsystems within Ql)
· 15 .2-meter (50-foot) DSSI host interconnect cable

Ordering Information

All SF400s are preconfigured for single-host operation; i.e., they are preconfigured to operate as an end-node on the DSSI bus. Because there is no SF400
bulkhead and no bulkhead to SF/TF internal cable, individual SF73s or SF35s
can be easily reconfigured to support multi-host/ through-bus DSSI VAXcluster
system configurations. Terminators are supplied with the cabinet.
SF400 Dual Power Distribution Upgrades
SF400-UA/UD

Upgrade to dual power distribution unit, 60 Hz/50 Hz

Custom SF400 DECarray
SF400-XA/XD

0 Gbyte 10 open slot DSSI cabinet 60 Hz/50 Hz

Preconfigured SF400/SF73 DECarrays
SF400-BA/BD
SF400-CA/CD
SF400-HA/HD
SF400-JA/JD
SF400-KAIKD

4-Gbyte 1 SF73, DSSI 5-high cabinet, 60 Hz/50 Hz
8-Gbyte 1 SF73, DSSI 5-high cabinet, 60 Hz/50 Hz
32-Gbyte 4 SF73, DSSI 5-high cabinet, 60 Hz/50 Hz
48-Gbyte 6 SF73, DSSI 5-high cabinet, 60 Hz/50 Hz
64-Gbyte 8 SF73 , DSSI 5-high cabinet, 60 Hz/50 Hz

Preconfigured SF400/SF35 DECarrays
SF400-BE/BH
SF400-HE/HH
SF400-JE/JH

5.1-Gbyte 1 SF35, DSSI 5-high cabinet, 60 Hz/50 Hz
41-Gbyte 4 SF35 , DSSI 5-high cabinet, 60 Hz/50 Hz
61-Gbyte 6 SF35, DSSI 5-high cabinet, 60 Hz/50 Hz

Storage Devices

7.29

Storage Arrays
SF400 DECarray (DSSI) (Continued)

SF400 Ordering Tables*
SF73 Storage

7
'

7.30

Storage Devices

Order the
following j,

SF35 Storage

Required~

4 Gbytes

SF400-BA/BD

5.1 Gbytes

SF400-BE/BH

8 Gbytes

SF400-CA/CD

10.2 Gbytes

SF400-XA/XD
+ 1 SF35-JE

12 Gbytes

SF400-CA/CD
+ 1 SF73-HE

15.3 Gbytes

SF400-BE/BH
+ 1 SF35-JE

16 Gbytes

SF400-CA/CD
+ 1 SF73-JE

20.4 Gbytes

SF400-XA/XD
+ 2 SF35-JEs

20 Gbytes

SF400-BA/BD
+ 2 SF73-JEs

25.5 Gbytes

SF400-BE/BH
+ 2 SF35-JEs

24 Gbytes

SF400-CAICD
+ 2 SF73-JEs

30.6 Gbytes

SF400-XA/XD
+ 3 SF35-JEs

28 Gbytes

SF400-CA/CD
+ 2 SF73-JEs
+ 1 SF73-HE

35.7 Gbytes

SF400-BE/BH
+ 3 SF35-JEs

32 Gbytes

SF400-HA/HD

40.8 Gbytes

SF400-HE/HH

36 Gbytes

SF400-HA/HD
+ 1 SF73-HE

46.0 Gbytes

SF400-HE/HH
+ 1 SF35-HE

40 Gbytes

SF400-HA/HD
+ 1 SF73-JE

51.1 Gbytes

SF400-HE/HH
+ 1 SF35-JE

44 Gbytes

SF400-HA/HD
+ 1 SF73-JE
+ 1 SF73-HE

56.2 Gbytes

SF400-HE/HH
+ 1 SF35-JE
+ 1 SF35-HE

48 Gbytes

SF400-JA/JD

61.3 Gbytes

SF400-JE/JH

52 Gbytes

SF400-JA/JD
+ 1 SF73-HE

66.4 Gbytes

SF400-JE/JH
+ 1 SF35-HE

56 Gbytes

SF400-JAIJD
+ 1 SF73-JE

71.5 Gbytes

SF400-JE/JH
+ 1 SF35-JE

60 Gbytes

SF400-JAIJD
+ 1 SF73-JE
+ 1 SF73-HE

76.6 Gbytes

SF400-JE/JH
+ 1 SF35-JE
+ 1 SF35-HE

64 Gbytes

SF400-KAIKD

81.7 Gbytes

SF400-JE/JH
+ 2 SF35-JEs

68 Gbytes

SF400-KA/KD
+ 1 SF73-HE

86.9 Gbytes

SF400-JE/JH
+ 2 SF35-JEs
+ 1 SF35-HE

72 Gbytes

SF400-KA/KD
+ 1 SF73-JE

92.0 Gbytes

SF400-JE/JH
+ 3 SF35-JEs

76 Gbytes

SF400-KA/KD
+ 1 SF73-JE
+ 1 SF73-HE

97.1 Gbytes

SF400-JE/JH
+ 3 SF35-JEs
+ 1 SF35-HE

80 Gbytes

SF400-KA/KD
+ 2 SF73-JEs

102 .2 Gbytes

SF400-JE/JH
+ 4 SF35-JEs

Required~

Ordering combinations are not limited to those listed in the SF400 ordering table. For example,
one SF72-JE can be substituted for one SF73-HE and two SF72-JEs can be substituted for one
SF73-JE, etc. SF73 section of table is broken out in two disk increments; SF35 section is broken
out in six disk increments.

Storage Arrays
SF400 DECarray (DSSI) (Continued)
Cabling

BC21Q-16
4.9 m (16 ft)
VAX 6000
VAX 7000
VAX 10000

BC22Q-16
4.9 m (16 ft)

BC21Q-25
7.6 m (25 ft)

SF400

BC21Q-50*
15.2 m (50 ft)

BC22Q-25
7.6 m (25 ft)

VAX 4000

BC22Q-50
15.2 m (50 ft)
BU-3302

*50-foot cables supported in Single-Host/System applications only.

Specifications

Physical Characteristics
Height
Width
Depth
Weight

1700 mm (67 inches)
800 mm (31 inches)
875 mm (34.5 inches)
544 kg (1200 lb) maximum

Power Requirements
Voltage (ac)
Number of phases
AC-plug type
Rated current

120/208 Vac and 240/416 Vac

3
NEMA L21-30P and IEC-309-516P6W
24 Amps/phase and 16 Amps/phase

Operating Environment
Class A operating environment
Agency compliance
Relative humidity
Temperature
Heat dissipation min/max
Non-operating altitude
Operating altitude
Systems supported
Disks/tapes supported

U.L., CSA, TUEV, FCC, VDE
10% to 85%
10° to 40° C (50° to 104° F)
4000 watts (13.6 KBtu/Hr), maximum
4900 m (16000 ft) maximum
2400 m (8000 ft) maximum
VAX 10000, VAX 9000, VAX 7000, VAX 6000,
VAX 4000
SF35, SF73, SF72, TF857, TF867

Storage Devices

7.31

Storage Arrays
SF220 DECarray (DSSI)

lllllllllllllHlllllllllllllllllll /
1111111111111111111111111111111111 ·

The SF220 cabinet packages the performance SF35 Storage Array Building
Blocks (SABB), the SF72/SF73 capacity SABBs, and TF857 tape subsystems. The
configurations thus brought to VAX systems balance performance/ capacity and
backup in single-system, two-system, and three-system environments. The SF220
fully populated with SF35s provides a maximum capacity of 61.2 Gbytes and a
peak throughput capability of 5 ,256 1/0 requests per second.
Features

· Maximum capacity of 61.3 Gbytes (formatted) in a single 1.5-meter-high
2
(60-in.-high) cabinet (5 ft of floor space)
· Maximum 5,256 requests per second (with RF35s) at 100-ms response time
· SABB add-on starter configurations in 1.7-Gbyte increments, with 852-Mbyte easy
upgrades
· Supports warm-swap of disk ISEs/TF857s
· Fully DSA compliant
• Upgrade with SF72 or SF73

Ordering Information

Configuration Notes

Note: The SF220 DECarray subsystem is factory configured to operate as an
"end-node" (see Note 2 below) and supported for use with the VAX 10000/
900017 000/6000/4000 and MicroVAX 3 xxx (except MicroVAX 3100) .

SF220-BA/BD

5.1 Gbytes-six RF35 disks in half-rack, 208-V 60-Hz/416-V
50-Hz three-phase

SF220-CA/CD

10.2 Gbytes-12 RF35 disks in one half-rack, 208-V
60-Hz/416-V 50-Hz three-phase

SF220-FA/FD

20.4 Gbytes-24 RF35 disks in two half-racks, 208-V
60-Hz/416-V 50-Hz three-phase

SF220-HA/HD

30.7 Gbytes-36 RF35 disks in three half-racks, 208-V
60-Hz/416-V 50-Hz three-phase

SF220-JA/JD

61.3 Gbytes-72 RF35 disks in six half-racks, 208-V
60-Hz/416-V 50-Hz three-phase

CK-SF200-L7

15.2-m (50-ft) cable kit for VAX 6000 and VAX 9000 systems

CK-SF200-L8

15.2-m (50-ft) cable kit for VAX 6000 and MicroVAX systems

Maximum two TF857 magazine tape subsystems can be configured into
SF220 storage array. Both can be on the same DSSI bus.

All SF220s are cabled for single-host/system or end-node operation; i.e., the
SF35s within the SF220 are terminated at the end of each bus. SF220s,
configured as is, also support DSSI VAX.cluster systems as long as the SF220
is located at the end of the DSSI bus; this requires at least one system to be
located in the middle of the bus. One SF220 will support up to 72 RF35s
when configured this way.

3. SF220s can be easily re-cabled to support DSSI VAX.cluster systems
configurations in through-bus mode with the SF220 located in the middle of
the DSSI bus. The maximum number of RF35s in any one SF220 that is
supported in through-bus mode is 48 because of SF220 bulkhead/connection
limitations.

7.32

Storage Devices

Storage Arrays
SF220 DECarray (DSSI) (Continued)

SF35s within the SF220 are factory-configured to support two DSSI buses
that can each support from one to six RF35s. The SF35 can also be
re-configured to support four DSSI buses with one to three RF35s on each
DSSI bus.

Increase SF220 in one RF35 increment by using SF35-UK expansion kits for
SF35 -BK/HF half-rack storage arrays. The SF35-BK/HK and SF35-BK/JK and
TF857-Ax half-racks come with SF220 internal cabling for connecting with
other half-racks.

For the number of options required for striping SF220 configuration for VAX_
9000 see the table under configuration notes for the SF200/SF210 DECarray
storage subsystems. The table is also true for SF220 subsystems.

The SF200 supports up to 72 RF35 disks. Refer to the following tables for
guidelines on configuring single, dual-host, and tri-host systems with SF35
storage array.

SF220 with SF35s-Single-Host and DSSI VAXcluster Configurations
Number of RF35s

Options Required/System
DSSI Adapters

Single- and
Two-System

1
2

Three-System Four-System

DECarray

XMI2

Q-bus

Cable Kits

Four-system configuration supported on VAX_ 6000/7000/10000 only.
VAX 6000/7000/ 9000/ 10000; VAX_ 9000 is single-system only.
VAX 4000 and MicroVAX. 3xxx (except MicroVAX 3100).

Storage Devices

7.33

Storage Arrays
Cable Kits
VAX 6000
VAX 7000
VAX 10000

CK-SF200-LM
2.7 m (9 ft)

CK-SF200-LP
2. 7 m (9 ft)

CK-SF200-L3
7.6 m (25 ft)

CK-SF200-L4
7.6 m (25 ft)

SF220

CK-SF200-L5
4.9m (1 6ft)

CK-SF200-L6
4.9 m (16 ft)

CK-SF200-L7
15.2 m (50 ft)

CK-SF200-L8
15.2 m (50 ft)

VAX 4000

BU 3303

CK-SF100-LM/L3/L5 used for all DSSI system-to-system interconnections between
VAX 6000, VAX 7000, and VAX 10000.
CK-SF200-LM/L3/L5 can also be used to connect the SF200/SF210/SF220 to the
VAX 9000.
Note: Use CK-SF100-LM/L3/L5 to connect the VAX 6000 to the VAX 6000.
CK-SF200-LP/L6 can also be used to connect the SF200/SF210/SF220 to the
MicroVAX II and MicroVAX 3xxx (except MicroVAX 3100).
Note: Use CK-SFlOO-LP to connect the VAX 6000 to the VAX 4000 or to the
R400X expander box.

Specifications

Physical Characteristics
Height
Width
Depth
Weight
Minimum configuration
Maximum configuration

153.7 cm (60.5 in.)
61.0 cm (24 .0 in.)
76.2 cm (30 .0 in.)
226 kg (500 lbs)
454 kg (1000 lbs)

Power Requirements
NEMA receptacle type
IEC receptacle type
PCS+IPDS+ cable type
Number of phases

Model

SF2x0-JA
SF2x0-JD
SF2x0-TE
SF2x0-TF

L21 -30R
309516
BC24W (120/208)

Voltage
Nominal

Frequency
Nominal

1101120
2401416
1101120
2401416

60
50
60
50

Current in Amps
Steady State

Thermal
Dissipation

Start3

15.5
9.3
1.6
1.6

6.25 3.28 5.27 8.75
4.3 2.3 3.65 6.0
1.3 NIA NIA 1.3
1.0 NIA NIA 1.0

Watts Btul kJl h
1133
1106
92
127

3875 Btu/h
3783 kJl h
315 Btul h
434 kJl h

Notes:
Only minimum and maximum values are presented in above table. This data is typical and calculated
for the product at the time of release; it is subject to change without notice.
• Currents are for nominal voltages of 120 Vac phase-to-neutral corresponding to 208 Vac
phase-to-phase, or for 240 Vac phase-to-neutral corresponding to 416 Vac phase-to-phase.
• Startup currents are calculated for worst-case power phase.
• Line and neutral currents are broken down by number, i.e., Ll, L2, L3, and N. Neutral currents in
these products are typically higher than phase currents. It is recommended that neutral site wiring be
oversized by 1.7 times that of any one phase.

7.34

Storage Devices

Storage Arrays
SF200/SF210 DECarrays (DSSI)
The SF200/SF210 DECarray storage subsystems bring DSSI technology to the
computer room. The SF200/SF72 and SF210/SF73 are supported for use with the
VAX 10000, VAX 9000, VAX 7000, VAX 6000, VAX 4000, MicroVAX 3xxx
(except MicroVAX 3100), and MicroVAX II systems.
The SF200/SF210 provides from 2 to 48 Gbytes of usable disk storage with the
1-Gbyte RF72 and 2-Gbyte RF73 disk integrated storage elements (ISEs) and up
to 36.4 Gbytes of unattended tape backup when two TF857s are included.
The SF200 uses the SF72 (maximum six) storage array building block and the
18.2- Gbyte (formatted) TFB,57 (maximum two) magazine tape subsystem. The
SF72 is a 2- or 4-Gbyte (formatted) half-rack building block within the SF200
and provides incremental capacity, starting as small as 2 Gbytes. Each SF72 is a
separately cooled and powered package with two or four RF72 disks. The 4- or
8-Gbyte SF73 (2-Gbyte RF73 component disk ISE) can be added to an SF200
configuration directly from the factory or in the field.
The SF210 uses the SF73 (maximum six) storage array building block and the
18.2-Gbyte (formatted) TF857 (maximum two) magazine tape subsystem. The
SF73 is a 4- or 8-Gbyte half-rack building block within the SF210 and provides
incremental capacity, starting as small as 4 Gbytes. Each SF73 is a separately
cooled and powered package with two or four RF73 qisks. The 2-Gbyte or
4-Gbyte SF72 can also be added to the SF210 configuration from the factory or
in the field.
The SF200/SF210 can be used to support DSSI VAx.cluster systems as well as
single-host or striping configurations. The versatility and capacity of the SF200/
SF210 allows for the support of one or all three types of configurations at the
same time. For example, up to three hosts/systems can be sharing disk and tape
ISEs as part of a DSSI VAXcluster system while other hosts/ systems are accessing
other ISEs within the same SF200/SF210.
The SF200/ SF210 offers the flexibility required to take advantage of the fast
response time, high QIO/bandwidth, and data availability/integrity characteristics
of DSSI VAx.cluster systems and configurations.

A single SF2QO/SF210 can be configured to support up to 14 DSSI buses, providing up to 56 Mbytes/ second bandwidth in a DSSI VAXcluster system or single-host configuration or 12 DSSI buses and 48 Mbytes/ second bandwidth in
striping mode (requires QL-YELA9-xx striping drivers).
Multiple SF200/SF210s containing up to 144 disks (up to 288 Gbytes capacity)
can be configured as part of DSSI VAXcluster system and single-host configurations/ applications that require large storage capacity.
Features

· Maximum capacity SF200-24 Gbytes (formatted) and 33.6 Gbytes (unformatted) , SF210--48 Gbytes (formatted ) and 62.4 Gbytes (unformatted) in a single
1.5-meter-high (60-inch-high) cabinet (five square feet of floor space)
· Unattended backup of up to 36.4 Gbytes by optional magazine tape subsystems
(two embedded in cabinet)
· Storage array building block starter configurations in 2 Gbytes (SF200) and
4 Gbytes (SF210) formatted, for increments with easy upgrade
· Maximum 1200 requests per second (24 RF72s in an SF200/24 RF73s in an
SF210) at 150-ms response time
• Supports warm-swap of disk ISEs/ TF857
· VAXsimPLUS support
• Fully DSA compliant
• All single-system configurations can be field-upgraded to two- or threesystem DSSI VAXcluster configurations.
• Upgrade with SF72 or SF73

Storage Devices

7.35

Storage Arrays
Configuration Notes

1. Maximum two TF857 magazine tape subsystems can be configured into any
SF200 or SF210 storage array. Both can be on the same DSSI bus.
2. It is recommended that customers select the SF200/SF210-xNxD for multihost/system (as well as single-host) DSSI VAXcluster applications. To do this,
the SF200/SF210 must be configured as an end-node and any system used as
a middle-node must use the KFMSA-BA/CK-KFMSA-LN adapter/
cabinet kit combination (VAX 6000, VAX 7000, VAX 10000) or the VAX
4000 Model 300/500/600 DSSI Bus 1 to connect to adjacent nodes. Utilizing
the SF200/SF210 -xNxD for multi-host/system applications will allow customers to:
·Maximize the number of RF72/RF73 ISEs (maximum six) per DSSI bus in
dual-host/system configurations.
·Upgrade from single-host/system configurations to multi-host/system configurations without having to reconfigure the SF200/SF210.
3. The SF200/SF210-xE/ xH variations will also support two- and three-system
DSSI VAXcluster configurations in which host systems are used as end nodes.
The SF200/SF210 -xE/xH variations are recommended for striping applications because each SF7x box is preconfigured with two SF7x-to-bulkhead
cables.
4. The SF200/SF210 supports up to six RF disks and one tape on a single DSSI
bus, or four RF disks and two tapes.
5. All SF200/SF210-xNxD single-system variants are preconfigured to support
up to six RF7x ISEs and one TF857 per DSSI bus.
6. All SF200/SF210-xE/xH DSSI VAXcluster/Striping variants are preconfigured
to support up to four RF7x ISEs per DSSI bus.
7. The drives in an SF7x-JK (four RF7x) can be "split" into pairs which then
must be connected to different DSSI buses. This is necessary because, in
"split mode,'' the DSSI bus for each pair of drives is terminated in the SF7x
storage array. This feature allows an SF210/SF210 to support a maximum of
six RF7x drives per bus and 24 RF7x drives on four DSSI buses. The
SF7x-HK (2 RF7x) does not have this feature.
8. For SF200/SF210 DSSI VAXcluster configurations with requirements of six
RF7x drives per DSSI bus, order one SF7x-HA (two RF7x) per DSSI bus in
addition to a preconfigured SF200/SF210. It is important to note that the
SF200/SF210 can hold a maximum of six SF7x storage arrays. If the SF7x-HA
is upgraded with a SF7x-UK, the SF7x-HA must be connected to another
DSSI bus.

Software Support

VAXsimPLUS Support: SF200 supported in current release. SF210 will be supported in a future release of VAXsimPLUS.
· SF200 requires VMS V5.4-2 or later
• SF210 requires VMS V5 .5 or later

7.36

Storage Devices

Storage Arrays
Ordering Information

Different SF200/SF210 variations can be ordered depending on capacity and
application requirements.
To maximize the number of RF72/RF73 ISEs (maximum six) per DSSI bus, it is
recommended that customers select SF200/SF210-xNxD variations for a
two -system DSSI VAXcluster (as well as single-system) applications. To do this,
the SF200/SF210-xA/xD must be configured as an end node within the DSSI
VAXcluster (because of the -xNxD split-bus/terminated SF72/SF73 feature) and
the VAX 6000 or VAX 4000 Model 300/500 system that is used as the middle
node must use the VAX 6000 KFMSA-BA/CK-KFMSA-LN adapter/
cabinet kit combination or VAX 4000 Model 300/500 DSSI Bus 1 to connect to
both end nodes.
The SF200/210-xE/xH variations will also support two-system DSSI VAXcluster
systems in which both hosts are end nodes. The SF200/210-xE/xH variations are
recommended for three-system DSSI VAXclusters because the -xE/-xH variations
are preconfigured in through-bus mode and are recommended for striping applications because each SF7x box comes preconfigured with two SF7x-to-bulkhead
cables.
The following tables contain SF200/SF210 ordering information based on capacity and application requirements.
Note: See cable/kitting requirements and configuration notes that follow Ordering Information.

SF200 DECarray

Storage
Required

Single-System

DSSI VAXcluster

Striping

2 Gbytes

SF200-BAIBD

SF200-BA/BD or
SF200-BE/Bff'

SF200-BE/BH

4 Gbytes

SF200-CA/CD

SF200-CAICD"'

SF200-CE/CH

6 Gbytes

SF200-CA/CD
+ SF72-HK

SF200-CA/CD'"
+ SF72-HK

SF200-CE/CH
+ SF72-HK

8 Gbytes

SF200-FA/FD

SF200-FA/FD"'

SF200-FE/FH

10 Gbytes

SF200-FA/FD
+ SF72-HK

SF200-FA/FD'"
+ SF72-HK

SF200-FE/FH
+ SF72-HK

12 Gbytes

SF200-HA/ HD

SF200-HAIHD'"

SF200-HE/HH

14 Gbytes

SF200-HA/HD
+ SF72-HK

SF200-HA/HD"'
+ SF72-HK

SF200-HE/HH
+ SF72-HK

16 Gbytes

SF200-HA/HD
+ SF72-JK

SF200-HAIHD"'
+ SF72-JK

SF200-HE/HH
+ SF72-JK

18 Gbytes

SF200-HAIHD
+ SF72-JK
+ SF72-HK

SF200-HA/HD"'
+ SF72-JK
+ SF72-HK

SF200-HE/HH
+ SF72-JK
+ SF72-HK

20 Gbytes

SF200-HA/HD
+ SF72-JK (2)

SF200-HAIHD"'
+ SF72-JK (2)

SF200-HE/HH
+ SF72-JK (2)

22 Gbytes

SF200-HA/ HD
+ SF72-JK (2)
+ SF72-HK

SF200-HAIHD"'
+ SF72-JK (2)
+ SF72-HK

SF200-HE/HH
+ SF72-JK (2)
+ SF72-HK

24 Gbytes

SF200-JA/JD

SF200-JAIJD'"

SF200-JE/JH

18.2 Gbytes
Tape

SF200-TE/ TF-can be expanded to include 18.2 Gbytes more tape
(add TF857) and up to six SF72s or SF73.

,f~

·s:

Q
G.I

Cl)

"' SF200-xE/xH variations can also be used for multi-host system DSSI VAXcluster applications in
which the SF200 is configured as a middle node but will support a maximum of only four RF72
ISEs per bus in dual-host configurations because all SF72s are set up in through-bus mode.

Storage Devices

7.3 7

Storage Arrays
SF210 DECarray

Storage
Required

Single-System

DSSI VAXcluster

Striping

4 Gbytes

SF210-BA/BD

SF210-BA/BD or
SF210-BE/ BF"'

SF210-BE/ BH

8 Gbytes

SF210-CA/CD

SF210-CA/CD"'

SF210-CE/CH

12 Gbytes

SF210-CA/CD
+ SF73-HK

SF210-CA/CD"'
+ SF73-HK

SF210-CE/CH
+ SF73-HK

16 Gbytes

SF210-FA/FD

SF210-FA/FD"'

SF210-FE/FH

20 Gbytes

SF210-FA/FD
+ SF73-HK

SF210-FA/FD'''
+ SF73-HK

SF210-FE/FH
+ SF73-HK

24 Gbytes

SF210-HA/HD

SF210-HA/HD'~

SF210-HE/HH

28 Gbytes

SF210-HA/HD
+ SF73-HK

SF210-HA/HD'''
+ SF73-HK

SF210-HE/HH
+ SF73-HK

32 Gbytes

SF210-HA!HD
+ SF73-JK

SF210-HA!HD"'
+ SF73-JK

SF210-HE/HH
+ SF73-JK

36 Gbytes

SF210-HA/HD
+ SF73-JK
+ SF73-HK

SF210-HA/HD"'
+ SF73 -JK
+ SF73-HK

SF210-HE/HH
+ SF73-JK
+ SF73-HK

40 Gbytes

SF210-HA/HD
+ SF73-JK (2)

SF210-HAIHD"'
+ SF73-JK (2)

SF210-HE/HH
+ SF73-JK (2)

44 Gbytes

SF210-HA/HD
+ SF73-JK (2)
+ SF73-HK

SF210-HA/HD"'
+ SF73-JK (2)
+ SF73-HK

SF210-HE/HH
+ SF73-JK (2)
+ SF73-HK

48 Gbytes

SF210-JA/JF

SF210-JA/JF"'

SF210-JE/JH

"' SF210-xE/xH variations can also be used for multi-host system DSSI VAXcluster applications in
which the SF210 is configured as a middle node but will support a maximum of only four RF73
ISEs per bus in dual-host configurations because all SF73s are set up in through-bus mode.

CK-SF200-LM
2.7 m (9 ft)

Cable Kits
VAX 6000
VAX 7000
VAX 10000

CK-SF200-L3
7.6 m (25 ft)
CK-SF200-L5
4.9 m (16 ft)
CK-SF200-L7
15.2 m (50 ft)

CK-SF200-LP
2.7 m (9 ft)

SF200/
SF210

CK-SF200-L4
7.6 m (25 ft)

VAX 4000

CK-SF200-L6
4.9 m (16 ft)
CK-SF200-L8
15.2 m (50 ft)

BU-3304

All CK-SF200-Lx cable kits include 1.7-meter (70-inch) SF200/SF210 internal
DSSI cable for connecting SF200/SF210 1/0 bulkhead to SF72/SF73 or TF857
building blocks.
CK-SF200-LM/L3 /L5 can also be used to connect the SF200/SF210 to the VAX
9000.
Note: Use CK-SF100-LM/ L3/L5 for VAX 6000, VAX 7000, VAX 10000 systemto-system DSSI interconnects.
CK-SF200-LP/L4/L6 can also be used to connect the SF200/SF210 to the
MicroVAX II and MicroVAX 3xxx (except MicroVAX 3100).
Note: Use CK-SFlOO-LP to connect the VAX 6000 to the VAX 4000 or to the
R400X expander box.

7.38

Storage Devices

Storage Arrays
Specifications

Physical Characteristics

153.7 cm (60.5 in.)
61.0 cm (24.0 in.)
76.2 cm (30.0 in.)
393.2 kg (865.0 lb)

Height
Width
Depth
Weight

Note: Weight represents maximum configuration.
Power Requirements

L21 -30R
309516
BC24W (120/208)
3

NEMA receptacle type
IEC receptacle type
PCS+/PDS+ cable type
Number of phases
Voltage
Nominal
Model

SF200-JA
SF200-JD
SF200-TE
SF200-TF

1101120
2401416
1101120
2401416

SF210-JA
SF210-JD
SF210-TE
SF210-TF

1101120
2401416
1101120
2401416

Frequency
Nominal
Hz

60
50

Current in Amps
Steady State

Thermal Dissipation

Start

15.5
9.3
1.6
1.6

6.25 3.28 5.27 8.75
4.3 2.3 3.65 6.0
1.3 NIA NIA 1.3
1.0 NIA NIA 1.0

1133
1106
92
127

3875 Btulh
3783 kJlh
315 Btulh
434 kJ/h

15.5
9.3
1.6
1.6

6.25 3.28 5.27 8.75 1133
4.3 2.3 3.65 6.0 1106
92
1.3 NIA NIA 1.3
127
1.0 NIA NIA 1.0

3875 Btulh
3783 kJ/h
315 Btu/h
434 kJ/h

Watts Btu/kJ/h

Notes:
Only minimum and maximum values are presented in above table. This data is typical and calculated
for the product at the time of release; it is subject to change without notice.
• Currents are for nominal voltages of 120 Vac phase-to-neutral corresponding to 208 Vac
phase-to-phase, or for 240 Vac phase-to-neutral corresponding to 416 Vac phase-to-phase.
• Startup currents are calculated for worst-case power phase.
• Line and neutral currents are broken down by number, i.e., Ll, L2, L3, and N. Neutral currents in
these products are typically higher than phase currents. It is recommended that neutral site wiring be
oversized by 1.7 times that of any one phase.

Storage Devices

7.39

Storage Array Building Blocks
SA71/SA~:J. Storage Ar,ray Building Blocka~SDI)
0

.......---~~..-.----..------

~~_...~~~~---

The SA71 and SA72 storage array building blocks (SABBs) each house up to four
high-performance, high-reliability 5.25-inch RA71 and RA72 disk drives. These
innovative storage devices are designed to maximize performance and capacity,
while minimizing footprint and protecting storage investment.
SA71 and SA72 SABBs can be packaged in a 1700-mm (67-inch) high SA900
storage array to provide maximum configurations of 28 Gbytes and 40 Gbytes.
An SA900 fully configured with SA72 SABBs provides an industry-leading footprint of 40 Gbytes in 7 square feet.
The SA7 l and SA72 can also add capacity and performance to installed SA800,
SA850, SA600, SA650, and SA550 storage arrays in the top two slots only. The
SABBs can be factory-installed in DECarray 300.
Features

SA 71

SA72

• Interface
·Capacity (formatted)
·Capacity (unformatted.,")
·Maximum requests/s (@ 50 ms)
·Maximum requests/s (@ 100 ms)
· Dual access
· Performance flexibility
· VAX VMS Volume Shadowing
· VAX Disk Striping
· VAXsimPLUS

SDI
2.8 Gbytes
3.5 Gbytes
196
224

SDI
4.0 Gbytes
5.1 Gbytes
200
232

* Unformatted capacity provided for comparison purposes; only formatted capacity is user-accessible
in any disk drive. For symmetrical load balancing, it is recommended that storage arrays be loaded
at more conservative levels.

Ordering Information

The following table lists the SA71 and SA72 SDI Storage Array Building Blocks
(SABB). For dual porting, a duplicate set of open ports on additional SDI controller or 1/0 servers and a duplicate set of SDI external cables are required.
Prerequisite software: VMS V5.4-2, HSC40/60/70/90 software V6.0 and HSC50
software V4. 09.

Order Number

Mbyte/Gbyte
Capacity

Number
Empty Slots

Open
Ports

Prerequisites
BC26V
Cables

Field-Installable for SA550/SA650/SA850 Storage Arrays:
SA71-CK

700-Mbyte

SA72-CK

1.0-Gbyte

SA71-JK

2.8-Gbyte

SA72-JK

4.0-Gbyte

Field-Installable for SA600/SA800 Storage Arrays:
SA71-LK

700-Mbyte

SA72-LK

1.0-Gbyte

SA71-MK

2.8-Gbyte

SA72-MK

4.0-Gbyte

Factory-Installable for SX300 Storage Arrays:
SA71-AK

7.40

Storage Devices

700-Mbyte

SA72-AK

1.0-Gbyte

SA71-BK

2.8-Gbyte

SA72-BK

4.0-Gbyte

Storage Array Buildin~ Blocks
P rerequisites

SA71/SA72 Storage Array Building

Blocks (SDI) (Continued)

Number
Empty Slots

Mbyte/Gbyte
Capacity

Order N umber

O pen
Ports

BC26V
Cables

Field-Installable for SA900 Storage Arrays:
SA71 -EK

700-Mbyte

SA72-EK

1.0-Gbyte

SA7 1-FK

2.8-Gbyte

SA72-FK

4.0-Gbyte

Factory-Installable for SA900 Storage Arrays:
SA71-GK

700-Mbyte

SA72-GK

1.0-C{byte

SA71-HK

2.8-Gbyte

SA72-HK

4.0-Gbyte

Cables

Length

Where Used

BC26V-12
BC26V-25
BC26V-50
BC26V-80

12 ft (3 .7 m)
25 ft (7.6 m)
50 ft (15.2 m)
80 ft (24.4 m)

One cable connects one RA7 x to an existing
SDI I/ O server or controller.

Note: In the SA900, BC26V-12 ( 12 ft/ 3 .7 m) cables are suitable for drives located
in the bottom rack only. It is recommended that 25 ft (7 .6 m) cables or longer
be used in all slots of the SA900 storage array.

Specifications

Physical Characteristics
Height
Width
Depth
Weight

26.56 cm ( 10.42 in.)
22.19 cm (8 .74 in.)
70.51 cm (27.5 in.)
27 .5 kg (60 .0 lb) minimum;
36.0 kg (79.5 lb) maximum

Power Requirements
IEC Receptacle Type
PCS+/ PDS+ Cable Type

320
BC26V

Number of Phases

1
Voltage
Nominal

Frequency
Nominal
Hz

120
240
120
240

50160
50160
50160
50160

120
240
120
240

50160
50160
50160
50160

Model

SA71-AK/CK/EK/GK
SA71-BK/JK/FK/HK
SA72-AKICK!EKIGK

SA72-BK/JK/FK/HK

Current in Amps
Steady State

Thermal
Dissipation
N

Start

Watts

Btul kJ/h

2.0

1.1

0.6
3.3
1.6

NIA NIA 1.1
NIA NIA 0.6
NIA NIA 3.3
NIA NI A 1.6

71.5
71.5
241
241

244 Btu/h
257 kJl h
823 Btul h
868 kJ/h

NIA
NIA
NIA
NIA

71.5
71.5
241
241

244 Btu/h
257 kJ/h
823 Btul h
868 kJ/h

6.7
3.9
2.0

1.1

0.6
3.3
1.6

6.7
3.9

NIA 1.1
NIA 0.6
NIA 3.3
NIA 1.6

Storage Devices

7.41

Storage Array Building Blocks
SF73/SF72 Storage Array Building Blocks (DSSI)
The SF72 4-Gbyte (formatted) and SF73 8-Gbyte (formatted) storage array building blocks use DSSI ISE technology to provide high capacity and performance in
a half-rack. They are suitable for primary local storage or as shared storage
within a DSSI VAXcluster configuration.
Two or four disks, each with integral controller, and a multi-track read-ahead
cache provide very high throughput. HISPEED mode, selectable on each ISE,
substantially reduces access times.
Features

SF72

SF73

Formatted capacity
Unformatted capacity
Transfer rate
Spiral transfer rate
(per ISE)
Average access time
Average access time
high-speed mode
Read-ahead cache
(per ISE)
Availability/ warm-swap

4-Gbyte
8-Gbyte
2.0 Mbytes/second
>1.3 Mbytes/ second

8-Gbyte
10.4-Gbyte
2.0 Mbytes/ second
> 1.3 Mbytes/ second

21.7 ms
<19.5 ms

21.3 ms
<18.3 ms

128-Kbyte

512-Kbyte

Each ISE has separate
power and operator
controls and can be
replaced without
shutting down SF72
Yes
VMS 5.4-2
Yes

Each ISE has separate
power and operator
controls and can be
replaced without
shutting down SF73
Yes

VAXsimPLUS support
VMS support
Fully DSA compliant

VMS 5.5
Yes

Additional SF72 Features
• 4-Gbyte (formatted) and 5.6-Gbyte (unformatted) capacity with a 2-Gbyte
(formatted) and 2.8-Gbyte (unformatted) entry configuration offered
• Average access time 21. 7 ms; < 19 .5 ms in HIS PEED mode
· Maximum requests per second: 200 per SF72 (four RF72s) at 150 ms response
time
· 128-Kbyte read-ahead cache associated with each ISE
Additional SF73 Features
· 8-Gbyte (formatted) and 10.4-Gbyte (unformatted) capacity with a 4-Gbyte
(formatted) and 5 .2-Gbyte (unformatted) starter configuration
·Average access time 21.3 ms; < 18.3 ms in HISPEED mode
· Maximum requests per second: 200 per SF73 (four RF73) at 150-ms response
time
· 512-Kbyte read-ahead cache associated with each ISE

Software Support

VAXsimPLUS Support: SF72 supported in current release. SF73 will be supported
in a future release of VAXsimPLUS.
• SF72 requires VMS V5 .4-2 or higher for VAX 6000 systems.
• SF72 requires VMS V5.4-1 or higher for VAX 4000 systems.
• SF73 requires VMS V5 .5

7.42

Storage Devices

Storage Array Building Blocks
Ordering Information

SF72 Option

Application ( 1-Gbyte RF72 ISEs)

SF72-HA

2-Gbyte half-rack embedded in VAX 6000

SF72-HK

2-Gbyte half-rack embedded in SF2x0

SF72-UK

2-Gbyte upgrade expansion kit for SF72-HA or SF72-HK

SF72-JA

4-Gbyte half-rack embedded in VAX 6000

SF72-JK

4-Gbyte half-rack embedded in SF2x0

SF73 Option

Application (2-Gbyte RF73 ISEs)

SF73-HA

4-Gbyte half-rack embedded in VAX 6000

SF73-HK

4-Gbyte half-rack embedded in SF2x0

SF73-UK

4-Gbyte upgrade expansion kit for SF73-HA or SF73-HK

SF73-JA

8-Gbyte half-rack embedded in VAX 6000

SF73-JK

8-Gbyte half-rack embedded in SF2x0

Note: When adding the first embedded storage devices in the VAX 6000 CPU
cabinet already installed in the field, the following kit is required.
62X34-UA/UB

Specifications

Door and power controller upgrade kit, 60 Hz/50 Hz

Physical Characteristics
Height
Width
Depth
Weight

26.7 cm (10.5 in.)
22.2 cm (8.75 in.)
71.1 cm (28.0 in.)
41.4 kg (91.0 lb)

Note: Weight represents maximum configuration.
Power Requirements
Connector type
Cable type

IEC-320 (male and female)
3-conductor power cord 250 Vac
UL recognized and CSA certified
1

Number of phases

Model

SF72-JK
SF73-JAIJK

Voltage Frequency
Nominal Nominal
v
Hz

120
240
120
240

Current in Amps
Steady State

Thermal Dissipation
N

Start

NIA NIA 2.0
NIA NIA 1.5
NIA NIA 2.0
NIA NIA 1.5

5.0

2.0

3.0

1.5

5.0

2.0

3.0

1.5

Watts Btu/kJ/h
130

444.6 Btulh

130

444.6 Btulh

Notes:
This data is typical and calculated for the product at the time of release; it is subject to change
without notice.

• Currents are for nominal voltages of 120 Vac phase-to-neutral corresponding to 208 Vac
phase-to-phase, or for 240 Vac phase-to-neutral corresponding to 416 Vac phase-to-phase.

• Startup currents are calculated for worst-case power phase.

• Line and neutral currents are broken down by number, i.e., Ll , L2 , L3, and N. Neutral currents in
these products are typically higher than phase currents. It is recommended that neutral site wiring be
oversized by 1.7 times that of any one phase.

Storage Devices

7.43

ci)

Storage Array Building Blocks
SF35 Storage Array Building Block (DSSI)
The SF35 storage array is a half-rack building block (SABB) that can house from
2 to 12 of Digital's highest performing DSSI Integrated Storage Element (ISE),
the 3.5-inch 852-Mbyte RF35. Each RF35 ISE includes an intelligent controller
and Storage Control Protocol (MSCP) server, enabling the SF35 to achieve industry-leading performance that scales linearly as devices are added. Compatible
with previous generations of SABBs, the SF35 contains independent power and
cooling elements.
Custom configurations of SF35s can be ordered directly for the new SF220
DECarray. Added performance is gained by installing SF35s into the SF200
and SF210 arrays. Individual RF35s are upgradeable into the SF35 as well. An
SF220 cabinet, fully populated with SF35s, provides a maximum capacity of
61.2 Gbytes and a peak throughput capability of 5,256 I/O requests per second.
The VAX 6000 CPU cabinet can accommodate up to two SF35s; the MicroVAX
3xxx (except 3100), MicroVAX II, and VAX 4000 systems also support the
SF35/SF220 DECarray subsystems.
The RF35 is the first 3.5-inch, 5400-rev/min drive available for DSSI, and its
unparalleled throughput brings high performance to the mid-range and low-end
space.
Features
·Available in multiple DECarray cabinets: SF200, SF210, or SF220 performance
storage subsystems
• Single drive upgrades available
· Highest I/O throughput (73 I/O requests per second)
·Warm swap
· Easy removability
· Compact packaging with 3.5-inch form factor

Software Support
Ordering Information

Requires VMS V5.5 or later.
Note: The SF35 is available as an add-on for the SF200, SF210, and SF220.

SF35-BA

1.7 Gbytes-SABB for embedding in VAX 6000 system cabinet,
includes half-rack enclosure, integrated disk controllers, two
RF35 852-Mbyte disks, internal cabinet cable, mounting hardware, and user documentation

SF35-BK

1.7 Gbytes-Same as above except for SF220, SF210, SF200

SF35-HA

5 .1 Gbytes-SABB for embedding in VAX 6000 system cabinet,
includes half-rack enclosure, integrated disk controllers, six
RF35 852-Mbyte disks, internal cabinet cable, mounting hardware and user documentation

SF35-HK

Same as above except for SF220, SF210, SF200

SF35-JA

10.2 Gbytes-SABB for embedding in VAX 6000 system cabinet, includes half-rack enclosure, integrated disk controllers, 12
RF35 852-Mbyte disks, internal cabinet cable, mounting hardware and user documentation

SF35-JK

Same as above except for SF220, SF210, SF200

SF35-UK

852 Mbytes-Upgrade capacity expansion kit for SF35-Bx/Hx
SABB, includes one RF35 852-Mbyte disk disk, mounting hardware, and user documentation

Note: When adding the first embedded storage devices in the VAX 6000 CPU
cabinet already installed in the field, the following kit is required.

62X34-UA/UB

7.44

Storage Devices

Door and power controller upgrade kit, 60 Hz/50 Hz

Storage Array Building Blocks
Specifications

Physical Characteristics
Height
Width
Depth
Weight (Cabinet only)

26.7 cm (10.5 in. )
22.2 cm (8.75 in.)
71.1 cm (28 in.)
SF35-BK: 26 kg (58 lb)
SF35-HK: 33 kg (73 lb)
SF35 -JK: 40 kg (88 lb)

Operating Environment

Unformatted
Formatted
Interface
Disk transfer rate (peak)
Throughput (I/O per second)

2 Drives

12 Drives

2.2 Gbytes
1.7 Gbytes
DSSI
6.6 Mbytes second
146 I/O per second

13.2 Gbytes
10.2 Gbytes
DSSI
39.6 Mbytes second
876 I/O per second

Note: Although there is complete compatibility among the cabinets for the RF
drives, RF35 drives cannot be added into an SF73; RF7x drives cannot be added
into an SF35. Partially filled SF35 (BK/HK) options may be upgraded with individual RF35 disks with the SF35-UK option. The configuration and cabling considerations that impact the SF35 in the SF2xx cabinets, and in two-system/
three-system DSSI VAXclusters are illustrated in the configuration section of the
SF220 section.

Storage Devices

7.45

Disk Devices
ESE50 Solid State Disk
The ESE50 is Digital's fastest Standard Disk Interconnect (SDI) storage system.
Using semiconductor technology, the ESE50 eliminates I/O bottlenecks and
enables users to achieve maximum system utilization by matching the accelerated
power of today's CPUs and V AXclusters with exceptionally fast access to their
systems' most time-critical data.
The ESE50 is the same form factor as an RA92 and can be configured in SA900
series storage array cabinets along with additional storage products. It is available
in three different capacities: 120 Mbytes, 600 Mbytes and 1 Gbytes. A data
retention capability (hard disk, batteries, control logic), which ensures permanent
data protection in the event of an ac power loss, is provided with the 120-Mbyte
and 600-Mbyte models. In addition, the ESE50 600-Mbyte model incorporates a
redundant power supply which provides industry-leading data availability. A 120to 600-Mbyte upgrade package is available when the need to increment capacity
arises.
Superior I/ O performance can make a major difference in optimizing the performance of applications in a broad range of industries. From financial trading and
telecommunications to retail, pharmaceutical, and scientific environments, the
ability to achieve consistently fast access to growing volumes of data is a competitive necessity. Designed to meet this need, the extremely fast access time and
I/O per second throughput capabilities of the ESE50 meet the challenge of timely
access to the data.
The ESE50 can improve system response time, reduce prolonged batch job runtimes, and allow users to be added without impacting user-level system performance. The ESE50 can reduce system management workload and help expand
computing capabilities without adding resources. Its performance boost can also
extend the life of inefficiently-coded applications, alleviating the need for expensive application software development.
Features

· Performance-Device access time of 0.25 ms provides the fastest and most consistent access to response-time critical data.
· Capacity-Provides up to 600 Mbytes with integrated data retention-five
times that of an ESE20-in a single RA92-sized rack-mountable unit. Up to
1 Gbyte with no data retention.
· Packaging-Packaging in SA900 series storage array cabinets like RA9x/SA7x
magnetic drives allows for optimized floor space, power, and HSC controller
ports.
· Affordability-Significantly reduced price on entry level models and even greater
savings on higher capacity options.
· Availability-Use of industry-leading N+ 1 power supply component redundency
ensures extremely high data availability.

Ordering Information

ESE50-AA/AB

120-Mbyte solid-state disk with integrated data retention,
120 V, 60 Hz/ 240 V, 50 Hz

ESE50-BA/BB

600-Mbyte solid-state disk with integrated data retention and
redundant power supply, 120 V, 60 Hz/240 V, 50 Hz

ESE50-CA

120- to 600-M8 te upgrade kit consisting of eight 64-Mbyte
memory array ca: ds and one power supply module

ESE50-DA/DB

1.0-Gbyte solid-sta e disk with no data retention functionality,
120 V, 60 Hz/ 240 , 0 Hz

7.46

Storage Devices

Disk Devices
Ordering Information
(Continued)

Configuration Notes

Note: Each ESE50 requires one BC26V cable. If dual porting is required, a
duplicate set of cables must be purchased. When packaging an ESE50 in an
SA900 storage array, 25 ft. (7 .6 m) length cables or greater are recommended.
Option

Length

Where used

BC26V-12
BC26V-25
BC26V-50
BC26V-80

12 ft (3.7 m)
25 ft (7.6 m)
50 ft (15.2 m)
80 ft (24.4 m)

One cable connects one ESE50
to an existing SDI VO controller

Packaging-ESE50 units must be packaged in SA900 series storage array cabinets
only. The CK-SA900-L2 installation kit is required (order separately).
Field Installation-All ESE50 options are field installable only. Maximum of four
ESE50 units are supported in a single SA900 storage array cabinet.

VMS Support-The ESE50 has been tested under VMS versions V5.4 and V5.5.
Specific ESE50 device name recognition support will be provided in a future
VMS upgrade release.
Controller Support-ESE50 units are supported on HSC40/ 60/70/ 90 controllers
with version V6.0 or later microcode and KDM70 controllers running V2.4 or
later microcode. Support is unavailable for KDA50, KDB50 or UDA50 controllers.

Specifications

Physical Characteristics
Height
Width
Depth
Shipping weight
Installed weight

26.5 cm (10.4 in.)
22.2 cm (8.7 in.)
47 cm (18.5 in.)
22.7 kg (50 lb)
20.5 kg (45 lb)

Power Requirements
Standards
Voltage
Maximum heat dissipation

UL listed; CSA certified; FCC Class A verified
120/208 Vac at 60 Hz; single-phase WYE
220/240 Vac at 50 Hz
300

Operating Environment
Temperature range
Relative humidity
Maximum wet bulb
Minimum dew point
Maximum altitude
Maximum acoustic noise

15° - 32° C (59° - 90° F)
20% to 80%
25° c (77° F)
2° C (36° F)
8,000 ft above sea level
45 dBA

Performance
Maximum throughput
Seek time
Average latency
Access time
Peak transfer rate
Spiral transfer rate

1200 1/0 requests per second
Not applicable
Not applicable
0.25 ms
2.5 Mbytes/s
2.0 Mbytes/s

DSA Features
SDI Ports

Data Organization
Formatted Capacity

Sectors (Blocks)

Decimal MB

ESE50-AA/AB
ESE50-BA/BB
ESE50-DA/DB

238,080
1,196,544
1,915,392

121.9
612.6
980.6

Storage Devices

7.47

Disk Devices
RA92 Disk Drive (SDI)
The RA92 is a 9-inch form-factor half-rack SDI device. It is a component drive in
the SA800/SA850/SA900 storage array and in the RA92 I-meter (40-inch) cabinet.
The RA92 can be configured in any existing SA600/SA650 storage array and in
any RA90 1-meter (40-inch) cabinet configuration. It can also be configured in
VAX 6000 series system cabinets.

Features
• Capacity: 1.5 Gbytes (formatted); 2 Gbytes (unformatted''')
· Maximum requests/second: 45 (@ 50 ms), 53 (@100 mst)
· Dual access: standard
· VAX VMS Volume Shadowing
· One drive per port on any SDI controller or SDI server
• VAXsimPLUS support
"' Unformatted capacity provided for comparison purposes; only formatted capacity is user-accessible
in any disk drive.
t For symmetrical load balancing. It is recommended that storage arrays be loaded at more conservative levels.

Ordering Information

Note: RA92s are 1.5-Gbyte fixed-media disk drives. Open ports on SDI controllers or I/O servers and BC26V external SDI cables are required. For dual porting:
One open port on additional SDI controller or I/O server and one additional
external BC26V-xx cable required for each RA92 component drive.
Prerequisites
Order
Number

Gbyte
Number
Capacity of Drives

Number
of BC26V
Cables

1.5

RA92-FAIFD 1

3.0

RA92-HA/HD 1

RA92-CAICD

6.0

9.0

RA92-KAILA

1.5

SA900

RA92-NA

1.5

SA600/SA650/
SA800/ SA850/
RA90/RA92
40-in. cabinet

RA92-PA2

1.5

VAX 6000 cabinet
DECsystem 5800
cabinet

RA92-JAIJD

Cabinet

Number
of Ports

Includes 1-meter (40-inch) cabinet with single-phase power; 120 V, 60 Hz/240

V, 50 Hz.
2

When adding the first embedded storage device(s) in the VAX 6000 and
DECsystem 5800 CPU cabinet already installed in the field, the following
kit is required.

62X34-UA
62X34-UB

Door and power controller upgrade kit for 60-Hz systems
Door and power controller upgrade kit for 50-Hz systems

Note: External BC26V-xx cables must be ordered separately for all drives. Each
RA92 requires one cable (two if dual porting). See cable options below:

7.48

Storage Devices

Cables

Length

BC26V-12
BC26V-25
BC26V-50
BC26V-80

12 ft/3.7 m
25 ft/7.6 m
50 ft/15.2 m
80 ft/24.4 m

Disk Devices
Specifications

Physical Characteristics

Height
Width
Depth
Weight

RA92

RA92 in Cabinet

26.56 cm (10.42 in. )
22.19 cm (8.74 in.)
68.47 (26.96 in.)
31.8 kg (70.0 lb)

107 .0 cm (42.5 in.)
55.0 cm (21.5 in.)
92.0 cm (33.0 in.)
306.0 kg (680.0 lb)

Note: Weight represents maximum configuration.
Power Requirements
NEMA receptacle type
IEC receptacle type
PCS+/PDS+ cable type
Number of phases
Voltage
Nominal
Model

RA92-CA
RA92-CD
RA92-JA
RA92-JD
RA92-PA

v
120
240
120
240
120
240

L5-30R
309
BC24S (120)
1

1
Frequency
Nominal
Hz

60
50
60
50
50160
50160

Current in Amps
Steady State

Thermal Dissipation

Start

5.0
2.35
29.9
14.0
5.0
3.35

3.4 NIA NIA 3.4
1.45 NI A NIA 1.45
20.1 NI A NI A 20.1
8.7 NIA NIA 8.7
3.4 NIA NIA 3.4
1.45 NI A NIA 1.45

Watts BtulkJlh
281
271
1688
1627
281
271

960 Btulh
976 kJlh
5760 Btulh
5858 kJlh
960 Btulh
976 kJlh

Notes:
This data is typical and calculated for the product at the time of release; it is subject to change
without notice.
• Currents are for nominal voltages of 120 Vac phase-to-neutral corresponding to 208 Vac
phase-to-phase, or for 240 Vac phase-to-neutral corresponding to 416 Vac phase-to-phase.
• Startup currents are calculated for worst-case power phase.
• Line and neutral currents are broken down by number, i.e., Ll , L2, L3 , and N. Neutral currents in
these products are typically higher than phase currents. It is recommended that neutral site wiring be
oversized by 1.7 times that of any one phase.
• RA9x and SA70 products are not line-frequency dependent; line frequency must be considered in
cabinet products containing RA8x products.

The RA7x-series disk drives are the 1.0-Gbyte RA72 ~nd the 700-Mbyte RA71
disk drives. These Digital-manufactured full-height 5.25-inch disk drives are fully
DSA/SDI-compliant. The RA72 offers price/performance by providing highcapacity disk storage for mid-range and high-end capacity-intensive applications.
The RA71 replaces the RA82 disk drive, reducing the average seek time by 50
percent. It is packaged in 1/8th of the footprint.
The RA7X series of disk drives, packaged in SA7X configurations, represent a
competitive, flexible, all-purpose storage solution for datacenter storage needs.
Power and cooling are supplied by the SA7X storage array building block
(SABB), a half-rack chassis that houses up to four RA7X component drives. The
SA7X SABB is factory or field installed in the SA900 storage array and field
installed in all existing SA8XX, SA6XX, and SA550 storage arrays.

Storage Devices

7.49

Disk Devices
RA71/RA72 Disk Drives (Continued)

Features

RA71

RA72

700 Mbytes
1.0 Gbyte
· Capacity (formatted)
·Capacity (unformatted'")
874 Mbytes
1.3 Gbytes
·Maximum requests/s (@ 50 ms)
48
50
·Maximum requests/ s (@ 100 ms)
56
58
·Media transfer rate (peak):
2.0 Mbytes/s 2.0 Mbytes/s
· Spiral transfer rate (MB/s)
1.255
1.307
12.5 ms
12.5 ms
· Average seek time
• SDI interface
• Dual access
• Performance flexibility
• VAX VMS Volume Shadowing
· One drive per port on any SDI controller or SDI server
· VAXsirriPLUS support
''Unformatted capacity provided for comparison purposes; only formatted capacity is user-accessible
in any disk drive. For symmetrical load balancing, it is recommended that storage arrays be loaded
at more conservative levels.

Ordering Information

All RA7 x models are 5 .25-inch disk drives installable in SA72/SA71 SABBs, with
the following prerequisites:
- SA72-xx or SA71-xx
- One open port on an SDI controller or I/ O server
- One BC26V-xx external SDI cable (see Cables that follow)
- For dual porting: one open port on an additional SDI controller or I/ O server
and one additional BC26V-xx external SDI cable
- VMS Version 5.4-2
- HSC40/ 60/70/ 90 Software Version 6.0
RA72-AF/AK

1.0-Gbyte, 5.25-inch disk drive; factory/ field installable in
SA72/ SA71 SABB.

RA71-AF/AK

700-Mbyte, 5.25-inch disk drive; factory/ field installable in
SA72/ SA71 SABB.

Cable

Length

Where Used

BC26V-12
BC26V-25
BC26V-50
BC26V-80

12 ft (3 .7 m)
25 ft (7.6 m)
50 ft (15.2 m)
80 ft (24.4 m)

One cable connects one RA7 x to an
exi.sting SDI I/ O server or controller.

Refer to the SA900 cable information for detail on appropriate cable lengths for
SA900 configuration.

Specifications

Physical Cparacteristics
Height
Width
Depth
Weight

8.856 cm (3.49 in.)
14.61 cm (5.75 in.)
20.96 cm (8.25 in.)
3.0 kg (6.5 lb)

Power Requirements
Watts
Thermal dissipation

7.50

Storage Devices

56.6
203 kJ/ h (193 Btu/ h)

Disk Devices
RF-Series Integrated Storage Elements (DSSI)
Digital provides an innovative approach to VAX and DECsystem computer data
storage with the RF series of Integrated Storage Elements (ISEs). These DSSI disk
storage devices integrate dedicated intelligent controllers within the Winchester
disk drives.
The embedded disk controller and MSCP server in the RF ISE increase performance in several ways. They produce close device control, including rotational
position sensing, and optimize disk performance through dedicated command
execution and queuing. Most importantly, embedded controllers and dedicated
bus channels allow multiple RF ISEs to achieve full, simultaneous I/O operation.
Overall storage system performance is not compromised by the queuing and
communication delays that usually occur when multiple devices share a single
controller.
The RF ISE provides increased multidisk performance, similar to large system I/O
performance, in cost-effective, compact configurations. This makes the RF ISE an
especially appropriate storage solution for performance-oriented, small-cabinet
systems.
The RF-series are supported by VAXsimPLUS, knowledge-based software that
analyzes the number and type of errors recorded by the system, predicts failures,
and suggests proactive corrective maintenance to achieve high system availability.
The RF ISE storage solution offers a technology that delivers the performance,
data integrity, availability, and flexibility of high-end storage systems in a compact, noise-free ISE. Users can enjoy the advantages of easy, incremental system
growth, DSA investment protection, and single-vendor service and support.
Features

• 264-bit error correction code (E~C) per sector and the use of quadruplicate
headers
, . VLSI components, high-storage density, an embedded servo, and improved
packaging ensure unsurpassed reliability
· Support for VMS Volume Shadowing
.

.,_,~-~~~~,_,,,,,_,,.... ,~~"""""'-%"'*""'----~-...~~,_...~"""'!

RF73 Integrate~ ·Stor~e Element (DSSI)
The RF73 is a leading-edge full-height 5.25-inch integrated storage element (ISE).
It provides large quantities of bulk storage at the lowest $/mb for those who
have reached capacity limits using other products within the DSSI storage family.
Like previous DSSI ISEs, the RF73 contains its own intelligent controller and
Storage Control Protocol (MSCP) server, enabling the RF73 to achieve industryleading performance that scales linearly as devices are added.
Features

• Capacity: 2.0 Gbytes (formatted), 2.6 Gbytes (unformatted)
· Peak transfer rate to DSSI bus: 4.0 Mbytes/s
• Peak transfer rate from disk: 2 .7 Mbytes/ s
• Average seek time: 12.9 ms
• Average access time: 21.2 ms
· Sustained spiral transfer rate: 2.0 Mbytes/s 0~
· Read-ahead cache: 11 tracks, 512K
· Throughput: 47 I/Os/s at 100 ms response time
·Power requirements: 1 A@ 5 Vdc; 1.49 A@ 12 Vdc
· Typical power consumption: 23 W
;, Note certain combinations of random I/ O and transfer size will result in transfer rates significantly
higher than the sustained spiral rate of 2.0 Mbytes/s.

Storage Devices

7.51

Disk Devices
Software Support

· Requires VMS V5 .5 or later.
• ULTRIX support available in a future release.
· VAXsimPLUS support available in a future release.

Ordering Information

Note: RF73s are 5.25-inch full-height, 2-Gbyte fixed integrated storage
elements (ISE).

Specifications

RF73E-AAIAF

RF73 for BA4xx systems and B400X/ R400X expansion pedestals.
Factory/field installed.

RF73E-SA/SF

RF73 for BA2xx systems and expansion pedestals. Factory/ field
installed.

RF73-JA

Removable RF73 for VAXft systems and expanders. Factory or
field installed.

RF73-KA

Fixed integrated RF73 for VAXft systems and expanders.
Factory or field installed.

DL-RF73A-AA

Ten RF73s factory installed in two R400X expansion pedestals
for a 20-Gbyte total capacity.

DL-RF73A-A5

Five RF73s factory installed in one R400X expansion pedestal
for a 10-Gbyte total capacity.

Physical Characteristics

Height
Width
Depth
Weight

8.25 cm (3.25 inches)
14.7 cm (5.79 inches)
20.8 cm (8.21 inches)
2.89 kg (6.36 lb)

RF72 Integrated Storage Elements (DSSI)
The RF72 integrated storage element (ISE) provides increased storage capacity for
Q-bus MicroVAX, VAXft, VAX 4000, VAX 6000, VAX 9000, and DECsystem
5500 systems. The RF72 is a leading-edge, full-height, 5.25-inch disk storage
device. Each RF72 provides 1 Gbyte of storage capacity. Like the other RF-series
the RF72 contains its own controller and MSCP server, bringing state-of-the-art
capacity and multi-device performance to the low-midrange systems environment.
The RF72 ISE, combined with the DSSI bus, offers industry-leading data integrity, higher reliability, system and data availability, and provides mainframe class
storage for capacity-intensive applications. The RF72 ISE is the storage solution
for performance-oriented online transaction processing (OLTP), shop floor control, and other mission-critical applications.
Features

· Capacity: 1 Gbyte (formatted), 1.4 Gbytes (unformatted)
• Media transfer rate (peak): 2.0 Mbytes/ second
• Bus peak transfer rate to DSSI: 4.0 Mbytes/ second
• Read-ahead cache: 4 tracks, 128K
• Customer data tracks/ surface: 1861
·Average seek time: 13.4/ 10.7 ms in HISPEED mode
• Rotational latency time: 8.3 ms
· Average access time: 21.7 ms
· Data integrity: 264-bits ECC/ sector, EDC and parity
·Throughput: 44 I/Os/ s (@ 100 ms completion time)

7.52

Storage Devices

Disk Devices
Ordering Information

Specifications

Note: RF72s are 5.25-inch, full-height, 1-Gbyte, fixed-disk, integrated storage
elements (ISEs).

RF72E-AA/AF

RF72 for BA4xx systems and B400X/R400X expansion pedestals; factory/field installed.

RF72E-SA/SF

Same as RF72E-AA except for BA2xx systems and expansion
pedestals; factory/field installed.

RF72-JA

RF72 removable storage element (RSE) for VAXft systems and
expanders; factory or field installed.

RF72-KA

RF72 integrated storage element (ISE) for VAXft systems and
expanders; factory or field installed.

DL-RF72A-AA

Ten RF72s factory-installed in two R400X expansion pedestals
for a 10-Gbyte total capacity.

DL-RF72A-A5

Five RF72s factory-installed in two R400X expansion pedestals
for a 5-Gbyte total capacity.

Physical Characteristics

Height
Width
Depth
Weight

8.25 cm (3.25 in.)
14.7 cm (5.79 in.)
20.9 cm (8.21 in.)
2.57 kg (5.66 lb)

RF35 Integrated Storage Element (DSSI)
The 852-Mbyte RF35 integrated storage element (ISE) provides increased I/O
bandwidth performance for VAX 4000 and Q-bus MicroVAX systems. The RF35
ISE is a leading-edge, full-height, 3 .5-inch disk storage device. With its integral,
dedicated controller, the RF35 ISE adds state-of-the-art single drive performance
to the linear increase in system performance achieved when additional ISEs are
added to DSSI. The RF3 5 ISE, combined with the DSSI bus, offers industryleading 264-bit error correction, higher reliability, system and data availability,
and provides maximum bandwidth for I/ O intensive applications. The RF35 ISE
with DSSI is a full implementation of Digital Storage Architecture (DSA).
With three-system enclosure storage cavities, the system can contain over five
G bytes of disk storage, an I/O bandwidth of 438 I/Os per second, with room
available for a tape drive. For applications requiring storage expansion, the RF35
is supported in the R400X expander box. The R400X expansion pedestal can
contain up to 13 RF35 ISEs for a total of 11 Gbytes of formatted disk drive
storage spread across 13 ISEs, thereby providing highest linear scaleability.
The RF35 offers DSSI integrity and availability features, higher capacity, higher
performance, and greater I/O bandwidth, in less physical space, at a lower operating cost. All of these features make the RF35 ISE the storage solution for
performance-oriented on line transaction processing (OLTP), shop floor control,
and other mission-critical applications.

Storage Devices

7.53

Disk Devices
RF35 ISE (Continued)

Features
· Capacity: 852 Mbytes (formatted), 1.1 Gbytes (unformatted)
· Areal density: 128 Mbits/in.
· Peak transfer rate: 3 .3 Mbytes/ second
· Peak transfer rate to DSSI bus: 4.0 Mbytes/second
· Read-ahead cache: 13 tracks, 512K
• Rotational latency: 5 .6 ms
·Average seek time: 9.5 ms; HISPEED mode, 7.5 ms
· Average access time: 15.1 ms; HISPEED mode, 13.1 ms
· Throughput: 73 I/Os per second (100 ms)'"
• Spiral transfer: 2100 Kbytes/second
• Data integrity: ECC/EDC/parity
• VAXsimPLUS: Future support
• Control panel: Optional remote
,; See Disk Comparison Chart on page 7.5 .

Ordering Information

Specifications

Note: RF35s are 852-Mbyte 3.5-inch full-height fixed disk ISEs.
RF35E-AA/AF

RF35 with DSSI interface for BA4xx based systems and
R400XIB400X expanders; factory/field installed.

RF352-AA/AF

Two RF35s with DSSI interface for BA4xx systems and
R400X/B400X expanders. Fits in one 5.25-inch storage
cavity; factory/field installed.

RF35E-SA/SF

RF35 with DSSI interface for BA2xx based systems and
expanders; factory/field installed.

RF35U-AF

RF35 upgrade kit for capacity expansion of RF35E-AA/AF in
the field for BA4 xx based systems and expanders; cables
included.

Voltage
Weight
Option

RF35
(Single drive)

+5, +12
0.9 kg (1.9 lbs)
Mounting
Requirements

Watts
Drawn

de Amps@

Bus Loads
Drawn

Typical
Max

0.71
0.85

2.29
2.55

NIN '
NIA';

(Peak @spinup)
(Peak @spinup)

Typical
Max

0.71
0.85

0.85
0.96

13.8
16.5

(Seeking)
(Seeking)

I/O Panel
Insert Size

"' The first set of +12V figures are transient currents during the first seconds of spin up; power refers
more to continuous consumption and does not therefore apply.

RF31 T Integrated Storage Element (DSSI)
The RF31T, Digital's fastest DSSI disk drive, is a full-height 3.5-inch ISE designed
for VAX 4000 systems and MicroVAX 3xxx systems. Improved performance is
achieved by 5400 rev/min, higher areal density, faster access times, and a
512-Kbyte cache buffer. At 381 Mbytes of formatted disk storage, the RF31T is
fully compatible with the RF31E; combining the two can provide stripped and
shadowed sets.
Fully compliant with previous generations of DSSI ISEs, the RF31 T contains its
own intelligent controller and Mass Storage Control Protocol (MSCP) server,
enabling the RF31 T to achieve industry-leading performance that scales linearly
as devices are added. End to end data integrity is maintained through 264-bit
Error Correction Code, 16-bit Error Detection Code, and bus parity.
7.54

Storage Devices

Disk Devices
RFJ 1T Integrated Storage Element
(DSSI) (Continued)

Features

• Highest performance DSSI ISE (84 I/O per second at 100 ms completion time)
• 5400 rev/min (5.6 ms rotational latency) for leadership access time (12.5 ms)
· High-speed mode provides 5.5-ms average seek and 11.1-ms average access times
· Fits twice as many spindles in the same physical space for leadership I/O performance/storage compartment (168 I/O per second at 100 ms completion time)
• DSSI storage packs contain either six or 12 drives in one R400X storage expansion pedestal
With the RF31T dual ISE, 4 x greater I/O per second over RF31E (5.25-inch)
DSSI ISE are acheived in same physical space.

Ordering Information

Note: RF31Ts are 381-Mbyte full-height 3.5-inch DSSI ISEs.

RFJ lT-AA/AF

RF31T with DSSI interface for BA4 xx-based systems and
expanders; factory/field installed.

RF312-AA/AF

Two RF31Ts (dual ISE) with DSSI interface for BA4xx-based
systems and expanders; factory/field installed.

RF31U-AF

RF31T upgrade kit for capacity expansion of RF31T-AA/AF in the
field for BA4xx-based systems and expanders; cables included.

RFJ 1T-SA/SF

RF31T with DSSI interface for BA2xx-based systems and
expanders; factory/field installed.

DL-RF31A-A6

Six RF31Ts factory-installed in one R400X expansion pedestal;
only available at time of initial system sale.

DL-RF31A-AB

12 RF31 Ts factory-installed in one R400X expansion pedestal;
only available at time of initial system sale.

RF31 Integrated Storage Element (DSSI)
The RF31 Integrated Storage Element is a 5 .25-inch, half-height DSSI device. The
RF31 has many performance features not found in the previous generation of
ISEs, including error detection code (EDC). EDC is appended to all data and
commands entering or leaving the device and bus to provide increased data
integrity. The RF31 also features a 4-track, 128-Kbyte look-ahead cache for faster
time to data, decreased seek time, parity (end-to-end bus verification of data) for
increased data integrity, improved command latency, and increased QIOs/second.
Features

· Formatted capacity: 381 Mbytes
·Average access time: 23.6
• Average seek time: 15 .3
· Peak transfer rate: 4.0 Mbytes/second (to bus)
· Cache: 4-track, read-ahead
· Throughput: 41 I/Os/s (at 100 ms response)
• Power (typical): 18.7 watts

Ordering Information

Specifications

N ote: RF31s are 381-Mbyte half-height ISEs.

RF31 -JA

RF31 removable storage element (RSE) for VAXft system.

RF31-KA

RF31 integrated storage element (ISE) for VAXft system.

RF3 1-HA

RF31 integrated storage element (ISE) for VAXft Model 110
system.

Physical Characteristics

Height
Width
Depth
Weight

4.12 cm (1.62 in.)
14.7 cm (5.79 in.)
20.9 cm (8.21 in.)
1.52 kg (3.34 lb)

Voltage

+5, +12
Storage Devices

7.55

Disk Devices
RF31F Integrated Storage Element (DSSI)
The RF31F is a 200-Mbyte, 5 .25-inch half-height integrated storage element (ISE)
with an embedded DSSI controller. It has all of the benefits of the RF31 along
with faster average seek and access times. Utilizing multiple RF31F ISEs allows
users high capacity and exceptional performance. The RF31F has been introduced primarily to provide a low-cost, high-performance storage option for
Q -bus MicroVAX and VAX 4000 systems. Additionally, it provides customers a
replacement for the RF30 while offering 50 additional Mbytes of capacity. The
RF31F is fully supported with VMS V5 .4-2; it is not currently supported with
ULTRIX.

Features

· Formatted capacity: 200 Mbytes
·Average access time: 20.5 ms
• Average seek time: 12 .2 ms
• Peak transfer rate to DSSI bus: 4.0 Mbytes/ second
· Cache: 4-track, read-ahead
· Throughput: 47 I/ Os/ s (at 100 ms response)
• Form factor: 5.25 -inch, half-height
1
'

Ordering Information

The power requirements for the RF3 1F differ from those of the RF3 0. See site preparation tables in
this chapter.

RF31F-AA/AF

200-Mbyte, 5.25-inch half-height DSSI ISE for BA4xx-based
systems and R400X/ B400X expanders; factory/field installed.

RF31F-SA/SF

200-Mbyte, 5.25-inch half-height DSSI ISE for BA2xx/R215Fbased systems and expanders; factory/field installed.

Note: See RF-Series Storage Expansion Pedestals Ordering Information for additional information
regarding expansion pedestals.

Specifications

Physical Characteristics

Height
Width
Depth
Weight

4.12 cm (1.62 in.)
14.7 cm (5 .79 in.)
20.9 cm (8.21 in.)
1.52 kg (3.34 lb)

Power Requirements

1.3 amps maximum at 5 V
2.21 amps maximum at 12 V (de only)
Typical power consumption: 18.7 W seeking, 38.0 W spin-up

7.56

Storage Devices

Disk Devices
RF-Series DSSI Storage Expansion Pedestals
The RF-series storage-only expansion pedestals consist of an R215F expansion
enclosure that includes one or two RF-series ISEs. The R215F expansion enclosure is a derivative of the BA215 pedestal enclosure. The R215F has the physical
capacity for three DSSI ISEs, in any combination.

Ordering Information

R215F (DSSI) expansion enclosure for DSSI-based BA2xx/BA4 xx VAX/MicroVAX
systems. Includes 2.7-m (9-ft) DSSI cable, H4010-AA kit, and documentation.
120-V power cord included with -DA variants. Note: 240-V devices require a
country-specific power cord.
RF31F

RF31

RF72

RF73

1 ISE

RF31G-DA/DB

RF31B-DA/DB

RF72B-DA/DB

RF73B-DA/DB

2 ISEs

NIA

R215F (DSSI) expansion enclosure for non-DSSI-based BA200-series systems;
includes KFQSA adapter. Includes 2.7-m (9-ft) DSSI cable, H4010-AA kit, and
documentation. 120-V power cord included with -xA variants.
RF31F

RF31

RF72

RF73

1 ISE

RF31G-CA/CB

RF31B-CA/CB

RF72B-CA/CB

RF73B-CA/CB

2 ISEs

NIA

R215F (DSSI) expansion enclosure for BA123 system enclosures. Includes KFQSA
adapter, 2.7-m (9-ft) DSSI cable, H4010-AA kit, and documentation kit. 120-V
power cord included with -BA variants.
RF31F

RF31

RF72

RF73

1 ISE

RF31G-BA/BB

RF31B-BA/BB

RF72B-BA/BB

RF73B-BA/BB

2 ISEs

NIA

R215F (DSSI) expansion enclosure for BA23 system enclosures. Includes KFQSA
adapter, 2.7-m (9-ft) DSSI cable, H4010-AA kit, and documentation kit. 120-V
power cord included with -AA variants.
RF31F

RF31

RF72

RF73

1 ISE

RF31G-AAIAB

RF31B-AA/AB

RF72B-AAIAB

RF73 B-AAIAB

2 ISEs

NIA

The following ISEs are available for any of the expansion enclosures previously
referenced.

Power Cords

RF31F

RF31

RF72

RF73

Factory Installed

RF31F-SA

RF31E-SA

RF72E-SA

RF73E-SA

RF35E-SA

Field Installed

RF31F-SF

RF31E-SF

RF72E-SF

RF73E-SF

RF35E-SF

RF35

240-V storage expansion pedestals require a country-specific power cord.

BN19B-2E
BN19J-2E
BN19N-2E
BN19Y-2E
BN19T-2E
BN20N-2E
BN19L-2E
BN19F-2E
BN03B-2E

U .K./Ireland
Australia/New Zealand
Italy
Israel
India
Canada/] apan/United States
Denmark
Switzerland
Austria, Belgium, France, Germany, Finland,
Holland, Norway, Sweden, Portugal, and Spain

Storage Devices

7.57

Disk Devices
RF-Series DSSI Removable Storage Elements
The Removable Storage Element (RSE) is an Integrated Storage Element in a
shock-mounted, protective canister. RF-Series RSEs are packaged in the same
enclosures as the RZ-Series Removable SCSI Disks. RSEs offer Q-bus systems a
high level of security by allowing data to be physically removed from the system,
transported to, and stored in a secure location. The RSE, combined with the
Digital Storage Systems Interconnect (DSSI), offers system integrity, reliability,
and availability. As with the fixed RF-series ISEs, DSSI VAXclusters and Volume
Shadowing are supported. RSEs are available for all Q-bus MicroVAX and
VAX 4000 systems.
The RSE products offer investment protection in two ways. First, through compatibility with Digital Storage Architecture (DSA), and second, hardware investment is protected by the ability to mix and match all variations of the RSEs in
any supported enclosure.
A lockable carrying case is available for protection of the drives during
transportation.
Features
· 5 .25-inch Winchester disk and integral controller
· Enclosed in protective canister

Prerequisite Software

VMS V5 .3 or later

Ordering Information

Note: RSE pedestals for BA4xx and BA2xx enclosures include BC21M DSSI
cables and documentation, 120-V power cord, and universal power supply
(120/240 V). For 240-V use, a country-specific power cord is required.
RF31

RF72

RF73

1 RSE in R23 RF
enclosure'"

RF31B-KA
381 Mbytes

RF72B-KA
1 Gbyte

2 Gbytes

1 RSE in canister
for use in

RF31-RA
381 Mbytes

RF72-RA
1 Gbyte

2 Gbytes

1 RSE in rackmount
chassis 1'

2R-RF31R-01

381 Mbytes

2R-RF72R-01
1 Gbyte

RF73R-KA
2 Gbytes

1
'

RF73-RA

Includes one RSE. Pedestal and rackmount chassis can accommodate two RSEs (order RFxx-RA
separately).

RFXX-CK
Power Cords

RF73B-KA

Carrying case for one removable drive canister.

240-V storage expansion pedestals require a country-specific power cord.

BN19P-1K
BN19H-2E
BN19A-2E
BN19E-2E
BN19K-2E
BN19Z-2E
BN19S-2E
BN18L-2E
BN19W-2E

U.S./Japan/ Mexico
Australia/ New Zealand
U .K./Ireland
Switzerland
Denmark
Italy
India
Israel
Austria, Belgium, France, Germany, Holland, Norway,
Portugal, Spain, Sweden

Note: For additional information, contact the EiC Sales Support Center at
800-832-6277 or 603-884-8990 .

7.58

Storage Devices

Disk Devices

The RZ family of SCSI Winchester disk drives consists of both 3.5- and 5.25-inch
form factors. Capacities range form 121 to 1380 Mbytes. In addition, the family
offers a variety of performance characteristics that can be matched to the system
or application environment.
The 3.5-inch RZ23L, RZ24L, and RZ25 drives are typically mounted in the system
enclosure of the desktop systems and, depending on the system and its configuration, can provide from 121 Mbytes to 2.1 Gbytes in the system enclosure. The
RZ23L, RZ24L, and RZ25 are available in the SZ03 single-drive storage expansion
enclosure. The RZ25 is also available in the SZ12 dual-drive storage expansion
enclosure.
The 5 .25 -inch RZ56, RZ57, and RZ58 drives are typically mounted in the SZ12
and SZ16 dual-drive storage expansion enclosures. These drives are also mounted
in the system enclosures of the DECsystem 5500 and DECsystem 5900.
With the exception of the DECsystem 5500 and DECsystem 5900 which use only
5.25-inch disks, the RZ23L, RZ24L, RZ25, RZ56, RZ57, and RZ58 may be mixed
on systems to provide the required capacity and/or performance.
The following drives are available
• RZ23 L-121 Mbytes, suitable for entry level systems or as a swapping disk
• RZ24L-245 Mbytes, an ideal drive for single-user VAXstations
• RZ25-426 Mbytes, ideal for single-user DECstations and entry-level servers
• RZ56-665 Mbytes, suitable for desktop storage expansion
• RZ57-1000 Mbytes, suitable for CAD applications and PC LAN servers
• RZ58-1380 Mbytes, excellent for RISC servers, multimedia, and imaging
RZ26 SCSI Disk Drive

The new RZ26 1.5-Gbyte 3.5-inch SCSI-2 disk drive more than doubles the
available capacity for internal system storage on the MicroVAX 3100 Model
30/40/80/90 systems. This device fully incorporates 5.25-inch technology in the
3 .5-inch form factor.
Features

The RZ series of 3.5- and 5.25-inch Winchester disk drives offer numerous features that are unique in SCSI disk products.
• Reliability
- Elevated shock, vibration, and temperature specifications to meet the requirements of an office environment
- Thorough testing to Digital's SCSI standards for both signal integrity and command conformance

Storage Devices

7.59

Disk Devices
RZ-Series Disk Drives (SCSI)
(Continued)

• Data Integrity
- 48-bit error correction code (ECC)
- On power failure, writes-in-progress are completed, thus preventing data loss
or corruption
- 90 percent on-board diagnostic coverage on power-up, for improved fault
isolation
- Write as well as read diagnostics on power-up

- All etrors, hard and soft, are reported to the system to aid in monitoring drive
condition
• Performance
- Drive buffer management optimized to Digital operating systems
- Drives support overlapped seeking for near-linear incremental performance
• Compatibililty

- All Digital SCSI disk drives undergo exhaustive system and software regression
testing
• Quality Assurance
- Ongoing testing to assure consistent quality throughout the manufacturing life
of the product
Digital's SCSI implementation is documented in Small Computer System Interface,
An Overview (EK-SCSIS-OV) and Small Computer System Interface, A Developer's
Guide (EK-SCSIS-SP).

Ordering Information

The following table lists the systems that support RZ56, RZ57, and RZ58 disk
drives. See comparison chart on page 7 .6.
System

Factory
Installed

Add-on

Installation

VAXstation 3520/3540

RZ56-SF

Field installed

For addition to SZ12/RZ5x
expansion boxes

RZ56-UK
RZ57-UK
RZ58-UK

Customer installable
Customer installable
Customer installable

For addition to SZ16
expansion box

RZ56-UL
RZ57-UL
RZ58-UL

Customer installable
Customer installable
Customer installable

DECsystem 5500
(BA4xx series enclosures)

RZ56E-AA
RZ57E-AA
RZ58E-AA

RZ56E-AF
RZ57E-AF
RZ58E-AF

Field installed
Field installed
Field installed

DECsystem 5900

RZ57-LF
RZ58-LF

RZ57-LG
RZ58-LG

Field installed
Field installed

Note: See SZ12/ SZ16 description in this chapter for RZ56, RZ57, and RZ58
drives in expansion boxes.

7.60

Storage Devices

Disk Devices
Ordering Information
(Continued)

The following table lists the systems that support the RZ23L, RZ24L, and RZ25
drives. Each drive can be factory installed with diskless systems (see respective
system menus for maximum quantity allowed) or installed as an add-on at the
customer site. See comparison chart on page 7 .6.
Base Drives:

RZ23L 121-Mbyte, 3.5-inch SCSI fixed-disk drive
RZ24L 245-Mbyte, 3.5-inch SCSI fixed-disk drive
RZ25 426-Mbyte, 3.5-inch SCSI fixed-disk drive

Factory
Installed

Add-on

Installation

V AXstation 4000 VLC

RZ23L-EJ
RZ24L-ES

RZ23L-EH
RZ24L-ER

Customer installable
Customer installable

VAXstation 4000
Model 60

RZ23L-EM
RZ24L-EM
RZ25-EM

RZ23L-EL
RZ24L-EL
RZ25-EL

Customer installable
Customer installable
Customer installable

VAXstation 3100
Model 30/40/48

RZ23L-EF
RZ24L-EF
RZ25-EH

Field installed
Field installed
Field installed

V AXstation 3100

RZ23L-EH
RZ24L-EH
RZ25-EH

Field installed
Field installed
Field installed

System

Model 38/76
MicroVAX 3100
Models 1Oe/ 20e

RZ23L-EG
RZ24L-EG

RZ23L-EF
RZ24L-EF

Field installed
Field installed

MicroVAX 3100
Models 30/40/80/90

RZ23L-EJ
RZ24L-EJ
RZ25-EN
RZ26-EN

RZ23L-EH
RZ24L-EH
RZ25-EK
RZ26-EK

Field installed
Field installed
Field installed
Field installed

DECstation 5000
Model 20/25
DECsystem 5000
Model 25

RZ23L-FM
RZ24L-FM
RZ25-FM

RZ23L-FN
RZ24L-FN
RZ25-FN

Customer installable
Customer installable
Customer installable

DECstation 5000
Model 100 Series
DECsystem 5000
Model 133

RZ23L-FM
RZ24L-FM
RZ25-FM

RZ23L-FL
RZ24L-FL
RZ25-FL

Customer installable
Customer installable
Customer installable

DECstation 5000
3100/2100

RZ23L-FG
RZ24L-FG

RZ23L-FG

Field installed
Field installed

DECstation/
DECsystem 5000
Model 200/240,
DECsystem 3100

NIA

RZ25-EF

Field installed

RZ24L-SH
RZ25-SH

Customer installable
Customer installable

DECsystem 5100
applicationDEC 433

Power Cords

A power cord is required for each 220/ 230/240-V RZ device ordered.

BN19A-2E
BN19D-2E
BN19E-2E
BN19H-2E
BN19K-2E
BN19N-2E
BN19S-2E
BN19U-2E

Specifications

RZ24L-SJ
RZ25-SJ

U.K./Ireland
Austria, Belgium, Finland, France, Germany, Holland, Norway,
Portugal, Spain, Sweden
Switzerland
Australia/New Zealand
Denmark
Italy
India
Israel

See the SCSI comparison chart on page 7 .6.

Storage Devices

7.61

fl)

.t
~
cu
Of)'
OS

....!:>
~

Disk Devices
RZ-Series Removable Disks (SCSI)
The Removable SCSI Disks (RSDs) are 5.25-inch Winchester disks in shockmounted, protective canisters, with the same features and functionalities as their
fixed RZxx SCSI drive counterparts, with the added benefit of removability. The
RSD products provide the ideal solution for SCSI workstation and entry-level
system users with applications requiring data security, transportability, and high
availability.
The RSDs are available in three capacities, based on the RZ55 (332 Mbytes), the
RZ56 (665 Mbytes), and the RZ57 (1.0 Gbyte), and can be ordered in either an
R23RZ pedestal similar in style to a BA23 enclosure, or in a rackmount chassis
compatible with any 19-inch EIA-type cabinet.
The canister remains the same regardless of the drive type, allowing all of the
SCSI RSDs to be interchangeable. It also features a retractable handle for ease of
insertion and portability.
A lockable carrying case is available for protection of the disk during
transportation.
Features

· 5.25-inch Winchester disk enclosed in protective canister
· Pedestal or rackmount configuration
· Pedestal and rackmount chassis each house up to two canisters
• Interchangeable canister. Note: Not interchangeable with custom tabletop SCSI
removable canisters or RF-series removables for DSSI.
• Connect up to six RSDs on any single SCSI-bus system

Capacity (formatted)
Transfer rate
Seek time
Access time

Prerequisite Software

RZ55

RZ56

RZ57

332 Mbytes
1.25 MB/s
16 ms
24.3 ms

665 Mbytes
1.87 MB/s
16 ms
24.3 ms

1.0 Gbyte
2.2 MB/s
14.5 ms
<23 ms

VMS V5.0 or later
VMS V5 .4 or later for Volume Shadowing
ULTRIX V4.1 and later (cold swap support only)

Ordering Information

RZ55

RZ56

RZ57

One RSD in R23 RZ pedestal enclosure with space for one additional

RZ55B-KA

RZ56B-KA

RZ57B-KA

One RSD in rackmount chassis
with space for one additional

RZ55R-KA

RZ56R-KA

RZ57R-KA

One add-on RSD in canister

RZ55-RA

RZ56-RA

RZ57-RA

RFXX-CK
Power Cords

Carrying case for one removable canister

Included with enclosures is a universal power supply (120/240 V). For 240-V
use, a country-specific power cord is required.

BN19P-1K
BN19H-2E
BN19W-2E

U.S./Japan/Mexico
Australia, New Zealand
Austria, Belgium, France, Germany, Holland, Norway,
Portugal, Spain, Sweden
U.K./Ireland
Switzerland
Denmark
Italy
India
Israel

BN19A-2E
BN19E-2E
BN19K-2E
BN19Z-2E
BN19S-2E
BN18L-2E
Note: For additional information, contact the EiC Sales Support Center at
800-832-6277 or 603-884-8990.

7.62

Storage Devices

Disk Devices
RX3 3 Flexible Diskette Drive (SCSI)
The RX33 is a half-height, 5.25-inch 1.2-Mbyte diskette drive. In high-density
mode, the drive provides industry-standard compatibility utilizing doublesided high-density diskettes. This allows customers access to a vast software base
of industry media. In BA23 configurations, the RX33 can go into standard mode
allowing users to read and write RX50-type standard-density diskettes on a single
side. This dual-mode capability allows Digital customers to access a vast software
base without sacrificing RX50 software compatibility. The RX3 3 is offered in the
SZ12 expansion box for use with Digital's desktop systems. In this SCSI configuration, support of the RX50 mode is not available-access to the industrystandard software base is fully supported.
Features
• Formatted capacity per diskette: 1.2 Mbytes
· Peak transfer rate: 500 Kbytes/second
· Average seek time: 92 ms
· Average rotational latency: 83 ms
• Bytes per sector: 512
• Sectors per track: 15
• Tracks per diskette: 160
• Brushless direct drive de motor
·Dynamic media clamping
· Diskette ejection mechanism
· "Diskette changed" detection device

Ordering Information

Note: RX33s are 1.2-Mbyte diskette drives.
RX33A-AA
RX33A-BA
RX33-AS
RX33-UK
RX33K-10

RX33 with cables, for use in BA23 enclosure (drive 1)
RX33 with cables, for use in BA123 enclosure (drive 1)
RX33 for use in applicationDEC 433
RX3 3 upgrade kit for SZ12/RZ5X expansion box
Pack of ten RX33s

Note: See SZ12 description in this chapter for RX33 included in SZ12 dual-drive
expansion box.

Configuring Information

Option

RX33

de Amps Drawn at
5V

12 v

0.35

0.22

Watts Drawn

4.40

RX26 Flexible Diskette Drive (SCSI)
The RX26 flexible diskette drive is designed for high-capacity floppy-disk storage
for desktop systems. It provides 2.8 Mbytes of formatted storage capacity
(4 Mbytes unformatted) in a compact 3.5-inch form factor. Utilizing industrystandard 3.5-inch microfloppy diskettes, the RX26 adds a third level to the
existing industry diskette structure of 0.7 Mbyte and 1.4 Mbytes, formatted
(1 Mbyte and 2 Mbytes unformatted, respectively) .
It is fully backward compatible on both read and write capabilities with the
RX23 3.5-inch media at both 0.7-Mbyte and 1.4-Mbyte capacities. This important
feature provides users with access to the complete range of industry-standard
software published on 3.5-inch microfloppies. The RX26 may be operated in
these modes as well. The RX26 employs the industry-standard FDD interface.
The RX26 is offered in the VAXstation 4000 Model 60/ 90 workstations, the SZ03
expansion box, and MicroVAX 3100 Models 30/40/80/90.

Storage Devices

7.63

Disk Devices
RX26 Flexible Diskette Drive

Features

(Continued)

• Formatted capacity per diskette: 2.8 Mbytes (2 Mbytes unformatted)
· Peak transfer rate: 1-Mbyte/second (in 2.8/4-Mbyte mode)
·Average seek time: 95 ms
• Average rotational latency: 100 ms
· Sectors per track: 36
• Tracks per diskette: 160

Ordering Information

Factory
Field
RX26K-10

VAXstation 4000
Models 60/90

VAX 4000
Model 100
MicroVAX 3100
Models
30/40/80/90

DECstation 5000
Models 20/25/33

DECsystem 5900

RX26-ES
RX26-UL

RX26-EN
RX26-EL

RX26-FP
RX26-FN

RX26-LF
RX26-LG

Pack of ten 2.8-Mbyte 3.5-inch flexible diskettes

RX23 Flexible Diskette Drive (SCSI)
The RX23 flexible diskette drive provides a convenient removable storage for
desktop systems. It features exceptional storage capacity and functionality in a
highly compact, 3.5-inch form factor.
The RX23 drive utilizes industry-standard 3.5-inch microfloppy diskettes. Industry diskettes are currently offered in two standard capacities: 2.0-Mbyte, highdensity floppies (1.4-Mbyte formatted), and 1.0-Mbyte, standard-density floppies
(700-Kbyte formatted). The RX23 drive will read and write to the high-density
media while providing read-only compatibility with the standarddensity media. This dual mode capability provides users with access to the complete range of industry-standard software published on 3.5-inch microfloppies.
The RX23 is offered in most Digital desktop systems as well as in the SZ12
dual-drive expansion box.

Features
• Formatted capacity per diskette: 1.4 Mbytes
• Peak transfer rate: 500 Kbytes/second
·Average seek time: 94 ms
· Rotational latency (average): 100 ms
• Sectors per track: 18
· Tracks per diskette: 160
· Operating current consumption: 0.22 A@ 5.00 Vdc (typical)

Ordering Information
VAXstation 3100
Model 30 Model 38 Model 76

MicroVAX 3100
Model lOe Model 20e

DECstation
2100/3100

DECsystem
5100

DECstation 5000
Series 100

Factory Installed

RX23-EJ

RX23-ET

RX23-EM

RX23-EJ

RX23-EM

RX23-FM

, Field Installed

RX23-EH

RX23-EP

RX23-EK

RX23-EZ

RX23-EK
(includes
drive plate)

RX23-FL

RX23-ER

RX23-UK

1.44-Mbyte 3 .5-inch diskette drive upgrade kit for SZ12/RZ5X
expansion box.

RX23K-10

Pack of ten 1.44-Mbyte 3.5-inch flexible diskettes.

Note: See SZ12 description in this chapter for RX23 included in SZ12 dual-drive
expansion box.

7.64

Storage Devices

Expansion Boxes (SCSI)
SZ03/SZ12/SZ16 Expansion Boxes
Power Cords for SZ03, SZ12, and SZ16 expansion boxes
120-V expansion boxes include power cord. Expansion boxes for 240-V systems
require a country-specific power cord.

BN19K-2E
BN19W-2E
BN19P-1K
BN19U-2E
BN19Z-2E
BN19E-2E
BN19A-2E
BN19H-2E

Denmark
Austria, Belgium, Finland, France, German, Holland, Norway,
Portugal, Spain, Sweden
U .S./Canada/Mexico
Israel
Italy
Switzerland
U .K./Ireland
Australia/ New Zealand

SZ03 expansion boxes are supported on the following systems: DECstation 5000
series, DECsystem 5000 series, and VAXstation 4000 series.
· The SZ03 tabletop expansion box supports one 3.5-inch half-height device.
· 120-V expansion boxes include power cord; order power cord for 240-V
variants.

SZ03A-AA/AB
SZ03B-AA/AB
SZ03B-BC/BD
SZ03B-CA/CB
RRD42-F AIDG

2.8-Mbyte RX26 diskette drive
121-Mbyte RZ23L disk drive
245-Mbyte RZ24L disk drive
426-Mbyte RZ25 disk drive
600-Mbyte RRD42 compact disc drive

SZ12 Expansion Box
The SZ12 expansion box is a dual-drive enclosure used to house SCSI storage
drives. SZ12 expansion box configurations and upgrade kits are supported on
the following systems: DECstation 5000, 3100, 2100, DECsystem 5100, 5000,
VAXstation 3100, 4000, and MicroVAX 3100 systems.
Ordering Information Configuration Rules
· The SZ12 expansion box supports a maximum of two 5.25-inch full-height disk
drives, or one 5 .25-inch full-height disk drive and one removable media device
(diskette, tape, or compact discs).
· Maximum of three SZ12 expansion boxes (six storage drives) supported on one
SCSI controller, with maximum of one internal drive.
· 120-V expansion boxes include power cord; order power cord for 240-V
variants.
· SZ 12 expansion box is customer installable.

SZ12 Dual-Drive Expansion Boxes
Disk Drives

Order Number
RZ25
426-MB

RZ55
332-MB

SZ12A-XA/XB

SZ12A-AAIAB

SZ12A-LA/LB

SZ12A-MA/MB

SZ12A-HAIHB

SZ12A-EA/EB

RZ56
665-MB

Diskette Drives
RZ57
1.0-GB

RZ58
1.38-GB

RX23
1.44-MB

RX33
1.2-MB

Compact
Disk Drives

Tape Drives
TZ30
95 -MB

TZKlO
525 -MB

RRD42
600-MB

1
1
1
1

Storage Devices

7.65

Expansion Boxes (SCSI)
SZ12 Dual-Drive Expansion Boxes (Continued)
Order Number

Disk Drives
RZ25
426-MB

SZ12A-FAIFB

RZ55
332-MB

RZ56
665-MB

RZ57
1.0-GB

RZ58
1.38-GB

RX23
1.44-MB

RX33
1.2-MB

Compact
Disk Drives

Tape Drives

Diskette Drives

TZ30
95-MB

TZKlO
525-MB

SZ12B-XAIXB

SZ12B-BA/BB

SZ12B-HAIHB

SZ12B-EAIEB

SZ12B-FA/FB

1
1
1

SZ12C-XAIXB

SZ12C-CA/CB

SZ12C-EA/EB

SZ12C-FAIFB

SZ12G-XAIXB

SZ12G-GA/GB

SZ12G-HAIHB

SZ12G-EAIEB

SZ12G-FAIFB

RRD42
600-MB

1
1

SZ12J-XAIXB

SZ12J-JA/JB

SZ12J-EA/EB

SZ12J-FAIFB

SZ12X-LA/LB

1
1
1

SZ12X-MAIMB

1
1

SZ12X-HAIHB

SZ12X-EAIEB

Note: If the required storage combinations are not offered above, order the single-drive SZ12 configuration plus an upgrade
kit; see following page.
SZ12 Upgrade Kit Configuration Rules
• One free storage cavity must be available to house the upgrade kit.
• SZ12 upgrade kits can be used with existing RZ5X expansion boxes.
• Upgrade kits are customer installable.

RZ25
426-MB
RZ25-UK
RZ55-UK
RZ56-UK
RZ57-UK
RX23-UK
RX33-UK
TZ30-UK
TZKlO-UK
RRD42-UK

7.66

Storage Devices

Diskette Drives

Disk Drives

Order Number

RZ55
332-MB

RZ56
665-MB

RZ57
1.0-GB

RX23
1.44-MB

RX33
1.2-MB

Compact
Disk Drives

Tape Drives
TZ30
95-MB

TZKlO
525-MB

RRD42
600-MB

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Expansion Boxes (SCSI)

SZ16 expansion boxes and upgrade kits are supported on the following systems:
DECstation 5000 series, 3100, 2100; DECsystem 5100, 5000, and VAXstation 4000
Configuration Rules

Ordering Information

• The SZ16 expansion box supports a maximum of two 5.25-inch full-height disk
drives, or one 5.25-inch full-height disk and two half-height removable media
devices. Supported removable media combinations are:
- Two RRD42 compact disk drives
- One TZ30 tape, or TLZ06 tape plus RRD42 compact disc drive
- One TZKlO tape, or TLZ06 tape plux RRD42 compact disc drive
• Installation of two half-height removable media devices requires hardware
bracket kit (BA46X-AB)
· Maximum of three SZ12 expansion boxes (six storage drives) supported on one
SCSI controller, with maximum of one internal drive.
· 120-V expansion boxes include power cord; order power cord for 240-V
variants.
Note: DECsystem and DECstation 5000 series require a terminator

H8574-A

SCSI Terminator

Note: A combination of one TZ30 and one TZKlO is NOT supported
Disk Drives

Order Number

SZ16B-XA/XB

Compact
Disk Drives

Tape Drives

RZ56
665-MB

RZ57
1.0-GB

RZ58
1.4-GB

TZ30
95-MB

TZKlO
525 -MB

TLZ06
4.0-GB

RRD42
600-MB

Full-Height

Half-Height

SZ16C-XA/XB

SZ16C-CA/CB

SZ16J-XAIXB

SZ16J-JA/JB

SZ16J-KAIKB

1
1

SZ16X-HAIHB
SZ16X-EA/EB

SZ16X-KA/KB

SZ16X-FA/FB

If desired storage combinations are not offered, order a single-drive SZ16 configuration plus an upgrade kit.
Upgrade Kit Configuration Rules

· A free storage cavity must be available for each additional drive.
• Upgrade Kit devices are customer installable
Order Number

RZ56-UK
RZ57-UK
RZ58-UK
TZ30-UK
TZKlO-GG
TLZ06-GG
RRD42-JL

Disk Drives

Compact
Disk Drives

Tape Drives

RZ56
665-MB

RZ57
1.0-GB

RZ58
1.4-GB

TZ30
95-MB

TZKlO
525-MB

TLZ06
4.0-GB

RRD42
600-MB

Full-Height

Half-Height

1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Storage Devices

7.6 7

Optical Devices
RV64 Optical Library Jukebox System
The RV64 Optical Library Jukebox system provides up to 128 Gbytes of near
online storage using high-capacity RV02 optical platters. It is an ideal tool for
large applications that need to store and retrieve huge quantities of data and/or
large numbers of documents or image files.
The RV64's automated cartridge handling and 64-platter capacity reduces or
eliminates the operator's physical activities associated with archiving and retrieving information. The subsystem can accommodate up to four RV60 (modified
RV20) drives in a variety of master/slave configurations and can handle a maximum of 64 RV02 cartridges for 128 Gbytes of storage. The RV64 attaches to
VAXcluster and Ethernet networks via a VAXBI library node.
Media Management Software (MMG) Vl.O is a tool for applications developers
and a utility for system managers and operators. MMG' s database keeps track of
the content and status of jukeboxes, drives, cartridges, and volumes, and eliminates the requirement for users and applications developers to monitor the location and status of individual drives and cartridges.
Features

· Total cycle time: 13-15 seconds (time to retrieve and insert cartridge and access
beginning of file)
• Software support: Jukebox Control Software (JCS) Vl.O and MMG Vl.O
(included), VMS V5.1 or later
· Drive performance: Refer to the RV20 Optical Drive section

Ordering Information

RBV64-AA/AD

Optical Library with one master drive, 60/50 Hz.

RBV60-A

Add-in master optical drive for RBV64 jukebox.

RV60-B

Add-in slave optical drive for RV64 jukebox.

RV02K-01

2-Gbyte media in cartridge.

QL-VHBA9-AA

License for Jukebox Control Software Vl.O (included
with RBV64s above).

Note: Media-specific H-kit must be ordered.

QA-VHBAA-H5/HM

Jukebox Control Software media and documentation kit
(TK50/magtape).

QA-VHBAA-GZ

VAX JCS Vl.O documentation set only.

QT-VHBAx-xx

Support services for JCS-Jukebox Control Software SPD
25.D6.

QL-VZDA9-AA

License for Media Management Software Vl.0 (included
with RBV64s above).

QA-VZDAA-H5/HM

Media Management Software media and documentation
kit (TK50/magtape).

QA-VZDAA-GZ

VAX MMG Vl.O documentation set only.

QT-VZDAx-xx

Support services for MMG-Media Management Software
SPD 31.40.

Note: All RBV64 and RBV60 models include appropriate cables and KLESI interface modules. They can attach to VAXBI-based processors. One VAXBI backplane slot is required for each master drive in the configuration. ·The robot
interface requires a DMB32/DHB32 in the host. The RV64 uses RV02K-01 media.

7.68

Storage Devices

Optical Devices
Configuring Information
Option

RBV60-A

Specifications

Mounting
Requirements

1 VAXBI slot

VAXBI

de Amps Drawn @

Nodes

12 v -12 v

-5.2 v

-2 v

7.0

0.0

1/0 Panel
Units

Physical Characteristics
Height
Width
Depth
Weight

152.0 cm (60.0 in.)
162.0 cm (64.0 in.)
142.0 cm (56.0 in.)
753.0 kg (1660.0 lb)

Power Requirements
Current (ac amps)
Watts
NEMA receptacle type
PCS+/PDS+ cable type
Number of phases

13.0/6.5
1300
5-20R
BC24N (120 V)
1

RV20 Write-Once Optical Drive

-----

The RV20 laser disk drive (with its RV02 media) is based on write-once-readmany (WORM) optical technology, in which the user can record data of any type
to the media and read it as many times as desired; data cannot be erased or
destroyed. This technology provides a cost-effective tool for archiving huge
quantities of data on compact, rugged cartridges for 30 years or more.

The RV20 subsystem comes in a I -meter-high, 0.5-meter-wide (40-inch-high,
19-inch-wide) H9643 storage cabinet only. Each master connects to the backplane of supported VAXBI, UNIBUS, or Q-bus systems through the KLESI bus
adapter (also used with TU81E). Most processors support up to four KLESis per
channel, and eight per system (in the case of multiple-channel systems, refer to
relevant Systems chapters of this catalog). Digital's RV02 cartridges can be used
on any Digital RV20 or RV64 subsystem.
As many as four RV20s, in any combination of master/ slave configurations, can
fit into one cabinet. Up to three slaves can be daisychained onto one master,
provided that the application's performance requirements can accept the lower
per-drive throughput that will result from multiplexing.

Features
• Capacity: 1 Gbyte formatted per side; two-sided media
• Transfer rate: 262 Kbytes/s (formatted, sustained) ; 1.33 Mbytes/s (burst rate)
• Access time: 212 .5 ms
·Average seek time: 150 ms
• Latency: 62 .5 ms
• Media life: 5 years prerecording; 30 years readable
· Transports per controller: 4
• Controllers per CPU: up to 4
• Maximum cable length (CPU to drive): 6.1 meters (20 feet)
• Supported by VMS V4.6 or later

Storage Devices

7.69

Optical Devices
Ordering Information

RBV20-PAIPD

Master drive with VAXBI KLESI, H9643-BC cabinet, cabling

RQV20-PAIPD

Master drive with MicroVAX II KLESI, H9643-BC cabinet,
cabling

RSV20-PA/PD

Master drive with KLESI-Sx, H9643-BC cabinet, and cabling

RBV20-A

Add-in master drive with VAXBI KLESI and cabling

RQV20-A

Add-in master drive with MicroVAX II KLESI and cabling

RSV20-A

Add-in master drive with BA213 KLESI and cabling

RV20-B

Slave drive with cabling

RV02K-01

2-Gbyte media cartridge

Configuring Information

Mounting
Requirements

Option

1 quad slot

4.0

0.0

RQV20-PA/PD

1 dual slot

3.0

RSV20-PA/PD

1 dual slot

3.0

RBV20-PA/PD

Specifications

5V
RUV20-PA/PD

Option

Mounting
Requirements

1 VAXBI slot

Bus Loads
Drawn

de Amps Drawn @

-15

0.0

1.0

0.0

1.0

0.0

1.0

IA
VAXBI
Nodes

de Amps Drawn @
5V

7.0

0.0

IIO Panel
Units

v -12 v -5.2 v -2 v
0.0

0.0

Physical Characteristics

Height
Width
Depth
Weight

RV20

In Cabinet

13 .0 cm (5 .1 in.)
48.3 cm (19.0 in.)
65.0 cm (25.6 in.)
25.0 kg (55 lb)

106 cm (41.8 in.)
54 cm (21.3 in.)
84 cm (33.1 in.)
121 kg (266.2 lb)

Power Requirements
Current (ac amps)
Watts
Btulh
NEMA receptacle type
PCS+/PDS+ cable type
Number of phases

2.5/1.25
200
683
L5-30R
BC24S ( 120 V)
BN29H (240 V)
1

Rewritable and WORM Optical Storage Subsystems
Rewritable and WORM optical storage subsystems are based on a finite set of
third-party optical hardware components (drives and jukeboxes) that are integrated into Digital's systems by third-party integration (software) kits. A total
subsystem consists of the hardware component plus the integration kit (software)
component.
REWRITABLE MO (Magneto Optical-the most common rewritable or erasable
optical technology) optical recording is the optical technology that is functionally
equivalent to magnetic disk recording in that randomly accessible sectors can be
written , read, and overwritten. Erasable optical media is useful in applications
where eventual media reuse is required. The shelf life of rewritable optical media
is a minimum of 10 years.

7.70

Storage Devices

Optical Devices
Rewritable and WORM Optical
Storage Subsystems (Continued)

WORM (Write Once Read Many) optical technology enables the user to encode
any data permanently onto the surface of the WORM optical disk (media). With
WORM technology, the data is safe from being overwritten. WORM data can be
written only once, overwrites of the data are not possible. Additional data writes
are automatically encoded onto the remaining space on the disk. WORM optical
subsystems are of particular interest in security, legal, financial and medical
applications where the integrity of the data important. The shelf life of WORM
optical disks is a minimum of 25 years.
The REWRITABLE offerings are available in 5.25-inch form factor and the
WORM offerings are available in both 5.25-inch and 12-inch form factors.
REWRITABLE storage capacity ranging from 594 Mbytes (desktop) to
33.2 Gbytes (5.25-inch jukebox), and WORM storage capacity ranging from
654 Mbytes (desktop) to 328 Gbytes (12-inch jukebox)
Features

· Near-line data access
· Total storage solution
• End-user integration
• Data security
• Cost effective data storage
· VMS and RISC/ ULTRIX integration
· High capacity data storage
· Removability
Note: For more information on Rewritable and WORM optical storage
subsystems, contact the EiC Sales Support Center at 800-832-6277 or
603-884-8990.

The RWZOl is a 5.25-inch, rewritable, tabletop, magneto optical disk drive. On a
compact, double-sided 5.25-inch diameter disk, the RWZOl disk drive contains
up to 594 Mbytes (297 Mbytes per side) of formatted data. The disk must be
manually turned over to access the second side.
Optical disk technology provides a means by which large amounts of data can be
stored at a comparatively low cost. In optical storage, a very tightly focused laser
beam is used to read and write to the surface of the platter, eliminating disk
wear. The RWZOl emulates a magnetic disk drive, providing random access to
data.
The RWZOl contains modified firmware which enables it to connect directly to
SCSI ports on Digital workstations, DECstations, and DECsystems. For connection to Q-bus MicroVAX systems, KZQSA adapter is required. It is operated by
disk driver software which is embedded in VMS and ULTRIX operating systems,
allowing operators to use standard operating system commands.
The disk comes in a protective cartridge to safeguard against scratches, fingerprints, and dust. The cartridge can be removed from the drive and filed compactly in archives or transported easily from one system to another for effective
data sharing.

Storage Devices

7. 71

Optical Devices
RWZOl Optical Disk Drive
(Continued)

Prerequisites

Features

·Removable 5.25-inch diameter media
• Tabletop enclosure
· Customer-installable
· Capacity per disk: 594 Mbytes
· Raw data transfer rate: 620 Kbytes/second
· Read transfer speed: 166 Kbytes/second
· Write transfer speed: 91-93 Kbytes/second
• Average access time: 95 ms
• Media shelf/archival life: More than 15 years
· Conforms to all requirements of the ISO 10089 Type A rewritable standard
· Auto-ranging power supply
Hardware

• KZQSA adapter for Q-bus MicroVAX systems
· SCSI interconnect cable must be ordered separately
· Disk cartridge media
Software

VMS Version 5 .4-1 or later
ULTRIX Version 4.0 or later

Ordering Information

RWZOl-AA

5.25-inch rewritable tabletop optical disk drive with universal
power supply. SCSI cables and disk cartridge media must be
ordered separately. Includes 120-V power cord; 240-V power
cord must be ordered separately.

Power Cords

BN19A-2E
BN19D-2E
BN19E-2E
BN19K-2E
BN19N-2E
BN19U-2E

SCSI Cables

U.K./Ireland
Austria, Belgium, Finland, France, Germany, Holland, Norway,
Portugal, Spain, Sweden
Switzerland
Denmark
Italy
Israel

BC06P-xx

50-pin right-angle bale lock to 50-pin right-angle bale lock connector for MicroVAX, DECsystem 5100, DECsystem 5500>\
VAXstation 4000, InfoServer 150 and Q-bus MicroVAX systems
(via KZQSA)

BC56H-xx

68-pin straight microconnector to 50-pin straight bale lock connector for VAXstation 3100, DECstation 2100, DECstation 3100

BC09D-xx

50-pin straight bale lock to 50-pin straight microconnector for
DECstation 5000 Models 200/240

,., Via SCSI port only

Supplies

RWXlK-01
RWXlH-AA

Specifications

Physical Characteristics

Height
Width
Depth
Weight

Optical disk cartridge media
Lens cleaning cartridge

12.7 cm (5.0 in.)

21.3 cm (8.4 in.)
31.1 cm (12.25 in.)
6.8 kg (15.0 lb)

Note: For additional information, contact the EiC Sales Support Center at
800-832-6277 or 603-884-8990.

7. 72

Storage Devices

Optical Devices

The StorageServer 100 product is an ULTRIX-based hierarchical storage system
which directly manages 19 to 114 Gbytes of compact, rewritable optical storage
at costs more typical of off-line media.
Network file servers can satisfy the needs of storage-intensive applications such
as imaging, multimedia, automated libraries of engineering diagrams and documents, and extended databases. Clients may include UNIX systems, IBM PCs and
compatibles, Macintosh and VMS systems using popular communications protocols including TCP/IP, NFS, DECnet/OSI, and PATHWORKS.
The StorageServer 100 product utilizes both rewritable optical and magnetic disk
technologies. StorageServer software automatically migrates files between magnetic disk and optical platters based on usage patterns in an applicationtransparent manner. Magnetic storage is dynamically allocated to active files,
whereas inactive files reside on optical platters. Consequently, file system responsiveness remains extremely high. The number of system bus connections is
greatly reduced while the amount of on-line storage is dramatically increased.
Features

· 19 to 114 Gbytes of high capacity, compact storage
• Incremental expansion in units of 19 Gbytes with 32 optical platters
• Uses industry-standard 5.25-inch rewritable optical platters with 595-Mbyte
capacity (formatted) per platter
• File access transparent to users and applications
· Individual files may be up 2 Gbytes in size, independent of capacity of media
• Significantly lower maintenance costs than magnetic storage

Prerequisite Hardware

DECsystem 5000 Model 240 or DECsystem 5900
Each 19-Gbyte deskside or rackmount optical library requires three available
SCSI bus connections, one for each of the two optical drives and one for the
mechanical selector.
Sufficient "front-end" magnetic storage as noted under ((Configuration Notes"
below.

Prerequisite Software

ULTRIX 4.2C or later

Configuration Notes

Optimal performance assumes the proper ratio of magnetic storage to the total
storage according to the percentage of active files, the size of those files , and the
read/write ratio. Variations are to be expected according to the workloads.
The percentage of the total storage that should be magnetic will typically be
between 5 % to 20%.

Ordering Information

RWlOO-AA
Deskside base option, TK50 media
RWlOO-BA
Deskside base option, CD-ROM media
RWlOO-DAIDB . For DECsystem 5900; factory/field installed in system cabinet
RWlOO-CA
Deskside add-on option

Storage Devices

7.73

Optical Devices
Specifications

Physical Characteristics
Deskside cabinet
Dimensions
Weight

720 x 375 x 800 mm (28.3 x 14.8 x 31.5 in.)
79 kg (174 lb)

Rackmount
Dimensions
Weight

400 x 483 x 759 mm (15.7 x 19.0 x 30.0 in.)
58 kg (127 lb)

Power Requirements (Deskside or Rackmount)
Line Voltage
100-127 Vac, 200-240 Vac, 50-60 Hz
Power Consumption
250 W maximum, 110 W typical
· Deskside or rackmount unit
• 19 Gbytes maximum with full complement of 32 platters

• 595 Mbytes per platter, with 512 bytes/sector, conforming to ISO/IEC 10089A
and ANSI X3Bll standards
• Multifunction optical drives
· Two drives per deskside or rackmount unit
· Maximum transfer rates: 680 Kbytes/s read, 340 Kbytes/s write

7.74

Storage Devices

CD-ROM Devices
InfoServer 150/InfoServer 150 VXT Network Storage Servers
The InfoServer 150 is a dedicated network storage server that delivers information across multiple operating platforms. It provides SCSI storage access to a
variety of clients in an 802.3/Ethernet LAN. A caching scheme, sophisticated
software, and 60-ns CPU chip allow the InfoServer 150 to deliver information to
up to 100 clients at a performance rate equal to that of a locally attached device.
It supports 14 SCSI devices'\ including CD-ROM, hard disk, tape, and
magneto-optical drives.
In addition, InfoServer V2.1 software provides VMS backup support. This means
that VAX systems can be backed up to one centralized management point, the
same point through which software is distributed.
InfoServer 150 client software is available for VMS, ULTRIX, generic DOS,
PATHWORKS for DOS, Macintosh, and Novell NetWare environments, as well as
for the VXT 2000. The InfoServer 150 system's ability to serve multiple clients
simultaneously, regardless of format, is achieved using LASTport/Disk. This
sophisticated protocol allows the InfoServer 150 to transfer information at the
block level, regardless of the file format being served. DOS clients can read ISO
9660 and High Sierra formats while VMS users read ODS-2 formats, and ULTRIX
clients read ISO 9660, ULTRIX File System (UFS), and Berkeley Software Distribution file formats.
Features
· Allows users of DOS PCs, RISC workstations, VAX, and Macintosh systems to
access information stored in multiple formats simultaneously
• Easy to install and use-features preconfigured hardware and factory-loaded
software
· Cost-effective-serves as a shared LAN peripheral for up to 100 clients
· Rights to use all Digital-developed InfoServer 150 clients are included with the
server license
· Supports up to 14 locally-attached SCSI devices including CD-ROM, tape, hard
disk, and magneto-optical drives
InfoServer 150 VXT
Specifically designed for use with the VXT 2000 X Window terminal, the
InfoServer 150 VXT extends physical memory by creating a virtual memory environment for each VXT 2000. This system is preconfigured with InfoServer software V2.1 and VXT software. System managers can use the VXT software to
manage VXT 2000 terminal work groups across the network. The InfoServer 150
VXT acts as a load device for VTX 2000 software and also serves as a network
storage device for high-speed font access. It can be upgraded to include disk
and/or tape access.
"' The InfoServer 150 supports up to 14 SCSI devices when ANSI bus length requirements are
observed.

Prerequisite H ardware

Ethernet drop; both Thin Wire or thick wire connections are supported.

Ordering Information

Each of the base package configurations allows users to access CD-ROMs and
hard disks. The ability to serve tapes to VMS clients (tape function access) is
included with the SEACT and SEACU systems. InfoServer 150 SEACD and
SEACE systems can be upgraded to include tape functionality by ordering the
appropriate media and license. InfoServer 150 VXT systems can be upgraded for
disk and tape access by ordering the appropriate media kits and licenses. It is
also possible to order the InfoServer Client for VXT media kit, which allows the
InfoServer to support up to eight VXT 2000 terminals. See Chapter 8, Terminals
and Printers, for ordering details.

Storage Devices

7.75

CD-ROM Devices
Ordering Information
(Continued)

Hardware Options

Note: All configurations include the following: factory-installed InfoServer V2.1
software, hardware and software documentation, SCSI disk drive, and an internal
RRD42 CD-ROM drive.

SEACD-AA/A9

InfoServer 150 disk server with RZ23L 121-Mbyte disk drive
and one internal CD-ROM drive; can be upgraded to include
tape function access. See Software Options.

SEACE-AA/A9

Same as above except includes two CD-ROM drives

SEACT-AA/A9

InfoServer 150 disk and tape server with RZ23L 121-Mbyte
disk drive and one RRD42 CD-ROM drive; includes media and
licenses for disk and tape function access

SEACU-AA/A9

Same as above except includes two CD-ROM drives

SEACV-AA/A9

InfoServer 150 VXT with RZ24 209-Mbyte disk drive and
RRD42 CD-ROM drive; preconfigured with VXT 2000 software.
Can be upgraded to disk and tape function access. See Software Options.

SEACW-AAIA9

Same as above except includes two CD-ROM drives.

Each InfoServer 150 supports up to 14 SCSI devices (including the integral
RZ23L and RRD42 CD-ROM drives).
RRD42-FA

Tabletop external 600-Mbyte CD-ROM drive

TK50Z-GA/G3

SCSI subsystem, TK50 controller expander box (maximum two;
each must be placed at end of SCSI bus.)

TLZ04-MA

Tabletop external 1.2-Gbyte digital audiotape (DAT); includes
BC56H-03 SCSI cable

TLZ04-FA

Tabletop external 1.2-Gbyte digital audiotape (DAT)

TZ85-TA

2.6-Gbyte tabletop tape subsystem with data cartridge, cleaning
kit, and 120-V power cord.

TSZ07-AA

1600/6250-bit/inch SCSI rackmountable 9-track magtape*

TSZ07-BA

1600/6250-bit/inch SCSI 9-track magtape mounted in H9642
cabinet, 120 V; power cord included

TSZ07-CA

1600/6250-bit/inch SCSI tabletop 9-track magtape'"

RWZOl-AA

Magneto-optical drive

"' Requires country kit-see TSZ07 description in this chapter.

SZ12 Expansion Box

See SZ12 description in this chapter for additional external RZ, tape, and
CD-ROM ordering information. Note that RZ series drives are not supported on
the InfoServer 150 or InfoServer 150 VXT systems.
Note: Most external devices include both BC56H-03 and BC19J-1E cables. For
those devices that do not include the connected cables, e.g., RWZOl-AA, order
BC56H-03 if the device is the first on the external bus, or BC 19}- lE if the device
is in any other position on the bus.

Clients

Clients are defined as those systems that use the InfoServer as a logically
mounted drive. These clients can be individual Ethernet PCs, workstations, or
host systems serving any number of terminals and workstations.
Media and documentation only. The right to use up to 100 clients is included
with the InfoServer server license in the base packaged systems.

QA-YSHAB-Hx
QA-YSHAC-Hx
QA-YSHAD-HW
QA-YSHAE-HC

InfoServer Client for ULTRIX/RISC media and documentation kit
InfoServer Client for ULTRIX/VAX media and documentation kit
InfoServer Client for DOS media and documentation kit
InfoServer Client for Macintosh media and documentation kit

'" x denotes media type, 5 = TK50, M = magtape, 8 =CD-ROM

7.76

Storage Devices

CD-ROM Devices
Software Options

Country Kits

Specifications~·:

QA-YSHAA-H8
QL-YSH99-RA
QL-XZYA9-AA
QL-XZYAA-H8
QL-XZZA9-AA
QA-XZZAA-H8

SEAKC-AA
SEAKC-AC
SEAKC-AD
SEAKC-AE
SEAKC-AP
SEAKC-AG
SEAKC-AI
SEAKC-AJ
SEAKC-AK
SEAKC-AT
SEAKC-AZ
SEAKC-BJ

InfoServer V2.1 media and documentation kit
InfoServer software kernel update license
InfoServer disk function access license
InfoServer disk function access media kit
InfoServer tape function access license
InfoServer tape function access media and documentation
kit, InfoServer V.20 software or higher is required for
tape functionality

U.S.
Canada
Denmark
U.K./Ireland
France
Germany/Austria
Italy
Japan
Switzerland
Israel
Australia
India

System enclosure

Tabletop

Maximum total drives

14 (Including integral hard disk and CD-ROM drive)

Ethernet communications

One AUI (thick wire)/Thin Wire port
One console port

Physical Characteristics
Height
Width
Depth
Weight

10.33 cm (4.07 in.)
46.38 cm (18.26 in.)
39.42 cm (15.52 in.)
11.4 kg (25 lb)

Power Requirements
Nominal voltage
Power source phasing
Nominal frequency
Voltage range
Line frequency tolerance
Maximum running current
Maximum power consumption

110/240
Single
50 Hz-60 Hz
88 V-132 V; 176 V-264 V
47 Hz-63 Hz
2.8 All.5 A
190

Operating Environment
Temperature (sea level)
Relative humidity
Non-condensing maximum
operating altitude

10° to 32° C (50° to 90° F)
10% to 80 %
2.4 km (8,000 ft)

For additional ordering information on the InfoServer 150 VXT and the VXT
2000, in Chapter 8, Terminals and Printers.

* Tape function access is not available to ULTRIX clients at this time. In addition, ISL for ULTRIX
systems is not supported at this time.
Client notes: InfoServer client code is included in VMS V5.4 and V5.5 and PATHWORKS for DOS
V4 .l. For DOS and Novell NetWare environments, order the InfoServer Client for DOS media kit.
The InfoServer Client for VTX media kit can be used with InfoServer 150 systems.

Storage Devices

7.77

CD-ROM Devices
RRD42 Compact Disc Drive
The RRD42 CD-ROM subsystem is an industry-standard, 5.25 -inch half-height
device that fits conveniently into a system cabinet or in a desktop enclosure. The
media is a removable 4.7-inch compact disc enclosed in a protective cartridge
carrier which is loaded at the front of the drive. The subsystem offers an excellent vehicle for distributing software, layered applications, and upgrades to
desktop worksystems and networked systems. It is also available as a complete
solutions packaged called DECdisc. DECdisc is a solutions package containing
software applications, documentation, service information, and the low-cost tabletop RRD42 compact disc drive. Different versions are available for VMS V5 .4-2
and RISC ULTRIX V4.2.
Available for Small Computer Systems Interface (SCSI) based systems, the RRD42
device appears to the system as a high-capacity write-protected Winchester disk
drive. The RRD42 subsystem can be configured in an Ethernet Local Area Network via the InfoServer 150, allowing system managers to download software
and documentation to non-SCSI-based systems. The RRD42 subsystem can also
connect to Q-bus systems through the KZQSA adapter.
Powerful error correction features in both the drive and the controller ensure
high data integrity.
Features

· Configuration options: tabletop or embedded (SCSI format)
• Formatted capacity: 600-Mbyte disc
• Average access time: 0.45 second
• Average transfer rate: 150 Kbytes/second
· Average seek time: less than 500 ms
· Form factor: 5.25 inches, half-height
· Data format: Philips/Sony CD-ROM standard
· Medium: replicated optical disk, 120-mm (4.7-in.) diameter
13
· Corrected bit error rate: not greater than 1 in 10

Ordering Information

7.78

Storage Devices

Note: RRD42s are 600-Mbyte SCSI CD-ROM drives.

RRD42-EM/EL

RRD42 for DECsystem 5100, factory/field installed.

RRD42-FM/FL

RRD42 for DECsystem 5000 Models 125/133 ; factory/field
installed.

RRD42-JM/JL

RRD42 for VAXstation 4000 Models 60/90; factory/field
installed.

RRD42-GM

RRD42 for MicroVAX 3100, Model 10e/20e; factory installed.

RRD42-FA

RRD42 tabletop for InfoServer 150; VAXstation 3100, 4000;
DECstation 2100, 3100, 5000; DECsystem 5000, 5100; VAX
4000 Model 100; and MicroVAX 3100; includes connecting
cables and 120-V power cord.

RRD42-FB

RRD42 tabletop for MicroVAX 3300, 3400, 3800, 3900;
MicroVAX II; BA2x- and BA4xx-based VAX 4000s; and
DECsystem 5500. Includes connecting cables and power cord.

RRD42-DG

RRD42 tabletop for InfoServer 150; VAXstation 3100, 4000;
MicroVAX 3100; DECstation 2100, 3100, 5000; VAX 4000
Model 100; DECsystem 5000 and 5100. Includes connecting
cables. Requires country-specific power cord.

RRD42-DH

RRD42 tabletop for MicroVAX 3300, 3400, 3800, 3900; BA2xand BA4xx-based VAX 4000s; and MicroVAX IL Includes connecting cables. Requires country-specific power cord.

RRD42-UK

RRD42 upgrade to SZ12 and RZ5 x dual-drive expansion boxes;
customer installed.

CD-ROM Devices
Ordering Information

RRD4X-CA

Five protective plastic caddies for RRD42.

(Continued)

RRD42-GA

RRD42 tabletop drive for PC/AT compatible computers.
Includes host bus adapter, interface cable, SCSI bus terminator,
Adaptec software drivers with MS-DOS CD-ROM extensions,
installation manual, power cord, and two caddies.

Note: See SZ12 description in this chapter for RRD42 included in SZ12
dual-drive expansion box.
Power Cords

For 240-V options select appropriate power cord.

BN19A-2E
BN19W-2E
BN19E-2E
BN19H-2E
BN19K-2E
BN19Z-2E
BN19S-2E
BN18L-2E

U.K./lreland
Germany, Austria, Belgium, Finland, France, Holland, Norway,
Portugal, Spain, Sweden
Switzerland
Australia/New Zealand
Denmark
Italy
India
Israel

Note: Order the 120-V RRD42 for Japan, Mexico, and Canada.

The DECdisc package offers the opportunity to try software applications before
purchasing them. For VMS systems, a customer can try four of 24 selected
applications from the VMS Consolidated Software Distribution offering. Customers can install and use applications, tools, and layered products for 90 days. For
RISC ULTRIX systems, a customer has access to the Software Store for ULTRIX,
consisting of demonstrations of 25 third-party applications. Digital software can
be purchased from DECdirect catalog and third-party software can be ordered
directly from Digital's third-party partners.

RISC ULTRIX Version
· Tabletop model of RRD42 CD-ROM
· ULTRIX V4.2 binaries (one disk)
· Online documentation library
• Software Store for UL TRIX
· Informational fliers: Software Update Services and Media Replication and

Distribution Services
VMS Version
• Tabletop model of RRD42 CD-ROM
• VMS Consolidated Software Distribution (four disks)
· Online documentation library (one disk)
· Trial Software PAKS (four)
· Informational fliers: Software Update Services, Media Replication and
Distribution Services, and DEClearn

Ordering Information

Note: All RRD42s are 600-Mbyte SCSI CD-ROM tabletop models; include connecting cables, documentation, and power cords.
RRD42-FC

RRD42 for VAXstation 3100, InfoServer 150, and MicroVAX
3100. Includes VMS DISC package.

RRD42-FD

RRD42 for DECstation 2100, 3100, 5000; DECsystem 5000,
5100, 5500. Includes ULTRIX DISC package.

RRD42-FE

RRD42 for MicroVAX 3300, 3400, 3800, 3900; MicroVAX II,
and VAX 4000. Includes VMS DISC package.

Storage Devices

7. 79

Tape Devices (Cartridge Subsystems)
Tx800 Family of Cartridge Tape Drives

--.......--- -..........

The Tx800 cartridge tape drives are industry-leading 5.25-inch streaming linear
recording tape devices, designed for systems requiring high performance, high
data integrity, and unattended backup. The performance and capacity of the
Tx800 cartridge tape drive subsystem is unrivaled. With a sustained transfer rate
of up to 800 Kbytes per second and up to 2.6 Gbytes of formatted capacity, the
Tx85 tape drives can complete full backups in under an hour. With the same
transfer rate, the Tx86 tape drive systems support up to 6 Gbytes of formatted
capacity.
A 512-Kbyte adaptive cache matches the speed of the tape subsystem to system
performance, minimizing repositioning delays, and a dual-channel read/write
head design provides a high data transfer rate.
Extensive error detection and correction make the data integrity of the Tx800
cartridge tape subsystem comparable to that of magnetic disks. Other advanced
data integrity features include a custom 64-bit CRC on each 2 Kbytes of data on
media; a powerful custom Reed Solomon ECC, end-to-end EDC on data (onto
media and back) overlapped with parity from the DSSI bus, as well as parity
checking on data cache memory. These features combine to produce undetected
27
errors of less than 1 in 10 bits and unrecovered read errors of less than 1 in
17
10 bits.
Extensive diagnostic and troubleshooting features include serial EIA-422 ports on
the subsystem and controllers for offline troubleshooting and POST (power on
self-test) error reporting, embedded diagnostic and self-test software, and LEDs
for indication of operating and fault information.
Tape composition, rugged cartridge design, and gentle tape handling of the
Tx800 cartridge tape subsystems result in a durable medium that can be used for
over 20,000 tape-head passes.
The Tx800 cartridge tape drive subsystems use the CompacTape III cartridge,
which contains 335 meters (1100 feet) of half-inch-wide metal powder (MP) tape.
MP tape is a durable medium, thus providing longer media life than many other
tapes. While the CompacTape III cartridge resembles earlier cartridges, it is not
interchangeable in earlier tape drives. However, the Tx85 tape drive subsystem
accepts and reads cartridges from TZ30, TK50, TK70, and TF70 tape drives.
Users currently employing these tape subsystems for backups, archiving, and
software interchange can thus protect their earlier investment. The Tx86 drives,
on the other hand, offer Tx85 read and write compatibility, but no TZ30/TK50/
TK70 read compatibility.
Features
• DSSI interface (TF devices)
· SCSI interface (TZ devices)
· Extensive embedded diagnostic/self-test software
· Four LEDs and audio indicators of subsystem status on front panel
T x85 Features
· Up to 2.6-Gbyte formatted capacity per cartridge
• TZ30/TK50/TK70 read compatibility
• Available as system embedded and in an attractive tabletop enclosure
T x86 Features
• Up to 6-Gbyte capacity per cartridge
• Available in tabletop enclosure only
• Read/write compatibility with Tx85 drives
• Tx86 drives are NOT read compatible with TZ30/TK50/TK70 drives.

7.80

Storage Devices

Tape Devices (Cartridge Subsystems)
Software Support

Most common tape functionality, such as COPY, MOUNT, INIT, BACKUP, TAR,
and DUMP will function normally on VMS V5.3 or later or ULTRIX V4.2 or later
for SCSI support. DSSI is supported by VMS V5.4-2 and not on ULTRIX. For
some of these earlier versions of the operating systems, there are some operational limitations in such areas as device name recognition, error reporting facility, and standalone backup. These restrictions depend on the type of drive,
system, and version of operating system used. Contact a Digital Sales Office for a
list of support limitations.

TF85/TZ85

Note: Tx85s are 2.6-Gbyte (formatted) extended 5.25-inch, 800-Kbyte/s cartridge
tape subsystems; each incudes tape cartridge, head cleaning cartridge, mounting
chassis, cables, and documentation.

Ordering Information

Configuration Notes

TF85B-AA

TF85 factory-installed-only version for VAX 6000 systems

TF85C-AA

TF85 for VAXft 610/612 systems

TF85E-JAIJF

TF85 for BA4 xx enclosure and R400X/B400X expansion pedestals; factory/field installed.

TF85E-27

Same as TF85E-JF-quantity 27 (full palette)

TF85-TA

TF85 in tabletop enclosure for DSSI-based systems, includes
U.S. power cord

TF85T-18

Same as above-quantity 18 (full palette)

TF85D-AA

TF85 cartridge tape subsystem for VAXft Model 610/612 systems, includes mounting chassis and cables

TZ85E-MX

TX85 cartridge tape subsystem, field installable for VAX 4000
systems, includes mounting hardware

TZ85-TA

TX85 cartridge tape subsystem in tabletop enclosure for
SCSI-based systems

TZ85-RA

Includes one TZ85-TA, VAXBI adapter, internal cable with I/O
bulk head connector; order external SCSI cable (BC 19}-xx)
separately

TFM85-AA

TF85 tape drive for DSSI-based systems, includes KFMSA-BA
XMI-DSSI controller and CK-KFMSA-LJ cable kit

TFM85-DA
TFM85-TA

Same as TFM85-AA except for VAX 7000 systems
Same as TFM85-AA except in tabletop enclosure

1. When connected to a KFQSA installed in a MicroVAX II or MicroVAX 3 xxx
(except MicroVAX 3100) system, the TF85 and TF857 tape subsystems do not
support booting of MicroVAX Diagnostics Monitor (MDM) or VMS.
2. VMS V5 .4-2 is required for boot support on VAX 4000 series systems and
MicroVAX 33/34xx series systems (only bootable on embedded DSSI adapter),
although a TZ85 can be booted on a MicroVAX 3100. VMS V5.4-3 is required
for VAX 6000 and VAX 9000 series systems.
3. For optimum TF85/TF857 backup performance, Digital recommends the
TF85/TF857 be connected to a high-performance adapter such as the KFMSA
adapter module on the VAX 6000 and VAX 9000 or the embedded DSSI
adapter such as those found on VAX 4000 systems.
4. For VAX 4000 systems, the DSSI controller module is physically attached to
the tape drive, and therefore the subsystem can only be mounted in the
removable-media slot in BA430 and BA440 pedestal enclosures, which were
designed to house this tape drive/controller combination.

Storage Devices

7.81

5
....

"'"

Tape Devices (Cartridge Subsystems)
TF86/TZ86
Ordering Information

Note: Tx86s are 6-Gbyte (formatted) SCSI-2 cartridge tape drive subsystems with
800-Kbyte/second transfer rate. Each includes a tape cartridge, U.S. power cord,
and documentation.

TF86-TA/TB

Tabletop version, 110 V/120 V

TFM86-TA/TB

TF86-TA with KFMSA-BA DSSI controller and CK-KFMSA-LN,
110 V/ 120 V

TZ86-TA/TB

Tabletop version, 110 V/120 V

TZ86-RA

Same as above with VAXBI controller

Cables, media, and power cords for the Tx800 family are described on page
7.84.

The two Tx800 magazine tape subsystems-Tx85 and Tx867-combine the cartridge drive and an automatic cartridge loader to provide highly reliable unattended backup for SCSI, DSSI, and CI systems. Up to seven cartridges are
inserted into the magazine, a remov~ble storage rack. An internal, elevator-like
mechanism moves to each of the storage slots to load and unload cartridges.
When fully loaded, the Tx857 subsystems can back up as much as 18 Gbytes in
a single shift (8 hours) without operator intervention. The Tx867 subsystems can
back up as much as 42 Gbytes in two shifts (16 hours) without operator
intervention.
The Tx800 magazine tape subsystems are offered in half-rack enclosure for inclusion in the BAlOO storage array pedestals or the integrated storage array system.

Tx857/Tx867 Features
• Incorporates the 2.6-Gbyte Tx85/6-Gbyte Tx86 cartridge tape drive
· Maximum capacity: up to seven cartridges for up to 18.2-Gbyte unattended
. backup
· TZ30/TK50/TK70 read compatibility (Tx85 only)
· Available in pedestal enclosure (SZl00/ 106, SAl00/106)
·Available for inclusion in storage arrays (TF857, TA857)

Software Support

VMS'·V5.4 or higher is required for the HSC-based TA8x7 /SAlOx. Same limitiation as described for the Tx85/Tx86 devices.

Tx857 Ordering Information

TF857-AA/AB

18.2-Gbyte (formatted) half-rack magazine tape subsystem for
VAX 6000, BA2xx- and BA4xx-based VAX 4000s, Q-bus
MicroVAX 3xxx, MicroVAX II systems; includes tape subsystem, seven tape cartridges, head cleaning cartridge, tape magazine, and documentation; 120 V/240 V.

TF857-CA/CB

Same as above except for VAXft Model 610/612 systems.

SFlOO-PA/PB

18.2-Gbyte (formatted) magazine tape subsystem for
DSSI-based systems in pedestal enclosure; includes tape subsystem, seven tape magazines, head cleaning magazine, tape magazine, pedestal enclosure, ' documentation; 120 V/240 V.

SF101-AA/AB

Same as above except includes KFMSA-BA DSSI controller and
CK-KFMSA-LJ cable: kit.

SF200-TE/TF

Half-rack magazine tf,lpe subsystem for DSSI-based systems,
18.2-Gbyte (formatted), includes DSSI storage cabinet, tape
subsystem, seven tape cartridges, head cleaning cartridge, tape
magazine, and documentation; 120 V/240 V.

7.82

Storage Devices

Tape Devices (Cartridge Subsystems)
Tx857 Ordering Information

TA857-AA/AB

Full-rack magazine tape subsystem for SA300 or SA400 storage
arrays. 18.2-Gbyte (formatted), includes DSSI storage cabinet,
tape subsystem, seven tape cartridges, head cleaning cartridge,
tape magazine, and documentation; 120 V/240 V.

SZlOO-AA/AB

18-Gbyte cartridge loader tape subsystem in pedestal enclosure,
includes seven TK85K data cartridges, cleaning kit, tape magazine, documentation. 120-V/240-V power cord.

SZlOO-RAIRB

Includes an SZlOO magazine tape subsystem and a KZBSA-CA
BI-SCSI controller.

SAlOO-AA/AB

Half-rack magazine tape subsystem for HSC-based systems,
18.2 Gbytes (formatted) in a pedestal cabinet enclosure.
Includes seven TK85K media cartridges, one TK85-M tape cartridge magazine, one TK85 -HC head cleaning cartridge, HSC
interface, cabinet, BC26V-25 cables, and documentation; 120
V/240 V.

(Continued)

Cables, media, and accessories are described on page 7 .84.

Upgrades

Tx867 Ordering Information

An upgrade package is available for customers who have a Tx857 variant and
want to take advantage of the Tx867's higher capacity but don't need the
Tx857's software distribution compatibility. The Tx867-UG package includes the
appropriate variant of the Tx86 drive, which will be exchanged in the field for
the Tx85 drive that is contained in an existing Tx857 tape subsystem. Return of
the existing Tx80 cartridge is mandatory.
TZ867-UG

TZ857-to-TZ867 upgrade, mandatory return of TZ85 drive

TF867-AA/AB

DSSI 42-Gbyte (formatted) cartridge loader tape subsystem for
SF2xx, 120 V/240 V

TF867-UG

TF857-to-TF867 upgrade, mandatory return of TF85 drive

TA867-AA/AB

CI 42-Gbyte (formatted) cartridge loader tape subsystem, full
rack, for SA300/SA900, 120 V/240 V

TA867-UG

TA857-to-TA867 upgrade, mandatory return of TZ85 drive

SZ106-AA/AB

SCSI 42-Gbyte (formatted) cartridge loader tape subsystem in
pedestal, 120 V/240 V

SZ106-RA/RB

SCSI 42-Gbyte (formatted) VAXBI tape subsystem in pedestal
with CI controller, 120 V/240 V

SF106-AA/AB

DSSI 42-Gbyte (formatted) cartridge loader tape subsystem
with pedestal, 120 V/240 V

SF106-AC/AD

SF106-AA with KFMSA-BA DSSI controller and CK-KFMSA-LJ,
120 V/240 V

SA106-AA/AB

TA867-AA with pedestal, 120 V/240 V

Note: All TA867 or SA106 CI tape options include a BC27V-25 7 .6-m (25-ft) STI
cable.
Notes:
1. Tape option includes KFMSA-BA XMI-DSSI controller.
2. Factory installed only, replaces TBK70-CA on VAX 6000
3. Field installed only.
4. Quantity discounted prices for distributor channel.
5. Tape option that includes KZBSA-CA BI-SCSI controller
6. All TA8x7 or SAlOx CI tape options include a BC27V-25 7.6-m (25-ft) cable.

Storage Devices

7.83

Tape Devices (Cartridge Subsystems)
Cables

DSSI Cables
CK-SF200-LM
CK-SF200-LP
CK-SFlOO-LM
CK-SFlOO-LP
CK-SF100-L3
CK-SF100-L4
CK-SF100-L5
CK-SF100-L6
BC21Q-3F
BC21Q-50
BC22Q-50

2.7-m (9-ft) for VAX 6000/7000/9000/10000
2.7-m (9-ft) for MicroVAX 3xxx/BA2xx- and BA4xx-based
VAX 4000
2.7-m (9-ft) for VAX 6000/7000/9000/10000
2.7-m (9-ft) for MicroVAX 3xxx/BA2xx- and BA4xx-based
VAX 4000
7 .6-m (25-ft) for VAX 6000/ 7000/ 9000/10000
2.7-m (9-ft) for MicroVAX 3xxx/ BA2xx- and BA4xx-based
VAX 4000
4.8-m (6-ft) for VAX 6000/7000/9000/10000
4.8-m (16-ft) for MicroVAX 3xxx/BA2xx- and BA4xx-based
VAX 4000
1.06-m (3.5-ft) daisychain cable
15.2-m (50-ft) for VAX 6000/7000/ 9000/ 10000
15.2-m (50-ft) for MicroVAX 3xxx/BA2xx- and BA4xx-based
VAX 4000

SCSI Cables
Select one of the following SCSI cables for:

BC56H-03
BC56H-06
BC56H-03

0.9-m (3-ft) 68-pin to 50-pin pos SCSI adapter cable assembly
1.8-m (6-ft) 68-pin to 50-pin pos SCSI adapter cable assembly
3.6-m (12-ft) 68-pin to 50-pin pos SCSI adapter cable assembly

DECsystem 5900/DECsystem 5000 Cables

BC09D-12

3.6-m (12-ft) SCSI cable, Champ/SCSI-2

MicroVAX 3100 Models lOe, 20e, 30, 40, and 80 Cables
BC06P-2F
BC06P-06
BC06P-09

76.2-cm (2.5 -ft) SCSI cable, TLZ04/RRD40/TZ85
1.8-m (6-ft) SCSI cable, TLZ04/RRD40/TZ85
2.7-m (9-ft) SCSI cable, TLZ04/RRD40/TZ85

Media

TK85K-01
TK85K-07
TK85K-AO
TK85-HC

Single tape cartridge for Tx800 cartridge tape subsystems
Seven tape cartridges for Tx800 cartridge tape subsystems
1008 tape cartridges for Tx800 cartridge tape subsystems
Head cleaning cartridge for Tx800 cartridge tape subsystems

Power Cords

The following power cords are required for supporting the Tx800 tabletop
option. Choose one for each 220/240-V option ordered. The 120-V power cord
is included with the Tx800 tabletop option unless another power cord is specified on the order.

BN19H-2E
BN19D-2E
BN19A-2E
BN19E-2E
BN19K-2E
BN19N-2E
BN19S-2E
BN18L-2E

7.84

Storage Devices

Australia/ New Zealand
Austria, Belgium, France, Germany, Finland, Holland, Norway,
Sweden, Portugal, Spain
U.K./Ireland
Switzerland
Denmark
Italy
India
Israel

Tape Devices (Cartridge Subsystems)
Configuration Notes

The tabletop TF86 and TF867 are supported with restrictions on any system
configuration that supports the TF85 and TF857. VMS V5 .4-2 is the earliest
version that provides full support for the TF85. The TF86/TF867 are supported
with restrictions in VMS V5 .3 and higher.

DSSI Configurations
The TF85/TF86 and TF867 /TF857 can be configured:
• As a field add-on in a tabletop box or storage array pedestal on VAXft 3000,
MicroVAX II, MicroVAX 3xxx, VAX 4000/6000/7000/ 9000/10000 systems.
·Together with the KFMSA-BA XMI-to-DSSI controller for VAX
6000/7000/9000/10000 systems using the tape value packages.
• As TF867 /TF857 magazine subsystems added to new or existing SF200/SF210
storage arrays and to Sx300/Sx400 DECarray cabinets.
· Share the TF86/TF867 investment across multiple hosts by implementing
multi-host DSSI VAXclusters.
· As daisychained storage devices with up to two tape drives able to be shared on
a single DSSI bus (using the BC21Q-3F cable).

SCSI Configurations
The tabletop TZ86/TZ85 and pedestal SZ106/SZ100 can be configured:
• As a field add-on in a tabletop box or storage array pedestal on most systems
that contain a SCSI-2 compliant interface port.
• Together with the KZBSA-CA BI-to-SCSI controller to provide a Tx800 family
tape solution for the VAXBI installed base.

HSC-Based Configurations
The TA857 /TA867 or SA106/ SA100 can be configured:
• As a field add-on mounted as a full-rack configuration into an SA300 or SA900
cabinet (TA857 or TA867-AA/AB).
• As a field add-on pedestal option for all CI VAXcluster systems.
• Interfaced onto any HSC configuration-HSC40/50/60/70/ 90.

Storage Devices

7.85

Tape Devices (Cartridge Subsystems)

Tx800 Family

Performance

Data transfer rate (formatted)

0.8 Mbyte/second

Read/write speed

100 in.ls, streaming

Tran sfer rate, raw

1.1 Mbytes/ s

Sustained transfer rate, user data
On DSSI bus
On SCSI-2 bus
On SCSI-2 bus with Infoserver
On HSC
Peak transfer rate
On DSSI bus
On SCSI-2 bus
On HSC
Repositioning time
Access time (with tape mark)
Cartridge load/ unload cycle time
with loader

0.706 Kbyte/second
0.600 Kbyte/second
0.200 Kbyte/second
0.550 Kbyte/second
4.0 Mbytes/ s (synchronous mode)
3.0 Mbytes/ second (average)
1.2 Mbytes/ second
1.3 seconds typical
3 minutes maximum
1.5 minutes average
38 seconds typical

Data Organization

Recording format
Recording density
Recording method
Track density
Read-write head
Record size
Tx85 maximum capacity
Tx857 maximum capacity

48-track serial serpentine fixed block
42,500 bits/inch
MFM, bit serial data
96 tracks per inch
Two-channel ferrite, servo-controlled
Variable up to (64 Kbyte-1 byte) ,
4-Kbyte blocking factor
2.6 Gbytes (formatted)
18.2 Gbytes (formatted)

Supported Interfaces

Tx85/Tx86

DSSI
SCSI-2
HSC

TF85, TF857, SFlOO, TF86, TF867, SF106
TZ85, TZ857, SZlOO, TF867 , SZ106
TA857, SAlOO, TA867, SA106

Physical Characteristics

Drive Only

Bezel

Total

Width

14.5 cm
(5.7 in.)
11.3 cm
(4.5 in.)
22.9 cm
(9.0 in.)
3.2 kg (7 lb)

14.9 cm
(5.87 in.)
8.6 cm
(3.4 in.)
1.5 cm
(0.6 in.)

14.9 cm
(5.8 in.)
11.3 cm
(4.5 in.)
24.4 cm
(9.6 in.)

Height (with controller mounted)
Length (from back of bezel)
Weight
Power Requirements

Voltage
Power consumption
Dissipation (maximum watts x 3 .41)
Line type

Tx85/Tx86 Tabletop

+5 V, +12 V, de only
56.37 watts maximum , 29.74 watts typical,
35 watts average
192 Btu's
Molex 5129-4A

Physical Characteristics

Height
Width
Length
Weight (box only)
Weight (box with drive)

14.52 cm (5.72 in.)
23.49 cm (9.25 in.)
33.22 cm (13.08 in.)
10 pounds , 1.5 ozs
16 pounds, 15 ozs

Power Requirements

Nominal voltage
Minimum voltage
Maximum voltage
Power consumption
Dissipation (maximum watts x 3 .41)
Line type

7.86

Storage Devices

120 Vac/ 230 Vac
90 Vac/180 Vac
135 Vac/270 Vac
56.37 watts maximum, 29.74 watts typical,
35 watts average
192 Btu's
Single-phase AC, NEMA#515, IEC#320

Tape Devices (Cartridge Subsystems)
Tx857/Tx867

Physical Characteristics

Height
Width
Length
Weight

2.65 cm (10.42 in.)
22.2 cm (8.74 in.)
64.7 cm (25.50 in.)
25 kg (55 lb)

Power Requirements

Nominal voltage
Minimum voltage
Maximum voltage
Power consumption
Dissipation (maximum watts x 3.41)
Line type

Sx100/Sx106

120 Vac/230 Vac
90 Vac/180 Vac
135 Vac/270 Vac
83 .5 watts maximum, 82 watts typical
285 BTU's
Single-phase, ac, NEMA#515, IEC#320

Physical Characteristics

Height
Width
Length
Weight (box only)
Weight (box with Tx857)
Weight (box with Tx857 and Sx72)

68.6 cm (27 in.)
45.7 (18 in.)
86.4 cm (34 in.)
72.7 cm (160 lb)
102.2 kg (225 lb)
111.8 kg (246 lb)

Power Requirements

Nominal voltage
Minimum voltage
Maximum voltage
Power consumption
Dissipation (maximum watts x 3.41)
Line type

Cartridge

Magazine

120 Vac/230 Vac
90 Vac/180 Vac
135 Vac/ 270 Vac
83 .5 watts maximum, 82 watts typical
285 BTU's
Single-phase ac, NEMA#515, IEC#320

Physical Characteristics

Width
Height
Length
Weight

10.5 cm (4.15 in.)
2.54 cm (1.0 in.)
11.3 cm (4.165 in.)
8 ozs

Tape
Length
Cartridge
Durability, magazine
Durability, cartridge
Compatibility

0.53-mil thick, 0.5-inch metal powder
361.5 m (1186 ft) of usable tape
Digital-designed CompacTape III
10,000 insertions
20,000 passes
TK50-K (TZ30,TK50), TK52-K (TK70) and
TK85K

Physical Characteristics

Width
Height
Length
Weight (empty)
(fully loaded)

13.25 cm (5.217 in.)
21.89 cm (8.622 in.)
11.8 cm (4.646 in.)
0.59 cm (1.3 lb)
2.04 cm (4.5 lb)

Storage Devices

7.87

Tape Devices
TA91 Cartridge Tape Subsystem
The TA91 cartridge tape subsystem is the third member of the TA90 family of
high-performance, IBM 3480/3490-compatible, tape storage subsystems for large
computer systems. It replaces the TA90 and the TA90E subsystems.
The TA91 master tape subsystem cabinet holds one controller and either one or
two tape drives. Slave drives may be added in two-drive increments, up to a
maximum of eight drives attached to single controller. Slave drives are also
packaged in 1.75-meter (69-inch) high cabinets.
The TA91 drive uses a standard 3480-compatible cartridge (200-Mbyte capacity)
in an automatic six-cartridge stack loader. Improved Data Recording Capability
(IDRC), a standard feature of the TA91 subsystem, increases the cartridge capacity two to four times. Improved capacity significantly increases the amount of
data that can be backed up before an operator needs to reload the drive,
improving backup efficiency. With IDRC enabled, a dual drive master can provide up to 9.6 Gbytes of unattended backup.
On VAXclusters, the TA91 subsystem connects to the HSC40/HSC50/HSC70 hierarchical storage controllers using the HSC5X-DA channel card, it connects to the
KDM70 for use on single VAX 6000 and VAX 9000 systems.
Features

· 1.75-meter (69-inch) high cabinet with elevated swivel display for high visibility
• Dual-drive configuration has a 27 percent smaller footprint than the TA90 and
TA90E subsystems
• 200 Mbytes per cartridge capacity, increases up to 800 Mbytes with IDRC
depending upon type of dat~ and application
· Full read/write compatibility with IBM 3480/3490 devices
· Full read/write compatibility with TA90 and TA90E devices
·Maximum data transfer rate: 2.6 Mbytes/second
· Rewind time: 48 seconds per cartridge
· Record density: 38,000 bits/inch
• Maximum configuration: two TA91 control units (masters) and 12 transport units
per HSC or KDM70

Ordering Information

7.88

Storage Devices

Note: TA91 enclosure is a 1.75-meter (69-inch) high cabinet.

TA91-AA/AB

Single-drive master tape unit with one controller and one
drive, IDRC, one loader, and two BC27V-25 external cables.
3480-compatible. Connects to HSC or KDM70 controller.
200/208 V, 60 Hz/230/240 V, 50 Hz

TA91-BA/BB

Dual-drive master tape unit with one controller and two drives,
IDRC, two loaders, and four BC27V-25 cables. 3480-compatible.
Connects to HSC or KDM70 controller. 200/208 V, 60 Hz/
230/240 V, 50 Hz.

TA91U-DA

Upgrade kit converts a single drive master (TA9 l -AA/AB) to a
dual-drive master (TA91-BA/BB) . Includes loader, two
BC27V-25 external cables. 50/60 Hz.

TU91-BA

Dual-drive slave unit for use with TA91-BA. Includes two slave
drives with loaders; expandable to a TU91-DA. 200/208 V,
60 Hz.

TU91-BB

Same as above except for use with TA91 -BB. Expandable to
TU91-DB. 230/240 V, 50 Hz.

Tape Devices
Ordering Information
(Continued)

TU91-CA

Dual-drive slave unit for use with TA91-AA. Includes two slave
drives with loaders, and two BC27V-25 external cables; expandable to a TU91-DA. 200/208 V, 60 Hz.

TU91-CB

Same as above except for use with TA91-AB. Expandable to
TU91-DB, 230/240 V, 50 Hz

TU91-DA

Four-drive slave unit for use with TA91-BA. Includes four slave
drives with loaders, 200/208 V, 60 Hz.

TU91-DB

Same as above except for use with TA91-BB, 230/240 V, 50 Hz

TU91-EA

Four-drive slave unit for use with TA91-AA. Includes four slave
drives with loaders, two BC27V-25 external cables, 200/208 V,
60 Hz

TU91-EB

Same as above except for use with TA91-AB; 230/240 V 50 Hz

TU91U-DA

Upgrade kit converts a dual drive slave unit (TU91-BA or
TU91-CA) to a four-drive slave unit (TU91-DA), 200/208 V,
60 Hz

TU91U-DB

Same as above except converts TU91-BB or TU91-CB to
TU91-DB, 230/240 V, 50 Hz

Note: Products required for TA91 installation include one HSC5X-DA controller
card for HSC40/50/70, VMS V5.4-2, HSC code V5.0A for HSC 40/70, HSC code
V4.0 for HSC 50 and ULTRIX V4.2 and Russell Stoll 3754 receptacle. KDM70
required for direct connection of VAX 6000 or VAX 9000.

The TU90 dual-drive slave unit can be connected to either a TA90 or TA90E
master subsystem. It allows customers who have existing TA90 or TA90E tape
subsystems to add capacity while maintaining their current skyline. As many as
three additional TU90 dual-drive store units can be connected to a single
TA90/TA90E master subsystem.
Features
· Full IBM 3480 read/write compatibility
·Maximum data transfer rate: 2.6 Mbytes/ second
· Rewind time: 48 seconds per cartridge
· Record density: 38,000 bits/inch
· Optional ·6-cartridge automatic stack loader
• High reliability and high data integrity

Ordering Information

Maximum configuration is two TA90 control units (masters) and six dual-drive
TU90 slaves.
TU90-AA/AB
TU90-BA/BB
TA90-FL
TA90K-30
TA90K-HC

Dual-drive slave cabinet, for use with TA90, 60 Hz/50 Hz
Dual-drive slave cabinet, with loaders, 60-Hz/50-Hz
Cartridge loader option
TA90 media (30 cartridges)
TA90 head cleaning cartridge (5)

Storage Devices

7.89

Tape Devices
TA90E Tape Subsystem Upgrade Kit
The TA90E master consists of one controller and two drive transports. TA90E
combines the TA90 tape subsystem with an Improved Data Recording Capability
(IDRC) feature. This feature increases the effective capacity of a TA90K cartridge
so that more data may be backed up before an operator needs to reload the
drive. Space required to store TA90 cartridges may also decrease as well as the
number of mounts/ dismounts on the drive, lowering the overall amount of time
needed to complete backup.
TA90E and TA90 are read/write compatible except that cartridges written on the
TA90E in IDRC mode may only be read on a TA90E or on an IBM 3480/3490
drive with IDRC. IDRC can be switched off so that a TA90E can be read/write
compatible with a TA90 or IBM 3480/3490 subsystem that does not have IDRC.
Each TA90E dual drive subsystem is available with automatic stack loaders that
hold six cartridges per loader. When upgrading to TA90E, only the master, or
tape control unit, must be upgraded. All drives connected to an upgraded control unit can take advantage of the TA90E's capacity improvement.
The TA90E tape drive requires HSC software V5.0A to connect to the HSC40
and the HSC70. TA90E requires HSC software V4.0 to connect to and deliver
full functionality on the HSC50. TA90E also requires VMS V5.3-2 or higher.
Features

• Two to four times increase in effective cartridge capacity, depending on data
type and application
·Maximum data transfer rate: 2.6 Mbytes/second
· Record density: 38,000 bits/inch
· Maximum configuration: two TA90E control units (masters) and 12 additional
transport units per HSC or KDM70

Ordering Information

TA90E-UG

Upgrade kit to convert TA90 to TA90E; one per dual-drive
master

Note: Products required for TA90E installation include one HSC5X-DA K.SI con-

troller card for HSC40/50/70, V5 .0A HSC code for HSC40/70, V4.0 HSC code
for HSC50. VMS 5.3-2, or higher, and a Russell Stoll 3754 receptacle. KDM70
required for direct connection to a VAX 6000 or VAX 9000 system.

VAX Jo StorageTek 444 ACS Interconnect
VAX VMS to StorageTek connectivity products provide the ability to connect
VAXclusters via an HSC, or VAXs via an XMI bus to the Storage Technology
4400 Automated Cartridge System (ACS), a high-availability automated tape
library for IBM 3480 compatible cartridges. The ACS is a collection of up to 16
interconnected Library Storage Modules, each of which contains up to 6,000
cartridges at 200-Mbyte storage capacity per cartridge, providing access to up to
19,200 Gbytes (19.2 Terabytes) of near on-line storage. The 4400 ACS uses
robotics and an optical scanning system to quickly and accurately locate and
mount tape cartridges.

7.90

Storage Devices

Tape Devices
VAX to Sto),'ageTek 444 ACS
Interconnect (Continued)

There are two ways to connect the StorageTek 4400 ACS to a VAX environment:
• The TC44 offers a connection through an HSC. This option is preferred by users
accustomed to the features of a VAXcluster environment. HSC connected
resources are shared equally across all CPUs in a VAXcluster.
· The KCM44 provides a direct connection to a VAX via the XMI bus. It offers
maximum performance at 4.5-Mbyte-per-second burst rate, and supports
dynamic sharing of tape drives within the ACS with other Digital and non-Digital
hosts.

In both cases, DCSC software communicates over the Ethernet via TCP/IP to the
4400 ACS Library Server to manage the allocation of tape cartridges and drives.
Features
· Provides fast, automated access to tapes for unattended backup
· Provides access to 19.2 Terabytes or more of near on-line storage capacity
• Uses industry-standard IBM 3480/3 490 tape cartridges
· Supported in a mixed CPU vendor environment

Prerequisites

Hardware
• StorageTek 4400 ACS components must be purchased separately
·For TC44 connection: HSC and two HSC5X-DA cards
• For KCM44 connection: two adjacent slots in an XMI backplane (restrictions
apply)
Software
· VMS V5.4-2 or later-if tape units under control of a KCM44 are to be served to
the cluster, VMS V5 .5 or later is required
· VMS ULTRIX Connection (for TCPIIP) Vl.3 required for DCSC Control Path
- DCSC Software Version 1.1
- For TC44 connection: HSC software V5 .OF or higher
Note: These products are available by custom quote only. For additional information, contact the EIC Sales Support Center at 800-832-6277 or 603 -884-8990.

'EKZ60 Cartric}e 'Fape Drive
The TKZ60 is a third-party vendor labeled product that provides data interchange capability for VAX.stations and DECsystems/DECstations via a SCSI interface and for VAX VMS Q-bus systems via an optional KZQSA. The TKZ60 is also
available on all VAX 6000 systems with a VAXBI/XMI adapter (DWMBB) .
This product is designed to meet the needs of customers who are currently using
TA90 and IBM 3480 compatible media on other platforms within their business
environment and have a requirement to exchange data between these platforms
and their VAX workstations, DECsystems/DECstations Q-bus systems and VAXBI
systems.
This cartridge tape drive uses the same 200-Mbyte tape cartridges as the TA90
and IBM 3480 drives. It is also compatible with STK 4480, Fujitsu M2480, and
other 3480 format drives. It can be purchased with or without a sequential
loader, providing an unattended capacity of 1 Gbyte with a 5-cartridge magazine,
or 2 Gbytes with a 10-cartridge magazine.
The drive provides full 18-track, parallel recording with a thin-film head. The
IBM IDRC compaction/ compression algorithm, which is used to increase capacity
in the TA90E and TA91 , is not available for this SCSI/Q-bus drive at this time.

Storage Devices

7.91

Tape Devices
TKZ60 Cartridge Tape Drive
(Continued)

Features

• Compact size-13.3 cm (5.25 in.) high x 21.7 cm (8.55 in.) wide x 54 cm
(21.25 in.) deep
· Tabletop and rackmountable versions
· Available with or without sequential cartridge loader
• 5-slot and 10-slot cartridge magazines available
Note: This product is available by custom quote only. For additional information, contact the EiC Sales Support Center at 800-832-6277 or 603-884-8990.

TK70 Cartridge Tape Drives
The TK70, designed for use on VAX, Micro VAX, and DECsystem computer systems, is used for disk backup, software distribution, data collection, and data
interchange between microsystems.
The subsystem consists of a tape drive (5.25-inch form factor), the dual-height
Q-bus controller, and cables. Power supply and cabinetry are supplied by the
system box in which the TK70 is mounted. The TK70 is not available in desktop
or rackmount packages. The subsystem uses the CompacTape II cartridge
(TK52-K), an enhanced version of the CompacTape cartridge. TK52-K cartridges
should be used only with TK70 drives; TK50 users should continue to order
TK50-K cartridges. Because the TK70 can read (but not write) TK50 formatted
data, libraries of older cartridges can be read on the subsystem. Digital will
continue to distribute software on TK50-K cartridges for both TK50 and TK70
subsystems.
Features

• Read/write speed: 100 inches/second, streaming
• Peak transfer rate: Total: 125 Kbytes/second, user data: 90 Kbytes/second
·Record size: Variable to (64 Kbytes minus 1 byte)
• Maximum capacity: 296 Mbytes (formatted)

Ordering Information

{I)

Controller and drive must be ordered separately (except for TF70C-JA).
TQK70-AA

TK70 controller and 76-cm (30-inch) cable for BA23.

TQK70-BA

TK70 controller and 76-cm (30-inch) cable for BA123.

TQK70-SA/SF

TK70 controller, 76-cm (30-inch) cable, and filler panel for
BA2xx, BA4xx, and B400X; factory/field installed.

TK70-AA

TK70 drive for BA23 and BA123 (MicroVAX II), requires
TQK70-AAIBA controller.

TK70E-AA/AF

TK70 drive for BA4xx and B400X. Requires TQK70;
factory/field installed.

TK70E-SA/SF

TK70 drive for BA2xx systems and expansion pedestals;
factory/field installed. Requires TQK70.

TF70C-AA

TK70 drive in removable canister. Includes controller. For
VAXft Model 610/612 systems.

TF70C-JA

TK7 0 drive in removable canister for VAXft Models 310/410
systems. Includes controller.

TF70C-RA

TK70 drive for VAX.ft Model 110. Includes controller.

TK52-K

CompacTape II cartridge (296-Mbyte capacity).

~
CJ

Cf)

....0

7.92

Storage Devices

Tape Devices
Configuring Information

Specifications

J/O Panel
Insert Size

Watts
Drawn

Bus Loads
Drawn
ac

2.4

35 .8

NIA

1.5

2.4

36.30

NIA

1.5

2.4

36.30

NIA

TQK70-AA

Dual module

3.5

NIA

17.5

2.0

1.0

l(A)

TQK70-BA

Dual module

3.5

NIA

17.5

2.0

1.0

l(A)

TQK70-SA/SF

Dual module

3.5

NIA

17.5

4.3

0.5

NIA

Option

Mounting
Requirements

TK70-AA

NIA

1.4

TK70E-AAIAF

NIA

TK70E-SAISF

de Amps@

Physical Characteristics

Height
Width
Depth
Weight without cartridge

Without Bezel

With Bezel

8.2 cm (3 .23 in.)
14.5 cm (5.70 in.)
21.4 cm (8.44 in.)

8.6 cm (3.38 in.)
14.9 cm (5.88 in.)
0.9 cm (0.35 in.)
2.3 kg (5.0 lb)

TK50 Cartridge Tape Drives
The TK50 combines high reliability and data integrity with innovative, simplified
streaming design. Its 95-Mbyte capacity makes it an ideal backup device for any
of Digital's mini-Winchester disks. It fits into enclosures designed for 5.25-inch
form factor storage devices. The CompacTape cartridge is a distribution medium
for Digital's VAX software products, and the cartridge's capacity, small size, and
ruggedness make it ideal for OEMs and end users who want to transport their
own software or data.
Features
· Read/write speed: 75 inches/second, streaming
• Peak transfer rate: Total: 62.5 Kbytes/second, user data: 45 Kbytes/second
· Record size: Variable to (64 Kbytes - 1 byte)
· Maximum capacity: 95 Mbytes (formatted)

Ordering Information

All TK50 drives include a TK50-K cartridge.

TK50-AA

TK50 5.25-inch tape drive, 120 V (desktop model-no cables).

TK50-DA

TK50 in desktop unit, 120 V, includes 2.7 -meter (9-foot) cable
(BC06P-09).

TK50-DB

Same as above except 240 V; requires a country-specific power
cord.

TK50-RA

TK50 in rackmount unit, 120 V, includes 2.7-meter (9-foot)
cable (BC06P-09); Requires H9302-00 rackmount installation kit

TK50-RB

Same as above except 240 V; requires a country-specific power
cord.

TK50E-AAIAF

TK50 drive for BA4xx-series systems and expansion
pedestals; factory/field installed.

TK50E-SAISF

TK50 for BA2xx-series systems and expansion pedestals;
factory/field installed.

Storage Devices

7.93

Tape Devices
Q-bus Controllers

TQK50-AA

Controller for TK50-AA. Includes 76.2-cm (30-inch) cable for
BA23.

TQK50-BA

Controller for TK50-AA. Includes 76.2-cm (30-inch) cable for
BA123.

TQK50-AB

Controller for TK50-Dx/Rx. Includes 35 .6-cm (14-inch) cable
and distribution insert for BA23.

TQK50-BB

Controller for TK50-Dx/Rx. Includes 53.3-cm (21-inch) cable
and distribution insert for BA123 or BAll -M.

TQK50-CB

Controller for TK50-Dx/Rx. Includes 91.44-cm (36-inch) cable
and bulkhead plate for H3490.

TQK50-PB

Controller for TK50-Dx/Rx. Includes 76.2-cm (30-inch) cable
and bulkhead plate for H3490.

TQK50-RB

Controller for TK50-Dx/Rx. Includes 3 .05-m ( 120-inch) cable
and bulkhead plate for non-FCC-compliant cabinets.

TQK50-SA/SF

Controller for TK50E-SA/AA. Includes 91.44-cm (36-inch)
cable; factory/field installed.

SCSI Subsystem

TK50Z-GA/G3

SCSI subsystem, TK50 controller expander box, 120 V/240 V for
DECsystem 5100, VAXstation 3100, and MicroVAX 3100 systems.

Cartridge

TK50-K

CompacTape cartridge, 95-Mbyte capacity.

Power Cords

220/ 240-V devices require a power cord.
BN19A-2E
BN19D-2E

U.K./Ireland
Austria, Belgium, Finland, France, Germany, Holland,
Norway, Portugal, Spain, Sweden
Switzerland
Denmark
Italy
Israel

BN19E-2E
BN19K-2E
BN19N-2E
BN19U-2E

Configuring Information
Option

Specifications

Mounting
Requirements

Storage Devices

Bus Loads
Drawn
ac

I/O Panel
Insert Size

TK50-AA

NIA

1.4

2.4

35 .8

0.0

NIA

TK50-DA

NIA

0.0

NIA

TK50-RA

NIA

0.0

NIA

TQK50

Dual module

2 .9

0.0

14.5

2.8

0.5

l(A)

TUK50

Quad module

3.0

0.0

4.2

0.5

l(A)

Physical Characteristics

Height
Width
Depth
Weight without cartridge

7. 94

Watts
Drawn

de Amps@

Without Bezel

With Bezel

8.2 cm (3 .23 in.)
14.5 cm (5.70 in.)
21.4 cm (8.44 in. )

8.6 cm (3.38 in.)
14.9 cm (5.88 in.)
0.9 cm (0.35 in.)
2.3 kg (5.0 lb)

Tape Devices
TZJO Cartridge Tape Drive (SCSI)
The TZ30, a member of the TK family, is a 95-Mbyte streaming cartridge tape
drive with embedded SCSI controller in a 5.25-inch, half-height, industry-standard
form factor. It is designed for use as a software distribution and backup device on
DECsystem 5100, MicroVAX 3100, VAXstation 4000, and VAXstation 3100 systems. The TZ30 is read/ write compatible with the TK50. This feature allows software interchange within the entire range of Digital systems. The TZ30 includes
design changes incorporated on the TK50 and TK70, such as the simplified front
panel.
Features

· 95-Mbyte formatted capacity
• 62.5-Kbyte/ second transfer rate
· Operator interface similar to TK70 front panel
· Embedded SCSI interface

Ordering Information

Note: TZ30s are 95-Mbyte half-height cartridge tape drives.

TZ30-EG/EF

TZ30 with integral SCSI interface for MicroVAX 3100,
DECsystem 5100, and VAXstation 3100 Models 40/ 48;
includes TK50-K cartridge; factory/field installed

TZ30-EJ/EH

TZ30 for VAXstation 3100 Models 30/ 38 systems; factory/
field installed

TZ30-EK/EL

TZ30 for MicroVAX 3100 Models 30/ 40/ 80/ 90; factory/field
installed

TZ30-EM/EN

TZ30 for DECsystem 5900; factory/field installed

TZ30-UK

Upgrade for SZ16 expansion box

TZ30-UL

Upgrade for SZ12 expansion box

TLZ06 4-mm DAT Tape Drive (SCSI)
The TLZ06 tape drive is a 4-mm Digital Audio Tape (DAT) drive with a capacity
of 4.0 Gbytes (with data compression) per cartridge and a SCSI-2 interface. At a
lower price, this new drive is smaller, faster, and has a higher capacity than its
predecessor, the TLZ04 tape drive.
The TLZ06 tape drive has a sustained transfer rate of 366 Kbytes/ s in data
compression mode for a typical backup of 1 Gbyte/hour. To provide for flexible
configurations it is offered as an embedded device, in a slim 3.5-inch form factor
or a 5.25-inch, half-height form factor. It is also offered in a standalone tabletop
enclosure and in the SZ16 expansion box.
This second-generation DAT drive uses four direct-drive motors and a helical-scan, read-after-write recording technique to provide reliable data recording,
with or without data compression (DC) , on 60- or 90-meter data cassettes. The
Digital Data Storage (DDS) recording format implements 10 distinct errorhandling techniques, including three levels of error correction code (ECC) to
ensure superlative data reliability.
The high 4.0-Gbyte capacity of the TLZ06 tape drive is achieved by a combination of a 90-meter cassette and typical 2x data compression. These features,
combined with the Digital Data Storage recording formats (DDS-DC) , ensure that
interchangeability is retained as capacity increases. DDS-labeled media is required
to ensure the highest data integrity during read/ write operations.

Storage Devices

7.95

Tape Devices
Data compression is software selectable on the TLZ06 tape drive and can be
turned off to read and write to 60-meter DAT tapes for interchange with the
TLZ04 tape drive. However, it is important to remember that data compressed
and recorded on 60-meter DAT cassettes by the TLZ06 drive cannot be read by
the TLZ04 drive. The TLZ04 will not handle 90-meter DAT cartridges.
Features
· 366-Kbyte/s peak transfer rate (with data compression) for an unattended
backup rate of 1-Gbyte/hour
• Q -bus compatible with KZQSA adapter
• VAXBI compatible with KZBSA adapter
• Supported on VMS V5.5-1, ULTRIX V4.2C, and SCO UNIX V3.2.4
• Read and write compatible with TLZ04
• Industry-standard DDS and DDS-DC formats for industry-wide data interchange

Ordering Information
System

Factory
Installed
(Embedded)

Field
Installed
(Embedded)

Tabletop

MicroVAX 3100 Model 1Oe

NIA

TLZ06-FA

MicroVAX 3100
Models 30140180190

TLZ06-HF

TLZ06-HG

TLZ06-FA

VAX 4000 Model 100

TLZ06-HF

TLZ06-HG

TLZ06-GA

VAX 4000 Models
2001300140015001600 1

NIA

TLZ06-GA

MicroVAX II and 3xxx 1

NIA
NIA

TLZ06-GA

VAx.station 4000 VLC

NIA
NIA

TLZ06-FA

VAx.station 4000 Model 60190

TLZ06-GF

TLZ06-GG

TLZ06-FA

DECsystem 5100

TLZ06-FF

TLZ06-FG

TLZ06-FA

DECsystem 5500

NIA

TLZ06-GA

DECsystem 5900

TLZ06-LF

TLZ06-LG

TLZ06-FA

DECstation 5000 Models 20125133 NIA

NIA

DECstation 5000
Models 12011251133

TLZ06-FM

TLZ06-FL

TLZ06-FA

DECstation 5000 Models 2001240

NIA
NIA

TLZ06-FA

VAX 6000/VAX 8xxx

NIA
NIA

applicationDEC 400xP

PS20R-LA

TLZ06-FA

applicationDEC 433MP

TLZ06-EF

TLZ06-EG

TLZ06-FA

TLZ06-RA2

Requires KZQSA adapter.
2
Includes KZBSA adapter.

Notes: One media and cleaning cartridge included with all models. See SZ16
expansion box in this chapter for TLZ06 expansion box configurations and
ordering information.
Accessories and Supplies

KZQSA Adapter

7.96

Storage Devices

TLZ04-HA
TLZ06-CB

Cleaning cartridge for TLZ04 and TLZ06
Five-pack of 9-m data cartridges

KZQSA-AA
KZQSA-BA
KZQSA-CA
KZQSA-SA/SF

TLZ06 adapter for BA23 MicroVAX II systems
TLZ06 adapter for BA123 MicroVAX II systems
TLZ06 adapter for DECsystem 5500 system (optional)
TLZ06 adapter for BA200/BA400 MicroVAX 3000 and VAX
4000 systems; factory/field installed

Tape Devices
Power Cords

240-V devices require a country-specific power cord.

BN19A-2E
BN19C-2E
BN19E-2E
BN19H-2E
BN19K-2E
BN19M-2E
BN19S-2E
BN18U-2E

Specifications

U.K./Ireland
Austria, Belgium, Finland, France, Germany, Holland, Norway,
Portugal, Spain, Sweden
Switzerland
Australia/ New Zealand
Denmark
Italy
India
Israel

Physical Characteristics

Height
Width
Depth
Weight

3.5-lnch
Embedded

5.25-Inch
Embedded

Tabletop

4.1 cm (1.6 in.)
10.1 cm (4.0 in.)
15.2 cm (6.0 in.)
0.9 kg (2.0 lb )

4.1 cm (1.6 in.)
14.6 cm (5.7 in.)
18.0 cm (7 .1 in.)
1.1 kg (2.4 lb)

8.6 cm (3 .4 in.)
13.5 cm (5.3 in.)
23.6 cm (9.3 in.)
2.4 kg (5.2 lb)

The TKZ08 is an 8-millimeter helical scan tape drive with SCSI interface for data
backup, storage and data interchange that uses an Exabyte tape drive. It comes
in a tabletop enclosure and provides the ability to record up to 2.2 Gbytes of
formatted data per cartridge, using the helical scan recording techniques. The
drive's raw transfer rate is 246 Kbytes per second. The TKZ08 is supported on
DECstation 3100, DECstation 2100, DECstation 5000 Models 120/125, Model
200, DECsystem 5100 and 5500 systems. It is supported by ULTRIX V3.ld/
V4.0/ 4.1/4.2. It is available in the U.S. only.

Note: The TKZ08 is the Mountain Network Solutions, Inc. FileSafe 2100D. The
drive will remain third-party vendor labeled and is packaged with vendor documentation. Supports single tape operations of 2.2 Gbytes or less.
Features
• Tabletop enclosure
· Capacity per tape cassette: 2.2 Gbytes
· Raw data transfer rate: 246 Kbytes/second
· Read/ write speed: 150 inches/second (effective tape to head speed)

Ordering Information

TKZ08-AA

2.2-Gbyte cartridge tape drive in tabletop enclosure; 50-50 pin
connecting cable for daisy chaining; includes one data cartridge, one cleaning cartridge, and 120-V power cord.

TKZ8X-CB

Boxed five-pack of 2.2-Gbyte data cartridge tapes.

Note: For additional information, call the EiC Sales Support Center at
800-832-6277 or 603 -884-8990.

Storage Devices

7.97

Tape Devices

The TKZ09 is an Exabyte 8-mm helical scan tape drive with SCSI interface for
unattended backup, storage, and data interchange. It provides the ability to
record up to 5 Gbytes of formatted data per cartridge. It has a sustained transfer
rate of up to 500 Kbytes/second. The TKZ09 can write to cartridges in 2-Gbyte
format or in 5-Gbyte format, providing read and write compatibility with
2-Gbyte 8-mm cartridge drives, including the TKZ08 and TLZ08.
The TKZ09 is offered as a tabletop device supporting direct SCSI VMS systems:
VAXstation 4000 Models 60 and VLC, VAXstation 3100 Models 30, 38, 40, 48,
76 and MicroVAX 3100 Models lOe, 30, 40 and 80.
The TKZ09 can also be mounted in a 5.25-inch slot in the Mass Storage Drawer
(MASA) of the DECsystem 5900 cabinet. A field-installable version is also available for existing DECsystem 5900 systems.
Features

• Capacity per cartridge: 5 Gbytes formatted
· Raw data transfer rate: 500 Kbytes/s sustained, 4 Mbytes/s burst
· Read/write compatibility: EXB-8500 and EXB-8200

Prerequisite Software

• VMS V5 .5 and later
·ULTRIX V4.2C

Note: The TKZ09 is available by custom quote only. For additional information,
contact the EIC Sales Support Center at 800-832-6277 or 603 -884-8990.

TLZ08 Helical S~an Tape .'Drjve (SCSI)
The TLZ08 is an 8-millimeter helical scan tape drive with SCSI interface for data
backup, storage, and data interchange. It is based on the Exabyte 8200 tape
drive and supports single tape operations. For systems with a VAXBI bus, a
VAXBI-to-SCSI adapter for tape drives is included. For Q-bus systems, a KZQSA
adapter is required.
Features

• Tabletop or rackmount enclosure
· Dual 16-character status display
• Single- or dual-drive capflbility
• Capacity per tape cassette: 2.2 Gbytes
· Peak data transfer rate: 246 Kbytes/s

Prerequisites

Hardware

· For VAXBI, one available VAXBI slot
· For Q-bus, a KZQSA adapter
Software

·VAX VMS V5.3-2 or later
• VAX ULTRIX V4.2 or later
Note: These products are available by custom quote only. For additional information, contact the EIC Sales Support Center at 800-832-6277 or 603-884-8990.

7.98

Storage Devices

Tape Devices
) Tape Drive (S'CSI)

ru...&........,;;;._

The TZKlO tape drive is an industry-standard quarter-inch cartridge (QIC)
streaming tape device, with a capacity of up to 525 Mbytes. It uses a 5.25-inch,
half-height form factor. Used for backup and data interchange, the TZKlO can
read and write according to the following tables. The TZKlO tape drive is used
for backup and data interchange.

Cartridge

System

Capacity

Format

Read

Write

DC6525

ULTRIX, VMS

Up to 525 Mbytes

QIC 525

DC6320

x
x
x
x
x

x
x
x
x

ULTRIX, VMS

Up to 320 Mbytes

QIC 320

DC6150 or DC600XTD

ULTRIX

Up to 150 Mbytes

QIC 150

DC6150 or DC600XTD

ULTRIX

Up to 120 Mbytes

QIC 120

DC600A

ULTRIX

Up to 60 Mbytes

QIC 24

Features

• Both 320-Mbyte and 525-Mbyte (formatted) tape capacities
• 200-Kbyte/second transfer rate
• 5.25-inch half-height form factor
• Embedded and tabletop models
• Read/write speed: 120 inches/second streaming
· Supported interface: SCSI
• Supported in ULTRIX V4.1, VMS V5.4-2, and SCO UNIX

Ordering Information

Note: TZKlOs are 525-Mbyte QIC-tape-embedded drives.

TZKlO-FF/FG

TZKlO for DECsystem 5100 system and MicroVAXIVAXserver
3100 Models 10e/20e; factory/field installed. Note: MicroVAX
3100 Models 10e/20e ordered without factory-installed TZKlO
cannot have TZKlO insta1led at a later date.

TZKlO-EF/EG

TZKlO for applicationDEC 433MP; factory/field installed.

TZKlO-FM/FL

TZKlO for DECstation 5000 Models 125/133; factory/field
installed.

TZKlO-HF/HG

TZKlO for MicroVAX 3100 Models 30/40/80/90; VAX 4000
Model 100; factory/field installed.

TZKlO-LF/LG

TZKlO for DECsystem 5900; factory/field installed

TZKlO-GF/GG

TZKlO for VAXstation 4000 Model 60/90; factory/field installed.

PCXAT-AA

TZKlO for DECpc 433W, DECpc 433T, and DECstations
3xx/4xx running under SCO UNIX. Includes SCO UNIX
driver and documentation.

PCXAT-AB

TZKlO for DECpc 433W, DECpc 433T, and DECstations
3xx/4xx running under DOS. Includes DOS driver and
documentation.

PCXAT-AC

TZKlO for DECpc 433W, DECpc 433T, and DECstations
3 xx/4xx running under OS/2. Includes OS/2 driver and
documentation.

Notes: One media and one cleaning cartridge included in all models; also available in SZ12/SZ16 dual-drive expansion boxes.

Storage Devices

7.99

Tape Devices
Ordering Information
(Continued)
Accessories and Supplies

Specifications

TZKlX-HA
TZKlX-CB
TZKlX-CD

Physical Characteristics (embedded)
Height
Width
Depth
Weight

7.100 Storage Devices

TZKlO cleaning cartridge.
5-pack, 320-Mbyte QIC media cartridges (DC6320)
5-pack, 525-Mbyte QIC media cartridges (DC6525)

4.40 cm (1.75 in.)
15.00 cm (5.9 in.)
21.80 cm (8.6 in.)
1.1 kg (2.4 lb)

Tape Devices (Reel-to-Reel)

The TA79 tape subsystem is a rugged and reliable, autoloading high-performance
tape companion for systems with large amounts of disk storage. The TA79 is
packaged with its formatter in a single cabinet that is radially connected to the
HSC5X-CA or -DA interface in the HSC storage servers or to the KDM70 disk/
tape controller. For operation above 610 meters (2,000 feet), a high altitude kit
must be installed. Note that adding a TA79 requires minimum revision levels of
software and microcode.
Features
1111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111
1111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111

Ordering Information

• Read/ write speed: 125 inches/ second
·Maximum data transfer speed: 200 Kbytes/ second (phase encoded), 781 Kbytes/s
(Group Code Recording)
·Rewind speed: 440 inches/second
• Rewind time: 65 seconds per 731.5 m (2,400 ft)
· Number of tracks: 9 on 0.5 -inch magnetic tape
·Recording method: Group Code Recording (GCR) to ANSI X3.54-1976 and
phase encoded (PE) to ANSI X3.39-1973
• Record density: 6,250 bits/inch (GCR), and 1,600 bits/ inch (PE)
·Capacity: 145 Mbytes (GCR) , 40 Mbytes (PE)
· TA79 tapes per HSC5X-DA interface: four; per KDM70: two
· TU79 add-ons per TA79 tape: three

TA79-BF/BJ

High-density magnetic tape subsystem

Prerequisite: HSC40/50/70 with HSC5X-DA or KDM70
TU79-AF/AJ

TU79 add-on tape transport

TA78-UG

TU78 master to TA78 upgrade kit~'

TU79K-EA

Cabinet kit for adding TU79 to TA/TU78 string

TU79K-EB

Cabinet kit for adding TU78 to TA/TU79 string

;, All drive options include cables.

Specifications

Physical Characteristics
Height
Width
Depth
Weight

153 .0 cm (60.3 in.)
66.7 cm (26.3 in.)
76.2 cm (30.0 in.)
254.2 kg (560.0 lb)

Power Requirements
Current (ac amps)
Watts
Btu/ h

KJ/h
NEMA receptacle type
PCS+/PDS+ cable type
Number of phases

7.8
1500
5118
5399
L6-30R
BC26E (120/208)
BN29K (240/416)
1

Storage Devices

7.101

Tape Devices (Reel-to-Reel)
TA81 Magnetic Tape Subsystem
The TA81 is a low-cost, entry-level tape drive for VAXcluster systems. It is
packaged with its formatter in a single cabinet that is radially connected to the
HSC5X-CA or -DA interface or KDM70 disk/tape controller. It has one transport
per formatter, supporting four TA81 tapes per HSC5X-DA or HSC5X-CA and two
interfaces per KDM70. Unlike the TA79, the TA81 does not support slave
transports .
Features

el
Ordering Information

Specifications

· Read/ write speed: 75 and 25 inches/ second (streaming) , 25 inches/ second
(start/ stop)
· Maximum data transfer speed: 468 Kbytes/ second
·Rewind speed: 192 inches/ second
· Rewind time: 2.5 minutes per 731.5-m (2,400-ft) reel
· Number of tracks: 9 on 0.5-inch magnetic tape
·Recording method: Group Code Recording (GCR) to ANSI X3.54-1976 and
phase encoded (PE) to ANSI X3.39-1973
·Record density: 6,250 bits/ inch (GCR), and 1,600 bits/ inch (PE)
· Capacity: 145 Mbytes (GCR) , 40 Mbytes (PE)

TA81-AA/AB

TA81 magnetic tape subsystem; includes two SDI cables

TA81-UG

TU81 or TU81E to TA81 upgrade kit

Physical Characteristics

Height
Width
Depth
Weight

106.0 cm (41.6 in.)
54.0 cm (21.3 in.)
76.2 cm (30.0 in.)
106.0 kg (235.0 lb)

Power Requirements

Current (ac amps)
Watts
Btu/ h
NEMA receptacle type
IEC receptacle type
PCS+/ PDS+ cable type
Number of phases

5.2
500
1030
l5 -30R
BC24S (120/ 208); BN29K (240/ 416)
1

TU81-Plus Magnetic Tape Subsystem
The TU81-Plus is a high-density, industry-compatible, magnetic tape subsystem
for VAX 4000, MicroVAX 3300, DECsystem 5500, and VAX 6000 systems with
high-capacity disks. It includes a VAXBI, Q -bus, or UNIBUS compatible controller (one transport per controller) and a 256-Kbyte cache buffer that dramatically
increases its backup performance as compared to the TU81. An entry-level
Group Code Recording (GCR) drive, the TU81-Plus offers low cost of ownership
and high reliability.
Features

· Read/write speed:
75 and 25 in.ls (streaming),
25 in.ls (start/ stop)

• Recording method: Group Code
Recording to ANSI X3 .54-197 6 and
phase encoded (PE) to ANSI X3.39-1973

·Rewind speed: 192 in.ls

·Record density: 6,250 bits/in. (GCR) ,
and 1,600 bits/ in. (PE)

· Maximum data transfer speed:
468 Kbytes/ s
·Rewind time: 2.5 minutes per
731.5 m (2 ,400-ft) reel
·Number of tracks: nine on 0.5-inch
magnetic tape
7.102

Storage Devices

·Capacity: 145 Mbytes (GCR),
40 Mbytes (PE)
·Transports per controller: one

Tape Devices (Reel-to-Reel)
Ordering Information

TU81E-AA/AB

TU81-Plus with UNIBUS controller; 120-V/240-V

TU81E-BA/BB

TU81-Plus with VAXBI controller; 120-V/240-V

TU81E-DA/DB

TU81-Plus with Q-bus controller (KLESI) for BA23 or BA123
enclosures; 120-V/240-V

TU81E-SA/SB

TU81-Plus with Q-bus controller (KLESI) for BA2xx and
BA4 xx enclosures; factory installed; 120-V/240-V

TU81E-SF/SG

TU81-Plus with Q-bus controller (KLESI) for BA2xx and
BA4 xx enclosures; field installed; 120-V/240-V

TU81E-UG

TU81 to TU81E upgrade kit

Note: A standard 25-pin, 6.1-m (20-ft) cable is included with all drive options.
No other cable options are available.

Power Cords

120-V power cord included with 120-V models. 240-V devices require the
purchase of a country-specific power cord.
BN18B-4E
BN18D-4E
BN18E-4E
BN18F-4E
BN18H-4E
BN18T-4E
BN18P-4E
BN18C-4E

U.K./Ireland
Australia/New Zealand
Italy
Israel
India
Canada/Japan/U.S.
Denmark
Switzerland, Austria, Belgium, France, Germany, Finland, Holland, Norway, Sweden, Portugal, and Spain

Configuring Information
Option

Watts
Drawn

de Amps Drawn @

Bus Loads
Drawn

I/O Panel
Units

15 v

-15 v

1 quad slot

4.0

0.0

TU81E-Dx

1 dual slot

3.0

0.0

1.0

TU81E-Sx

1 dual slot

4.0

0.0

0.5

1.0

Option

Slots

TU81E-Bx

1 VAXBI slot

TU81E-Ax

Specifications

Slots

1.0

VAXBI
Nodes

de Amps Drawn @

12 v -12 v

-5.2 v

-2 v

7.0

0.0

I/O Panel
Units

Physical Characteristics
Height
Width
Depth
Weight

106.0 cm (41.6 in.)
54.0 cm (21.3 in.)
76.2 cm (30.0 in.)
106.0 kg (235.0 lb )

Power Requirements
Watts
Btu/h
NEMA receptacle type
IEC receptacle type
PCS+/PDS+ cable type
Number of phases

500
1024
L5-30R
Schuko/CEE7-7
BC24S (120/208)
BN29K (240/416)
1

.t
Q
~

=
0

4"'

.....

Storage Devices

7.103

Tape Devices (Reel-to-Reel)

rso; Family 'of Magnetic Tape Subsystems
The TS05 family includes low-cost industry-standard magnetic tape drives. Data
on the TS05 drives can be interchanged with any system that uses half-inch,
ANSI 9-track 1600-bit/inch tape in phase-encoded format. The TSV05 is for
Q-bus systems, including the DECsystem 5400 and 5500. The TSU05 is for
UNIBUS systems. Both the TSV05 and TSU05 require 22-cm (8.7-in. ) in an
H9642-type 106-cm (41.7-in.) high cabinet. They are also available fo r rackmounting. The TSZ05 offers a Small Computer Systems Interface (SCSI) and is
packaged in a tabletop enclosure.
Features

• Recording density: 1,600 bits/inch
• Capacity per 731.5-m (2,400-ft) reel: 40 Mbytes with 8-Kbyte blocks at
1,600 bits/inch
· Number of tracks: nine on 0.5-inch magnetic tape
· Data transfer rate (maximum): 40 or 160 Kbytes/ second
· Read/ write speed: TSV05/TSU05: 25 in.ls; TSZ05: 100 in.ls
·Rewind speed (maximum): TSV05/TSU05: 180 in.ls; TSZ05: 175 in.ls

Ordering Information
Notes: TSV05 model numbers are 100 V/ 120 V/ 220 V/240 V. 120-V models
include 120-V power cord; all others require the purchase of a country-specific
power cord; contact the EIC Sales Support Center at 800-832-6277 or
603 -884 -8990 for more information.
TSV05-AC/AA/AD/AB ~:

For BA23-based Q-bus systems; includes controller
and mounting hardware

TSV05-ZC/ZA/ZD/ZB

For MicroVAX II Models DH-630Q5, DH-630Q6,
DJ-630P5 , and 630QE deep cabinet systems; includes
controller, cables, top access cover, and mounting
hardware

TSV05 -BC/BA/BD/BB ~:

For BA23- or BA123-based Q-bus systems; magtape in
106-cm (41.7-in.) H9642 cabinet that includes 53.3 -cm
(21-in.) expansion space, includes controller and side
panels. Note: H9544-DD (5.25-in. shielded front
cover) is required when mounting BA23 enclosure in
TSV05-Bx cabinet

H9644-DD

5.25-in. shielded front cover; required when mounting
BA23 enclosure in TSV05-Bx cabinet

TSV05-SC/SA/SD/SB

For BA4xx- and BA2xx-based systems; includes
controller, cables, and mounting hardware

TSV05-SH/SE/SJ/SF

For BA4xx- and BA2xx-based systems; magtape in
106-cm (41.7-in.) H9642 cabinet that includes 53.3-cm
(21-in.) expansion space, includes controller, side
panels, and cables

TSV05-SM/SK/SN/SL

For VAXserver 3602 BA2xx-based systems; includes
controller, cables, mounting hardware, and top access
cover for top mounting in system cabinet

'" Requires the purchase of a cable kit from the following list.

7.104

Storage Devices

Tape Devices (Reel-to-Reel)
Ordering Information

Note: TSU05 model numbers are 120 V/240 V.

(Continued)
TSU05-AA/AB

For UNIBUS systems; includes control module, cables,
and mounting hardware

TSU05-BA/BB

For UNIBUS systems; magtape in 106-cm (41.7-in.)
H9642 cabinet, includes control module and cables

Note: TSZ05 model numbers are 100 V/12 0 V/220 V/ 240 V
TSZ05-AC"/AA/Aff':/AB ~' SCSI magnetic tape system in tabletop enclosure.
7
'

Requires the selection of a country kits from the following list.

TSV05 System

BA23

BA123

H9642
Std Cab

OEM
Configuration

H9642
Deep Cab

TSV05-AA, AB, AC, AD

CK-TS05-14

CK-TS05-11

CK-TS05-14

CK-TS05-12

CK-TS05-13*

TSV05-BA, BB, BC, BD

CK-TS05 -14

CK-TS05-11

CK-TS05-14

CK-TS05-12

CK-TS05-11

TSV05-ZA, ZB, ZC, ZD

NIA

CPU Enclosures/Cable Chart

(BA23 Enclosures only)

7
'

Country Kits

If H9642 is an expansion cabinet, use CK-TS05 -ll.

-AB, -AC, and -AD configurations require country kits which include: countryspecific ac power cord, 50-pin to 50-pin SCSI cable, 68-pin to 50-pin SCSI cable,
SCSI terminator, installation guide, and user's guide.
TSZ05-KA
TSZ05-MA
TSZ05-KD
TSZ05-KE
TSZ05-KG
TSZ05-KI
TSZ05-KJ
TSZ05-KK
TSZ05-LJ
TSZ05-KT
TSZ05-KZ

U.S./Canada
Austria, Belgium, Finland, France, Netherlands, Norway,
Portugal, Spain, and Sweden
Denmark
U.K./Ireland
Germany
Italy
Japan
Switzerland
India
Israel
Australia/New Zealand

Note: For additional information, contact the EIC Sales Support Center at
800-832-6277 or 603-884-8990.

Configuring Information
Option

Mounting
Requirements

TSV05-AA/AB

1 quad slot

6.5

TSV05-BAIBB

1 quad slot

TSV05-ZAIZB

Watts
Drawn

Bus Loads
Drawn
ac

0.0

32.5

3.0

1.0

2(A)

6.5

0.0

32.5

3.0

1.0

2(A)

1 quad slot

6.5

0.0

32.5

3.0

1.0

2(A)

TSV05-SA/SB

1 quad slot

2.5

0.0

12.5

3.0

1.0

NIA

TSV05-SE/SF

1 quad slot

2.5

0.0

12.5

3.0

1.0

NIA

TSV05-SKISL

1 quad slot

2.5

0.0

12.5

3.0

1.0

NIA

de Amps@

IIO Panel
Insert Size

Storage Devices

flJ

7.105

Tape Devices (Reel-to-Reel)
TSZ07 Magnetic Tape Drive (SCSI)
The TSZ07 is a dual:.density 1600/6250-bit/inch magnetic tape drive that can be
connected to SCSI workstations using the built-in SCSI 2 interface, and to Q-bus
MicroVAX systems via the KZQSA adapter, to provide industry-standard 9-track
data interchange (one TSZ07 per KZQSA). The TSZ07 can be connected to
DECsystem 5500 systems using the embedded SCSI adapter or to Q-bus systems
using the KZQSA adapter. The TSZ07 is also available on all VAX 6000 systems
with a VAXBI/XMI adapter (DWMBB). The TSZ07 is available in a standard
48.3-cm (19-inch) rackmount form, in a tabletop version, or top mounted in a
I-meter (40-inch) cabinet which includes an 874-type power controller and provides 53.3 cm (21 inches) of cabinet expansion space.
Features

• Recording density: 6250 bits/inch (GCR), 1600 bits/inch (phase encoded)
· Formatted capacity @ 6250 bits/inch: 140 Mbytes (2400-foot reel), @ 1600
bits/inch: 40 Mbytes (2400-foot reel)
·Read/write speed: 2.54 meters/second (100 inches/second) (maximum)
·Maximum rewind speed: 5.1 meters/second (200 inches/second)
·Maximum data transfer rate: 625 Kbytes/second
·Maximum SCSI transfer rate: 4 Mbytes/second (synchronous)
• Automatic loading and threading
· 8-character alphanumeric front panel display
· 1 Mbyte of cache memory
• Front loading with low-profile 22.2-cm (8.75-inch) height
·Auto-ranging power supply
· Low acoustic noise level

Ordering Information

Order the following for direct SCSI or Q-bus (KZQSA required for Q-bus)
connection:

TSZ07-AA-::

1600/6250-bit/in. SCSI rackmountable 9-track magtape

TSZ07-BA

1600/6250-bit/in. SCSI 9-track magtape mounted in H9642
cabinet, includes 9-ft (2.7-m) external cable (BC06P-09), and
120-V power cord

TSZ07-BBt

Same as above except 240 V

TSZ07 -CA ~~

1600/6250-bit/in. SCSI tabletop 9 track magtape

Order the following for VAXBI connection:

TSB07-AA 1:

Differential rackmountable magtape; includes VAXBI adapter,
internal cable, I/O bulkhead with connector, and 25-ft (7.6-m)
external cable (BC13N-25)

TSB07-BA

Differential rackmountable magtape; includes VAXBI adapter,
internal cable, I/O bulkhead with connector, 25-ft (7 .6-m)
external cable (BC13N-25), and 120-V power cord

TSB07-BBt

Same as above except 240 V

1
:

TSB07-CA

7.106

Storage Devices

Differential rackmountable magtape; includes VAXBI adapter,
internal cable, I/O bulkhead with connector, and 25-ft (7.6-m)
external cable (BC13N-25)

Tape Devices (Reel-to-Reel)
Ordering Information
(Continued)

For daisychaining off a VAXBI system, order one TSB07 above and one TSZ07
differential SCSI model below:

TSZ07-DA'"

Differential SCSI rackmountable 9-track magtape

TSZ07-EA

Differential SCSI 9-track magtape in H9642 cabinet, includes
9-ft (2.7-m) external cable (BC06P-09), and 120-V power cord

TSZ07-EBt

Same as above except 240 V

TSZ07-FA":

Differential SCSI tabletop 9-track magtape

'' Order country kit separately
t Order power cord separately

Country Kits

TSZ07-AA/CA/DA/FA and TSB07-AA/CA require one of the following country
kits which include an ac power cord, two 1.8-m (6-ft) SCSI cables (BC06P-06
and BC56H-06), hardware documentation, tape head cleaning kit, and 731.5-m
(2400-ft) reel of blank magnetic tape.

TSZK7-AA
TSZK7-AD
TSZK7-AE
TSZK7-AG
TSZK7-AI
TSZK7-AJ
TSZK7-AK
TSZK7-AT
TSZK7-AZ
TSZK7-BJ
Power Cords

The TSZ07-BA/BB/EA/EB and TSB07-BA/BB include a SCSI cable, documentation, cleaning kit, and blank magnetic tape reel. 240-V options (-xB) require a
power cord from the following list:

BN18B-4E
BN18D-4E
BN18E-4E
BN18F-4E
BN18H-4E
BN18T-4E
BN20B-2E
BN18P-4E
BN18C-4E

Specifications

U .S./Canada/Mexico
Denmark
U.K./Ireland
Austria, Belgium, Finland, France, Netherlands, Norway,
Portugal, Spain, and Sweden
Italy
Japan
Switzerland
Israel
Australia/New Zealand
India

U.K./Ireland
Australia/New Zealand
Italy
Israel
India
Canada/U.S./Japan (100/120 V)
Canada/U.S./J apan (240 V)
Denmark
Austria, Belgium, Finland, France, Netherlands, Norway, Portugal, Spain, and Sweden

Physical Characteristics

Height
Width
Depth
Weight

TSx07-AAIDA

TSx07-Bx/Ex

TSx07-CA/FA

22.8 cm (9.0 in .)
43.2 cm (17.0 in.)
63.5 cm (25.0 in.)
30.9 kg (68.0 lb)

111.1 cm (43.75 in.)
59.7 cm (23.5 in.)
83.8 cm (33.0 in. )
115.9 kg (255 lb)

26.9 cm (10.6 in.)
50.8 cm (20.0 in.)
68.6 cm (27 .0 in. )
43.2 kg (95 lb)

Note: For additional information, contact the EIC Sales Support Center at
800-832-6277 or 603-884-8990.

Storage Devices

7.107

Video Terminals Introduction
Overview

Digital's high-performance, high-quality terminals improve user productivity,
enhance system performance, and promote improved communications and network performance.
The VXT 2000 family of X Window System terminals combines superior graphics capability with easy application access in a single video display terminal. The
VXT family includes color, monochrome, and grayscale models in 15-, 17-, and
19-inch monitor sizes, as well as a low-cost, compact single-box 15-inch monochrome model. It offers both host-based and server-based modes of operation.
Server-based mode provides enhanced system management, virtual memory management, and font management capabilities.
The VT420 is a text terminal with many ergonomic and functional enhancements.
The VT420 replaces the VT320 and offers text windowing, six pages of memory,
up to 50 display lines, and dual sessions.
The VT420 with PCTerm is a full-featured alphanumeric terminal that supports
the PC character set and scan codes for multiuser DOS and DOS applications
running under UNIX.
The VT340+ is a color graphics dual-session terminal. The VT340+ is for users
who require high-performance, full-color business and preview graphics, as well
as high-quality text display capabilities.

Terminals and Printers

8.3

VXT 2000 Windowing Terminals
The VXT 2000 is an open desktop device that provides a window into the
network-and easy access to its many resources, applications, and databases.
Because it is system independent, the VXT 2000 can be used in any multivendor
environment that requires users to share data among multiple applications
located on different hosts and supporting a variety of operating systems.
The VXT 2000 is available in two complementary software models that share
core functionality-Host-based and Server-based. The Host-based model downline loads the VXT 2000 software from a UNIX, ULTRIX, or VMS host. The
Server-based model uses the InfoServer 100 or InfoServer 150 (when upgraded
with VXT software), or the InfoServer 150VXT-specifically designed for use
with VXT 2000 windowing terminals. The InfoServers provide virtual memory
capability, high-speed font access, and facilitate the establishment and management of terminal work groups performing similar tasks.
The VXT 2000 family of X terminals includes monochrome, grayscale and color
two-box models in 15-, 17- and 19-inch monitor sizes and a 15-inch monochrome single-box model; the 8-plane color and grayscale models include a
graphics coprocessor for high-performance graphics. The DECimage option is
a low-cost plug-in board that turns any two-box VXT terminal into a highperformance image display system.
Features
• Server-based and host-based modes of operation provide flexibility for different
operating environments.
• Runs multiple terminal and X Window System applications simultaneously-from
UNIX, ULTRIX, or VMS operating systems.
• Industry-standard OSF/Motif graphical user interface provides a common user
interface for applications.
·Easy work group configuration and font management provided in server-based
mode of operation.
• Powerful, industry-standard imaging capabilities are integrated with the X Window System environment, and are available through the DECimage option on all
two-box models.
·TCP/IP, LAT, and LASTport communications protocols, supported over
802.3/Ethernet thick wire, 802.3/Ethernet ThinWire, or Twisted Pair (lOBaseT)
provide easy interface to existing networks.
• Booting flexibility: load from UNIX, ULTRIX, or VMS systems.
• 4-Mbyte standard terminal memory; expandable to 16 Mbytes.
• Three-button mouse (200 pulses per linear inch) and mousepad.
• Choice of keyboards-including a keyboard tailored for UNIX environments.
• Autostart capability for quick access to most frequently used hosts and
applications.

Prerequisites

Host Systems
·VAX system running VMS V5.4.2 or later, or ULTRIX V4.2
• RISC system running ULTRIX V4 .2
• SUN system running SunOS V4.1.1
• Hewlett-Packard system running HP-UX V8.05
Server Systems
• InfoServer 100 or InfoServer 150 (upgraded with VXT 2000 software)
OR
• InfoServer 150VXT (see Step 3 for details)

8.4

Terminals and Printers

VXT 2000 Windowing Terminals
Ordering Information-Note that Steps 1, 2, 3, and 4 are required.
1

Notes: VX215-xx/xx/xx, VX217-xx/xx/xx, or VX225-xx/xx/xx =Standard keyboard/WPS keyboard/UNIX keyboard
Thick/thin = 802.3/Ethernet thick wire/ThinWire
Thick/twisted = 802.3/Ethernet thick wire/twisted-pair (lOBaseT)
U.S./U.K./Canada are 120-V devices
VXT 2000 with 15-inch Monitor
VR326
Color Monitor

VR315
Monochrome Monitor
Thick/Twisted
(Single Box)

Thick/Thin
(Two Box)

Thick/Twisted
(Two Box)

Country/Language

Thick/Thin
(Two Box)

Thick/Twisted
(Two Box)

U.S. , U.K./English

VX215 -AA/BAICA

VX215-JA/KA/LA

VX225 -JA/KA/ LA

VX215 -DAIEAIFA

VX215-MA/NA/PA

Canada/ French

VX215-AC/BC/CC

VX215-JC/KC/LC

VX225-JC/KC/LC

VX215-DC/EC/FC

VX215 -MC/ NC/PC

Belgium/ Flemish

VX215-AB/ BB/CB

VX215-JB/ KB/LB

VX225-JB/ KB/LB

VX215-DD/ EB/ FB

VX215 -MB/ NB/PB

Denmark/Danish

VX215 -AD/ BD/CD

VX215 -JD/KD/ LD

VX225-JD/ KD/ LD

VX215-DD/ ED/ FD

VX215-MD/ND/ PD

U.K./English

VX215 -AE/ BE/CE

VX215 -JE/ KE/LE

VX225-JEIKE/LE

VX215-DE/ EE/ FE

VX215-ME/ NE/PE

Finland/ Finnish

VX215 -AF/BF/CF

VX215-JF/ KF/ LF

VX225-JF/ KF/LF

VX215 -DF/EF/FF

VX215 -MF/ NF/PF

Germany/ German

VX215 -AG/BG/CG

VX215 -JG/ KG/ LG

VX225-JG/ KG/ LG

VX215-DG/EG/ FG

VX215 -MG/ NG/PG

Holland/Dutch

VX215 -AHIBH/ CH

VX215 -JH/KH/ LH

VX225 -JH/KH/ LH

VX215 -DH/EH/ FH

VX215 -MH/NHIPH

Italy/Italian

VX215 -A1/ BI/CI

VX215 -JI/ KI/ LI

VX225 -JI/KI/ LI

VX215- DI/ EI/ FI

VX215 -MIINI/ PI

Switzerland/ French

VX215 -AK/ BK/CK

VX215-J K/ KK/LK

VX225-JK/ KK/LK

VX215-DK/ EKIFK

VX215 -MK/NK/PK

Switzerland/ German

VX215-AL/ BLICL

VX215-JL/KLILL

VX225 -JL/KL/LL

VX215 -DL/ELIFL

VX215-ML/NL/PL

Sweden/ Swedish

VX215-AM/BM/CM

VX215-JM/KM/ LM

VX225-JM/ KM/LM

VX215-DM/ EM/ FM

VX215 -MM/ NM/PM
VX215-MN/ NN/PN

Norway/ Norwegian

VX215 -AN/BN/CN

VX215-JN/ KN/ LN

VX225 -.JN/ KN / LN

VX215-DN/EN/FN

France/French

VX215 -APIBP/CP

VX215-JP/ KP/ LP

VX225-JP/KP/LP

VX215-DP/EP/ FP

VX215-MP/ NP/PP

Spain/ Spanish

VX215 -AS/ BS/CS

VX215-JS/ KS/ LS

VX225-JS/ KS/LS

VX215-DS/ES/ FS

VX215 -MS/ NS/PS

Portugal/Portuguese

VX215 -AV/CV

VX215 -JV / LV

VX225-JV/ LV

VX215-DV/FV

VX215 -MV/PV

Australia, New Zealand/ English

VX215 -AZ/ BZ/CZ

VX215-JZ/KZ/LZ

VX225-JZ/KZ/ LZ

VX215-DZ/ EZ/ FZ

VX215 -MZ/ NZ/PZ

VXT 2000 with 17 -inch Monitor
VRM17
Monochrome Monitor

VRC16
Color Monitor

Country/Language

Thick/Thin

Thick/Twisted

Thick/Thin

Thick/Twisted

VRM17
Grayscale Monitor
Thick/Thin

Thick/Twisted
VX2 17-RA/SA/TA

U.S.,U.K./English

VX217 -AA/BA/CA

VX2 l 7-J A/ KA/ LA

VX217-MA/NA/ PA

VX217 -DA/EA/ FA

VX2 l 7-GA/ HA/IA

Canada/ French

VX217 -AC/ BC/CC

VX2 l 7 -JC/KC/LC

VX2 l 7-MB/ NB/ PB

VX2 l 7-DC/EC/ FC

VX217 -GC/HCIIC

VX2 l 7-RC/SC/TC

Belgium/ Flemish

VX217-AB/ BB/ CB

VX217 -JB/ KB/LB

VX2 17-MCINC/PC

VX217-DB/ EB/ FB

VX2 l 7-GB/HB/IB

VX217 -RB/ SB/ TB

Denmark/Danish

VX217 -AD/ BD/ CD

VX2 l 7-JD/ KD/ LD

VX2 l 7-MD/ ND/PD

VX2 l 7 -DD/ ED/FD

VX217 -GD/HD/ ID

VX217 -RD/ SD/TD

U.K./English

VX217 -AE/ BE/CE

VX2 l 7-JE/KE/LE

VX217-ME/NE/PE

VX217-DE/EE/FE

VX217-GE/HE/ IE

VX217 -RE/ SE/ TE

Finland/ Finnish

VX217-AF/ BF/ CF

VX2 l 7-JF/ KF/ LF

VX217 -MF/NF/PF

VX2 l 7-DF/ EF/ FF

VX217-GF/ HF/ IF

VX217 -RF/ SF/ TF

Germany/ German

VX2 l 7-AG/ BG/ CG

VX217-JG/ KG/LG

VX217-MG/ NG/PG

VX217-DG/EG/ FG

VX2 l 7 -GG/ HG/IG

VX217-RG/ SG/TG

Holland/Dutch

VX2 l 7 -AH/ BH/ CH

VX2 l 7-JH/ KH/ LH

VX2 l 7 -MH/NH/PH

VX2 l 7-DH/ EH/FH

VX217 -GH/ HH/ IH

VX217-RH/SI-I/TH

Italy/ Italian

VX2 l 7-AI/ BI/CI

VX2 l 7-JI/ KI/LI

VX2 l 7-MI/NI/ PI

VX2 l 7-DI/ EI/ FI

VX2 l 7-GI/HI/II

VX2 l 7-RI/ SI/TI

Switzerland/ French

VX2 l 7-AK/ BK/CK

VX2 l 7-JK/ KK/ LK

VX217 -MKINK/ PK

VX217-DK/EK/ FK

VX217 -GKIHKIIK

VX217-RK/ SK/TK

Switzerland/ German

VX217-AL/BLICL

VX2 l 7-JL/KLILL

VX217-MLINL/PL

VX217-DL/ELIFL

VX217 -GL/HLIIL

VX217 -RL/ SLITL

Sweden/ Swedish

VX2 l 7-AM/ BM/CM

VX2 l 7-JM/ KM/ LM

VX217-MM/ NM/ PM

VX217-DM/ EM/ FM

VX217-GM/HM/ IM

VX217-RM/SM/TM

VX217-DN/ EN/FN

VX217-GN/HN/ IN

VX217 -RN/ SN/ TN
VX217-RP/ SP/ TP

Norway/ Norwegian

VX2 l 7-AN/ BN/CN

VX2 l 7-JN/ KN/ LN

VX217 -MN/ NN/ PN

France/French

VX217 -AP/ BP/CP

VX217 -JP/ KP/ LP

VX217-MP/ NP/ PP

VX2 l 7-DP/ EP/ FP

VX217-GP/ HP/ IP

Spain/ Spanish

VX217 -AS/ BS/ CS

VX2 l 7 -JS/ KS/ LS

VX217 -MS/NS/PS

VX2 l 7-DS/ ES/FS

VX217 -GS/HS/ IS

VX217 -RS/ SS/ TS

Portugal/Portuguese

VX217-AV/CV

VX217-JV/ LV

VX217-MV/ PV

VX217-DV/FV

VX217-GV/IV

VX217-RV/ TV

Australia, New Zealand/
English

VX217 -AZ/ BZ/ CZ

VX217 -JZ/ KZ/ LZ

VX2 l 7-MZ/NZ/PZ

VX2 l 7-DZ/EZ/FZ

VX217 -G Z/HZ/ IZ

VX217 -RZ/SZ/TZ

Terminals and Printers

8.5

VXT 2000 Windowing Terminals

Notes: VX219-xx/xx/xx = Standard keyboard/WPS keyboard/ UNIX keyboard
Thick/thin = 802.3/Ethernet thick wire/ThinWire
Thick/twisted = 802.3/ Ethernet thick wire/twisted-pair (lOBaseT)
U.S./U.K./Canada are 120-V devices
VXT 2000 with 19-inch Monitor
VR319
Monochrome Monitor

VR319
Grayscale Monitor

VR320
Color Monitor

Country/Language

Thick/Thin

Thick/Twisted

Thick/Thin

Thick/Twisted

Thick/Thin

Thick/Twisted

U.S., U.K./English

VX219-AA/BAICA

VX2 19-J A/KAILA

VX219-DAIEAIFA

VX219-MA/NA/PA

VX219-GA/HA/IA

VX219-RA/SAITA

Canada/ French

VX219-AC/BC/CC

VX2 19-JC/ KC/ LC

VX219-DC/EC/FC

VX219-MC/NC/PC

VX2 l 9-GC/HC/IC

VX219-RC/SC/TC

Belgium/ Flemish

VX219-AB/BB/CB

VX219-JB/ KB/ LB

VX219-DB/EB/FB

VX2 l 9-MB/N B/PB

VX2 19-GB/HB/IB

VX219-RB/SB/ TB

Denmark/Danish

VX219-AD/ BD/CD

VX2 19-JD/KD/ LD

VX219-DD/ED/FD

VX219-MD/ ND/ PD

VX219-GD/HD/ID

VX2 l 9-RD/ SD/TD

U.K./English

VX219-AE/ BE/CE

VX219-JE/ KD/ LE

VX219-DE/EE/FE

VX219-ME/NE/PE

VX219-GEIHE/ IE

VX219-RE/SE/TE

Finland/ Finnish

VX219-AF/BF/ CF

VX219-JF/ KF/ LF

VX219-DF/ EF/FF

VX219-MF/ NF/ PF

VX219-GF/HF/ IF

VX2 19-RF/ SF/TF

Germany/German

VX219-AG/BG/CG

VX2 l 9-JG/ KG/ LG

VX219-DG/ EG/FG

VX219-MG/ NG/ PG

VX219-GG/ HG/ IG

VX219-RG/ SG/TG

Holland/ Dutch

VX2 19-AHIBH/CH

VX2 l 9-JH/ KH/ LH

VX219-DH/EH/FH

VX2 l 9-MH/NH/ PH

VX219-GH/ HH/IH

VX219-RH/SH/TH

Italy/Italian

VX219-AI/BI/ CI

VX219-JI/ KI/ LI

VX2 l 9-DI/EI/FI

VX219-MI/ NI/PJ

VX219-GI/ HI/ II

VX219-RIISI/TI

Switzerland/ French

VX219-AK/BK/ CK

VX219-JK/ KK/LK

VX2 19-DK/EK/ FK

VX219-MK/NK/ PK

VX2 19-GK/HK/IK

VX219-RK/ SKITK
VX219-RL/SLITL

Switzerland/ German

VX219-ALIBLICL

VX2 l 9-JL/KL/LL

VX219-DLIEL/FL

VX219-ML/NLIPL

VX2 19-GL/HL/IL

Sweden/Swedish

VX2 19-AM/BM/CM

VX2 l 9-JM/ KM/ LM

VX219-DM/EM/FM

VX219-MM/ NM/PM

VX219-GM/HM/ IM

VX219-RM/ SM/ TM

Norway/ Norwegian

VX219-AN/ BN/CN

VX2 l 9-JN/ KN/ LN

VX2 l 9-DN/EN/FN

VX219-MN/NN/PN

VX219-GN/ HN/ IN

VX219-RN/SN/TN

France/ French

VX2 l 9-AP/ BP/CP

VX219-JP/ KP/ LP

VX219-DP/ EP/FP

VX219-MP/ NP/PP

VX219-GP/ HP/ IP

VX2 19-RP/ SP/ TP

Spain/Spanish

VX2 19-AS/BS/CS

VX219-JS/ KS/ LS

VX219-DS/ ES/ FS

VX219-MS/NS/PS

VX2 l 9-GS/ HS/IS

VX219-RS/ SS/TS

Portugal/Portuguese

VX219-AV/CV

VX219-JV/ LV

VX219-DV/ FV

VX219-MV/PV

VX219-GV/ IV

VX219-RV/TV

Australia, New
Zealand/English

VX219-AZ/BZ/CZ

VX219-JZ/ KZ/ LZ

VX219-DZ/EZ/FZ

VX219-MZ/ NZ/PZ

VX219-GZ/ HZ/ IZ

VX2 19-RZ/SZ/TZ

One software license per VXT 2000 is required.

QL-XNGA9-AA

VXT 2000 software license

~Stepvl Me
A·

Select a Host media and documentation kit, OR Server media and documentation kit (for existing InfoServer 100/ 150), OR
preconfigured InfoServer 150VXT.

QA-XNGAB-Hx
QA-XNGAC-Hx
QA-XNGAD-HM
QA-XNGAD-HM
QA-XNGAE-HP

For Host VMS systems
For Host ULTRIX systems
For Host UNIX systems
For Host UNIX systems-QIC media
For Host UNIX systems-DAT media

QA-XNGAF-Hx
QA-XNGAG-Hx
QA-XNGAH-HM
QA-XNGAH-HP
QA-XNGAJ-HP

For Server VMS systems
For Server ULTRIX systems
For Server UNIX systems
For Server UNIX systems-QIC media
For Server UNIX systems-DAT media

Note: x denotes media type: M = magtape; 5 = TK50

8.6

Terminals and Printers

VXT 2000 Windowing Terminals

InfoServer 100 and InfoServer 150 can be upgraded to support up to eight VXT 2000 terminals.
InfoServer 100 requires the following license and media and documentation kit and appropriate InfoServer media and
documentation kit (QA-XNGAx-xx):

QL-YSH99-RA
QA-YSHAA-H8

InfoServer 100 upgrade license (Vl.O to V2.0)
InfoServer 100 media and documentation V2.0

VXT 2000 media and documentation for InfoServer 100 or InfoServer 150.
Note: Select media and documentation based on primary host system.

QA-XNGAF-Hx
QA-XNGAG-Hx
QA-XNGAH-Hx
QA-XNGAH-HP
QA-XNGAJ-HP

For VMS systems
For ULTRIX systems
For UNIX systems
For UNIX systems-QIC media
For UNIX systems-DAT media

Note: x denotes media type: M = magtape; 5 = TK50
...--~~~-~~~~--·-----·~--

Step 3-lnfoServer l50VXT
InfoServer 150VXT is preconfigured with VXT server software and acts as a load device and storage device.

SEACV-AAIA9
SEACW-AA/A9

InfoServer 150VXT with one RRD42 CD-ROM; 120 V/240 V
InfoServer 150VXT with two RRD42 CD-ROMs; 120 V/240 V

Step 4-802.3/Ether~~t cables
Order one 802.3/ Ethernet cable per VXT 2000.

BNE4C-xx
BNEJH-xx
BNEJL-xx
BC16M-xx

Thick wire 802.3/Ethernet cable (xx = 02/ 05 refers to length in meters)
Thick wire transceiver cable with straight connector-PVC
(xx = 05/ 10/ 20/40 refers to length in meters)
Thick wire transceiver cable with straight connector-Teflon
(xx = 05/ 10/ 20/40 refers to length in meters)
ThinWire 802.3/ Ethernet cable (xx = 06/ 15/30 refers to length in feet)

Step 5-Memory
Three additional memory slots are available. VXT 2000 terminals can be expanded to 16 Mbytes of memory. (Four Mbytes
included with each terminal-to reach the maximum of 16 Mbytes, the three available slots must use 4-Mbyte SIMM
modules.) Memory options can be used in any combination.
Note: VXT 2000s using host media require 10 Mbytes of memory.

MS200-AA
MS200-BA

2 Mbytes of SIMM memory
4 Mbytes of SIMM memory

Step ~DECimage Option
The DECimage option is a customer-installable hardware option and can be used with all VXT 2000 terminals except the
single-box model.

VX20A-OP

DECimage option

QL-GL9A9-AA
QA-GL9AA-Hx
QL-GL9AA-GZ

DECIUL/VMS Vl.O VAX-based system license
DECIUL/VMS kit
DECIULIVMS documentation

QL-GM1A9-AA
QA-GMlAA-Hx
QA-GMlAA-GZ

DECIUL/ULTRIX Vl.O VAX-based system license
DECIUL/ULTRIX kit (VAX)
DECIUL/ULTRIX documentation (VAX)

QL-GN1A8-AA
QA-GNlAA-Hx
QA-GNlAA-GZ

DECIUL/ULTRIX Vl.O RISC-based system license
DECIUL/ULTRIX kit (RISC)
DECIUL/ULTRIX documentation (RISC)

Note: x denotes media type: M = magtape; 5 = TK50

Terminals and Printers

8. 7

VXT 2000 Windowing Terminals
Specifications

Physical Characteristics
System Box~'

Height
Width
Depth
Weight

6.1 cm (2.4 in.)
39.1 cm (15.4 in.)
36.8 cm (14.5 in. )
4.6 kg (10.15 lb)

Monitors (Monochrome )

Height
Width
Depth
Weight

15-inch (VR315 )

15-inch singlebox (VR325 )

17-inch (VRM17)

19-inch (VR319)

38.2 cm (15.0 in.)
38.2 cm (15.0 in.)
39.6 cm (15.6 in.)
14.4 kg (32.0 lb )

36.9 cm (14.5 in.)
36.2 cm (14.75 in. )
38.2 cm (15 in. )
14.6 kg (32 lb)

41.9 cm (16.5 in.)
40.6 cm (16.0 in .)
37.6 cm (14.8 in.)
16.8 kg (37.0 lb)

46.0 cm (18.0 in.)
49.5 cm (19.5 in.)
40.1 cm (15 .8 in.)
21.8 kg (48.0 lb)

15-inch (VR326)

17-inch (VRC16)

19-inch (VR320 )

38.2 cm (15 .0 in.)
38.2 cm (15.0 in.)
39.6 cm (15.6 in. )
17.2 kg (38.0 lb)

43.3 cm (17 in. )
41.3 cm (16.2 in .)
43.6 cm (17.1 in.)
25 kg (55 lb)

46.0 cm (18.0 in.)
49.5 cm (19.5 in.)
45 .2 cm (17 .8 in.)
29.0 kg (64.0 lb)

Monitors (Color)

Height
Width
Depth
Weight

Dots-per-inch (dpi)

100

Orientation

Landscape (horizontal)

Resolution

1,280 x 1,024 (VR315, VRM17, VR319, VR320)
1,024 x 768 (VR325, VR326, VRC16)

Refresh rate

72 Hz

Video attrib utes

Reverse video , underline, bold, and blinking (can be selected
individually or in any combination) ; 2-plane monochrome or
8-plane color/grayscale capability

Power Requirements
Line voltage
Voltage tolerance
Line frequency

120 V/ 240 V
88 to 132 Vrms/ 176 to 264 Vrms
50 to 60 Hz

Operating Environment
Temperature
Relative h umidity
Max. operating altitude

10° to 40° C (50° to 104° F)
10 % to 90% noncondensing
2.4 km (8000 ft)

Input Devices
Keyboards
Mouse

Digital standard (LK401); WPS (LK402-Gold Key);
UNIX (LK421)
Three-button mouse, 200 pulses per linear inch

Operating System/Communication Environments
Operation

Operating System

Communication Protocol

Terminal
Session

VMS V4.6
UNIX (any BSD V2 .0 or higher)
ULTRIX (any version)
UWS V4 .0

LAT, TELNET (requires UCX)
TCP/IP, TELNET
TCP/ IP, TELNET
LAT, TELNET

X Window

VMS V5.4-2
UNIX (any version)
UWS V4.0 or higher

LATt, TCP/IP
TCP/ IP
TCP/IP

Session

* Applicable to two-box VXT 2000 models only.
t LAT master is recommended to achieve improved boot and network performance. LAT master is
available as an optional saveset in VMS V5.4-1 through V5.4-3 and can be installed by the system
manager. LAT master is integrated in VMS V5.5 .

8.8

Terminals and Printers

Video Terminals Comparison Chart

Features
Common Attributes

.1-·

VT220 compatibility (text)
Bidirectional printer port
Two-piece, convection-cooled design
25th status line
Keyboard status line

VT420
(North
American
Model)

VT420
(International
Model)

VT420
(International
LMF)

VT420
with
PCTerm

vn40+

x
x
x
x
x

Digital LK201 keyboard
Digital LK401 keyboard

Digital LK443/LK444 keyboard
Programmable function keys (15)

Modem support

Second DEC-423 interface port for dual sessions or printer port
Pedestal base with tilt and swivel

x
x
x
x

x
x

x
x
x

x
x

x
x
x
x

Programmable function keys (48)

DEC-423 interface port (EIA)

Extended Performance Attributes

Programmable function keys saved in ROM
14-inch flat monochrome CRT screen
Paper-white, amber, or green display
Paper-white phosphor only
13-inch color CRT screen
National replacement character set
EIA-232 port
Full EIA-232 modem control
10-foot cable (BC16E) and 25-pin EIA-232 adapter (H8571-F)
Dual sessions (single or dual wire)
Vertical split screen
Horizontal split screen
Multiple pages of memory
Window management features
Downline-loadable macros

120-V or 240-V versions

x
x

120-V-240-V self-adjusting capability

x
x
x

x
x
x
x
x
x
x

Block-mode operation
120-V capability only

x
x
x
x

Graphics Attributes

x
x
x
x
x

VT330 compatibility (text and graphics)
VT340 compatibility (color text and graphics)
Graphics memory, two screens
Mouse/ tablet interface
16 colors, 16 shades of gray, 13-inch screen

Certifications
FCC Class A Certification
FCC Class B Certification
VDE Class B, GS Certification
Swedish Radioprotection Institute (SSI) conformance
on low-frequency magnetic fields and low electrostatic
fields ; white phosphor only

x
x
x

Terminals and Printers

8.9

VT420 Text Terminal
The VT420 is a low-cost, dual-session text terminal with award-winning functionality and ergonomic design.
The VT420 terminal improves the standards set by the VT320 terminal by providing many enhancements, including a three-year warranty. Performance, ergonomics, and display features of the VT420 terminal improve application interaction, screen management, viewing comfort, and productivity. Fully formed fonts ,
higher resolution, overscan, and up to 48 displayable data lines allow text applications to be displayed with clarity and greater functionality comparable to more
expensive desktop display devices.
Display characteristics, combined with commands for management of text
windows, off-screen memory, and locally stored macros, can enhance the
performance of interactive text applications such as online transaction processing,
spreadsheets, database inquiries, and word processing.
Digital terminal servers or Session Support Utility software (a VMS layered product) enable two simultaneous sessions to run through a single wire from the
same or different hosts on the network. This saves the cost of installing a second
wire and the cost of a second port. Two-wire dual sessions are also supported
through the independent host communications ports. The user decides how to
allocate the communication ports; one can be used for a printer, or both can be
used for host communications.

In dual sessions, information can be viewed from each session simultaneously or
one at a time with the "flip-screen" function . A total of 48 data lines plus two
status lines can be displayed and the number of lines shown in each session on
the screen can be adjusted.
Whether the terminal is in single-session or dual-session mode, information can
be copied and pasted within and between sessions. Copy and paste are local
functions and can be used with existing applications. The paste function sends
the copied data to the receiving application as if it had been entered from the
keyboard.
The VT420 terminal is fully supported by a complete range of operating systems
and applications from Digital and other vendors. Any software that currently
supports text-only terminals in the VTl00/200/300 families, or the VT52 terminal, will support the VT420. VT420 terminals can be used with VMS V5.3, as
well as earlier releases of VMS if they are set up with other VT terminal
identification.
The VT420 terminal is available in three models: the North American, the international, and the international Low Magnetic Field (LMF). The North American
version with an MMJ modular connector is suitable for most North American
requirements where full modem control is not required. The international version
includes an EIA-232 25-pin communications port and FCC Class B certification.
The Low Magnetic Field version includes conformance to the Swedish Radioprotection Institute (SSI) requirement on low-frequency magnetic fields and low
electrostatic fields, in addition to the standard features of the International
model. See the Video Terminals Comparison Chart on page 8.9 for more details.
Features
• 14-inch flat-faced, anti-glare CRT screen, available in paper-white, amber, or
green phosphors.
• 800 by 414 pixel resolution, 70-Hz refresh rate, and overscan.
• Displays 24 , 25 , 36, or 48 data lines per session in 80 or 132 columns and six
different font sizes per session.

8.10

Terminals and Printers

VT420 Text Terminal
• Dual-sessions capability with choice of viewing each session independently in
flip-screen mode or both simultaneously in split-screen mode.
• Two on-screen status lines (one per session) plus a keyboard/session indicator
line.
· Local copy and paste within or between sessions.
·Low-profile, narrow LK401 keyboard designed for user comfort and improved
productivity provides two operating modes: a "novice" mode which is similar to
the LK201, and a new "extended" mode that activates extended reports, a key
position mode for alternate layouts, and the ability to take advantage of the new
"ALT" keys functions.
· Six pages of memory.
· Text windowing features and local macros enable efficient implementation of
forms management, pop-up menus, help, and dialog boxes for improved user
interfaces.
· Downloadable macro feature enables frequently used strings of text and control
sequences to be stored and executed from a 12-Kbyte memory buffer (6 Kbytes
per session). Up to 64 macros can be stored, with a nesting of 16 levels to
permit fast screen updates and reduced network traffic.
· Includes function keys "hold," "set-up,'' "print,'' and "switch session,'' as well as
keys for copy/paste and paging. Applications can clear volatile memory, reset
settings, access the terminal's unique serial number, and be informed if the
operator attempts to enter dual sessions, or reset or repower the terminal.

Ordering Information
For quantity orders (50 or more), or when ordering any VT420 terminal with a system or upgrade, use the DL prefix. For
quantities of 1-49, use the order numbers listed, without a prefix.
The VT420 North American models include: monitor, keyboard (WPS or standard), attached power cord, legend strip,
BC16E-10 communications cable and H8571-F adapter, and documentation.
The VT420 International and International LMF models include: monitor, keyboard (WPS or standard), detached power
cord, legend strip, and documentation. (Does not include BC16E-10 communications cable and H8571-F adapter.)
Model
Number

Description

Model
Number

Description

U.S. North American

VT420-AA White, text terminal, standard keyboard, 120 V
VT420-BA Green, text terminal, standard keyboard, 120 V
VT420-CA Amber, text terminal, standard keyboard, 120 V

VT420-DA White, text terminal, WPS keyboard , 120 V
VT420-EA Green, text terminal, WPS keyboard, 120 V
VT420-FA Amber, text terminal, WPS keyboard, 120 V

U.S. International

VT420-GA White, text terminal, standard keyboard, 120-240 V
VT420-HA Green, text terminal, standard keyboard, 120-240 V
VT420-JA Amber, text terminal, standard keyboard, 120-240 V
VT420-SA White, text terminal, standard keyboard , 120-240 V

VT420-KA White, text terminal, WPS keyboard, 120-240 V
VT420-LA Green, text terminal, WPS keyboard , 120-240 V
VT420-MA Amber, text terminal, WPS keyboard, 120-240 V
VT420-TA White, text terminal, WPS keyboard, 120-240 V

VT420-AB
VT420-BB
VT420-CB
VT420-SB

White, text terminal, standard keyboard, 120-240 V
Green, text terminal, standard keyboard , 120-240 V
Amber, text terminal, standard keyboard, 120-240 V
White, text terminal, standard keyboard, 120-240 V

VT420-DB
VT420-EB
VT420-FB
VT420-TB

White, text terminal, WPS keyboard , 120-240 V
Green, text terminal, WPS keyboard, 120-240 V
Amber, text terminal, WPS keyboard, 120-240 V
White, text terminal, WPS keyboard, 120-240 V

VT420-AC
VT420-BC
VT420-CC
YT420-SC

White, text terminal, standard keyboard, 120-240 V
Green, text terminal, standard keyboard, 120-240 V
Amber, text terminal, standard keyboard, 120-240 V
White, text terminal, standard keyboard, 120-240 V

VT420-DC
VT420-EC
VT420-FC
VT420-TC

White, text terminal, WPS keyboard, 120-240 V
Green, text terminal, WPS keyboard, 120-240 V
Amber, text terminal, WPS keyboard, 120-240 V
White, text terminal, WPS keyboard, 120-240 V

VT420-AD
VT420-BD
VT420-CD
VT420-SD

White, text terminal, standard keyboard, 120-240 V
Green , text terminal, standard keyboard , 120-240 V
Amber, text terminal, standard keyboard, 120-240 V
White, text terminal, standard keyboard, 120-240 V

VT420-DD White, text terminal, WPS keyboard, 120-240 V
VT420-ED Green, text terminal, WPS keyboard, 120-240 V
VT420-FD Amber, text terminal, WPS keyboard, 120-240 V
VT420-TD White, text terminal, WPS keyboard , 120-240 V

VT420-AE
VT420-BE
VT420-CE
VT420-SE

White, text terminal, standard keyboard, 120-240 V
Green, text terminal, standard keyboard, 120-240 V
Amber, text terminal, standard keyboard, 120-240 V
White, text terminal, standard keyboard, 120-240 V

VT420-DE
VT420-EE
VT420-FE
VT420-TE

U.S. Low Magnetic Field
Belgium (Flemish)
Low Magnetic Field
Canada (French)
Low Magnetic Field
Denmark
Low Magnetic Field
U.K./Ireland
Low Magnetic Field

White, text terminal, WPS keyboard, 120-240 V
Green, text terminal, WPS keyboard , 120-240 V
Amber, text terminal, WPS keyboard , 120-240 V
White, text terminal, WPS keyboard, 120-240 V

Terminals and Printers

8.11

VT420 Text Terminal
Ordering Information (Continued)
Finland
Low Magnetic Field
Germany/Austria
Low Magnetic Field
Netherlands
Low !vfagnetic Field
Italy
Low Magnetic Field
Switzerland
(French)
Low Magnetic Field
Switzerland
(German)
Low Magnetic Field
Sweden
Norway
Low Magnetic Field
France
Low Magnetic Field
South America/
Mexico
Spain
Low Magnetic Field
Israel
Portugal
Australia/
New Zealand

Model
Number
VT420-AF
VT420-BF
VT420-CF
VT420-SF

White, text terminal, standard keyboard , 120-240 V
Green, text terminali standard keyboardd 120-240 V
Amber, text termina , standard keroar , 120-240 V
White, text terminal, standard key oard, 120-240 V

VT420-AG White, text terminal, standard keyboard , 120-240 V
VT420-BG Green, text terminali standard keyboar~ 120-240 V
VT420-CG Amber, text termina, standard kebboar , 120-240 V
VT420-SG White, text terminal, standard key oard, 120-240 V
VT420-AH White, text terminal, standard keyboard, 120-240 V
VT420-BH Green, text terminali standard keyboar~ 120-240 V
VT420-CH Amber, text termina , standard kebboar , 120-240 V
VT420-SH White, text terminal, standard key oard, 120-240 V
VT420-AI White, text terminal, standard keyboard, 120-240 V
VT420-BI Green, text terminaJ standard keyboard, 120-240 V
VT420-CI Amber, text termin , standard kebboard, 120-240 V
VT420-SI White, text terminal, standard key oard, 120-240 V
VT420-AK White, text terminal, standard keyboard, 120-240 V
VT420-BK Green, text terminal standard keyboard 120-240 V
VT420-CK Amber, text terminal, standard kebboard, 120-240 V
VT420-SK White, text terminal, standard key oard, 120-240 V
VT420-AL White, text terminal, standard keyboard, 120-240 V
VT420-BL Green, text terminali standard keyboard, 120-240 V
VT420-CL Amber, text termina , standard kebboard, 120-240 V
VT420-SL White, text terminal, standard key oard, 120-240 V
VT420-AM White, text terminal, standard keyboard, 120-240 V
VT420-AN White, text terminal, standard keyboard, 120-240 V
VT420-BN Green, text terminal standard keyboard, 120-240 V
VT420-CN Amber, text terminal, standard kebboard, 120-240 V
VT420-SN White, text terminal, standard key oard, 120-240 V
VT420-AP White, text terminal, standard keyboard, 120-240 V
VT420-BP Green, text terminali standard keyboard, 120-240 V
VT420-CP Amber, text termina, standard kebboard , 120-240 V
VT420-SP White, text terminal, standard key oard, 120-240 V
VT420-AR White, text terminal, standard keyboard, 120-240 V
VT420-BR Green, text terminali standard keyboar~ 120-240 V
VT420-CR Amber, text termina , standard kebboar , 120-240 V
VT420-AS White, text terminal, standard key oard, 120-240 V
VT420-BS Green, text terminali standard keyboar~ 120-240 V
VT420-CS Amber, text termina, standard kebboar , 120-240 V
VT420-SS White, text terminal, standard key oard, 120-240 V
VT420-AT White, text terminal, standard keyboard, 120-240 V
VT420-BT Green, text terminal, standard keyboard, 120-240 V
VT420-AV White, text terminal, standard keyboard, 120-240 V
VT420-BV Green, text terminal, standard keyboard, 120-240 V
VT420-AZ White, text terminal, standard keyboard, 120-240 V
VT420-BZ Green, text terminal standard keyboard 120-240 V
VT420-CZ Amber, text terminal, standard keyboard, 120-240 V

Accessories and Supplies

8.12

Model
Number

Description

Terminals and Printers

Description
VT420-DF White, text terminal, WPS keyboard , 120-240 V
VT420-EF Green, text terminaJ WPS keyboar~ 120-240 V
VT420-FF Amber, text termin , WPS kebboar , 120-240 V
VT420-TF White, text terminal, WPS key oard, 120-240 V
VT420-DG White, text terminal, WPS keyboard, 120-240 V
VT420-EG Green, text terminal, WPS keyboard, 120-240 V
VT420-FG Amber, text terminal, WPS kebboard, 120-240 V
VT420-TG White, text terminal, WPS key oard, 120-240 V
VT420-DH White, text terminal, WPS keyboard , 120-240 V
VT420-EH Green, text terminali WPS keyboard , 120-240 V
VT420-FH Amber, text termina, WPS kebboard, 120-240 V
VT420-TH White, text terminal, WPS key oard, 120-240 V
VT420-DI White, text terminal, WPS keyboard , 120-240 V
VT420-EI Green, text terminal WPS keyboard, 120-240 V
VT420-FI Amber, text terminal, WPS kebboard, 120-240 V
VT420-TI White, text terminal, WPS key oard, 120-240 V
VT420-DK White, text terminal, WPS keyboard , 120-240 V
VT420-EK Green, text terminaJ WPS keyboard, 120-240 V
VT420-FK Amber, text termin , WPS kebboard, 120-240 V
VT420-TK White, text terminal, WPS key oard, 120-240 V
VT420-DL White, text terminal, WPS keyboard , 120-240 V
VT420-EL Green, text terminali WPS keyboard, 120-240 V
VT420-FL Amber, text termina , WPS kebboard , 120-240 V
VT420-TL White, text terminal, WPS key oard, 120-240 V
VT420-DM White, text terminal, WPS keyboard , 120-240 V
VT420-DN White, text terminal, WPS keyboard, 120-240 V
VT420-EN Green, text terminal! WPS keyboar~ 120-240 V
VT420-FN Amber, text termina , WPS kebboar , 120-240 V
VT420-TN White, text terminal, WPS key oard, 120-240 V
VT420-DP White, text terminal, WPS keyboard, 120-240 V
VT420-EP Green, text terminali WPS keyboard, 120-240 V
VT420-FP Amber, text termina, WPS kebboard, 120-240 V
VT420-TP White, text terminal, WPS key oard, 120-240 V
VT420-DR White, text terminal, WPS keyboard, 120-240 V
VT420-ER Green, text terminali WPS keyboar~ 120-240 V
VT420-FR Amber, text termina , WPS kebboar , 120-240 V
VT420-DS White, text terminal, WPS key oard, 120-240 V
VT420-ES Green, text terminali WPS keyboar~ 120-240 V
VT420-FS Amber, text termina , WPS kebboar , 120-240 V
VT420-TS White, text terminal, WPS key oard, 120-240 V
VT420-CT Amber, text terminal, standard keyboard,
120-240
VT420-CV Amber, text terminal, standard keyboard,
120-240
VT420-DZ White, text terminal, WPS keyboard, 120-240 V
VT420-EZ Green, text terminaJ WPS keyboar~ 120-240 V
VT420-FZ Amber, text termin , WPS keyboar , 120-240 V

v
v

For more information, refer to the DECdirect catalog.
EK-VT420-RM

VT420 Programmer's Reference Guide

H8673-AA

20 mA active host Mate-N-Lok to EIA-423 DECconnect MMJ
passive converter

H8673-AB

20 mA active host RJll (6 pin) to EIA-423 DECconnect MMJ
passive converter

VSXXX-HA

DECwand bar code reader, 6-mil aperture, visible red light

VSXXX-HB

DECwand bar code reader, 8-mil aperture, visible red light

VT4XX-GF

VT420 screen filter with static protection (qty. 1)

VT4XX-XG

VT420 screen filter with static protection (qty. 5)

VT4XX-XF

VT420 screen filter with static protection (qty. 75)

VT3XX-SC

Video screen cleaner

VT4XX-GF

VT420 anti-glare screen

LK4XX-KC
LK4XX-KD
LK4XX-KH
LK4XX-KJ

Clear, blank, full keyboard overlay (1O/box)
Clear, blank, numeric keypad overlay (15/box)
KED/EDT numeric keypad overlay (10/box)
Blank keycap set (108/set)

VT420 Text Terminal
Specifications

Physical Characteristics

Height
Width
Depth
Weight

VT420 Terminal

LK401 Keyboard

31.2 cm (12.3 in.)
31.5 cm (12.4 in.)
33.0 cm (13.0 in.)
8.5 kg (18.7 lb)

4.5 cm (1.75 in.)
47 .8 cm (18.8 in.)
17.8 cm (7.0 in.)
1.4 kg (3.0 lb)

Dual-Session Modes: Single or dual, independent set-up characteristics
Screen Characteristics

Type

14-inch flat-surfaced, anti-glare CRT, overscan

Refresh rates

70 Hz, 60 Hz (selectable)

Phosphors

Paper white (P192), amber (P194), or green (P31) Low
Magnetic Field model-paper white only

Resolution

800 pixels x 414 scan lines

Display format

Full screen of 24, 36, or 48 data lines, terminal
indicator line, optional status line each session. Other
formats of 25, 40, and 50 data lines depend on font
size, page size, and status line display selections.

Column/ rows:

80x24

132x24

80x36

132x36

80x48

132x48

Cell size

10x16

6x16

lOxlO

6x 10

10x8

6x8

8x10

5 x9

8x7

5 x7

8x6

5x7

Character size
Status lines

1 per session, set-up selectable

Cursor selection

On/off, block/underline, blink/steady

Attributes

Normal, reverse, underline, bold, blink, double width,
double height, double height/width

Scrolling:

Types
Rates

Vertical and horizontal on full display or within defined
rectangular region
Jump, scroll 2 (9 lines per second), scroll 4
(18 lines per second)

Keyboard (LK401)

108 keys, tactile feel , full matte finish, sculptured key caps, volume selections for
keyclick, margin bell, and warning bell
Modes

Novice and extended

Character location
selections

Set-up choices for: greater than/less than (><), shift
comma and period (, and .), tilde/single quote(-'), and
escape (ESC)

Copy/paste

Up to a full screen of 24 lines by 132 columns can be
copied within or between sessions

Function keys

15 shiftable to 30, 15 host programmable,
256 bytes per session

Local Memory: Single-Session Mode

Page configuration

6 pages of 24 lines; 5 pages of 25 lines;
4 pages of 36 lines; 3 pages of 48 lines;
2 pages of 72 lines; 1 page of 144 lines

Macro buffer

6,000 bytes

Terminals and Printers

8.13

VT420 Text Terminal
Specifications (Continued)

Local Memory: Dual-Session Mode (per session)
Page configuration

3 pages of 24 lines; 2 pages of 25 lines;
2 pages of 36 lines; 1 page of 48 lines;
1 page of 72 lines

Macro buffer

6,000 bytes per session

Addressable by

Page(s), rectangle(s) , line(s), character(s)

Rectangular
operations

Copy, fill, erase, change attributes, insert/ delete columns

Character Sets: ASCII, DEC supplemental, DEC special graphics, ISO Latin-1,
DEC technical, 7-bit NRCS 1'
'~ International and Low Magnetic Field models only

Communications
Full-duplex asynchronous with selectable local echo full modem control. ;~ 7-bit
or 8-bit character length, 1 or 2 stop bits
Speeds

300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19,200, and 38,400
baud (set-up selectable). Transmit and receive rates can
be set separately.

Parity

Even, odd, none, even no-check (7- or 8-bit); mark,
space (7 -bit only), set-up selectable. Transmit and receive
must be the same.

Interface

North American: 2 DEC-423 (MMJ) (1 as alternate
printer port), 10-foot 0-meter) 25-pin adapter cable
included; International and Low Magnetic Field: 1
DEC-423 (MMJ) , 1 EIA-232 (25-pin) , and 1 printer port

(MMJ)
Printer Port: Full bidirectional communications; assignable to either session or
shared between sessions; supports Digital desktop printers. May alternately be
configured as second DEC-423 port for 2-wire dual session.
Power Cord/Power Supply: North American-attached, 120 V; International and
Low Magnetic Field-detached, auto range 120-240 V
Standards: North American-FCC Class A certification, UL, CSA, IEC; International-FCC Class B, GS certification, UL, CSA, IEC, VDE-B; Low Magnetic
Field-Swedish Radioprotection Institute (SSI) conformance on low-frequency
magnetic fields and low electrostatic fields, FCC Class B, GS certification, UL,
CSA, IEC, VDE-B
Environment
Operating

Storage

Temperature

10° to 40° C
(50° to 104° F)

-40° to 66° C
(-40° to 151 ° F)

Relative humidity

10% - 90%

50% - 95 %

Maximum wet bulb

28° C (82° F)

46° C (115 ° F)

Minimum dew point

2° C (36° F)

NIA

Maximum altitude

24 ,000 m (8000 ft)

49,000 m (16,000 ft)

Power cord

Attached, 3-conductor grounded, 5-15P plug; detached
for all International and Low Magnetic Field versions.

* VT420 International and Low Magnetic Field models only

8.14

Terminals and Printers

VT420 with PCT erm Text Terminal
VT420 with PCTerm is· a multi-personality video text terminal adapted to the
needs of users in the UNIX and multi-user DOS markets. It is particularly suited
to timesharing on INTEL 386/486-based computers using operating systems supplied by the Santa Cruz Operation (SCO) or multi-user DOS companies. This
model will be of interest to other UNIX users or to users who prefer a PC-style
keyboard.
VT420 with PCTerm includes the industry-standard enhanced 101/102 key
PC-style keyboard and PCTerm capabilities. These include: the standard PC character set, 25-line presentation, and XPC XON/XOFF communications protocol.
These additional capabilities adapt to operating systems such as SCO/UNIX,
UNIX and multi-user DOS.
VT420 with PCTerm provides the user with dual sessions in PC (50 lines) and VT
(48 lines) modes, copy and paste, rectangular area operations, and downline
loadable macros. SSU (Session Support Utility) is supported in VT mode. See
Chapter 9, Software and Services, for more information on SSU software.
As a multi-personality terminal, the user can operate the terminal with two
sessions in either mode:
• PCTerm Mode: This mode is adapted to the standards and expectations of UNIX
and multiuser DOS opccrating system users. With the enhanced PC-style keyboard
and screen presentation, the VT420 with PCTerm terminal is the appropriate
interface device.
· VT/PC mode: In this mode, VT420 with PCTerm can function as a standard
VT420 terminal with a PC keyboard.
Features

· Displays 800- x 414 -pixel resolution at a flicker-free 70-Hz refresh rate with full
overs can
· Provides superior presentation clarity
· 3-year return-to-factory warranty
• Provides advanced functionality of the standard VT420 in both the 80- and
132-column settings
·Multi-personality terminal emulation: PCTerm mode and VT/PC mode
· Includes PC character set and PC keyboard scan codes
· Term Cap/Term Info files are available for most popular UNIX operating
systems
· Complies with Swedish MPR II low emissions (LE) requirements

Ordering Information

VT420 PCTerm terminal includes paper white screen and international power
supply. MPR II low emissions compliance is standard in all models.

VT42A-SA
VT42A-SB
VT42A-SD
VT42A-SE
VT42A-SF
VT42A-SG
VT42A-SH
VT42A-SI
VT42A-SK
VT42A-SN
VT42A-SP
VT42A-SS
VT42A-SV
VT42A-AZ

U.S./English
Belgium/Flemish
Denmark/Danish
U.K., Ireland/ English
Finland, Sweden/Finnish, Swedish
Germany, Austria/German
Holland/Dutch
Italy/Italian
Switzerland/French, German
Norway/ Norwegian
France/French
Spain/Spanish
Portugal/Portuguese
Australia, New Zealand/English

Terminals and Printers

8.15

VT420 with PCT erm Text Terminal
Specifications
Physical Characteristics

Monitor Box
Keyboard

Weight

Height

Width

Depth

8.5 kg
(18.7 lb)
1.4 kg
(3 lb)

31.2 cm
(12.3 in.)
4.5 cm
(1.75 in.)

31.5 cm
(12.4 in.)
4.78
(18.8 in.)

33.0 cm
(13 in.)
19.1 cm
(7 in.)

Environment
Operating

Storage

10° to 40° C (50° to 104 ° F)
. 10 % to 90%
28° C (82° F)
2° C (36° F)
24 ,000 meters (8000 ft)

Temperature
Relative humidity
Maximum wet bulb
Minimum dew point
Maximum altitude

-40° to 66° C (-40° to 151° F)

50% to 95%
46° C (115° F)

NIA
49,000 meters (16,000 ft)

Electrical
Voltage
Frequency range
Power cord

88 to 264 V - single phase, three wire
47 to 63 Hz
Detached 3-conductor grounded, 5-15 plug

Specifications by Mode of Operation
Single Session
fl.I

Combined
Dual Session

Screen Characteristics

VT/PC

PCTerm

VT/PC

PCTerm

VT/PC: PCTerm

·1

Display:
Data lines per session

Eo-c

Dual Session

24125136148/50

24/25/36/48/50

24/25/36/ 48/50:25

Session status line

Yes

Yes:No

Terminal indicator line

Yes

Yes:Yes

80/ 132

80/132

80/132:80

Page(s):
Number of columns
Rows
Pages per session
Advanced programming functions :
Text windows (rectangular area op.)

3:1

Yes

Yes:Yes

Horizontal/vertical scrolling

Yes

Yes:Yes

Local macros

Yes

Yes:Yes

Redefinable characters sets (RDCS)

2:2

Programmable function keys:
Number keys per session (UDKs)

NIA
NIA

48:N/A

l.5K

NIA
NIA

Yes

No:No

Yes

Yes:Yes

NIA
NIA

24-50

25:25

Yes

Yes:No

Yes

Yes:No

NIA

Yes

No:No

Memory per session
Dual sessions:
Single wire
Dual wire
Split screen viewing:
Lines per session
Dynamic viewing adjustment
Local copy/ paste:
Within session
Between sessions

8.16

Terminals and Printers

768 bytes

768:N/A

VT420 with PCT erm Text Terminal
Specifications (Continued)
Screen Characteristics

Screen attributes:
Cursor selection

On/ off, block/underline, blink/steady

Attributes

Normal, reverse, underline, bold , blink, double width, double height, double height/width

Scrolling
Types
Rates
Keyboards LK443/LK444
(U .S./lnternational)
Local memory:
Page configuration
Macro buffer

Vertical and horizontal on full display or within defined rectangular region
Jump, scroll 2 (9 lines per second), scroll 4 (18 lines per second)
101- or 102-key, tactile quality, full matte finish, sculptured key caps, volume selection for
keyclick, margin bell, and warning bell
Single Session Mode:
6 pages of 24 lines; 5 pages of 25 lines; 4 pages of 36 lines; 3 pages of 48 lines; 2 pages
of 72 lines; 1 page of 144 lines
6,000 bytes
Dual Session Mode (per session):

Page configuration
Macro buffer

3 pages of 24 lines; 2 pages of 25 lines; 2 pages of 36 lines; 1 page of 48 lines; 1 page of
72 lines
6,000 bytes

Addressable by

Page(s), rectangle(s), line(s), character(s)

Rectangular operations

Copy, fill, erase, change attributes, insert/ delete columns

Character sets

ASCII, DEC supplemental, DEC Special Graphics, ISO Latin-1 , DEC technical, 7-bit NRCS,
PC International

Communications

Full-duplex asynchronous with selectable local echo and full modem control. 7-bit or 8-bit
character

Speeds

300 to 38.4K Baud

Interface

One DEC-423 (MMJ), one EIA-232 25-pin, and one printer port (MMJ).

Printer port

Full bidirectional communications; assignable to either session or shared between sessions;
supports Digital desktop printers. May alternately be configured in set up as second
DEC-423 port for 2-wire dual session.

Power cord/power supply

Detached, auto range 120-240 V.

Standards

FCC class B, GS certification, UL, CSA, IEC, VDE-B. Low Emissions (LE)-Swedish
Radioprotection Institute (SRI) conformance on low frequency magnetic fields and low
electrostatic fields.

Terminals and Printers

8.17

VT340+ Graphics Terminal
The VT340+ color graphics terminal provides high-resolution and high-quality
fully-formed characters. The VT340+ has a 13-inch screen and can display up to
16 colors from a palette of 4096. It features a 25th status line. For operator
viewing comfort, it includes a pedestal with tilt and swivel capabilities.
VT340+ terminals offer a three-year warranty.
VT340+ terminals offer features such as a bidirectional printer port for connecting a local printer or an alternate input device and the ability to connect to more
than one host over a single wire. Because they do not have cooling fans, they are
quiet and their covers hide all cables to provide a clean appearance.
A MicroDIN connector is provided with the VT340+ terminal to connect an
optional mouse or tablet which is supported in ReGIS and Tektronix 4010/4014
graphics modes.
Improved performance is due to Digital's proprietary graphics chipset, the same
graphics processors used in Digital's high-end workstations. They offer full text
and graphics capabilities including support for the ReGIS and Tektronix
4010/4014 graphics protocols.

Ordering Information

8.18

Terminals and Printers

For quantity orders (25+) or when ordering any VT300 series terminal with a
system, or upgrade, use the DL prefix. For orders of quantities from 1-24, use
the order numbers listed, without a prefix.
U.S.

VT340-GA
VT340-KA

Color graphics terminal with standard keyboard, 120 V
Color graphics terminal with WPS keyboard, 120 V

Belgium

VT340-GB
VT340-KB

Color graphics terminal with standard keyboard, 240 V
Color graphics terminal with English keyboard, 240 V

Canada

VT340-GC
VT340-KC

Color graphics terminal with standard keyboard, 120 V
Color graphics terminal with French WPS keyboard , 120 V

Denmark

VT340-GD
VT340-KD

Color graphics terminal with standard keyboard , 240 V
Color graphics terminal with English keyboard, 240 V

U.K./lreland

VT340-GE
VT340-KE

Color graphics terminal with standard keyboard , 240 V
Color graphics terminal with WPS keyboard , 240 V

Finland

VT340-GF
VT340-KF

Color graphics terminal with standard keyboard , 240 V
Color graphics terminal with English keyboard, 240 V

Germany/
Austria

VT340-GG
VT340-KG

Color graphics terminal with standard keyboard, 240 V
Color graphics terminal with English keyboard, 240 V

Holland

VT340-GH
VT340-KH

Color graphics terminal with standard keyboard, 240 V
Color graphics terminal with English keyboard, 240 V

Italy

VT340-GI
VT340-KI

Color graphics terminal with standard keyboard , 240 V
Color graphics terminal with English keyboard , 240 V

Switzerland
(French)

VT340-GK
VT340-KK

Color graphics terminal with standard keyboard , 240 V
Color graphics terminal with English keyboard, 240 V

Switzerland
(German)

VT340-GL
VT340-KL

Color graphics terminal with standard keyboard, 240 V
Color graphics terminal with English keyboard , 240 V

Sweden

VT340-GM
VT340-KM

Color graphics terminal with standard keyboard , 240 V
Color graphics terminal with English keyboard , 240 V

Norway

VT340-GN
VT340-KN

Color graphics terminal with standard keyboard , 240 V
Color graphics terminal with English keyboard , 240 V

France

VT340-GP
VT340-KP

Color graphics terminal with standard keyboard, 240 V
Color graphics terminal with English keyboard, 240 V

Spain

VT340-GS
VT340-KS

Color graphics terminal with standard keyboard, 240 V
Color graphics terminal with English keyboard , 240 V

Portugal

VT340-GV
VT340-KV

Color graphics terminal with standard keyboard, 240 V
Color graphics terminal with English keyboard , 240 V

Australia/
New Zealand

VT340-GZ
VT340-KZ

Color graphics terminal with standard keyboard, 240 V
Color graphics terminal with WPS keyboard , 240 V

VT340+ Graphics Terminal
Ordering Information
(Continued)
Accessories and Supplies

For more information, refer to the DECdirect catalog.

VT2XX-AA
VSXXX-AA
VSXXX-EB
VSXXX-AB
VSXXX-HA
VSXXX-HB
VTJXX-XX
H8673-AA

VT200/VT300 family system stand
Mouse
Mouse pad
Graphics tablet
DECwand bar code reader, 6 mil aperture, visible red light
DECwand bar code reader, 8 mil aperture, visible red light
VT220/VT320 monitor arm
20 mA active host Mate-N-Lok to EIA-423 DECconnect MMJ
passive converter
20 mA active host RJll (6 pin) to EIA-423 DECconnect MMJ
passive converter

H8673-AB

Specifications

Physical Characteristics
36.83 cm (14.5 in.)
39.4 cm (15.5 in.)
42.9 cm (16.9 in.)
15.4 kg (34.0 lb)

Height
Width
Depth
Weight
Screen Characteristics
Type

13-inch convex anti-glare CRT

Resolution

800 pixels x 500 lines

Shades

16 colors from a palette of 4096

Display format

Full screen, 24 lines plus 25th status line;
vertical split screens for session 1 and 2;
horizontal split screens (variable) for session 1
and 2

Column/rows: Cell Size

80-column mode 10 x 20;
132-column mode 6 x 20
80-column mode, 8 or 9 x 11;
132-column mode, 4 or 5 x 9

Character Size
Local memory

Single session mode: 6 pages @ 24 lines; 4 pages
@ 36 lines; 2 pages @ 72 lines; 1 page @ 144 lines
Dual session mode: 3 pages@ 24 lines; 2 pages @
36 lines; 1 page @ 72 lines
Graphics storage: two full screen graphics
images

Operating Environment
Temperature
Relative humidity
Altitude

10° to 40° C (50° to 104 ° F)
10% to 90%
9.1 km (30,000 ft)

Power Requirements
Voltage
Frequency
Phases
Current ac amps (maximum)
NEMA receptacle type
Heat dissipation
Thermal dissipation (Watts)

120
50-60 Hz
Single
1.16
5-15R
222 Btu/h
60

240 v
50-60 Hz
Single
2.1
5-15R
376 Btu/h
60

Terminals and Printers

8.19

Industrial Terminals
'

IT330 and IT340 Industrial Terminals
The IT330 and IT340 industrial terminals consist of VT330 and VT340 graphics
terminals packaged in rugged, sealed NEMA-12 enclosures. They have the same
text and graphics capabilities as Digital's VT330 and VT340 terminals. NEMA-12
sealing protects the terminals from failures caused by dirt, airborne particles,
noncorrosive liquids, and leaking oil or coolants. Tough enclosures protect the
terminals from vibration or rough handling, and a high-impact shield protects
the monitors against breakage. Their unique, passive cooling design lets the terminals withstand higher operating temperatures than ordinary office terminals.
The IT3 XX-AA membrane keyboard and IT3 XX-AB tactile keyboard, also sealed
to NEMA-12 standards, are available for both the IT330 and IT340. Optional
rackmount and wallmount kits are available for both IT330/340 terminals and
IT3XX keyboards.
Note: All IT330 terminals are graphics terminals with NEMA-12 enclosures.

Ordering Information

IT330-A2/A3

Monochrome, white phosphor, VT330 functionality,
120 V/240 V.

IT330-B2/B3

Monochrome, green phosphor, VT330 functionality,
120 V/240 V.

IT330-C2/C3

Monochrome, amber phosphor, VT330 functionality,
120 V/240 V.

IT340-A2/A3

Color, Northern Hemisphere, VT340 functionality,
120 V/240 V.

IT340-A5

Color, Southern Hemisphere, VT340 functionality, 240 V.

Note: Terminal order numbers do not include the keyboard.

ITJXX-AA

NEMA-12 flat membrane keyboard.

ITJXX-AB

NEMA-12 tactile keyboard.

ITJXX-RA

Rackmount kit for IT330 and IT340.

ITJXX-WA

Wallmount kit for IT330 and IT340.

Note: For additional information, contact the EIC Sales Support Center at
800-832-6277 or 603-884-8990.

VTN-Series Industrial Terminals
The VIN-Series of industrial terminals features VT330 and VT340 terminals
packaged in NEMA-2 enclosures, a standard that protects from falling dirt and
splashing noncorrosive liquids while the rugged enclosures protect from rough
handling.
Designed to operate in light industrial environments where office-grade equipment would fail , the VTN terminals can be located next to a manufacturing
process or assembly area, providing convenient graphics capability. The optional
rackmount kit allows installation in industry-standard 19-inch racks or cabinets.
Alternatively, they can sit on a tabletop.

Ordering Information

8.20

Terminals and Printers

VT33N-A2/A3

VT330 graphics terminal, NEMA-2 enclosure, monochrome,
white phosphor, no keyboard, 120 V/240 V.

VT33N-B2/B3

VT330 graphics terminal, NEMA-2 enclosure, monochrome,
green phosphor, no keyboard, 120 V/240 V.

Industrial Terminals
Ordering Information

VT33N-C2/C3

VT330 graphics terminal, NEMA-2 enclosure, monochrome,
amber phosphor, no keyboard, 120 V/240 V.

VT34N-A2/AJ

Color VT340 graphics terminal, NEMA-2 enclosure, no keyboard, 120 V/ 240 V.

ITJXX-AA

NEMA-12 flat membrane keyboard for VT33N/34N and
IT330/34 0.

ITJXX-AB

NEMA-12 rubber keyboard for VT33N/34N and IT330/340
terminals.

(Continued)

For non-120-V systems, order a power cord based on the particular country.

BN19A-2E
BN19C-2E
BN19E-2E
BN19H-2E
BN19K-2E
BN19M-2E
BN19S-2E

United Kingdom, Ireland
.
Austria, Belgium, France, Germany, Finland, Holland,
Norway, Sweden, Portugal, Spain
Switzerland
Australia, New Zealand
Denmark
Italy
India

Note: For additional information, contact the EiC Sales Support Center at
800-832-6277 or 603-884-8990.

Specifications
Environmental Characteristics

Physical Characteristics

Operating
Temperature

Relative
Humidity

Code
Standards

Height

Width

Depth

Weight
VT33N

Weight
VT34N

10° C to 40° C

20 % or less

NEMA-2,

40.0 cm

44.5 cm

45.72 cm

27.5 kg

32.6 kg

50° F to 104° F

to 80 %

FCC Class A

15.75 in.

17.2 in.

19.1 in.

61.0 lb

72.0 lb

Terminals and Printers

8.21

MD30C Color Scanner
The MD30C is an affordable, desktop 300-dpi scanner that works with workstations and personal computers running software that transfers scanned data into
computer files. The MD30C color scanner and assbciated software allow
scanned-in data to be displayed on the computer screen, then modified, stored,
or printed.
In color mode, the MD30C scanner scans full-color images to enhance office
documents or create effective illustrations. It also provides accurate representations of black-and-white (bitonal or grayscale) hardcopy information, including
photographs. The scanner offers 16.4 million shades of each color or up to 256
shades of gray.
The MD30C scanner works with DECimage Scan Software on workstations in
VMS and RISC ULTRIX environments and with Image-In Color scanning software
on PCs to easily transfer scanned data into usable computer files. The scanning
software then allows scanned images to be previewed, cropped, rotated, washed,
inverted, or magnified.
On VAX VMS and RISC ULTRIX platforms, DECimage character recognition
software allows scanned-in hardcopy text to be converted to ASCII, PostScript,
or Digital Document Interchange Format (DDIF) files. Scanned-in data can also
be integrated into new or existing documents, or mailed electronically over the
network. The MD30C scanner can also be used with CDA-compliant publishing
software, such as DECpresent and DECwrite.
Features
· Captures te){t, line art, and photographs in original hardcopy form and transfers
them into the computer system
· Offers color, grayscale and bitonal scanning to give accurate representation of all
hardcopy images
· Provides affordable alternative to rekeying text or recreating artwork on the
system
• Scans at 300 dpi in 10 seconds in bitonal mode, 37 seconds in grayscale mode,
and 13 0 seconds in color mode
· Requires no special operator training

Prerequisites

Workstations
Hardware
• VAXstation 3100
• VAXstation 4000
· DECstation 3100
· DECstation 5000
· 6 Mbytes of memory
· RZ24 209-Mbyte disk drive
· VT Series color monitor

Software
· VMS Version 5 .4-2 or later
· DECwindows Motif Version 1.0
·DECnet VAX V5.3-V5.5 Open
(Phase IV End Node) for remote
· Scanning and mail
· DECimage Scan Software for
·VMS V3.0

Personal Computers
Hardware
Software
·DECstation 320, 325, 333 , 425
• MS-DOS V3 .3 or later; Microsoft
Windows V3.0
• DECpc 433
· IBM PC compatibles
· 2 Mbytes of memory (four recommended for editing color images)
• 70 Mbytes of disk storage
·VGA, 8514, XGA or any
Windows-compatible display with resolution
of at least 640 x 480; 256-color or
true-color; 24-bit display recommended

8.22

Terminals and Printers

MD30C Color Scanner
Ordering Information

The MD30C color scanner is offered in four configurations: hardware-only, with
VMS license, with RISC ULTRIX license, and with Image-In Color license.
Note: -Ax = hardware only; -Bx = with VMS license; -Cx =with Image-In Color
license; -Dx = with RISC ULTRIX license.

MD30C-AA
MD30C-BA
MD30C-CA
MD30C-DA

MD30C scanner for U.S./Canada; hardware only
MD30C scanner for U.S./Canada; with VMS license
MD30C scanner for U.S./Canada; with Image-In Color license
MD30C scanner for U.S./Canada; with RISC ULTRIX license

Note: For international models, replace A with: D = Denmark;
E = U.K./Ireland; I = Italy; J = Japan; K = Switzerland;
T = Israel; Z = Australia/New Zealand; X = Austria,
Belgium, Finland, France, Germany, Holland, Norway,
Portugal, Spain, Sweden
Accessories

MD3XC-HA
BC56H-06
BC19J-06
PC4XR-CC
12-30552-01

Specifications

Physical Characteristics

Fluorescent bulb, 8 watts
SCSI cable for workstations
SCSI cable for PCs
16-bit SCSI adapter for PCs
SCSI terminator

Height
Width
Depth
Weight

120 mm (4 .7 in.)
353 mm (13.9 in.
545 mm (21.5 in.)
11 kg (24 lbs.)

Performance Characteristics

Resolution
Scanning Speed

Document Size
Operation Mode

Interface

Up to 300 dpi
Bitonal (10 seconds)
Grayscale (3 7 seconds)
Color (130 seconds)
Up to 8.5 x 14 in. (216 mm x 356 mm)
Bi tonal
8-bit grayscale
24-bit color
SCSI-2

Operating Environment

Noise Level
Operating Temperature
Relative Humidity
Power Consumption (Watts)
Regulatory Compliance

< 55 dBA
10° to 40° C (50° to 104 ° F)
35% to 80 %
40
UL, CSA, FCC, VDE, veer, ZZF

Terminals and Printers

8.23

MD410 Document Image Scanner
The MD410 is a departmental document scanner. The MD410 product is a SCSI,
grayscale, 15-page-per-minute (at 200 dots per inch), desktop, document image
scanner with automated document feeder (ADF). It is manufactured by Ricoh
and distributed by Digital for use with DECimage compatible software solutions
to address customer needs in the document image management market.
With a VAXstation and an image capture capability (MD410 Scanner/ DECimage
Scanning Software), information on paper-photographs, line drawings, business
forms, engineering sketches, etc.-can be entered into the computer-based information system of the workgroup, department, or enterprise.
The software features pull-down menus and windows, and uses keyboard and
mouse input for easy operation. This capability not only scans images but also
accepts any image file that conforms to Digital's Document Interchange Format
(DDIF) . This includes images from DECimage EXpress, Digital's first preconfigured document image management system.
Once scanned into the system, the image can be displayed on a workstation,
modified, stored, mailed electronically, or incorporated into compound documents using DECwrite, VAX DOCUMENT, or a number of third-party compound
document editors. It can be used across all industries where there is a requirement to reduce paper-intensive operations to easily managed, retrievable electronic images.

Features

· Customer installable

· Scanning system: stationary flat bed
• Simplex scanning
·Scanning area: maximum of B size paper (11-inch x 17-inch)
· 50-page automatic document feeder (ADF) for 3-inch x 5-inch to
11-inch x 17-inch documents
• Maximum 15 pages per minute at 200 dpi
·Up to 17,000 pages/ month per scanner
• Bitonal and grayscale scanning
• Grayscale: 8 bits per pixel (256 gray levels)
• 75 to 400 dots per inch (dpi) resolution
· Optional hardcopy endorser
• SCSI-2 interface
• Onboard compression
Compatible Applications/Solutions

The MD410-AA scanner is compatible with DECimage Application Services (DAS)
V3 .0 development toolkit and with two currently available DECimage software
applications:
· Standalone-The MD410 scanner can be used to capture images with a singleuser software application called DECimage Scan Software (DSS).

The DECimage Scan Software product is a VMS-DECwindows application to
operate the MD410 from a VAXstation 3100 as a standalone image capture/
acquisition workstation. Images captured and adjusted with DSS are stored in
DDIF-compatible files which can be used by other applications (e.g. , DECwrite)
that use image data.

8.24

Terminals and Printers

MD410 Document Image Scanner
Compatible Applications/Solutions
(Continued)

·In DECimage EXpress-The MD410 is the primary input device for the multiuser document image management software solution, DECimage EXpress Vl.O.
DECimage EXpress is Digital's first preconfigured VMS document image management system using a combination of standard and custom hardware and software
products to meet development and product workgroup needs.

Performance

Performance is a function of two overall parameters: speed of the scanner and
throughput capabilities of the workstation plus application(s) that drive the scanner. Most typical end-user configurations result in a throughput in the "nominal"
range. The upper end of the throughput range is attainable only with the most
streamlined configuration and scanner settings.
Testing configuration: VAXstation 3100/40 with 16-Mbyte memory running
VMS V5 .4 and DSS V2 .1
Settings:

Bitonal, scanner compression ON

Images scanned:

Ten 8.5- x 11-inch pages using ADF mode

Scanner resolution:
Nominal throughput:

100 dpi
17-14 ppm

200 dpi
15-11 ppm

300 dpi
10.5-10 ppm

Notes:
Average time/sheet calculated, high and low times discarded, translated to pages
per minute.
Throughput is defined as scanning the documents and storing the compressed
image on internal disk.
Some scanner features (e.g., endorser, grayscale, uncompressed scanning) will
significantly slow scanner throughput below the nominal range.

Prerequisites

Hardware
· VAXstation 3100 Models 30, 40, 38, 48, or 76
· One 50-pin SCSI terminator
• One SCSI interconnect cable (BC56H-68-pin to 50-pin)
·For daisychaining: one BC19J-50-pin to 50-pin interconnect cable
Software
·VMS V5.4
• DECimage Scan Software V2.1 plus associated prerequisites OR
· DECimage EXpress V2.0 plus associated prerequisites OR
• DECimage Application Services V3 .0 for VMS

Ordering Information

MD410-AA

MD410 document image scanner, includes 120-V power cord;
requires SCSI interconnect cable.

MD410-A3

MD410 document image scanner, requires SCSI interconnect
cable and 240-V power cord from the following list:
U.S., Canada
U.K., Ireland
Austria, Belgium, Finland, France, Germany, Holland, Norway,
Portugal, Spain, Sweden
Switzerland
Australia, New Zealand
Denmark
Italy
India
Israel

BN19P-1K
BN19A-2E
BN19W-2E
BN19E-2E
BN19H-2E
BN19K-2E
BN19Z-2E
BN19S-2E
BN19U-2E

Terminals and Printers

8.25

MD410 Document Image Scanner
Ordering Information
(Continued)

Accessories and Supplies

MD41X-EA
MD41X-RA
MD41X-LA
MD41X-SA

Specifications

Physical Characteristics
Height
Width
Depth
Weight

Programmable hard copy endorser for MD410-AA/A3
5-pack of replacement rollers for MD41X-EA endorser
Lamp replacement for MD410-AA/A3
User-replaceable separation roller

18 cm (7.1 in.)
69.8 cm (27.5 in.)
50 cm (19.7 in.)
38.2 kg (84 lb)

Power Requirements
Voltage
Frequency
Phases
Current ac amps (maximum)
Thermal dissipation (Watts)
Thermal dissipation (Btu/h)

120 v

45-65 Hz
1
1.5
123
420

Operating Environment
Temperature
Relative humidity

41° to 98° F (5° to 35° C)
30% to 85%

For additional information on the MD410, or DECimage EXpress Vl.O, contact
the EIC Sales Support Center, 800-832-6277 or 603-884-8990.

8.26

Terminals and Printers

MD400 Document Image Scanner
The MD400 is a document scanner for use with DECimage-compatible software
solutions to address customer business needs at the workgroup level of the
document image management market. The MD400 product is a SCSI, grayscale,
6- to 8-page-per-minute desktop, document image scanner for use with
VAXstation 3100 Models 30, 40, 38, 48, and 76. An optional automatic document feeder (ADF) is available.
The MD400 is compatible with two currently available DECimage software
applications:
· Standalone-The MD400 as a standalone image capture device with a single user
software application, called DECimage Scan Software (DSS).
• DECimage EXpress-The MD400 is an image-capture device for the multiuser
document image management software solution called DECimage EXpress Vl.O.
The DECimage Scan Software (DSS) product is a VMS-DECwindows application
that operates the MD400 from a VAXstation 3100 as a standalone image capture/
acquisition workstation. Images captured and adjusted with DSS are stored as
DDIF-compatible files which can be used by other applications (i.e., DECwrite)
that use image data.
Features
· Customer installable
• Scanning system: stationary flat bed
• Simplex (single-sided) scanning .
• Scanning area: maximum 8 1/2 x 14 inches
· Optional 30-page automatic document feeder
• Speed: 7 pages per minute at 300 dots per inch
·Volume: Up to 1000 pages/ month per scanner
• Bitonal and grayscale scanning
· Resolution: 75 to 400 dots per inch
· Interface: SCSI
For a custom quote or additional information, contact the EIC Sales Support
Center, 800-832-6277 or 603 -884-8990.

Terminals and Printers

8.27

2D and JD Programmable Peripherals for
CAD/CAM/CAE
The Lighted Programmable Function Keyboard (LPFK) and the Programmable
Function Dials (PFD) are workstation peripherals that complement Digital's
hardware and software solutions for the Computer-Aided Design (CAD) and
Computer-Aided Engineering (CAE) markets. The LPFK and the PFD can be
used either individually or simultaneously with any of Digital' s VMS or
ULTRIX/RISC-based workstations through the EIA-232-D (formerly RS-232-C)
serial port.
The Lighted Programmable Function Keyboard consists of 32 individually
programmable pushbuttons. Each button has a built-in LED and can be
programmed for specific application usage.
The Programmable Function Dial Box consists of eight valuator dials that rotate
360 degrees. The dials divide 360 degrees of rotation by 256 bits (each bit
corresponds to approximately 1.4 degrees per incremental change in rotation).
The function of each dial is defined by the application program and is typically
used to rotate and translate screen images.
The Peripheral Control Module is an intelligent interface box that provides individual or simultaneous access for both the LPFK and the PFD by multiplexing
these two peripheral devices to one common EIA-232-D serial port.
Features

• Fully compatible with all Digital workstations running VMS or ULTRIX/RISC.
· Supported by DEC Programmers' Hierarchical Interactive Graphics System (DEC
PHIGS) graphics standard. The PFD provides hardware for VALUATOR input
and LPFK provides hardware for CHOICE input.
· Fully programmable LPFK and PFD to support a variety of applications.

Ordering Information

The following peripherals may be ordered either in a packaged format or as
single units. These packages include the Peripherals Control Module (PCM),
exercisers, power supply, cables, and user documentation.
VSXlO-AA/A3
VSX20-AA/A3
VSX30-AA/A3

Combination LPFK and PFD package, 120 V /240 V
Lighted Programmable Function Keyboard, 120 V /240 V
Programmable Function Dial box package, 120 V /240 V

The following single units include the unit with its integral cable.
VSXXA-KA
VSXXA-DA
VSXXA-CA
H7824-AA/AB

Lighted Programmable Function Keyboard and cable.
Prerequisites: Peripheral control module and power supply.
Programmable Function Dials and cable. Prerequisites: Peripheral control module and power supply.
Peripheral Control Module-includes cable to the workstation,
user documentation, and exerciser. Prerequisite: power supply.
Power supply, 120 V /240 V.

For additional information, contact the EIC Sales Support Center, 800-832-6277
or 603-884-8990.

8.28

Terminals and Printers

Printers Introduction
Overview

The DECprint Architecture is Digital's model for printing. It meets the needs for
distributed printing and for managing a variety of printers. The DECprint Architecture supports the ANSI and ISO DPA standards and the PostScript page
description language used on Digital's printers. It also supports other page
description languages.
Through Network Application Support (NAS) print services, the DECprint Architecture provides standardized software interfaces to the printing system, which
enables application developers, OEMs, and ISVs to add new features. Third parties conforming to industry standards can connect directly to the Digital printing
system.
DECprint Architecture offers the following features:
·Integrates networked, heterogeneous systems (VMS, ULTRIX, UNIX, MS-DOS,
Macintosh, and OS/ 2) and their printers into a single printing system.
• Simplifies the user's interface to the printing system.
• Simplifies the programming interface to the printing system through standardized
software interfaces.
• Simplifies the configuration and management of the printing system for system
managers.
Within the DECprint Architecture, printers should be selected based on the user
and system environments and the network interconnection. Printers must be
considered part of the whole system and not just as peripherals.
The following are conditions that must be considered before deciding which
printer best fits a given application:
• Number of users and their locations
• Types of tasks to be performed
• Amount of floor space or table space available
• Computers to which printers connect
• Geographic location of computers
• Low cost per page (PrintServers) vs. user convenience (desktop printers)
• Method of interconnection among computers
• Type and size of documents printed
• Need for duplex (two-sided) printing
• Need for multiple images on a single side
• Need for multiple and/ or mixed forms (letterhead, envelopes, overhead transparencies, etc. )
• How quickly printouts are needed
• Volume of printing (pages per month)
• User care at specific print volume intervals
Consider printing requirements when selecting a printer from the following
technologies:

Nonimpact Printers

Impact Printers

• Laser. (PrintServers and desktop)
·Ink-jet
• Thermal transfer

·Dot-matrix
·Line dot-matrix
·Print band

Terminals and Printers

8.29

Nonimpact Printers Comparison Chart

turbo PrintServer 20
(LPS20)

PrintServer 40 Plus
(LPS40 Plus)

DEClaser 1100/1150
(LN07)

DEClaser 2100 plus/
2150 plus
(LN05)

DEClaser 2200 plus/
2250 plus
(LN06)

Technology

Laser

Speed (maximum
8.5 x 11-in. pgs/minute)

20-simplex
16 sides-duplex

Recommended
impressions/month
(maximum)

Up to 70,000

Up to 100,000

Up to 6,000

Up to 16,000

Up to 20,000

Number of colors
Paper type

Cutsheet, labels (specified stock required), transparencies

Cutsheet, labels (special stock required),
transparencies, envelopes

Paper thickness

18-24 lb

16-21 lb

16-24 lb

Multipart forms

Paper sizes

7.5 x 10.5, 8.5 x 11,
8.5 x 14, 11 x 17
inches, ISO A3,
ISO A4, JIS B5

7.5 x 10.5, 8.5 x 14,
11 x 17 inches,
ISO A3 , ISO A4,
JIS B4

7.5 x 10.5, 8.5 x 11
8.5 x 14 inches,
ISO A4

7.5 x 10.5, 8.5 x 11 ,
8.5 x 14 inches,
ISO A4

7.5 x 10.5, 8.5 x 11,

Resident fonts

29 PostScript scalable

43 PostScript
(1150)

43 PostScript
(2150 Plus)

43 PostScript
(2250 Plus)

Optional fonts

Downloadable

Downloadable or
font cartridges

..,.,

Lines/inch

....

..,.,

Graphics
protocols

PostScript, HP PCL,
DDIF, ANSI/Sixel,
ReGIS, Tektronix
4010/4014 (VMS)
ANSI/Six el (UL TRIX
RISC); ASCII text
(UNIX)

PostScript, HP PCL,
DDIF, ANSI/Sixel,
ReGIS, Tektronix
4010/4014 (VMS)
ANSI/Sixel (ULTRIX
RISC); ASCII text
(UNIX)

Resolution
(dots per inch)

300 x 300

Bar codes

Characters/inch

8.5 x 14 inches,
ISO A4

·k

~·,

PostScript (DEClaser
1150), (ANSI/Sixel,
ReGIS, Tektronix
4010/4014)

DEC PPL3
(ANSI-compliant),
PostScript (DEClaser
2150 plus), HP PCL-4 ,
ANSI/ Sixel ReGIS,
Tektronix 4010/ 4014,
DDIF LaserWriter

DEC PPL3
(ANSI-compliant),
PostScript (DEClaser
2250 plus), HP PCL-4,
ANSI/Sixel ReGIS,
Tektronix 4010/ 4014,
DDIF LaserWriter

300 x 300

Yes, through ANSI translator and application
software

Yes, optional cartridge
or application software

Yes, optional cartridge
(Code 3 of 9) or
ON-TAP software

Yes, with ON-TAP
software in ANSI
mode

Interfaces

Ethernet

EIA-232
EIA-423
(with optional adapter)

EIA-232

EIA-423

IBM PCcompatible

Yes, with optional
software

Yes

RAM (stan~ard)

12 MB

8 MB

.5 MB

.5 MB, 2.5 MB
(2150 Plus)

1 MB, 5 MB
(2250 Plus)

Noise level

<55 dBa

57 dBa

<54 dBa

Dimensions
WxDxH

37 x 27 x 50 in.
93.5 x 69 x 126 cm

60 x 28 x 40 in.
152 x 72 x 103 cm

13.8 x 15.9 x 8 in.

17.9 x 20.7 x 9 in.

17.9 x 27 x 12.3 in.

35 x 40.5 x 20.4 cm

45.4 x 52.5 x 22.8 cm

45.4 x 66.5 x 32.2 cm

Weight

345 lb (155 kg)

485 lb (220 kg)

25 lb (11.5 kg)

45.5 lb (20.6 kg)

67.1 lb (30.4 kg)

'"Varies depending on fonts used.

8.30

Terminals and Printers

Nonimpact Printers Comparison Chart

DEClaser 3200/3250
(LN08)

DECjet 1000

DECjet 2000

Companion
Color Printers
(LJ250/LJ252)

Colormate PS
(LFOl)

Technology

Laser

Bubble ink jet with
50-nozzle pinhead

Color ink-jet
Drop on demand

Color thermal wax

Speed (maximum
8.5 x 11-in. pgs/minute)

Up to 13 simplex
Up to 11 duplex

Up to 160 chi s

Up to 360 chi s

3 (text) (167 chi s)

3 (monochrome)
1 (color)

Recommended
impressions/ month
(maximum)

Up to 35 ,000

Up to 400

Up to 800

Up to 500

Up to 1,500

7 plus white
(255 shades)

over 700

Number of colors
Paper type

Cutsheet, labels
(specified stock
required) ,
transparencies,
envelopes

Cutsheet,
transparencies,
envelopes

Cutsheet, fanfold,
transparencies

Cutsheet, transparencies

Paper thickness

16-24 lb, up to 34 lb
manual feed

19-24 lb , up to 36 lb
man ual feed

19-24 lb, up to 36 lb
manual feed

26 lb

17- 21 lb

Multipart forms

Paper sizes

8.5 x 11, 8.3 x 11.7 ,
7.25 x 10.5, 8.5 x 14

8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 10.5 ,
8.5 x 14 inches

8.5 x 11 in, 8.5 x 10.5 , 8.5 x 11 inches
8.5 x 14 inches, ISO A4 ISO A4

inches

ISO A4

Resident fonts

43 PostScript
(3250 Plus )

NIA

Optional fonts

Downloadable or
font cartridges

HP PCL, downloadable

Downloadable

5, 10, 12 , 16.6, 20, 24

5, 10, 12, 16.6, 20, 24

5, 6, 9, 10, 12, 18

;':

2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 12

Characters/inch

8.5 x 11 inches
ISO A4

....ct

·c
~

Lines/inch
Graphics
protocols

DEC PPL3
(ANSI-compliant),
PostScript (DEClaser
3250 Plus), HP-PCL4 ,
ANSI/Sixel ReGIS ,
Tektronix 401014014 ,
DDIF LaserWriter

HP DeskJet Plus
(standard) , IBM
ProPrinter (optional) ,
Epson FX-850
(optional)

HP DeskJet Plus
(standard), IBM
ProPrinter (optional),
Epson FX-850
(optional)

ANSI/Sixel, HP PCL,
ReGIS (with optional
RETOS software)

PostScript

Resolution
(dots per inch)

300 x 300

300 x 300
600 x 300
(with optional fonts)

180 x 180 (8 colors)
90 x 90 (255 colors)

300 x 300

Bar codes

Yes, optional cartridge
(Code 3 of 9) or
ON-TAP software

Yes, through ON-TAP
software

Yes, through ON-TAP
software in ANSI mode

Interfaces

EIA-423 , PC-compatible
parallel in terface,
· Novell Ethernet
interface (customer
installable)

Centronics parallel

EIA-232
EIA-423 (LJ250) ,
Parallel (LJ252 )

Parallel, serial EIA-232 ,
EIA-422, AppleTalk

IBM PCcompatible

Yes

Yes, emulates HP
Paint}et

Yes

RAM (standard)

1 MB, 7 MB (3 250)

8 KB

2 KB (inp ut buffer)

8 MB

Noise level

55 dBa max. while

<45 dBa

45 dBa

<53 dBa

printing; 53 dBa max.
during standby
Dimensions
Wx D xH

26.4 x 21.1 x 19.5 in.
67 x 53.6 x 49 cm

13.5 x 5.8 x 4.5 in.
34.2 x 14.7 x 11.5 cm

16.7 x 17.7 x 5.8 in.
42.5 x 45 x 14.7 cm

17.5 x 12.25 x 3.65 in.
44.5 x 31.1 x 9.3 cm

16.9 x 18.3 x 9.5 in.
43 x 46.5 x 24 cm

Weight

85 lb (38 kg)

6.4 lb (2.9 kg)

19.6 lb (9 kg)

10 lb (4.5 kg)

55 lb (25 kg)

,; Varies depending on fonts used.

Terminals and Printers

8.31

Impact Printers Comparison Chart

LP37

LG31

LG06

Band

Line dot-matrix

Dot-matrix

Up to 2,000 lines/
minute, optimized
band, uppercase
characters

300 lines/ minute
uppercase characters ,
data processing mode

800 lines/minute
(high speed)
255 (correspondence)

150,000

300,000

25 ,000

75 ,000

Paper type

Fanfold , labels

Fanfold, labels

Fanfold , labels cardstock,
multipart forms (1- 6)

Paper thickness
(maximum)

0.020 in. (0.05 cm )

0.020 in. (0.05 cm)

0.025 in. (0.06 cm)

LP29

Technology

Band

Speed

1200 lines/ min, uppercase
characters

Recommended
impressions/month
(maximum)
Number of colors

Multipart forms

1-6

W idth of output

3.5- 18.75 in.
8.9-47 .6 cm

3.5-18.75 in.
8.9-47 .6 cm

4-16 in.
10.1-40.6 cm

Resident fonts

OCR-A/B

OCR-B

OCR-AIB

Characters
per inch

5, 10, 12 , 13.3 , 15, 16.7

5, 10, 12, 13.3 , 15 , 16.7

Lines per inch

6, 8

6, 8, 10

Graphics
protocols

NIA

ANSI/sixel

ANSI/sixel, IBM
ProPrinter emulation

Resolution
(dots per inch )

Fully fo rmed character

Fully formed character

120 H x 144 V

100 H x 100 V

Bar codes

Yes

Interleaved 2 of 5
Code 39, EAN 8
EAN , Code 11 Codebar a/ n ,
bi n, elk , d/ e, UPC-A, E,
POSTNET, optional ON-TAP
software

Interfaces

Parallel (D ata Products)

EIA-232

EIA-232 (Centronics , Data
Products)

IBM PCcompatible

Yes, through IBM ProPrinter
emulation

Baud rate

NIA

9600

300-19,200

Buffer size

NIA

2 KB

Noise level

55 dBa

73 dBa

55 dBa

52 dBa

Dimensions
WxDxH

31 x 35 x 44 in.
70.7 x 88.9 x 111.7 cm

35 x 49 x 49 in.
88.9 x 125.2 x 124.5 cm

29 x 40.6 x 46 in.
73 .6 x 103.1 x 116.8 cm

27 x 28.7 x 40.6 in.
69 x 73 x 103 cm

Weight

350 lb (159 kg)

610 lb (274.5 kg)

285 lb (128.3 kg)

225 lb (102 kg)

Ribbon/ink
technology

Reel-to-reel
50 M characters

Towel ribbon
100 M characters

Nylon cartridge
50 M characters

Nylon cartridge
20 M characters

Line Printer Interconnect Cabling
System P rinter
Interface

LP29

LP37

LG06

LG31

LPll

BC27A

NIA

LPVll

BC27A

NIA

LPVll -SA

BC27L

NIA

DMF32

BC27A

NIA

DMB32

BC27A

NIA

EIA-232

NIA

BC22D

For more information on line printers, contact the EIC Sales Support Center, 800-832-6277 or 603-884-8990.

8.32

Terminals and Printers

Impact Printers Comparison Chart

LA424 MultiPrinter

LA70 Personal Printer

LA75 Plus
Companion Printer

LA210

Technology

Dot-matrix, 24-wire

Dot-matrix, 9-wire

Dot-matrix, 24-wire

Dot-matrix, 9-wire

Speed

400 ch/ s draft
133 chi s LQ

200 chi s draft
100 chi s memo
40 chis NLQ

250 chis draft
83 chi s LQ

240 chis draft
80 chi s memo
40 chi s NLQ

Recommended
impressions/month
(maximum)

6,000

1,000

2,000

3,000

Number of colors

Paper type

Cutsheet; fanfold ; labels;
envelopes

Cutsheet; fanfold; labels;
envelopes

Cutsheet; fanfold, labels

Paper thickness
(maximum)

0.020 in.
(0.052 cm)

0.012 in.
(0.031 cm)

0.015 in .
(0.038 cm)

Multipart forms

1-6

1-3

1-4

4.5- 10 in .
(11.4-15.5 cm)

4.5-10 in.
(11.4-15.5 cm )

3.5-14.9 in.
(8.9-37 .9 cm)

Width of output

4-17 in.
(10.2-40.6 cm)

Resident fonts

OCR-A/B

NIA

OCR-A/B

NIA

Characters
per inch

5, 6, 6.7, 8.55, 9, 10, 12,
13.33 , 17.14, 18

5, 6, 6.6, 8.25, 8.55 , 9, 10,
12 , 13.2 , 16.5 , 17.1, 18

10, 12, 16.5 , 17.5

5, 6, 6.8, 8.25, 10, 12 , 13.2, 16.5

Lines per inch

2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 12

Graphics
protocols

ANSl/Sixel
IBM ProPrinter

ANSI/ (PPL2)
IBM ProPrinter

ANSl/Sixel
IBM ProPrinter

ANSl/Sixel
IBM Graphics 5

Resolution
(dots per inch)

360 H x 180
(ANSI
mode) ; 180 H x 180 V
(IBM ProPrinter mode)

180 H x 180 V

360 H x 180 V

132 H x 72 V

Bar codes

Yes, 3 of 9 and ON-TAP
software

Yes, through optional
ON-TAP software

Built-in 3 of 9 and optional Yes, through optional ON-TAP
ON-TAP software
software

Interfaces

EIA-423 ,2 paralleP
20 mA8

EIA-423 ,2 paralleP

EIA-423 (MMJ) Centronics
Parallel

EIA-232 6, parallel optional

IBM PCcompatible

Yes (IBM ProPrinter
XL24 emulation )

Yes (IBM ProPrinter
XL24 emulation)

Yes (IBM ProPrinter
emulation)

Yes (IBM graphics printer emulation
optional)

Baud rate

200- 19,200

200-9,600

110-9,600

50-9,600

Buffer size

8 KB

2 KB

8 KB

2 KB

Noise level

<55 dBa
<53 dBa quiet mode

<55 dBa

52 dBa

58 dBa

Dimensions
WxDxH

24.2 x 12.2 x 6.7 in.
61.5 x 31 x 17 cm

15.5 x 11.4 x 4.7 in.
39.3 x 29 x 12 cm

16.8 x 14.5 x 5.3 in.
42.7 x 34.5 x 12.1 cm

21.2 x 13.5 x 5 in.
54.6 x 34.3 x 12.1 cm

Weight

31.5 lb (14.3 kg)

16 lb (7.5 kg)

10.5 lb (4.8 kg)

27 lb (121 kg)

Ribbon/ink
technology

Black and color cartridges

Nylon cartridge

Nylon cartridge
optional color

Nylon cartridge

'. Data Products type: LLFOl optional.
EIA-232D compatible with optional adapter.
3
PC Centronics type.
4
EIA-423 compatible.
2

Terminals and Printers

8.33

PrintServer Family
Overview

Digital's PrintServer systems are connected directly to Ethernet and support the
PostScript page description language by Adobe Systems Inc.
The PrintServer systems enable any user on an Ethernet network to print text,
graphics, halftones, and scanned images at 300-dots-per-inch resolution. Maximum print speeds are 20 pages per minute on the turbo PrintServer 20, and 40
pages per minute on the PrintServer 40 Plus. PrintServer systems support the
VMS, ULTRIX, and UNIX (Berkeley-based or System V with access to Berkeley
Library Extensions) operating systems. DOS systems are supported through
PATHWORKS software. Apple Macintosh systems are supported through
PATHWORKS for Macintosh software as well as third-party hardware and
software.
Digital's PrintServer family offers paper-handling features that provide greater
productivity and user satisfaction. With the PrintServer family's large paper
capacity, workgroups can print many documents without reloading paper. Output is collated facedown, for convenience.
The right paper combination for jobs can be obtained by loading the input trays
with up to three different paper sizes. The PrintServer software provides for
dynamic paper tray selection during print jobs. The PrintServer systems have two
user-selectable output trays.
The PrintServer family can print on a variety of paper and forms-including
specified label stock and transparencies. For special media, where a straight
paper path is required, a side output tray is provided.
PrintServer systems bring sophisticated printing capabilities to a wide variety of
users. Because they are shared through an Ethernet network, the PrintServer
systems provide PostScript printing at a low cost per user. And because the
PrintServer systems support a variety of operating systems, they can satisfy printing needs regardless of the desktop device that is used.
Features

· Connects directly to standard Ethernet networks (thick wire and twisted pair),
supporting both DECnet/OSI and TCP/IP environments
• Supports DECconnect ThinWire networks with optional ThinWire Ethernet Station Adapter (DESTA)
· Full support for DECnet and TCP/IP printing coexists in a single PrintServer; no
need for a dedicated printer for each protocol
· Printing support for VMS, ULTRIX, and Berkeley-based UNIX systems on
Ethernet networks
• PATHWORKS for VMS or PATHWORKS for ULTRIX software is required to
print from DOS systems
• PATHWORKS for Macintosh software is required to print from Apple Macintosh
systems; third-party hardware and software solutions are also available: Mac connection using Cayman Systems, Inc. Gator Box or Shiva Fastpath to link
AppleTalk to Ethernet; software from Alisa Systems, Inc., or Pacer software
installed on VMS network host (Cayman Systems, Inc., 617-494-1999; Shiva
Corp. , 800-458-3535; Alisa Systems, Inc., 818-792-9474; Pacer Software, Inc.,
619-454-0565)
· Employs the PostScript page description language from Adobe Systems Inc. with
29 resident PostScript typefaces; optional typefaces for VMS clients also available.
See product descriptions for DECfonts Typeface Collection and SoftFont at the
end of this chapter.
• Software translators enable printing of ANSI/Sixel, ReGIS, PCL (VMS only), and
Tektronix 4010/4014 files; ASCII text only (UNIX/TCP/IP)
· Access control software allows a system manager to have full control over who
may have access to the PrintServer
8.34

Terminals and Printers

PrintServer Family
Overview (Continued)

• Quiet enough to blend in with today's open office settings
• Provides near-typeset print quality with 300-dots-per-inch resolution
• Capability to print multiple page images on a single side of paper with the
"number-up" function
• Per-job accounting functions allow system manager to monitor all access of a
PrintServer and bill for printer usage
· Provides generous input and output capacity, and collated, facedown output
· Handles a variety of international paper sizes; supports predrilled paper, transparencies, and specified label stock

If the VMS, ULTRIX, UNIX, MS-DOS, or Apple Macintosh operating systems are
used, the PrintServer family offers complete solutions for printing environments
with moderate to heavy print volumes. The PrintServer family supports Digital's
Network Application Support (NAS), enabling many types of systems to share
printing facilities via DECnet or TCP/IP Ethernet networks.
PrintServer systems are ideal for department managers and information systems
professionals who want the benefits of distributed network printing. The PrintServer family can satisfy a wide assortment of printing needs. In a single environment, administrative, accounting, and document-creation activities can go on
simultaneously. Many users can share the same printer while using different
applications-printing multiple formats on various sizes and types of media.
A key to the PrintServer family's versatile printing performance is PostScript, the
page description language, from Adobe Systems Inc., now a de facto standard in
printer software. PostScript enables users to print text, graphics, halftones, and
scanned images on the same page. PostScript includes 29 resident typefaces
(listed in the PrintServer Specifications section in this chapter). All 29 typefaces
are accessible to all PostScript applications. The 29 typefaces are not accessible
to print jobs accessed through translators.
Equipped with the PostScript language, PrintServer systems can produce professional, complex documents, with multiple typefaces in a variety of sizes, weights,
and styles, as well as rotated type, textures and patterns, halftones, and other
images, in any size or shape. With the appropriate application software, the
PostScript language can help eliminate the trouble and expense of dealing with
outside vendors for conventional typesetting, paste-up, and printing tasks.
Because the PostScript language is device-independent, files can be printed on
any PrintServer system, DEClaser printer, high-resolution typesetting system, and
other printing devices that support the PostScript language.
Many applications supported by Digital take advantage of the power of the
PostScript language. These include DECpage (supports simplex printing only at
this time), VAX DOCUMENT, DECwrite (Digital's DECwindows-based compound
document editor), DECpresent, and many CADICAMICAE packages. Other applications written for the DECwindows operating environment also support the
PostScript language, as well as third-party applications such as Technical Publishing Software (TPS) by Interleaf, Inc., Pager by Datalogics, Inc., PageMaker by
Aldus, Inc., and Scribe by UNILOGIC, Ltd.
The unique advantage of Digital's network printing solution is that the PrintServer family can be shared across heterogeneous platforms (as shown in the
following diagrams). A diverse set of users working with different operating
systems from different hardware platforms can share and print information with- out worrying about these differences-working as one across the Ethernet. VMS
and ULTRIX systems, and UNIX systems that support BSD TCP/IP sockets, can
coexist and share resources and information easily as these four diagrams
indicate.

Terminals and Printers

8.35

?;§

·f
~

PrintServer Family
Overview (Continued)

Q, ,Q,
VT1200

VT420

UNIX Node with BSD
Sockets and
BSD lpd, running
PrintServer Source
Kit for BSD UNIX.

-- ~

VMS Node

VT1300

VT420

ULTRIX Node

1-[m
turbo PrintServer 20

PrintServer 40 Plus

BU-3195

The printing environment for mixed operating systems: VMS, UL TRIX, and UNIX systems that support BSD TCP/IP sockets. For direct printing from all systems in a mixed operating environment, like
the one shown in the diagram , the supporting host can be either a VMS system or an ULTRIX system.
With Digital's PrintServer Supporting Host software for VMS Version 4.0, and the appropriate Client
software configured on each of the VMS and ULTRIX systems, and with the PrintServer Source Kit
for BSD UNIX installed on at least one of the UNIX systems, all can print directly to the PrintServer
systems.
Macintosh
PC

a
PC

Macintosh

I
\I \
~

e:=:::JI

Macintosh

e:=:::JI

Fastpath or
Galer Box

°'

F"tpath
Galer
Box

Digital's
PATHWORKS
Application

10 :

Digital's
PATHWORKS
Application

Pacer Print
Application

PATHWORKS
Server 3100e

DD
VMS Node

ULTRIX Node

turbo Prin!Server 20

Prin!Server 40 Plus

BU-3196

The printing environment for PC and Macintosh integration with PATHWORKS. The combination
of DECprint, PrintServer, and PATHWORKS software products provides seamless integration. Any
VMS or ULTRIX system on the Ethernet can run the PrintServer Supporting Host software. For PC
integration with VMS, the system running PATHWORKS for VMS requires DECprint Printing Services
or VAX PrintServer Client software V3.0. With PCs and ULTRIX, the system running PATHWORKS
for ULTRIX requires PrintServer Client software for ULTRIX or ULTRIX V4.0 or greater. The PC
system requires PATHWORKS for DOS or PATHWORKS for OS/ 2. PATHWORKS for Macintosh is
required for Macintosh integration.

8.36

Terminals and Printers

PrintServer Family
Overview (Continued)

~~~
VT420

VT420

\/
DD

FUSION third-party
TCP/IP connection
application software
with BSD lpd support

VMSN~

UNIX Node with BSD
Sockets and
BSD lpd , running
PrintServer Source
Kit for BSD UNIX.

~i}

turbo PrintServer 20

PrintServer 40 Plus

BU-3197

The printing environment for VMS and non-Digital UNIX systems. In a mixed VMS and UNIX
environment as shown in the diagram, it is recommended that the supporting host be a VMS system.
This configuration allows direct printing from both VMS and UNIX systems that support BSD TCP/ IP
sockets. At least one BSD-UNIX client system must have the PrintServer Source Kit for BSD UNIX
installed. In a TCP/ IP-only environment , VMS systems may spool through a UNIX node using
FUSION, a third-party layered software product. In that case the supporting host and client would
be the UNIX system, and only the turbo P rintServer 20 can be supported.

11
UNIX Node with BSD
Sockets and
BSD lpd, without
PrintServer Source
Kit for BSD UNIX.

UNIX Node with BSD
Sockets and
BSD lpd , running
PrintServer Source
Kit for BSD UNIX.

turbo Prin!Server 20

UNIX Node with BSD
Sockets and
BSD lpd, running
PrintServer Source
Kit for BSD UNIX .

BU-3198

The printing environment for non-Digital UNIX systems only. In an environment comprised solely of
UNIX systems supporting BSD TCP/ IP sockets, as in the example shown, the turbo PrintServer 20 is
supported. (The PrintServer 40 Plus is not supported in this environment. ) Any one of these systems
may be designated as the supporting host and at least one system must be designated as a client. The
PrintServer Source Kit for BSD UNIX must be installed on these designated systems. (The source
license agreement must be signed prior to delivery. Installing and porting the source code requires
proficiency with the C programming language.)

...
Terminals and Printers

8.3 7

PrintServer Famity
Overview (Continued)

The printing environment for ULTRIX and non-Digital UNIX systems. Another
common environment (not shown) is one which consists of only ULTRIX and
non-Digital UNIX systems. In this case it's recommended that the PrintServer
Supporting Host and Client software reside on the ULTRIX node. With Digital's
PrintServer Source Kit for BSD UNIX installed on UNIX systems, UNIX systems
that support BSD TCP/IP sockets can print directly to the PrintServer family.
(For details on the PrintServer Source Kit for BSD UNIX, refer to SPD 38.53.)

PrintServer Software

The PrintServer system's intelligence resides in the software. New releases of
PrintServer software give additional functions while protecting hardware
investments.
PrintServer software handles all of the print management functions, and provides
the communication between a computer system with a print job and the PrintServer system. PrintServer software consists of two portions: supporting host and

client.
One system on the network is designated as the supporting host. The supporting
host loads the PrintServer software into the PrintServer controller via the network, and performs management functions such as accounting for the PrintServer. Any system that sends print jobs directly to the PrintServer system is
known as a client.
The newest release of PrintServer software adds capabilities to the Supporting
Host component. Common host services give both VMS systems and UNIX platforms that support BSD TCP/IP sockets direct access to the PrintServer system.
BSD-based UNIX systems no longer need to spool print jobs through and
ULTRIX node. This promotes a high degree of compatibility across operating
systems and network protocols.
Significant enhancements have been added to the management functions of the
Supporting Host soft~are as well. For example, the PrintServer software's
accounting utility prepares usage reports on a per-user basis and provides the
system manager with a convenient way to monitor all access of the PrintServer
and bill accordingly for its usage. Centralized accounting information (on a
per-job basis) can be sent to any supporting host system on the network.
The PrintServer's Print Client Access utility provides the system manager with a
convenient way to control all access to a PrintServer system. Access is controlled
by "allowing" or "denying" access by either system name or by its network
address.
Another improvement is a patented image rendering technology-DECimagewhich enhances printed images with crisper edges, finer details and greater overall quality without additional hardware through superior halftoning capabilities.
DECimage is supported under the ULTRIX and VMS operating systems.
All of these enhancements add up to a rich printing system with tremendous
flexibility for users and for system managers.
The PrintServer family delivers a patented innovative feature known as "number-up" (n-up), which enables users to print multiple page images per side of a
sheet of paper. N-up significantly reduces paper consumption and saves time by
enabling users to preview entire document layouts on a single sheet. N-up also
increases the effective throughput of the printer so print jobs are completed
faster.
N-~p is accessible from the print command level or through supporting applications and gives users complete control over borders, margins, margin alternations, pages per sheet, first page, page order, and grid.

For Pre-sales assistance, in the U.S., call the Technical Consulting Center,
800-343-4040 or 603-884-4040.

8.38

Terminals and Printers

PrintServer 40 Plus
The PrintServer 40 Plus system features a high-performance CMOS-based
MicroVAX CPU for processor-intensive print jobs such as complex graphics and
multifont text. It can print up to 40 pages per minute and print volumes of up
to 100,000 pages per month.
The PrintServer 40 Plus system is designed for user convenience. It includes a
Digital VT320 video terminal as a console device from which users can monitor
printer status, active print job characteristics, printer/job defaults, and other
important information. The VT320 console can also provide detailed diagnostic
data for field service professionals.
Standard operating messages such as "paper out" are indicated on the VT320
console, while the control panel located on the printer itself communicates
messages graphically to the user.
Features

· High throughput of processor-intensive print jobs with high-performance
CMOS-based MicroVAX CPU
• Provides up to 40 page-per-minute printing
• Supports print volumes of up to 100,000 pages per month
· Large capacity (2000 sheet) input tray; two auxiliary input trays (250 sheets
each); two output trays (500 sheets each); optional large capacity output tray
(3000 sheets) for unattended operation
· Includes a Digital VT320 video terminal console to monitor system, print job
status
· Paper handling includes 11 paper sizes (up to 11 x 17), transparencies, and
labels

Ordering Information

PrintServers are network printers consisting of hardware and appropriate software licenses (DECnet, TCP/ IP, DECprint Printing Services for VMS) necessary
for network use (software licenses are packaged with the hardware). Software
media, H4005 Ethernet transceiver, DELNI or DESTA, and the transceiver or
ThinWire cable to connect the PrintServer to the network must be ordered
separately.

Upgrade Kit

LPS40-UA
Model
Number

LPS40-xA
LPS40-x3

PrintServer 40-to-PrintServer 40 Plus Upgrade Kit
Country or Region

Language

U.S., Canada, Mexico, South
America
Austria, New Zealand, Belgium,
Canada, Denmark, Finland,
France, Holland, Israel, Italy,
Japan , Norway, Portugal, Spain,
Sweden, Switzerland, U.K.,
Ireland , Germany, Austria

English, French, Spanish
English, Flemish, French, Danish,
Finnish, Dutch, Hebrew, Italian,
Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish,
Swedish, German

Note: Replace x with D for DECnet license; F for TCP/ IP license

Terminals and Printers

8.39

PrintServer 40 Plus
Ethernet Connectivity

H4005
DELNI-BA
DESTA-BA

Ethernet Transceiver
U.S ./Canada version Local Network Interconnect
ThinWire Ethernet Station Adapter

For H4005/DELNI connection, right-angle cables must be ordered:

BNE3K-xx

BNE3M-xx

AUI PVC-jacketed right-angle male-to-female transceiver cable;
choose required length: 10, 20, or 40 meters
(10 m = 32.8 ft, 20 m = 65 .6 ft, 40 m = 131.2 ft)
AUI Teflon-jacketed right-angle male-to-female transceiver
cable; choose required length: 5, 10, 20, or 40 meters
(5 m = 16.4 ft, 10 m = 32.8 ft, 20 m = 65.6 ft,
40 m = 131.2 ft)

Note: For more information on Ethernet connectivity options and international
versions of DESTA and DELNI, refer to Chapter 6, Networks, Communications,

and Cables.
Accessories and Supplies

Software

For more information, refer to the DECdirect catalog.

LNOlX-AB
LN03X-AJ
LPSXX-PA
LPS4X-BA
LPS4X-BB
H9850-TA
H9850-TB
LPS4X-AA
LPS4X-AB
LPS4X-AC
LPS4X-CA
LPS4X-LP

A size paper, 8.5 by 11.0 in. , 5000 sheets (letter)
A size transparencies, 8.5 by 11.0 in. , 50 sheets
B size paper, 11 .0 by 17.0 in., 2500 sheets
Small paper cassette
Large paper cassette
Laser labels (21/ sheet, 100/box)
Laser labels (30/ sheet, 100/ box)
Toner kit (approximately 60K pages)
Maintenance kit (approximately lOOK pages)
Fuser oil kit (approximately 60K pages)
Large capacity output tray (3000 sheets)
Bulk supplies kit

QA-YNCAA-Hx
QA-797 AA-Hx
QA-798AA-Hx
QA-VVMAA-Hx
QA-VVZAA-Hx
QB-YURAA-E5

DECprint Printing Services for VMS"
VAX PrintServer Client Software t
DEC PrintServer Supporting Host Software for VMS
PrintServer Client Software for ULTRIX+
DEC PrintServer Supporting Host Software for ULTRIX
PrintServer source kit for BSD UNIX V4.0, includes licens~,
media (TK50) , and documentation
PrintServer source kit for BSD UNIX V4.0, includes license,
media (magtape), and documentation
PrintServer source kit for BSD UNIX V4 .0, includes license,
media (CD-ROM) , and documentation
PrintServer source kit for BSD UNIX V4.0, includes license,
media (QIC24), and documentation
PrintServer source kit for BSD UNIX documentation

QB-YURAA-EM
QB-YURAA-E8
QB-YURAA-E9
QB-YURAA-GZ
1
'

Required only with VMS operating system V5 .3 or greater.

t Required only with VMS operating system less th an V5 .3 .
:j: Required only with ULTRIX operating system less than V4.0; ULTRIX operating system V4.0 and

higher includes the client software.
Note: x denotes media type: 5 == TK50; M == magtape

Specifications

8.40

Terminals and Printers

P rintServer 40 Plus specifications . follow turbo PrintServer 20 ordering
information.

turbo PrintServer 20
As the name implies the turbo PrintServer 20 has a supercharged controller that
utilizes a high-performance CPU-on-a-chip. It offers greatly enhanced performance in processor-intensive print jobs such as complex graphics and multifont
text. It is fast enough for the requirements of a large workgroup or a small
department. It will handle moderate print volumes of up to 70,000 pages per
month.
A distinguishing characteristic of the turbo PrintServer 20 system is its duplex
(two-sided) printing capability. The turbo PrintServer 20 system processes page
images using an interleaved technique that enables users to print multiple-page,
two-sided documents quickly and efficiently. Designed as a standard feature,
duplex printing can cut paper costs, and reduce production and distribution
costs.
The turbo PrintServer 20 system was designed for user convenience. This convenience starts with hardware installation which typically can be completed in less
than an hour. (Optional installation is available from Digital Service.) Software
should be installed by the network manager familiar with VMS, ULTRIX, or
UNIX software installation procedures.
The turbo PrintServer 20 system includes an integral Liquid Crystal Display
(LCD) control panel. The LCD displays up to 48 characters of user-friendly,
local-language text to keep users informed of the printer status. An easy-toread graphic display also provides printer status. With the touch of a button,
users can conveniently monitor active print job characteristics, printer/ job
defaults, and paper and supplies status.
The turbo PrintServer 20 system's modular design makes for speedy and straightforward user-care and reliable operation. The slideout drawer puts userreplaceable consumables within easy reach.
Features

• Can be used in a UNIX-only environment without any other Digital hardware
• Performs user-selectable duplex (two-sided) and simplex (single-sided) printing
• Provides up to 20 page-per-minute printing
• Provides large capacity (1000 sheet) input tray; two auxiliary (250 sheets each)
input trays; two (750 sheets each) selectable output trays
· Integral control panel indicates printer and print job status
• Provides offset stacking, so print jobs can be instantly separated
· Non-Digital systems running a UNIX operating system or a System V operating
system with access to Berkeley Library Extensions require the
PrintServer Source Kit for BSD UNIX; to port the source code, a technical user
proficient with source code porting is required.
· Simple user care to provide optimal printer performance and availability
· Videotape included with system-a popular training tool on use and care of the
turbo PrintServer 20

Terminals and Printers 8.41

turbo PrintServer 20
Ordering Information

PrintServers are network printers consisting of hardware and appropriate software licenses (DECnet, TCP/IP, DECprint Printing Services for VMS) necessary
for network use (software licenses are packaged with the hardware). Software
media, H4005 Ethernet transceiver, DELNI or DESTA, and the transceiver or
ThinWire cable to connect the PrintServer to the network must be ordered
separately.
Model
Number

Country or Region

Language

LPS20-GZ
LPS20-GB

U.S ., Canada, Mexico, South
America, Sweden
Australia, New Zealand
Belgium, Switzerland

LPS20-GD
LPS20-IC

Denmark
Finland, Norway, Portugal,Spain

LPS20-GP
LPS20-GH
LPS20-GT
LPS20-GI
LPS20-GE
LPS20-GG

France
Holland
Israel
Italy
U.K., Ireland
Germany, Austria

English, Spanish, Portuguese,
Swedish
English
Flemish, French, German,
English
Danish
Fihnish, Norwegian, Portuguese,
Spanish
French
Dutch
Hebrew
Italian
English
German

LPS20-UA

LPS20 to turbo LPS20 upgrade kit for North America

H4005
DELNI-BA
DESTA-BA

Ethernet Transceiver
U.S./Canada version Local Network Interconnect
ThinWire Ethernet Station Adapter

LPS20-GA

Ethernet Connectivity

For H4005/DELNI connection, right-angle cables must be ordered:

BNEJK-xx

BNE3M-xx

AUi PVC-jacketed right-angle male-to-female transceiver cable;
choose required length: 10, 20, or 40 meters
(10 m = 32.8 ft, 20 m = 65.6 ft, 40 m = 131.2 ft)
AUi Teflon-jacketed right-angle male-to-female transceiver
cable; choose required length: 5, 10, 20, or 40 meters
(5 m = 16.4 ft, 10 m = 32.8 ft, 20 m = 65.6 ft,
40 m = 131.2 ft)

Note: For more information on Ethernet connectivity options and international
versions of DESTA and DELNI, refer to Chapter 6, Networks Communications,

and Cables.
Accessories and Supplies

For more information, refer to the DECdirect catalog.

LNOlX-AB
LN03X-AJ
LPSXX-PA
LPS4X-BA
LPS4X-BB
H9850-TA
H9850-TB
LPS2X-AA
LPS2X-AD
LPS2X-AB
LPS2X-AC
LPS2X-LP

A size paper, 8.5 in. by 11.0 in., 5000 sheets (letter)
A size transparencies, 8.5 in. by 11.0 in., 50 sheets
B size paper, 11.0 in. by 17 .0 in., 2500 sheets
Small paper cassette
Large paper cassette
Laser labels (21/sheet, 100/box)
Laser labels (30/sheet, 100/box)
Toner kit (approximately 20K pages)
Cleaning units kit (order when toner kit ordered, LPS2X-AA,
or at approximately 40K pages)
Supplies kit (approximately 20K pages)
OPC drum kit (approximately 80K pages)
80,000-page bulk supplies kit

Page limits are for simplex printing only.

8.42

Terminals and Printers

turbo PrintServer 20
Software

QA-YNCAA-Hx
QA-797AA-Hx
QA-798AA-Hx
QA-VVMAA-Hx
QA-VVZAA-Hx
QB-YURAA-E5
QB-YURAA-EM
QB-YURAA-E8
QB-YURAA-E9
QB-YURAA-GZ

DECprint Printing Services for VMs''
DEC PrintServer Client Software t
DEC PrintServer Supporting Host Software for VMS
PrintServer TCP/IP Client Software for ULTRIX+
DEC PrintServer Supporting Host Software for ULTRIX
PrintServer source kit for BSD UNIX V4.0, includes license,
media (TK50), and documentation
PrintServer source kit for BSD UNIX V4.0, includes license,
media (magtape), and documentation
PrintServer source kit for BSD UNIX V4.0, includes license,
media (CD-ROM), and documentation
PrintServer source kit for BSD UNIX V4.0, includes license,
media (QIC24), and documentation
PrintServer source kit for BSD UNIX documentation

''Required only with VMS operating system V5.3 or later.
t Required only with VMS operating system less than V5 .3.
:j: Required only with ULTRIX operating system less than V4.0; ULTRIX operating system V4.0 or later
includes the client software.
Note: x Denotes media type: 5 = TK50; M = magtape.

Terminals and Printers

8.43

PrintServer 40 Plus and
turbo PrintServer 20 Specifications
Specifications
Product Type

Nonimpact printers with Digital-developed data controllers, Ethernet interface,
PostScript interpreter by Adobe Systems, Inc. , PrintServer 40 Plus includes
VT320 console terminal

Prerequisite Software

DECnet/OSI Phase IV or TCP/IP
VMS systems: VMS V5.3 (or greater)
ULTRIX V4.0

PrintServer Software

PrintServer 40 Plus and turbo PrintServer 20
In an environment that comprises only VMS systems, or any combination of
VMS, ULTRIX and UNIX systems:

·Designate either a VMS system or ULTRIX-DECnet system as the supporting host;
install QA-798AA-Hx or QA-VVZAA-Hx on it.
· Install QA-797AA-Hx on each VMS V5.2 or earlier system designated as a client,
and QA-YNCAA-Hx on each VMS V5.3 or later system.
• For VMS V5 .3 or later, DECprint Printing Services for VMS is recommended for
client systems.
· Install QA-VVMAA-Hx on each ULTRIX system designated as a client;
systems running ULTRIX operating system V4 .0 or greater do not require
client software. UNIX client systems are to install QB-YURAA-Ex.
In an environment that comprises only ULTRIX systems, or any combination of
ULTRIX and UNIX systems (Berkeley-based or System V with access to Berkeley Library Extensions ):

• Designate an ULTRIX system as the supporting host and install QA-VVZAA-Hx.
For a turbo PrintServer 20 operating in a combined ULTRIX and UNIX environment, a UNIX system can be designated as the supporting host by installing and
porting QB-YURAA-Ex.
· Install QA-VVMAA-Hx on each ULTRIX system designated as a client.
Systems running ULTRIX operating system V4.0 or greater do not require
client software.
· Install and port QB-YURAA-Ex on each UNIX system (Berkeley-based or System
V with access to Berkeley Library Extensions) designated as a client. UNIX users
can also spool through the ULTRIX supporting host system; (does not require the
source code) .

turbo PrintServer 20 only
In an environment that comprises only Berkeley-based UNIX systems
(Berkeley-based or System V with access to Berkeley Library Extensions):
• Designate one UNIX system as the supporting host and install and port
QB-YURAA-Ex.
· Install and port QB-YURAA-Ex on each system designated as a client.
Maximum Print Speed 1:

PrintServer 40 Plus:

- 40 pages-per-minute with 8.5- x 11-inch or A4 paper
- 24 pages-per-minute with 8.5- x 14-inch paper
- 20 pages-per-minute with 11- x 17-inch or A3 paper

turbo PrintServer 20:
- 20 pages-per-minute with 8.5- x 11-inch or A4 paper, simplex
- 16 printed sides-per-minute with 8.5- x 11-inch or A4 paper, duplex
- 11 pages-per-minute with 11- x 17-inch or A3 paper, simplex
- 13 pages-per-minute with 8.5- x 14-inch paper, simplex
-1,

8.44

Terminals and Printers

Print speed is a function that is dependent on several characteristics: paper size, amount of text and
number of font changes, quality of application-generated PostScript code, and graphics
complexities.

PrintServer 40 Plus and
turbo PrintServer 20 Specifications
Specifications (Continued)
Image Resolution

300 x 300 dpi for text, graphics, and images
PrintServer 40 Plus

turbo PrintServer 20

Three cutsheet input trays:
total sheet capacity of
2
20 lb (75 g/m ) paper

2500

1500

Primary input tray

2000

1000

Two primary cutsheet output
trays: total
sheet capacity of
2
20 lb (75 g/ m ) paper

1000

1500

Large capacity output
tray (optional)

3000

Paper Handling

Side output tray for media such as transparencies and specified label stock;
PrintServer 40 Plus: user-selectable faceup or facedown; turbo PrintServer 20:
output is faceup.
Paper

PrintServer 40 Plus
turbo PrintServer 20

16 lb (60 g/m ) minimum; 24 lb (90 g/m ) maximum
2
2
18 lb (67.5 g/m ) minimum; 24 lb (90 g/m ) maximum'~
2

* Minimum 20 lb (75 g/ m ) paper weight is recommended for duplex printing to ensure maximum
readability and paper feeding reliability. Predrilled paper is supported.

R ecommended Moisture Content

4 %-6%

Environmental Requirements

For maximum print quality and paper feeding reliability, paper should be stored,
unopened, in the same environment as the printer for at least 24 hours before
use.

Transparencies

Polyester film with a basic thickness 0.004 inch (± 0.0004 inch) with both sides
coated to receive toner

Label stock

As specified by label manufacturers for laser printers and plain paper copiers

Typefaces (built in)

Courier (fixed pitch) with bold, oblique, and bold oblique
Times with bold, italic, and bold italic
Helvetica with bold, oblique, and bold oblique
Symbol/ Math
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Book with Book oblique, demi, and demi-oblique
New Century Schoolbook with bold, italic, and bold italic
ITC Lubalin Graph Book with Book oblique, demi, and demi-oblique
ITC Souvenir demi, demi italic, light, and light italic

Optional Typefaces

SoftFont is a series of bitmap fonts emulating the same font families and sizes as
the LN03 and DEClaser 2100 plus/2200 plus printers. Any member of Digital' s
PrintServer family that operates under DECprint Printing Services software V4.0
or higher can use SoftFont.
DECfonts Typeface Collection is a set of PostScript Type 1 font kits that can be
used on any Digital networked PostScript printer with applications such as
DECwrite and DECpresent.
See SoftFont and DECfonts Typeface Collection product descriptions at the end
of this chapter.
Font Cache

256 Kbytes RAM

PostScript Virtual Memory (VM)

1 Mbyte

* DECfonts is available for VMS and ULTRIX. It includes the Typeface Pack I fonts.

Terminals and Printers

8.45

PrintServer 40 Plus and
turbo PrintServer 20 Specifications
Specifications (Continued)
Physical Characteristics

Power Requirements

PrintServer 40 Plus

turbo PrintServer 20

Height
Width
Depth
Weight

102.7 cm (40.4 in.)
152.4 cm (60 in. )
72.1 cm (28.4 in.)
220 kg (485 lb)

126 cm (49.6 in.)
93 .5 cm (36.8 in.)
69 cm (27.2 in.)
157 kg (345 lb)

Voltage

200/2081240 V;

100-120 V; 50-60 Hz
(North America
and Japan)
220-240 V; 50 Hz
(International)

60 Hz
200/220/ 230/240 V;
50 Hz

Operating Environment

Current ac amps
(maximum)

12 A

12 A (North America
and Japan)
7 A (International)

Heat dissipation
(continuous printing)

<6000 Btu/ hr

<3585 Btu/hr

Temperature

15° to 32° C
10° to 32 ° C
(59° to 90° F)
(50 ° to 90° F)
Operating: 20 % to 80% humidity (noncondensing)

Relative humidity

8.46

Terminals and Printers

Recommended
humidity

45 % ± 10 %

Altitude

Up to 2000 meters (6500 feet)

DEClaser Printer Family
DEClaser 1000' (LN07) Family
DEClaser 1000 printers are available in two models. Both models print up to
four pages per minute. The DEClaser 1100 supports the DEC ANSI/sixel protocol. PostScript support is available through an optional upgrade kit. The
DEClaser 1150 provides both DEC ANSI/sixel and PostScript support as a standard feature.
Serial and parallel (IBM/Centronics) interfaces allow the DEClaser 1000 to be
connected to any of Digital's terminals, workstations, or DECstation PCs. HP
PCL-4 for HP II P emulation is included in the DEClaser 1150. HP PCL-4 for
II P and IBM ProPrinter X24 is available as a cartridge for the DEClaser 1100.
Both versions of the DEClaser 1000 printers print on standard, legal, and international paper sizes as well as envelopes, transparencies, and labels. Optional
font cartridges are installed under the paper trays in the front of the DEClaser
printers. Maintenance is simple with a single supplies cartridge.
The DEClaser 1150 printer supports DEC ANSI/sixel and PostScript. PostScript
by Adobe Systems Inc. is the industry-standard page description language offering flexibility and device independence. With the availability of PostScript, multiple type styles can be integrated with graphics; images can be rotated, enlarged,
or reduced; and line ~t, text, and digitized photographs can be used within one
document.
With PostScript support, full compatibility with VMS-based PostScript applications is provided. Forty-three PostScript-resident fonts are included with the
DEClaser 1150. These fonts are used in Digital and industry-standard applications. With Apple LaserWriter compatibility, users have access to PC, UNIX,
and ULTRIX applications, written to support the Apple LaserWriter.
The "U" version of the DEClaser 1150 is ideal for printing in a non-VMS environment. This version contains all the features of the basic DEClaser 1100 plus
the industry-standard Adobe PostScript and HP PCL emulation. In addition, with
DEClaser PostScript printers, thousands of applications written to support PCs,
UNIX, and ULTRIX operating systems can be accessed.
For VMS PostScript printing, DECprint Printing Services for VMS is a layered
product required by VMS systems to access and control the DEClaser 1150 ("R"
version) PostScript printer. It contains the print command interpreters and translators required to print documents formatted in a number of industry-standard
or proprietary protocols (ASCII, ANSI/LN03, PostScript, DDIF, Tektronix
4010/4014, HP LaserJet II P, and Apple LaserWriter). It must be installed on
each VMS V5 .3 or higher CPU or a single CPU within a cluster that will be
sending print jobs to .,a Digital PostScript printer. This provides a single client
interface to drive all VMS-based printing for Digital PostScript printers. Utilization of this software product allows DEClaser PostScript printers to provide
better support for a wide variety of host environments than any other printers
available. With the addition of this software, compatibility is provided for
Macintosh through PATHWORKS for Macintosh and PC applications are accessible through software translators for HP LaserJet II P (PCL-4) .
Features

· Prints up to four pages per minute at 300- by 300-dot-per-inch resolution
· Equipped with stanclard EIA-232 serial and parallel (IBM/Centronics) interfaces,
and includes DECconnect adapter and cable
· Wide variety of optional font cartridges (credit-card sized)
· Optional memory upgrade cards (graphic applications may require additional
memory)

Terminals and Printers

8.47

DEClaser Printer Family
DEClaser 1000 Family
(Continued)

· Optional lower cassette (250 sheets) for increased capacity
• Easy-to-read LCD (liquid crystal display) displays printer's operational status,
font selection, paper selection, and baud rate
· Optional font cartridges including bar codes
• Optional software (see product descriptions at the end of this chapter):
DECprint Utility software (DEClaser 1100 only); LaserTwin software;
SuperFonts 25; Canon CaPSL software; PrintAPlot software; ON-TAP software;
and Freed om of Press software
· PostScript DEClaser 1150 Highlights
- 43 resident PostScript fonts, plus support for downline-loadable fonts
- PostScript/DEC ANSI protocol (LaserWriter compatible)
- PostScript output in UNIX, ULTRIX, DOS, and VMS environments
- Additional memory included
- Includes HP LaserJet II P emulator

DEClaser 2000 plus printers are available in four models: two models print DEC
ANSI/sixel only and two models print both PostScript and DEC ANSI/sixel. All
four printers are compact, quiet, fast, flexible, and easy to install and maintain.
With standard features such as serial and parallel (IBM/Centronics) interfaces,
they can be connected to any of Digital's terminals, workstations, DECstation
PCs, or other industry-standard PCs. For PC networks and Macintosh environments, optional Novell (2100/2150/2200/2250) and AppleTalk (2150/2250) connections are available to extend the DEClaser 2100 plus/2200 plus printers direct
connect network operating environments.
All four versions of the DEClaser 2000 plus printers print on standard, legal, and
international paper sizes as well as envelopes, transparencies, and labels. An
adjustable slot located at the top of the paper tray allows for manual feed of a
single sheet of paper, transparency, label, or envelope. Optional font cartridges
are available for HP PCL/IBM ProPrinter and other families of popular font
cartridges.
DEClaser 2150 plus/2250 plus printers support DEC ANSI/sixel and PostScript.
PostScript by Adobe is the industry-standard page description language offering
flexibility and device independence. With the availability of PostScript, multiple
type styles can be integrated with graphics; images can be rotated, enlarged, or
reduced; and line art, text, and digitized photographs can be used within one
document.
With Digital PostScript support, full compatibility with VMS PostScript applications is provided. Forty-three PostScript resident fonts are included with the
DEClaser 2150 plus/2250 plus. These fonts are used in Digital and industrystandard applications. With Apple LaserWriter compatibility, users have access
to PC, UNIX, and ULTRIX applications, written to support the Apple
LaserWriter.
The "U" versions of the DEClaser 2150 plus/2250 plus are ideal for printing in a
non-VMS environment. These versions contain all the features of the basic
DEClaser 2100 plus or 2200 plus, as well as the industry-standard Adobe PostScript page description language. In addition, with DEClaser PostScript printers,
thousands of applications written to support PCs, UNIX, and ULTRIX operating
systems can be accessed. These printers contain 43 PostScript fonts, which are
compatible with Apple LaserWriter printing through PATHWORKS for
Macintosh software.

8.48

Terminals and Printers

DEClaser Printer Family
DEClaser 2000 plus Family
(Continued)

For VAX PostScript printing, DECprint Printing Services for VMS is an optional
layered product required by VMS systems to access and control the DEClaser
2150 plus/2250 plus PostScript printers. It must be installed on each VMS V5.3
or higher CPU or a single CPU within a cluster that will be sending print jobs to
a Digital PostScript printer. It contains the print command interpreters and
translators required to print documents formatted in a number of industrystandard or proprietary protocols (ASCII, ANSI/LN03, PostScript, DDIF,
Tektronix 4010/4014, HP Laser II P, and Apple LaserWriter).

Features
• Prints up to eight pages per minute at 300- by 300-dot-per-inch resolution
• DEClaser 2100 plus (simplex only); DEClaser 2200 plus (simplex/duplex)
• Standard EIA-232 serial and parallel (IBM/Centronics) interfaces, includes
DECconnect adapter and cable
• Variety of optional font cartridges (credit-card sized)
· Optional memory upgrade cards (graphics applications may require additional
memory)
· DEClaser 2200 plus/2250 plus models include two paper cassettes
· Optional large capacity input tray (1000 sheets)
· Monthly usage: DEClaser 2100 plus/2150 plus-up to 16,000 pages/ month;
DEClaser 2200 plus/2250 plus-up to 20,000 pages/ month
· Optional large capacity output stacker (500 sheets)
· Optional auto-envelope feeder (50 envelopes) used in addition to two standard
paper cassettes (available on DEClaser 2200 plus/2250 plus models only) for
first sheet, second sheet, and envelopes
· DEClaser 2150 plus/2250 plus highlights
- 43 resident PostScript fonts, plus support for downline-loadable fonts
- PostScript/ DEC ANSI protocol (LaserWriter compatible)
- PostScript output in UNIX, ULTRIX, DOS and VMS environments
- Additional memory included
• Optional software (see product descriptions at the end of this chapter):
DECprint Utility software; LaserTwin software for HP-LaserJet II emulation, for
the DEClaser 2100 plus/2200 plus; SuperFonts 25 software; Canon CaPSL software; PrintAPlot software; ON-TAP software; and Freedom of Press software

DEdaser 3200/3250 (LN08) Family
DEClaser 3200 and 3250 printers offer fast (13-page-per-minute), duplex
(double-sided) and simplex (single-sided) printing on a variety of media- cutsheet paper, transparencies, envelopes, and labels. The printers support Digital
ANSI-compliant printing protocol (DEC PPL3) and emulate HP LaserJet II D
(PCL Level 4) . The DEClaser 3250 printer also supports an emulation that is
compatible with Adobe's PostScript page description language. For PC network
environments, an optional Novell Ethernet connection is offered to extend the
DEClaser 3200/3250 printers' direct connect network operating environments.
The DEClaser 3200 and 3250 printers offer two input trays, each with a capacity
of 250 sheets of standard paper, and an output tray capacity of up to 500 sheets.
With an optional 1,500-sheet large capacity input tray, total paper input capacity
is 2,000 sheets. A separate manual feed tray allows users to feed a single sheet,
transparency, label, or envelope without removing either of the two paper
cassettes.

Terminals and Printers

8.49

DEClaser Printer Family
DEClaser 3200/3250 Family
(Continued)

The DEClaser 3250 printer is compatible with Adobe's PostScript page description language. It offers 43 resident fonts, including the 35 industry-standard
Apple LaserWriter fonts. The DEClaser 3250 printer also supports the optional
DECfonts Typeface Collection for VMS and ULTRIX, which offers an extensive
library of PostScript Type 1 Typefaces by Adobe.
The "U" version of the DEClaser 3250 is ideal for printing in a non-VMS environment. This version contains all the features of the basic DEClaser 3200, plus
an emulation that is compatible with Adobe's PostScript page description language. In addition, with DEClaser PostScript printers, thousands of applications
that are written to support PCs, UNIX, and ULTRIX operating systems can be
accessed.
The DEClaser 3250 ("R" version) printer offers an optional DECprint Printing
Services for VMS~' license, which allows printing in heterogeneous environments.
It makes PostScript the common denominator for many applications, translating
printer input of different data types into PostScript and printing it on a PostScript printer. For occasional PostScript printing, the DEClaser 3200 printer can
use the optional DECprint Utility for PostScript to Sixel Printing for VMS. This
software converts PostScript files to sixel format used by most of Digital's
desktop printers.
'" VMS version 5.3 or higher is required to run DECprint Printing Services for VMS , V4.l.

Features

• Prints up to 13 pages per minute
• Duty cycle of up 35 ,000 pages per month
• Double-sided (duplex) and single-sided (simplex) printing
· Built-in HP LaserJet II D protocol emulation
• Compatible with thousands of PC, Macintosh, VMS, and PostScript applications
• Compatible with VMS applications such as DECwrite, DECpage, and
DECpresent for the LN03 and other DEClaser family printers (3250 only)
• Standard DECconnect serial and PC-compatible parallel interfaces (3250 only)
• Optional Novell Ethernet interface (3250 only)

8.50

Terminals and Printers

DEClaser Printer Family Ordering Information

DEClaser
3200
(LN08)

DEClaser
3250
(LN08)

LN06R-CA
LN06U-CA5

LN08-CA

LN08R-CA
LN08U-CA4

LN06R-AZ
4
LN06U-AZ

LN08-AZ

LN08R-AZ
4
LN08U-AZ

LN06R-CD
4
LN06U-CD

LN08-CD

LN08R-CD
LN08U-CD 4

LN06R-CA
LN06U-CA4

LN08-CA

LN08R-CA
LN08U-CA4

LN06R-CA
4
LN06U-CA

LN08-CA

LN08R-CA
LN08U-CA4

LN06R-AD
LN06U-AD4

LN08-AD

LN08R-AD
LN08U-AD4

LN06R-CC
LN06U-CC4

LN08-CC

LN08R-CC
LN08U-CC4

LN06R-CD
LN06U-CD 4

LN08-CD

LN08R-CD6
LN08U-CD4

LN06R-CD
4
LN06U-CD

LN08-CD

LN08R-CD 6
LN08U-CD 4

LN06-AT

LN06R-Ar6
LN06U-AT

LN08-AT

LN08R-AT
LN08U-AT

LN05R-AI
LN05U-AI4

LN06-AI

LN06R-AI
LN06U-AI4

LN08-AI

LN08R-AI
4
LN08U-AI

LN05R-CC
LN05U-CC 4

LN06-CC

LN06R-CC
LN06U-CC 4

LN08-CC

LN08R-CC
LN08U-CC 4

LN05R-CC
4
LN05U-CC

LN06-CC

LN06R-CC
4
LN06U-CC

LN08-CC

LN08R-CC
4
LN08U-CC

LN05R-CC
4
LN05U-CC

LN06-CC

LN06R-CC
LN06U-CC4

LN08-AS

LN08R-AS
LN08U-AS 4

LN05R-CC
LN05U-CC4

LN06-CC

LN06R-CC
LN06U-CC 4

LN08-CC

LN08R-CC
LN08U-CC4

LN05-CB

LN05R-CB6
4
LN05U-CB

LN06-CB

LN06R-CB
LN06U-CB4

LN08-CB

LN08R-CB
LN08U-CB4

LN07R-CB
LN07U-CB5

LN05-CB

LN05R-CB
LN05U-CB 4

LN06-CB

LN06R-CB
LN06U-CB 4

LN08-CB

LN08R-CB
4
LN08U-CB

LN07R-CB
LN07U-CB5

LN05-CB

LN05R-CB
4
LN05U-CB

LN06-CB

LN06R-CB
LN06U-CB 4

LN08-CB

LN08R-CB
4
LN08U-CB

LN07R-AE
LN07U-AE5

LN05-AE

LN05R-AE
LN05U-AE4

LN06-AE

LN06R-AE
LN06U-AE4

LN08-AE

LN08R-AE6
LN08U-AE4

LN07R-AG3
LN07U-AG 5

LN05-AG

LN05R-AG
LN05U-AG 4

LN06-AG

LN06R-AG
LN06U-AG4

LN08-AG

LN08R-AG
LN08U-AG 4

DEClaser
2
2200 plus
(LN06)

DEClaser
2250 plus
(LN06)

LN06-CA
7
LN06P-CA

LN05R-AZ
4
LN05U-AZ

LN06-AZ

LN05R-CD
LN05U-CD4

LN06-CD

LN05R-CA
4
LN05U-CA

LN06-CA

LN05R-CA
LN05U-CA4

LN06-CA

LN05R-AD
LN05U-AD4

LN06-AD

LN05R-CC
4
LN05U-CC

LN06-CC

LN05-CD

LN05R-CD6
LN05U-CD 4

LN06-CD

LN07R-CD3
LN07U-CD5

LN05-CD

LN05R-CD6
LN05U-CD 4

LN06-CD

LN07R-AT
5
LN07U-AT

LN05-AT

LN05R-Ar6
LN05U-AT

LN07-AI

LN07R-AI 3
5
LN07U-AI

LN05-AI

NorwayIN orwegian

LN07-CC

LN07R-CC
LN07U-CC5

LN05-CC

Portugal/Portuguese

LN07-CC

LN07R-Cc3
LN07U-CC5

LN05-CC

Spain/Spanish

LN07-CC

LN07R-Cc3
LN07U-CC5

LN05-CC

Sweden/Swedish

LN07-CC

LN07R-Cc3
5
LN07U-CC

LN05-CC

Switzerland/French

LN07-CB

LN07R-CB3
LN07U-CB5

Switzerland/German

LN07-CB

Switzerland/Italian

LN07-CB

U.K., Ireland/England

LN07-AE

Germany, Austria/ German LN07 -AG

DEClaser
1100
(LN07)

DEClaser
1150
(LN07)

DEClaser
1
2100 plus
(LN05)

DEClaser
2150 plus
(LN05)

North American/English

LN07-CA
7
LN07P-CA

LN07R-CA
5
LN07U-CA

LN05-CA
LN05P-CA 7

LN05R-CA
LN05U-CA5

Australia, New Zealand/
English

LN07-AZ

LN07R-AZ
5
LN07U-AZ

LN05-AZ

Belgium/Flemish

LN07-CD

LN07R-CD3
5
LN07U-CD

LN05-CD

Canada/English

LN07-CA

LN07R-CA
LN07U-CA5

LN05-CA

Canada/French

LN07-CA

LN07R-CA
LN07U-CA5

LN05-CA

Denmark/Danish

LN07-AD

LN07R-AD 3
LN07U-AD5

LN05-AD

Finland/Finnish

LN07-CC

LN07R-Cc3
LN07U-CC5

LN05-CC

France/ French

LN07-CD

LN07R-CD
LN07U-CD 5

Holland/Dutch

LN07-CD

Israel/Hebrew

LN07-AT

Italy/ Italian

Country or Region/
Language

Simplex (single-sided)
Duplex (double-sided)
3
Includes VMS software license.
2

Does not include DECprint Printing Services for VMS license.
Does not include VMS software license.
6
Includes DECprint Printing Services for VMS license.

Includes PCL emulation.

Upgrade Kits

LN07U-UA
LN07R-UA
LN05U-UA
LN05R-UA
LN06U-UB
LN06R-UB
LN08U-UA
LN08R-UA

PostScript upgrade kit for DEClaser 1100 (includes PostScript cartridge and 2 Mbytes of memory)
PostScript upgrade kit for DEClaser 1100 (includes PostScript cartridge, VMS software license, and
2 Mbytes of memory)
PostScript upgrade kit for DEClaser 2100 plus (includes PostScript cartridge and 2 Mbytes of
memory)
PostScript upgrade kit for DEClaser 2200 plus (LN07) (includes PostScript cartridge, VMS software
license, and 2 Mbytes of memory)
PostScript upgrade kit for DEClaser 2200 plus (includes PostScript cartridge and 2 Mbytes of
memory)
PostScript upgrade kit for DEClaser 1100 (LN07) (includes PostScript cartridge, VMS software
license, and 2 Mbytes of memory)
PostScript upgrade kit for DEClaser 3200 (includes PostScript cartridge and 2 Mbytes of memory)
PostScript upgrade kit for DEClaser 3200 (LN07) (includes PostScript cartridge, VMS software
license, and 2 Mbytes of memory)

Terminals and Printers

8.51

DEClaser Printer Family Ordering Information
Accessories and Supplies
Note: For cable/adapter information, refer to the Desktop Printers Cable and Adapter Guide that follows the LA75 Plus
ordering information.
Option

DEClaser
1000 Family
(LN07)

DEClaser 2000
plus Family
(LN05/LN06)

Toner cartridge kit

LN07X-AA

LNXX-AC

Photoreceptor kit

DEClaser
3200/3250
(LN08)
LN08X-AA
LN08X-AB

Developer kit

LN08X-AC

CG Times proportional spaced font cartridge

LNXX-CA

LN08X-CA

CG Triumverate proportional spaced font cartridge

LNXX-CB

LN08X-CB

ITC Souvenir and Script proportional spaced Font Cartridge

LNXX-CC

LN08X-CC

Monospaced font cartridge

LNXX-CD

LN08X-CD

LaserJet IIP (HP PCL4) and ProPrinter X24E emulation cartridge

LNXX-PC

MicroSoft PCL font cartridge

LN07X-HM

LN08X-CI

WordPerfect PCL font cartridge

LN07X-HW

Multifont PCL font cartridge

LN07X-HT

CaPSL ROM cartridge (Canon LBP printer emulation)

LNXX-CN

Media kit (one each: LNOlX-AB, H9850-TA LNXX-AC; two each LN03X-AJ

LNXX-SA

Paper tray kit (one each: LNXX-LA, LNXX-LT LNXX-LN, LNXX-LE, LNXX-AC)

LNXX-SB

CG font library kit (1 each: LNXX-AC, LNXX-CA, LNXX-CB)

LNXX-SC

DEClaser font library kit (1 each: LNXX-AC, LNXX-CA, LNXX-CB, LNXX-CC, LNXX-CD)

LNXX-SD

LNXX-CD

PostScript cartridge (requires optional memory), documentation , and VMS software license

LN07X-PS

LNXXR-PS

LNXX-SC

PostScript cartridge (requires optional memory), documentation, and no VMS software license

LN07U-PS

LNXXU-PS

Toner cartridge

LN07X-AA

LNXX-AC

A4 size paper tray

LN07X-TA

LNXX-LB

LN08X-TA

Legal-size paper cassette

LN07X-TB

LNXX-LA

LN08X-TB

Letter-size paper cassette

LN07X-TC

LNXX-LT

LN08X-TC

Envelope cassette

LN07X-TD

LNXX-LN

Automatic envelope feeder (2200 and 2250 only)

LN06X-EF

Large capacity input cassette {letter)

LN08X-TG
LNXX-LS

Large capacity output stacker
LN07X-TE

LNXX-LE
LN08X-TD

Adjustable paper cassette
Optional lower cassette with letter tray

LN08X-TE
LN08X-TF

Large capacity input cassette (A4)

Executive size paper cassette

LN08X-AA

LN07X-TF
LN08X-NE

Novell Ethernet interface
LNXX-LC

Large capacity output stacker
1-Mbyte RAM card

LN07X-MA

LNXX-UC

2-Mbyte RAM card

LN07X-UD

LNXX-UD

3-Mbyte RAM card

LNXX-UE

AppleTalk connection (for DEClaser 2150 plus/2250 plus only)

LNXX-AT
LNXX-NE

Novell connection

LN08X-UC

LNXX-NE

Mobile printer cabinet stand

LN03X-AE

Laser printer paper

LNOlX-AB

Laser transparencies

LN03X-AJ

Laser labels

H9850-TA

Digital ANSI-Compliant Printing Protocol Level 3 Programmer's Reference Manual

AA-PBWGA-TE

Digital ANSI-Compliant Printing Protocol Level 3 Supplement to Programmer's Reference Manual

AA-PBWHA-TE

PostScript Programming Supplement

AA-HL84E-TE

DEClaser 2000 plus toner cartridge kits can be purchased in bulk quantities at a discounted price; LNXX-XA = four kits: LNXX-XB = 16 kits; LNXX-XC
= 64 kits .

8.52

Terminals and Printers

DEClaser Printer Family Specifications

DEClaser
1000 (LN07)

DEClaser
2100 plus/2150 plus
(LN05 )

DEClaser
2200 plus/2250 plus
(LN06)

DEClaser
3200/3250 (LN08)

20.4 cm (8.0 in.)
35.0 cm (13.8 in.)
40.5 cm (15.9 in. )
11.0 kg (25.0 lb)

23.8 cm (9.4 in.)
45 .2 cm (17.8 in.)
51.0 cm (20. 1 in.)
19.l kg (42.0 lb)

31.2 cm (12.3 in.)
45.2 cm (17.8 in.)
68.5 cm (27 .0 in.)
29.0 kg (64.0 lb)

49.6 cm (19.5 in.)
67.0 cm (26.4 in.)
53 .6 cm (21.1 in.)
38 kg (85 lb)

100/ 115 v
50-60 Hz
1
550
1875

100/ 115 v
50-60 Hz
1
810
2764

100/ 115 v
50-60 Hz
1
940
3208

120 v
60 Hz
1
450
1535

Physical Characteristics
Height
Width
Depth
Weight
Power Requirements
Voltage
Frequency
Phases
Thermal dissipation (watts)
Thermal dissipation (Btu/ h)

2201240 v
50 Hz
1
530
1875

220/ 240 v
50 Hz
1
700
2696

2201240 v
50 Hz
1
725
3037

2201240 v
50 Hz
1
450
1535

Communications
Baud rate

3 00 to 19 .2 Kbytes

300 to 19.2 Kbytes

1200 to 38.4 Kbytes

10° to 32.5° C
20 % to 80 %
20 % to 80 %
2500 m (8200 ft)

10° to 32.5° C
20 % to 80%
20% to 80%
2500 m (8200 ft)

10° to 32° C
20 % to 80%
20 % to 80%
2000 m (6600 ft)

Operating Environment
Temperature
Relative humidity
Recommended humidity
Altitude (max)

·efi'
~

Terminals and Printers

8.53

DECjet 1000 and DECjet 2000 Ink-jet Printers

The DECjet 1000 is an ink-jet printer offering reliable, high-quality, monochrome
printing on cutsheet paper, selected transparencies, and envelopes. Designed to
support personal computers, it offers a parallel interface and HP DeskJet Plus
emulation. It also offers optional IBM ProPrinter and Epson FX-850 printer
emulation cards. The DECjet 1000 prints up to 160 characters per second with
300-dot-per-inch resolution.
Features

· Prints up to 160 characters per second, with a duty cycle of up to 400 pages
per month
• Handles letter, legal, and international (A4) paper sizes; selected transparencies
and envelopes
· Standard parallel (IBM Centronics) interface
• Offers built-in HP DeskJet Plus emulation
· Cartridge slot for font or emulation cartridges or RAM cards
• Optional 70-page sheet feeder
• Includes the following resident fonts: Courier, Courier Landscape, Times Nordic (propohional spacing), and Letter Gothic

DECjet 2000
The DECjet 2000 offers reliable, high-quality, monochrome printing on cutsheet
paper, selected transparencies, and envelopes with 300-dot-per-inch resolution. It
is designed to support personal computers and includes a parallel interface and
HP Desk} et Plus emulation. Optional emulation cards are available for the IBM
ProPrinter and Epson FX-850. The DECjet 2000 prints up to 360 characters per
second.
Features

· Prints up to 360 characters per second, with a duty cycle of up to 800 pages
per month
• Handles letter, legal, and international (A4) paper sizes; selected transparencies,
and envelopes
• Standard parallel (IBM Centronics) interface
• Built-in HP DeskJet Plus emulation
• 150-page sheet feeder for legal or A4 sizes-a second 150-page sheet feeder is
available as an option
· Two cartridge slots for font or emulation cartridges or for RAM cards
· Includes the following resident fonts: Courier, Courier Landscape, Times Nordic (proportional spacing), and Letter Gothic

Ordering Information

8.54

Terminals and Printers

LJ16P-AA
LJ36P-AA
LJ16X-CA
LJ36X-CA
LJ16X-CB
LJ36X-CB

DECjet 1000 Printer, North American Model
DECjet 2000 Printer, North American Model
IBM ProPrinter emulation card (DECjet 1000)
IBM ProPrinter emulation card (DECjet 2000)
Epson emulation card (DECjet 1000)
Epson emulation card (DECjet 2000)

DECjet 1000 and DECjet 2000 Ink-jet Printers
International Models

DECjet 1000

DECjet 2000

Country/Region

Language

LJ16P-AE
LJ16P-AT
LJ16P-AZ
LJ16P-CC

LJ36P-AE
LJ36P-AT
LJ36P-AZ

U.K./Ireland
Israel
Australia/New Zealand
Continental Europe
Central Europe
Denmark
Italy
Switzerland

English
English
English
Multilingual
Multilingual
English
English
Multilingual

LJ36P-CC
LJ36P-AD
LJ36P-AI
LJ36P-AK

LJ50X-DA

DECjet 1000 automatic sheet feeder (70-page)
DECjet 2000 automatic sheet feeder legal size (150-page)
DECjet 2000 automatic sheet feeder A4 size (150-page)
Ink-jet cartridge (pack of one)
Font cartridge; Prestige Elite, 3 .5-10 points; Line Draw,
6-12 points; Math/ PI, 5-10 points
Font cartridge; Letter Gothic Landscape, 4.7-24 points
Font cartridge; Information (Presentation), 7-18 points;
Letter Gothic, 7-14 points; Line Draw, 6-12 points
Font cartridge; Times Nordic (Times Roman)-proportional
spacing, 4-14 points
Font cartridge; Nordic (Helvetica)-proportional spacing,
4-14 points
Font cartridge; Times Nordic (Times Roman)-proportional
spacing, 15-30 points
Font cartridge; Nordic (Helvetica)-proportional spacing, 1530 points
RAM extension card 256K

Cables and Adapters

BC19M-10

IBM/Centronics parallel cable

Specifications

Physical Characteristics

Accessories and Supplies

LJ16X-SF
LJ36X-SF
LJ36X-SG
LJ50X-AA
LJ50X-CA
LJ50X-CB
LJ50X-CC
LJ50X-CD
LJ50X-CE
LJ50X-CF
LJ50X-CG

DECjet 1000 (LJ16P)

Closed
Height
Width
Depth
Weight

DECjet 2000 (LJ36P)

Open

115 mm (4.5 in.) 275 mm (10.8 in.)
342 mm (13.5 in.) 342 mm (13.5 in.)
147 mm (5.8 in.) 360 mm (14.2 in.)
2.9 kg (6.4 lb)

Print modes
Portrait and landscape
Input buffer size 8 Kbytes
Optional memory 256 Kbytes
upgrade cards

147 mm (5.8 in.)
425 mm (16.7 in.)
450 mm (17.7 in.)
9 kg (19.6 lb)
Portrait and landscape
8 Kbytes
256 Kbytes

Power Requirements
Voltage
Frequency
Power Absorbed

115 /220/240
50 or 60 Hz
20 W

115/220/240
50 or 60 Hz

35 w

Terminals and Printers

8.55

LJ250/LJ252 Companion Color Printers
Digital's Companion Color Printers are quiet, compact desktop printers that
create professional-looking documents-combining high-quality, color graphics
with high-quality text. They are available in two models: LJ250, with DEC-423
and EIA-232 serial interfaces; LJ252, with a Centronics-type parallel interface.
They employ cartridge technology, consisting of a printhead and ink supply, for
high-quality text and graphics printing and no user maintenance. This technology
allows printing of up to seven pure colors-including plain black ink-and hundreds of mixed colors on a single page. LJ250 and LJ252 print text and graphics
on paper and transparencies in the A (8.5-by-11-inch) and European A4
(8.3-by-11-inch) sizes, using single-sheets or fanfold paper. Specially treated
paper and transparencies from Digital provide optimum print quality.
Features

• Bold, bright colors
· Fast (167 chis burst, 90 chis throughput) and quiet (less than 45 dBA)
• Capable of printing PostScript output with optional DECprint Utility software
• Prints up to seven colors at 180-by-180 dpi resolution, and up to 255 colors at
90-by-90-dpi resolution
• Emulates the HP Paint] et printer for wide application support on IBM PCs and
PC-compatibles through the Hewlett-Packard PCL protocol
• Supports Digital systems through DEC-PPL2 with color sixel extension
• Prints ReGIS graphics files using host-resident VAX ReGIS-to-Sixels Converter
(RETOS) software or the print screen function on many of Digital's graphic terminals, PCs, or workstations
• Compact and lightweight [less than 4.5 kg (10 lb)]
• DECprint Utility for PostScript to Sixel Printing for VMS extends the printing
capabilities (see product description at the end of this chapter)
• PrintAPlot software turns the LJ250 into a high-speed, high-resolution plotter
(see product description at the end of this chapter)

Ordering Information

Model
Number

LJ25x-CA
LJ25x-AB
LJ250-AD
LJ25x-AE
LJ25x-AG
LJ25x-AH
LJ25x-AI
LJ25x-AS
LJ25x-AT
LJ25x-AZ
LJ25x-AP
LJ25x-CB
LJ25x-CC

Country or Region

Language

U.S., Canada, Mexico, South
America
Belgium
Denmark
U.K., Ireland
Germany, Austria
Holland

English, French, Spanish,
Portuguese
Flemish
Danish
English
German
Dutch

hilim

Spain
Israel
Australia, New Zealand
France
Switzerland
Finland, Norway, Portugal,
Sweden

Spanish
Hebrew
English
French
English, French, German
Finnish, Norwegian,
Portuguese, Swedish

Note: Replace x with 0 for serial; 2 for parallel: parallel models include
BC19M-10 10-ft (3.1-m) parallel cable

8.56

Terminals and Printers

LJ250/LJ252 Companion Color Printers
Accessories and Supplies

LJ25X-AA
LJ25X-AB
LJ25X-AC
LJ25X-AD
LJ25X-AE
LJ25X-AF
LJ25X-DC
LAXXS-DS
LJ25X-SW

Color ink cartridge
Black ink cartridge
Continuous form paper (A size), 250 sheets
Continuous form paper (A4 size), 250 sheets
Cutsheet transparencies (A size), 50 sheets
Cutsheet transparencies (A4 size), 50 sheets
Dust cover
Desk stand
Paper catcher

Cables and Adapters

For more information on cabling and adapters, refer to the Desktop Printer
Cable-and Adapter Guide at the end of this chapter.

Specifications

Physical Characteristics
Height
Width
Depth
Weight

9.0 cm (3.5 in.)
42.5 cm (16.7 in.)
26.0 cm (10.2 in.)
4.5 kg (10.0 lb)

Power Requirements
Voltage
Frequency
Phases
Current ac amps (maximum)
Thermal dissipation (watts)
Thermal dissipation (Btu/h)

120
59-61 Hz
1
0.17
20
188

220
49-51 Hz
1
0.091
20
188

240
49-51 Hz
1
0.083
20
188

Operating Environment
Temperature

15° to 30° C (54.5 ° to 86° F)

Relative humidity

20 % to 80 % (paper) ;
20 % to 70% (transparency)

Terminals and Printers

8.57

Colormate PS Printer
The LFOlR Colormate PS Printer includes an Adobe PostScript interpreter and
outputs 300-dot-per-inch graphics in an array of colors. It prints on 8 1/2- x
11-inch paper and transparencies with highly saturated color. The LFOlR
Colormate simulates the PANTONE color matching system when used with
PANTONE-certified software.
The Colormate's M68020 microprocessor and thermal transfer print engine combine to produce one full-color page per minute. The printer's 8 Mbytes of
memory handles the most complex color art and photographs. Adobe PostScript
interpreter provides shading, type scaling, and rotation capabilities and permits
the Colormate to work with many popular graphics packages.
Standard EIA-232, EIA-422, Apple LocalTalk and Centronics parallel interfaces
permit integration with any network, multiuser system, or personal computer. A
built-in library of 35 Adobe fonts provides a variety of online selections, and the
printer supports downloading of additional fonts.
The Colormate PS Printer fits comfortably in most environments and is designed
for ease of use and serviceability. The thermal transfer printhead has no moving
parts. A 16-character status display conveys configuration and operating information. All selections are made from the front panel.
Features

· Choice of three ribbons: four-color, three-color, and monochrome
· Printing speed:
Monochrome letter: 3 pages/minute maximum
Color letter: 1 page/minute maximum
· Prints cutsheets and transparencies
• 35 resident fonts
• Quiet-less than 53 dBA
• Supports DECpresent, DECpage, DECslide, and DECwrite application software
· Supports VMS DECprint Printing Services for VMS
· Supports systems that output in PostScript format

Ordering Information

Accessories and Supplies

With
Software License·;':

Without
Software Licenset

LFOlR-CA
LFOlR-CB
LFOlR-CC

LFOlU-CA
LFOlU-CB
LFOlU-CC

LFOlR-AD
LFOlR-AE
LFOlR-AG
LFOlR-AI
LFOlR-AT
LFOlR-AZ

LFOlU-AD
LFOlU-AE
LFOlU-AG
LFOlU-AI
LFOlU-AT
LFOlU-AZ

Country

North America
Switzerland
Finland/Norway/Portugal/
Sweden/Belgium/Holland/
France/Spain
Denmark
U.K.
Germany/Austria
Italy
Israel
Australia/NZ

For more information, refer to the DECdirect catalog.

LFOlX-KA
LFOlX-KB
LFOlX-KC
LFOlX-KD
LFOlX-TP
LFOlX-TQ
LFOlX-TT
LFOlX-TU

Black ribbon
3-color ribbon letter size
3-color ribbon A4 size
4-color ribbon
Paper, letter size
Paper, A4 size
Transparency letter size
Transparency A4 size

'" Includes license for DECprint Printing Services for VMS.
t Does not include license for DECprint Printing Services for VMS.

8.58

Terminals and Printers

Colormate PS Printer
Specifications

Physical Characteristics

Height
Width
Depth
Weight

24.1 cm (9.5 in.)
43.1 cm (17 in.)
45.7 cm (18 in.)
25 kg (55 lb)

Power Requirements

Voltage
Frequency
Phases
Current ac amps (maximum)
Thermal dissipation (Watts/h)
Thermal dissipation (Btu/h)

120 v
50-60 Hz
1
4.0
235
1160

240 v
50-60 Hz
1
2.0
235
1160

240 LMF

Operating Environment

Temperature

10° to 35° C (50° to 95° F)

Relative humidity

30% to 80 %

Terminals and Printers

8.59

LA424 MultiPrinter
The LA424 MultiPrinter is a high-resolution, wide-carriage, receive-only, impact,
dot-matrix printer. It is well suited for various environments from the factory
floor to the desktop to the datacenter. The LA424 MultiPrinter incorporates a
24-wire printhead.
It is a heavy-duty forms printer designed for usage of 6000 pages per month.
The LA424 MultiPrinter is also designed for the IBM personal computer environment with its built-in IBM ProPrinter XL24 emulation mode and parallel interface. The LA424 MultiPrinter's paper and forms handling capabilities make it
ideal for a variety of applications. For users who need spreadsheet and simple
color output, the LA424 MultiPrinter offers a wide carriage and eight-color
printing capability.
The rugged modular design of the LA424 MultiPrinter makes it very reliable for
high-volume printing in areas such as online transaction processing, engineering
and science, financial services, insurance, and banking.
Features

·Average duty cycle of up to 6000 pages per month
• 400 chis draft printing speed (burst); 133 chi s letter-quality printing speed
(burst)
• Prints color or monochrome PostScript output with optional DECprint Utility
software
· Prints in black or color ink using snap-in ribbon cartridges
• Compatibility with Digital and IBM ProPrinter applications through Digital and
IBM protocols
• Plug-in font cartridges for varying type styles
• Built-in bar code 39 printing capability
· Wide carriage enables printing 17-inch (43 .2-centimeter) wide paper
· Equipped with built-in serial (DEC-423) and parallel (Centronics) interfaces
· Quiet printing mode at 51 dBA (front bystander position)
· Handles up to six-part forms as well as envelopes and labels
· Superior paper handling such as document-on-demand, autoload, autopark, and
optional three-bin automatic sheetfeeder
·Automatic switching of universal power supply from 120 V, 220 V, or 240 V
• DECprint Utility for PostScript to Sixel Printing for VMS extends printing capabilities; see product description at the end of this chapter
• VAX ReGIS-to-Sixels Converter (RETOS) provides fast, flexible printing capabilities; see product description at the end of this chapter
· PrintAPlot software; see product description at the end of this chapter

Ordering Information

Model
Number

LA424-CA
LA424-AB
LA424-AD
LA424-AE
LA424-AG
LA424-AH
LA424-AI
LA424-AS
LA424-AT
LA424-AZ
LA424-AP
LA424-CB
LA424-CC

Country or Region

Language

U.S., Canada, Mexico, South
America
Belgium
Denmark
U.K. , Ireland
Germany, Austria
Holland

English, French, Spanish,
Portuguese
Flemish
Danish
English
German
Dutch

hilim

Spain
Israel
Australia, New Zealand
France
Switzerland
Finland, Norway, Portugal,
Sweden

Spanish
Hebrew
English
French
English, French, German
Finnish, Norwegian,
Portuguese, Swedish

Note: Replace x with 0 for serial; 2 for parallel (parallel models include
BC19M-10 10-ft (3.1-m) parallel cable)

8.60

Terminals and Printers

LA424 MultiPrinter
Accessories and Supplies

LA24X-CA
LA24X-CB
LA24X-CC
LA24X-CG
LA24X-CH
LA24X-CD
LA24X-CE
LA24X-CF
LA24R-KA
LA24R-KC
LA24X-AC
LA24X-PS
LA24X-DS
LA24X-SF
EK-LA324-PM

Cables and Adapters

Programmer>s Reference Manual

For more information on cabling and adapters, refer to the Desktop Printer
Cable and Adapter Guide at the end of this chapter.

H8673-AA

20 mA active host Mate-N-Lok-to-EIA-423 DECconnect MMJ
passive converter
20 mA active host RJll (6-pin) to EIA-423 DECconnect MMJ
passive converter
IBM/Centronics parallel cable
25-pin female-to-MM} adapter
9-pin male-to-MM} adapter (DEC)
25-pin cable-to-MM} adapter
25-pin male-to-MMJ adapter (modem)
9-pin PC-type-to-MM} adapter

H8673-AB
BC19M-10
H8575-A
H8575-B
H8571-C
H8571-D
H8571-J

Specifications

DEC Letter Gothic font cartridge
DEC Orator font cartridge
DEC Prestige Elite font cartridge
DEC OCR-A font cartridge
DEC OCR-B font cartridge
Font cartridge emulating IBM OCR-A
Font cartridge emulating IBM OCR-B
Font cartridge emulating IBM Presentor
Ribbon, black: up to 5M characters (six/box)
Ribbon, color: yellow, magenta, cyan, and black; up to 500,000
characters per color band (six/box)
Acoustic cover
Printer stand (pedestal style)
Desktop stand
Three-bin sheetfeeder

Physical Characteristics

Height
Width
Depth
Weight

17.0 cm (6.7 in.)
61.5 cm (24.2 in.)
31.0 cm (12.2 in.)
14.3 kg (31.5 lb)

Power Requirements

Voltage
Frequency
Phases
Current ac amps (maximum)
Thermal dissipation (watts)
Thermal dissipation (Btu/ h)
NEMA receptacle type

120 v

240 v

50160 Hz

1
1.4
120
41
5-15R

1
0.7
120
41
5-15R

Operating Environment

Temperature
Relative humidity
Altitude

10° to 40° C (operating)
10% to 90% (operating)
2400 meters (8000 feet) maximum (operating)

Terminals and Printers

8.61

LA70 Personal Printer
The LA70 Personal Printer is a versatile, compact, impact dot-matrix printer. It
complements personal computers, terminals, and workstations and supports a
wide range of applications.

It is a low-cost, entry-level printer for screen dump graphics printing and simple
word processing. The LA70 offers print speeds up to 200 characters per second,
in three printing densities. It has both a serial and a parallel interface, making it
compatible with industry-standard PCs, terminals, or workstations.
The bidirectional LA70 prints in any one of three text printing densities: draft at
200 characters per second; memo at 100 characters per second; and near-letterquality at 40 characters per second. It also prints bitmapped graphics. It offers
built-in character sets that provide added capabilities for maximum versatility in
word processing and other applications. A full multinational character set allows
for printing in 14 languages.
The LA70 Personal Printer can print text with superscripts and subscripts,
underlines, double underlines, shadow bold, italics, strike-through, and overline.
The front panel has well-labeled switches as well as LED indicators that display
the printer's operating status.
Features

· Prints up to 1,000 pages per month
· Built-in IBM ProPrinter and Digital protocols
• Narrow carriage accommodates standard paper and envelope sizes
· Reliable 9-wire dot-matrix technology
· Printer settings selectable from front panel switches or through software control
· Convenient, versatile paper handling
· Accommodates fanfold, single sheets, labels, envelopes, and multipart forms
(original plus two copies)
· Quiet Mode operation less than 52 dBA, activated by a front-panel switch; normal operation is less than 55 dBA
· Document-on-demand printing features: zero tear-off loss and viewing
· Serial and parallel interfaces built in to each printer (parallel cable must be
ordered separately: BC19M-10)
· Auto Load feature automatically advances tractor-fed paper
• Viewing feature automatically advances page at end of text for easy reading
• Auto Park feature enables printing on either continuous tractor paper or cutsheet paper without removing the tractor paper
• Optional software (see product description at the end of this chapter): ON-TAP;
DECprint Utility software; RETOS; Reggie; and PrintAPlot

8.62

Terminals and Printers

LA70 Personal Printer
Ordering Information

Model
Number

Country or Region

Language

LA70-CB

U.S., Canada, Mexico, South
America
Belgium, Finland, France,
Holland, Norway, Portugal,
Spain, Sweden, Switzerland

LA70-AZ
LA70-AD
LA70-AI
LA70-AJ
LA70-AE
LA70-AG
LA70-AT

Australia, New Zealand
Denmark
Italy
Japan
U.K., Ireland
Germany, Austria
Israel

English, French, Spanish,
Portuguese
Flemish, Finnish, French,
Dutch, Norwegian,
Portuguese, Spanish, Swedish,
English, German
English
Danish
Italian
Katakana
English
German
Hebrew

LA70R-06
LAXXA-AA
LA70X-DP
LA70X-DC
EK-LA70J-RM
LA70X-SF

LA70 ribbon (6)
LA70 desktop acoustic cover
LA70 desk stand and paper catcher
LA70 dust cover (10)

BC19M-10
H8575-A
H8575-B
H8571-C
H8571-D
H8571-J
H8673-AA

IBM/ Centronics parallel cable
25 -pin male-to-MMJ adapter
9-pin male-to-MMJ adapter (Digital)
25-pin cable-to-MMJ adapter
25-pin male-to-MMJ adapter (modem)
9-pin (PC-type)-to-MMJ adapter
20 mA active host Mate-N-Lok-to-EIA-423 DECconnect MMJ
passive converter
20 mA active host RJll (6-pin) to EIA-423 DECconnect MMJ
passive converter

LA70-AA

Accessories and Supplies

Cables and Adapters

H8673-AB

Programmer)s Reference Manual
LA70 single-bin sheet feeder

T ermina]s and Printers

8.63

I'/)
~

....cQ>

•t:

LA70 Personal Printer
Specifications

Physical Characteristics

Height
Width
Depth
Weight

12.0 cm (4.7 in.)
39.3 cm (15.5 in.)
29.0 cm (11.4 in.)
7.5 kg (16.0 lb)

Power Requirements

Voltage
Frequency
Phases
Current ac amps (maximum)
Thermal dissipation (watts)
Thermal dissipation (Btu/h)

100

120

220

240

50-60 Hz

1
0.75
68
188

1
0.75
69
188

1
0.51
68
188

1
0.51
67
188

Print Characteristics

Aspect ratio

1:1, 2:1, or 2.5:1

Print density
Draft mode
Memo mode
Near-letter-quality mode

(horizontal x vertical dots)
12 x 9 matrix
24 x 9 matrix
24 x 17 matrix

Character sets

U.S. ASCII, IBM ProPrinter (Line Drawing,
Chart Drawing, Symbol Drawing), Katakana, 14
National Replacement Character Sets (NRC), ISO
8-bit Supplemental, DEC Supplemental, DEC
Technical, VTlOO Line Drawing, Hebrew

Communications

Character code

7- or 8-bit ASCII with odd, even, mark, space,
or no parity

Power Cord: 2.0 m (6.7 ft) long, detachable
Operating Environment

FCC Class B, Environmental- Class B (normal office environment)
Temperature range
Relative humidity
Safety/ performance
Buffer Control

X-ON/X-OFF protocol
READY/OFF LINE switch
DIR buffer control
Standard Font: Courier 10

8.64

Terminals and Printers

10° to 40° C (50° to 104° F)
10% to 90 %
Certified by UL, CSA, FCC, VDE, IEC, and GS

LA75 Plus Companion Printer
The LA75 Plus Companion Printer is a fast, flexible, dot-matrix printer that can
be used as a personal printer or shared with other users. It can handle up to
2,000 pages per month. It uses a 24-wire impact dot-matrix printhead capable of
360 x 180 dots per inch (dpi) resolution for excellent print quality. The LA75
Plus printer supports applications running under VAX VMS, SCO UNIX, UNIX,
and ULTRIX operating systems. The LA75 Plus also supports printing from
Digital and other industry-standard personal computers, terminals, and
workstations.
The LA75 Plus printer prints professional-looking office reports and graphs in
color. It offers optional font cartridges for office documents or optical character
recognition. The bar-code capability is resident in the LA75 Plus printer.
Features

• Supports both DEC PPL2 and IBM ProPrinter emulation
· Displays last line printed, eliminating the need to move the platen to see the last
line
• Advances paper for tearing and repositions it for printing (eliminates wasted
forms)

• Handles various sizes of paper and envelopes
· Provides choice of print quality from quick draft to letter-quality
• Allows quick, easy selection of printer settings, either from the front panel or
software
• Tractor-fed paper can be temporarily bypassed-single sheets can be fed without
removing the continuous-form paper
· Automatically senses data and selects the appropriate interface
· Adds color to office documents and graphs
· Five of the most commonly used ROM-based type fonts are available as options
to create professional-looking documents
• Handles downline-loaded fonts
· Prints multipart forms and labels through the bottom feed slot
• Can simultaneously connect to two hosts, allowing printing from either host

Ordering Information

Model
Number

Country or Region

Language

LA75S-CB

U.S., Canada, Mexico, South
America
Belgium, Finland, France,
Holland, Norway, Portugal,
Spain, Sweden, Switzerland

LA75S-AZ
LA75S-AD
LA75S-AI
LA75S-AJ
LA75S-AE
LA75S-AG
LA75S-AT

Australia, New Zealand
Denmark
Italy
Japan
U.K., Ireland
Germany, Austria
Israel

English, French, Spanish,
Portuguese
Flemish, Finnish, French,
Dutch, Norwegian,
Portuguese, Spanish, Swedish,
English, German
English
Danish
Italian
Katakana
English
German
Hebrew

LA75R-KA
LA75R-KC
BC19M-10
LAXXS-DS
H9850-HP

LA75S black ribbon (6)
LA75S color ribbon (1)
Parallel cable
LA75S wire paper catcher
LA75S dust cover

LA75S-AA

Accessories and Supplies

Terminals and Printers

8.65

LA75 Plus Companion Printer
Accessories and Supplies
(Continued)

LAXXS-AB
PCXXA-PC
LA75Y-SF
EK-L75PL-DK

Programmer's Reference Manual

Font Cartridges

LA75Y-CA
LA75Y-CB
LA75Y-CC
LA75Y-CD
LA75Y-CE

LA75S Letter Gothic
LA75S Orator
LA75S Prestige Elite
LA75S OCR-A
LA75S OCR-B

Cables and Adapters

BC19M-10
H8571-A
H8571-B
H8571-C
H8571-D
H8571-J
H8673-AA

IBM/Centronics parallel cable
25-pin male-to-MM} adapter
9-in male-to-MM} adapter (Digital)
25-pin cable-to-MM} adapter
25-pin male-to-MM} adapter (modem)
9-pin (PC-type)-to-MMJ adapter
20 mA active host Mate-N-Lok-to-EIA-423 DECconnect MMJ
passive converter
20 mA active host RJll (6-pin) to EIA-423 DECconnect MMJ
passive converter

H8673-AB

Specifications

LA75S floor stand
Platen cleaner
LA75S single bin sheetfeeder

Physical Characteristics
Height
Width
Depth
Weight

13 .4 cm (5 .3 in.)
36.9 cm (14.5 in.)
42.7 cm (16.8 in.)
10.5 kg (23 lb)

Power Requirements
Voltage/frequency
Power cord
Operating environment
Temperature range
Relative humidity
SafetyI performance

100 V, 50/60 Hz; 120 V, 50/60 Hz; 220 V, 50/60
Hz; 240 V, 50/60 Hz
2.0 m (6.7 ft), detachable
FCC Class B, Environmental-Class B (normal office
environment)
10° C to 40° C (50° F to 104° F)
10% to 90%
Certified by UL, CSA, FCC, VDE, IEC, and GS

Hardware Characteristics
Interfaces
Noise level
Baud rate
Buffer control
Print speed (maximum)

EIA-423 (MMJ) and Centronics Parallel Interface
Normal< 53 dBA; quiet< 51 dBA
200, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, and 9600
XON/XOFF protocol
DTR buffer control
250 cps
Draft mode
125 cps
Memo mode
Letter-quality mode
83 cps

Print Characteristics
Horizontal pitch

Vertical pitch
Print density (horizontal x
vertical dots)
Optional fonts

8.66

Terminals and Printers

Standard width characters: 10, 12, 16.5, 17.1
chars/inch
Double width characters: 5, 6, 8.25, 8.55 chars/inch
2, 3, 4, 6, 8, and 12 lines/inch
1, 2, and 4 lines/cm
Draft mode
9 x 24 matrix
Memo mode
18 x 24 matrix
Letter-quality mode
30 x 24 matrix
Orator, Letter Gothic, Prestige Elite, OCR-A, and
OCR-B

Desktop Printer Cable and Adapter Guide
The following chart is a guide for connecting printers to video terminals, hosts, and terminal servers (cables and adapters
are included with most Digital printers).

Serial Connections
Connector Type Video device/server
DEC-423 (MM])
DECserver 300/90L/200 DL
VT420, VT1200, VT300 Family
VAX/VAX.servers with CXY16
VAXstation 3100
MicroVAX 3100/DECsystem 5100
DECsystem 5000 Series with CXY16
DECstation 3100/2100/5000
25-pin female (EIA -232)
VTl 00 Series
DECserver 200/MC (DSRVB-AA)
VAX with CXY08
DECsystem with CXY08
IBM PC and PS/ 2, or compatibles
9-pin male (EIA-232)
VT200 Family
VAXstation 2000
MicroVAX II (std)
DECmate II/ III

LA70, DEClaser 1000/2000/3000 Series;
LA75 , LJ25o; LA424, LF01; LA75 Plus

LA210 and other
Digital EIA232 printers

BC16E 1 or H8673-AA 10 or
H8673-AB 11

H8575-A and BC16E

H8575-A and BC16E 1

BC22D4

H8575-B and BC16E 1

BCC05

9-pin serial (PC! AT type)
DECstation PCs
IBM PC/ AT or compatibles

H8571-J and BC16E

25-pin male (EIA-232)
Modems 7
Rainbow

H8571 -D and BC16E 1

BCC14 10

Open DECconnect
RJ45 MJJ

BN24H-03

H8575-A and BN24H-03

20 mA Active Host
Mate-N-Lok

H8673-AA

H8575-A and H8673-AA

20 mA Active Host

H8673-AB

H8575-A and H8673-AB

Connector Type
Video device/server

LA75 Plus~ LA70, DEClaser series LJ252~
LA424, LFOl, DECjet 1000/2000

LA210

25-pin PC port Centronics parallel
DECstation PCs
IBM PC or compatible
IBM PS/2

BC19M-10

LA10X-EP6 and BC19M-10

H8672-A3·6

·~

RJll

Parallel Connections (PC-type)

BC16E-10 is included with LA70, LA75 , LJ250, LA424, LFOl, and the DEClaser family printers.
Use the H8571-E adapter included with these printers.
3
H8672-A includes H8571-J, H8575-A, and BC16E-10 cable.
4
Not for connecting LQP45 directly to host port.
5
BC19M-l0 is included with LA75P and LJ252.
6
For LA210, IBM Graphics Printer Emulation cartridge recommended (LAlOX-LE).
7
DECconnect (MMJ) does not provide full modem control; this combination works with Digital modems and many non-Digital modems.
8
To connect the LA75, LA210, LN03, LN03 PLUS, ScriptPrinter, or LQP45 to non-Digital PCs, XON-XOFF serial flow is required. This is supported by
many application packages, including Digital's PCSA client software (check your application).
9
DEC-423 cabinet kits also available.
10
20 mA active host Mate-N-Lok to EIA-423 (MMJ) converter.
11
For 20 mA systems that require an RJll interface.
2

Terminals and Printers 8.67

LP29 Line Printer
The LP29 system printer operates at speeds up to 2000 lines/min through the
use of a Digital unique interface and optimized character band. The interface
allows the LP29 to accept continuous input from the CPU while it is printing.
The proprietary optimized character band is a special arrangement of 64 uppercase characters that permits greater speeds without sacrificing print quality or
character selection.
The LP29 is the ideal printer for Digital's high-performance systems. Its rugged
design allows it to withstand continuous impact at very high speeds. The LP29 is
designed for Digital's UNIBUS or VAXBI and Q-bus systems. It includes a universal power supply and prints using a proprietary optimized 64-character uppercase ASCII set or 1500 Ii/min using a 96-character uppercase and lowercase
ASCII set. Character bands and paper and ribbon handling are easy for the
operator. Self-test diagnostics are built in, and a powered paper stacker is standard. OCR-B and 64-character bands are optional.
The LP29 can be placed in a network environment utilizing the DECserver 250
network server for printers. VAX Vertical Forms Printing is available for
improved productivity (up to 35 percent) in VFU applications with the LP29
printer in the VAX VMS environment.

Features
• Proprietary optimized character band
· Front paper handling
· High slew speed
• Accepts pinfeed, continuous fanfold paper
• Accepts forms, including carbons, with as many as six parts in a variety of
widths and thicknesses
• Has 132-character buffer capacity

Ordering Information

Accessories and Supplies

LP29-UA/U3

LP29 UNIBUS system printer with LPll controller, BC05L-10
10-ft (3-m) cable, bulkhead, and BC27 A-30 30-ft (9.5-m) data
cable. Includes powered paper stacker. 120/240 V

LP29-VA/V3

LP29 system printer with BC27 A-30 30-ft (9.5-m) data cable
and powered paper stacker. For use with DECserver 250 and
VAXBI systems. Prerequisite for VAXBI systems: DMB32 controller (not included). 120/240 V

LP29-SA/S3

LP29 Q-bus system printer with LPVll-SA controller,
BC27L-3 0 30-ft (9.5 -m) data cable, and powered paper stacker.
For use on BA2xx or VAX 4000 system. 120/240 V.

LP29-QAIQ3

LP29 Q-bus system option with LPVl 1 controller for the
MicroVAX II, BC27A-30 30-ft (9.5-m) data cable and powered
paper stacker. For use with BA23 and BA123 enclosures.
120/240 V.

For more information, see the DECdirect catalog.

LP29R-01
LP29R-02
LP29X-AA
LP29X-AC
LP29X-AD
LP29X-AE
LP29X-AF

8.68

Terminals and Printers

5-mil nylon ribbon, 22.8 m (75 ft)
Ribbon shield
U.S. 64-character band
U.S. 64-character band optimized
U.S. 96-character band
U.S. OCR-B 96-character band
U.S. OCR-B 64-character band

LP29 Line Printer
Ordering Information (Continued)
Country Kits

Country kits include power cord and documentation.

LP29-KD
LP29-KE
LP29-KG
LP29-KI
LP29-KJ
LP29-KM
LP29-KP
LP29-KS
LP29-KV
Options

Denmark
U.K.

Germany
Italy
Japan
Sweden
France
Spain
Portugal

DSRVP-AA/AB

DECserver 250 with license. Refer to Chapter 6, Networks,
Communications, and Cables, for more information and prerequisite software.

QL-VZEA9-AA
QA-VZEAA-H5

VAX Vertical Forms Printing Vl.0 generic license for VMS.
VAX Vertical Forms Printing media (TK50) and
documentation.
VAX Vertical Forms Printing media (magtape) and
documentation.

QA-VZEAA-HM

Configuring Information

Specifications

Model
Number

Mounting
Requirements

de Amps Drawn @

15 v

-15 v

Bus Loads
Drawn

IIO Panel
Units

d::

LP29-UA/U3

1 quad slot

1.5

0.0

LP29-VA/V3

DMB32
DMF32

NIA

LP29-SA/S3

1 quad slot

2.4

NIA

1.0

NIA

LP29-QAIQ3

1 qu ad slot

NIA

Physical Characteristics
Height
Width
Depth
Weight

124.5 cm (49.0 in.)
90.0 cm (35.5 in.)
98.0 cm (38.5 in.)
255.0 kg (560.0 lb)

Power Requirements
Voltage
Frequency
Phases
Thermal dissipation (watts)
Thermal dissipation (Btu/ h)

120
50-60 Hz
1

1044
4013

240 v
50-60 Hz
1
1044
4013

Operating Environment
Temperature
Relative humidity
Altitude

{I)

.s!

10° to 40° C (50° to 104° F)
20 % to 80 %
2.4 km (8000 ft)

For more information contact the EIC Sales Support Center, 800-832-6277 or
603 -884-8990.

Terminals and Printers

8.69

LP3 7 Line Printer
Suitable for the open office environment, the LP3 7 is a high-speed parallel line
printer. It is supported on all Digital systems utilizing VMS operating systems
and LPll, LPVll, LPVll-SA, DMF32 , and DMB32 controllers. The LP37 prints
fully formed characters at 10 per inch and 132 per line at speeds up to 1200
li/m. Both the 64-character uppercase band and the 96-character upper- and
lowercase "C" font bands are standard. OCR "A" 96-character band and OCR
"B" 64- and 96-character bands are optional.
The LP37 is ideal for printing volume jobs in office (acoustic level 55 dBA) or
MIS environments. The LP3 7 can be placed in a networked environment utilizing
the DECserver 250 network server for printers.
VAX Vertical Forms Printing (VFP) is available for improved productivity in VFU
applications with the LP3 7 printer in the VAX VMS environment. Productivity is
improved up to 47 percent based upon the application. A power paper stacker is
standard, and both single and six-part forms stack in an enclosed paper cavity
behind the printer. Ribbons and bands are easy to change, and the power paper
stacker enhances paper handling for medium-duty cycle jobs. Format changes
and setups are easily accomplished. The LCD control panel displays messages.
The quick-reference flip chart defines the most frequently used features of the
printer. The duty-cycle monitor displays power on time, cumulative lines printed,
and ribbon exhaust features via a 16-digit LCD.
Features

· Unique <Escape> Sequence Override Module
·Paper slew speed of 33 inches per second (83.8 cm per second)
· Ribbon usage monitor
· Accepts continuous fanfold paper
· Accepts carbon and carbonless multipart forms (original plus five copies)
· Long life reel-to-reel ribbon
· Fully integrated power paper stacker

Ordering Information

LP37-QNQ3

LP37 band printer with LPVll Q-bus controller, BC27A-30
cable. For use with BA23 and BA123 enclosures. 120/240 V

LP37-SA/S3

LP37 band printer with LPVll-SA Q-bus S-box controller,
BC27L-30 cable. For use with BA2xx and VAX 4000 systems.
120/ 240 v

LP37-UA/U3

LP37 band printer with LPll UNIBUS controller, BC27A-30
cable. 120/240 V

LP37-VA/V3

LP37 band printer with no controller, BC27 A-30 cable for use
with DECserver 250 and VAXBI systems. Prerequisite for VAXBI
systems: DMB32 controller (not included) 120/240 V

Note: LP37 includes universal power supply; -x3 variants require a country kit
from the list below.

8. 70

Terminals and Printers

LP3 7 Line Printer
Country Kits

Accessories and Supplies

Options

64-/ 96-character band, power cord, English operator's panel

LP37K-AD

Denmark

LP37K-AE

U.K.

64-/ 96-character band, power cord, English operator's panel

LP37K-AG

Germany

64-/ 96-character band, power cord, German operator's panel

LP37K-AI

Italy

64-/ 96-character band, power cord, English operator's panel

LP37K-AJ

Japan

128-character Katakana, 96-character English band, power cord,
English operator's panel

LP37K-AM

Sweden

64-/ 96-character band, power cord, English operator's panel

LP37K-AP

France

64-/ 96-character band, power cord, French operator's panel

LP37K-AS

Spain

64-/ 96-character band, power cord, Spanish operator's panel

LP37K-AV

Portugal

64-/ 96-character band, power cord, English operator's panel

For more information, see the DECdirect catalog.
LP37R-01
LP37R-02
LP37X-AA
LP37X-AC
LP37X-BA
LP37X-BC
LP37X-BD

LP37 reel-to-reel ribbon (6-pack)
LP37 reel-to-reel OCR ribbon (6-pack)
American 64-character band
American 96-character band
OCR-B American 64-character band
OCR-B Americah 96-character band
OCR-A American 96-character band

DSRVP-AA/AB

DECserver 250 with license. Refer to Chapter 6,
Networks, Communications, and Cables, for more
information and software prerequisites .

QL-VZEA9-AA

VAX Vertical Forms Printing Vl.O generic license for
VMS.
VAX Vertical Forms Printing media and documentation.

QA-VZEAA-Hx

Note: x denotes media type; 5 = TK50; M = magtape.

Configuring Information

Specifications

Model
Number

Mounting
Requirements

15 v

-15 v

LP37-UA/U3

1 quad slot

1.5

0.0

1.0

LP37-VA/V3

DMB32

NIA

LP37-SA/S3

1 quad slot

2.4

NIA

1.0

NIA

LP37-QA/Q3

1 quad slot

NIA

Bus Loads
Drawn

de Amps Drawn @

IIO Panel
Units

NIA

Physical Characteristics
Height
Width
Depth
Weight

110 cm (44 in.)
79 cm (31 in.)
90 cm (35 in.)
159 kg (350 lb)

Power Requirements
Voltage
Frequency
Phases
Thermal dissipation (watts)
Thermal dissipation (Btu/ h)

Universal power supply
50-60 Hz
1
850
2900

Operating Environment
Temperature
Relative humidity
Altitude

10° to 40° C (50° to 104° F)
20 % to 80% noncondensing
2.4 km (8000 ft)

For more information contact the EIC Sales Support Center, 800-832-6277 or
603-884-8990.

Terminals and Printers 8. 71

LG06 Shuttle-Matrix Printer
The LG06 is a 600-line-per-minute shuttle-matrix text and graphics impact
printer. As a text printer, the LG06 printer offers data processing and correspondence mode printing, multiple-characters-per-inch print selections, and 7- or
8-bit character sets. In graphics mode, the LG06 printer provides up to 13 styles
of barcoding including Postnet, custom forms creation, superscript and subscript,
portrait and landscape mode, and many other graphics functions including sixel
graphics. The LG06 is compatible with VAX VMS for text and graphics printing.
UNIX systems support text printing only.
The LG06 printer's low noise level (52 dBA) , small footprint, and rugged design
allows placement virtually anywhere-open office, laboratory, or shop floor. It
can be placed in a networked environment utilizing the DECserver 250 printer
server. The LG06 printer is offered with either Data Products-style parallel interface , Centronics-style parallel interface for connection to DEC PCs or EIA-232
serial interface.
Features

• Compressed or expanded print
· Underlining, strikethrough, and balding
· Multipart forms (1-6 parts)
· Multiple fonts
· Sparse font (800 lines per minute)
· Multiple character sets
· OCR character sets
• 7 - or 8-bit character sets
· ANSI/ISO compatible
· Subscripts and superscripts
· Rotation of text for spreadsheets
· Ability to create custom forms and logos
· 13 styles of bar codes including Postnet
• LG02 compatibility
· IBM ProPrinter emulation
· Triple interfacing (EIA-232 , Data Products, Centronics)
· 75 ,000 pages per month workload
Performance

Print Speeds
High Speed
Data Processing

Uppercase
Upper- and lowercase

600 lpm
465 lpm

Correspondence

Uppercase
Upper- and lowercase

300 lpm
255 lpm

OCR-A

Uppercase
Upper- and lowercase

465 lpm
380 lpm

OCR-B

Uppercase
Upper- and lowercase

280 lpm
205 lpm

Barcodes and Graphics

60 x 75 dpi
100 x 100 dpi

56 inches per minute
35 inches per minute

1
'

8. 72

Terminals and Printers

600 lines/ minute (lpm) (standard)
450-800 lines/ minute (lpm) (range)
800 lpm ,., (maximum)
Uppercase
Upper- and lowercase
590 lpm

Using the sparse font , the LG06 printer has the ability to print with redu ced dots allowing the
printer to print 800 lpm .

LG06 Shuttle-Matrix Printer
Ordering Information

LG06-AA/AB

UNIBUS parallel text and graphics printer with LPl 1 controller,
BC27A-30 30-ft (9.1-m) data cable; 120/ 240 V.

LG06-BA/BB

Q-bus (MicroPDP-11 and MicroVAX II) parallel text and graphics printer with LPVll controller, BC27 A-30 30-ft (9.1-m) data
cable. For use with BA23 or BA123 enclosures; 120/240 V.

LG06-CA/CB

Parallel text and graphics printer with BC27A-30 30-ft (9.1-m)
data cable for use with DECserver 250 and VAXBI systems.
Prerequisite for VAXBI systems: DMB32 controller (not
included); 120/240 V.

LG06-DA/DB

Serial 600-line/minute text and graphics printer for connection
· to EIA-232 serial interface. Includes 25-ft (7 .6-m) BC22D-25
cable; 120/240 V.

LG06-EA/EB

Parallel text and graphics printer with LPVll-SA dualported controller, BC27L-30 30-ft (9.1-m) data cable, for use
with BA2xx or VAX 4000 enclosures; 120/ 240 V.

LG06-JA/JB

Parallel text and graphics printer with 30-ft (9.1-m) BC27L-30
data cable to be used as a second printer connected to an
LG06-EA LPVll-SA controller. Prerequisite: LG06-EA; 120/240 V.

LG06-PA/PB

Text and graphics printer with Centronics-type BC19M-10 10-ft
data cable for use with DEC personal computers; 120/ 240 V.

Note: 240-V variants require the purchase of a country-specific power cord:

BN02A-2E
BN03A-2E
BN04A-2E
BN05A-2E
BN06A-2E
BN07A-2E
BN18L-2E

United Kingdom/ Ireland
Austria/Belgium/Finland/F ranee/ GermanyIN etherlands/
Norway/Portugal/Spain/Sweden
Switzerland
Australia/New Zealand
Denmark
Italy
Israel

Accessories and Supplies

LXYXX-RB

Ribbons (6/box)

Options

DSRVP-AA/AB

DECserver 250 with license. Refer to Chapter 6, Networks, Communications, and Cables, for more information
and software prerequisites.

QL-VZEA9-AA

VAX Vertical Forms Printing Vl.O generic license for
VMS
VAX Vertical Forms Printing media and documentation

QA-VZEAA-Hx

Note: x denotes media type; 5 = TK50; M = magtape.

Configuring Information

Model
Number

Mounting
Requirements

LG06-AAIAB

1 quad slot

LG06-BAIBB
LG06-EAIEB
LG06-JAIJB

de Amps Drawn @

Bus Loads
Drawn

110 Panel
Units

15 v

-15 v

1.5

0.0

1.0

1 quad slot

1.5

1 quad slot
1 quad slot

1.5

0.0
0.0
0.0

1.0
1.0
1.0

lA
NIA
NIA

1.5

Terminals and Printers

8.73

LG06 Shuttle-Matrix Printer
Specifications

Physical Characteristics
Height
Width
Depth
Weight

103 cm (40.6 in.)
69 cm (27 in.)
73 cm (28.7 in.)
102 kg (225 lb)

Power Requirements
Voltage
Frequency
Phases
Current ac amps (maximum)
Thermal dissipation (watts)
Thermal dissipation (Btu/h)
NEMA receptacle type

120 v
47-63 Hz
1
8
1000
1000
5-15R

240 v
47-63 Hz
1
4
1000
1000

Operating Environment
Temperature
Relative humidity
Altitude

10° to 40° C (50° to 104° F)
10% to 90 %
2.4 km (8000 ft)

For more information contact the EiC Sales Support Center, 800-832-6277 or
603-884-8990.

8.74

Terminals and Printers

LG31 Dot-Matrix Line Printer
The LG31 is a low·end, distributed data-processing system printer. It prints at
speeds up to 300 lines per minute in uppercase data-processing mode and provides extended text, bar code, and sixel processing capabilities and can be used
in the open office environment; it has an acoustic level of (55 dBA). The LG31 is
connected to the host CPU via a serial EIA-232 interface or in a network environment utilizing a terminal server or the DECserver 250 network server for
printers.
VAX vertical forms printing is available for improved productivity in VFU applications with the LG31 printer in the VAX VMS environment.
Features

• Compressed or expanded print
• Underlining, holding, superscript, subscript
• Multi part forms (1 to 6 parts)
· 7 - or 8-bit character sets and addressing, ANSI/ISO compatible
· Front control panel
· Universal power supply

Ordering Information

LG31-A2/A3

300-li/min enhanced text line dot-matrix impact line printer
with 25-ft (7 .6-m) cable (BC22D-25). -A2 = 120 V, includes
power cord; -A3 = 240 V, requires country kit

An EIA-232 port is required to connect the LG31 to the system. If no EIA-232
port is available, order an EIA-232 -to-MMJ adapter, H8575-A, and one null
modem MMJ serial cable, BC16E-xx (refer to Chapter 6, Networks, Communications, and Cables, for available lengths).
Country Kits

Note: A country kit must be ordered as a separate no-charge item for LG31-A3.
Each country kit includes power cord, serial cable (25 feet), installation/operator
manual, and user guide.

LGK3 l-AD
LGK31-AE
LGK31-AG
LGK31-AI
LGK31-AJ
LGK31-AK
LGK31-AT
LGK31-AZ
LGK31-CA

Options

LGK31-BJ

Denmark
U.K./Ireland
Germany/Austria
Italy
Japan
Switzerland
Israel
Australia
Belgium/Finland/France/Netherlands/Norway/Portugal/
Spain/Sweden
India

LGR31-01

50 million character cartridge nylon ribbon (1/box).

DSRVP-AA/AB

DECserver 250 with license. Refer to Chapter 6, Networks, Communications, and Cables, for ordering information and software prerequisites.

QL-VZEA9-AA

VAX Vertical Forms Printing Vl.O generic license for
VMS.
VAX Vertical Forms Printing media and documentation.

QA-VZEAA-Hx

Note: x denotes media type: 5 = TK50; M = magtape.

Terminals and Printers

8.75

LG31 Dot-Matrix Line Printer
Specifications

Physical Characteristics

Height
Width
Depth
Weight

116.8 cm (46.0 in.)
73.7 cm (29.0 in.)
103.2 cm (40.6 in.)
172 .3 kg (3 75 lb)

Power Requirements

Voltage
Frequency
Phases
Thermal dissipation (watts)
Thermal dissipation (Btu/h)
NEMA receptacle type

100 v
50-60 Hz

240 v
50-60 Hz
1

400
1,368
5-15P

Operating Environment

Temperature
Relative humidity
Altitude

10° to 40° C (50° to 104° F)
10% to 90 % maximum
2.4 km (8000 ft)

For more information contact the EIC Sales Support Center, 800-832-6277 or
603-884-8990.

8. 76 Terminals and Printers

Printer Software
DECp~int Printing Services for VMS

SPD: 32.41
UPI: YNC
DECprint Printing Services for VMS V4.1 is a layered product
used with VMS systems running VMS V5 .3 or greater to access
and control Digital PostScript printers. This software is an
update to the Version 4.0 software, which replaced two products:
VAX ScriptPrinter software (which supported LN03R and LN03Q
printers) and VAX PrintServer Client Software for VMS (which
supported the PrintServer 40, PrintServer 40 Plus, and PrintServer 20 laser printers). Users of VMS prior to V5 .3 require VAX
PrintServer Client software to support PrintServers.

Ordering Information
QL-YNCA9-AA
LNXX-R
QA-YNCAA-Hx
QT-YNCAx-xx
EK-TPS20-RC

Traditional license (included with
PrintServers)
Traditional license (included with DEClasers)
Media and documentation; x denotes media:
5 ~ TK50, M = magtape
Software Product Services
User feature card

SPD: 27.68
UPI: 798

DECprint Printing Services for VMS supports the following
Digital printers:
• DEClaser 1150 (LN07R)
• DEClaser 2150 plus (LN05R)
• DEClaser 2250 plus (LN06R)
• DEClaser 3250 (LN08R)
• PrintServer 20
• turbo PrintServer 20
• PrintServer 40
• PrintServer 40 Plus
• ScriptPrinter (LN03R)
• LN03 Image Printer (LN03Q)
• LFOlR Colormate PS
The DECprint Printing Services product includes the following
major components:
• A print symbiont that processes print requests from the host on
which it resides.
• Distribution software to transmit the request and associated
data over the Ethernet to a remote PrintServer via DECnet.
• Translators to convert selected data types to PostScript (ANSI,
HP/ PCL Level 4, ReGIS, Tektronix 4010/4014 , and DDIF
bitonal image files).
DECprint Printing Services for VMS must be installed on each
VMS CPU or a single CPU within a cluster that will be sending
print jobs directly to a PostScript printer.

Features
• Supports printing in a heterogeneous environment (VMS and
PCs networked via PCSA Services for VMS). Printers can be
accessed from a variety of hosts including PCs (MS-DOS, OS/2,
Macintosh) , workstations, and traditional VMS time-sharing
terminals.
• Provides "lay-up " feature which prints multiple logical page
images on one side of a sheet of paper (number-up or N-up) ,
or to offset page images for appropriate margins when binding
or hole-punching.
• Online help command provides all print commands unique to
the product.
• A collection of optional ALL-IN-1 scripts and a WPS-PLUS
printer table file that enhances the compatibility between
ALL-IN-1, WPS-PLUS, and Digital PostScript printers.
ALL-IN-1/WPS-PLUS users can access the unique features of
these printers, such as duplex printing, from within the
application print menus. LN03 font cartridge emulation via
DEClaser soft font kits is also provided.
• PostScript tools including a kit for facilitating the Apple
LaserWriter printer files and other tools that facilitate
customization of the software.

SPD: 30.85
UPI: VVZ
DEC PrintServer Supporting Host Software V4.0 is a layered
product that enables suitably configured systems in a DECnet or
TCP/IP Ethernet local area network to boot and provide management functions for PrintServer 20, turbo PrintServer 20, PrintServer 40, and PrintServer 40 Plus.
PrintServer Supporting Host software consists of the following
components:
• Primary boot image which is downloaded into the PrintServer
upon receipt of a boot request.
• Management component which includes support for PrintServer
configuration files, downloading of secondary boot files, and
remote storage of event log and accounting files.
• Console component which allows management and monitoring
of a printer from a terminal or terminal window.
• PrintServer component which is downloaded into the
PrintServer. It includes DECnet and Internet distribution
services, remote console services (also local console client for
the PrintServer 40 and PrintServer 40 Plus and local panel
services for the PrintServer 20 and turbo PrintServer 20) , and
the PostScript interpreter. The interpreter processes PostScript
commands and generates imaging data for the printer
controller.
PrintServer console clients are available for all PrintServers
through a command-line interface at selected terminals on the
supporting host or at the local PrintServer consoles for the PrintServer 40 and PrintServer 40 Plus. The console services enable
the system manager to monitor the status of the PrintServer.
PrintServer 20 and turbo PrintServer 20 have a front panel with a
2 x 24 LED display which provides PrintServer information. The
front panel status messages can be displayed in English, French,
German, Dutch, Swedish, or Norwegian.
Events logged by the PrintServer range from successful completion of jobs to fatal errors. These events can be displayed on
remote console terminals and are displayed on the local console
of the PrintServer 40 Plus; a subset of similar event messages are
displayed on the front panel of the turbo PrintServer 20. Events
can also be recorded in an event log file on the supporting host.
A separate event log file is maintained for each PrintServer managed by the supporting host software. The PrintServer communicates with the management client component running on the supporting host which writes to the event log. Each PrintServer can
send the logging data to supporting hosts.
(Continued)

Terminals and Printers

8. 77

Printer Software
DEC PrintServer Supporting Host Software for ULTRIX

PrintServer 'Client Shttware for UJ.,tRIX

(Continued)
The PrintServer' s accounting utility provides the system manager
with a convenient way to monitor printer usage of a PrintServer
and bill for printer usage. As with event logging data, accounting
information can be sent to multiple supporting host systems on
the network. The accounting utility is provided to prepare each
PrintServer's usage report on a per-user-basis. Information captured includes user name (including client system), total number
of sheets/sides printed, accounting by tray, and PostScript CPU
time used (in seconds). In addition, the system manager can
specify cost (per sheet, per side, or per seconds of CPU time); the
utility also allows for accounting to begin from a specific date.
The PrintServer's client access feature provides the system manager with a convenient way to control all access to a PrintServer.
Printing restrictions to a PrintServer are specified by either
"allowing" or "denying" access to a PrintServer. The allow command adds DECnet area numbers or node addresses and Internet
addresses, networks, or subnet numbers to the list of nodes or
areas that are allowed to communicate with the PrintServer
system.
The deny command adds DECnet area numbers or node
addresses and Internet hosts or network numbers to the list of
nodes or areas that are not allowed to communicate with the
PrintServer system. Access restriction applies not only to print
clients, but to management and console clients as well.

Ordering Information
QA-798AA-Hx
QA-VVZAA-Hx

VMS media and documentation
ULTRIX media and documentation

VAX Distributed Queuing Service (DQS) uses DECnet to extend
the standard VMS queue system that enables users to print files
on output devices attached to their local VMS node. VAX DQS
enables users to print jobs on printers connected to systems other
than their own, show the status of jobs on those systems, cancel
their jobs from those systems, and change the specifications of
their jobs on those systems.
Any node where a print request originates is called a client. Any
node with an attached printer that performs the printing is called
a server. Any node with VAX DQS can be configured to operate
as only a client or as both a client and a server. VAX DQS does
not limit the number of client or server nodes or queues. The
system manager creates the queues and establishes the correspondence between client queues and queues on server nodes . A
queue on a server node can accept jobs from queues on multiple
client nodes. Finally, a server node can be a client to another
DQS server node, which is a convenient feature when printers are
temporarily out of service.

Ordering Information
Refer to SPD or complete ordering information and prerequisites.

8.78

PrintServer Client Software for UL TRIX is a layered product that
enables suitably configured ULTRIX or UNIX systems to communicate within an Ethernet network to access a PrintServer and to
use the printing and accounting services available.
PrintServer Client software consists of the following components:
• Print daemon filters to process print requests from one or more
printer queues.
• Network software to transmit the print request and associated
data over the Ethernet to a remote PrintServer printer via
Internet (TCP/IP) protocols.
• Event logging which captures error and status information.
• Centralized and local accounting for tracking printer usage.
• Online manual pages providing help for the user.
• Complete installation instructions.
• Translators to convert ANSI text and sixel graphics, ASCII,
ReGIS, and Tektronix 4010/ 4014 files into the PostScript
language.
PrintServer Client Software for ULTRIX must be installed on
each system that prints directly to the PrintServer printer or provides distributed printing services for other systems (remote
spooling). Systems using ULTRIX V4.0 or later do not require this
client software; it has been bundled with the operating system.

Ordering Information
Refer to SPD 30.86 for complete ordering information and
prerequisites.

VAX PrintServer Client Softwar,e

SPD: 28.80
UPI: VEN

QL-VENA9-xx
QA-VENAA-H5
QA-VENAA-HM

SPD: 30.86
UPI: VVM

Cluster license
Media (TK50) and documentation
Media (magtape) and documentation

Terminals and Printers

SPD: 27.67
UPI: 797
VAX PrintServer Client Software is a VMS layered product that
enables suitably configured VMS systems within a DECnet
Ethernet network to access the PrintServer 20, turbo PrintServer
20, PrintServer 40, and PrintServer 40 Plus.
The client software consists of a print symbiont and distribution
software; translators to convert ANSI text and Sixel graphics,
ReGIS, and Tektronix 4010/ 4014 files into PostScript language;
and a series of PostScript tools for creator software support.
These tools include a PostScript error handler, font metric files
and font encoding vectors for the ISO Latin Alphabet Number 1
(ISO 8859/1), and Digital Multinational Character Set for all of
the built-in PostScript fonts.
VAX PrintServer Client Software must be installed on each system running VMS operating system V4.7-V5.2 that will be providing direct printing services to the PrintServer printer or distributed printing services for other systems. A system running the
VAX PrintServer Client software can transmit print requests
directly to any PrintServer on the network that is defined in its
network database.

Ordering Information
QA-797AA-Hx
QA-797AA-GZ

Media and documentation
Documentation only

Printer Software
DECprint Utility for PostScript to Sixel Printing for VMS
SPD: 31.56
UPI: YZP
DECprint Utility for PostScript to Sixel Printing for VMS (also
known as DECprint Utility) is a software product that extends
the capabilities of Digital printers by allowing PostScript files to
be printed to sixel printers. It also provides users with a low-cost
solution to the problem of printing color PostScript files.
Any current Digital graphics printer can print PostScript files,
attached directly to a VAX, remotely via DECnet, or to printers
attached to remotely located terminals and PCs.
DECprint Utility software enables printing of PostScript files to
remote locations or when the confidentiality and convenience of
a personal printer are required.

Ordering Information

Features
• Provides a low-cost Digital color PostScript output solution in
combination with the LJ250/ LJ252 Companion Color Printers,
and also with the LA324 MultiPrinter
• Supports the LA70 Personal Printer, LA324 MultiPrinter,
LA75/ LA75P Companion Printers, LA210 Letterprinter, LN03
PLUS Laser Printer, and LJ250/ LJ252 Companion Color
Printers
• Expands Digital's printer capabilities by supporting PostScript
printing on printers attached to terminals or shared on the
network
• Is less expensive than a dedicated PostScript printer, making it
ideal for low-volume PostScript printing needs
• Provides access to PostScript printing for remote locations or
can print confidential information right at the desk
• Easy to install and use
• Runs on any VAX, MicroVAX, VAXstation, or VAXserver
running VMS V5 .1 or later

Ordering Information
QL-VZPA9-PB
QA-VZPAA-H5
QA-VZPAA-HM

• Prints up to 255 colors on the LJ250 and LJ252 Companion
Color Printers
• Supports most Digital printers for high-quality graphics printing
• Supports variable sizing of ReGIS images
• Choice of portrait or landscape printing
• Ideal for shared-resource printing environments
• Also supports Digital graphics video terminals
• Enhanced font output specific to printer resolutions _
• Optimizes output resolution to each supported printer
• Provides flexibility and user control through optional
conversion parameters
• Through RETOS, many third-party application packages that
support ReGIS can output to Digital's printers
• Available in magtape, RX50 floppy disk, or TK50 tape

Single-user license
Media (TK50) and documentation kit
Media (magtape) and documentation kit

SPD: 27.88
UPI: VEF
Software applications based on Digital's ReGIS graphics protocol
are an established standard in the business, scientific, engineering, and educational fields. The VAX ReGIS-to-Sixels Converter
(RETOS) makes it easier than ever for ReGIS users to enjoy fast,
flexible, full-featured printing capabilities on Digital printers.
RETOS is a layered VMS software product that converts ReGIS
graphics files to sixel files . Sixel files created by RETOS can be
printed on any one of the many popular Digital printers that
support the sixel protocol, including the L]250 and LJ252 Companion Color Printers.

Features
• Supports the following Digital printers: LA324 , LA75/ LA75P,
LA210, LN03 , and the LN03 PLUS
• Fast ReGIS-to-Sixels file conversions

QL-VEFA9-"d'
QA-VEFAA-H5
QA-VEFAA-HM

Traditional license
Media (TK50) and documentation kit
Media (magtape) and documentation kit

Refer to SPD 27 .88 for complete ordering information and
prerequisites.

DECfonts Typeface Collection for VMS and ULTRIX
SPD: 33.50
UPI: YX4
DECfonts Typeface Collection for VMS AND ULTRIX provides
applications with a library of PostScript Type 1 Typefaces by
Adobe Systems Inc. These are the first optional scalable typefaces
for Digital's PostScript platforms; they can be used on any PostScript language imaging device including PostScript printers, Display PostScript software, or host-based PostScript software interpreters. DECfonts Typeface Collection includes a consolidated
distribution media containing a number of typeface kits. The first
release of the DECfonts Typeface Collection includes one kit, the
Apple LaserWriter emulation kit, and the additional typefaces
necessary to give Digital PostScript printers complete compatibility with LaserWriters. LaserWriter emulation kit contains the following typeface families: Palatino, ITC Bookman, Helvetica Narrow, ITC Zapf Chancery Medium Italic, and ITC Zapf Dingbats.
Palatino, ITC Bookman, and Helvetica Narrow are available in
upright, slanted, upright bold, and slanted bold versions.
Ad,obe's Type 1 Typefaces contain outlines, font metrics, and
screen bitmaps. The outline description of the typeface characters
used by the printer are contained in the printer font files. This
outline description is scalable and device independent. Scalability
allows the typeface to be printed in any point size supported by
the application. Device independence means the characters can
be reproduced on any PostScript language device. The font metric files contain information on size and shape characteristics of
the font. This includes data that may be required by application
programs in determining the spacing between characters (kerning) and the spacing between lines (leading) . Screen bitmaps of
corresponding sizes can be used by applications to provide
WYSIWYG (What You See Is What You Get) video displaying of
documents.
(Continued)

Terminals and Printers

8. 79

Printer Software
DECfonts Typeface Collection for VMS and ULTRIX
(Continued)
Features
• Optional PostScript Type 1 Typeface outlines can be used by
PostScript software interpreters such as Display PostScript
software, PostScript printers or the DECprint Utility for
PostScript to Sixel printing.
• Incorporates matching screen bitmaps for both 75 and 100
dot/ inch video displays in a number of standard DECwindows
sizes (10, 12, 14, 18, and 24 points) for WYSIWYG screen
representation. The LaserWriter emulation kit also includes 8
points.
• Associated font metric files used by formatting software such as
DECwrite and DECpresent.

Ordering Information
QL-YX499-PB
QA-YX6AA-Hx
QA-YX6AB-Hx

DECfonts LaserWriter emulation kit
(single-user license)
DECfonts for VMS media and documentation
DECfonts for ULTRIX media and
documentation

Note: x denotes media type; M = magtape, 5 = T.IGO.

VAX Vertical Forms Printing for VMS (VAX VFP) is an online
software utility designed for users who want to take advantage of
the Vertical Forms Unit (VFU) capabilities of the printers listed
in the Systems Support Addendum (SSA 31.26) (LG3 1, LGOl,
LP37, and LP29). VFU controls the vertical motion of the paper,
which enables faster throughput.
VFP provides DCL-like commands to set up a generic VFU load
file and to convert generic load and data files into device-specific
load and data files. A generic VFU load file describes the format
of the page. The page format is described by specifying the line
numbers and the channel numbers associated with the line.
To order VAX VFP the UPI is VZE. Refer to SPD 31.26. For
more information, call the EIC Sales Support Center at
800-832-6277 or 603-884-8990.

Documentation and Publication Management (DPM)
DPM allows users to print high-mix documentation retrieved
from an electronic database at high speeds in a production environment. It consists of four subsystems.
The Scanning Subsystem provides for the creation of electronic
files through the use of a duplex high-speed scanner with speeds
of up to 50 impressions per minute (CCITT G4.2).

SoftFont

The Image Editing Subsystem provides manipulation and
pixel-level editing of page images retrieved from either the Scanning or the Processing and Storage Subsystem.

SoftFont is a series of bitmap fonts emulating the font capabilities of the LN03 and DEClaser 2100 plus and 2200 plus printers.
Any of Digital's PostScript printers that operate under DECprint
Printing Services software V4.0 or higher can use SoftFont.

The Printing Subsystem provides hard-copy output. A Kodak
13 92 LED printer is driven by a VAX-based print controller permitting operation at 92 pages/ minute for any mix of documents
or images.

The standard SoftFonts are available on TK50 or 9-track magtape
media. Installed and specified through VMSINSTAL, they are further specified through an extension to the standard VMS PRINT
command. The fonts are then available to all ANSI documents
such as those produced by WPS-PLUS and printed under
DECprint Printing Services to a Digital PostScript printer.

The Host Processing and Storage Subsystem allows scanned documents to be stored on a combination of magnetic disks (up to
126,000 pages of archival storage) and WORM DRIVES (up to
75,000 pages of magnetic disk storage). It also provides
high-speed conversion of electronically created documents into
image from PostScript, ASCII, Sixel and others.

Prerequisites

Ordering Information

DECprint Printing Services Software V4.0 or higher.

DPM is available by custom quote only. For additional information, contact the EIC Sales Support Center at 800-832-6277 or
603-884-8990.

Ordering Information

LNSFT-Ax

CG Times 8, 10, 12
CG Times 14, 18
CG Times 24

LNSFT-Bx

CG Triumvirate 8, 10, 12
CG Triumvirate 14, 18
CG Triumvirate 24

LNSFT-Cx

ITC Souvenir 8, 10, 12
English Embassy 14, 18

LNSFT-Dx"'

Mono Swiss 14, 18
Mono Swiss 24
Letter Gothic 10, 14
OCR-A, OCR-B 10
Barcode 3 of 9, 18, 36
U.S. Legal

Note: x denotes media type; M = magtape, 5 = TK50
"' Does not include U.S. Legal Gothic

8.80 Terminals and Printers

ON-TAP software enables users to print bar codes anywhere in a
document by placing a mark at each position where a bar code is
to be printed. Because ON-TAP software is application-independent, the information that is marked for bar coding
can be part of a letter produced by word processing software,
information from an accounting program, or part of virtually any
off-the-shelf program or custom-written application. ON-TAP software prints the following symbologies: Code 39, Codabar, Code
128, Interleaved 2 of 5, Straight 2 of 5, MSI, UPC, and EAN.
One of ON-TAP software's greatest features is its intrinsic ease of
use. No programming or technical expertise is required. Once
ON-TAP is installed on the system and a symbology is selected,
bar codes can be printed anywhere on a page by simply entering
a tilde (-) character at the beginning and the end of the data
which is to be bar coded.
(Continued)

Printer Software
ON-TAP-Bar Code Printing Software (Continued)
Features
• Ability to print the most commonly used bar code symbologies
• Available for VMS systems, DECstation 200/300 personal
computers, and PCSA local area networks
• Easy to change bar code height, ratio, plot density, and use of
check digits
• Supports LA324 MultiPrinter, LA75/ LA75P Companion
Printers, LA210 Letterprinter, LN03 PLUS desktop laser printer,
and LJ250/LJ252 Companion Color Printers, LA70 Personal
Printer, and the DEClaser family
• Supports the ScriptPrinter, PrintServer 20, and the PrintServer
40 Plus in ANSI mode

Ordering Information
QB-GADAD-WB
QB-GADAD-WA
QB-GADAV-WG
QB-GADAV-WH

ON-TAP/ DOS (5 .25 -inch floppy disk)
ON-TAP/ DOS (3.5-inch floppy disk)
ON-TAP/VMS MicroVAX (TK50) *
ON-TAP/VMS MicroVAX (magtape)'"

QB-GADAV-WL
QB-GADAV-WM

ON-TAP/VMS VAX 4xxx (TK50)
ON-TAP/VMS VAX 4xxx (magtape)

QB-GADAV-WA
QB-GADAV-WB
QB-GADAV-WC
QB-GADAV-WD
QB-GADAV-WE
QB-GADAV-WF

ON-TAP/VMS VAX 6xxx (TK50)
ON-TAP/VMS VAX 6xxx (magtape)
ON-TAP/VMS VAX 7xx (TK50)
ON-TAP/VMS VAX 7xx (magtape)
ON-TAP/VMS VAX 8xxx (TK50)
ON-TAP/VMS VAX 8xxx (magtape)

QB-GADAV-WJ
QB-GADAV-WK

ON-TAP/VMS VAX 9xxx (TK50)
ON-TAP/VMS VAX 9xxx (magtape)

1
'

• Non memory-resident version (for batch processing)

• 5.25- and 3.5-inch disks

MicroVAX order numbers include the MicroVAX II, MicroVAX 2000,
and MicroVAX 3000 series.

LaserTwin Version .5.0~ftware-HP LaserJet
Series m Emulation
LaserTwin Version 5.0, from Metro Software, Inc., is a memory-resident MS-DOS software package for use with Digital's
laser, dot-matrix, and ink-jet printers. It provides HewlettPackard LaserJet Series III emulation, with the exception of the
HP-GL/2 plotter language. LaserTwin Version 5.0 permits use of
scalable fonts , graphics, and other features of the HP LaserJet III
while printing with a Digital printer. Professional-looking documents can be created with fonts scalable from 1 to 1,000 points.
It is a low-cost software solution for Digital users who have
MS-DOS PCs and need LaserJet III capabilities. With LaserTwin
Version 5.0, users can print from virtually all PC software using
Digital printers.

Features
• HP LaserJet Series III emulation for Digital's printers
• Support for all popular PC software packages through their HP
LaserJet III drivers
• All HP LaserJet III internal fonts, scalable from 1 to 1,000
points
• Ability to use Metro's SuperFonts 25/ 1 or other soft font
equivalents with programs that require a particular HP font
cartridge

Ordering Information
QB-GGHAD-WA

QB-YZRAD-WA

LaserTwin (Version D ) software for the
DEClaser family, LN03 , and LN03 PLUS
printers
LaserTwin (Version A) for the LA70, LA75,
LA75P, LA210, LJ250, LJ252 , and LA324
printers

Prerequisites
• DECstation PC family; IBM PC XT, AT, PS/2 , or compatible
·DOS V3.0 or above
• 29-Kbytes PC RAM memory
• 1-Mbyte disk space
• 1 RAM cartridge recommended for soft font

SuperFonts 2.5/1
SuperFonts 25/ 1 offers 25 of Hewlett-Packard's popular A-Z font
cartridges for use with Digital's DEClaser family of printers and
LaserTwin software. This package includes portrait and landscape
orientation of Helvetica, Times Roman, Times Math, Courier,
Presentation, Prestige Elite, Letter Gothic, Tax Line, Draw, PC
Line, or even OCR and UPC for product codes. Use with
LaserTwin to make a DEC printer HP compatible.

Features
• Contains all HP font cartridges in one software package
• Easy to install; menu-driven
• Over 139 fonts , all HP symbol sets, 14 type families and over
11 type sizes
• Compatible with most popular software programs

Ordering Information
Q6VS4-CZ

SuperFonts 25/1

Freedom of Press
Freedom of Press software turns an ordinary printer into a PostScript language compatible device. It can create text and graphics
from a Macintosh to LA75 , LJ250, LN03 PLUS, DEClaser 2100
plus, and DEClaser 2200 plus printers. Complete with 35 outline
fonts equivalent to those found on an Apple LaserWriter Plus , it
provides the capability to scale and rotate these typefaces to arbitrary point sizes and angles. Freedom of Press software can also
be used to turn a Macintosh into a print server for use by anyone in the network.

Prerequisites
Macintosh Plus, SE, SE30, II, Ilcx, Ilci, IIfx, portable, or any
Macintosh with math coprocessor; 2 Mbytes of memory; application software that generates PostScript language output.

Ordering Information
QB-GJKAM-WA

Terminals and Printers

8.81

Printer Software
Reggie Software-Mac Graphics Files Converter
Reggie software is a Macintosh application that converts Macintosh-format graphics files into Digital-format graphics files. Reggie software converts the Macintosh-format graphics files into
either ReGIS or sixel files for use with any of Digital's dot-matrix
printers, such as the LA324 MultiPrinter, LA75/ LA75P Companion Printers, and the LA210 Letterprinter; Digital's DEClaser fam ily of printers; and the LN03 and LN03 PLUS printers. Reggie
software also provides a low-cost solution for those requiring
ReGIS or sixel printing capabilities on Digital's LJ250/LJ252
Companion Color Printers.
The resulting ReGIS or sixel files can be shared with anyone
connected to the host or network. The graphics files can be
viewed on any graphics terminal, such as the VT330+ or VT340+
terminals.

Features
• Define output devices as sixel or ReGIS
• Adjust the size and position of the image
• Preview the conversion on an attached terminal or printer
• Retain all the original color information to print in ReGIS or
sixel format
• Save converted images in files
• Supports LA324 MultiPrinter, LA75 Companion Printer, LA210
Letterprinter, the DEClaser family of printers, LN03 and LN03
PLUS desktop laser printers, and LJ250 Companion Color
Printer

Ordering Information
Q6VKR-CZ

Reggie Software

PrintAPlot Software-HP Plotter Emulation
PrintAPlot is a PC software package that enables Digital laser,
ink-jet, or dot-matrix printers (LN03 and DEClaser family; LJ250
and LJ252; LA210, LA75, LA70, LA75P, and LA324) to be used
as high-resolution plotters. Users can double the utility of their
printers by producing complicated drawings. The user selects the
pen width, shading, and colors from a simple Lotus-like menu.
PrintAPlot enables users to print large drawings by segmenting
them over separate pages; they can then assemble them to form a
complete image. PrintAPlot also allows users to reduce drawings
to 1 percent of the original size. In addition, images can be
rotated and positioned anywhere on a page. PrintAPlot is ideal
for scientific and engineering drawings as well as business graphics. It includes a card for 3.5-inch floppy if needed.

Features
• Improved printing speeds, up to 10 times
• Improved output quality without adding memory
• Simplified reduction or enlargement of drawings
• Maximum resolution graphics for each printer
• Support for LJ250, LJ252, LA70, LA75 , LA75P, LA210, LA324,
LN03 , LN03 PLUS, ScriptPrinter, and the DEClaser family
• Color support for LJ250, LJ252, LA324, and color simulation on
monochrome printers by rendering in various shades of grey
• Works with all popular MS-DOS packages which support
HP7470, 7475, Colorpro or the Digital LVP16 plotters
• Emulation is transparent to user
• Supports filing of output. Large images can be printed in
sections over several pages, enabling users to recreate them by
assembling the individual sheets
• Drawings can be enlarged up to 600 % or reduced to 1 % of
full size
8.82

Terminals and Printers

Ordering Information
Q6VNW-CZ

PrintAPlot Software (5.25-inch floppy disk)

JetForm Software
The JetForm Forms Development System is a set of tools for
designing, developing, and completing electronic forms. Electronic forms can be used to collect, store, share, and retrieve
information for every kind of form , including insurance claims,
job applications , invoices, and shipping labels.
The JetForm Forms Development System provides four different,
specialized products that work either alone or together, depending on user requirements. The four products are:

· JetForm Design, a forms design and fill tool based on the
Microsoft Windows interface
• JetForm Filler, which provides interactive data entry on the
forms created by JetForm design
• JetForm Server, a VAX VMS based server that monitors the
system for new printing tasks and then locates the form, enters
the data, controls the assigned laser printers, downloads the
fonts, and prints the required number of completed forms
• JetForm Merge, which enables merging of variable data (from
files created by host application programs) with electronic
forms created with JetForm Design, and then prints the
completed form

Prerequisites
Intel 386 or 486-based PC running MS-DOS V3.0 or higher,
2-Mbyte RAM minimum; hard disk, mouse, graphics monitor;
JetForm server runs on VAX VMS V5.3 (or higher) or in a PC
environment; Windows 3.0 or higher; Digital's PrintServer 20,
turbo PrintServer 20, PrintServer 40 Plus , DEClaser 1150,
DEClaser 2150 plus, DEClaser 2250 plus, DEClaser 3250, LN03
ScriptPrinter, and ColorMate PS. Digital's PATHWORKS PC integration software products are required to print from a PC to a
PrintServer printer; JetForm server supports any MS-DOS LAN or
OS/2 LAN server.

Ordering Information
QB-XBNAD-WA
QB-XL6AD-WA
QB-XBPAD-WA
QB-XW9AV-WE
QB-XW9AV-WF
QB-XW9AV-WG
QB-XW9AD-WH
QB-XW9AV-WB
QB-XW9AV-WC
QB-XW9AV-WD

JetForm Design MS-DOS 3.5-inch,
5.25-inch diskette
JetForm Filler MS-DOS 3.5-inch,
5.25-inch diskette
JetForm Server MS-DOS 3.5-inch,
5.25-inch diskette
JetForm Server VAX Class 2 TK50
JetForm Server VAX Class 3 TK50
JetForm Server VAX Class 4 TK50
JetForm Merge MS-DOS 3.5-inch,
5.25-inch diskette
JetForm Merge VAX Class 2 TK50
JetForm Merge VAX Class 3 TK50
JetForm Merge VAX Class 4 TK50

VAX Class 2: VAXstation, MicroVAX, VAX-11 /725 , VAX-11/730,
2000, MicroVAX 3100
VAX Class 3: DEC VAX-111750, 78x 3xxx, VAX 4000, VAX 62xx,
VAX 6320, VAX 6410, VAX 82xx/83xx/85xx/86xx
VAX Class 4: DEC VAX 6330, 6340, 6420-6460, 86xx, 87xx,
88xx, 89xx, 9xxx

Network Application Support (NAS)
Overview

Network Application Support (NAS) is a set of standards-compliant software that
resides above the base platform (hardware and operating system) , providing a
consistent interface to support applications running on different platforms. NASbased applications allow users to access and share information across the organization, no matter where they are located or what kind of system they are using.
With NAS integrated software products, Digital is the first vendor to provide an
easy, yet comprehensive approach to implementing the infrastructure needed for
today's open, client/server computing environment. Much more than just a package, these integrated software products combine a set of individual components
with the engineering integration necessary to ensure that a server environment is
in place for various applications.

NAS 200 for VMS and NAS 200 for ULTRIX provide a complete set of networking and distributed computing capabilities for basic print, file, and data sharing
services for PCs, Macintosh systems, and workstations. It is targeted for environments where applications run principally on the desktop, and where users of
these applications need to share files, printers, and data.
The NAS 200 software supports key standards such as OSF's DCE/ DME, OSI,
TCP/IP, and NFS.

NAS 300 Distributed Glient/Server (;o,jpputlng
The NAS 300 integrated software products for VMS and ULTRIX systems provide
a complete set of runtime services for client/server, distributed, or general hostbased applications. They provide integration capabilities for the interoperation
and distribution of applications that run partially or totally on the server or
across multiple servers or clients.
NAS 300 provides a range of application integration software for a broad range
of client/server capabilities and features. These include: distributed user interface
facilities, object-oriented application linking and control, support for creating
multimedia documents and management of multimedia data, along with desktop
integration. It supports key standards such as OSF's Motif, OMG/ORB, and SQL.
:0

NAS 400 Ideal for Critical Large Business Oi>erations
~~--~~~~~--~--

NAS 400 for VMS offers additional NAS and system software for environments
that require higher levels of availability, manageability, and reliability for transaction processing and other business-critical applications. NAS 400 supports
performance tuning and capacity planning; disk shadowing, clustering, journaling,
transaction processing, application distribution and integration, and desktop
integration.

NAS 250 VAXstation Integration into the NAS Environment
The NAS 250 software provides a complete set of NAS software to enable the
new VAX workstations to fully integrate into a client/server or distributed
environment.
The NAS 250 software supports key standards such as OSF's Motif, OSI, TCP/IP,
NFS, OMGIORB, and SQL.

9.2

Software and Services

Network Application Support (NAS)
Components of NAS Software Products
NAS Software for VAX Systems

NAS Software for DECsystems

NAS 400 for VMS
DECnet VAX Full Function
ACMS RT
DECtrace RT
RMS Journaling
VAXcluster Software
Volume Shadowing
DE Cps-DC

NAS 300 for ULTRIX
DEC ACA Services RT
DECmessageQ ULTRIX RISC
NAS 200 for ULTRIX
PATHWORKS for ULTRIX
RSM Client
DECnet/OSI for ULTRIX

NAS 300 for VMS
ALL-IN-1 Mail Server (X.400)
DEC ACA Services RT
DECforms Runtime System
DECmessageQ for VMS RTO
VMS DECwindows Motif
RdbNMS Runtime Option

NAS Software for VAXstations
NAS 250 for VAXstations
DECnet-VAX EN
DECnet-VAX Ext
RdbNMS Runtime Option
VMS/ULTRIX Connection (UCX)
VAXcluster Software
VMS DECwindows Motif
DEC ACA Services RT

NAS 200 for VMS
DECnet VAX End-node
DECnet-VAX Ext
PATHWORKS for VMS
PATHWORKS for Macintosh
Remote System Mananger Client
VMS/ULTRIX Connection (UCX)

BU-3258

Ordering Information

QL-MClA' '-xx
QL-MC2A"'-xx
QL-MC5A *-xx

QL-XVCA"'-xx
QL-XVAA"'-xx

QL-XVDA 1'-xx

NAS 200 for VAX VMS (SPD 36.86); requires VMS V5.4-1
or later
NAS 300 for VAX VMS (SPD 36.85); requires VMS V5.4-1
or later
NAS 400 for VAX VMS (SPD 40.63); requires VMS V5.5
or later

NAS 200 for ULTRIX (SPD 36.87); requires ULTRIX V4.2
or later
NAS 300 for ULTRIX (SPD 36.84); requires UWS V4.2 or
later

NAS 250 for VAX.stations (SPD 36.89); requires VMS V5.5
or later

Software and Services

9.3

Network Application Support (NAS)
NAS Optional Development Software

QL-GZRA"'-AA

OSI Application Developer's Toolkit

QP-LAXAA-AA
QL-YHCA9-QB
QL-XARA9-QB
QL-XAQA9-QB

DECwindows Motif Tools Package with:
DEC VUIT
LINKWORKS Developer's Tools
DECwindows Graphical Interface Tools

QL-VCHA"'-xx
QL-XKAA"'-xx
QL-GKPA9-Jx
QL-VD2A*-xx
QL-VD2A"'-xx
QL-VFJA"'-xx
QL-MEQA *-xx
QL-GZRA"'-AA
QL-892A9-f'
QL-MLTA"'-xx

DECforms
ACA Services Development
DECmessageQ Development
Rdb/VMS Full Development
VAX Rdb/VMS
DEC Rdb Expert for VMS
DEC InstantSQL for Rdb/VMS (workstations only)
OSI Application Developer's Toolkit
DECimage Application Services
SQL Multimedia for Rdb/VMS

QL-079A'~-xx

QL-897A"'-xx
QL-VW2A"'-xx
QL-GZRA"'-AA

VAX ACMS
CDD/Repository for VMS
DECtrace
OSI Application Developer's Toolkit

QP-LAXAA-AA
QL-YHCA9-QB
QL-XARA9-QB
QL-XAQA9-QB

DECwindows Motif Tools Package with:
DEC VUIT
LINKWORKS Developer's Tools
DECwindows Graphical Interface Tools

QL-VCHA"'-xx
QL-XKAA'"-xx
QL-GKPA9-Jx
QL-VD2A"'-xx
QL-VD2A"'-xx
QL-VFJA'"-xx
QL-MEQA'"-xx
QL-892A9-Jx
QL-MLTA"'-xx

DECforms
ACA Services Development
DECmessageQ Development
Rdb/VMS Full Development
VAX Rdb/VMS
DEC Rdb Expert for VMS
DEC InstantSQL for Rdb/VMS (workstations only)
DECimage Application Services
SQL Multimedia for Rdb/VMS

QL-GZSA"'-AA

OSI Application Developer's Toolkit

QL-XKE-'"-AA
QL-GZSA'"-AA
QL-YFAA"'-AA

ACA Services Development
OSI Application Developer's Toolkit
DECimage Application Services

YNAs JoQ roJ. :vMs
'

* Processor code

9.4

Software and Services

Network Application Support (NAS)

QA-D04AB-GZ
QA-A93AA-GZ
QA-YPCAA-GZ
QA-B13AA-GZ
QA-358AA-GZ
QA-VHRAA-GZ

DECnet-VAX Extensions, V5 .4
PATHWORKS for VMS, V4.0
PATHWORKS for Macintosh, Vl.O
Remote System Manager, V2.3
SQL/Services, V4.0
VMS/ULTRIX Connection, Vl.3

QA-D04AB-GZ
QA-A93AA-GZ
QA-YPCAA-GZ
QA-B13AA-GZ
QA-358AA-GZ
QA-VHRAA-GZ
QA-XKAAA-GZ
QA-VCHAA-GZ
QA-GKPAA-GZ
QA-XAlAA-GZ
QA-358AA-GZ

DECnet-VAX Extensions, V5.4
PATHWORKS for VMS, V4.0
PATHWORKS for Macintosh, Vl.O
Remote System Manager, V2.3
SQL/Services, V4.0
VMS/UL TRIX Connection, Vl .3
DEC ACA Services, V2.0
DECforms, VI .3
DECmessageQ for VMS, Vl.O
DECwindows Motif, Vl.O
VAX Rdb/VMS, V4.0

QA-D04AB-GZ
QA-A93AA-GZ
QA-YPCAA-GZ
QA-B13AA-GZ
QA-358AA-GZ
QA-VHRAA-GZ
QA-XKAAA-GZ
QA-VCHAA-GZ
QA-GKPAA-GZ
QA-XAlAA-GZ
QA-358AA-GZ
QA-079AA-GZ
QA-VW2AA-GZ
QA-VBRAB-GZ
QA-AB2AA-GZ
QA-GXlAA-GZ

DECnet-VAX Extensions, V5.4
PATHWORKS for VMS, V4.0
PATHWORKS for Macintosh, Vl.O
Remote System Manager, V2.3
SQL/Services, V4.0
VMS/ULTRIX Connection, Vl .3
DEC ACA Services, V2 .0
DECforms, Vl.3
DECmessageQ for VMS, Vl.O
DECwindows Motif, Vl.O
VAX Rdb/VMS, V4.0
VAX ACMS, V3 .2
DEC trace
VAXcluster Software, V5 .4
Volume Shadowing, V5 .4
DECps Data Collector

QA-716AA-GZ
QA-YNGAA-GZ
QA-B13AA-GZ

DECnet/OSI for ULTRIX, V5.0
PATHWORKS for ULTRIX, Vl.1
Remote System Manager, V2.3

QA-716AA-GZ
QA-YNGAA-GZ
QA-B13AA-GZ
QA-XKCAA-GZ
QA-GHUAA-GZ

DECnet/ OSI for ULTRIX, V5.0
PATHWORKS for ULTRIX, Vl.1
Remote System Manager, V2.3
DEC ACA Services, V2.0
DECmessageQ for ULTRIX, Vl.O

QA-001A4-GZ
QA-XAlAA-GZ
QA-D04AB-GZ
QA-VBRAA-GZ
QA-VHRAA-GZ
QA-XKAAA-GZ

DECnet-VAX (end node), V5.4
DECwindows Motif, Vl.1
DECnet-VAX Extensions, V5 .4
VAXcluster Software, V5 .4
VMS/ULTRIX Connection, Vl.3
DEC ACA Services

Software and Services

9.5

Network Application Support (NAS)
Network Application Support (NAS) at a Glance
Package

Contents

Target Environments

Standards Supported

NAS 200-VMS
QL-MClN'-xx
SPD 36.86

DECnet End-Node
DECnet-VAX Extensions
PATHWORKS for VMS
PATHWORKS for Macintosh
Remote System Manager Client
VMS/ULTRIX Connection UCX

Desktop Integration
Sharing files, printers and data
Services for workstations, PCs, and
Macintosh systems

OSI
TCP/IP
NFS
LAN Manager

NAS 300-VMS
QL-MC2N'-xx
SPD 36.85

DECnet End-Node
DECnet-VAX Extensions
PATHWORKS for VMS
PATHWORKS for Macintosh
Remote System Manager Client
Rdb/VMS Runtime Option
VMS/ULTRIX Connection UCX
ALL-IN-1 Mail Server (X.400)
VAX ACA Services VMS RT
DECforms Runtime System
DECmessageQ for VMS RTO
VMS DECwindows Motif

Distributed client/server computing
Runtime services for feature distributed
user interface facilities; object-oriented
application linking and control; multimedia
documents; interprocess messaging and
mail; full data integration

OSI
TCP/IP
NFS
LAN Manager
SQL
Motif
X-windows
OM GI ORB
FIMS
ODA
X.400

NAS 400-VMS

DECnet Full-Function
DECnet-VAX Extensions
PATHWORKS for VMS
PATHWORKS for Macintosh
Remote System Manager Client
Rdb/VMS Runtime Option
VMS/ULTRIX Connection UCX
ALL-IN-1 Mail Server (X.400)
VAX ACA Services VMS RT
DECforms Runtime System
DECmessageQ for VMS RTO
VMS DECwindows Motif
VAX ACMS RT
DECtrace RT
VAX RMS Journaling
VAX.cluster Software
Volume Shadowing
DECps Data Collector

Targeted at business-critical applications
Supports performance tuning, capacity
planning, disk shadowing, clustering,
journaling, and transaction processing

OSI
TCP/IP
NFS
LAN Manager
SQL
Motif
X-windows
OMGI ORB
FIMS
ODA
X.400

NAS 250-VMS
QL-XVDN'-xx
SPD 36.89

DECnet-VAX End Node
DECnet-VAX Extensions
Rdb/VMS Runtime Option
VMS/ULTRIX Connection UCX
VAX.cluster Software
VMS DECwindows Motif
VAX ACA Services VMS RT

Allows workstation to fully integrate into
client/server or distributed environments

OSI
TCP/IP
NFS
LAN Manager
SQL
Motif
OM GI ORB

NAS 200-UL TRIX
QL-XVCA*-xx
SPD 36.87

PATHWORKS for ULTRIX
RSM Client
DECnet/OSI for UL TRIX

Desktop integration
Sharing files, printers, and data
Services for workstations, PCs, and
Macintosh systems

OSI
TCP/IP
NFS
LAN Manager

AS 3 00-ULTRIX
QL-XVAA*-xx
SPD 36.84

PATHWORKS for ULTRIX
RSM Client
DECnet/OSI for ULTRIX
DEC ACA Services RT
DECmessageQ ULTRIX/RISC

Distributed client/server computing
Runtime services for object-oriented
application linking and control and
interprocess messaging

OSI
TCP/IP
NFS
LAN Manager
OMGI ORB

QL-MC5A'~ -xx

SPD 40.63

9.6

Software and Services

Operating Environments
DEC OSF/1

DesktOp-VMS Software

SPD: 36.29
UPI: XYW

SPD: 25.F4
UPI: VV8

DEC OSF/ 1 is Digital Equipment Corporation's implementation
of the Open Software Foundation (OSF) and operating system
components and Motif graphical user interface and programming
environment.

Desktop-VMS Software is an easy-to-use VMS operating system
environment, offering simplified system installation and system
management.

The DEC OSF/ 1 Vl.O operating system is an advanced kernel
architecture based on Carnegie Mellon University's Mach kernel
design with components from Berkeley Software Distribution
(BSD) and other sources. DEC OSF/1 also provides realtime support and numerous features intended to assist application programmers in developing applications that use shared libraries,
multithread support, and memory mapped files. In addition, to
insure a high level of binary compatibility with ULTRIX, the DEC
OSF/1 operating system is compatible with the Berkeley programming interfaces.
Part of the charter of the Open Software Foundation is to provide an interface for developing portable applications that will
run on a variety of hardware platforms. DEC OSF/1 is compliant
with the OSF Application Environment Specification (AES) that
specifies the interface to support these portable applications. In
addition, the DEC OSF /1 operating system complies with standards and industry specifications, including PIPS 151 1, POSIX
(IEEE Std. 1003 .1-1988), XPG3 BASE branding, XTI, and AT&T
System V Interface Definition (SVID) Issue 2 (Base System and
Kernel Extensions).

DEC So&PC for VMS
SPD: 32.18
UPI: YNW
DEC SoftPC for VMS provides VAXstation users with the ability
to operate DOS-based software. The SoftPC product emulates an
IBM PC/AT system (real mode only) using standard VAX hardware and VMS software. A DOS application functions in the
SoftPC environment as it functions on an IBM PC AT providing it
does not require special hardware, protected mode memory or
copy protected diskette.
DEC SoftPC supports DECwindows as well as the VT220. As
such, it can be executed on any VMS system and displayed on a
VT220 or a local or remote DECwindows X Windows display
station. For example, a VAX 8600 can be used for execution and
a VAXstation 2000 running the VMS operating system can act as
the display. Additionally, it supports the DECwindows text cut
and paste facility.
The performance of the SoftPC facility is dependent upon a number of factors as well as the speed of the processor upon which it
executes. A VAXstation 3100/38 system yields slightly under 6
MHz IBM PC/AT CPU performance with arithmetic applications.
Graphics applications may be slower.
Applications used with the SoftPC emulator (except those DOS
utilities included with the SoftPC software) are not Digital
licensed, warranted or supported products. The user must comply with the terms and conditions of each application software
license agreement in effect between the user and application
supplier.
Communications applications may not operate in a like manner
to a real PC due to differences in signaling on the VAX processor
and the PC processor and the way in which the VAX processor
handles interrupts. Many communications programs do work correctly and it is recommended these programs be tried before
purchasing SoftPC.

It is delivered as a preintegrated, preinstalled VMS system on
compact disc (CD) and includes the following system software
components: VMS operating system, DECnet-VAX End-Node,
VAXcluster software, and Desktop VMS "ease-of-use" software.

SPD: 32.17
UPI: YP7
SoftPC for ULTRIX provides the RISC user the ability to operate
DOS based software. The SoftPC product emulates an IBM
PC! AT system (real mode only) using standard hardware and
software. A DOS application will function in the SoftPC environment as it functions on an IBM PC/AT if it does not require
special hardware, protected mode memory, or copy protected
diskettes.
DEC SoftPC supports DECwindows as well as the VT220. As
such, it can be executed on an ULTRIX system and can be displayed on a VT220 or a local or remote DECwindows display.
Additionally, it supports the DECwindows text cut and paste
facility.
The performance of the SoftPC facility is dependent upon a number of factors as well as the speed of the processor upon which it
executes. A DECstation 3100 system yields somewhere between
an 8 MHz AT and a 386 CPU speed. A DECstation 5000 will
deliver compute performance above that of a low-end 386.
Graphics performance will be slower.
Applications used with the SoftPC emulator (except those DOS
utilities included with the SoftPC software) are not Digital
licensed, warranted, or supported products. The user must comply with the terms and conditions of each application software
license agreement in effect between the user and application
supplier.
Communications applications may not operate in a like manner
to a real PC due to differences in signaling on the RISC processor
and the PC processor, and the way in which the RISC processor
handles interrupts. Many communications programs do work correctly and it is recommended these programs be tried before
purchasing SoftPC.

ULTRIX Operating System
~~----..,_--~----~~~~--

SP D: 26.40
UPI: VEY (VAX)
VYV (RISC)
ULTRIX operating system is Digital Equipment Corporation's
native implementation of the UNIX operating system for all currently supported VAX, MicroVAX, VAXstation and Digital RISC
systems. The UL TRIX operating system is an interactive, demand
paged, virtual memory, multiple processor, time-sharing operating
system that has a hierarchical file system with dismountable
volumes, compatible device and interprocess I/O, asynchronous
processes, system command language selectable on a per-user
basis, disk quotas, job quotas, over 200 subsystems, and a high
degree of portability among processors running ULTRIX application programs.

Software and Services

9. 7

Operating Environments
VAX System V

OpenVMS Operating System

SPD: 33.24
UPI: VZZ

SPD: 25.01
UPI: 09S (Base Documentation Kit)
001 (Extended Documentation Kit)

VAX System V is Digital Equipment Corporation's implementation of UNIX System V running on VAX processors. It has been
tested using the AT&T System V Verification Suite and conforms
to the Base System, Kernel Extension, Terminal Interface Extension, and Network Services Extension as specified in Issue 2 of
the AT&T System V Interface Definition Volumes 1, 2, and 3.
VAX System V provides a high degree of compatibility and portability among systems running the UNIX System V operating system and UNIX System V application programs.
VAX System V is an interactive, demand-paged, virtual memory,
time-sharing operating system including support for a Symmetric
Multiprocessing (SMP) architecture. An SMP architecture is a
tightly coupled multiple CPU configuration, where all processors
share all of memory, execute a single copy of reentrant kernel
code, and serve as peer resources to the operating system in the
execution of user and kernel processes.
This version includes the following UNIX System V features:
STREAMS, Transport Level Interface Library, Remote File Sharing (RFS), and Shared Libraries. Additionally, this version contains enhancements provided by Digital including STREAMS
based TCP/IP networking software, cluster hardware support,
Digital terminal server support (LAT), an on line system exerciser
suite, and simplified system installation procedures.
VAX System V is upward compatible with previous versions of
UNIX System V for VAX processors. Executable images that run
on previous versions of UNIX System V for VAX processors generally run unmodified on VAX System V.

VAX-11 RSX
SPD: 26.73
UPI: 382
VAX-11 RSX is an emulator of the RSX operating system family
which executes on all VAX systems. VAX-11 RSX runs in compatibility mode on processors that support a PDP-11 instruction set
subset in hardware or microcode, and also runs on processors
without this support by providing its own software emulation of
the same PDP-11 instruction set subset.

VAXmate Software for Standalone Use
SPD: 55.06
UPI: OMl
VAXmate Software for Standalone Use gives the user of VAXmate
hardware the ability to use industry standard applications in a
nonnetworked environment. It includes the MS-DOS operating
system, a user interface, terminal emulation, online user information , and printer support.
Digital's adaptation of the MS-DOS operating system enables program execution, file retrieval, and editing and provides storage
capabilities, disk utilities, and other system operations.
MS-Windows gives the user a visual interface to the operating
system through pull-down menus, dialog boxes, and icons, as
well as providing the multiple program viewing capability of
windowing.

9.8

Software and Services

OpenVMS operating system, is a general-purpose multiuser operating system that supports VAX, MicroVAX, VAX.station, and
VAX.server series computers in both development and production
environments. OpenVMS can be tuned to perform well in a wide
variety of applications, including compute-intensive, I/O intensive,
realtime, and combinations of those and other environments.
(Actual performance depends upon the type of VAX computer,
available physical memory, and the number and type of disk and
tape drives on the system.)
OpenVMS has well-integrated networking, distributed computing,
multiprocessing and windowing capabilities. OpenVMS contains
extensive features that promote ease-of-use, improve the productivity of programmers, and facilitate system management.
OpenVMS also supports a large number of industry standards,
facilitating application portability and interoperability.
Users may access OpenVMS by using the English-like Digital
Command Language (DCL), the command language for
OpenVMS that is supplied with the system. DCL commands take
the form of a command name followed by parameters and qualifiers. DCL commands provide information about the system, initiate system utilities, and initiate user programs. OpenVMS
prompts users to enter required DCL parameters, making it easy
for novice users to use.
DCL commands can be entered at a terminal or included in
command procedures. Command procedures can be run interactively or submitted to a batch queue for deferred execution.
Information on DCL and OpenVMS utilities is available through
online HELP. Online HELP includes summary operational information on all aspects of system operation. A number of tools and
utilities are integrated into the OpenVMS operating system.

VMS POSIX
SPD: 34.82
UPI: GXX
VMS POSIX (Portable Operating System Interface for Computing
Environments) is a set of standards and draft standards that have
been generated by the Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) and supported by organizations such as the International Organization for Standardization (ISO). POSIX defines a set
of interface standards for various parts of an operating system.
Because of the consistency they afford applications at the operating system level, the POSIX standards are an essential underpinning of open systems computing environments.
VMS POSIX is one of Digital Equipment Corporation's responses
as a software vendor to the industry POSIX effort, and is a cornerstone of VMS open systems capabilities. (Digital's ULTRIX and
VAXELN systems also offer support for POSIX standards.) VMS
POSIX provides the capability on VMS to develop and run applications conforming to the POSIX standards.
VMS POSIX includes support for the standards and draft standards for the system application programming interface (POSIX
1003.1 ), shell and utilities (1003 .2), and realtime programming
(1003.4). POSIX 1003.l has been approved as a final standard.
POSIX 1003 .2 and 1003 .4 are mature drafts that are currently
being considered and evaluated by the standards community.

Application Development Tools and Languages

SPD: 36.31
UPI: XDB (Development)
XDC (Runtime)

BASEstar CIMfast for VMS is an application enabler that reduces
development time and application complexity, while enhancing
software maintainability and facilitating rapid prototyping
capability.
CIMfast allows even inexperienced BASEstar application developers to create BASEstar applications quickly.
CIMfast provides a very high level event-driven language called
the CIMfast Event Language (CEL) that is especially suited for
describing highly asynchronous BASEstar interaction.

Library adds a broader set of supported formats to the file conversion facility that is a part of UL TRIX. CDA Converter Library
for ULTRIX supports DECwindows workstations and timesharing
systems.
The user interface provided by the ULTRIX shell and
DECwindows application programs, such as DECwrite or
DECdecision, remains the same, except that more formats are
available. Available formats are document, table data, and graphics converters.
Converters in the CDA Converter Library do not perform modality conversions. Converters that support compound formats can
process text, graphics, and images in input data, but output formats specified by users limits the conversion process. The bidirectional AFS format converter can be used to utilize an ASCII
editor to edit a compound document.

BASEstar for VMS
SPD: 33.17
UPI: YU9 (Development)
YUA (Runtime)

BASEstar for VMS software facilitates the integration of manufacturing applications with plant equipment, accelerates development
of integrated manufacturing systems, and provides an architecture
for consistent development of manufacturing applications.
BASEstar software has features for manufacturing application integration, device connection and control of plant equipment, and
storage and management of device and operator files through its
library system.
BASEstar software operates in a distributed VAX processing environment. Its application integration features include: the ability to
collect, manage, and distribute plant data, automatically notify
applications of critical changes in plant information, and synchronize execution of manufacturing applications. BASEstar software's
distributed capabilities allow globally-defined objects to be utilized by applications residing on different nodes in a BASEstar
network.
BASEstar device integration software gives generic device access
and control for plant equipment through an interface that is
independent of device-specific operations and protocols. BASEstar
device connection management software is dependent on equipment level communication achieved through BASEstar device
access software (DAS), allowing data to be obtained through standard mechanisms and made available throughout the BASEstar
network. BASEstar device connection management capabilities can
also be used to start and stop device operations, upload from
and download to the memory of programmable devices, and
other standard functions offered by industrial control devices.
BASEstar library management software provides BASEstar users
with a mechanism for storing and tracking file development, controlling access to files, and transferring files to and from devices.
The BASEstar library system can track a file from its development
stage through testing and production to the archive stage while
providing a history of files changes. Through its ability to control
distribution of files, the BASEstar library can prevent an outdated
control program from running in production.

CDA Converter Library for ULTRIX
SPD: 31.30
UPI: VZB (VAX)

YG9 (RISC)

SPD: 31.31
UPI: VZA

CDA Converter Library for VMS allows users of document and
table data files to convert to and from a variety of other standard
document and table file formats . The CDA Converter Library
adds a broader set of supported formats to the file conversion
facility that is a part of VMS with VMS DECwindows.
The CDA Converter Library for VMS supports both DECwindows
workstations and timesharing systems with the DECwindows
Compute Server installed. The user interface provided by DCL
and by DECwindows application programs such as DECwrite or
DECdecision remains the same, except that more formats are
available.

DEC ACA Services for ULTRIX
SPD: 36.07
UPI: XKC (VAX development)
XKD (VAX runtime)
XKE (RISC development)
XKF (RISC runtime)

DEC ACA Services for ULTRIX is an implementation of Digital
Equipment Corporation's Application Control Architecture. It
consists of platform independent software services that address
the interaction of independently developed applications across
different computing environments.
DEC ACA Services for ULTRIX provides application developers
and system integrators with a set of software services for integrating independently developed applications and services across a
distributed environment. Facilities are provided for registering,
installing and invoking applications, and for handling interapplication communication and interaction among VMS and ULTRIX
computing environments.
An object-oriented model is used to define applications to DEC
ACA Services for ULTRIX Runtime system allowing sharing and
re usability of application definitions. However, applications do
not have to be written using object-oriented programming techniques or data storage.
DEC ACA Services for ULTRIX is based on a client/ server model.
A client is defined as any process or application requesting an
application invocation via the ACA Services procedure call. A
server is defined as the process that fulfills the request.

CDA Converter Library for ULTRIX allows users of document
and table data files to convert to and from a variety of other
standard document and table file formats. The CDA Converter

Software and Services

9.9

Application Development Tools and Languages
DEC ACA Services for VMS
SPD: 36.06
UPI: XKA (Development)
XKB (Runtime)
DEC ACA Services for VMS is an implementation of Digital's
Application Control Architecture. It consists of platformindependent software services that address the interaction of
independently developed applications across different computing
environments.
DEC ACA Services for VMS provides application developers and
system integrators with a set of software services for integrating
independently developed applications and services across a distributed environment. Facilities are provided for registering,
installing and invoking applications, and for handling interapplication communication and interaction among VMS and ULTRIX
computing environments.
An object-oriented model is used to define applications to DEC
ACA Services for VMS Runtime system, allowing sharing and
re-usability of application definitions. However, applications do
not have to be written using object-oriented programming techniques or data storage.
DEC ACA Services for VMS is based on a client/server model. A
client is defined as any process or application requesting an
application invocation via the ACA Services procedure call. A
server is defined as the process that fulfills the request.

DEC Ada

standard language features that are supported across implementations. Ada provides a number of other features that make it
suitable for a variety of applications, including general systems
and computational applications. Because it includes language features that support multi-tasking, Ada is particularly well suited
for real-time applications.

DEC ASD/SEE Toolkit for VMS
SPD: 37.09
UPI: YXZ
DEC ASD/SEE Toolkit for VMS, the AeroSpace Defense Software
Engineering (ASD/SEE) Toolkit for VMS, is a collection of software applications that supplement existing Digital Equipment
Corporation and third-party software products to form a complete Software Engineering Environment, which is referred to as
the COHESION ASD/SEE.
The COHESION ASD/SEE product supports software development roles across the entire software development lifecycle. It is
designed primarily to support programming-in-the-large, defined
to be 500,000 lines of code or greater. From an organizational
perspective, programming-in-the-large equates to a department/
program development effort involving many small teams. The
COHESION ASD/SEE solution will also prove useful for programming-in-the-medium, consisting of 50,000 to 500,000 lines of
code.
The ASD/SEE Toolkit is one element of the COHESION ASD/SEE
product. It provides tools and functions that help to integrate
and enhance the capabilities that exist in Digital and third-party
products today.

SPD: 21.41
UPI: GZQ

DEC AVS for ULTRIX

DEC Ada is Digital Equipment Corporation's implementation of
the Ada programming language, hosted and targeted for Digital
RISC systems running the ULTRIX operating system.

SPD: 33.29
UPI: YUT

DEC Ada conforms fully to the Ada language definition standard,
ANSI/MIL STD-1815A-1983. As a result of meeting the ANSI
standard, DEC Ada also conforms to the Federal Information
Processing Standard (FIPS-119) and the International Standards
Organization (IS0/8652-1987) standards for the Ada programming language.
DEC Ada generates highly optimized code across multiple units.
All UL TRIX services and utilities are available to programs written in DEC Ada. In addition to standard Ada I/O packages that
access ULTRIX standard file utilities, DEC Ada I/O is able to
access files that Ada cannot open, such as inherited files and
pipes.
The DEC Ada program library manager provides a number of
features that allow Ada library units to be linked with foreign
object files and object libraries. The program library manager can
link programs consisting of either Ada or foreign main programs
and either Ada or foreign subprograms.
Ada is a powerful, general purpose language that supports many
modern programming practices. The language was designed as
the result of a competition sponsored by the United States
Department of Defense. The purpose of the competition was to
define a language suitable for programming embedded computer
systems. Among the requirements for the language were features
that would reduce software costs by increasing maintainability,
evolvability, reliability, and portability.
Ada meets these requirements by providing a modular structure
for programs and allowing separate compilation of program units
as well as providing strong typing, exception handling, and other

9.10

Software and Services

DEC AVS for ULTRIX, (Application Visualization System), provides a next generation system environment which makes the
power of real time visualization accessible to the technical professional. AVS models the interactive exploratory approach of the
scientist, encompassing the full research and analysis steps of the
visualization cycle. By including the simulation and data transformation stages in the visualization process, AVS provides the first
true visualization environment.

DEC C++ for ULTRIX
SPD: 37.61
UPI: MG5
DEC C++ for ULTRIX is a native compiler which implements the
C++ programming language. It includes: a C++ compiler that
implements C++ as defined by The Annotated C++ Reference
Manual, Ellis & Stroustrup, Reprinted with corrections, May
1991; DEC C, an ANSI C compiler, as described in SPD 26.40.xx;
DECladebug, a symbolic debugger for C++ and C programs; DEC
C++ Class Libraries; and enhanced ANSI C and XPG3 header
files for use with the DEC C++ compiler.
The documentation provides comprehensive reference and usage
information for all product components. Included is a copy of an
authoritative book on C++, The C++ Programming Language, 2nd
Edition, by Bjarne Stroustrup.

Application Development Tools and Languages
DEC/EDI
SPD: 31.70
UPI: YMl (Media and documentation)
YM2 (Application component)
YM3 (Translation component)
YM4 (X.400 communications component)
YM5 (OFTP communications component)
YM6 (Bi-synch communications component)
YM7 (Bi-synch package)
YM8 (OFTP package)
YMP (X.400 package)
DEC/EDI offers application developers all the facilities necessary
for Electronic Data Interchange (EDI) . It enables users to electronically exchange structured business documents such as
Purchase Orders, Dispatch Advice and Invoices with their Trading Partners using International, National and Industry specific
EDI standards. Extensive communication options are also provided, to facilitate inter-enterprise communication via the use of
either EDI VANs or OSI protocols.
DEC/EDI is a VMS layered product. DEC/EDI consists of the
following components which provide a complete EDI solution:
DEC/EDI Application Component, DEC/EDI Translation Component, DEC/ EDI Communications Component,and DEC/EDI Management Component.
DEC/EDI can be configured such that each of these components
can be located together on the same processor or distributed
around the enterprise on different processors, using Digital's
networking products, to provide an enterprise-wide EDI system.
Multiple copies of these components can also be deployed across
the enterprise to implement an EDI system ideally suited for the
business needs of the Enterprise.

DEC Image Utility Library for ULTRIX
~~~~~~---.....

SPD: 34.48
UPI: GMl (VAX)

When DEC lnstantSQL is started, the main window appears on
the screen. This window contains a pictorial view of the tables
and columns in the user's Rdb/VMS database. The top of the
window contains a menu bar with pull-down menus listing the
top-level items, such as File, Edit, Queries, Metadata, Window
and Help. By pointing-and-clicking, users can manipulate the
data and metadata from the DECwindows interface.
The results of the query may be viewed in a spreadsheet-style
output window supporting horizontal and vertical scrolling, or
saved in an ASCII text file. The SQL statement representing the
query is automatically generated, and can be displayed and
pasted into an application program.

DEC Pascal for DEC OSF/l
SPD: 36.72
UPI: XYV
DEC Pascal for DEC OSF/1 is an implementation of the Pascal
language that complies with the ANSI/IEEE770X3. 97-1983 standard and the International Standard ISO 7185-1983 (E) Level 0
and Level 1. DEC Pascal for DEC OSF/ 1 is a fully compliant,
Class A, PIPS 109 Certified Pascal compiler. ISO Level 0 is the
ANSI implementation and ISO Level 1 includes support for conformant arrays.
DEC Pascal for DEC OSF/ 1, Version 1.2 contains some Domain
Pascal extensions, additional BSD Pascal compatibility, shared
library support, enhanced documentation, and bug fixes.
The Pascal language contains control statements, data types, and
predeclared procedures and functions. Containing extensions to
the standard, DEC Pascal for DEC OSF/1 generates optimized
code that takes advantage of the RISC hardware.
In order to enhance portability, DEC Pascal for DEC OSF/ 1
meets the X/Open Pascal language requirements and will apply
for XPG/3 Branding. Conformance to ANSI and X/Open guidelines reinforces Digital Equipment Corporation's overall commitment to meet industry standards.

GNl (RISC)
DEC Image Utility Library for UL TRIX (IUL) provides a basic set
of application-callable subroutines for use in the transport and
display of CCITT compressed bitonal images between an X
client and X server. The IUL subroutines are an applicationprogrammer interface to an image-capable X server. The X
Image Extension (XIE) has been proposed to the MIT X consortium as an image extension to the X protocol.
DEC IUL is intended to be used as embedded subroutines within
applications constructed to include control of the display of
images on video devices that are compliant with the proposed
XIE standard.
The DEC IUL capabilities supply an application interface with an
underlying implementation that extends the XLIB facilities of the
host system with an extension of library facilities called XIELIB.
In addition, IUL provides routines that aid in the integration of
image applications with the host system environments.

DEC lnstantSQL for R,db/VMS

.........~~---........_~~~-------~---"-'

SPD: 37.60
UPI: MEQ
DEC lnstantSQL for Rdb/VMS is a DECwindows Motif Graphical
User Interface (GUI) for VAX Rdb/VMS that enables users to
quickly compose and test complicated database queries without
hand-coding complex SQL statements. Using DEC lnstantSQL,
users can graphically create queries, develop prototypes, or
manipulate data and metadata without knowing SQL.

SPD: 32.43
UPI: YUQ (Development)
YV8 (Runtime)
DEC Realtime Test Integrator for ULTRIX (RT Integrator) is an
icon-based, graphical programming environment. Instead of using
a conventional programming language, the user can create and
run real-time (data acquisition, IEEE 488 and RS-232 instrument
control, test and measurement) applications by drawing them
graphically as flow diagrams.
Each DEC RT Integrator icon represents a function such as an
analog or digital input, an arithmetic operation, or a logical function. DEC RT Integrator provides several libraries of such functions. The application is built by using the point-and-click
method now standard in graphical user interfaces. By pointing
and clicking the mouse, icons are moved from the libraries to the
worksurface and then connected to the icons with either data
flow or signal flow lines. Once the icons have been set up, the
application is ready to run.
The worksurface acts as a graphical editor, enabling users to
move, copy, delete, add, cut and paste icons representing devices
and sections of code thereby allowing the user to create and
change applications much more quickly than traditional programming languages.

(Continued)

Software and Services

9.11

Application Development Tools and Languages
DEC Realtime Test Integrator for ULTRIX (Continued)
Each icon has a set-up menu that allows customization of its
function for the application. Once built, the application can be
saved and restored without the need to repeat the set-up operations. Since the configuration is saved as an ASCII text file , it can
be mailed to any other system running DEC RT Integrator and
restore it there. This feature allows the user to build an application on an ULTRIX system and transport it to a VMS system or
vice versa, and run it without modifications.

DEC Realtime Test Integrator for VMS
SPD: 28.30
UPI: YWQ (Development)
B15 (Runtime)
DEC Realtime Test Integrator for VMS, (RT Integrator), is an
icon-based, graphical programming environment. Instead of using
a conventional programming language, users create and run realtime (data acquisition, IEEE-488 and RS 232 instrument control,
test and measurement) applications by drawing them graphically
as flow diagrams.
Each DEC RT Integrator icon represents a function such as an
analog or digital input, an arithmetic operation, or a logical function. DEC RT Integrator provides several libraries of such functions. The application is built by using the point-and-click
method now standard in graphical user interfaces. By pointing
and clicking the mouse, icons are moved from the libraries to the
worksurface and then connected to the icons with either data
flow or signal flow lines. Once the icons are set up, the application is ready to run.
The worksurface acts as a graphical editor, enabling users to
move, copy, delete, add, cut and paste icons representing devices
and sections of code. This allows users to create and change
applications more quickly than traditional programming
languages.
Each icon has a set-up menu that allows customization of its
function for the application. Once built, the application can be
saved and restored without repeating the set-up operations. Since
the configuration is saved as an ASCII text file, it can be mailed
to any other system running DEC RT Integrator and restored
there. This feature allows users to build an application on a VMS
system and transport it to an UL TRIX system or vice versa, and
run it without modifications.

DEC Text Processing Utility (DECTPU)
SPD: 38.42
UPI: MC6
DEC Text Processing Utility (DECTPU) for RISC-based ULTRIX
systems is a multi-environment, multi-platform high-performance
tool designed to aid application and system programmers in
developing customized text processing tools. DECTPU includes a
high-level procedural language (which supports looping and conditional statements), a compiler, an interpreter, and over 130
built-in procedures. DECTPU, Version 3.0 also provides screen
managers for DECwindows, Version 2.0 (XUI) and DECwindows,
Version 3 .0 (Motif) environments, as well as screen managers for
character-cell (non-graphical) environments.
In addition , DECTPU provides the Extensible Versatile Editor
(EVE), which is a text editor built upon the DECTPU language
and designed for any text processing user.

DEC Trellis Object System for ULTRIX
SPD: 32.39
UPI: YLU (VAX)
YLW (RISC)
DEC Trellis Object System for ULTRIX is a comprehensive object
oriented application development system. It includes a stronglytyped object oriented language, an interactive tool kit, persistent
workspaces, and type library. The tool kit provides users with the
ability to browse, edit, debug and compile their programs. All
the tools and the incremental compiler support the
object-oriented style of programming.

DEC Trellis Object System for VMS
SPD: 32.40
UPI: YLV
DEC Trellis Object System for VMS is a comprehensive object
oriented application development system. It includes a stronglytyped object oriented language, an interactive tool kit, SQL database support, persistent workspaces, and type library. The tool
kit provides users with the ability to browse, edit, debug and
compile their programs. All the tools and the incremental compiler support the object-oriented style of programming.

SPD: 37.63
UPI: MFN (ULTRIX)
MFP (MIPS)
MFQ (68K)
MFR (MIPS runtime)
MFS (68K runtime)
DECelx Realtime Tools for ULTRIX provides Realtime software
for development on DECstations and DECsystem/ULTRIX platforms and a runtime environment for Motorola 68K and
MIPS/R3000 based Single Board VMEbus Computers.
The products for these are known as the DECelx Realtime Tools
for ULTRIX and DECelx Runtime For MIPS or 68K. There is also
a DECelx BSP (board support package) for each runtime platform
supported for use with the DECelx Tools.
DECelx Realtime Tools for ULTRIX is an ULTRIX layered product, which is installed on a host UL TRIX development system.
The DECelx BSP is installed along with the Tools on the host
s~stem.

DECelx is a software product designed to support low-end commodity boards. It provides an easy-to-use, high performance runtime system for Realtime or distributed applications.
The DECelx Runtime environment consists of modules and utilities that, along with the user application programs, execute on a
target runtime commodity board. The finished DECelx application for the Runtime Environment includes only the runtime
functions that are required for the application.

SPD: 31.83
UPI: YGJ
YHL (Client)
YHJ (Server)
YGK (Integration Kit)
DECframe for RISC UL TRIX is an engineering design management
framework that can be used as the basis for configuring a design
environment for a multiuser design team. DECframe provides
design file management, tool and process management, and helps
automate the design process for groups involved in ECAD and
MCAD design.

(Continued)

9.12

Software and Services

Application Development Tools and Languages
DECframe for RISC ULTRIX (Continued)
DECframe increases the design engineering team's productivity by
providing an open framework consisting of data management and
process management features in which engineering applications
(tools) can be incorporated. These tools can then be invoked
from the DECframe user interface, and DECframe will manage
the design files used and created by the tools. It also includes: a
consistent user interface; a simple level of workflow management
which helps designers walk through the complex engineering
design processes; a release management feature; and configuration
management that supports construction of a design object
hierarchy.
DECframe is provided in several configurations. A server and a
client are required to use DECframe.
The DECframe Workstation Kit, which provides a single-user version of the software, is the minimum configuration required to
run DECframe.

DECmpp FORTRAN
~~-"'-~~~------'--~---~~~...--..

SPD: 36.68
UPI: XT6
DECmpp FORTRAN allows data-parallel programming on
DECmpp 12000 Series systems. DECmpp FORTRAN for DECmpp
12000 Series systems is an implementation of FORTRAN-77 conforming to American National Standard FORTRAN, ANSI
X3.9-1978, although it is not currently validated.
DECmpp FORTRAN includes extensions from DEC FORTRAN and
the Fortran 90 Standard, ANSI X3.198-1991. Fortran 90 features
make it easy for programs to access the data-parallel hardware of
the DECmpp 12000 Series systems.

DECmpp System Software
SPD: 36.70
UPI: XT4
DECmpp System Software is a layered software product on the
ULTRIX operating system. DECmpp System Software is a set of
advanced integrated tools that allows users to access the DECmpp
12000 Series Data Parallel Unit using system level commands.
The software consists of two components: Extensions to ULTRIX
to support the DECmpp Hardware environment; and DECmpp
Programming Language (DPL) , a high level C-like programming
language for developing parallel application software.
The DECmpp System Software supports multi-user access to the
Data Parallel Unit and interface routines for displaying data from
the DECmpp software programming environment. The DECmpp
System Software consists of a Concurrent Process Manager that
provides simultaneous access for multiple user jobs. The Concurrent Process Manager operates by sharing memory among the
various jobs rather than sharing processors. As a result, all jobs
have access to the DECmpp 12000 Series system. In addition, the
Concurrent Process Manager ensures that jobs have access to I/O
devices, like the DEC Massively Parallel Disk Array, at all times.
It also handles any contention among different jobs for the same
I/O device.
The DECmpp System Software includes an I/O library that provides support for devices attached to the Data Parallel Unit,
including those attached to the VMEbus interface and DEC Massively Parallel Disk Array. Using routines modeled after ULTRIX
I/O functions, users can write DECmpp application programs to
access the Parallel Disk Array directly. VMEb us access is accomplished via a set of routines that allow parallel data copies
between the PE array and VME devices.

DECview3D
SPD: 26.95
UPI: 796
DECview3 D is a software tool used for display, review, markup,
analysis and manipulation of engineering graphics created by
CAD (Computer Aided Design) packages. It combines data translation, snapshot generation and LiveLinks to DECwrite Compound Document Editor. DECview3D can be used to integrate
engineering graphics into other applications, or as a standalone
tool for display and review of those graphics.
DECview3 D runs under VMS DECwindows and adheres to the
XUI Style Guide. It has the same look and feel as other Digital
developed DECwindows applications. DECview3 D also supports
graphics terminals such as VT240, VT241, VT330, VT340.

DECview3D Concurrent View and Edit Module for VMS
SPD: 31.35
UPI: :xws

DECview3D Concurrent View and Edit Module for VMS allows
two users of the DECview3D software, linked by DECnet communications , to work simultaneously on the same DECview3D layout
file. Users of the Concurrent View and Edit software have access
to all DECview3D functions and pass control of the application
back and forth. The results of all appli-cation operations are
displayed on both users' DECwindows workstations.
DECview3 D is a software tool used for display, review, markup,
analysis, and manipulation of engineering graphics created by
CAD (Computer Aided Design) packages. It combines data translation, snapshot generation and LiveLinks to the DECwrite Compound Document Editor. DECview3 D can be used to integrate
engineering graphics into other applications, or as a standalone
tool for display and review of those graphics. Refer to
DECview3D for VMS Software Product Description (SPD
26.95.xx) for a complete product description.
The DECview3D Concu.r rent View and Edit Module for VMS
facilitates the review of engineering designs among distributed
work groups and team members.
DECview3D Concurrent View and Edit Module for VMS runs
under VMS DECwindows and adheres to the XUI Style Guide. It
has the same look and feel as other Digital developed
DECwindows applications.

DECwindows 412.5 Emulator for ULTRIX
SPD: 31.59
UPI: YE9 (VAX)
YHD (RISC)
DECwindows 4125 Emulator for ULTRIX allows applications that
utilize Tektronix 4125 terminal to run in a DECwindows environment. The Emulator supports functions documented by Tektronix for the Tektronix Model 4125 Color Graphics terminal. It
also supports selected 4010/ 4014 applications.
Third-party software applications may utilize Tektronix features
unique to a specific model. Customers should contact the thirdparty vendor regarding software compatibility with Tektronix
4125.
The DECwindows 4125 Emulator uses the same mouse and
windowing techniques as other DECwindows applications. Users
can use the mouse to choose commands from a menu, expand
and shrink windows and rearrange windows on the screen.
DECwindows-style HELP is also provided.

Software and Services

9.13

Application Development Tools and Languages
DECwindows 4125 Emulator for VMS
SPD: 3 1.60
UPI: VZQ
DECwindows 4125 Emulator for VMS allows applications that
utilize Tektronix 4125 terminals to run in a DECwindows environment. The Emulator supports functions documented by Tektronix for the Tektronix Model 4125 Color G raphics terminal. It
also supports selected 4010/4014 applications.
Third-party software applications may utilize Tektronix features
unique to a specific model. Customers should contact the
third-party vendor regarding software compatibility with Tektronix 4125 .
The DECwindows 4125 Emulator uses the same mouse and
windowing techniques as other DECwindows applications. Users
can use the mouse to choose commands from a menu, expand
and shrink windows and rearrange windows on the screen.
DECwindows-style HELP is also provided.

making use of the vector instruction set. Optimization techniques
include chaining and overlapping of the vector functional units ,
as well as efficient management of the hierarchical memory
system.

SPD: 36.26
UPI: XAR
LinkWorks Developer's Tools for VMS is a set of development
tools for creating, modifying, and maintaining hyperapplications.
A hyperapplication is an application that participates in a
DECwindows LinkWorks environment. Hyperapplications provide
linking and navigation capabilities to application end users
through a new Link menu. LinkWorks support can be added to
existing applications, and new applications can be designed with
LinkWorks support included from the beginning.

Lucid Common Lisp/DECsystem

DECwindows Developer Kit on VMS for OSF/Motif

SPD: 32.23
UPI: YL9

SPD: 32.37
UPI: YMA

Lucid Common Lisp/DECsystem is a complete implementation of
Common Lisp as defined in the first edition of Common Lisp:
The Language by Guy L. Steele Jr. All data types and operations
are supported. Lucid Common Lisp also provides a number of
important extensions to the language, such as a multitasking facility and an ephemeral garbage collector. Also provided, as separate modules, are enhancements to the programming environment, including an EMACS-style editor and the Window Tool
Kit.

DECwindows Developer Kit for VMS on OSF/ Motif is a development environment, based on the OSF/ Motif Vl.1 standard. This
version of the Digital Equipment Corporation product is
intended to meet the needs of software developers who are developing new Motif applications or are converting existing XUI or X
Windows System-based applications to the Motif standard. This
version of the software supports program development in the C
language only. This development environment is comprised of
components directly from OSF and some additions from Digital.

Lucid Common Lisp/VAX for VMS

Digital Extended Math Library

SPD: 36.76
UPI: XVJ

SPD: 31.67 (VMS)
UPI: YEZ (VMS)
SPD: 34.44 (ULTRIX)
UPI: GKK (ULTRIX)

Lucid Common Lisp/VAX for VMS is a complete implementation
of Common Lisp as defined in the first edition of Common Lisp:
The Language by Guy L. Steele Jr. All data types and operations
are supported. Lucid Common Lisp also provides a number of
important extensions to the language, such as a multitasking facility and an ephemeral garbage collector. Also provided, as separate modules, are enhancements to the programming environment, including an EMACS-style editor and the Window Tool
Kit.

Digital Extended Math Library (DXML) is a set of mathematical
subroutines drawn from public domain and proprietary libraries
that are optimized for the VAX vector architecture. It includes
the Basic Linear Algebra Subprograms (BLAS) Level 2 and BLAS
Level 3 available from the Argonne National Labs. Also included
are Digital proprietary subprograms for BLAS Level 1 Extensions
and signal processing including one and two dimensional Fast
Fourier Transforms (FFTs), Convolution, Correlation, and Digital
Filters. These subprograms are highly optimized for the VAX
Vector Architecture, but also support VAX scalar processing.
Since DXML routines can be called from all languages that are
supported by the VAX calling standards, the library permits
access to VAX vector processing for applications written in other
languages as well as FORTRAN or VAX MACRO.
DXML contains both a scalar library and a vector library. The
scalar library is provided for development and testing of application programs. The vector library can be used for vectorization
and optimization of scientific and engineering programs, as well
as for mathematical software libraries.
Where appropriate, all routines are available in both real and
complex versions , as well as in both single and double precision
(D and G format).
The vector library uses advanced algorithms tailored to specific
operational characteristics of the VAX Vector Architecture. Some
key computational modules are written in assembler language,

9.14

Software and Services

The Compiler produces high-performance and efficient code. It
offers incremental compilation and both automatic and usercontrolled optimizations. Lucid Common Lisp has a compiler
mode designed for fast compilation during the early stages of
development and a production mode that provides the optimizations that produce the fastest possible application quality code.
The Interpreter is the basis of the interactive environment with
the same semantics for Lisp code as the Compiler. Compiled and
interpreted code integrate completely and transparently.

OSI Application Developer's Toolkit
SPD: 34.98
UPI: GZR
OSI Application Developer's Toolkit enables users to write distributed applications that communicate over open networks and
use the OSI services provided by DECnet-VAX and DECnet/ OSI
for ULTRIX.
(Continued)

Application Development Tools and Languages
OSI Application Developer's Toolkit (Continued)
The Toolkit permits the application writers to use the services of
the OSI upper layers in their applications.
The Application Programming Interfaces (APis) provide access to
the OSI services supported by the underlying DECnet system.
The ASN.1 tools provide a compiler and a library of
encode/decode routines.

PDP-11 Symbolic Debugger runs as a two-task debugger. A small
portion of the code, necessary to debug applications, is linked
with the user task and the major portion of the debugger runs as
a separate task.
PDP-11 Symbolic Debugger provides access to program symbols
by reading the symbol table file produced by the task builder.
PDP-11 Symbolic Debugger can understand symbols produced by
FORTRAN-77 and MACR0-11.

The Toolkit supports application development on both VMS and
ULTRIX for applications to be run on DECnet-VAX
orDECnet/OSI for ULTRIX.

PIJI for RISC ULTRIX

Pascal for RISC

SPD: 36.81
UPI: XWZ

SPD: 33.04
UPI: VV4 (Traditional)
XLU (ULTRIX ConDist)
Pascal for RISC is an implementation of the Pascal language that
complies with the ANSI/IEEE 770X3.97-1983 standard and the
International Standard ISO 7185-1983 (E) Level 0 and Level 1.
Pascal for RISC is a fully compliant, Class A, PIPS 109 Certified
Pascal compiler.
Pascal for RISC is a maintenance update which contains bug fixes
and implements the License Management Facility.
The Pascal language contains control statements, data types and
predeclared procedures and functions. Containing extensions to
the standard, Pascal for RISC generates optimized code that takes
advantage of the RISC hardware.
Pascal was designed as a language suitable for teaching programming concepts and one that would be efficient and reliable on
available computers. Pascal for RISC has a large concentration in
Educational institutions and is also used in the software development environment by application developers.

SPD: 33.54
UPI: 03K
PDP-11 C for VMS is a reliable language processor for Digital
Equipment Corporation's proprietary operating systems on the
PDP-11. It is highly compatible with the ANSI standard for the C
language. PDP-11 C can be used to develop code for inclusion
into resident libraries, and other low level system routines.
PDP-11 C for VMS consists of a compiler, a Run-Time Library
(RTL) and documentation.
The compiler produces machine code optimized for execution
speed and memory efficiency. It is highly compatible with the
ANSI C standard, X3Jll/90-013 February 14, 1990, and extends
beyond ANSI requirements with several extensions for the
PDP-11 family of central processors.
The compiler runs in native mode, as a cross compiler, on the
host VMS environment and produces PDP-11 object code compatible with all the supported target systems. These target systems are RSX-llM, RSX-llS, RSX llM-PLUS , Micro/ RSX, RSTS/E,
RT-11 (SJ, FB, XM), VAX-11 RSX, and VAX CoProcessor/RSX.
The Run-Time Library is provided in object form.

PDP-11 Symbolic DebuggerNAX, to RSX

PL/I for RISC ULTRIX is an extended implementation of the
ANSI X3.74-1981 American National Standard PL/I General Purpose Subset (Subset G). PL/I for RISC ULTRIX extensions
include compatibility features with industry standard implementations, VAX PL/I, and ANSI full language features (ANSI X3 .531976). PL/I for RISC ULTRIX consists of a compiler, a runtime
library, and online reference (manual) pages. PL/I for RISC
UL TRIX runs under the ULTRIX operating system on the
DECstation family of processors. PL/I for RISC ULTRIX is a comprehensive and powerful programming language that supports
scientific computation, commercial data handling and data organization, and extensive string manipulation. The block-structuring
provided by the PL/I language helps to reduce the costs of program development and maintenance.
The PL/I for RISC ULTRIX compiler includes a compile-time
embedded preprocessor facility that allows for language extension
and customization, include files, and conditional compilation. As
a native RISC UL TRIX language, PL/I for RISC UL TRIX is integrated into the RISC ULTRIX language environment. This integration provides PL/I for RISC ULTRIX users with support for
mixed-language programs and access to the source level debugger
(dbx).

PowerFrame for ULTRIX
SPD: 31.83
UPI: YGJ
PowerFrame for ULTRIX is an engineering design management
framework which can be used as the basis for configuring a
design environment for a multiuser design team. PowerFrame for
ULTRIX provides design file management, tool and process management, and helps automate the design process for groups
involved in ECAD and MCAD design.
PowerFrame for ULTRIX increases the design engineering team's
productivity by providing an open framework consisting of data
management and process management features in which engineering applications (tools) can be incorporated. These tools can then
be invoked from the PowerFrame user interface, and PowerFrame will manage the design files used and created by the tools.
It also includes: a consistent user interface; a simple level of
workflow management which helps designers walk through the
complex engineering design processes: a release management feature; and configuration management that supports construction of
a design object hierarchy.

SPD: 26.75
UPI: 139

PowerFrame for ULTRIX is provided in several configurations. A
server and a client are required to use PowerFrame.

PDP-11 Symbolic Debugger/VAX to RSX is a fully symbolic
debugger for FORTRAN 77 and MACR0-11 programs running on
VMS under VAX-11 RSX. PDP-11 Symbolic Debugger is a tool to
aid in locating programming errors in successfully compiled programs that do not execute properly.

The PowerFrame Workstation Kit, which provides a single user
version of the software, is the minimum configuration required to
run PowerFrame.

Software and Services

9.15

Application Development Tools and Languages
PowerFrame for VMS
SPD: 34.73
UPI: GTV (VMS workstations and clients)
GTX (VMS servers)
GTY (Integration kit)
PowerFrame for VMS is an engineering design management
framework which can be used as the basis for configuring a
design environment for a multi-user design team. PowerFrame
provides design file management, tool and process management,
and helps automate the design process for groups involved in
ECAD and MCAD design.

TPframe
SPD: 37.22
UPI: MB3
TPframe is a tool for developing database-oriented, transaction
processing applications in an ULTRIX/SQL environment. TPframe
has been tested to ensure operational stability and usability.
TPframe consists of two components; UNIX System Laboratories '
TUXEDO/T transaction monitor, and a software interface that
supports transactional semantics between the transaction monitor
and the ULTRIXISQL database management system (DBMS). The
software interface follows the X/Open XA interface specification
of April 1990.
Together, these two components provide an ideal application
development platform, one which allows the developer to focus
on application development rather than interoperability between
the transaction monitor and the operating system.
TPframe provides facilities for creating client/ server applications
and their associated terminal menus. Once applications are created, TPframe can be used to test the applications and migrate
them to a production environment.
TPframe is specifically designed to operate in conjunction with
Digital's ULTRIX/SQL DBMS , as well as with the ULTRIX/SQL C
preprocessor. The C preprocessor translates embedded SQL statements into native C language statements, which provide the protocol necessary to access the ULTRIX/SQL DBMS.

ULTRIX Worksyst~m Software
SPD: 28.22
UPI: OJQ (VAX)
VVl (RISC)
ULTRIX Worksystem Software (UWS), is an "integrated" system
based upon two major components: the ULTRIX operating system, Digital Equipment Corporation's native implementation of
the UNIX operating system for all currently supported VAX and
Digital RISC systems, and an extensive windowing environment
based on the X Window System standard that supports general
users and graphics applications developers while taking full
advantage of the specialized graphics hardware of the
workstations.
UWS provides users of ULTRIX workstations with a common user
interface and a base set of bundled applications.
UWS provides the application developer with a set of Style
Guides and the tools which help to implement that style.
UWS also contains Display PostScript, from Adobe Systems
Incorporated.

SPD: 26.60
UPI: 056
VAX Ada is Digital Equipment Corporation's validated implementation of the full ANSI/MIL-STD-1815A-1983 Ada Language.
The VAX Ada compiler runs under the VMS operating system
and generates optimized, shareable, and position-independent
code.
As a native mode VMS language, VAX Ada is integrated into the
VMS common language environment. All VMS system services
and utilities are thus available to programs written in VAX Ada.
VAX Ada supports the VAX Record Management Services (RMS)
sequential, relative, and indexed file organizations and associated
access methods. VAX Ada programs can invoke modules written
in other VMS languages. Additionally, programs written in other
languages can invoke VAX Ada modules.
Ada is a powerful, general-purpose language that supports many
modern programming practices. The language was designed as
the result of a competition sponsored by the United States
Department of Defense. The purpose of the competition was to
define a language suitable for programming embedded computer
systems. Among the requirements for the language were features
that would reduce software costs by increasing maintainability,
evolvability, reliability, and portability.
Ada meets these requirements by providing a modular structure
for programs and allowing separate compilation of program units,
as well as providing strong typing, exception handling, standard
language features that must be supported across implementations.
Ada provides a number of other features that make it suitable for
a variety of applications including general systems and computational applications. Because it includes language features that support multitasking, Ada is particularly well suited for realtime
applications.

VAX APL
SPD: 25.31
UPI: 020
XAA (High performance option)
VAX APL (A Programming Language), is a concise programming
language that can be used for a wide range of applications. It
simplifies the handling of numeric and character data organized
as lists and tables.
VAX APL is a native-mode, shareable, reentrant interpreter that
runs under the VMS operating system. It provides a built-in function editor, debugging aids, system communication facilities and a
file system. VAX APL can execute lines of code immediately or
store the code for later execution.
VAX APL uses virtual memory to create a "workspace" that can
expand dynamically as needed and utilizes the VAX FloatingPoint and Character String instructions.

VAX BASIC
SPD: 25.36
UPI: 095
VAX BASIC is an interactive, shareable language processor that
utilizes the VAX floating-point, decimal, and character instructions. It provides a program development environment for both
applications development and timesharing by generating in-line
VMS native mode instructions.
VAX BASIC provides a high-performance program development
environment for both applications development and timesharing
by generating in-line VMS native mode instructions. It combines
the power of a structured programming language with the interactivity of the BASIC environment and the convenience of
(Continued)

9.16

Software and Services

Application Development Tools and Languages

easy-to-use graphics statements. VAX BASIC is also integrated
with various programming productivity tools and key components
of the VAX Information Architecture.

VAX Record Management Services (RMS) , including sequential,
relative, and indexed file organizations and associated access
methods in addition to the stream file-access conventional among
most C implementations. VAX C programs can invoke, as functions, modules written in other VAX languages.

SPD: 25.12
UPI: 106

VAX C provides assistance in decomposing loops. Decomposed
loops run in parallel in multiple processes, reducing the total
elapsed time required to run the program. This capability is most
useful on multiple processor machines, such as the VAX 8800.

VAX BASIC (Continued)

VAX BLISS-32 Implementation Language is a high-level systems
implementation language for VAX systems. BLISS-32 supports
modular software development according to structured programming concepts. It provides an advanced set of language features
and access to most VAX hardware features to facilitate programming of realtime and hardware-dependent applications.
BLISS-32 is used for developing operating systems, compilers,
runtime system components, database file systems, communications software, utilities, and more.
The compiler runs in native mode under VMS. It translates
BLISS-32 source programs into relocatable object modules that
can be linked for execution.
This language includes separately compiled modules; expressions
for describing actions to be performed; declarations for allocating, describing, and initializing data; declarations for defining
macros and literals; longwords of 32 bits for data manipulation;
operators; field references; character sequence functions; IF,
CASE, SELECT, and SELECTONE; DO, WHILE, and UNTIL;
INCR and DECR; LEA VE; OWN and GLOBAL; LOCAL,
STACKLOCAL, and REGISTER; INITIAL and PRESET; STRUCTURE; ROUTINE; REQUIRE; LIBRARY; MACRO and
KEYWORDMACRO; % IF, %THEN, %ELSE, and %FI; and lexical functions.
Specialized BLISS-32 features include LINKAGE, PSECT, BUILTIN, and ENABLE.
BLISS-32 integrates into the VAX Common Language Environment. This integration provides VAX BLISS-32 users with support
for VAX interlanguage calling standards, LSE, and VAX Source
Code Analyzer; access to VMS system services and the VAX Symbolic Debugger; and callable interfaces to the VAX Common
Run-Time Library and VAX utilities.
BLISS-32 's compiler performs global and local optimization to
produce efficient and compact generated code. It treats each routine definition as a complete unit in compiling the code for that
routine. The compiler optionally checks for certain language
usage that, while technically correct, is likely to be a coding
error. BLISS-32's co.mpiler optionally produces a listing file that
shows the source text compiled and the generated code. The
format closely resembles a VAX MACRO assembly listing. Multiple listing options allow selective inclusion or exclusion of
source-generated code, use of source names in the listing in place
of machine register names, macro expansion and tracing information, and use of names from library files . The listing includes a
detailed symbol cross-reference.

SPD: 25.38
UPI: 015
VAX C is an extended implementation of the C programming
language originally developed at Bell Laboratories. The VAX C
compiler runs under the VMS operating system and generates
optimized and position-independent code.
As a native-mode VAX language, VAX C is integrated into the
VAX common language environment. All VAX system services are
thus available to programs written in VAX C. VAX C supports

VAX C supports the lint-like features of the Source Code Analyzer component of VAX Language-Sensitive Editor/ Source Code
Analyzer. The combination of using function prototypes and the
Source Code Analyzer component allows the programmer to
check for consistent function usage throughout a program environment. VAX C also generates complete debug and traceback
records for use with the VAX Symbolic Debugger. The Debugger
allows the C programmer to set breakpoints, examine and modify
the contents of user variables , and selectively halt or continue
program execution.

VAX COBOL

SPD: 25.04
UPI: 099
VAX COBOL is a high level language for business data processing
that operates under the VMS operating system, taking full advantage of the system facilities and the VAX Information Architecture. It is based upon the 1985 ANSI COBOL Standard
X3.23-1985.
VAX COBOL shares some common syntax with COBOL-81/
RSTS/ E and COBOL-81/RSX and includes a COBOL-81 subset
flagger. It is integrated with the VAX Information Architecture
and includes various Digital extensions to COBOL, including
screen handling at the source language level.
VAX COBOL has been validated by the National Bureau of Standards for conformance to PIPS PUB 21-2 , Federal Standard
COBOL at the high level.
Two features provide access to the VAX Information Architecture
from VAX COBOL. The Data Manipulation Language (DML)
allows users to access DBMS databases with VAX DBMS. VAX
DBMS must be installed to use this feature. The COPY FROM
DICTIONARY statement, a Digital extension to COBOL, allows
access to common record definitions stored in VAX CDD/ Plus.
VAX CDD/Plus must be installed to use this feature.
VAX COBOL, COBOL-81/RSTS/ E and COBOL-81/RSX share many
common features. These features are implemented with the same
syntax and semantics on both compilers. In this way, a VMS
system may be used to develop code that will eventually be compiled using COBOL-81. A COBOL-81 subset flagger may be used
to check code designed for eventual use on COBOL-81. Additionally, code developed using COBOL-81 may be migrated to VAX
COBOL.

SPD: 27.16
UPI: 365
VAX COBOL GENERA TOR is a screen-oriented program generator that produces VAX COBOL source programs. Commercial
programmers use the VAX COBOL GENERATOR as a productivity tool for the creation and maintenance of data processing
applications. The programmer can create or modify a program by
choosing icons that represent the components making up the

(Contin ued)

Software and Services

9.17

Application Development Tools and Languages
VAX COBOL GENERATOR (Continued)
program (menus, screens, etc.). From this input, the VAX COBOL
GENERATOR produces a VAX COBOL source program that can
be used like any other source program. Also, the VAX COBOL
GENERATOR can be used for rapid prototyping to produce a
program that can later be expanded and refined to become a
production application. Thus, programmers can produce and
maintain VAX COBOL programs in much less time than by traditional hand coding.
VAX COBOL GENERA TOR runs under the VMS operating system.
The VAX COBOL GENERATOR can produce programs that call
subprograms written in other VMS languages, as well as many
Runtime Library routines and system services. Similarly, programs
produced by the VAX COBOL GENERATOR can be called by
other VMS products adhering to the VAX Calling Standard. The
default screen interactions utilize the VAX COBOL extensions to
the ACCEPT and DISPLAY statements. However, the VAX
COBOL GENERATOR can produce screen applications that use
other screen packages, such as VAX PMS (Forms Management
System). These VAX COBOL source programs can be debugged
by the VAX Symbolic Debugger.
To define an application in the VAX COBOL GENERATOR environment, the programmer selects and places icons (representing
various parts of the application) in the screen work area for
expansion. Data and procedural flow are specified by connecting
these parts together. The VAX COBOL source code generated is
then compiled by the VAX COBOL language processor and
linked by the VAX Linker. These applications can then be executed on any valid VMS operating system.

VAX DEC/ CMS

VAX DEC/MMS is inclu.ded in the VAX.set (SPD 27 .07) software
development tool package. This package provides simplified
ordering and maintenance of various tools. See the appropriate
Software Product Descriptions for more information on VAX.set.

SPD: 26.69
UPI: 143 (1 to 16 users)
144 (32 users)
VAX DEC/Shell provides the same user interface found in the
native UNIX, namely, the Bourne Shell. VAX DEC/ Shell is an
alternative command language interpreter to DCL.
VAX DEC/ Shell, along with VAX C, VAX DEC/CMS and VAX
DEC/MMS, makes up the VMS layered product set for VNX. It
provides functionality similar to UNIX.
VAX DEC/Shell features environment variables, pipes,
user-definable search paths for command execution, control-flow
primitives, parameter passing, and UNIX file name syntax. Other
features include input and output redirection to and from files,
commands and utilities similar to those on a UNIX system, string
substitution, structured constructs, modification of a command's
environment, a shell runtime library, mechanisms for using DCL
from VAX DEC/ Shell, and interfaces to VAX DEC/CMS and VAX
DEC/MMS.
VAX DEC/Shell includes a tailorable user environment, commonly
used UNIX utilities, a text processing package, communication
utilities, and terminal operation routines.

SPD: 25.52
UPI: 007
VAX DEC/CMS (Code Management System) is a library system
that facilitates the development and maintenance of software systems. Software systems are divided into different functional components that are, in turn, organized into sets of one or more files.
During development, one or more programmers continually make
changes to these files. VAX DEC/CMS helps manage the files
during development (and later during maintenance) by storing
the files in a project library, tracking changes, and monitoring
access to the library.
VAX DEC/CMS also supplies a means of manipulating different
combinations of files within a library. The ability to formalize
these combinations provides a focus for system design and a
means of organizing the files within a library.
VAX DEC/CMS supports the DECwindows software environment,
and provides either a DECwindows or command line user
interface.
VAX DEC/ CMS is included in the VAX.set (SPD 27.07.xx) Software Development Tools Package. This package provides simplified ordering and maintenance of various tools. See the appropriate Software Product Description for more information on
VAXset.
W""1i

VAX DEC/MMS (Module
SPD: 26.03
UPI: VAD
VAX DEC/ MMS (Module Management System) is a software tool
designed to enhance programmer productivity. It determines
what components in a described software system have changed,
and rebuilds the system in an optimal way.
When some modules of a software system are modified, dependent modules may need to be recompiled. VAX DEC/MMS determines which modules need to be recompiled, and performs the

9.18

appropriate actions to ensure that the software system is recompiled and linked with all the latest changes. Additionally, VAX
DEC/ MMS has the ability to interact with VAX DEC/CMS (Code
Management System, SPD 25.52) and other VMS software productivity tools.

Software and Services

SPD: 26.98
UPI: VCS
VAX DECscan VMS Software Toolkit is used as an industrial
application platform to provide data acquisition, alarm detection
with controlling actions and reporting, action sets (sequence control), closed loop regulatory control, and an external utility interface. VAX DECscan supports the I/ O products of Honeywell and
Phoenix and treats the logical I/O point tags in a
device-independent fashion .
DECscan's menu-driven interactive utility provides the primary
user interface to define and configure the application. Supported
features include online definition and configuration of
device-independent I/O point tags, alarms, action sets, and
closed-loop controls; I/O vendor-specific prompts; online monitoring of the DECscan Toolkit operation and status; online control of alarms, control loops, and data acquisition; online forcing
of output type I/ O point tags; realtime operator display of field
I/O values in preconverted engineering units; time-stamped configuration lists of current database definitions; and DECnet
support.
DECscan's runtime task processes the DECscan Toolkit functions.
Features include an in-memory database that contains the
DECscan Toolkit I/O point data (realtime I/ O values) and all the
user-defined information used to control the Toolkit application
functions; configurable processing of the data acquisition, alarms ,
action sets, and control loops; and controlling actions connected
to alarms and action sets.

(Continued)

Application Development Tools and Languages
VAX DECscan VMS Software Toolkit (Continued)
DECscan's callable routines are invoked by user-written application programs to monitor and control Toolkit status and operation. The callable routines allow application programs to obtain
the current values of I/O tags ; force new values to output type
I/O tags; control the execution of preconfigured alarms, control
loops, and action sets; and interface database values to other
VMS utilities.
DECscan's point logging utility provides periodic logging of I/0
values on terminals and in files. It can provide historical data to
other VMS utilities or track I/O point values in real time. Several
such sessions can run in parallel, each with its own set of tags to
log. All I/O values are time-stamped.
DECscan's graphics interface provides the interface between the
realtime I/O data of the Toolkit's database and the DataViews
industrial graphics package sold by V.I. Corporation. The graphics interface automatically accumulates the list of IIO tags referenced in the views generated by DV-Draw. They will periodically
read the latest VO values of those tags and update the appropriate pictures on the user's graphics screens.
VAX DECscan VMS Software Toolkit applications include factory
floor monitoring and automation, remote high-speed data acquisition and control, product handling, and environmental control.

SPD: 32.67
UPI: YHB
VAX FORTRAN High-Performance Option (HPO) is an optional
enhancement to the VAX FORTRAN compiler. HPO enables the
FORTRAN compiler to automatically generate vector-processor
instructions and to automatically decompose programs to improve
performance on multiple-processor systems.
HPO adds a new ASSERT statement, which provides additional
information to the compiler about the program. The ASSERT
statement can be used in some programs to achieve a high
degree of vectorization and/ or automatic decomposition. The
ASSERT statement can optionally generate code to verify the
assertions at run time, if desired. ASSERT statements can be specified in directive form for portability and will be ignored by
other compilers since they will appear as comments.
HPO also adds the INIT_DEP_FWD directive to allow vector
processing for many loops that would otheiwise not qualify due
to unknown data dependencies. As this directive may change the
meaning of the program, Digital does not warrant execution
results conforming to the FORTRAN standard when this directive
is used.

VAX Image/3L Supporting Software for VMS
-----~-

SPD: 25.16
UPI: 100
VAX FORTRAN is an implementation of full language FORTRAN77, conforming to American National Standard FORTRAN, ANSI
X3.9-1978. It includes optional support for programs conforming
to the previous standard, ANSI X3 .9-1966. VAX FORTRAN meets
the Federal Information Processing Standard Publication
(FIPS-69-1) requirements for a flagger. The flagger optionally produces diagnostic messages for compile-time elements that do not
conform to the full-level ANSI FORTRAN X3.9-1978 Standard.
VAX FORTRAN also conforms to the International Standard ISO
1539-1980(E) and to MIL-STD 1753, with the exception of the
specific syntax for octal and hex constants.
The shareable, reentrant compiler operates under the VMS operating system. It globally optimizes source programs while taking
advantage of the VAX floating point and character string instruction set and the VMS virtual memory system.

VAX FORTRAN for ULTRIX Systems
SPD: 27.23
UPI: A99
YV7 (High performance option)
VAX FORTRAN for UL TRIX Systems is an implementation of full
language FORTRAN-77 that conforms to American National Standard FORTRAN, ANSI X3 .9-1978. Optional support for the previous standard (ANSI X3.9-1966) is included.
The reentrant compiler operates under the ULTRIX-32 operating
system and globally optimizes source programs while taking
advantage of the VAX floating-point and character-string instruction set and the ULTRIX demand-paged, virtual memory system.
Extensions to the ANSI standard include composite data declarations using STRUCTURE, END STRUCTURE, and RECORD statements; access to record components through field references; a
set of data types beyond those specified for full language FORTRAN-77; explicit specification of storage allocation units for data
types; data initialization in type declaration statements; and more.
The system also provides a multiphase optimizer that can perform optimizations across entire program units.

SPD: 33.42
UPI: PVO
VAX lmage/3 L Supporting Software for VMS is a programmer
interface allowing access to the lmage/3 L image accelerator
option module. It is used for display of bitonal images and provides software support of the hardware that accelerates image
decompression, scaling, and rotations of 90°, 180°, and 270°.
The lmage/3 L module can be used only in monochrome systems
and is designed to plug into the color option slot of a VAXstation
3100 (Model 30, 40, 38, 48) , or a VAXstation 2000.
VAX lmage/3 L Supporting Software includes a device driver that
provides a VMS interface to the lmage/3 L hardware module. A
shareable subroutine library is also included that provides a callable interface equivalent to that of the DECimage Application
Services (DAS)/ lmage Display Services (IDS) with the functional
differences listed below. Refer to the DECimage Application Service Software Product Description (SPD 25.E8.xx) for more
information on DECimage Application Services and, in particular,
Image Display Services.
The shareable library will determine if the lmage/3L hardware
module is present and use it to accelerate image operations
whenever possible. Only one process at a time can access the
Image/3 L hardware module. If the lmage/3 L hardware is in use
by another process, the shareable library will perform the
required image operations in software. Applications designed to
use IDS should be able to make use of the lmage/ 3 L by relinking
to the lmage/ 3L shareable library. There are several minor differences between the DECimage version of IDS and the lmage/3 L
version.

VAX LSE (Language-Sensitive Editor/Source Code
Analyzer)
SPD: 26.59
UPI: 057
VAX LSE (Language-Sensitive Editor/Source Code Analyzer) is an
integrated environment that provides software professionals with
editing, cross reference, and static analysis capabilitites. It is a
multilanguage, multimodule, and multiwindow tool that is useful
for program design, development, and maintenance.

(Continued)

Software and Services

9.19

Application Development Tools and Languages
VAX LSE (Language-Sensitive Editor/Source Code
Analyzer) (Continued)
The two main components of this product are the LanguageSensitive Editor and the Source Code Analyzer. The LanguageSensitive Editor component provides the following capabilities:
source code templates, the ability to do low level program design
by embedding pseudocode in source code, the ability to view
source code at various levels of detail by replacing a sequence of
source lines with a single overview line, and access to online
language specific help. Together, this support enables new and
experienced programmers to develop programs faster through
VAX language specific construct completion and error detection
and correction facilities.
The Source Code Analyzer component aids developers in understanding the complexities of software systems. Since it allows a
developer to analyze an entire system as opposed to individual
modules, and helps the developer understand unfamiliar systems,
the Source Code Analyzer component is extremely useful during
the implementation and maintenance phases of a project. The
Source Code Analyzer component provides source code navigation, cross reference, and static analysis for compile-time source
code information generated by supported VAX languages. Additionally, the Analyzer provides design cross reference, analysis,
and reports for pseudocode and specialized comment processing
information generated by supported VAX languages.
The Language-Sensitive Editor component supports the
DECwindows software environment, and provides either a
DECwindows or a character cell terminal interface. All the Source
Code Analyzer commands are available from within an editing
session.
The VAX Language-Sensitive Editor/Source Code Analyzer is
included in the VAX.set Software Engineering Tools Package (SPD
27 .07). This package provides simplified ordering and maintenance of various tools. See SPD 27.07 for more information on
VAX.set.
The VAX Language-Sensitive Editor/Source Code Analyzer works
in concert with supported VAX languages and the VAX Symbolic
Debugger to provide a highly interactive, on-line environment
that facilitates the EDIT-COMPILE DEBUG-NAVIGATE-ANALYZE
portion of the program development cycle. Within a single editing session, users can write, edit, compile, review compile time
errors , correct errors, navigate through , and analyze their source
code.

which queries VAX Jukebox Control Software (JCS) configuration
data. Cartridges and volumes are made known to MMG via the
ADD CARTRIDGE command. As MMG operations are performed,
entries in MMG's databases regarding the status of these objects
are updated.
MMG makes use of a hook provided in the VMS $MOUNT utility;
when the VMS $MOUNT utility detects a request for a media
mount on an RV60 drive in an RV64 jukebox, it calls MMG to
ascertain the availability of the drive and requested volume. MMG
then calls VAX JCS to perform the physical jukebox commands
necessary to pull the optical cartridge from its location in the
jukebox and place it in the desired drive.
VAX MMG supplies a callable runtime library interface as well as
a Digital Command Language (DCL) interface.
VAX MMG Run-Time Library (RTL) routines are intended to be
called from user-written programs to perform jukebox functions .
Any program written in one of the VMS operating system supported languages can call any procedure in the VAX MMG RTL.
VAX MMG RTL calls conform to standard VMS systems interface
specifications for Creating Modular Procedures, which allow
mixed language programming.
VAX MMG is contained in the VAX MMG RTL as a shareable
installed image. Only the DCL and callable RTL interfaces are
accessible by the user.

VAX Ras~al
··----~~-·-~---

SPD: 25.11
UPI: 126
VAX Pascal is an implementation of the Pascal language that
accepts programs compatible with either level of the ISO specification for Programming languages; Pascal (ISO 7185 -1983 (E) ) as
well as ANSI/IEEE 770X3.97 -1983 (December, 1983 ). VAX Pascal
also meets the Federal Information Processing Standard Publication (FIPS-109) requirements by accepting programs conforming
to the ANSI standard. VAX Pascal also accepts many features
from the Extended Pascal standard (ANSI/ IEEE 770X3.160-1989
and ISO 10206).

The Language-Sensitive Editor component can be invoked
directly from the VAX Symbolic Debugger to correct source code
errors found during a debugging session.

The compiler has been validated for both levels of the ISO
unextended Pascal standard and for conforming to FIPS-109.
Containing extensions to the standards, VAX Pascal generates
optimized, shareable code that takes full advantage of the VAX
hardware floating point and character instruction sets and the
virtual memory capabilities of the VMS operating system. The
language contains control statements, data types, and predeclared
procedures and functions .

Users can customize the environment by tailoring and expanding
upon the features and structures provided by the LanguageSensitive Editor component. User-defined environments can be
saved for future use.

SPD: 25.30
UPI: 114

SPD: 31.40
UPI: VZD
VAX Media Manager (MMG) is a VMS operating system layered
product that provides enhanced functionality to one or more
RV64 optical jukeboxes. It is intended as a tool for applications
developers and as a utility for system managers and operators.
MMG's database keeps track of the content and status of jukeboxes, drives, cartridges, and volumes, eliminating the requirement for users and applications developers to monitor the location and status of individual drives and cartridges. Jukeboxes and
drives are made known to MMG via MMG's CONFIG command,

9.20

Software and Services

VAX PL/I, an extended implementation of the ANSI X3.74 1981
American National Standard PL/I General Purpose Subset,
includes compatibility with industry standard implementations,
ANSI full language features , and features specific to VMS. The
software consists of a shareable compiler, a HELP facility, and a
system interface library that includes declarations for system routines. The compiler generates optimized, position independent
machine code.
VAX PL/I is a comprehensive programming language that supports scientific computation, commercial data handling and data
organization, and extensive string manipulation.

(Continued)

Application Development Tools and Languages
VAX PL/I (Continued)
VAX PL/I allows access to VAX CDD. A compile-time preprocessor facility allows language extension and conditional compilation.
All system services, the VAX Common Run-Time Library, and
VAX system utilities are available through the PL/I CALL statement. A library of predefined ENTRY declarations minimizes the
coding required.
A native-mode VMS language, VAX PL/I integrates into the VAX
VMS Common Language environment. This integration provides
user support for the VAX Interlanguage Calling Standard, access
to the VAX Symbolic Debugger (including support for source line
debugging) , and callable interfaces to VAX utilities and optional
products.
Features include a full complement of data types, an assignment
operator, VAX RMS file organization support, five storage classes,
a refer option, structured program control and structuring statements, condition handling, I/O control, preprocessor statements
and expressions, picture variable validation, and efficient object
code generation.

and can increase available memory for the VMS system and
performance of the realtime processor by having each realtime
processor with its own local memory for the application program.
Realtime applications are developed and debugged using the standard VAXELN Toolkit. VAXELN applications, including device
drivers, can be developed entirely in a high-level language.

SPD: 26.93
UPI: 495
VAX SCAN is a high-level language designed for text processing.
In addition to the commonplace string operators such as concatenation, substring, extraction, and comparison, VAX SCAN has
constructs for matching complex text patterns and sorting. These
capabilities make VAX SCAN particularly useful for building filters, translators, extractors, preprocessors, and parsers.

Other features include language elements that support the VAX
extended range and precision floating point architectural features,
a REFER option, ALLOCATE statements, LIKE and UNION attributes, built-in funtions, expressions in format lists, replication factors, compiler options, and INITIAL values.

As a native-mode VAX language, VAX SCAN is integrated into
the VMS Common Language Environment. Its programs can
invoke and be invoked by routines written in other VMS languages, as well as many runtime library routines and VMS system
services and utilities. VAX SCAN programs can be debugged
using the VAX Symbolic Debugger. VAX SCAN can also be integrated with the VAX Language-Sensitive Editor (LSE) and with
VAX Source Code Analyzer (SCA) .

VAX PL/I optimizations include value propagation, subexpression
elimination, local variable allocation, invariant computation
removal, Boolean expression simplification, special case code generation, pattern replacement, and in-line expansion of procedure
calls.

VAX SCAN is implemented as an optimizing compiler that produces standard VMS object modules. These modules can be
linked with modules written in other VMS languages to produce
an executable image that can be executed by the VMS RUN
command.

VAX RALLY
SPD: 27.03
UPI: A86

SPD: 27.36
UPI: 729

VAX RALLY provides a powerful fourth generation environment
for developing interactive database applications. As an integrated
package, RALLY provides tools to define Rdb/VMS databases,
forms , reports, menus, and online help for the application user.

VAX Xway is a spreadsheet model and data conversion application designed for use with spreadsheets, database managers, and
any other application that produces or accepts data in one of the
supported storage formats. It converts constant data (numbers
and text) between all supported formats. It also converts spreadsheet models between those selected formats which store relationships, formulas, and formats, as well as constant data.

Application developers can use VAX RALLY' s menu interface and
extensive defaulting capabilities to create simple applications
quickly. More sophisticated applications can be created in the
RALLY editing environment.

VAX Realtime Accelerator Software (VAX RTA)
SPD: 29.43
UPI: VJN
VAX Realtime Accelerator Software (VAX RTA) is a layered product that integrates the VAXELN message passing capability with
VMS operating system software. With VAX RTA and the VAXELN
Toolkit, users can develop realtime applications that can be distributed between the VMS host processor and the VAXELN-based
KA800 processors.
VAX RTA enables the VMS host processor to control the
VAXELN realtime processors using either program control or
through a command language interface. VAXELN-based KA800
processors communicate with the VMS host and each other at
DMA speeds over the VAXBI bus. Communication between
processors occurs through standard VAXELN message passing
services and the VAX RTA runtime library procedures.
VAX RTA can improve overall system performance by putting the
computing power closer to the realtime event that is being controlled or monitored; reduce and even eliminate the impact of an
intensive operation on the VMS host sys tem by distributing realtime data handling to dedicated VAXELN VAX RTA processors;

The supported storage formats are: WKS, WKl , WRK, DIF, SYLK,
VAX DECalc, and VAX DECalc-PLUS or VAX Xway-produced
Command files, ASCII tabular data with a specified separator,
and ASCII data which can be described as fields .

VAXELN Ada
SPD: 27.22
UPI: A97
VAXELN Ada is a VMS layered product for developing Ada language applications which run in a standalone or embedded environment on VAX processors under the VAXELN realtime
executive.
Typical VAXELN Ada applications are ones in which individual
processors have dedicated or otherwise predetermined functions
and are not needed simultaneously for general computing, program development, or other uses for which a general-purpose
operating system (e.g., VMS) is more appropriate. Other uses are
in embedded systems, where the processor is an integral part of a
larger device and the resources of a general-purpose computer
system, such as a disk, are not available. Examples include industrial automation, workstations designed for a particular profession, Ethernet server networks and robots.

(Continued)

Software and Services

9.21

Application Development Tools and Languages
VAXELN Ada (Continued)
VAXELN Ada is especially suited to, although not limited to,
creating realtime applications; that is, applications in which the
system's response to external events is critical. Such applications
include the typical scientific and industrial data processing situations in which the computer's operation has to be precisely synchronized with machines and special input/output devices.
VAXELN Ada applications are developed using VAX Ada and the
VAXELN Toolkit on a host VMS system. The resulting bootable,
VAXELN-based Ada application is then moved to the VAXELN
target system using disk or tape media, an Ethernet Local Area
Network (LAN) link, or programmable read-only memory
(PROM). The application program executes on the target system
as a dedicated system. The network link to the host development
system may be used for remote debugging.

VAXELN KltV Toolkit E~nsions for YMS
\>

SPD: 34.18
UPI: GES
VAXELN KAV Toolkit Extensions for VMS is a VMS layered
product. It can be used in conjunction with the VAXELN Toolkit
to develop dedicated realtime systems to run on the KAV30
module.
The KAV30 is a VMEbus-based, VAX-realtime single board computer that runs a user's ELN system. It is based on the
rt-VAX.300 processor daughter module which contains a 2.7-VUP
CMOS processor, a CMOS VAX floating-point coprocessor, a
CMOS second-generation Ethernet coprocessor, VSB, optional
SCSI controller, and 4 Mbytes or 16 Mbytes of memory.
With the KA V30, a user can now put a VAX on the VMEbus,
integrating the application into Digital Equipment Corporation's
extensive computing and networking environment. Data can be
communicated to and from devices on a DECnet or TCP/IP network, providing a means of total integration from the realtime
device to the data center. For the KAV30, the user develops the
application on a VAX VMS Host Development System using the
VAXELN Toolkit and the VAXELN KAV Toolkit Extensions. The
application can then be built into an ELN Target System, which
can be down-line loaded into a KAV30 over an Ethernet, booted
from SCSI disk, or booted from EPROM.

SPD: 28.02
UPI: 375
376 (Runtime)
VAXELN Toolkit is a VMS layered product used for the development of dedicated realtime VAXELN systems that run on VAX
and MicroVAX processors. The development tools run on any
host VAX computer under VMS or MicroVMS operating systems.
A finished VAXELN system runs directly on a supported runtime
target VAX or MicroVAX processor without the presence of
another operating system.
VAXELN is especially suited to, although not limited to, creating
realtime applications; that is, applications in which the system's
response (both speed and predictability) to external events is
critical.
The VAXELN software simplifies the design and implementation
of such applications by offering high-level language support, a
runtime kernel executive and various service programs. The high
level language support includes a Pascal compiler and runtime
libraries (RTL) for VAX C and VAX FORTRAN. Support for VAX
Ada is available under separate license. The kernel manages
resources, processes and shared data. The runtime service programs available are for a VMS compatible file system, network
communication facilities and device drivers.

9.22

Software and Services

VAXELN supports multitasking; that is, execution of a program
made up of several concurrently executing parts. In addition,
multiprogramming is supported, meaning that entire programs,
including multitasking programs, can be scheduled concurrently
on the same CPU.
VAXELN provides support for tightly coupled symmetric multiprocessing on the VAX 6000 Model Series 200, 300 and 400, and
VAX 8800 configurations. Each processor executes a single copy
of the system image and jobs can run on either processor.
VAXELN DECwindows is based on M.I.T.'s specification for the
X Window System. X Window System standards supported as
part of DECwindows include the Xl 1 network protocol, a base
set of workstation fonts, the C language binding for the Xlib
programming library and the C language binding for the Xtoolkit
library. Support of the Xl 1 network protocol in the client,
library and display server components provides VAXELN with the
capability to interoperate with other Xl 1 compliant systems in a
distributed fashion.
VAXELN supports the server-client distribution inherent in the X
Window System with three VAXELN-provided transports-local
shared memory and DECnet.
VAXELN DECwindows provides full client/server functionality.
Provided are the DECwindows server image, the DECwindows
runtime libraries and the user environment component
DECwindows software, all of which can be built into VAXELN
systems.

SPD: 33.68
UPI: YWR
VAXELN Window Server for ULTRIX is an ULTRIX layered product that loads a DECwindows kernel onto a VAX.station over
Ethernet to provide X-Window terminal functionality.
EWS consists of VAXELN system images, ULTRIX programs, and
ULTRIX shell scripts to set up an environment in which a host
ULTRIX system provides DECwindows client services for Digital
Equipment Corporation workstations. The host UL TRIX system
operates as a boot server, down-line loading the appropriate
VAXELN Window Server system images to the workstations. The
UL TRIX system and the workstation then appear to operate as a
single UL TRIX DECwindows workstation.
The VAXELN Window Server software provides a DECwindows
solution for diskless workstations and, depending on the configuration, may greatly improve windowing performance.
EWS provides the same look and feel of high-resolution workstations with the economies of centralized system management.
Users can run applications on the processor best suited for the
task and share data across the network.
Common fonts have been built into the runtime system image,
thus decreasing the time necessary for font loading and improving response time for many applications.
Communication between the boot server node and the workstation is DECnet, TCP/ IP, or both.

SPD: 33.69
UPI: 376
VAXELN Window Server for VMS (EWS) is a VMS installed product that loads a DECwindows kernel onto a target VAXstation
over Ethernet to provide X Window terminal functionality.
(Continued)

Application Development Tools and Languages
VAXELN Window Server for VMS (Continued)
EWS consists of VAXELN system images and VMS DCL command
files to set up an environment in which a host VMS system provides DECwindows client services for Digital workstations and
VT1300 terminals. The VMS system operates as a boot server,
down-line loading the appropriate VAXELN Window Server system images to the workstations and VT1300 terminals. The VMS
system and the workstation or terminal then operate as an integrated VMS DECwindows workstation.
The VAXELN Window Server (EWS) software provides a
DECwindows capability solution for diskless workstations and,
depending on the configuration, can greatly improve windowing
performance.
EWS provides the same look and feel of high-resolution workstations with the economies of centralized system management.
Users can run applications on the processor best suited for the
task and share data across the network.
Common fonts have been built into the runtime system image,
thus decreasing the time necessary for font loading and improving response time for many applications.
Communication between the boot server node and the workstation or VT1300 terminal is DECnet, TCP/ IP, or both.

SPD: 27.07
UPI: 965
VAXset Package (Software Engineering Tools) is comprised of
five component products: VAX Language-Sensitive Editor/ Source
Code Analyzer; VAX Performance and Coverage Analyzer; VAX
DEC/CMS; VAX DEC/ MMS; VAX DEC/Test Manager.
These products provide a set of software engineering tools for
the development, testing, and maintenance of application programs. Four products (VAX Language-Sensitive Editor/ Source
Code Analyzer editor component, VAX Performance and Coverage Analyzer, VAX DEC/CMS, VAX DEC/Test Manager) support
the DECwindows software environment, and provide either a
DECwindows or a command line user interface.
The VAX Language-Sensitive Editor/ Source Code Analyzer is an
integrated environment that provides software professionals with
editing, cross reference, and static analysis capabilities. It is a
multi-language, multi-module, and multi-window tool that is useful for program design, development and maintenance.
For more information on the VAX Language-Sensitive Editor/
Source Code Analyzer, the languages it supports, and its support
for vector software development, refer to the Software Product
Description (SPD 26.59) .
The VAX Performance and Coverage Analyzer is a tool to help
VMS users analyze the execution behavior of their application
programs. The VAX Performance and Coverage Analyzer has two
functions. First, it can pinpoint execution bottlenecks and other
performance problems in application programs. Second, it provides test coverage analysis by measuring what parts of a user
program are executed or not executed by a given set of test data.
For more information on the VAX Performance and Coverage
Analyzer, including support for vector software development,
refer to the Software Product Description (SPD 26.76).
VAX DEC/CMS (Code Management System) is a library system
that facilitates the development and maintenance of software systems. Software systems are divided into different functional components that are, in turn, organized into sets of one or more files .
During development, one or more programmers continually make
changes to these files. VAX DEC/ CMS helps manage the files
during development (and later during maintenance) by storing
the files in a project library, tracking changes, and monitoring
access to the library.

For more information on VAX DEC/CMS , refer to the Software
Product Description (SPD 25.52 ).
VAX DEC/ MMS (Module Management System) is a software tool
designed to enhance programmer productivity. It determines that
components in a described software system have changed, and
rebuilds the system in an optimal way.
For more information on VAX DEC/MMS, refer to the Software
Product Description (SPD 26.03 ).
VAX DEC/Test Manager automates regression testing by executing user supplied tests and automatically comparing the results
with the expected test results. VAX DEC/Test Manager gives the
software engineer flexibility in organizing tests and in selecting
tests for execution, and in verifying and reviewing test results.
For more information on the VAX DEC/Test Manager, refer to
the Software Product Description (SPD 26.68) .

SPD: 33.58
UPI: VAW
V AXuisx and VWS Migration Tools Kit allows most existing
applications written for the VWS windowing system to run under
the DECwindows windowing system. VAXuisx accomplishes this
by providing a new runtime library that uses the Xlib program
interface for drawing and input services. UIS routines are redirected to the new UISXSHR runtime image. Therefore, most
applications do not need to relink or install native VWS.

.XiMidia Too as

'<y fl'1@fa

SPD: 36.55
UPI: XUV (Tools Developer Kit)
XTP (Audio Developer License)
XTR (Video Developer License)
XTT (Audio Cluster License)
XTT (Software Media)
XUW (Tools Full Developer Kit)
XTP (Audio Developer License)
XTR (Video Developer License)
XTT (Audio Cluster License)
XTT (Software Media)
MB5 (Tools Runtime Kit)
LBD (Tools Runtime License)
XTQ (Audio Runtime License)
XTS (Video Runtime License)
MB4 (Software Media)
The Audio/Video Runtime Kit includes drivers, servers, sample
applications, Software Motion Pictures and a few sample audio
and video clips.
The Audio/Video Developer Kit adds on-line documentation,
audio and video libraries, a more extensive audio clip library, and
tools to the functionality found in the Runtime Kit.
Audio and Video Drivers provide support for the DECaudio and
DECvideo TURBOchannel options as well as the built on audio in
the Personal DECstation 5000.
The Audio Server allows multiple audio events, e.g., music,
sound effects and spoken text to occur simultaneously. Its synchronization primitives allow commands and devices to be
sequenced. They also prioritize audio resources among different
clients. The Audio Server supports both DECaudio and MAXine' s
audio capabilities.
The Xv Video Extension to the X Server allows live video to be
displayed in a workstation window. The DECvideo
TURBOchannel option can convert a channel of analog video into
a digital format (uncompressed) fo r display on a workstation. The
extension attaches the digitized video frame to a user specified
window and allows sharing of the screen between the video window and other windows .

Software and Services

9.23

Artificial Intelligence

SPD: 38.40
UPI: XSX (VAX systems-development)
YEN (VAX systems-runtime)
VWK (RISC systems-develoment)
YEP (RISC systems-runtime)
NEXPERT OBJECT for UL TRIX Systems is a software product
developed by Neuron Data Systems, Inc. and licensed under
Digital Equipment Corporation Standard Terms and Conditions.
NEXPERT OBJECT for ULTRIX is a powerful, workstation-based
application development tool, which fully utilizes the graphic
capability of a workstation. It is written in C, and integrates
proven knowledge representation methodologies with powerful
inferencing mechanisms. This facilitates the delivery of applications in a heterogeneous environment.
NEXPERT OBJECT uses Objects and Rules to represent knowledge. The user interface makes full use of color, windows and
graphic networks, permitting the user to easily interact with the
facts and rules in the system.
NEXPERT OBJECT supports sophisticated inference mechanisms,
including integrated forward and backward chaining which allows
the system to imitate the reasoning behavior of the expert. The
user can also customize the reasoning strategies of the system as
required. The explanation facility lets the user highlight the reasoning of the systems during any point in a session.
NEXPERT OBJECT supports direct calls to standard database
architectures throughout the network via bridges provided by
optional software. The user has the capability of filtering database queries. Processes/ programs can be spawned by the applications the user builds, thereby combining conventional and expert
system technologies.

VAX Decision Exp~rt for VMS

SPD: 27.05
UPI: 418
VAX LISP/ULTRIX is a full implementation of COMMON LISP,
with the exception of complex numbers, the INSPECT function,
and the ED (editor) function . With the exception of any operating system-specific feature, VAX LISP is source program compatible with VAX LISP/VMS.
VAX LISP/ULTRIX features a system building utility that allows a
user to create a LISP program excluding those parts of VAX LISP
not required for the program to execute and also allows users to
create a single executable image that contains both the VAX LISP
code necessary for the program to run and the user's code. This
utility also makes programs shareable by multiple users.
Other features include an interactive user interface; fully lexically
scoped variables so compiled and interpreted code execute identically; incremental compilation support for call out to compiled
non-LISP routines written in languages that support the VAX calling standard; call out to XlO Graphics Library; user-definable
I/O streams; user-controllable and extensible pretty printer;
debugger, stepper, and tracer; alien structure mechanism for
defining and manipulating non-LISP data structures; and
user-controllable error handling.

SPD: 25.82
UPI: 917
VAX LISP/VMS is a complete and extended implementation of
COMMON LISP as defined by the book, COMMON LISP: The
Language, by Guy L. Steele, Jr. It runs on the VAX family of
computers using the VMS Operating System. For workstations,
VAX LISP/VMS supports both DECwindows (XUI toolkit and Xll
graphics) and VWS graphics.

SPD: 25.05
UPI: VI2
VAX Decision Expert for VMS is a tool that assists programmers
and engineers in building expert systems.
VAX Decision Expert has both development and delivery packages. The development package allows users to build expert systems by making selections from menus . Information can be
shown in several ways: in a table format for entering if-then
rules; a graphical editor for building and-or trees; and a graphical
editor for building decision or procedural trees. VAX Decision
Expert allows for both forward and goal chaining in the if-then
table and and-or tree modules. The developer can control the
search technique by setting probability and cost data so the system will search the most effective and least expensive route first.
Also, the developer can control the search technique by using the
utility language. The utility language is an underlying command
language that provides the ability to perform functions that cannot be classified as if-then table, and-or tree, or decision tree
functions (for instance, input/ output or inference control
structures).
The delivery or end-user package is a menu interface aimed at
the end user with no computer experience. The screen is divided
into two main parts, the procedure window and the history window. A pop-up menu window appears and the end user must
choose a response from the menu in order to continue the session. Once the end user responds, both the question and the end
user's answer are placed in the history window. The procedure
continues until a solution is reached.

9.24

Software and Services

SPD: 27.04
UPI: 913 (Development)
MKL (Compiler only)
VAX OPS5 is a high-performance implementation of the OPS5
language as described in the OPS5 User's Manual by Charles L.
Forgy, Department of Computer Science, Carnegie-Mellon University. VAX OPS5 is a tool for developing commercial quality
rule-based systems. It provides a DECwindows-based development environment that integrates the steps required to create,
run, debug, and revise VAX OPS5 programs.
The VAX OPS5 runtime system sequences through all productions in a system in the recognize-act cycle. Production systems
written in VAX OPS5 call routines written in other VMS languages. Those routines, in turn, call the OPS5 system. VAX OPS5
supports routines for Ada, BASIC, BLISS-32, C, FORTRAN, and
Pascal.
VAX OPS5 consists of a compiler, a runtime system, and an
optional development environment. The compiler is incremental
and creates the Rete Network. This network eliminates redundant
tests that would otherwise be performed in an exhaustive pattern-matching or inference operation. The compiler translates the
Rete Network into position-independent VAX instructions, and
the output is a standard object module that can be linked into
VMS executable or shareable images.

(Continued)

Artificial Intelligence
VAX OPS5 (Continued)
The runtime system is a suite of routines that form part of an
application's running image. All routines reside in memory and
can be shared among users. It also includes a command interpreter that adds to user control of running VAX OPS5 programs
and other service routines. Features include runtime system support routines for interfacing to routines written in other VMS languages; BUILD command for incrementally compiling a startup,
production, or catcher into arunning program; and a RESTART
command for resetting execution context and reexecuting the
startup.

The development environment lets users create or modify source
code, then test, debug, and correct the altered program with the
new instructions in effect. Features include a standard
DECwindows interface with user-customizable options; an integrated text editor; one or more trace windows; one-to-one correspondence between modules and VMS files; single-user system
with temporary and permanent source code databases;
task-oriented and context-sensitive online help; and the ability to
use any bitmapped graphics display that supports DECwindows.
It also can execute standalone on a VAX.station or in
DECwindows client and server mode.

Software and Services

9.25

Communications
3270 Terminal Option Software
SPD: 25.G5
UPI: VV9

DEC Computer Integrated Telephony
Applications Interface for ULTRIX
SPD: 34.25
UPI: GMU (RISC)

3270 Terminal Option Software is the operational firmware that
is downline loaded to a CXM04 -'~ communication option card for
the DECserver 550 terminal server only. It allows supported
3270-type terminals attached to a CXM04 option card to interactively access host-based applications while continuing operation
with an IBM host. This same ability is provided for PCs properly
configured with one of the supported packages that emulate
3270-type terminals.

DEC Computer Integrated Telephony Applications Interface for
ULTRIX allows applications to establish and control logical communications channels to devices attached to a CIT-compatible
PBX.

3270 Terminal Option Software controls terminal port characteristics and the IBM session support. The 3270 user can have
access to both service nodes (hosts) and IBM host applications. A
hot-key sequence toggles users from the IBM session to the VMS
session. The system interprets VT220 escape sequences and translates them to 3270 coax commands that are sent to the IBM 3270
display. The software also reads keystrokes and performs the
reverse translation.

CIT Applications Interface for ULTRIX routines also allow the
programmer to establish communications channels with one or
more DECvoice modules.

A set-up menu selection similar to the VT220 set-up menu lets
users define terminal characteristics as needed. The 3270 Terminal Option Software is down-line loaded over the network from a
Phase IV DECnet load host.

DEC Commserver for VMS
SPD: 33.21
UPI: GCQ
DEC Commserver for VMS is a layered software product that
allows VMS host systems to communicate with suitably configured server systems over the Ethernet. The DEC Commserver
for VMS software package is composed of both host and server
functional components. The host components include an Application Interface Driver that implements the Simpact Associates
application programming interface (API); a host transport driver
which interfaces to the system's Ethernet Driver; and configuration and management drivers.

GMV (VAX)

These channels can be used for basic call processing such as
making and accepting telephone calls, additional call processing
such as transferring and conferencing calls, and Monitoring the
status of telephones.

A DECvoice module provides a voice response unit that can be
used for voice digitization (recorded voice) and voice synthesis
(text-to-speech synthesis). For example, messages re recorded
over a telephone and the voice synthesis converts text messages
to speech. Using CIT routines, the DECvoice module can also
make, answer and hangup telephone calls, and generate and recognize tones on the telephone line.
DEC CIT Applications Interface for ULTRIX passes the application's requests to Digital's CIT Server software, which must be
installed on a VAX/VMS system or a DEC MicroServer connected
to a CIT-compatible PBX over a synchronous communications
link. Refer to the DEC CIT Server for VMS Software Product
Description (SPD 29.91.xx) and the DEC CIT Server 100/500
Software Product Description (SPD 36.33) for more information.

DEC Computer Integrated Telephony
Applications Interface for VMS
~~~.~~~~~~~~~.~~~~-'

SPD: 29.92
UPI: VGX

The DEC Commserver's application interface driver permits users
to utilize their existing Simpact applications as if the Simpact
hardware (ICP1622) were installed in the host. Application programs are able to perform $QIO requests to the DEC Commserver's host transport driver-all transparent to the host
application.

DEC Computer Integrated Telephony Applications Interface for
VMS is a software product which provides programmers with an
applications interface comprising a library of VMS routines. These
routines allow the applications programmer to establish and control logical communications channels between a user process on a
VAX and devices attached to a CIT compatible PBX.

DEC Commserver for VMS can be configured to interface with
multiple servers and conversely, servers can be configured to
interface with multiple hosts. Any combination of host and server
connections can be made up of a maximum configuration of 31
hosts and/or 31 servers on a single LAN. Users must follow configuration and performance guidelines, since the total number of
communications lines supported is a function of line speeds and
line utilization. The server components within DEC Commserver
for VMS include commserver transport driver, transfer application, management and device processes, VAXELN operating system, and communication protocols.

DEC Computer Integrate~ Telephony Se~er 100/500

Simpact Associates software protocols for the DEC Commserver
are supported by Digital when purchased with the DEC Commserver for VMS software.

9.26

Software and Services

SPD: 36.33
UPI: XNQ
DEC Computer Integrated Telephony Server 100/500 provides
users with access to CIT-compatible voice-switches for applications using the CIT Applications Interface. The CIT Applications
Interface allows applications to establish and control logical communication channels between the appli-cation and devices
attached to the CIT-compatible switches. These channels can be
used to control basic call processing such as making and
accepting telephone calls, additional call processing such as transfer and conference calls, and monitoring the status of the devices.

Communications
DEC Reliable Ttansactlon Router (RTR) for VMS
SPD: 34.30
UPI: XNK (Backend)
XNL (Frontend)
DEC Reliable Transaction Router (RTR) for VMS is the implementation of the Reliable Transaction Router on VMS. It is a reliable,
transparent, message routing system that includes both a transactional and non transactional message control system. DEC RTR
implements automatic application software fault tolerance and
failure recovery on the VMS operating system by adapting to
hardware (CPU), communications, and application software failures. DEC RTR for VMS provides the users the ability to easily
partition multiple application programs over DECnet Local Area
Networks (LANs) and Wide Area Networks (WANs). Ease of
development features include both a Requester (Client)/Server
design environment, with optional all-or-nothing transaction
semantics, as well as a message broadcasting facility. DEC RTR
implements virtual, rather than physical, networks which provide
the application developer with a "single view" of a distributed
client/ server environment. This technique allows the application
software to be independent of physical hardware (CPU) location,
network naming conventions, and communications protocol.
DEC RTR for VMS is implemented by providing the programmer
with nine system services to develop distributed applications.
This call interface conforms to the VMS calling standard. In addition to the standard system service call interface, DEC RTR for
VMS includes a run-time library (RTR RTL) for the VMS language
family to facilitate application development in high level programming languages. The RTR call interface functions are also made
available at the Digital Command Language (DCL) level in both
their synchronous and asynchronous forms.
DEC RTR for VMS provides application software Fault Tolerant
features such as shadow-server processing, standby-server processing, and callout servers to implement user authentication control,
as well as concurrent servers with dynamic message queue load
balancing for high performance. The high performance transactional messaging is implemented as a full-duplex, conversational
remote procedure call (RPC) using real-time flow control techniques. These features generally require no special user application programming logic.
The System Management interface allows the dynamic creation,
deletion, and monitoring of multiple, independent virtual networks within a network. In addition, the monitoring utility can
be invoked from any system, with suitable privileges, to gather
and report distributed application performance statistics. The
DEC RTR for VMS System Management interface is used to bind
the physical hardware (CPU and communications) to a virtual
network namespace and is completely transparent to the application software. Several levels of physical and logical security can
be controlled via the System Management interface. Additional
security is provided at run-time through the RTR call interface.
DEC RTR for VMS is both forms/window management systems
and database independent. Application server features allow
transaction consistent access to Digital and non-Digital database
products within the same network-wide distributed transaction.
DEC RTR for VMS is primarily intended for production systems
in large distributed environments that require frontend forms
independence and backend server database independence (e.g.,
trading/money dealing systems, telecommunication systems, etc.).
DEC RTR for VMS can also be used in general distributed transaction systems that require reliable messaging and fault tolerant
application control over local and/ or wide area networks. DEC
RTR for VMS provides the enabling technology for applications
requiring fully distributed client-server models rather than a distributed database model.

DEC Sound/Picture Information Network (DECspin)
for ULTRIX
SPD: 37.21
UPI: MD9
DEC Sound/Picture Information Network (DECspin) for ULTRIX
layered software product provides video and audio conferencing,
using standard network protocols, among users of the DECmedia
base software and hardware environment.
The application operates on top of ULTRIX Worksystem Software
and XMedia and requires DECvideo and DECaudio hardware
options in order to function properly.

..;;;.._,,..-,g~--~--~~~~~~

DEC X.25 ~ccess for ULTRIX
~------~~~~~~~~~-....

SPD: 26.E6
UPI: YP3 (VAX)
GTE (RISC)
DEC X.25 Access for ULTRIX is a layered ULTRIX software product which allows an ULTRIX/UWS system to connect to an X.25
network. It provides the following functions : support for TCP/IP
over an X.25 network; an Application Programming Interface;
X.29 server capability; and a PAD facility to allow UL TRIX users
to communicate with remote Data Terminal Equipment (DTEs)
over a PSDN.

DEC X.25 Native Mode for ULTRIX
SPD: 32.35
UPI: YSZ (VAX)
YSY (RISC)
DEC X.25 Native Mode for ULTRIX is an ULTRIX layered product that allows suitably configured ULTRIX systems to connect to
Packet Switching Data Networks (PSDNs) conforming to CCITT
recommendation X.25 (1980, 1984, or 1988) and/ or to International Standard (ISO) 8208. Refer to the System Support Addendum (SSA 32.35.00-x) for the list of public PSDNs on which DEC
X.25 Native Mode is supported.
The product enables process-to-process and terminal communications between a VAX or RISC-based Digital system and remote
Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) in a PSDN supporting the ISO
or X.25 interface protocols, or direct connection to equipment
acting as Data Circuit Terminating Equipment (DCE) using the
ISO protocols, or to any combination of PSDNs and equipment
subject to the limitations noted below.

DEC X.25gateway 100/500

-~-----

SPD: 32.97
UPI: YT8
DEC X.25gateway 100/500 is a software product that runs on
either the DEC MicroServer (DEMSA) or DEC MicroServer-SP
(DEMSB) hardware unit. It provides both Digital and non-Digital
X.25 systems with connections to X.25 Packet Switched Data
Networks (PSDNs) and provides X.25 relay and switching capabilities locally for both Digital and non-Digital X.25 systems. The
combined hardware/software packages are known as the DEC
X.25gateway 500 and DEC X.25gateway 100 respectively.

DEC X.400 Mail System for ULTRIX
SPD: 31.32
UPI: YWl (VAX)
YW2 (RISC)
DEC X.400 Mail System for UL TRIX is a layered OSI application
which provides an X.400 communication path to other X.400
Message Transport Systems. It is a full CCITT 1984 Message
Handling System and allows users to exchange messages with
users of other X.400 mail systems. It consists of a Pl-compliant
Message Transfer Agent (MTA), a P2-compliant User Agent, submission and delivery daemons, and the Reliable Trans port Server
(RTS).
Software and Services

9.27

Communications
DECmessageQ for MS-DOS

DECmessageQ for VMS

SPD: 34.06
UPI: GHR

SP D: 34.07
UPI: GKP (Development)
GHV (Runtime)

~~~~~~~~~~~~~-

DECmessageQ for MS-DOS is the MS-DOS release of the
DECmessageQ message queuing bus software. It implements a
subset of the DECmessageQ application programming interface
that provides easy-to-use, efficient task-to-task communications
among VMS, ULTRIX, OS/2, and MS-DOS processes.
A common call interface allows messages to be delivered to
processes attached to the DECmessageQ queue bus. Applications
can be designed so program modules can be redeployed easily
anywhere within the network, whether in a standalone node, a
Local Area Network (LAN), or a wide area network.
The DECmessageQ for MS-DOS communication implementation
is designed for ease-of-use, expandability, and efficiency. Its features include remote message delivery via DECnet-DOS, message
broadcasting using selective broadcast services (SBS), message
capture facility for use in application testing, set of message
delivery options, language support for C, portable call interface,
and connectivity to DECmessageQ implementations on VMS,
ULTRIX, OS/2, and MS-DOS.

DECmessageQ for ULTRIX
SPD: 34.08
UPI: GHU (VAX)
GHT (RISC)
DECmessageQ for ULTRIX is the UL TRIX release of the
DECmessageQ message queuing bus software. It implements a
subset of the DECmessageQ application programming interface
that provides easy-to-use, efficient task-to-task communications
among VMS , ULTRIX, OS/2, and MS-DOS processes.
A common call interface allows messages to be delivered to
processes attached to the DECmessageQ queue bus. Applications
can be designed so program modules can easily be redeployed
anywhere within the network, whether in a standalone node, a
Local Area Network (LAN), or a wide area network.

DECmessageQ for UNIX
SPD: 39.25
UPI: MK6 (ULTRIX RISC development)
MKC (ULTRIX RISC runtime)
MK5 (ULTRIX VAX development)
MKB (ULTRIX VAX runtime)
MKS (HP-UX development)
MKE (HP-UX runtime)
MK7 (System V /88 development)
MKD (System V/88 runtime)
DECmessageQ for UNIX is the UNIX operating system implementation of a generic software message queuing bus that provides
easy-to-use, efficient task-to-task communications among
processes using DECmessageQ on ULTRIX/RISC, ULTRIX/VAX,
HP-UX, and SYSTEM V/88.
A common call interface allows messages to be delivered via local
interprocess communications for intra-CPU applications, or via
Transmission Control Protocol/ Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) for
inter-CPU applications. Applications can be designed so client
applications can be redeployed easily anywhere within the
DECmessageQ network configuration, whether in a standalone
node, a Local Area Network (LAN), or a wide area network.

9.28

Software and Services

DECmessageQ for VMS is the VMS operating system implementation of a generic software message queuing bus that provides
easy-to-use, efficient task-to-task communications among
processes using DECmessageQ on VMS, ULTRIX, MS-DOS, and
OS/2.
A common call interface allows messages to be delivered via
high-speed global sections for some intra-CPU applications, or via
DECnet-VAX for inter-CPU applications. Applications can be
designed so client applications can be redeployed easily anywhere
within the DECmessageQ network configuration, whether in a
standalone node, a Local Area Network (LAN) , or a wide area
network.

DECndu (Network Device Upgrade) Utility for ULTRIX
SPD: 33.48
UPI: YX2 (FDDI DECconcentrator 500)
YX3 (FDDI DECbridge 500)
XA2 (FD DIController)
DECndu (Network Device Upgrade) Utility for ULTRIX allows
users, at a host in an "Extended LAN," to upgrade the existing
version of software within the DECbridge 500 and
DECconcentrator 500.
The DECbridge 500 and DECconcentrator 500 are FDDI products
which ship from the factory with the software preloaded. The
software resides in electrically alterable memory within the hardware, and is updated via the DECndu Utility.
DECndu upgrades the existing version of software in the
DECbridge 500 and DECconcentrator 500 via the "Extended
LAN." An "Extended LAN" is a collection of LANs (Local Area
Networks) that are interconnected and logically appear as one
large Local Area Network.
General characteristics of the DECndu Utility are: it installs and
resides on a host in the LAN; it loads the new device software
from the host into electrically alterable memory within the hardware device where it will remain; it verifies that the load was
successful.

DECndu (Network Device Upgrade) Utility for
ULTRIX/VAX
SPD: 36.34
UPI: YX2 (FDDI DECconcentrator 500)
YX3 (FDDI DECbridge)
DECndu (Network Device Upgrade) Utility for UL TRIX/VAX
allows users, at a host in an "Extended LAN," to upgrade the
existing version of software microcode within the DECbridge 500
and DECconcentrator 500.
The DECbridge 500 and DECconcentrator 500 are FDDI products
which ship from the factory with the software microcode preloaded. The software microcode resides in electrically alterable
memory within the hardware, and is updated via the DECndu
Utility.
DECndu upgrades the existing version of software microcode in
the DECbridge 500 and DECconcentrator 500 via the "Extended
LAN." An "Extended LAN" is a collection of LANs (Local Area
Networks) that are interconnected and logically appear as one
large Local Area Network.

Communications
DECndu (Network Device Upgrade) Utility for VMS
SPD: 33.47
UPI: YX2 (FDDI DECconcentrator 500)
YX3 (FDDI DECbridge 500)
DECndu (Network Device Upgrade) Utility for VMS allows users,
at a host in an "Extended LAN,' ' to upgrade the existing version
of software within the DECbridge 500 and DECconcentrator 500.
The DECbridge 500 and DECconcentrator 500 are FDDI products
which ship from the factory with the software preloaded. The
software resides in electrically alterable memory within the hardware, and is updated via the DECndu Utility.
DECndu upgrades the existing version of software in the
DECbridge 500, and DECconcentrator 500 via the "Extended
LAN." An "Extended LAN" is a collection of LANs (Local Area
Networks) that are interconnected_and logically appear as one
large Local Area Network.
General characteristics of the DECndu Utility are: it installs and
resides on host in the LAN; it loads the new device software
from the host into electrically alterable memory within the hardware device where it will remain; and it verifies that the load was
successful.

DECnet/OSI for ULTRIX
SPD: 34.97
UPI: 716 (VAX ULTRIX systems)
YT9 (RISC ULTRIX)
DECnet/OSI for ULTRIX, is a Phase V end-node implementation
of the Digital Network Architecture (DNA) for the ULTRIX operating system and ULTRIX Worksystem Software (UWS) for VAX
and RISC systems. DNA Phase V Enables Digital systems to participate in multivendor networks that adhere to the Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) specifications as defined by the International Standards Organization (ISO). It also Supports increased
network sizes through the use of the ISO addressing capability, as
well as providing the ability to manage very small to very large
multivendor networks through the use of a network management
entity model that is modular and extensible.
The DECnet/ OSI for ULTRIX software enables communication
among and access to the resources of different, networked Digital
systems that use the DNA Phase V or Phase IV protocols or non
Digital systems that use the ISO OSI protocols. With proper network planning, DECnet/ OSI for ULTRIX nodes can participate in
multivendor networks with unlimited numbers of nodes. At the
same time, users and user programs can communicate with non
Digital systems that use the Internet (TCP /IP-based) protocols.
Mixing protocols may limit the functions available across the
network.

DECnet/PCSA Client: VAXmate
SPD: 55.10
UPI: ON7
DECnet/PCSA Client: VAXmate allows selected personal computers to be connected to VAX, MicroVAX, or VAXmate computers in a DECnet network, use facilities and services of those
systems, and access information and services contained on other
Digital systems in the DECnet network.
Personal Computing Systems Architecture (PCSA) is an extension
of Digital's systems and networking architecture that merges VMS
and MS-DOS environments. The graphical interface is an adaptation of MS-Windows, and the network software is based on an
adaptation of MS-NET.

DECnet/PCSA Client: VAXmate provides VAXmates with access to
network services, remote boot capability, an operating system, a
user interface, terminal emulation, online user information,
printer support, and all DECnet-DOS facilities.

DECnet/SNA VMS Gateway Matnagement
SPD: 29.70
UPI: VCK
DECnet/SNA VMS Gateway Management provides configuration
and management functions for use with DECnet/SNA Gateway
for Synchronous Transport and DECnet/SNA Gateway for Channel Transport. These two gateway products are designed to allow
users to exchange information and share resources bidirectionally
between suitably configured Digital systems in a DECnet environment and IBM systems in a Systems Network Architecture (SNA)
environment.
DECnet/SNA VMS Gateway Management allows the gateway
administrator to configure the software executing in the Synchronous Transport or the Channel Transport system. This software
lets the administrator set up parameters relating to lines, circuits,
physical units, logical units, and other key variables necessary for
network-to-network communications between the DECnet and
SNA networks. The administrator can also manage and diagnose
problems related to the DECnet/SNA Gateway.
DECnet/SNA VMS Gateway Management permits Digital system
operators to bootstrap or restart a DECnet/SNA Gateway
remotely and provide configuration and initialization facilities for
the DECnet/SNA Gateway.
This software provides event logging and error counters as well
as a range of fault isolation tools. These fault isolation tools
include a trace capability to help debug application programs and
identify system problems, a "snapshot" monitoring utility to display the status of Gateway buffer availability and the number of
SNA sessions in progress , and memory imaging for irrecoverable
errors.

SPD: 26.83
UPI: 716
DECnet-ULTRIX for RISC and VAX is a Phase IV end-node
implementation of Digital Network Architecture (DNA) for the
ULTRIX operating system and ULTRIX Work-system Software
.(UWS) for VAX and RISC systems.
The DECnet-ULTRIX software enables communication among different, networked Digital systems that use the DNA Phase III/IV'"
protocols. DECnet ULTRIX allows ULTRIX users and users' programs to access the resources of Phase IV DECnet networks.
With proper network planning, DECnet-ULTRIX nodes can participate in DECnet networks with up to 1023 nodes per area and
up to 63 areas per network. At the same time, users and user
programs can communicate with non-Digital systems that use the
Internet (TCP/IP based) protocols.
DECnet-ULTRIX offers the following capabilities: task-to-task
communications, network virtual terminal, remote file transfer,
mail, coexistence with the Internet protocols (TCP/IP-based), and
network-wide resource sharing and management as defined by
the DNA protocols. DECnet ULTRIX can communicate with and
is warranted for use only with other Digital Phase III/IV''' DECnet
products.
(Continued)

Software and Services

9.29

Communications
DECnet-ULTRIX for RISC and VAX (Continued)
The network functions available to a DECnet-ULTRIX user
depend, in part, on the configuration of the rest of the network.
Each DECnet product offers its own functions and its own set of
features to the user. Networks consisting entirely of DECnetULTRIX Phase IV nodes have all the functions described in this
Software Product Description (SPD). Networks that combine
DECnet-ULTRIX nodes with other DECnet products may limit the
functions available to the DECnet ULTRIX user, because some
DECnet-ULTRIX features may not be supported by all DECnet
products. Conversely, a user of another DECnet implementation
will not necessarily have access to all DECnet-ULTRIX functions.
The DECnet products and functions available to users on mixed
networks can be determined by comparison of the SPDs for the
appropriate products.

DECnet-VAX
SPD: 25.03
UPI: D04 (End-node)
D05 (Full-function)
D09 (migration option)
DECnet-VAX allows a suitably configured VMS system to participate as a routing or end node in DECnet computer networks.
With proper network planning, DECnet-VAX networks can contain up to 1023 nodes per network area and up to 63 areas per
network. DECnet-VAX interfaces are standard components of
VMS for use on a local standalone system.
DECnet-VAX end node and full function products are licensed
separately for VMS. The DECnet-VAX License Product Authorization Key (PAK), when registered on a VMS system, enables communication between different networked systems that use the
same protocols.
DECnet-VAX is a Phase IV network product and is warranted
only for use with Phase III and Phase IV products supported by
Digital Equipment Corporation.
DECnet-VAX offers task-to-task communications, file management, downline system and task loading, network command terminals, and network resource sharing capabilities using the
Digital Network Architecture (DNA) protocols. DECnet-VAX
communicates with adjacent and non-adjacent Phase III and
Phase IV nodes(adjacent nodes are connected by a single communications line).
VMS programs written in VAX MACRO and native mode highlevel languages can use DECnet-VAX capabilities, but programs
executing in PDP-11 compatibility mode cannot use DECnet-VAX.
The network functions available to a DECnet-VAX user depend,
in part, on the configuration of the rest of the network. Each
DECnet product offers its own subset of Digital Network Architecture (DNA) functions and its own set of features to the user.
Networks consisting entirely of DECnet VAX Phase IV nodes
have all the functions described in this Software Product
Description (SPD). Networks that combine different DECnet
implementations may limit the functions available to the DECnetVAX user on non-DECnet-VAX nodes since other DECnet implementations may not implement certain functions. Similarly, a user
of another DECnet implementation may not be able to access all
DECnet-VAX functions.

DECnei-VAX Extension
SPD: 29.03
UPI: D04
DECnet-VAX Extension software provides additional services for
DECnet-VAX. Use of these services is licensed under the DECnetVAX license.

9.30

Software and Services

The DECnet-VAX Extensions offers the following enhancements
to DECnet-VAX Version: DECnet-VAX use of the VAX Distributed Name Service for node names and addresses. OSI stack with
support for: File Transfer, Access and Management (FTAM);
Association Control Service Element (ACSE); Presentation; Session; Transport; Connection Oriented Network Service (CONS)
and Connectionless Network Service (CLNS) networks over
Ethernet and X.25; Network management using the Network
Control Language; Tools for easy node name management and
for network management support.
The DECnet-VAX DNS extension supports the optional use of the
VAX Distributed Name Service (DNS) namespace to store node
names and addresses for DECnet-VAX. To access node information, a DECnet-VAX node can use the local DECnet node name
database, the DNS namespace, or both.
A node name management tool helps users helps users with
names-pace management tasks such as registration of existing
node names and addresses and the creation, modification, and
deletion of node names and associated information.
Digital's Distributed Time Service (DECdts) provides a precise,
fault-tolerant clock synchronization for systems in a local and
wide area network.
The DECdts clerk and server are included in the DECnet-VAX
Extensions kit. The DNS clerk is included in the VMS kit. Use of
the namespace by DECnet-VAX requires at least one DNS server
in the network.

DEComni/VMS (Digital's OSI Manufacturing Network
Interconnect) '
SPD: 32.32
UPI: YME
DEComni/VMS (Digital's OSI Manufacturing Network Interconnect) is a network communication product and is an implementation of the Manufacturing Message Specification, MMS, ISO
9506-1 and ISO 9506-2. When combined with prerequisite hardware and software, DEComni/VMS interoperates with other systems supporting the Manufacturing Message Specification ISO
IS/9506-1 and ISO IS/ 9506-2 specification.
The conformance of DEComni/VMS software to OSI standards is
specified in Appendix A of Software Product Description 32.32.
DEComni/VMS is an implementation of the Manufacturing Message Specification, MMS, ISO 9506 consisting of a callable interface on VMS which will take the proper arguments and transform
them into the proper MMS protocol.
DEComni/VMS provides as a minimal set, the Client Conformance requirements for the services specified in MAP Implementation Class MAP2. DEComni/VMS additionally provides 28 services
above those specified in MAP Implementation Class MAP2.
The product may interoperate with those device vendors that
have implemented to ISO IS/9506(MMS).
DEComni/VMS provides a high level applications programming
interface (API) with a high degree of functionality built in. The
interface is easy to use and requires very little support code.

DECvqice So~,are
SPD: 29.97
UPI: VFU
DECvoice Software provides a programming interface to the
DECvoice hardware (DTC04 and DTCN5/DTC05 options). The
DECvoice hardware and software has been designed to allow
access to the North American telephone network by voice applications on a VAX platform.

Communications
DECwindows DECnet/SNA 3270 Terminal Emulator

located on any VAX computer in the extended LAN. Multiple
users from different nodes on the extended Ethernet can access
the traffic data.

SPD: 31.57
UPI: VXA

LAN Traffic Monitor contains the LTM Listener software, which
counts and classifies Ethernet traffic using a LAN bridge as a
monitoring device. It also contains the LTM User Interface, which
collects and displays data received from the LTM Listener.

for uLTRIX

DECwindows DECnet/SNA 3270 Terminal Emulator for ULTRIX
(DW ULTRIX 3270 TE) is a layered software product that allows
users of Digital supported workstation environments, on suitably
configured UL TRIX systems within a DECnet network, to interactively access IBM mainframe-based applications.
Translation tables on the respective systems convert ISO Latin
terminal input to a subset of IBM multinational EBCDIC code for
transfer through the DECnet/SNA gateway software. These translation tables can be modified to fit most language needs.

If customized, DW ULTRIX 3270 TE can be invoked by users
from an ULTRIX User Executive (UE) applications menu or an
ULTRIX command line. When DW ULTRIX 3270 TE is invoked
from the UE applications menu, DW ULTRIX 3270 TE options
are specified in a DECwindows dialog box. When DW ULTRIX
3270 TE is invoked from an ULTRIX command line, command
line qualifiers are used to specify the IBM system and system
resources to which the user wishes to connect. While the emulation utility is operating, the display window will be formatted
similar to a 3270 display station with the option of 3270,
3279-S3G, or 3192-G terminal types. When the user has completed work on the IBM system, the 3270 Terminal Emulator is
dismissed and control is returned to the UL TRIX command level
or to the UE utility.
An online HELP facility provides information about key functions. The operator information area as implemented on an actual
3270 display is not supported; however, much of the same information is reported by means of status indicators where the status
line is displayed. In addition, the user has the ability to redefine
certain IBM key functions to different keys of the workstation
keyboard.

Internet Portal
SPD: 31.61
UPI: VZS
Internet Portal is a server running on dedicated hardware configured as a DNA Phase IV /IV+ end system and an IP gateway. It
provides TCP/IP connectivity in an existing DECnet environment.
IP hosts forward IP datagrams destined for a remote host to the
Internet Portal. The portal encapsulates the IP datagram into
DECnet packets and forwards these to another portal located in
another portion of the DECnet wide-area network. The packets
are then passed to a DECnet router for transport over the network backbone.
The DECnet backbone configuration does not affect enveloped IP
datagram transfer to the receiving portal, where the DECnet
envelope is removed and the original IP datagram is sent on to
the receiving TCP/IP host. The DECnet networking protocol is
responsible for the packet routing through the network.
Internet Portal conforms to the DECnet end-node description in
the DNA Phase IV/IV+ routing specification and internet
standards.

LAN Tr&ffic Monitor VMS
SPD: 27.80
UPI: VEH
LAN Traffic Monitor VMS is the software portion of a fully distributed monitor that suppo.rts the capture and presentation of
traffic data from an extended Ethernet. A LAN Bridge 100 or
LAN Bridge 150, downline loaded with monitoring software, is
attached to the Ethernet cable and transmits information to a
VMS layered application software program. The program can be

Users interface with the application software through a menu
structure and can display the status and operational parameters
of the LTM Listener and LTM User Interface. The menu structure allows the VMS DCL process to be spawned and the terminal to be detached from the LTM application.

Remote System Manager
SPD: 29.59
UPI: B 13 (VMS Server)
B14 (VMS Client)
VWW (ULTRIX/VAX Client)
GUX (ULTRIX/RISC Client)
Remote System Manager (RSM) is a VMS and UL TRIX layered
product that permits a system manager to manage a number of
computer systems efficiently.
RSM uses the DECnet network to automate the recurring system
management tasks of Software distribution and installation (both
operating systems (VMS only) and applications); File backup and
restore and system administration (VMS systems only) .

ULTRIX Mail Connection
SPD: 29.05
UPI: VFG
ULTRIX Mail Connection is a layered ULTRIX application that
provides enhanced mail services for UL TRIX systems. It forms the
link between the UL TRIX mail systems and the MAIL bus user
agents and gateways through a connection with VAX Message
Router.
UL TRIX Mail Connection provides effective direct access between
ULTRIX sendmail and VAX Message Router.

VAX 278013 780 Protocol Emulator
SPD: 25.07
UPI: 111
VAX 2780/3780 Protocol Emulator emulates the synchronous line
protocol used by an IBM 2780 or 3780 remote batch terminal.
The emulator provides the VMS user with a mechanism for transferring data between the VMS operating system and another system equipped to handle 2780 or 3780 communications protocols.
The emulator can be invoked interactively or by a command
procedure. The emulator's command set is designed to let several
users share a communications line. With the appropriate modem
options, the emulator is capable of automatically answering
incoming calls.
Sophisticated operations can be performed by a combination of
command procedures, allowing, for example, unattended operation. This would include the capability to detect an incoming
call, establish the connection, transmit and receive files, and
recover from transmission failures, all without the intervention of
an operator.
Several data formats are supported and a particular format is
selected through user command. Users can select various forms
control translation schemes, variable record lengths or card
images, ASCII/EBCDIC translation, and BSC transparency. All file
I/O is performed through the VMS record management facility.
Data can be sent to files representing print and punch streams.
The format of data sent to one stream can differ from the format
of data sent to the other stream.
Software and Services

9.31

Communications
VAX 3271 Protocol Emulator
SPD: 25.21
UPI: 112
VAX 3271 Protocol Emulator (PE) enables VTlXX, VT2XX, ancl
VT3XX terminals and VMS applications programs to interact with
IBM system applications programs and system services that utilize
the Binary Synchronous Communications (BSC) line protocols.

VAX DEC/MAP conforms to OSI and MAP standards. Users are
provided with application interfaces for communicating with
other systems on the network. A network management facility for
control of the local node, VAX DEC/MAP Network Management,
is designed to provide local network management for the host.
Functions consist of management for layers one through seven,
directory services, tracing, logging, and local events.

VAX Distriltuted File Service

.......

~~~~~~~~

The application program interface provides a base for distributed
applications where one component of the application runs on an
IBM host system and the other component runs on a VMS system. This application is used for online access and update of a
mainframe database in response to an event on the VAX computer, or where it is inappropriate to present 3270 type formatted screens to users accustomed to VMS-style screens.
This product includes the 3270 Terminal Emulator (TE) utility
which transmits a screen display from the IBM system and displays it on a Digital terminal screen in a manner similar to the
format on a 3270 display. This utility maps the VTXXX to simulate the 3270 keyboard. The TE facility is also supported for the
VMS user of other Digital products running in VTlXX and
VT2XX emulation mode.
A HELP facility provides information on keys with altered
3270-oriented functions and other functions such as the display
of status information.

VAX Computer Integrated Telephony Server
SPD: 29.91
UPI: VGY
VAX Computer Integrated Telephony server (CIT) is a software
product which provides functional integration between Digital
Equipment Corporation's computing environment and a CITcompatible PBX.

VAX DEC/MAP
SPD: 27.66
UPI: VFZ

_,__~~-

SP D: 28.78
UPI: VEQ
VAX Distributed File Service (DFS) is a DECnet-VAX layered
product that provides VMS users with the ability to use remote
VAX VMS disks as if they were directly attached to the local VAX
system.
DFS provides users and applications with transparent, high
performance file access while using less CPU resources than standard DECnet-VAX file access.
DFS systems can act as "servers" or "clients" or both. Servers
make file resources available to clients. The resources can vary in
scope from a master file directory with all of the subordinate
directories and files on a disk volume to an individual file. The
DFS server gives the resource a unique name and registers it with
the VAX Distributed Name Service (DNS).
The DFS client can then use the resource by means of the DFS
MOUNT command. This command specifies the DNS name by
which the resource was registered, enables communication
between the client and the server, and creates a pseudodevice on
the client system. This pseudodevice makes the remote resource
appear to the local system like a local disk. Users can then perform operations on the pseudodevice, and DFS handles all of the
network access and translation.
VAX Distributed Name Service is a prerequisite product. In
order to use DFS, there must be at least one DNS server in the
network. DNS allows the name of the resource to be independent
of its physical location on the network. DFS systems throughout
the network can continue accessing a resource even if the
resource location is changed.

VAX DEC/ MAP is a network communication product that implements layers of the Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) reference model. When combined with prerequisite hardware, VAX
DEC/ MAP interoperates with other systems that support the Manufacturing Automation Protocol (MAP), version 3.0 specification.

A DFS license is required on each VAX VMS server node that
registers available directories or files and on each client node that
uses the directories or files.

The MAP network architecture specifies the protocols and services for seven layers: physical, datalink, network, transport, session, presentation, and application. This software implements
layers three through seven, the network layer through the application layer. Layers one and two, the physical and datalink layers,
are provided by the requisite hardware.

SPD: 28.79
UPI: VER

The network and the transport layers provide end-to-end transfer
of data between cooperating applications on open systems. The
session layer supports a dialog between presentation entities using
full-duplex functionality, check pointing, and resynchronizing
capabilities. The presentation layer negotiates transfer syntaxes
and performs local syntax to transfer syntax conversion for the
exchanging of data. The application layer provides the user interface to the communication services provided by the MAP network. It consists of File Transfer, Access, and Management
(FTAM) ; Association Control Service Elements (ACSE); and VAX
DEC/ MAP Directory Service (MDS) through the VAX DEC/MAP
Application Programming Interface (MAPI).

9.32

Software and Services

VAX Distributed Name Service

VAX Distributed Name Service (DNS) provides selected DIGITAL
products with a DECnet-wide name-to-attribute mapping service.
DNS presents and maintains a consistent, network-wide set of
names for network resources, called the namespace. These names
are constructed without including any location information in
them, thus permitting users to reference these network resources
independent of their physical location.
A single DNS node can provide a DECnet-wide name service.
DNS can be installed on additional nodes in a network to provide availability and performance benefits. As a general rule, it is
suggested that DNS be placed on two nodes in each local area
network. This should provide adequate performance and redundancy for most networks.
The VAX Distributed Name Service is used by selected DIGITAL
products only, as noted in their SPDs.

Communications

SPD: 29.86
UPI: VFW
VAX FTAM (File Transfer, Access, and Management) is a communications product for copying files between open systems,
deleting files on open systems, renaming files on open systems,
and displaying information about files on open systems.

the WAN driver kit. The applications interface is made via the
product's LAPD (level 2) and a subset of Q.931/Q.932 protocols
with a defined QIO interface.

SPD: 27.34
UPI: 742

VAX FTAM implements several standards including the File
Transfer, Access, and Management service element; the Association Control service element (ACSE) of the Application layer; the
Presentation layer; the Session layer; and the Transport and Network layers. The Transport implementation (VOTS) is shipped as
part of VAX FTAM on separate media and with separate documentation. Use of the VOTS programming interface is not supported under VAX FTAM.

VAX MAILGATE for MCI Mail is a VMS electronic mail handling
facility that communicates with the nationwide MCI Mail System
to extend the reach and delivery options of the ALL-IN-1 based
mail capability. VAX MAILGATE allows ALL-IN-1 users to add
many of the capabilities of MCI Mail to their in-house mail system. Messages can be delivered to any address allowed by MCI
Mail. Likewise, VAX MAILGATE allows ALL-IN-1 users to receive
mail into their ALL-IN-1 mailbox from MCI Mail and Telex subscribers worldwide.

Features include OSI layers implementation, VAX FTAM user
facilities, support for several file types, flexible and transparent
access for local files, RMS style format for file specifications, support for any file naming convention, and management and problem determination tools. Other features include VAX FTAM component software, directory requests, VAX FTAM DCL interface,
VAX FTAM Installation Verification Program, VAX FTAM Control
Program, VAX FTAM tracing utility, VAX FTAM event logging,
and VAX FTAM messages.

ALL-IN-1 users utilize addressing screens that are customized for
use with MCI Mail to specify delivery and handling information
for their messages. Online HELP is provided for these screens.
Messages can be sent to VAX users, MCI Mail subscribers, users
on other systems connected to MCI Mail, facsimile devices, and
Telex users. In addition, printed copies of a message can be sent
to anyone at a postal address using the sender's registered MCI
letterhead and signature.

SPD: 31.23
UPI: VZ9
VAX ISDN communication software product allows suitably configured VMS systems to connect to ISDN networks based on the
corresponding CCITT recommendations via a Basic Rate Access.
Connections are established using the circuit-switched access of
the ISDN networks.
VAX ISDN is a VMS layered product that provides circuit-switched call control functions. This allows data transfers
over one or two B-channels provided by the ISDN network at a
Basic Rate Access, using DECnet-VAX Phase IV, VAX P.S.I., and
Specific protocols.

VAX ISON ACCESS
SPD: 31.24
UPI: VZC
VAX ISDN ACCESS allows suitably configured DECnet-VAX nodes
in a DECnet network to control connections to an ISDN network
remotely at a DECnet node that is physically connected to the
ISDN network running the VAX ISDN software. This type of
node is called an ISDN connector node.
The ISDN connector node is a DECnet-VAX node that is physically connected to a supported ISDN network via a Basic Rate
Access (DEC ISDNcontroller 100/DIV32) and is running both
VAX ISDN software and DECnet-VAX software.

VA,XJSDN Primary Rate Acee

for VMS
SPD: 33.53
VAX ISDN Primary Rate Access D Channel Interface for VMS
provides Telephony applications a primary rate access (PRA)
D-channel communications path to a Northern Telecom, Inc.
SL-100 Automatic Call Distributor (ACD). It provides the ACD
interface via a 64K bit DSVll synchronous interface connected to

The system manager uses a utility called MG MAN to tailor VAX
MAILGATE for small or large mail systems and to control daily
operations. MGMAN allows the system manager to customize
VAX MAILGATE by setting parameters in a configuration database for such things as MCI Mail access information, modem
type, and the line to be used for connecting MCI Mail.
MCI Mail provides a service for the use of MICROCOM modems,
which provides error correcting protocol for reliable communication. MCI Mail routes the messages to their ultimate destination.
Incoming messages are transferred by VAX MAILGATE to the
queue and posted to the VAX Message Router, which forwards
them to the proper user agent and user as specified by the
address.

SPD: 26.33
UPI: 732
730 (VMSmail gateway)
733 (Programmer kit)
VAX Message Router is a store- and forward-message transfer
system that delivers messages within a DECnet Phase IV network.
VAX Message Router supports messages with NBS- (National
Bureau of Standards) constructed fields. Message construction
conforms to the CCITT X.400 standard for message handling services. Thes~ messages consist of text, data, and arbitrary files.
VAX Message Router logs message progress within the network
and informs the sending application if messages are
undeliverable.
Message Router requires application programs, called User
Agents or Gateways, that format and display messages, interact
with VAX Message Router to send and receive messages, convert
received messages from VAX Message Router format into the
required application format, and convert a sending application
format into VAX Message Router format.
VAX Message Router is available in three packages. VAX Message
Router Base provides message transport services required by
Digital-supplied mail agents, directory, and management services.
VMSmail Gateway consists of VAX Message Router Base and the
Gateway to the VMS Personal Mail Utility. VAX Message Router
Programmer's Kit consists of VAX Message Router Base and a
run-time library of high-level interface routines. These routines
may be built into user-written applications. The kit includes documentation to guide users in writing User Agents and Gateways.

Software and Services

9.33

Communications

SPD: 28.94
UPI: VCG
VAX Message Router/P Gateway is a network server, layered
software product that resides on a VMS system. It provides an
interconnection between MAILbus, and PROFS (Professional
Office System) systems in a SNA network. Through VAX Message
Router/P, users of Digital office automation systems can send
and receive messages, documents, and binary files to and from
users of IBM PROFS office systems. VAX Message Router/P
allows notes to be exchanged with users of IBM's CMS systems.
VAX Message Router/P provides both address and content conversion for messages and documents passed between the Digital
and IBM networks. VAX Message Router/P connects to an IBM
host system, thus giving other PROFS nodes access to the Digital
network through that IBM host. No Digital software has to be
installed on the IBM system to accomplish the transfers. With
some restrictions, VAX Message Router IP allows users to communicate through MAILbus to other networks, including public messaging services.
Message RouterIP' s DDS (Distributed Directory Service) function
converts message addresses. Digital users who wish to send and
receive mail to and from IBM users must be registered in DDS
and assigned an alias or virtual address for the PROFS network.
Message Router/P allows Digital and IBM users to be included in
a single message address or distribution list. The software supports delivery confirmation and nondelivery notification messages.
Message Router/P concatenates Digital text messages with
attached documents into a single document for transfer to the
PROFS network. The software does not support messages with
mixed contents. Message Router/P allows only one binary file to
be passed to the IBM environment at a time; any attachments to
these files are lost.
ALL-IN-1 automatically converts DECdx format to WPS-PLUS format. Other Digital user agents and MAILbus Gateways convert
DECdx format to a format appropriate to their function. Since
the capabilities of each vendor's word processing systems are not
identical, and since some control information is not transmitted,
Message Router/P does not convert all attributes and functions.

VAXM
SPD: 29.24
UPI: VDU
VAX Message Router/S Gateway (MRS) is a network server
layered software product that resides on VAX VMS systems providing interconnection between Digital' s Message Router based
electronic message systems and IBM Systems Network Architecture Distribution Services (SNADS). Through MRS, users of
Digital office automation systems such as ALL-IN-1 can send and
receive messages to and from users of IBM office systems.
VAX Message Router/ S Gateway provides address and content
conversion for messages and documents passed between the
Digital and IBM office networks. Office users are not required to
learn any new commands or procedures except the new
addresses representing the users of the other network(s) with
whom they can communicate by means of MRS. MRS connects to
an IBM DISOSS system, which contains the host implementation
of SNADS. Other SNADS nodes have access to the Digital network through that IBM host. No Digital software is required to
be installed on the IBM system to accomplish these transfers.
With some restrictions, MRS allows users of those IBM office
systems to communicate through MAILbus to other networks
including public messaging services.

9.34

Software and Services

A single MRS installation supports messaging services between a
SNADS network of IBM office systems, a MAILbus network of
Digital VMS systems, and any other messaging network connected
to MAILbus. VAX Message Router is included in the distribution
kit for MRS to provide MAILbus connections.

SPD: 29.96
UPI: VAV
VAX Message Router Telex Gateway allows other Digital Message
Router Gateways and user agents to exchange messages with the
Public Telex Network.
The gateway provides a method for exchanging messages between
the Digital mail domain and the Public Telex Network. The gateway uses third-party Telex hardware, the Hasler Telex, to communicate with the Telex network. The gateway interfaces with
the Message Routers Transfer Service and drives the Hasler
Telex, which communicates with the Public Telex Network.
The gateway provides a customizable formatter. Using the
defined format , the gateway forwards incoming Telex messages to
the user's electronic mail account without operator intervention.
VAX Message Router Telex Gateway transfers messages between
the Telex environment and the MAILbus, interfaces to the Message Router's Distributed Directory Service, converts Digital document types to ITA2, supports character replacement with a
string using VMS NCS routines, supports the interface to the
Hasler Telex Unit, and provides a management interface for controlling, configuring, and maintaining the gateway.
Features include addressing, authorization, a formatter, a management function, prioritizing messages, configuring message length,
generating delivery notifications, logging and journaling transaction events and internal state changes, and producing an accounting file.

SPD: 27.50
UPI: VDM
VAX Message Router X.400 Gateway is a layered VMS application that provides a communication path between a Message
Router based network and another X.400 conforming Message
Transport System. Together, Message Router X.400 Gateway and
Message Router form an X.400 Message Transfer Agent.
The X.400 Gateway allows users of mail agents running on Message Router, for example, ALL-IN-1 to communicate with other
X.400 mail systems either in other networks or within the same
network. Some mail agents such as VMSmail (through the
VMSmail Gateway) do not support the mandatory features of

X.400.
Message Router supports messages constructed with fields
defined by the National Bureau of Standards (NBS) Specification
for the Message Format for Computer Based Message Systems.
The structure of the messages supports the format specified in
the CCITT X.400 standard for Message Handling Services. The
Message Router X.400 Gateway converts the messaging protocols
between NBS and X.400.

X.400 Gateway uses the Message Router user directory. This
directory is used to address incoming mail and to authenticate
senders of outgoing mail.

Communications
VAX Notes
SPD: 27.06
UPI: 960 (Server/client)
VES (Client only)
VAX Notes is a computer conferencing product that allows users
to create and access online conferences or meetings. Computer
conferencing lets users conduct meetings with people in different
geographic locations. Participants can join in a discussion from
their desks a time of their choice.
VAX Notes offers the feature of keeping a detailed record of the
proceedings of a meeting, which can be searched by a variety of
criteria, such as name of participant, subject, or keyword. It can
also be used for an electronic bulletin board, collaborative document authoring and review, and internal classes or seminars.

VAX OSI Applicatlons Kemel
SPD: 27.47
UPI: VD9
VAX OSI Applications Kernel (OSAK) offers the combined functions of VAX OSI Transport Service (VOTS) and VAX OSI Applications Kernel (OSAK) VOTS implemented the Open System
Interconnection (OSI) Transport Layer and Internet Protocol.
OSAK implemented the OSI Session Layer.
This product conforms to the Protocol Specifications produced
by the International Organization for Standardization (ISO), and
the International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee (CCITT recommendations.

VAX Packetnet System Interface
~~~~-~---~~~...................

SPD: 25.40
UPI: 071
VAX Packetnet System Interface (VAX P.S.I.) allows suitably configured VAX VMS systems to connect to packet switching data
networks (PSDNs) conforming to CCITT recommendation X.25
(1978, 1980 or 1984) or to International Standards (ISO) 7776
and 8208. This software enables process-to-process and terminal
communications between a VAX computer and remote data terminal equipment (DTE) in a PSDN supporting the ISO or X.25
interface protocols. VAX P.S.I. enables direct connection to
equipment acting as data circuit terminating equipment (DCE) or
DTE using the ISO protocols, or to any combination of PSDNs
and equipment subject to the limitations noted below. The term
DCE in this SPD refers to ISO point-to-point communications
only; VAX P.S.I. does not provide any packet switching exchange
facilities.
VAX P.S.I. allows a standard VAX VMS system configuration to
function as a packet-mode DTE connected to a supported PSDN;
a packet-mode DTE connected to a DCE conforming to International Standards 7776 and 8208; a packet-mode DCE connected
to a DTE conforming to International Standards 777 6 and 8208;
or a combination of the above modes, chosen on a per line basis,
except in the case of the KMSll-B multiline device, where all
lines must use the same mode of operation and connect to the
same PSDN.
VAX P.S.I. can be configured for either multihost or native mode
operation. In native mode VAX P.S.I. supports connection to one
or more PSDNs. In multihost mode VAX P.S.I. lets VAX P.S.I.
Access systems use a PSDN as though directly connected.

VAX P.S.I., a layered product, can be used in process-to-process
(X.25) communication, process-to-terminal (X.29) communication, terminal-to-process (X.29) communication, full DECnet communication, and open system interconnection. For these uses,
VAX P.S.I. provides accounting information on P.S.I. usage, security, and the transfer of electronic mail using the VAX VMS mail
facility.

VAX Packetnet System Interface Access
--~----

SPD: 27.78
UPI: 061
VAX Packetnet System Interface Access (VAX P.S.I. Access)
allows a properly configured DECnet-VAX system in a DECnet
environment to make logical connections to packet switching data
networks (PSDNs) by way of one or more other connector nodes.
With the connector node providing physical connection(s) to a
PSDN(s), VAX P.S.I. Access enables process-to-process and terminal communications between the accessing VAX computer and
remote data terminal equipment.
The connector node can be VAX P.S.I. (SPD 25.40) installed in
multihost mode. The connector node can also be DECnet
Router/X.25 Gateway (SPD 30.41). In this case, several features
and options will not be available.
DECnet logical links are established by the VAX VMS system to
connect the VAX P.S.I. Access host to the connector node. These
links can use any supported DECnet communications path
between the VAX P.S.I. Access node and the connector node,
provided they do not themselves use an X.25 connection. VAX
P.S.I. Access uses these links to transmit X.25 or X.29 messages
between the connector node and the VAX P.S.I. Access host.
However, successful use of an X.29 connection, either for incoming X.29 calls or by means of the host PAD utility supplied with
VAX P.S.I. Access, depends on the DECnet circuit between the
access and connector nodes having a low response time.
A single VAX P.S.I. Access host can logically connect to one or
more connector nodes concurrently and therefore can access all
PSDN(s) accessible from those connector nodes. By installing
VAX P.S.I. Access, one of these combinations of several connector nodes or PSDNs is established as the default gateway to and
from which all traffic would normally flow.

SPD: 28.51
UPI: VFH
VAX Public Access Communications (VAXPAC) is a software
product that provides the MicroVAX user with a mechanism for
connecting the VMS operating system to a remote system using
asynchronous lines. A remote system may be any system that
accepts and displays data using an asynchronous interface compatible with EIA-232C, EIA-422 , or EIA-423. The description that
follows applies to MicroVAX II, MicroVAX 2000 , and VAXstation
2000 systems running either the full Micro VMS operating system
or the VMS operating system only.
All the features of VAX Public Access Communications are available using menus and forms. There is extensive online help to
assist the user of VAX Public Access Communications.

Software and Services

9.35

Communications
VMS/SNA
SPD: 27.01
UPI: 362
VMS/ SNA is a layered software product that allows suitably configured VMS systems to directly participate in an IBM Systems
Network Architecture (SNA) networking environment. After
installing the VMS/ SNA software and one or more DECnet/SNA
Access Routines, users can perform functions such as accessing
IBM application programs or other system resources, act as a
3270 display station, exchange data files and documents with an
IBM Host, and implement distributed application programs that
run between the VMS and IBM systems.
Architecturally, a VAX system running VMS/SN A appears to the
SNA network as a Physical Unit Type 2 node, and is attached to
the SNA network through a synchronous communications device
to an IBM 37 Communications Controller. The VMS/SNA software supports one synchronous communication line at speeds
from 1.2K bps to 64K bps, depending on the communications
device being used and a maximum of 16-64 concurrent SNA
logical unit sessions depending on the VAX CPU it is running on.
Both local and remote connections are supported from VMS/SNA
into the IBM SNA network, using switched or leased lines in
point-to-point or multipoint environments. VMS/ SNA also supports connections over X.25 switched virtual circuits using Qualified Logical Link Control (QLLC). VAX Packetnet System Interface access is required for SNA over X.25 connections.

9.36 Software and Services

VMS/SNA can send Record Formatted Maintenance Statistics
(RECFMS) messages to the IBM system. These messages contain
counters requested by the IBM Netview Hardware Monitor using
Request Maintenance Statistics (REQMS) messages. Not all
RECFMS messages are supported by VMS/ SNA.
Devices supported with VMS/SNA include the DST32 , DSH32,
DPVll , DSVll, DSF32, DMB32 , and DSB32. All VAX P.S.I.
supported devices for VAXBI and Q bus based systems are supported when communicating with X.25 networks using QLLC circuits. This excludes all UNIBUS devices, but does include the
KMVlA.

SPD: 25.A4
UPI: VHR
VMS/ULTRIX Connection is a VMS layered software product that
promotes interoperability and resource sharing between VMS systems and UNIX systems.
The VMS/ ULTRIX Connection supports networking, file access,
remote terminal access, and application development between
VMS systems and UNIX systems. The VMS/ULTRIX Connection
includes three major components: an ARPANET communication
system; a network file system (NFS server); and a DEC remote
procedure call (DECrpc) for VMS.

Data Management and Transaction Processing

SPD: 33.14
UPI: YNR (VAX)
YNQ (RISC)
DEC Ada Preprocessor for UL TRIX/SQL is a full function SQLbased relational database management system designed for the
ULTRIX Operating System. It is intended for general purpose,
multiuser, centralized or distributed applications.
Embedded SQL is an embedding of the database language SQL
into a procedural programming language.
The embedded SQL preprocessor converts the Embedded SQL
statements in the application program into host language source
code statements. These statements call a run-time library that
provides the interface to ULTRIX/ SQL. The host language statements originally in the program are passed through the preprocessor without being altered. Once the program has been
preprocessed, it can be compiled and linked in the usual fashion
for the host language.

DEC C Dteprocessor fot UfifRIX/SQL
SPD: 33.10
UPI: YNV (VAX)

vide applications with the ability to manipulate data structures,
manipulate data, manage groups of statements as transactions,
connect to multiple sessions, and perform other database management functions.

DEC FOR:i:RAN for OSF/1
~~...---~--~~~~~~----

SPD: 37.54
UPI: MD3
DEC FORTRAN for OSF/1 is an implementation of fulJ language
FORTRAN-77 conforming to American National Standard FORTRAN, ANSI X3.9-1978. It includes optional support for programs conforming to the previous standard, ANSI X3.9-1966.
DEC FORTRAN meets the Federal Information Processing Standard Publication (FIPS-69-1) requirements by conforming to the
ANSI Standard and by including a flagger. The flagger optionally
produces diagnostic messages for compile-time elements that do
not conform to the Full-Level ANSI FORTRAN X3 .9-1978 Standard. DEC FORTRAN also conforms to the International Standard
ISO 1539-1980(E) and conforms to MIL-STD 1753.
DEC FORTRAN supports extensions to the ANSI standard including a number of extensions defined by the VAX FORTRAN compiler that runs on VMS and ULTRIX systems.

DEC FORTRAN for ULTRIX RISC Systems

YNU (RISC)
DEC C Preprocessor for UL TRIX/SQL is a full function SQLbased relational database management system designed for the
ULTRIX operating system. It is intended for general purpose,
multiuser, centralized or distributed applications.
Embedded SQL is an embedding of the database language SQL
into a procedural programming language.
The embedded SQL preprocessor converts the Embedded SQL
statements in the application program into host language source
code statements. These statements call a run-time library that
provides the interface to ULTRIX/SQL. The host language statements originally in the program are passed through the preprocessor without being altered. Once the program has been
preprocessed, it can be compiled and linked in the usual fashion
for the host language.

SPD: 33.05
UPI: VV6
DEC FORTRAN for ULTRIX RISC Systems is an implementation
of full language FORTRAN-77 conforming to American National
Standard FORTRAN, ANSI X3.9-1978, although it is not currently
validated. It includes optional support for programs conforming
to the previous standard, ANSI X3.9-1966. DEC FORTRAN meets
the Federal Information Processing Standard Publication
(FIPS-69-1) requirements by conforming to the ANSI Standard
and by including a flagger. The flagger optionally produces diagnostic messages for compile-time elements that do not conform
to the Full-Level ANSI FORTRAN X3.9-1978 Standard. DEC FORTRAN also conforms to the International Standard ISO 1539-1980
(E) and conforms to MIL-STD 1753 .

DEC COBOL Preprocessor for ULTRIX/SQL

DEC FORTRAN supports extensions to the ANSI standard including a number of extensions defined by the VAX FORTRAN compiler that runs on VMS and UL TRIX systems.

SPD: 36.82
UPI: XXl

DEC FORTRAN Preprocessor for ULTRIX/SQL

DEC COBOL Preprocessor for ULTRIX/SQL is a full-function
SQL-based relational database management system designed for
the ULTRIX operating system. It is intended for general purpose,
multi-user, centralized, or distributed applications.
Embedded SQL is an embedding of the database language SQL
into a procedural programming language.
The Embedded SQL preprocessor converts the Embedded SQL
statements in the application program into host language source
code statements. These statements call a run-time library that
provides the interface to UL TRIX/SQL. The host language statements originally in the program are passed through the preprocessor without being altered. Once the program has been
preprocessed, it can be compiled and linked in the usual fashion
for the host language.
Embedded SQL provides the applications with full access to
UL TRIX/SQL databases. All statements that manipulate and
manage data in interactive SQL are also available, generally
unchanged, in the embedded version. Embedded SQL can pro-

SPD: 33.12
UPI: YNT (VAX)
YNS (RISC)
DEC FORTRAN Preprocessor for UL TRIX/SQL is a full function
SQL-based relational database management system designed for
the UL TRIX operating system. It is intended for general purpose,
multiuser, centralized or distributed applications.
DEC FORTRAN, the procedural programming language. contains
an Embedded SQL.
The embedded SQL preprocessor converts the Embedded SQL
statements in the application program into host language source
code statements. These statements call a run-time library that
provides the interface to ULTRIX/SQL. The host language statements originally in the program are passed through the preprocessor without being altered. Once the program has been
preprocessed, it can be compiled and linked in the usual fashion
for the host language.

Software and Services 9.37

J
0

t;l'J

Data Management and Transaction Processing
DEC InfoServer Client for VMS

DEC RdbAccess for VAX RMS on VMS

SPD: 33.91
UPI: GGW
YTC (InfoServer access license)

SPD: 32.88
UPI: YQZ

DEC lnfoServer Client for VMS enables VAX systems running
VMS Operating System to access the lnfoServer 100 Ethernetbased virtual disk server.
The InfoServer 100 is an Ethernet-based, high performance virtual disk server. Physical disk media and sets of logical disk
blocks can be served to the network by the lnfoServer. Host
systems running the appropriate client software can connect to
the virtual disks served by the InfoServer 100, and use them as
though they were locally attached devices.
DEC lnfoServer Client for VMS is used by client systems to
install or upgrade software using the lnfoServer 100-based media,
access on-line documentation via Bookreader with the lnfoServer
100 as its data source, or access any other CDROM-based data
with a disk format supported by VMS.

DEC RdbAccess for VAX RMS on VMS (RdbAccess for VAX
RMS) is a member of the DEC RdbAccess family of database
interoperability products. It permits transparent, read-only access
to VAX RMS files via the VAX implementation of the Structured
Query Language (VAX Rdb/VMS SQL). It also permits SQL
read-only access to data sets on IBM MVS systems via the
DECnet/SNA Data Transfer Facility (DTP) . RdbAccess for VAX
RMS retrieves the data definitions for the information contained
in these files from VAX CDD/Plus. RdbAccess for VAX RMS emulates a relational database, and enables SQL access by combining
the source data
RdbAccess for VAX RMS can be used in conjunction with products such as VAX TEAMDATA, DECdecision, and Rdb/VMS utilities including interactive SQL. It can also be used in conjunction
with VAX Data Distributor and VAX Rdb/VMS SQL/Services as
well as 3GL applications with embedded SQL.

Although the lnfoServt>r 100 supports read-write access, this kit
is restricted to providing read-only support to the InfoServer 100.

DEC RALLY for VMS
SPD: 27.03
UPI: A86 (Development)
VF4 (Runtime)
DEC RALLY for VMS provides a powerful fourth -generation environment for developing interactive database applications. As an
integrated package, RALLY provides tools to define Rdb/VMS
databases, forms , reports, menus, and on line help for the application user.
Application developers can use RALLY's menu interface and
extensive defaulting capabilities to create simple applications
quickly. More sophisticated applications can be created in the
RALLY editing environment.

DEC RdbAccess for ORACLE on VMS
SPD: 32.80
UPI: YQV
DEC RdbAccess for ORACLE on VMS is a family of database
interoperability products which provide direct, transparent access
from VAX Rdb/VMS applications to non-VAX Rdb/VMS databases
and files. DEC RdbAccess servers are specialized VAX Rdb/VMS
run-time systems which can be accessed by most applications and
tools which work with VAX Rdb/VMS. DEC RdbAccess for ORACLE on VMS (referred to as RdbAccess for ORACLE) provides
direct, transparent, read-only access to ORACLE databases residing on VAX/VMS systems from applications developed using
products such as VAX RALLY, VAX DATATRIEVE, VAX
TEAMDATA, and DECdecision.
RdbAccess for ORACLE also supports access from the VAX
Rdb/VMS interactive utilities, SQL and RDO, from precompiled
3GL applications with embedded SQL or RDML, and from
desktop applications using SQL/Services. VAX Data Distributor
can be used to extract data from ORACLE and replicate the
information across the network in VAX Rdb/VMS.
RdbAccess for ORACLE runs under VMS on VAX, MicroVAX,
VAX.server, and VAX.station systems.

9.38

Software and Services

SPD: 31.72
UPI: VFJ
DEC RdbExpert for VMS is a DECwindows and command-linebased expert system database tuning tool that is designed to
reduce the time and effort required to produce tuned VAX
Rdb/VMS physical database storage designs. DEC RdbExpert is
intended to help database designers and administrators during
the initial design and subsequent maintenance phases of database
development. DEC RdbExpert should expand the tuning capabilities of less experienced database administrators while improving
overall DBA tuning productivity.
DEC RdbExpert gathers information of importance encompassing
logical level input related to physical design. DEC RdbExpert
bases its design recommendations on this logical schema information, as well as the system environment, database record volumes,
and transaction workload information. DEC RdbExpert makes
extensive use of import functions which enables users to quickly
provide the required data. For example, DEC RdbExpert can
import DECtrace transaction workload data captured directly
from running VAX Rdb/VMS databases for use in the design
process, thus creating designs based upon the actual workload
executing against existing databases. The DBA then reviews this
input and modifies it where necessary to ensure that it is an
accurate reflection of the actual run time requirements.
DEC RdbExpert generates storage designs in the form of the SQL
Data Definition Language statements for VAX Rdb/VMS. It also
generates executable storage design creation procedures as well as
the VAX Rdb/VMS RMU/LOAD and UNLOAD scripts used to
unload existing data and reload it into the redesigned database.
In addition, DEC RdbExpert generates design reports to educate
the DBA about the design process and the database tuning rules.
The DEC RdbExpert knowledge base is cognizant of the VAX
Rdb/VMS database system internals, tuning rules, and run-time
optimizer heuristics. DEC RdbExpert uses this knowledge to help
the DBA arrive at the performance tuned design.

Data Management and Transaction Processing

SPD: 26.57
UPI: 031
DEC VIX is a distributed information retrieval service that
utilizes a tree structured database through which the user navigates by selecting choices from a menu. The content of the videotex infobase consists of full screen pages of information supplied by the Information Providers.
The information contained in the infobase is prepared with standard Digital editors (WPS-PLUS, TPU, EDT, DECgraph, DECslide,
DECwrite, etc.) to create the pages of information.

SPD: 29.90
UPI: VCH (VMS full development)
VNS (VMS runtime)
GVR (RISC ULTRIX full development)
GVS (RISC ULTRIX runtime)
DECforms offers application developers a set of software development tools and a run-time environment for implementing powerful, yet user friendly, human interfaces. DECforms supports the
full range of VTlOO, VT200, VT300 and VT420 series terminals
and compatible terminal emulators on PCs and workstations.
DECforms also supports the development and display of Hebrew
forms (right to left text path) on Hebrew VTlOO, VT200, and
VT300 series terminals.
DECforms offers a robust combination of the capabilities of previous Digital Equipment Corporation forms systems, such as VAX
PMS and VAX TDMS. In addition, DECforms offers a number of
significant features not previously available in a Digital forms
product.
DECforms integrates with VAX ACMS and DECintact to provide
powerful forms processing capabilities in transaction processing
environments. A private, asynchronous call interface to VAX
ACMS and DECintact allows a single DECforms run-time process
to control multiple terminals simultaneously in a multi-threaded
fashion, resulting in efficient use of memory. Using the VAX
ACMS Remote Access Option or DECintact Remote Access
Option, DECforms can be distributed to remote CPUs, thus off
loading forms processing from the host CPU and distributing it as
close to the end user as possible.
DECforms is Digital's VMS implementation of the proposed
ANSI/ISO standard for a Form Interface Management System
(FIMS). The Form Interface Management System is an industry
software system and is not the property of any company or group
of companies, or of any organization or group of organizations.
DECforms offers a subset of the full functionality described by
the CODASYL FIMS Journal of Development, with extensions tailored for the VMS environment.

SPD: 29.58
UPI: VFl (Development)
VF2 (Runtime)
VF3 (Remote access)
DECintact (Integrated Application Control System) product provides a foundation for building simple and complex transaction
processing applications on one or more VAX systems under the
VMS operating system. The DECintact product runs as a collection of services and several processes under the VMS operating
system. It supports either single threaded (Per-Process) or multithreaded (Server) application program design methodologies.
Multiple versions of the DECintact product may execute at the
same time, sharing physical memory, and be completely
independent.

SPD: 27.85
UPI: VEB (Server)
VEK (Utilities)
lGQ (MVS)
GUY (VM)

DECnet/SNA VMS Data Transfer Facility (DTP) is a layered software product that provides data transfer capabilities between IBM
MVS and IBM VM systems in a Systems Network Architecture
(SNA) environment and Digital DECnet nodes in a DECnet network. DTP supports the following DECnet nodes: VMS systems
running DECnet-VAX, RSX-llM-PLUS systems running
DECnet-llM-PLUS, ULTRIX systems running DECnet-ULTRIX,
MS-DOS systems running PATHWORKS for DOS, and OS/2 systems running PATHWORKS for OS/2. Access between the cooperating Digital and IBM environments is provided by a
DECnet/SNA Gateway or by VMS/SNA software.

SPD: 29.76
UPI: VC9
DECnet/SNA Gateway for Channel Transport is a member of the
DECnet/ SNA Transport product family. This family consists of
hardware and software products that allow users to exchange
information and share resources between suitably configured
Digital systems in a DECnet environment and IBM systems in a
Systems Network Architecture (SNA) environment. Users on one
or more Digital systems can simultaneously perform functions
such as accessing IBM application programs or other system
resources, act as a 3270 display station, perform data transfer
between Digital and IBM file systems, exchange electronic documents and mail messages, submit jobs to IBM batch subsystems
acting as a Remote Job Entry workstation, and implement distributed, task-to-task application programs that run between Digital
and IBM systems.
The DECnet/SNA Transport product set provides a means of
connecting DECnet and SNA networks which can be used by a
wide variety of Digital supplied access routines running under
VMS, MS-DOS, and ULTRIX operating environments. The
DECnet/SNA Gateway-CT is managed and configured using the
DECnet/SNA management software that is part of the
DECnet/SNA Gateway-CT product.

SPD: 25.C6
UPI: SOl
DECnet/ SNA Gateway for Synchronous Transport (DECnet/SNA
Gateway-ST) is a member of the DECnet/SNA Gateway product
family. This family consists of hardware and software products
that allow users to exchange information and share resources
bi-directionally between suitably configured Digital systems in a
DECnet environment and IBM systems in a Systems Network
Architecture (SNA) environment.
Users on one or more Digital systems can simultaneously perform
functions such as accessing IBM application programs or other
system resources, act as a 3270 display station, perform data
transfer between Digital and IBM file systems, exchange electronic documents and mail messages, submit jobs to IBM batch
subsystems acting as a Remote Job Entry work-station, and
implement distributed, task-to-task application programs that run
between Digital and IBM systems.
(Continued)

Software and Services

9.39

Data Management and Transaction Processing
DECnet/SNA Gateway for Synchronous Transport

DECnet/SNA VMS 3270 Data Stream Programming

(Continued)

Interface

The DECnet/SNA product set provides a system connecting
DECnet and SNA networks which can be used by a wide variety
of Digital-supplied access routines running under VMS, MS-DOS,
and ULTRIX operating environments. DECnet/SNA Gateway-ST is
managed and configured using the gateway management software
that is part of DECnet/SNA Gateway-ST.

DECnet/SNA ULTRIX 3270 Data Stream
SPD: 30.64
UPI: XD2 (VAX)
XD9 (RISC)
DECnet/SNA ULTRIX 3270 Data Stream Programming Interface
(ULTRIX 3270 DSPI) is a layered software product designed for
use by programmers using a VAX ULTRIX or RISC UL TRIX system in a DECnet network environment. The product enables
these programmers to create UL TRIX system applications that
communicate with IBM applications that use IBM's LU type 2
(LU2) protocol on an IBM host. Communication between cooperating Digital and IBM applications is facilitated by one of
Digital's DECnet/SNA Gateway products.
Programmers can use the ULTRIX 3270 DSPI to create a wide
range of applications. For instance, in a case where customer
information resides on an IBM system, and product information
resides on a VAX UL TRIX or RISC UL TRIX system, the product
can be used to develop an application that integrates all of this
information.

DECnet/SNA ULTRIX 3270 Tetminal Emulator
SPD: 29.88
UPI: 022
DECnet/SNA ULTRIX 3270 Terminal Emulator is a layered software product that allows users of a VT (or other Digital terminal,
workstation, or personal computer in VT emulation mode) on
suitably configured ULTRIX systems in a DECnet environment to
access IBM mainframe applications interactively. The applications,
originally developed for use with IBM 3270 display stations in a
Systems Network Architecture (SNA) networking environment,
can be accessed through the DECnet/SNA Gateway.
In normal operation, an IBM application transfers a formatted
screen, much like a form or panel, to the 3270 display. The user
then fills in any data the form requires. When complete, the form
is transmitted to the IBM host system as a single unit. This mechanism is emulated on a Digital terminal by buffering the form in
the DECnet host's memory and displaying it on the terminal.
When the form is . complete, it is sent to the IBM system through
the DECnet/SNA Gateway.
Translation tables on the ULTRIX system convert ASCII terminal
input to a subset of IBM multinational EBCDIC code for transfer
through the DECnet/SNA Gateway. These tables can be modified
to fit nonstandard character sets.
Users invoke the ULTRIX 3270 terminal emulator from the
UL TRIX shell. A predefined set of commands used to invoke the
emulator includes qualifiers specifying the IBM system and system
resources with which the user wishes to connect. While the emulator is operating, the terminal screen is formatted like the IBM
3270 display. At initial installation, keyboard mapping adheres to
a set of defaults. The user can, at any time, re-map the keyboard
to suit a particular application environment. The user can then
store the customized keyboard mapping information for later use.
Online HELP provides information about the current keyboard
layout and functions.

9.40

Software and Services

SPD: 26.87
UPI: 363
DECnet/SNA VMS 3270 Data Stream Programming Interface lets
user-written applications running on suitably configured VMS systems within a DECnet network or VMS/SNA environment
exchange messages with cooperating applications in an IBM host.
Access between applications is through DECnet/SNA Gateway or
VMS/SNA software.
This product is a set of subroutines designed to provide an interface for the application programmer who has a specific need to
interface to an IBM application subsystem. These subroutines perform functions such as establishing sessions, sending data, receiving data, and disconnecting sessions. The interface can also be
used to interpret the 3270 data stream and build a screen image.
DECnet/SNA VMS 3270 Data Stream Programming Interface
allows two modes of connection, the Data Stream Mode and the
Field Mode.

DECnet/SNA VMS 3270 Terminal Emulator
SPD: 26.84
UPI: 454
DECnet/SNA VMS 3270 Terminal Emulator is a layered product
that lets users of VTxxx terminals, other Digital terminals, or PCs
in VTlOO, VT200, or VT300 emulation mode interactively access
IBM host-based applications. These applications were originally
developed for IBM 3270 display stations in a Systems Network
Architecture (SNA) networking environment. Access to the IBM
networking host-based applications systems from VMS systems is
through the DECnet/SNA Gateway or through VMS/SNA.
Translation tables on the respective systems convert ASCII terminal input to a subset of IBM multinational EBCDIC code for
transfer through either the DECnet/SNA Gateway or VMS/SNA
software. These translation tables can be modified to fit nonstandard character sets.
Users invoke the 3270 utility using the local VMS system's command language. While the emulation utility is operating, the terminal screen will be formatted in a fashion similar to an IBM
3270 display. When the user has finished work on the IBM system, the 3270 emulator is dismissed, and the terminal is
"restored" as a VMS command terminal.

An online HELP facility provides information on keys with
altered 3270-oriented functions. DECnet/SNA VMS 3270 Terminal
Emulator does not support the status line as implemented on an
actual 3270 display; however, much of the same information is
reported on a special status line that can be overlaid on the 24th
line of the VT200. VMS system managers have the ability to
remap certain IBM key functions onto different locations on the
Digital keyboard.

DECnet/SNA VMS APPC/LU6.2 Programming Interface
SPD: 26.88
UPI: 022
DECnet/SNA VMS APPC/LU6.2 Programming Interface (APPC) is
a layered software product that allows user-written applications
running on suitably configured VMS systems either within a
DECnet network or running VMS/SNA software to exchange
messages with cooperating applications in an IBM host. The
APPC software exists in the VMS system as a shareable image.
Access between the cooperating Digital and IBM applications is
via the DECnet/SNA Gateway or VMS/SNA software.

Data Management and Transaction Processing

SPD: 26.86
UPI: 455
DECnet/SNA VMS Application Programming Interface is a
layered software product that lets user-written applications, running on suitably configured VMS or Micro VMS systems within a
DECnet network or on suitably configured Micro VMS systems
within a VMS/SNA environment, exchange information with
cooperating IBM host applications. Access between the applications is through DECnet/SNA Gateway or VMS/SNA software.
This application programming interface consists of a set of subroutines that provides an interface for VMS application programmers who have a specific need to interface to an IBM application
subsystem. Functionally, the interface is similar to the DECnet
task-to-task capability in that it is general and lets most features
of the SNA session layer be accessed by the cooperating
applications.
This facility is useful for applications that require facilities other ·
than DECnet/SNA VMS Remote Job Entry and DECnet/SNA VMS
3270 Terminal Emulation.

SPD: 26.72
UPI: 042
DECnet/SNA VMS DISOSS Document Exchange Facility (DDXF)
is a VMS-layered software product that allows its users the bidirectional ability to participate in an IBM office systems network.
The IBM office network is the vehicle for document library and
distribution services in an IBM Systems Network Architecture
(SNA) networking environment. Access from the VMS system to
the IBM/SNA network is through a DECnet/SNA Gateway or
VMS/SNA software.
DDXF users can file a document created on the VMS system with
associated profile information in a DISOSS/370 host document
library; file profile information for an external (nonsystem) document in the DISOSS/370 host document library; search a
DISOSS/370 host document library for documents previously filed
by themselves or by other DISOSS/370 users, including users of
IBM office systems; retrieve documents and associated profile
information to the VMS or Micro VMS system from the DISOSS/370 host document library; and delete ownership of documents filed in the DISOSS/370 host document library.
DDXF users can also add search terms and modify access codes
for documents filed in the DISOSS/370 host document library;
print a document, filed in the DISOSS/370 host document library,
on a DISOSS/370 host-controlled printer; send documents and
messages to either individuals or groups that are DISOSS/370
users using the DECnet/SNA Gateway and the DISOSS/370 host;
receive documents and messages distributed by other DISOSS/370
users through the DISOSS/370 host system; and display status
information regarding distribution requests made by DDXF to the
DISOSS/370 host system.

The software allows VMS systems to communicate with IBM HCF
(Host Command Facility) products which access, monitor, and
control remote IBM system computers. The software provides
IBM users with line mode or glass TTY access to the VMS system.
The software is not a general-purpose, full-screen access mechanism to the VMS system.
DECnet/SNA VMS Distributed Host Command Facility features
access to VMS applications specifically designed to run with 327x
terminals, full-screen mode sessions from NetView, 8-bit code
support, and error messages.
The software allows VMS system managers to modify the
EBCDIC-to-DMCS translation tables and AID key mappings. It
allows the DECnet/SNA gateway manager to create the Distributed Host Command Facility configuration and modify the initial
connect screen.

SPD: 26.70
UPI: 044
DECnet/SNA VMS Printer Emulator allows suitably configured
VMS systems in a DECnet network or running VMS/ SNA software
to receive printable data from IBM host-based applications. These
applications were originally developed to produce output for an
IBM 3287 printer in system mode that is connected to an IBM
3274 cluster controller in a Systems Network Architecture (SNA)
networking environment. Access from the IBM system to VAX
VMS systems is through a DECnet/ SNA gateway or VMS/ SNA
software.
This software allows VMS users to direct the received output to
be printed through the VMS print symbiont or spooled to a disk
file. This software is configured and controlled through a Digital
Command Language style interface and can accept data in SNA
Character String (SCS) format (LU Type 1) and 3270 Data Stream
format (LU Type 3).

SPD: 26.85
UPI: 453
DECnet/ SNA VMS Remote Job Entry (RJE) lets suitably configured VMS systems within a DECnet network function as
SNAIRJE workstations that can transmit batch jobs to an IBM
host and receive job output. With the required privilege, VMS
users can issue restricted commands to manage the workstation.
All users have the option of specifying servers. Access to the IBM
SNA host environment is through DECnet/ SNA Gateway or
VMS/SNA software.
Each workstation includes a console interface that an operator
can use to communicate with the job entry system in the IBM
host. RJE can support record sizes of up to 245 characters and
supports data compression on reader streams and on printer and
punch streams.

DECnet/SN
SPD: 26.71
UPI: 043
DECnet/SNA VMS Distributed Host Command Facility is a VMS
layered product used in conjunction with DECnet/SNA Gateway
products. It allows IBM host-controlled 327x display stations in a
SNA environment to access suitably configured VMS systems in a
DECnet network.

Software and Services

9.41

Data Management and Transaction Processing

SPD: 34.12
UPI: GGC
DECquery for Macintosh is an interactive database query tool for
Apple Macintosh computer users. It provides a graphical interface that allows users to formulate queries and send them to a
relational database to retrieve specific data.
DECquery for Macintosh gives users direct online access to
remote server databases (such as Rdb, DB2, VSAM, ORACLE, and
so on). Users can access relational data from any Digiital Database Architecture compliant database and extract needed data for
use in various desktop applications.

SPD: 36.78
UPI: MD2
DECquery for ULTRIX is an interactive database query tool for
RISC DECstation computer users. It provides an OSF/Motifcompliant graphical interface that enables end-users to formulate
queries and send them to a relational database to retrieve specific
data.
DECquery for ULTRIX provides end-users with direct online
access to local and remote server databases (such as
ULTRIX/ SQL, Rdb/VMS , IBM DB2, Oracle, and so on). Users can
access any Digital Database Architecture-compliant data source
and extract needed data for use in other workstation
applications.

them to a DSM node (the server) through the local area network.
The serving system, which can either be a VAX DSM or DSM-11
system, replies with the requested data. When the client receives
the response, DDP-DOS interprets the incoming message and
delivers the data to the DOS program that made the request.

SPD: 33.76
UPI: GFF
DSM for ULTRIX (Digital Standard MUMPS) is an implementation
of the ANSI Standard Specification for MUMPS (Xll.1-1990) that
is layered on the ULTRIX operating system. It is a high level
interpretive programming language and a multiuser data management system in which many users can share a common database.
DSM for ULTRIX software supports a superset of the ANSI
MUMPS specification, fully uses the capabilities of the ULTRIX
operating system, and is for use on Digital' s RISC DECsystems
and DECstations.
The DSM for ULTRIX utility set includes the DSM Application
Software Library (DASL) software. The DASL software is an
application creation tool which combines a Data Dictionary,
Screen (form) Compiler, Report Compiler, and an end user SQL
compliant Query Driver. DASL software uses code generation
techniques to transform DASL commands and SQL statements
into efficient MUMPS code. DSM for ULTRIX also includes an
interface to DECwindows, which allows the application programmer to create sophisticated graphical user interfaces.
The DSM for ULTRIX language couples the flexible processing of
variable length string data with a high-performance database system, making interactive database application systems easier to
implement and maintain.

SPD: 36.77
UPI: MDl
DECquery for VMS is an interactive database query tool for
VAXstation computer users. It provides an OSF/Motif-compliant
graphical interface that enables end-users to formulate queries
and send them to a relational database to retrieve specific data.
DECquery for VMS provides end-users with direct online access
to local and remote server databases (such as Rdb/VMS ,
ULTRIX/ SQL, IBM DB2, Oracle, etc. Users can access any Digital
Database Architecture compliant data source and extract needed
data for use in other workstation applications.

DSM DDP-DOS
SPD: 50.19
UPI: YG7
DSM DDP-DOS is a software product which allows selected personal computers to access DSM databases on VAX DSM and
DSM-11 systems within a local area network.
DDP (Distributed Data Processing) is a communications protocol
used by all DSM products to access VAX DSM and DSM-11
databases across a local area network. DSM products share
MUMPS databases by exchanging DDP messages in an Ethernetbased local area network.
The DSM DDP-DOS program services MUMPS database requests
on behalf of other DOS programs. DDP-DOS (the client, running
on the personal computer) formats the requests and transmits

9.42

Software and Services

SPD: 26.39
UPI: 518
EDCS II is an integration tool that provides tracking, access control, change notification and archiving of data across a network
regardless of the application that was used to generate the data.
EDCS II manages important information about the documents it
is controlling. In addition, EDCS II manages nonelectronic data
such as design drawings stored on microfilm or hardcopy. It
provides revision tracking of work in process, work in review and
released documents. EDCS II provides an automatic notification
capability that maintains lists of persons affected by changes and
informs them of the current status.
EDCS II is a management tool that enables users to efficiently
share data. It frees users from concerns over the existence of
multiple originals, latest revisions, and change notification issues.
EDCS II uses a Client/Server Architecture where the client provides the user interface and connects to the server which performs all data management tasks.
EDCS II supports several interfaces for integration. For the
end-user, EDCS II comes with both a terminal and DECwindows
interface providing a common menu system for both character
cell terminals and workstations. For system integrators, EDCS II
has a complete callable interface providing a mechanism to integrate EDCS II into any application suite.

Data Management and Transaction Processing

SPD: 25.17
UPI: 107
FORTRAN IVIVAX to RSX, PDP-11 Cross Compiler is an
extended FORTRAN implementation based on the former American National Standards Institute (ANSI) FORTRAN, X3.9-1966.
The compiler operates under the VAX-11 RSX-layered product on
VMS systems. Programs compiled and tasks built can be transported to remote RSX-llM, RSX-llM PLUS, or RSX-llS systems
or executed on the VMS system under VAX-11 RSX.
The FORTRAN IV language extensions to the 1966 ANSI standard
include general expressions allowed in all meaningful contexts;
mixed-mode arithmetic; BYTE data type for character manipulation; ENCODE, DECODE, and PROGRAM statements; PRINT,
TYPE, and ACCEPT input/output statements; direct access,
unformatted, input/output DEFINE FILE statement; comments
allowed at the end of each source line; OPEN and CLOSE file
access control statements; and list-directed input/ output.
Additionally, virtual arrays are supported on target systems with
memory management directives. Virtual arrays are memoryresident and require enough main memory to contain all elements
of all arrays.

SPD: 25.14
UPI: 105
PDP-11 DATATRIEVE/VAX is an interactive query, report, and
data maintenance system. It utilizes RMS to access data contained
in disk files of sequential, indexed, or relative organization.
DATATRIEVE/VAX provides facilities for selective data retrieval,
sorting, formatting, updating, and report generation, without the
need for programming. DATATRIEVE/VAX enables users to
define domains that cross RMS file definitions and subset record
definitions.
DATATRIEVE/VAX stores record and domain definitions in
shared data dictionaries. Data dictionaries also store frequently
used command sequences for recall and later processing. Commands let users list data dictionary contents, delete entries, and
control access to individual entries. A dictionary compression
utility compresses the data dictionary index file.
DATATRIEVE/VAX provides an ADT (Application Design Tool)
that assists novice users in creating domain and record definitions. ADT uses an interactive dialogue technique to guide users
through the data definition process. It creates an indirect command file that updates the DATATRIEVE/VAX data dictionary.
A report writer provides commands to control report name, date,
and page numbering; page width and length; detail line; multiple
control break with automatic totaling; and multiple report sections. DATATRIEVE/VAX report commands intermix with other
DATATRIEVE/VAX commands.
DATATRIEVE/VAX uses English-like commands for retrieving,
modifying, and displaying data. Prompting is automatic for command and data entry. Major commands include HELP, READY,
FIND, SORT, PRINT, SELECT, MODIFY, STORE, ERASE, FOR,
EDIT, DROP, DECLARE, DEFINE, and REDEFINE.
In addition to simple data manipulation commands, more complex commands include REPEAT, BEGIN-END, and IF-THENELSE. These can be used to create single compound commands
that can be stored in the data dictionary as procedures for invocation by less experienced users.

DATATRIEVE/VAX arithmetic operators include addition, subtraction, multiplication, division, and negation. Statistical operators include total, average, maximum, minimum, and count. Data
types include those used in FORTRAN, COBOL, DIBOL, and
BASIC-PLUS-2.
DATATRIEVE/VAX provides data encoding, decoding, and input
validation through tables stored in the data dictionary. Users can
also check data validity by storing validation criteria in the record
definition.

SPD: 26.16
UPI: 138
PDP-11 FORTRAN-77/VAX to RSX is a compatibility mode compiler. Source programs can be compiled under VAX-11 RSX and
the object modules then transported to an RSX system for task
building and execution.
The package is an extended implementation of the ANSI subset
FORTRAN-77 standard (X3.9-1978). It contains all the features of
the ANSI FORTRAN-77 subset, many of the full set language features, and extensions that are not included in the ANSI FORTRAN-77 standard. Switch-selectable support is provided for programs based on the previous ANSI FORTRAN standard (X3. 9
1966).
PDP-11 FORTRAN-77/VAX to RSX meets the Federal Information
Processing Standard Publication (FIPS PUB-69) requirement for
ANSI compliance and for a Bagger. The Bagger optionally produces diagnostic messages for syntax and/or source form elements that do not conform to the full-level ANSI FORTRAN
X3.9-1978 standard.
Programs can be optionally executed under control of PDP-11
FORTRAN-77 Symbolic Debugger/VAX to RSX, which helps
locate programming errors in successfully compiled programs that
behave abnormally when executed.

SPD: 34.27
UPI: GZM (VAX)
GMP (RISC)
ULTRIX Disk Shadowing software provides high data availabiity
by protecting against loss of data from media deterioration, communication path failure, or controller or device failure. UL TRIX
Disk Shadowing software provides high data availability by maintaining multiple copies of the same data on two or up to a
maximum of three disks. The software consists of a device driver
and a set of utilities. The device driver part of the software
provides logical disk abstraction to higher level software. The
utilities facilitate management of the shadow devices.
Once a shadow device is created, a file system may be structured
and mounted on it. The disk shadow driver allows the root file
system as well as other file systems to be structured on a shadow
device. Alternatively, the shadow device can be accessed directly
through its raw interface,
The utilities allow easy management of shadow devices. For
example, a disk may be added as a member of a shadow device
while the shadow device is being actively accessed by other appiications. Shadow devices may be created and destroyed without
requiring a system reboot. Following an orderly shut-down or a
system crash, the shadow devices can be returned to a consistent
state.

Software and Services

9.43

Data Management and Transaction Processing

SPD: 34.89
UPI: YNP
UL TRIX/SQL Remote Access to Rdb/VMS allows users to access
Rdb/VMS data remotely from UL TRIX/SQL.
ULTRJX/SQL is a full-function SQL-based relational database
management system designed for the ULTRJX operating system. It
is intended for general purpose, multi-user, centralized, or distributed applications.
ULTRJX/SQL Remote Access connects ULTRJX/SQL to the
Rdb/VMS relational database management system, which manages
and accesses its own files. The main function of UL TRIX/SQL
Remote Access is to translate OpenSQL queries into a form
understood by the Rdb database.

metadata are controlled by the dictionary. This can provide better control of the application development and dictionary administration processes.

SPD: 27.76
UPI: VDR
VAX Data Distributor manages the automated distribution of
relational data among multiple processors in a distributed database environment. From a source (master) relational database,
VAX Data Distributor can create one or more copies or subsets
(target Rdb/VMS databases) on the same processor or remote
processors. In addition, VAX Data Distributor can collect data
from several source databases and create an Rdb/VMS target
database that contains a rollup of that data.
VAX Data Distributor works with database management products
which conform to the Digital Standard Relational Interface
(DSRl) products such as VAX Rdb/VMS and VIDA for DB2. DSRl
is an architecture for relational database management systems as
well as a standard calling mechanism that can be used for database creation, population, and query.

SPD: 25.50
UPI: 079 (Development)
076 (Runtime)
Y30 (Remote access)
VAX ACMS (Application Control and Management System) is a
transaction processing (TP) monitor that works with other Digital
commercial applications to provide complete customizable development and run-time environments for transaction processing
applications. These applications include order tracking, accounting and billing, shop floor control, insurance claims, and funds
transfer.
VAX ACMS helps users design, develop, implement, manage, and
maintain complex TP applications. It also provides a special purpose applications definition language for structured definition of
TP application functionality and run-time characteristics.
VAX ACMS provides integration with many Digital layered products, including DECforms, VAX TDMS, VAX CDD/Plus, VAX
DBMS, and more. It is also capable of operating with an open
front end and back end, allowing utilization of nonstandard terminal or I/O devices and any manner of data management or
·communications link.
System features include: a run-time system; seven utilities for
application management and control; a forms manager for forms
processing; database management; a data dictionary; queuing;
security; a VAXcluster environment and availability; optional
Run-Time or Remote Access Option; and documentation.

SPD: 25.53
UPI: 897
VAX CDD/Plus is an active, distributed data dictionary system
that provides a single logical repository for data definitions
(metadata) and descriptions shared by VAX languages, tools and
information management products.
VAX CDD/Plus provides a way to define and track metadata that
is to be used by more than one product and provides a mechanism for sharing, relating and reporting on the dictionary
contents.
The metadata in CDD/Plus keeps track of location, type, format,
size, change history, and usage of the actual data (which is stored
and maintained outside the data dictionary). All changes to the

9.44

Software and Services

VAX Data Distributor provides the user with three methods of
distributing data from source databases; extraction, extraction
rollup, and replication. All methods allow a defined subset of a
source database to be created at a user specified location. Data
can be transferred to the target VAX Rdb/VMS database on
demand, or on a scheduled basis. Each target database depends
upon its associated transfer definition. Multiple target databases
can be created from a single source database. Each target contains a different subset (or the same subset, if multiple similar
target databases are required) and is created and maintained with
a different definition and schedule. Users choosing to maintain
data definitions from the target database in the target system's
Common Data Dictionary/ Plus (CDD/Plus) may do so by using
the INTEGRATE command of the VAX Rdb/VMS SQL or RDO
utility.

SPD: 25.44
UPI: 898
VAX DATATRJEVE is a query and report system for the VMS
operating system. It provides a uniform access method for data
stored by RMS, VAX Rdb/VMS, and VAX DBMS files on VMS and
data residing in certain IBM mainframe databases accessed
through VIDA for DB2. Using VAX DATATRJEVE, a novice or
experienced user can retrieve or modify data without considering
the underlying storage method or physical location.
VAX DATATRlEVE presents information in several different formats. Information can be displayed using simple defaults or can
be reported on through a more flexible report writer. Information can be displayed on a terminal or workstation, printed on a
hard-copy device, or written to a file. Information can also be
displayed with user-defined VAX FMS and VAX TDMS forms or
presented graphically. Hard copy of the graphic display can be
printed on a printer attached to the terminal. VAX DATATRJEVE
also provides an efficient way to access information stored on
other VAX or PDP-11 systems linked by DECnet.
VAX DATATRJEVE can be used interactively to retrieve, modify,
store, or delete data using a simple set of commands. Frequently
used combinations of commands can be stored as named procedures and invoked by name. Programs written in other VAX
languages can call VAX DATATRJEVE, allowing them to be independent of underlying data storage methods and physical
location.
(Continued)

Data Management and Transaction Processing
VAX DATATRIEVE (Continued)
A DECwindows interface to VAX DATATRIEVE is provided. This
allows the user to perform a subset of the DATATRIEVE functions using menu bars, scroll bars, pop-up menus, pull-down
menus, and buttons. Data Dictionary
VAX DATATRIEVE is dictionary driven. Data descriptions are
stored in and retrieved from VAX CDD/Plus. VAX DATATRIEVE
includes commands to store, examine, modify, and delete definitions in the dictionary and can use definitions stored by other
VAX layered products, such as the VAX DBMS Data Definition
Language (DDL) or VAX Rdb/VMS metadata definitions.
VAX DATATRIEVE includes full support for DMU format dictionaries. It includes support for record and domain definitions in
CDO format dictionaries, including the ability to access shareable
fields. Relationship tracking is also supported for these entities.

VAX DBMS (Database Management System)
SPD: 25.48
UPI: 899 (Development)
915 (Runtime)
VAX DBMS (Database Management System) is a multiuser, general-purpose, CODASYL compliant database management system
for accessing and administering databases ranging in complexity
from simple hierarchies to complex networks with multilevel relationships. It supports full concurrent access in a multiuser environment without compromising the integrity and security of the
user's databases.
Features include full concurrent access capabilities (storage,
retrieval, update, and deletion) in a multiuser environment;
record locking and journaling; automatic transaction and verb
rollback; multiple database support; Two Phase Commit capability automatically commits or rolls back updates across multiple
databases in one transaction; full VAx.cluster support, including
automatic recovery upon node failure; integration with VAX
Common Data Dictionary/Plus (VAX CDD/Plus) facility; schema,
subschema, storage schema, and security schema data definition
languages (DDLs); FORTRAN Data Manipulation Language
(FDML); callable interpretive interface for VAX languages that
adhere to the VAX calling standard; automatic subschema definition extraction from the CDD for BASIC, BLISS, C, COBOL,
DIBOL, MACRO, Pascal, PL/I, and VAX Ada when using the high
level call interface or DML preprocessor.
Other features include VAx.cluster support, a utility command
language, an interactive database query utility, online and incremental database verification, full and incremental database
backup and restore, initial load utility, an unload utility, BATCH
RETRIEVAL ready mode, space area management, Boolean record
selection, data compression, direct record access, automatic
expansion of large records, simple restructuring, sorted sets, and
DECnet database access.
VAX DBMS components include a DDL compiler, a database control system, a FORTRAN DML preprocessor, a generic DML
preprocessor, an interactive DML utility, a database monitor, and
a database operator utility. Also included are DBMSERVER,
HELP, security, a four-part data definition language, data manipulation facilities, and a run-time environment.

SPD: 25.49
UPI: 018
VAX DIBOL is a high-level procedural language designed specifically for interactive business data processing. It runs under the
VMS Operating System, taking full advantage of the system
facilities.

VAX DIBOL is a superset of the DIBOL-83 definition. VAX
DIBOL is highly compatible with DIBOL implementation on other
operating systems including CTS-300, RSTS/E, Micro/RSTS,
RSX-11M-PLUS, Micro/RSX.
VAX DIBOL includes support for several tools and utilities on
VMS including the VAX Language-Sensitive Editor, VAX Debugger, and the VAX Performance Coverage Analyzer.
VAX DIBOL also includes support for the current American
National Standard for DIBOL, as well as the 1988 ANSI DIBOL
Standard, X3.165-1988.
VAX DIBOL provides efficient terminal handling and efficient
access to the VAX Record Management Services (RMS). RMS provides access to sequential, relative and indexed file organizations.
The .INCLUDE directive allows access to common record definitions stored in the VAX Common Data Dictionary (CDD). Other
facilities such as VAX DATATRIEVE, VAX DBMS, VAX FMS and
VMS Run-Time Library routines are available as external subroutine calls.
VAX DIBOL supports a set of language statements commonly
referred to as structured constructs. These statements are
designed to complement and facilitate desirable programming
practices.
The DIBOL compiler reads a source program and produces a
shareable object module. The compiler is capable of producing a
source listing with embedded diagnostics and a cross reference
listing. Object modules produced by the compiler conform to the
VAX Procedure Calling Standard and may be linked with native
mode object modules produced by other VAX language
processors.
The VAX DIBOL product includes a compiler, a run-time library,
external subroutine libraries, a message manager for communicating between programs , a program to monitor the activities of the
message manager, and programs that provide access to the VAX
SORT using command files that are compatible with other DIBOL
products.
VAX DIBOL also includes a menu facility, support for long file
names (up to 39 characters in the "name" portion of the filespec)
and an ISMCRE subroutine which allows creation of RMS indexed
files under DIBOL program control.
The VAX DIBOL compiler generates debug records for use with
the VAX Symbolic Debugger, including support for source line
debugging.

vAX ' DOCUMENT '
SPD: 27.55
UPI: VEE
VAX DOCUMENT is a style-based, batch-oriented, document
composition system. It is designed to aid VMS users in the production of single manuals, large documentation sets, or specifications, and it supports hardcopy and online output. VAX DOCUMENT runs on a wide range of Digital configurations, including
VAx.clusters. It can be used from any of Digital' s standard terminals, and it can create files for hardcopy output to any Digital
line printer or laser printer, or Bookreader files for online viewing on a DECwindows workstation.
VAX DOCUMENT provides a complete, high-end documentation
product that automates the production of large, format-intensive,
technical documentation from the first entry of written material
to the final output of formatted hardcopy or online documentation. VAX DOCUMENT is designed for use by members of the
team of people who contribute to a technical document during
its life cycle; engineers, writers, editors, or final production specialists. Facilities are provided to create, maintain, revise, format,
and print complex technical documents efficiently. This provides
greater control over the entire documentation process while
reducing time-to-market and costs.

Software and Services

9.45

Data Management and Transaction Processing

SPD: 25.08
UPI: 130
YP2 (Runtime)
VAX DSM (Digital Standard MUMPS) is an implementation of the
ANSI Standard Specification for MUMPS (Xll.1- 1990) that is
layered on the VMS operating system. It is a high level interpretive programming language and a multiuser data management system in which many users can share a common database. VAX
J?SM software supports a superset of the ANSI MUMPS specification and fully uses the capabilities of the VMS operating system.
The VAX DSM utility set includes the DSM Application Software
Libr~ry (DASL) software. The DASL software is an application
creat10n tool which combines a Data Dictionary, Screen (form)
Compiler, Report Compiler, and an end user SQL compliant
Query Driver. DASL software uses code generation techniques to
transform DASL commands and SQL statements into efficient
MUMPS code.
The VAX DSM language couples the flexible processing of variable length string data with a high-performance database system,
making interactive database application systems easier to implement and maintain.

SPD: 28.03
UPI: D07 (Developmet)
DOS (Target system)
VAX Rdb/ELN is a relational database management system
designed for dedicated applications on systems running in the
VAXELN application environment.
VAX Rdb/ ELN applications are developed using the VAXELN
Toolkit on a host VMS system. The resulting bootable,
VAXELN-based Rdb/ELN applications are then moved to the
VAXELN target system using disk media or an Ethernet Local
Area Network (LAN) link. The application program executes on
the target system as a dedicated database system. The network
link to the host development system may be used for remote
debugging.

can be used for DSRI database creation and population. DSRI
allows applications running on any VAX or MicroVAX node in a
DECnet network to access all other DSRI-compliant databases in
the network.
Users can issue DDL statements through the interactive SQL and
RDO utilities, the SQL precompilers, or the SQL module language
in order to accomplish the following: create schemas (database),
tables (relations), views, columns (fields), and indexes (both
ascending and descending); create storage areas for tables and
indexes; define constraints and triggers in table definitions; grant
and revoke access rights to schemas, tables and views; alter definitions of tables, columns, storage areas, and access rights; delete
definitions of tables, views, columns, indexes, constraints, triggers, storage areas, and access rights; restructure schemas on-line,
without unload/reload; add comments to definitions of tables
views, fields, and indexes; and define collating sequences for
international character sets.

VAX RMS Journaling
SPD: 27.58
UPI: VDV
VAX RMS Journaling helps maintain the data integrity of RMS
files in the event of a number of failure scenarios. Journaling
helps to protect RMS file data from becoming lost or inconsistent.
VAX RMS Journaling provides the following three methods of
journaling: after-image (AI) journaling provides the ability to redo
a series of modifications to a data file. This type of journaling
helps recover lost or corrupted files. After-image recovery
restores the contents of the file from the point of the latest
backup copy of that file; before-image (BI) journaling provides
the ability to undo a series of modifications to a data file . This
type of journaling allows a file to be returned to a previous
known state. This is useful in the event that a file is updated
with erroneous data; and recovery unit journaling helps maintain
transaction integrity, where a transaction consists of a group of
related operations that must be "atomic. " That is, either all of
the operations complete in their entirety or none of the operations complete. This type of journaling helps prevent data from
becoming inconsistent due to the incomplete execution of a
transaction.

Users are expected to have the necessary hardware to provide
both host development and target execution environments.
Rdb/ ELN cannot be run in the development environment other
than for debugging purposes. Debugging an application in this
manner is not a feature of VAXELN, as VAXELN applications
cannot run on VMS.

Journaling is applied on a file-by-file basis. A file can be marked
for after-image, before-image, recovery unit journaling, or any
combination of these methods. Within a given application, any
combination of journaling methods can be used.

VAX Rdb/VMS

SPD: 29.67
UPI: 018 (Remote)

SPD: 25.59
UPI: VD2 (Development)
VCL (Interactive)
358 (Runtime)

VAX Storage Library System (SLS) is a VMS layered software
product that provides users with the ability to manage data
archiving activities and VMS BACKUP activities on their systems,
manage the resulting media and each piece of media's location,
and manage the devices associated with the archive or backup
activities.

VAX Rdb/VMS is a full-function, SQL-based relational database
management system designed for the VMS operating system. It is
intended for general purpose, multiuser, centralized or distributed applications.

VAX Storage Libnry System

VAX Rdb/VMS supports a complete set of languages, utilities and
precompilers that enable users to maintain and manipulate
databases. VAX Rdb/VMS implements ANSI/ISO SQL as its standard interface to the database.

The media that are managed and tracked by VAX SLS software
include reel-to-reel magnetic tape, cartridge tape, and optical cartridges. The devices that are managed by VAX SLS software are
all VMS-supported reel-to-reel tape drives, all VMS-supported cartridge tape drives (including the TA90 with loader), the RV20
optical drive, and the RV64 optical juke box.

VAX Rdb/VMS also includes SQL/Services, a client/server protocol that provides remote access to VAX Rdb/VMS databases from
various desktop platforms.

With the VAX Storage Library System software, users are able to
maintain a record of all information on BACKUP or archived
media and retrieve this information quickly.

VAX Rdb/VMS implements the Digital Standard Relational Interface (DSRI). DSRI is an architecture for relational database management systems, as well as a standard calling mechanism that

9.46

Software and Services

Data Management ·and Transaction Processing

SPD: 33.25
UPI: VFS
VAX System V Volume Shadowing is an enhancement to the
VAX System V operating system developed by Digital Equipment
Corporation for VAX processors using Hierarchical Storage Controllers (HSC) with A series disks.
A volume is defined as an entire disk. Volume shadowing is the
process of duplicating all data written to a disk volume onto one
to three additional volumes . This increases data availability and
accessibility and is transparent to the user. VAX System V Volume Shadowing also provides protection from catastrophic loss of
data caused by mechanical failure. It does not protect against
accidental data deletion, so it should not be used as a substitute
for regular backup operations.
A shadow set is a group of one to four physical disk volumes,
called members, that are represented by a virtual unit, called the
shadow set master. The virtual unit has the same attributes as
each of the members. All I/O requests for a shadow set are
directed to the virtual unit.
The major features of VAX System V Volume Shadowing are:
Increased Data Availability, Increased Data Accessibility, Automatic Failure Recovery, and Application Software Compatibility.

X 'QJMS (T~~;fl,8£ Data Management Sys
SPD: 25.71
UPI: 706 (Full development)
711 (Runtime)
VAX TDMS (Terminal Data Management System) is a product
designed for the implementation of interactive, forms-intensive
applications running on VAX systems. As a terminal subsystem,
VAX TDMS can reduce the application development and maintenance effort by replacing application program logic specific to
terminal interactions with definitions that are external to the
program.

query and data reduction operations. TEAMDATA users can perform their tasks by selecting items from strip menus, using a
command language, or a combination of the two.
TEAMDATA can be used with ALL-IN-1, as an information management option on an ALL-IN-1 menu, or can be installed
outside of ALL-IN-1. In addition, TEAMDATA provides the capability to run applications developed using VAX RALLY.
TEAMDATA users can create and maintain data in tables (stored
in Rdb/VMS) for private or shared use. Using a text processing
style that is consistent with WPS-PLUS function keys, users can
edit screens of data without having to learn a complex data
manipulation language. Data can be stored, sorted, updated, queried and reported on using menu selections, commands, or a
combination of the two.
TEAMDATA provides a basic spreadsheet capability for use in
conjunction with tables for ad hoc calculations. TEAMDATA uses
compatible menus and screen-editing styles for the creation and
modification of both spreadsheets and tables.
Users can create bar, multibar, stacked bar, line, multiline, pie or
scatter graphs of data from within tables or spreadsheets. Graphs
can be displayed, printed (black and white or color) , or saved.
Graphs can also be saved and then loaded into VAX DECgraph
for modification.
Users can organize tables, spreadsheets, and applications in folders. Folders can be nested hierarchically.
Folders contain a directory of the user's own private information
or can include public information for team or work group use.
TEAMDATA users can share Public Folder databases with
DECdecision users. Tables in databases created by TEAMDATA or
the DECdecision Access component can also be accessed interchangeably by either product.
TEAMDATA users can run VAX RALLY-generated applications.
Application developers can create custom applications that
include forms, reports, menus, HELP and complex logic. These
applications can then be included on a TEAMDATA directory and
run by the end-user. Refer to VAX RALLY (SPD 27.03.) for more
information. VAX Rally Run-Time system is required in order to
run VAX Rally applications from TEAMDATA.

SPD: 27.02
UPI: 741
VAX TEAMDATA is an end-user information management product that runs on the VMS operating system.

SPD: 27.29
UPI: AB2

TEAMDATA provides powerful yet easy-to-use information management capabilities to those who need to use data in their work,
but who don't want to do data processing. TEAMDATA lets users
easily store and modify data, using a screen-oriented, text-editing
style, in a powerful relational database management system (VAX
Rdb/VMS).

VAX Volume Shadowing is a System Integrated Product (SIP)
available on VMS systems. VMS Volume Shadowing provides high
data availability by ensuring against data loss resulting from
media deterioration or through controller or device failure. This
prevents storage subsystem component failures from interrupting
system or application operation.

TEAMDATA helps users share data, stored locally and remotely,
in a variety of storage formats. TEAMDATA users can access data
stored in Rdb/VMS databases by TEAMDATA or by other
Rdb/VMS applications. Through optional use of VAX DATATRIEVE, TEAMDATA allows (read-only) access to data stored in
VAX DBMS databases or RMS files which have been defined as
DATATRIEVE domains. Through optional use of VIDA,
TEAMDATA permits (read-only) access to data in certain remote
IBM mainframe databases. Additionally, through optional use of
VAX Xway, users can import and export data to and from common spreadsheet and data interchange formats.

Volume shadowing maintains multiple redundant copies of data
on a collection of disks called a shadow set. Shadow sets consist
of one, two, or three compatible disk volumes which are referred
to as shadow set members. This duplication of data provides
greater data availability. When data is recorded on more than
one disk volume, the data is accessible even when one volume is
unavailable. Disk input/output operations continue transparently
with the remaining members of the shadow set.
(Continued)

TEAMDATA allows users to manipulate their personal data, as
well as shared or remote databases, in simple tables, spreadsheets, reports, and business graphs, and to perform complex

Software and Services

9.47

Data Management and Transaction Processing
VAX Volume Shadowing (Continued)
Because a shadow set is made up of multiple disks containing the
same data, the VMS Volume Shadowing software can read from
either disk device. The VMS Volume Shadowing software determines which disk to read from, per read operation.

If sections of a volume become unreadable, systems with volume
shadowing can read the data from the duplicate and attempt to
repair the original by writing t~e data to good blocks.
VMS system disks and any Files-11 On-Disk Structure 2 (ODS2)
data disks can be volume shadowed.
VMS Volume Shadowing requires a minimum of one VAX CPU,
one MSCP-compliant mass storage controller, and one Digital
Storage Architecture (DSA) disk drive and volume. Although only
one disk is required, there must be two or more disk drives and
volumes in order to "shadow" or maintain multiple copies of the
same data. This configuration provides protection against either
failure of a single disk drive or deterioration of a single volume.
Using two controllers provides a further guarantee of data availability in the event of a single controller failure. Using a
VAXcluster and multiple controllers provides the greatest data
availability.

SPD: 25.E7
UPI: VTW (Client)
VTX (Server)

VIDA for DB2 is an interoperability product which permits access
to IBM DB2 databases resident on IBM mainframe systems. VIDA
for DB2 provides transparent, direct, read-only access to DB2
databases from VAX based applications . VIDA for DB2 is layered
within VAX Rdb/VMS and can be accessed by most applications
and tools which work with VAX Rdb/VMS. VIDA for DB2 users
can access IBM-resident DB2 data using products such as VAX
RALLY, VAX DATATRIEVE, VAX TEAMDATA, DECdecision, the
VAX Rdb/VMS utilities including interactive SQL and RDO, and
VAX Data Distributor, as well as 3GL applications with embedded SQL or RDO.
VIDA for DB2 is engineered using a client/ server architecture. It
consists of two component products and uses Digital's
DECnet/SNA interconnect products. VIDA Client for DB2 (hereafter referred to as VIDA Client) is a VAX resident product that
accepts requests for DB2 data from VAX applications. VIDA Client converts the requests into DB2 SQL and passes the requests
to the IBM-based component, VIDA Server for DB2 (hereafter
referred to as VIDA Server). VIDA Client and VIDA Server communicate using a DECnet/SNA Gateway or VMS/SNA (hereafter
referred to as a gateway) and the DECnet/SNA VMS APPC/LU6.2
Programming Interface (hereafter referred to as APPC/LU6.2 PI).
VIDA Server submits each request to DB2 using the dynamic SQL
interface. Data obtained from DB2 is passed back to VIDA Client
through the gateway, and VIDA Client returns the data to the
requesting application. The application can use the accessed data
as it would any locally accessed data. For example, the data can
be stored in a VAX database or VAX RMS file, or it could be
displayed on a screen or printed.
VIDA Client runs under VMS on VAX, MicroVAX, and
VAXstation systems. VIDA Server runs as a CICS transaction on
IBM System/370 mainframe systems running the IBM MVS/XAT
or MVS/ESAT operating systems.

9.48

Software and Services

Device Drivers

SPD: 31.41
UPI: YEH
DEC IEZl 1 Class Driver for VMS is a VMS layered product which
is part of the IEZl 1 option. The IEZl 1 option includes the
SCSI488/D bus converter and the IEZl 1 software.
The DEC IEZl 1 Class Driver allows an application written in a
higher-level language or in MACR0-32 to monitor, control, and
interface with IEEE488 devices using VMS QIO system calls. The
driver adheres to the VMS SCSI device architecture.
The IEZll driver supports most functions of the IExll driver.
The majority of IExll applications can be converted to run on
the IEZll with only minor modifications.

DEC TM32 ~~

~!rP:" -..

SPD: 31.45
UPI: VZU
DEC TM32 Software for VMS includes the Port Software Driver
(PL Driver) necessary to operate the TM32 tape controller hardware on any VAXBI bus system using the VMS operating system.
The software driver specifically allows the reading and writing of
record sizes larger than 64 K bytes through the use of special QIO
calls. Normal size records (less than or equal to 64K) can also be
handled by using the standard QIO calls. Buffered chaining is
supported by the driver, which effectively eliminates a maximum
record size.
Demonstration programs written in FORTRAN and C are
included to show users how software should be written for
chained and nonchained buffers, in order to make maximum use
of the TM32 Software Driver functionality.

SPD: 36.32
DEC Token Ring Network Device Driver for VMS (TRDRV VIV)
supports suitably configured Q-bus MicroVAX 3000 and
VAXserver 3000, and VAX 4000 and VAXserver 4000 systems on
4 Mbps or 16 Mbps 802.5/Token Ring LANs as DECnet Phase IV
systems. TRDRV VIV driver also supports VMS $QIO and Alternative Start VO interfaces for user-supplied applications. The
TRDRV V IV driver product includes on-line diagnostics, installation verification procedures, and host loadable DEQRA
microcode.

SPD: 32.33
UPI: YMK (VAX)

Phase IV DECnet networks are hierarchical networks that can be
segmented into areas. DECnet Router Server supports both intraarea (Level 1) and interarea (Level 2) routing for transporting
messages between nodes and areas. End nodes connected directly
to an Ethernet must use DECnet Router Servers or Phase IV host
routing nodes on the same Ethernet for message routing off that
Ethernet.
A routing node is not required on an Ethernet if the end nodes
connected to that Ethernet communicate only with each other.
However, if the Ethernet directly connects nodes with different
area addresses, an area routing node is required to transport
messages between those areas. Use of DECnet Router Server
offloads certain communications processing from host nodes that
would otherwise serve as routing nodes on the Ethernet.
DECnet Router Server implements Phase IV DECnet asynchronous and synchronous DDCMP routing and network management.
Through the use of Phase IV DECnet protocols, DECnet networks
can contain up to 63 areas, each containing up to 1023 nodes,
given proper network planning. DECnet Router Server can be
used to connect to Phase III nodes, providing migration of Phase
III networks with connectivity to Phase IV Ethernet nodes.

SPD: 27.72
UPI: VDJ (VMS and MicroVMS)
VDK (ULTRIX-32)
A33 (MS-DOS and PC-DOS)

DECrouter 200 is an Ethernet-based DECnet asynchronous router.
This router interconnects up to eight DECnet nodes connected to
the asynchronous DDCMP connections.
DECrouter 200 is also connected to the Ethernet and provides
access to the Ethernet (and the wider DECnet network) to the
nodes attached to the asynchronous ports. These nodes can be
located either locally, through dedicated wiring such as existing
office wiring, or remotely, through modem connections.
DECrouter 200 supports intra-area (level 1) routing of messages
between DECnet end nodes. These nodes can be Phase III, Phase
IV, or Phase IV+ routing nodes or end nodes in the same area.
DECrouter 200 offloads routing-related communications from
hosts that would otherwise serve as routing nodes on the
Ethernet-based DECnet LAN.
DECrouter 200 can act as the designated router for an Ethernet
segment. A designated router is necessary for end nodes to communicate with nodes off the Ethernet.
DECrouter 200 incorporates a remote monitor utility to monitor
its current state. This remote monitor contains the same displays
that are available through the local monitor.

YML (RISC)

DEC Wide Area Network Device Drivers for ULTRIX contains
the UL TRIX Device Drivers and specific datalink protocol support for Digital Equipment Corporation's synchronous communications options when used on VAX and Digital RISC systems.

SPD: 30.34
UPI: 725
DECnet Router Server runs on an Ethernet Communications
Server hardware unit to provide DECnet routing functions in a
network of one or more host computers. These hosts may be
Phase IV routing nodes or end nodes (for example, DECnet-RT,
Version 2.1 and DECnet/E, Version 2.7). DECnet Router Server
connects directly to the Ethernet to provide routing to nodes off
the Ethernet connected through the unit's synchronous or asynchronous lines.

SPD: 32.15
UPI: YG6
DECrouter 250 is a Local Area Network-based DECnet asynchronous/synchronous router. This Phase IV/ IV+, level 1/level 2
router is capable of supporting up to eight serial ports and providing DECnet nodes running DDCMP with access to the
Ethernet/802.3 and larger DECnet networks.
The DECrouter 250 provides access to Phase IV/ IV+ DECnet
nodes on a Local Area Network (LAN) and to Phase III or Phase
IV/ IV+ DECnet nodes over asynchronous/synchronous lines.
These nodes can be located either locally via dedicated wiring, or
remotely via modem connections.
(Continued)

Software and Services

9.49

Device Drivers
DECrouter 250 (Continued)
The DECrouter 250 performs adaptive routing utilizing all of the
eight asynchronous/synchronous lines and the Ethernet/802.3
port. In the case where communications to an end node might
pass through multiple routers, the DECrouter 250 has the capability of choosing the least-cost path or re-routing in case of a
line failure.
The DECrouter 250 supports intra-area (level 1) and inter-area
(level 2) routing of messages between DECnet end nodes. These
nodes can be Phase III/ IV/IV+ routing nodes or end-nodes. Use
of the DECrouter 250 offloads routing related communications
from hosts that would otherwise serve as routing nodes on the
Local Area Network-based DECnet LAN.
A major security feature of the DECrouter 250 is support for
modem dial back. This feature allows network managers to control access to their DECnet networks more tightly.
The DECrouter 250 has the ability to be downline loaded over
the serial lines as well as its Ethernet/802.3 connector.

SPD: 28.85
UPI: VIS
DECrouter 2000 is a communications product that provides a
routing service for the Local Area Network (LAN). This allows
communication with nodes outside the LAN within a Wide Area
Network (WAN). By using a DECrouter 2000, the routing load on
the other Ethernet nodes can be reduced, releasing these
resources for other applications.
The DECrouter 2000 provides access to and from Phase IV
DECnet nodes on a Local Area Network (LAN) to Phase III or
Phase IV DECnet nodes over synchronous lines. These nodes may
be located either locally, via dedicated wiring, or remotely via
modem connections. Note that LAN refers to any Local Area
Network that conforms with the Ethernet, IEEE 802.3, or ISO
8802/3 standards.
The DECrouter 2000 software product runs on the DEC MicroServer (DEMSA) and DEC MicroServer-SP (DEMSB) hardware
units. These units contain an Ethernet interface port (IEEE 802.3
compatible); the DEC MicroServer has four synchronous communications ports, and the DEC MicroServer-SP has a single synchronous port.
The DECrouter 2000, on the DEC MicroServer, supports the four
synchronous lines at speeds up to 64K bits per second, two synchronous lines at speeds up to 384K bits per second, or one
synchronous line at speeds up to 2.048M bits per second. The
DECrouter 2000, on the DEC MicroServer-SP, supports the single
synchronous line at speeds up to 64K bits per second. Communication over the synchronous lines is full- or half-duplex, and full
modem control is supplied on all synchronous line(s). The synchronous port(s) can operate as DDCMP point-to-point or multipoint links, and can communicate with all supported synchronous
Digital DDCMP products, excluding the DMCl 1. On DDCMP
multipoint links , the DECrouter 2000 can act only as a tributary.

SPD: 38.71
UPI: MJP
DECserver 90TL for VMS, ULTRIX, and MS-DOS provides concurrent Local Area Transport (LAT) and Telnet TCP/IP protocol
support from a DECserver 90TL communications server to enable
connectivity to host systems that utilize LAT or TCP/IP protocols.

9.50

Software and Services

The TCP/IP protocol suite is used to connect to UNIX host systems and other host systems that support the TCP/IP protocol
suite.
The DECserver 90TL Communications Server is an Ethernet
Communications Server for Ethernet Local Area Networks. The
DECserver 90TL provides a convenient method to logically connect up to eight digital asynchronous terminals to one or more
service nodes (hosts) on an Ethernet. Once the terminal is connected, a user can utilize application programs and utilities as
though the terminal was directly connected to a host via a
DMF32, DHUll, or DHVll/DHQll device, with a few exceptions. Thus, it may be possible to utilize the DECserver 90TL to
connect all terminals to service nodes in place of traditional interfaces, except for host console terminals.
In addition, the DECserver 90TL provides IP end-node routing
via SLIP. Up to eight TCP/IP systems can be connected to the
serial ports of the DECserver 90TL. These systems can run IP
applications (such as Telnet, FTP, X-Windows, etc.) on the serial
line and communicate with other TCP/IP services on the network.
The DECserver 90TL uses MJ8 (similar to RJ45 jacks used in
telephone jacks) for the attachment of asynchronous devices. The
DECserver 90TL utilizes the DEC 423-A electrical interface standard for local connections. DEC 423-A is compatible with the
DEC 232-D interface and supports DTRIDSR (Data Terminal
Ready/Data Set Ready) signals. DEC 423- A supports longer cable
runs and higher signaling speeds.

SPD: 27.41
UPI: 925
DECserver 100 for VMS and Micro VMS is a network terminal
switch for Ethernet local area networks. DECserver 100 provides
a convenient method to logically connect up to eight Digital
asynchronous terminals to one or more service nodes (hosts) on
an Ethernet. When the terminal is connected, users can run
application programs and utilities as though the terminal were
directly connected to a host through a DZll, DMF32, or DHll
device, with some limitations. DECserver 100 can connect all terminals to service nodes in place of traditional interfaces, except
for host console terminals.
DECserver 100 also allows for VMS host-initiated connections to
asynchronous printers. A special print symbiont on VMS service
nodes can initiate connections to asynchronous printers connected to DECserver ports. This allows certain asynchronous
printers to be distributed throughout the network and accessed
transparently by service node users. Incoming server connect
requests are queued in FIFO (first in/first out) order.
DECserver 100 implements the local area transport (LAT) protocol for communicating with service nodes that implement this
protocol on the same Ethernet. This interface has been optimized
for high terminal I/O performance over an Ethernet, while reducing host CPU cycles required to handle interrupts. Therefore,
under most I/O loading conditions a significant performance gain
may be realized by using DECserver 100 over direct terminal
connections through DZl ls.
Software that runs on DECserver 100 is downline loaded over the
network from a Phase IV DECnet load host. Terminal access
using DECserver 100 does not require DECnet running in the
same service node; LAT uses the Ethernet addressing mechanism
to transport terminal messages.
Features include login load balancing, multiple terminal sessions,
automatic login failover, and remote printer support.

Device Drivers

SPD: 27.54
UPI: VDE
DECserver 200 for ULTRIX-32 is a network terminal switch for
Ethernet Local Area Networks. The DECserver 200 provides a
convenient method to logically connect up to eight Digital asynchronous terminals to one or more service nodes (hosts) on an
Ethernet. Once the terminal is connected, a user can utilize
application programs and utilities as though the terminal were
directly connected to a host via a DZll, DMF32, or DHUll
device, with a few exceptions. Thus, it may be possible to utilize
the DECserver 200 to connect all terminals to service nodes in
place of traditional interfaces, except for host console terminals.
Remote connection via dial-in modems is fully supported.
The DECserver 200 also allows for ULTRIX host-initiated connections to asynchronous printers. This allows the printers to be
distributed throughout a facility and accessed transparently by
service node users. Incoming host-initiated connect requests may
be queued FIFO at the server.
The DECserver 200 also provides the capability to connect host
systems that do not support the LAT protocol, Digital personal
computers, and dial out modems directly to ports on the server.
Interactive server users can issue commands to connect to services which are offered on such ports. Port-to-port connections
on the same server are also supported.
The DECserver 200 implements the Local Area Transport (LAT)
protocol for communication with service nodes that implement
this protocol on the same Ethernet. This interface has been optimized for high terminal I/0 performance over an Ethernet, while
reducing host CPU cycles required .to handle interrupts. Hence,
under most I/O loading conditions, a significant performance
gain may be realized by using the DECserver 200 versus direct
terminal connections via DZlls.

SPD: 27.53
UPI: VCB
DECserver 200 for VMS and Micro VMS is a network terminal
switch for Ethernet Local Area Networks. The DECserver 200
provides a convenient method to logically connect up to eight
Digital asynchronous terminals to one or more service nodes
(hosts) on an Ethernet. Once the terminal is connected, a user
can utilize application programs and utilities as though the terminal were directly connected to a host via a DZll, DMF32, or
DHUl 1 device, with a few exceptions. Thus, it may be possible
to utilize the DECserver 200 to connect all terminals to service
nodes in place of traditional interfaces, except for host console
terminals. Remote connection via dial-in modems is fully
supported.
The DECserver 200 also allows for VMS host-initiated connections
to serial printers. A special print symbiont on VMS service nodes
can initiate connections to serial printers connected to DECserver
200 ports. This allows the printers to be distributed throughout a
facility and accessed transparently by service node users. Incoming host-initiated connect requests may be queued FIFO (first
in/first out) at the server.
The DECserver 200 also provides the capability to connect host
systems that do not support the LAT (Local Area Transport)
protocol, Digital personal computers, and dial-out modems
directly to ports on the server. Interactive server users can issue
commands to connect to services which are offered on such
ports. Port-to-port connections on the same server are also
supported.

The DECserver 200 implements the Local Area Transport protocol for communication with service nodes that implement this
protocol on the same Ethernet. This interface has been optimized
for high terminal I/0 performance over an Ethernet, while reducing host CPU cycles required to handle interrupts. Hence, under
most I/O loading conditions, a significant performance gain may
be realized by using the DECserver 200 versus direct terminal
connections via DZlls.

SPD: 38.07
UPI: VTN
DECserver 250 for ULTRIX-32 is a network server for printers for
Ethernet Local Area Networks. DECserver 250 provides a
method to logically connect the following: two Digital asynchronous parallel printers (using Dataproducts parallel interface standard); three Digital asynchronous serial printers; and a Digital
asynchronous serial printer or terminal with modem control to
one or more service nodes (hosts) on an Ethernet.
DECserver 250 implements the Local Area Transport (LAT) protocol for communication with service nodes that implement this
protocol on the same Ethernet.
Software that runs on DECserver 250 is down-line loaded over
the network from either an ULTRIX-32 load host or from any
other supported load host that runs Phase IV DECnet. DECnet is
not required for ULTRIX-32 load hosts.
A line printer daemon on ULTRIX-32 service nodes initiates connections to asynchronous printers connected to DECserver 250
ports. Users can establish a logical connection from any service
node that implements the LAT protocol on the same Ethernet
LAN. The terminal connected to the server can be used to make
multiple connections to the same or to different service nodes on
the Ethernet. Only one connection per asynchronous printer can
be made.
DECserver 250 offers load balancing, a function that dynamically
spreads the user load evenly among service nodes that offer the
same service.
An online reference HELP facility with tutorial HELP feature is
available on the printer/terminal port. The remaining ports do
not have access to the HELP facilities.
DECserver 250 maintains permanent characteristics in nonvolatile
memory, which is retained even when the power is disconnected.
Characteristics governing the operation of the DECserver 250
ports can be displayed interactively from the printer/terminal
port when connected to a terminal. Characteristics other than
permanent can be set up by the user or server manager.
In terms of throughput of the printer ports, the DECserver 250
parallel ports can support up to 2000 lpm. All ports can be
accessed at their rated speeds; however, the DECserver 250 overall performance is a factor of the CPU and network utilization.

SPD: 25.}5
UPI: VTM
DECserver 250 for VMS is a network server for printers for
Ethernet Local Area Networks. The DECserver 250 provides a
convenient method to connect logically; two Digital asynchronous
parallel printers (using Dataproducts parallel interface standard),
three Digital asynchronous serial printers, and a Digital asynchronous serial printer or terminal with modem control to one or
more service nodes (hosts) on an Ethernet.
(Continued)

Software and Services

9.51

Device Drivers
DECserver 250 for VMS (Continued)
The DECserver 250 implements the Local Area Transport (LAT)
protocol for communication with service nodes that implement
this protocol on the same Ethernet.
Software that runs on the DECserver 250 is down-line loaded
over the network from a Phase IV DECnet load host.
A print symbiont on VMS service nodes initiates connections to
asynchronous printers connected to DECserver 250 ports.
Users can establish a logical connection from any service node
that implements the LAT protocol on the same Ethernet LAN.
The terminal connected to the server can be used to make multiple connections to the same or to different service nodes on the
Ethernet. Only one connection per asynchronous printer can be
made.
The DECserver 250 offers load balancing, which is a function
that dynamically spreads the user load evenly among service
nodes that offer the same service.
The LAT Control Program (LATCP) is used by the System Manager to establish service definitions.
A full on-line reference HELP facility, with tutorial HELP feature,
is available on the printer/terminal port. The remaining ports do
not have access to the HELP facilities.
The DECserver 250 maintains permanent characteristics in nonvolatile memory, which is retained even when the power is
disconnected.
Characteristics governing the operation of the DECserver 250
ports can be displayed interactively from the printer/terminal
port when connected to a terminal. Characteristics other than
permanent may be setup by the user or Server Manager.
In terms of throughput to the printer ports, the DECserver 250
supports the equivalent of two 1200 LPM printers, or one 2000
LPM printer running at full speed, or aggregate transfer rates of
19 ,200 baud on two of the serial ports and 9600 baud on the
remaining two serial ports.

SPD: 25.]2
UPI: VTV
DECserver 300 for ULTRIX-32 Terminal Server is a network terminal switch for Ethernet Local Area Networks. It provides a
convenient method to logically connect up to 16 Digital asynchronous terminals to one or more service nodes (hosts) on an
Ethernet. Once the terminal is connected, a user can utilize
application programs and utilities as though the terminal was
directly connected to a host via a DMF32, DHUll, or
DVll/DHQll device, with a few exceptions. Thus, it may be
possible to utilize the DECserver 300 to connect all terminals to
service nodes in place of traditional interfaces, except for host
console terminals and remote connection via dial-in modems
which is not supported.
DECserver 300 uses Modified Modular Jacks (MMJs) for the
attachment of serial devices. The MMJ segregates a data from a
voice connection. DECserver 300 utilizes the EIA 423-A electrical
interface standard for local connections. EIA 423-A is compatible
with the EIA 232-D interface and supports DTR/DSR (Data Terminal Ready/Data Set Ready) signals. EIA 423-A supports longer
cable runs and higher signaling speeds. Port-to-port connections
on the same server are supported.
DECserver 300 implements the Local Area Transport (LAT) protocol for communication with service nodes that implement this
protocol on the same Ethernet. DECserver 300 also implements
and supports the Terminal Device/Session Management Protocol
(TD/ SMP) to manage multiple sessions at the device level.

9.52

Software and Services

Features of DECserver 300 include terminal connection management, load balancing, multiple sessions, multiple session management, outbound connection queues, and welcome identification.
Other features include local and service modes, autoconnection,
automatic session failover, groups, security, an online HELP facility, directory service, and more.

SPD: 25.Jl
UPI: VTU
DECserver 300 for VMS and MS-DOS software provides concurrent Local Area Transport (LAT) and Telnet TCP/ IP protocol
support from a DECserver 300 terminal server to enable connectivity to host systems that utilize LAT or TCP!IP protocols. The
TCP/IP protocol suite is used to connect to UNIX host systems
and other host systems that support the TCP/IP protocol suite.
The DECserver 300 Terminal Server is an Ethernet Communications Server for Ethernet Local Area Networks. The DECserver
300 provides a convenient method to logically connect up to
sixteen Digital asynchronous terminals to one or more service
nodes (hosts) on an Ethernet. Once the terminal is connected, a
user can utilize application programs and utilities as though the
terminal was directly connected to a host via a DMF32, DHUl 1
or DHVll/DHQll device, with a few exceptions. Thus, it may be
possible to utilize the DECserver 300 to connect all terminals to
service nodes in place of traditional interfaces, except for host
console terminals and remote connection via dial-in modems
which is not supported.
The DECserver 300 uses MMJs (Modified Modular Jacks) for the
attachment of serial devices. The MMJ segregates a Data from a
Voice connection. The DECserver 300 utilizes the EIA 423-A
electrical interface standard for local connections. EIA 423-A is
compatible with the EIA 232-D. interface and supports DTR/DSR
(Data Terminal Ready/Data Set Ready) signals. EIA 423 A supports longer cable runs and higher signaling speeds.
The DECserver 300 does not support connections to wide-area
networks via modems. However, it does provide the capability
for connections to non-LAT hosts.
The DECserver 300 also allows for host-initiated connections to
serial printers. A print symbiont on service nodes can initiate
connections to serial printers connected to DECserver 300 ports.
This allows the printers to be distributed throughout a facility
and accessed transparently by service node users. Incoming
host-initiated connect requests may be queued FIFO at the server.

SPD: 33.54
UPI: 03K
DECserver 500 for ULTRIX is an Ethernet Communications
Server for Ethernet Local Area Networks (LANs). The DECserver
500 series server can provide up to 128 EIA-423-A or 64 EIA-232
asynchronous port connections to Digital asynchronous terminals.
Both EIA-232, via the 8 port CXY08 communication option card,
and EIA-423-A, via the 16 port CXA16 communication option
card and EIA-422 16 port CXB16 communication option card can
be mixed together in any combination from two to eight cards in
one server. The DECserver 500 series server provides a convenient method to connect logically up to 128 Digital asynchronous
terminals to one or more service nodes (hosts) on an Ethernet.
(Continued)

Device Drivers
DECserver 500 for ULTRIX (Continued)
Once the terminal is connected, a user can use application programs and utilities as though the terminal was directly connected
to a host. Thus, it may be possible to use the DECserver 500
series server to connect all terminals to service nodes in place of
traditional interfaces, except for host console terminals. Remote
connection via dial-in modems is fully supported. See the Restrictions section for limitations.
The DECserver 500 series server also allows for ULTRIX hostinitiated connections to asynchronous printers. A print symbiont
on ULTRIX service nodes can initiate connections to asynchronous printers connected to DECserver 500 series ports. This
allows the printers to be distributed throughout a facility and
accessed transparently by service node users. Incoming hostinitiated connect requests can be queued FIFO at the server.
The DECserver 500 series server also provides the capability to
connect host systems that do not support the LAT protocol,
Digital personal computers, and dial-out modems directly to
ports on the server. Interactive server users can issue commands
to connect to services that are offered on such ports. Port-to-port
connections on the same server are also supported.
The DECserver 500 series server implements the Local Area
Transport (LAT) protocol for communication with service nodes
that implement this protocol on the same Ethernet. This interface
has been optimized for high terminal I/O performance over an
Ethernet, while reducing host CPU cycles required to handle
interrupts. Hence, under most I/ O loading conditions, a
signifi-cant performance gain may be realized by using the
DECserver 500 series servers as opposed to direct terminal
connections.

though the terminal was directly connected to a host via a DZll ,
DMF32 , or DHUll device, with a few exceptions. Thus, it may
be possible to use the DECserver 500 series server to connect all
terminals to service nodes in place of traditional interfaces,
except for host console terminals. Remote connection via dial-in
modems is fully supported.
The DECserver 500 series server also allows for VMS host initiated connections to asynchronous printers. A special print symbiont on VMS service nodes can initiate connections to asynchronous printers connected to DECserver 500 series ports. This
allows the printers to be distributed throughout a facility and
accessed transparently by service node users. Incoming hostinitiated connect requests may be queued FIFO at the server.
The DECserver 500 series server also provides the capability to
connect host systems that do not support the LAT protocol,
Digital personal computers, and dial-out modems directly to
ports on the server. Interactive server users can issue commands
to connect to services that are offered on such ports. Port-to-port
connections on the same server are also supported.
The DECserver 500 series server implements the Local Area
Transport (LAT) protocol for communication with service nodes
that implement this protocol on the same Ethernet. This interface
has been optimized for high terminal I/O performance over an
Ethernet, while reducing host CPU cycles required to handle
interrupts.
The DECserver 500 series server implements the On-Demand
Loading (ODL) font loading protocol, which allows Asian terminals that implement the ODL protocol to communicate with a
suitable VMS host via a terminal server. The Asian terminals will
be able to request font definitions from a suitable VMS host
when connected to a DECserver 500 series server.

The DECserver 500 series server implements the On-Demand
Loading (ODL) font loading protocol, which allows Asian terminals that implement the ODL protocol to communicate with a
suitable host via a terminal server. The Asian terminals will be
able to request font definitions from a suitable host when connected to a DECserver 500 series server.

The DECserver 500 series server also implements and supports
the Terminal Device/ Session Management Protocol (TD/SMP) to
manage multiple sessions at the device level. The DECserver 500
series servers provide the ability to communicate with devices
that also implement this protocol, and assist in the management
of multiple sessions for these devices. By implementing this protocol, the DECserver 500 series servers can permit attached
devices to maintain screen and keyboard context for multiple
LAT sessions, as well as allow these devices to run multiple LAT
sessions concurrently.

The DECserver 500 series server also implements and supports
the Terminal Device/Session Management Protocol (TD/SMP) to
manage multiple sessions at the device level. The DECserver 500
series servers provide the ability to communicate with devices
that also implement this protocol, and assist in the management
of multiple sessions for these devices. By implementing this protocol, the DECserver 500 series servers can permit attached
devices to maintain screen and keyboard context for multiple
LAT sessions, as well as allow these devices to run multiple LAT
sessions concurrently.

DECserver 500 for VAX VMS and MicroVMS
SPD: 26.97
UPI: 03K
DECserver 500 for VAX VMS and Micro VMS series server is an
Ethernet Communications Server for Ethernet Local Area Networks (LANs). The DECserver 500 series server can provide up to
128 EIA-423 -A or 64 EIA-232 asynchronous port connections to
Digital asynchronous terminals. Both RS 232, via the 8 port
CXY08 communication option card, and EIA-423-A, via the 16
port CXA16 communication option card and EIA-422 16 port
CXB16 communication option card can be mixed together in any
combination from two to eight cards in one server. The
DECserver 500 series server provides a convenient method to
connect logically up to 128 Digital asynchronous terminals to one
or more service nodes (hosts) on an Ethernet. Once the terminal
is connected, a user can use application programs and utilities as

Software that runs on the DECserver 500 series server is downline loaded over the network from a Phase IV DECnet load host.
Terminal access using the DECserver 500 series server does not
require DECnet running in the same service node; LAT uses the
Ethernet addressing mechanism to transport terminal messages.
For wide area network (WAN) communications, terminal users
can connect to a LAN service node running DECnet where they
can "SET HOST" to a remote system via the DECnet network
terminal protocol. If this system has the prerequisite X.29 or SNA
3270 access routines, a terminal user could communicate to a
remote SNA or X.25 host through the appropriate gateway and
this intervening host. A DECserver 500 series terminal user cannot communicate directly to remote hosts through DECnet Routers or X.25/SNA Gateways. Wide area network traffic will not
provide the same high level of performance as local terminal
connections, due to the additional DECnet and internet protocol
overhead.

Software and Services

9.53

Device Drivers
DRB32 VMS Drivers
SPD: 27.69
UPI: VF5
DRB32 VMS Drivers supports the DRB32 options (DRB32-M,
DRB32-E, and DRB32W) under the VMS operating system. The
DRB32 -M is a general purpose parallel port that provides a 32-bit
high speed interface between the VAXBI and a user's peripheral.
In DMA mode, the DRB32-M can transfer up to 960K bytes of
data without processor intervention. The DRB32-M also supports
programmed I/O data transfers between a VAX processor and an
external device. The DRB32-E an external cable driving option
allows for communications with a device outside the system cabinet. The DRB32 -W a DRll-W compatible option provides
DRl 1-W like transactions, so that existing DRl 1-W applications
may utilize the higher band-width provided by the VAXBI.
DRB32 VMS DRIVERS provides device drivers and other programs that support the DRB32 under VMS on VAXBI systems.
Included in the kit are two working example device drivers; one
for the DRB32-M/DRB32-E, and one for the DRB32-W. Also there
are example programs that demonstrated the use of the drivers
and provides test and installation verification procedures.
The DRB32-M/ DRB32-E Driver Features simple interface for user
programs, via the $QIO VMS system service. This service can be
called from any VMS supported programming language. This
allows users to: pre-lock buffers in memory, reducing driver overhead when processing user requests; transfer very large amounts
of data, much larger than the DRB32's 982K bytes, by making
use of the DRB32 's double-buffering capability in longword mode
transfers; set up an attention AST, which gives a user program a
synchronous notification of external device events; implement its
own data transfer protocol,· between the user program and the
external device. The driver imposes no restrictions on this
protocoL
The DRB32-M/ DRB32-E Pipelines user I/O requests, keeps the
DRB32 and the external device as busy as possible by overlapping
driver and user program overhead with data transfers, and allows
programmed I/O to either the DRB32 's data port, control port, or
both. This allows a user program to read or write a longword or
word at a time from or to the user device.
The DRB32 -W driver is a modified version of the VMS DRll-W
driver, with a nearly identical user QIO interface. Existing programs for the DRl 1-W may require modification to use the
DRB32-W driver. The sources to this driver are provided, so that
the user has an example of how to modify the DRll-W device
handling to use the DRB32-W. Systems that are upgraded to the
T1023-YA version of the DRB32-W board will be able to use the
word counter functionality included in the example driver source,
UQWDRIVER, if so desired.

DRVll-WAIDRVlW ULTRIX Driver
SPD: 32.91
UPI: YLJ (VAX)
YLK (RISC)

DRVll -WA/DRVlW ULTRIX Driver provides a software interface
to the DRVll -WA/DRVl W controller hardware. The
DRVll -WAIDRVlW hardware is a general-purpose, 16-bit, parallel, direct-memory-access (DMA) data interface. It is capable of
being used either as an interface between memory and a user
device or as an interprocessor link (non-DECnet) between two
systems. The DRVll-WAIDRVlW device is compatible with systems which have the 22-bit Q-bus. For more information about
the controller hardware, refer to the DRVll-WA General Purpose
DMA Interface User's Guide.
The DRVll-WA/DRVlW ULTRIX Driver software allows general
access to the features provided by the DRVll -WA/DRVlW
devices. The standard ULTRIX system driver calls: open, close,
9.54

Software and Services

read, write, and ioctl, are provided for controlling and transferring data between the user device or interprocessor link and the
ULTRIX operating system. To allow asynchronous operations, the
driver has been implemented to be compatible with the ULTRIX
nbuf(4) mechanism. For detailed information about the driver,
refer to the DRVll-WAIDRVlW ULTRIX Driver User's and Installation Guide.
As well as being installable on supported Q -bus systems, the
DRVll -WAIDRVlW ULTRIX Driver may be installed on any
ULTRIX system with the diskless management services (dms) , for
booting to supported Q-bus clients.
The DRVll -WA/ DRVlW ULTRIX Driver will support up to 4
DRVll-WAIDRVlW controllers per Q-bus system or client.

Ethernet Terminal Server for VMS and MicroVMS
SPD: 27.39
UPI: 726
Ethernet Terminal Server for VMS and Micro VMS is a network
terminal switch for Ethernet local area networks. The server provides a method to logically connect up to 32 Digital EIA-232
asynchronous terminals to one or more service nodes (hosts) on
an Ethernet. When the terminal is connected to the service node,
application programs and utilities are available as though the terminal was directly connected to a host through a DZll , DMF32 ,
or DHUll device. Ethernet Terminal Server can connect terminals to service nodes rather than traditional interfaces. Remote
connection through dial-in modems is supported.
The server also allows for VMS-host initiated connections to asynchronous printers.
Features include terminal connection management, non-LAT host
support, load balancing, multiple sessions, local mode and service
mode, autoconnection, and more.

SPD: 30.52
UPI: 926
HSC Software is the software component of a special-purpose
hardware and software set that makes up a Hierarchical Storage
Controller (HSC) . HSC Software is the software executed within
the I/O control processor and other peripheral processors of the
HSC. The three hardware models of the HSC product family are
HSC40, HSC50, and HSC70. The HSC is an intelligent mass storage server, interfacing one or more host computer systems to a
set of mass storage devices.
The HSC is an intelligent subsystem because, together with the
devices it controls, it is seen by the host computers as a single
high-level entity. The host computers send high-level I/O requests
to the HSC subsystem and relegate to the subsystem the responsibility for all low-level operations required to implement the highlevel requests. Internally, the HSC subsystem utilizes programmed
processors to direct and perform its detailed I/O operations.
The HSC arranges its software by function . Major portions of the
software include the Disk Server, which services all I/O requests
for disk units; the Tape Server, which services all I/O requests
for tape units; and the DUP (Diagnostics/ Utilities Protocol)
Server, which services the host-to utility connection.
HSC attaches to host computer systems through the CI (Computer Interconnect). HSC supports connection to the maximum
number of nodes in any valid VAXcluster configuration.
(Continued)

Device Drivers
HSC Software (Continued)
HSC connects to mass storage devices through the Standard Disk
Interface and Standard Tape Interface. The maximum number of
disk devices that a single HSC70 can support is 32. The HSC50
supports 24 devices and the HSC 40 supports 12 disk devices.
HSC software converts host requests into device-specific requests
and manages the physical activity of the devices, supporting parallel transfers on multiple data channels. The HSC also implements deep buffering (the ability to interpret and prepare for
transfer) of commands from hosts.

The counter functions can start or stop up to five counter channels simultaneously on one IDVlx-D module, count upwards or
downwards on a per channel selection and preset every channel
with an initial value. Counter functions can also handle counter
overflow and underflow in a user AST routine, control by internal
or external start signal the count of external events, count selectable internal time intervals upon external control signal (time
measurements), and concatenate consecutive counter channels.

SPD: 31.62

IEX·VMS.Driver
SPD: 26.30

UPI: 519
!EX-VMS-Driver allows programs written in MACR0-32 and
higher level languages (such as VAX FORTRAN, VAX BASIC and
VAX PASCAL) to communicate through the IEUll-A or IEQll-A
with devices containing an IEC 625-1 or IEEE Std. 488 interface.
This communication is implemented through a choice of direct
QIO calls or a set of subroutines callable from high level
languages.
The IEXll-A interface is a bit-parallel byte-serial device which
can perform transfers in either program interrupt or DMA (direct
memory access) mode. Program interrupt is used for transferring
commands and addresses, while DMA is used for transferring
data. DMA significantly reduces processor loading during the
transfer of long data buffers.
The IEXll-A interface contains two independent !EC/IEEE bus
controllers, also known as General Purpose Interface Buses
(GPIBs). These two controllers may be connected to the same or
to different !EC/IEEE buses. Up to 15 devices may be attached to
each !EC/IEEE bus.
The IEXll is most commonly used as Controller-in-Charge, but
can also be used when another device is Controller-in-Charge.
The Controller-in-Charge directs the sequence of information on
the bus.
When the IEXll acts as Controller-in-Charge, it may request status information from other devices through serial and parallel
polling. When the IEXll is not Controller-in-Charge, it can be
polled in either fashion to provide status information.

UPI: YG5
KDM70 Software is the software component of a special-purpose
hardware/software set that makes up the DSA XMI storage controller. KDM70 Software is executed by the CVAX Processor of
the KDM70. The KDM70 is an intelligent MSCP/TMSCP storage
controller which supports RA Series Disks and Storage Arrays,
TA Series Tape, and ESE20.

SPD: 28.38

UPI: Z74
KMVlA LRR Program is a long range radar protocol microcode
for the KMVlA programmable communications controller. The
microcode allows the user to perform medium-speed synchronous
radar communication in a point-to-point radar environment using
the LRR link level protocol. KMVlA LRR Program operates with
the KMVlA Support Software Package product, which is comprised of a KMVlA driver program and high level language interface library.
Features of KMVlA LRR Program include framing of variable
number (to a maximum of nine) of 13-bit data words; direct
memory access for high throughput; support for DTE clock
source from 1200 bps up to 4800 bps; modem control, including
remote loop or local loop; modem lead change control for carrier
detect, ring indicator, clear to send, and data set ready; and line
statistics. KMVlA LRR Program transmits and receives data and
aborts data transmission and reception .

KMVlA MicroVAX Driver
SPD: 28.23

IXVl 1/VMS Driver
SPD: 28.28
UPI: VHZ
IXVl 1/VMS Driver allows programs written in any language supporting the MicroVAX/MicroVMS $QIO System Service to communicate with user devices connected to the IXVll/IXVlS modules. The IXVl 1 module family is a group of industrial digital
input and output, analog input and output, and counter interfaces for Digital's Q-bus machines.
Digital input and output requests support the following modes of
operation: read data from one or several IDVl x-A modules; write
data to one or several IDVlx-B modules or IDVl x-C modules;
read or write fractions of a 16-bit value; and handle interrupts in
a user process by AST routines.
Analog input and output requests support the following modes of
operation: read data from up to 128 different channels on
IAVlx-A, -AA, and IAVlx-C, -CA modules; write data to up to
four different channels on IAVlx-B modules; enable automatic
gain selection; initiate multiple reads on one channel with one
request; and start conversion internally or externally.

UPI: VCP
KMVlA MicroVAX Driver provides a mechanism for communication between a MicroVAX host and the KMVlA Programmable
Communications Controller. It controls this communication by
providing an interface between MicroVAX application programs
and microcode being executed in the KMVlA Controller's microprocessor. The communication includes data transfer and the
transfer of command, control, and status information to and from
the KMVlA Controller. The driver provides the mechanism to
load microcode from the host into the KMVlA Controller and to
initialize the microcode.
KMVlA MicroVAX Driver consists of the KMVlA driver, an
installation verification program, and a demonstration program.
Features include initialization of KMVlA microcode, the capability to up-line dump the memory contents of the KMVlA Controller RAM to host memory, a QIO-based interface for communications between the MicroVAX host and the KMVlA Controller,
and memory mapped control of the host area for DMA data
transfer to and from the KMVlA Controller. KMVlA MicroVAX
Driver also allows full duplex data transmission between the host
and the KMVlA Controller at up to 64K bps and host
error-logging of detected KMVlA errors.

Software and Services

9.55

.Device Drivers
KM~,lA MicroVAX Driver ~nil Dev~op
SPD: 28.26
UPI: VCR

KMVlA Controller's communication line. The microcode can be
configured at the user's option to execute the data link level of
the X.25 communications protocol or to provide an HDLC framing capability.

KMVlA MicroVAX Driver and Development Tools consists of
two components: a driver to control communication between a
MicroVAX host and a KMVlA -Programmable Communications
Controller, and development tools to facilitate the programming
of the KMVlA Controller for custom telecommunications
applications.

The link level option provided by the microcode performs processing of the data link level of the X.25 protocol in conformance
with the 1980 CCITT X.25 Recommendation pertaining to Link
Access Procedure. Functions provided through the link level
processing include data framing, frame header generation, error
checking, and retransmission of erroneous frames.

The driver provides a mechanism for communication between a
MicroVAX host and the KMVlA Programmable Commu~ications
Controller. It controls communication by providing an interface
between MicroVAX application programs and microcode being
executed in the KMVlA Controller's microprocessor. The communication includes data transfer and the transfer of command,
control, and status information to and from the KMVlA Controller. The driver also provides the mechanism to load microcode
from the MicroVMS host into the KMVlA Controller and to initialize the microcode.

The HDLC framing option provides a subset of the link level
processing capability. Framing is done in conformance with the
ISO 3309 Standard for HDLC frame generation and recognition.

The driver consists of three components: the KMVlA driver, the
installation verification program, and a demonstration program.
The development tools provide utilities for developing telecommunications microcode for a KMVlA Programmable Communications Controller installed on a MicroVAX II host. The microcode
developed with the utilities is executed in the microprocessor of
the KMVlA Controller to provide a layered telecommunications
protocol application on the host system. The utilities include a
generation procedure to assemble and link the user-written
microcode, a debugger to permit the interactive debugging of the
microcode, and a dump analyzer to provide a formatted printout
of KMVlA and microcode data structures.

In addition to these utilities, the tools include a tools demonstration program and an installation verification program. The tools
demonstration program includes KMVlA microcode and hostbased software. The demonstration microcode provides an example of an effective microcode interface. The host-based portion of
the demonstration program provides an example of application
software that communicates with the demonstration microcode in
the KMVlA Controller through the ·KMVlA driver. The installation verification program validates that the tools have been
installed properly on the host system.

SPD: 28.27
UPI: VCQ
KMVlA MicroVAX Driver and X.25 Link Level Software consists
of a driver to control communication between a MicroVAX host
and a KMVlA Programmable Communications Controller; and
KMVlA microcode and host-based software, which allow the
KMVl A Controller either to process the data link level of the
X.25 communications protocol or to perform HDLC framing.
The driver controls communication by providing an interface
between MicroVAX application programs and microcode being
executed in the KMVlA Controller's microprocessor. The communication includes data transfer and the transfer of command,
control, and status information to and from the KMVlA Controller. The driver also loads microcode from the MicroVAX host
into the KMVlA Controller and initializes the microcode.
The driver consists of three major components: the KMVlA
driver, the installation verification program, and a demonstration
program.
The X.25 link level component provides X.25-based communications capability and includes microcode, which is down-line
loaded into the memory of the KMVlA Controller. The microcode is executed by the KMVlA Controller's microprocessor to
control and process data transmission between the driver and the

9.56

Software and Services

The X.25 link level component also includes a sample host program, a tracing utility, and an installation verification program.

SPD: 30.88
UPI: VW9
KMVlA VMS RMJ Link Level Software consists of KMVlA microcode that allows the KMVlA Controller to process the data link
level of the RMJ communications protocol. This KMVlA firmware
operates with the KMVlA MicroVAX Driver, which must be
installed before the KMVlA VMS RMJ Link Level Software can
be operated.

RM] Link Level Software provides an RMj communications capability to the KMVlA Programmable Communications Controller.
RM] Link Level Software is microcode that is downline loaded
into the memory of the KMVlA Controller. The microcode is
executed by the KMVlA Controller's microprocessor to control
and process data transmission between the driver and the
KMVlA Controller's communication line.
The RMJ link level protocol operated by the microcode performs
processing of the data link level of the RMJ protocol in conformance with the 1986, RMJ Securities Corporation, Specification for
the Digital Switching Service. The functions provided through
the link level processing include data framing, frame header recognition, error checking, and transmission of acknowledgments
for correctly received frames and transmission of negative
acknowledgments for incorrectly received frames.
The microcode included in the RMJ Link Level Software product
is downline loaded into the memory of the KMVlA Controller by
the driver. When executed by the controller's microprocessor, the
microcode provides three major functions: communication with
the MicroVAX host via the driver, execution of the data link level
of the RMJ protocol, and communication with the KMVlA Controller's serial communication line.

SPD: 30.46
UPI: VJ4
LCGOl Software is a downline loadable file used with the LCGOl
Color Printing System. It is loaded into the LCGOl by any standard EIA-232, 20ma, or EIA-422 serial port supporting XON/
XOFF protocol. Once the software is loaded, the LCGOl can
process serial protocols including ASCII text, ReGIS (Remote
Graphics Instruction Set), GIDIS (General Image Display Instruction Set), NAPLPS (North American Presentation Level Protocol
Syntax), and color sixel.
All valid commands in these protocols are accepted. Only those
commands applicable to a hardcopy, noninteractive device are
acted upon.
Files can be transferred to the LCGOl using the standard system
PRINT utility and the system print queues.

Device Drivers

SPD: 29.25
UPI: OAP
MicroVMS/ DRQ3B Device Driver (HXDRIVER) supports the
DRQ3B interface, which is a general purpose 16 bit parallel interface between the MicroVAX Q-bus and a user's peripheral. The
DRQ3B, under driver control, is capable of performing double
buffered direct memory access (DMA) using the block mode
capabilities of the Q-bus to provide high bandwidth data transfers. The DRQ3B interface also has 512 word FIFO (First In, First
Out) buffers on both the input and output ports to allow data to
be transferred while an interrupt service routine is setting up the
next buffer.

SPD: 25.Fl
UPI: VZH
MUXserver 300 Remote Terminal Server for ULTRIX is a wide
area terminal switch for Ethernet Local Area Networks. It has
been designed to support interactive asynchronous terminal users,
using data compression, background priority, and statistical multiplexing to optimize the network performance.
In general, the MUXserver/ DECmux 300 provides the same terminal services to a remote workgroup as the DECserver products
give to local users.
A MUXserver/ DECmux 300 network provides a convenient
method to connect workgroups of remotely located asynchronous
terminals, printers, and computers to each other and to one or
more service nodes (hosts) on an Ethernet.

SPD: 25.E9
UPI: VT7
MUXserver 300 Remote Terminal Server for VMS is a wide area
terminal switch for Ethernet Local Area Networks. It has been
designed to support interactive asynchronous terminal users,
using data compression, background priority, and statistical multiplexing to optimize the network performance.
In general, the MUXserver/ DECmux 300 provides the same terminal services to a remote workgroup as the DECserver products
give to local users.
A MUXserver/ DECmux 300 network provides a convenient
method to connect workgroups of remotely located asynchronous
terminals, printers, and computers to each other and to one or
more service nodes (hosts) on an Ethernet.

SPD: 32.94
UPI: YWL
MUXserver 320/ 380 Remote Terminal Server is a wide area terminal switch for Ethernet Local Area Networks. It has been
designed to support interactive asynchronous terminal users,
using data compression, background priority, and statistical multiplexing to optimize the network performance.
When used in conjunction with a DECmux 300, the MUXserver
320/ 380 provides concurrent Local Area Transport (LAT) and
INTERNET (Telnet/TCP /IP) support to enable connectivity to

host systems that utilize LAT or INTERNET protocols. The
INTERNET protocol suite is used to connect to UNIX host systems and other host systems that support the INTERNET protocol
suite. In general, the MUXserver 320/380/ DECmux 300 provides
the same terminal services to a remote workgroup as the
DECserver products give to local users.

SPD: 29.23
UPI: VCC
PBXserver is an Ethernet-based terminal server. It links to Digital
PBXs through a European-standard 30-channel interface and
allows terminals connected to a terminal adapter/ telephone set to
use VMS host services on Ethernet through the PBX and its associated building wiring.
The interface between PBXserver and the PBX runs at 2.048M
bps. It is called ECMA S2 interface, based on the ISDN primary
rate interface, 30B+D, and carries 30 data communications simultaneously. It is fully described by a set of ECMA standards, based
on the CCITT recommendation for ISDN.
The terminal user has to establish a connection to PBXserver by
dialing in through the terminal adapter/telephone set and the
PBX. Once connected to PBXserver, the user has the same general functionality as a user of the DECserver terminal servers. The
dial-in procedure is PBX-specific.
The reason for using a PBX for terminal access to services on
Ethernet is to have a higher number of potential users than
actual users: a concentration factor of between 5:1 and 3:1 is
reasonable for an office environment.
The PBXserver software is down-line loaded into PBXserver hardware from a VAX host system running DECnet-VAX. Users may
then access Ethernet-based MicroVAX VMS host services through
LAT protocol.
User interfaces are provided to the terminal user and to the
privileged user (system manager). PBXserver supports the simultaneous operation of up to 30 asynchronous terminals, including
keyboard send-receive (KSR-) printers and PCs.
Features include XON/XOFF flow control between the terminal
and PBXserver that can be dynamically enabled or disabled;
switching to different host services from the LOCAL prompt of
PBXserver without having to redial the connection through the
PBX; access control by group codes, limiting accessibility of certain hosts to terminals; and direct inward dialing through the
PBX for fast connection to a host service.

SPD: 27.98
UPI: VCJ
VAX DECscan VMS and ELN Bitbus Drivers provides a hardware
and software link between the Q-bus series of MicroVAX processors and the Intel Bitbus. It allows for communication between
users in a MicroVAX host and multidropped devices and software
tasks running on those devices (nodes) adhering to Bitbus protocol. This product set consists of a MicroVAX VMS driver, a
VAXELN driver, and an 8044 cross assembler and support
utilities.
(Continued)

Software and Services

9.57

Device Drivers
VAX DECscan VMS and ELN Bitbus Drivers (Continued)
The MicroVAX VMS driver, along with a user interface program,
allows the user to access a Bitbus system through a program or
interactively with the MicroVMS operating system. The user interface lets the user configure the system and test its responses for
calibration purposes. VAX DECscan allows the user to obtain and
monitor realtime data.
The VAXELN driver allows the user to build finished VAXELN
systems on VMS or Micro VMS host systems, using the VAXELN
toolkit. The finished VAXELN system is then downloaded to
MicroVAX target systems, where it runs without the presence of
another operating system. VAXELN is especially suited to creating
realtime applications. The ELN target systems can be diskless and
downloaded via Ethernet using DECnet services and protocols or
permanently resident in the ELN target systems using EPROMs
(erasable, programmable, read-only memories) .
The 8044 cross assembler and support utilities allows the user to
develop application tasks on the VMS host system, to run on
8044-based Bitbus nodes. When using the DECscan MicroVMS
driver, these remote node tasks are downloaded directly to and
run on the Bitbus nodes. When using the DECscan ELN driver,
these remote tasks are included in the finished VAXELN system
that is downloaded to the MicroVAX target system. The finished
VAXELN system then downloads the remote Bitbus tasks to run
on the Bitbus nodes.

SPD: 25.88
UPI: S32
VAX DT07 software allows the VMS operating system user to
electronically connect the switchable UNIBUS, together with all
attached peripherals, to the user's system. When the DT07 is
connected, the switched peripherals operate as if they were permanently attached to that system. When the DT07 is disconnected, the switched peripherals are removed and are then available for connection to another system. Up to four systems can
share a single switched UNIBUS via the DT07.
VAX DT07 consists of two separate parts: a Driver and a Bus
Switch Manager. The Driver maintains control of the DT07,
monitors its activities, supports the connect and disconnect functions, and handles associated system-level housekeeping tasks for
each processor. The Bus Switch Manager provides a link between
the user and the DT07 Driver. The Bus Switch Manager also
maintains information regarding users that are currently using the
switched UNIBUS and the status of operations performed in controlling the switched UNIBUS.

SPD: 25.]9
UPI: VUR
VAX Genius Driver supports the IGQll interface, which provides
a hardware link between the MicroVAX Q-bus and the GE-Fanuc
Genius I/O bus. The IGQll , under driver control, is capable of
communicating, through a dual ported memory, to GE-Fanuc
Genius I/O connected to the IGQll. All communication with the
IGQll interface (IGQll-xx) is through driver calls. VAX Genius
Driver provides the standard operating system QIO interface to
the IGQll-xx.

j
0

SPD: 26.04
UPI: 128
VAX KCT32 is a software and firmware package that provides
VMS support for the KCT32 hardware communication option. It
allows users to implement custom communication applications.
Users can program the KCT32 communication lines for bit/byte

9.58

Software and Services

synchronous or asynchronous transmission and reception using
the standard Digital PDP-11 Instruction Set. When used with the
KCT32 hardware and user-written communication application,
VAX KCT32 allows the VMS host processor to perform highspeed, multiline communication functions .
Software features include the VMS general-purpose driver; downline loading of the KCT32 user-developed communication; KCT32
status and statistics; full duplex driver operation; UETP (User
Environment Test Program); IVP (Installation Verification Program); and integrated support of the UETP, IVP, and level 2R
diagnostic in the VMS driver. The driver is full duplex, maintains
internal queues, and supports up to four KCT32's concurrently.
The KCT32 firmware consists of system support modules upon
which users can build and debug custom communication applications. The support modules consist of the KCT32 executive;
modem control, baud rate generator, and CSR interfaces; timer
functions; KCT32 front-end I/O processor interface; KCT32 ODT
type debugger interface; DMA interfaces; and onboard selectable
interface for EIA-422/449, EIA-423, and EIA-232.

NAX: KMSl 1-BD/BE HOLCIBSC FranUn
SPD: 2655
UPI: 920
VAX KMSll-BD/BE HDLC/BSC Framing Software consists of a
VMS software driver and firmware for the KMSll-BD/BE, which
allow VMS users to build and implement custom or standard
communication protocol without having to program the
KMS 11-BD/BE.
The KMSll-BD/BE firmware provides the HDLC or BISYNCH
(BSC) framing of the data, as well as the DMA between the
KMS 11-BD/ BE and VAX host. This capability reduces the host of
processor overhead associated with character interrupt devices.
The host is no longer interrupted on each character that is transmitted or received and does not have the software overhead associated with determining what to do with each character as it is
received or transmitted. Rather, an interrupt is generated on a
message transmitted or received basis, and processing then takes
place on the entire message.
The driver is the interface that allows the user to transmit or
receive command, control, or message data between VMS users,
the KMSll-BD/BE firmware, and the remote end of the communication line. The software driver for the KMSll-BD/BE provides
the interface that allows the VMS user to send or receive
messages for various protocols in the VMS host. Those messages
are then sent or received via DMA from KMSll -BD/BE
HDLC/BISYNCH Framing Software.
The purpose of the KMSll-BD/BE firmware is to provide the
basic HDLC or BISYNCH line framing of the messages received
or to be transmitted from the VAX host using a DMA device. It
is the responsibility of a host application program (not supplied
with this software) to provide the protocol line control. This
program can be written in a higher level language that is supported on VMS systems.

VA.x KMS11-BD/BE X.25 Link Level Software
SPD: 25.80
UPI: 757
VAX KMSll-BD/BE X.25 Link Level Software is a package of
X.25 Level 2 firmware plus a VMS device driver for the
KMSll-BD/ BE X.25 Link Level Software. The driver, in conjunction with the X.25 Level 2 firmware and KMSll-BD/BE hardware, allows the VAX VMS processor to perform high-speed, multiline synchronous communication in a point-to point
environment.
(Continued)

Device Drivers

The primary purpose of the driver is to allow command, control,
and data information to be communicated between VMS users,
KMSU-BD/BE firmware, and the remote end of a communication
line.

Translator software allows users to print documents on the
ScriptPrinter or LN03 Image Laser Printer with graphic protocols
other than the native language of the printer by translating the
designated protocol into PostScript. At print time, the translators
are invoked by the print symbiont through the IPARAMETERS
switch of the PRINT command or by submission to a translator-specific queue.

SPD: 31.52
UPI: GXZ

The translators provided convert ANSI text and sixel graphics
compatible with the LN03 into PostScript. PostScript tools
include a PostScript error handler, which prints the last partial
page of output as well as information to help identify the error.

VAX KMSll-BD/BE X.25 Link Level Software (Continued)

VAX LN03 Image Support Software consists of a VMS device
driver for the LN03 Image printer and associated MD300 scanner.
The software also includes a PostScript library used exclusively
by VAX ScriptPrinter Software.
Calls are made to the PostScript library from VAX ScriptPrinter
Software to convert PostScript data into bit-mapped data capable
of being printed by the LN03 Image printer.

SPD: 26.23
UPI: S33
VAX PCL is an optional software product that supports interprocessor communications through the PCLl 1 hardware option.
The VAX PCL driver provides a message-oriented data communications capability between user software located in up to 16
processors linked into a local area network by the PCLl 1 multidropped parallel bus. A user-oriented message of variable length
can be directed to any single receiving node during each transmission transaction. Both VAX and PDP-11 processors can be
combined on the same PCLl 1 local network. The VAX PCL
driver is compatible with the PCL-UM driver for the RSX-UM
operating system.
The VAX PCL driver also supports interprocessor communications through the DECnet-VAX network software package. The
PCLl 1 hardware and VAX PCL driver supports the features of
DECnet-VAX except down-line loading. Mixed networks of VAX
and RSX-UM DECnet nodes can be implemented.
VAX PCL is provided as source code only.

SPD: 27.84
UPI: VF9
VAX ScriptPrinter Software is a layered product required by suitably configured VMS systems to access the ScriptPrinter (LN03R)
and the LN03 Image Laser Printer (LN03Q). VAX ScriptPrinter
Software consists of a print symbiont that processes print
requests from the host on which it resides; translators that convert ANSI text and sixel graphics, ReGIS, Tektronix 4010/4014,
and DDIF bitonal image files into the PostScript language; and a
series of PostScript tools for creator software support. ScriptPrinters connected to a DECserver must have the ScriptPrinter
software installed on each system that will provide distributed
print services to its users.
Print symbiont command parameters include data type, messages,
lay-up definition, number up, page limit, page orientation, page
size, sheet size, and sheet count. The /SETUP qualifier sends
specified modules from a device control library to the printer.
These modules can be encoded in either ANSI or PostScript.

SPD: 27.09
UPI: 187
VAX TU70/72 Device Driver is an integration product that allows
the use of TU70 or TU72 tape transports in an environment
consisting of VAX, DECsystem-10, and DECSYSTEM-20 systems.
The driver forms an interface between the VMS operating system
and the tape subsystem that allows users to access these tape
transports as they would any other VMS tape device. The driver
performs hardware-specific functions for tape positioning, tape
read/write, user mode diagnostic support, and error logging.
Features include tape positioning and read and write functions
compatible with other VMS tape equipment; full support fo r VMS
utility programs such as BACKUP and COPY; hardware error
reporting through the ERP program; automatic load of DX20
microcode at startup and provision for operator-initiated reload;
and assistance in managing a dual-ported configuration through a
special operator program.

SPD: 29.64
UPI: VAW
VAX Wide Area Network Device Drivers contains the VMS
device drivers for Digital's synchronous communications options.
VAX Wide Area Network Device Drivers includes device drivers
that are reserved for use by Digital software products and device
drivers that offer a supported user interface. The device drivers
support full duplex and half duplex operation. DDCMP and
SDLC device drivers support point-to-point and multipoint tributary operation.
The maximum permitted line speed is dependent on the line
interface standard used and must not exceed l 9.2K bps for an
RS232/V.24 standard interface. There may be additional line
speed restrictions for other line interface standards. Data
throughput over the synchronous lines is dependent on user .
applications and the system environment. The device drivers support modem control signal operation.

SPD: 28.31
VAXELN Ethernet Driver/Switch is a VAXELN Driver program
that supports VAXELN application software programs that
require access to a DEQNA data communications controller. The
program supports two Ethernet Local Area Networks (LANs)
connected to a MicroVAX II running VAXELN Toolkit.
(Continued)

The print symbiont also supplies accounting information for each
print job, including sheets of paper printed, the number of RMS
that get to the user's files in the print job, and the number of
QIO writes over the network to the print server.

Software and Services

9.59

Device Drivers
VAXELN Ethernet Driver/Switch (Continued)
The VAXELN Ethernet Driver/Switch software supports one
active DEQNA data communications controller at a time. The
major features or functions provided by the program include user
commands when Ethernet Local Area Network (LAN) is active,
and transmission and reception of network data messages across
the Ethernet switch. Controller switching operations are transparent to higher network protocol (DECnet) layers.

v AXELN KMVlA Support Soft\vate Pack~ge,t t
SPD: 28.35
UPI: Z71
VAXELN KMVlA Support Software Package consists of a
VAXELN KMVlA driver program and a VAXELN KMVlA
high-level language interface library that facilitates the development of MicroVAX applications that utilize microprogrammed
KMVlA product-supported radar and communications protocols.
KMVlA Support Software Package supports EPascal application
programs.
Driver and library support includes loading KMVlA microprograms from mass storage into KMVll memory, starting and
stopping KMVlA microprogrammed execution, realtime response
to KMVlA microprogrammed events, simultaneous support for
up to 16 KMVlA devices, KMVlA list/ buffer definition and creation, and an online message error facility for status code
translation.

VAXELN KMVlA Tool Kit
SPD: 29.17
UPI: OJP
VAXELN KMVlA Tool Kit allows the development of KMVlA
control programs for KMVlAs in MicroVAX VAXELN systems.
This package includes software that creates KMVlA control program images on a VAX host system, VAXELN KMVlA Load and
Dump Programs, and a KMVlA network Debug package that
allows the testing and debugging of KMVlA control programs
from a VAX host system. VAXELN KMVlA Tool Kit is designed
to operate with the VAXELN Toolkit and the VMS RSX Emulation products. This product features automated KMVlA control
program image generation, a KMVlA Load Program, a KMVlA
Dump Program, and remote debugging.
The KMVlA Load Program includes loading KMVlA control programs from local or network mass storage, loading the KMVlA
Debugger into KMVlA, and using a Master Clear KMVlA option.
KMVlA Dump Program includes application program commands
for stopping and dumping of KMVlA for realtime snapshot of
KMVlA state, dumped material stored in local or network mass
storage, and dumped material examined with the standard VMS
Dump/ Analyze Program.
Remote Debugging includes network debugging. The host VAX
system must have Ethernet connection to a MicroVAX with
KMVlA installed. The debug strategy follows the VAXELN Network Debug model. An operator interface program executes on
the VAX host system. VAXELN Debug Server Program operates a
communications channel through the MicroVAX in which KMVlA
is installed. The Debug Server connects the operator interface on

9.60

Software and Services

the Ethernetted VAX system through Ethernetted MicroVAX to
KMVlA. The KMVlA Debug Service module executes in KMVlA
to provide ODT-type debugging. This Debug Service module can
be linked into a KMVlA control program or loaded into KMVlA
independently.

SPD: 25.45
UPI: S28
VSll-VAX Driver provides all the VO services required for communication between a VAX host and a VSll graphics subsystem.
VSll-VAX Driver enables the user to communicate with the VSll
using the QIO executive directive in a MACRO assembly language
program or a VAX FORTRAN program.
Features include execution of a display file containing VSllspecific graphics instructions; on-demand use of an auxiliary
memory segment that contains VSll instructions, providing
extended addressing to the VS 11; reading back of the four VS 11
device registers; execution of STOP/ RESUME display file; waiting
for an interrupt that will be generated when the VSll joystick
switch is pressed; and specifying the QIO complete time-out
parameter for display file execution QIOs.

SPD: 25.F9
UPI: VHU
X25portal 2000 provides the facilities necessary to implement an
X.25-based connection-oriented network service across a DECnet
backbone network and provides packet switching exchange facilities over this network. The system allows local switching of X.25
SVCs inside the system; has DTE to X25portal 2000 node address
resolution, which makes use of the VAX Distributed Name Service (DNS); provides virtual circuit accounting; traces protocol
messages sent or received by the X25portal 2000; logs events to
any designated VMS sink node; and acts as a DECnet Phase IV
end-node.
The system is a combination of the DEC MicroServer (DEMSA)
communications server and software. Major features of the complete system are synchronous line capabilities; X.25 capabilities;
network and configuration management capabilities; accounting
features; security features; network and configuration management, using the DECnet Network Control Program (NCP) from
any DECnet IV node; and support of a wide range of optional
X.25 facilities.

SPD: 28.86
UPI: VIA
X25Router 2000 is a communications product that provides routing and X.25 communications services for a Local Area Network
(LAN). It allows communications with nodes outside the LAN
within a Wide Area Network (WAN). By using X25router 2000,
the routing load on other nodes on the LAN is reduced, releasing
resources for other applications.

Graphics
The user can control multiple simultaneous views of the same
object on separate display surfaces, as well as the position of the
picture on the surface. For example, one application program can
display on a workstation an image of a cube in one window, and
at the same time in another window (on another workstation if
required), display a detail of the rear of the cube.

CADRA-VIEW for VMS
SPD: 33.88
UPI: GFY
GG 1 (View only)
GG3 (DXF interface)
GG5 (ADT interface)
GG7 (IGES)
GLW (Translators)
CADRA-VIEW for VMS is a software product which provides the
capability of sharing CADRA-III drawings with other individuals
in the organization. It provides a low-cost solution for view-only
and red-lining requirements in support of concurrent engineering
environments without altering the master drawing file. It provides
query capabilities regarding geometric properties and supports
industry standard interfaces such as DXF, IGES and Raster files.
In addition, it supports HPGL and PostScript output including
red-lining additions.

CDD/Administrator for 41MS

VFY (Runtime)

DEC GKS-3D for VMS provides the application programmer with
a set of functions for interactive and non-interactive computer
graphics applications that need to define and display computer
generated three-dimensional pictures using a variety of computer
graphic equipment. DEC GKS-3D as a development tool is a solid
base for portable, device independent, three-dimensional graphics
application development.
DEC GKS-3D (Graphical Kernel System for Three Dimensions) is
a subroutine library packaged as a VMS Run Time Library with
shareable image device handlers.

SPD: 32.72
UPI: YP8
CDDIAdministrator for VMS is a DECwindows Motif based, fully
customizable, graphical management tool for CDD/Repository. It
allows persons who manage or administer repositories to locate,
query, manipulate, manage, and report on objects stored in
CDD/Repository through a graphical interface.

DEC GKS-3D for 'ULTRIX

DEC GKS-3D implements the International Standard (IS 8805)
Graphical Kernel System for three-dimensional deviceindependent graphics. DEC GKS 3D conforms to level 2c of the
GKS-3D International Standard. Thus it provides full output
capabilities, including workstation independent segment storage
(level 2), and full input capabilities (synchronous and asynchronous input (level K)).
DEC GKS-3D is upwardly compatible with Digital Equipment
Co~oration's DEC GKS (two-dimensional Graphical Kernel System). Two-dimensional graphics applications, written to conform
to the ISO standard, will run without change using DEC GKS-3D.

SPD: 30.93
UPI: VX3 (VAX development)
VX4 (VAX runtime)
VXl (RISC development)
VX2 (RISC runtime)

SPD: 25.D2
UPI: VFX (Development)

DEC GKS-3D for ULTRIX (Graphical Kernel System r Three
Dimensions) provides the application programmer with a set of
functions for interactive and non-interactive computer graphics
applications that define and display computer generated three
dimensional pictures using a variety of computer graphics equipment. DEC GKS-3D, as a development tool, is a solid base for
portable, device-independent, three dimensional graphics application development.

DEC GKS-3D allows the user to specify views of 3D objects and
define the working coordinate system (world coordinates). World
coordinates can have any scale. For example, one application
might have a maximum range from 0 to 1000.0 while another
application might limit the range from 0.01 to 0.1.

DEC GKS-3D is a subroutine library packaged as a linkable object
library for ULTRIX.

The user can also control multiple simultaneous views of the
same object on separate display surfaces, as well as the position
of the picture on the surface. For example, one application program can display an image of a cube in one window on a workstation and at the same time in another window (on another
workstation if required) it can display a detail of the rear of the
~ube all from the same application program.

DEC GKS-3D implements the International Standard ISO (ISO
8805) Graphical Kernel System for Three Dimensional deviceindependent graphics. DEC GKS 3D conforms to level 2c of the
GKS-3D International Standard. Thus, it provides full output
capabilities including workstation independent segment storage
(level 2) and full input capabilities, synchronous and asynchronous input (level c).

DEC GKS-3D provides an interface to sequential files, the ISO
suggested GKS-3D Metafile for filing graphical information. The
Metafile can be used for the following purposes; transporting
graphical information between systems with compatible versions
of GKS-3D, transporting graphical information from one DEC
GKS-3D application to another, and storing accompanying nongraphical information.

DEC GKS-3D is upward compatible with Digital Equipment Corporation's DEC GKS (two dimensional Graphical Kernel System)
in the limit of the GKS 3D standard required upwards compatibility with the GKS standard. Two dimensional GKS graphics
applications, written to conform to the ISO standard, will run
without change using DEC GKS-3D.

DEC GKS-3D provides support for storing two-dimensional views
of three-dimensional objects encoded in Digital's Document
Interchange Format (DDIF). Views stored in DDIF may be then
processed by applications which conform to Digital's Compound
Document Architecture.

DEC GKS-3D provides an escape mechanism which allows the
application programmer to access device capabilities not defined
in the GKS standard.

DEC GKS-3D provides support for VMS DECwindows.

(Continued)

Software and Services

9.61

Graphics
DEC GKS-3D for VMS (Continued)
In DEC GKS-3D, text lies on a plane which may be arbitrarily
positioned in 3D space.
DEC GKS-3D provides support for a wide variety of Digital and
non-Digital graphics output devices and support for Digital
VAXstations as input and output devices.
DEC GKS-3D provides control functions for managing the manner and devices on which pictures will be displayed. These
include GKS-3D initialization and termination, and functions that
control the opening and closing of logical graphical devices. It
also provides a complete set of inquiry functions which aid in
developing modular, device-independent programs.
The DEC GKS-3D Run-Time license does not allow the user to
create new applications, but rather allows execution of applications that were previously developed using the full DEC GKS-3D
Developer's Kit.

chical graphics data. DEC PHIGS for ULTRIX manages the organization and display of graphical data stored in a conceptually
centralized database.
DEC PHIGS for ULTRIX is Digital Equipment Corporation's
implementation of the 1988 ANSI/ ISO PHIGS standard for three
dimensional (3D) device independent graphics. DEC PHIGS for
ULTRIX provides the standard FORTRAN and C language bindings as well as a language-independent (PHIGS$) binding. DEC
PHIGS for ULTRIX is supported on most Digital processors running the UL TRIX operating system.
DEC PHIGS for UL TRIX is device independent. That is, the same
program can generate graphical output on different devices without modification to the source code. DEC PHIGS for UL TRIX
supports DECwindows (UWS). DEC PHIGS for ULTRIX also supports most of the hardcopy devices supported by DEC GKS, such
as the HPGL series of plotters and Digital's compatible sixel
devices, as well as all the terminals supported by DEC GKS.
DEC PHIGS for UL TRIX is packaged as a linkable object library.

SPD: 26.20
UPI: 810 (Development)
811 (Runtime)
DEC GKS for VMS provides the application programmer with a
single interface to a variety of graphic devices. DEC GKS for VMS
is a development tool that application programmers can use to
produce computer generated pictures. DEC GKS for VMS is a
solid base for portable, device independent two-dimensional
graphics application development.
DEC GKS for VMS is a subroutine library packaged as a set of
VMS shareable images, which implements the ISO (ISO 7942) and
ANSI (ANSI X3.124-1985) GKS standard for two-dimensional
(2D) device-independent graphics. DEC GKS for VMS conforms
to level 2c of the GKS standard which provides full output capabilities, including workstation independent segment storage (level
2), and full input capabilities (synchronous and asynchronous
input (level c). DEC GKS for VMS supports DECwindows.

SPD: 34.47
UPI: GL9
DEC Image Utility Library for VMS (IUL) provides a basic set of
application-callable subroutines for use in the transport and display of CCITT compressed bitonal images between an X client
and X server. The IUL subroutines are an applicationprogrammer interface to an X Image Extension (XIE) server. XIE
has been proposed to the MIT X consortium as an image extension to the X protocol.
DEC IUL is intended to be used as embedded subroutines within
applications constructed to include control of the display of
images on video devices that are compliant with the proposed
XIE standard.
The DEC IUL capabilities supply an application interface with an
underlying implementation that extends the XLIB facilities of the
host system with an extension of library facilities called XIELIB.
In addition, IUL provides routines that aid in the integration of
image applications with the host system environments.

SPD: 25.K7
UPI: VW6 (Development)
VW7 (Runtime)
DEC PHIGS for ULTRIX (Programmers Hierarchical Interactive
Graphics System) is a sophisticated 3D graphics support system
that controls the definition, modification, and display of hierar-

9.62

Software and Services

SPD: 29.38
UPI: OKB (Development)
VKl (Runtime)
DEC PHIGS for VMS (Programmers Hierarchical Interactive
Graphics System) for VMS is a sophisticated 3D graphics support
system that controls the definition, modification, and display of
hierarchical graphics data. DEC PHIGS for VMS manages the
organization and display of graphical data stored in a conceptually centralized database.
DEC PHIGS for VMS is Digital Equipment Corporation's implementation of the 1988 ANSI/ISO PHIGS standard for three
dimensional (3D) device independent graphics. DEC PHIGS for
VMS provides the standard FORTRAN and C language bindings
as well as a language-independent (PHIGS$) binding. DEC PHIGS
for VMS is supported on most Digital processors running the
VMS operating system.
DEC PHIGS for VMS is device independent. That is, the same
program can generate graphical output on different devices without modification to the source code. DEC PHIGS for VMS supports either DECwindows or VMS Workstation Software (VWS).
DEC PHIGS for VMS also supports most of the hardcopy devices
supported by DEC GKS, such as the HPGL series of plotters and
Digital's compatible sixel devices, as well as all the terminals
supported by DEC GKS.
DEC PHIGS for VMS is a subroutine library packaged as a set of
shareable images which the application program is linked against.
The shareable images are activated at run-time as needed.

SPD: 33.78
UPI: GE8
DEC VUIT (Visual User Interface Tool) for ULTRIX Systems is an
interactive WYSIWYG style (What-You-See-Is-What-You-Get)
editor for building Motif application interfaces. It is intended for
developers experienced in constructing interfaces using Motif or
similar windowing systems.
DEC VUIT provides a direct manipulation interface to the
OSF/Motif User Interface Language (UIL). DEC VUIT also provides an environment that supports rapid development of graphical user interfaces that are compliant with OSF/Motif. Prototype
(Continued)

Graphics
DEC VUIT (Visual User Interface Tool) for ULTRIX
Systems (Continued)
interfaces can be tested, quickly modified based on end-user
input, and fed directly into the development stream. Since DEC
VUIT generates industry-standard OSF/Motif UIL, not a proprietary presentation description language, the interface built using
DEC VUIT is portable to any other platform that supports the
OSF/Motif environment.
DEC VUIT enables developers to build the interface visually
instead of writing code. During editing, it uses inherent knowledge of widget properties and parent-child relationships to
reduce runtime errors.

The software designer can select from one of two technique
libraries available in DECdesign to model their application;
Yourdon (with Ward Mellor extensions)/EER or Gane & Sarson/EER. The models are defined and manipulated using graphic
icons which represent the constructs of a chosen technique.
DECdesign, upon the user's request, will check for valid models
based upon predefined but differing rules for each technique.
DECdesign does not support validation of Ward-Mellor State
Transition Diagrams or State Tables. The process and data models are integrated in each of the two libraries through the sharing
of data definitions.

DEC V9J'f (Visual User In~~~ [ool) for V~ syifenis

SPD: 31.73
UPI: YF7

SPD: 32.09

DECimage Application Services for ULTRIX is a programmer
interface for basic image data type handling. It consists of
library-resident routines for scanning, viewing, printing, and
manipulating image data.

UPI: YHC
DEC VUIT (Visual User Interface Tool) for VMS Systems is an
interactive WYSIWYG style (What-You-See-Is-What-You-Get)
editor for building Motif application interfaces. It is intended for
developers experienced in constructing interfaces using Motif or
similar windowing systems.

Application Services enables application developers and systems
integrators to handle bitonal, gray scale (photographic), and RGB
(red, green, blue) color image data as they develop applications
that deal concurrently with image, text, and graphics. Routines
provide C language bindings and include examples in C. The
programmer productivity tools offer a consistent interface that
conforms to MIT C bindings and routine names for source code
transportability.

DEC VUIT provides a direct manipulation interface to the
OSF/Motif User Interface Language (UIL). DEC VUIT also provides an environment that supports rapid development of graphical user interfaces that are compliant with OSF/Motif. Prototype
interfaces can be tested, quickly modified based on end-user
input, and fed directly into the development stream. Since DEC
VUIT generates industry-standard OSF/Motif UIL, not a proprietary presentation description language, the interface built using
DEC VUIT is portable to any other platform that supports the
OSF/Motif environment.

Application Services complies with CCITT, Group III (lD and
2D) and Group IV (2D) (CCITT Standards T.4 and T.6) recommendations for bitonal (facsimile) image data compression
schemes; the X-Window standard; and the PostScript Language
Reference industry standard.

DEC VUIT enables developers to build the interface visually
instead of writing code. During editing, it uses inherent knowledge of widget properties and parent-child relationships to
reduce runtime errors.

This product features a condition handling facility (CHF) to provide error signaling that is portable between VMS and ULTRIX.
CHF provides one common interface for both VMS and ULTRIX
applications and includes message support services.

SPD: 29.29
UPI: XDl (Platform)
XAK (Yourdon technique)
XAL (Gane & Sarson technique)
XAM (MERISE technique)

Features include Image Input Services, which allows programmers to control an image input device and to acquire the image
data from that device. Image Services Library provides integrated
image data type support and core services for bitonal and continuous tone images. Image Display Services provide rendition and
presentation services for device independent image display for
applications.

DECdesign is a DECwindows-based, VMS-layered product that
graphically supports the analysis and design phase of the software
development life cycle. Graphics-based analysis and design models describe the application under development the way blueprints describe a building under construction.

SPD: 25.ES
UPI: 829

Software engineers using DECdesign can create, modify or reuse
these models to describe a software system according to the rules
of the modeling technique.

DECimage Application Services for VMS is a programmer interface for basic image data type handling. It consists of libraryresident routines for scanning, viewing, printing, and manipulating image data.

DECdesign supported modeling techniques are Y ourdon Structured Design and Gane & Sarson for process modeling, WardMellor extensions to Yourdon Structured Design for realtime
application modeling and Extended Entity Relationship (EER) for
data modeling.

Application Services is intended to enable application developers
and systems integrators to handle bitonal, gray scale (photographic), and RGB (red, green, blue) color image data as they
develop applications that deal concurrently with image, text, and
graphics.

On-line training and context sensitive help are included in
DECdesign.

The routines are language-independent and include examples in
BASIC, FORTRAN, and C. These programmer productivity tools
offer a consistent interface that conforms to the VAX-11 Procedure Calling and Condition Handling Standard or MIT C bindings and routine names for source code transportability.

DECdesign is a multiple-user system that supports concurrent
access, data security and permanent data storage.
DECdesign stores analysis and design models in libraries that
have the following functions: security, data storage, data sharing,
and design control.

(Continued)

Software and Services

9.63

Graphics
DECimage Application Services for VMS (Continued)
Application Services supports VMS DECwindows and complies
with CCITT, Group III (lD and 2D) and Group IV (2D) (CCITT
Standards T.4 and T.6) recommendations for bitonal (facsimile)
image data compression schemes; the X Window System standard; and the PostScript language reference industry standard. It
also complies with Digital's Imaging System Architecture (DISA) ,
Document Interchange Format (DDIF), and Compound Document Architecture.
Application Services features a condition handling facility (CHF)'
to provide error signaling that is portable between VMS and
UL TRIX. CHF provides one common interface for both VMS and
ULTRIX applications and includes messaging support services.

SPD: 34.24
UPI: GJF
DECimage Character Recognition Services for VMS is a set of
runtime services for the recognition and conversion of text information contained in bitonal images. Images can be scanned documents or existing bitonal image files. It provides a languageindependent programmable interface that is used in conjunction
with DECimage Application Services to develop image applications that include character recognition. DECimage Character
Recognition Services also provides the runtime environment for
these applications.
DECimage Character Recognition Services supports a subset of
the ISO LATIN 1 character set. It recognizes most common European languages and a broad range of fonts in a broad range of
font sizes. It converts recognized text into ASCII, DDIF, or PostScript format. Converted text can be used by text-based editors,
forms packages, indexing systems, and electronic mail.

SPD: 31.75
UPI: YFS
DECimage SCAN Software for ULTRIX is an application for the
capture of bitonal (black-and-white) images and the adjustment
of bitonal, grayscale, and RGB color images read in from DDIF
format image files. It scans, previews, adjusts images, and reads
and creates DDIF image files . Files created using the DECimage
SCAN Software can be used by other applications that operate on
DDIF image files .
The Scanner Set-up feature allows users to select the scanner,
contrast, brightness, resolution, page size, mode, scan framing,
window set-up, and units of measurement for framing and window set-up. Preview Image displays the image scaled to fit into
the preview window or magnified to display each pixel of the
scanned image. Edit functions include CROP, WASH, REVERSE,
ROTATE, and UNDO. File functions include SAVE AS, OPEN AS,
and CLIPBOARD. Customizing functions allow users to retain settings that customize the operation of DECimage SCAN.

SPD: 25.D4
UPI: YPF
DECimage SCAN Software for VMS is a DECwindows application
for the capture and adjustment of bitonal (black and white)
images using the MD300 Scanner and the adjustment of bitonal,
gray scale, and RGB color images read in from DDIF (Digital's
Document Interchange Format) format image files . Capabilities
include scan, preview, adjustment of images, reading and creating
DDIF image files, and mailing image files. Files created using the
SCAN Software can be used by other applications that operate on
image files in DDIF.

DECimage Character Recognition Services can process an entire
image for character recognition or specified regions of interest.

SPD: 31.22
UPI: 893 (Server)
SPD: 37.41
UPI: MBU (Runtime)
MBV (Development)
MBW (Client)
MBX (Server)
DECimage EXpress includes two components: DECimage EXpress
(Client and Server) and DECimage EXpress Application Development Environment.
DECimage EXpress is a ready to use and functional document
imaging system. This scaleable system is designed to operate as a
combination of specified hardware and software components. The
hardware portion includes VAX supported processors and client
support for PCs and Workstations (refer to the System Support
Addendum, SSA 37.41.00) and image capable Digital Equipment
Corporation X-Terminals. Using this combination, DECimage
EXpress delivers the ability to convert a paper based information
system to an online, image based information system. Among the
capabilities of DECimage EXpress are the basic document image
management functions of capture, index, storage, retrieval, distribution, and system management.
In addition, DECimage EXpress Application Development Environment is the VAX C callable application programming interface
that is used to extend the DECimage EXpress application system.
This functionality is provided by a set of routines used by the
DECimage EXpress System Administration, Data Storage, and
Document Indexing subsystems to access documents within
DECimage EXpress. This enables the user to tailor the end product to the specific situation at hand.
9.64

Software and Services

YGD (Client)
DECimage Storage Manager for VMS is the storage component of
the DECimage product set. This component provides centralized
storage and distributed access of image data. The DECimage
Storage Manager uses a client/ server approach, in which the
server software provides centralized storage capability and the
client software provides distributed access to the image data.
The server provides control of image access and client privileges
on the server, control of storage resources, transparent access to
the image data, and shutdown and restart capabilities.
The client software establishes and terminates sessions with a
server node; controls the physical location and access to image
objects; provides services to create new storage sets, attach to
existing storage sets, delete a storage set, and list the available
storage sets on a server node; and provides the ability to manipulate access control lists. The client software also provides func tions to create, retrieve, and delete image objects, as well as to
set and retrieve image attributes; and supports the movement of
images between storage devices.
DECimage Storage Manager is intended to be used with a database product. It provides a unique key for each image object
stored. This image key can be placed in a database to associate
application information with the stored image data. When an
application wants to retrieve the image, it retrieves the image key
from the database, then returns the image key to the client
software.

Graphics
DECpresent runs under ULTRIX DECwindows (included with
ULTRIX Operating System) and utilizes a graphical WYSIWYG
(What-You-See-Is-What-You-Get) interface. The WYSIWYG
interface displays the document on the screen closely simulating
how it will appear when printed.

DECmpp.Image Processing Library
SPD: 36.69
UPI: XT5 (License and documentation)
XT4 (Media)
DECmpp Image Processing Library is an optimized set of image
processing routines for the DECmpp 12000 Series systems. The
library ~up ports .the development of high performance image
processmg solutions on a fully programmable platform with a
symbolic, window-based, interactive, graphical, and networkdistributed development environment. Library routines are
directly callable from DECmpp Programming Language (DPL) .
!he DPL routines are callable from C or FORTRAN. The library
mclud~s routine~ for image ~rithmetic, low-level image processing
?peratio~s, and lffiage analysts, as well as a variety of utilities for
lffiage display, I/O, test image generation, and format .conversion.
The Image_Processing Library routines are written in DECmpp
Programmmg Language and have been tuned for optimal
perfon_nance. The library uses an internal virtualization strategy
(~app~ng ~->£ data elements to processors) that provides for configuration mdependence across the entire range of DECmpp
12000 Series systems.

DECpresent adheres to the DECwindows Style Guide and has the
same look and feel as other DECwindows applications.
DECpresent is compliant with Digital's Compound Document
Architecture (CDA), and can take advantage of the CDA converter architecture and system level support.

DECpr
SPD: 32.07
UPI: YHE
DECpresent for VMS is an application that enables users prepare
presentation materials quickly and easily. DECpresent provides a
complete set of features designed to automate and accelerate the
task of preparing and delivering a presentation using overhead
transparencies, 35mm slides, or the workstation display.
Presentation content or "slide shows" may be comprised of text,
graphics, images, charts and tables.

A consistent and well-defined calling interface and set of virtualization primitives allows users to extend the library by adding
new ro~tines . Additionally, this consistent interface provides a
foun dation for developing interactive image analysis systems
based on the library's primitives.

DECpresent offers an integrated outliner, table editor, text editor,
graphics editor, and color image editor. DECpresent includes
DECchart for data driven charting. DECpresent is a full-color
application.

Basic routines operate in a memory-to-memory fashion, with various utilities provided to move images to and from the file system.
~his allows developers to string together image operational pipelmes that work entirely in memory, avoiding I/O overhead typically associated with image processing software systems that use a
disk-to-disk model.

DECpresent includes productivity features for the creator of a
presentation. The Sorter View allows the user to view the presentation as a group of slides displayed in a reduced scale. Using the
Sorter View, it is easy to re-order the slides within a presentation
and to perf~rm common edits such as copy, delete, etc. Speaker
Notes permit the user to create and print a companion set of
notes.

DECpresent for ULTRIX

To help the user illustrate presentations, DECpresent includes an
Art Gallery. Users can visually preview, then select the artwork
from the Art Gallery directly into the presentation.

........~~~~--....___:,)

--~~~~~~~

SPD: 32.08
UPI: YHG
DECpresent for UL TRIX is an application which enables users to
prepare presentation materials quickly and easily. DECpresent
provides a complete set of features to automate and accelerate
the task of preparing and delivering a presentation using overhead transparencies, 35mm slides, or the workstation display.
Presentation content or "slide shows" may be comprised of text
graphics, images, charts and tables.
'
DECpresent offers an integrated outliner, table editor, text editor,
graphics editor, and color image editor. DECpresent includes
DECchart for data driven charting. DECpresent is a full-color
application.
DECpresent includes productivity features for the creator of a
pr:sentation. The Sorter View allows the user to view the presentat10n as. a gr?up of slides displayed in a reduced scale. Using the
Sorter View, 1t ts easy to re-order the slides within a presentation
and easy to perform common edits such as copy, delete, etc.
Speaker Notes permits the user to create and print a companion
set of notes.
To help the user illustrate presentations, DECpresent includes an
Art Gallery. Users can visually preview, then select the artwork
from the art gallery directly into the presentation.
A Slide Show facility is provided which enables the workstation
display to act as the presentation delivery media.
DECpresent includes an Equation Editor for technical and scientific presentations.

A Slide Show facility is provided which enables the workstation
display to act as the presentation delivery media.
DECpresent includes an Equation Editor for technical and scientific presentations.
DECpresent runs under VMS DECwindows and utilizes a graphical WYSIWYG (What-You-See-Is-What-You-Get) interface. The
~SI~G interfac: di~plays the document on the screen closely
slffiulatmg the way 1t will appear when printed.
DECpresent adheres to the DECwindows Style Guide and has the
same look and feel of other DECwindows applications.
DECpresent is compliant with Digital's Compound Document
Architecture (CDA) and can take advantage of the CDA converter
architecture and system level support.

DECwin

s Graphical lnterface/Tools for VMS

SPD: 32.27
UPI: XAQ
DE~windo~s Graphical Interface Tools for VMS are widgets
which i;>ro~1de advanced programming capabilities for developers
of applications based on the OSF/Motif, allowing customers to
easily create graphical WYSIWYG (What-You-See-Is-Whaty ou-Get) applications. This product is available separately or as
a c01_nponent of the DECwindows Tools Package for Motif, which
provides a set of development tools for developers of Motif
applications. Also included in this package are DEC VUIT V2.0
and Link~orks Developer's Tools Vl.O. The application deployment ~nv1ronment for applications written using the DECwindows
Graph~c~ Interface .Tools and/or the LinkWorks Developer's
Tools ts mcluded with VMS DECwindows Motif Vl.O at no additional charge.

Software and Services

9.65

Graphics

SPD: 25.K6
UPI: YGl
DECwrite for ULTRIX is a compound document processing application that allows ULTRIX users to create and format documents
which contain text, graphics, images, and supported application
data. DECwrite automates the steps of document production from
text entry, formatting and graphics creation to printing.

pull-down menus, keyboard sequences, and dialogue boxes contain all of the functions needed to utilize DECwrite. The menus
also display the keyboard equivalents provided to perform these
functions from the keyboard.

In addition to the pull-down menus, DECwrite provides four context sensitive pop-up menus. These menus pop up near the
pointer position for easy access. The pop-up menus include the
most frequently used editing features for text and graphics , as
well as the entries for the most commonly used element styles
and objects.

DECwrite is compliant with Digital Equipment Corporation's
Compound Document Architecture (CDA) and, therefore, can
take advantage of the CDA converter architecture and system
level support. This system level support includes the ability to
mail compound documents across the enterprise.

DECwrite provides language switching which allows users to
select a language from the DECwindows Session Manager to
determine the user interface language for DECwrite.

DECwrite runs under DECwindows and utilizes a graphical
What-You-See-Is What-You-Get (WYSIWYG) interface. The
WYSIWYG interface displays the document on the screen as it
print. This maximizes ease-of-use. DECwrite adheres to the
DECwindows Style Guide and has the same look and feel as
other DECwindows applications.

SPD: 34.78
UPI: XSZ

DECwrite combines word processing, publishing, graphics creation, data driven charting, image integration and live links to
supported application data. A DECwrite user may create sophisticated compound documents for distribution throughout the
enterprise.

DECwrltt for .VMS
SPD: 25.F6
UPI: VVF
DECwrite for VMS, is a compound document processing application that allows VMS users to create and format documents which
contain text, graphics, images and supported application data.
DECwrite automates the steps of document production from text
entry, formatting and graphics creation to printing.
DECwrite is compliant with Digital's Compound Document
Architecture (CDA) and, therefore, can take advantage of the
CDA converter architecture and system level support. This system
level support includes the ability to mail compound documents
across the enterprise.
DECwrite runs under VMS DECwindows (included with VMS
operating system) and utilizes a graphical What-You-See-IsWhat-You-Get (WYSIWYG) interface.
The WYSIWYG interface displays the document on the screen as
it will print. DECwrite adheres to the DECwindows Style Guide
and has the same look and feel as other DECwindows
applications.
DECwrite combines word processing, publishing, graphics creation, data driven charting, image integration and live links to
supported application data. A DECwrite user can create sophisticated compound documents for distribution throughout the
enterprise.
DECwrite presents functions through a graphical user interface.
Functions are represented through straightforward menu selections and icons. DECwrite features a menu bar with pull-down
menus at the top of the document window. These menus contain
the top-level items such as File, Edit, Search, Type, Elements,
Style, Draw, Links, Customize, and Help. The combination of

9.66 Software and Services

~,,., ML Gateway and De-velopment Tools for

DECwrite SGML Gateway and Development Tools for ULTRIX
are companion products on the RISC ULTRIX platform. The
Gateway and Development Tools support document conversion
in a CALS (Computer Aided Acquisition and Logistics Support) -compliant environment. As a standalone product, the Gateway gives DECwrite the ability to become an SGML "feeder"
system to composition systems, desktop publishing systems, and
text databases from a variety of sources. When the SGML Development Tools are part of the solution, front and back end converters can be modified to support a variety of SGML Document
Type Declarations (DTDs).
The DECwrite SGML Gateway offers bi-directional conversion of
documents from DDIF to SGML and SGML to DDIF format. During import, the Gateway matches SGML tags with DECwrite
styles. When exporting documents, the Gateway views the text to
identify the document parts and applies the appropriate SGML
tags using the Visual Recognition Engine (VRE) technology.

SPD: 34.77
UPI: XSY
DECwrite SGML Gateway and Development Tools for VMS are
companion products on the VMS platform. The Gateway and
Development tools support document conversion in a CALS
(Computer Aided Acquisition and Logistics Support) compliant
environment. As a standalone product, the Gateway gives
DECwrite the ability to become an SGML feeder system to composition systems, desktop publishing systems, and text databases
from a variety of sources. When the SGML Development Tools
are part of the solution, front and back end converters can be
modified to support a variety of SGML Document Type Declarations (DTDs).
The DECwrite SGML Gateway offers bi-directional conversion of
documents from DDIF to SGML and SGML to DDIF format. During import, the Gateway matches SGML tags with DECwrite
styles. When exporting documents, the Gateway views the text to
identify the document parts and applies the appropriate SGML
tags using the Visual Recognition Engine (VRE) technology.

Graphics
The product also supports the ASCII and ISO Latin Alphabet
Number 1 character sets.

SPD: 28.20
UPI: 185
MicroVAX VSV21 Support Software is the software component of
the VSV21 Q-22 Bus Color Graphics Module. The VSV21 Module requires some elements of the support software to be
downloaded before operation; in particular, certain code must be
loaded into the module to allow on-board interpretation of
graphics display commands. MicroVAX VSV21 Support Software
is a prerequisite for using all the capabilities of the VSV21
Module.
The package consists of a device driver, software modules, a
configuration and control utility program (VSVCP) , an installation
verification procedure (VSV$IVP) , and the VIVID subroutine
library (VSL).
The software modules, which are loaded into the VSV21 Module
using the VSVCP, allow terminal emulation, VSVll emulation, or
VSV21 VIVID display list processing.

SPD: 26.11
UPI: 361
VAX DECslide is a menu-driven graphic presentation utility that
runs on VMS operating system. It is intended for individuals who
create or prepare materials for in-house presentations. A combination of symbols and text are used for menu selection.
VAX DECslide uses an interactive interface so that diagrams and
text are displayed as they are entered. Editing functions permit
changes to slides as they are created, or after they have been
saved.
A strip (text) menu and message area at the bottom of the screen
displays user options, help messages, and operation status. A
directory feature lists the slides, including the date and time of
creation, slide name and comments.
After slides are created, they can be colored with available color
palettes. They can be printed (single or double size format),
saved (filed), copied, exported, changed, or deleted.
Slides are saved in the current default VMS directory. Different
directories can be used to group common slides together, and all
are protected via the standard VMS protection mechanisms.

SPD: 27.88
UPI: VEF
VAX ReGIS to Sixels Converter is a layered software product that
allows users to convert ReGIS graphics files into color sixel files.
These sixel files can be printed on Digital-supplied printers that
support the sixel protocol.
The converter handles all ReGIS commands supported by the
VT340, VT240, VT241, and VT125 with the exception of reports,
scrolling, graphic cursor control, data movement control, hardcopy control, time delay, and temporary writing control.

SPD: 36.09
UPI: XAl (End user)
XDD (Developer)
VMS DECwindows Motif provides a graphical user interface to
VMS. DECwindows incorporates the Qpen Software Foundation's
Motif user interface as the design center for DECwindows applications. OSF/ Motif is a graphical user interface widely acknowledged as the industry standard. This user interface defines a
powerful model for interacting with the VMS operating system
using a point-and-dick metaphor. DECwindows includes a set of
integrated desktop applications that demonstrate the power of
this metaphor and provide VMS users with a base set of desktop
tools.
VMS DECwindows Motif is based on MIT's specification for the
X Window System, Version 11 , Release 4 and OSF/Motif Vl.1.1.
X Window System standards supported as part of DECwindows
include the Xl 1 network protocol, a base set of workstation
fonts, the C language binding for the Xlib programming library
and the C language binding for the Xtoolkit library. For workstations users, DECwindows support for the Adobe Display PostScript System is integrated into Xl 1.

SPD: 28.06
UPI: A96
VMS Workstation Software (VWS) is a VMS layered product that
provides windowing and graphics support for the VAXstation II,
VAXstation II/ GPX, VAXstation 2000, VAXstation 3100 Models
30/40/ 38/ 48 with GPX graphics and VAXstation 3200/3500.
VWS supports VAXstations with windowing, VT200 series terminal emulation with technical character set, TEK4014 and
TEK4125 terminal emulation a simple mouse based human interface for window manipulation, a graphics programming interface,
Hard Copy (HCUIS) for applications requiring hardcopy output,
VWS/ SIGHT, an easy-to-use tool that enables the user to create
graphics, and a Migration Tools kit to assist users in migrating
UIS applications to the DECwindows platform.
VMS Workstation Software features include: Multiple Overlapping Windowing system via the mouse; VT200 series terminal and
TEK4014, TEK4125 Emulation Multiple VT200, series terminals;
ReGIS Color Support, provides VT240 compatible subset of
video-ReGIS graphics; Simple User Interface via the mouse;
Workstation Setup that enables the workstation characteristics to
be configured to customer requirements; On line Help; Programming Interface for workstation application development; Device
Driver Interface for applications with special requirements; Hardcopy Graphics Support for applications requiring the generation
of hardcopy output of graphics; and SIGHT (Simple Interactive
Graphics Handling Tool) that enables the user to create graphics
on a workstation.

Software and Services

9.67

License Control

SPD: 34.29
UPI: GT9
DEC LMF PAK Generator for ULTRIX software enables third parties to use Digital Equipment Corporation's License Management
Facility (LMF) Software. It consists of the right to use the
ULTRIX License Management Facility system service calls in any
licensee's products using a single LMF Producer Name and LMF
Issuer Name. It includes the PAK Generating software, consisting
of a callable routine which generates a valid LMF checksum, and
an application which issues and prints Product Authorization
Keys (PAKs). The application uses the callable routine, however,
the user may access the callable routine directly.
Prior to receiving the software, the third party must register their
ISSUER and PRODUCER company name with Digital Equipment
Corporation. This ensures that the PAKs they generate contains
information unique to their company.

SPD: 31.68
UPI: YWP
DEC LMF PAK Generator for VMS software enables third parties

to use Digital Equipment Corporation's License Management
Facility (LMF) Software. It consists of the right to use the VMS
License Management Facility system service calls in any licensee's
products using a single LMF Producer Name and LMF Issuer
Name. It includes the PAK Generating software, consisting of a
callable routine which generates a valid LMF checksum, and an
application which issues and prints Product Authorization Keys
(PAKs). The application uses the callable routine; however, the
user may access the callable routine directly.
Prior to receiving the software, the third party must register their
ISSUER and PRODUCER company name with Digital Equipment
Corporation. This will ensure that the PAKs they generate will
contain information unique to their company.
The callable routine accepts thirteen input arguments, verifies
that the third-party company information matches the registered
ISSUER and PRODUCER names, and returns a checksum.
The applications provides a utility to configure the application,
and a utility to maintain a Product Reference File, also it issues
and prints PAKs.
Included with each DEC LMF PAK Generator license is a
self-paced instruction course. The course is provided to support
the business practices and decisions associated with the introduction and use of the LMF as a license management tool.

SPD: 36.20
UPI: GZF
DEC SecurityGate software is a VMS layered software product
that, when installed on a DECnet Phase IV routing node, provides an additional level of access control to that part of the
network served by the routing node. A system or security manager can use the DEC SecurityGate software to create a security
domain consisting of a group of nodes serviced by the router.
A system or security manager defines a set of access rules that
apply to the security domain. Access to nodes in the security
domain can be specified and controlled based on source and
destination nodes, inbound and outbound communication lines,
network object or task, and the day of week and hour of day.

9.68

Software and Services

The DEC SecurityGate software consists of a VMS pseudo driver
that provides the network access control, a user interface program that creates and maintains rules databases and controls the
loading of network access control rules, and an Ancillary Control
Process (ACP) that provides event logging and loads rules into
the pseudo driver.
DEC SecurityGate software pseudo driver software becomes part
of the DECnet-VAX routing layer and examines each network
packet passing through. Each packet is examined to determine if
it is a Connect Request or a Reconnect Request. Only Connect
and Reconnect Requests are further examined; all others are
passed back to the router for forwarding.
The DEC SecurityGate forwards Connect Requests if permitted
by the access rules but rejects Connect Requests if prohibited by
the rules. Since only Connect Request packets and Reconnect
Request packets are examined, the effect on network routing
performance is small.
The ACP maintains an audit event file that automatically records
all failed network connections and changes to the access rules.
The user interface will display the entire audit file or create a
report from selected portions which, in turn, can be either displayed or printed as a separate file.
The user interface also provides a test function. A security manager can determine if the rules that are defined will behave as
expected by simulating Connect Requests and verifying that the
rules either permit or deny access.

SPD: 26.Nl
UPI: GKL
DECinspect for VMS is a software tool that a security or system
manager uses to establish a custom security analysis and reporting system to manage the security of a network of distributed
systems. With this tool, the security manager can implement and
maintain a security standard that is consistent with corporate
security policy for the VMS nodes in the distributed computing
environment. Digital highly recommends that customers purchase
security consulting services for assistance in designing and implementing a security analysis and reporting system that balances
business needs with security requirements. Local Digital offices
can assist customers in determining the appropriate services for
their requirements.
DECinspect software is designed to run on every VMS node in a
network to periodically evaluate compliance with a security policy
defined by the security manager. Optionally, DECinspect software
will work with DEC Security Reporting Facility (DECsrf) software
(SPD 26.N2). DECsrf software is designed to run on one or more
nodes to support centralized collection and management of compliance reports from DECinspect installations.
Using DECinspect software, the security manager defines settings
(that are consistent with the organization's security policy) for the
security relevant operating system parameters. DECinspect software establishes processes, called inspectors, to periodically evaluate the node for compliance with the established parameter settings an inspection. For VMS systems, inspector tests will evaluate
security-relevant parameters in the following areas; Files and
Directories, Accounts, Network settings and accounts, SYSGEN
parameters, and Security auditing.

License Control

SPD: 34.10
UPI: GXR (VAXstation 3100)
GNA (RISC)
ULTRIX MLS+ Trusted Worksystem Software, Version 1.0
extends ULTRIX Worksystem Software to provide a trusted operating system designed to meet Bl and CMW levels of security.
ULTRIX MLS+ Trusted Worksystem Software is a security-enhanced version of the ULTRIX operating system, with the
industry standard OSF/Motif window manager and Xll window
server. It is designed to label data and control access to different
security levels of information. It provides many of the familiar
features of ULTRIX, while incorporating high levels of security.
By design, the ULTRIX MLS+ system provides protected processing of sensitive information. The heart of the system is the
Trusted Computing Base (TCB), a set of protection mechanisms
that enforce the system's security policy.This policy protects
information from disclosure to unauthorized users. Security features are transparent to applications, with the exception of a
policy violation.

take the data as input. VAX Encryption uses the DES algorithm
to generate MACs. The second stop is to recalculate the code as
needed. If the calculated code is identical to the original code,
there is assurance that the original data has not been altered.
VAX Encryption performs encryption and decryption of user data
and generation of authentication codes for user data. This product provides a DCL interface from which users can encrypt and
decrypt complete files and generate and verify MACs on complete
files. Its application program interface allows application programs to encrypt and decrypt complete files or specific data elements and generate and verify MACs on specific data elements.
An interface to the VMS backup utility allows users to maintain
encrypted backup save sets.
This product contains a software implementation of the Data
Encryption Standard (DES) algorithm, which is promulgated by
the United States National Institute of Science and Technology.
The DES cryptographic algorithm is a Federal Information Processing standard (FIPS PUB 46) and an American National Standards Institute standard (ANSI X3 .106-1983).

SPD: 36.35
UPI: XAN
SPD: 26.74
UPI: 081
VAX Encryption is a layered product that offers customers the
ability to enhance the security and integrity of data stored on
their systems by encrypting that data and authenticating it.
VAX Encryption supports the use of encrypted manipulation
detection codes (MDCs) and cryptographic message authentication
codes (MACs). MDCs are generated by algebraic functions that
accept the data as input. Examples of such functions include
cyclic redundancy checks. VAX Encryption uses CRC-16 to calculate MDCs. MACs are generated by cryptographic functions that

VMS License Management Facility allows the system manager to
easily determine which software products are licensed on a
standalone VAX and on each of the VAX systems in a VAX.cluster
System. It allows the system manager to select the subset of
systems or users in a VAX.cluster that may use the software products. LMF also provides an audit trail which allows the system
manager to track license changes that occur within a VAX.cluster
system.
V5 .x VAXcluster configurations are fully described in the
VAX.cluster Software Product Description (29.78.xx) and include
CI, Ethernet and Mixed Interconnect configurations.

Software and Services

9.69

Office Systems

SPD: 27.30
UPI: AAA
ALL-IN-1 is a customizable, menu-oriented software product that
provides generic office applications and a facility for integrating
other business oriented applications. ALL-IN-1 unifies these applications into an easy-to-use, menu-driven, information system.
Through ALL-IN-l's electronic mail is linked into Digital Equipment Corporation's networking facilities, users can transport or
receive information that has been created on desktop, departmental, and corporate systems.

SPD: 50.20
UPI: YFE
ALL-IN-1 DESKtop for DOS is a software package that integrates
into the services provided by Digital Equipment Corporation's
ALL-IN-1. It is a multi-lingual product offering Mail, File, and
Application integration between the dissimilar DOS and ALL-IN-1
environments. By combining the main components of the
DESKtop, such as Communications, Scripting Language and
built-in DESKtop Applications, it is possible to extend the functionality of the DOS microcomputer via the centralized user interface. Such extensions provide Terminal Emulation, access to
commonly used third party products both remote and local in
nature, Message Based Applications, document conversion, and
directory management. Other features can be added through the
use of the available customization options.

SPD: 31.71
UPI: YFF
ALL-IN-1 DESKtop Server for VMS is an ALL-IN-1 layered application that runs on a suitably-configured VMS host computer. It
controls the exchange of inbound and outbound mailbags
between ALL-IN-1 DESKtop users and ALL-IN-1. A mailbag is a
single file comprised of one or more electronic mail messages
and, optionally, their attachments as well as their associated
envelope header information. The product also recognizes and
executes Message Based Applications (MBAs) and File Transfer
requests. The Server converts different document types using
ALL-IN-l's conversion mechanism, the CDA Converter Library, or
a third party product called KEYpak (if installed).

SPD: 34.80
UPI: GJ6
ALL-IN-1 Electronic Authorization and Routing System,
(ALL-IN-1 EARS), is a software product layered on ALL-IN-1 to
provide serial and parallel routing of electronic "items" in
ALL-IN-1. This system is based entirely on standard ALL-IN-1
forms and scripts, and is customized into the ALL-IN-1 Electronic Messaging subsystem. The system also uses standard ALL
IN-1 file cabinet features to maintain the security and integrity of
the items being routed.
The electronic items are defined in a database and can include
objects such as word processing based documents, Forms Management System (FMS) Form based information, 4GL database
information, CAD drawings, spreadsheets, and images. The status
of any item's progress is always available to users.

9.70

Software and Services

SPD: 39.58
UPI: VZ8 (For DOS)
SPD: 39.59
UPI: YFT (Local Area Network)
YFU (Wide Area Network)
YCZ (Server for VMS)
YZ7 (For VMS DECwindows)
YHS (For Video Terminals)
SPD: 39.15
UPI: YZJ (Mail for Windows)
MCU (PATHWORKS Links)
LBJ (PATHWORKS for Windows)
ALL-IN-1 MAIL is an electronic messaging application, which
implements the international messaging standards set by the
CCITT X.400 P2 recommendations. It provides a means of
exchanging messages and attached data with other users and is a
consistent user interface across heterogeneous desktop devices in
a client/server implementation. ALL-IN-1 MAIL also interacts with
all other MAILbus gateways and complementary products.
ALL-IN-1 is a client/server implementation supporting video terminals, DOS PCs, and DECwindows VMS workstations. ALL-IN-1
MAIL represents an upgrade path for current users of Digital's
VMS Personal Mail Utility (VMSmail), DECwindows VMSmail, or
the PC Mail interfaces provided with the DECnet/PCSA product
set.
ALL-IN-1 MAIL has no technical dependency on the ALL-IN-1
integrated office product. It can be used entirely independent of
that product. DOS and DECwindows clients are also available,
which connect directly into the ALL-IN-1 integrated office system
base and do not require the ALL-IN-1 MAIL server.
Client software performs services for the user. This software usually resides on an intelligent desktop device and takes advantage
of the processing power on the desk. Clients are connected to
the ALL-IN-1 MAIL server, through which local- and wide-area
network delivery services are performed.
Transport between ALL-IN-1 MAIL servers and between
ALL-IN-1 MAIL and the other products in the ALL-IN-1 Phase II
product family is performed by the VAX Message Router.
Optional gateways can also be connected to the VAX Message
Router as needed for mail transfer in a multivendor environment.

SPD: 39.59
UPI: YFT (Local Area Network Server)
YFU (Wide Area Network Server)
YCZ (Server for VMS)
VZ7 (VMS DECwindows)
YHS (For video terminals)
ALL-IN-1 MAIL for VMS is an electronic messaging application
which implements the international messaging standards set by
the CCITT X.400 P2 recommendations. It provides a means of
exchanging messages and attached data with other users, and is a
consistent user interface across heterogeneous desktop devices in
a client/server implementation.
Layered on top of Digital Equipment Corporation's VAX Message Router (SPD 26.33), ALL-IN-1 MAIL interacts with all other
MAILbus gateways and complementary products.
(Continued)

Office Systems
ALL-IN-1 MAIL for VMS (Continued)
ALL-IN-1 MAIL is a client/server implementation supporting
Video Terminals, DOS PCs, the Microsoft Windows Environment,
Apple Macintosh PCs, DECwindows VMS workstations, and other
Xll display devices. ALL-IN-1 MAIL represents an upgrade path
for current users of Digital's VMS Personal Mail Utility
(VMSmail) or DECwindows VMSmail.
ALL-IN-1 MAIL has no technical dependency whatever on the
ALL-IN-1 integrated office product. It may be used entirely independent of that product. DOS and DECwindows clients are also
available which connect directly into the ALL-IN-1 integrated
office system base and do not require the ALL-IN-1 MAIL Server.

ALL·IN·l Manager fot LANs
SPD: 36.59
UPI: XTJ (Manager for LANs)
XTK (Manager for WANs)
XTL (Desktop for LANs)
XTM (IOS for LANs)
ALL-IN-1 Manager for LANs is composed of two packages:
ALL-IN-1 Manager for LANs and ALL-IN-1 Manager for WANs.
ALL-IN-1 Manager for WANs is available as an optional add-on
upgrade to ALL-IN-1 Manager for LANs only and does not stand
on its own. ALL-IN-1 Manager for LANs provides office management services to end-users on heterogeneous PC LANs and provides integration with the ALL-IN-1 IOS environment. This product supports PATHWORKS, Netware, 3+, and Banyan PC LANs.
ALL-IN-1 Manager for LANs offers two supported user interfaces,
the ALL-IN-1 DESKtop for LANs and the ALL-IN-1 IOS for
LANs. ALL-IN-1 DESKtop for LANs is the standard desktop interface. ALL-IN-1 IOS for LANs is an ALL IN-1 IOS look alike client
interface. While the product serves the PC LANs behind the
scenes within a corporation's computer network, end users perform work through the menu-driven functions of the user
interface.
This product is layered on the MS-DOS operating system, can
operate on any MS-DOS platform, and does not depend on the
underlying network protocol for compatibility and functionality.
The user for this product is a PC user on a Novell NetWare,
PATHWORKS for DOS, 3Com 3+, or Banyan LAN. The environment addressed is based on typical ALL-IN-1 installed-base customer situations within Fortune 1,000 companies. The system
environment of such large corporations' is necessarily diverse. It
may consist of many different PC LANs, (local or remote) as well
as IBM, Digital, and other system environments. The customer
may have different installed office systems, such as ALL-IN-1 IOS
electronic messaging, PROFS, SNADS, and others.
The end-user receives office services, i.e., mail, PC application
integration, menu customization, etc., through the end-user
interface.
The business manager gains the ability to deploy mission critical
applications throughout the enterprise.
The MIS manager benefits with an office end-user management
system that provides customizability, flexibility, easy system management, and security, across heterogeneous PC LAN platforms.

SPD: 31.71
UPI: YFF

The PC user has the ability to run ALL-IN-1 applications directly
through terminal emulation or let the PC control mail and file
movement. In terminal emulation, the ALL-IN-1 PC Server for
VMS recognizes the session as an interactive session.
The ALL-IN-1 PC Server for VMS also has a simple user interface
available to the VMS and/or ALL-IN-1 system manager for management functions.

SPD: 37.53
UPI: MDX
ALL-IN-1 Personal Assistant is a product which is layered on top
of a base ALL-IN-1 system.
ALL-IN-1 IOS is a customizable, menu-oriented software product
that provides generic office applications and a facility for integrating other business oriented applications. ALL-IN-1 IOS unifies
these applications into an easy-to-use, menu-driven information
system.
Through ALL-IN-1 IOS's electronic mail and links into Digital
Equipment Corporation's networking facilities, users can transport or receive information that has been created on desktop,
departmental, and corporate systems.
ALL-IN-1 Personal Assistant enables users to track new ALL-IN-1
messages and locate documents within their ALL-IN-1 file cabinet
using a variety of selection criteria. Use ALL-IN-1 Personal Assistant if receiving large amounts of mail or maintaining large numbers of documents.
The ALL-IN-1 Personal Assistant is an add-on subsystem to the
standard ALL-IN-1 IOS product. ALL-IN-1 Personal Assistant
extends ALL-IN-1 with a set of additional text searching and
filtering functions. Additional forms are provided to assist users
in dealing with the new capabilities.
ALL-IN-1 Personal Assistant helps the user deal with information
by providing three sets of facilities: Standard Operations, Rule
Specification, and scheduling of the application of rules to file
cabinet documents.

SPD: 33.22
UPI: YG4
ALL-IN-1 Services for DECwindows provides a DECwindows style
User Interface for ALL-IN-1, as well as extensions to ALL-IN-1
functionality. It works in conjunction with and assumes that
ALL-IN-1 resides on the same system.
The ALL-IN-1 Services for DECwindows provides ALL-IN-1 users
on X-Windows supported devices an alternate choice of user
interface. Users can select either push button or pull down
menus at any time during their ALL-IN-1 session, or can choose
to use the standard FMS forms user interface.
Additionally, ALL-IN-1 Services for DECwindows allows compound document processing within ALL-IN-1 by allowing
DECwrite to be used as an editor from the word processing
menu . Documents created with DECwrite from ALL-IN-1 can easily be stored in the ALL-IN-1 File Cabinet.
ALL-IN-1 Services for DECwindows further enhances the CDA
support of ALL-IN-1 by providing nine viewer windows.

ALL-IN-1 PC Server for VMS is a collection of executable images,
DCL command procedures, ALL-IN-1 scripts, and data files. It
allows an ALL-IN-1 system to be used as a server for the various
PC clients.
Software and Services

9. 71

Office Systems
ALL·IN·l STARTER
SPD: 25.D9
UPI: VNN
ALL-IN-1 STARTER is a bounded, non-customizable, menuoriented software product that provides the user with the ability
to create, send, and receive electronic mail and to create, edit,
and print word processing documents.
ALL-IN-1 STARTER provides an environment in which users
access all of its functions in a consistent manner. Users' documents are stored in folders in the users' file cabinets where they
are accessed from the word processing (create and edit messages)
and electronic messaging (send and receive) functions.
ALL-IN-1 STARTER is a true subset of ALL-IN-1. ALL-IN-1 provides additional functionality such as customization, time management, and application integration I development. Within the limits of this subset, ALL-IN-1 STARTER is fully compatible with
ALL-IN-1 (all data and training experience are transferable from
one product to the other) . ALL-IN-1 STARTER provides for ease
in upgrading to ALL-IN-1. This upgrade does not require data
conversion, but may require additional hardware and software
resources to use the additional functionality of ALL-IN-1.

communicates with the client application via DECnet and uses
the CDA Base Services routines on the VAX to perform conversions for the client. Support for external references in DDIF/DTIF
input files is included.
The MS-DOS client provides a command-line interface, while the
Macintosh and MS-Windows clients provide a windowed interface. A library and a DLL containing the callable interface is also
provided for MS-DOS. The windowed interface for MS-Windows
is the same interface as provided by CDA Base Services, but with
additional support needed for remote conversions.

DEC ODA ~ompound Documen•'4tthite<:ture (CDA)
SPD: 32.10
UPI: YHN

There is a restriction that ALL-IN-1 STARTER cannot be run on
the same system node as ALL-IN-1.

DEC ODA Compound Document Architecture (CDA) Gateway
provides an extensible interchange capability between CDA and
ODA. The product can be used in stand-alone mode or over
X.400, and will support internationally recognized Document
Application Profiles (DAPS) (Qlll, Q112, and Q121) as defined
by the European Workshop for Open Systems (EWOS). The DEC
ODA Compound Document Architecture (CDA) Gateway, when
used over X.400, provides open systems access to and from CDA,
and allows users to interchange CDA documents transparently in
a multivendor heterogeneous environment.

ALL·I~~ 1 Voice Messaging Support

DECdecision*

SPD: 26.44

SPD: 25.G2
UPI: VW3

ALL-IN-1 Voice Messaging Support is a software product that
provides an interface between the ALL-IN-1 mail user and the
voice store-and-forward system known as Voicemail.
The voice store-and-forward system allows users to send voice
messages to other users of the Voicemail system, reply to
messages received, delete and save messages, and more. Access to
the system is made from a telephone equipped for tone dialing
and commands are entered using the telephone keys.
The Voicemail system notifies the ALL-IN-1 Voice Messaging
Support software running in the VAX over a local high-speed link
of the arrival of voice messages. The Voice Messaging Support
software passes these notifications on to the ALL-IN-1 user in the
form of items of electronic mail. The notifications include information provided by the Voicemail system to identify the sender
of the voice message, the date and time of recording, and the
length (in seconds) of the message. Notification can also be sent
over a DECnet network to any remote user addressable by message router.
Local and remote ALL-IN-1 users can, from their terminal, invoke
the Voicemail system to call their own telephone, play the
messages to the user, and request the system to delete the voice
messages.

DEC CDA Invokers for VMS
SPD: 34.91
UPI: GVM
DEC CDA Invokers for VMS provides remote conversion capabilities for MS-DOS and Macintosh users who wish to convert their
documents from a local format supported in the CDA Converter
Library to another supported format.
DEC CDA Invokers for each platform consists of a server component located on a VAX running VMS, and a client component is
located on a PC running its native operating system. The server

9.72

Software and Services

DECdecision is a workstation-based decision support application.
The system is comprised of four major components: Access, for
ad hoc database queries; Cale, for analyzing financial and business data; Chart, for generating business graphs; and Builder, for
recording and automating repetitive tasks across components.
DECdecision runs under the DECwindows X-Window environment and incorporates its common appearance and operation for
pull-down menus, dialog boxes, windows, component cut and
paste operations, and mouse pointing device support.
DECdecision has a consistent appearance across the entire product, shared with other applications written under DECwindows.

DECcixlvMS
SPD: 26.36
UPI: 708
DECdx/VMS enables DECmate II and III systems, both standalone
and shared resource, to be linked to the host for better system
utilization, document exchange, and information and data sharing. Digital Standard Document Exchange (DX) error-detecting
and error-correcting transmission protocol is used to transport
documents in WPS file format.
Users of DECmates can use DECdx to transfer documents
between the DECmate system and the VMS host over a serial line
interface. The WPS-8 word processing document formats, and the
print control characters are retained. During a DECdx session,
the DECmate system operates as though it were another terminal
on the host system.
DECdx/VMS features compatibility with WPS-PLUS, DECpage,
and EDE products; shared access; and transfer, add, conversion,
print, and index functions . Online user assistance, a user's manual, and installation instructions are included.

Office Systems
DECpage

-------~~_..

__________

_______

.........

,,__._.

SPD: 26.29
UPI: AAN
DECpage is a style-controlled batch formatter offered as a layered
product. It uses WPS-PLUS documents for input to produce
high-quality text or high-quality integrated text and graphics output to laser printers.
DECpage uses normal, italic, and bold fonts in a variety of proportionally spaced typefaces in several character sizes. DECpage
produces most types of standard office documents, including
memos, reports, business letters, directories, announcements,
newsletters, and overhead transparencies.
DECpage formats an entire document with or without graphics,
by performing automatic typeface selection, line justification, and
pagination based on the user's selection of any of the 41 professionally designed print styles or additional styles created by the
user.
DECpage features include WPS-PLUS and ALL-IN-ONE integration; graphics support (PostScript, ReGIS, Sixel, and GKS);
clip-art; multiple language hyphenation; and multinational character set. Document construction includes table of contents, indexing, appendices and table of authorities generation; and a document preview option.

SPD: 31.29
UPI: YPB
DEC plan Client for UL TRIX/RISC is an integrated time and project management tool designed to help users plan, track, schedule,
and report on projects and meetings. DECplan is a client/server,
DECwindows based tool that provides a server and two clients,
the DECplan client and the DECplan Time Manager client.
DECplan Time Manager is a subset of the DECplan client. The
DECplan server manages a single DECplan database of information delineated by a series of planners; project, personal, equipment, and locations. Multiple DECplan or DECplan Time Manager clients can connect to a single server. These clients, when
connected to the DECplan server, allow users to share project
information stored in a common database.

SPD: 33.09
UPI: YPB (Server)
XC6 (Client)
XC8 (Time manager client)
XNV (Time manager to client upgrade option)
DECplan for VMS is an integrated time and project management
tool designed to help users plan, track, schedule, and report on
projects and meetings. DECplan is a client/server, DECwindowsbased tool that provides a server and two clients, the DEC-plan
client and the DECplan Time Manager client. DECplan Time
Manager is a subset of the DEC plan client. (See SPD 31.27 .xx for
details on the DECplan Time Manager client.) The DECplan
server manages a single DECplan database of information delineated by a series of planners; project, personal, equipment, and
locations. Multiple DECplan or DECplan Time when connected
to the DECplan server, allow users to share project information
stored in a common database.

DECpliin T~e Ma~ger Oi~t (or OOtR.IDIUSc

------

SPD: 31.28
UPI: YPB (Server)
XC6 (Client)
XC8 (Time manager client)
XNV (Time manager to client upgrade option)
DECplan Time Manager Client for ULTRIX/RISC is an integrated
time and project management tool designed to help users plan,
track, schedule, and report on projects and meetings. DECplan is
a client/server, DECwindows based tool that provides a server
and two clients, the DECplan client and the DECplan Time Manager client. DECplan provides a superset of the DECplan Time
Manager functionality. (Refer to the DECplan for VMS Software
Product Description SPD 33.09.xx for details on DECplan.) The
DECplan server manages a single DECplan database of information delineated by a series of planners; project, personal, equipment, and locations. Multiple DECplan or DECplan Time Manager clients can connect to a single server. These clients, when
connected to the DECplan server, allow users to share project
information stored in a common database, schedule meetings,
and exchange information.

SPD: 26.45
UPI: 088
DECtalk Mail Access is an ALL-IN-1 software application that
provides users with convenient access to their ALL-IN-1 documents and messages from a touch-tone telephone.
DECtalk Mail Access users can dial their ALL-IN-1 system from a
touch-tone telephone and command the DECtalk unit to read
their mail, reply to it by using a prewritten reply in a specific
folder, or delete it. Nonmail messages can also be read and
deleted.
Commands are entered using the telephone keypad to gain access
to a user's account. The commands include the ability to select
and read messages and documents, delete messages and documents, select and send standard answers to mail messages, and
modify speech mode (by letter, word, or sentence) and speech
rate (slow, normal, or fast).
System and user text-to-phone dictionary support is provided.
This allows customization of the pronunciation of abbreviations
and special words. The size of these dictionaries, which are
loaded into the DECtalk's user-definable lexicon, are controlled
only by the size of the DECtalk system lexicon.
System management options facilitate the authorization of user
access, the specification of a site-specific welcome message,
optional logging of transactions and errors, and the temporary
suspension of all DECtalk Mail Access to the system.

SPD: 34.81
UPI: GZG
DECtp Desktop for ACMS (also referred to as "Desktop ACMS")
is a layered software product that allows application programs
running in DOS and Macintosh operating system environments to
access VMS-based ACMS transaction processing applications
through a desktop programming interface.
There are three Network Application Support components
included in the product; Desktop ACMS Client for DOS, Desktop
ACMS Client for Macintosh, and Desktop ACMS Server for VMS.
(Continued)

Software and Services

9.73

Office Systems
DECtp Desktop for ACMS (Continued)
The desktop server software component resides on the host VMS
system. The desktop client components reside on the desktop
operating systems and provide an application programming interface for customer-written desktop client programs. Digital Equipment Corporation's PATHWORKS products supplythe software
networking connection between the client and server systems. A
client for VMS is provided for development purposes only (it is
identical to the client for DOS)

Extem~ D~ument Exchange wi~ IBM DISOSS

SPD: 26.92
UPI: 761
External Document Exchange with IBM DISOSS is a VMS layered
product that allows Digital office automation users to access text
information distributed through or contained in an IBM DISOSS/370 system. Users of Digital's ALL-IN-1 or DECdx/VMS can
search for, retrieve, file, or delete documents in IBM DISOSS
Library Services.
Through DISOSS Distribution Services, Digital office automation
users can send and receive documents to and from users of IBM
office systems connected to the DISOSS/ 370 system. Thus, users
can receive documents created by other users in an IBM SNA
office network environment, edit it locally on the Digital system,
distribute it through a Digital office network, and print it out or
file it in the DISOSS/370 document library.
External Document Exchange with IBM DISOSS uses a menu
interface that can be added to the ALL-IN-1 office system or
invoked from the DCL system prompt when used with DECdx/
VMS. Supported functions correspond to the command structure
of Library and Distribution Services found in IBM's DISOSS/370
office applications. The user interface for the search, file, retrieve,
and delete document, send, obtain, show and cancel distribution
were produced for compatibility with Digital· standard user interface requirements for office products. The product includes context specific, online HELP.
External Document Exchange with IBM DISOSS retrieves both
DCA Revisable Form Text and DCA Final Form Text documents.
EDE with IBM DISOSS converts the IBM DISOSS DCA-formatted
text into Digital document exchange (DX) , DEC Standard Document File Format, and stores the converted documents in the
users' DECdx or ALL-IN-1 filing cabinet. Documents being sent
from the Digital system for filing in or distribution through the
IBM DISOSS system are converted from DX format into IBM DCA
Revisable Form. ASCII and other text files sent from ALL-IN-1
are converted into DCA Final Form documents prior to filing in
or distribution through the IBM DISOSS/3 70 system. When using
the WPS-PLUS word processing editor under ALL-IN- 1, conversions between WPS-PLUS and DX format occur without user
intervention. Otherwise, the Convert Document utility within
ALL-IN-1 allows the conversion of documents to and from other
formats used by ALL-IN-1.
The library search function of External Document Exchange creates an index of DISOSS documents on the VAX system. This
simplifies subsequent access to those documents since users need
only refer to this index to use the document in the DISOSS/370
database. A single command can be used to obtain all documents
awaiting delivery to a user from DISOSS Distribution Services.

9.74

Software and Services

Inteiipational Lexic&ts ·tor ULTRIX
SPD: 31.05
UPI: VYL
International Lexicons for UL TRIX are encoded lists of the most
frequently used words for a specific language. One or more language lexicons can be added as layered products to run with
some Digital applications, including DECwrite.
Additional lexicons allow users to check spelling in two variations of English (American and British); French (French, Canadian, or European); German (Deutsch, High German, or Swiss);
Dutch (Nederlands); Swedish (Svenska); and Spanish (Espanol),
all within a single document when used with applications that
have implemented the multilingual spell check feature. American
Business and Medical International lexicons are also available.
The American and British English Lexicons each contain more
than 87 ,000 entries and are both based on the American Heritage
Dictionary.
The American Business Lexicon contains over 95,000 entries.
These include the same entries as found in the American English
Lexicon and specialized entries, including Latin terms, case law
terms, legislative acts, terms that are specific to the full range of
legal practices, stock terms, arbitrage terms, proper names, and
insurance underwriting and claim reporting terms.
The American Medical Lexicon contains over 157 ,000 entries and
includes the International Lexicon/ American for ULTRIX or RISC
entries and specialized entries, including biological, biochemical,
anatomical, and physiological terms; names of diseases; trade and
generic names of drugs; medical and surgical procedures; and
medical equipment and instruments.

futemational Lexicons for VMS
SPD: 31.04
UPI: VYH
International Lexicons for VMS are wordlists used for spell
checking verification and correction within WPS-PLUS (in
ALL-IN-1), WPS-PLUS for VMS, DECwrite for VMS, or
DECpresent for VMS. Users can purchase one or more of these
optional lexicons to provide multilingual spell verification and
correction capability to be used with any of these VMS writing
applications. Each lexicon consist of a list of words, similar to a
dictionary, but without the associated meanings. Users select the
words or document to be spellchecked and choose the appropriate lexicon purchased.

Language and ·specialized LexicOns for VMS
SPD: 29.61
UPI: VI7
Language and Specialized Lexicons for VMS consists of lists of
words, similar to dictionaries but without the associated meanings. One or more languages or specialized lexicon products can
be purchased to add as a layered application to run with
WPS-PLUS/VMS.
Specialized lexicons include American Business Lexicon, American Medical Lexicon, British Lexicon, German Lexicon, and
French Lexicon. The French and German Lexicons verify spelling only and do not offer corrections.
American Lexicon contains over 87 ,000 entries. Additional lexicons can be purchased that allow users the capability to check
spelling in two variations of English (American and British),
French (Canadian or Parisian), or German (High German or
Swiss). American Business Lexicon contains over 95,000 entries;
American Medical Lexicon contains over 157 ,000 entries; and
British Lexicon contains more than 87 ,000 words.

Office Systems

SPD: 27.79
UPI: VE3
Session Support Utility (SSU) is a VMS layered software product
that allows users to log into and maintain multiple independent
sessions on a VMS system using Digital's VT330, VT340 or VT420
terminals. SSU software can be activated on either of the two
communication ports on these terminals.
Session Support Utility supports three (3) types of connections to
a VMS host: hardwired ASYNC line, mode, or LAT line.

SPD: 25.76
UPI: 425
VAX ADE is specifically designed to help managers, administrative and clerical personnel, and other office professionals manage
their own information. ADE users can create and manage information files as well as produce a variety of reports. An on-line
tutorial makes ADE extremely easy to learn, while extensive
HELP messages and a self-prompting command structure make
ADE easy to use. ADE allows users to produce and use simple
applications without learning programming techniques or
languages.
The ADE user defines a Worksheet by naming the column headings needed for the data. The data is then entered through the
user's terminal and is displayed on the terminal screen under the
appropriate column headings. Data or columns can be added,
changed, or deleted at any time. Column widths are automatically
adjusted to accommodate the data being entered. Once entered,
the data can be manipulated and reports can be printed.
The standard ADE report format automatically prints information
in a columnar format, numbers pages, centers titles, and centers
data under column headings. With a little more effort, the ADE
user can select specific data to be printed and format the report
to meet specific needs.
ADE uses Self-prompting Commands to manage information and
to print reports. The user enters a single word command telling
ADE what to do. If not sure which command to use, HELP will
give the user a list of choices with a brief description, or the
TRAIN command can be used to learn about the various commands. Once the command is entered, ADE prompts the user for
any additional information that is needed. HELP and TRAIN are
always available. As the user becomes more familiar with ADE,
abbreviations can be used and the entire ADE command can be
entered without selecting from the available options at each step.
This greatly increases the frequent user's productivity.

SPD: 32.06
UPI: YGS
VAX Computer Integrated Telephony Message Desk (CITMD)
enhances user interactions with office telephone systems by providing telephony, mail, and phonebook services.
VAX CITMD allows access to dialing services that provide dialing
features, such as allowing users to place and answer calls using
CITMD commands. Message services provide a means of organizing messages left for or by telephone callers. Phonebook services
provide users with an online telephone directory.
Two sets of features are provided. Message Attendants answer
calls on behalf of other users, and take and deliver messages, and
maintain the online system phonebook. Possible attendants
include a full time message desk attendant or a group secretary

to whom others forward their phones. All other users of the
application are considered general users. General users use
CITMD to respond to telephone messages left for them, to make
calls, and to provide a personal phonebook in addition to the
generally available system phonebook.

SPD: 25.79
UPI: 310
VAX DECalc is an electronic spreadsheet package for creating,
editing, and manipulating numbers in a worksheet format. This
package is specifically designed for use on multiuser systems and
over a network. VAX DECalc executes in the native mode under
the VMS operating system and drives VTlOO, VT200 or VT300
series terminals. VAX DECalc comes with an extensive reference
manual containing practice sessions and therefore, requires little
computer experience.

SPD: 27.51
UPI: 924
VAX DECalc/DECgraph Package consists of two software products that are tightly integrated, VAX DECalc and VAX DECgraph.
Data and labels can be extracted from the VAX DECalc spreadsheet and graphed directly with DECgraph.
VAX DECalc is an electronic spreadsheet package for creating,
editing, and manipulating numbers in a worksheet format. VAX
DECalc is specifically designed for use on multiuser systems and
over a network. VAX DECalc executes in native mode under the
VMS operating system and drives VTlOO, VT200, or VT300 series
terminals. VAX DECalc comes with an extensive reference manual
containing practice sessions and thus requires little computer
experience.
VAX DECgraph can stand alone as a general purpose, graphics
plotting package that runs under the VMS operating systems.
Alternatively, when linked with VAX DECalc upon installation, it
allows users to create, change, display, and print graphs using the
spreadsheet for data.
Users access VAX DECgraph from within VAX DECalc via the
EXTERNAL command. Using this interface the user can specify
graph options, including: Title; Subtitle; Horizontal and Vertical
labels; X and Y Values; Legends; references to the VAX DECalc
grid, or independent data points; graph display types, including
Line, Bar, and Pie; and whether the output should go to the
screen or to a file.

SPD: 27.37
UPI: A98
VAX DECalc-PLUS is a multiuser spreadsheet designed for technical, engineering, and scientific environments. VAX DECalc-PLUS
combines an interactive spreadsheet with the ability to call external routines written in any programming language that supports
the VMS calling standard. From within a VAX DECalc-PLUS session, the user can link in one or more external routines and use
the spreadsheet grid boxes to hold parameters to be passed as
inputs to the routine or to receive output from the routine. In
addition, users can specify that a routine be iteratively executed a
specified number of times. VAX DECalc-PLUS executes in native
VMS and MicroVMS mode and drives VTlOO or VT200 series
terminals.
(Continued)

Software and Services

9.75

Office Systems
VAX DECalc-PLUS (Continued)
VAX DECalc-PLUS enables users to perform common mathematical, statistical, and financial analyses through built-in functions,
including but not limited to the following: cosine, tangent, sine,
logarithms; average, minimum and maximum value, least squares,
standard deviation; and payment, payback, depreciation, and discounts. This spreadsheet also enables users to manipulate their
data through DELETE, INSERT, MOVE, and REPRODUCE commands . The spreadsheet contains an extensive set of data manipulation functions and formatting capabilities.

SPD: 26.07
UPI: 360
VAX DECgraph is a general purpose graphics plotting package
that runs under the VMS operating system. VAX DECgraph allows
users to create, change, display, and print graphs. Individuals can
use VAX DECgraph for decision support and making
presentations.
User interface features included: an interactive keyboard interface
to create, change, and display charts; memu and submenus using
symbols to display user options; a sample set of data files which
is supplied with the installation kit; color palettes that can be
used to select colors for the chart; one-line help facilities and
task-oriented documentation; the ability to display an output file
on any supported terminal device without running VAX
DECgraph; completed charts from both interactive and noninteractive (VMS DCL) modes in either color ReGIS, black and white
REGIS, or printer protocol formats; and a VMS printer queue that
can be set up with a supported graphics printer to output printer
protocol files.

VAX DECspell Verifier/<;orrector
SPD: 26.34
UPI: 650
VAX DECspell Verifier/Corrector is a spelling verification and
correction utility which runs under the VMS operating system. It
has the capability of automatically scanning text documents or
files and detecting spelling errors. It also offers a list of suggestions from which the user can select the correctly spelled word
for substitution.
VAX DECspell is offered with either a master lexicon in American English or British English, each comprised of over 80,000
words. As an extra option, VAX DECspell may be upgraded to
allow users to verify documents against either of these lexicons.
VAX DECspell uses the master lexicon together with over 12,000
additional, user-specified words. These user-specified words can
be divided between the user's personal dictionary and up to ten
other dictionaries. These additional dictionaries can be personal
dictionaries or dictionaries shared with other users.

VAX Grammar Checker
SPD: 29.60
UPI: VFB
VAX Grammar Checker checks American English text for correct
spelling, proper grammatical construction, and style. VAX Grammar Checker works best with text that follows standard rules of
English, such as memos, reports, and business letters. It is not as
useful for text that violates standard rules of English. Built on
the Houghton Mifflin CorrecText Grammar Correction System,
VAX Grammar Checker runs standalone under VMS.

9. 76

Software and Services

VAX Grammar Checker accepts as input any document using
WPS-PLUS/VMS V3.0, or any file with a VAX ASCII-based editor,
such as EDT or TPU-based EVE. VAX Grammar Checker does
not support documents that contain markup information.
VAX Grammar Checker is interactive, allowing users to display
documents, identify selected regions of text to be checked, read
the displayed grammatical comments, and make corrections with
a limited set of editing functions. VAX Grammar Checker repeatedly processes a selected sentence until that sentence is determined to be correct, or until the user chooses to pass to the next
sentence.
VAX Grammar Checker analyzes sentences for their grammatical
form, not for their meaning, and determines whether the relationships among words are correct. To accomplish these tasks, VAX
Grammar Checker uses a dictionary that includes more than 99
percent of the words used in average English writing. Entries in
the dictionary include details about grammatical function , spelling, and word endings.
Grammar can be checked on a complete document, a selected
region of a document, or on a sentence in a document. If an
error is found, processing stops, the error is highlighted, and an
explanatory message and a menu of correction options are
provided.
Menu options include edit, replace, ignore, add, pass, finish , and
more information. User selectable functions include the number
of words splitting infinitives to flag as an error; the number of
noun adjuncts to flag as an error; and the flagging of clustered
prepositional phrases.
VAX Grammar Checker needs to distinguish sentential from nonsentential text as this helps to indicate whether to check only the
spelling of the text block or to perform a more complete grammatical analysis. The set line spacing value function helps define
some of the criteria for making this distinction. This option is
available through the TPU interface. WPS-PLUS handles this
option implicitly and requires no user interaction.

VAX Key·Distlibution Center
SPD: 27.77
UPI: 03U
VAX Key Distribution Center (KDC) is an integral part of an
Ethernet security system designed to enhance the security of the
Ethernet LAN (Local Area Network) environment. VAX KDC
manages and controls the operations of a number of Digital
Ethernet Secure Network Controllers (DESNCs) attached to a
network. The DESNCs provide a number of security features ,
including encryption and decryption of Ethernet frames, node
authentication and authorization, node access control, and management services.
The VAX KDC software enhances the security and integrity of
distributed Ethernet systems by protecting data confidentiality
and integrity; protecting against node masquerading; enforcing a
network security policy; and extending security management,
monitoring, and control.
This product manages all of the DESNCs in an Ethernet LAN or
extended LAN environment. The software provides a user interface for a security manager or system manager to initialize
DESNCs attached to a network, to establish the access rights of
each client node that is connected to a DESNC controller, to
select events that should be audited and alarmed, and to monitor
the status of the DESNC controllers in the network. Summary
reports of network usage and security-related events can also be
provided.
(Continued)

Office Systems
VAX Key Distribution Center (Continued)
Features include LAN access control, initialization, key distribution and management, encryption mode, firmware authentication,
key source options, auditing and alarming, multicast message forwarding, bypass and standby mode, and node restrictions.
Multiple VAX Key Distribution Center nodes can be used cooperatively in a LAN or extended LAN to enhance network availability. In the event that one of these nodes becomes inoperative,
the other nodes will respond to requests for cryptographic keys
and services from the network DESNC controllers.

VAX SaftwMe Proj~t Manag~r
~~--~~~--~~~~~~~

SPD: 27.52
UPI: A82
VAX Software Project Manager facilitates the estimating, planning, and controlling of software development projects. The software utilizes two user interaction modes. Menu mode visually
presents project data in the form of trees, nodes, graphs, and
charts. Users specify actions by pointing at objects and selecting
menu features. DCL-style command line mode permits succinct
expression and batch mode.
Using VAX Software Project Manager's planning, control, estimation, and environmental tools, users can input, manipulate, and
view variable amounts of data.
The planning tools allow users to manipulate and analyze information about a project as a whole, individual tasks, milestones,
and resources. Using a work breakdown structure, users construct a graphical, hierarchical representation of project tasks.
Scheduling allows users to show dependencies among tasks, milestones, and the order in which tasks must be done. The planning
tool includes Gantt and loading charts and a calendar.
The control tools track project status, determine progress trends,
and measure and report progress against plan at the project and
individual contributor levels. Specific control tools include status
updating, rate charting, and reporting.
The estimation tools allow users to input an estimation hierarchy,
cost driver values, lines of code estimates, and cost per phase. In
return the estimation tools provide effort, scheduling, cost, and
staffing level projections for the project's development phases.
The environmental tools let users decide which project database
and resources to use and associated costs. Specific tools include
resources, user preference, and projects.
VAX Software Project Manager includes a single database per
project; multiple, concurrent users per database; database integrity and reliability; limited cost accounting; and statistics roll-up.
Reports and printouts include work breakdown structure; precedence diagram; project calendar; Gantt, loading, and rate charts;
user-formatted, schedule, cost, and precedence reports; estimation
project hierarchy; resource list; and contents of screen.

VAXlink for IMS and VSAM Client
SPD: 29.87
UPI: VFV
VAX.link for IMS and VSAM Client, a layered VMS software application, provides VMS users with unidirectional IBM mainframe
database access and extract capabilities. VAX.link client works
together with Answer/DB Extractor for VAX.link to provide intelligent access to IMS and VSAM data structures. VAX.link Client
transfers extracted data to VAX Rdb/VMS databases.

Once on the VAX system, local users can manipulate and analyze
the data using any VAX layered product or application that communicates with Rdb/VMS. The accessible IBM environments and
databases include MVS, CICS, IMS/ DC, TSO, IMS/ DB, and VSAM.
A menu-driven, interactive program requests specific data from
the VAX database administrator by creating a task that defines
the data extraction. Task definition and processing involves
examining a list of available mainframe databases and selecting
the desired database, accessing the metadata provided by the
VAX.link product server and using the metadata information to
construct criteria for task data retrieval, submitting the task to
the mainframe's Answer/ DB Extractor products, and delivering
the desired data to the VAX system.
Data may be simple queries or snapshots. Because users cannot
access the data until it is installed in an Rdb/VMS database, the
normal format will be snapshots taken at intervals determined by
the database administrator.
VAXlink Client includes a menu interface; strip menus; functions
arranged by screens and submenus; task processing; task definition; listing, archiving, and other task-related services; log on and
log off scripts; per-function HELP; security; and multiple database support.

VAXmate Services for MS-DOS
SPD: 55.09
UPI: A9A
VAX.mate Services for MS-DOS , a DECnet application, implements
PCSA (Personal Computing Systems Architecture) , allowing a
VAXmate with a hard disk to act as a dedicated application, data,
and resource server to groups of personal computers. This product provides file, print, date and time, and server management
and control services. VAXmate Services for MS-DOS also includes
the MS-DOS operating system and all DECnet-VAXmate facilities.

VXT Terminal Software
SPD: 31.34
UPI: XNG
VXT Terminal Software provides the user with access to host
systems by establishing X Window System compliant sessions
over Ethernet.
The VXT terminal Software is downline loaded into a VXT 2000
terminal from a load host utilizing TCP/ IP and LAT, LASTport
network protocols. The VXT software provides terminal emulation connections to host systems for conventional text-based
applications.
Terminal sessions may use LAT and TELNET running on
Ethernet or via a serial line port provided by the VXT 2000
terminal. A local window manager, running in the terminal, is
provided to give the user high responsiveness when manipulating
windows and to reduce network load. This local window manager is fully compliant with OSF/ Motif Window Manager. A set
of local fonts is provided to support local clients. Alternative
fonts sets are available through TFTP, LAT and LASTport/ disk.
When a host system is available offering LAST port/ disk, the VXT
software provides a virtual memory capability. With the increased
memory capacity, the ability to customize configurations of terminals and font management is made available.

Software and Services

9.77

Office Systems

SPD: 30.70

UPI: OF2
WPS-PLUS/DOS, a menu-driven document processing system,
provides GOLD key style word processing to users of personal
computers.

In addition to common word processing functions, WPS-PLUS/
DOS provides multinational, technical, and scientific character
sets, superscripts and subscripts, scientific equations, composite
characters, and a two-dimensional editor for creating diagrams,
line drawings, equations, and more. To simplify the processing of
long, complex documents, the product generates a table of contents, numbered pages and footnotes, automatic headers and
footers , and storage for rulers and print settings.
Other word processing features include list processing, cut and
paste, spelling verification and correction, and a personal dictionary. The package also provides user-defined keys and a HELP
facility.
WPS-PLUS/DOS documents can be converted to and from a DX
file, ASCII file, and WPS-PLUS format; and can be transferred
between supported WPS-PLUS/DOS and a personal computer,
using the DECmate Floppy Utility.

SPD: 26.27
UPI: AAM
WPS-PLUS for VMS is a menu driven document processing software system that provides GOLD KEY style word processing for
VMS users. It allows WPS-PLUS users to create, format and print
documents that contain text, includes Encapsulated PostScript
(EPS) graphics and application data generated by a variety of
Digital Equipment Corporation software products using the
External Application Link. WPS-PLUS for VMS is installed as a
layered product on VMS systems.

9.78 Software and Services

WPS-PLUS for VMS software is compatible with Digital's Compound Document Architecture (CDA); it provides document conversion to the Digital Data Interchange Format (DDIF). DDIF
files may also be imported into the WPS PLUS system by using
the document conversion features available from the WPS-PLUS
Document Transfer Facility.
The WPS-PLUS for VMS product provides word processing, EPS
graphics inclusion, Two-Dimensional Editing, Editor Math, and
List and Sort Processing capabilities. These features can be used
to create high quality, sophisticated documents for distribution
throughout the enterprise.

SPD: 30.51
WPS-PLUS/Workstation is a document processing software system
that provides Gold key style word processing for users of
MS-DOS/PC-DOS.
WPS-PLUS features menu-driven document processing, including
word and list processing with math and sort capabilities.
WPS-PLUS/Workstation allows MS-DOS/PC-DOS users to create,
edit, and print documents; produce form letters and maintain
mailing lists; retrieve documents by document name, number, or
keyword; convert a WPS-PLUS document to and from a DX file
format and ASCII file format; and communicate through
user-developed scripts. Users can also create and modify printer
attribute and character print tables; transfer documents with
Digital hosts running WPS-PLUS/VMS or WPS-PLUS/ALL-IN-1,
and include technical characters and scientific equations in a
document.

Performance Tools and Diagnostics
DECmpp Parallel Programming Environment

Micro6'~ 2QOO/VAXstauon 2000 Qiagnos'c l!ackage

SPD: 36.67
UPI: XT7 (License and documentation)

SPD: 25.CJ
UPI: AGX

XT4 (Media)
DECmpp Parallel Programming Environment (DPPE) is a set of
interactive, visually-oriented, window-based tools that help users
run, debug, and analyze programs that run on the DECmpp
12000 Series systems. Data visualization features include the ability to display activity and data values in the PE array. DPPE
consists of a symbolic debugger with execution control facilities,
data inspector, machine and data visualizers, and statement level
execution profiling tools integrated with the symbolic debugger.
DPPE is based on an X-windows user interface. When DPPE
starts up, it creates a single window that covers the entire screen.
The root window can have its size changed or be iconified. Each
tool in DPPE occupies a separate application window within the
root window. Each window has a label (usually the tool name)
above the upper left corner of the window. Each window is
composed of one or more panes, each of which has its own
menu. Almost all DECmpp functions can be performed by simply
selecting that function with the mouse.
DPPE can be started and program execution controlled at any
point, even while an application is running. All other DPPE programming environment facilities are invoked from the symbolic
debugger, usually when execution is stopped.
DPPE is composed of several pieces. The windowed user interface can execute on any DECstation workstation. While the
Debugger Engine can execute on the DECstation 5000 Model 200
connected to the data parallel unit, a program that calls parallel
code (code that executes in the DPU) can only be invoked on the
console workstation (the workstation that is directly connected to
the DPU). Therefore, if the program is run under debugger, part
of the user interface can execute on any DECstation 5000 Model
200 on the network, but part of the debugger will be invoked on
the console workstation.

SPD: 25.Gl
UPI: VW2
DECtrace for VMS collects and reports on event-based data. This
data is helpful for performance analysis, capacity planning, database tuning, error logging, and other areas in which detailed
application or layered product specific performance and/or event
information is useful.
·
DECtrace event data can be gathered from any VMS layered
product or combination of products that contains DECtrace service routine calls. Customers can also put DECtrace event calls in
their application code to collect event and performance data.
DECtrace is designed to operate with minimal performance
impact on the system and can be used in both development and
production environments. DECtrace supports both single-node
and VAXcluster environments.
DECtrace considers an event to be an application-defined occurrence. An event can have a start and an end (duration event) or
can simply occur (point event). DECtrace allows events within
layered products or customer application programs to be defined
and data items to be associated with each event. These data items
can be resource utilization statistics (for example, CPU time) .

MicroVAX 2000/VAXstation 2000 Diagnostic Package is a set of
functional diagnostic tests and maintenance utilities.
Functional tests are run on each system power-up that check
basic system hardware operation. The console display terminal
will show a hexadecimal countdown beginning at F and counting
down to 1. Tests are performed on power-up in the following
sequence: base video subsystem tests (VAXstation 2000 only) ,
time of year clock, battery/NVR tests, serial line controller tests,
memory tests, memory management unit test, floating point unit
test, interval timer test disk controller test, tape controller test,
interrupt controller/system ID ROM tests, and daughter module
option tests.
After completion of the power-on tests, the user can invoke one
of several additional tests or maintenance utilities. These tests
include TEST 0, which executes a serial string test of all devices
in the system; TEST 50, a utility that displays the hardware configuration of the system; TEST 51, which allows the user to
define a default boot device for automatic bootstrapping of the
system; TEST 71 , a disk verifier utility; TEST 90, a utility that is
used with systems that are connected in a network configuration;
and more.
The remainder of the package is extended diagnostics and maintenance utilities for Digital Equipment Corporation field service
personnel and licensed customers. This series of routines requires
the use of a special hardware key to invoke and execute.
TEST 60 is a utility that displays a circle/ crosshatch pattern on
the console monitor (VAXstation 2000 only). It is used by service
personnel to check/adjust monitor linearity and aspect ratio.
TEST 72 is a utility that writes a special key on scratch floppy
diskettes. After running a floppy diskette through this utility, the
diskette can then be used with the field service system excerciser
to do write testing of the floppy diskette subsystem.
TEST 101 executes the field service mode system excerciser. This
test excercises each device once sequentially and then excercises
all devices concurrently. This sequence is executed for two complete passes of all system devices present in the configuration.
This test automatically stops after two complete passes and displays a test summary. Additional routines are included.

MicroVAi Diagnostic Monitbr
SPD: 28.09
UPI: ABX
MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor (MDM) is a standalone operating
system designed to support the execution of diagnostics.
MDM is operated through two user interfaces, menu mode and
command line mode. Menu mode provides structured control of
diagnostic testing through menu selections. Command line mode
provides interactive control of diagnostic testing through individual commands typed at a command line prompt as well as
greater control of diagnostic operating conditions.
This product is available in two versions, a customer and a service version, both of which allow the user to select operations
from the same menu. The service version supports command line
mode.

Additionally, data items specific to the Digital layered product,
third-party layered product, or customer application can be associated with each event. These facility-specific data items might
include information supporting database tuning, application-level
error logging, and a range of other information logging needs.
Software and Services

9.79

Performance Tools and Diagnostics
MittOVAX' Diagnostic Monitor RA/RD Kit"
SPD: 33.16
UPI: K32
MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor CDROM Maintenance Diagnostic
Kit allows the MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor standalone operating system to be booted from an RRD4x CDROM reader connected to a KZQSA controller or to a DECsystem 5500's SCSI
interface. It also allows MDM to be booted from an RRD4x or
RRD50 CDROM reader connected to a KRQ50 controller. The
CDROM loadable MDM system images are functionally the same
as the loadable MDM images available in the RX50/TK50 version
of MDM.
For VMS users, the CDROM Kit also includes a working directory
called (MDMKITS) in which a number of useful MDM files are
provided. These files include: VMS installable savesets for both
the RA/RD/RF loadable MDM kits and the Ethernet loadable
MDM kits, MDM release notes, MDM User documentation, and
an MDM TK tape building file. A CDROM_README. TXT file
located in the MDMKIT' s directory provides information on the
building of MDM TK50/70 tapes and any last minute updates not
included in the MDM Release Notes.
The MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor (MDM) standalone operating
system with diagnostic programs runs on any valid MicroVAX or
DECsystem based system to verify that the system is operating
correctly. MDM is designed to be booted on a valid MicroVAX or
DECsystem based system where it can test the system's devices.
The main objective of the diagnostic testing is the isolation of
problems to a field replaceable unit (FRU) that can be easily
removed and repaired.
MDM is operated through two user interfaces, menu mode and
command line mode. Menu mode provides an easy-to-use structured control of diagnostic testing through menu selections. Command line mode provides a more interactive control of diagnostic
testing through individual commands typed at a command line
mode prompt. Both interfaces offer full testing capability, but
command line mode allows greater control of diagnostic operating conditions.

SPD: 29.89
UPI: A07
MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor Ethernet Server allows the
MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor (MDM) standalone operating system to be loaded from a remote VMS host over the Ethernet.
This is particularly useful in situations where local load devices
are not available. The loaded system is functionally the same as
the locally loaded MDM product available as ZNABX.
The MDM standalone operating system's diagnostic programs verify that the system is operating correctly and test the system's
devices. Diagnostic testing isolates problems to a field replaceable
unit (FRU) that can be easily removed and repaired.
MDM's user interfaces include menu and command line modes.
Menu mode provides a structured control of diagnostic testing
through menu selections. Command line mode provides an interactive control of diagnostic testing through individual commands
typed at a command line prompt. Both interfaces offer full testing capability, but command line mode allows greater control of
diagnostic operating conditions.
Available in two versions, MDM's customer version is shipped
with every MicroVAX and the service version is described here.
Both versions allow users to select operations from the same
menu, but the service version provides full diagnostic testing and
supports command line mode.
MDM provides Functional, Exerciser and Utility environments
under verify or service modes for MicroVAX hardware testing.
9.80 Software and Services

SPD: 31.82
UPI: All
MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor RA/RD Kit allows the MicroVAX
Diagnostic Monitor (MDM) standalone operating system to be
loaded from a fixed hard disk. The loaded system is functionally
the same as the RX50 loaded MDM (available as ZNABX).
The MDM standalone operating system with diagnostic programs
runs on a MicroVAX II/rtVAX/MicroVAX 3000 to verify that the
system is operating correctly. MDM is designed to be booted on a
MicroVAX II/rtVAX/MicroVAX 3000 where it can test the system's devices. The main objective of the diagnostic testing is the
isolation of problems to a field replaceable unit (FRU) that can
be removed and repaired.
MDM is operated through two user interfaces, menu mode and
command line mode. Menu mode provides structured control of
diagnostic testing through menu selections. Command line mode
provides a more interactive control of diagnostic testing through
individual commands typed at a command line mode prompt.
Both interfaces offer full testing capability, but command line
mode allows greater control of diagnostic operating conditions.

MicroVAX MIRA Switch Control
SPD: 27.86
UPI: 09T
MicroVAX MIRA Switch Control is the software for controlling a
MicroVAX based MIRA System.
A MIRA System is comprised of dual MicroVAX computers, each
supplied with its own power source and mounted in a single
cabinet, or in two cabinets for larger configurations. The configuration of each computer is normally identical, so one computer
is a backup for the other in the event of failure.
The computers are linked via Ethernet and MIRA unique hardware. The software controls the status (Master, Standby, or Idle)
of each computer. It detects a computer failure and changes the
status of each computer accordingly. Designated devices that
were previously connected to a failed Master computer are connected to the Standby computer, whose status then becomes
Master. The user can then restart applications on the new. Master
and continue operation.
MIRA Systems are particularly suited to dedicated control applications, rather than general purpose data processing. That is,
applications can maintain communication with terminals and
other computers, maintain full performance after a failure, or
recover without operator intervention.

SPD: 25.93
UPI: 200
VAX-11/725/730 Diagnostic Set includes micro- and macrodiagnostic programs required to support Customer Runab~e Diagnostics (CRDs). The microdiagnostic programs detect and isolate
faults at the module level within the CPU, Floating Point Accelerator (FPA), Integrated Disk Controller (IDC), and memory. A
microdiagnostic monitor and test overlays achieve module~level
fault isolation. The macrodiagnostic programs detect and isolate
faults within the VAX-11/725/730 and standard options. The
Customer Runable Diagnostics (CRD) feature is a simplified operator interface that sequentially runs the micro- and macrodiagnostic programs.

Performance Tools and Diagnostics
VAX·11/7SO Diagn~c Set

VAX-11/785 Diagnostic Set

SPD: 26.42
UPI: 201

SPD: 26.81
UPI: 210

VAX-11/750 Diagnostic Set is a set of programs that allows users
to maintain a VAX 11/750 Central Processor Unit (CPU) and
standard VAX-11/750 peripheral devices. The set includes microand macrodiagnostic programs required to fully support diagnosis
on VAX-11/750 systems.

VAX-1117 85 Diagnostic Set allows users to maintain a
VAX-111785 central processor unit (CPU) and standard
VAX-111785 peripheral devices. The set includes micro- and
macrodiagnostic programs required to fully support diagnosis of
a VAX-111785 system.

The microdiagnostic programs detect and isolate faults at the
micro level within the CPU and memory. The microdiagnostic
monitor and a number of test overlays achieve module-level fault
detection and isolation.

The microdiagnostic programs detect and isolate faults at the
module level in the CPU, floating point, and memory. The
microdiagnostic monitor and a number of test overlays achieve
module-level fault detection and isolation. Microdiagnostics are
executable with the microdiagnostic monitor running in the
VAX-11/785 LSI-11 console. The console disks provide storage
for the microdiagnostic test overlays. Microdiagnostic tests are
organized into a bootstrapping sequence for testing the console
interface, data path hardware, SBI Cache-Translation Buffer,
I-stream Buffer, SBI, and Memory Controller, arrays, and Floating-Point Accelerator (FPA) . Detected faults result in error
typeouts that indicate the smallest set of modules to which the
program can isolate a failure.

At the start of the microdiagnostic program, a ROM-based TU58
driver routine loads the microdiagnostic monitor from a TU58
tape cartridge into RAM memory located on the VAX-11/750
diagnostic module, L0006-YA. Then the program initialization
routine begins. That routine controls program flow, initializes
parameters, and invokes the TU58 driver routine to automatically
load each of a series of overlays. The microdiagnostic tests are
organized to sequentially test the data path hardware, CMItranslation buffer-cache, I-stream buffer, CMI, and the memory
controller and first two arrays. Detected faults result in error
typeouts indicating the lowest level of modules and/ or gate arrays
to which the program can isolate the failure.
The macrodiagnostic programs provide fault detection and isolation within the VAX-11/750 CPU and standard options.

VAX-111780 Diagnostic ·set
SPD: 26.41
UPI: 200
VAX-11/7 80 Diagnostic Set is a set of programs that allows users
to maintain a VAX-11/780 Central Processor Unit (CPU) and
standard VAX-11/7 80 peripheral devices. The set includes microand macrodiagnostic programs required to fully support diagnosis
on VAX-11/780 systems.
The microdiagnostic programs detect and isolate faults at the
module level within the CPU, floating point, and memory. The
microdiagnostic monitor and a number of test overlays achieve
module-level fault detection and isolation. Microdiagnostics are
executable with the microdiagnostic monitor running in the
VAX-1117 80 LSI-11 console. The console disks provide storage
for the microdiagnostic test overlays. Microdiagnostic tests are
organized into a bootstrapping sequence for testing the console
interface, data path hardware, SBI-Cache Translation Buffer,
I-stream Buffer, SBI, and Memory Controller, arrays, and Floating-Point Accelerator (FPA). All detected faults result in error
typeouts that indicate the smallest set of modules to which the
program can isolate a failure.
The macrodiagnostic programs provide fault detection and isolation within the VAX-11/780 CPU and standard options.

VAx-n nso Micropro~~ming Tools
SPD: 25.09
VAX-111780 Microprogramming Tools enable a programmer to
assemble and load microprograms for the User Writable Control
Store (UWCS) option of the VAX-111780 CPU. The tools consist
of MICR0-2, an assembler written in BLISS-32 for user-written
source microcode; VAXDEF, the definition file that describes to
the assembler the VAX-11/780 microarchitecture; MICLD, a utility
program to load the UWCS memory of a VAX-11/780 CPU from
a VAX-11/780 WCS microprogram object file; and a tool verification test that invokes a sample program to ensure that the tools
have been installed correctly.

The macrodiagnostic programs provide fault detection and isolation within the VAX-11/785 CPU and standard options.

VAX-11/785 Microprogramming Tools
SPD: 26.63
VAX-111785 Microprogramming Tools enable a programmer to
assemble and load microprograms for the User Writable Control
Store (UWCS) feature of the VAX-11/785 CPU.
VAX-111785 Microprogramming Tools consist of MICR0-2 , an
assembler for user-written source microcode; 785DEF, the definition file that describes to the assembler the VAX-1117 85 microarchitecture; MICLD, a utility program to load the User Writable
Control Store memory of a VAX-11 /785 CPU from VAX-111785
WCS microprogram object file; and a tool verification test that
invokes a sample program to ensure that the tools have been
installed correctly.

VAX 6000 Diagnostic Set
SPD: 33.55
UPI: K34 (VAX 6000 Models 200, 300, 400)
K3 3 (VAX 6000 Models 500, 600)
VAX 6000 Diagnostic Set is a package of programs and documentation that allows users to maintain VAX 6000 Series central
processor units (CPUs), memory, and standard peripheral devices.
The set consists of ROM-Based and loadable macrodiagnostic
programs which are required to fully support diagnosis of a VAX
6000 Series system.
The VAX 6000 Series systems are currently available in the following models: VAX 6000-2x0, VAX 6000-3x0, VAX 6000-4x0,
and VAX 6000-5x0, where x = 1 through 6, depending on the
number of processor modules on the system. For example, a
VAX 6000-540 system would contain four of the Model 500
processors.
The heart of a VAX 6000 Series system is the XMI internal bus.
CPUs, memory, I/O controllers, and adapters to the VAXBI I/O
buses are connected to this XMI bus, and are referred to as XMI
nodes. The system can contain one or more VAXBis and peripheral device adapters and controllers reside there. They are
referred to as VAXBI nodes.
(Continued)

Software and Services

9.81

Performance Tools and Diagnostics
VAX 6000 Diagnostic Set (Continued)

systems. In addition, most XMI nodes and some VAXBI nodes
contain user-invokable, ROM-based diagnostics that are accessible
through the system console.

XMI and VAXBI nodes have extensive self-tests built into them
(primarily ROM-Based), and these are automatically executed
when the system is initialized. This minimizes the number of
loadable macrodiagnostics required for maintenance of VAX 6000
Series systems. In addition, most XMI nodes and some VAXBI
nodes contain user invokable ROM-Based Diagnostics which are
accessible through the system console.

The UNIBUS is supported on VAX 6400 Series systems to a limited extent, and a small number of existing UNIBUS peripheral
devices can be used. This requires loadable macrodiagnostics to
be used for maintenance of these devices.

The UNIBUS is supported on VAX 6000-2x0, 3x0 and 4x0 Series
systems to a limited extent, and a small number of existing
UNIBUS peripheral devices can be used. This requires loadable
macrodiagnostics to be used for maintenance of these devices.

SPD: 27.81
UPI: KlO

SPD: 25.C9
UPI: K12
VAX 6200/6300 Series Diagnostic Set is a package of programs
and documentation that allows users to maintain VAX 6200/6300
Series central processor units (CPUs), memory, and standard
peripheral devices. The set consists of ROM-based and loadable
macrodiagnostic programs that are required to fully support diagnosis of a VAX 6200/6300 Series system.

VAX 8200/8300 Diagnostic Set is a package of programs that
allows users to maintain a VAX 8200/8300 central processor unit
(CPU), memory, and standard VAX 8200/8300 peripheral devices.
The set consists of macrodiagnostic programs which are required
to fully support diagnosis of a VAX 8200/8300 system.
The heart of the VAX 8200/83 00 system is the VAXBI internal
bus. CPU, memory, and some peripheral adapters and controllers
are connected to this bus, and are referred to as VAXBI nodes.
All VAXBI nodes have extensive Self-tests built into them, and
these are automatically executed when the system is initialized.
This minimizes the number of macrodiagnostics required for
maintenance of VAX 8200/8300 systems.

CPUs, memory, and adapters to the I/O buses are connected to
the XMI internal bus , and are referred to as XMI nodes. The I/0
buses consist of one or more VAXBis, and peripheral device
adapters and controllers reside there and are referred to as
VAXBI nodes.

In summary, macrodiagnostics are used for fault detection and

XMI and VAXBI nodes have self-tests built into them (primarily
ROM-based), and these are automatically executed when the system is initialized.

isolation within some VAXBI nodes and all UNIBUS peripherals.
This complements the extensive self-test capabilities of VAX
8200/8300 Systems.

Components of the set include ROM-Based Diagnostic Monitor
(RBD Monitor), a program that resides in ROM on various XMI
and VAXBI nodes and supplies diagnostic and operator services
for the ROM-based diagnostics accessible from the system console; ROM-based Diagnostics, diagnostic programs that reside in
ROM on various XMI and VAXBI nodes and are invokable on
power-up, reset, and/or by the operator via the RBD Monitor;
VAX Diagnostic Supervisor (VAX/DS), a loadable program that
supplies diagnostic and operator services for the loadable diagnostics; and VAX/DS Diagnostics, loadable macrodiagnostics that
consist of exercisers, functional-level and logic-level tests, disk
formatters , and autosizers that run under control of VAX/DS.

SPD: 31.55
UPI: K21
VAX 6400 Series Diagnostic Set is a package of programs and
documentation that allows users to maintain VAX 6400 Series
central processing units (CPUs), memory, and standard peripheral
devices. The set consists of ROM-based and loadable
macrodiagnostic programs that are required to fully support diagnosis of a VAX 6400 Series system.
The heart of the VAX 6400 Series system is the XMI internal bus.
CPUs, memory, and adapters to the I/O buses are connected to
the XMI internal bus, and are referred to as XMI nodes. The I/O
buses consist of one or more VAXBis; peripheral device adapters
and controlle.rs reside there and are referred to as VAXBI nodes.
XMI and VAXBI nodes have self-tests built into them (primarily
ROM-based), and these are automatically executed when the system is initialized. This minimizes the number of loadable
macrodiagnostics required for maintenance of VAX 6400 Series

9.82

Software and Services

The UNIBUS is supported on VAX 8200/8300 systems, and many
existing UNIBUS peripheral devices can be used. This requires
macrodiagnostics to be used for maintenance of these devices.

SPD: 27.82
VAX 8500/855018700/8800 Diagnostic Set allows users to maintain VAX 8500/8550/8700/8800 systems. These diagnostic programs test the CPU, memory, and peripheral devices . The package includes both micro- and macrodiagnostics.
The microdiagnostic components detect and isolate solid faults at
the module level within the CPU and memory. The microdiagnostic tests are controlled by the micromonitor, which is built into
the system console software. The console provides storage for the
microdiagnostics tests.
Microdiagnostics tests are organized in a bottom-up test
sequence. This sequence first tests the console, then the instruction unit, execution unit, cache, and memory. Microdiagnostics
also test fault conditions on the NMI bus. All detected faults
result in error typeouts that indicate the smallest set of modules
to which the program can isolate a failure.
The macrodiagnostics components provide fault detection and
isolation within the VAX 8500/85501870018800 CPU and standard
options.
VAX Diagnostic Supervisor (VDS) supplies diagnostic operator
services such as loading, starting, and control as a standalone
non-VAX-VMS controller or as a process under VAX VMS.
Diagnostics consist of exercisers, and functional-level and
logic-level tests that run under the control of VDS. Functional-level tests run in standalone mode or with VAX VMS.
Repair-level programs run only in standalone mode.

Performance Tools and Diagnostics

SPD: 26.82
VAX 8600/8650 Diagnostic Set allows users to maintain a VAX
8600/8650 central processor unit (CPU) and standard VAX
860018650 peripheral devices. The set includes micro- and
macrodiagnostic programs required to fully support diagnosis of
a VAX 860018650 system.
The microdiagnostic programs detect and isolate faults at the
module level in the CPU, floating point, and memory. The microdiagnostic monitor and a number of test overlays achieve module-level fault detection and isolation. Microdiagnostics are executable with the microdiagnostic monitor running in the VAX
8600/8650 LSI-11 console. The console disks provide storage for
the microdiagnostic test overlays. Microdiagnostic tests are organized into a bootstrapping sequence for testing the console interface, data path hardware, SBI-Cache-Translation Buffer, I-stream
Buffer, SBI, and memory controller, arrays, and floating-point
accelerator (FPA). Detected faults result in error typeouts that
indicate the smallest set of modules to which the program can
isolate a failure.
The macrodiagnostic programs provide fault detection and isolation in the VAX 8600/8650 CPU and standard options including a
VAX Diagnostic Supervisor, Diagnostics, and supporting
programs.

SPD: 25.C7
VAX 8820/8830/8840 Diagnostic Set is a package of programs
that allows users to maintain VAX 8820/8830/8840 systems.
These diagnostics test the CPU, memory, and peripheral devices.
The package includes both micro and macro diagnostics.
The microdiagnostic components detect and isolate solid faults at
the module level within the CPUs and memory system. They are
controlled by the MICROMONITOR, which is built into the VAX
console software that is shipped with the system. The console
provides the storage for the microdiagnostics tests. Microdiagnostics tests are organized into a bottom-up test sequence. This
sequence first tests the console, then the instruction unit, execution unit, cache, and memory. Microdiagnostics are also used to
test fault conditions on the NMI bus. All detected faults result in
error typeouts that indicate the smallest set of modules to which
the program can isolate a failure.
The macrodiagnostics components provide fault detection and
isolation within the VAX 8820-8840 CPUs and standard options.
VAX Diagnostic Supervisor (VDS) supplies diagnostic operator
services (loading, starting, and control) as a standalone controller
(non-VMS) or as a process under VMS.
Diagnostics consist of exercisers, functional level and logic level
tests that run under the control of VDS. Functional level tests
run in standalone mode or with VMS. Repair level programs run
only in standalone mode.

SPD: 32.22
UPI: K23
VAX 9000 Series Diagnostic Set is a package of programs that
allow users to maintain a VAX 9000 system. These diagnostics
test all subsystems of the VAX 9000 system including the Power
Control System, Service Processor System, CPU, Memory, I/O
Adapters, and peripheral devices. The package includes firmwarebased tests, service processor-based tests, and macrodiagnostics.

failing replaceable unit by illuminating an LED located on the
failing unit. In addition, diagnostic messages may be displayed in
the HEX display on the operator control panel or be displayed
on the Service Processor console. These tests are executed automatically during system power-on or controlled by issuing commands from the Service Processor console.
The standard COBOL data type used in the data processing
industry is known as a packed-decimal string. It was created to
store data more efficiently on disk at a time when disks were
much more expensive than they are today. Third-party vendors
for the commercial market usually make their layered software
execute instructions quickly using packed-decimal data types.
Therefore, the packed-decimal performance of the VAX 9000 will
be important for mainframe customers who run third-party commercial packages or have developed their own programs using
the packed-decimal string instruction set in firmware.
On the VAX.server 9000 packages, Digital has offered a nonoptimized version of the packed-decimal string instruction
firmware. The Commercial Instruction Set (CIS) option may be
added to the VAXserver packages using the CIS Upgrades. Server
systems that have the CIS Upgrade will have comparable COBOL
packed-decimal string instruction performance to similarlyconfigured VAX 9000 mainframe systems.
The Service Processor-based components are comprised of functional diagnostics and structural tests that use the VAX 9000
maintenance facilities such as SCAN and BIST. These tests verify
the integrity of the CPU, memory, and I/O adaptets. Some of
these tests are executed automatically during system startup. All
of these tests can be controlled by issuing commands on the
Service Processor console. Failure reports from these diagnostics
indicate the set of replaceable units that may be at fault. All
failure reports are displayed on the Service Processor console.
The Macrodiagnostic components provide fault detection and isolation within the VAX 9000 CPUs and standard options. Most
macrodiagnostics are executed in conjunction with the VAX Diagnostic Supervisor (VAX DS).
The VAX Diagnostic Supervisor supplies diagnostic operator services (i.e., loading, starting, and control) as a stand-alone controller (non-VAX-VMS) or as a process under VAX VMS.
The Macrodiagnostics consist of exercisers, functional-level and
logic level tests that run under the control of VAX DS. Functional-level tests run in stand-alone mode or with VAX VMS.
Repair-level programs run only in stand-alone mode.

SPD: 26.68
UPI: 927
VAX DEC/Test Manager automates regression testing by executing user supplied tests and automatically comparing the results
with the expected test results. VAX DEC/Test Manager gives the
software engineer flexibility in organizing tests, selecting tests for
execution, and verifying and reviewing test results. Batch applications and interactive applications which input and output text to
character cell terminals or DECwindows applications on VMS can
be tested using VAX DEC/Test Manager.
VAX DEC/Test Manager supports the DECwindows software
environment and provides either a DECwindows or command
line user interface. VAX DEC/Test Manager is included in the
VAXset Software Engineering Tools Package. This package provides simplified ordering and maintenance of various tools. Refer
to the VAX.set Package Software Product Description (SPD 27.07)
for more information on VAX.set.

The firmware-based components are comprised of functional tests
that are executed by microprocessors located on various subsystem modules. These tests provide fault detection and indicate the
Software and Services

9.83

Performance Tools and Diagnostics
,VAX SoftWare Performance Monitor
SPD: 26.25
UPI: ZEO
VAX Diagnostic Program Macros Library is a set of macros that
establish the interface between a diagnostic program and the
VAX diagnostic supervisor.
The VAX Diagnostic Program Macros Library is provided in
three versions: MACR0-32, BLISS-32, and C.

SPD: 27.71
UPI: VE5
VAX Performance Advisor (VPA) is a DECwindows based VMS
layered product that reduces the time and effort required to
manage and monitor VAX system performance, as well as plan
for future resource requirements. It can be used with standalone
VAX, VAX.cluster and Local Area VAX.cluster systems, as well as
Mixed-interconnect VAX.cluster systems.
VPA gathers VMS system data and through the application of
expert system technology, analyzes the data, identifies specific
conditions causing performance degradation, and presents
detailed evidence to support its conclusions. Further, VPA provides recommendations for attaining improved system
performance.

In addition to its expert system analysis, the VAX Performance
Advisor assists in capacity planning exercises by providing data
archival and graphing capabilities for long term trend analysis,
and performance modeling to determine future system
performance given changes in workload or configuration.

SPD: 26.76
UPI: 119
VAX Performance and Coverage Analyzer helps VMS users analyze the execution behavior of their application programs and is
an aid in tuning the performance and testing of applications programs. It pinpoints execution bottlenecks and other performance
problems in applications programs and provides test coverage
analysis by measuring which parts of a user program are executed or not executed by a given set of test data.
VAX Performance and Coverage Analyzer includes the Collector,
which gathers performance or test coverage data on the running
user program, and the Analyzer, which later processes and displays the collected data. The Collector gathers the performance
data and writes that information to a data file. Once the data has
been collected into a data file, the Analyzer can be run using that
data file as input. The Analyzer is a separate program that reads
the data file produced by the Collector and presents the results
as performance histograms or other displays.
The Collector and the Analyzer are fully symbolic and use the
Debug Symbol Table (DST) information in the user program to
access the symbolic names of program locations. Applications
written in any VMS language that produces DST information can
be analyzed using VAX Performance and Coverage Analyzer.

9.84

Software and Services

SPD: 27.56
UPI: 850 (Full function)
VUP (Collector facility)
VAX Software Performance Monitor (VAX SPM) is a software
performance management facility for VAX and VAXcluster systems. VAX SPM can collect, archive, display, analyze, report and
graph performance information useful in system tuning, trend
analysis and workload forecasting. This information includes
resource utilization and load balance data for single node, multiCPU, and VAXcluster systems. VAX SPM software is designed for
use by system managers and system programmers.
VAX SPM Collector Facility provides a flexible facility for collecting and archiving performance data. Data may be collected using
a variety of user specified qualifiers and parameters. The user can
start and stop data collection for all nodes in a VAX.cluster or
from remote nodes in a distributed system from a single terminal,
and archive all the performance data into a single history file.

SPD: 27.63
UPI: 382
VAX Source Code Analyzer is an interactive, multilanguage, multimodule, source code cross-reference and static analysis tool that
helps developers analyze an entire system as opposed to individual modules. It also helps developers understand unfamiliar systems. This product is useful during the implementation and
maintenance phases of a project.
The query feature allows users to search and display specific
symbol, file, and module information. Previously entered queries
can be maintained, reused, and used in new queries.
VAX Source Code Analyzer helps answer common source code
questions such as where a particular global variable is declared,
initialized, modified, or referenced; which modules contain references to a particular symbol name; whether the calling arguments
are consistent; and where a specific routine is called.
This product is integrated with the VAX Language-Sensitive Editor. The editor, together with the Source Code Analyzer, provides developers with an integrated environment for source code
development and maintenance. When the software is used with
one of the supported VAX language compilers, developers can
interactively edit, compile, debug, navigate, and analyze source
code from a single session.

SPD: 31.64
UPI: YEA
VAXft System Services is a VMS layered software product. When
combined with base VMS and the VAXft series hardware, VAX.ft
System Services provides the full fault tolerant system capabilities.
The resulting features include automatic failover, configuration
management, automatic dial-out notification, and component fault
isolation and recovery
VAXft System Services software is used by System Managers,
Operations, and Field Service personnel to perform system management and maintenance operations. The software is transparent
to the system users as well as to VMS layered products and
applications.

System Management

SPD: 36.21
UPI: GJS

SPD: 31.79
UPI: YFP

DEC File Optimizer for VMS is a layered software product which
reduces file fragmentation and optimizes file placement through
scheduled defragmentation jobs.

DECelms (DEC Extended Local Area Network Management Software) is a VMS layered product that allows users, at a VAX host,
to configure, manage, monitor, control and observe any LAN
Bridge and FDDI Wiring Concentrator in the "Extended LAN"
and FDDI network environment. The term LAN Bridge is used to
refer to Digital's LAN Bridge 100, LAN Bridge 150, LAN Bridge
200, DECbridge 500, METROwave, and Chipcom's Ethermodem
Broadband Bridge.

DEC Network Save and Restrite ~or UL'FRIX
SPD: 36.17
UPI: MA5 (VAX single-use)
GZK (VAX server)
MA6 (RISC single-use)
GZL (RISC server)
XYX (VAX and RISC client)

DEC Network Save and Restore for ULTRIX provides backup
services to either a single system or to a group of systems on a
TCP/ IP network.
Backup/Restore is a routine system management function where
redundant copies of data are made to improve data integrity.

The LAN Bridge products are the primary building blocks of the
"Extended LAN" (Local Area Network) architecture. An
Extended LAN is a collection of LANs that are interconnected
and logically appear as one large Local Area Network. The
DECconcentrator is the primary building block of the FDDI network environment. Together these environments are physically
and logically attached and extended via the DECbridge 500. The
DECbridge 500 is the device which allows Ethernet and FDDI
networks to transparently communicate.
The LAN Bridge products operate at the data link level, and the
FDDI DECconcentrator operates at the physical link level. Both
product sets are transparent to upper level protocols.

SPD: 26.N2
UPI: GKM
DEC Security Reporting Facility for VMS (DECsrf) is a software
tool that a security or system manager uses, in conjunction with
DECinspect software (SPD 26.Nl), to establish a custom security
analysis and reporting system to manage the security of a network of distributed systems. With these tools, the security manager can implement and maintain a security standard that is consistent with corporate security policy for the VMS nodes in the
distributed computing environment. Digital highly recommends
that customers purchase security consulting services for assistance
in designing and implementing a security analysis and reporting
system that balances business needs with security requirements.
Local Digital offices can assist customers in determining the
appropriate services for their requirements.
DECsrf software is designed to run on one or more nodes to
support centralized collection and management of compliance
reports from DECinspect installations. DECinspect software is
designed to run on every node in a network to periodically evaluate compliance with a security policy defined by the security
manager.
Optionally, DECinspect software can be configured to send summary security status messages (called tokens) to a DECsrf installation. While DECinspect can be used alone in small distributed
systems, managing a large number of nodes or a set of nodes on
a dispersed network can be very difficult. DECsrf centralized
management capabilities can be very helpful in these situations.

DECelms resides on a VAX host. Corresponding management
firmware resides in the LAN Bridges and FDDI
DECconcentrators. The management protocol is used to communicate between the VAX host and the target LAN Bridges and
FDDI DECconcentrators. DECelms provides additional functionality to support the actual control and observation of the target
LAN Bridges and FDDI DECconcentrators.

SPD: 32.48
UPI: YSU
DECmcc Basic Management System software implements Digital's
Enterprise Management Architecture (EMA) director model, consistent with the ISO/OSI management framework. The DECmcc
Basic Management System (BMS) software, initially implemented
under the VMS operating system lets users control, monitor and
test manageable objects (entities) in a network.
The EMA Director Model defines a management platform called
a director, and cooperating but independent software components named, management modules. DECmcc BMS is comprised
of 3 types of director and management modules they are; the
Access Modules (AMs) that provide access to and information
about different classes of entities, the Function Modules (FMs)
that provide high level management functions for managed entities , and the Presentation Modules (PMs) that provide a consistent user interface for Function modules.

If centralized management is desired, the customer will establish
one or more DECsrf installations on the network. Typically,
DECsrf installations will be set up to support the organizational
reporting structure (e.g., one DECsrf node per organizational
management domain). The specific DECsrf installation that a
DECinspect node reports to is specified during installation of the
DECinspect software. DECsrf software performs integrity checks
to prevent unauthorized modification of token information during
transmission from DECinspect installations.

SPD: 32.49
UPI: YSW
DECmcc Developer's Toolkit is a VMS layered product used for
the development of application-specific DECmcc access modules.
The development tools run on any host VAX computer under
VMS operating systems. The DECmcc Developer's Toolkit is for
experienced network managers and system software developers.
(Continued)

Software and Services

9.85

System Management
DECmcc Developer's Toolkit (Continued)
The DECmcc Director or Basic Management System software is
required for enrolling, testing and operating access modules
developed using the Toolkit. The DECmcc system software simplifies the design and implementation of application-specific
access modules by offering a runtime kernel executive, various
service programs, and source code for a Sample Access Module.
The Toolkit includes documentation and several software development utilities and testing tools.

DECmcc Director
SPD: 32.46
UPI: YM9

DECmcc Director software implements Digital's Enterprise Management Architecture (EMA) director model, consistent with the
ISO/OSI management framework. The DECmcc Director software,
initially implemented under VMS operating systems, lets users
control, monitor, and test manageable objects (entities) in a
network.
The EMA Director Model defines a management platform called
a director and cooperating but independent software components
named, management modules. The DECmcc Director is comprised of three types of director and management modules are;
the access modules (AMs) provide access to and information
about different classes of entities, the function modules (FMs)
provide high level management functions for managed entities,
and the presentation modules (PMs) provide a consistent user
interface for function modules.

DECmcc Enterprise Management Stadbn
~------~----~~-

control, and observe any LAN Bridge, DECbridge 5xx, 6xx, and
DECconcentrator 500 physical media variants in the "Extended
LAN" and FDDI network environment. The term LAN Bridge is
used to refer to Digital Equipment Corporation's LAN Bridge
100, LAN Bridge 150, LAN Bridge 200, METROWAVE Bridge,
and Chipcom's Ethermodem Broadband Bridge.
The LAN Bridge and DECbridge products are the primary building blocks of the "Extended LAN" (Local Area Network) architecture. An Extended LAN is a collection of LANs that are interconnected and logically appear as one large Local Area Network.
The DECconcentrator family of products is the primary building
block of the FDDI network environment. Together these environments are physically and logically attached and extended via the
DECbridge family of products. The DECbridge product line is the
family of products which allow Ethernet and FDDI networks to
communicate transparently.
The LAN Bridge and DECbridge products operate at the data
link level, and FDDI DECconcentrators operate at the physical
link level. Both product sets are transparent to upper level
protocols.
DECmcc Extended LAN Manager AM resides on a VAX host.
Corresponding management firmware resides in the LAN Bridges,
DECbridges, and FDDI DECconcentrators.
The management protocol is used to communicate between the
DECmcc VAX host running the DECmcc Extended LAN Manager
AM software and the target LAN Bridges, DECbridges, and FDDI
DECconcentrators. DECmcc Extended LAN Manager AM provides
additional functionality to support the actual control and observation of the target LAN Bridges, DECbridges, and FDDI
DECconcentrators.

SPD: 31.88
UPI: YFV

DECmcc Enterprise Management Station (DECmcc EMS) is a network management software product designed to provide network
managers with a complete set of applications to manage wide
area heterogeneous networks.
The DECmcc Enterprise Management Station consolidates Digital
Equipment Corporation's network management applications
within a DECwindows environment and provides the capability of
running all applications on a single system. It consists of products that are compliant with Digital's Enterprise Management
Architecture (EMA) as well as products that are not EMAcompliant. As such, DECmcc EMS is a transition vehicle to an
EMA compliant product set within a single software product.
DECmcc EMS supports the ability to install and run other VMS
layered products within a DECwindows environment. DECmcc
EMS also provides access to non-Digital management products
that are based on Xl 1 standards. Such products can be installed
on the same or separate processors as DECmcc EMS for the purpose of consolidating interfaces on a single workstation display.
Also included with the DECmcc EMS components is the Network
Troubleshooting Guide. Available through the Bookreader application, the Network Troubleshooting Guide provides DECmcc
EMS users with a systematic, on-line approach to solving some of
the most common problems that occur on DECnet-VAX,
DECnet-ULTRIX, Ethernet, and TCP/IP networks.

pECmcc Extended LAN Manager AM
SPD: 31.33
UPI: GX8
GX9 (License required with DECmcc Director Vl.1)

DECmcc Extended LAN Manager AM is a VMS layered product
that allows users, at a VAX host, to configure, manage, monitor,

9.86

Software and Services

SPD: 33.18
UPI: YUl (VAX)
YUG (RISC)

DECmcc Management Station for ULTRIX, (DECmcc MSU) , is an
integrated set of network tools designed to manage multivendor
networks. It has a DECwindows based graphical user interface
that allows a user to manage TCP/IP objects using Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP), and DECnet Phase IV
objects using DNA Network Information and Control Exchange
(NICE) protocol.
It provides management capabilities in the areas of Configuration,
Fault, and Performance and has a Report Generation capability
that allows users to store and retrieve management information
on the users' networks. It uses an ULTRIX/SQL relational database (included with ULTRIX Operating System) to store the map
representation, object and service information, the Management
Information Base (MIB) data dictionary, alarm data, and reporting
data. Sophisticated users can use SQL report generation capabilities to create customized reports.
In the area of Configuration Management, DECmcc MSU allows
the user to add, modify, query and delete information about various objects or services associated with those objects. It also provides for installation of SNMP agents on remote systems, starting
demons on distributed hosts, and the addition of object identifiers for the vendor-specific portion of MIB into the ULTRIX/SQL
database. DECmcc MSU provides agents for previous versions of
ULTRIX. DECmcc MSU also provides the function of Autotopology, building the map automatically while determining which
TCP/IP routes and hosts exist on the network.
(Continued)

System Management
DECmcc Management Station for ULTRIX (Continued)
The Fault Management functions assist in the diagnosis of network failure conditions. They allow the customer to query or set
MIB variables for TCP/IP objects and NICE variables for DECnet
objects, and perform reachability tests to check connectivity of
TCP/IP and DECnet nodes.
The Performance Management functions allow the user to see
what is happening on the network backbone and on individual
hosts. It provides the essential network statistical information to
enable users to identify trends and design and plan the network.
It allows the user to look at the load on the Ethernet backbone
and provides percentage utilization of the backbone bandwidth.
It also allows the capability to monitor MIB variables, and displays the MIB variables in real time and through a bar graph.

SPD: 31.87
UPI: YGL
DECmcc Site Management Station (DECmcc SMS) is a network
management software product designed to provide network managers with a complete set of applications to manage wide area
heterogeneous networks.
The DECmcc Site Management Station consolidates Digital
Equipment Corporation's network management applications
within a DECwindows environment and provides the capability of
running all applications on a single system. It consists of products that are compliant with Digital's Enterprise Management
Architecture (EMA) as well as products that are not
EMA-compliant. As such, DECmcc SMS is a transition vehicle to
an EMA compliant product set within a single software product.
DECmcc SMS supports the ability to install and run other VMS
layered products within a DECwindows environment. DECmcc
SMS also provides access to non-Digital management products
that are based on Xl 1 standards. Such products can be installed
on the same or separate processors as DECmcc SMS for the purpose of consolidating interfaces on a single workstation display.
Also included with the DECmcc SMS components is the Network
Troubleshooting Guide. Available through the Bookreader application, the Network Troubleshooting Guide provides DECmcc
SMS users with a systematic, on-line approach to solving some of
the most common problems that occur on DECnet-VAX,
DECnet-ULTRIX, Ethernet, and TCP/ IP networks .

SPD: 32.50
UPI: YSV
DECmcc TCP/IP SNMP Access Module for VMS is a component
of the EMA compliant DECmcc family of products. It provides
DECmcc with access to systems in a TCP/IP network that have a
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) agent. Using
SNMP protocol, the DECmcc TCP/IP SNMP AM provides
DECmcc with data to perform configuration management on
these devices , and monitor and control them via the DECmcc
Forms and Command Line (FCL) user interface.
The DECmcc TCP/IP SNMP AM along with the DECmcc Basic
Management System becomes a Manager with the following
SNMP capabilities: it fully conforms to the Internet Advisory
Board RFC 1098 (SNMP), and supports the SNMP Get, GetNext
and Set operations; it fully supports the Structure of Management
Information (SMI) as specified in Internet Advisory Board RFC
1065; and it fully supports the Management Information Base
(MIB I) as specified in Internet Advisory Board RFC 1066.
In addition, the DECmcc TCP/IP SNMP AM is a fully integrated
component of DECmcc. The DECmcc Forms and Command Line
(FCL) user interface allows identification of TCP/ IP systems by IP

address " dot" notation, or by domain name. The DECmcc
Alarms Function Module and the Configuration Function Module support TCP/ IP systems as accessed via SNMP.
The DECmcc TCP/IP SNMP AM uses the VMS/ULTRIX Connection software from Digital as the transport mechanism to communicate with TCP/JP systems, and to translate internet domain
names.
DECmcc TCP/ IP SNMP AM includes extensive on-line information
similar to VMS HELP. Help information is provided in the following four categories: Entity information, Function information,
Presentation information, and Tutorial information.

SPD: 35.45
UPI: YMG
DECmcc WANdesigner is an interactive VMS layered software
product that enables users to design and evaluate wide area networks (WANs). With WANdesigner, users can design new WANs
or evaluate changes to existing ones based on cost considerations,
equipment and application data, and performance requirements.
Changes to existing networks can be planned in advance and
alternative designs can be generated for comparison purposes.
WANdesigner enables users to conduct what-if analyses on
existing networks or suggested network designs. For example,
users can make manual modifications of network components,
change applications, traffic, or design goals and have
WAN designer compute the result to analyze the effect of the
proposed changes.
Using a device that supports VAX GKS software, users can display and interact with network topology maps. Such maps, with
WANdesigner's DECforms-based menu interface, enables users to
describe and map exiting networks, estimate network
performance, design new networks, and generate reports.

SPD: 36.60
UPI: XTX
DECperformance Solution Accounting Chargeback generates a
report of charges based upon system resource utilization with
user specified resource pricing.
The DECps Solution Accounting Chargeback product uses VMS
accounting data to produce system ulitization reports . These
reports show monetary amounts charged for various types of system resources based upon unit prices provided by the user. The
report can be used as an itemized bill or as a general resource
utilization report.
DECps Solution Accounting Chargeback provides the user with
the capabilities to gather the data needed allow the user to effectively manage the allocating of costs of an existing system.

SPD: 36.04
UPI: GX3
DECperformance Solution Capacity Planner determines system
performance levels for various workloads and configurations.
DECps Capacity Planner allows the system manager to define the
system's total workload in terms of manageable units which
DECps will then report against. Workloads and groups of workloads (workload families) are used in model generation and can
be reported against in DECps' Performance Evaluation Reports or
Graphics. Workloads can be defined according to users, images,
UICs, process name, account name and process mode.

Software and Services

9.87

System Management

SPD: 36.02
UPI: GXl
DECperformance Solution Data Collector records VMS system
data for subsequent processing by the DECps advisor. The data
collector runs as a detached process and is activated at system
start up .
DECps Data collector collects data according to a user-defined
schedule maintained in a schedule file; default collection is 24
hours per day, 7 days per week. The data collection schedule
should be consistent for each node in the VAXcluster system to
ensure all critical pieces of system data are collected. The data
collector will automatically shut off when the disk on which the
raw DECps data files reside has insufficient free space.
The Dump Report displays data from the DECps database files in
user readable format. The user may select to dump the full database record, or may choose to dump a portion of the database
record.
DECps Data collector provides data archiving capabilities so the
VMS performance data collected by DECps on a daily basis can
be used in long term performance studies. When DECps daily
data files are archived, the resultant data files are known as history files. History files, which can be used as the data source for
generating Performance Evaluation Reports, Dump Reports, and
Graphs, are created according to user-specified reduction
scheme(s). The user has the abilty to define specifically how the
data will be archived by defining history file descriptor elements,
such as the granularity, periodicity, time interval, model data,
workload family, retention period, schedule, and holiday schedule. The size of the history file is dependent on the data reduction scheme selected with the most important element being the
interval size defined. The size of reduced data, in blocks, is about
10 times smaller than it is in daily form.

SPD: 36.03
UPI: GX2
DECperformance Solution Performance Advisor analyzes VMS
data through the application of expert system technology, identifies specific conditions causing performance degradation, and
presents detailed evidence to support its conclusions. Further, the
Performance Advisor provides recommendations for attaining
improved system performance.
The DECps Performance Advisor contains a knowledge base of
rules and thresholds which it uses to analyze VAX system data.
The Performance Advisor rules fall into five categories: Memory,
CPU, I/ O, Cluster, and Miscellaneous.
The knowledge base may be modified and expanded at the user's
discretion. To integrate new rules, modify existing rules, or effectively turn off existing rules, the user creates an auxiliary knowledge base. In subsequent analysis, the user can load the auxiliary
knowledge base to augment DECps Performance Advisor factory
rules.
The Performance Advisor produces an analysis report that aids
the system manager in monitoring system activities and in making
performance evaluations by quickly identifying performance
problems. Through its analysis, DECps will also identify potential
bottlenecks and the specific device on which the bottleneck will
occur.

9.88

Software and Services

The Performance Advisor reports are generated at the request of
the user and include: the Analysis Report, the Performance Evaluation Report, Line Graphs and Pie Charts. The Performance
Advisor reports can be generated from either daily or historical
data, with the exception of the analysis report which is generated
from daily data files only.

SPD: 34.26
UPI: GJ9
DECram for VMS is a disk device driver that allows a VMS system manager to create pseudo disks (RAMdisks) that reside in
VAX main memory for the purpose of improving I/O
performance. Frequently accessed data can be accessed much
faster from a DECram device than from a physical disk device.
These RAMdisks can be accessed through the VMS file system
just as physical disks are accessed, requiring no change to application or system software.
The number of DECram units used will most often be quite small
(usually one, but sometimes two or more).
Since VAX main memory is allocated for the DECram device, a
substantial amount of extra memory is generally required. The
amount of memory dedicated is selectable. The VMS system manager designates the amount of memory dedicated to the DECram
device(s) and the files that will be stored on it. The maximum
size of a DECram device is 524,280 blocks.

SPD: 32.19
UPI: YLL
DECscheduler for VMS is a distributed scheduling product that
automates the execution of repetitive production jobs on VMS
systems. (A job is a DCL command file or a VMS command
string.) DECscheduler for VMS separates information that specifies how jobs should be run from the jobs themselves. It automatically takes care of the job rescheduling calculation, completion notification, and so on. A scheduled job can run when
constraints on its execution are met. There are two types of
constraints: the time must be later than the job's scheduled time,
and all of the jobs that the job depends on must have completed
successfully later than the last time the job completed. A job can
depend on up to 16 other jobs, which can be within a
VAXcluster or on remote nodes of a wide area DECnet network.
Job database information can be accessed through DCL commands. Most commands can also work remotely over the network, allowing centralized control of distributed applications.
DECscheduler for VMS has full VAXcluster failover capabilities.
Jobs can be divided into steps. Interrupted jobs can be automatically restarted at the current step on another node in the
VAXcluster or restricted to a single node. An installationmodifiable, load-balancing procedure can be invoked at execution
time to select the VAXcluster node for job execution.
The product includes an event logging and reporting facility that
can be used to produce job reports.

System Management
DECtrace
SPD: 25.Gl
UPI: VW2 (Development)
VW4 (Runtime)

DCSC manages the StorageTek ACS transport assignments to a
VMS system. This includes managing the allocation of ACS transports, locking and unlocking both cartridge and transport
resources to accommodate user tape function requests, and recovering any unused resources (caused by a user mounting a tape
and logging out before dismounting it).

DECtrace for VMS is a layered product that collects and reports
on event based data. This data is helpful for performance analysis, capacity planning, database tuning, error logging and other
areas in which detailed application or layered product specific
performance and/ or event information is useful. DEC trace event
data can be gathered from any VMS layered product or combination of products that contains DECtrace service routine calls.
Customers can also put DECtrace event calls in their application
code to collect event and performance data. DECtrace is designed
to operate with minimal performance impact on the system and
can be used in both development and production environments.
DECtrace supports both single-node and VAXcluster
environments.

SPD: 26.91

DECtrace considers an event to be an application-defined occurrence. An event can have a start and an end (duration event) or
can simply occur (point event). DECtrace allows events within
layered products or customer application programs to be defined
and data items to be associated with each event. These data items
can be resource utilization statistics (for example, CPU time).
Additionally, data items specific to the Digital layered product,
third-party layered product, or customer application can be associated with each event. These facility-specific data items might
include information supporting database tuning, application-level
error logging, and a range of other information logging needs.

NMCC/DECnet Monitor is a network monitoring system for
Phase IV/IV+ DECnet network nodes. It runs as a layered application on VMS Systems and does not require any additional hardware or software on the remote DECnet nodes to be monitored.
NMCC/DECnet Monitor collects and monitors data concerning
the DECnet network. NMCC/DECnet Monitor enables the user to
store, distribute, analyze, and evaluate the data into useful and
comprehensible information, and to present the data either as a
screen display or as a printed report.

DECtrace for VMS collects and reports on event-based data. This
data is helpful for performance analysis, capacity planning, database tuning, error logging, and other areas in which detailed
application or layered product specific performance and/or event
information is useful.
DECtrace event data can be gathered from any VMS layered
product or combination of products that contains DECtrace service routine calls. Customers can also put DECtrace event calls in
their application code to collect event and performance data.
DECtrace is designed to operate with minimal performance
impact on the system and can be used in both development and
production environments. DECtrace supports both single-node
and VAXcluster environments.
DECtrace considers an event to be an application-defined occurrence. An event can have a start and an end (duration event) or
can simply occur (point event). DECtrace allows events within
layered products or customer application programs to be defined
and data items to be associated with each event. These data items
can be resource utilization statistics (for example, CPU time).
Additionally, data items specific to the Digital layered product,
third-party layered product, or customer application can be associated with each event. These facility-specific data items might
include information supporting database tuning, application-level
error logging, and a range of other information logging needs.

Digital C~l1ridge Server Component (DCSC) for VMS,:
SPD: 33.59
UPI: YWN
Digital Cartridge Server Component (DCSC) for VMS provides
the software front-end interface to the StorageTek 4400 Automated Cartridge System (StorageTek ACS). It can be installed on
either a single VAX computer or a VAXcluster.

When a user requests a tape function such as mount, DCSC
checks for the existence of the requested cartridge, selects an
available StorageTek ACS transport, and locks the required
resources. DCSC ensures the tape cartridge is physically loaded
onto a StorageTek transport and, if requested, executes a VMS
tape mount function. Once a tape cartridge is mounted, DCSC
makes it possible for users to request a VMS copy or backup
function to read data from or send data to the cartridge.

UPI: VTG (Base system)
VMS (Right-to-copy)

NMCC/DECnet Monitor consists of software modules which combine to form a comprehensive monitoring system. The central
component of NMCC/DECnet Monitor is the Kernel, a data
acquisition process, which collects data from the network using
polling and/ or event logging. Polling can be used to obtain status, characteristics and traffic/error counters. Event logging can
be set up to cause remote nodes to log events automatically to
the Kernel, including status changes and traffic/error counters as
they occur.
The network manager has full control over which nodes are
polled, the polling rates, and which remote nodes log events. The
Kernel processes the raw data and creates a log file of statistical
data which is then available to the NMCC/DECnet Reports subsystem for the production of network reports.
The User Interface subsystem provides an easy-to-use command
interface to the NMCC/DECnet Monitor. It provides on-line
~raphic and lexical video displays of selected error statistics, traffic statistics, and status information. The displays are designed
?ierarchi.cally so that the user can select the network components,
mformat10n types, and levels of detail in a consistent and easy to
use manner. The graphic displays include histograms, linear
scales, and a network map.
The User Interface subsystem also provides the user with the
capability to build and manipulate various databases maintained
by NMCC/DECnet Monitor, including a network component reference database. This contains a description of all nodes and
physical links in the network. It includes such details as CPU
type, type and version of operating system, name and telephone
number of system manager, name and telephone number of customer service contacts, and many other useful details. Display
commands are provided to retrieve this information. The user
interface to these commands is consistent with the operational
interface of the product.

Software and Services

9.89

:.,

System Management
NMCCJVAX ETHERnim
SPD: 26.96
UPI: 514
NMCC/VAX ETHERnim is a network management application
program that provides the network manager with a tool to gather
information about Ethernet nodes, verify reachability of nodes,
provide a graphical display of local area network topology, and
monitor Ethernet traffic.
NMCC/VAX ETHERnim consists of two categories of software.
One must be installed on a VMS system set up as the Host, and
the other can be optionally installed on Target systems running
VMS. In this context, the Host is defined as the node on which
the NMCC/VAX ETHERnim application runs, while the Target
systems are the DECnet nodes on the Ethernet segments which
are being tested at the User (task) level. The optional software
installed on the Target system is referred to as the Remote files.
The Host software requires Phase IV DECnet software on a VMS
system.

Termin Se,rver Manager
SPD: 27.64

VAX JCS Run-Time Library routines are intended to be called
from user-written programs to perform jukebox functions. Any
program written in one of the VMS operating system supported
languages can call any procedure in the VAX JCS RTL (Run-Time
Library). VAX JCS RTL calls conform to standard VMS systems
interface specifications for creating modular procedures, which
allow mixed language programming.
VAX JCS is contained in the VAX JCS RTL as a shareable
installed image. Only the DCL and callable RTL interfaces are
accessible by the user.
VAX JCS provides programmed control that enables the RV64
jukebox to optical cartridges between door, slots, and drives in
the jukebox; load and unload optical cartridges to and from the
optical drives; flip a cartridge from one side to another; and run
calibration and self-test procedures. Functions for locking and
unlocking the jukebox are supplied to ensure a controlled environment for any process. VAX JCS also maintains a database for
the RV64 that can generate a bitmap for the slots and provide
status information.
VAX JCS checks for sufficient user privilege before performing
each VAX JCS functions. Higher-privileged processes can unlock
a jukebox locked by a lower-privileged process. The system manager can assign system privileges.

UPI: VDH
Terminal Server Manager VMS (ISM) software will allow suitably
privileged users at a VAX host to control and observe terminal
servers anywhere in the extended local area network. ISM provides centralization and increased flexibility in configuring, monitoring, and controlling Digital Equipment Corporation's family of
terminal servers.

VAX "'Disk Striping Driver for VMS
SPD: 31.66
UPI: YEL
VAX Disk Striping Driver for VMS implements disk striping for
the VMS operating system. The product provides the ability for
users to create one or more stripesets, each comprised of two or
more physical disk drives and represented to the user application
(and operating system) as a single pseudo-device. Stripesets must
be composed of disks of a single type. Full VAXcluster support is
provided with Striping V2.0 (with VMS V5.4).
Disk striping interleaves multiple disks to improve I/O
performance in the same way that high-performance memory systems interleave memory banks. In each case, data requests are
decomposed and distributed to physical storage components that
process those requests in parallel.

VAX Jukebox Control SoftWare
SPD: 25.D6
UPI: VHB
VAX Jukebox Control Software (JCS) is a VMS operating system
layered product that controls the operation of one or more RV64
optical libraries or jukeboxes. It is intended as a toolkit for applications developers and as a utility for system managers and operators. VAX JCS supplies a callable run-time library interface as
well as a Digital Command Language (DCL) interface. Commands
are provided that allow the movement of optical disk cartridges
into and out of the jukebox, and between storage slots and optical drives within the jukebox. In addition to cartridge movement,
a variety of status reports and maintenance commands are supported by VAX JCS.

9.90

Software and Services

SPD: 29.73
UPI: VI5
VAX Remote Environmental Monitoring Software (REMS) supports Digital's HA3000 Uninterruptible Power System, H7317
Power Distribution System PLUS (PDS+) and H7318 Power Conditioning System Plus (PCS+) microprocessor based environmental and power distribution systems, and the H7310 Environmental Monitoring System. With the PDS+/PCS+ and/ or EMS
systems, complemented by the VAX REMS software, complete
environmental surveillance of a computer site and supporting
equipment is accomplished. In addition, VAX REMS, communicates with the HA3000 UPS to accept alarm and status information from that product's internal sensors.
Through the use of sensors that are both internal and external to
the PDS+/PCS+ units, and external sensors in the EMS units,
environmental changes are detected, and, depending upon user
defined threshold settings for these sensors, notification alarms
are triggered on the host VAX system. Optionally, utilizing
embedded sensors within HA3000 UPS systems, internal parameters and alarms are retrieved in a time-stamped sequence allowing
this information to be included within the VMS file structure
created by REMS. VAX REMS provides continuous unattended
monitoring and collection of environmental data and will only
require attention if an alarm condition is reached on one of its
sensors.
Employing an easy to learn and use menu and forms style user
interface, VAX REMS facilitates the task of configuring the environmental sensors for a complete system. For status inquiry and
alarm notification purposes, VAX REMS generally eliminates the
need to use the the H7310 local terminal interface, along with
the PCS+/PDS+ and HA3000 consoles.

System Management
VAXdust~,,~ftware
SPD: 27.46
UPI: VOl

SPD: 29.78
UPI: VBR

VAXcluster Console System (VCS) is a VMS DECwindows layered
software product which provides a central point for system console services and for logging console data received from the serviced nodes. From a single terminal or VAXstation display connected to the VCS host system, a system manager can perform all
console functions for all serviced nodes.

VAXcluster Software is a VMS System Integrated Product (SIP). It
provides a highly integrated VMS computing environment distributed over multiple VAX and/or MicroVAX CPUs. This environment is called a VAXcluster system.

Functions include shutting down or rebooting the serviced nodes;
running standalone diagnostics; performing standalone backup
operations; installing layered products; viewing console output;
reviewing historical console data; retrieving historical console data
for analysis or printing; and searching for console data.
VCS also logs all data and activities between VCS and the serviced nodes; scans incoming messages from the serviced nodes
for specific text strings that can contain status or error information; notifies system managers of critical system messages; enables
users to assemble icons (not drawn to scale) into graphics displays on a VAXstation screen representing the aerial view of the
data center and the logical grouping of your VAXcluster configurations; and provides an optional security facility to control
access to the serviced nodes.

CPUs in a VAXcluster system can share processing, mass storage,
and other resources under a single VMS security and management
domain. Within this highly integrated environment, CPUs retain
their independence because they use local, memory resident copies of the VMS operating system. Thus, clustered CPUs can boot
and fail independently while benefiting from common resources.
Applications running on one or more CPUs in a VAXcluster system access shared resources in a coordinated manner. VAXcluster
Software components synchronize access to shared resources,
preventing two or more processes from interfering with each
other when updating data. This coordination ensures data integrity during multiple concurrent update transactions.
Because resources are shared, VAXcluster systems offer higher
availability than standalone CPUs. Properly configured VAXcluster
systems can withstand the failure of various components. For
example, when one CPU in a cluster fails , users can log on to
another CPU to create a new process and continue working.
Applications can be designed to survive the failure of one or
more CPUs or other components.

Software and Services

9.91

Software Product Summary

9.92

Software and Services

Product Name

SPD

UPI

3270 Terminal Option Software

25.G5

VV9

ALL-IN-1

27.30

AAA

ALL-IN-1 DESKtop for DOS

50.20

YFE

ALL-IN-1 DESKtop Server for VMS

31.71

YFF

ALL-IN-1 Electronic Authorization and Routing
System

34.80

GJ6

ALL-IN-1 MAIL

39.58

VZ8 (For DOS)

39.59

YFT (LAN)
YFU (WAN)
YCZ (Server for VMS)
YZ7 (For VMS DECwindows)
YHS (For Video Terminals)

39.15

YZJ (Mail for Windows)
MCU (PATHWORKS Links)
LBJ (PATHWORKS for Windows)

ALL-IN-1 MAIL for VMS

39.59

YFT (Local Area Network Server)
YFU (Wide Area Network Server)
YCZ (Server for VMS)
VZ7 (VMS DECwindows)
YHS (For video terminals)

ALL-IN-1 Manager for LANs

36.59

XTJ (Manager for LANs)
XTK (Manager for WANs)
XTL (Desktop for LANs)
XTM (IOS for LANs)

ALL-IN-1 PC Server for VMS

31.71

YFF

ALL-IN-1 Personal Assistant

37.53

MDX

ALL-IN-1 Services for DECwindows

33.22

YG4

ALL-IN-1 STARTER

25.D9

VNN

ALL-IN-1 Voice Messaging Support

26.44

BASEstar CIMfast for VMS

36.31

XDB (Development)
XDC (Runtime)

BASEstar for VMS

33.17

YU9 (Development)
YUA (Runtime)

CADRA-VIEW for VMS

33.88

GFY
GGl (View only)
GG3 (DXF interface)
GG5 (ADT interface)
GG7 (IGES)
GLW (Translators)

CDA Converter Library for ULTRIX

31.30

VZB (VAX)
YG9 (RISC)

CDA Converter Library for VMS

31.31

VZA

CDD/Administrator for VMS

32.72

YP8

DEC ACA Services for ULTRIX

36.07

XKC (VAX development)
XKD (VAX runtime)
XKE (RISC development)
XKF (RISC runtime)

DEC ACA Services for VMS

36.06

XKA (Development)
XKB (Runtime)

DEC Ada

21.41

GZQ

DEC Ada Preprocessor for ULTRIXISQL

33.14

YNR (VAX)
YNQ (RISC)

DEC ASD/SEE Toolkit for VMS

37.09

YXZ

DEC AVS for ULTRIX

33.29

YUT

DEC CDA Invokers for VMS

34.91

GVM

DEC C++ for ULTRIX

37.61

MG5

DEC COBOL Preprocessor for ULTRIXISQL

36.82

XXl

Software Product Summary
Product Name

SPD

UPI

DEC Commserver for VMS

33.21

GCQ

DEC Computer Integrated Telephony Applications
Interface for ULTRIX

34 .25

GMU (RISC)
GMV (VAX)

DEC Computer Integrated Telephony Applications
Interface for VMS

29.92

VGX

DEC Computer Integrated Telephony Server 100/ 500

36.33

XNQ

DEC C Preprocessor for ULTRIX/SQL

33.10

YNV (VAX)
YNU (RISC)

DECdecision

25.G2

VW3

DECdesign

29.29

XDl (Platform)
XAK (Yourdon technique)
XAL (Gane & Sarson technique)
XAM (MERISE technique)

DECdx/VMS

26.36

708

DEC/EDI

31.70

YM 1 (Media/documentation)
YM2 (Application component)
YM3 (Translation component)
YM4 (X.400 comm. component)
YM5 (OFTP comm. component)
YM6 (Bi-synch comm.
component)
YM7 (Bi-synch package)
YM8 (OFTP package)
YMP (X.400 package)

DECelms

31.79

YFP

DECelx Realtime Tools for ULTRIX

37.63

MFN (ULTRIX)
MFP (MIPS)
MFQ (68K)
MFR (MIPS runtime)
MFS (68K runtime)

DEC File Optimizer for VMS

36.21

GJ8

DECforms

29.90

VCH (VMS full development)
VNS (VMS runtime)
GVR (RISC ULTRIX full dev.)
GVS (RISC ULTRIX runtime)

DEC FORTRAN for OSF/1

37.54

MD3

DEC FORTRAN for ULTRIX RISC Systems

33 .05

DEC FORTRAN Preprocessor for ULTRIX/SQL

33.12

YNT (VAX)
YNS (RISC)

DECframe for RISC ULTRIX

31.83

YGJ
YHL (Client)
YHJ (Server)
YGK (Integration Kit)

DEC GKS-3D for ULTRIX

30.93

VX3 (VAX development)
VX4 (VAX runtime)
VXl (RISC development)
VX2 (RISC runtime)

DEC GKS-3D for VMS

25.D2

VFX (Development)
VFY (Runtime)

DEC GKS for VMS

26.20

810 (Development)
811 (Runtime)

DEC IEZl l Class Driver for VMS

31.41

YEH

DECimage Application Services for ULTRIX

31.73

YF7

DECimage Application Services for VMS

25.E8

829

DECimage Character Recognition Services for VMS

34.24

GJF

DECimage EXpress

37.41

MBU (Runtime)
MBV (Development)
MBW (Client)
MBX (Server)

DECimage SCAN Software for ULTRIX

31.75

YF8

...c
QI

So&ware and Services

9.93

Software Product Summary

9.94

Software and Services

Product Name

SPD

UPI

DECimage SCAN Software for VMS

25.D4

YPF

DECimage Storage Manager for VMS

31.22

893 (Server)
YGD (Client)

DEC Image Utility Library for ULTRIX

34.48

GMl (VAX)
GNl (RISC)

DEC Image Utility Library for VMS

34.47

GL9

DEC InfoServer Client for VMS

33.91

GGW
YTC (InfoServer access license)

DECinspect for VMS

26.Nl

GKL

DEC InstantSQL for Rdb/VMS

37.60

MEQ

DECintact

29.58

VFl (Development)
VF2 (Runtime)
VF3 (Remote access)

DEC LMF PAK Generator for ULTRIX

34.29

GT9

DEC LMF PAK Generator for VMS

31.68

YWP

DECmcc Basic Management System

32.48

YSU

DECmcc Developer's Toolkit

32.49

YSW

DECmcc Director

32.46

YM9

DECmcc Enterprise Management Station

31.88

YFV

DECmcc Extended LAN Manager AM

31.33

GX8
GX9 (License required with
DECmcc Director Vl.1)

DECmcc Management Station for ULTRIX

33 .18

YUl (VAX)
YUG (RISC)

DECmcc Site Management Station

31.87

YGL

DECmcc TCP/IP SNMP Access Module for VMS

32.50

YSV

DECmcc WANdesigner

35.45

YMG

DECmessageQ for MS-DOS

34.06

GHR

DECmessageQ for ULTRIX

34 .08

GHU (VAX)
GHT (RISC)

DECmessageQ for UNIX

39.25

MK6 (ULTRIX RISC dev.)
MKC (ULTRIX RISC runtime)
MK5 (ULTRIX VAX dev.)
MKB (ULTRIX VAX runtime)
MK8 (HP-UX development)
MKE (HP-UX runtime)
MK7 (System V/ 88 dev.)
MKD (System V/ 88 runtime)

DECmessageQ for VMS

34.07

GKP (Development)
GHV (Runtime)

DECmpp FORTRAN

36.68

XT6

DECmpp Image Processing Library

36.69

XT5 (License and doc.)
XT4 (Media)

DECmpp Parallel Programming Environment

36.67

XT7 (License and doc.)
XT4 (Media)

DECmpp System Software

36.70

XT4

DECndu (Network Device Upgrade) Utility for
ULTRIX

33.48

YX2 (FDDI DECconcentrator 500)
YX3 (FDDI DECbridge 500)
XA2 (FDDIController)

DECndu (Network Device Upgrade) Utility for
ULTRIX/VAX

36.34

YX2 (FDDI DECconcentrator 500)
YX3 (FDDI DECbridge)

DECndu (Network Device Upgrade) Utility for VMS

33.47

YX2 (FDDI DECconcentrator 500)
YX3 (FDDI DECbridge 500)

DECnet/OSI for ULTRIX

34.97

716 (VAX ULTRIX systems)
YT9 (RISC UL TRIX)

DECnet/PCSA Client: VAXmate

55.10

ON7

DECnet Router Server

30.34

725

Software Product Summary
Product Name

SPD

UPI

DECnet/SNA Gateway for Channel Transport

29.76

VC9

DECnet/SNA Gateway for Synchronous Transport

25.C6

SOI

DECnet/SNA ULTRIX 3270 Data Stream

30.64

XD2 (VAX)
XD9 (RISC)

DECnet/SNA ULTRIX 3270 Terminal Emulator

29.88

022

DECnet/SNA VMS 3270 Data Stream Programming
Interface

26.87

363

DECnet/SNA VMS 3270 Terminal Emulator

26.84

454

DECnet/SNA VMS APPC/ LU6.2 Programming
Interface

26.88

022

DECnet/SNA VMS Application Programming Interface

26.86

455

DECnet/SNA VMS Data Transfer Facility

27 .85

VEB (Server)
VEK (Utilities)
lGQ (MVS)
GUY (VM)

DECnet/SNA VMS DISOSS Document Exchange
Facility

26.72

042

DECnet/SNA VMS Distributed Host Command
Facility

26.71

043

DECnet/SNA VMS Gateway Management

29.70

VCK

DECnet/SNA VMS Printer Emulator

26.70

044

DECnet/SNA VMS Remote Job Entry

26.85

453

DECnet-ULTRIX for RISC and VAX

26.83

716

DECnet-VAX

25 .03

D04 (End-node)
D05 (Full-function)
D09 (migration option)

DECnet-VAX Extension

29.03

D04

DEC Network Save and Restore for ULTRIX

36.17

MA5 (VAX single-use)
GZK (VAX server)
MA6 (RISC single-use)
GZL (RISC server)
XYX (VAX and RISC client)

DEC ODA Compound Document Architecture (CDA)

32 .10

YHN

DEComni/VMS (Digital's OSI Manufacturing Network
Interconnect)

32.32

YME

DEC OSF/1

36.29

XYW

DECpage

26.29

AAN

DEC Pascal for DEC OSF/1

36.72

XYV

DECperformance Solution Accounting Chargeback

36.60

XTX

DECperformance Solution Capacity Planner

36.04

GX3

DECperformance Solution Data Collector

36.02

GXl

DECperformance Solution Performance Advisor

36.03

GX2

DEC PHIGS for ULTRIX

25 .K7

VW6 (Development)
VW7 (Runtime)

DEC PHIGS for VMS

29.38

OKB (Development)
VKl (Runtime)

DECplan Client for ULTRIX/RISC

31.29

YPB

DECplan for VMS

33.09

YPB (Server)
XC6 (Client)
XC8 (Time manager client)
XNV (Time manager to client
upgrade option)

DECplan Time Manager Client for ULTRIX/RISC

31.28

YPB (Server)
XC6 (Client)
XC8 (Time manager client)
XNV (Time manager to client
upgrade option)

Software and Services

9.95

Software Product Summary

9. 96 Software and Services

Product Name

SPD

UPI

DECpresent for ULTRIX

32 .08

YHG

DECpresent for VMS

32.07

YHE

DECquery for Macintosh

34.12

GGC

DECquery for ULTRIX

36.78

MD2

DECquery for VMS

36.77

MDI

DEC RALLY for VMS

27 .03

A86 (Development)
VF4 (Runtime)

DECram for VMS

34.26

G]9

DEC RdbAccess for ORACLE on VMS

32.80

YQV

DEC RdbAccess for VAX RMS on VMS

32.88

YQZ

DEC RdbExpert for VMS

31.72

VFJ

DEC Realtime Test Integrator for ULTRIX

32.43

YUQ (Development)
YV8 (Runtime)

DEC Realtime Test Integrator for VMS

28.30

YWQ (Development)
Bl5 (Runtime)

DEC Reliable Transaction Router (RTR) for VMS

34.30

XNK (Backend)
XNL (Frontend)

DECrou ter 2000

28.85

VI8

DECrouter 200

27.72

VDJ (VMS and MicroVMS)
VDK (ULTRIX-32 )
A33 (MS-DOS and PC-DOS)

DECrouter 250

32.15

YG6

DECscheduler for VMS

32.19

YLL

DEC SecurityGate for VMS

36.20

GZF

DEC Security Reporting Facility for VMS

26.N2

GKM

DECserver 100 for VMS and MicroVMS

27.41

925

DECserver 200 for ULTRIX-32

27.54

VDE

DECserver 200 for VMS and MicroVMS

27.53

VCB

DECserver 250 for ULTRIX-32

38.07

VTN

DECserver 250 for VMS

25.]5

VTM

DECserver 300 for ULTRIX-32

25.]2

VTV

DECserver 300 for VMS and MS-DOS

25.]1

VTU

DECserver 500 for ULTRIX

33.54

03K

DECserver 500 for VAX VMS an d MicroVMS

26.97

03K

DECserver 90TL for VMS, ULTRIX, and MS-DOS

38.71

M]P

DEC SoftPC for VMS

32 .18

YNW

DEC Sound/Picture Information Network (DECspin)
for ULTRIX

37.21

MD9

DECtalk Mail Access

26.45

088

DEC Text Processing Utility (DECTPU)

38.42

MC6

DEC TM32 Software for VMS

31.45

vzu

DEC Token Ring Network Device Driver for VMS

36.32

DECtp D esktop for ACMS

34.81

GZG

DECtrace

25 .G l

VW2 (Development)
VW4 (Runtime)

DECtrace for VMS

25 .Gl

VW2

DEC Trellis Object System for ULTRIX

32.39

YLU (VAX)
YLW (RISC)

DEC Trellis Object System for VMS

32.40

YLV

DECview3D

26.95

796

DECview3 D Concurrent View and Edit Module for
VMS

31.35

xws

Software Product Summary
P roduct Name

SPD

UPI

DECvoice Software

29.97

VFU

DEC VTX

26.57

031

DEC VUIT (Visual User Interface Tool) for ULTRIX
Systems

33 .78

GE8

DEC VUIT (Visual User Interface Tool) for VMS
Systems

32.09

YHC

DEC Wide Area Network Device Drivers for ULTRIX

32.33

YMK (VAX)
YML (RISC)

DECwindows 4125 Emulator for ULTRIX

31.59

YE9 (VAX)
YHD (RISC)

DECwindows 4125 Emulator for VMS

31.60

VZQ

DECwindows DECnet/SNA 3270 Terminal Emulator
for ULTRIX

31.57

VXA

DECwindows Developer Kit on VMS for OSF/Motif

32.37

YMA

DECwindows Graphical Interface Tools for VMS

32.27

XAQ

DECwrite for ULTRIX

25.K6

YGl

DECwrite for VMS

25.F6

VVF

DECwrite SGML Gateway and Development Tools for
ULTRIX

34.78

xsz

DECwrite SGML Gateway and Development Tools for
VMS

34.77

XSY

DEC X.25 Access for ULTRIX

26.E6

YP3 (VAX)
GTE (RISC)

DEC X.25gateway 100/500

32 .97

YT8

DEC X.25 Native Mode for ULTRIX

32.35

YSZ (VAX)
YSY (RISC)

DEC X.400 Mail System for ULTRIX

31.32

YWl (VAX)
YW2 (RISC)

Desktop-VMS Software

25 .F4

VV8

Digital Cartridge Server Component (DCSC) for VMS

33.59

YWN

Digital Extended Math Library for VMS

31.67

YEZ

Digital Extended Math Library for ULTRIX

34.44

GKK

DRB32 VMS Drivers

27.69

VF5

DRVll -WA/DRVlW ULTRIX Driver

32 .91

YLJ (VAX)
YLK (RISC)

DSM DDP-DOS

50.19

YG7

DSM for ULTRIX

33 .76

GFF

EDCS II

26.39

518

Ethernet Terminal Server for VMS and MicroVMS

27.39

726

External Document Exchange with IBM DISOSS

26.92

761

FORTRAN IVIVAX to RSX, PDP-11 Cross Compiler

25 .17

107

HSC Software

30.52

926

!EX-VMS-Driver

26.30

519

International Lexicons for ULTRIX

31.05

VYL

International Lexicons for VMS

31.04

VYH

Internet Portal

31.61

vzs

IXVl 1/VMS Driver

28.28

VHZ

KDM70 Software

31.62

YG5

KMVlA LRR Program

28.38

Z74

KMVlA MicroVAX Driver and Development Tools

28.26

VCR

KMVlA MicroVAX Driver and X.25 Link Level
Software

28.27

VCQ

Software and Services

9.97

Software Product Summary
Product Name

J
9. 98 Software and Services

SPD

UPI

KMVlA MicroVAX Driver

28.23

VCP

KMVlA VMS RMJ Link Level Software

30.88

VW9

Language and Specialized Lexicons for VMS

29.61

VI7

LAN Traffic Monitor VMS

27 .80

VEH

LCGOl Software

30.46

VJ4

LinkWorks Developer's Tools for VMS

36.26

XAR

Lucid Common Lisp/ DECsystem

32.23

YL9

Lucid Common Lisp/VAX for VMS

36.76

XVJ

MicroVAX 2000/VAXstation 2000 Diagnostic Package

25.C3

AGX

MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor CDROM Maintenance
Diagnostic

33.16

K32

MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor

28.09

ABX

MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor Ethernet Server

29.89

A07

MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor RA/RD Kit

31.82

All

MicroVAX MIRA Switch Control

27 .86

09T

MicroVAX VSV21 Support Software

28.20

185

MicroVMS/ DRQ3B Device Driver

29.25

OAP

MUXserver 300 Remote Terminal Server for ULTRIX

25.Fl

VZH

MUXserver 300 Remote Terminal Server for VMS

25.E9

VT7

MUXserver 320/380 Remote Terminal Server

32.94

YWL

NEXPERT OBJECT for ULTRIX Systems

38.40

XSX (VAX systems-dev.)
YEN (VAX systems-runtime)
VWK (RISC systems-dev.)
YEP (RISC systems-runtime)

NMCC/ DECnet Monitor

26.91

VTG (Base system)
VM8 (Right-to-copy)

NMCCIVAX ETHERnim

26.96

514

OSI Application D eveloper's Toolkit

34.98

GZR

Pascal for RISC

33.04

VV4 (Traditional)
XLU (ULTRIX ConDist)

PBXserver

29.23

vcc

PDP-11 C for VMS

33.54

03K

PDP-11 DATATRIEVEIVAX

25.14

105

PDP-11 FORTRAN-77/VAX to RSX

26.16

138

PDP-11 Symbolic Debugger/VAX to RSX

26.75

139

PL/I for RISC ULTRIX

36.81

xwz

PowerFrame for ULTRIX

31.83

YGJ

PowerFrame for VMS

34.73

GTV (VMS workstations and
clients)
GTX (VMS servers)
GTY (Integration kit)

Remote System Manager

29.59

B13 (VMS Server)
B14 (VMS Client)
VWW (ULTRIX/VAX Client)
GUX (ULTRIX/RISC Client)

Session Support Utility

27 .79

VE3

SoftPC for ULTRIX

32.17

YP7

Terminal Server Manager

27 .64

VDH

TPframe

37.22

MB3

ULTRIX Disk Shadowing

34.27

GZM (VAX)
GMP (RISC)

ULTRIX Mail Connection

29.05

VFG

Software Product Summary
Product Name

SPD

UPI

ULTRIX MLS+ Trusted Worksystem Software

34.10

GXR (VAXstation 3100)
GNA (RISC)

UL TRIX Operating System

26.40

VEY (VAX)
VYV (RISC)

ULTRIXISQL Remote Access to Rdb/VMS

34.89

YNP

ULTRIX Worksystem Software

28.22

O]Q (VAX)
VVl (RISC)

VAX-111725/730 Diagnostic Set

25 .93

200

VAX-111750 Diagnostic Set

26.42

201
200

VAX-111780 Diagnostic Set

26.41

VAX-11/780 Microprogramming Tools

25 .09

VAX-11/785 Diagnostic Set

26.81

VAX-11/785 Microprogramming Tools

26.63

VAX-11 RSX

26.73

382

VAX 2780/ 3780 Protocol Emulator

25.07

111

VAX 3271 Protocol Emulator

25.21

112

VAX 6000 Diagnostic Set

33.55

K34 (VAX 6000 Models 200, 300,
400)
K33 (VAX 6000 Models 500 , 600)

VAX 6200/ 6300 Series Diagnostic Set

25.C9

K12

210

VAX 6400 Series Diagnostic Set

31.55

K21

VAX 8200/ 8300 Diagnostic Set

27.81

KlO

VAX 8500/ 8550/ 8700/ 8800 Diagnostic Set

27 .82

VAX 8600/ 8650 Diagnostic Set

26.82

VAX 8820/8830/8840 Diagnostic Set

25 .C7

VAX 9000 Series Diagnostic Set

32.22

K23

VAX ACMS (Application Control and Management
System)

25.50

079 (Development)
076 (Runtime)
Y30 (Remote access)

VAX Ada

26.60

056

VAX ADE

25.76

425

VAX APL

25.31

020
XAA (High performance option)

VAX BASIC

25.36

095

VAX BLISS-32 Implementation Language

25 .12

106

VAX C

25.38

015

VAX CDD/Plus

25.53

897

VAXcluster Console System

27.46

VOl

VAX cluster Software

29.78

VBR

VAX COBOL

25.04

099

VAX COBOL GENERATOR

27 .16

365

VAX Computer Integrated Telephony Message Desk

32 .06

YG8

VAX Computer Integrated Telephony Server

29.91

VGY

VAX D ata Distributor

27.76

VDR

VAX DATATRIEVE

25.44

898

VAX DBMS (D atabase Management System)

25.48

899 (Development)
915 (Runtime)

VAX DECalc

25.79

310

VAX DECalc/ DECgraph Package

27.51

924

VAX DECalc-PLUS

27.37

A98

VAX DEC/CMS

25.52

007

VAX DECgraph

26.07

360

Software and Services

9.99

Software Product Summary
Product Name

SPD

UPI

VAX Decision Expert for VMS

25.D5

VI2

VAX DEC/ MAP

27.66

VFZ

VAX DEC/ MMS (Module Management System)

26.03

VAD

VAX DECscan VMS and ELN Bitbus Drivers

27.98

VCJ

VAX DECscan VMS Software Toolkit

26.98

vcs

VAX DEC/ Shell

26.69

143 (1 to 16 users)
144 (32 users)

VAX DECslide

26.11

361

VAX DECspell Verifier/Corrector

26.34

650

VAX DEC/ Test Manager

26.68

927

VAX Diagnostic Program Macros Library

26.25

ZEO

VAX DIBOL

25.49

018

VAX Disk Striping Driver for VMS

31.66

YEL

VAX Distributed File Service

28.78

VEQ

VAX Distributed Name Service

28.79

VER

VAX DOCUMENT

27.55

VEE

VAX DSM

25.08

130

YP2 (Runtime)

9.100

Software and Services

VAX DT07

25.88

S32

VAXELN Ada

27.22

A97

VAXELN Ethernet Driver/ Switch

28.31

VAXELN KAV Toolkit Extensions for VMS

34.18

VAXELN KMVlA Support Software Package

28.35

Z71

VAXELN KMVlA Tool Kit

29.17

O]P

VAXELN Toolkit

28.02

375
376 (Runtime)

GES

VAXELN Window Server for ULTRIX

33.68

YWR

VAXELN Window Server for VMS

33.69

376

VAX Encryption

26.74

081

VAX FORTRAN

25.16

100

VAX FORTRAN for ULTRIX Systems

27.23

A99
YV7 (High performance option)

VAX FORTRAN High-Performance Option

32.67

YHB

VAX FTAM (File Transfer, Access, and Management)

29.86

VFW

VAXft System Services

31.64

YEA

VAX Genius Driver

25.]9

VUR

VAX Grammar Checker

29.60

VFB

VAX Image/ 3L Supporting Software for VMS

33.42

PVO

VAX ISDN ACCESS

31.24

vzc

VAX ISDN

31.23

VZ9

VAX ISDN Primary Rate Access D Channel Interface
for VMS

33.53

VAX Jukebox Control Software

25.D6

VAX KCT32

26.04

128

VAX Key Distribution Center

27.77

03U

VAX KMSll-BD/BE HDLC/ BSC Framing Software

26.55

920

VAX KMS 11-BD/BE X.25 Link Level Software

25.80

757

VAXlink for IMS and VSAM Client

29.87

VFV

VAX LISP / ULTRIX

27.05

418

VAX LISP/VMS

25.82

917

VHB

Software Product Summary
Product Name

SPD

UPI

VAX LN03 Image Support Software

31.52

GXZ

VAX LSE (Language-Sensitive Editor/Source Code
Analyzer)

26.59

057

VAX MAILGATE for MCI Mail

27.34

742

VAXmate Services for MS-DOS

55 .09

A9A

VAXmate Software for Standalone Use

55 .06

OMl

VAX Media Manager

31.40

VZD

VAX Message Router

26.33

732
730 (VMSmail gateway)
733 (Programmer kit)

VAX Message Router/P Gateway

28.94

VCG

VAX Message Router/S Gateway

29.24

VDU

VAX Message Router Telex Gateway

29.96

VAV

VAX Message Router X.400 Gateway

27.50

VDM

VAX Notes

27 .06

960 (Server/client)
VES (Client only)

VAX OPS5

27 .04

913 (Development)
MKL (Compiler only)

VAX OSI Applications Kernel

27.47

VD9

VAX Packetnet System Interface Access

27.78

061

VAX Packetnet System Interface

25.40

071

VAX Pascal

25 .11

126

VAX PCL

26.23

S33

VAX Performance Advisor

27 .7 1

VE5

VAX Performance and Coverage Analyzer

26.76

119

VAX PL/I

25.30

114

VAX Public Access Communications

28.51

VFH

VAX RALLY

27 .03

A86

VAX Rdb/ELN

28.03

D07 (Developmet)
DOS (Target system)

VAX Rdb/VMS

25.59

VD2 (Development)
VCL (Interactive)
358 (Runtime)

VAX Realtime Accelerator Software (VAX RTA)

29.43

VJN

VAX ReGIS to Sixels Converter

27.88

VEF

VAX Remote Environmental Monitoring Software
(REMS)

29.73

VI5

VAX RMS Journaling

27.58

VDV

VAX SCAN

26.93

495

VAX ScriptPrinter Software

27 .84

VF9

VAXset Package

27.07

965

VAX Software Performance Monitor

27.56

850 (Full function)
VUP (Collector facility)

VAX Software Project Manager

27.52

A82

VAX Source Code Analyzer

27 .63

382

VAX Storage Library System

29.67

OL8 (Remote)

VAX System V

33.24

vzz

...OJ
«S

VAX System V Volume Shadowing

33 .25

VFS

VAX TDMS (Terminal Data Management System)

25.71

706 (Full development)
711 (Runtime)

VAX TEAMDATA

27 .02

741

VAX TU70/ 72 D evice Driver

27.09

187

Software and Services

i
9.101

Software Product Summary
Product Name

SPD

UPI

VAXuisx and VWS Migration Tools Kit

33.58

VAW

VAX Volume Shadowing

27.29

AB2

VAX Wide Area Network Device Drivers

29.64

VAW

VAX Xway

27.36

729

VIDA for DB2

25 .E7

VTW (Client)
VTX (Server)

VMS DECwindows Motif

36.09

XAl (End user)
XDD (Developer)

VMS License Management Facility

36.35

XAN

VMS Operating System

25.01

09S (Base Documentation)
001 (Extended Documentation)

VMS POSIX

34.82

GXX

VMS/SN A

27.01

362

VMS/ ULTRIX Connection

25.A4

VHR

VMS Workstation Software

28.06

A96

VSll-VAX Driver

25.45

S28

VXT Terminal Software

31.34

XNG

WPS-PLUS/ DOS

30.70

OF2

WPS-PLUS for VMS

26.27

AAM

WPS-PLUS/Workstation

30.51

X25 portal 2000

25.F9

VHU

X25Router 2000

28.86

VIA

XMedia Tools for RISC ULTRIX

36.55

XUV (Tools Developer Kit)
XTP (Audio Dev. License)
XTR (Video Developer License)
XTT (Audio Cluster License)
XTT (Software Media)
XUW (Tools Full Dev. Kit)
XTP (Audio Dev. License)
XTR (Video Dev. License)
XTT (Audio Cluster License)
XTT (Software Media)
MB5 (Tools Runtime Kit)
LBD (Tools Runtime License)
XTQ (Audio Runtime License)
XTS (Video Runtime License)
MB4 (Software Media)

For information on the following personal computing products refer to Chapter 3, Personal
Computing.
Browser for Windows

37.42

MCV

Conferencing for Windows

38.65

MCW

DEC MAILworks for DOS

39.58

VZ8

DEC MAILworks for Macintosh
DEC MAILworks for PCs
DEC MAILworks for Windows

39.15

XZJ

eXcursion for Windows

37.43

MG7

MOBILIZER for ALL-IN-1

36.95

XWW Server
XWX Client

Pacer for ULTRIX
PATHWORKS Access Solution for TCP/IP

9.102

Software and Services

Software Product Summary
Product Name

SPD

UPI

PATHWORKS Desktop Backup

41.55

MR2

PATHWORKS for DOS and Windows

55 .07

OTL

PATHWORKS for DOS (NetWare Coexistence)

34.76

GLV

PATHWORKS for DOS (TCP/ IP)

33.45

YV9

PATHWORKS for Macintosh

31.53

YPH

PATHWORKS for OS/2

55.24

YFW Client
YLX Server

PATHWORKS for OS/2 (TCP/IP)

36.58

XV7

PATHWORKS for ULTRIX

32.44

YNG

PATHWORKS for VMS

30.50

A93

PATHWORKS for VMS (Macintosh)

35.09

YPH Client
YPC Server

Vivace for Windows Version

41.39

For information on the following printer software, refer to Chapter 8, Terminals and Printers.
DECfonts Typeface Collection for VMS and ULTRIX
DECprint Printing Services for VMS
DEC PrintServer Client Software for ULTRIX

30.86

VVM

DEC PrintServer Supporting Host Software for
ULTRIX

30.85

VVM

DEC PrintServer Supporting Host Software for VMS

27.68

798

DECprint Utility for PostScript to Sixel Printing for
VMS

31.56

YZP

27.88

VEF

Documentation and Publication Management (DPM)
Freed om of Press
JetForm Software
LaserTwin Software-HP LaserJet Series III
Emulation
ON-TAP-Bar Code Printing Software
PrintAPlot Software-HP Plotter Emulation
PrintServer Client Software for ULTRIX
Reggie Software-Mac Graphics Files Converter
RETOS-VAX ReGIS-to-Sixels Converter
SoftFont
SuperFonts 25/ 1
VAX Distributed Queuing Service (DQS)

28.80

VEN

VAX PrintServer Client Software

27.67

797

VAX Vertical Forms Printing

Software and Services

9.103

Digital Services
Overview

Digital, an international company, does more than half its business outside of the
United States. There are over 40,000 service professionals that deliver consistent,
high-quality service at 450 locations around the world.
More than 15 years of experience creating and supporting networks has made
Digital an industry leader. Digital's own EASYnet, which encompasses 40,000
intelligent nodes and serves 100,000 users, provides an ideal platform for testing
and refining network tools, products, and services. As a networking leader,
Digital is committed to open systems and industry standards. Digital was the first
vendor to agree to make its proprietary network architecture comply fully with
the Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) model.
Digital has an established track record for creating multivendor networks, supporting third-party hardware and software, and using other vendors' products.
With this expertise, solutions that ensure interconnectivity and interoperability
are offered for diverse computing.
Digital has a tradition of working cooperatively with other vendors. These alliances ensure that products and services are available to complement Digital's
offerings. When expertise is required that is not available from Digital, assistance
is requested from a partner.
Consulting Services and Systems Integration experts provide assistance in areas
such as manufacturing, distribution, service administration and support, applications development, business systems, datacenter management, and training
development.

Digital Services
Open Services

Digital recognizes that consideration of three elements is essential to the realization of open solutions: the business, the people, and the technology. Digital's
Open Advantage is to provide services that address all three throughout the life
cycle of the solution-from planning and design through implementation and
management.
The bottom line is that "open services" is Digital's commitment to do whatever
it takes to make sure its customers get solutions that always work-multivendor
systems integration, flexibility of choice, consistent standards, and unqualified
accountability.
Digital's services are "open." The reason can be summed up in what Digital calls
"The Open Advantage," an open technology that treats the customer as a partner, and open services that turn technology into useable solutions-even if they
don't include Digital's products.
Digital defines "open services" by these characteristics:
• A single source of responsibility for all support
• Complete support for multivendor environments
• Flexible support tailored to each customer's needs
• Worldwide standards of support, from desktop to enterprise

Systems Integration

Systems Integration (SI) involves applying technology to solve business problems
and may require the realignment of organizational structure and business
processes so that every aspect of the enterprise-people, technology, and business-supports strategic goals.
As a leading technology vendor and a business innovator, Digital has the
resources to implement large-scale SI projects that incorporate multiple projects
and span multiple business functions and geographies.

9.104

Software and Services

Digital Services
Systems Integration (Continued)

Digital's approach to SI includes:
· Dedicated program management
• A comprehensive and flexi~le program methodology
· Strategic alliances with other market leaders to deliver joint solutions
· Resource centers that focus Digital's vast resources in support of major integration efforts
Industry analysts consistently rank Digital as one of the top five systems integrators in the world.

Consulting Services

Consulting is an integral part of many information technology solutions and
provides specialized expertise when and where it is needed-for only as long as
it is required.
Consulting Services can include:
• Analyzing current environment and defining overall information needs.
· Designing business processes.
• Developing guidelines and standards for an enterprise-wide information
architecture.
• Developing a solution architecture that specifies technologies and applications
required to support those business goals.
· Creating a functional requirements definition.
Digital offers four major categories of consulting services:
• Management Consulting-helps articulate clear business objectives, develop business processes, and identify technology opportunities.
• Applications Consulting-employs industry and applications expertise to define
solutions that solve specific problems or support business processes. Services
include application analysis and design, selection of an application portfolio, and
application programming.
• Information Technology (IT) Consulting-provides assistance in designing and
implementing enterprise-wide IT systems. Digital's areas of expertise include:
- database design, implementation, and management
- transaction processing
- network planning and design
- enterprise-wide messaging systems
• Information Service (IS) Consulting - assists in optimizing the use of technology
resources. Areas of focus include IS strategy, IS organizational design, and operations planning; Computer-Aided Software Engineering (CASE); and performance,
capacity, and security services.

Customized Solutions

Because "off-the-shelf" solutions seldom provide a strategic advantage,
custom-designed solutions can provide a .competitive edge. Digital has been
developing customized solutions for more than 25 years. These solutions include
customized hardware, applications, training, and support. Digital brings together
a team of professionals with the skills to design and implement a solution to
meet defined specifications. Digital' s commitment to industry standards and use
of proven tools and methods ensure quality, consistency, and long-term
supportability.

Software and Services

9.105

Digital Services
Customized Solutions (Continued)

Examples of custom solutions include:
• Modifying Digital hardware for a special purpose such as "ruggedizing" for use
in a harsh industrial setting, or providing more computing power in a smaller
footprint.
· Developing a software application that embodies the knowledge of company
experts.
• Creating a training solution that teaches students about proprietary information
or company-specific procedures.
• Developing a customized support solution that helps an organization improve its
service call-handling or its service warranty and service contract administration
systems.

Facilities Management Services

Facilities Management Services (FMS) provides the benefit of Digital's experience
in managing information systems and datacenters. Computing resources are operated by professionals whose skills are "state-of-the-practice." In addition, FMS
can help achieve efficiencies and control costs while providing a higher level of
service to internal IS customers.

Warranty, Installation, and
Startup Services

Startup period is a critical time; Digital offers a range of warranty, installation,
and startup services that ensure an efficient startup and smooth operation during
the first year.

Training

Digital's training curriculum addresses the needs of technology planners, technical professionals, and non-technical end users. More than 500 courses are
offered, covering a range of technical topics and organizational and professional
development training.
Digital training offers the following benefits:
• Convenient training formats
• Training-plan assistance
• Discounts for volume purchases
• 16 languages and at 130 training sites worldwide
• The option to train at a Digital facility or on site

Software Product Services

Digital's family of product support services ensure maximum availability for multivendor systems and applications. Through the combined resources of the U.S.
Customer Support Centers and local service offices, Digital delivers remedial and
preventive maintenance, advisory support to answer questions and solve
problems, technical information, and services to keep computing environments
up to date.
For multivendor configurations, Digital provides hardware support for thousands
of non-Digital devices when they are are linked to or co-located with a covered
Digital system. Software support is also extended to cover non-Digital operating
systems and layered software running on Digital hardware.
Advanced Electronic Support (AES) is a key element of product support. AES
provides remote diagnosis of system problems; predictive service tools that identify problems before they cause an outage; electronic submission of software
service requests; and electronic access to flash messages, software patches, and
Digital's extensive product databases.

9.106

Software and Services

Digital Services
Network Services

Digital's network services include network integration as well as network support. Skilled network consultants assist in designing and implementing multiprotocol, multivendor LANs and WANs. Digital can design and manage installation of the network physical layer and aid in developing distributed applications.
When comprehensive support is required for a complex network environment,
Digital offers network operations management services. These NETsupport Services provide network service tools, service planning assistance, fault isolation
and fault resolution management, network configuration management, and network performance monitoring.

PC Integration and
Desktop Services

Digital provides complete PC solutions which include the design and implementation of PC networks and the development and delivery of specialized multivendor hardware/software platforms to meet your specifications. Digital also
provides ongoing support for PC environments comprising 100 or more systems.
Digital's Desktop 'Services portfolio provides installation service, on-site and
remote maintenance, and telephone software support for the most popular PC
hardware and software products. Support is provided on products from
respected vendors such as Apple, Ashton-Tate, Borland, COMPAQ, Epson, IBM,
Lotus Development Corp., Microsoft, WordPerfect, and Zenith.

Business Recovery Services

Digital can help safeguard computing resources against unpredictable events that
can shut down operations for days or weeks at a time. Consultants will assist in
designing and implementing an effective business recovery plan for the
datacenter, facility, or enterprise.

In case of a disaster, a range of services are available to help return systems to
normal operations quickly. Some examples are RESTART Service, which provides
access to a backup configuration at a "hot site" to run critical applications.
RECOVER-ALL service covers the repair or replacement of equipment damaged
during a disaster.
Performance, Capacity, and
Security Services

In each of these areas of concern, Digital uses proven tools and methods to
assess current computing environments and propose changes that will help meet
stated goals.
Both custom-quoted and pre-defined, packaged consulting services are available to help keep systems and networks responsive to evolving business needs.

Digital Assisted Services

Digital Assisted Services offers products, services, and programs to customers
who participate in the maintenance of their computer equipment.
Components of Digital Assisted Services include:
• Spare parts and kits
• Diagnostics and documentation
· Tools and test equipment
· Parts repair services, including Field Change Orders
• Off-site product repair
• Other Digital Assisted Services programs

For More Information

Specifications and detailed descriptions on Digital's service offerings can be
found in The Digital Services Reference Guide. The U.S. version order number is

EC-Gl726-76.

Software and Services

9.107

Leasing Services
Description

As a part of the total solution, the Digital Leasing and Remarketing Group
(DLRG) provides financing and leasing alternatives for customers who choose not
to pay cash for Digital' s products. Whether customers are looking for protection
from technology obsolescence, responding to budgetary limitations, or prefer to
preserve cash and bank lines for other purposes, DLRG can help customers
acquire Digital's products.
DLRG offers services to a wide range of customers: commercial firms, Federal
government, state and local governments, schools, non-profit organizations, and
prime contractors.
Note: These particular services are available in the U.S. only.

Leasing Plans

• Capital Lease-Provides the lessee with a fixed purchase option but with the
flexibility of never having to exercise it. The lessee can simply return the system
at the end of the lease term. Digital's capital leases are structured with either a
10 percent of the original cost of the system or a $1.00 purchase option. The
lessee normally depreciates the assets, as opposed to expensing the monthly
rental.
• Operating Lease-Complies with FASB 13 guidelines. Terms are normally three
or four years, payments level, and purchase and renewal options are at fair
market value. The lessee can also return the system at the end of the lease.
Pricing assumes certain residual values will be obtained. The lessee normally has
a higher regard for accounting issues than ownership rights and is concerned
with economic and technological obsolescence of the system in the future. Often
referred to as off-balance sheet financing.
• Total Protection Lease-A full-service lease that can include extended warranty,
RECOVER-ALL, RESTART, and TRANSIT PLUS insurance. This is a convenient
fixed-price method of providing full protection for computer installations.
• Tailored Payment Lease-Any lease that is structured around specific cash flow
requirements. For example, schools may experience heavy cash flows during
registration and light cash flows during mid-term. Some industries' cash flows are
tied to seasonal products or services. Step payments can be arranged over the
term of the lease or decreased payments during the period when cash flow is
tight. Digital is interested in providing tailored payment leases that will fit customers' specific cash flow needs.
·Skip Payment Lease-These leases are structured with no payments during the
initial months of the lease or at annual intervals. Often computer resource needs
are not synchronized with budget approval cycles. Lease billings do not commence until the beginning of a new fiscal period or when funds become
available.
• VAX 6000 and VAX 4000 Platform Lease -36-month leases for any current VAX
6000-410, -510, -6xx and VAX 4000-300, -500 CPUs. The Platform Lease provides a rate guarantee when a leased CPU is upgraded. This rate guarantee is
tied to fluctuations in Treasury bill rates.
• VAX 9000 Lease Program-Provides "below market" lease rates along with board
upgrade and box upgrade options. Lease financing provides the total system
solution to get the mainframe environment up and running. VAX 9000 leases are
anticipated to be written over a three- or four-year period.

• Technology Migration Option-A convenient method of upgrading leased computer systems when a capital lease is written. The Technology Migration option
is available over lease terms for periods of two to five years.

9.108

Software and Services

Leasing Services
What Can Be Leased?

·Hardware
·Software
• Warranty uplift
• Extended warranty
• Educational Services
• Other Services
- Transit insurance

- RECOVER-ALL
- RESTART
• Software services
• Non-DEC products and services (limited)

Field Support

Digital Leasing managers are conveniently located throughout the country. They
work with customers and Digital account managers in developing financial strategies that best meet customer needs. For more information, call your Account
Manager or the Digital Leasing Hotline-800-343-3451 (outside Massachusetts)
or 800-322-3239 (within Massachusetts). Note: These particular services are available in the U.S. only.

Software and Services

9.109

Information Services
Electronic Connection

The Electronic Connection is Digital' s free online information and purchasing
resource used to evaluate, select, configure, quote, and purchase products. The
Electronic Connection provides information on Digital products ranging from
accessories and supplies to mid-size systems. It is also a convenient way to obtain
new product announcements and special offers from Digital.
Using rapid search methods, such as keywords and order numbers, the Electronic Connection has information on Digital and complementary solutions as
well as services through product descriptions, product demonstrations, selection
charts, prices, and configuration aids. The information is organized in an
easy-to-use system of menus.
The Electronic Connection saves time and money because orders are placed
online. Critical ordering information is displayed, such as order numbers,
pricing, and product availability. Once the order is placed, it is immediately
entered into Digital's order-processing system, allowing users to monitor their
order.
To register for a free online account, dial 800-234-1998 at 1200 through 9600
baud from 7 a.m. to midnight, Eastern Time, with any Digitalcompatible terminal or PC. For access assistance, call 800-DIGITAL
(800-344-4825).

DECdirect

9.110

Software and Services

To complement a Digital computer system, supporting products such as add-ons
and upgrades, software, networking and communications, desktop products,
accessories, and supplies are available through the DECdirect hardware and software catalogs. Digital' s RISC Systems and Applications catalog focuses on RISC
ULTRIX systems and also features third-party applications. With a colorful,
informative format that's easy to read and use, DECdirect catalogs make buying
high-quality Digital products and services simple. For a free copy of any of these
catalogs, in the U.S. , call 800-DIGITAL.

Digital Reference Service
The Digital Reference Service (DRS) provides hands-on access to over 30 standard Digital publications, as well as Digital
and third-party new product information sheets and announcements.
For $450 per year ($485 for SPDS on CD-ROM) , DRS provides:
• Hardcopy information-no phone calls or logging in and out of different systems
• All shipping charges paid by Digital
• Information updated every six weeks
• New product information
• Digital and third-party software information
· Easy-to-use phone index for quick access to many Digital customer support organizations
• Complete, up-to-date set of software product descriptions (SPDs)-available either in hardcopy or CD-ROM
• Current pricing information
To learn more about the DRS, call Digital Reference Service at (508) 467-4566. Be sure to ask about multi-year discount
subscription rates.

Ordering Information

To order the Digital Reference Service, call the DECdirect telephone ordering and information service at 800-DIGITAL or
complete this form and send it with your payment to DECdirect Catalog, Digital Equipment
Corporation, P.O. Box CS2008, Nashua, NH 03061.
[ ] Please enter my annual subscription(s) to the Digital Reference Service, order number ED-23800-18/JY
(with hardcopy SPDs), at the annual cost of $450/year each.
[ ] Please enter my annual subscription(s) to the Digital Reference Service, order number ED-00896-18/JY
(with SPDs on CD-ROM for VAX VMS or DOS systems), at the annual cost of $485/year each.
Method of Payment

[ ] Check enclosed

[ ] Purchase order enclosed

[ ] Visa/MasterCard No. _ _ _ _ __

Exp. Date: _ _ __

Allow up to 6 weeks for delivery. Subscription rates are valid in the U.S. only and subject to change without notice.
Mr./Mrs./Ms. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Title-----------------------------Firm _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
~

Address _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
City _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
State _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Zip _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Telephone _ _ _ _ _ _ __

Software and Services

9.111

Index
11-80 kVA HA4000 Order Number
Chart, 5.49
2D and 3D Programmable
Peripherals for CADICAMICAE,
8.28
310XR, 1.87, 5.35
3270 Terminal Option Software,
9.26
4N-AEAAA, 5.58
4N-AEAAB, 5.58
4N-AEAAD, 5.58
4N-AEAAE, 5.58
4N-AEAAF, 5.58
4N-AEAAG, 5.58
4N-AEAAH, 5.55
4N-AEAAJ, 5.55
4N-AEAAL, 5.55
4N-AEAAM, 5.55
4N-AEACH, 5.55
4N-AEACK, 5.55
4N-AEAEO, 5.58
55AAA, 1.143
55AAB, 1.143
55BAA, 1.156
55BAB, 1.156
55CAA, 1.144
55CAB, 1.144
55CDA, 1.144
55CDB, 1.144
62XOO, 5.30
62X34 , 7.48
63XOO, 5.30
64AUA, 1.111, 5.38
64BUA, 1.111 , 5.38
64CUA, 1.111, 5.38
64DUA, 1.111 , 5.38
64EUA, 1.111 , 5.38
64FUA, 1.111, 5.38
64XOO, 5.30
65AMB, 1.103
65AMD, 1.94
65AME, 1.94
65APB, 1.103
65AUA, 1.111, 1.112, 5.38, 5.39
65AUE, 1.111, 5.38
65AUH, 1.111, 5.38
65AUJ, 1.111, 5.38
65AUK, 1.111 , 5.38
65BUA, 1.111, 1.112, 5.38, 5.39
65CUA, 1.111, 1.112, 5.38, 5.39
65DUA, 1.111, 1.112, 5.38, 5.39
65EUA, 1.111, 1.112, 5.38, 5.39
65FUA, 1.111, 1.112, 5.38, 5.39
660XR, 1.87, 5 .34
66AMA, 1.94
66AMC, 1.94
66AUA, 1.111 , 1.112, 5.38, 5.39
66AUE, 1.111, 1.112, 5.38, 5.39
66AUF, 1.111, 1.112, 5.38, 5.39
66AUH, 1.111 , 1.112, 5.38, 5.39
66AUJ, 1.111, 5.38
66AUK, 1.111, 5.38
66AUL, 1.111, 5.38
66AVA, 1.111, 1.112, 5.38, 5.39
66BUA, 1.111 , 1.112, 5.38, 5.39
66BUJ, 1.112, 5.39
66BUK, 1.112, 5.39
66BUL, 1.112, 5.39
66CUA, 1.111, 1.112, 5.38, 5.39
66DUA, 1.111, 1.112, 5.38, 5.39

66EUA, 1.111 , 1.112, 5.38, 5.39
66FUA, 1.111 , 1.112, 5.38, 5.39
670XR, 1.87, 5.34
675XR, 1.88, 5.35 , 5.36, 5.37
680XR, 1.87, 1.88, 5.35, 5.36, 5.37
690XR, 1.87, 1.88, 5.35, 5.36, 5.37
7FAMB, 1.118
7FAMC, 1.118
7FAMD, 1.118
7FAME, 1.118
7FBMC, 1.118
7FBMD, 1.118
7FBME, 1.118
7FBT A, 1.127
7FCMC, 1.118
7FCMD, 1.118
7FCME, 1.118
7FCTA, 1.127
7FDMC, 1.118
7FDMD, 1.118
7FDME, 1.118
7FDTA, 1.127
802.3/Ethernet Terminal Server
Selection Guide, 6.6
9FAJD, 1.132
9FBJD, 1.132
9FCJD, 1.132
9FDJD, 1.132
ACCESSWORKS Data Integration
Servers, 1.158-1.163
ALL-IN-1 DESKtop for DOS, 9.70
ALL-IN-1 DESKtop Server for VMS,
9.70
ALL-IN-1 Electronic Authorization
and Routing System, 9.70
ALL-IN-1 MAIL for VMS, 9.70
ALL-IN-1 MAIL, 9.70
ALL-IN-1 Manager for LANs, 9.71
ALL-IN-1 PC Server for VMS, 9.71
ALL-IN-1 Personal Assistant, 9. 71
ALL-IN-1 Services for DECwindows,
9.71
ALL-IN-1 STARTER, 9.72
ALL-IN-1 Voice Messaging Support,
9.72
ALL-IN-1, 9.70
applicationDEC 400xP System
Diagram, 3 .56
applicationDEC 400xP, 3.50-3.56
applicationDEC 433MP System
Diagram, 3.66
applicationDEC 433MP System
Specifications, 3.67
applicationDEC 433MP System,
3.57-3.65
Application Development Tools and
Languages, 9.9-9.23
Artificial Intelligence, 9.24-9.25
B400X Expansion Pedestal, 1.82
BA22D, 1.155
BA22E, 1.155
BASEstar CIMfast for VMS, 9.9
BASEstar for VMS, 9.9
BNCIA, 5.26
Browser for Windows, 3.13 , 3.14
BS17Y, 6.46
Cables, 6.61-6.68
CADRA-VIEW for VMS, 9.61
Cartridge Tape Comparison Chart,
7.8

CDA Converter Library for ULTRIX,
9.9
CDA Converter Library for VMS,
9.9
CDD/Administrator for VMS, 9.61
CD-ROM Devices, 7.75-7 .79
CIBCA, 5.26
CI Cables, 5.26
CI Interfaces, 5.25
CISCE, 5.25
CIXCD Revision Matrix, 5 .27
CIXCD, 5.26
CL-42HS1, 4.26
CL-42HT1, 4.26
CL-42RS1 , 4.26
CL-42RT1, 4.26
CL-43JS1, 4.26, 4.27
CL-43JS2, 4.27
CL-43JT1, 4.26
CL-43JT2, 4.27
CL-45JS1 , 4.27, 4.28
CL-45JT1, 4.27 , 4.28
CL-46JS1, 4.28, 4.29
CL-46JT1, 4.28, 4.29
Colormate PS Printer Specifications,
8.59
Colormate PS Printer, 8.58-8.59
Communications Servers, 6.6
Communications Software, 9.26
Communications, 9.26-9.36
Comparison charts
DECbridge 500/600 Series, 6.54
DECpc Personal Computers,
3.32, 3.33
DEC Multiprotocol
Router/ Bridge, 6.19
DECstations/ DECsystems, 2.2
Environmental Products, 5.44
Ethernet Terminal Server, 6.6
EtherWORKS, 3.26
Impact Printers, 8.32
MicroVAX 3100, 1.28
Nonimpact Printers, 8.30
PATHWORKS Server, 3.18
SCSI Disk Drives, 7 .6
SDI/DSSI Disk Drives, 7.5
Tape Drives, 7.8
VAX 4000, 1.39
VAX Systems, 1.2
Video terminals, 8. 9
Conferencing for Windows , 3.14
Constant Voltage Conditioners,
5.45
CPU upgrades
VAX 10000, 1.139
VAX 4000, 1.87
VAX 7000, 1.127
VAXft, 1.149
VAXIVAXserver 4000, 1.37, 5.34
CRAY Y-MP EL System Diagrams,
4.12
CRAY Y-MP EL System
Specifications, 4 .11
CRAY Y-MP EL Systems, 4.2--4.10
CXA16, 6.37
ex Asynchronous Communications
Controllers (Q-bus), 6.37
CXB16, 6.37
ex Communications Controllers,
6.37
CXY08, 6.37
Data Management and Transaction
Processing, 9.37-9.48
DEBNI, 6.3

DEC ACA Services for ULTRIX, 9.9
DEC ACA Services for VMS, 9.10
DEC Ada Preprocessor for
ULTRIX/SQL, 9.37
DEC Ada, 9.10
DECarray 300 Family (SDI/DSSI)
Specifications, 7.2 1
DECarray 300 Family (SDI/DSSI),
7.20
DECarrays, 7 .20
DEC ASD/ SEE Toolkit for VMS,
9.10
DEC AVS for ULTRIX, 9.10
DECbridge 5xx Series, 6.53
DECbridge 6xx Series, 6.53
DECbridge 90, 6.51
DEC CDA Invokers for VMS , 9.72
DEC C++ for ULTRIX, 9.10
DEC COBOL Preprocessor for
ULTRIX/SQL, 9.37
DEC Commserver 100/150
Communication s Servers, 6.16
DEC Commserver for VMS, 9.26
DEC Computer Integrated
Telephony Applications Interface
for ULTRIX, 9.26
DEC Computer Integrated
Telephony Applications Interface
for VMS , 9.26
DEC Computer Integrated
Telephony Server 100/500, 9.26
DECconcentrator 500, 6.55
DEC C Preprocessor for
ULTRIX/SQL, 9.37
DECdecision, 9.72
DECdesign, 9.63
DECdirect, 9.110
DECdisc-CD-ROM Solution
Package, 7 .79
DECdisc, 7.79
DECdx/VMS, 9.72
DEC/ EDI, 9.11
DECelms, 9.85
DECelx Realtime Tools for ULTRIX,
9.12
DEC EtherWORKS NIC Family
Overview, 3.27
DEC FDDicontroller 400, 6.4
DEC FDDicontroller 700, 6.5
DEC File Optimizer for VMS, 9.85
DECfonts Typeface Collection for
VMS and ULTRIX Software, 8.79
DECforms, 9.39
DEC FORTRAN for OSF/ 1, 9.37
DEC FORTRAN for ULTRIX RISC
Systems, 9.37
DEC FORTRAN Preprocessor for
ULTRIXISQL, 9.37
DECframe for RISC ULTRIX, 9.12
DEC GKS-3D for ULTRIX, 9.61
DEC GKS-3D for VMS, 9.61
DEC GKS for VMS , 9.62
DEChub 90, 6.52
DEC IEZl 1 Class Driver for VMS,
9.49
DECimage Application Services for
ULTRIX, 9.63
DECimage Application Services for
VMS , 9.63
DECimage Character Recognition
Services for VMS , 9.64
DECimage EXpress, 9.64
DECimage SCAN Software for
ULTRIX, 9.64

lndex.1

Index
DECimage SCAN Software for VMS,
9.64
DECinrnge Storage Manager for
VMS, 9.64
DEC Im age Utility Library for
ULTRIX, 9.11
DEC Image Utility Library for VMS,
9.62
DEC InfoServer Client for VMS,
9.38
DECinspect for VMS, 9.68
DEC lnstantSQL for Rdb/VMS, 9.11
DECintact, 9.39
DEC ISDNcontroller 100
Synchronous Controller (Q-bus),
6.39
DEC ISDNcontroller 100, 6.39
DEC ISDNrouter 100, 6.33
DECjet 1000 and DECjet 2000 Inkjet Printers, 8.54-8.55
DECjet 1000 and DECjet 2000
Specifications, 8.55
DEC LANcontroller 200, 6.3
DEC LANcontroller 400, 6.2
DEClaser Printer Family Ordering
Information, 8.51-8.52
DEClaser Printer Family
Specifications, 8.53
DEClaser Printer Family, 8.47-8.50
DEC LMF PAK Generator for
ULTRIX, 9.68
DEC LMF PAK Generator for VMS,
9.68
DEC MAILworks for DOS, 3.12
DEC MAILworks for Macintosh,
3.11
DEC MAILworks for PCs, 3.11
DEC MAILworks for Windows,
3.11
DEC MAIL works Server, 3 .11
DECmcc Basic Management System,
9.85
DECmcc Developer's Toolkit, 9.85
DECmcc Director, 9.86
DECmcc Enterprise Management
Station, 9.86
DECmcc Extended LAN Manager
AM, 9.86
DECmcc Management Station for
ULTRIX, 9.86
DECmcc Site Management Station,
9.87
DECmcc TCP/ IP SNMP Access
Module for VMS , 9.87
DECmcc WANdesigner, 9.87
DECmessageQ for MS-DOS, 9.28
DECmessageQ for ULTRIX, 9.28
DECmessageQ for UNIX, 9.28
DECmessageQ for VMS, 9.28
DECmodem V32, 6.57
DECmpp 12000/ 12000-LC Massively
Parallel Processing Systems,
4.13-4.18
DECmpp FORTRAN, 9.13
DECmpp Image Processing Library,
9.65
DECmpp Parallel Programming
Environment, 9.79
DECmpp System Software, 9.13
DECMR, 6.51
DEC MULTicontroller 542, 6.43
DEC MULTlcontroller 581/582,
6.43
DEC Multiprotocol Router/ Bridge
Comparison Chart, 6.19

Index.2

DECmux 300 Remote Terminal
Server, 6.14
DECndu (Network Device Upgrade)
Utility for ULTRIX/VAX, 9.28
DECndu (Network Device Upgrade)
Utility for ULTRIX, 9.28
DECndu (Network Device Upgrade)
Utility for VMS, 9.29
DECnet/OSI for ULTRIX, 9.29
DECnet/ PCSA Client: VAXmate,
9.29
DECnet Router Server, 9.49
DECnet/SNA Gateway for Channel
Transport, 9.39
DECnet/S NA Gateway for
Synchronous Transport, 9.39
DECnet/SNA ULTRIX 3270 Data
Stream, 9.40
DECnet/SNA ULTRIX 3270
Terminal Emulator, 9.40
DECnet/SNA VMS 3270 Data
Stream Programming Interface,
9.40
DECnet/SNA VMS 3270 Terminal
Emulator, 9.40
DECnet/SNA VMS APPC/ LU6.2
Programming Interface, 9.40
DECnet/SNA VMS Application
Programming Interface, 9 .41
DECnet/SNA VMS Data Transfer
Facility, 9.39
DECnet/SNA VMS DISOSS
Document Exchange Facility,
9.41
DECnet/S NA VMS Distributed Host
Command Facility, 9.41
DECnet/ SNA VMS Gateway
Management, 9.29
DECnet/S NA VMS Printer Emulator,
9.41
DECnet/SNA VMS Remote Job
Entry, 9.41
DECnet-ULTRIX for RISC and VAX,
9.29
DECnet-VAX Extension, 9.30
DECnet-VAX, 9.30
DEC Network Save and Restore for
ULTRIX, 9.85
DECNIS 500 , 6.23
DECNIS 600, 6.20
DEC ODA Compound Document
Architecture (CDA), 9.72
DEComni/VMS (Digital's OSI
Manufacturing Network
Interconnect), 9.30
DEC OSF/ l , 9.7
DECpage, 9.73
DEC Pascal for DEC OSF/1, 9.11
DECpc 320P Portable Computers,
3.34-3.35
DECpc 400ST Deskside Computers,
3.46--3.49
DECpc 433 Workstation, 3.42-3.45
DECpc Desktop Computers,
3.36--3.41
DECpc Personal Computers
Comparison Chart, 3.32-3.33
DECpc Personal Computers
Overview, 3 .31
DECpc Personal Computers, 3.31
DECperformance Solution
Accounting Chargeback, 9.87
DECperformance Solution Capacity
Planner, 9.87

DECperformance Solution Data
Collector, 9.88
DECperformance Solution
Performance Advisor, 9.88
DEC PHIGS for ULTRIX, 9.62
DEC PHIGS for VMS, 9.62
DECplan Client for ULTRIX/RISC,
9.73
DECplan for VMS , 9.73
DECplan Time Manager Client for
ULTRIX/RISC, 9.73
DECpresent for ULTRIX, 9.65
DECpresent for VMS, 9.65
DECprint Printing Services for VMS
Software, 8.77
DEC PrintServer Supporting Host
Software for ULTRIX, 8.77
DEC PrintServer Supporting Host
Software for VMS , 8.77
DECprint Utility for PostScript to
Sixel Printing for VMS Software,
8.79
DECquery for Macintosh, 9.42
DECquery for ULTRIX, 9.42
DECquery for VMS, 9.42
DEC RALLY for VMS, 9.38
DECram for VMS, 9.88
DEC RdbAccess for ORACLE on
VMS, 9.38
DEC RdbAccess for VAX RMS on
VMS, 9.38
DEC RdbExpert for VMS , 9.38
DEC Realtime Test Integrator for
ULTRIX, 9.11
DEC Realtime Test Integrator for
VMS, 9.12
DEC Reliable Transaction Router
(RTR) for VMS, 9.27
DECrepeater 350, 6.49
DECrepeater 90C, 6.50
DECrepeater 90T, 6.50
DECrouter 2000, 9.50
DECrouter 200, 9.49
DECrouter 250, 9.49
DECscheduler for VMS, 9.88
DEC SecurityGate for VMS, 9.68
DEC Security Reporting Facility for
VMS, 9.85
DECserver 100 for VMS and
MicroVMS, 9.50
DECserver 200 for ULTRIX-32, 9.51
DECserver 200 for VMS and
MicroVMS, 9.51
DECserver 250 Communications
Server, 6.13
DECserver 250 for ULTRIX-32 , 9.51
DECserver 250 for VMS, 9.51
DECserver 300 for ULTRIX-32, 9.52
DECserver 300 for VMS and MSDOS, 9.52
DECserver 500 for ULTRIX, 9.52
DECserver 500 for VAX VMS and
MicroVMS, 9.53
DECserver 700 Ethernet
Communications Server, 6.10
DECserver 90L+ Terminal Server,
6.9
DECserver 90TL for VMS, ULTRIX,
and MS-DOS, 9.50
DECserver 90TL Telnet/ LAT
Terminal Server, 6.7
DEC SoftPC for VMS , 9.7
DEC Sound/Picture Information
Network (DECspin) for ULTRIX,
9.27

DECstation 2100/ 3100 Memory,
5.32
DECstation 5000 Model 240,
2.23-2.32
DECstation 5000 Models 120 and
125 Memory, 5.32
DECstation 5000 Models 125 and
133, 2.14-2.22
DECstation 5000 Models 20 and 25
Memory, 5.32
.DECstation 5000 Series Upgrades,
2.32
DECstation 5000 Specifications,
2.34-2.36
DECstation 5000 System Diagrams,
2.33
DECstations/ DECsystems
Comparison Chart, 2.2-2.3
DECsystem 3100 Memory, 5.32
_DECsystem 5000 Model 200/240
Memory, 5.32
-DECsystem 5000 Series Upgrades,
2.44
DECsystem 5000 Systems and
Servers, 2.37-2.44
DECsystem 5100 Memory, 5.31
DECsystem 5500 Memory, 5.32
DECsystem 5800 to DECsystem
5900 Upgrade, 2.49
DECsystem 5900 Memory, 5.32
DECsystem 5900 Specifications,
2.50
DECsystem 5900 System Diagrams,
2.51-2.52
DECsystem 5900 Systems, 2.45-2.49
DECsystems, 2.1-2.52
DECtalk Mail Access, 9.73
DECtalk Speech Synthesizers,
6.59-6.60
DECtalk, 6.59
DEC Text Processing Utility
(DECTPU), 9.12
DEC TM32 Software for VMS, 9.49
DEC Token Ring Network D evice
Driver for VMS, 9.49
DECtp Desktop for ACMS, 9.73
DECtrace for VMS, 9.79
DECtrace, 9.89
DEC Trellis Object System for
ULTRIX, 9 .12
DEC Trellis Object System for VMS,
9.12
DEC TRNcontroller 100, 6.4
DECview3D Concurrent View and
Edit Module for VMS, 9.13
DECview3D, 9.13
DECvoice Software, 9.30
DEC VTX, 9.39
DEC VUIT (Visual User Interface
Tool) for ULTRIX Systems, 9.62
DEC VUIT (Visual User Interface
Tool) for VMS Systems, 9.63
DEC WANcontroller 220
Synchronous Controller (V AXBI),
6.38
DEC WANcontroller 220, 6.38
DEC WANcontroller 620
Synchronous Controller (VAXft),
6.41
DEC WANrouter 250 Multiprotocol
Router, 6.24
DEC WANrouter 500 Multiprotocol
Router, 6.25
DEC Wide Area Network Device
Drivers for ULTRIX, 9.49

Index
DECwindows 4125 Emulator for
UL1RIX, 9.13
DECwindows 4125 Emulator for
VMS , 9.14
DECwindows DECnet/SNA 3270
Terminal Emulator for UL1RIX,
9.31
DECwindows Developer Kit on
VMS for OSF/ Motif, 9.14
DECwindows Graphical Interface
Tools for VMS, 9.65
DECwrite for ULTRIX, 9,66
DECwrite for VMS, 9.66
DECwrite SGML Gateway and
Development Tools for ULTRIX,
9.66
DECwrite SGML Gateway and
Development Tools for VMS,
9.66
DEC X.25 Access for ULTRIX, 9.27
DEC X.25gateway 100/500, 9.27
DEC X.25 Native Mode for
ULTRIX, 9.27
DEC X.400 Mail System for
UL1RIX, 9.27
DEFCN, 6.56
DEFEE, 6.54
DEFZA, 6.5
DEHUB, 6.53
DELNI, 6.48
DEMFA, 6.5
DEMNA, 6.2
DEMPR, 6.49
DEMSA, 6.26
DEQRA, 6.4
Desktop Printer Cable and Adapter
Guide, 8.67
Desktop-VMS Software, 9.7
DESPR Repeater, 6.50
DESQA Controller, 6.3
DESQA, 6.3
DESTA Station Adapter, 6.51
DETAC, 6.28
DETAD, 6.28
DETCE, 6.30
DETCF, 6.30
DETLB, 6.33
DETMR, 6.51
DETPR, 6.49
Device Drivers, 9.49- 9.60
DEWGB, 6.52
DF196, 6.58
DF242 Scholar Plus Modem, 6.57
DF242, 6.57
DF296, 6.58
DHB32 Asynchronous Controller
(VAXBI) , 6.37
DHB32, 6.37
Digital Cartridge Server Component
(DCSC) for VMS , 9.89
Digital Extended Math Library,
9.14
Digital Reference Service, 9 .111
Digital Services, 9.104-9.107
Digital Storage Architecture, 7.2
Digital Storage Solutions, 7.2-7.4
DISDN, 6.34
Disk/and Tape Drives, 7.2
Disk Devices, 7.46-7.64
Disk Drive Comparison Chart, 7 .6
DIV32, 6.39
DIXSA, 6.35
DJ-31FP1 , 3.23
DJ-31GP1 , 3.23
DJ-31HP1 , 3.23

DJ-31PP1, 3.23
DJ-DB2AA, 1.160
DJ-DB3CA, 1.160
DJ-DB3EA, 1.160
DJ-DB4AA, 1.160
DJ-DB4DA, 1.160
DJ-DB6AA, 1.160
DJ-DB6CA, 1.160
DJ-DB7AA, 1.160
DJ-PC4S3, 3.19
DJ-PCTSl, 3.21
DM308, 6.15
DM316, 6.15
DM332, 6.15
DMB32 Multifunction Controller
(VAXBI), 6.42
DNSDA, 6.23
DNSEA, 6.21
DNSEB, 6.21
DNSEC, 6.21
DNSED, 6.21
DNSEE, 6.21
DNSEF, 6.21
Documentation and Publication
Management (DPM) Software,
8.80
DRB32 Parallel Interface (VAXBI) ,
6.44
DRB32 VMS Drivers, 9.54
DRQ3B Parallel Interface (Q-bus),
6.46
DRVll and DRVlW Interfaces (Qbus), 6.47
DRVll -WAIDRVlW UL1RIX Driver,
9.54
DRVlJ Parallel Interface (Q-bus) ,
6.47
DSB32, 6.38
DSF32 , 6.41
DSH32 , 6.44
DSH80, 6.43
DSM DDP-DOS, 9.42
DSM for ULTRIX, 9.42
DSPAX, 6.17
DSRVE, 6.8
DSRVG, 6.10
DSRVP, 6.14
DSRVR, 6.25
DSRVW, 6.11
DSRZD, 6.15
DSRZE, 6.15
DSSI/SDI Disk Drive Comparison
Chart, 7.5
DSSI, 7.3
DSVll Synchronous Controller (Qbus), 6.40
DTCOl, 6.59
DTC03 , 6.59
DU-59BU1, 2.49
Dual Drive Expansion Box, 7 .65
DV-31FAA, 1.29
DV-31FTA, 1.29
DV-31GAA, 1.29
DV-31GTA, 1.29
DV-31HAA, 1.29
DV-31HCB, 1.29
DV-31HTA, 1.29
DV-3 lPAA, 1.29
DV-3 lPCA, 1.29
DV-31PTA, 1.29
DV-34MS3 , 4.20, 4.21
DV-34MT3, 4.20, 4.21
DV-38MS3, 4.20, 4.22
DV-38MT3, 4.20, 4.22
DV-41MAA, 1.41

DV-41MBC, 1.41
DV-41MCA, 1.41
DV-41MT1, 1.41
DV-42HS1, 1.58
DV-42HS2, 1.58
DV-42HT1 , 1.58
DV-42HT2 , 1.58
DV-42RS1 , 1.49
DV-42RT1 , 1.49
DV-43JS1 , 1.66
DV-43JS2, 1.67
DV-43JS3 , 1.67
DV-43JT1, 1.66
DV-43JT2, 1.66
DV-43JT3, 1.66
DV-43JTB, 1.66
DV-44JT2, 1.73
DV-44LAA, 1.84
DV-44LT1 , 1.84
DV-44LT2, 1.84
DV-45JT2, 1.73
DV-45LAA, 1.84
DV-45LT1, 1.84
DV-45LT2, 1.84
DV-46JT2, 1.73
DV-46LAA, 1.84
DV-46LT1 , 1.84
DV-46LT2, 1.84
DV-51AAA, 1.143
DV-55CAB, 1.144
DV-6E03A, 1.93
DV-6F04B, 1.93
DV-6F04D, 1.93
DV-7F2DA, 1.117
DWMBB VAXBI Expansion Options,
1.109
DWMBB, 1.109
DWMVA, 1.110
EDCS II, 9.42
Electronic Connection, 9.110
Environmental Monitoring System
(EMS), 5.45
Environmental Products Summary
Chart, 5.44
Environmental Products, 5.44-5.45
ESE50 Solid State Disk, 7.46
ESE50 Specifications, 7.47
Ethernet Communications Servers
Summary Chart, 6.6
Ethernet Terminal Server for VMS
and MicroVMS, 9.54
Ethernet Terminal Server Selection
Guide, 6.6
EtherWORKS Comparison Chart,
3.26
eXcursion for Windows, 3 .15
Expansion Boxes (SCSI) , 7.65-7.67
External Document Exchange with
IBM DISOSS, 9.74
FORTRAN IVIVAX to RSX, PDP-11
Cross Compiler, 9.43
Freedom of Press Software, 8.81
FV64A, 1.109
Graphics Software, 9.61
Graphics, 9.61-9.67
H3350, 6.49
H4005 Transceiver, 6.48
H7231 , 1.109
H7236, 1.109

HA4000 3-Phase Uninterruptible
Power System, 5.46-5.52
HA4000 System Specifications, 5.48
HA42A, 5.49
HA42B, 5.49
HA42C, 5.49
HA42D, 5.49
HA42E, 5.49
HA42J, 5.49
HA42K, 5.49
HA432, 5.49
HA44A, 5.50
Host-Based Communications
Controllers, 6.37-6.47
HSC5X, 7.18
HSC60, 7.18
HSC6X, 7.18
HSC90/ HSC60 Specifications, 7 .18
HSC90, 7.18
HSC9X, 7.18
HSC Software, 9.54
HSS60, 7.18
HSS90/ HSS60 Cluster Starter
Packages, 7.18
HSS90, 7.18
!EX-VMS-Driver, 9.55
Impact Printers Comparison Chart,
8.32-8.33
Industrial Terminals, 8.20-8.21
Information Services, 9.110
InfoServer 150/ InfoServer 150 VXT
Network Storage Servers, 7.75,
7.77
Integrated Storage Elements, 7.51
International Lexicons for UL1RIX,
9.74
International Lexicons for VMS ,
9.74
Internet Portal, 9.31
ISDNcontroller 100, 6.39
ISDNrouter 100, 6.33
IT330, 8.20
IT340, 8.20
IXVl 1/VMS Driver, 9.55
JetForm Software, 8.82
KDA50, 7.16
KDB50, 7.14
KDM70 Software, 9.55
KDM70, 7.10
KFMSA, 7.11
KFQSA, 7.15
KMVlA LRR Program, 9.55
KMVlA MicroVAX Driver and
Development Tools, 9.56
KMVlA MicroVAX Driver and X.25
Link Level Software, 9.56
KMVlA MicroVAX Driver, 9.55
KMVlA VMS RMJ Link Level
Software, 9.56
KZQSA, 7.15
LA24X, 8.61
LA424 MultiPrinter Specifications,
8.61
LA424 MultiPrinter, 8.60-8.61
LA70 Personal Printer
Specifications, 8.64
LA70 Personal Printer, 8.62-8.64
LA75 Plus Companion Printer
Specifications, 8.66

lndex.3

Index
LA75 Plus Companion Printer,
8.65-8.66
LA75S, 8.65
LAN-Based Applications, 3.13-3.17
LAN Communications Controllers,
6.2-{).5
Language and Specialized Lexicons
for VMS , 9.74
LAN Traffic Monitor VMS , 9.31
LaserTwin Version 5 .0 SoftwareHP LaserJet Series III Emulation,
8.81
LCGOl Software, 9.56
Leasing Services, 9.108-9.109
LFOlR, 8.58
LG06 Shuttle-Matrix Printer
Specifications, 8.74
LG06 Shuttle-Matrix Printer,
- 8.72-8.74
LG31 Dot-Matrix Line Printer
Specifications, 8.76
LG3 l Dot-Matrix Line Printer,
8.75-8.76
LG31, 8.75
License Control, 9.68-9.69
LinkWorks Developer's Tools for
VMS , 9.14
LJ16P, 8.54
LJ250/ LJ252 Companion Color
Printers Specifications, 8.57
LJ250/ LJ252 Companion Color
Printers, 8.56-8.57
LJ25X, 8.57
LJ36P, 8.54
LN05P, 8.51
LN05R, 8.51
LN05U, 8.51
LN05, 8.51
LN06P, 8.51
LN06R, 8.51
LN06U, 8.51
LN06, 8.51
LN07P, 8.51
LN07R, 8.51
LN07U, 8.51
LN07 , 8.51
LN08R, 8.51
LN08U, 8.51
LN08, 8.51
Local and Wide Area
Communications Servers,
6.6-{).36
LP29 Line Printer Specifications,
8.69
LP29 Line Printer, 8.68-8.69
LP29, 8.68
LP37 Line Printer Specifications,
8.71
LP37 Line Printer, 8.70-8.71
LP37 , 8.70
Lucid Common Lisp/ DECsystem,
9.14
Lucid Common Lisp/VAX for VMS,
9.14
MC121 , 4.
MC131 , 4.
MC141 , 4.4
MC122, 4.
MC132, 4.
MC142 , 4.4
MC123 , 4.
MC133 , 4.
MC143 , 4.4
MC124, 4.4

lndex.4

MC134 , 4.4
MC144 , 4.4
MD30C Color Scanner, 8.22-8.23
MD30C, 8.23
MD400 Document Image Scanner,
8.27
MD410 Document Image Scanner
Specifications, 8.26
MD410 Document Image Scanner,
8.24-8.26
MD410, 8.25
Memory, 5.28-5.32
MicroVAX 2000/VAXstation 2000
Diagnostic Package, 9.79
MicroVAX 3100 Memory, 5.31
MicroVAX 3100 Model 30 System
Diagram, 1.34
MicroVAX 3100 Models 30/40/ 80
Memory, 5.31
MicroVAX 3100 Models 40, 80, and
90 System Diagrams, 1.35
MicroVAX 3100 Specifications, 1.36
MicroVAX 3100 Systems and
Servers, 1.27-1.36
MicroVAX 3100 Upgrades and
Conversion Kits, 1.3 7
MicroVAX Conversion Kits, 5.34
MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor
CDROM Maintenance Diagnostic,
9.80
MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor
Ethernet Server, 9.80
MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor
RA/RD Kit, 9.80
MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor,
9.79
MicroVAX MIRA Switch Control,
9.80
MicroVAX/VAX 4000 Upgrades and
Conversion Kits, 5.34
Micro VAX/VAXserver
33 00/ 3 400/ 3500/3 600/ 3800/3 900
Memory, 5.30
MicroVAXIVAXserver 3300
Expansion, 1.82
MicroVAX VSV21 Support
Software, 9.67
MicroVMS/ DRQ3B Device Driver,
9.57
MIRA Application Switch
3400/ 3800, 4.19-4 .20
MIRA AS 3400 Systems, 4.21
MIRA AS 3800 Systems, 4.22
MM] Accessories, 6.64
MOBILIZER for ALL-IN-1, 3.12
Modems, 6.57
MPOOl , 4.16
MP002 , 4.16
MPlOl , 4.16
MP102, 4.16
MP103, 4.16
MP104, 4.16
MP105 , 4.16
MP106, 4.16
MP107 , 4.16
MP108, 4.16
MSOl , 5.32
MS02, 5.32
MS200, 8.7
MS220, 5.32
MS40 , 5.31
MS42 , 5.31
MS44L, 5.31
MS44 , 5.31
MS520 , 5.31

MS62A, 5.28
MS650, 5.30
MS65A, 5.28
MS670, 5.30
MS690, 5.30
MS7AA, 5.28
MS900, 5.28
MULTlcontroller 581/582, 6.43
Multiline DECvoice, 4.23-4.31
MUXserver 300/ 310/ 380/ DECmux
300 Remote Terminal Server,
6.14
MUXserver 300/ 310/ 380, 6.14
MUXserver 300 Remote Terminal
Server for ULTRIX, 9.57
MUXserver 300 Remote Terminal
Server for VMS, 9.57
MUXserver 320/ 380 Remote
Terminal Server, 9.57
Network Application Support
(NAS), 9.2-9.6
Network Connectivity Products,
6.48-{).58
Network Personal Computing, 3.2
Networks, Communications, and
Cables, 6. l-{).68
Network Storage Servers, 7.75
NEXPERT OBJECT for ULTRIX
Systems, 9.24
NMCC/ DECnet Monitor, 9.89
NMCCIVAX ETHERnim, 9.90
Nonimpact Printers Comparison
Chart, 8.30-8.31
Office Systems, 9.70-9.78
ON-TAP-Bar Code Printing
Software, 8.80
OpenVMS Operating System, 9.8
Operating Environments, 9.7-9.8
Optical Devices, 7.68-7 .74
Optical Storage System, 7.73
OSI Application Developer's
Toolkit, 9.14
Pacer for ULTRIX, 3 .10
Pascal for RISC, 9.15
PATHWORKS Access Solution for
TCP/ IP, 3.6, 3.7
PATHWORKS Client Software,
3.5-3 .8
PATHWORKS Desktop Backup,
3.14, 3.15
PATHWORKS for DOS and
Windows , 3.5
PATHWORKS for DOS (NetWare
Coexistence), 3.6
PATHWORKS for DOS (TCP/ IP),
3.6
PATHWORKS for Macintosh, 3.8
PATHWORKS for OS/ 2 (TCP/ IP) ,
3.7
PATHWORKS for OS/ 2, 3.7, 3.10
PATHWORKS for ULTRIX, 3.10
PATHWORKS for VMS (Macintosh),
3.9
PATHWORKS for VMS, 3.9
PATHWORKS Links for Windows,
3.13
PATHWORKS Packaged Servers,
3.18
PATHWORKS PC Networks, 3.3-3.4
PATHWORKS Server 3100,
3.23-3 .24

PATHWORKS Server 333 , 3.19-3.20
PATHWORKS Server 433 , 3.21-3 .22
PATHWORKS Server Comparison
Chart, 3.18
PATHWORKS Server Software,
3.9-3.10
PBXserver, 9.57
PC443, 3.36
PC444, 3.36
PC445, 3.36
PC462 , 3.36
PC463, 3.36
PC465 , 3.36
PC Networking Hardware,
3.25-3.30
PCPll, 3.34
PCS+/ PDS+ Options, 5.44
PCT15 , 3.46
PCT20, 3.46
PCT25, 3.46
PCWlO, 3.42
PCWll , 3.42
PDP-11 C for VMS , 9.15
PDP-11 DATATRIEVE/VAX, 9.43
PDP-11 FORTRAN-77/VAX to RSX,
9.43
PDP-11 Symbolic Debugger/VAX to
RSX, 9.15
Performance Tools and Diagnostics,
9.79-9.84
Personal Computer Mail Solutions,
3.11-3 .12
Personal Computing, 3.1-3.67
Personal DECstation 5000 Models
20, 25, and 33, 2.4-2.13
Personal Series-Uninterruptible
Power Systems (UPS), 5.56-5.59
Personal Series-Uninterruptible
Power Systems (UPS)
Specifications, 5 .57
Personal Series-PLUS System
Specifications, 5.54-5.55
Personal Series-PLUS
Uninterruptible Power System,
5.53
PL/I for RISC ULTRIX, 9.15
PM300, 2.6
PM305 , 2.6
PM307 , 2.6
PM310, 2.6
PM319, 2.39
PM326, 2.16
PM327 , 2.16
PM338, 2.39
PM339, 2.16
PM380, 2.25
PM381, 2.25
PM382 , 2.25
PM383 , 2.25
PM384, 2.25
PM385, 2.25
PM390, 2.25
PM399, 2.39
Power Conditioning System
Plus/Power Distribution System
Plus, 5.44
PowerFrame for ULTRIX, 9.15
PowerFrame for VMS, 9.16
PrintAPlot Software-HP Plotter
Emulation Software, 8.82
Printer Server, 6.13
Printers Introduction, 8.29
Printer Software, 8.77-8.82

Index
PrintServer 40 Plus and turbo
PrintServer 20 Specifications,
8.44-8.46
PrintServer 40 Plus, 8.39-8.40
PrintServer Client Software for
ULTRIX, 8.78
PrintServer Family, 8.34-8.38
Proteon 4100+ Multiprotocol
802.5/ Token Ring Bridging
Router, 6.27
Proteon CNX 500 Multiprotocol
802.5/Token Ring Bridging
Router, 6.29
PSllO, 3.59
PSllA, 3.59
PSllK, 3.65
PS200, 3.51
PS201, 3.51
PS202, 3.51
PS203, 3.51
PV31A, 1.5
PV31U, 1.22
PV61A, 1.11
PV61E, 1.11
PV61U, 1.22
PV71U, 1.22
Q-bus and Storage Expansion
Pedestal, 1.82
QL-XNGA9-AA, 8.6
R215F, 7.57
R400X and B400X Expansion
Pedestals, 1.82
R400X Expansion Pedestal, 1.82
RA71/RA72 Disk Drives (SDI), 7.49
RA7 l / RA72 Specifications, 7.50
RA71, 7.26, 7.50
RA72, 7.26, 7.50
RA92 Disk Drive (SDI), 7.48
RA92 Specifications, 7.49
RA92, 7.48
Rackmountable VAX 4000
Specifications, l.85
Rack-mountable VAX 4000 System
Mounting Diagrams, 1.86
Rack-mountable VAX 4000 Systems,
1.83-1.85
RBV20, 7.70
RBV60, 7.68
RBV64, 7.68
Receptacle Reference Chart, 5.60
Reel-to-Reel Tape Comparison
Chart, 7.9
Reggie Software-Mac Graphics
Files Converter Software, 8.82
Remote Environmental Monitoring
Software (REMS), 5.45
Remote System Manager, 9.31
Removable Storage Elements, 7.58
RETOS-VAX ReGIS-to-Sixels
Converter Software, 8.79
Rewritable and WORM Optical
Storage Subsystems, 7.70
RF312, 7.55
RF31B, 7.57, 7.58
RF31F Integrated Storage Element
(DSSI), 7.56
RF31F Specifications, 7.56
RF31F, 7.56
RF31G, 7.57
RF31 Integrated Storage Element
(DSSI), 7.55
RF31 Specifications, 7.55

RF31 T Integrated Storage Element
(DSSI), 7.54
RF31T, 7.55
RF31U, 7.55
RF31, 7.55, 7.58

RF352, 7.54
RF35E, 7.54
RF35 Integrated Storage Element
(DSSI), 7.53

RF35 Specifications, 7.54
RF35U, 7.54
RF35, 7.5
RF72B, 7.57, 7.58
RF72E, 7.53
RF72 Integrated Storage Elements
(DSSI), 7.52
RF72 Specifications, 7.53
RF72, 7.58
RF73B, 7.58
RF73E, 7.52
RF73 Integrated Storage Element
(DSSI), 7.51
RF73 Specifications, 7.52
RF73, 7.58
RF-Series DSSI Removable Storage
Elements, 7.58
RF-Series DSSI Storage Expansion
Pedestals, 7.57
RF-Series Integrated Storage
Elements (DSSI), 7.51
ROM Kits, 5.30
RQV20, 7.70
RRD42 Compact Disc Drive, 7.78
RRD42, 7.79
RSV20, 7.70
RV20 Specifications, 7.70
RV20 Write-Once Optical Drive,
7.69
RV20, 7.70
RV60, 7.68
RV64 Optical Library Jukebox
System, 7 .68
RV64 Specifications, 7 .69
RWlOO, 7.73
RWZ01 Optical Disk Drive, 7.71
RWZOl Specifications, 7.72
RWZOl , 7.72
RX23 Flexible Diskette Drive
(SCSI), 7.64
RX23, 7.64
RX26 Flexible Diskette Drive
(SCSI) , 7.63
RX26, 7.64
RX33A, 7.63
RX3 3 Flexible Diskette Drive
(SCSI), 7.63
RZ23L, 7.61
RZ24L, 7.61
RZ25 , 7.61
RZ26, 7.61
RZ55B, 7.62
RZ55R, 7.62
RZ55, 7.62
RZ56B, 7.62
RZ56E, 7.60
RZ56R, 7.62
RZ56, 7.60, 7.62
RZ57B, 7.62
RZ57E, 7.60
RZ57R, 7.62
RZ57, 7.60, 7.62
RZ58E, 7.60
RZ58, 7.60
RZ-Series Disk Drives (SCSI), 7.59

RZ-Series Removable Disks (SCSI),
7.62
SAlOO, 7.83
SA300, 7.21
SA301, 7.21
SA71/SA72 Specifications, 7.41
SA71/SA72 Storage Array Building
Blocks (SDI), 7.40
SA71, 7.40, 7.41
SA72, 7.40, 7.41
SA7XR-AK, 7.26
SA800 SDI Specifications, 7 .28
SA800 Storage Array (SDI), 7.27
SA900 DECarray (SDI), 7.22
SA900 Specifications, 7 .25
SA900, 7.22
SA905 Removable DECarray (SDI),

7.25
SA905 Specifications, 7 .26
SA905, 7.26
SC008, 5.25
Scholar Plus Modem, 6.57
SCSI Disk Drive Comparison Chart,
7.6
SCSI Storage Expansion, 7 .65
SDIIDSSI Disk Drive Comparison
Chart, 7.5
SDIISTI, 7 .2
SEACD, 7.76
SEACE, 7.76
SEACT, 7.76
SEACU, 7.76
SEACV, 7.76, 8.7
SEACW, 7.76, 8.7
Session Support Utility, 9.75
SFlOO, 7.82
SFlOl, 7.82
SF106, 7.83
SF200/SF210 DECarrays (DSSI),

7.35
SF200/SF210 Specifications, 7.36,
7.43
SF200, 7.37
SF210, 7.38
SF220 DECarray (DSSI), 7.32
SF220 Specifications, 7.34
SF220, 7.32
SF300, 7.20
SF35 Specifications, 7.45
SF35 Storage Array Building Block
(DSSI), 7.44
SF35, 7.44
SF400 DECarray (DSSI), 7.28
SF400 Specifications, 7.31
SF400, 7.29
SF72, 7.43
SF73/SF72 Storage Array Building
Blocks (DSSI), 7.42
SF73, 7.43
SoftFont, 8.80
SoftPC for ULTRIX, 9.7
Software and Services, 9.1-9.111
Software Product Summary,
9.92-9.103
Specialized Systems, 4.1-4.31
Star Coupler Expander, 5.25
Star Coupler, 5.25
Storage Array Building Blocks,

7.40-7.45
Storage Arrays, 7.20-7.39
Storage Controllers/Adapters,
7.10-7.16
Storage Devices, 7.1-7.107, 7.2
Storage I/O Servers, 7.17-7.19

Storage Expansion Pedestal, 1.82
StorageServer 100 Optical Storage
System, 7.73
Storage Server 100 Optical Storage
System, 7.74
StrataCom IPX Transmission
Resource Manager, 6.34
SuperFonts 2511 Software, 8.81
SV-51AAA, 1.143
SV-51ABA, 1.143
SV-51BAA, 1.156
SV-51BBA, 1.156
SV-6E04A, 1.93
SV-6E04C, 1.93
SV-6F04B, 1.93
SV-6F04E, 1.93
SV-7FlDA, 1.117
SV-7F2DA, 1.117
SV-7F3DA, 1.117
SV-9F3BB, 1.131
SV-9F4BA, 1.131
SV-9F4CA, 1.132
System Management, 9.85-9.91
SZ03 Expansion Box, 7 .65
SZlOO, 7.83
SZ106, 7.83
SZ12A, 7.65
SZ12B, 7.66
SZ12C, 7.66
SZ12 Expansion Box, 7 .65
SZ12X, 7.66
SZ16 Expansion Box, 7.67
TA78, 7.101
TA79 Magnetic Tape Subsystem,
7.101
TA79 specifications, 7.101
TA79, 7.101
TA81 Magnetic Tape Subsystem,
7.102
TA81 specifications, 7.102
TA81, 7.102
TA857, 7.83
TA867, 7.83
TA90E Tape Subsystem Upgrade
Kit, 7.90
TA90E, 7.90
TA91 Cartridge Tape Subsystem,
7.88
TA91U, 7.88
TA91, 7.88
Tape Comparison Chart, 7 .8
Tape Devices (Cartridge
Subsystems), 7 .80-7 .87
Tape Devices (Reel-to-Reel),
7.101-7.107
Tape Devices, 7.88-7.100
Tape Drives, 7.7
Tape Selection Chart, 7.7
TBK70, 1.109
Terminals and Printers, 8.1-8.82
Terminal Server Manager, 9.90
Terminal Server Selection Guide,
6.6
Terminal Server Summary Chart,
6.6
Terminal Servers, 6.6
TF70C, 7.92
TF857, 7.82
TF85B, 7.81
TF85C, 7.81
TF85D, 7.81
TF85T, 7.81
TF85, 7.81
TF867, 7.83

Index.5

Index
TF86, 7.82
TFM85, 7.81
TFM86, 7.82
TK.50 Cartridge Tape Drives, 7.93
TK.50E, 7.93
TK.50, 7.93
TK.50Z, 7.94
TK70 Cartridge Tape Drives, 7.92
TK70E, 7.92
TK70, 7.92
TKZ08 Helical Scan Tape Drive
(SCSI), 7.97
TKZ08, 7.97
TKZ09 Helical Scan Tape Drive,
7.98
TKZ60 Cartridge Tape Drive, 7.91
TLZ06 4-mm DAT Tape Drive
(SCSI), 7.95
TLZ06, 7.96
TLZ08 Helical Scan Tape Drive
(SCSI), 7.98
Token Ring Cards, 3.28
TPframe, 9.16
TQK.50, 7 .94
TQK70, 7.92
Transient Voltage Surge
Suppressors, 5.45
TransLAN III, 320, 335, 350
Remote Bridges, 6.32
TransPATH 335 , 350
Bridge/Routers, 6.31
TS05 Family of Magnetic Tape
Subsystems, 7 .104
TSB07, 7 .106
TSU05, 7.105
TSV05, 7 .104
TSZ05 , 7 .105
TSZ07 Magnetic Tape Drive (SCSI),
7.106
TSZ07 , 7 .106, 7 .107
TU79, 7.101
TU81-Plus Magnetic Tape
Subsystem, 7.102
TU81-Plus specifications, 7.103
TU90 Dual-Drive Slave Unit, 7.89
TU90, 7.89
TU91U, 7.89
TU91, 7.88
turbo PrintServer 20, 8.41-8.43
Twisted-Pair Media Access Unit,
6.49
Tx800 Family of Cartridge Tape
Drives, 7 .80
Tx800 Family of Magazine Tape
Subsystems, 7 .82
Tx800 Magazine and Cartridge
Tape Family Specifications, 7.86
TZ30 Cartridge Tape Drive (SCSI),
7.95
TZ30, 7.95
TZ85E, 7.81
TZ85 , 7.81
TZ867, 7.83
TZ86, 7.82
TZKlO Quarter-Inch Cartridge
(QIC) Tape Drive (SCSI), 7.99
TZKlO, 7.99
ULTRIX Disk Shadowing, 9.43
ULTRIX Mail Connection, 9.31
ULTRIX MLS+ Trusted Worksystem
Software, 9.69
ULTRIX Operating System, 9.7
ULTRIX/SQL Remote Access to
Rdb/VMS, 9.44

lndex.6

ULTRIX Worksystem Software, 9.16
Upgrades-TA90 to TA90E, 7.90
VAX 10000 CPU Upgrades, 1.139
VAX 10000 Specifications, 1.138
VAX 10000 System Diagram, 1.137
VAX 10000 Systems and Servers,
1.128-1.13 9
VAX-111725/730 Diagnostic Set,
9.80
VAX-11/750 Diagnostic Set, 9.81
VAX-111780 Diagnostic Set, 9.81
VAX-11/780 Microprogramming
Tools, 9.81
VAX-111785 Diagnostic Set, 9.81
VAX-111785 Microprogramming
Tools, 9.81
VAX-11 RSX, 9.8
VAX 2780/ 3780 Protocol Emulator,
9.31
VAX 3271 Protocol Emulator, 9.32
VAX 4000 Comparison Chart, 1.39
VAX 4000 Expansion, 1.82
VAX 4000 Model 100 Memory,
5.31
VAX 4000 Model 100
Specifications, 1.48
VAX 4000 Model 100 System
Diagrams, 1.47
VAX 4000 Model 200 (BA215)
Specifications, 1.57
VAX 4000 Model 200 (BA430)
System Expansion Diagrams,
1.65
VAX 4000 Model 200 Memory,
5.30
VAX 4000 Model 200 Memory,
5.30
VAX 4000 Model 300, 400, 500,
and 600 Expansion Diagrams,
1.81
VAX 4000 Model 300 Memory,
5.30
VAX 4000 Model 400, 500, and 600
Specifications, 1.79
VAX 4000 Model 400, 500, and 600
System Diagrams, 1.80
VAX 4000 Models 400, 500, and
600 Memory, 5.30
VAX 4000 Rack-mountable Systems,
1.83
VAX 4000 Systems and Servers
(Model 100), 1.41-1.48
VAX 4000 Systems and Servers
(Model 200), 1.49-1.65
VAX 4000 Systems and Servers
(Model 300), 1.66-1.71
VAX 4000 Systems and Servers
(Models 400, 500, 600),
1.72-1.81
VAX 4000 Systems and Servers
Options, 1.89-1.90
VAX 4000 Systems and Servers,
1.38-1.40
VAX 4000 Upgrades and
Conversion Kits, 1.87-1.88
VAX 6000 CPU ROM Kits, 5.30
VAX 6000 CPU Upgrades, 1.111,
5.38
VAX 6000 Diagnostic Set, 9.81
VAX 6000 Model 200 Systems
TK.50-to-TK70 Upgrade, 1.109
VAX 6000 Series Memory, 5.28
VAX 6000 Systems and Servers
Specifications, 1.108

VAX 6000 Systems and Servers,
1.91-1.107
VAX 6000 Systems Battery Backup,
1.109
VAX 6000 Systems Expansion,
1.109-1.110
VAX 6000 ULTRIX Base Systems, 1.
VAX.server 6000 ULTRIX Base
Systems, 1.103
VAX 6000 Vector Processor, 1.109
VAX 6000 VME Adapter Option,
1.110
VAX 6200/6300 Series Diagnostic
Set, 9.82
VAX 6400 Series Diagnostic Set,
9.82
VAX 7000 and VAX 10000 Memory,
5.28
VAX 7000 CPU Upgrades, 1.127
VAX 7000 System Diagram, 1.125
VAX 7000 Systems and Servers,
1.114-1.125
VAX 7000 Systems Specifications,
1.126
VAX 8200/8300 Diagnostic Set,
9.82
.
VAX 8500185501870018800
Diagnostic Set, 9.82
VAX 8600/8650 Diagnostic Set,
9.83
VAX 8820/8830/8840 Diagnostic
Set, 9.83
VAX 9000 Series Diagnostic Set,
9.83
VAX 9000 Series Memory, 5 .28
VAX ACMS (Application Control
and Management System), 9.44
VAX Ada, 9.16
VAX ADE, 9.75
VAX APL, 9.16
VAX BASIC, 9.16
VAX BLISS-32 Implementation
Language, 9.17
VAX CDD/Plus, 9.44
VAX.cluster Configuration Support
Table, 5.26
VAX.cluster Console System,
5.23-5.24, 9.91
VAX.cluster Multi-Datacenter
Facility, 5.19-5.22
VAX.cluster Options/ System
Expansion, 5.1-5.60
VAX.cluster Options, 5 .25-5 .27
VAX.cluster Software, 9.91
VAX.cluster Systems Configuration
Details, 5.2-5.18
VAX COBOL GENERATOR, 9.17
VAX COBOL, 9.17
VAX Computer Integrated
Telephony Message Desk, 9.75
VAX Computer Integrated
Telephony Server, 9.32
VAX C, 9.17
VAX Data Distributor, 9.44
VAX DATATRIEVE, 9.44
VAX DBMS (Database Management
System) , 9.45
VAX DECalc/DECgraph Package,
9.75
VAX DECalc-PLUS, 9.75
VAX DECalc, 9.75
VAX DEC/ CMS, 9.18
VAX DECgraph, 9.76
VAX Decision Expert for VMS ,
9.24

VAX DEC/MAP, 9.32
VAX DEC/MMS (Module
Management System), 9.18
VAX DECscan VMS and ELN Bitbus
Drivers, 9.57
VAX DECscan VMS Software
Toolkit, 9.18
VAX DEC/Shell, 9.18
VAX DECslide, 9.67
VAX DECspell Verifier/Corrector,
9.76
VAX/DECsystems LAN
Communications Controllers
Summary Chart~', 6.2
VAX DEC/ Test Manager, 9.83
VAX Diagnostic Program Macros
Library, 9.84
VAX DIBOL, 9.45
VAX Disk Striping Driver for VMS,
9.90
VAX Distributed File Service, 9.32
VAX Distributed Name Service,
9.32
VAX Distributed Queuing Service
(DQS), 8.78
VAX DOCUMENT, 9.45
VAX DSM, 9.46
VAX DT07, 9.58
VAXELN Ada, 9.21
VAXELN Ethernet Driver/Switch,

9.59
VAXELN KA V Toolkit Extensions
for VMS, 9.22
VAXELN KMVlA Support Software
Package, 9.60
VAXELN KMVlA Tool Kit, 9.60
VAXELN Toolkit, 9.22
VAXELN Window Server for
ULTRIX, 9.22
VAXELN Window Server for VMS,
9.22
VAX Encryption, 9.69
VAX FORTRAN for ULTRIX
Systems, 9.19
VAX FORTRAN High-Performance
Option, 9.19
VAX FORTRAN, 9.19
VAX FTAM (File Transfer, Access,
and Management), 9.33
VAX.ft Memory, 5.31
VAX.ft Model 110/410 Rackmount
Systems/Servers, 1.156
VAX.ft Model 110 System Diagrams,
1.150
VAX.ft Model 410 Rackmount
Diagram, 1.157
VAX.ft Model 410 System Diagrams,
1.150, 1.151
VAX.ft Model 610 System/ Server
Diagrams, 1.151, 1.152
VAX.ft Model 612 System/ Server
Diagrams, 1.153
VAX.ft Storage Expansion Option,
1.155
VAX.ft Systems and Servers
Specifications, 1.154
VAX.ft Systems and Servers,
1.140-1.154
VAX.ft System Services, 9.84
VAX Genius Driver, 9.58
VAX Grammar Checker, 9.76
VAX Image/3L Supporting Software
for VMS, 9.19
VAX ISDN ACCESS, 9.33

Index
VAX ISDN Primary Rate Access D
Channel Interface for VMS, 9.33
VAX ISDN, 9.33
VAX Jukebox Control Software,
9.90
VAX KCT32 , 9.58
VAX Key Distribution Center, 9.76
VAX KMSll -BD/ BE HDLC/ BSC
Framing Software, 9.58
VAX KMSll-BD/ BE X.25 Link
Level Software, 9.58
VAXlink for IMS and VSAM Client,
9.77
VAX LISP/ULTRIX, 9.24
VAX LISP/VMS, 9.24
VAX LN03 Image Support Software,
9.59
VAX LSE (Language-Sensitive
Editor/ Source Code Analyzer) ,
9.19
VAX MAILGATE for MCI Mail,
9.33
VAXmate Services for MS-DOS,
9.77
VAXmate Software for Standalone
Use, 9.8
VAX Media Manager, 9.20
VAX Message Router/ P Gateway,
9.34
VAX Message Router/ S Gateway,
9.34
VAX Message Router Tel ex
Gateway, 9.34
VAX Message Router X.400
Gateway, 9.34
VAX Message Router, 9.33
VAX Notes, 9.35
VAX OPS5 , 9.24
VAX OSI Applications Kernel, 9.35
VAX Packetnet System Interface
Access, 9.35
VAX Packetnet System Interface,

9.35
VAX Pascal, 9 .20
VAX PCL, 9.59
VAX Performance Advisor, 9.84

VAX Performance and Coverage
Analyzer, 9.84
VAX PL/I, 9.20
VAX PrintServer Client Software,
8.78
VAX Public Access
Communications, 9.35
VAX RALLY, 9.21
VAX Rdb/ ELN, 9.46
VAX Rdb/VMS, 9.46
VAX Realtime Accelerator Software
(VAX RTA) , 9.21
VAX ReGIS to Sixels Converter,
9.67
VAX Remote Environmental
Monitoring Software (REMS),
9.90
VAX RMS Journaling, 9.46
VAX SCAN, 9.21
VAX ScriptPrinter Software, 9.59
VAXset Package, 9.23
VAX Software Performance
Monitor, 9.84
VAX Software Project Manager,
9.77
VAX Source Code Analyzer, 9.84
VAXstation 3100 Memory, 5.31
VAXstation 3100 Model 76
Memory, 5.31
VAXstation 3100 Models 30, 38, 40,
and 48 Memory, 5.31
VAXstation 4000 Model 60
Memory, 5.31
VAXstation 4000 Model 60,
1.9-1.15
VAXstation 4000 Model 90,
1.16-1.21
VAXstation 4000 Models 60 and 90
System Diagram, 1.23
VAXstation 4000 Upgrades , 1.22
VAXstation 4000 VLC and Models
60 and 90 Monitor Chart,
1.24-1.26
VAXstation 4000 VLC Memory,
5.31

VAXstation 4000 VLC System
Diagram, 1.8
VAXstation 4000 VLC Systems,
1.4-1.7
VAX Storage Library System, 9.46
VAX Systems Comparison Chart,
1.2-1.3
VAX Systems, 1.1-1.163
VAX System V Volume Shadowing,
9.47
VAX System V, 9.8
VAX TDMS (Terminal Data
Management System), 9.47
VAX TEAMDATA, 9.47
VAX to StorageTek 444 ACS
Interconnect, 7. 90
VAX TU70/ 72 Device Driver, 9.59
VAXuisx and VWS Migration Tools
Kit, 9.23
VAX/VAXserver 4000 Model 200
(BA215 ) Expansion Diagrams,
1.56
VAX/VAXserver 4000 Model 200
(BA215) System Diagrams, 1.55
VAXIVAXserver 4000 Upgrades and
Conversion Kits, 5 .34
VAX Vertical Forms Printing
Software, 8.80
VAX Volume Shadowing, 9.47
VAX Wide Area Network Device
Drivers, 9.59
VAX Xway, 9.21
VIDA for DB2 , 9.48
Video Terminals Comparison Chart,
8.9
Video Terminals Introduction, 8.3
Vivace for Windows Version, 3.16,
3.17
VME Adapter, 1.110
VMS DECwindows Motif, 9.67
VMS License Management Facility,
9.69
VMS POSIX, 9.8
VMS/SNA, 9.36

VMS/ ULTRIX Connection, 9.36
VMS Workstation Software, 9.67
VSll-VAX Driver, 9.60
VSXlO, 8.28
VSX20, 8.28
VSX30, 8.28
VSXXA, 8.28
VT33~ 8.20
VT340 Graphics Terminal,
8.18-8.19
VT340+ Graphics Terminals
Specifications, 8.19
VT340+ Graphics Terminal, 8.18
VT34N, 8.21
VT420 Ordering Information, 8.11
VT420 Text Terminal
Specifications, 8.13
VT420 Text Terminal, 8.10-8.14
VT420 with PCTerm Text Terminal
Specifications, 8. 16
VT420 with PCTerm Text Terminal,
8. 15-8.17
VT42A, 8. 15
VTN-Series Industrial Terminals,
8.20
VX215 , 8.5
VX217, 8.5
VX219, 8.6
VX225, 8.5
VXT 2000 Windowing Terminals
Specifications, 8.8
VXT 2000 Windowing Terminals,
8.4-8.8
VXT Terminal Software, 9.77
WPS-PLUS/ DOS, 9.78
WPS-PLUS for VMS, 9.78
WPS-PLUS/Workstation , 9.78
X25portal 2000, 9.60
X25Router 2000, 9.60
XMedia Tools for RISC ULTRIX, 9.23

lndex.7

Digital Systems and Options Catalog
Reader Comment Card

July 1992

Your comments and suggestions will assist us in our continuous efforts to improve the quality
and usefulness of this catalog. Please take a few moments to answer the questions below.
Thank you.

l. Does this document satisfy your particular needs (i.e., configurations, recent and
available options, etc.)? - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

1. Does this document satisfy your particular needs (i.e., configur~tions , recent and
available options, etc.)? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ____,_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ _

2. Did you find any errors that may have confused you ? Please be specific and note
section , page numbers, paragraph(s) , etc. - - - -- - -- - -- - - - - - -- --

2. Did you find any errors that may have confused you? Please be sPecific and note
section, page numbers, paragraph(s) , etc. _ _ _ __ _ __ _._\
~---------

3. Was there any information you thought should have been included but was not found?
Please describe. - - - - -- - - -- -- - - - - - - - - - - -- - - - - - -

3. Was there any information you thought should have been included-out was not found?
Please describe. --------------~--------------

Do not send requests to be added to mailing lists, or receive copies of current or future
catalogs. This card is for comments and suggestions only. Customers, contact your local
sales office to receive catalogs.

Do not send requests to be added to mailing lists, or rec ·: ve copies of current or future
catalogs. This card is for comments and suggestions only ~ Customers, contact your local
sales office to receive catalogs.

Name _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _Title _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Company _ _ __ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

Company _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ __ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

D epartment _ _ _ __ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

Department _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ __ _ _ _ __ __ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ _ _

Address _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

Address _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ __ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

City _ _ _ __ _ _ ______ State _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Zip _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

City _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ State _ __ _ _ __ _

Telephone:

Zip _ _ _ _ _ __ __ _

(please tape here)

. _________ _______ .. ___ ___ .. ~p_l~_~S_t: _f~l_q _~~~~) - .. __ .. ____ _____ .. . ___ .. .. _ ___ . _. _.. _. _. __ .. _.. ___ .. . __ . __ .

.. .. .... ___ . __ __ _____ . ~ pl~_as_e f~l~ -~~~~) ____ . ___ ____ . ___ _. . _ _ ___ __ _. __________ . ____ ____ _________ ___ _________ __

NO POSTAGE

NECESSARY IF

MAILED IN THE

UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAIL

FIRST CLASS PERMIT NO. 33 MAYNARD, MASS.

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE

Attn : Digital Systems and Options Catalog

DIGITAL EQUIPMENT CORPORATION
85 Swanson Road (BXB 1-1 /F04)
Boxboro, MA 01719-9960

III 111111 III111I111III1I11I1I11I1I11.II11II111I11I1 I

III111111III111I111III1I11I1I11I1I111II11II111I11I1 I